Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1
A factor which distinguishes the corporate form of organization from a sole proprietorship or partnership is that a
corporation is organized for the purpose of making a profit.
corporation is subject to more federal and state government regulations.
corporation s temporary accounts are closed at the end of the accounting period.
corporation is an accounting economic entity.
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Question 2
The following data is available for Blaine Corporation at December 31, 2012:
Common stock, par $10 (authorized 25,000 shares) $200,000
Treasury Stock (at cost $15 per share) 900
Based on the data, how many shares of common stock are outstanding?
19,940
24,940
25,000
20,000
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Question 3
On January 1, Collins Corporation had 800,000 shares of $10 par value common stock outstanding. On March 31, the company declared a 15% stock dividend. Market value of the stock was $15/share. As a result of this event,
Collins Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par account increased $600,000.
Collins total stockholders equity was unaffected.
Collins Stock Dividends account increased $1,800,000.
All of the above.
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Question 4
Dillon Corporation splits its common stock 2 for 1, when the market value is $40 per share. Prior to the split, Dillon had 50,000 shares of $10 par value common stock issued and outstanding. After the split, the par value of the stock
is reduced to $20 per share.
remains the same.
is reduced to $2 per share.
is reduced to $5 per share.
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Question 5
A major disadvantage resulting from the use of bonds is that
taxes may increase.
earnings per share may be lowered.
interest must be paid on a periodic basis.
bondholders have voting rights.
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Question 6
Bargain Company has $1,600,000 of bonds outstanding. The unamortized premium is $21,600. If the company redeemed the bonds at 101, what would be the gain or loss on the redemption?
$16,000 loss
$5,600 loss
$16,000 gain
$5,600 gain
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Question 7
Horton Company purchased a building on January 2 by signing a long-term $480,000 mortgage with monthly payments of $4,400. The mortgage carries an interest rate of 10 percent. The amount owed on the mortgage after the first payment will be
$479,600.
$476,000.
$475,600.
$480,000.
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Question 8
Wise Company owns 30% interest in the stock of Dark Corporation. During the year, Dark pays $20,000 in dividends to Wise, and reports $200,000 in net income. Wise Company’s investment in Dark will increase Wise’s net income by
$6,000.
$60,000.
$66,000.
$80,000.
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Question 9
If an investor owns less than 20% of the common stock of another corporation as a long-term investment,
no dividends can be expected.
it is presumed that the investor has relatively little influence on the investee.
it is presumed that the investor has significant influence on the investee.
the equity method of accounting for the investment should be employed.
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Question 10
Reporting investments at fair value is
a conservative approach because only losses are recognized.
applicable to both debt and stock securities.
applicable to debt securities only.
applicable to stock securities only.
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Question 11
Available-for-sale securities are classified as
short-term investments only.
long-term investments only.
either short-term or long-term investments.
current assets only.
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Question 12
Which of the following changes in retained earnings during a period will be reported in the financing activities section of the statement of cash flows?
1. Declaration and payment of a cash dividend during the period.
2. Net income for the period.
1
2
Neither 1 nor 2.
Both 1 and 2.
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Question 13
Hark Inc. had cash sales of $400,000 and credit sales of $1,100,000. The accounts receivable balance increased $25,000 during the year. How much cash did Hark receive from its customers during the year?
$725,000
$1,500,000
$1,475,000
$1,075,000
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Question 14
The statement of cash flows is prepared from all of the following except
comparative balance sheets.
the current income statement.
selected transaction data.
the adjusted trial balance.
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Question 15
Corgan Company uses the direct method in determining net cash provided by operating activities, During the year, operating expenses were $290,000, prepaid expenses increased $20,000, and accrued expenses payable increased $30,000. Cash payments for operating expenses were
$240,000.
$280,000.
$300,000.
$340,000.
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Question 16
Assume the following sales data for a company:
2014 $1,050,000
2013 950,000
2012 800,000
2011 550,000
If 2011 is the base year, what is the percentage increase in sales from 2011 to 2013?
72.7%
100%
52.4%
90.9%
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Question 17
Darius, Inc. has the following income statement (in millions):
DARIUS, INC.
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2012
Net Sales $300
Cost of Goods Sold 120
Gross Profit 180
Operating Expenses 44
Net Income $136
Using vertical analysis, what percentage is assigned to Net Income?
100%
75.6%
45.3%
None of the above.
Question 18
Parrish, Inc. decided on January 1 to discontinue its telescope manufacturing division. On July 1, the division s assets with a book value of $1,250,000 are sold for $850,000. Operating income from January 1 to June 30 for the division amounted to $125,000. Ignoring income taxes, what total amount should be reported on Parrish s income statement for the current year under the caption, Discontinued Operations?
$400,000 loss
$125,000
$275,000 loss
$525,000
Question 24
Each of these items must be considered in preparing a statement of cash flows for Kiner Co. for the year ended December 31, 2012. For each item, state how it should be shown in the statement of cash flows for 2012.
(a) Issued bonds for $200,000 cash. C
(b) Purchased equipment for $150,000 cash.
(c) Sold land costing $20,000 for $20,000 cash.
(d) Declared and paid a $50,000 cash dividend. –
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Question 25
Villa Company reported net income of $195,000 for 2012. Villa also reported depreciation expense of $45,000 and a loss of $5,000 on the sale of equipment. The comparative balance sheet shows a decrease in accounts receivable of $15,000 for the year, a $17,000 increase in accounts payable, and a $4,000 decrease in prepaid expenses.
Instructions
Prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows for 2012. Use the indirect method. (List multiple entries with a positive cash flow first and then the negative cash flow. List amounts from largest to smallest e.g. 10, 5, 3, 2. If amount decreases cash flow, use either a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -45 or parentheses e.g. (45).)
VILLA COMPANY
Partial Statement of Cash Flows
For the Year Ended December 31, 2012
Cash flows from operating activities
$
Adjustments to reconcile net income
to net cash provided by operating activities $
Net cash by operating activities $
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Title:
Accounting Problems
Question Detail:
|
The Marchetti soup Company entered into the following transactions during the month of june: (1) purchased inventory on account for $171,000 (assume Marchetti uses a perpetual inventory system); (2) paid $48,000 in salaries to employees for work performed during the month; (3) sold merchandise that cost $120,000 to credit customers for $208,000; (4) collected $167,000 in cash from credit customers; and (5) paid suppliers of inventory $140,000.
|
|
Required:
|
|
Analyze each transaction and show the effect of each on the accounting equation for a corporation. (Select “None” if the category is not affected.)
|
Brief Exercise 2-4 Journal entries [LO2]
|
A company has a fiscal year-end of December 31: (1) on October 1, $14,400 was paid for a one-year fire insurance policy; (2) on June 30 the company lent its chief financial officer $12,000; principal and interest at 9% are due in one year; and (3) equipment costing $63,000 was purchased at the beginning of the year for cash.
|
|
Required:
|
|
Prepare journal entries for each of the above transactions. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Brief Exercise 2-5 Journal entries [LO4, 5]
A company has a fiscal year-end of December 31: (1) on October 1, $14,400 was paid for a one-year fire insurance policy; (2) on June 30 the company lent its chief financial officer $12,000; principal and interest at 8% are due in one year; and (3) equipment costing $52,000 was purchased at the beginning of the year for cash. Depreciation on the equipment is $10,400 per year.
|
|
Required:
|
|
Prepare the necessary adjusting entries at December 31 for each of the above items. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
Brief Exercise 2-11 Closing entries [LO7]
|
The year-end adjusted trial balance of the Timmons Tool and Die Corporation included the following account balances: retained earnings, $226,000; sales revenue, $855,000; cost of goods sold, $565,000; salaries expense, $178,000; rent expense, $37,000; and interest expense, $16,000.
|
|
Required:
|
|
Prepare the necessary closing entries. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
Exercise 2-5 The accounting processing cycle [LO2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7]
|
Listed below are several terms and phrases associated with the accounting processing cycle. Pair each item from List A (by letter) with the item from List B that is most appropriately associated with it.
|
|
List A
|
List B
|
|
k
|
|
Source documents
|
|
|
e
|
|
Transaction analysis
|
|
|
a
|
|
Journal
|
|
|
j
|
|
Posting
|
|
|
f
|
|
Unadjusted trial balance
|
|
|
b
|
|
Adjusting entries
|
|
|
h
|
|
Adjusted trial balance
|
|
|
c
|
|
Financial statements
|
|
|
d
|
|
Closing entries
|
|
|
g
|
|
Post-closing trial balance
|
|
|
i
|
|
Worksheet
|
|
Exercise 2-6 Debits and credits [LO1]
|
Indicate whether a debit will increase (I) or decrease (D) each of the following accounts listed in items 1 through 16:
|
|
Increase (I) or Decrease (D)
|
Account
|
|
Inventory
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
Prepaid rent
|
|
Sales revenue
|
|
Common stock
|
|
Wages payable
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
Utility expense
|
|
Equipment
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
Allowance for uncollectible accounts
|
|
Bad debt expense
|
|
Interest expense
|
|
Interest revenue
|
|
Gain on sale of equipment
|
Exercise 2-14 Cash versus accrual accounting; adjusting entries [LO4, 5, 8]
|
The Righter Shoe Store Company prepares monthly financial statements for its bank. The November 30 and December 31, 2011, trial balances contained the following account information:
|
|
Nov. 30
|
Dec. 31
|
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
1,100
|
2,200
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
5,700
|
4,275
|
|
Wages payable
|
14,500
|
21,750
|
|
Unearned rent revenue
|
1,500
|
750
|
|
The following information also is known:
|
|
The December income statement reported $1,467 in supplies expense.
|
|
No insurance payments were made in December.
|
|
$14,500 was paid to employees during December for wages.
|
|
On November 1, 2011, a tenant paid Righter $2,250 in advance rent for the period November through January. Unearned rent revenue was credited.
|
|
What was the cost of supplies purchased during December? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Requirement 2:
|
|
What was the adjusting entry recorded at the end of December for prepaid insurance? (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Requirement 3:
|
|
What was the adjusting entry recorded at the end of December for accrued wages? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Requirement 4:
|
|
What was the amount of rent revenue earned in December? What adjusting entry was recorded at the end of December for unearned rent? (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
Exercise 2-15 External transactions and adjusting entries [LO2, 4, 5]
|
The following transactions occurred during 2011 for the Beehive Honey Corporation:
|
|
Feb. 1
|
Borrowed $16,000 from a bank and signed a note. Principal and interest at 9.5% will be paid on January 31, 2012.
|
|
Apr. 1
|
Paid $3,100 to an insurance company for a two-year fire insurance policy.
|
|
July 17
|
Purchased supplies costing $2,200 on account. The company records supplies purchased in an asset account. At the December 31, 2011, year-end, supplies costing $982 remained on hand.
|
|
Nov. 1
|
A customer borrowed $5,200 and signed a note requiring the customer to pay principal and 6% interest on April 30, 2012.
|
|
Requirement 1:
|
|
Record each transaction in general journal form. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Requirement 2:
|
|
Prepare any necessary adjusting entries at the December 31, 2011, year-end. No adjusting entries were made during the year for any item.(Round your answers to the nearest whole number. Enter adjusting entries in the same order as above. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
Problem 2-3 Adjusting entries [LO 4, 5]
|
Pastina Company manufactures and sells various types of pasta to grocery chains as private label brands. The company’s fiscal year-end is December 31. The unadjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2011, appears below.
|
|
Account Title
|
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
30,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
40,000
|
|
Allowance for uncollectible accounts
|
3,000
|
|
Supplies
|
1,500
|
|
Inventory
|
60,000
|
|
Note receivable
|
25,000
|
|
Interest receivable
|
0
|
|
Prepaid rent
|
4,000
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
0
|
|
Equipment
|
80,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation equipment
|
30,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
28,000
|
|
Wages payable
|
0
|
|
Note payable
|
68,000
|
|
Interest payable
|
0
|
|
Unearned revenue
|
0
|
|
Common stock
|
60,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
16,500
|
|
Sales revenue
|
148,000
|
|
Interest revenue
|
0
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
70,000
|
|
Wage expense
|
18,900
|
|
Rent expense
|
11,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
0
|
|
Interest expense
|
0
|
|
Supplies expense
|
1,100
|
|
Insurance expense
|
9,000
|
|
Bad debt expense
|
3,000
|
|
Totals
|
353,500
|
353,500
|
|
Information necessary to prepare the year-end adjusting entries appears below.
|
|
Depreciation on the equipment for the year is $11,000.
|
|
The company estimates that of the $40,000 in accounts receivable outstanding at year-end, $5,200 probably will not be collected.
|
|
Employee wages are paid twice a month, on the 22nd for wages earned from the 1st through the 15th, and on the 7th of the following month for wages earned from the 16th through the end of the month. Wages earned from December 16 through December 31, 2011, were $3,000.
|
|
On October 1, 2011, Pastina borrowed $68,000 from a local bank and signed a note. The note requires interest to be paid annually on September 30 at 9%. The principal is due in 10 years.
|
|
On March 1, 2011, the company lent a supplier $25,000 and a note was signed requiring principal and interest at 11% to be paid on February 28, 2012.
|
|
On April 1, 2011, the company paid an insurance company $9,000 for a two-year fire insurance policy. The entire $9,000 was debited to insurance expense.
|
|
$900 of supplies remained on hand at December 31, 2011.
|
|
A customer paid Pastina $1,000 in December for 1,500 pounds of spaghetti to be manufactured and delivered in January 2012. Pastina credited sales revenue.
|
|
On December 1, 2011, $4,000 rent was paid to the owner of the building. The payment represented rent for December and January 2012, at $2,000 per month.
|
|
Required:
|
|
Prepare the necessary December 31, 2011, adjusting journal entries. (Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount.Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
Problem :
|
The general ledger of the Karlin Company, a consulting company, at January 1, 2011, contained the following account balances:
|
|
Account Title
|
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
30,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
15,000
|
|
Allowance for uncollectible accounts
|
500
|
|
Equipment
|
20,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
6,000
|
|
Salaries payable
|
9,000
|
|
Common stock
|
40,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
9,500
|
|
Total
|
65,000
|
65,000
|
|
Sales of services, $100,000, of which $30,000 was on credit.
|
|
Collected on accounts receivable, $27,300.
|
|
Issued shares of common stock in exchange for $10,000 in cash.
|
|
Paid salaries, $50,000 (of which $9,000 was for salaries payable).
|
|
Paid miscellaneous expenses, $24,000.
|
|
Purchased equipment for $15,000 in cash.
|
|
Paid $2,500 in cash dividends to shareholders.
|
|
(Offline – not submitted or graded in this system). Prepare the necessary T-accounts, entering the beginning balances from the trial balance.
|
|
Requirement 2:
|
|
Prepare a general journal entry for each of the summary transactions listed above. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Requirement 3:
|
|
Post the journal entries to the offline T-accounts.
|
|
Requirement 4:
|
|
Prepare an unadjusted trial balance. (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter a 0 wherever required.Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Requirement 5:
|
|
Prepare and post adjusting journal entries. Post to offline T-accounts. Accrued salaries at year-end amounted to $1,000. Depreciation for the year on the equipment is $2,000. The allowance for uncollectible accounts is estimated to be $1,500. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Requirement 6:
|
|
Prepare an adjusted trial balance. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Requirement 7:
|
|
Prepare an income statement for 2011 and a balance sheet as of December 31, 2011. (Amounts in parentheses do not require a minus sign. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Requirement 8:
|
|
Prepare and post closing entries. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Selected balance sheet information for the Wolf Company at November 30, and December 31, 2011, is presented below. The company uses the perpetual inventory system and all sales to customers are made on credit.
|
|
Nov. 30
|
Dec. 31
|
|
Debits
|
Credits
|
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
10,000
|
3,000
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
5,000
|
7,500
|
|
Inventory
|
7,000
|
6,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
12,000
|
15,000
|
|
Wages payable
|
5,000
|
3,000
|
|
The following cash flow information also is available:
|
|
Cash collected from credit customers $55,000.
|
|
Cash paid for insurance $8,000.
|
|
Cash paid to suppliers of inventory $44,000 (the entire accounts payable amounts relate to inventory purchases).
|
|
Cash paid to employees for wages $10,000.
|
|
Determine the following for the month of December. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Requirement 2:
|
|
Prepare a summary journal entry to record the month’s sales and cost of those sales. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
Problem 2-6 Accounting cycle [LO2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7]
|
The general ledger of the Karlin Company, a consulting company, at January 1, 2011, contained the following account balances:
|
|
Account Title
|
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
30,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
15,000
|
|
Allowance for uncollectible accounts
|
500
|
|
Equipment
|
20,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
6,000
|
|
Salaries payable
|
9,000
|
|
Common stock
|
40,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
9,500
|
|
Total
|
65,000
|
65,000
|
The following is a summary of the transactions for the year:
|
Sales of services, $100,000, of which $30,000 was on credit.
|
|
Collected on accounts receivable, $27,300.
|
|
Issued shares of common stock in exchange for $10,000 in cash.
|
|
Paid salaries, $50,000 (of which $9,000 was for salaries payable).
|
|
Paid miscellaneous expenses, $24,000.
|
|
Purchased equipment for $15,000 in cash.
|
|
Paid $2,500 in cash dividends to shareholders.
|
|
(Offline – not submitted or graded in this system). Prepare the necessary T-accounts, entering the beginning balances from the trial balance.
|
|
Requirement 2:
|
|
Prepare a general journal entry for each of the summary transactions listed above. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Requirement 3:
|
|
Post the journal entries to the offline T-accounts.
|
|
Requirement 4:
|
|
Prepare an unadjusted trial balance. (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter a 0 wherever required.Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Requirement 5:
|
|
Prepare and post adjusting journal entries. Post to offline T-accounts. Accrued salaries at year-end amounted to $1,000. Depreciation for the year on the equipment is $2,000. The allowance for uncollectible accounts is estimated to be $1,500. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Requirement 6:
|
|
Prepare an adjusted trial balance. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Requirement 7:
|
|
Prepare an income statement for 2011 and a balance sheet as of December 31, 2011. (Amounts in parentheses do not require a minus sign. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Requirement 8:
|
|
Prepare and post closing entries. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Requirement 9:
|
|
Prepare a post-closing trial balance. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Duke Associates, antique dealers, purchased the contents of an estate for $37,500. Terms of the purchase were FOB shipping point, and the cost of transporting the goods to Duke Associates warehouse was $1,200. Duke Associates insured the shipment at a cost of $150. Prior to putting the goods up for sale, they cleaned and refurbished them at a cost of $490.
|
|
Determine the cost of the inventory acquired from the estate. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
| Park Company reported the following March purchases and sales data for its only product. |
| Date |
Activities |
Units Acquired at Cost |
Units sold at Retail |
| Mar. |
1 |
Beginning Inventory |
150 |
units |
@ |
$ |
7.00 |
= |
$ |
1,050 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Mar. |
10 |
Sales |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
90 |
units |
@ |
$ |
15 |
|
| Mar. |
20 |
Purchase |
220 |
units |
@ |
$ |
6.00 |
= |
|
1,320 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Mar. |
25 |
Sales |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
145 |
units |
@ |
$ |
15 |
|
| Mar. |
30 |
Purchase |
90 |
units |
@ |
$ |
5.00 |
= |
|
450 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Totals |
460 |
units |
|
|
|
|
$ |
2,820 |
|
235 |
units |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Park uses a perpetual inventory system. For specific identification, ending inventory consists of 225 units, where 90 are from the March 30 purchase, 80 are from the March 20 purchase, and 55 are from beginning inventory.
| 3. |
Determine the cost assigned to ending inventory and to cost of goods sold using FIFO. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
| 4. |
Determine the cost assigned to ending inventory and to cost of goods sold using LIFO. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.) |
|
|
Ripken Company’s ending inventory includes the following items.
|
|
|
Per Unit |
|
|
|
| Product |
Units |
Cost |
Market |
| Helmets |
22 |
$ |
50 |
$ |
54 |
| Bats |
15 |
|
78 |
|
72 |
| Shoes |
36 |
|
95 |
|
91 |
| Uniforms |
40 |
|
36 |
|
36 |
|
|
Compute the lower of cost or market for ending inventory applied separately to each product. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
| The following is information for Ryder Co. |
|
2011 |
2010 |
2009 |
| Cost of goods sold |
$ 643,825 |
$ 426,650 |
$ 391,300 |
| Ending inventory |
96,400 |
86,750 |
91,500 |
|
|
Use the above information to compute inventory turnover for 2010 and 2011, and its days’ sales in inventory at December 31, 2010 and 2011. (Use 365 days a year. Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answers to 1 decimal place.)
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Edwards, Inc. has prepared the following comparative balance sheets
for 2003 and 2004:
2004 2003
Cash $ 198,000 $102,000
Receivables 106,000 78,000
Inventory 100,000 120,000
Prepaid expenses 12,000 18,000
Plant assets 840,000 700,000
Accumulated depreciation (300,000) (250,000)
Patent 102,000 116,000
$1,058,000 $884,000
Accounts payable $ 102,000 $112,000
Accrued liabilities 40,000 28,000
Mortgage payable 300,000
Preferred stock 350,000
Additional paid-in capital preferred 80,000
Common stock 400,000 400,000
Retained earnings 86,000 44,000
$1,058,000 $884,000
1. The Accumulated Depreciation account has been credited only for
the depreciation expense for the period.
2. The Retained Earnings account has been charged for dividends of
$92,000 and credited for the net income for the year.
The income statement for 2004 is as follows:
Sales $1,320,000
Cost of sales 726,000
Gross profit 594,000
Operating expenses 460,000
Net income $ 134,000
INSTRUCTIONS
(a) From the information above, prepare a statement of cash flows
(indirect method) for Edwards, Inc. for the year ended
December 31, 2004.
(b) From the information above, prepare a schedule of cash provided
by operating activities using the direct method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tanner Furniture Company concluded its FIRST year of operations in
which it made sales of $1,500,000, ALL on installment. Collections
during the year from down payments and installments totaled
$600,000. Purchases for the year totaled $900,000; the cost of
merchandise on hand at the end of the year was $180,000.
INSTRUCTIONS
Using the installment-sales method, make summary entries to record:
(a) the installment sales and cash collections;
(b) the cost of installment sales;
(c) the unrealized gross profit;
(d) the realized gross profit.
6. On February 1, 2003, Miley Contractors agreed to construct a
building at a contract price of $5,600,000. Miley estimated total
construction costs would be $4,000,000 and the project would be
finished in 2005. Information relating to the costs and billings for
this contract is as follows:
2003 2004 2005
Total costs incurred to date $1,500,000 $2,640,000 $4,600,000
Estimated costs to complete 2,500,000 1,760,000 -0-
Customer billings to date 2,200,000 4,000,000 5,600,000
Collections to date 2,000,000 3,500,000 5,500,000
INSTRUCTIONS
Fill in the correct amounts on the following schedule. For
percentage-of-completion accounting and for completed-contract
accounting, show the gross profit that should be recorded for 2003,
2004, and 2005.
Percentage-of-Completion Completed-Contract
Gross Profit Gross Profit
2003 ____________ 2003 ____________
2004 ____________ 2004 ____________
2005 ____________ 2005 ____________
————————-
Section 3.Problems
7. Cherry Construction specializes in the construction of commercial
and industrial buildings. The contractor is experienced in bidding
long-term construction projects of this type, with the typical
project lasting fifteen to twenty-four months. The contractor uses
the percentage-of-completion method of revenue recognition since,
given the characteristics of the contractor’s business and con-
tracts, it is the most appropriate method. Progress toward comple-
tion is measured on a cost to cost basis. Cherry began work on a
lump-sum contract at the beginning of 2004. As bid, the statistics
were as follows:
Lump-sum price (contract price) $4,000,000
Estimated costs
Labor $ 850,000
Materials and subcontractor 1,750,000
Indirect costs 400,000 3,000,000
$1,000,000
At the end of the first year, the following was the status of the contract:
Billings to date $2,230,000
Costs incurred to date
Labor $ 414,000
Materials and subcontractor 1,098,000
Indirect costs 150,000 1,662,000
Latest forecast total cost 3,000,000
It should be noted that included in the above costs incurred to date
were standard electrical and mechanical materials stored on the job
site, but not yet installed, costing $102,000. These costs should
not be considered in the costs incurred to date.
INSTRUCTIONS
(a) Compute the percentage of completion on the contract at the end
of 2004.
(b) Indicate the amount of gross profit that would be reported on
this contract at the end of 2004.
(c) Make the journal entry to record the income (loss) for 2004 on
Cherry’s books.
(d) Indicate the account(s) and the amount(s) that would be shown on
the balance sheet of Cherry Construction at the end of 2004
related to its construction accounts. Also indicate where these
items would be classified on the balance sheet. Billings
collected during the year amounted to $1,960,000.
(e) Assume the latest forecast on total costs at the end of 2004 was
$4,100,000. How much income (loss) would Cherry report for
the year 2004?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Natural Fragrance, Inc., began operations on January 1, 2012. The company produces a hand and body lotion in an eight-ounce bottle called Eternal Beauty. The lotion is sold wholesale in 12-bottle cases for $80 per case. There is a selling commission of $16 per case. The January direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead costs are as follows:
Make a workbook in excel and apply the worksheets within it.
Spreadsheet One: Break-Even Analysis
Determine a fixed and variable portion of a utility cost using the high-low method.
Determine a contribution margin
Determine a fix cost
Determine a break-even number
Spreadsheet Two: Budgets
Include a production budget
Include a direct materials purchase budget
Include a direct labor budget
Include a factory overhead budget
Include a budgeted income statement
Spreadsheet Three: Variance Analysis
Determine a direct material price and quantity variances
Determine a direct labor rate and time variances
Determine a factory overhead controllable variance
Determine a factory overhead volume variance
The software (excel workbook) should be attractive and user friendly.
See the following for the work information to complete it.
DIRECT MATERIALS
Cost Behavior Units per Case Cost per Unit Direct Materials Cost per Case
Cream base Variable 72 ozs. $0.015 $ 1.08
Natural oils Variable 24 ozs. 0.250 6.00
Bottle (8-oz.) Variable 12 bottles 0.400 4.80
$11.88
DIRECT LABOR
Department Cost Behavior Time per Case Labor Rate per Hour Direct Labor Cost per Case
Mixing Variable 16.8 min. $15.00 $4.20
Filling Variable 4.2 12.00 0.84
21.0 min. $5.04
FACTORY OVERHEAD
Cost Behavior Total Cost
Utilities Mixed $ 230
Facility lease Fixed 12,043
Equipment depreciation Fixed 3,600
Supplies Fixed 600
$16,473
Part A Break-Even Analysis
The management of Natural Fragrance, Inc., wishes to determine the number of cases
required to break even per month. The utilities cost, which is part of factory overhead,
is a mixed cost. The following information was gathered from the first six months of
operation regarding this cost:
2012 Case Production Utility Total Cost
January 300 $230
February 600 263
March 1,000 300
April 900 292
May 750 280
June 825 285
Instructions
1. Determine the fixed and variable portion of the utility cost using the high-low method.
2. Determine the contribution margin per case.
3. Determine the fixed costs per month, including the utility fixed cost from part (1).
4. Determine the break-even number of cases per month.
Part B August Budgets
During July of the current year, the management of Natural Fragrance, Inc., asked the controller to prepare August manufacturing and income statement budgets. Demand was expected to be 1,300 cases at $80 per case for August. Inventory planning information is provided as follows:
Finished Goods Inventory:
Cases Cost
Estimated finished goods inventory, August 1, 2012 200 $6,000
Desired finished goods inventory, August 31, 2012 100 3,000
Materials Inventory:
Cream Base(ozs.) Oils(ozs.) Bottles (bottles)
Estimated materials inventory, August 1, 2012 200 240 500
Desired materials inventory, August 31, 2012 800 300 200
There was negligible work in process inventory assumed for either the beginning or end of the month; thus, none was assumed. In addition, there was no change in the cost per unit or estimated units per case operating data from January.
Instructions
5. Prepare the August production budget.
6. Prepare the August direct materials purchases budget.
7. Prepare the August direct labor budget.
8. Prepare the August factory overhead budget.
9. Prepare the August budgeted income statement, including selling expenses.
Part C August Variance Analysis
During September of the current year, the controller was asked to perform variance analyses for August. The January operating data provided the standard prices, rates, times, and quantities per case. There were 1,300 actual cases produced during August, which was 100 more cases than planned at the beginning of the month. Actual data for August were as follows:
Actual Direct Materials Actual Direct Materials
Price per Unit Quantity per Case
Cream base $0.014 per oz. 74 ozs.
Natural oils $0.27 per oz. 26 ozs.
Bottle (8-oz.) $0.35 per bottle 12.6 bottles
Actual Direct Labor Rate Actual Direct Labor Time per Case
Mixing $15.20 16.20 min.
Filling 11.70 4.80 min.
Actual variable overhead $162.00
Normal volume 1,350 cases
The prices of the materials were different than standard due to fluctuations in market prices. The standard quantity of materials used per case was an ideal standard. The Mixing Department used a higher grade labor classification during the month, thus causing the actual labor rate to exceed standard. The Filling Department used a lower grade labor classification during the month, thus causing the actual labor rate to be less than standard.
Instructions
10. Determine and interpret the direct materials price and quantity variances for the three materials.
11. Determine and interpret the direct labor rate and time variances for the two departments.
12. Determine and interpret the factory overhead controllable variance.
13. Determine and interpret the factory overhead volume variance.
14. Why are the standard direct labor and direct materials costs in the calculations for
parts (10) and (11) based on the actual 1,300-case production volume rather than
the planned 1,200 cases of production used in the budgets for parts (6) and (7)?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Scenario: RYT (aka RotYourTeeth) Candy Company sells lollipops.
Last year the company sold 10,000,000 lollipops for $1,000,000.
The Variable Costs were $350,000 and the Net Profits were $100,000
Administration has directed management to double profits in the next year.
ASSIGNMENT: DETERMINE whether RYT should discontinue a product line to increase profitability.
RYT has been evaluating its various product lines and is specifically analyzing one location that produces three flavors: Cherry, Lemon, and Blueberry. Further analysis indicates that 20% of COGS is variable and 30% of Selling and Admin expenses are variable.
Given the following data for the month of September, RYT is considering discontinuing the Blueberry flavor. What would you advise Support your position.
|
|
Cherry
|
Lemon
|
Blueberry
|
|
Sales
|
$18,000
|
$26,000
|
$9,000
|
|
COGS
|
7,000
|
12,000
|
4,000
|
|
Gross Profit
|
11,000
|
14,000
|
5,000
|
|
Selling and Admin Exp
|
7,000
|
8,000
|
6,000
|
|
Net Income
|
4,000
|
6,000
|
(1,000)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Vitalite, Inc., produces a number of products, including a body-wrap kit. Standard variable costs relating to a single kit are given below:
Standard Quantity
or Hours Standard Price
or Rate Standard
Cost
Direct materials ? $6 per yard $ ?
Direct labor ? ? ?
Variable manufacturing overhead ? $2 per direct
labor-hour ?
Total standard cost per kit $42
During August, 500 kits were manufactured and sold. Selected information relating to the month s production is given below:
Materials Used Direct Labor Variable
Manufacturing
Overhead
Total standard cost* ? $8,000 $1,600
Actual costs incurred $10,000 ? $1,620
Materials price variance
Materials quantity variance $ 600 U
Labor rate variance
Labor efficiency variance
Variable overhead rate variance ?
Variable overhead efficiency variance ?
*For the month’s production.
The following additional information is available for August s production of kits:
Actual direct labor-hours 900
Difference between standard and actual cost per kit produced during August $.14 U
Required:
1.
What was the total standard cost of the materials used during August? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Standard cost $
2.
How many yards of material are required at standard per kit? (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your final answer to 2 decimal places.)
Number of yards yards per kit
3.
What was the materials price variance for August if there were no beginning or ending inventories of materials? (Input all amounts as positive values. Do not round intermediate calculations. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Material price variance $
4.
What is the standard direct labor rate per hour? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Standard direct labor rate $ per DLH
5.
What was the labor rate variance for August? The labor efficiency variance? (Input all amounts as positive values. Do not round intermediate calculations. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Labor rate variance $
Labor efficiency variance $
6.
What was the variable overhead rate variance for August? The variable overhead efficiency variance? (Input all amounts as positive values. Do not round intermediate calculations. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Variable overhead rate variance $
Variable overhead efficiency variance $
7.
Complete the standard cost card for one kit shown at the beginning of the problem. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Standard Quantity
or Hours Standard Price or Rate Standard Cost
Direct materials yards $6 per yard $
Direct labor hours $ per hour
Variable manufacturing overhead hours $2 per direct labor-hour
Total standard cost per kit $42
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. (TCO A) Below you will find selected information (in millions) from Coca-Cola Co. s 2012 Annual Report:
|
Income Taxes Payable
|
$471
|
|
Short-term Investments and Marketable Securities
|
8,109
|
|
Cash
|
8,442
|
|
Other non-current Liabilities
|
10,449
|
|
Common Stock
|
1,760
|
|
Receivables
|
4,812
|
|
Other Current Assets
|
2,973
|
|
Long-term Investments
|
10,448
|
|
Other Non-current Assets
|
3,585
|
|
Property, Plant and Equipment
|
23,486
|
|
Trademarks
|
6,527
|
|
Other Intangible Assets
|
20,810
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
53
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
9,010
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
8,680
|
|
Short Term Notes Payable
|
17,874
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
2,781
|
|
Other Current Liabilities
|
796
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
14,736
|
|
Paid-in-Capital in Excess of Par Value
|
11,379
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
55,038
|
|
Inventories
|
3,264
|
|
Treasury Stock
|
35,009
|
Other information taken from the Annual Report:
|
Sales Revenue for 2012
|
$48,017
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold for 2012
|
19,053
|
|
Net Income for 2012
|
9,019
|
|
Inventory Balance on 12/31/11
|
3,092
|
|
Net Accounts Receivable Balance on 12/31/11
|
4,920
|
|
Total Assets on 12/31/11
|
79,974
|
|
Equity Balance on 12/31/11
|
31,921
|
Required:
1. Using the information provided prepare a Balance Sheet. Separate the current assets from non-current assets and provide a total for each. Also separate the current liabilities from the non-current liabilities and provide a total for each.
2. Using the Balance Sheet from your answer above, calculate the Current Ratio and Return on common stockholders equity ratio. (Make sure to show all your work).
2.
(TCO B) The following selected data was retrieved from the Wal-Mart, Inc. financial statements for the year ending January 31, 2013:
|
Accounts Payable
|
$38,080
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
6,768
|
|
Cash
|
7,781
|
|
Common Stock
|
3,952
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
352,488
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
7,981
|
|
Interest Expenses
|
2,064
|
|
Membership Revenues
|
3,048
|
|
Net Sales
|
466,114
|
|
Operating, Selling and Administrative Expenses
|
88,873
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
72,978
|
Required:
Using the information provided above:
1. Prepare a multiple-step income statement
2. Calculate the Profit Margin, and Gross profit rate for the company. Be sure to provide the formula you are using, show your calculations, and discuss your findings/results.
3.(TCO C) Please review the following real-world Hewlett Packard Statement of Cash flows and address the 2 questions below:
|
Cash flow from operating activities
|
In millions
|
In millions
|
|
For the year ended 2012
|
For the year ended 2011
|
|
Net (loss) earnings
|
$(12,650)
|
$7,074
|
|
Depreciation and amortization
|
5,095
|
4,984
|
|
Impairment of goodwill and purchased intangible assets
|
18,035
|
885
|
|
Stock-based compensation expense
|
635
|
685
|
|
Provision for doubtful accounts
|
142
|
81
|
|
Provision for inventory
|
277
|
217
|
|
Restructuring charges
|
2,266
|
645
|
|
Deferred taxes on earnings
|
(711)
|
166
|
|
Excess tax benefit from stock-based competition
|
(12)
|
(163)
|
|
Other, net
|
265
|
(46)
|
|
Accounts and financing receivables
|
1,269
|
(227)
|
|
Inventory
|
890
|
(1,252)
|
|
Accounts payable
|
(1,414)
|
275
|
|
Taxes on earnings
|
(320)
|
610
|
|
Restructuring
|
(840)
|
(1,002)
|
|
Other assets and liabilities
|
(2,356)
|
(293)
|
|
Net cash provided by operating activities
|
10,571
|
12,639
|
|
Cash flows from investing activities:
|
|
|
|
Investment in property, plant, and equipment
|
(3,706)
|
(4,539)
|
|
Proceeds from sale of property, plant, and equipment
|
617
|
999
|
|
Purchases of available-for-sale securities and other investments
|
(972)
|
(96)
|
|
Maturities and sales of available-for-sale securities and other investment
|
662
|
68
|
|
Payments in connection with business acquisitions, net of cash acquired
|
(141)
|
(10,480)
|
|
Proceeds from business divestiture, net
|
87
|
89
|
|
Net cash used in investing activities
|
(3,453)
|
(13,959)
|
|
Cash flow from financing activities:
|
|
|
|
(Payments) issuance of commercial paper and notes payable, net
|
(2,775)
|
(1,270)
|
|
Issuance of debt
|
5,154
|
11,942
|
|
Payment of debt
|
(4,333)
|
(2,336)
|
|
Issuance of common stock under employee stock plans
|
716
|
896
|
|
Repurchase of common stock
|
(1,619)
|
(10,117)
|
|
Excess tax benefit from stock-based compensation
|
12
|
163
|
|
Cash dividends paid
|
(1,015)
|
(844)
|
|
Net cash used in financing activities
|
(3,860)
|
(1,566)
|
|
Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
|
3,258
|
(2,886)
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period
|
8,043
|
10,929
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period
|
$11,301
|
$8,043
|
Required:
1) Please calculate the percentage increase or decrease in cash for the total line of the operating, investing, and financing sections bolded above and explain the major reasons for the increase or decrease for each of these sections.
2) Please calculate the free cash flow for 2012 and explain the meaning of this ratio.
4.(TCO D) You are CFO of Goforit, Inc., a wholesale distribution company specializing in emerging technologies. Your CEO is a brilliant marketer, but relies on you to explain issues and choices in accounting and finance. She has heard from other members of a CEO organization to which she belongs that a company s net income can vary widely depending on which accounting choices are made from the GAAP menu.
Assuming the goal is to maximize net income, choose an accounting treatment from each of the following scenarios, and explain to your CEO why the choice will produce the desired effect on reported Net Income for the current year. Include in your answer the effect of the choice on both the income statement and balance sheet.
Required:
a. Goforit carries significant electronics inventory in a competitive environment where prices are actually falling. Which inventory valuation method would you choose LIFO, FIFO, or average cost Assume that unit purchases exceed unit sales.
b. Goforit has a large investment in warehouse equipment including conveyor belts, forklifts, and automated packaging systems. Which depreciation method would you choose: Straight line (SL) or double declining balance (DDB)?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Wheel Industries is considering a three year expansion project.
The project requires an initial investment of $1.5 million. The project will use straight line depreciation method. The project has no salvage value. It is estimated that the project will generate additional revenues of $1.2 million and has costs of $600,000.
The tax rate is 35%. Calculate the cash flows for the project. If the discount rate is 6% calculate the NPV of the project.
2. Clinton Co. has just paid a dividend of $2.50 per share. The dividends are expected to grow at a constant rate of 6% per year for ever. If the stock is currently selling for $50 per share, calculate the cost of equity for the firm
3. The Jersey Co s common stock has beta of 1.25. The risk free rate is 4% and the expected return on the market is 12%. What is the firm s cost of equity?
4. The WW Inc. has 9% coupon bonds outstanding. They have a maturity of 13 Years and are selling for $1,080. The face value is $1,000 and the interest is paid semi-annually. Calculate the cost of debt on a pre-tax basis. What will be the after tax cost of debt if the tax rate is 35%?
5. BW Co. has a target debt equity ratio of 0.6. Its cost of debt is 12% and its cost of equity is 20%. If the corporate tax rate is 34%, what is the firm s WACC?
6. MW Co. has a target capital structure of 35% common equity, 10% preferred equity and 55% debt. The cost of common equity is 18%, the cost of preferred equity is 8% and the pre-tax cost of debt is 10%.
If the corporate tax rate is 35%, what is MW s WACC?
If the firm has a project with an IRR of 12% would you accept the project?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Q1. Montana Company produces basketballs. It incurred the following costs during the year.
Direct materials $14,509
Direct labor $25,625
Fixed manufacturing overhead $10,440
Variable manufacturing overhead $32,425
Selling costs $21,365
What are the total product costs for the company under variable costing? Total product costs $
Q2.
On December 1,Diaz Company introduces a new product that includes a one-year warranty on parts. In December, 1,000 units are sold. Management believes that 5% of the units will be defective and that the average warranty costs will be $80 per unit. Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31 to accrue the estimated warranty cost.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below are data on three promissory notes. Determine the missing amounts.(Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125. Assume length of year = 360 days.)
|
|
Date of Note
|
Terms
|
Maturity Date
|
Principal
|
Annual Interest Rate
|
Total Interest
|
|
(a)
|
April 1
|
60 days
|
May 30June 31May 31
|
$600,000
|
9%
|
$
|
|
(b)
|
July 2
|
30 days
|
August 1August 2June 2June 1
|
90,000
|
%
|
$600
|
|
(c)
|
March 7
|
6 months
|
September 7September 6October 7October 6
|
120,000
|
10%
|
$
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below are data on three promissory notes. Determine the missing amounts.(Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125. Assume length of year = 360 days.)
|
|
Date of Note
|
Terms
|
Maturity Date
|
Principal
|
Annual Interest Rate
|
Total Interest
|
|
(a)
|
April 1
|
60 days
|
May 30June 31May 31
|
$600,000
|
9%
|
$
|
|
(b)
|
July 2
|
30 days
|
August 1August 2June 2June 1
|
90,000
|
%
|
$600
|
|
(c)
|
March 7
|
6 months
|
September 7September 6October 7October 6
|
120,000
|
10%
|
$
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ron Benson is a new production manager. After a great deal of effort, including considerable market research, he completes his budget and submits it to his boss, Diane Moran. Without even looking at it, she asks him what his “fudge factor” was, and which items contained the most slack. Ron, very surprised, responds that he doesn’t use any “fudge factor,” and that all his figures are honest. Ms. Moran counters by asking him how he would respond if he had to cut about 20% from his budget, as it is. She tells him that most budgets are trimmed in committee, and he had better be ready. She returns the budget to him, and tells him to come back with something reasonable.
Should Ms. Moran refuse to accept a budget without slack? Should building in slack be an accepted budgeting practice? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
The stockholders equity accounts of Falk Company at January 1, 2012, are as follows.
| Preferred Stock, 6%, $50 par |
|
$625,000 |
| Common Stock, $4 par |
|
636,000 |
| Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Preferred Stock |
|
187,300 |
| Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Common Stock |
|
306,900 |
| Retained Earnings |
|
798,400 |
There were no dividends in arrears on preferred stock. During 2012, the company had the following transactions and events.
| July 1 |
|
Declared a $0.7 cash dividend on common stock. |
| Aug. 1 |
|
Discovered $27,400 understatement of 2011 depreciation on equipment. Ignore income taxes. |
| Sept. 1 |
|
Paid the cash dividend declared on July 1. |
| Dec. 1 |
|
Declared a 14% stock dividend on common stock when the market value of the stock was $19 per share. |
| 15 |
|
Declared a 6% cash dividend on preferred stock payable January 15, 2013. |
| 31 |
|
Determined that net income for the year was $392,700. |
| 31 |
|
Recognized a $218,500 restriction of retained earnings for plant expansion. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Journalize the transactions, events, and closing entry. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
| Date |
Account Titles and Explanation |
Debit |
Credit |
| July 1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Aug. 1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Sept. 1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Dec. 1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Dec. 15 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Dec. 31 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(To close net income) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(To close cash dividends) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(To close stock dividends) |
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| In the month of June, Jose Hebert s Beauty Salon gave 3,580 haircuts, shampoos, and permanents at an average price of $36. During the month, fixed costs were $16,870 and variable costs were 75% of sales.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Determine the contribution margin in dollars, per unit and as a ratio. (Round contribution margin per unit and contribution margin ratio to 2 decimal places, e.g. $5.25 & 10.50%.)
| Contribution margin |
|
$ |
|
| Contribution margin per unit |
|
$ |
|
| Contribution margin ratio |
|
|
% |
|
|
|
Fredonia Inc. had a bad year in 2013. For the first time in its history, it operated at a loss. The company s income statement showed the following results from selling 75,400 units of product: Net sales $1,485,380; total costs and expenses $1,736,000; and net loss $250,620. Costs and expenses consisted of the following.
|
|
Total |
|
Variable |
|
Fixed |
| Cost of goods sold |
|
$1,201,500 |
|
$779,500 |
|
$422,000 |
| Selling expenses |
|
426,800 |
|
78,300 |
|
348,500 |
| Administrative expenses |
|
107,700 |
|
46,500 |
|
61,200 |
|
|
$1,736,000 |
|
$904,300 |
|
$831,700 |
Management is considering the following independent alternatives for 2014.
| 1. |
|
Increase unit selling price 28% with no change in costs and expenses. |
| 2. |
|
Change the compensation of salespersons from fixed annual salaries totaling $202,700 to total salaries of $42,700 plus a 5% commission on net sales. |
| 3. |
|
Purchase new high-tech factory machinery that will change the proportion between variable and fixed cost of goods sold to 50:50. |
(a) Compute the break-even point in dollars for 2014.
(Round contribution margin ratio to 4 decimal places e.g. 0.2512 and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 2,510.)
(b) Compute the break-even point in dollars under each of the alternative courses of action.
(Round contribution margin ratio to 4 decimal places e.g. 0.2512 and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 2,510.)
|
|
|
|
Break-even point |
| 1. |
|
Increase selling price |
|
$ |
| 2. |
|
Change compensation |
|
$ |
| 3. |
|
Purchase machinery |
|
$ |
Which course of action do you recommend Alternative 1Alternative 2Alternative 3
| Click if you would like to Show Work for this question: |
Open Show Work
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Volumetrica, a producer of audio equipment for large computer systems, is reviewing its policies as part of a biannual self-examination of the company. As part of this process, all managers have been asked to carefully examine costs and determine as closely as possible which costs are direct and which are indirect.
Linda Bedard and Sam Hilton, managers of different manufacturing departments in the same building, have been working together. They found the following four costs that could be economically traced to the products, but have historically been a part of overhead:
- Cost of setting up the machinery for a different production run.
- Cost of minor assembly components such as knobs and switches.
- Cost of packaging, which is quite different for each model.
- Cost of inspecting and testing each model.
None of the costs is significant by itself, but together these four costs make up between 10 and 15% of the total cost of the product. Linda favors “leaving well enough alone,” as she puts it, and leaving these costs in overhead. She is afraid that her volunteering to trace these costs will result in her having to trace many more costs in the future. Sam, on the other hand, prefers to have the product cost as accurate as possible. He points out that these costs are already known, and the process would require little extra work.
You have been called on in your function as accounting manager to resolve the dispute. Write a response to Linda and Sam, supporting one or the other position. Be sure to adequately defend your position.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
3 accounting questions, to be done ASAP
total answer should not be longer than 2 pages
Q1.
Describe what is meant by the naive investor hypothesis and the no-effects hypothesis
in relation to firms accounting policy changes.
Q2.
Firms often borrow funds from lenders (i.e., debtholders) to finance their investments
and activities. However, this can create incentives for firms to take actions that are
opportunistic, such as claim dilution and asset substitution.
REQUIRED:
(a) What is meant by claim dilution and asset substitution
(b) Who ultimately bears the (agency) costs if the firm engages in these opportunistic
actions and why
(c) In relation to accounting, how can the interests of the firm and debtholders be
aligned
Q3.
Explain why managers would have an incentive to choose income decreasing
accounting methods when there are (complex) bonus plan arrangements that pay
bonuses if reported earnings are between lower and upper bounds
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The Modified Accelerated Cost Recovery System (MACRS) specifies which of the following depreciation methods for buildings?
A. 150% declining-balance.
B. Double-declining-balance.
C. Straight line.
D. Buildings are not depreciable assets.
2. The Modified Accelerated Cost Recovery System (MACRS) specifies which of the following depreciation methods for land?
A. 150% declining-balance.
B. Double-declining-balance.
C. Straight line.
D. Land is not a depreciable asset.
3. If an organization has an obligation to pay $5,000 to a supplier two years from now, the present value of the obligation:
A. is less than $5,000.
B. is $5,000.
C. is more than $5,000.
D. could be calculated using an annuity factor from the present value
tables.
4. Depreciation, in accounting, is a process that results in:
A. depreciable assets being reported in the balance sheet at their fair market value.
B. accumulating cash for the replacement of the asset.
C. an accurate measurement of the economic usefulness of an asset.
D. spreading the cost of an asset over its useful life to the entity.
Use the below present value tables for problems 5, 6 and 7
5. The present value of $3,000 to be received in 7 years at 10% is:
A. $616.22
B. $1,539.60
C. $3,000.00
D. $5,845.67
6. The present value of $3,000 to be received every year for 9 years, at 10%, is:
A. $7,073.80
B. $12,273.00
C. $17,277.00
D. $27,000.00
7. The present value of an obligation of $4,000 payable in 7 years at 8% is:
A. $1,760
B. $2,334
C. $3,206
D. $3,680
Solution -PV = FV [ 1 / (1 + i)n ]
8. A particular common stock has an annual cash dividend of $2.00 per share and is predicted to have a market value of $30 per share 5 years from now. Assuming a discount rate of 10%, a fair market price for the stock today is:
A. $20.00
B. $26.21
C. $37.58
D. $56.21
Solution-
= $26.21
9. Psyche Company wants to acquire Trim Company. Trim’s ROI has been above average for its industry; net income has averaged $70,000 a year more than the industry average. These
“excess” earnings are expected to continue at this amount for 5 years. Assuming a discount rate of 8%, how much goodwill will arise from Psyches’ purchase of Trim?
A. $40,836
B. $88,157
C. $279,489
D. $350,000
Solution
= $279,490
10. Leasehold is an example of which of the following types of assets?
A. Current asset.
B. Property, plant and equipment.
C. Goodwill.
D. Intangible asset.
11. The principal challenge to calculating depletion is estimating:
A. the cost of the asset.
B. the salvage value of the exploration equipment.
C. the demand for the product.
D. the quantity of material to be recovered.
12. Long-lived, intangible assets such as leasehold improvements, patents, and copyrights are all subject to:
A. depreciation
B. amortization
C. depletion
D. consolidation
13. When a depreciable asset is sold:
A. a gain arises if the sales proceeds exceed the net book value.
B. a loss arises if the sales proceeds exceed the net book value.
C. any cash received results in a gain.
D. depreciation expense is adjusted so there is no gain or loss.
14. Goodwill is an asset that arises because the present value of an acquired company’s estimated future earnings, discounted at the acquiring firm’s ROI:
A. is less than the fair market value of the net assets of the acquired company.
B. is more thanthe fair market value of the net assets of the acquired company.
C. is more than the fair market value of the net assets of the acquiring company.
D. is less than the fair market value of the net assets of the acquiring company.
15. The intangible asset “goodwill:”
A. represents the management team’s assessment of its value to the
company.
B. may arise when one company purchases another company.
C. arises because the market value of a company’s assets is greater than
cost.
D. all of the above are correct.
16. Many current liabilities are affected by accrual accounting entries. This happens because:
A. liabilities are usually paid when they are incurred.
B. accrual accounting involves recognizing liabilities before they are paid.
C. the only way to reduce a liability account balance is with an adjusting entry.
D. accrual accounting frequently involves recognizing liabilities before
they are incurred.
17. Which of the following is not usually associated with bonds?
A. Coupon rate.
B. Maturity value.
C. Face amount.
D. Maturity rate.
18. An Accounts Payable could result from which of the following transactions?
A. Purchasing accounts for cash.
B. Purchasing property, plant and equipment on credit.
C. Purchasing goods and services from suppliers on credit.
D. All of the above.
19. The current liability for Wages Payable (or Accrued Payroll) represents the:
A. gross pay earned by employees for which they have not yet been paid.
B. net pay earned by employees for which they have not yet been paid.
C. employer’s federal and state payroll tax obligation.
D. employer’s liability for various with holdings taken out of the gross pay earned by employees.
20. The financial leverage characteristic of long-term debt results in:
A. a reduction of the risk that creditors will not be paid.
B. a magnification of ROE relative to what it would be without long-term debt.
C. a magnification of ROI relative to what it would be without long-term debt.
D. the deductibility, for income tax purposes, of dividends to stockholders.
21. When a company issues a bond at a premium:
A. the company is more profitable than most companies in its industry.
B. investors perceive the bond to be a very safe investment.
C. the investors’ interest income will be less than the interest received each year.
D. the investors’ interest income will be more than the interest received each year.
22. Which of the following is not sometimes associated with bonds?
A. Debenture.
B. Callable.
C. Cumulative.
D. Convertible
23. If the market price of a bond exceeds its face amount:
A. the coupon rate is less than the market interest rate.
B. the coupon rate is more than the market interest rate.
C. the company’s ROI and working capital have been increasing over time.
D. the maturity rate has been declining.
24. The market value of a bond is the sum of the present value of future interest payments and the present value of the amount to be repaid at maturity, discounted at:
A. the market rate.
B. the coupon rate.
C. the dividend rate.
D. the prime rate.
25. Financial leverage refers to which of the following?
A. The difference between the rate of return earned on assets (ROI) and the rate of return earned on owners’ equity (ROE).
B. The difference between the rate of return earned on current assets and the rate of return earned on retained earnings.
C. The leverage a firm obtains from increasing production.
D. Decreasing fixed costs per unit by increasing production.
26. When a company issues a bond at a discount:
A. the company will pay less than the face amount of the bond at its
maturity.
B. the company will pay more than the face amount of the bond at its maturity.
C. the company’s interest expense will be less than the interest paid each year.
D. the company’s interest expense will be more than the interest paid each year.
27. When bonds are issued at a premium:
A. interest expense on the bonds will be less than the interest paid.
B. interest expense on the bonds will be more than the interest paid.
C. the bonds are sold for less than their face amount.
D. the coupon interest rate is less than the market interest rate.
28. Which of the following is (are) a true statement(s) pertaining to bonds?
A. Bonds can be sold at a discount, par, or payable.
B. Bonds can be sold at a discount, par, or premium.
C. The SEC sets the market price of a bond.
D. The issuing firm sets the price of a bond.
E. None of the above.
29. Which of the following is true regarding bond discounts and/or premiums?
A. Bond discount is amortized but bond premium is not.
B. Bond premium is amortized but bond discount is not.
C. Neither bond discount nor premium is amortized.
D. Both bond discount and premium are amortized.
30. The amortization of bond discount:
A. increases the cash paid to bondholders for interest.
B. results in bond interest expense being greater than the interest paid to bondholders.
C. results in bond interest expense being less than the interest paid to bondholders.
D. reduces the carrying value of bonds payable on the balance sheet.
31. Factors that usually affect retained earnings directly include:
A. net income or loss, and dividends.
B. extraordinary items and losses from discontinued operations.
C. stock dividends and gains or losses from the sale of treasury stock.
D. net income or loss, and the issuance of stock at an amount in excess of par value.
32. In comparison to the owners’ equity section of a corporation’s balance sheet, owners’ equity of a proprietorship or partnership:
A. normally does not make a distinction between invested capital and retained earnings.
B. normally uses “Capital” accounts for each individual owner, rather than a “Retained Earnings” account for all of the owners.
C. normally uses a “Drawings” account for each individual owner, rather than a “Dividends” account for all of the owners.
D. all of the above.
33. The declaration of a cash dividend by the directors results in:
A. a decrease in cash and a decrease in retained earnings.
B. a decrease in retained earnings and an increase in current liabilities.
C. a decrease in net income and a decrease in cash.
D. a decrease in net income and an increase in current liabilities.
34. In most states, par value of issued shares represents:
A. Legal capital.
B. No par capital.
C. Noncontrolling capital.
D. Corporate capital.
35. The term preemptive right pertains to which of the following?
A. The Board of Directors rights in liquidation.
B. Present shareholders right to purchase shares from any additional share issuances.
C. Present shareholders right to purchase treasury shares when reissued.
D. Preferred stockholders right to dividends.
36. Balance sheet disclosures for preferred stock include all of the following except:
A. The number of shares issued.
B. The number of shares outstanding.
C. The liquidating or redemption value.
D. The credit or market value.
E. The number of shares authorized.
37. The declaration date pertains to:
A. The date used to determine who receives dividends.
B. The date on which the board of directors declares it’s going to liquidate the firm.
C. The date on which the board of directors declares a dividend.
D. The date a dividend is paid.
38. Fred Jones owns 56 shares of the Robust Corporation’s stock. Robust announces a 3 for 2 stock split. How many shares will Fred have after this split?
A. 178 shares.
B. 112 shares.
C. 84 shares.
D. 56 shares.
39. Braco has 40,000 shares of $100 par value common stock outstanding, and 10,000 shares in the treasury. The number of additional shares that would be issued in a 5% stock dividend is:
A. 500
B. 1,000
C. 1,500
D. 2,000
40. When a stock dividend is declared and issued:
A. total paid-in capital does not change.
B. total owners’ equity does not change.
C. the balance in the retained earnings account is decreased by the par value of the shares issued in the dividend.
D. total paid-in capital is decreased by the market value of the shares issued in the dividend.
41. When a company splits its common stock 3 for 1:
A. total paid-in capital increases by a factor of 3.
B. the balance in the retained earnings account is decreased by the market value of the shares issued.
C. the market value of the company’s stock falls by two-thirds.
D. the shareholders are assured of receiving larger cash dividends.
42. The principal reason for a company having a common stock split is to:
A. increase the total cash dividends paid to stockholders.
B. capitalize retained earnings.
C. decrease total owners’ equity.
D. decrease the market value per share of common stock.
43. When a firm purchases its own shares for the treasury:
A. total owners’ equity is decreased.
B. total owners’ equity is increased.
C. the balance in the retained earnings account is decreased.
D. paid-in capital is decreased.
44. If a firm sells treasury stock for more than its cost:
A. a gain is recognized in the income statement.
B. the balance in the retained earnings account is increased.
C. additional paid-in capital is increased.
D. total owners’ equity does not change.
45. The statement of changes in retained earnings for the year shows:
A. the retained earnings balance at the beginning of the year.
B. amounts received from the sale of additional common stock during the
year.
C. extraordinary gains or losses during the year.
D. the effect of a stock split during the year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
13. Aerospace Dynamics will invest $110,000 in a project that will produce the following cash flows. The cost of capital is 11 percent. Should the project be undertaken? (Note that the fourth year s cash flow is negative.)
|
Year
|
Cash Flow
|
|
1…………….
|
$36,000
|
|
2…………….
|
44,000
|
|
3…………….
|
38,000
|
|
4…………….
|
(44,000)
|
|
5…………….
|
81,000
|
14. The Horizon Company will invest $60,000 in a temporary project that will generate the following cash inflows for the next three years.
|
Year
|
Cash Flow
|
|
1…………….
|
$15,000
|
|
2…………….
|
25,000
|
|
3…………….
|
40,000
|
The firm will also be required to spend $10,000 to close down the project at the end of the three years. If the cost of capital is 10 percent, should the investment be undertaken?
15. Skyline Corp. will invest $130,000 in a project that will not begin to produce returns until after the 3rd year. From the end of the 3rd year until the end of the 12th year (10 periods), the annual cash flow will be $34,000. If the cost of capital is 12 percent, should this project be undertaken?
16. The Ogden Corporation makes an investment of $25,000, which yields the following
cash flows:
|
Year
|
Cash Flow
|
|
1…………….
|
$ 5,000
|
|
2…………….
|
5,000
|
|
3…………….
|
8,000
|
|
4…………….
|
9,000
|
|
5…………….
|
10,000
|
a. What is the present value with a 9 percent discount rate (cost of capital)?
b. What is the internal rate of return? Use the interpolation procedure shown in this chapter.
c. In this problem would you make the same decision in parts a and b
17. The Danforth Tire Company is considering the purchase of a new machine that would increase the speed of manufacturing and save money. The net cost of this machine is $66,000. The annual cash flows have the following projections.
|
Year
|
Cash Flow
|
|
1…………….
|
$21,000
|
|
2…………….
|
29,000
|
|
3…………….
|
36,000
|
|
4…………….
|
16,000
|
|
5…………….
|
8,000
|
a. If the cost of capital is 10 percent, what is the net present value?
b. What is the internal rate of return?
c. Should the project be accepted? Why?
18. You are asked to evaluate two projects for Adventures Club, Inc. Using the net present value method combined with the profitability index approach described in footnote 2 on page ____, which project would you select? Use a discount rate of 12 percent.
|
Project X (trips to Disneyland) ($10,000 investment)
|
Project Y (international film festivals) ($22,000 investment)
|
|
Year
|
Cash Flow
|
Year
|
Cash Flow
|
|
1…………………………
|
$4,000
|
1……………………………
|
$10,800
|
|
2…………………………
|
5,000
|
2……………………………
|
9,600
|
|
3…………………………
|
4,200
|
3……………………………
|
6,000
|
|
4…………………………
|
3,600
|
4……………………………
|
7,000
|
19. Cablevision, Inc., will invest $48,000 in a project. The firm s discount rate (cost of capital) is 9 percent. The investment will provide the following inflows.
|
1…………….
|
$10,000
|
|
2…………….
|
10,000
|
|
3…………….
|
16,000
|
|
4…………….
|
19,000
|
|
5…………….
|
20,000
|
The internal rate of return is 15 percent.
a. If the reinvestment assumption of the net present value method is used, what will be the total value of the inflows after five years? (Assume the inflows come at the end of each year.)
b. If the reinvestment assumption of the internal rate of return method is used, what will be the total value of the inflows after five years?
c. Generally is one investment assumption likely to be better than another?
20. The 21st Century Corporation uses the modified internal rate of return. The firm has a cost of capital of 8 percent. The project being analyzed is as follows ($20,000 investment):
|
Year
|
Cash Flow
|
|
1…………….
|
$10,000
|
|
2…………….
|
9,000
|
|
3…………….
|
6,800
|
a. What is the modified internal rate of return? An approximation from Appendix B is adequate. (You do not need to interpolate.)
b. Assume the traditional internal rate of return on the investment is 14.9 percent. Explain why your answer in part a would be lower.
21. Oliver Stone and Rock Company uses a process of capital rationing in its decision making. The firm s cost of capital is 12 percent. It will invest only $80,000 this year. It has determined the internal rate of return for each of the following projects.
|
Project
|
Project Size
|
Percent of Internal Rate of Return
|
|
A…………………….
|
$15,000
|
14%
|
|
B……………………..
|
25,000
|
19
|
|
C……………………..
|
30,000
|
10
|
|
D…………………….
|
25,000
|
16.5
|
|
E……………………..
|
20,000
|
21
|
|
F……………………..
|
15,000
|
11
|
|
G…………………….
|
25,000
|
18
|
|
H…………………….
|
10,000
|
17.5
|
a. Pick out the projects that the firm should accept.
b. If Projects B and G are mutually exclusive, how would that affect your overall answer? That is, which projects would you accept in spending the $80,000?
22. Miller Electronics is considering two new investments. Project C calls for the purchase of a coolant recovery system. Project H represents an investment in a heat recovery system.
The firm wishes to use a net present value profile in comparing the projects. The investment and cash flow patterns are as follows:
|
Project C ($25,000 Investment)
|
Project H ($25,000 investment)
|
|
Year
|
Cash Flow
|
Year
|
Cash Flow
|
|
1……………………..
|
$ 6,000
|
1………………………….
|
$20,000
|
|
2……………………..
|
7,000
|
2………………………….
|
6,000
|
|
3……………………..
|
9,000
|
3………………………….
|
5,000
|
|
4……………………..
|
13,000
|
|
|
a. Determine the net present value of the projects based on a zero discount rate.
b. Determine the net present value of the projects based on a 9 percent discount rate.
c. The internal rate of return on Project C is 13.01 percent, and the internal rate of return on Project H is 15.68 percent. Graph a net present value profile for the two investments similar to Figure 12-3. (Use a scale up to $10,000 on the vertical axis, with $2,000 increments. Use a scale up to 20 percent on the horizontal axis, with
5 percent increments.)
d. If the two projects are not mutually exclusive, what would your acceptance or rejection decision be if the cost of capital (discount rate) is 8 percent? (Use the net present value profile for your decision; no actual numbers are necessary.)
e. If the two projects are mutually exclusive (the selection of one precludes the selection of the other), what would be your decision if the cost of capital is (1) 5 percent,
(2) 13 percent, (3) 19 percent? Use the net present value profile for your answer.
23. Software Systems is considering an investment of $20,000, which produces the following inflows:
|
Year
|
Cash Flow
|
|
1…………….
|
$11,000
|
|
2…………….
|
9,000
|
|
3…………….
|
5,800
|
You are going to use the net present value profile to approximate the value for the internal rate of return. Please follow these steps:
a. Determine the net present value of the project based on a zero discount rate.
b. Determine the net present value of the project based on a 10 percent discount rate.
c. Determine the net present value of the project based on a 20 percent discount rate
(it will be negative).
d. Draw a net present value profile for the investment. (Use a scale up to $6,000 on the vertical axis, with $2,000 increments. Use a scale up to 20 percent on the horizontal axis, with 5 percent increments.) Observe the discount rate at which the net present value is zero. This is an approximation of the internal rate of return on the project.
e. Actually compute the internal rate of return based on the interpolation procedure presented in this chapter. Compare your answers in parts d and e.
24. Howell Magnetics Corporation is going to purchase an asset for $400,000 that will produce $180,000 per year for the next four years in earnings before depreciation and taxes. The asset will be depreciated using the three-year MACRS depreciation schedule in Table 12-9. (This represents four years of depreciation based on the half-year convention.) The firm is in a 34 percent tax bracket. Fill in the schedule below for the next four years. (You need to first determine annual depreciation.)
|
Earnings before depreciation and taxes
|
_____
|
|
Depreciation
|
_____
|
|
Earnings before taxes
|
_____
|
|
Taxes
|
_____
|
|
Earnings after taxes
|
_____
|
|
+ Depreciation
|
_____
|
|
Cash flow
|
_____
|
25. Assume $80,000 is going to be invested in each of the following assets. Using Tables 12-8 and 12-9, indicate the dollar amount of the first year s depreciation.
a. Computers
b. Petroleum refining product
c. Office furniture
d. Pipeline distribution
26. The Keystone Corporation will purchase an asset that qualifies for three-year MACRS depreciation. The cost is $60,000 and the asset will provide the following stream of earnings before depreciation and taxes for the next four years:
Year 1……………… $27,000
Year 2……………… 30,000
Year 3……………… 23,000
Year 4……………… 15,000
The firm is in a 36 percent tax bracket and has an 11 percent cost of capital. Should it purchase the asset?
27. Oregon Forest Products will acquire new equipment that falls under the five-year MACRS category. The cost is $300,000. If the equipment is purchased, the following earnings before depreciation and taxes will be generated for the next six years.
Year 1………………… $112,000
Year 2………………… 105,000
Year 3………………… 82,000
Year 4………………… 53,000
Year 5………………… 37,000
Year 6………………… 32,000
The firm is in a 30 percent tax bracket and has a 14 percent cost of capital. Should Oregon Forest Products purchase the equipment? Use the net present value method.
28. The Thorpe Corporation is considering the purchase of manufacturing equipment with a 10-year midpoint in its asset depreciation range (ADR). Carefully refer to Table 12-8 to determine in what depreciation category the asset falls. (Hint: It is not 10 years.) The asset will cost $80,000, and it will produce earnings before depreciation and taxes of $28,000 per year for three years, and then $12,000 a year for seven more years. The firm has a tax rate of 34 percent. With a cost of capital of 12 percent, should it purchase the asset? Use the net present value method. In doing your analysis, if you have years in which there is no depreciation, merely enter a zero for depreciation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1. Prepare a budget for this year for the Administrative Department at Tom’s Toyota Company based on the following information:
Last Year Forecasting Assumption Budget for this Year
Salaries $60,000 2% increase ___________
Stationary $ 900 1% decrease ___________
Telephone $ 2,500 3% increase ___________
Electricity $ 1,200 2.5% increase ___________
Office Rent $10,000 2% increase ___________
Depreciation $ 4,000 no change ___________
Total: $78,600 ___________
Question 2. Define a “Static Budget.”
Question 3. Define a “Flexible Budget.”
Question 4. Define the term “Zero-based Budgeting.”
Question 5. Define “Period Budgets.”
Question 6. Define “Rolling Budgets.”
Question 7. Big Bob’s Discount Appliances expects sales of $5,000, $5,000, and $10,000 during April, May, and June (big sale in June). To build business, Big Bob lets all customers buy on credit, and all do so. In the past, 50% of Big Bob’s sales have been collected during the month of sale, 40% are collected the following month, and 10% the month after that. If this trend continues, what will be Big Bob’s total cash collections in the month of June?
Question 8. Little Louie’s expects to have $100 in cash on hand at the beginning of June, and the company’s target cash balance is $100. Net cash flow for June is minus $300. Assuming that Little Louie’s borrows to meet shortterm cash needs and pays back as soon as surplus cash is available, what will be the company’s ending cash balance after financing at the end of June?
Question 9. Ma & Pa Kettle’s Chili Company has begun selling a new chili recipe and they want you to help them with next year’s budgeted financial statements. Using the worksheet below, complete Ma & Pa’s forecast and answer the questions which follow.
Assumptions:
To begin with, Ma & Pa are sure sales will grow 50% next year. Assume that is true. Then assume that COGS, Current Assets, and Current Liabilities all vary directly with Sales (that means if sales grows a certain percentage, then the account in question will grow by that same percentage). Assume that fixed expenses will remain unchanged and that $1,000 worth of new Fixed Assets will be obtained next year. Lastly, the current dividend policy will be continued next year.
Ma & Pa Kettle Chili Company, Inc.
Financial Forecast
Estimated
This year for next year
Sales $10,000 ________
COGS 4,000 ________
Gross Profit 6,000 ________
Fixed Expenses 3,000 ________
BeforeTax Profit 3,000 ________
Tax @ 33.3333% 1,000 ________
Net Profit $2,000 ________
Dividends $0 ________
Current Assets $25,000 ________
Net Fixed Assets 15,000 ________
Total Assets $40,000 ________
Current Liabilities $17,000 ________
Longterm debt 3,000 ________
Common Stock 7,000 ________
Retained Earnings 13,000 ________
Total Liabs & Eq $40,000 ________
Amount need to balance the balance sheet ________
(Projected total assets minus projected
total liabilities & equity *)
* If this number is positive it means Ma & Pa need additional external funding to finance their projected asset growth. If this number is negative it means Ma & Pa have programmed too much financing for the amount
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Pizza Company makes two types of frozen pizzas: pepperoni and cheese. The Pizza Company allocates overhead to these two products based on the number of direct labor hours. The direct labor hours per unit for making a pepperoni pizza is 5 minutes or 1/12 of an hour. The direct labor hours per unit for making a cheese pizza is 4 minutes or 1/15 of an hour. At the start of the year The Pizza Company expected to make 12,000 pepperoni pizzas and 6,000 cheese pizzas. During the year, The Pizza Company actually made 9,000 pepperoni pizzas and 7,500 cheese pizzas. The time cards indicate that direct laborers worked for 1,300 hours.
What are the total expected direct labor hours, standard direct labor hours, and actual direct labor hours?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Writea paper of no more than 750 words in which you respond to the Broadening Your Perspective 17-2 activity titled “Managerial Perspective” in Ch. 17 of Accounting.
Some of you are having troubles finding this exercise. I have included the exercise in this message. For further reference, please click in:
“Reading Activity – Chapter 17”, a new tab will open: Reading Activity Chapter, please select the last item on the list “Broadening your perspective”. Please let me know if you have any questions.
| BYP17-2 |
MANAGERIAL ANALYSISIdeal Manufacturing Company of Sycamore, Illinois, has supported a research and development (R&D) department that has for many years been the sole contributor to the company’s new farm machinery products. The R&D activity is an overhead cost center that provides services only to in-house manufacturing departments (four different product lines), all of which produce agricultural/farm/ranch related machinery products.The department has never sold its services outside, but because of its long history of success, larger manufacturers of agricultural products have approached Ideal to hire its R&D department for special projects. Because the costs of operating the R&D department have been spiraling uncontrollably, Ideal’s management is considering entertaining these outside approaches to absorb the increasing costs. But, (1) management doesn’t have any cost basis for charging R&D services to outsiders, and (2) it needs to gain control of its R&D costs. Management decides to implement an activity-based costing system in order to determine the charges for both outsiders and the in-house users of the department’s services.R&D activities fall into four pools with the following annual costs.
| Market analysis |
$1,050,000 |
| Product design |
2,350,000 |
| Product development |
3,600,000 |
| Prototype testing |
1,400,000 |
|
|
Activity analysis determines that the appropriate cost drivers and their usage for the four activities are:
| Activities |
Cost Drivers |
Total Estimated Drivers |
| Market analysis |
Hours of analysis |
15,000 |
hours |
| Product design |
Number of designs |
2,500 |
designs |
| Product development |
Number of products |
90 |
products |
| Prototype testing |
Number of tests |
500 |
tests |
|
|
Instructions
| (a) |
Compute the activity-based overhead rate for each activity cost pool. |
| (b) |
How much cost would be charged to an in-house manufacturing department that consumed 1,800 hours of market analysis time, was provided 280 designs relating to 10 products, and requested 92 engineering tests? |
| (c) |
How much cost would serve as the basis for pricing an R&D bid with an outside company on a contract that would consume 800 hours of analysis time, require 178 designs relating to 3 products, and result in 70 engineering tests? |
| (d) |
What is the benefit to Ideal Manufacturing of applying activity-based costing to its R&D activity for both in-house and outside charging purposes? |
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The owner of the company where you work finds out that you are majoring in accounting and she wants you to explain the corporate structure to her. She also wants to see why someone would want to invest in a corporation. She wants to better understand stock transactions that the corporation would engage in.
She wants you to:
- Explain the corporate structure.
- Select two companies in the same industry and find their financial statements for the last two years. Provide citations for all statements.
- Compare the stockholder s equity between these two company’s financial statements.
- Explain what kinds of stock transactions have taken place in the last two years.
|
Grading Criteria
|
|
15%
|
Explain the corporate structure.
|
|
15%
|
Select two companies in the same industry and find their financial statements for the last two years. Provide citations for all statements.
|
|
15%
|
Compare the stockholder s equity between these two company’s financial statements.
|
|
15%
|
Explain what kinds of stock transactions have taken place in the last two years.
|
|
20%
|
Additional research supporting the initial answer to the IP
|
|
20%
|
Justified ideas and responses by using appropriate examples or personal experience.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are between jobs and have decided to relocate to a city west of the Mississippi River, but you are unsure of what size or type of city you and your family can afford to live in.
Choose 4 cities west of the Mississippi River, each of a different size, and research the housing prices for a 3-bedroom, 2-bath condo for each city. Determine how supply and demand can affect the prices of these homes. In a PowerPoint presentation, submit data findings that include economic factors within that area that may influence your decision, or factors that have prohibited an area to be chosen.
Present the data in the following format:
- 1 slide of housing data findings. Provide the housing prices of each chosen city west of the Mississippi for a 3-bedroom, 2-bath condo or house.
- 2 3 slides of your preferred city to relocate with your reasoning for this choice
- 1 2 slides: Explain at least 2 reasons why housing prices vary from city to city
- 3 5 slides: Explain 3 4 ways in which supply and demand affect the prices of the homes
- 3 5 slides: Include any supply and demand figures or calculations to support your reasoning
- Cite sources using APA style.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Phase 1 Individual Project |
| Deliverable Length: |
12 15 slides with notes (excluding cover and references) |
| Details: |
Weekly tasks or assignments (Individual or Group Projects) will be due by Monday and late submissions will be assigned a late penalty in accordance with the late penalty policy found in the syllabus. NOTE: All submission posting times are based on midnight Central Time.
Your friend, Mr. CPA, suggested that you, Mr. Ethics, the controller of Reliable Inc., prepare a presentation to educate the CEO of Reliable Inc., Mr. Fraud, on the following topics:
- Accounting concepts and principles
- Generally accepted accounting principles: the accounting period, the revenue principle, and the matching principle
- Governing organizations
- Internal and external users of accounting and their use of the company financials
- The dangers of the CEO’s suggestions about how to avoid showing a loss for a second year in a row
Please submit your assignment.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The business provided services to a credit customer.
a.
Assets and owners equity increase
b.
Assets and revenue increase
c.
Liabilities and owner s equity increase
d.
None of the above are correct
A credit may signify a(n):
a.
Decrease in revenues
b.
Decrease in assets
c.
Decrease in capital
d.
Decrease in liabilities
A credit to an asset account was posted to an owners equity account. This error would cause:
a.
Assets were overstated
b.
Owners equity was overstated
c.
Liabilities were overstated
d.
Both A and C are correct
A debit to an asset account was posted to an expense account. This error would cause:
a.
Assets were overstated
b.
Expenses were overstated
c.
Liabilities were overstated
d.
None of the above are correct
One asset would be debited and another credited if:
a.
A business paid a creditor
b.
The business provided services to a cash customer
c.
The business bought supplies paying cash
d.
The business provided services to a credit customer
Paid the rent for the next six months.
a.
an asset would be debited and an expense credited
b.
an asset would be debited and a revenue credited
c.
capital would be debited and a revenue credited
d.
an asset would be debited and an asset credited
M. Sands, CPA, collected fees of $650 not previously billed or recorded. The journal entry to record the collection would be:
a.
accounting fees 650, cash 650
b.
accounts receivable 650, cash 650
c.
cash 650, accounting fees 650
d.
cash 650, M. Sands Capital 650
A $600 check written for supplies was journalized as $60. The entry to correct this error is:
a.
debit supplies, $540; credit cash, $540
b.
debit supplies, $60; credit cash $60
c.
debit cash, $540; credit supplies, $540
d.
debit cash, $60; credit cash, $60
Proof that the dollar amount in debits equals the dollar amount of the credits in the ledger means:
a.
all accounts have their correct balances in the ledger
b.
all of the information from the journal was correctly transferred to the ledger
c.
only that the debit dollar amounts equal the credit dollar amounts
d.
only the ledger is accurate; the journal may be incorrect
A debit to a revenue account was posted to an asset account. This would cause:
a.
revenue to be understated
b.
liabilities to be understated
c.
expense to be understated
d.
assets to be overstated
The general journal entry to record an exchange of assets would most commonly include:
a.
a debit to cash and a credit to fees earned
b.
a debit to fees earned and a credit to accounts receivable
c.
a debit to supplies and a credit to accounts payable
d.
a debit to cash and a credit to accounts receivable
If cash has been debited, it is most likely that:
a.
the business borrowed cash from the bank
b.
a charge customer made a payment
c.
the owner made an investment
d.
all of these are possible
If the adjustment for supplies used during the period was not made:
a.
expenses would be too high
b.
revenue would be too high
c.
expenses would be too low
d.
asset office supplies would be too low
Roy purchased a one year insurance policy for $2400. The adjusting entry for he one month would be:
a.
debit to prepaid insurance, $200
b.
credit to cash, $200
c.
debit to insurance expense, $200
d.
none of these answers are correct
The capital balance amount shown in the balance sheet column of the worksheet represents:
a.
beginning capital plus net income
b.
beginning capital plus investments to capital
c.
beginning capital less withdrawals
d.
beginning capital plus net income less withdrawal
When counting the supplies a file cabinet was forgotten and the adjustment was made based upon the incorrect count. This would:
a.
overstate the periods net income
b.
overstate the end of period assets
c.
understand the end of period assets
d.
none of these are correct
The adjustment for accrued wages included the entire pay period, some of which occurs next month. This would:
a.
understate the end of period liabilities
b.
overstate the periods net income
c.
overstate the end of period liabilities
d.
none of these are correct
The purchase of equipment will require an adjustment of:
a.
increasing the total assets and increasing the total expenses at the end of the month
b.
decreasing the total assets and decreasing the total expenses at the end of the month
c.
decreasing the total assets and increasing the total expenses at the end of the month
d.
none of the above
Which of the following would cause an asset to be debited and a liability to be credited?
a.
Recorded the adjustment for the expiration of the insurance policy
b.
Recorded the adjustment for the expiration of rent
c.
Purchases supplies on account
d.
None of these would have that effect
Which of the following would cause a liability to be credited and an expense debited?
a.
Recorded the adjustment for the accrual of wages
b.
It s the end of the month and no utility bill has been received
c.
Recorded an accrued expense
d.
All of the above would have that effect
Which of the following accounts will be directly closed to capital at the end of the fiscal year?
a.
Depreciation expense
b.
Fees revenue
c.
Salaries expense
d.
Withdrawals
The income summary account shows debits of $20,000 and credits of $18,000. This is a result of a:
a.
Net loss of $38,000
b.
Net income of $2,000
c.
Net income of $38,000
d.
Net loss of $2,000
After closing the revenue, expense and withdrawal accounts, the capital increased by $2,000. Which of the following situations could have occurred
a.
The owner made withdrawals
b.
The company had a net income of $5,000
c.
The owner invested an additional amount
d.
All of these answers are correct
When the expense are closed:
a.
Owners capital will be debited
b.
Income summary will be credited
c.
Income summary will be debited
d.
None of these are correct
Close the fees earned account:
a.
Owners capital would increase
b.
Owners capital would remain the same
c.
Owners capital would increase
d.
None of these are correct
A check for $78 is incorrectly recorded on the checkbook stub as $87. The $9 error should be shown on the bank reconciliation as:
a.
Deducted from the balance per bank statement
b.
Added to the balance per bank statement
c.
Added to the balance per books
d.
Deducted from the balance per books
Which of the following bank reconciliation items would not be reflected in a journal entry?
a.
Outstanding checks
b.
NSF customer check
c.
Collection of a note by the bank
d.
Bank service charges
The debit recorded in the journal to establish the petty cash fund is to:
a.
Petty cash
b.
Accounts receivable
c.
Cash
d.
Accounts payable
Robbins supply journal entry to establish a $100 petty cash fund for the office would include a:
a.
Credit to petty cash for $100
b.
Credit to cash for $100
c.
Debit to office expense for $100
d.
Debit to cash for $100
An error recording a $72 check as $27 would be included on the bank reconciliation as a(n):
a.
Subtraction from the balance per bank
b.
Subtraction from the balance per books
c.
Addition to the balance per books
d.
Addition to the balance per bank
The accounting department forgot to estimate the worker s compensation, this will cause:
a.
The net income to be understated
b.
The liabilities to be overstated
c.
The assets to be overstated
d.
The net income to be overstated
Posting the payroll entry comes from the:
a.
Employees earning record
b.
Journal
c.
Payroll register
d.
None of these answers are correct
The entry to record he employers payroll taxes would include:
a.
a credit to state and federal unemployment tax payable
b.
a credit to fica-social security taxes payable and fica-medicare taxes payable
c.
a debit to payroll taxes expense
d.
all of these answers are correct
The entry to record the payroll tax expense would include:
a.
a credit to cash
b.
a credit to fica (social security and medicare) taxes payable
c.
a credit to federal income taxes payable
d.
a credit to wages payable
The normal balance of the sales returns and allowances account is:
a.
a debit
b.
zero
c.
a credit
d.
it does not have a normal balance
Accounts of a single type are kept in this ledger
a.
Subsidiary ledger
b.
Supplemental ledger
c.
Additional ledger
d.
None of these answers are correct
Payment for merchandise sold on credit for $100 subject to 2/10 n/30 was received within the discount period – $98 was received. This was recorded with a debit to sales discounts for $2, a debit to cash for $98 and a credit to accounts receivable 100, but no mention was made of the subsidiary ledger account. This error will cause:
a.
The net income for the period to be overstated
b.
The net income for the period to be understated
c.
The assets to be overstated
d.
The control account to not agree with the subsidiary ledger
A list of creditors with ending balances is called:
a.
A trade list
b.
A schedule of accounts payable
c.
A list of suppliers
d.
A schedule of accounts receivable
Purchased office supplies on account. This will be recorded with:
a.
A debit to a liability and a credit to an asset
b.
A credit to a liability and a debit to an asset
c.
A credit to an asset and a debit to an expense
d.
A debit to an asset and a credit to an expense
The journal entry to record the return of a purchase of inventory under the perpetual system includes a:
a.
Credit to merchandise inventory
b.
Credit to purchases
c.
Debit to purchase returns and allowances
d.
Debit to merchandise inventory
Deluth Corporation has a normal gross profit of 40%. The current year s beginning inventory was $2,000, purchase were $5,000 and retail sales were $6,000. The estimated ending inventory under the gross margin method is:
a.
$3,600
b.
$3,400
c.
$3,450
d.
$4,500
When an asset is exchanged for a similar asset and a gain results, under accounting rules the gain is:
a.
Subtracted from the cost of the new asset
b.
Credited to gain on exchange of an asset
c.
Absorbed into the cost of the new asset
d.
Recorded in the other income section of the income statement
Salvage value was ignored using units of production depreciation. This error would cause:
a.
The periods net income to be understated
b.
The periods net income will be overstated
c.
The periods net assets will be overstated
d.
None of these are correct
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The convention of consistency refers to consistent use of accounting principles:
among firms
within industries
among accounting periods
throughout the accounting period
2. Jayadev Athreya has started his first job. He will invest $5,000 at the end of each year for the next 45 years in a fund that will earn a return of 10 percent. How much will Jayadev have at the end of 45 years?
$2,667,904
$3,594,524
$1,745,600
$5,233,442
3. Variance reports are:
SEC financial reports
internal reports for management
external financial reports
all of these
4. Horizontal analysis is also known as:
linear analysis
vertical analysis
common size analysis
trend analysis
5. Turnbull Corp. had an EBIT of $247 million in the last fiscal year. Its depreciation and amortization expenses amounted to $84 million. The firm has 135 million shares outstanding and a share price of $12.80. A competing firm that is very similar to Turnbull has an enterprise value/EBITDA multiple of 5.40.
What is the enterprise value of Turnbull Corp.? Round to the nearest million dollars.
$1,787 million
$1,344 million
$1,315 million
$453.6 million
6. Regatta, Inc., has six-year bonds outstanding that pay a 8.25 percent coupon rate. Investors buying the bond today can expect to earn a yield to maturity of 6.875 percent. What should the company s bonds be priced at today? Assume annual coupon payments. (Round to the nearest dollar.)
$1,066
$923
$1014
$972
7. How firms estimate their cost of capital: The WACC for a firm is 13.00 percent. You know that the firm s cost of debt capital is 10 percent and the cost of equity capital is 20% What proportion of the firm is financed with debt?
33%
50%
70%
30%
8. The cash conversion cycle?
estimates how long it takes on average for the firm to collect its outstanding accounts receivables balance.
begins when the firm uses its cash to purchase raw materials and ends when the firm collects cash payments on its credit sales.
begins when the firm invests cash to purchase the raw materials that would be used to produce the goods that the firm manufactures.
shows how long the firm keeps its inventory before selling it.
9. The accumulation of accounting data on the basis of the individual manager who has the authority to make day-to-day decisions about activities in an area is called:
responsibility accounting
flexible accounting
master budgeting
static reporting
10. Which of the following financial statements is concerned with the company at a point in time?
balance sheet
statement of cash flows
income statement
retained earnings statement
11. The major element in budgetary control is:
the approval of the budget by the stockholders
the comparison of actual results with planned objectives.
the preparation of long-term plans
the valuation of inventories
12. The group of users of accounting information charged with achieving the goals of the business is its:
creditors
investors
managers
auditors
13. Which of the following is an advantage of corporations relative to partnerships and sole proprietorships?
most common form of organization
reduced legal liability for investors
lower taxes
harder to transfer ownership
14. Teakap, Inc. has current assets of $1,456,312 and total assets of $4,812,369 for the year ending September 30, 2006. It also has current liabilities of $1,041,012, common equity of $1,500,000 and retained earnings of $1,468,347. How much long-term debt does the firm have?
$1,844,022
$803,010
$2,303,010
$2,123,612
15. Gateway, Corp. has an inventory turnover of 5.6. What is the firm s days s sales in inventory?
65.2
57.9
61.7
64.3
16. An activity that has a direct cause-effect relationship with the resources consumed is a(n):
product activity
cost driver
cost pool
overhead rate
17. The process of evaluating financial data that change under alternative courses of action is called:
cost-benefit analysis
double entry analysis
contribution margin analysis
incremental analysis
18. An unrealistic budget is more likely to result when it:
is developed with performance appraisal usages in mind.
has been developed in a top down fashion.
has been developed by all levels of management.
has been developed in a bottom up fashion.
19. Serox stock was selling for $20 two years ago. The stock sold for $25 one year ago, and it is currently selling for $28. Serox pays a $1.10 dividend per year. What was the rate of return for owning Serox in the most recent year? (Round to the nearest percent.)
12%
40%
32%
16%
20. Which of the following is considered a hybrid organizational form?
partnership
sole proprietorship
limited liability partnership
corporation
21. A cost which remains constant per unit at various levels of activity is a:
manufacturing cost
mixed cost
fixed cost
variable cost
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Duggan Company applies manufacturing overhead to jobs on the basis of machine hours used. Overhead costs are expected to total $338,580 for the year, and machine usage is estimated at 125,400 hours.
For the year, $361,548 of overhead costs are incurred and 132,400 hours are used.
(a) Compute the manufacturing overhead rate for the year. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25.)
Manufacturing overhead rate ————————- per machine hour
(b) What is the amount of under or over-applied overhead at December 31?
(c) Prepare the adjusting entry to assign the under or over-applied overhead for the year to cost of goods sold.
The ledger of Custer Company has the following work in process account.
|
5/1 Balance 4,280
5/31 Materials 6,400
5/31 Labor 3,200
5/31 Overhead 1,330
|
5/31 Transferred out ?
|
|
5/31 Balance ?
|
|
Production records show that there were 570 units in the beginning inventory, 30% complete, 1,460 units started, and 1,510 units transferred out. The beginning work in process had materials cost of $2,610 and conversion costs of $1,670. The units in ending inventory were 40% complete. Materials are entered at the beginning of the painting process.
Instructions
(a) How many units are in process at May 31?
(b) What is the unit materials cost for May?
(c) What is the unit conversion cost for May?
(d) What is the total cost of units transferred out in May?
(e) What is the cost of the May 31 inventory?
|
Wilkins Inc. has two types of handbags: standard and custom. The controller has decided to use a plantwide overhead rate based on direct labor costs. The president has heard of activity-based costing and wants to see how the results would differ if this system were used. Two activity cost pools were developed: machining and machine setup. Presented below is information related to the company s operations.
|
Standard
|
Custom
|
|
Direct labor costs
|
$47,500
|
$96,300
|
|
Machine hours
|
1,260
|
1,390
|
|
Setup hours
|
100
|
390
|
Total estimated overhead costs are $305,000. Overhead cost allocated to the machining activity cost pool is $196,200, and $108,800 is allocated to the machine setup activity cost pool.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Compute the overhead rate using the traditional (plantwide) approach. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 12.25%.)
|
|
|
(b) Compute the overhead rates using the activity-based costing approach.
(c) Determine the difference in allocation between the two approaches.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Additional Information (for all entries; please see the posted Excel spreadsheet with a few journal entries already provided):
1. Sales for 2011 are $310,000. All sales are on credit.
2. Gross Margin ratio is 40 percent
3. Accounts Receivable:
i. $190,000 of the accounts receivable is paid by the end of the year (the remaining balance remains on the balance sheet).
ii. $4,000 of A/R is written off during the year.
iii. 5% of Accounts Receivable (after write-off and collections) is considered to be uncollectible.
4. Inventory:
i. Inventory purchases is $180,000, all on credit.
ii. All accounts payable is from inventory purchases; all but $12,000 of inventory purchased is paid by the end of the year.
5. Additional equipment is purchased on 4/1/11 for $20,000 cash. All equipment when new, including the new purchase, has/had a five year life, no salvage value, and is depreciated using the straight-line method.
6. The building depreciates at $5,000 per year.
7. Half of the marketable securities were sold for $1,200. The FMV and cost of the other half of the securities are the same, so no adjustment to FMV is required.
8. Salaries are $2,200 per month (12 months of salaries expense must be booked). It is expected that one-half month will be owed on 12/31/11 because of when payday falls (therefore, 11.5 months of salaries have been paid and month is still owed to the employees at year end).
9. $55,000 in cash is borrowed on 9/30/11 by issuing a Note Payable. Interest is 8% per year.
10. The bonds were sold at face value last December and pay interest on Dec. 31, 2011.
11. 10,000 additional shares of stock were sold for $3 a share.
12. Insurance costing $18,000 was purchased on 6/1/11 (the same time in which the policy purchased in 2010 expired. The new policy was for 12 months).
13. On Dec. 31, 1000 shares of stock are repurchased from the market at $2.90/share (treasury stock).
14. The tax rate is 30 percent. Income taxes for the current year are due and therefore paid during the first two months of the next year (you will have complete an entry to pay the 2010 taxes, however the 2011 taxes will not be paid until the end of January 2012).
15. Dividends of $3,000 were paid during 2011.
16. The unearned revenue has been earned during the year (classified as other revenue on the multi-step income stmt.).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
L. Rashid Company, a rapid growing chemical company needs to raise $3 million in external funds to finance the acquisition of a new chemical waste disposal system. After carefully analyzing alternative financing sources, Denise MacMahon, the firm’s vice president of finance reduced the financing alternatives to three choices: (1) debt (2) debt with warrants, and (3) a financial lease. The key terms of each of these choices are below.
Debt: The firm can borrow the full $3million from First Shreveport Bank. The bank will charge 12% annual interest and require annual end of year payments of $1,249,050 over the next three years. The disposal system will be depreciated under MACRS using a three year recovery period (Depreciation percentages below). The firm will pay $45,000 at the end of each year for a service contract that covers all maintenance cost; insurance and other costs will be borne by the firm. The firm plans to use the equipment beyond its three year recovery period.
Depreciation
Year 1 33%
Year 2 45%
Year 3 15%
Year 4 7%
Debt with warrants: The firm can borrow the full %3 million from Southern National Bank. The bank will charge 10% interest and will, in addition, require a grant of $50,000 warrants, each allowing the purchase of two shares of the firm’s stock for $30 per share at any time during the next 10 years. The stock is currently selling for $28 per share and the warrants are estimated to have a market value of $1 each. The price (market value) of the debt with the warrants attached is estimated to equal the $3 million initial loan principle. The annual end of year payments on this loan will be $1,206,345 over the next three years. Depreciation, maintenance, insurance, and other costs will have the same costs and treatments under this alternative as those described before the straight debt financing alternative
Financial Lease: The waste disposal system can be leased from First International Capital. The lease will require annual end of year payments of $1,200,000 over the next three years. All maintenance costs will be paid by the lessor; insurance and other costs will be borne by the lessee. The lessee will exercise the option to purchase the system at the end of the lease for $220,000.
Denise decided first to determine which of the debt alternatives would least burden the firm’s cash flows over the next three years. In this regard, she felt that very few if any, warrants would be exercised during this period. Once the better debt alternative was found, Denise planned to use lease – versus purchase analysis to evaluate it in light of the lease alternative. Assume the firm is in the 40% tax bracket, and its after tax cost of debt is 7% under the debt alternative and 6% under the debt with warrants alternative.
A. Under the debt with warrants, find the following
(1) Straight debt value
(2) Implied price of all warrants
(3) Implied price of each warrant
(4) Theoretical value of a warrant
B. On the basis of A, do you think that the price of the debt with warrants is too high or too low? Explain
C. Assuming that the firm can raise the needed funds under the specified terms, which debt financing alternatives – debt or debt with warrants- would recommend in view of your findings above? Explain.
D. For the purchase alternative, financed as recommended is part c, calculate the following
(1) The annual interest expense deductible for tax purchases for each of the next three years.
(2) The after tax outflow for each for the next three years.
(3) The present value of cash outflows using the appropriate discount rate
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for a troubled debt settlement.
Elton, Inc., which owes Boston Co. $900,000 in notes payable, is in financial difficulty. To eliminate the debt, Boston agrees to accept from Elton land having a fair market value of $680,000 and a recorded cost of $510,000.
Instructions
(a) Compute the amount of gain or loss to Elton, Inc. on the transfer (disposition) of the land.
(b) Compute the amount of gain or loss to Elton, Inc. on the settlement of the debt.
(c) Prepare the journal entry on Elton’s books to record the settlement of this debt.
(d) Compute the gain or loss to Boston Co. from settlement of its receivable from Elton.
(e) Prepare the journal entry on Boston’s books to record the settlement of this receivable.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting Problem on Computing Equivalent Units of Production? Computing equivalent units of production Weighted average L.O. C2, P4 During April, the production department of a process manufacturing system completed a number of units of a product and transferred them to finished goods. Of these transferred units, 30,000 were in process in the production department at the beginning of April and 120,000 were started and completed in April. April’s beginning inventory units were 60% complete with respect to materials and 40% complete with respect to labor. At the end of April, 41,000 additional units were in process in the production department and were 80% complete with respect to materials and 30% complete with respect to labor. 1. Compute the number of units transferred to finished goods. Total units transferred to finished goods ____________ 2. Compute the number of equivalent units with respect to both materials used and labor used in the production department for April using the Weighted average method. Equivalent units of production (direct materials) Weighted average ____________ Equivalent units of production (direct labor) Weighted average ____________
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem Set 3
1. Louise McIntyre s monthly gross income is $2,000. Her employer withholds $400 in federal, state, and local income taxes and $160 in Social Security taxes per month. Louise contributes $80 per month for her IRA. Her monthly credit payments for VISA, MasterCard, and Discover card are $35, $30, and $20, respectively. Her monthly payment on an automobile loan is $285. What is Louise s debt payments-to-income ratio? Is Louise living within her means?
2. Calculating Debt Payments to – Income Ratio. Suppose that your monthly net income is $2,400. Your monthly debt payments include your student loan payment, a gas credit card and they total $360. What is your debt payments to income ratio?
3. Dave borrowed $500 for one year and paid $50 in interest. The bank charged him a $5 service charge.
A- What is the finance charge on this loan?
B- Dave borrowed $500 on January 1, 2006, and paid it all back at once on December 31, 2006. What was the APR?
C- If Dave paid the $500 in 12 equal monthly payments, what is the APR?
4. Calculating Simple Interest on a Loan. Damon convinced his aunt to lend him $2,000 to purchase a plasma digital TV. She has agreed to charge only 6 % simple interest, and he has agreed to repay the loan at the end of one year. How much interest will he pay for the year?
5. After visiting several automobile dealerships, Richard Welch selects the car he wants. He likes its $10,000 price, but financing through the dealer is no bargain. He has $2,000 cash for a down payment, so he needs an $8,000 loan. In shopping at several banks for an installment loan, he learns that interest on most automobile loans is quoted at add-on rates. That is, during the life of the loan, interest is paid on the full amount borrowed even though a portion of the principal has been paid back. Richard borrows $8,000 for a period of four years at an add-on interest rate of 11 percent.
Questions
a. What is the total interest on Richard s loan?
b. What is the total cost of the car?
c. What is the monthly payment?
d. What is the annual percentage rate (APR)?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Wheel Industries is considering a three year expansion project.
The project requires an initial investment of $1.5 million. The project will use straight line depreciation method. The project has no salvage value. It is estimated that the project will generate additional revenues of $1.2 million and has costs of $600,000.
The tax rate is 35%. Calculate the cash flows for the project. If the discount rate is 6% calculate the NPV of the project.
2. Clinton Co. has just paid a dividend of $2.50 per share. The dividends are expected to grow at a constant rate of 6% per year for ever. If the stock is currently selling for $50 per share, calculate the cost of equity for the firm.
3. The Jersey Co s common stock has beta of 1.25. The risk free rate is 4% and the expected return on the market is 12%. What is the firm s cost of equity?
4. The WW Inc. has 9% coupon bonds outstanding. They have a maturity of 13 Years and are selling for $1,080. The face value is $1,000 and the interest is paid semi-annually. Calculate the cost of debt on a pre-tax basis. What will be the after tax cost of debt if the tax rate is 35%?
5. BW Co. has a target debt equity ratio of 0.6. Its cost of debt is 12% and its cost of equity is 20%. If the corporate tax rate is 34%, what is the firm s WACC?
6. MW Co. has a target capital structure of 35% common equity, 10% preferred equity and 55% debt. The cost of common equity is 18%, the cost of preferred equity is 8% and the pre-tax cost of debt is 10%.
If the corporate tax rate is 35%, what is MW s WACC?
If the firm has a project with an IRR of 12% would you accept the project?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Resolved Question:
1. Specific identification method. Boston Galleries uses the specific identification method for inventory valuation. Inventory information for several oil paintings follows.
Painting Cost
1/2 Beginning inventory Woods $21,000
4/19 Purchase Sunset 21,800
6/7 Purchase Earth 31,200
12/16 Purchase Moon 4,000
Woods and Moon were sold during the year for a total of $35,000. Determine the firm s
a. cost of goods sold.
b. gross profit.
c. ending inventory.
2. Inventory valuation methods: basic computations. The January beginning inven tory of the Gilette Company consisted of 300 units costing $40 each. During the first quarter, the company purchased two batches of goods: 700 Units at $44 on February 21 and 800 units at $50 on March 28. Sales during the first quarter were 1,400 units at $75 per unit. The White Company uses a periodic inventory system. Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods.
FIFO LIFO Weighted Average
Goods available for sale $ $ $
Ending inventory, March 31
Cost of goods sold
3. Perpetual inventory system: journal entries. At the beginning of 20X3, Beehler Company implemented a computerized perpetual inventory system. The first transactions that occurred during 20X3 follow:
1/2/20X3 Purchases on account: 500 units @ $6 = $3,000
1/15/20X3 Sales on account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550
1/20/20X3 Purchases on Account: 200 units @ 5 = $1,000
1/25/20X3 Sales on Account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550
The company president examined the computer-generated journal entries for these transactions and was confused by the absence of a Purchases account.
a. Duplicate the journal entries that would have appeared on the computer printout under FIFO & LIFO
b. Calculate the balance in the firm s Inventory account under each method.
c. Briefly explain the absence of the Purchases account to the company president.
4. Inventory valuation methods: computations and concepts.
Wild Riders Surfboard Company began business on January 1 of the current year. Purchases of surfboards were as follows:
Date Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
1/3 100 $125 $12,500
4/3 200 $135 $27,000
6/3 100 $145 $14,500
7/3 100 $155 $15,500
Total 500 $69,500
Wild Riders sold 400 boards at $250 per board on the dates listed below. The company uses a perpetual inventory system.
Date Quantity Sold Unit Price Total Sales
3/17 50 $250 $12,500
5/17 75 $250 $18,750
8/10 275 $250 $68,750
Total 400 $100,000
Instructions
a. Calculate cost of goods sold, ending inventory, and gross profit under each of the following inventory valuation methods:
First-in, first-out
Last-in, first-out
Weighted average
b. Which of the three methods would be chosen if management s goal is to
(1) produce an up-to-date inventory valuation on the balance sheet
(2) show the lowest net income for tax purposes
5. Depreciation methods. XXXXX XXXXX Enterprises purchased a delivery van for $40,000 in January 20X7. The van was estimated to have a service life of 5 years and a resid ual value of $6,000. The company is planning to drive the van 20,000 miles annually. Compute depreciation expense for 20X8 by using each of the following methods:
a. Units-of-output, assuming 17,000 miles were driven during 20X8
b. Straight-line
c. Double-declining-balance
6. Depreciation computations. Alpha Alpha Alpha, a college fraternity, purchased a new heavy-duty washing machine on January 1, 20X3. The machine, which cost $2,000, had an estimated residual value of $100 and an estimated service life of 4 years (1,800 washing cycles). Calculate the following:
a. The machine s book value on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the straight-line depreciation method
b. Depreciation expense for 20X4, assuming use of the units-of-output depreciation method. Actual washing cycles in 20X4 totaled 500.
c. Accumulated depreciation on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the double-declining-balance depreciation method.
7. Depreciation computations: change in estimate. Aussie Imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for $50,000 on January 1, 20X3. At the time of acquisition, the machine was estimated to have a service life of 5 years (25,000 operating hours) and a residual value of $5,000. During the 5 years of operations (20X3 – 20X7), the machine was used for 5,100, 4,800, 3,200, 6,000, and 5,900 hours, respectively.
Instructions
a. Compute depreciation for 20X3 – 20X7 by using the following methods: straight line, units of output, and double-declining-balance.
b. On January 1, 20X5, management shortened the remaining service life of the machine to 15 months. Assuming use of the straight-line method, compute the company s depreciation expense for 20X5.
c. Briefly describe what you would have done differently in part (a) if Aussie Imports had paid $47,800 for the machinery rather than $50,000 In addition, assume that the company incurred $800 of freight charges $1,400 for machine setup and testing, and $300 for insurance during the first year of use.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A camera company produces and sells cameras, film, and other imaging products. A condensed 2000 income statement (in millions) includes the following:
Sales
20,991
Cost of goods sold
12,028
Gross margin
8,963
Other operating expenses
5,641
Operating income
$3,322
Assume that $3.6 million of the cost of goods sold is a fixed cost representing depreciation and other production costs that do not change with the volume of production. In addition, $5 million of the other operating expenses are fixed.
Compute the total contribution margin for 2010 and the contribution margin percentage. Explain why the contribution margin differs from the gross margin.
Suppose that sales for the camera company were predicted to increase by 10% in 2011 and that the cost behavior was expected to continue in 2011 as it did in 2010. Compute the predicted operating income for 2011. By what percentage did this predicted 2011 operating income exceed the 2010 operating income?
What assumptions were necessary to compute the predicted 2011 operating income in question 2
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Johnson Company has entered into a lease agreement for equipment which is not cancelable. The details of the lease are as follows: Inception of the lease: Jan 1, 2012, residual value at the end of the lease term is guaranteed at the end of the lease term for $50,000, annual lease payments are $124,798 due at the beginning of each year, starting on Jan 1, 2012. The lease term is 6 years, the economic life of the equipment is 5 years and the fair value of the asset at Jan 1, 2012 is $600,000. The borrowing rate is 6% per year. The lessee uses the straight line method to depreciate the asset.
a. Prepare the journal entry to record the lease agreement on Jan 1, 2012 from the lessee s perspective.
b. Record the first payment on Jan 1, 2012
c. Record the second payment on Jan 1, 2013 and any adjusting entries needed on Dec 31, 2013.
2. George Manufacturing manufactures equipment for booths and has leased one to Peterson for a period of 10 years. The equipment has an estimated useful life of 12 years and the normal selling price of the asset is $278,072. The unguaranteed residual value is $20,000. Peterson will make annual payments of $40,000 at the beginning of each year starting on June 1, 2012 and all maintenance and insurance costs. It cost George $180,000 to manufacture the equipment and the borrowing rate is 10%.
a. Record the lease agreement from the lessor s perspective on July 1, 2013.
b. Record receipt of the first payment on July 1, 2013
c. Record any adjusting entry at December 31, 2013
d. Record receipt of the second payment on July 1, 2014 and any other entries if needed.
3. On January 1, 2011 Richardson Corp. leased a new machine from Johnson Corp for 3 years which has an expected useful life of 8 years with no salvage value. It is depreciated on a straight line basis. The annual rental payments are $180,000 and start at the beginning of the year. Richardson is required to pay a security deposit of $35,000 at the signing of the lease.
a. Record the lease agreement from the lessee s point of view on Jan 1, 2011.
b. Record payment of the security deposit by Richardson and the first payment
c. Record the journal entry for initial lease contract from the lessor s perspective.
d. Record the first payment received by the lessor and the security deposit.
e. Record any adjusting journal entry needed at December 31, 2011 by the lessee or lessor.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kendra Company s standard labor cost of producing one unit of Product DD is 4 hours at the rate of $12.00 per hour. During August, 40,800 hours of labor are incurred at a cost of $12.10 per hour to produce 10,000 units of Product DD.
BE9-6 For Eckert Inc., variable manufacturing overhead costs are expected to be $20,000 in the first quarter of 2011, with $4,000 increments in each of the remaining three quarters. Fixed overhead costs are estimated to be $35,000 in each quarter. Prepare the manufacturing overhead budget by quarters and in total for the year.
Cawley Company’s Small Motor Division manufactures a number of small motors used in household and office appliances. The Household Division of Cawley then assembles and packages such items as blenders and juicers. Both divisions are free to buy and sell any of their components internally or externally. The following costs relate to small motor LN233 on a per unit basis.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
29. The Spartan Technology Company has a proposed contract with the Digital Systems Company of Michigan. The initial investment in land and equipment will be $120,000. Of this amount, $70,000 is subject to five-year MACRS depreciation. The balance is in nondepreciable property. The contract covers six years; at the end of six years, the nondepreciable assets will be sold for $50,000, which is their original cost. The depreciated assets will have zero resale value.
The contract will require an additional investment of $55,000 in working capital at the beginning of the first year and, of this amount, $25,000 will be returned to the Spartan Technology Company after six years.
The investment will produce $50,000 in income before depreciation and taxes for each of the six years. The corporation is in a 40 percent tax bracket and has a 10 percent cost of capital.
Should the investment be undertaken? Use the net present value method.
30. An asset was purchased three years ago for $140,000. It falls into the five-year category for MACRS depreciation. The firm is in a 35 percent tax bracket. Compute the:
a. Tax loss on the sale and the related tax benefit if the asset is sold now for $15,320.
b. Gain and related tax on the sale if the asset is sold now for $58,820. (Refer to footnote 3.)
31. Polycom Technology is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment for
$110,000. It has a nine-year midpoint of its asset depreciation range (ADR). It will require an additional initial investment of $60,000 in nondepreciable working capital. Fifteen thousand dollars of this investment will be recovered after the sixth year and will provide additional cash flow for that year. Income before depreciation and taxes for the next
six years will be:
Year Amount
1………………… $85,000
2………………… 75,000
3………………… 60,000
4………………… 52,500
5………………… 45,000
6………………… 40,000
The tax rate is 30 percent. The cost of capital must be computed based on
the following (round the final value to the nearest whole number):
|
|
|
Cost (aftertax)
|
Weights
|
|
Debt…………………………………………………..
|
Kd
|
7.0%
|
40%
|
|
Preferred stock…………………………………….
|
Kp
|
10.0
|
10
|
|
Common equity (retained earnings)………..
|
Ke
|
16.0
|
50
|
a. Determine the annual depreciation schedule.
b. Determine annual cash flow. Include recovered working capital in the sixth year.
c. Determine the weighted average cost of capital.
d. Determine the net present value. Should Polycom Technology purchase the new equipment?
32. Graphic Systems purchased a computerized measuring device two years ago for $80,000. It falls into the five-year category for MACRS depreciation. The equipment can currently be sold for $28,400.
A new piece of equipment will cost $210,000. It also falls into the five-year category for MACRS depreciation.
Assume the new equipment would provide the following stream of added cost savings for the next six years.
|
Year
|
Cash Flow
|
|
1…………….
|
$76,000
|
|
2…………….
|
66,000
|
|
3…………….
|
62,000
|
|
4…………….
|
60,000
|
|
5…………….
|
56,000
|
|
6…………….
|
42,000
|
The tax rate is 34 percent and the cost of capital is 12 percent.
a. What is the book value of the old equipment?
b. What is the tax loss on the sale of the old equipment?
c. What is the tax benefit from the sale?
d. What is the cash inflow from the sale of the old equipment?
e. What is the net cost of the new equipment? (Include the inflow from the sale of the old equipment.)
f. Determine the depreciation schedule for the new equipment.
g. Determine the depreciation schedule for the remaining years of the old equipment.
h. Determine the incremental depreciation between the old and new equipment and the related tax shield benefits.
i. Compute the aftertax benefits of the cost savings.
j. Add the depreciation tax shield benefits and the aftertax cost savings, and determine the present value. (See Table 12-17 as an example.)
k. Compare the present value of the incremental benefits (j) to the net cost of the new equipment (e). Should the replacement be undertaken?
COMPREHENSIVE PROBLEM
The Woodruff Corporation purchased a piece of equipment three years ago for $230,000. It has an asset depreciation range (ADR) midpoint of eight years. The old equipment can be sold for $90,000.
A new piece of equipment can be purchased for $320,000. It also has an ADR of eight years.
Assume the old and new equipment would provide the following operating gains (or losses) over the next six years.
|
|
New Equipment
|
Old Equipment
|
|
1………….
|
$80,000
|
$25,000
|
|
2………….
|
76,000
|
16,000
|
|
3………….
|
70,000
|
9,000
|
|
4………….
|
60,000
|
8,000
|
|
5………….
|
50,000
|
6,000
|
|
6………….
|
45,000
|
(7,000)
|
The firm has a 36 percent tax rate and a 9 percent cost of capital. Should the new equipment be purchased to replace the old equipment?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Proble 3-25
3 25 Comprehensive cycle problem: perpetual system
At the beginning of 2012, the jeater company had that following balances in its accounts:
|
Cash $ 4,300
Inventory 9,000
Common stock 10,000
Retained earnings 3,300
|
- Purchased inventory that cost $2,200 on account from Blue Company under terms 1/10, n/30. The merchandise was delivered FOB shipping point. Freight costs of $110 were paid in cash.
- Returned $200 of the inventory that it had purchase because the inventory was damaged in transit. The freight company agreed to pay the return freight cost.
- Paid the amount due on its account payable to Blue Company within the cash discount period.
- Sold inventory that had cost $3,000 for $5,500 on account, under terms 2/10, n/45.
- Received merchandise returned from a customer. The merchandise originally cost $400 and was sold to the customer for $710 cash during the previous accounting period. The customer was paid $710 cash for the returned merchandise.
- Delivered goods FOB destination in Event 4. Freight costs of $60 were paid in cash.
- Collected the amount due on the account receivable within the discount period.
- Took a physical count indicating that $7,970 of inventory was on hand at the end of the accounting period.
Required
- Identify these events as asset source (AS), asset use (AU), asset exchange (AE), or claims exchange (CE).
- Record each event in a statement model
Problem 4-20 The following data apply to superior auto supply inc. for may 2012
1. Balance per the bank on may 31, $8000
2. Deposits in transit not recorded by the bank, $975
3. Bank error, check written by allen auto supply was charged to superior auto sales account, $650
4. The following checks written and recorded by superior auto supply were not included in the bank statement: 3013-$385, 3054-$735, 3056-$1900
5. Not collected by the bank, $500
6. Service charge for the collection of note $10
7. The book keeper recorded a check written for $188 to pay for the may utilities expense as $888 in the cash disbursements journal
8. bank service charge in addition to the note collection fee $25
9. customer checks returned to the bank as NSF $125
Required: determine the amount of unadjusted cash balance per superior auto supply s books.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Shelby and Mortonson formed a partnership with capital contributions of $300,000 and $400,000, respectively. Their partnership agreement calls for Shelby to receive a $60,000 per year salary. Also, each partner is to receive an interest allowance equal to 10% of a partner’s beginning capital investments. The remaining income or loss is to be divided equally. If the net income for the current year is $135,000, then Shelby and Mortonson’s respective shares are:
A. $67,500; $67,500.
B. $92,500; $42,500.
C. $57,857; $77,143.
D. $90,000; $40,000.
E. $35,000; $100,000.
2. A partnership agreement:
A. Is not binding unless it is in writing.
B. Is the same as a limited liability partnership.
C. Is binding even if it is not in writing.
D. Does not generally address the issue of the rights and duties of the partners.
E. Is also called the articles of incorporation.
3. In closing the accounts at the end of a period, the partners’ capital accounts are credited for their share of the partnership loss or debited for their share of the partnership net income.
True
False
4. Accounting procedures for all items are the same for both C corporations and S corporations in all aspects.
True
False
5. McCartney, Harris, and Hussin are dissolving their partnership. Their partnership agreement allocates income and losses equally among the partners. The current period’s ending capital account balances are McCartney, $15,000, Harris, $15,000, Hussin, $(2,000). After all the assets are sold and liabilities are paid, but before any contributions to cover any deficiencies, there is $28,000 in cash to be distributed. Hussin pays $2,000 to cover the deficiency in his account. The general journal entry to record the final distribution would be:
A. McCartney, Capital 15,000 Harris, Capital 15,000 Cash 30,000
B. McCartney, Capital 14,000 Harris, Capital 14,000 Cash 28,000
C. McCartney, Capital 15,000 Harris, Capital 15,000 Hussin, Capital 2,000 Cash 28,000
D. Cash 28,000 Hussin, Capital 2,000 McCartney, Capital 15,000 Harris, Capital 15,000
E. McCartney, Capital 9,334 Harris, Capital 9,333 Hussin, Capital 9,333 Cash 28,000
6. Partnership accounting:
A. Is the same as accounting for a sole proprietorship.
B. Is the same as accounting for a corporation.
C. Is the same as accounting for a sole proprietorship, except that separate capital and withdrawal accounts are kept for each partner.
D. Is the same as accounting for an S corporation.
E. Is the same as accounting for a corporation, except that retained earnings is used to keep track of partners’ withdrawals.
7. Limited liability partnerships are designed to protect innocent partners from malpractice or negligence claims resulting from the acts of another partner.
True
False
8. Assume that the S & B partnership agreement gave Steely 60% and Breck 40% of partnership income and losses. The partnership lost $27,000 in the current period. This implies that Steely’s share of the loss equals $16,200, and Breck’s share equals $10,800.
True
False
9. McCartney, Harris and Hussin are dissolving their partnership. Their partnership agreement allocates each partner 1/3 of all income and losses. The current period’s ending capital account balances are McCartney, $13,000; Harris, $13,000; and Hussin, $(2,000). After all assets are sold and liabilities are paid, there is $24,000 in cash to be distributed. Hussin is unable to pay the deficiency. The journal entry to record the distribution should be:
A. McCartney, Capital 8,000 Harris, Capital 8,000 Hussin, Capital 8,000 Cash 24,000
B. McCartney, Capital 12,000 Harris, Capital 12,000 Cash 24,000
C. McCartney, Capital 13,000 Harris, Capital 13,000 Hussin, Capital 2,000 Cash 24,000
D. Cash 24,000 Hussin, Capital 2,000 McCartney, Capital 13,000 Harris, Capital 13,000
E. Cash 24,000 McCartney, Capital 8,000 Harris, Capital 8,000 Hussin, Capital 8,000
10. Groh and Jackson are partners. Groh’s capital balance in the partnership is $64,000, and Jackson’s capital balance $61,000. Groh and Jackson have agreed to share equally in income or loss. Groh and Jackson agree to accept Block with a 25% interest. Block will invest $35,000 in the partnership. The bonus that is granted to Block equals:
A. $5,000.
B. $2,500.
C. $6,667
D. $3,333
E. $0, because Block must actually grant a bonus to Groh and Jackson.
Total partnership equity = $64,000 + $61,000 + $35,000 = $160,000
Equity of Block = $160,000 x 0.25 = $40,000
Bonus to Block = $40,000 – $35,000 = $5,000
11. Rice, Hepburn, and DiMarco formed a partnership with Rice contributing $60,000, Hepburn contributing $50,000 and DiMarco contributing $40,000. Their partnership agreement called for the income (loss) division to be based on the ratio of capital investments. If the partnership had income of $75,000 for its first year of operation, what amount of income (rounded to the nearest dollar) would be credited to DiMarco’s capital account?
A. $20,000.
B. $25,000.
C. $30,000.
D. $40,000.
E. $75,000.
$75,000 x ($40,000/($60,000 + $50,000 + $40,000)) = $20,000
12. Partners’ withdrawals of assets are:
A. Credited to their withdrawals accounts.
B. Debited to their withdrawals accounts.
C. Credited to their retained earnings.
D. Debited to their retained earnings.
E. Debited to their asset accounts.
13. When a partnership is liquidated:
A. Noncash assets are converted to cash.
B. Any gain or loss on liquidation is allocated to the partners’ capital accounts using the income and loss sharing ratio.
C. Liabilities are paid or settled.
D. Any remaining cash is distributed to the partners based on their capital balances.
E. All of the above.
14. Renee Jackson is a partner in Sports Promoters. Her beginning partnership capital balance for the current year $55,000, and her ending partnership capital balance for the current year is $62,000. Her share of this year’s partnership income was $5,250. What is her partner return on equity?
A. 8.47%
B. 8.97%
C. 9.54%
D. 1047%
E. 1060%
$5,250/[($55,000 + $62,000)/2] = 8.97%
15. To buy into an existing partnership, the new partner must contribute cash.
True
False
16. Partnership accounting:
A. Uses a capital account for each partner.
B. Uses a withdrawals account for each partner.
C. Allocates net income to each partner according to the partnership agreement.
D. Allocates net loss to each partner according to the partnership agreement.
E. All of the above.
17. The partnership agreement for Smith Wesson & Davis, a general partnership, provided that profits be shared between the partners in the ratio of their financial contributions to the partnership. Smith contributed $100,000, Wesson contributed $60,000 and Davis contributed $20,000. In the partnership s first year of operation, it incurred a loss of $210,000. What amount of the partnership s loss, rounded to the nearest dollar, should be absorbed by Smith?
A. $70,000
B. $116,667
C. $23,333
D. $105,000
E. $52,500
If the partnership agreement does not specifically address how losses are to be allocated between the partners, the losses are to be shared in the same manner as profits.
Therefore, since Smith’s capital contribution ($100,000) represented 5/9 of the total capital upon formation ($100,000 + $60,000 + $20,000), Smith should be allocated 5/9 of the $210,000 loss or $116,667.
18. A partner can withdraw from a partnership by:
A. Selling his/her interest to another person who pays for it in cash.
B. Selling his/her interest to another person who pays for it with assets.
C. Receiving cash of the partnership in the amount of his/her interest.
D. Receiving assets of the partnership in the amount of his/her interest.
E. All of the above.
19. If a partner is unable to cover a deficiency and the other partners absorb the deficiency, then the partner with the deficiency is thus relieved of all liability.
True
False
20. Mutual agency implies that each partner in a partnership is a fully authorized agent of the partnership. Which of the following statements is correct regarding the authority of a partner to bind the partnership in dealings with third parties?
A. The partner s authority must be derived from the partnership agreement.
B. The partner s authority may be effectively limited by a formal resolution of the other partners, even if third parties are not aware of that limitation.
C. Only a partner with a majority interest in a partnership has the authority to represent the partnership to third parties.
D. A partner has authority to deal with third parties on the behalf of the other partners only if he has written permission to do so.
E. A partner may be able to legally bind the partnership to actions even if the other partners are unaware of his actions.
21. A partnership cannot use salary allowances or interest allowances if it uses the stated ratio method to allocate income and losses to the partners.
True
False
22. Partner return on equity can be used by each partner to help decide whether additional investment or withdrawal of resources is best for that partner.
True
False
23. When a partner is added to a partnership:
A. The previous partnership ends.
B. The underlying business operations end.
C. The underlying business operations must close and then re-open.
D. The partnership must continue.
E. The partnership equity always increases
24. Partners’ withdrawals are credited to their separate withdrawals accounts.
True
False
25. Groh and Jackson are partners. Groh’s capital balance in the partnership is $64,000, and Jackson’s capital balance $61,000. Groh and Jackson have agreed to share equally in income or loss. Groh and Jackson agree to accept Block with a 20% interest. Block will invest $35,000 in the partnership. The bonus that is granted to Groh and Jackson equals:
A. $1,500 each.
B. $1,875 each.
C. $3,750 each
D. 1,920 to Groh; $1,830 to Jackson.
E. $0, because Groh and Jackson actually grant a bonus to Block.
Total partnership equity = $64,000 + $61,000 + $35,000 = $160,000
Equity of Block = $160,000 x 0.20 = $32,000
Bonus to old partners = $35,000 – $32,000 = $3,000, split equally
26. Chen and Wright are forming a partnership. Chen will invest a building that currently is being used by another business owned by Chen. The building has a market value of $90,000. Also, the partnership will assume responsibility for a $30,000 note secured by a mortgage on that building. Wright will invest $50,000 cash. For the partnership, the amounts to be recorded for the building and for Chen’s Capital account are:
A. Building, $90,000 and Chen, Capital, $90,000.
B. Building, $60,000 and Chen, Capital, $60,000.
C. Building, $60,000 and Chen, Capital, $50,000.
D. Building, $90,000 and Chen, Capital, $60,000.
E. Building, $60,000 and Chen, Capital, $90,000.
27. Mutual agency means
A. Creditors can apply their claims to partners’ personal assets.
B. Partners are taxed on partnership withdrawals.
C. All partners must agree before the partnership can act.
D. The partnership has a limited life.
E. A partner can commit or bind the partnership in any contract within the scope of the partnership business.
28. Collins and Farina are forming a partnership. Collins is investing a building that has a market value of $80,000. However, the building carries a $56,000 mortgage that will be assumed by the partnership. Farina is investing $20,000 cash. The balance of Collins’ Capital account will be:
A. $80,000.
B. $24,000.
C. $56,000.
D. $44,000.
E. $60,000.
29. An unincorporated association of two or more persons to carry on a business for profit as co-owners is a(n):
A. Partnership.
B. Proprietorship.
C. Contractual company.
D. Mutual agency.
E. Voluntary organization
30. A partnership has an unlimited life.
True
False
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Accounting MCQs |
| Question Detail:
1)Under a relevant range of production, when total quantities sold increase, total fixed costs
|
increase
|
|
decrease
|
|
remain equal
|
|
there is no relationship
|
2)Conversion costs are
|
only direct material
|
|
only direct labor
|
|
only overhead
|
|
overhead and direct labor
|
3)XY Company sells its unique product at $30.00. Variable costs per unit are $20.00. Total fixed sales salaries per month $40,000.00. Other fixed costs per month $60,000.00. Assume that the company wants to change the sales salaries as follows: Total fixed sales salaries per month 25,000. Sales commission of 10% of sales.?Find at what sale-level is the company indifferent between the two alternatives
|
$5,000
|
|
5,000 units
|
|
10,000
|
|
7,500 units
|
|
4) AJ Company makes three products.
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Current selling price per unit, variable cost per unit, and machine hours required are as follows:
|
|
?
|
?
|
Products
|
?
|
|
?
|
X
|
Y
|
Z
|
|
Current selling price per unit
|
$20
|
$30
|
$20
|
|
Variable cost per unit
|
10
|
18
|
12
|
|
Machine hours required for each unit
|
2
|
3
|
4
|
|
The company has a maximum of 1000 machine hours available per month.
|
Assume the company produces all products; find the total contribution margin per hour.
|
5) TC Company makes several printing works using two machines (X and Y).
|
|
Data on the two machines for June 2010 are as follows:
|
|
X
|
Y
|
|
Direct material
|
10
|
15
|
|
Time required for each unit (TR)
|
2
|
3
|
|
Expected volume during the month (EV)
|
2,000
|
500
|
|
Expected labor cost per hour
|
50
|
|
Budgeted overhead costs
|
660,000
|
|
Determine
|
|
The overhead rate per labor hour
|
|
FOAR = $120.00 per hour worked
|
|
FOAR = 120.00 per dollar
|
|
FOAR = $60.00 per hour worked
|
|
FOAR = $120.00 per overhead costs
|
6) Assume the cost structure is as follows: TC = 25,000 + 5q, where TC = total costs, q = quantities sold. Under relevant range of sales, selling price per unit is $8.00. Total fixed costs are
|
$100,000
|
|
$50,000
|
|
$25,000
|
|
More information is needed
|
|
7) The income statements of Tahany Company for June and July 2005 are as follows:
|
|
June
|
July
|
|
Sales
|
610
|
650
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
420
|
460
|
|
Gross margin
|
190
|
190
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
185
|
195
|
|
Income before tax
|
5
|
-5
|
Using High Low Method, the variable component of cost of goods sold is
8) Non value added activities are
|
Direct material (only)
|
|
Direct labor (only)
|
|
Overhead (only)
|
|
Not essential costs to make/manufacture a product
|
|
9) Tany Corporation is a small table manufacturing company operating in the north of Puerto Rico.
|
|
Managers estimate the following costs per unit (one table)
|
|
Direct material (DM)
|
$6.00
|
|
Direct labor (DL)
|
$4.00
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead (VMO)
|
$3.00
|
|
Variable administrative expenses (VAE)
|
$1.00
|
|
The estimated contribution margin is
|
30%
|
|
Monthly fixed costs are
|
|
Manufacturing
|
$10,000.00
|
|
Administrative
|
$5,000.00
|
|
10) Tany Corporation is a small table manufacturing company operating in the north of Puerto Rico.
|
|
Managers estimate the following costs per unit (one table)
|
|
Direct material (DM)
|
$6.00
|
|
Direct labor (DL)
|
$4.00
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead (VMO)
|
$3.00
|
|
Variable administrative expenses (VAE)
|
$1.00
|
|
The estimated contribution margin is
|
30%
|
|
Monthly fixed costs are
|
|
Manufacturing
|
$10,000.00
|
|
Administrative
|
$5,000.00
|
Total unit sold during last month is 2525, what is the total operating income.
|
between $100 and $120
|
|
between $120 and $140
|
|
between $140 and $160
|
|
between $160 and $180
|
11) BC Company estimates the following data for the coming month: total variable costs $60,000.00, income tax rate 30%, contribution margin percentage 60%. Find the estimated total sales for the coming month.
|
$100,000
|
|
$60,000 / 40%
|
|
$60,000 / 60%
|
|
$60,000 X 60%
|
12) If a company raises its required net income
|
the tax rate will decrease
|
|
break even point is negative
|
|
required contribution margin increases
|
|
required contribution margin decreases
|
13)If a company raises its required operating profit
|
break even point is negative
|
|
break even point is zero
|
|
required contribution margin increases
|
|
required contribution margin decreases
|
14) Copy of
XYZ has three products X, Y and Z. The following information pertains to these products X, Y, and Z. Contribution margin percentages are 40%, 50%, and 40% respectively. Sales mix percentages are 20%, 30%, and 50% respectively. Monthly fixed costs are estimated to be $100.00. The weighted average contribution margin percentage is
15) Which of the following examples is a short term decision?
|
Make or buy decision
|
|
Purchase of land
|
|
Issuing bonds
|
|
Joint venture
|
|
Purchase of building
|
|
16) Sales (in units)
|
60,000
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
25
|
|
Manufacturing costs per unit:
|
|
Materials
|
5
|
|
Direct labor
|
4
|
|
Overhead
|
|
Variable
|
4
|
|
Fixed
|
6
|
|
Total
|
19
|
|
Gross margin
|
6
|
|
Selling and admin. Expenses per unit
|
2
|
|
Operating income
|
4
|
|
A company in a foreign market offer to buy and the offer specifies the following data
|
|
units to be sold
|
10000
|
|
price per unit
|
20
|
|
If the Company accepts the special offer, the incremental profit would be
|
|
$70,000.00
|
|
($70,000.00)
|
|
$10,000.00
|
|
($10,000.00)
|
|
17) Total Costs
|
Unit Cost
|
|
Direct materials
|
20,000
|
2.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
25,000
|
2.50
|
|
Variable overhead
|
15,000
|
1.50
|
|
Fixed overhead (non-avoidable)
|
24000
|
2.40
|
|
Fixed overhead (avoidable)
|
26,000
|
2.60
|
|
Purchase cost
|
85,999
|
Should the company produce the product internally?
|
Yes
|
|
No
|
|
Indifferent to to make or to buy
|
|
Yes if the market price per unit covers the fixed cost per unit.
|
|
18) Sales (in units)
|
60,000
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
25
|
|
Manufacturing costs per unit:
|
|
Materials
|
5
|
|
Direct labor
|
4
|
|
Overhead
|
|
Variable
|
4
|
|
Fixed
|
6
|
|
Total
|
19
|
|
Gross margin
|
6
|
|
Selling and admin. Expenses per unit (fixed)
|
2
|
|
Operating income
|
4
|
|
A company in a foreign market offer to buy and the offer specifies the following data
|
|
units to be sold
|
10,000
|
|
price per unit
|
13.1
|
|
Should the company sell this special order?
|
|
Yes, accept
|
|
No, reject
|
|
Indifferent to reject or not
|
|
Always reject
|
|
Which of the following costs should be considered in short term decisions?
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The cost of an asset less accumulated depreciation equals:
|
|
A. book value.
|
|
|
|
B. residual value.
|
|
|
|
C. depreciation expense.
|
|
|
|
D. None of these answers are correct.
|
|
If the balance of supplies at the start of the month was $900 and at the end of the month you had $450 on hand, the adjustment for Supplies would be:
A. $900.
B. $350.
C. $550.
D. $450.
Depreciation Expense would be found on which of the following financial statements?
A. Income statement
B. Statement of Owner’s Equity
C. Balance sheet
D. Depreciation report
Which of the following accounts would appear on the balance sheet?
A. Depreciation Expense
B. Fees Earned
C. Accumulated Depreciation
D. None of these are correct.
A form used to organize and check data before preparing financial reports is known as a(n):
A. income statement.
B. balance sheet.
C. trial balance.
D. worksheet.
Which of the following is most likely to result in an adjusting entry at the end of the period?
A. Payment for routine maintenance on the company van
B. Owner’s withdrawals
C. Payment of two months’ insurance in advance
D. Payment of one month’s rent
When historical cost is used to record equipment, it would appear as the:
A. original cost on the income statement.
B. original cost on the balance sheet.
C. residual value on the balance sheet.
D. residual value on the income statement.
Bringing account balances up to date before preparing financial reports is called:
A. adjusting.
B. posting.
C. analyzing.
D. journalizing.
Not recording the Prepaid Rent used causes:
A. assets to be too low.
B. expenses to be too high.
C. revenue to be too high.
D. assets to be too high.
A contra-asset is:
A. in reality a liability.
B. an account with an opposite balance of a normal asset.
C. an asset with a debit balance.
D. an account that increases the asset.
Reset Selection
Equipment with a cost of $150,000 has an accumulated depreciation of $100,000. What is the historical cost of the equipment?
A. $100,000
B. $200,000
C. $50,000
D. $150,000
The estimated value of an item at the end of its useful life is:
A. residual value.
B. accumulated depreciation.
C. depreciation expense.
D. None of these answers are correct.
Evans Golf Academy estimated depreciation on its building at $300. The adjusting entry for depreciation of the building would include:
A. a debit to Depreciation Expense for $300.
B. a credit to Depreciation Expense for $300.
C. a credit to Building for $300.
D. a debit to Accumulated Depreciation for $300.
Equipment with a cost of $200,000 has an accumulated depreciation of $100,000. What is the book value of the equipment?
A. $200,000
B. $100,000
C. $150,000 D. $50,000
Which of the following accounts would most likely not need to be adjusted at the end of the year?
A. Cash
B. Accumulated Depreciation
C. Prepaid Rent
D. Office Supplies
|
Question 16 of 30
|
5.0 Points
|
The income statement credit column of the worksheet showed the following revenues:
|
Catering Fees
|
$500
|
|
Cleaning Fees
|
800
|
The journal entry to close the revenue accounts is:
|
|
A.
|
Catering Fees
|
500
|
|
Cleaning Fees
|
800
|
|
Income Summary
|
1,300
|
|
|
|
|
B.
|
Capital
|
1,300
|
|
Income Summary
|
1,300
|
|
|
|
|
C.
|
Catering Fees
|
500
|
|
Cleaning Fees
|
800
|
|
Capital
|
1,300
|
|
|
|
|
D.
|
Income Summary
|
1,300
|
|
Catering Fees
|
500
|
|
Cleaning Fees
|
800
|
|
|
Reset Selection
Income Summary:
A. is a temporary account.
B. is a permanent account.
C. summarizes revenue and expenses and transfers the balance to Capital.
D. Both A and C are correct.
Which of the following columns of the worksheet are referred to when preparing closing entries to the Income Summary?
A. Adjustments columns
B. Adjusted trial balance columns
C. Balance sheet columns
D. Income statement columns
Adjusting journal entries:
A. need not be journalized since they appear on the worksheet.
B. are not needed if closing entries are prepared.
C. need not be posted if the financial statements are prepared from the worksheet.
D. must be journalized and posted.
When the balance in the Income Summary account is a credit, the company has:
A. made an error in their closing entries.
B. incurred a net loss.
C. incurred a net income.
D. had more expenses than revenue.
How do you close the expense accounts?
A. Debit Capital; credit the expense accounts
B. Credit Income Summary; debit the expense accounts
C. Debit Income Summary; credit the expense accounts
D. Credit Capital; debit the expense accounts
How do you close a revenue account?
A. Credit Income Summary; debit Revenue
B. Credit Capital; debit Revenue
C. Debit Income Summary; credit Revenue
D. Debit Capital; credit Revenue
The adjusting entry to record the expired rent would be to:
A. debit Prepaid Rent; credit Cash.
B. debit Cash; credit Prepaid Rent.
C. debit Prepaid Rent; credit Rent Expense.
D. debit Rent Expense; credit Prepaid Rent.
Closing entries:
A. need not be posted if the financial statements are prepared from the worksheet.
B. must be journalized and posted.
C. are not needed if adjusting entries are prepared.
D. need not be journalized since they appear on the worksheet.
Which of the following accounts would appear on the post-closing trial balance?
A. Owner’s Capital
B. Fees Earned
C. Income Summary
D. Rent Expense
M. Smuts showed a net income of $6,000. The entry to close the Income Summary account would include a:
A. debit to M. Smuts Capital, $6,000.
B. credit to M. Smuts Capital, $6,000.
C. debit to Income Summary, $6,000.
D. Both B and C are correct.
Which of the following accounts will be directly closed to Capital at the end of the fiscal year?
A. Withdrawals
B. Salaries Expense
C. Fees Revenue
D. Depreciation Expense
Which of the following accounts would not be considered a permanent account?
A. Accounts Payable
B. Salaries Expense
C. Accounts Receivable
D. Office Supplies
Which of the following sequence of actions describes the proper order in the accounting cycle?
A. Analyze transactions, journalize, post, adjust, prepare financial statements, close
B. Journalize, post, close, prepare financial statements, adjust, and analyze transactions
C. Prepare financial statements, journalize, post, adjust, analyze transactions, close
D. Post, close, prepare financial statements, adjust, analyze transactions, and journalize
The adjusting entry for accrued salaries is to:
A. debit Salaries Payable; credit Salaries Expense.
B. debit Salaries Expense; credit Cash.
C. debit Salaries Expense; credit Salaries Payable. D. debit Cash; credit Salaries Expense.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
9. Jot Construction Company uses the percentage-of-completion method of accounting. In 2013, Jot began work on a contract it had received which provided for a contract price of $6,000,000. Additional information related to the project includes: costs incurred during the year were $1,400,000; estimated costs to complete as of December 31, 2013 were $2,100,000. What amount should Jot recognize as gross profit for the project in 2013?
|
$700,000 $1,000,000 $1,500,000 $2,500,000
|
|
10. Swift Builders, Inc. uses the completed-contract method of accounting for a $450,000 contract that it expects will take two years to complete. At December 31, 2013, the end of the first year of the contract, additional information related to the project includes: costs incurred to date were $290,000; estimated costs to complete were $180,000; billings to date were $325,000; collections to date were $300,000. What amount should Swift recognize as gross profit or loss for 2013?
|
$ -0- a $20,000 loss a $40,000 loss a $110,000 loss
|
|
11. Miller Company appropriately uses the installment method of accounting to recognize income in its financial statements. Pertinent data relating to this method of accounting includes: installment sales totaled $400,000 for 2013 and $500,000 for 2014; cost of sales were $260,000 for 2013 and $300,00 for 2014; in 2013 Miller collected $280,000 from 2013 sales; in 2014 Miller collected $100,000 from 2013 sales and $300,000 from 2014 sales. What amount should Miller report as realized gross profit on the 2014 income statement?
|
$155,000 $120,000 $98,000 $35,000
|
|
12. In a consignment sale, the consignor (Points : 6)
|
does not show the merchandise as an asset on its books. recognizes revenue only after receiving notification of sale and the cash remittance from the consignee. recognizes revenue when it ships merchandise to the consignee. periodically prepares an “account report” for the consignee.
|
|
13. If Collier Costumes, Inc. has the following items at year-end, how much should it report as cash on the balance sheet?
|
Cash in bank
|
$25,700
|
|
Cash on hand
|
$620
|
|
Post-dated checks
|
$1,680
|
|
Certificates of deposit
|
$80,000
|
|
$80,000 $28,000 $26,320 $620
|
|
14. At December 31, 2013, Vega Vacuum Corporation has cash in bank of 38,500, restricted cash in a separate account of $9,000, and a bank overdraft at another bank of $750. How much should it report as cash on the balance sheet?
|
$38,500 $29,500 $37,750 $46,750
|
|
15. Which of the following is not classified as cash on the balance sheet? (Points : 6)
|
Postage stamps Post-dated checks Cash restricted for plant expansion All of the above
|
|
16.Corresponds to CLO 4(d) The month-end bank statement for Guthrie Motors shows a balance of $152,000 and a bank service charge of $40. Outstanding checks are $35,000, a deposit of $10,000 was in transit at month end, and a check for $1,500 was erroneously charged by the bank against the account. The correct balance in the bank account at month end is (Points : 6)
|
$125,000 $125,460 $128,500 $128,460
|
|
17.Corresponds to CLO 5(a) As of December 31, Gammelguard Corporation has outstanding accounts receivable of $1.5 million. Sales on credit during the year were $9 million. The allowance for doubtful accounts has a credit balance of $20,000. If the company estimates that 9% of its outstanding receivables will be uncollectible, what will be the amount of bad debt expense recognized for the year? (Points : 6)
|
$115,000 $135,000 $155,000 $810,000
|
|
18.Corresponds to CLO 5(b) As of December 31, Wiliams Corporation has outstanding accounts receivable of $3.6 million. Sales on credit during the year were $12.5 million. The allowance for doubtful accounts has a credit balance of $62,000. If the company estimates that 1% of its net credit sales will be uncollectible, what will be the amount of bad debt expense recognized for the year? (Points : 6)
|
$63,000 $125,000 $187,000 $360,000
|
|
19.Corresponds to CLO 5(c) Kandris Corporation had a balance in accounts receivable of $450,000 and a balance in allowance for doubtful accounts of $34,000, when management decided the accounts receivable from Dunn Corporation of $1,800 had become uncollectible. What journal entry should Kandris Corporation make to write-off the uncollectible account? (Points : 6)
|
Debit Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, credit Accounts Receivable, $1,800 Debit Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, credit Bad Debt Expense, $1,800 Debit Bad Debt Expense, credit Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, $1,800 Debit Accounts Receivable, credit Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, $1,800
|
|
20.Corresponds to CLO 5(d) At December 31, Norman Industrial Inc. had account balances before year-end adjusting entries for accounts receivable and the related allowance for doubtful accounts of $850,000 and $79,000 respectively. An aging of accounts receivable indicated that $88,000 of December 31, receivables are expected to be uncollectible. The net realizable value of accounts receivable after adjustment is (Points : 6)
|
$938,000 $929,000 $771,000 $762,000
|
|
21.Corresponds to CLO 6(a) The following is a record of Axis Corporation’s inventory transactions for the current month:
|
June 1
|
Balance, 300 units @ $65 each
|
June 16
|
Sale, 400 units @ $90
|
|
June 14
|
Purchase 800 units @ $68 each
|
June 20
|
Sale, 500 units @ $90
|
|
June 25
|
Purchase 250 units @ $70
|
|
|
Axis uses the periodic inventory system. Using the FIFO method, what is the amount of cost of goods sold for the month?
(Points : 6)
|
$61,700 $60,300 $58,500 $31,100
|
|
22.Corresponds to CLO 6(b) The following is a record of Meyer Corporation’s inventory transactions for the current month:
|
October 1
|
Balance, 500 units @ $24 each
|
October 9
|
Sale, 500 units @ $51
|
|
October 12
|
Purchase 900 units @ $26 each
|
October 19
|
Sale, 800 units @ $51
|
|
October 25
|
Purchase 600 units @ $27 each
|
|
|
Meyer uses the periodic inventory system. Using the LIFO method, what is the amount of ending inventory on October 31?
(Points : 6)
|
$18,900 $16,800 $34,600 $17,200
|
|
23.Corresponds to CLO 6(c) The following is a record of Tiller Corporation’s inventory transactions for the current month:
|
January 1
|
Balance, 500 units @ $10 each
|
January 5
|
Sale, 290 units @ $25
|
|
January 11
|
Purchase, 300 units @ $12 each
|
January 13
|
Sale, 250 units @ $25
|
|
January 23
|
Purchase, 400 units @ $13 each
|
January 27
|
Sale, 310 units @ $25
|
Tiller uses the periodic inventory system. Using the weighted-average inventory method, what is the cost of goods sold for the month of January?
(Points : 6)
|
$14,004 $9,775 $4,085 $4,025
|
|
24.Corresponds to CLO 6(d) The following is a record of Caulder Corporation’s inventory transactions for the current month:
|
March 1
|
Balance, 500 units @ $40 each
|
March 12
|
Sale, 200 units @ $85
|
|
March 16
|
Purchase, 300 units @ $42 each
|
March 22
|
Sale, 350 units @ $85
|
|
March 28
|
Purchase, 300 units @ $43 each
|
|
|
Caulder uses the perpetual inventory system. Using the LIFO method, what is the ending inventory on March 31?
(Points : 6)
|
$22,900 $22,100 $22,600 $23,400
|
|
25.Corresponds to CLO 7(a) In the context of dollar-value LIFO, when inventory in base year dollars increases, (Points : 6)
|
The LIFO reserve decreases The LIFO price index increases A LIFO layer is created A LIFO layer is liquidated
|
|
26.Corresponds to CLO 7(b) Hemmer Corporation adopted the dollar-value LIFO method of inventory valuation on December 31, 2011. Its inventory at that date was 450,000 and the relevant price index was 100. Information regarding inventory for subsequent years is as follows:
|
Date
|
Inventory at Current Prices
|
Current Price Index
|
|
December 31, 2012
|
$513,600
|
107
|
|
December 31, 2013
|
$580,000
|
125
|
|
December 31, 2014
|
$650,000
|
130
|
What is the ending inventory at December 31, 2012 under dollar-value LIFO?
(Points : 6)
|
$464,000 $464,980 $482,100 $497,080
|
|
27.Corresponds to CLO 7(c) What is primary purpose of stating inventories at lower-of-cost-or-market? (Points : 6)
|
To report a loss when there is a decrease in the future utility below the original cost To be conservative To report a loss whenever there is a decrease in the future utility To permit future profits to be recognized
|
|
28.Corresponds to CLO 7(d) If the historical cost of product X is $64, the selling price of product X is $90, the costs to sell product X are $14, the replacement cost for product X is $55, and the normal profit margin is 30% of sales price, what is the market value that should be used in the lower-of-cost-or-market comparison? (Points : 6)
|
$64 $49 $76 $55
|
|
29.Corresponds to CLO 8(a) Energy Solutions Corporation estimates the cost of its physical inventory at November 30 for use in an interim financial statement. Management uses a gross profit rate on sales of 40%. The following information is available:
|
Inventory, November 1
|
$500,000
|
|
Purchases during November
|
$650,000
|
|
Sales during November
|
$900,000
|
The estimated cost of inventory at November 30 is
(Points : 6)
|
$360,000 $540,000 $610,000 $650,000
|
|
30.Corresponds to CLO 8(b) Which of the following is not a basic assumption of the gross profit method of estimating inventory? (Points : 6)
|
The beginning inventory plus the purchases equal total goods to be accounted for. Goods not sold must be on hand. The sales, reduced to cost, deducted from the sum of the opening inventory plus purchases, equal ending inventory. The total amount of purchases and the total amount of sales remain relatively unchanged from the comparable previous period.
|
|
31.Corresponds to CLO 8(c) Arrow Corporation uses the conventional retail inventory method to value its merchandise inventory. The following information is available for the current year:
|
|
Cost
|
Retail
|
|
Beginning Inventory
|
$30,000
|
$50,000
|
|
Purchases
|
$180,000
|
$250,000
|
|
Freight-In
|
$2,500
|
—-
|
|
Net Markups
|
|
$8,500
|
|
Net Markdowns
|
|
$10,000
|
|
Employee Discounts
|
|
$1,000
|
|
Sales
|
|
$205,000
|
What is the cost to retail ratio?
(Points : 6)
|
68.88% 68.07% 70.35% 70.83%
|
|
32.Corresponds to CLO 8(d) Capital City Corporation uses the conventional retail inventory method to determine its ending inventory at cost. The following information is available for the current year:
|
|
Cost
|
Retail
|
|
Beginning Inventory
|
$300,000
|
$420,000
|
|
Purchases
|
$1,450,000
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Net Markups
|
|
$80,000
|
|
Net Markdowns
|
|
$30,000
|
|
Sales
|
|
$1,900,000
|
Capital City determines that the cost-to-retail ratio is 70%. What is the ending inventory at cost?
(Points : 6)
|
$520,000 $399,000 $300,000 $570,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.) The method of evaluating financial data that change under different courses of action is called:
a. financial statement analysis.
b. break-even analysis.
c. incremental analysis.
d. cost-benefit analysis.
2.) Braizen, Inc. produces a product with a $30 per-unit variable cost and an $80 per-unit sales price. Fixed manufacturing overhead costs are $100,000. The firm has a one-time opportunity to sell an additional 1,000 units at $60 each that would not affect its current sales. Assuming the company has sufficient capacity to produce the additional units, how would the acceptance of the special order affect net income?
a. income would decrease by $30,000.
b. income would increase by $30,000.
c. income would increase by $140,000.
d. income would increase by $40,000.
3.) Opportunity costs are:
a. included in inventory.
b. foregone benefits.
c. sunk costs.
d. included in cost of goods sold.
4.) A sunk cost is a cost that:
a. has been incurred and cannot be eliminated.
b. is never relevant in decision-making.
c. is never a differential cost.
d. all of these.
5.) _____________ is a cost management technique in which the firm determines the required cost for a product or service in order to earn a desired profit when the marketplace establishes the product’s selling price:
a. relevant costing.
b. product costing.
c. differential costing.
d. target costing.
6.) ______________ can be measured as the income that could have been earned on an asset, based on the potential rate of return that is lost or sacrificed when one alternative use of the asset is chosen over another:
a. target cost.
b. sunk cost.
c. opportunity cost.
d. allocated cost.
7.) _____________ costs between two alternative projects are those that would result from selecting one alternative instead of the other:
a. allocated.
b. differential.
c. sunk.
d. irrelevant.
8.) Which of the following cost classifications would not be considered relevant in comparing decision alternatives?
a. opportunity cost.
b. differential cost.
c. sunk cost.
d. none of these.
9.) In considering whether to accept a special order at a price less than the normal selling price of the product and where the additional sales will make use of present idle capacity, which of the following costs will not be relevant?
a. direct labor.
b. direct materials.
c. variable manufacturing overhead.
d. fixed manufacturing overhead that cannot be avoided.
10.) A cost classified “for decision making purposes” would include:
a. period cost.
b. opportunity cost.
c. controllable cost.
d. inventoriable cost.
11.) Relevant costs in decision-making:
a. are future costs that represent differences between decision alternatives.
b. result from past decisions.
c. should not influence the decision.
d. none of these.
12.) If a cost is irrelevant to a decision, the cost could not be a:
a. fixed cost.
b. sunk cost.
c. differential cost.
d. variable cost.
13.) The potential rental value of space used in the manufacturing process:
a. is a variable production cost.
b. is an unavoidable production cost.
c. is a sunk production cost.
d. is an opportunity cost if production is not outsourced.
14.) . Greenland Sports, Inc. has been asked to submit a bid to the National Hockey League on supplying 1,000 pairs of professional quality skates. The cost per pair of skates has been determined as follows:
Direct Materials $80
Direct Labor 60
Variable overhead 30
Fixed overhead (allocated) 20
Other non-manufacturing costs associated with each pair of skates are:
Variable selling cost (commission) $25
Fixed selling and administrative cost 10
Assume the commission on the sale of skates to the National Hockey League would be reduced to $15 per pair and that available production capacity exists to produce the 1,000 pairs of skates, the lowest price the firm can bid is some price greater than:
a. $185.
b. $190.
c. $215.
d. $225.
15.) The key to analyzing a sell as is or process further decision is to determine that:
a. opportunity costs exceed sunk costs.
b. incremental revenues exceed incremental costs.
c. differential costs do not exist.
d. all allocated costs are included in the decision.
16.) In a make or buy decision which of the following costs would be considered relevant?
a. avoidable costs.
b. unavoidable costs.
c. sunk costs.
d. allocated costs
17.) Which of the following qualitative factors favors the buy option in the make or buy decision?
a. production scheduling.
b. utilization of idle capacity.
c. ability to control quality.
d. technical expertise of supplier.
18.) Product Z sells for $18 per unit as is but if it is enhanced it can be sold for $24 per unit. The enhancement process will cost $50,000 for 10,000 units. If the 10,000 units of Product Z are sold as is without further processing, the company:
a. will incur an incremental profit of $10,000.
b. will incur an opportunity cost of $10,000.
c. will incur an incremental profit of $1 per unit.
d. will incur an incremental loss of $6 per unit.
19.) A(n) _____________ is the minimum cost that can be incurred, which when subtracted from the selling price, allows for a desired profit to be earned.
a. relevant cost.
b. opportunity cost.
c. incremental cost.
d. target cost.
20.) Product X sells for $80 per unit in the marketplace and ABC Company requires a 35% minimum profit margin on all product lines. In order to compete in this market, the target cost for Product X must be equal to or lower than:
a. $28
b. $45
c. $52
d. $80
21.) Which of the following costs are not relevant in a decision to continue or discontinue a segment of the organization?
a. avoidable costs.
b. unavoidable costs.
c. opportunity costs.
d. differential costs.
22.) The decision to continue or discontinue a segment of the business should focus on:
a. sales minus total variable expenses and total fixed expenses.
b. sales minus total variable expenses and avoidable fixed expenses of the segment.
c. sales minus total variable expenses and allocated fixed expenses of the business.
d. none of these.
23.) The decision for solving production mix problems involving multiple products and scarce production resources should focus on:
a. gross profit of each product.
b. sales price of each product.
c. contribution margin per unit of scarce resource.
d. contribution margin of each product.
24.) XYZ Company produces three products: A, B, and C. Product A has a contribution margin of $20 and requires 1 hour of machine time. Product B has a contribution margin of $30 and requires 2 hours of machine time. Product C has a contribution margin of $36 and requires 1.5 hours of machine time. If machine hours are considered scarce, in what product mix order should XYZ Company schedule the production of Products A, B, and C for the available machine hours?
a. first A, then B, then C.
b. first C, then A, then B.
c. first C, then B, then A.
d. first B, then C, then A.
25.) A principal difference between operational budgeting and capital budgeting is the time frame of the budget. Because of this difference, capital budgeting:
a. is an activity that involves only the financial staff.
b. is done on a rolling budget period basis.
c. focuses on the present value of cash flows from investments.
d. is concerned with a long-term net income forecast.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The cash disbursements journal also is called the
a) Voucher register.
b) Purchases journal.
c) Check register.
d) Accounts payable subsidiary ledger.
- In assessing control risk for purchases, an auditor vouches a sample of entries in the voucher register to the supporting documents. Which assertion would this test of controls most likely support?
a) Completeness.
b) Existence or occurrence.
c) Valuation or allocation.
d) Rights and obligations.
- An important purpose of the auditor s review of the client s procurement system should be to determine the effectiveness of the procedures to protect against
a) Improper materials handling.
b) Unauthorized persons issuing purchase orders.
c) Mispostings of purchase returns.
d) Excessive shrinkage or spoilage.
- A client erroneously recorded a large purchase twice. Which of the following internal control measures would be most likely to detect this error in a timely and efficient manner?
a) Footing the purchases journal.
b) Reconciling vendors monthly statements with subsidiary payable ledger accounts.
c) Tracing totals from the purchases journal to the ledger accounts.
d) Sending written quarterly confirmation to all vendors.
- Which of the following departments most likely would approve changes in pay rates and deductions from employee salaries?
a) Personnel.
b) Treasurer.
c) Controller.
d) Payroll.
- Possible misstatements related to the validity internal control objective for payroll transactions include all of the following except
a) Payments to fictitious employees.
b) Payments to terminated employees.
c) Payments to valid employees who have not worked.
d) Payment to valid employees at a rate in excess of the authorized amount.
- When examining payroll transactions, an auditor is primarily concerned with the possibility of
a) Posting of gross payroll amounts to incorrect salary expense accounts.
b) Overpayments and unauthorized payments.
c) Misfootings of employee time records.
d) Excess withholding of amounts required to be withheld.
- An auditor vouched data for a sample of employees in a payroll register to approved clock card data to provide assurance that
a) Payments to employees are computed at authorized rates.
b) Internal controls relating to unclaimed payroll checks are operating effectively.
c) Segregation of duties exist between the preparation and distribution of the payroll.
d) Employees work the number of hours for which they are paid.
- Which of the following circumstances most likely would cause an auditor to suspect an employee payroll fraud scheme?
a) Payrolls checks are disbursed be the same employee each payday.
b) There are significant unexplained variances between standard and actual labor cost.
c) Employee time cards are approved by individual departmental supervisors.
d) A separate payroll bank account is maintained on an imprest basis.
- If preparation of a periodic scrap report is essential in order to maintain adequate control over the manufacturing process, the data for this report should be accumulated in the
a) Production Department.
b) Accounting Department.
c) Warehousing Department.
d) Budget Department.
- Which of the following departments typically approves purchase requisitions?
a) Raw materials stores.
b) Cost accounting.
c) IT.
d) Inventory management.
- Which of the following best describes the validity audit objectives for inventory?
a) Purchase requisitions initiated by authorized personnel.
b) Recorded inventory actually exists.
c) Inventory properly accumulated from journals and ledgers.
d) All inventory is recorded.
- Auditors are most likely to ensure that no production activity is scheduled prior to
a) Determining standard costs.
b) Observing physical inventory.
c) Completing the book to physical adjustment.
d) Determining the amount of consigned inventory.
- Which of the following is least likely to be a possible cause of book-to-physical differences in inventory quantities?
a) Inventory cutoff errors.
b) Misapplication of LIFO.
c) Unreported scrap or spoilage.
d) Theft.
- The auditor is most likely t seek information from the plant manager with respect to the
a) Adequacy of the provision for uncollectible accounts.
b) Appropriateness of physical inventory observation procedures.
c) Existence of obsolete machinery.
d) Deferral or procurement of certain necessary insurance coverage.
- In the examination of property, plant, and equipment, the auditor tries to determine all of the following except the
a) Adequacy of internal controls.
b) Extent of property abandoned during the year.
c) Adequacy of replacement funds.
d) Reasonableness of the depreciation.
- The auditor may conclude that depreciation charges are insufficient by noting
a) Insured values greatly in excess of book values.
b) Large amounts of fully depreciated assts.
c) Continuous trade-in s of relatively new assets.
d) Excessive recurring losses on assets retired.
- Which of the following accounts should be reviewed by the auditor to gain reasonable assurance that additions to property, plant, and equipment are not understated?
a) Depreciation expense.
b) Accounts payable.
c) Cash.
d) Repairs and maintenance.
- In auditing intangible assets, an auditor most likely would review or recomputed amortization and determine whether the amortization period is reasonable in support of management s financial statement assertion of
a) Valuation or allocation.
b) Existence or occurrence.
c) Completeness.
d) Rights and obligations.
- Several years ago, Conway, Inc. secured a conventional real estate mortgage loan. Which of the following audit procedures would be least likely to be performed by an auditor examining the mortgage balance?
a) Examine the current year s canceled checks.
b) Review the mortgage amortization schedule.
c) Inspect public records of lien balances.
d) Re-compute mortgage interest expense.
- An internal control that ensures that long-term borrowing is properly initiated by appropriate individuals addresses the internal control objective of
a) Validity.
b) Authorization.
c) Completeness.
d) Ownership.
- The primary reason for preparing a reconciliation between interest-bearing obligations outstanding during the year and interest expense presented in the financial statements is to
a) Evaluate internal control over securities.
b) Determine the validity of prepaid interest expense.
c) Ascertain the reasonableness of imputed interest.
d) Detect unrecorded liabilities.
- Valuation is most likely an issue for long-term debt if
a) Bonds are sold on the open market.
b) Bonds are issued at a discount or premium.
c) The loans are from banks.
d) The company has many short-term leases.
- A substantive strategy is typically used to audit stockholders equity because
a) The number of transactions is small.
b) Controls over stockholders equity transactions typically are weak.
c) A reliance strategy is most efficient.
d) A substantive strategy likely was used in prior years.
- The least crucial element of internal control over cash is
a) Separation of cash record-keeping from custody of cash.
b) Preparation of the monthly bank reconciliation.
c) Batch processing of checks.
d) Separation of cash receipts from cash disbursements.
- Which of the following is one of the better auditing techniques that might be used by an auditor to detect kiting between inter-company banks?
a) Review the composition of authenticated deposit slips.
b) Review subsequent bank statements received directly from the banks.
c) Prepare a schedule of bank transfers.
d) Prepare year-end bank reconciliations.
- An unrecorded check issued during the last week of the year would most likely be discovered by the auditor when the
a) Check register for the last month is reviewed.
b) Cutoff bank statement is reconciled.
c) Bank confirmation is reviewed.
d) Search for unrecorded liabilities is preformed.
- Which of the following audit procedures is the most appropriate when internal control over cash is weak or when a client requests an investigation of cash transactions?
a) Proof of cash.
b) Bank reconciliation.
c) Cash confirmation.
d) Evaluate ratio of cash to current liabilities.
- Which of the following internal controls most likely would reduce the risk of diversion of customer receipts by an entity s employees?
a) A bank lockbox system.
b) Pre-numbered remittance advices.
c) Monthly bank reconciliation.
d) Daily deposit of cash receipts.
- When auditing contingent liabilities, which of the following procedures would be least effective?
a) Reading the minutes of the board of directors.
b) Reviewing the bank confirmation letter.
c) Examining customer confirmation replies.
d) Examining invoices for professional services.
- The auditor s primary means of obtaining corroboration of management s information concerning litigation is a
a) Letter of audit inquiry to the client s lawyer.
b) Letter of corroboration from the auditor s lawyer upon review of the legal documentation.
c) Confirmation of claims and assessments from the other parties to the litigation.
d) Confirmation of claims and assessments from an officer of the court presiding over the litigation.
- An auditor will ordinarily examine invoices from lawyers primarily in order to
a) Substantiate accruals.
b) Assess the legal ramifications of litigation in progress.
c) Estimate the dollar amount of contingent liabilities.
d) Identify possible unasserted litigation, claims, and assessments.
- If a lawyer refuses to furnish corroborating information regarding litigation, claims, and assessments, the auditor should
a) Honor the confidentiality of the client-lawyer relationship.
b) Consider the refusal to be tantamount to a scope limitation.
c) Seek to obtain the corroborating information from management.
d) Disclose this fact in a footnote to the financial statements.
- Which of the following situations would require adjustment to or disclosure in the financial statements?
a) a merger discussion.
b) The application for a patent on a new production process.
c) Discussions with a customer that could lead to a 40 percent increase in the client s sales.
d) The bankruptcy of a customer who regularly purchased 30 of the company s output.
- Which of the following parties is responsible for the fairness of the representations made in financial statements?
a) Client s management.
b) Independent auditor.
c) Audit committee.
d) AICPA.
- Which of the following situations will not result in modification of the auditor s report because of a scope limitation?
a) Restriction imposed by the client.
b) Reliance placed on the report of another auditor.
c) Inability to obtain sufficient competent evidential matter.
d) Inadequacy in the accounting records.
- Management believes, and the auditor is satisfied, that a material loss probably will occur when pending litigation is resolved. Management is unable to make a reasonable estimate of the amount or range of the potential loss, but fully discloses the situation in the notes to the financial statements. If management does not make an accrual in the financial statements, the auditor should express a/an
a) Qualified opinion due to a scope limitation.
b) Qualified opinion due to a departure from GAAP.
c) Unqualified opinion with an explanatory paragraph.
d) Unqualified opinion in a standard auditor s report.
- When a question arises about an entity s continued existence, the auditor should consider factors tending to mitigate the significance of contrary information concerning the entity s alternative means for maintaining adequate cash flow. An example of such a factor is the
a) Possibility of purchasing certain assets rather than leasing them.
b) Capability of extending the due dates of existing loans.
c) Feasibility of operating at increased levels of production.
d) Marketability of property and equipment that management plans to keep.
- An auditor issued an audit report that was dual dated for a subsequent event occurring after the completion of fieldwork but before issuance of the auditor s report. The auditor s responsibility for events occurring subsequent to the completion of fieldwork was
a) Limited to include only events occurring up to the date of the last subsequent event referenced.
b) Limited to the specific event referenced.
c) Extended to subsequent events occurring through the date of issuance of the report.
d) Extended to include all events occurring since the completion f fieldwork.
- With respect to ethics, the theory of rights
a) Suggests that auditors should always verify ownership of a client s material tangible assets.
b) Is primarily concerned with equity and impartiality.
c) Suggests that an individual s actions should not violate the liberties of any individual.
d) Recognizes that decisions involve trade-offs between costs and benefits.
- In which of the following instances would the independence of the CPA not be considered to be impaired? The CPA has been retained as the auditor f a brokerage firm
a) Which owes the CPA audit fees for more than one year.
b) In which the CPA has a large active margin account.
c) In which the CPA s brother is the controller.
d) Which owes the CPA audit fees for current year services and has just filed a petition for bankruptcy.
- A CPA, while performing an audit, strives to achieve independence in appearance in order to
a) Reduce risk and liability.
b) Comply with the generally accepted standards of fieldwork.
c) Become independent in face.
d) Maintain public confidence in the profession.
- Which of the following is not a principle of professional conduct as defined by the Code of Professional Conduct?
a) Integrity.
b) Due care.
c) Reporting.
d) Scope and nature of services.
- According to the profession s standards, which of the following is not required of a CPA performing a consulting engagement?
a) Complying with Statements on Standards for Consulting Services.
b) Obtaining an understanding of the nature, scope, and limitations of the engagement.
c) Supervising staff who are assigned to the engagement.
d) Maintaining independence from the client.
- According to the ethical standards of the profession, which of the following acts is generally prohibited?
a) Issuing a modified report explaining a failure to follow a governmental regulatory agency s standards when conducting an attest service for a client.
b) Revealing confidential client information during a quality review of a professional practice by a team from the state CPA society.
c) Accepting a contingent fee for representing a client in an examination of the client s federal tax return by an IRS agent.
d) Retaining client records after an engagement is terminated prior to completion and the client has demanded their return.
- An auditor, using the same degree of due care as other members of the profession, fails to create an adequate allowance for bad debts. This occurrence is an example of
a) Negligence.
b) Fraud.
c) An error in judgment.
d) Constructive negligence.
- Which of the following is the best statement of the general standard of performance owed by an accountant in his or her professional work?
a) To do the job correctly and discover all irregularities.
b) To follow generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) and generally accepted auditing standards (GAAS).
c) To act as a professional and not commit fraud.
d) To exercise the skill and care of the ordinarily prudent accountant in the same circumstances.
- Which of the following is not within the class of foreseen users of an accountant s work product?
a) A shareholder of the client.
b) A lender bank when the accountant knows only that the client will use the financial statements to obtain a loan from an unspecified source.
c) A bank when the accountant knows the client will rely on the financial statements as the basis for a loan from the bank.
d) An investor if the accountant knows that the client is seeking capital from a select group of investors.
- Which of the following statements is correct with respect to ownership, possession, or access to a CPA firm s audit work-papers?
a) Work-papers are subject to the privileged communication rule, which, in most jurisdictions, prevents any third-party access to the work-papers.
b) Work-papers may never be obtained by a third-party unless the client consents.
c) Work-papers are the client s exclusive property.
d) Work-papers are not transferable to a purchaser of a CPA practice unless the client consents.
- At which point in an ordinary sales transaction of a wholesaling business would a lack of specific authorization be of least concern to the auditor?
a) Granting of credit.
b) Shipment f goods.
c) Determination of discounts.
d) Selling of goods for cash
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week 6 – Chapter 7 Pre- Quiz Study 15 QUESTIONS
Question 1
Which of the following stages of the management decision-making process is improperly sequenced?
Evaluate possible courses of action Make decision.
Assign responsibility for the decision Identify the problem.
Identify the problem Determine possible courses of action.
Assign responsibility for decision Determine possible courses of action.
Question 2
A segment has the following data:
Sales $700,000
Variable expenses 300,000
Fixed expenses 550,000
What will be the incremental effect on net income if this segment is eliminated, assuming the fixed expenses will be allocated to profitable segments?
$400,000 decrease
cannot be determined from the data provided
$5,000 decrease
$400,000 increase
Question 3
New Age Makeup produces face cream. Each bottle of face cream costs $10 to produce and can be sold for $13. The bottles can be sold as is, or processed further into sunscreen at a cost of $14 each. New Age Makeup could sell the sunscreen bottles for $23 each.
Face cream must be processed further because its profit is $9 each.
Face cream must not be processed further because costs increase more than revenue.
Face cream must not be processed further because it decreases profit by $1 each.
Face cream must be processed further because it increases profit by $3 each.
Question 4
A company decided to replace an old machine with a new machine. Which of the following is considered a relevant cost?
The book value of the old equipment
Depreciation expense of the old equipment
The current disposal price of the old equipment
The loss on disposal of the old equipment
Question 5
Incremental analysis would not be appropriate for:
analysis of manufacturing variances.
elimination of an unprofitable segment.
an allocation of limited resource decision.
a make or buy decision.
Question 6
Sandusky Inc. has the following costs when producing 100,000 units:
Variable costs $600,000
Fixed costs 900,000
An outside supplier is interested in producing the item for Sandusky. If the item is produced outside, Sandusky could use the released production facilities to make another item that would generate $150,000 of net income. At what unit price would Sandusky accept the outside supplier s offer if Sandusky wanted to increase net income by $120,000?
$5.70
$6.30
$8.70
$7.50
Question 7
Book value of old equipment is considered to be a
cost that can be changed by a present or future decision.
sunk cost.
relevant cost.
semi-relevant cost.
Question 8
Paul Bunyon Lumber Co. produces several products that can be sold at the split-off point or processed further and then sold. The following results are from a recent period:
Sales Value Additional Sales Value After
Product at Split-off Variable Costs Further Processing
Green lumber $159,600 $24,000 $178,000
Rough lumber 124,000 28,200 173,600
Sawdust 102,000 19,600 130,000
What is the increase in profit if the appropriate products are processed further?
$29,800
$24,200
$96,000
$255,800
Question 9
All of the following are relevant to the sell or process further decision except:
revenues at the split-off point.
costs incurred before the split-off point.
revenues beyond the split-off point.
costs incurred beyond the split-off point.
Question 10
A company is considering replacing old equipment with new equipment. Which of the following is a relevant cost for incremental analysis?
Cost of the new equipment
Annual depreciation charge on the old equipment
Book value of the old equipment
Estimated annual depreciation of the new equipment
Question 11
A company is contemplating the acceptance of a special order. The order would not affect regular sales and could be filled without exceeding plant capacity. However, a new stamping machine would have to be purchased in order to stamp the customer s name on the product. Which of the following is likely?
Only variable costs will be relevant.
Both variable and fixed costs will be relevant.
Only fixed costs will be relevant.
Total variable costs will be irrelevant.
Question 12
A company is deciding whether or not to replace some old equipment with new equipment. Which of the following is not considered in the incremental analysis?
Book value of the old equipment
Annual operating cost of the new equipment
Annual operating cost of the old equipment
Net cost of the new equipment
Question 13
In the analysis concerning the acceptance or rejection of a special order, which items are relevant?
Variable costs only
Fixed costs only
Variable costs and fixed costs
Variable costs and unavoidable costs
Question 14
In incremental analysis:
only costs are analyzed.
both costs and revenues may be analyzed.
only revenues are analyzed.
both costs and revenues that stay the same between alternate courses of action will be analyzed.
Question 15
If a company anticipates that other sales will be affected by the acceptance of a special order, then:
lost sales should not be considered in the incremental analysis.
lost sales should be considered in the incremental analysis.
the order should not be accepted.
the order will only be accepted if the plant is below capacity.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
16.
The ability to meet short-term obligations and to efficiently generate revenues is called:
A.
Liquidity and efficiency.
B.
Solvency.
C.
Profitability.
D.
Market prospects.
E.
Creditworthiness.
17.
Industry standards for financial statement analysis:
A.
Are based on a company’s prior performance.
B.
Are set by the government.
C.
Are set by the financial performance and condition of the company’s industry.
D.
Are based on rules of thumb.
E.
Compare a company’s income with the prior year’s income.
18.
A complete income statement potentially has the following sections:
A.
Items from continuing operations and earnings per share for a corporation.
B.
Income or loss from operating a discontinued segment for the current period.
C.
The loss from disposing of the discontinued segment’s net assets.
D.
Extraordinary items.
E.
Continuing operations, discontinued segments, extraordinary items, changes in accounting principles, and earnings per share for a corporation.
19.
A company’s sales in 2009 were $250,000 and in 2010 were $287,500. Using 2009 as the base year, the sales trend percent for 2010 is:
A.
87%.
B.
100%.
C.
115%.
D.
15%.
E.
13%.
($287,500/$250,000) x 100 = 115%
20.
Comparative financial statements in which each amount is expressed as a percentage of a base amount, and in which the base amount is expressed as 100%, are called:
A.
Comparative statements.
B.
Common-size comparative statements.
C.
General-purpose financial statements.
D.
Base line statements.
E.
Index statements.
21.
A corporation reported cash of $14,000 and total assets of $178,300. Its common-size percent for cash equals:
A.
.0785%.
B.
7.85%.
C.
12.73%.
D.
1273%.
E.
7850%.
($14,000/$178,300) x 100 = 7.85%
22.
Current assets minus current liabilities is:
A.
Profit margin.
B.
Financial leverage.
C.
Current ratio.
D.
Working capital.
E.
Quick assets.
23.
Annual cash dividends per share divided by market price per share is the:
A.
Price-earnings ratio
B.
Price-dividends ratio.
C.
Profit margin.
D.
Dividend yield ratio.
E.
Earnings per share.
24.
The average number of times a company’s inventory is sold during an accounting period, calculated by dividing cost of goods sold by the average inventory balance, is the:
A.
Accounts receivable turnover.
B.
Inventory turnover.
C.
Days’ sales uncollected.
D.
Current ratio.
E.
Price earnings ratio.
25.
A company had a market price of $37.50 per share, earnings per share of $1.25, and dividends per share of $0.40. Its price-earnings ratio equals:
A.
3.1.
B.
30.0.
C.
93.8.
D.
32.0.
E.
3.3.
26.
A company reports basic earnings per share of $3.50, cash dividends per share of $0.75, and a market price per share of $64.75. The company’s dividend yield equals:
A.
1.16%.
B.
2.14%.
C.
4.67%.
D.
5.41%.
E.
18.50%.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question
1.
Bonds that have an option exercisable by the issuer to retire them at a stated dollar amount prior to maturity are known as:
A.
Convertible bonds.
B.
Sinking fund bonds.
C.
Callable bonds.
D.
Serial bonds.
E.
Junk bonds.
2.
A bond traded at 102 means that:
A.
The bond pays 2.5% interest.
B.
The bond traded at $1,025 per $1,000 bond.
C.
The market rate of interest is 2.5%.
D.
The bonds were retired at $1,025 each.
E.
The market rate of interest is 2 % above the contract rate.
3.
The contract between the bond issuer and the bondholders, which identifies the rights and obligations of the parties, is called a(n):
A.
Debenture.
B.
Bond indenture.
C.
Mortgage.
D.
Installment note.
E.
Mortgage contract.
4.
The carrying value of a long-term note payable:
A.
Is computed as the future value of all remaining future payments, using the market rate of interest.
B.
Is the face value of the long-term note less the total of all future interest payments.
C.
Is computed as the present value of all remaining future payments, discounted using the market rate of interest at the time of issuance.
D.
Is computed as the present value of all remaining interest payments, discounted using the note’s rate of interest.
E.
Decreases each time period the discount on the note is amortized.
5.
A company must repay the bank $10,000 cash in 3 years for a loan it entered into. The loan is at 8% interest compounded annually. The present value factor for 3 years at 8% is 0.7938. The present value of the loan is:
A.
$10,000.
B.
$12,400.
C.
$ 7,938.
D.
$ 9,200.
E.
$ 7,600.
$10,000 x 0.7938 = $7,938
6.
A pension plan
A.
Is a contractual agreement between an employer and its employees in which the employer provides benefits to employees after they retire.
B.
Can be underfunded if the accumulated benefit obligation is more than the plan assets.
C.
Can include a plan administrator who receives payments from the employer, invests them in pension assets, and makes benefit payments to pension recipients.
D.
Can be a defined benefit plan in which future benefits are set, but the employer’s contributions vary depending on assumptions about future pension assets and liabilities.
E.
All of these.
7.
Operating leases differ from capital leases in that
A.
For a capital lease the lessee records the lease payments as rent expense, but for an operating lease the lessee reports the lease payments as depreciation expense.
B.
For an operating lease the lessee depreciates the asset acquired under lease, but for the capital lease the lessee does not.
C.
Operating leases create a long-term liability on the balance sheet, but capital leases do not.
D.
Operating leases do not transfer ownership of the asset under the lease, but capital leases often do.
E.
Operating lease payments are generally greater than capital lease payments.
8.
A disadvantage of bonds is:
A.
Bonds require payment of periodic interest.
B.
Bonds require payment of principal.
C.
Bonds can decrease return on equity.
D.
Bond payments can be burdensome when income and cash flow are low.
E.
All of these.
9.
A company’s total liabilities divided by its total stockholders’ equity is called the:
A.
Debt ratio.
B.
Return on total assets ratio.
C.
Pledged assets to secured liabilities ratio.
D.
Debt-to-equity ratio.
E.
Times secured liabilities earned ratio.
10.
When a bond sells at a premium:
A.
The contract rate is above the market rate.
B.
The contract rate is equal to the market rate.
C.
The contract rate is below the market rate.
D.
It means that the bond is a zero coupon bond.
E.
The bond pays no interest.
11.
A company issues 9%, 20-year bonds with a par value of $750,000. The current market rate is 9%. The amount of interest owed to the bondholders for each semiannual interest payment is.
A.
$ 0.
B.
$ 33,750.
C.
$ 67,500.
D.
$ 750,000.
E.
$1,550,000.
$750,000 x .09 x year = $33,750
12.
Amortizing a bond discount:
A.
Allocates a part of the total discount to each interest period.
B.
Increases the market value of the Bonds Payable.
C.
Decreases the Bonds Payable account.
D.
Decreases interest expense each period.
E.
Increases cash flows from the bond.
13.
A company issued 5-year, 7% bonds with a par value of $100,000. The company received $97,947 for the bonds. Using the straight-line method, the amount of interest expense for the first semiannual interest period is:
A.
$3,294.70.
B.
$3,500.00.
C.
$3,705.30.
D.
$7,000.00.
E.
$7,410.60.
Cash interest paid: $100,000 x .07 x year = $3,500
Discount amortization: ($100,000 – $97,947)/10 periods = $205.30
Interest expense = $3,500 + $205.30 = $3,705.30
14.
Financial statement analysis:
A.
Is the application of analytical tools to general-purpose financial statements and related data for making business decisions.
B.
Involves transforming accounting data into useful information for decision-making.
C.
Helps users to make better decisions.
D.
Helps to reduce uncertainty in decision-making.
E.
All of these.
15.
The building blocks of financial statement analysis include:
A.
Liquidity and efficiency.
B.
Solvency.
C.
Profitability.
D.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following facts pertain to questions 1 and 2:
The Scepter Shop recorded October sales of $185,000. All sales are cash. Their one store is in an area with a 7.5% sales tax rate. Cost of goods sold for these sales amounted to 112,000. The Scepter Shop must pay its sales tax liability by the 15th day of the month following the month of sales.
1. What accounts will be affected in the transaction recording the October sales?
a. cash, sales tax expense, sales revenues
b. cash, sales tax payable, sales revenues
c. cash, sales revenues
d. cash, sales tax expense
2. When the sales taxes are paid on November 15, what accounts are involved in this transaction?
a. cash, sales tax expense
b. accounts payable, sales tax expense
c. cash, sales tax payable
d. none of the above.
The following information pertained to questions 3 through 5:
The Standard Company signed a note on November 15, 2013 when it borrowed $25,000. The note had a maturity date of 90 days and an APR interest rate of 6 %.
3. What was the amount of interest to be accrued on December 31, 2013? (Use the actual number of days method.)
a. 766.67
b. 189.04
c. 375.00
d. 191.67
4. What is the total amount of interest to be accrued for 2014? (Use the actual number of days method.)
a. 180.82
b. 183.33
c. 187.50
d. 184.93
5. When the note is finally paid off by Standard, which accounts are affected?
a. note receivable, interest expense
b. note payable, interest payable, cash
c. note receivable, interest expense, cash
d. note payable, interest expense, interest payable, cash
The following information pertains to questions 6 through 8:
Larry, Moe and Curly work for Stooges, Inc., which does not have a policy of paying time-and-a-half for hours worked in excess of 40 per week. The following information relates to a recent week:
Name Hourly Rate # hours worked Federal Income Tax withheld
Larry 7.50 45 15%
Moe 9.25 56 22%
Curly 8.50 38 20%
Social Security withholding is at 6%, Medicare withholding is at 1.5%.
6. Calculate the total gross wages of all three employees for the week.
a. 1,298.25
b. 1,186.25
c. 1,178.50
d. 1,211.45
7. What is the net pay of Curly for the week?
a. 234.18
b. 298.78
c. 303.62
d. 239.02
8. What is the total amount of Social Security and Medicare taxes that Stooges must send to the government for this week
a. 88.39
b. 317.57
c. 635.14
d. 176.78
9. The Whipsaw Company wants to accumulate $250,000 in 5 years in order to purchase a new machine. It prefers to make a one-time payment to a bank account that will pay 4%. How much must the single-sum payment be so that it will grow to $250,000 in 5 years at an APR of 4%?
a. 50,000.00
b. 205,481.75
c. 248,975.63
d. 215,986.48
10. The Quigley Company wants to set up a fund to pay off a $125,000 loan in 8 years. It can invest the same sum of money each year to an account that will pay 4%. What will Quigley s annual contribution to the fund be?
a. 14,382.01
b. 13,289.24
c. 13,565.98
d. 14,001.54
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Seven years ago, Eleanor transferred property she had used in her sole proprietorship to Blue Corporation for 2,000 shares of Blue Corporation in a transaction that qualified under 351. The assets had a tax basis to her of $400,000 and a fair market value of $700,000 on the date of the transfer. In the current year, Blue Corporation ( E & P of $1 million) redeems 600 shares from Eleanor for $260,000 in a transaction that qualifies for sale or exchange treatment. With respect to the redemption, Eleanor will have a:
$140,000 dividend.
$260,000 dividend.
$140,000 capital gain.
$260,000 capital gain.
None of the above.
Question 2
Which of the following entity owners cannot participate in management of the entity?
A general partner in a general partnership.
A member of a limited liability company.
A partner in a limited liability partnership.
A limited partner in a limited liability limited partnership.
None of the above.
Question 3
Elk, a C corporation, has $370,000 operating income and $290,000 operating expenses during the year. In addition, Elk has a $10,000 long-term capital gain and a $17,000 short-term capital loss. Elk s taxable income is:
$63,000.
$73,000.
$80,000.
$90,000.
None of the above.
Question 4
Which of the following statements is incorrect with respect to determining current E & P?
All tax-exempt income should be added back to taxable income.
Dividends received deductions should be added back to taxable income.
Charitable contributions in excess of the 10% of taxable income limit should be subtracted from taxable income.
Federal income tax refunds should be added back to taxable income.
None of the above statements are incorrect.
Question 5
Rachel is the sole member of an LLC, and Jordan is the sole shareholder of a C corporation. Both businesses were started in the current year, and each business has a long-term capital gain of $10,000 for the year. Neither business made any distributions during the year. With respect to this information, which of the following statements is correct?
The C corporation receives a preferential tax rate on the LTCG of $10,000.
The LLC must pay corporate tax on taxable income of $10,000.
Jordan must report $10,000 of LTCG on his tax return.
Rachel must report $10,000 of LTCG on her tax return.
None of the above.
Question 6
Fred and Ella are going to establish a business. They expect the business to be very successful in the long-run, but project losses of approximately $100,000 for each of the first five years. Due to potential environmental concerns, limited liability is a requisite for the owners. Which form of business entity should they select?
General partnership.
Limited partnership.
C corporation.
S corporation.
Any of the above should satisfy Fred and Ella.
Question 7
During 2013, Miles Nutt, the sole shareholder of a calendar year S corporation, received a distribution of $16,000. On December 31, 2012, his stock basis was $4,000. The corporation earned $11,000 ordinary income during the year. It has no accumulated E & P. Which statement is correct?
Nutt recognizes a $1,000 LTCG.
Nutt s stock basis will be $2,000.
Nutt s ordinary income is $15,000.
Nutt s return of capital is $11,000.
None of the above.
question 9
In the current year, Warbler Corporation (E & P of $250,000) made the following property distributions to its shareholders (all corporations):
Adjusted
Fair Market
Basis
Value
Pink Corporation stock (held for investment)
$150,000
$120,000
Non-LIFO inventory
80,000
110,000
Warbler Corporation is not a member of a controlled group. As a result of the distribution:
The shareholders have dividend income of $200,000.
The shareholders have dividend income of $260,000.
Warbler has a recognized gain of $30,000 and a recognized loss of $30,000.
Warbler has no recognized gain or loss.
None of the above.
Question 10
Bev and Cabel each have 50% ownership in Finch Partnership. Bev s partnership interest has a basis of $225,000. Finch s taxable income for the current year is $100,000, and it distributes $180,000 to each partner. Bev s partnership interest basis at the end of the year is:
$0.
$45,000.
$95,000.
$100,000.
None of the above.
Question 11
Finch Corporation distributes property (basis of $225,000, fair market value of $300,000) to a shareholder in a distribution that is a qualifying stock redemption. The property is subject to a liability of $160,000, which the shareholder assumes. The basis of the property to the shareholder is:
$0.
$140,000.
$225,000.
$300,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Determine the size of the M1 money supply using the following information.
A. Currency plus traveler s checks $25 million
B. Negotiable CDs $10 million
C. Demand deposits $13 million
D. Other checkable deposits $12 million
M0-Physical cash and coin
M1 All of M0 plus demand deposits, traveler s checks
M2 All of M1 plus savings deposits, money market shares
3. Determine the size of the demand deposits component of the M1 money supply using the following information. Demand deposit = M1 currency-traveler`s checks- other checkable deposits- small time deposits
A. Currency $350 million
B. Traveler s checks $10 million
C. Other checkable deposits $200 million
D. Small time deposits $100 million
E. M1 money supply $800 million
2. Assume a bank has $5 million in deposits and $1 million in vault cash. If the bank holds $1 million in excess reserves and the required reserves ratio is 8 percent, what level of deposits are being held?
a. If the required reserves ratio is 8 percent, what dollar amount of deposits can the bank have =
b. If the bank holds $65 million in deposits and currently holds bank reserves such that excess reserves are zero, what required reserves ratio is implied =
5. The Friendly National Bank holds $50 million in reserves at its Federal Reserve District Bank. The required reserves ratio is 12 percent.
a. If the bank has $600 million in deposits, what amount of vault cash would be needed for the bank to be in compliance with the required reserves ratio?
b. If the bank holds $10 million in vault cash, determine the required reserves ratio that would be needed for the bank to avoid a reserves de cit.
1. Assume that Banc One receives a primary deposit of $1 million. The bank must keep reserves of 20 percent against its deposits. Prepare a simple balance sheet of assets and liabilities for Banc One immediately after the deposit is received.
5. A thirty-year U.S. Treasury bond has a 4.0 percent interest rate. In contrast, a ten-year Treasury bond has an interest rate of 2.5 percent. A maturity risk premium is estimated to be 0.2 percentage points for the longer maturity bond. Investors expect inflation to average 1.5 percentage points over the next ten years.
a. Estimate the expected real rate of return on the ten-year U. S. Treasury bond.
b. If the real rate of return is expected to be the same for the thirty-year bond as for the ten-year bond, estimate the average annual inflation rate expected by investors over the life of the thirty-year bond.
6. You are considering an investment in a one-year government debt security with a yield of 5 percent or a highly liquid corporate debt security with a yield of 6.5 percent. The expected inflation rate for the next year is expected to be 2.5 percent.
a. What would be your real rate earned on either of the two investment?
b. What would be the default risk premium on the corporate debt security?
4. You are planning to invest $2,500 today for three years at a nominal interest rate of 9 percent with annual compounding.
a.What would be the future value of your investment?
b.Now assume that inflation is expected to be 3 percent per year over the same three-year period. What would be the investment s future value in terms of purchasing power?
c.What would be the investment s future value in terms of purchasing power if inflation occurs at a 9 percent annual rate?
1. Compute the annual interest payments ad principal amount for a Treasury Inflation-Protected Security with a par value of $1,000 and a 3 percent interest rate if inflation is at 4 percent in year one, 5 percent in year two, and 6 percent in year three.
23. The Joseph Company has a stock issue that pays a fixed dividend of $3.00 per share annually. Investors believe the nominal risk-free rate is 4 percent and that this stock should have a risk premium of 6 percent. What should be the value of this stock?
1. In late 2010, you purchased the common stock of a company that has reported significant earnings increases in nearly every quarter since your purchase. The price of the stock increased from $12 a share at the time of the purchase to a current level of $45. Notwithstanding the success of the company, competitors are gaining much strength. Further, your analysis indicates that the stock may be overpriced based on your projection of future earnings growth. Your analysis, however, was the same one year ago and the earnings have continued to increase. Actions that you might take range from an outright sale of the stock (and the payment of capital gains tax) to doing nothing a continuing to hold the shares. You reflect on these choices as well another action that could be taken. Describe the various actions tat you might take and their implications.
Problem 3: Use your knowledge of balance sheets to fill in the missing amounts:
|
ASSETS
|
|
|
CASH ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE
|
$50,000
|
|
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE
|
80,000
|
|
INVENTORY
|
100,000
|
|
TOTAL CURRENT ASSETS
|
|
|
GROSS PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
|
|
|
LESS: ACCUMULATED DEPRECIATION
|
130,000
|
|
NET PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
|
600,000
|
|
TOTAL ASSETS
|
|
|
LIABILITIES
|
|
|
ACCOUNTS PAYABLE
|
$12,000
|
|
NOPTES PAYABLE
|
50,000
|
|
TOTAL CURRENT LIABILITIES
|
|
|
LONG-TERM DEBT
|
|
|
TOTAL LIABILITIES
|
|
|
COMMON STOCK($ 1 PAR, 100,000 SHARES)
|
|
|
PAID-IN CAPITAL
|
250,000
|
|
RETAINED EARNINGS
|
200,000
|
|
TOTAL STOCKHOLDERS EQUITY
|
|
|
TOTAL LIABILITIES AND EQUITY
|
$830,000
|
Problem 6: Use the following information to construct an income statement:
|
INTEREST
|
25,000
|
|
SALES
|
950,000
|
|
INCOME TAX RATE
|
25%
|
|
SELLING AND MARKETING EXPENSES
|
160,000
|
|
GENERAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE EXPENSE
|
200,000
|
|
GROSS PROFIT
|
550,000
|
|
DEPRECIATION
|
30,000
|
|
COST OF GOODS SOLD
|
400,000
|
Problem 3: The Dayco s Manufacturing Company had the following financial statement results for last year. Net sales were $1.2 million with net income of $90,000. Total assets at year end amounted to $900,000.
A. Calculate Dayco s asset turnover ratio and its profit margin.
B. Show how the two ratios in Part (a) can be used to determine Dayco s rate of return on assets.
C. Dayco s operates industry average ratios are these: Return on assets: 11 percent; Asset turnover: 2.5 times; Net profit margin: 3.6 percent. Compare Dayco s performance against the industry averages.
Problem 6: Following are financial statements for the Genatron Manufacturing Corporation for 2012 and 2011.
GENATRON MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
|
BALANCE SHEET
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
ASSETS
|
|
|
|
CASH
|
$40,000
|
$50,000
|
|
ACCTS. RECIEVABLE
|
260,000
|
200,000
|
|
INVENTORY
|
500,000
|
450,000
|
|
TOTAL CURRENT ASSETS
|
800,000
|
700,000
|
|
FIXED ASSETS, NET
|
400,000
|
300,000
|
|
TOTAL ASSETS
|
$1,200,000
|
$1,000,000
|
|
LIABILITIES AND EQUITY
|
|
|
|
ACCTS. PAYABLE
|
$170,000
|
$130,000
|
|
BANK LOAN
|
90,000
|
90,000
|
|
ACCRUALS
|
70,000
|
50,000
|
|
TOTAL CURRENT LIABILITIES
|
330,000
|
270,000
|
|
LONG-TERM DEBT, 12%
|
400,000
|
300,000
|
|
COMMON STOCK, $10 PAR
|
300,000
|
300,000
|
|
CAPITAL SURPLUS
|
50,000
|
50,000
|
|
RETAINED EARNINGS
|
120,000
|
80,00
|
|
TOTAL LIABILITIES & EQUITY
|
$1,200,000
|
$1,000,000
|
|
INCOME STATEMENT
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
NET SALES
|
$1,500,000
|
$1,300,000
|
|
COST OF GOODS SOLD
|
900,000
|
780,000
|
|
GROSS PROFIT
|
600,000
|
520,000
|
|
EXPENSES; GENERAL & ADMIN
|
150,000
|
150,000
|
|
MARKETING
|
150,000
|
130,000
|
|
DEPRECIATION
|
53,000
|
40,000
|
|
INTEREST
|
57,000
|
45,000
|
|
EARNING BEFORE TAXES
|
190,000
|
155,000
|
|
INCOME TAXES
|
76,000
|
62,000
|
|
NET INCOME
|
$114,000
|
$93,000
|
a. Apply Du Pont analysis to both the 2012 and 2011 financial statements data.
b. Explain how financial performance differed between 2012 and 2011.
Problem 1: Find the NVP and PI of a project that cost $1,500 and returns $800 in year one and $850 in year two. Assume the project s cost of capital is 8 percent.
Problem 1: AQ&Q has EBIT of $2 million, total assets of $10 million, stockholders s equity of $4 million, and pretax interest expense of 10 percent.
a. What is AQ&Q s indifference level of EBIT?
b. Given its current situation, might it benefit from increasing or decreasing its use of debt? Explain.
c. Suppose we are told AQ&Q s average tax rate is 40 percent. How does this affect your answers to (a) and (b)?
Problem 4: Faulkner s Fine Fries, Inc. (FFF), is thinking about reducing its debt burden. Given the following capital structure information and an expected EBIT of $50 million (plus or minus 10 percent) next year, should FFF change their capital structure?
|
CURRENT
|
PROPOSED
|
|
TOTAL ASSETS
|
$750 MILLION
|
$750 MILLION
|
|
DEBT
|
450 MILLION
|
300 MILLION
|
|
EQUITY
|
300 MILLION
|
450 MILLION
|
|
COMMON STOCK PRICE
|
$30
|
$30
|
|
NUMBER OF SHARES
|
10,000,000
|
15,000,000
|
|
INTEREST RATE
|
12%
|
12%
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Determine the size of the M1 money supply using the following information.
A. Currency plus traveler s checks $25 million
B. Negotiable CDs $10 million
C. Demand deposits $13 million
D. Other checkable deposits $12 million
M0-Physical cash and coin
M1 All of M0 plus demand deposits, traveler s checks
M2 All of M1 plus savings deposits, money market shares
3. Determine the size of the demand deposits component of the M1 money supply using the following information. Demand deposit = M1 currency-traveler`s checks- other checkable deposits- small time deposits
A. Currency $350 million
B. Traveler s checks $10 million
C. Other checkable deposits $200 million
D. Small time deposits $100 million
E. M1 money supply $800 million
2. Assume a bank has $5 million in deposits and $1 million in vault cash. If the bank holds $1 million in excess reserves and the required reserves ratio is 8 percent, what level of deposits are being held?
a. If the required reserves ratio is 8 percent, what dollar amount of deposits can the bank have =
b. If the bank holds $65 million in deposits and currently holds bank reserves such that excess reserves are zero, what required reserves ratio is implied =
5. The Friendly National Bank holds $50 million in reserves at its Federal Reserve District Bank. The required reserves ratio is 12 percent.
a. If the bank has $600 million in deposits, what amount of vault cash would be needed for the bank to be in compliance with the required reserves ratio?
b. If the bank holds $10 million in vault cash, determine the required reserves ratio that would be needed for the bank to avoid a reserves de cit.
1. Assume that Banc One receives a primary deposit of $1 million. The bank must keep reserves of 20 percent against its deposits. Prepare a simple balance sheet of assets and liabilities for Banc One immediately after the deposit is received.
5. A thirty-year U.S. Treasury bond has a 4.0 percent interest rate. In contrast, a ten-year Treasury bond has an interest rate of 2.5 percent. A maturity risk premium is estimated to be 0.2 percentage points for the longer maturity bond. Investors expect inflation to average 1.5 percentage points over the next ten years.
a. Estimate the expected real rate of return on the ten-year U. S. Treasury bond.
b. If the real rate of return is expected to be the same for the thirty-year bond as for the ten-year bond, estimate the average annual inflation rate expected by investors over the life of the thirty-year bond.
6. You are considering an investment in a one-year government debt security with a yield of 5 percent or a highly liquid corporate debt security with a yield of 6.5 percent. The expected inflation rate for the next year is expected to be 2.5 percent.
a. What would be your real rate earned on either of the two investment?
b. What would be the default risk premium on the corporate debt security?
4. You are planning to invest $2,500 today for three years at a nominal interest rate of 9 percent with annual compounding.
a.What would be the future value of your investment?
b.Now assume that inflation is expected to be 3 percent per year over the same three-year period. What would be the investment s future value in terms of purchasing power?
c.What would be the investment s future value in terms of purchasing power if inflation occurs at a 9 percent annual rate?
1. Compute the annual interest payments ad principal amount for a Treasury Inflation-Protected Security with a par value of $1,000 and a 3 percent interest rate if inflation is at 4 percent in year one, 5 percent in year two, and 6 percent in year three.
23. The Joseph Company has a stock issue that pays a fixed dividend of $3.00 per share annually. Investors believe the nominal risk-free rate is 4 percent and that this stock should have a risk premium of 6 percent. What should be the value of this stock?
1. In late 2010, you purchased the common stock of a company that has reported significant earnings increases in nearly every quarter since your purchase. The price of the stock increased from $12 a share at the time of the purchase to a current level of $45. Notwithstanding the success of the company, competitors are gaining much strength. Further, your analysis indicates that the stock may be overpriced based on your projection of future earnings growth. Your analysis, however, was the same one year ago and the earnings have continued to increase. Actions that you might take range from an outright sale of the stock (and the payment of capital gains tax) to doing nothing a continuing to hold the shares. You reflect on these choices as well another action that could be taken. Describe the various actions tat you might take and their implications.
Problem 3: Use your knowledge of balance sheets to fill in the missing amounts:
|
ASSETS
|
|
|
CASH ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE
|
$50,000
|
|
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE
|
80,000
|
|
INVENTORY
|
100,000
|
|
TOTAL CURRENT ASSETS
|
|
|
GROSS PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
|
|
|
LESS: ACCUMULATED DEPRECIATION
|
130,000
|
|
NET PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
|
600,000
|
|
TOTAL ASSETS
|
|
|
LIABILITIES
|
|
|
ACCOUNTS PAYABLE
|
$12,000
|
|
NOPTES PAYABLE
|
50,000
|
|
TOTAL CURRENT LIABILITIES
|
|
|
LONG-TERM DEBT
|
|
|
TOTAL LIABILITIES
|
|
|
COMMON STOCK($ 1 PAR, 100,000 SHARES)
|
|
|
PAID-IN CAPITAL
|
250,000
|
|
RETAINED EARNINGS
|
200,000
|
|
TOTAL STOCKHOLDERS EQUITY
|
|
|
TOTAL LIABILITIES AND EQUITY
|
$830,000
|
Problem 6: Use the following information to construct an income statement:
|
INTEREST
|
25,000
|
|
SALES
|
950,000
|
|
INCOME TAX RATE
|
25%
|
|
SELLING AND MARKETING EXPENSES
|
160,000
|
|
GENERAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE EXPENSE
|
200,000
|
|
GROSS PROFIT
|
550,000
|
|
DEPRECIATION
|
30,000
|
|
COST OF GOODS SOLD
|
400,000
|
Problem 3: The Dayco s Manufacturing Company had the following financial statement results for last year. Net sales were $1.2 million with net income of $90,000. Total assets at year end amounted to $900,000.
A. Calculate Dayco s asset turnover ratio and its profit margin.
B. Show how the two ratios in Part (a) can be used to determine Dayco s rate of return on assets.
C. Dayco s operates industry average ratios are these: Return on assets: 11 percent; Asset turnover: 2.5 times; Net profit margin: 3.6 percent. Compare Dayco s performance against the industry averages.
Problem 6: Following are financial statements for the Genatron Manufacturing Corporation for 2012 and 2011.
GENATRON MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
|
BALANCE SHEET
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
ASSETS
|
|
|
|
CASH
|
$40,000
|
$50,000
|
|
ACCTS. RECIEVABLE
|
260,000
|
200,000
|
|
INVENTORY
|
500,000
|
450,000
|
|
TOTAL CURRENT ASSETS
|
800,000
|
700,000
|
|
FIXED ASSETS, NET
|
400,000
|
300,000
|
|
TOTAL ASSETS
|
$1,200,000
|
$1,000,000
|
|
LIABILITIES AND EQUITY
|
|
|
|
ACCTS. PAYABLE
|
$170,000
|
$130,000
|
|
BANK LOAN
|
90,000
|
90,000
|
|
ACCRUALS
|
70,000
|
50,000
|
|
TOTAL CURRENT LIABILITIES
|
330,000
|
270,000
|
|
LONG-TERM DEBT, 12%
|
400,000
|
300,000
|
|
COMMON STOCK, $10 PAR
|
300,000
|
300,000
|
|
CAPITAL SURPLUS
|
50,000
|
50,000
|
|
RETAINED EARNINGS
|
120,000
|
80,00
|
|
TOTAL LIABILITIES & EQUITY
|
$1,200,000
|
$1,000,000
|
|
INCOME STATEMENT
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
NET SALES
|
$1,500,000
|
$1,300,000
|
|
COST OF GOODS SOLD
|
900,000
|
780,000
|
|
GROSS PROFIT
|
600,000
|
520,000
|
|
EXPENSES; GENERAL & ADMIN
|
150,000
|
150,000
|
|
MARKETING
|
150,000
|
130,000
|
|
DEPRECIATION
|
53,000
|
40,000
|
|
INTEREST
|
57,000
|
45,000
|
|
EARNING BEFORE TAXES
|
190,000
|
155,000
|
|
INCOME TAXES
|
76,000
|
62,000
|
|
NET INCOME
|
$114,000
|
$93,000
|
a. Apply Du Pont analysis to both the 2012 and 2011 financial statements data.
b. Explain how financial performance differed between 2012 and 2011.
Problem 1: Find the NVP and PI of a project that cost $1,500 and returns $800 in year one and $850 in year two. Assume the project s cost of capital is 8 percent.
Problem 1: AQ&Q has EBIT of $2 million, total assets of $10 million, stockholders s equity of $4 million, and pretax interest expense of 10 percent.
a. What is AQ&Q s indifference level of EBIT?
b. Given its current situation, might it benefit from increasing or decreasing its use of debt? Explain.
c. Suppose we are told AQ&Q s average tax rate is 40 percent. How does this affect your answers to (a) and (b)?
Problem 4: Faulkner s Fine Fries, Inc. (FFF), is thinking about reducing its debt burden. Given the following capital structure information and an expected EBIT of $50 million (plus or minus 10 percent) next year, should FFF change their capital structure?
|
|
CURRENT
|
PROPOSED
|
|
TOTAL ASSETS
|
$750 MILLION
|
$750 MILLION
|
|
DEBT
|
450 MILLION
|
300 MILLION
|
|
EQUITY
|
300 MILLION
|
450 MILLION
|
|
COMMON STOCK PRICE
|
$30
|
$30
|
|
NUMBER OF SHARES
|
10,000,000
|
15,000,000
|
|
INTEREST RATE
|
12%
|
12%
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
XXXXX is trying to find total payments made from a $100 petty cash fund if there is a $ 6 shortage and $8 left in the account.
B. XXXXX XXXXX works at Pet Supply Inc. and is recording cash sales, how much would cash be debited if sales receipts totaled $5,550 and the cash short/over is credited for $80. What would his credit sales be?
C. Record the collection of a 90 day, 10%, $125,000 note dated November 18th.
D. Farming equipment was purchased on July 1st 2005 for 19.5 million dollars. Farmers believe this machinery can mow 100 million acres of land over its 15 year useful economic life. The salvage value was 1.5 million. Calculate and record depreciation for 2005 using the straight line method. Also calculate the units of production method if deprecation of 4 million acres of land were actually mowed.
Now assume the book value of the equipment is now equal to its salvage value. Record the entry to account for the sale of the equipment for 6 million dollars.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. At the current time Warren Industries can issue 15-year, $1,000 par-value bonds paying annual interest at a 12% coupon rate. As a result of current interest rates, the bonds can be sold for $1,010 each. Flotation costs of $30 per bond will be incurred in the process (which implies that f = 2.97%, or 0.0297 in decimal form) and the firm is in a 40% tax bracket
(a) Find the net proceeds from the sale of each bond for Warren Industries.
(b) Calculate the before-tax and the after-tax cost of debt for Warren Industries.
2. Drywall Systems, Inc., is presently in discussions with its investment bankers regarding the issuance of new bonds. The investment banker has informed the company that different maturities will carry different coupon rates and sell at different prices. Drywall Systems must choose among several alternatives. In each case, the bonds will have a $1,000 par value and flotation costs will be $30 per bond. This implies that the firm will net $970 per bond, before the adjustment for the premium (+) or discount (-). The company is taxed at a rate of 40%.
Calculate the after-tax costs of financing with each of the following alternatives.
Alternative Coupon Rate Time to Maturity Premium (+) or Discount (-)
3. Gem Systems has recently issued preferred stock. The stock has a 12% annual dividend based on a par value of $100 per share. The stock is currently selling for $97.50 per share in the secondary market (so that Po = $97.50). Finally, flotation costs of $2.50 must be paid for each new share Gem Systems issues. (a) Calculate the cost of preferred stock based on the outstanding issue, given the current market price.
4. Calculate the cost of preferred stock (rPS) for each of the following:
Preferred Stock Par Value Current Price (Po) Flotation Cost Annual Dividend (% of Par)
A $100 $101 $9.00 11%
B $40 $38 $3.50 8%
C $35 $37 $4.00 $5.00
D $30 $26 5% of par $3.00
E $20 $20 $2.50 9%
5. JPM Corporation common stock has a beta of 1.2. The risk-free rate is 6%, and the market return is 11%.
(a) Derive the risk premium on JPM common stock.
(b) Determine JPM s cost of common equity using the CAPM.
6. Reynolds Textiles wants to measure its cost of common equity. The firm s stock is currently selling for $57.50 per share. The firm expects to pay a $3.40 dividend at the end of 2011 (so assume that D1 = $3.40 for purposes of calculation). The dividends for the last 5 years are as follows: Year Dividend 2010 $3.10 2009 $2.92 2008 $2.60 2007 $2.30 2006 $2.12 After incurring flotation costs, Reynolds Textiles expects to net $52 per share on a new issue.
(a) Determine the growth rate of dividends (g).
(b) By applying the constant-growth valuation model, determine the cost of retained earnings common equity (rs).
(c) By applying the constant-growth valuation model, determine the cost of newly-issued common equity (re).
7. Brite Lighting Corporation wants to investigate the effect on its cost of capital based on the rate at which the company is taxed. The firm wishes to maintain a capital structure of 30% debt, 10% preferred stock, and 60% common stock. The cost of financing with retained earnings is 14% (i.e., rs = 14%), the cost of preferred stock financing is 9% (rps = 9%), and the before-tax cost of debt is 11% (rd = 11%). Calculate the weighted average cost of capital (WACC) given the tax rate assumptions in parts (a) to (c) below.
(a) Tax rate = 40%.
(b) Tax rate = 35%.
(c) Tax rate = 25%.
Westerly Manufacturing has compiled the information shown in the following table:
| Source of Capital |
Book Value |
Market Value |
After-tax Cost |
| Long-Term Debt |
$4,000,000 |
$3,840,000 |
6.00% |
| Preferred Stock |
$40,000 |
$60,000 |
13.00% |
| Common Stock Equity |
$1,060,000 |
$3,000,000 |
17.00% |
| Totals |
$5,100,000 |
$6,900,000
(a) Calculate the firm s weighted average cost of capital (WACC) using book value weights. (c) Compare your answers found in parts (a) and (b) and briefly explain the differences. Other things equal, would you recommend that Westerly Manufacturing rely on its book value weights or market value weights in determining its WACC?
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cap Inc. acquired 100% of the voting common stock of Decker Inc. on January 1, year 1. The book value and fair value of Decker’s land account on that date (prior to creating the combination) follow, along with the book value of Cap’s land accounts:
Cap’s book value $280,000
Decker’s book value $220,000
Decker’s fair value $240,000
Assume that Cap issued 12,000 shares of common stock with a $5 par value and a $42 fair value for all of the outstanding stock of Decker. What is the consolidated balance for Land as a result of this acquisition transaction?
520,000 OR 280,000 OR 0, Or 500,000
Dividends received are reported as revenue under the investment account when using the equity method.
TRUE OR FALSE
Cap Co. paid cash for all of the voting common stock of Decker Corp. Decker will continue to exist as a separate corporation. Entries for the consolidation of Cap and Decker would be recorded in
Decker’s general journal
Cap’s general journal
the worksheet
Both Cap’s and Decker’s general journal
A partnership is insolvent and will be unable to pay $30,000 in liabilities currently due. The partnership’s creditors may seek remuneration from any partner they choose.
TRUE OR FALSE
The Schedule of Liquidation provides a listing of transactions to date, current cash, and capital balances.
TRUE OR FALSE
Under the current rate method, common stock would be translated at what rate?
Average rate OR HISTORICAL RATE OR CURRENT RATE OR Beginning of the year rate
In translating a foreign subsidiary’s financial statements, which exchange rate does the current method require for the subsidiary’s assets and liabilities?
the exchange rate in effect as of the balance sheet date
the exchange rate in effect when each asset or liability was acquired
the exchange rate in effect at the start of the current year
the average exchange rate for the current year
The dissolution of a partnership occurs when there is any change in the individuals who make up the partnership
TRUE OR FALSE
In accounting, the term translation refers to
the procedure required to identify a company’s functional currency
a procedure to prepare a foreign subsidiary’s financial statements for consolidation
the calculation of gains or losses from hedging transactions
the calculation of exchange rate gains or losses on individual transactions in foreign currencies
What is a company’s functional currency?
THEe currency of the primary economic environment in which it operates
the currency of the country where it has its headquarters
the currency in which it prepares its financial statements
the currency it chooses to designate as such
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. (TCO 5) Control can be defined as (Points : 3)
the process of setting standards, receiving feedback on actual performance, and taking
corrective action whenever actual performance deviates significantly from plan.
a quantification of plans, stated in either physical or financial terms or both.
identification of corporate objectives.
a comprehensive financial plan.
2. (TCO 5) The budgets that are comprehensive financial plans made up of various individual departmental and activity budgets are the (Points : 3)
operating budgets.
master budgets.
financial budgets.
continuous budgets.
3. (TCO 5) The body that has the responsibility to review the budget, provide policy guidelines and budgetary goals, resolve differences that may arise as the budget is prepared, approve the final budget, and monitor the actual performance of the organization as the year unfolds is called the (Points : 3)
budget director.
budget committee.
controller.
president.
4. (TCO 5) Which is NOT a component of the cash budget? (Points : 3)
Sales forecast
Cash disbursements
Financing
Cash excess or deficiency
5. (TCO 5) A budget that is developed around the actual level of activity is (Points : 3)
a static budget.
a continuous budget.
a flexible budget.
None of the above
6. (TCO 5) A budget that is developed around one particular level of activity is (Points : 3)
a static budget.
a continuous budget.
an incremental budget.
None of the above
7. (TCO 5) Volume variances examine differences between (Points : 3)
the static budget and actual costs.
the flexible budget and the static budget.
the static budget and the rolling budget.
None of the above
8. (TCO 5) Goal congruence means (Points : 3)
there is alignment of organizational and managerial goals.
the organization is aligned to the needs of the environment.
the organization is aligned to shareholder goals.
there is no divergence between organizational and stockholder goals.
9. (TCO 5) Participative budgeting has which potential problem? (Points : 3)
Building slack into a budget
Encouraging individual behavior that is in basic conflict with the goals of the organization
Using budgets as a part of performance evaluations, which could lead to unethical behavior
Managers taking action that will improve performance in the short run but has long-term consequences
10. (TCO 5) Bored Manufacturing has projected the following.
Units to be produced 2,000
Direct materials 4 pounds at $5 $20
Direct labor 1 hour at $8 $8
Variable overhead 75% of direct labor
Fixed overhead 50% of direct labor
Which is the total amount of overhead included in the overhead budget? (Points : 3)
$12,000
$8,000
$30,000
$20,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PROBLEMS
1.March Madness Corporation is having financial difficulty and therefore has asked ACC Bank to restructure its $3 million note outstanding. The present note has 3 years remaining and pays a current rate of interest of 10%. The present market rate for a loan of this nature is 12%. The note was issued at its face value. The note pays interest annually.
REQUIRED:
Presented below are three independent situations. Prepare the journal entry (if any) that March Madness Corporation would make for each of these restructurings on the first day of the restructuring only (you do not need to make any entries after the restructuring date):
- ACC agrees to take an equity interest in March Madness by accepting common stock valued at $2,500,000 in exchange for relinquishing its claim on this note. The common stock has a par value of $2,100,000.
- ACC agrees to modify the terms of the note, indicating that March Madness does not have to pay any interest on the note over the three year period.
- ACC agrees to reduce the principal balance due to $2,500,000 and March Madness does not have to pay any interest on the note over the three year period.
1.At December 31, 2010, Aaron Corporation owes $500,000 on a note payable due February 15, 2011. It issues its audited financials on April 1of each year. How much of the note payable should be considered a current liability under the following circumstances:
- Aaron pays off the note on February 15, 2011 as planned, using company cash.
- Aaron pays off the note on February 15, 2011 as planned, issuing company stock in exchange for the debt.
- Aaron refinances the debt on February 15, 2011 and uses the proceeds from the new long-term debt to pay off the note.
- Aaron tells the auditors that it plans to refinance the debt by February 15, 2011 and even though it has not contacted the bank yet to discuss the refinancing, it has generally been able to secure favorable financing
5.Cleveland Company purchased $80,000 of 9%, 5-year bonds of Greenwood Corporation for $74,086, which provide an 11% return. It intends to hold these bonds to maturity. The fair market value of the securities at year-end is $75,500. Assuming that the bonds are considered held-to-maturity investments, prepare the journal entries for:
- The purchase of the investment
- The receipt of annual interest and discount amortization (assume effective interest method is used)
- The fair market value adjustment at year-end (if necessary)
6.Cleveland Company purchased $80,000 of 9%, 5-year bonds of Greenwood Corporation for $74,086, which provide an 11% return. The fair market value of the securities at year-end is $75,500. Assuming that the bonds are considered available-for-sale investments, prepare the journal entries for:
- The purchase of the investment
- The receipt of annual interest and discount amortization
- The fair market value adjustment at year-end (if necessary)
7.How would the answers to Problem #6 have differed if the securities had been trading securities (You don t have to show the journal entries again you can simply provide a brief statement about any differences).
8.Peyton Imports is contemplating an agreement to lease equipment to a customer for five years. Peyton normally sells the asset for a cash price of $100,000. Assuming that 8% is a reasonable rate of interest, what must the quarterly lease payments (beginning at the inception of the lease) be in order for Peyton to recover its normal selling price, as well as be compensated for financing the asset over the lease term?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting system
Here are some additional instructions and guidelines for the Article Review.
Read one long, or two shorter articles, from the Journal of Accountancy (within last 18 months, your choice of articles) .
Prepare a 2-3 page paper (~1 page per article, if shorter) that:
1) Summarizes the purpose and major points of the article;
2) States whether you agree or disagree with the author’s viewpoint;
3) Explains how the article is related to, or impacts, accounting information systems.
Please attach the article(s) to your paper or provide the web-link.
You will find the articles on the Journal’s website (http://journalofaccountancy.com/).
For an example, one recently published article in the Journal involves a “fraud risk self assessment tool”. As part of an audit, the tool can be completed by the client and will help auditors assess the internal control risks to the client’s operations, accounting systems and financial information. You can find the article here:
http://journalofaccountancy.com/Issues/2013/Mar/20126264.htm
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
10. T/F The two kinds of equities reported on the income statement are liabilities and owner s equity.
11. T/F The balance sheet reports information about the elements in the accounting equation.
12. T/F The owners drawing account is closed to the owners capital account.
13. T/F A balance sheet is a financial statement that reports assers, liabilities, and owners equity on a specific date.
14. T/F The income summary account is a temporary account that does not have a normal balance
15. T/F The temporary accounts are reduced to zero at the end of each fiscal period.
16. T/F Temporary accounts with zero balances are listed on the post-closing trial balance.
17. T/F All balances sheet accounts are closed to the income summary account.
18. T/F The information needed to prepare a balance sheet is obtained from a work sheet s Account Title column and the Balance Sheet columns.
19. T/F Reporting revenue earned and the expenses incurred to earn that revenue in the same fiscal period is an application of the accounting concept Matching Expenses with Revenue
20. T/F Expense accounts are closed by posting a credit to each expense account and debiting the income summary for the total of all expense account balances
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 1 – Red Sauce Canning Company processes tomatoes into catsup, tomato juice, and canned tomatoes. During the summer of 20X2, the joint costs of processing the tomatoes were $420,000. There was no beginning or ending inventories for the summer. Production and sales value information for the summer is as follows:
|
Product
|
Cases
|
Sales Value at Splitoff Point
|
Separable Costs
|
Selling Price
|
|
Catsup
|
100,000
|
$6 per case
|
$3.00 per case
|
$28 per case
|
|
Juice
|
150,000
|
8 per case
|
5.00 per case
|
25 per case
|
|
Canned
|
200,000
|
5 per case
|
2.50 per case
|
10 per case
|
Question: Determine the amount allocated to each product if the estimated net realizable value method is used, and compute the cost per case for each product.
Problem 2 – Zenon Chemical, Inc. processes pine rosin into three products: turpentine, paint thinner, and spot remover. During May, the joint costs of processing were $240,000. Production and sales value information for the month is as follows:
|
Product
|
Units Produced
|
Sales Value at Splitoff Point
|
|
Turpentine
|
6,000 liters
|
$60,000
|
|
Paint thinner
|
6,000 liters
|
50,000
|
|
Spot remover
|
3,000 liters
|
25,000
|
Question: Determine the amount of joint cost allocated to each product if the physical-measure method is used.
Problem 3 – Oregon Lumber processes timber into four products. During January, the joint costs of processing were $280,000. There was no inventory at the beginning of the month. Production and sales value information for the month is as follows:
|
|
|
Sales Value at
|
|
Product
|
Board feet
|
Splitoff Point
|
Ending Inventory
|
|
2 x 4’s
|
6,000,000
|
$0.30 per board foot
|
500,000 bdft.
|
|
2 x 6’s
|
3,000,000
|
0.40 per board foot
|
250,000 bdft.
|
|
4 x 4’s
|
2,000,000
|
0.45 per board foot
|
100,000 bdft.
|
|
Slabs
|
1,000,000
|
0.10 per board foot
|
50,000 bdft.
|
Question: Determine the value of ending inventory if the sales value at splitoff method is used for product costing. Round to three decimal places when necessary.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are a fresh accounting graduate. You have landed a job with a big 3 accounting firm. The first day at your job, your manager approaches you: Hi Bill! Welcome aboard. Hope you like your new cubicle. Have you met everyone? By the way, you will be working with me from tomorrow on Long House Company. This is an important client. They have sent me some information on their projects. Can you provide a report that answers all of the questions listed below? By the way I need it by tomorrow morning at 8 a.m.!”
|
Project
|
Total Contract Price
|
Billings Through 12/31/12
|
Cash Collections Through 12/31/12
|
Contract Costs Incurred Through 12/31/12
|
Estimated Additional Costs to Complete
|
|
A
|
$200,000
|
$100,000
|
$80,000
|
$120,000
|
$90,000
|
|
B
|
250,000
|
50,000
|
45,000
|
40,000
|
180,000
|
|
C
|
180,000
|
180,000
|
150,000
|
120,000
|
0
|
|
D
|
100,000
|
10,000
|
5,000
|
80,000
|
20,000
|
|
E
|
140,000
|
120,000
|
110,000
|
100,000
|
10,000
|
|
870,000
|
460,000
|
390,000
|
460,000
|
300,000
|
- Prepare a schedule of gross profit (loss) to be reported.
- Prepare the entries for projects A and B only.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have been hired as the CFO of a new company and are determining the company’s accounting needs.
- Explain to your staff at least 2 ways in which accounting data are used to make business decisions.
- Explain at least three related accounting terms or theories.
___________________________________________________________________________________
You are an accountant at a local CPA firm that is auditing the accounting records of ABC Company. You have been asked to educate the accounting department about the limitations of the internal control system in preparation for an upcoming audit. During your audit, you have identified that because of a weak internal control system, an adjusting entry for prepaid insurance was not recorded for the first 3 months of the year at $500 per month.
- Identify the limitations of the internal control system. Provide at least 3 limitations.
- Provide at least 2 examples of internal control procedures, and explain how these procedures can be implemented.
- Identify symptoms of a lack of internal control.
- Explain the impact of the missing journal entry on the financial statements of the company
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| 1-2 Pages |
| Details: |
Selecting a for-profit organization of interest, you will research an unusual or conflicting accounting principle that has impacted your chosen organization. The research will require you to present, review and analyze the organizations published accounting statements of the last two years. Specifically, your research paper will:
- Identify the core functions of each department, their strengths and weaknesses, and make recommendations for improvement, as appropriate.
- Identify and describe the underlying problem or conflict.
- Compare the alternative courses of action.
- Explain the effects at issue.
- Recommend options that would be consistent with the organization s accounting practices, accounting processes, and accounting-related departments.
- Include the last two years of published accounting statements.
Present your findings as a 1-2 pages Word document formatted in APA style.
Please submit your assignment.
Submitting your assignment in APA format means, at a minimum, you will need the following:
- TITLE PAGE. Remember the Running head: AND TITLE IN ALL CAPITALS.
- ABSTRACT.A summary of your paper not an introduction. Begin writing in third person voice.
- BODY. The body of your paper begins on the page following the title page and abstract page and must be double-spaced (be careful not to triple- or quadruple-space between paragraphs). The type face should be 12-pt. Times Roman or 12-pt. Courier in regular black type. Do not use color, bold type, or italics except as required for APA level headings and references. The deliverable length of the body of your paper for this assignment is 3-4 pages. In-body academic citations to support your decisions and analysis are required. A variety of academic sources is encouraged.
- REFERENCE PAGE. References that align with your in-body academic sources are listed on the final page of your paper. The references must be in APA format using appropriate spacing, hang indention, italics, and upper and lower case usage as appropriate for the type of resource used. Remember, the Reference Page is not a bibliography but a further listing of the abbreviated in-body citations used in the paper. Every referenced item must have a corresponding in-body citation.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
At a recent meeting, one of your coworkers stated that “Using the right analysis tool will compensate for inexperienced managers.”
How would you reply to your coworker? Consider the following items in your discussion:
- Do the tools help only in certain situations such as routine, daily or rather mundane decisions, like cost controls, quality controls or staffing questions (in term of number of people needed)?
- How can analysis tools help the finance or accounting arms of a company more so than operations managers? (For example, do computers really think? Do they learn from their mistakes? Can they manipulate or change their environment?)
- What happens if the data entered is wrong?
- Respond to another students post.
- If needed, cite references in APA format.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Part 1B
Research the annual reports of various companies to find examples of the following, and explain the meaning of your findings to Craig:
- Equity securities:Find a company that has investments and equity securities listed on its balance sheet.
- Cite the source of the statement(s).
- Look at the footnotes to the financial statements and comment on its holdings in equity securities.
- Explain how this information is used by an investor.
- Cumulative effect:This has an impact on shareholders equity. Find a company that has an impact on their financial statements because of cumulative effect.
- Cite the source of the statement(s).
- Explain its footnotes.
- Explain how this information is used by an investor.
- Leases:Find a company that has leases.
- Cite the source of the statement(s).
- Examine its footnotes. See if it has capital leases or operating leases. What is the difference in the presentation in the financial statements? Provide an explanation of the notes to financial statements about leases.
Part 2
Identify, analyze, and record accounting error corrections.
- Find a company that has accounting changes or correction of errors in its annual report.
- Cite the source of the statement(s).
- Discuss the footnote that explains the accounting change.
- Explain the net impact on the financial statements.
- In 20X0, ABC company purchased machine for $300,000 that had a useful life of 5 years, with a salvage value of $50,000 at the end its life. Depreciation was calculated over 2 years on straight-line basis. In 20X2, it determined that the total life should be 10 years with the salvage value of $5,000 at the end its life.
- Prepare the entry to correct the depreciation for 20X1.
- Prepare the entry to record the depreciation for 20X2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 2: Required Assignment 1 Cost and Decision-Making Analysis
Cheryl Montoya picked up the phone and called her boss, Wes Chan, Vice President of Marketing at Piedmont Fasteners Corporation.
|
Cheryl: Wes, I’m not sure how to go about answering the questions that came up at the meeting with the President yesterday.
Wes: What’s the problem .
Cheryl: The president wanted to know the break-even point for each of the company’s products, but I am having trouble figuring them out.
Wes: I’m sure you can handle it, Cheryl. And, by the way, I need your analysis on my desk tomorrow morning at 8:00 sharp in time for the follow-up meeting at 9:00.
|
Piedmont Fasteners Corporation makes three different clothing fasteners at its manufacturing facility in North Carolina. Data concerning these products appear below:
|
Velcro |
Metal |
Nylon |
| Normal annual sales volume |
100,000 units |
200,000 units |
400,000 units |
| Unit selling price |
$1.65 |
$1.50 |
$0.85 |
| Variable cost per unit |
$1.25 |
$0.70 |
$0.25 |
Total fixed expenses are $400,000 per year.
All three products are sold in highly competitive markets, so the company is unable to raise its prices without losing unacceptably large numbers of customers.
The company has a very effective lean production system, so there is no beginning or ending work in process or finished-goods inventories.
Using the module readings, the Argosy University online library resources, and the Internet, research break-even point and costing systems. Analyze the case based on your research and what you have learned so far in the course.
Respond to the following:
- Calculate the company’s overall break-even point in total sales dollars. Explain your methodology (approximately 2 pages).
- Of the total fixed costs of $400,000: $20,000 could be avoided if the Velcro product were dropped, $80,000 if the Metal product were dropped, and $60,000 if the Nylon product were dropped. The remaining fixed costs of $240,000 consist of common fixed costs such as administrative salaries and rent on the factory building that could be avoided only by going out of business entirely (approximately 2 pages):
- Calculate the break-even point in units for each product. Explain your methodology.
- Determine the overall profit of the company if the company sells exactly the break-even quantity of each product. Present your results.
- Evaluate costing systems for this company. Explain if this company should be using a job-order or process-costing system to accumulate costs (1 page).
Be sure to include your calculations in Microsoft Excel format.
Write a 5 6-page report in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M3_A2.doc.
By Wednesday, September 18, 2013, deliver your assignment to the M3: Assignment 2 Dropbox.
| Assignment 2 Grading Criteria |
Maximum Points |
| Calculated the company’s overall break-even point in total sales dollars and explained your methodology. |
32 |
| Calculated the break-even point in units for each product in the scenario and explained your methodology. |
52 |
| Explained what the overall profit of the company will be if the company sells exactly the break-even quantity of each product and showed your results. |
16 |
| Compared and explained if this company should be using a job-order or process-costing system to accumulate costs. |
80 |
| Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; and displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. |
20 |
| Total: |
200 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1)
NetPerks Co. establishes a $200 petty cash fund on January 1. On January 8, the fund shows $28 in cash along with receipts for the following expenditures: postage, $64; transportation-in, $19; delivery expenses, $36; and miscellaneous expenses, $53. NetPerks uses the perpetual system in accounting for merchandise inventory.
2)
| Match each description with a document in a voucher system. |
|
Description |
Document |
| A. |
A document used to notify the appropriate persons that ordered goods have arrived, including a description of the quantities and condition of goods.
|
(Click to select)Invoice approvalInvoiceReceiving reportPurchase requisitionPurchase orderVoucher |
| B. |
An internal file used to store documents and information to control cash disbursements and to ensure that a transaction is properly authorized and recorded.
|
(Click to select)InvoiceReceiving reportPurchase orderPurchase requisitionVoucherInvoice approval |
| C. |
A document used to place an order with a vendor that authorizes the vendor to ship ordered merchandise at the stated price and terms.
|
(Click to select)Purchase requisitionInvoice approvalPurchase orderVoucherInvoiceReceiving report |
| D. |
A checklist of steps necessary for the approval of an invoice for recording and payment; also known as a check authorization.
|
(Click to select)Purchase requisitionReceiving reportPurchase orderVoucherInvoice approvalInvoice |
| E. |
A document used by department managers to inform the purchasing department to place an order with a vendor.
|
(Click to select)Invoice approvalPurchase requisitionVoucherInvoicePurchase orderReceiving report |
| F. |
An itemized statement of goods prepared by the vendor listing the customer’s name, items sold, sales prices, and terms of sale.
|
(Click to select)Invoice approvalVoucherPurchase orderReceiving reportInvoicePurchase requisition
|
|
Frederick Clinic deposits all cash receipts on the day when they are received and it makes all cash payments by check. At the close of business on June 30, 2011, its Cash account shows a $15,141 debit balance. Frederick Clinic’s June 30 bank statement shows $14,275 on deposit in the bank.
|
| a. |
Outstanding checks as of June 30 total $2,500. |
| b. |
The June 30 bank statement included a $125 debit memorandum for bank services.
|
| c. |
Check No. 919, listed with the canceled checks, was correctly drawn for $645 in payment of a utility bill on June 15. Frederick Clinic mistakenly recorded it with a debit to Utilities Expense and a credit to Cash in the amount of $654.
|
| d. |
The June 30 cash receipts of $3,250 were placed in the bank’s night depository after banking hours and were not recorded on the June 30 bank statement.
|
|
Prepare the adjusting journal entries that Frederick Clinic must record as a result of preparing the bank reconciliation. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
[The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]
|
USA Imports uses the perpetual system in accounting for merchandise inventory and had the following transactions during the month of October.
|
| Oct. |
2 |
Purchased merchandise at a $4,000 price, invoice dated October 2, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
10 |
Received a $400 credit memorandum (at full invoice price) for the return of merchandise that it purchased on October 2.
|
|
17 |
Purchased merchandise at a $4,400 price, invoice dated October 16, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
26 |
Paid for the merchandise purchased on October 17, less the discount.
|
|
31 |
Paid for the merchandise purchased on October 2. Payment was delayed because the invoice was mistakenly filed for payment today. This error caused the discount to be lost.
|
| (a) |
Prepare entries to record the above transactions assuming that USA Imports records invoices at gross amounts. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.) |
| (b) |
Prepare entries to record the above transactions assuming that USA Imports records invoices at net amounts. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is available to reconcile Clark Company s book balance of cash with its bank
statement cash balance as of July 31, 2011.
a. On July 31, the company s Cash account has a $26,193 debit balance, but its July bank statement
shows a $28,020 cash balance.
b. Check No. 3031 for $1,380 and Check No. 3040 for $552 were outstanding on the June 30 bank rec-
onciliation. Check No. 3040 is listed with the July canceled checks, but Check No. 3031 is not. Also,
Check No. 3065 for $336 and Check No. 3069 for $2,148, both written in July, are not among the
canceled checks on the July 31 statement.
c. In comparing the canceled checks on the bank statement with the entries in the accounting records, it
is found that Check No. 3056 for July rent was correctly written and drawn for $1,250 but was errone-
ously entered in the accounting records as $1,230.
d. A credit memorandum enclosed with the July bank statement indicates the bank collected $9,000 cash
on a non-interest-bearing note for Clark, deducted a $45 collection fee, and credited the remainder to
its account. Clark had not recorded this event before receiving the statement.
e. A debit memorandum for $805 lists a $795 NSF check plus a $10 NSF charge. The check had been
received from a customer, Jim Shaw. Clark has not yet recorded this check as NSF.
f. Enclosed with the July statement is a $15 debit memorandum for bank services. It has not yet been
recorded because no previous notification had been received.
g. Clark s July 31 daily cash receipts of $10,152 were placed in the bank s night depository on that date,
but do not appear on the July 31 bank statement.
Required
1. Prepare the bank reconciliation for this company as of July 31, 2011.
2. Prepare the journal entries necessary to bring the company s book balance of cash into conformity
with the reconciled cash balance as of July 31, 2011.
Analysis Component
3. Assume that the July 31, 2011, bank reconciliation for this company is prepared and some items are
treated incorrectly. For each of the following errors, explain the effect of the error on (i) the adjusted
bank statement cash balance and (ii) the adjusted cash account book balance.
a. The company s unadjusted cash account balance of $26,193 is listed on the reconciliation as $26,139.
b. The bank s collection of the $9,000 note less the $45 collection fee is added to the bank statement
cash balance on the reconciliation.
NOTE … ineed the answers on WORD
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Harrell Entertainment sells souvenir T-shirts at each rock concert that it sponsors. The shirts cost $7 each. Any excess shirts can be returned to the manufacturer for a full refund of the purchase price. The sales price is $20 per shirt.
|
|
a.
|
What are the total cost of shirts and cost per shirt if sales amount to 4,000, 4,500, 5,000, 5,500, or 6,000
|
|
b.
|
Is the cost of T-shirts a fixed or a variable cost Explain your answer.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Part IV Seymour Chemical Company makes a variety of cosmetic products, one of which is a skin cream designed to reduce the signs of aging. Seymour produces a relatively small amount (14,000 units) of the cream and is considering the purchase of the product from an outside supplier for $5.70 each. If Seymour purchases from the outside supplier, it would continue to sell and distribute the cream under its own brand name. Seymour s accountant constructed the following profitability analysis.
|
|
|
|
|
Revenue (14,000 units $14.0)
|
$
|
196,000
|
|
|
Unit-level materials costs (14,000 units $1.70)
|
|
(23,800
|
)
|
|
Unit-level labor costs (14,000 units $.60)
|
|
(8,400
|
)
|
|
Unit-level overhead costs (14,000 $.40)
|
|
(5,600
|
)
|
|
Unit-level selling expenses (14,000 $.20)
|
|
(2,800
|
)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Contribution margin
|
|
155,400
|
|
|
Skin cream production supervisor s salary
|
|
(57,000
|
)
|
|
Allocated portion of facility-level costs
|
|
(13,900
|
)
|
|
Product-level advertising cost
|
|
(46,000
|
)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Contribution to companywide income
|
$
|
38,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
a.
|
Calculate the total avoidable costs.
|
|
b-1.
|
Calculate the total avoidable cost per unit.
|
|
b-2.
|
Should Seymour continue to make the product or buy it from the supplier?
|
|
|
|
|
|
c-1.
|
Suppose that Seymour is able to increase sales by 10,000 units (sales will increase to 24,000 units). Calculate the total avoidable costs.
|
|
c-2.
|
At this level of production, should Seymour make or buy the cream?
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Part IV Seymour Chemical Company makes a variety of cosmetic products, one of which is a skin cream designed to reduce the signs of aging. Seymour produces a relatively small amount (14,000 units) of the cream and is considering the purchase of the product from an outside supplier for $5.70 each. If Seymour purchases from the outside supplier, it would continue to sell and distribute the cream under its own brand name. Seymour s accountant constructed the following profitability analysis.
|
|
|
|
|
Revenue (14,000 units $14.0)
|
$
|
196,000
|
|
|
Unit-level materials costs (14,000 units $1.70)
|
|
(23,800
|
)
|
|
Unit-level labor costs (14,000 units $.60)
|
|
(8,400
|
)
|
|
Unit-level overhead costs (14,000 $.40)
|
|
(5,600
|
)
|
|
Unit-level selling expenses (14,000 $.20)
|
|
(2,800
|
)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Contribution margin
|
|
155,400
|
|
|
Skin cream production supervisor s salary
|
|
(57,000
|
)
|
|
Allocated portion of facility-level costs
|
|
(13,900
|
)
|
|
Product-level advertising cost
|
|
(46,000
|
)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Contribution to companywide income
|
$
|
38,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
a.
|
Calculate the total avoidable costs.
|
|
b-1.
|
Calculate the total avoidable cost per unit.
|
|
b-2.
|
Should Seymour continue to make the product or buy it from the supplier?
|
|
|
|
|
|
c-1.
|
Suppose that Seymour is able to increase sales by 10,000 units (sales will increase to 24,000 units). Calculate the total avoidable costs.
|
|
c-2.
|
At this level of production, should Seymour make or buy the cream?
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Brief Exercise 5-1
Presented here are the components in Casilla Company s income statement.
Determine the missing amounts.
Sales Revenue Cost of Goods Sold Gross Profit Operating Expenses Net Income
sales COGS GP Operating exp NP
Year 1 $ 71,200 $ 30,000 $ 12,100
Year 2 $ 108,000 $ 70,000 $ 29,500
Year 3 $ 71,900 $ 109,600 $ 46,200
Brief Exercise 5-8
Assume that Tracy Company uses a periodic inventory system and has these account balances: Purchases $404,000; Purchase Returns and Allowances $13,000; Purchase Discounts $9,000; and Freight-in $16,000.
Determine net purchases and cost of goods purchased.
Brief Exercise 5-9
Assume that Tracy Company uses a periodic inventory system and has these account balances: Purchases $404,000; Purchase Returns and
Allowances $13,000; Purchase Discounts $9,000; and Freight-in $16,000. Tracy Company has beginning inventory of $60,000, ending inventory of $90,000, and net sales of $612,000.
Determine the amounts to be reported for cost of goods sold and gross profit.
Brief Exercise 5-10
Durbin Corporation reported net sales of $250,000, cost of goods sold of $150,000, operating expenses of $50,000, net income of $32,500,
beginning total assets of $520,000, and ending total assets of $600,000.
Calculate profit margin and gross profit rate. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 10%.)
Exercise 5-6 (Part Level Submission)
Presented below is information for Zhou Co. for the month of January 2014.
Cost of goods sold $212,000 Rent expense $32,000
Freight-out 7,000 Sales discounts 8,000
Insurance expense 12,000 Sales returns and allowances 20,000
Salaries and wages expense 60,000 Sales revenue 370,000
(a) Prepare an income statement using the multi-step format. Assume a 25% tax rate.
(b) Calculate the profit margin and the gross profit rate. (Round answers to 1 decimal place, e.g. 15.2%.)
Problem 5-2A
McCoy Warehouse distributes hardback books to retail stores and extends credit terms of 2/10, n/30 to all of its customers. During the
month of June, the following merchandising transactions occurred.
June 1 Purchased books on account for $1,040 (including freight) from Carlin Publishers, terms 2/10, n/30.
3 Sold books on account to the Goldschmidt bookstore for $1,200. The cost of the merchandise sold was $720.
6 Received $40 credit for books returned to Carlin Publishers.
9 Paid Carlin Publishers in full.
15 Received payment in full from the Goldschmidt bookstore.
17 Sold books on account to Town Crier for $1,200. The cost of the merchandise sold was $730.
20 Purchased books on account for $720 from Good Book Publishers, terms 1/15, n/30.
24 Received payment in full from Town Crier.
26 Paid Good Book Publishers in full.
28 Sold books on account to Emporia Bookstore for $1,300. The cost of the merchandise sold was $780.
30 Granted Emporia Bookstore $130 credit for books returned costing $80.
Journalize the transactions for the month of June for McCoy Warehouse, using a perpetual inventory system. (Credit account titles are
automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually. Record journal entries in the order presented in the
problem. Round answers to 0 decimal places e.g. 15,222.)
Problem 5-9A (Part Level Submission)
At the beginning of the current season on April 1, the ledger of Flint Hills Pro Shop showed Cash $ 2,500 ; Inventory $ 3,500 ; and Common
Stock $ 6,000 . The following transactions occurred during April 2014.
Apr. 5 Purchased golf bags, clubs, and balls on account from Akers Co. $ 1,500 , terms 3 /10, n/60.
7 Paid freight on Akers Co. purchases $ 80 .
9 Received credit from Akers Co. for merchandise returned $ 200 .
10 Sold merchandise on account to members $ 1,340 , terms n/30.
12 Purchased golf shoes, sweaters, and other accessories on account from Palmer Sportswear $ 830 , terms 1 /10, n/30.
14 Paid Akers Co. in full.
17 Received credit from Palmer Sportswear for merchandise returned $ 30 .
20 Made sales on account to members $ 810 , terms n/30.
21 Paid Palmer Sportswear in full.
27 Granted credit to members for clothing that did not fit properly $ 80 .
30 Received payments on account from members $ 1,220 .
(a)Journalize the April transactions using a periodic inventory system. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is
entered. Do not indent manually. Record journal entries in the order presented in the problem.)
(b)Using T accounts, enter the beginning balances in the ledger accounts and post the April transactions. (Post entries in the order of journal
entries posted in part a.)
(c)Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2014.
(d)Prepare an income statement through gross profit, assuming inventory on hand at April 30 is $4,263.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| 5-10 PowerPoint slides / can include an Excel file for financial analysis |
| Details: |
Choose a public company in the food industry. Analyze the financial statements and assess whether the financial performance has improved or declined year-over-year.
Analysis techniques include the following:
- Comparative financial statements
- Trend analysis
- Ratio analysis
- Percentage analysis
Presentation of 5 10 PowerPoint slides that includes the following:
- At least 3 slides relevant to the analysis prepared
- An analysis of the performance of the firm based on the analysis tools used
- A summary of the company’s financial performance and assessment of whether it has improved or declined year-over-year in terms of profitability, asset utilization, and liquidity
Background on Course Research Requirements: In the business world, it is important to use research to strengthen points made in presentations and projects. Learning to use the search functions in databases for research is a crucial critical thinking skill that complements other research techniques.
There are two main types of databases. You must stay away from inferior Web sites with anonymous writers; articles found on consultant Web sites, and materials on Web sites that are not reputable. Dictionaries and encyclopedias most often repeat the information from textbooks. Acceptable Internet resources include, among others, government sites (especially for statistics). Wikipedia or any open source Web sites are not permitted. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Many corporations and government entities have an internal auditing function and a separate fraud investigation function either as a subunit of internal auditing or security or as a separate unit within the organization. In addition, many accounting and consulting firms have a forensic, investigation, and litigation support services.
The financial forensic investigation techniques and procedures used within an organization (in-house) or from a professional contracted service firm can come about in different ways. For example, some forensic techniques for analyzing financial statements are common for financial auditors, fraud auditors, or forensic accountants and investigators. Other techniques, such as using behavior detection methods and interviewing methods, are primarily used in specific fraud investigation engagements.
Please post an answer to the following questions. Support your answers with academic or real-life criminal justice examples to accentuate your point. Also, you must provide at least 1 feedback post to one of your classmates.
- Research and locate a company who was audited by an outside source and explain the method, technique, and findings of an audit.
- Do you think that it is a wise investment to contract services that provide security against fraud or should it be an in-house department that provides fraud security services?
- Include additional information that you think is appropriate or interesting concerning ethical or unethical business behavior.
- Cite your references in APA format.
- Provide one feedback post to another classmate.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The Modified Accelerated Cost Recovery System (MACRS) specifies which of the following depreciation methods for buildings
A. 150% declining-balance.
B. Double-declining-balance.
C. Straight line.
D. Buildings are not depreciable assets.
2. The Modified Accelerated Cost Recovery System (MACRS) specifies which of the following depreciation methods for land
A. 150% declining-balance.
B. Double-declining-balance.
C. Straight line.
D. Land is not a depreciable asset.
3. If an organization has an obligation to pay $5,000 to a supplier two years from now, the present value of the obligation:
A. is less than $5,000.
B. is $5,000.
C. is more than $5,000.
D. could be calculated using an annuity factor from the present value tables.
4. Depreciation, in accounting, is a process that results in:
A. depreciable assets being reported in the balance sheet at their fair market value.
B. accumulating cash for the replacement of the asset.
C. an accurate measurement of the economic usefulness of an asset.
D. spreading the cost of an asset over its useful life to the entity.
Use the below present value tables for problems 5, 6 and 7
5. The present value of $3,000 to be received in 7 years at 10% is:
A. $616.22
B. $1,539.60
C. $3,000.00
D. $5,845.67
6. The present value of $3,000 to be received every year for 9 years, at 10%, is:
A. $7,073.80
B. $12,273.00
C. $17,277.00
D. $27,000.00
7. The present value of an obligation of $4,000 payable in 7 years at 8% is:
A. $1,760
B. $2,334
C. $3,206
D. $3,680
8. A particular common stock has an annual cash dividend of $2.00 per share and is predicted to have a market value of $30 per share 5 years from now. Assuming a discount rate of 10%, a fair market price for the stock today is:
A. $20.00
B. $26.21
C. $37.58
D. $56.21
9. Psyche Company wants to acquire Trim Company. Trim’s ROI has been above average for its industry; net income has averaged $70,000 a year more than the industry average. These “excess” earnings are expected to continue at this amount for 5 years. Assuming a discount rate of 8%, how much goodwill will arise from Psyches’ purchase of Trim
A. $40,836
B. $88,157
C. $279,489
D. $350,000
10. Leasehold is an example of which of the following types of assets
A. Current asset.
B. Property, plant and equipment.
C. Goodwill.
D. Intangible asset.
11. The principal challenge to calculating depletion is estimating:
A. the cost of the asset.
B. the salvage value of the exploration equipment.
C. the demand for the product.
D. the quantity of material to be recovered.
12. Long-lived, intangible assets such as leasehold improvements, patents, and copyrights are all subject to:
A. depreciation
B. amortization
C. depletion
D. consolidation
13. When a depreciable asset is sold:
A. a gain arises if the sales proceeds exceed the net book value.
B. a loss arises if the sales proceeds exceed the net book value.
C. any cash received results in a gain.
D. depreciation expense is adjusted so there is no gain or loss.
14. Goodwill is an asset that arises because the present value of an acquired company’s estimated future earnings, discounted at the acquiring firm’s ROI:
A. is less than the fair market value of the net assets of the acquired company.
B. is more than the fair market value of the net assets of the acquired company.
C. is more than the fair market value of the net assets of the acquiring company.
D. is less than the fair market value of the net assets of the acquiring company.
15. The intangible asset “goodwill:”
A. represents the management team’s assessment of its value to the company.
B. may arise when one company purchases another company.
C. arises because the market value of a company’s assets is greater than cost.
D. all of the above are correct.
16. Many current liabilities are affected by accrual accounting entries. This happens because:
A. liabilities are usually paid when they are incurred.
B. accrual accounting involves recognizing liabilities before they are paid.
C. the only way to reduce a liability account balance is with an adjusting entry.
D. accrual accounting frequently involves recognizing liabilities before they are incurred.
17. Which of the following is not usually associated with bonds
A. Coupon rate.
B. Maturity value.
C. Face amount.
D. Maturity rate.
18. An Accounts Payable could result from which of the following transactions
A. Purchasing accounts for cash.
B. Purchasing property, plant and equipment on credit.
C. Purchasing goods and services from suppliers on credit.
D. All of the above.
19. The current liability for Wages Payable (or Accrued Payroll) represents the:
A. gross pay earned by employees for which they have not yet been paid.
B. net pay earned by employees for which they have not yet been paid.
C. employer’s federal and state payroll tax obligation.
D. employer’s liability for various with holdings taken out of the gross pay earned by employees.
20. The financial leverage characteristic of long-term debt results in:
A. a reduction of the risk that creditors will not be paid.
B. a magnification of ROE relative to what it would be without long-term debt.
C. a magnification of ROI relative to what it would be without long-term debt.
D. the deductibility, for income tax purposes, of dividends to stockholders.
21. When a company issues a bond at a premium:
A. the company is more profitable than most companies in its industry.
B. investors perceive the bond to be a very safe investment.
C. the investors’ interest income will be less than the interest received each year.
D. the investors’ interest income will be more than the interest received each year.
22. Which of the following is not sometimes associated with bonds
A. Debenture.
B. Callable.
C. Cumulative.
D. Convertible
23. If the market price of a bond exceeds its face amount:
A. the coupon rate is less than the market interest rate.
B. the coupon rate is more than the market interest rate.
C. the company’s ROI and working capital have been increasing over time.
D. the maturity rate has been declining.
24. The market value of a bond is the sum of the present value of future interest payments and the present value of the amount to be repaid at maturity, discounted at:
A. the market rate.
B. the coupon rate.
C. the dividend rate.
D. the prime rate.
25. Financial leverage refers to which of the following
A. The difference between the rate of return earned on assets (ROI) and the rate of return earned on owners’ equity (ROE).
B. The difference between the rate of return earned on current assets and the rate of return earned on retained earnings.
C. The leverage a firm obtains from increasing production.
D. Decreasing fixed costs per unit by increasing production.
26. When a company issues a bond at a discount:
A. the company will pay less than the face amount of the bond at its maturity.
B. the company will pay more than the face amount of the bond at its maturity.
C. the company’s interest expense will be less than the interest paid each year.
D. the company’s interest expense will be more than the interest paid each year.
27. When bonds are issued at a premium:
A. interest expense on the bonds will be less than the interest paid.
B. interest expense on the bonds will be more than the interest paid.
C. the bonds are sold for less than their face amount.
D. the coupon interest rate is less than the market interest rate.
28. Which of the following is (are) a true statement(s) pertaining to bonds
A. Bonds can be sold at a discount, par, or payable.
B. Bonds can be sold at a discount, par, or premium.
C. The SEC sets the market price of a bond.
D. The issuing firm sets the price of a bond.
E. None of the above.
29. Which of the following is true regarding bond discounts and/or premiums
A. Bond discount is amortized but bond premium is not.
B. Bond premium is amortized but bond discount is not.
C. Neither bond discount nor premium is amortized.
D. Both bond discount and premium are amortized.
30. The amortization of bond discount:
A. increases the cash paid to bondholders for interest.
B. results in bond interest expense being greater than the interest paid to bondholders.
C. results in bond interest expense being less than the interest paid to bondholders.
D. reduces the carrying value of bonds payable on the balance sheet.
31. Factors that usually affect retained earnings directly include:
A. net income or loss, and dividends.
B. extraordinary items and losses from discontinued operations.
C. stock dividends and gains or losses from the sale of treasury stock.
D. net income or loss, and the issuance of stock at an amount in excess of par value.
32. In comparison to the owners’ equity section of a corporation’s balance sheet, owners’ equity of a proprietorship or partnership:
A. normally does not make a distinction between invested capital and retained earnings.
B. normally uses “Capital” accounts for each individual owner, rather than a “Retained Earnings” account for all of the owners.
C. normally uses a “Drawings” account for each individual owner, rather than a “Dividends” account for all of the owners.
D. all of the above.
33. The declaration of a cash dividend by the directors results in:
A. a decrease in cash and a decrease in retained earnings.
B. a decrease in retained earnings and an increase in current liabilities.
C. a decrease in net income and a decrease in cash.
D. a decrease in net income and an increase in current liabilities.
34. In most states, par value of issued shares represents:
A. Legal capital.
B. No par capital.
C. Noncontrolling capital.
D. Corporate capital.
35. The term preemptive right pertains to which of the following
A. The Board of Directors rights in liquidation.
B. Present shareholders right to purchase shares from any additional share issuances.
C. Present shareholders right to purchase treasury shares when reissued.
D. Preferred stockholders right to dividends.
36. Balance sheet disclosures for preferred stock include all of the following except:
A. The number of shares issued.
B. The number of shares outstanding.
C. The liquidating or redemption value.
D. The credit or market value.
E. The number of shares authorized.
37. The declaration date pertains to:
A. The date used to determine who receives dividends.
B. The date on which the board of directors declares it’s going to liquidate the firm.
C. The date on which the board of directors declares a dividend.
D. The date a dividend is paid.
38. Fred Jones owns 56 shares of the Robust Corporation’s stock. Robust announces a 3 for 2 stock split. How many shares will Fred have after this split
A. 178 shares.
B. 112 shares.
C. 84 shares.
D. 56 shares.
39. Braco has 40,000 shares of $100 par value common stock outstanding, and 10,000 shares in the treasury. The number of additional shares that would be issued in a 5% stock dividend is:
A. 500
B. 1,000
C. 1,500
D. 2,000
40. When a stock dividend is declared and issued:
A. total paid-in capital does not change.
B. total owners’ equity does not change.
C. the balance in the retained earnings account is decreased by the par value of the shares issued in the dividend.
D. total paid-in capital is decreased by the market value of the shares issued in the dividend.
41. When a company splits its common stock 3 for 1:
A. total paid-in capital increases by a factor of 3.
B. the balance in the retained earnings account is decreased by the market value of the shares issued.
C. the market value of the company’s stock falls by two-thirds.
D. the shareholders are assured of receiving larger cash dividends.
42. The principal reason for a company having a common stock split is to:
A. increase the total cash dividends paid to stockholders.
B. capitalize retained earnings.
C. decrease total owners’ equity.
D. decrease the market value per share of common stock.
43. When a firm purchases its own shares for the treasury:
A. total owners’ equity is decreased.
B. total owners’ equity is increased.
C. the balance in the retained earnings account is decreased.
D. paid-in capital is decreased.
44. If a firm sells treasury stock for more than its cost:
A. a gain is recognized in the income statement.
B. the balance in the retained earnings account is increased.
C. additional paid-in capital is increased.
D. total owners’ equity does not change.
45. The statement of changes in retained earnings for the year shows:
A. the retained earnings balance at the beginning of the year.
B. amounts received from the sale of additional common stock during the year.
C. extraordinary gains or losses during the year.
D. the effect of a stock split during the year.
46. Which of the following is an accurate statement regarding a statement of cash flows
A. Only cash items that affect the income statement are included.
B. Only material cash items that affect the income statement are included.
C. Material non-cash transactions are included.
D. Immaterial financing activities that affect cash do not need to be included.
E. None of the above.
47. In the statement of cash flows, the amount of depreciation and amortization expense is added back to net income because:
A. these expenses do not affect cash, but were subtracted in the determination of net income.
B. these expenses affect investing activities, not operating activities.
C. the cash disbursements for these accrued expenses will be made in a future period.
D. these expenses are recognized for accounting purposes, but they do not represent economic costs.
48. In the statement of cash flows, an increase in the accounts receivable balance from the beginning of the period to the end of the period would:
A. be added to net income because this represents earned revenues that have not been collected.
B. be subtracted from net income because this represents earned revenue provided by operating earnings.
C. be added to net income because this means that revenues were less than cash collected.
D. be subtracted from net income because this means that revenues were more than cash collected.
49. Revenue may be recognized:
A. from the sale of a company’s own common stock.
B. if a company trades inventory at its usual sale value for newspaper advertising.
C. if management believes the market value of land held for future development rises.
D. in 2010 from the sale of subscriptions of a magazine to be published in 2011.
50. The term, “realization,” in revenue recognition refers to which of the following
A. The entity has completed, or substantially completed, the activities it must perform to be entitled to the revenue benefits.
B. The product or service has been exchanged for cash, claims to cash, or an asset that is readily convertible to a known amount of cash or claims to cash.
C. The entity has received an irrevocable order for goods or services.
D. Cash has been received with an irrevocable order for goods or services.
E. None of the above.
ESSAY:
1.Use the appropriate information from the data provided below for the year ended December 31, 2009 to calculate the following:
a. Operating income
b. Income from continuing operations
c. Net income
Cost of goods sold $117,000
General and administrative expenses 48,000
Net cash provided by financing activities 69,000
Dividends paid 16,000
Extraordinary loss from a flood,net of
tax savings of $32,000 74,000
Income tax expenses 11,000
Other Selling expenses 26,000
Net sales 278,000
Advertising expenses 39,000
Accounts receivable 33,000
2. The balance sheet caption for common stock is:
Common stock, $10 par value, 7,000,000 shares authorized, 5,700,000 shares issued, 5,500,000 shares outstanding.
(a.) Calculate the dollar amount that will be presented opposite of this caption.
(b.) Calculate the total amount of a cash dividend of $1.00 per share.
(c.) What accounts for the difference between issued shares and outstanding shares
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The cash budget is especially important to a firm when:
A. there is not a lot of confidence in the sales forecast.
B. it has a relatively large amount of operating cash.
C. the P/E ratio has been trending downwards.
D. it may have to negotiate a short-term bank loan.
2. Which of the following costs are included in the cost classification that is based on the relationship between total cost and volume of activity
A. Variable cost and fixed cost.
B. Direct cost and indirect cost.
C. Product cost and period cost.
D. Committed cost and discretionary cost.
3. Which of the following costs are included in the cost classification that is based on the time frame perspective
A. Variable cost and fixed cost.
B. Direct cost and indirect cost.
C. Product cost and period cost.
D. Committed cost and discretionary cost.
4. A cost that is incurred because of a long-range policy decision is known as a:
A. discretionary cost.
B. committed cost.
C. continuous cost.
D. standard cost.
5. Which of the following is not an important factor to consider when preparing a sales forecast
A. The state of the economy.
B. Seasonal demand variations.
C. A change in the management team.
D. Competitors’ actions.
6. Which of the following is a plan for acquiring the resources needed to complete the manufacturing activities that will satisfy the organization’s sales forecast
A. Sales budget
B. Raw materials budget
C. Production budget
D. Direct labor budget
7. Which of the following lists the components of the master budget in correct chronological order
A. Direct labor budget, production budget, cost of goods sold budget.
B. Sales budget, production budget, cash budget.
C. Sales budget, raw materials budget, production budget.
D. Cash budget, production budget, manufacturing overhead budget.
8. The raw materials budgeted to be purchased for the period is equal to:
A. ending inventory + raw material used – beginning inventory.
B. ending inventory + ending inventory – raw material used.
C. beginning inventory – ending inventory + raw material used.
D. beginning inventory + raw material used – ending inventory.
9. The operating expense budget is based on the:
A. sales budget.
B. production budget.
C. manufacturing overhead budget.
D. cash budget.
10. Depreciation on the office equipment would appear in which of the following budgets
A. Production budget.
B. Manufacturing overhead budget.
C. Operating expense budget.
D. Cash budget.
11. Which of the following items would be included in the operating expense budget
A. Sales commissions.
B. Raw material purchases.
C. Cash receipts.
D. Cost of goods sold.
12. Which of the following would not appear in the operating expense budget .
A. Sales commissions.
B. Delivery expense.
C. Advertising.
D. Depreciation on the production equipment
13. What is the “key” to the entire operating budget
A. The forecast of operating activity.
B. The budgeted income statement.
C. The budgeted balance sheet.
D. The production/purchases budget.
14. Which of the following is the last budgeted financial statement to be prepared
A. Budgeted income statement.
B. Budgeted balance sheet.
C. Cash budget.
D. It doesn’t matter which one is prepared last.
15. Which of the following lists the components of the master budget in correct chronological order
A. Cash budget, budgeted income statement, budgeted balance sheet.
B. Budgeted balance sheet, cash budget, budgeted income statement.
C. Budgeted income statement, cash budget, budgeted balance sheet.
D. It doesn’t matter in which order they are prepared.
16. Val’s travel budget for October was $720, based on her plan to drive 3,000 miles at a cost of $0.24 per mile. During October, she actually drove 2,800 miles at a total cost of $700. A flexed budget performance report would show a variance of:
A. $50 F
B. $20 F
C. $28 U
D. $30 U
17. If it is to be most useful for control purposes, what variance should be reported to the supervisor responsible for the number of pounds of corn syrup used in the manufacture of a candy bar
A. Raw material price variance, expressed in cents per pound.
B. Raw material usage variance, expressed as a total cost for the month.
C. Raw material usage variance, expressed in total pounds for the month.
D. Raw material usage variance, expressed in total pounds for the week.
18. The purchasing agent of an organization acquired some raw materials at a bargain price, even though she knew that their quality was lower than that of the materials customarily used. This action resulted in a favorable raw materials purchase price variance that might very well have been more than offset by:
A. an unfavorable raw materials usage variance.
B. a favorable direct labor efficiency variance.
C. an unfavorable variable overhead spending variance.
D. an unfavorable direct labor rate variance.
19. When an appropriately established and effective standard cost system is used to value inventory:
A. cumulative variances are deferred.
B. a significant unfavorable net variance may be reported as an expense of the current period.
C. a significant favorable net variance may be reported as an expense of the current period.
D. the explanatory notes to the financial statements will explain the disposition of the net variance.
20. A performance report for direct labor shows a variance between the budget and actual amounts. This difference is a:
A. budget variance.
B. direct labor efficiency variance.
C. direct labor spending variance.
D. direct labor rate variance.
21. If they are to be useful to managers, variances should be reported:
A. simultaneously to all managers within a week after the end of the month.
B. in dollar amounts as soon as all costs are known.
C. in physical terms or dollar amounts as promptly as feasible.
D. in physical terms and dollar amounts if the variance exceeds 10% of the budget.
22. What should the decision rule be to determine what budget variances to investigate
A. Investigate unfavorable variances only.
B. Investigate favorable variances only.
C. Investigate if the variance is significant.
D. Investigate all variances.
23. Which of the following variances is not determined during an overhead variance analysis
A. Volume variance.
B. Budget variance.
C. Spending variance.
D. Price variance.
24. The fixed manufacturing overhead variance caused by actual activity being different from the estimated activity used in calculating the predetermined overhead application rate is called the:
A. spending variance.
B. budget variance.
C. efficiency variance.
D. volume variance.
25. The part of the variable overhead budget variance due to the difference between actual hours required and standard hours allowed for the work done is called the:
A. variable overhead spending variance.
B. variable overhead budget variance.
C. variable overhead efficiency variance.
D. variable overhead volume variance.
26. The part of the variable overhead budget variance due to the difference between actual variable overhead cost and the standard cost allowed for the actual inputs used is called the:
A. variable overhead spending variance.
B. variable overhead budget variance.
C. variable overhead efficiency variance.
D. variable overhead volume variance.
27. If the net variance of a business using standard costing is significant relevant to total production cost, the net variance should be:
A. assigned to cost of goods sold.
B. allocated between work in process, finished goods, and cost of goods sold.
C. carried forward to the next accounting period.
D. none of the above.
28. If the net of all variances is immaterial relative to the total production costs incurred during the period, the net variance is:
A. treated as an adjustment to cost of goods sold.
B. ignored.
C. treated as an adjustment to work in process, finished goods, and cost of goods sold.
D. treated as an adjustment to manufacturing overhead.
29. The preferred format for a segmented income statement emphasizes:
A. direct and common fixed costs.
B. variable and fixed costs.
C. operating expenses and fixed costs.
D. variable costs and operating expenses.
30. Which of the following is a true statement pertaining to segment income statements
A. Only present the individual segments’ net income, not total company net income.
B. Only include variable costs.
C. Do not present a segment margin.
D. Do not include arbitrarily allocated common fixed expenses when calculating segment margin.
E. All of the above.
31. How is performance evaluated for a cost center
A. Actual costs incurred compared to budgeted costs.
B. Actual segment margin compared to budgeted segment margin.
C. Comparison of actual and budgeted return on investment (ROI) based on segment margin and assets controlled by the segment.
D. None of the above.
32. How is performance evaluated for a profit center
A. Actual costs incurred compared to budgeted costs.
B. Actual segment margin compared to budgeted segment margin.
C. Comparison of actual and budgeted return on investment (ROI) based on segment margin and assets controlled by the segment.
D. None of the above.
33. The key to analyzing a sell as is or process further decision is to determine that:
A. opportunity costs exceed sunk costs.
B. incremental revenues exceed incremental costs.
C. differential costs do not exist.
D. all allocated costs are included in the decision.
34. In a make or buy decision which of the following costs would be considered relevant
A. Avoidable costs.
B. Unavoidable costs.
C. Sunk costs.
D. Allocated costs.
35. Which of the following qualitative factors favors the buy option in the make or buy decision
A. Production scheduling.
B. Utilization of idle capacity.
C. Ability to control quality.
D. Technical expertise of supplier.
36. Product Z sells for $18 per unit as is but if it is enhanced it can be sold for $24 per unit. The enhancement process will cost $50,000 for 10,000 units. If the 10,000 units of Product Z are sold as is without further processing, the company:
A. will incur an incremental profit of $10,000.
B. will incur an opportunity cost of $10,000.
C. will incur an incremental profit of $1 per unit.
D. will incur an incremental loss of $6 per unit.
37. A(n) _____________ is the minimum cost that can be incurred, which when subtracted from the selling price, allows for a desired profit to be earned.
A. relevant cost.
B. opportunity cost.
C. incremental cost.
D. target cost.
38. Product X sells for $80 per unit in the marketplace and ABC Company requires a 35% minimum profit margin on all product lines. In order to compete in this market, the target cost for Product X must be equal to or lower than:
A. $28
B. $45
C. $52
D. $80
39. Which of the following costs are not relevant in a decision to continue or discontinue a segment of the organization
A. Avoidable costs.
B. Unavoidable costs.
C. Opportunity costs.
D. Differential costs.
40. The decision to continue or discontinue a segment of the business should focus on:
A. sales minus total variable expenses and total fixed expenses.
B. sales minus total variable expenses and avoidable fixed expenses of the segment.
C. sales minus total variable expenses and allocated fixed expenses of the business.
D. none of the above.
41. The decision for solving production mix problems involving multiple products and scarce production resources should focus on:
A. gross profit of each product.
B. sales price of each product.
C. contribution margin per unit of scarce resource.
D. contribution margin of each product.
42. XYZ Company produces three products: A, B, and C. Product A has a contribution margin of $20 and requires 1 hour of machine time. Product B has a contribution margin of $30 and requires 2 hours of machine time. Product C has a contribution margin of $36 and requires 1.5 hours of machine time. If machine hours are considered scarce, in what product mix order should XYZ Company schedule the production of Products A, B, and C for the available machine hours
A. First A, then B, then C.
B. First C, then A, then B.
C. First C, then B, then A.
D. First B, then C, then A.
43. A principal difference between operational budgeting and capital budgeting is the time frame of the budget. Because of this difference, capital budgeting:
A. is an activity that involves only the financial staff.
B. is done on a rolling budget period basis.
C. focuses on the present value of cash flows from investments.
D. is concerned with a long-term net income forecast.
44. Capital budgeting differs from operational budgeting because:
A. depreciation calculations are required.
B. it considers the time value of money.
C. operating expenses are not relevant.
D. capital budgets don’t affect cash flow.
45. Capital expenditure analysis, which leads to the capital budget, attempts to determine the impact of a proposed capital expenditure on the organization’s:
A. segment margin.
B. contribution margin.
C. ROI.
D. cost of capital.
Essay:
1. The cost formula for the maintenance department of the Eifel Co. is $6,500 per month plus $3.50 per machine hour used by the production department.
a. Calculate the maintenance cost that would be budgeted for the month of May in which 5,700 machine hours are planned to be used.
b. Prepare an appropriate performance report for the maintenance department assuming that 5,860 machine hours were actually used in the month of May, and the total maintenance cost incurred was $28,010.
2. Breaded Oak, Inc. has a policy that requires 20 percent of the expected sales of its product to be on hand at the end of the prior month. Forecasted sales, in units, for the months of January through April are as follows:
January 36,000 units
February 42,000 units
March 58,000 units
April 52,000 units
(a.) Calculate the number of units planned for ending inventory for January, February, and March.
(b.) Calculate the number of units budgeted to be produced in January, February, and March.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
-
Introduction
Making sense of accounting data on financial statements can be difficult. Thankfully, combining numbers from income statements, balance sheets, and other data provides a starting point to analyze a company’s financial results. You now have the opportunity to demonstrate your prowess by identifying and computing financial ratios.
Instructions
For this assignment, use the BUS3061 Assignment u05a1 Template (listed in Resources).
Analyze and compute the necessary financial ratios. The Financial Statements worksheet in the template contains the income statement, balance sheets, and additional information needed. The Ratio Analysis worksheet contains space for your calculations and answers.
- Toggle Drawer
Assignment 2
On the template, you will find selected ratios for a company over a two-year period. Compare the ratios, and on a separate document (Word or Excel), submit your answers to the following questions:
- What does the calculation of each ratio represent?
- How does year one compare with year two, and what trend can be seen when you compare the two years?
- Is the trend from year one to year two positive or negative?
- What are the possible reasons for the trend?
- What recommendations do you have for turning a negative trend to a positive trend?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
-
[u02a1] Unit 2 Assignment 1
CATEGORIZING BALANCE SHEET ACCOUNTS
Resources
- Categorizing Balance Sheet Accounts Scoring Guide.
- BUS3061 Assignment u02a1 Template
Accounts are either temporary or permanent, with the temporary ones assigned to revenues and expenses, leaving the permanent ones to reside on the balance sheet. Because the balance sheet reflects all journal entries affecting the business since inception, knowledge of the placement of each account is essential to preparing the statement. Because you have been studying the parts of the balance sheet, this is an opportunity to apply your knowledge to an important piece of the accounting cycle.
Instructions
For this assignment, use the BUS3061 Assignment u02a1 Template (listed in Resources).
Determine the correct balance sheet category for each of the following accounts:
- Accounts payable.
- Equipment.
- Prepaid rent.
- Short-term investments.
- Accounts receivable.
- Land.
- Common stock.
- Cash.
- Accumulated depreciation.
- Goodwill.
- Bonds payable.
- Retained earnings.
- Preferred stock.
- Mortgage payable.
- Salaries payable.
- Allowance for uncollectibles.
- Inventories.
- Patent.
- Income tax payable.
- Security deposits.
- Toggle Drawer
[u02a2] Unit 2 Assignment 2
BALANCE SHEET PREPARATION
Resources
- Balance Sheet Preparation Scoring Guide.
- BUS3061 Assignment u02a2 Template
Reporting the results of an organization’s business transactions requires the preparation of financial statements that will be shared with both internal and external users of financial data. For this reason, preparation of the balance sheet, or statement of financial position, is an essential skill and requires the accountant to take information from the accounting system and summarize it in a single location. This assignment demonstrates your skill in the preparation of this financial statement.
Instructions
For this assignment, use the BUS3061 Assignment u02a2 Template (listed in Resources).
Use the following account information to prepare the 2011 balance sheet for Blaze Industries. Be sure to use the proper format, similar to the one that begins on the bottom of page 115 of the McCrary text, Mastering Financial Accounting Essentials.
- Wages payable: $880.00.
- Supplies: $80.00.
- Common stock: $10,000.00.
- Equipment: $217,200.00.
- Interest payable: $3,600.00.
- Retained earnings: $27,520.00.
- Accounts receivable: $400.00.
- Long-term bonds payable: $150,000.00.
- Cash: $3,050.00.
- Advances from customers: $460.00.
- Prepaid insurance: $830.00.
- Accumulated depreciation: $29,100.00.
- Toggle Drawer
[u02a3] Unit 2 Assignment 3
INCOME STATEMENT PREPARATION
Resources
- Income Statement Preparation Scoring Guide.
- BUS3061 Assignment u02a3 Template
As you have learned, generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) require organizations to prepare both an income statement and a balance sheet. Before the balance sheet can be prepared, the organization’s net income must be determined. This requires the accountant to pull together data from numerous system accounts and other sources of information. In this assignment, you will demonstrate your skill in putting together the necessary account data and preparing an income statement in good form.
Instructions
For this assignment, use the BUS3061 Assignment u02a3 Template (listed in Resources) to prepare an income statement.
- Toggle Drawer
[u02a4] Unit 2 Assignment 4
ANALYZING ITEMS IN THE FINANCIAL STATEMENT
Resources
- Analyzing Items in the Financial Statement Scoring Guide.
- BUS3061 Assignment u02a4 Template
Balance sheets do not always balance once they are prepared, and income statements do not always contain correct account data. This can cause havoc across the accounting department and requires the accountant to locate the missing or incorrect data. Financial statement preparation will be an important skill during this process, as you will discover when you determine the missing amounts in the statement in this assignment.
Instructions
For this assignment, use the BUS3061 Assignment u02a4 Template (listed in Resources).
In each of the two sets of organization financial statement information, two items have been omitted. Determine the missing amounts and fill them in on the template to complete the financial statement information.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1 of 30 3.3334 Points
The business bought supplies on account. To record this:
A. an asset is debited and a liability is credited.
B. an asset is debited and an asset is credited.
C. an expense is debited and a liability is credited.
D. None of these are correct.
Question 2 of 30 3.3334 Points
Given the following list of accounts with normal balances, what are the trial balance totals of the debits and credits?
Cash $1000
Equipment 500
Accounts Payable 350
Capital 900
Service Fees 1000
Salaries Expense 750
A. $4,500 debit, $4,500 credit
B. $3,250 debit, $3,250 credit
C. $1,125 debit, $1,125 credit
D. $2,250 debit, $2,250 credit
Question 3 of 30 3.3334 Points
Which of the following is prepared first?
A. Trial balance
B. Statement of owner’s equity
C. Income statement
D. Balance sheet
Question 4 of 30 3.3334 Points
Given the following list of accounts with normal balances, what are the trial balance totals of the debits and credits?
Cash $1,100
Accounts Receivable 800
Capital 1,900
Withdrawals 500
Service Fees 1,000
Rent Expense 500
A. $1,200 debit, $1,200 credit
B. $2,900 debit, $2,900 credit
C. $3,900 debit, $3,900 credit
D. $2,000 debit, $2,000 credit
Question 5 of 30 3.3334 Points
A liability would be credited and an expense debited if:
A. the business paid a creditor.
B. the business bought supplies on account.
C. the business incurred an expense and did not pay the expense immediately.
D. the business bought supplies for cash.
Question 6 of 30 3.3334 Points
An asset would be debited and a liability credited if:
A. the business incurred an expense and did not pay for the expense immediately.
B. the business bought equipment on account.
C. the business bought supplies for cash.
D. the business incurred an expense and paid it.
Question 7 of 30 3.3334 Points
Which of the following errors would cause the trial balance to be out of balance?
A. An entry is not posted at all.
B. A debit is entered as $200 and the credit is entered at $2,000.
C. An entry is posted twice.
D. None of these answers are correct.
Question 8 of 30 3.3334 Points
Which of the following is not a financial statement?
A. Statement of owner’s equity
B. Trial balance
C. Income statement
D. Balance sheet
Question 9 of 30 3.3334 Points
One asset would be debited and another credited if:
A. the business provided services to a credit customer.
B. the business paid a creditor.
C. the business provided services to a cash customer.
D. the business bought supplies paying cash.
Question 10 of 30 3.3334 Points
The owner invested personal equipment in the business. To record this transaction:
A. debit Equipment and credit Accounts Payable.
B. credit Equipment and debit Capital.
C. debit Equipment and credit Capital.
D. debit Accounts Payable and credit Equipment.
Question 11 of 30 3.3334 Points
A journal entry affecting three or more accounts is called a:
A. simple entry.
B. multi-step entry.
C. multi-level entry.
D. compound entry.
Question 12 of 30 3.3334 Points
If Accounts Payable has been credited, it is most likely that:
A. a payment was made on account.
B. a correcting entry was made for the overstatement of the purchase of equipment on account.
C. a purchase was made on account.
D. None of these are possible.
Question 13 of 30 3.3334 Points
When the trial balance includes a debit column total of $10,350 and a credit column total of $11,350, it is probable that:
A. a transposition error occurred.
B. a $500 debit was recorded twice.
C. a $500 debit was recorded as a credit.
D. a $500 credit was recorded twice.
Question 14 of 30 3.3334 Points
The posting reference column in the journal is used for:
A. recording the account number to which the entry was posted.
B. recording the time when the entry was posted.
C. recording the initials of the person who did the posting.
D. recording the source documents identification number.
Question 15 of 30 3.3334 Points
The journal entry to record a withdrawal by the owner would most commonly include:
A. a debit to Wage Expense and a credit to Cash.
B. a debit to Withdrawals and a credit to Cash.
C. a debit to Capital and a credit to Cash.
D. a debit to Cash and a credit to Wage Expense.
Question 16 of 30 3.3334 Points
The general journal:
A. is completed after the general ledger.
B. is the book of final entry.
C. contains account balances.
D. is the book of original entry.
Question 17 of 30 3.3334 Points
Which of the following entries records the owner taking cash for personal use?
A. Capital, debit; Cash, credit
B. Wage Expense, debit; Cash, credit
C. No entry is necessary since the owner owns the cash and the entire business.
D. Withdrawals, debit; Cash, credit
Question 18 of 30 3.3334 Points
Interim statements are prepared to:
A. notify management of the company’s current financial position.
B. allow management to make changes to the business before processing year-end financial statements.
C. notify investors of the company’s current financial position.
D. All of the above are correct.
Question 19 of 30 3.3334 Points
A debit to the Capital account was posted to an expense account. This would cause:
A. liabilities to be understated.
B. capital to be overstated.
C. assets to be overstated.
D. expense to be understated.
Question 20 of 30 3.3334 Points
If the debit and credit totals of a trial balance are not equal, it could be due to the following type of error:
A. Recording the same transaction more than once
B. Incorrectly calculating the debit side of the trial balance
C. Failure to record a transaction
D. Recording the same erroneous amount for both the debit and the credit sides of a transaction
Question 21 of 30 3.3334 Points
Which of the following transactions would cause the trial balance to be out of balance?
A. A credit to Cash and a debit to Supplies for the same amount
B. A debit to Cash and a debit to Equipment for the same amount
C. A debit to Accounts Receivable and a credit to Accounting Fees for the same amount
D. All of these answers are correct.
Question 22 of 30 3.3334 Points
The general ledger:
A. lists the transactions in chronological order.
B. is the book of final entry.
C. is before the general journal.
D. is the book of original entry.
Question 23 of 30 3.3334 Points
The process of initially recording business transactions in a journal is:
A. transposing.
B. journalizing.
C. sliding.
D. posting.
Question 24 of 30 3.3334 Points
If Prepaid Rent has been debited, it is likely that:
A. a bill for the past month’s rent was received.
B. this month’s rent was paid.
C. the rent was paid for three months in advance.
D. All of these are possible.
Question 25 of 30 3.3334 Points
As Withdrawals increase:
A. owner’s equity decreases.
B. Cash increases.
C. expense increases.
D. owner’s equity increases.
Question 26 of 30 3.3334 Points
Proof that the dollar amount of the debits equals the dollar amount of the credits in the ledger means:
A. all accounts have their correct balances in the ledger.
B. only the ledger is accurate; the journal may be incorrect.
C. only that the debit dollar amounts equal the credit dollar amounts.
D. all of the information from the journal was correctly transferred to the ledger.
Question 27 of 30 3.3334 Points
The process that begins with recording business transactions and includes the completion of the financial statements is the:
A. accounting cycle.
B. fiscal year.
C. calendar year.
D. natural business years.
Question 28 of 30 3.3334 Points
The entry to record the payment of office salaries would be:
A. Debit Salaries Expense; Credit Cash
B. Debit Cash; Credit Accounts Receivable
C. Debit Cash; Credit Salaries Expense
D. Debit Salaries Expense; Credit Accounts Payable
Question 29 of 30 3.3334 Points
The entry to record completing a financial lecture and immediately collecting payment from customers would be:
A.
Cash 500
Lecture Fees 500
B.
Cash 500
Accounts Payable 500
C.
Lecture Fees 500
Accounts Payable 500
D.
Lecture Fees 500
Cash 500
Question 30 of 30 3.3334 Points
Antonio’s catered a reception. The total price was $500. The customer paid half of the fee in cash and placed the remainder on account. The journal entry to record this transaction is:
A.
Cash 500
Catering Service Fees 500
B.
Accounts Receivable 500
Cash 250
Catering Service Fees 250
C.
Cash 250
Accounts Receivable 250
Catering Service Fees 500
D.
Cash 500
Accounts Receivable 500
ASSIGN 8
Question 1 of 20 5.0 Points
The entry to replenish the petty cash fund debited Insurance Expense for postage. This would cause:
A. Petty Cash to be understated.
B. Postage Expense to be overstated.
C. Insurance Expense to be overstated.
D. Petty Cash to be overstated.
Question 2 of 20 5.0 Points
The petty cash overage was not recorded. This would cause:
A. expenses to be understated.
B. expenses to be overstated.
C. revenues to be overstated.
D. revenues to be understated.
Question 3 of 20 5.0 Points
Outstanding checks:
A. have not been presented to the bank for payment and have not been subtracted from the checkbook.
B. have been subtracted on the bank records but not the checkbook records.
C. have not been presented to the bank for payment but have been subtracted in the checkbook.
D. have been returned to the business for nonpayment.
Question 4 of 20 5.0 Points
An example of an internal control is:
A. all checks are prenumbered.
B. the use of bank account.
C. all checks written must have reference source documents.
D. All of these answers are correct.
Question 5 of 20 5.0 Points
The check is written and signed by the:
A. drawer.
B. payee.
C. payer.
D. drawee.
Question 6 of 20 5.0 Points
A nonsufficient funds check was returned to your company. How does the bank treat this on your bank statement?
A. It is shown as a credit memo.
B. It is added to the bank balance.
C. It is shown as a debit memo.
D. None of these answers are correct.
Question 7 of 20 5.0 Points
The bank would issue a credit memorandum to Maria’s Life Management when the bank:
A. discovered a check that was deposited was returned for nonsufficient funds.
B. collects a note receivable from a customer.
C. received the deposits in transit.
D. None of these answers are correct.
Question 8 of 20 5.0 Points
The debit recorded in the journal to establish the petty cash fund is to:
A. Petty Cash.
B. Accounts Receivable.
C. Accounts Payable.
D. Cash.
Question 9 of 20 5.0 Points
What type of an account is the petty cash fund?
A. Liability
B. Expense
C. Asset
D. Revenue
Question 10 of 20 5.0 Points
Determine the adjusted cash balance per bank for Santa’s Packaging on November 30, from the following information:
Cash balance on the bank statement $2,350
Customer’s check returned NSF
500
Customer’s note collected by the bank 600
Deposits in transit, November 30 1,400
Outstanding checks, November 30 2,650
A. $1,350
B. $1,250
C. $1,100
D. $1,550
Question 11 of 20 5.0 Points
The drawee is the:
A. the person to whom the check is payable.
B. bank that drawer has an account with.
C. person who writes the check.
D. the person who reconciles the account.
Question 12 of 20 5.0 Points
Checks that have been processed by the bank and are no longer negotiable are:
A. checks in process.
B. outstanding checks.
C. canceled checks.
D. blank checks.
Question 13 of 20 5.0 Points
The May bank statement for Accounting Services shows a balance of $6,300, but the balance per books shows a cash balance of $7,980. Other information includes:
1. A check for $200 to pay the electric bill was recorded on the books as $20.
2. Included on the bank statement was a note collected by the bank for $400 plus interest of $30.
3. Checks outstanding totaled $260.
4. Bank service charges were $50.
5. Deposits in transit were $2,140.
Which item(s) should be subtracted from the balance per books?
A. Bank service charge
B. Bank service charge and the note collected by the bank
C. Checks outstanding and bank service charge
D. None of the above are correct.
Question 14 of 20 5.0 Points
The May bank statement for Accounting Services shows a balance of $6,300, but the balance per books shows a cash balance of $7,980. Other information includes:
1. A check for $200 to pay the electric bill was recorded on the books as $20.
2. Included on the bank statement was a note collected by the bank for $400 plus interest of $30
3. Checks outstanding totaled $260.
4. Bank service charges were $50.
5. Deposits in transit were $2,140.
The adjusted cash balance at the end of August should be:
A. $7,620.
B. $7,980.
C. $9,810.
D. $8,180.
Question 15 of 20 5.0 Points
The person or company to whom a check is payable is called the:
A. drawer.
B. payer.
C. drawee.
D. payee.
Question 16 of 20 5.0 Points
On a bank reconciliation, deposits added to the bank side are called:
A. deposits in transit.
B. deposits on hold.
C. outstanding deposits.
D. late deposits.
Question 17 of 20 5.0 Points
Scotch Services received a credit memorandum from the bank. During the bank reconciliation they should:
A. decrease the ending cash balance on the bank statement.
B. increase their cash account on the company’s books.
C. decrease their cash account on the company’s books.
D. increase the ending cash balance on the bank statement.
Question 18 of 20 5.0 Points
The May bank statement for Accounting Services shows a balance of $6,300, but the balance per books shows a cash balance of $7,980. Other information includes:
1. A check for $200 to pay the electric bill was recorded on the books as $20.
2. Included on the bank statement was a note collected by the bank for $400 plus interest of $30.
3. Checks outstanding totaled $260.
4. Bank service charges were $50.
5. Deposits in transit were $2,140.
Which item(s) will require a journal entry to update the balance in the Cash account?
A. Bank service charges, note collected by the bank, and error made by Accounting Services
B. Checks outstanding and deposits in transit
C. Bank service charges, note collected by the bank, and deposits in transit
D. None of these answers are correct.
Question 19 of 20 5.0 Points
Samantha’s Tutoring Service’s $200 petty cash fund has a shortage of $4. The facts are: $80 in valid receipts for expenses; $116 in coins and currency. The journal entry to replenish the petty cash fund would include a:
A. credit to Cash for $80.
B. debit to Cash Short/Over for $4.
C. credit to Cash Short/Over for $4.
D. credit to Petty Cash for $84.
Question 20 of 20 5.0 Points
Information to calculate the adjusted cash balance for Sam’s Gift Wrapping is as follows:
Cash balance per general ledger $2,100
Customer’s check returned NSF
75
Bank service charges 40
Deposits in transit 500
Outstanding checks 700
Customer’s note collected by bank 645
A. $2,430
B. $2,630
C. $2,330
D. $2,230
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Q1
On July 1st, H&M Construction purchases a bulldozer for $330,000. The equipment has a 9 year life with a residual value of $15,000. Harding uses straight-line depreciation.
Calculate the depreciation expense for the first year ending December 31st. =
Calculate the third year’s depreciation expense and provide the journal entry for the third year ending December 31st.
Calculate the last year’s depreciation expense.
Provide the journal entry for the last year.
Q2
Journalize the following transactions (Assume a 360-day year when calculating interest.
Mar 1: received a 90-day, 10 % note for $24,000, dated march 1, from Bat Co. on account
May 30: The note of march 1 was dishonored
For a compound transaction, if an amount box does not require an entry, leave it blank or enter “0”.
Q3
Calculate the amount of each periodicity range that is deemed to be uncollectible. If required, round your answers to two decimal places.
Age, Balance, Percent = amount
Not past due 850,000 3.50% = 29,750.00
1-30 days past due: 47,500 5.00% = 2,375.00
31-60 days past due: 21,750 10.00% = 2,175.00
61-90 days past due: 11,250 20.00% = 2,250.00
91-180 days past due: 5,065 30.00% = 1,519.50
181-365 days past due: 2,500 50.00% = 1,250.00
Over 365 days past due: 1,145 95.00% = 1,087.75
If the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $1,135.00, record the adjusting entry for the bad debt expense for the year. Round your answers to two decimal places.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Q1
a) KNG issued a 90-day, 7% note for $200,000, dated February 3rd to Amy Co. on account. (Assume a 360-day year when calculating interest.)
Determine the due date of the note
Determine the interest:
Determine the maturity value of the note
b) journalize the entry to record the issuance of the note by KNG on Feb. 3.
c) Journalize the entry to record the receipt of payment of the note at maturity by Amy Co. For a compound transaction, if an amount box does not require an entry, leave it blank or enter “0”.
Q 2
STS Company received a 90-day, 6% note for $80,000, dated March 12 from a customer on account. (Assume a 360-day year when calculating interest.)
a) Determine the due date of the note
b) Determine the maturity value of the note
C) Journalize the entry to record the receipt of the payment of the note at maturity
Q 3
MNJ Company issued a 60-day, 8% note for $18,000, dated April 5, to Lake Company on account. (Assume a 360-day year when calculating interest.)
a) Determine the due date of the note
b) Determine the maturity value of the note
c) Journalize the entries:
1-receipt of the note by the payee, and
2- receipt by the payee of the amount due on the note at maturity.
Debit Credit
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
|
Presented below are two independent situations.
Situation 1 Hatcher Cosmetics acquired 10% of the 215,000 shares of common stock of Ramirez Fashion at a total cost of $16 per share on March 18, 2012. On June 30, Ramirez declared and paid a $77,400 cash dividend. On December 31, Ramirez reported net income of $130,400 for the year. At December 31, the market price of Ramirez Fashion was $18 per share. The securities are classified as available-for-sale.
Situation 2 Holmes, Inc. obtained significant influence over Nadal Corporation by buying 27% of Nadal s 31,300 outstanding shares of common stock at a total cost of $10 per share on January 1, 2012. On June 15, Nadal declared and paid a cash dividend of $36,300. On December 31, Nadal reported a net income of $89,600 for the year.
Prepare all necessary journal entries in 2012 for both situations.(Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.
|
|
|
|
.3
|
|
|
Cardinal Paz Corp. carries an account in its general ledger called Investments, which contained debits for investment purchases, and no credits, with the following descriptions.
|
Feb. 1, 2012
|
|
Sharapova Company common stock, $100 par, 200 shares
|
|
$41,500
|
|
April 1
|
|
U.S. government bonds, 10%, due April 1, 2022, interest payable April 1 and October 1, 112 bonds of $1,000 par each
|
|
112,000
|
|
July 1
|
|
McGrath Company 12% bonds, par $53,600, dated March 1, 2012, purchased at 104 plus accrued interest, interest payable annually on March 1, due March 1, 2032
|
|
57,888
|
(a) Prepare entries necessary to classify the amounts into proper accounts, assuming that all the securities are classified as available-for-sale.(Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
(b) Prepare the entry to record the accrued interest and the amortization of premium on December 31, 2012, using the straight-line method.(Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $2,500. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
(c) The fair values of the investments on December 31, 2012, were:
|
Sharapova Company common stock
|
|
$33,070
|
|
U.S. government bonds
|
|
147,900
|
|
McGrath Company bonds
|
|
58,620
|
What entry or entries, if any, would you recommend be made?(Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $2,500. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
(d) The U.S. government bonds were sold on July 1, 2013, for $120,650 plus accrued interest. Give the proper entry.(Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
|
|
|
Brooks Corp. is a medium-sized corporation specializing in quarrying stone for building construction. The company has long dominated the market, at one time achieving a 70% market penetration. During prosperous years, the company s profits, coupled with a conservative dividend policy, resulted in funds available for outside investment. Over the years, Brooks has had a policy of investing idle cash in equity securities. In particular, Brooks has made periodic investments in the company s principal supplier, Norton Industries. Although the firm currently owns 12% of the outstanding common stock of Norton Industries, Brooks does not have significant influence over the operations of Norton Industries.
Cheryl Thomas has recently joined Brooks as assistant controller, and her first assignment is to prepare the 2012 year-end adjusting entries for the accounts that are valued by the fair value rule for financial reporting purposes. Thomas has gathered the following information about Brooks s pertinent accounts.
|
1.
|
|
Brooks has trading securities related to Delaney Motors and Patrick Electric. During this fiscal year, Brooks purchased 100,000 shares of Delaney Motors for $1,400,000; these shares currently have a market value of $1,600,000. Brooks investment in Patrick Electric has not been profitable; the company acquired 50,000 shares of Patrick in April 2012 at $20 per share, a purchase that currently has a value of $720,000.
|
|
2.
|
|
Prior to 2012, Brooks invested $22,500,000 in Norton Industries and has not changed its holdings this year. This investment in Norton Industries was valued at $21,500,000 on December 31, 2011. Brooks 12% ownership of Norton Industries has a current market value of $22,225,000.
|
For both classes of securities presented above, describe how the results of the valuation adjustments made to reflect the application of the fair value rule would be reflected in the body of and notes to Brooks 2012 financial statements. (Refer to Problem 17-8.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The work-in-process inventory account of a manufacturing company shows a balance of $3,000 at the end of an accounting period. The job-cost sheets of the two incomplete jobs show charges of $500 and $300 for direct materials, and charges of $400 and $600 for direct labor. From this information, it appears that the company is using a predetermined overhead rate as a percentage of direct labor costs. What percentage is the rate?
2. The break-even point in dollar sales for Rice Company is $480,000 and the company s contribution margin ratio is 40 percent. If Rice Company desires a profit of $84,000, how much would sales have to total?
3. Williams Company s direct labor cost is 25 percent of its conversion cost. If the manufacturing overhead for the last period was $45,000 and the direct material cost was $25,000, how much is the direct labor cost?
4. Grading Company s cash and cash equivalents consist of cash and marketable securities. Last year the company s cash account decreased by $16,000 and its marketable securities account increased by $22,000. Cash provided by operating activities was $24,000. Net cash used for financing activities was $20,000. Based on this information, was the net cash flow from investing activities on the statement of cash flows a net increase or decrease? By how much?
5. Gladstone Footwear Corporation s flexible budget cost formula for supplies, a variable cost, is $2.82 per unit of output. The company s flexible budget performance report for last month showed an $8,140 unfavorable spending variance for supplies. During that month, 21,250 units were produced. Budgeted activity for the month had been 20,900 units. What is the actual cost per unit for indirect materials?
6. Lyons Company consists of two divisions, A and B. Lyons Company reported a contribution margin of $60,000 for Division A, and had a contribution margin ratio of 30 percent in Division B, when sales in Division B were $240,000. Net operating income for the company was $22,000 and traceable fixed expenses were $45,000. How much were Lyons Company s common fixed expenses?
7. Atlantic Company produces a single product. For the most recent year, the company s net operating income computed by the absorption costing method was $7,800, and its net operating income computed by the variable costing method was $10,500. The company s unit product cost was $15 under variable costing and $24 under absorption costing. If the ending inventory consisted of 1,460 units, how many units must have been in the beginning inventory.
8. Black Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The company s ending work-inprocess inventory consists of 6,000 units, 75 percent complete with respect to materials and 50 percent complete with respect to labor and overhead. If the total dollar value of the inventory is $80,000 and the cost per equivalent unit for labor and overhead is $6.00, what is the cost per equivalent unit for materials?
9. At Overland Company, maintenance cost is exclusively a variable cost that varies directly with machine-hours. The performance report for July showed that actual maintenance costs totaled $11,315 and that the associated rate variance was $146 unfavorable. If 7,300 machine-hours were actually worked during July, what is the budgeted maintenance cost per machine-hour?
10. The cost of goods sold in a retail store totaled $650,000. Fixed selling and administrative expenses totaled $115,000 and variable selling and administrative expenses were $420,000. If the store s contribution margin totaled $590,000, how much were the sales?
11. Denny Corporation is considering replacing a technologically obsolete machine with a new state-of-the-art numerically controlled machine. The new machine would cost $600,000 and would have a 10-year useful life. Unfortunately, the new machine would have no salvage value. The new machine would cost $20,000 per year to operate and maintain, but would save $125,000 per year in labor and other costs. The old machine can be sold now for scrap for $50,000. What percentage is the simple rate of return on the new machine rounded to the nearest tenth of a percent? (Ignore income taxes in this problem.)
12. Lounsberry Inc. regularly uses material O55P and currently has in stock 375 liters of the material, for which it paid $2,700 several weeks ago. If this were to be sold as is on the open market as surplus material, it would fetch $6.35 per liter. New stocks of the material can be purchased on the open market for $7.20 per liter, but it must be purchased in lots of 1,000 liters. You ve been asked to determine the relevant cost of 900 liters of the material to be used in a job for a customer. What is the relevant cost of the 900 liters of material O55P?
13. Harwichport Company has a current ratio of 3.0 and an acid-test ratio of 2.8. Current assets equal $210,000, of which $5,000 consists of prepaid expenses. The remainder of current assets consists of cash, accounts receivable, marketable securities, and inventory. What is the amount of Harwichport Company s inventory?
14. Tolla Company is estimating the following sales for the first six months of next year:
January $350,000
February $300,000
March $320,000
April $410,000
May $450,000
June $470,000
Sales at Tolla are normally collected as 70 percent in the month of sale, 25 percent in the month following the sale, and the remaining 5 percent being uncollectible. Also, customers paying in the month of sale are given a 2 percent discount. Based on this information, how much cash should Tolla expect to collect during the month of April?
15. Trauscht Corporation has provided the following data from its activity-based costing system:
Activity Cost Pool Total Cost Total Activity
Assembly $704,880 44,000 machine-hours
Processing orders $91,428 1,900 orders
Inspection $117,546 1,950 inspection-hours
The company makes 360 units of product P23F a year, requiring a total of 725 machine-hours, 85 orders, and 45 inspection-hours per year. The product s direct materials cost is $42.30 per unit and its direct labor cost is $14.55 per unit. The product sells for $132.10 per unit. According to the activity-based costing system, what is the product margin for product P23F?
16. Williams Company s direct labor cost is 30 percent of its conversion cost. If the manufacturing overhead for the last period was $59,500 and the direct materials cost was $37,000, what is the direct labor cost?
17. In a recent period, 13,000 units were produced, and there was a favorable labor efficiency variance of $23,000. If 40,000 labor-hours were worked and the standard wage rate was $13 per labor-hour, what would be the standard hours allowed per unit of output?
18. The balance in White Company s work-in-process inventory account was $15,000 on August 1 and $18,000 on August 31. The company incurred $30,000 in direct labor cost during August and requisitioned $25,000 in raw materials (all direct material). If the sum of the debits to the manufacturing overhead account total $28,000 for the month, and if the sum of the credits totaled $30,000, then was Finished Goods debited or credited? By how much?
19. A company has provided the following data:
Sales 4,000 units
Sales price $80 per unit
Variable cost $50 per unit
Fixed cost $30,000
If the dollar contribution margin per unit is increased by 10 percent, total fixed cost is decreased by 15 percent, and all other factors remain the same, will net operating income increase or decrease? By how much?
20. For the current year, Paxman Company incurred $175,000 in actual manufacturing overhead cost. The manufacturing overhead account showed that overhead was overapplied in the amount of $9,000 for the year. If the predetermined overhead rate was $8.00 per direct labor-hour, how many hours were worked during the year?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1 of 37
Kelly Petroleum Products owns furniture that was purchased for $19,600. Accumulated depreciation is $17,300. The furniture was sold for $3,800. Which of the following is the correct entry to record the transaction?
Furniture 19,600
Cash 2,700
Gain on sale of furniture 5,000
Accumulated depreciation 17,300
Furniture 19,600
Gain on sale of furniture 3,800
Cash 2,700
Accumulated depreciation 17,300
Accumulated depreciation 17,300
Cash 3,800
Furniture 31,100
Accumulated depreciation 17,300
Cash 3,800
Gain on sale of furniture 1,500
Furniture 19,600
Question 2 of 37
Contributed capital is also known as:
retained earnings.
total stockholders’ equity.
paid-in capital.
common stockholders’ equity.
Question 3 of 37
Shareholders’ equity is divided into:
retained earnings and common stock.
preferred stock and common stock.
retained earnings and contributed capital.
paid-in capital and common stock.
Question 4 of 37
If a corporation issues only one class of stock, it must be:
common.
contributed.
either common or preferred.
preferred.
Question 5 of 37
Treasury stock is a(n):
asset account.
liability account.
contra-equity account.
contra-asset account.
Question 6 of 37
Cole Company issued 10,000 shares of common stock. Cole purchased 1,000 shares and later reissued 500 shares. How many shares are issued and outstanding?
10,000 issued and 9,500 outstanding
10,000 issued and 10,000 outstanding
9,500 issued and 9,000 outstanding
9,000 issued and 9,000 outstanding
Question 7 of 37
Stock dividends:
are distributions of cash to the stockholders.
have no effect on total stockholders’ equity.
increase the total liabilities of the corporation and decrease the total stockholders’ equity.
reduce the total assets of the corporation.
Question 8 of 37
Which of the following statements regarding stock splits is incorrect?
A stock split decreases the market price of the stock.
A stock split involves a reduction in the stock’s par value.
A stock split is an increase in the number of authorized, issued, and outstanding shares of stock.
A stock split increases total owners’ equity.
Question 9 of 37
A company may declare a stock split to:
reduce total equity.
decrease the market value of the stock.
avoid playing a cash dividend.
reduce retained earnings.
Question 10 of 37
The B. Spaniel Company has Common Stock with a $5 par value. 100,000 shares were authorized and 25,000 shares were issued. Common stock is currently selling at $13 per share. The number of shares of common stock authorized and issued after the distribution of a 15% common stock dividend is:
100,000 and 25,000.
100,000 and 28,750.
115,000 and 28,750.
115,000 and 25,000.
Question 11 of 37
The following information is available for Louisville Limestone Corporation for the current year:
Net Income $160,000
Preferred dividends 30,000
Interest expense 18,000
Beginning of year:
Total assets 900,000
Total liabilities 300,000
Total common stockholders’ equity 375,000
End of year:
Total assets 950,000
Total liabilities 350,000
Total common stockholders’ equity 400,000
The return on assets for Louisville Limestone Corporation is:
18.70%.
19.80%.
19.20%.
17.30%.
Question 12 of 37
Proceeds from the issuance of stock appear in which, if any, section of the statement of cash flows?
They do not appear in the statement of cash flows.
Both operating and financing activities sections
Financing activities section
Operating activities section
Question 13 of 37
Stock dividends distributed appear in which, if any, section of the statements of cash flows?
They do not appear anywhere in the statement of cash flows.
Operating activities section
Operating and investing activities section
Financing and investing activities section
Question 14 of 37
Which of the following are included in the cost of land?
The cost of paving
The cost of fencing
The cost of clearing the land
The cost of outdoor lighting
Question 15 of 37
Which of the following is a characteristic of a plant asset?
a) The asset is used in the production of income for the business.
b) The asset is available for resale to customers in the ordinary course of business.
c) The asset lacks physical form.
d) Both A and B are characteristics of a plant asset.
Question 16 of 37
Which of the following depreciation methods allocates an equal amount of depreciation to each year?
Straight-line
Declining-balance
Units-of-production
All of the above
Question 17 of 37
Which of the following properly describes accumulated depreciation?
Accumulated depreciation is an expense account.
Accumulated depreciation is a contra-liability account.
Accumulated depreciation is a contra-equity account.
Accumulated depreciation is a contra-asset account.
Question 18 of 37
Which of the following is the purpose of accumulated depreciation?
Accumulated depreciation’s purpose is to provide details about the cost expiration of natural assets.
Accumulated depreciation’s purpose is to provide details about the cost expiration of plant assets.
Accumulated depreciation is an expense.
Accumulated depreciation’s purpose is to provide details about the cost expiration of intangible assets.
Question 19 of 37
Which of the following depreciation methods is used by MOST companies for their financial statements?
Declining-balance
Units-of-production
Straight-line
All of the above methods are used about equally.
Question 20 of 37
Which of the following items is included in the journal entry if a company sells equipment at a price less than its book value?
A debit to equipment for its book value
A credit to gain on sale of equipment
A credit to accumulated depreciation
A debit to loss on sale of equipment
Question 21 of 37
Which of the following items should be depleted?
Natural resources
Land
Intangible property
Tangible property, plant, and equipment other than land
Question 22 of 37
Which of the following is the expense resulting from a decline in the utility of natural resource?
Depreciation
Amortization
Depletion
Obsolescence
Question 23 of 37
Which of the following accounting methods is the method used to compute depletion?
Units-of-production
Declining-balance
Straight-line
None of the above
Question 24 of 37
Which of the following items should be amortized?
Intangible property
Natural resources
Land
Tangible property, plant, and equipment other than land
Question 25 of 37
Which of the following is generally the base amount when performing vertical analysis of an income statement?
Gross profit is generally the base amount when performing vertical analysis of an income statement.
Net sales is generally the base amount when performing vertical analysis of an income statement.
Total expenses is generally the base amount when performing vertical analysis of an income statement.
Gross sales is generally the base amount when performing vertical analysis of an income statement.
Question 26 of 37
Which of the following types of analysis include common-size financial statements?
Common-size financial statements are a type of ratio analysis.
Common-size financial statements are a type of trend analysis.
Common-size financial statements are a type of vertical analysis.
Common-size financial statements are a type of horizontal analysis.
Question 27 of 37
Which of the following balance sheets displays only percentages?
A common-size balance sheet displays only percentages.
A report form balance sheet displays only percentages.
A comparative balance sheet displays only percentages.
An account form balance sheet displays only percentages.
Question 28 of 37
Which of the following ratios is a measure of a company’s ability to sell inventory?
The inventory turnover ratio is a measure of a company’s ability to sell inventory.
The current ratio is a measure of a company’s ability to sell inventory.
The day’s sales in receivables is a measure of a company’s ability to sell inventory.
The acid-test ratio is a measure of a company’s ability to sell inventory.
Question 29 of 37
Which of the following is the formula to compute inventory turnover?
The formula is net credit sales / average inventory.
The formula is net credit sales / average net accounts receivable.
The formula is cost of goods sold / average inventory.
The formula is average net accounts receivable / one day’s sales.
Question 30 of 37
Which of the following is the formula to compute the rate of return on total assets?
The formula is (net income preferred dividends) / average common stockholders’ equity.
The formula is net income / net sales.
The formula is (net income + interest expense) / average total assets.
The formula is (net income preferred dividends) / number of shares of common stock outstanding.
Question 31 of 37
Case 17.5
Bevington Studio reported the following income statement and balance sheet amounts on December 31, 2007.
2007 2006
Net sales revenue (all credit) $950,000
Cost of goods sold 630,000
Gross profit 320,000
Selling and general expenses 230,000
Interest expense 20,000
Net income $70,000
Current assets $60,000 $55,000
Long-term assets 465,000 445,000
Total assets – 12/31 $525,000 $500,000
Current liabilities $25,000 $20,000
Long-term liabilities 105,000 205,000
Common stockholders equity – 12/31 395,000 275,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $525,000 $500,000
Inventory and prepaid expenses account for $20,000 of the 2007 current assets.
Average inventory for 2007 is $15,000.
Average net accounts receivable for 2007 is $30,000.
Average one-day sales are $3,150.
There are 7,000 shares of common stock outstanding.
Total dividends paid during 2007 were $140,000.
The market price per share of common stock is $21.
Refer to Case 17.5. What is the company’s dividend yield?
$ .95
$20.00
$ 2.00
$ 1.05
Question 32 of 37
The declaration of dividends by the board of directors would be reported on a statement of cash flows as:
a cash inflow under the financing activities.
a cash outflow under the investing activities.
a cash outflow under the financing activities.
nothing-this activity would not be reported on a statement of cash flows.
Question 33 of 37
When preparing a statement of cash flows, the sum of operating and investing and financing activities equals the:
cash inflow for the period.
change in cash for the period.
net income, as reported on the income statement.
ending cash balance.
Question 34 of 37
Which method of preparing the statement of cash flows reconciles net income to cash flows from operating activities?
Indirect method
Reconciliation method
Direct method
Equilibrium method
Question 35 of 37
McAfee Construction acquired the following plant assets on January 1, 2009. The delivery equipment was driven for 12,000 miles of its useful estimated life of 100,000 miles. Compute depreciation for the delivery equipment and select the correct answer from the choices below.
Assets Cost Residual Value Useful Life Depreciation Method
Office Equipment $150,000 $ 5,000 5 years Straight-line
Building $240,000 $20,000 20 years Double-declining balance
Delivery equipment $125,000 $25,000 10 years Units-of-production
$24,000
$12,000
$29,000
Question 36 of 37
Perform a horizontal analysis of current liabilities on the following company’s balance sheet. Which of the following is the correct answer if both the amount and the percentage of change are calculated.
Change
Account 2007 2006 Amount Percent
Current assets $121,000 $100,000
Accounts receivable 117,000 125,000
Merchandise inventory 70,000 85,000
Current liabilities 63,500 50,000
Long-term liabilities 100,000 100,000
Common stock 50,000 50,000
Retained earnings 94,500 110,000
$-15,500 and -14.1%
$13,500 and 27.0%
$-13,500 and -27.0%
$21,000 and 21.0%
Question 37 of 37
The following data is provided for last year: Net income was $210,000. Current receivables and prepaid expenses increased by $10,000 and $2,000, respectively. Current payables decreased by $8,000. Under the indirect method, the cash flows from operating activities would be:
$190,000.
$206,000.
$214,000.
$230,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CARIBOU COFFEE and FAZER GROUP
CARIBOU COFFEE
Caribou owns coffee houses. Most locations are currently in the United States.
http://www.cariboucoffee.com/
FAZER GROUP
Fazer is probably most known for its chocolate. Below is the link to the company’s homepage.
http://www.fazer.com/
Required:
Go to each company s website and review the most recent financial statements for each company and answer the following questions.
- What accounting standards are used?
- What auditing standards are used by the external auditors?
- Analyze and comment on the differences in the annual statements found on the companies’ websites. Provide a few specific differences in content and format.
- How comparable are these financial statements?
Prepare a table for a period of three years showing some key financial information for the two companies. Include at least four items from the balance sheet, four items from the income statement, and four items from the statement of cash flow. Having reviwed and analyzed the financial information, please elaborate on the following three questions.
- Which one of the two companies is the most profitable?
- Compare growth of revenues versus income over time and between the two companies
- How can you explain the difference in profitability between the two companies?
- Indicate in detail the information you used to answer the above questions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week 1
Problem 1:
During 2012, Margan Corporation had the following transactions and events.
Indicate the effect(s) of each of the foregoing items on the subdivisions of stockholders equity. Present your answer in tabular form with the following columns. Use (I) for increase, (D) for decrease, and (NE) for no effect. Item no. 1 is given as an example in the worksheet.
1.
Declared a cash dividend.
2.
Issued par value commons stock for cash at par value.
3.
Completed a 2-for-1 stock split in which $10 par value stock was changed to $5 par value stock.
4.
Declared a small stock dividend when the market value was higher than par value.
5.
Made a prior period adjustment for overstatement of net income.
6.
Issued the shares of common stock required by the stock dividend declaration in item no. 4 above.
7.
Issued par value common stock for cash above par value.
Problem 2:
Beck Company reported the following balances at December 31, 2012: common stock $400,000; paid-in capital in excel of par value common stock $100,000; and retained earnings $250,000. During 2012, the following transactions affected stockholder s equity.
Prepare the stockholders equity section of Beck Company s December 31, 2012, balance sheet.
1.
Issued preferred stock with a par value of $125,000 for $200,000.
2.
Purchased treasury stock (common) for $40,000.
3.
Earned net income of $140,000.
4.
Declared and paid cash dividends of $56,000.
Week 2
Problem 1:
Bohlander Airlines is considering two alternatives for the financing of a purchase of a fleet of airplanes. These two alternatives are:
1.
Issue 60,000 shares of common stock at $45 per share. (Cash dividends have not been paid nor is the payment of any contemplated).
2.
Issue 10%, 10-year bonds at face value for $2,700,000.
It is estimated that the company will earn $800,000 before interest and taxes as a result of this purchase. The company has an estimated tax rate of 30% and has 90,000 shares of common stock outstanding prior to the new financing.
Determine the effect on net income and earnings per share for these two methods of financing.
Problem 2:
On January 1, Camel Cove Company issued $5,000,000, 10%, 10-year bonds at face value. Interest is payable semiannually on July 1 and January 1.
Present journal entries to record the following.
1.
The issuance of the bonds
2.
The payment of interest on July 1, assuming that interest was not accrued on June 30.
3.
The accrual of interest on December 31.
Problem 3:
Diann Company had the following transactions pertaining to stock investments.
1.
Feb. 1 – Purchased 600 shares of Ronn common stock (2%) for $6,000 cash, plus brokerage fees of $200.
2.
July 1 – Received cash dividends of $1 per share on Ronn common stock.
3.
Sept. 1 – Sold 300 shares of Ronn common stock for $4,400, less brokerage fees of $100.
4.
Dec. 1 – Received cash dividends of $1 per share on Ronn common stock.
Journalize the transactions
Explain how dividend revenue and the gain (loss) on sale should be reported in the income statement.
Problem 4:
Spring Inc. had the following transactions pertaining to investments in common stock.
1.
Jan. 1 Purchased 2,500 shares of Angeltide Corporation common stock (5%) for $140,000 cash plus $2,100 broker s commission.
2.
July 1 Received a cash dividend of $3 per share.
3.
De. 1 Sold 500 shares of Angeltide Corporation common stock for $32,000 cash, less $800 broker s commission.
4.
Dec. 31 Received a cash dividend of $3 per share.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting II
Test #2
QUESTION #1
On January 1, 2008, Kohl Corporation issued $700,000, 8%, 10-year bonds at face value. Interest is payable semiannually on July 1 and January 1. Kohl Corporation has a calendar year end.
Instructions
Prepare all entries related to the bond issue for 2008.
QUESTION #2
Presented below are three independent situations:
(a) Howell Corporation purchased $250,000 of its bonds on June 30, 2008, at 102 and immediately retired them. The carrying value of the bonds on the retirement date was $229,500. The bonds pay semiannual interest and the interest payment due on June 30, 2008, has been made and recorded.
(b) Justice, Inc. purchased $200,000 of its bonds at 97 on June 30, 2008, and immediately retired them. The carrying value of the bonds on the retirement date was $196,500. The bonds pay semiannual interest and the interest payment due on June 30, 2008, has been made and recorded.
(c) Starr Company has $80,000, 10%, 12-year convertible bonds outstanding. These bonds were sold at face value and pay semiannual interest on June 30 and December 31 of each year. The bonds are convertible into 40 shares of Starr $5 par value common stock for each $1,000 par value bond. On December 31, 2008, after the bond interest has been paid, $30,000 par value of bonds were converted. The market value of Starr’s common stock was $38 per share on December 31, 2008.
Instructions
For each of the independent situations, prepare the journal entry to record the retirement or conversion of the bonds.
QUESTION #3
Unruh Company issued $900,000, 10%, 20-year bonds on January 1, 2008, at 104. Interest is payable semiannually on July 1 and January 1. Unruh uses the straight-line method of amortization and has a calendar year end.
Instructions
Prepare the January 1, 2008 and the July 1, 2008 journal entries related to the bond issue.
QUESTION #4
Karly Company issued $250,000, 11%, 10-year bonds on December 31, 2008, for $230,000. Interest is payable semiannually on June 30 and December 31. Karly uses the straight-line method of amortization and has a calendar year end.
Instructions
Prepare the appropriate journal entries on
(a) December 31, 2008.
(b) June 30, 2009.
QUESTION #5
The adjusted trial balance for Payne Corporation at the end of the current year contained the following accounts:
Bonds payable, 10%…………………………………………………….. $800,000
Bond interest payable…………………………………………………… 20,000
Discount on bonds payable……………………………………………. 40,000
Lease liability………………………………………………………………. 60,000
Mortgage notes payable, 9%, due 2018…………………………… 80,000
Accounts payable…………………………………………………………. 120,000
Instructions
(a) Prepare the long-term liabilities section of the balance sheet.
(b) Indicate the proper balance sheet classification for the accounts listed above that do not belong in the long-term liabilities section.
QUESTION #6
Glaser Company had the following transactions pertaining to debt securities held as a short-term investment.
Jan. 1 Purchased 40, 8%, $1,000 Cotter Company bonds for $40,000 cash plus brokerage fees of $800. Interest is payable semiannually on July 1 and January 1.
July 1 Received semiannual interest on Cotter Company bonds.
Oct. 1 Sold 30 Cotter Company bonds for $32,000 plus accrued interest less $500 brokerage fees.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the transactions.
(b) Prepare the adjusting entry for the accrual of interest on December 31.
QUESTION #7
The following transactions were made by Waite Company. Assume all investments are short-term and are readily marketable.
June 2 Purchased 300 shares of Beaty Corporation common stock for $45 per share.
July 1 Purchased 200 Meng Corporation bonds for $220,000.
30 Received a cash dividend of $2 per share from Beaty Corporation.
Sept. 15 Sold 90 shares of Beaty Corporation stock for $50 per share.
Dec. 31 Received semiannual interest check for $11,000 from Meng Corporation.
31 Received a cash dividend of $2 per share from Beaty Corporation.
Instructions
Journalize the transactions.
QUESTION #8
Stine Corporation’s balance sheet at December 31, 2007, showed the following:
Short-term investments, at fair value $46,500
Stine Corporation’s trading portfolio of stock investments consisted of the following at December 31, 2007:
Stock Number of Shares Cost
Dooley Common Stock 200 $30,000
Adler Preferred Stock 400 6,000
Griggs Common Stock 300 9,000
$45,000
During 2008, the following transactions took place:
Feb. 5 Sold 50 shares of Dooley common stock for $8,000.
Mar. 30 Purchased 25 shares of Griggs common stock for $950.
Sept. 9 Purchased 50 shares of Griggs common stock for $2,000.
At year end on December 31, 2008, the market values per share were:
Market Value Per Share
Dooley Common Stock $158.00
Adler Preferred Stock $14.00
Griggs Common Stock $25.00
Instructions
(a) Prepare the journal entries to record the 2008 stock transactions.
(b) On December 31, 2008, prepare any adjusting entry that might be necessary relative to the trading portfolio.
(c) Show how the stock investments will appear on Stine Corporation’s balance sheet at December 31, 2008.
QUESTION #9
Seely Company purchased 42,000 shares of common stock of Otto Corporation as a long-term investment for $1,000,000. During the year, Otto Corporation reported net income of $300,000 and paid dividends of $100,000.
Instructions
(a) Assuming that the 42,000 shares represent a 15% interest in Otto Corporation:
1. Prepare the journal entry to record the investment in Otto stock.
2. Prepare any entries that Seely Company should make in accounting for its investment in Otto stock during the year.
3. What is the balance of the Stock Investments account on Seely Company’s books at the end of the year?
(b) Repeat requirement (a) above except assume that the 42,000 shares represent a 25% interest in Otto Corporation.
QUESTION #10
Rison Corporation has the following trading portfolio of stock investments as of December 31, 2008.
Security Cost Fair Value
A $19,000 $16,000
B 22,000 26,000
C 34,000 31,000
$75,000 $73,000
On January 22, 2009, Rison Corporation sold security C for $30,000.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the adjusting entry for Rison Corporation on December 31, 2008, to report the portfolio at fair value.
(b) Indicate the balance sheet and income statement presentation of the fair value data for Rison Corporation at December 31, 2008.
(c) Prepare the journal entry for the 2009 sale.
QUESTION #11
Selected transactions of Eller Company are listed below.
1. Common stock is sold for cash above par value.
2. Bonds payable are issued for cash at a discount.
3. Interest receivable on a short-term note receivable is collected.
4. Land is sold for cash at book value.
5. Accounts payable are paid in cash.
6. Equipment is purchased by signing a 3-year, 10% note payable.
7. Cash dividends on common stock are declared and paid.
8. 100 shares of XYZ common stock are purchased for cash.
9. Merchandise is sold to customers for cash.
10. Bonds payable are converted into common stock.
Instructions
Classify each transaction as either (a) an operating activity, (b) an investing activity, (c) a financing activity, or (d) a noncash investing and financing activity.
QUESTION #12
A comparative balance sheet for Lyon Company appears below:
LYON COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheet
Dec. 31, 2008 Dec. 31, 2007
Assets
Cash $ 23,000 $10,000
Accounts receivable 18,000 14,000
Inventory 27,000 18,000
Prepaid expenses 6,000 9,000
Long-term investments -0- 18,000
Equipment 60,000 32,000
Accumulated depreciation equipment (18,000) (14,000)
Total assets $116,000 $87,000
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Accounts payable $ 17,000 $ 7,000
Bonds payable 37,000 47,000
Common stock 40,000 23,000
Retained earnings 22,000 10,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $116,000 $87,000
Additional information:
1. Net income for the year ending December 31, 2008 was $24,000.
2. Cash dividends of $12,000 were declared and paid during the year.
3. Long-term investments that had a cost of $18,000 were sold for $16,000.
4. Sales for 2008 were $120,000.
Instructions
Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2008, using the indirect method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
All this highlighted in this color is the DQ1 on what we need to do. I put the chapter and the topics of the chapter to help you on picking a topic to write about this week.
Chapter 3 is about Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships Terms used in this chapter are: Break even point, Contribution Margin ratio (CM ratio), Cost-volume profit (CVP) graph, Degree of operating leverage, Incremental analysis, Margin of safety, Operating leverage, Sales mix, Target profit analysis, Variable expenses ratio.
Chapter 4 is about Job-Order Costing terms used are: Absorption costing, Allocation base, Bill of materials, Cost driver, Cost of goods manufactured, Finished Goods, Job Cost Sheets, Job-order costing, Materials requisition form, Multiple predetermined overhead rates, Normal cost system, Overapplied overhead, Overhead overhead, Overhead application, Plantwide overhead rate, Predetermined overhead rate, Raw materials, Time ticket, Underapplied overhead, Work in process.
Post a 400-500 word synopsis on a topic that is related to this week’s readings in the textbook. Use at least three sources for in your review of the topic. Your review should be similar to a “literature review lite” which covers the topic is some detail, but not fully, due to the constraints in time and also in word limitation.
You must submit your posting to the plagiarism software link, which is located in the Weekly folders.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
NEED IN 2 to 3 hours from now(with calculations)
USE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION FOR QUESTIONS 17 20.
Assume that the following information is relevant for one of the bond issues of Fran Company:
Face value $900,000
Bond term 20 years
Stated interest rate 10% (paid semiannually)
Market interest rate 8%
Issue date July 1, 2013
Interest payment dates June 30 and December 31
Present Value Factors: 4% 5% 8% 10%
Present value of 1 for 20 periods 0.456 0.377 0.215 0.149
Present value of 1 for 40 periods 0.208 0.142 0.046 0.022
Present value of annuity for 20 periods 13.590 12.462 9.818 8.514
Present value of annuity for 40 periods 19.793 17.159 11.925 9.779
(Use only the present value factors shown above to make calculations.)
17. On July 1, 2013, the amount the bonds should sell for is
$___________
18. The total amount of bond interest to be paid in cash over the life of the bonds is:
$_____________
19. The amount of interest expense for 2013 using the effective interest method of amortization is
$__________ (show exact amount including cents)
20. The amount of bond interest paid in cash for 2014 is
$___________
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please show work.
QUESTION #1
Using the following selected items from the comparative balance sheet of Anders Company, illustrate horizontal and vertical analysis.
December 31, 2009 December 31, 2008
Accounts Receivable $ 900,000 $ 600,000
Inventory 975,000 750,000
Total Assets 4,000,000 2,500,000
QUESTION #2
The financial statements of Dobson Company appear below:
DOBSON COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31,
Assets 2009 2008
Cash……………………………………………………………………………………… $ 35,000 $ 40,000
Short-term investments…………………………………………………………… 15,000 60,000
Accounts receivable (net)………………………………………………………… 50,000 30,000
Inventory……………………………………………………………………………….. 50,000 70,000
Property, plant and equipment (net)………………………………………….. 250,000 300,000
Total assets ……………………………………………………………………… $400,000 $500,000
Liabilities and stockholders’ equity
Accounts payable…………………………………………………………………… $ 10,000 $ 30,000
Short-term notes payable………………………………………………………… 40,000 90,000
Bonds payable……………………………………………………………………….. 88,000 160,000
Common stock………………………………………………………………………. 160,000 145,000
Retained earnings…………………………………………………………………… 102,000 75,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity………………………………… $400,000 $500,000
DOBSON COMPANY
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2009
Net sales……………………………………………………………………………….. $360,000
Cost of goods sold………………………………………………………………….. 198,000
Gross profit……………………………………………………………………………. 162,000
Expenses
Interest expense……………………………………………………………….. $12,000
Selling expenses……………………………………………………………….. 40,000
Administrative expenses…………………………………………………….. 59,000
Total expenses…………………………………………………………….. 111,000
Income before income taxes……………………………………………………. 51,000
Income tax expense……………………………………………………………….. 15,000
Net income……………………………………………………………………………. $ 36,000
Additional information:
a. Cash dividends of $9,000 were declared and paid in 2009.
b. Weighted-average number of shares of common stock outstanding during 2009 was 30,000 shares.
c. Market value of common stock on December 31, 2009, was $21 per share.
Instructions
Using the financial statements and additional information, compute the following ratios for Coulter Company for 2009. Show all computations.
Computations
1. Current ratio _________.
2. Return on common stockholders’ equity _________.
3. Price-earnings ratio _________.
4. Acid-test ratio _________.
5. Receivables turnover _________.
6. Times interest earned _________.
7. Profit margin _________.
8. Days in inventory _________.
9. Payout ratio _________.
10. Return on assets _________.
QUESTION #3
Gumble Corporation had income from continuing operations of $300,000 for the year ended December 31, 2008. It also had the following items (before income taxes):
1. Extraordinary flood loss of $150,000.
2. Loss of $60,000 on discontinuance of a division.
All items are subject to income taxes at a 30% tax rate.
Instructions
Prepare a partial income statement, beginning with income from continuing operations.
QUESTION #4
Presented below is a list of costs and expenses incurred in the factory by Nu-Way Corporation, a manufacturer of recreational vehicles.
____ 1. Property taxes on the factory land
____ 2. Nails and glue used in production
____ 3. Cabinet maker’s wages
____ 4. Factory supervisors salaries
____ 5. Metal used in manufacturing
____ 6. Depreciation on factory machines
____ 7. Factory utilities
____ 8. Carpeting for the recreational vehicles
____ 9. Property taxes on the factory building
____ 10. Insurance on factory equipment
Instructions
Classify the above items into the following categories:
DM Direct Materials
DL Direct Labor
MO Manufacturing Overhead
QUESTION #5
For each item, identify all applicable cost labels. Use the following code in your answer:
1 Product Cost
2 Period Cost
a. Advertising _________
b. Direct materials used _________
c. Sales salaries _________
d. Indirect factory labor _________
e. Repairs to office equipment _________
f. Factory manager’s salary _________
g. Direct labor used _________
h. Indirect materials _________
QUESTION #6
Among the items that Gentry Print Shop accounts for are the following:
1. Direct labor _________
2. Office supplies used _________
3. Depreciation on printing machines _________
4. Finished goods inventory, 12/31 _________
5. Raw materials inventory, 1/1 _________
6. Cost of goods manufactured _________
7. Work in process, 1/1 _________
8. Office supplies inventory, 12/31 _________
9. Indirect labor _________
10. Heat and electricity for the print shop _________
Gentry Print Shop prepares the following schedule and financial statements on a yearly basis:
(a) Cost of goods manufactured schedule.
(b) Income statement.
(c) Balance sheet.
Instructions
For each item, indicate by using the appropriate letter(s) the schedule and/or financial statements in which the item will appear.
QUESTION #7
From the account balances listed below, prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured for Timmons Manufacturing Company for the month ended December 31, 2008.
Account Balances
Finished Goods Inventory, December 31 $42,000
Factory Supervisory Salaries 12,000
Income Tax Expense 18,000
Raw Materials Inventory, December 1 12,000
Work In Process Inventory, December 31 25,000
Sales Salaries Expense 14,000
Factory Depreciation Expense 8,000
Finished Goods Inventory, December 1 35,000
Raw Materials Purchases 95,000
Work In Process Inventory, December 1 30,000
Factory Utilities Expense 4,000
Direct Labor 70,000
Raw Materials Inventory, December 31 19,000
Sales Returns and Allowances 5,000
Indirect Labor 21,000
QUESTION #8
Listed below are selected items for Klugman Company at December 31, 2008.
Finished goods inventory $35,000 Short-term investments $28,000
Cash 20,000 Raw materials inventory 12,000
Prepaid expenses 2,000 Work in process inventory 18,000
Accounts receivable 4,000 Supplies 500
Instructions
Prepare the current assets section of the balance sheet. (Include a complete heading.)
QUESTION #9
Finn Manufacturing Company uses a job order cost accounting system and keeps perpetual inventory records. Prepare journal entries to record the following transactions during the month of June.
June 1 Purchased raw materials for $20,000 on account.
8 Raw materials requisitioned by production:
Direct materials $8,000
Indirect materials 1,000
15 Paid factory utilities, $2,100 and repairs for factory equipment, $3,000.
25 Incurred $84,000 of factory labor.
25 Time tickets indicated the following:
Direct Labor (5,000 hrs $12 per hr) = $60,000
Indirect Labor (3,000 hrs $8 per hr) = 24,000
$84,000
QUESTION #10
Martin Co. applies manufacturing overhead based on direct labor hours. Information concerning manufacturing overhead and labor for the year are as follows:
Actual manufacturing overhead $118,000
Estimated manufacturing overhead $110,000
Direct labor hours incurred 4,800
Direct labor hours estimated 5,000
Compute the predetermined overhead rate AND the amount of applied manufacturing overhead.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Different borrowers have different risks of bankruptcy, and bankruptcy is costly to lenders. Therefore, lenders charge higher rates to borrowers judged to be more at risk of going bankrupt.
A) True
B) False
2. A firm’s business risk is largely determined by the financial characteristics of its industry, especially by the amount of debt the average firm in the industry uses.
A) True
B) False
3. Financial risk refers to the extra risk stockholders bear as a result of using debt as compared with the risk they would bear if no debt were used.
A) True
B) False
4. As the text indicates, a firm’s financial risk has identifiable market risk and diversifiable risk components.
A) True
B) False
5. If debt financing is used, which of the following is CORRECT?
A) The percentage change in net operating income will be greater than a given percentage change in net income.
B) The percentage change in net operating income will be equal to a given percentage change in net income.
C) The percentage change in net income relative to the percentage change in net operating income will depend on the interest rate charged on debt.
D) The percentage change in net income will be greater than the percentage change in net operating income.
E) The percentage change in sales will be greater than the percentage change in EBIT, which, in turn, will be greater than the percentage change in net income.
6. Which of the following statements is CORRECT, holding other things constant?
A) Firms whose assets are relatively liquid tend to have relatively low bankruptcy costs, hence they tend to use relatively little debt.
B) An increase in the personal tax rate is likely to increase the debt ratio of the average corporation.
C) If changes in the bankruptcy code make bankruptcy less costly to corporations, then this would likely reduce the debt ratio of the average corporation.
D) An increase in the company s degree of operating leverage is likely to encourage a company to use more debt in its capital structure.
E) An increase in the corporate tax rate is likely to encourage a company to use more debt in its capital structure.
7. In a world with no taxes, MM show that a firm s capital structure does not affect the firm s value. However, when taxes are considered, MM show a positive relationship between debt and value, i.e., its value rises as its debt is increased.
A) True
B) False
8. According to MM, in a world without taxes the optimal capital structure for a firm is approximately 100% debt financing.
A) True
B) False
9. MM showed that in a world with taxes, a firm s optimal capital structure would be almost 100% debt.
A) True
B) False
10. MM showed that in a world without taxes, a firm s value is not affected by its capital structure.
A) True
B) False
11. The major contribution of the Miller model is that it demonstrates that:
A) personal taxes increase the value of using corporate debt.
B) personal taxes decrease the value of using corporate debt.
C) financial distress and agency costs reduce the value of using corporate debt.
D) equity costs increase with financial leverage.
E) debt costs increase with financial leverage.
12. Which of the following statements concerning capital structure theory is NOT CORRECT?
A) The major contribution of Miller’s theory is that it demonstrates that personal taxes decrease the value of using corporate debt.
B) Under MM with zero taxes, financial leverage has no effect on a firm s value.
C) Under MM with corporate taxes, the value of a levered firm exceeds the value of the unlevered firm by the product of the tax rate times the market value dollar amount of debt.
D) Under MM with corporate taxes, rs increases with leverage, and this increase exactly offsets the tax benefits of debt financing.
E) Under MM with corporate taxes, the effect of business risk is automatically incorporated because rsL is a function of rsU.
13. Brammer Corp.’s projected capital budget is $1,000,000, its target capital structure is 60% debt and 40% equity, and its forecasted net income is $550,000. If the company follows a residual dividend policy, what total dividends, if any, will it pay out?
A) $122,176
B) $128,606
C) $135,375
D) $142,500
E) $150,000
14. Blease Inc. has a capital budget of $625,000, and it wants to maintain a target capital structure of 60% debt and 40% equity. The company forecasts a net income of $475,000. If it follows the residual dividend policy, what is its forecasted dividend payout ratio?
A) 40.61%
B) 42.75%
C) 45.00%
D) 47.37%
E) 49.74%
15. P&D Co. has a capital budget of $1,000,000. The company wants to maintain a target capital structure which is 30% debt and 70% equity. The company forecasts that its net income this year will be $800,000. If the company follows a residual dividend policy, what will be its total dividend payment?
A) $100,000
B) $200,000
C) $300,000
D) $400,000
E) $500,000
16. D&P Co. has a capital budget of $2,000,000. The company wants to maintain a target capital structure that is 35% debt and 65% equity. The company forecasts that its net income this year will be $1,800,000. If the company follows a residual dividend policy, what will be its total dividend payment?
A) $100,000
B) $200,000
C) $300,000
D) $400,000
E) $500,000
17. Underlying the dividend irrelevance theory proposed by Miller and Modigliani is their argument that the value of the firm is determined only by its basic earning power and its business risk.
A) True
B) False
18. One implication of the bird-in-the-hand theory of dividends is that a given reduction in dividend yield must be offset by a more than proportionate increase in growth in order to keep a firm’s required return constant, other things held constant.
A) True
B) False
19. The cost of meeting SEC and possibly additional state reporting requirements regarding disclosure of financial information, the danger of losing control, and the possibility of an inactive market and an attendant low stock price are potential disadvantages of going public.
A) True
B) False
20. The term leaving money on the table refers to the situation where an investment banking house makes a very low bid for the right to underwrite a firm s new stock offering. The banker is, in effect, buying the job with the low bid and thus not getting all the money his firm would normally earn on the job.
A) True
B) False
21. The term equity carve-out refers to the situation where a firm s managers give themselves the right to purchase new stock at a price far below the going market price. Since this dilutes the value of the public stockholders, it carves out some of their value.
A) True
B) False
22. Suppose a company issued 30-year bonds 4 years ago, when the yield curve was inverted. Since then long-term rates (10 years or longer) have remained constant, but the yield curve has resumed its normal upward slope. Under such conditions, a bond refunding would almost certainly be profitable.
A) True
B) False
23. Which of the following is generally NOT true and an advantage of going public?
A) Facilitates stockholder diversification.
B) Increases the liquidity of the firm’s stock.
C) Makes it easier to obtain new equity capital.
D) Establishes a market value for the firm.
E) Makes it easier for owner-managers to engage in profitable self-dealings.
24. Which of the following statements about listing on a stock exchange is most CORRECT?
A) Listing is a decision of more significance to a firm than going public.
B) Any firm can be listed on the NYSE as long as it pays the listing fee.
C) Listing provides a company with some “free” advertising, and it may enhance the firm’s prestige and help it do more business.
D) Listing reduces the reporting requirements for firms, because listed firms file reports with the exchange rather than with the SEC.
E) The OTC is the second largest market for listed stock, and it is exceeded only by the NYSE.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kimm Company has gathered the following information about its product.
Direct materials: Each unit of product contains 3.80 pounds of materials. The average waste and spoilage per unit produced under normal conditions is 0.10 pounds. Materials cost $1 per pound, but Kimm always takes the 4.58% cash discount all of its suppliers offer. Freight costs average $0.43 per pound.
Direct labor. Each unit requires 2.10 hours of labor. Setup, cleanup, and downtime average 0.18 hours per unit. The average hourly pay rate of Kimm s employees is $10.70. Payroll taxes and fringe benefits are an additional $3.30 per hour.
Manufacturing overhead. Overhead is applied at a rate of $6.80 per direct labor hour.
Compute Kimm s total standard cost per unit.(Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25.)
| Total standard cost per unit |
|
$ |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lewis Company s standard labor cost of producing one unit of Product DD is 3.20 hours at the rate of $11.00 per hour. During August, 42,800 hours of labor are incurred at a cost of $11.16 per hour to produce 13,200 units of Product DD.
(a)Compute the total labor variance.
| Total labor variance |
|
$ |
|
FavorableUnfavorableNeither favorable nor unfavorable
|
(b)Compute the labor price and quantity variances.
| Labor price variance |
|
$ |
|
Neither favorable nor unfavorableUnfavorableFavorable
|
| Labor quantity variance |
|
$ |
|
FavorableUnfavorableNeither favorable nor unfavorable
|
(c)Compute the labor price and quantity variances, assuming the standard is 3.52 hours of direct labor at $11.36 per hour.
| Labor price variance |
|
$ |
|
UnfavorableFavorableNeither favorable nor unfavorable
|
| Labor quantity variance |
|
$ |
|
Neither favorable nor unfavorableUnfavorableFavorable
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Costello Corporation manufactures a single product. The standard cost per unit of product is shown below.
| Direct materials 2 pound plastic at $6.52 per pound |
|
$ 13.04 |
| Direct labor 2.50 hours at $12.00 per hour |
|
30.00 |
| Variable manufacturing overhead |
|
20.00 |
| Fixed manufacturing overhead |
|
20.00 |
| Total standard cost per unit |
|
$83.04 |
The predetermined manufacturing overhead rate is $16 per direct labor hour ($40.00 2.50). It was computed from a master manufacturing overhead budget based on normal production of 15,000 direct labor hours (6,000 units) for the month. The master budget showed total variable costs of $120,000 ($8.00 per hour) and total fixed overhead costs of $120,000 ($8.00 per hour). Actual costs for October in producing 4,100 units were as follows.
| Direct materials (8,350 pounds) |
|
$ 56,446 |
| Direct labor (10,130 hours) |
|
125,004 |
| Variable overhead |
|
121,194 |
| Fixed overhead |
|
44,956 |
| Total manufacturing costs |
|
$347,600 |
The purchasing department buys the quantities of raw materials that are expected to be used in production each month. Raw materials inventories, therefore, can be ignored.
(a) Compute all of the materials and labor variances. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)
| Total materials variance |
|
$ |
|
UnfavorableNeither favorable nor unfavorableFavorable
|
| Materials price variance |
|
$ |
|
UnfavorableFavorableNeither favorable nor unfavorable
|
| Materials quantity variance |
|
$ |
|
Neither favorable nor unfavorableUnfavorableFavorable
|
| Total labor variance |
|
$ |
|
FavorableNeither favorable nor unfavorableUnfavorable
|
| Labor price variance |
|
$ |
|
UnfavorableFavorableNeither favorable nor unfavorable
|
| Labor quantity variance |
|
$ |
|
FavorableNeither favorable nor unfavorableUnfavorable
|
(b) Compute the total overhead variance.
| Total overhead variance |
|
$ |
|
Neither favorable nor unfavorableFavorableUnfavorable
|
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
KAYAKS, INC.
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2011
ASSETS
Cash——-$ 52,000
Accounts receivable—-1,200,000
Raw materials inventory* —120,000
Finished goods inventory** —–287,500
Plant assets, net of accumulated
Depreciation ———–2,135,000
Total Assets —–$ 3,794,500
LIABILITIES
Accounts payable —-$ 131,000
STOCKHOLDERS EQUITY Common Stock—1,600,000
Retained Earnings ——2,063,500
Total Liabilities & SE —–$ 3,794,500
use in preparing the budget for 2012:
*40,000 pounds **1,000 kayaks
The following additional data is available for use in preparing the budget for 2012:
Cash collections (all sales are on account):
Collected in the quarter of sale————40%
Collected in the quarter after sale———60%
(Bad debts are negligible and can be ignored)
Cash disbursements for raw materials (all purchases are on account):
Cash paid in the quarter of purchase—-70%
Cash paid in the quarter after purchase —–30%
Desired quarterly ending Raw materials inventory—-40% of next quarter s production needs.
Desired quarterly ending Finished goods inventory—— 10% of next quarter s sales
Budgeted sales:
1st quarter 2012 ————————————10,000 kayaks
2nd quarter 2012 ————————————15,000 kayaks
3rd quarter 2012 ————————————16,000 kayaks
4th quarter 2012 ————————————14,000 kayaks
1st quarter 2013————————————10,000 kayaks
2nd quarter 2013 ————————————12,000 kayaks
Anticipated equipment purchases:
1st quarter 2012 ————————————$30,000
2nd quarter 2012 ————————————$0
3rd quarter 2012 ————————————$0
4th quarter 2012 ————————————$150,000
Quarterly dividends to be paid each quarter in 2012 —-$4,000
Expected sales price per unit ———$400
Standard cost data:
Direct materials ———-10 pounds per kayak @ $3 per pound
Direct labor———-10 hours per kayak @ $20 per hour
Variable manufacturing overhead—–$5 per direct labor hour
Fixed manufacturing overhead (includes $9,000 depreciation)— $103,125 per quarter
Variable selling expenses————$25 per kayak
Fixed selling and administrative expenses:
Insurance ———————————–$45,000 per quarter
Sales salaries ——————————-$30,000 per quarter
Depreciation ——————————–$6,000 per quarter
Income tax rate —————————–30%
Estimated income tax payments planned in 2012:
1st quarter ————————————$0
2nd quarter————————————$50,000
3rd quarter————————————$400,000
4th quarter ————————————$500,000
Kayak s desires to have a minimum cash balance at the end of each quarter of $50,000. In order to maintain this minimum balance, They may borrow from its bank in $10,000 increments with an interest rate of 6%. Money is borrowed at the beginning of the quarter in which a shortage is expected. Repayments of all or a portion of the principle (plus accrued interest on the amount being repaid) are made at the end of any quarter in which the cash balance exceeds the required minimum.
Requirements:
1.Use the above information to prepare the following components of the master budget:
a. Sales budget with a schedule of expected cash collections for each quarter and the year as a whole
b. Production budget for each quarter and the year as a whole
c. Direct materials purchases budget with a schedule of expected cash disbursements for materials for
i. each quarter and the year as a whole
d. Direct labor budget for each quarter and the year as a whole
e. Manufacturing overhead budget with expected cash disbursements for each quarter and the year as
i. a whole
f. Ending finished goods inventory budget for the year
g. Selling and administrative expense budget with expected cash disbursements for each quarter and
i. the year as a whole
h. Cash budget for each quarter and the year as a whole
i. Budgeted income statement for the year
j. Budgeted balance sheet for the end of the year
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.
value:
5.00 points
Exercise 6-4 Income effects of inventory methods L.O. A1
Park Company reported the following March purchases and sales data for its only product.
|
Date
|
Activities
|
Units Acquired at Cost
|
Units Sold at Retail
|
|
Mar.
|
1
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
|
150
|
units
|
@ $7.00
|
=
|
$
|
1,050
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Mar.
|
10
|
|
Sales
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
90
|
units
|
@$15
|
|
|
Mar.
|
20
|
|
Purchase
|
|
220
|
units
|
@ $6.00
|
=
|
|
1,320
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Mar.
|
25
|
|
Sales
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
145
|
units
|
@$15
|
|
|
Mar.
|
30
|
|
Purchase
|
|
90
|
units
|
@ $5.00
|
=
|
|
450
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Totals
|
|
460
|
units
|
|
|
$
|
2,820
|
|
235
|
units
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Park uses a perpetual inventory system. For specific identification, ending inventory consists of 225 units, where 90 are from the March 30 purchase, 80 are from the March 20 purchase, and 55 are from beginning inventory.
1. Complete comparative income statements for the month of March for Park Company for the four inventory methods. Assume expenses are $1,600, and that the applicable income tax rate is 30%. (Round per unit costs to three decimal places. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amounts. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “”$”” sign in your response.)
|
PARK COMPANY Income Statements For Month Ended March 31
|
|
Specific Identification
|
Weighted Average
|
FIFO
|
LIFO
|
|
Sales
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
|
|
|
|
Expenses
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Income before taxes
|
|
|
|
|
|
Income tax expense
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net income
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2. Which method yields the highest net income?
a. FIFO
b. Weighted average
c. Specific identification
d. LIFO
3. Does net income using weighted average fall between that using FIFO and LIFO?
Yes
No
4. If costs were rising instead of falling, which method would yield the highest net income?
Weighted average
Specific identification
LIFO
FIFO
Problem 6-1A Alternative cost flows-perpetual L.O. P1
[The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]
Anthony Company uses a perpetual inventory system. It entered into the following purchases and sales transactions for March.
|
Date
|
Activities
|
Units Acquired at Cost
|
Units Sold at Retail
|
|
Mar.
|
1
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
|
50
|
units
|
@ $50/unit
|
|
|
|
|
|
Mar.
|
5
|
|
Purchase
|
|
200
|
units
|
@ $55/unit
|
|
|
|
|
|
Mar.
|
9
|
|
Sales
|
|
|
|
|
|
210
|
units
|
@ $85/unit
|
|
Mar.
|
18
|
|
Purchase
|
|
60
|
units
|
@ $60/unit
|
|
|
|
|
|
Mar.
|
25
|
|
Purchase
|
|
100
|
units
|
@ $62/unit
|
|
|
|
|
|
Mar.
|
29
|
|
Sales
|
|
|
|
|
|
80
|
units
|
@ $95/unit
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Totals
|
|
410
|
units
|
|
|
290
|
units
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
references
2. value:
3.00 points
Problem 6-1A Part 1
|
Required:
|
|
1.
|
Compute cost of goods available for sale and the number of units available for sale. (Omit the “”$”” sign in your response.)
|
|
|
|
|
Cost of goods available for sale
|
$
|
|
|
Number of units available for sale
|
|
units
|
|
check my workeBook Linkreferences
3. value:
3.00 points
Problem 6-1A Part 2
2. Compute the number of units in ending inventory.
check my workeBook Linkreferences
4. value:
3.00 points
Problem 6-1A Part 3
3. Compute the cost assigned to ending inventory using (a) FIFO, (b) LIFO, (c) weighted average, and (d)specific identification. For specific identification, the March 9 sale consisted of 40 units from beginning inventory and 170 units from the March 5 purchase; the March 29 sale consisted of 20 units from the March 18 purchase and 60 units from the March 25 purchase. (Due to rounding, the sum of Cost of Goods Sold and Ending inventory may not equal the Cost of Good available for sales. Round your weighted average cost to 3 decimal places. Round your final answers to nearest whole dollar amount. Omit the “”$”” sign in your response.)
|
|
Ending Inventory
|
|
(a)
|
FIFO
|
$
|
|
(b)
|
LIFO
|
$
|
|
(c)
|
Weighted average
|
$
|
|
(d)
|
Specific identification
|
$
|
|
rev: 12_18_2012
check my workeBook Linkreferences
5. value:
3.00 points
Problem 6-1A Part 4
4. Compute gross profit earned by the company for each of the four costing methods. (Round your per unit costs to 3 decimal places and inventory balances and final answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “”$”” sign in your response.)
|
Gross profit
|
|
FIFO
|
$
|
|
LIFO
|
$
|
|
Weighted average
|
$
|
|
Specific identification
|
$
|
|
6. value:
5.00 points
Problem 6-4A Analysis of inventory errors L.O. A2
Doubletree Company s financial statements show the following. The company recently discovered that in making physical counts of inventory, it had made the following errors: Inventory on December 31, 2010, is understated by $50,000, and inventory on December 31, 2011, is overstated by $20,000.
|
For Year Ended December 31
|
2010
|
2011
|
2012
|
|
(a)
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$
|
725,000
|
$
|
955,000
|
$
|
790,000
|
|
(b)
|
Net income
|
|
268,000
|
|
275,000
|
|
250,000
|
|
(c)
|
Total current assets
|
|
1,247,000
|
|
1,360,000
|
|
1,230,000
|
|
(d)
|
Total equity
|
|
1,387,000
|
|
1,580,000
|
|
1,245,000
|
|
Required:
For each key financial statement figure (a), (b), (c), and (d) above prepare a table to show the adjustments necessary to correct the reported amounts. (Amounts to be deducted should be indicated with a minus sign. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “”0″” wherever required. Omit the “”$”” sign in your response.)
A
|
Cost of goods sold:
|
|
2010
|
2011
|
2012
|
|
Reported amount
|
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
Adjustments for:
|
12/31/2010 error
|
|
|
|
|
12/31/2011 error
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Corrected amount
|
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
B
|
Net income
|
|
2010
|
2011
|
2012
|
|
Reported amount
|
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
Adjustments for:
|
12/31/2010 error
|
|
|
|
|
12/31/2011 error
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Corrected amount
|
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
C
|
Total current assets
|
|
2010
|
2011
|
2012
|
|
Reported amount
|
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
Adjustments for:
|
12/31/2010 error
|
|
|
|
|
12/31/2011 error
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Corrected amount
|
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
D
|
Equity:
|
|
2010
|
2011
|
2012
|
|
Reported amount
|
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
Adjustments for:
|
12/31/2010 error
|
|
|
|
|
12/31/2011 error
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Corrected amount
|
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.
|
What is the error in total net income for the combined three-year period resulting from the inventory errors?(Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “”0″” wherever required. Input your answer as a positive value. Omit the “”$”” sign in your response.)
|
|
Error in total net income of three years
|
$
|
Problem 6-5AA Alternative cost flows-periodic L.O. P3
[The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]
|
Viper Company began year 2011 with 20,000 units of product in its January 1 inventory costing $15 each. It made successive purchases of its product in year 2011 as follows. The company uses a periodic inventory system. On December 31, 2011, a physical count reveals that 35,000 units of its product remain in inventory.
|
|
|
|
|
Mar.
|
7
|
28,000 units @ $18 each
|
|
May.
|
25
|
30,000 units @ $22 each
|
|
Aug.
|
1
|
20,000 units @ $24 each
|
|
Nov.
|
10
|
33,000 units @ $27 each
|
|
eBook Linkreferences
7. value:
4.00 points
Problem 6-5AA Part 1
|
1.
|
Compute the number and total cost of the units available for sale in year 2011. (Omit the “”$”” sign in your response.)
|
|
|
|
|
Number of units available for sale
|
|
units
|
|
Cost of the units available for sale
|
$
|
|
|
check my workreferences
8. value:
4.00 points
Problem 6-5AA Part 2
|
2.
|
Compute the amounts assigned to the 2011 ending inventory and the cost of goods sold. (Input all amounts as positive values. Round per unit costs to 3 decimal places. Round your final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “”$”” sign in your response.)
|
|
|
|
Total cost of units available for sale
|
$
|
|
Less ending inventory on a FIFO basis
|
|
|
|
|
Cost of units sold
|
$
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total cost of units available for sale
|
$
|
|
Less ending inventory on a LIFO basis
|
|
|
|
|
Cost of units sold
|
$
|
|
|
|
|
(c) Weighted average periodic
|
|
|
|
Total cost of units available for sale
|
$
|
|
Less ending inventory on a weighted average
|
|
|
|
|
Cost of units sold
|
$
|
|
|
</fb:comments>
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The trial balance of Houston Inc. includes the following balances: Common Stock, $28,000; Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par, $64,000; Treasury Stock, $6,000; Preferred Stock, $30,000. Capital stock totals (Points : 2) $58,000.
$96,000.
$122,000.
$128,000.
| Question 2. 2. Under IFRS, the term reserves relates to each of the following except (Points : 2) |
asset revaluations. contributed (paid-in) capital. fair value differences. retained earnings. |
| Question 3. 3. Five thousand shares of treasury stock of Marker, Inc., previously acquired at $14 per share, are sold at $20 per share. The entry to record this transaction will include a (Points : 2) |
credit to Treasury Stock for $100,000. debit to Paid-In Capital from Treasury Stock for $30,000. debit to Treasury Stock for $70,000. credit to Paid-In Capital from Treasury Stock for $30,000. |
| Question 4. 4. Which of the following is not true of a corporation? (Points : 2) |
It may buy, own, and sell property. It may sue and be sued. The acts of its owners bind the corporation. It may enter into binding legal contracts in its own name. |
| Question 5. 5. If Vickers Company issues 4,000 shares of $5 par value common stock for $140,000, (Points : 2) |
Common Stock will be credited for $140,000. Paid-In Capital in Excess of Par will be credited for $20,000. Paid-In Capital in Excess of Par will be credited for $120,000. Cash will be debited for $120,000. |
| Question 6. 6. Bacon Corporation began business by issuing 150,000 shares of $5 par value common stock for $25 per share. During its first year, the corporation sustained a net loss of $25,000. The year-end balance sheet would show (Points : 2) |
Common stock of $750,000. Common stock of $3,750,000. Total paid-in capital of $3,725,000. Total paid-in capital of $775,000. |
| Question 7. 7. A corporation has the following account balances: Common stock, $1 par value, $60,000; Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par, $1,300,000. Based on this information, the (Points : 2) |
legal capital is $1,360,000. number of shares issued are 60,000. number of shares outstanding are 1,360,000. average price per share issued is $22.50. |
| Question 8. 8. Crain Company issued 2,000 shares of its $5 par value common stock in payment of its attorney’s bill of $40,000. The bill was for services performed in helping the company incorporate. Crain should record this transaction by debiting (Points : 2) |
Legal Expense for $10,000. Legal Expense for $40,000. Organization Expense for $10,000. Organization Expense for $40,000. |
| Question 9. 9. Treasury stock is generally accounted for by the (Points : 2) |
cost method. market value method. par value method. stated value method. |
| Question 10. 10. If no-par stock is issued without a stated value, then (Points : 2) |
the par value is automatically $1 per share. the entire proceeds are considered to be legal capital. there is no legal capital. the corporation is automatically in violation of its state charter. |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Grading criteria must be strickly followed!
Assignment 1: Discussion Activity-Based Costing System
Activity-based costing is one of the most accurate methods that can be used to allocate overhead. However, it is not often used in many smaller organizations due to the substantial cost involved with its implementation.
Using the module readings and the Argosy University online library resources, research the activity-based costing method. Use your research and/or your experiences as a working professional to complete this assignment.
Respond to the following:
- If you have utilized an activity-based costing system in your former or current employment, describe how this system had been used. In your response, be sure to include your experience and position on the effectiveness of the activity-based costing system. Support your ideas by drawing on your readings and scholarly articles.
- If you have not encountered this type of system in your work experience, assume a company needs to switch to an ABC system. Describe the common cost drivers that could be used.
- How would the organization identify the cost drivers?
- How would the organization use them in the implementation of this system? You may use your former or current company for the analysis.
Write your initial response in 3 4 paragraphs. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.
| Assignment 1 Grading Criteria |
Maximum Points |
|
Initial response:
- Was insightful, original, accurate, and timely.
- Was substantive and demonstrated advanced understanding of concepts.
- Compiled/synthesized theories and concepts drawn from a variety of sources to support statements and conclusions.
|
16 |
|
Discussion response and participation:
- Responded to a minimum of two peers in a timely manner.
- Offered points of view supported by research.
- Asked challenging questions that promoted the discussion.
- Drew relationships between one or more points in the discussion.
|
16 |
|
Writing:
- Wrote in a clear, concise, formal, and organized manner.
- Responses were error free.
- Information from sources, where applicable, was paraphrased appropriately and accurately cited.
|
8 |
| Total: |
40 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| ACCOUNTING HELP PLEASE |
| Question Detail:
BA5001 / BA5001X Business Decision-Making
Final coursework: Lamberts Heating
Submission date: Friday 24th May 2013
This coursework is worth 40% of your final mark for this module.
Scenario
Lamberts Heating has two main divisions: one manufacturing radiators and the other installation of central heating systems. The manufacturing arm of the company makes radiators for domestic and commercial central heating systems. These radiators are either used by Lamberts installation division or are sold to other central heating installation companies. Lamberts Heating has rather old machinery, presently used to manufacture the radiators, that it wants to replace. The company wants both the new machinery to be in place as soon as possible and to plan the procurement and installation as soon as possible. The company has yet to decide which piece of new machinery to buy and thus does not expect to make an order for this machinery before 3rd June 2013.
Lamberts Heatings installation division supplies and fits domestic central heating systems. It uses its own radiators to obtain the materials for this, but buys in boilers and pipes from other companies. This company is keen to increase its profit margin in this division but the business of supplying domestic heating systems is very competitive at present. The company has decided that the best way to increase its profit margin is to reduce the cost of buying the boilers from a number of suppliers. It has conducted some research into the prices charged by three major suppliers: Apex Boilers, Brunswich Heating Supplies and Centrale.
Tasks
This coursework is in three parts. You should submit all three parts together as one document.
The first part of the document will consist of three reports: one for each part of the coursework with three appendices. These appendices will contain all the details for the work you have completed in order to write the reports. All computer input and output should also be in the appendices, as should the details of any other calculations you have made.
Part A:Planning and control of capital expenditure
Question / Tasks:
The senior management of the Lamberts Heating are considering the replacement of one of the firm s machines that is used to make radiators in the factory. You are one of the managers involved in this decision. You have had some discussions with other members of the senior management about this proposed investment and there appear to be three machines that the firm could purchase.
Either a:
Alumier machine, a straight replacement for the present machine from the same supplier
Big EZ machine from an American supplier
Cial machine from Japan
The senior management team wish to carefully consider the alternatives. As a first step, it was decided to accurately estimate each of the alternative s cash flows and the following estimated figures are available:
|
Alumier
|
Big EZ
|
Cial
|
Machine
|
Machine
|
Machine
|
|
Initial Outlay
|
500,000
|
500,000
|
500,000
|
|
Cash inflows
|
Year 1
|
50,000
|
200,000
|
150,000
|
|
2
|
100,000
|
150,000
|
150,000
|
|
3
|
150,000
|
150,000
|
150,000
|
|
4
|
150,000
|
50,000
|
150,000
|
|
5
|
150,000
|
25,000
|
100,000
|
|
6
|
170,000
|
25,000
|
50,000
|
|
770,000
|
600,000
|
750,000
|
The other members of the management team have asked you to consider each of the above alternatives, using the various methods usually employed in appraisal of capital investment decisions. You have been asked to report back to the whole team at their next meeting. Whilst other members at this meeting are also aware of usual investment appraisal methods, your report is expected to assess the above alternatives in any way that you consider is appropriate. Your report will be expected to include your recommendation of the machine to purchase, a recommendation that the team can then consider at their next meeting. Your report will also be expected to include an explanation of the strengths and weaknesses of the various methods that you have utilised in your investment appraisal. A 10% discount rate has also been recommended, the yield for each machine is expected to be calculated separately, and it is acceptable for all calculations to be worked out on a pre-tax basis.
(50 Marks)
Note:
All references and books, etc., consulted must be included, including any internet sites used.
You are also expected to produce this assignment using information technology. Particularly expected for this part of the assignment would be the use of Microsoft Word and Excel, or the use of other similar word-processing and spreadsheet software to produce this coursework.
A successful assignment (in Part A of this assignment) might include consideration or explanation of:
consideration of each of the alternative proposals under at least three methods of evaluating capital investment decisions
comparison of the inflows and outflows for each machine under each method
the objective(s) of each method
the advantages and disadvantages (strengths and weaknesses) of each of these methods
consideration of any non-financial factors which may have to be considered
consideration of any other information you may require
a recommendation of one of the proposals, including the reasons for your recommendation
use of the expected word-processing and spreadsheet software
Note:The above is illustrative, covering only the main points of the assignment.
Suggested length: 1,250 words
This part of the assignment (Part A) represents 50% of your marks on this piece of coursework
Part B: Scheduling the installation of the new machinery
Having decided to buy a new piece of machinery to make the radiators, Lambert Heating now has to consider the timeframe for getting the new piece of machinery up and running. This will involve you developing the project plan in terms of determining the critical path and the sequencing of the relevant activities.
The activities involved are shown in the table below with their preceding activities and their normal durations. Some of the activities can be reduced in time by using extra staff but this is at an extra cost. The minimum duration for each activity is shown in the final column. For a number of activities, the minimum duration is the same as the normal duration as the duration of these activities cannot be reduced.
The earliest that the company expects to start the process is Monday 3rd June 2013
|
Activity
|
Normal Duration in weeks
|
Preceding activity
|
Minimum Duration
[Each day saved cost 200]
|
|
A:
|
Order new machinery
|
2
|
None
|
2
|
|
B:
|
Plan new physical layout of factory
|
3
|
None
|
3
|
|
C:
|
Determine changes needed in existing machinery
|
3
|
None
|
3
|
|
D
|
Receive new equipment
|
10
|
A
|
8
|
|
E
|
Hire new employee to supervise the operation of the new machinery
|
7
|
A
|
6
|
|
F
|
Make changes needed to accommodate new machinery
|
15
|
B
|
13
|
|
G:
|
Make changes needed in existing machinery
|
9
|
C
|
7
|
|
H:
|
Train existing employees to use new machinery
|
7
|
D,E
|
6
|
|
I:
|
Install new machinery
|
4
|
F
|
3
|
|
J:
|
Disassemble old machinery
|
5
|
G
|
4
|
|
K:
|
Conduct employee safety training on new installation
|
2
|
H,I
|
2
|
Please note that the company works a 5 day week: Monday to Friday.
Task:
Appendix
You may complete this task manually or by using MS project.
Assuming that the project starts on Monday 3rd June 2013, determine the shortest duration for the entire project, using the normal duration times. Specify the date at which the project can finish and the number of weeks required.
Produce a Gantt chart showing the starting and finishing times of each activity
Identify which activities form the critical path(s) of the project.
If the project could be speeded up by a maximum of 3 weeks at a cost of 200 a day, where should this money be spent? Produce a new network diagram to show the new critical path(s) and total duration.
Report
Give details of the proposed calendar of works, making it clear which activities are critical and which activities have some slack. This section should be written so that the management can understand the advice being given without reference to the work in the appendix. Give details of the starting date, the finishing date and the duration of the project.
Explain how, by spending more money, the project duration can be shortened. Explain which activities have been shortened and which activities are now critical. Give details of the starting date, the finishing date and the duration of the project. Give details of the extra cost involved in shortening the project.
A successful assignment (Part B of this assignment) should include:
Determining the shortest time in which the project can be completed using the normal durations
Determining the shortest time in which the project can be completed using the minimum durations
Producing a well-written, well-structured report that enables management to understand how to schedule the project. This report should include details of activities which must be completed on time and those for which there is some slack.
The costs of shortening the project time should be included in the report as should the relevant start and finishing dates.
Note:The above is illustrative, covering only the main points of the assignment.
Suggested length: 500 words
This part of the assignment (Part B) represents 20% of your marks on this piece of coursework.
Part C: Cost of procuring boilers
This part of the coursework requires you to use linear programming techniques to determine the best way to minimise the cost of supplying boilers to Lamberts Heating
As well as manufacturing radiators (as mentioned in Part A), Lamberts Heating is also reviewing the way it procures boilers to enable the installation of domestic heating systems.
The purchasing department has identified three possible suppliers of boilers; Apex, Brunswich and Centrale. It has also identified five kinds of domestic boiler that it wants to purchase so it can supply and fit these boilers to a variety of sizes of homes.
The five boilers are known and coded by Italian numbers as most are manufactured in Italy ; Uno (1), Duo (2), Tre (3), Quattro (4) and Cinque (5).
The table below gives the cost of each boiler (in s) from each supplier. The final row of the table specifies the minimum requirement of each type of boiler per year. Please note that not all boilers are available from each supplier.
|
Uno
|
Duo
|
Tre
|
Quattro
|
Cinque
|
|
Apex
|
500
|
750
|
300
|
—
|
450
|
|
Brunswich
|
—
|
725
|
320
|
875
|
420
|
|
Centrale
|
480
|
775
|
310
|
900
|
—
|
|
Requirement
(number of boilers)
|
2000
|
1500
|
3000
|
2500
|
2200
|
There are certain limitations that have to be taken into account;
Apex can supply no more than 1,000 of the Tre boiler each year.
Brunswich can supply no more than 800 of the Duo boiler each year.
Centrale can supply no more than 1,800 Uno boilers each year.
Lamberts Heating wants to meet its requirement for the number of boilers needed each year at the minimum cost.
Task
You are expected to use MS Excel software for this task. However, we will accept printouts from any other Linear Programming software.
Appendix
Define the meaning of any decision variables you are using.
Formulate the situation described above as a linear programming problem.
Include your computer input of the problem (and show any formulae used)
Include the Answer Report and Sensitivity Report printouts
Report
Write a brief report to the management of Lambert Heating detailing the cheapest way of meeting their need for boilers.
This report, written in a formal style of English, should include:
The nature of the problem being solved
The suggested purchasing plan
The cost of the suggested purchasing plan.
The robustness of the plan. Provide details of the ranges of costs of boilers from each suggested supplier for which your suggested plan remains optimal, and advise the company when they will have to generate a new plan. Do not just provide lists but consider your answers in the context of the question.
At present, Apex can supply no more than 1,000 of the Tre boiler each year. If this limit was changed so that Apex could now supply 1,100 Tre boilers, explain what effect this would have on the total minimum cost?
A successful assignment (for Part C of this assignment) should include:
Well-defined decision variables and a correct formulation of the problem.
Appropriate use of Excel (or other software) to produce a solution to the problem.
Producing a well-written, well-structured report that enables management to understand how to procure boilers at the minimum price. This report should include details of your suggested purchasing plan and the cost of this plan.
The advice to management should also enable them to determine the range of prices for each boiler for which your purchasing plan is valid.
The implications of the increased capacity to supply by Apex should be clearly described.
Note:The above is illustrative, covering only the main points of the assignment.
Suggested length: 500 words
This part of the assignment (Part C) represents 30% of your marks on this piece of coursework.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
- Peachtree Complete Accounting allows for roles to be assigned as sales reps or vendor reps. Determine what other role assignments should be available for employees in Peachtree Complete Accounting and why they would be valuable for management at the company for which you currently work (or would like to work). Explain your rationale.
- Identify and discuss a challenge in maintaining employee data in Peachtree Complete Accounting, how that challenge could be addressed, and how the successful mitigation of that challenge will benefit management.
- Identify and discuss a challenge in maintaining inventory data in Peachtree Complete Accounting, as well as how you would address that challenge personally.
- Discuss the various ways that user security addresses the purpose of internal control and why internal control is essential for any business to execute correctly. Consider whether or not the controls are sufficient to minimize the risk of breaches in the integrity of the data. Provide specific examples to support your response.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Write a 300-400 word response to the following scenario:
Original work only
Chen, Inc. purchases 1,000 shares of its own previously issued $5 per common stock for $12,000. Assuming the shares are held in the treasury, what effect does this transaction have on (a) net income, (b) total assets, (c) total paid-in capital, and (d) total stockholders equity?
The treasury stock purchased in the above question was resold by Chen, Inc. for $15,000. What effect does this transaction have on (a) net income, (b) total assets, (c) total paid-in capital, and (d) total stockholders equity?
Formatyour response consistent with APA guideline
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| 3-4 pages |
| Details: |
You are an accountant in a medium-sized manufacturing company. You have been asked to mentor an accounting clerk who is new to your accounting department.
- Explain why adjusting entries are necessary.
- Describe the 4 types of adjusting entries, and provide a manufacturing industry example of each.
- Describe how these entries would be recorded in a computerized accounting system.
- Describe 1 ethical issue that could result from the preparation of these manufacturing entries
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Select a company that you are familiar with from the transportation industry.
- Collect the 4 main financial statements from credible sources (e.g., nationally syndicated newspapers, peer-reviewed journals, investor relations, Web sites or annual reports.
- Create a flow chart that illustrates the steps in the accounting cycle.
- Include any other relevant information in the chart that would apply within the steps.
When reviewing the financial statements, focus your attention on the expenses and revenues incurred by the company
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Bell Company, a manufacturer of audio systems, started its production in October 2014. For the preceding 3 years, Bell had been a retailer of audio systems. After a thorough survey of audio system markets, Bell decided to turn its retail store into an audio equipment factory.
Raw materials cost for an audio system will total $75 per unit. Workers on the production lines are on average paid $14 per hour. An audio system usually takes 6 hours to complete. In addition, the rent on the equipment used to assemble audio systems amounts to $5,008 per month. Indirect materials cost $6 per system. A supervisor was hired to oversee production; her monthly salary is $3,455.
Factory janitorial costs are $2,164 monthly. Advertising costs for the audio system will be $9,292 per month. The factory building depreciation expense is $6,384 per year. Property taxes on the factory building will be $8,472 per year.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Assuming that Bell manufactures, on average, 1,598 audio systems per month, enter each cost item on your answer sheet, placing the dollar amount per month under the appropriate headings. Total the dollar amounts in each of the columns.
|
|
Product Costs |
|
|
| Cost Item |
|
Direct Materials |
|
Direct Labor |
|
Manufacturing Overhead |
|
Period Costs |
| Raw materials (1) |
|
$ |
|
$ |
|
$ |
|
$ |
| Wages for workers (2) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Rent on equipment |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Indirect materials (3) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Factory supervisor s salary |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Janitorial costs |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Advertising |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Depreciation on factory building (4) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Property taxes on factory building (5) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$ |
|
$ |
|
$ |
|
$ |
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose you are a CPA, and your client has requested advice regarding establishing an irrevocable trust for his two (2) grandchildren. He wants the income from the trust paid to the children for 20 years and the principal distributed to the children at the end of 20 years.
Use the Internet and Strayer databases to research the rules regarding irrevocable trusts, gift tax, and estate tax. Be sure to use the six (6) step tax research process in Chapter 1 and demonstrated in Appendix A of your textbook as a guide for your written response.
Write a one to two (1-2) page letter in which you:
- Analyze the effect of an irrevocable trust on the gift tax and future estate taxes.
- Suggest other significant alternatives that the client could use both to reduce estate tax and to maximize potential advantages of the payment of gift taxes on transfers of property.
- Use the six (6) step tax research process, located in Chapter 1 and demonstrated in Appendix A of the textbook, to record your research for communications to the client.
Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:
- Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
- Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length.
The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:
- Prepare client, internal, and administrative documents that appropriately convey the results of tax research and planning.
- Create an approach to tax research that results in credible and current resources.
- Analyze tax issues regarding the gift tax and the estate tax.
- Analyze tax issues regarding trusts and estates.
- Use technology and information resources to research issues in organizational tax research and planning.
- Write clearly and concisely about organizational tax research and planning using proper writing mechanics.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1). Briarcrest Condiments is a spice-making firm. Recently, it developed a new process for producing spices. The process requires new machinery that would cost $1,776,329. have a life of five years, and would produce the cash flows shown in the following table.
| Year |
Cash Flow |
| 1 |
$613,201 |
| 2 |
-225,580 |
| 3 |
1,015,102 |
| 4 |
1,011,437 |
| 5 |
844,196 |
What is the NPV if the discount rate is 15.69 percent? (Enter negative amounts using negative sign e.g. -45.25. Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 15.25.)
2). Archer Daniels Midland Company is considering buying a new farm that it plans to operate for 10 years. The farm will require an initial investment of $12.10 million. This investment will consist of $2.60 million for land and $9.50 million for trucks and other equipment. The land, all trucks, and all other equipment is expected to be sold at the end of 10 years at a price of $5.15 million, $2.11 million above book value. The farm is expected to produce revenue of $2.05 million each year, and annual cash flow from operations equals $1.91 million. The marginal tax rate is 35 percent, and the appropriate discount rate is 9 percent. Calculate the NPV of this investment. (Round intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 15.25.)
The project should be: Accepted or Rejected.
3). Bell Mountain Vineyards is considering updating its current manual accounting system with a high-end electronic system. While the new accounting system would save the company money, the cost of the system continues to decline. The Bell Mountain s opportunity cost of capital is 10.4 percent, and the costs and values of investments made at different times in the future are as follows:
| Year |
Cost |
Value of Future Savings (at time of purchase) |
| 0 |
$5,000 |
$7,000 |
|
| 1 |
4,250 |
7,000 |
|
| 2 |
3,500 |
7,000 |
|
| 3 |
2,750 |
7,000 |
|
| 4 |
2,000 |
7,000 |
|
| 5 |
1,250 |
7,000 |
|
Calculate the NPV of each choice. (Round answers to the nearest whole dollar, e.g. 5,275.)
The NPV of each choice is:
NPV0 = $
NPV1 = $
NPV2 = $
NPV3 = $
NPV4 = $
NPV5 = $
Suggest when should Bell Mountain buy the new accounting system?
|
Chip s Home Brew Whiskey management forecasts that if the firm sells each bottle of Snake-Bite for $20, then the demand for the product will be 15,000 bottles per year, whereas sales will be 92 percent as high if the price is raised 12 percent. Chip s variable cost per bottle is $10, and the total fixed cash cost for the year is $100,000. Depreciation and amortization charges are $20,000, and the firm has a 30 percent marginal tax rate. Management anticipates an increased working capital need of $3,000 for the year. What will be the effect of the price increase on the firm s FCF for the year?
|
|
(Round answers to nearest whole dollar, e.g. 5,275.)
|
| At $20 per bottle the Chip s FCF is $ and at the new price Chip s FCF is $. |
|
|
5).Capital Co. has a capital structure, based on current market values, that consists of 48 percent debt, 11 percent preferred stock, and 41 percent common stock. If the returns required by investors are 9 percent, 12 percent, and 17 percent for the debt, preferred stock, and common stock, respectively, what is Capital s after-tax WACC? Assume that the firm s marginal tax rate is 40 percent.(Round intermediate calculations to 4 decimal places, e.g. 1.2514 and final answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 15.25%.)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Your neighbour invited you to lunch yesterday. Sure enough, it was no “free lunch”, because he wanted to discuss the annual report of the Dodge Corporation. He owns Dodge shares and just received the report. He says, “PwC prepared the audited financial statements and gave an unqualified opinion, so my investment must be safe”.
Required. Whta misconceptions does your neighbour seem to have about the auditor’s role with respect to Dodge Corporation?
2. The standard unmodified report contains severl importnt sentences and phrases. Give an explanation of why each of the following phrases is used instead of the alternative language indicated.
a. Adress: “To the Board of Directors and Stockholders” instead of ” To whom it may concern.”
b. “We have audited the balance sheet of Anycompany as of December 31, 20×2, and the related statements of income, retained earnings, and cash flows for the year then ended”, instead of ” We have audited the attached financial statements”.
c. “We coducted our audit in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards” instead of ” Our audit was conducted with due audit care appropriate in the circumstances”.
d. In our opinion , the financial statementsreffered to above present fairly…in conformity with generally accepted accounting principales” instead of ” The financial statements are true and correct”.
3. Ellen Eagle is a banker in a small town. Her customers, Deve and Dot Dauber, are the owners of a franchised candy store in town. They have an opportunity to bu a second franchised store in a neearby town, and are requesting that Ellen increase their bank loan from $300,000 to $2,000,000 to finance this aquisition. The Daubers are two of Ellen’s best customers and have always made the loan payments on time during the 10 years they have been customers of her bank. Currently, Ellen is requiring tht Daubers provide annual financial statements with a review report of a PA. To approve the requested loan increase, the bank’s head office will require them to provide annual audited financial statements.
Required: Distinguish between a review report and an audit report. Why would the bank require an audit instead of a review in this case. Do you think the bank’s policy is reasonable?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
9 sheets to be done. please.
prof emailed this:
my recommendation for pages 7-8-9-10 do one by one. starting on number 7, then submit and make sure you have the correct answer before proceding to number 8-9 or 10, because the following may happen since we are working with an excel file it is formatted to correct formulas, so your formulas for number 8-9-10 may be correct but the calculations for the first number was incorrect.
please follow my advice and submit the file, upon completion of each sheet and make sure you are in the right track.
you should by now have worked on several pages of your project and I believe you need to be extra careful when calculation the budgets.
for 7.01: You have to start with the planned sales (given at the top) and the desired ending inventory. They tell you in the fact pattern that they want to decrease finished goods by 20%. If you look at the Balance Sheet you will see that they had 3,000 items in finished goods last year. They want to decrease that number by 20% which would be 600. Therefore, the desired ending inventory is 2,400 (3,000 – 600).
You are preparing the budget for next year. Therefore, every time they ask you for a beginning balance you will go to the Balance Sheet which is on sheet #2. I suggest you try to work on it tonight so you can ask me questions in class tomorrow. remember project is due 100% completed by saturday at 2pm sharp. goodluck
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for Business Decisions
This assignment is in two parts, the first one that will require you to undertake some research, the
Second part will involve a preparation of worksheet.
The assignment aims to develop understanding of financial statements and their use in decision-making. The task is to study and compare 2 publicly held company specifically in the same
Industry, (use ASX s website to select a company) and be able to understand the structure of
Financial statements. This project itself includes several assignments, each of which comprises a
Part of the students task. However it is well encouraged to include any additional information
That students may think will be useful in conducting financial statements analysis of the
Company.
General Rules and Requirements:
The report should be prepared by a small group (with a maximum of three to four members) with
the contribution of each member specified on the report s title page. Reports must be confined to
3,000 words (+/- 5%). A title page, table of contents page (based on your report headings),
Introduction, conclusion and list of the references actually cited should accompany your report.
Font type should be Arial (size 11), paragraph spacing should be equal to 1.5.
Note: any additional material from external sources that you paste into your report is NOT
Included in the word limit. Also, ensure it is appropriately referenced.
PART A: (50 MARKS)
Section A (total marks are 50. Whatever student scores 15% will be the weightage of this
Section)
Part A1 (10 points)
Before the actual financial statements are evaluated, your group must inform interested parties
About the company s business structure, operations, services and all other business activities that
Are conducted, etc.
Part A2 (10 points)
Locate the most recent annual report of your public listed chosen companies of the same year.
Your group will need to review the major sections of this report in order to familiarize
Yourselves with the content of each of the financial statements and appropriate footnotes.
Review the most recent year-end balance sheets of the companies and indicate the
following:
The amount of total current assets
The amount of total non-current assets
The amount of total current liabilities 2
The amount of total non-current liabilities
The amount of total stockholder s equity
Compare the above figures with the figure of second company. Compare percentage
increase or decrease.
(Use Excel Sheet)
Part A3 (10 points)
Review the most recent year s income statement and indicate the following:
total (operating) revenues;
cost of goods sold (if listed);
total expenses (before income taxes)
any non-operating (or extraordinary) gains and losses; and
Earnings per common share.
Compare the above figures with the figure of second company. Compare percentage
increase or decrease.
Part A4 (10 points)
Review the statement of cash flows for the most recent year and indicate the
following:
net cash inflow (outflow) from operating activities;
net cash inflow (outflow) from financing activities;
net cash inflow (outflow) from investing activities; and
net increase (decrease) in cash during the year.
Compare the above figures with the figure of second company. Compare percentage
increase or decrease.
Part A5 (10 points)
Review the stockholders’ equity section in your chosen company’s most recent year-end
balance sheet and compare that with the figure of second company. Compare percentage
increase or decrease. Compare percentage increase or decrease.
List the stockholders’ equity account balances and number of outstanding
shares from these two balance sheets and compute the increase or decrease for each during this past year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
#1 A comparative balance sheet for De La Cruz Corporation is presented below:
DE LA CRUZ CORPORATION
Comparative Balance Sheet
2014 2013
Assets
Cash $ 36,000 $ 31,000
Accounts receivable (net) 70,000 60,000
Prepaid insurance 25,000 17,000
Land 18,000 40,000
Equipment 70,000 60,000
Accumulated depreciation (20,000) (13,000)
Total Assets $199,000 $195,000
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Accounts payable $ 11,000 $ 6,000
Bonds payable 27,000 19,000
Common stock 140,000 115,000
Retained earnings 21,000 55,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $199,000 $195,000
Additional information:
1. Net loss for 2014 is $20,000.
2. Cash dividends of $14,000 were declared and paid in 2014.
3. Land was sold for cash at a loss of $4,000. This was the only land transaction during the year.
4. Equipment with a cost of $15,000 and accumulated depreciation of $10,000 was sold for $5,000 cash.
5. $22,000 of bonds were retired during the year at carrying (book) value.
6. Equipment was acquired for common stock. The fair value of the stock at the time of the exchange was $25,000.
Instructions
Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended 2014, using the indirect method.
#2The French Corporation experienced a fire on December 31, 2015, in which its financial records were partially destroyed. It has been able to salvage some of the records and has ascertained the following balances.
December 31, 2015 December 31, 2014
Cash $ 30,000 $ 10,000
Receivables (net) 85,000 125,000
Inventory 200,000 180,000
Accounts payable 50,000 90,000
Notes payable 30,000 60,000
Common stock, $100 par 400,000 400,000
Retained earnings 130,000 101,000
Additional information:
1. The inventory turnover is 4 times
2. The return on common stockholders’ equity is 20%. The company had no additional paid-in capital.
3. The accounts receivable turnover is 8.6 times.
4. The return on assets is 16%.
5. Total assets at December 31, 2014, were $685,000.
Instructions
Compute the following for The French Corporation.
(a) Cost of goods sold for 2015.
(b) Net sales (credit) for 2015.
(c) Net income for 2015.
(d) Total assets at December 31, 2015.
#3Manufacturing cost data for Pear Corporation, which uses a job order cost system, are presented below:
iPear Mini iPear Video
Direct Materials Used (a) $103,000
Direct Labor $ 70,000 140,000
Manufacturing Overhead Applied 63,000 (d)
Total Manufacturing Costs 240,000 (e)
Work in Process, 1/1/13 (b) 45,000
Total Cost of Work in Process 300,000 (f)
Work in Process, 12/31/13 (c) 40,000
Cost of Goods Manufactured 205,000 (g)
Instructions
Indicate the missing amount for each letter. Assume that overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor cost and that the rate is the same for both products.
#4The following information is available for Vaughn Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2014:
Collection of principal on long-term loan to a supplier $15,000
Acquisition of equipment for cash 10,000
Proceeds from the sale of long-term investment at book value 20,000
Issuance of common stock for cash 27,000
Depreciation expense 28,000
Redemption of bonds payable at carrying (book) value 35,000
Payment of cash dividends 15,000
Net income 25,000
Purchase of land by issuing bonds payable 45,000
In addition, the following information is available from the comparative balance sheet for Sally at the end of 2013 and 2014:
2014 2013
Cash $ 66,000 $14,000
Accounts receivable (net) 20,000 16,000
Prepaid insurance 18,000 13,000
Total current assets $104,000 $43,000
Accounts payable $ 30,000 $20,000
Salaries payable 3,000 7,000
Total current liabilities $ 33,000 $27,000
Instructions
Prepare Vaughn’s statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2014 using the indirect method.
#5Presented below are incomplete 2013 manufacturing cost data for Watts Corporation.
|
Direct Material Used
|
Direct Labor
|
Manufacturing Overhead
|
Total Manufacturing Costs
|
Work in Process (1/1)
|
Work in Process (12/31)
|
Cost of Goods Manufactured
|
|
(a)
|
$38,000
|
$60,000
|
$48,000
|
?
|
$120,000
|
$96,000
|
?
|
|
(b)
|
$149,000
|
$53,000
|
$90,000
|
$292,000
|
?
|
$98,000
|
$311,000
|
|
(c)
|
$53,000
|
$116,000
|
$121,000
|
$290,000
|
$413,000
|
?
|
$515,000
|
Instructions
Determine the missing amounts. (Remember the formula!)
#6The comparative condensed balance sheets of Balderson Corporation are presented below.
BALDERSON CORPORATION
Comparative Condensed Balance Sheets
December 31
2015 2014
Assets
Current assets $ 72,000 $ 80,000
Property, plant, and equipment (net) 95,400 90,000
Intangibles 33,600 40,000
Total assets $201,000 $210,000
Liabilities and stockholders’ equity
Current liabilities $ 40,320 $ 48,000
Long-term liabilities 142,500 150,000
Stockholders’ equity 18,180 12,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $201,000 $210,000
Instructions
(a) Prepare a horizontal analysis of the balance sheet data for Balderson Corporation using 2014 as a base.
(b) Prepare a vertical analysis of the 2015 balance sheet data for Balderson Corporation in columnar form.
#7Chapman Corporation incurred the following costs while manufacturing its product.
Materials used in product $130,000 Advertising expense $49,000
Depreciation on plant 65,000 Property taxes on plant 16,000
Property taxes on store 7,700 Delivery expense 20,000
Labor costs of assembly-line workers 112,000 Sales commissions 31,000
Factory supplies used 24,000 Salaries paid to sales clerks 58,000
Work-in-process inventory was $23,000 at January 1 and $15,800 at December 31. Finished goods inventory was $67,000 at January 1 and $52,600 at December 31.
Instructions
(a) Compute cost of goods manufactured.
(b) Compute cost of goods sold.
#8Durgapersad Corporation’s comparative balance sheets are presented below.
DURGAPERSAD CORPORATION
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31
2014 2013
Cash $ 21,570 $ 10,700
Accounts receivable 18,200 23,400
Land 18,000 26,000
Building 70,000 70,000
Accumulated depreciation (15,000) (10,000)
Total $112,770 $120,100
Accounts payable $ 12,370 $31,100
Common stock 75,000 69,000
Retained earnings 25,400 20,000
Total $112,770 $120,100
Additional information:
1. Net income was $27,900. Dividends declared and paid were $22,500.
2. All other changes in noncurrent account balances had a direct effect on cash flows, except the change in accumulated depreciation. The land was sold for $5,900.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2014 using the indirect method.
(b) Compute free cash flow.
#9Assuming a statement of cash flows is prepared, indicate the reporting of the transactions and events listed below by major categories on the statement. Use the following code letters to indicate the appropriate category under which the item would appear on the statement of cash flows.
Code
Cash Flows From Operating Activities
Add to Net Income A
Deduct from Net Income D
Cash Flows From Investing Activities IA
Cash Flows From Financing Activities FA
Category
1. Common stock is issued for cash at an amount above par value. _____
2. Merchandise inventory increased during the period. _____
3. Depreciation expense recorded for the period. _____
4. Building was purchased for cash. _____
5. Bonds payable were acquired andretired at their carrying value. _____
6. Accounts payable decreased during the period. _____
7. Prepaid expenses decreased during the period. _____
8. Treasury stock was acquired for cash. _____
9. Land is sold for cash at an amount equal to book value. _____
10. Patent amortization expense recorded for a period. _____
#10 Greene Corporation’s comparative balance sheets are presented below.
GREENE CORPORATION
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31
2014 2013
Cash $ 18,700 $ 22,700
Accounts receivable 24,700 22,300
Investments 25,000 16,000
Equipment 59,000 70,000
Accumulated depreciation (14,500) (10,000)
Total $112,900 $121,000
Accounts payable $ 13,600 $11,100
Bonds payable 6,000 30,000
Common stock 50,000 45,000
Retained earnings 43,300 34,900
Total $112,900 $121,000
Additional information:
1. Net income was $17,700. Dividends declared and paid were $9,300.
2. Equipment which cost $11,000 and had accumulated depreciation of $2,000 was sold for $4,000.
3. All other changes in noncurrent account balances had a direct effect on cash flows, except the change in accumulated depreciation.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2014 using the indirect method.
(b) Compute free cash flow.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An abbreviated cash budget for Big Chuck Enterprises follows.
July August September
Beginning cash balance $10,000 $ $ ?
Add: Cash receipts 50,000 63,000 71,000
Deduct: Cash payments -64,000 -58,000 -64,000
Cash excess (deficiency) before financing ($4,000) $ $ ?
Financing
Borrowing to maintain minimum balance ?
Principal repayment ?
Interest payment ?
Ending cash balance $ $ $ ?
Big Chuck wishes to maintain a $10,000 minimum cash balance at all times. Additional financing is available (and retired) in $1,000 multiples at a 12% interest rate. Assume that borrowings take place at the beginning of the month; retirements, in contrast, occur at the end of the month. Interest is paid at the time of repaying principal and computed on the portion of principal repaid.
a. Find the unknowns in Big Chuck’s abbreviated cash budget.
b. Determine the outstanding loan balance as of September 30, after any repayments have been made.
Banner Company manufactures flags of various countries. Each flag has a standard of eight square feet of fabric and three hours of direct labor time. Information about recent production activity follows.
Nova Manufacturing applies factory overhead to products on the basis of direct labor hours. At the beginning of the current year, the company’s accountant made the following estimates for the forthcoming period:
Estimated variable overhead: $500,000
Estimated fixed overhead: $400,000
Estimated direct labor hours: 40,000
| Arrow Enterprises uses a standard costing system. The standard cost sheet for product no. 549 follows. |
| Direct materials: 4 units @ $6.50 $26.00 |
| Direct labor: 8 hours @ $8.50 68 |
| Variable factory overhead: 8 hours @ $7.00 56 |
| Fixed factory overhead: 8 hours @ 2.5 20 |
| Total standard cost per unit $170.00 |
|
| The following information pertains to activity for December: |
| 1. Direct materials acquired during the month amounted to 26,350 units at $6.40 per unit. All materials were consumed in operations. |
| 2. Arrow incurred an average wage rate of $8.75 for 51,400 hours of activity. |
| 3. Total overhead incurred amounted to $508,400. Budgeted fixed overhead totals $1.8 million and is spread evenly throughout the year. |
| 4. Actual production amounted to 6,500 completed units. |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Arrow Enterprises uses a standard costing system. The standard cost sheet for product no. 549 follows.
Direct materials: 4 units @ $6.50 $26.00
Direct labor: 8 hours @ $8.50 68
Variable factory overhead: 8 hours @ $7.00 56
Fixed factory overhead: 8 hours @ 2.5 20
Total standard cost per unit $170.00
The following information pertains to activity for December:
1. Direct materials acquired during the month amounted to 26,350 units at $6.40 per unit. All materials were consumed in operations.
2. Arrow incurred an average wage rate of $8.75 for 51,400 hours of activity.
3. Total overhead incurred amounted to $508,400. Budgeted fixed overhead totals $1.8 million and is spread evenly throughout the year.
4. Actual production amounted to 6,500 completed units.
Nova Manufacturing applies factory overhead to products on the basis of direct labor hours. At the beginning of the current year, the company’s accountant made the following estimates for the forthcoming period:
Estimated variable overhead: $500,000
Estimated fixed overhead: $400,000
Estimated direct labor hours: 40,000
It is now 12 months later. Actual total overhead incurred in the manufacture of 7,900 units amounted to $895,100. Actual labor hours totaled 39,800. Assuming a direct labor standard of five hours per finished unit, calculate the following:
a. Variable overhead efficiency variance
b. Fixed overhead volume variance
c. Overhead spending variance
Banner Company manufactures flags of various countries. Each flag has a standard of eight square feet of fabric and three hours of direct labor time. Information about recent production activity follows.
Actual cost of fabric: $4.50 per square foot
Fabric consumed: 32,080 square feet
Standard price per square foot of fabric: $4.25
Standard direct labor rate: $10.00 per hour
Actual direct labor rate: $10.20 per hour
Actual labor hours worked: 11,940
Actual production completed: 4,000 flags
a. Compute the materials price variance and the materials quantity variance.
b. Compute the labor rate variance and the labor efficiency variance.
“An abbreviated cash budget for Big Chuck Enterprises follows.
July August September
Beginning cash balance $10,000 $ $ ?
Add: Cash receipts 50,000 63,000 71,000
Deduct: Cash payments -64,000 -58,000 -64,000
Cash excess (deficiency) before financing ($4,000) $ $ ?
Financing
Borrowing to maintain minimum balance ?
Principal repayment ?
Interest payment ?
Ending cash balance $ $ $ ?
Big Chuck wishes to maintain a $10,000 minimum cash balance at all times. Additional financing is available (and retired) in $1,000 multiples at a 12% interest rate. Assume that borrowings take place at the beginning of the month; retirements, in contrast, occur at the end of the month. Interest is paid at the time of repaying principal and computed on the portion of principal repaid.
a. Find the unknowns in Big Chuck’s abbreviated cash budget.
b. Determine the outstanding loan balance as of September 30, after any repayments have been made.”
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The following balance sheet information (in $ millions) comes from the Annual Report to Shareholders of Marriott International Inc. for the 2008 fiscal year. (Certain amounts have been replaced with question marks to test your understanding of balance sheets.) In addition, you re provided with the following information from an analysis of Marriott s financial position at the same date:
Current ratio = 1.3296486
Acid-test ratio = 0.407422
Debt-to-equity ratio = 5.4514493
Compute the missing amounts (rounded to the nearest $ in millions) in the Marriott balance sheet.
Assets
Current assets
Cash and equivalents $134
Accounts and notes receivable ?
Inventory ?
Other 355
Total current assets ?
Property and equipment, net $1,443)
Intangible assets, net ?)
Investments 346)
Notes and other receivables, net 988)
Other 1,173)
Total non-current asssets ?
Total assets ?
Liabilities and Shareholders Equity
Current liabilities
Accounts payable $704
Accrued payroll and benefits 633
Other payables and accruals 1,196
Total current liabilities 2,533
Long-term debt ?)
Other long-term liabilities 2,015)
Total long-term liabilities ?
Total liabilities ?
Shareholders equity
Class A common stock 5)
Additional paid-in capital 3,590)
Retained earnings 3,565)
Treasury stock and other (5,780)
Total shareholders equity 1,380
Total liabilities and shareholders equity $8,903
2. The following information is provided in the 2011 annual report to shareholders of paris-perfume.com:
December 31, 2011 December 31, 2010
accounts receivable $100 million
Inventory $70 million $30 million
Other assets $170 million
Total assets $300 million Total liabilities $100 million
Total stockholders equity $200 million
For the year ended Dec. 31, 2011
Net sales
Cost of goods sold
Net income $40 million
Return on assets 10%
Receivables turnover 8.0
Inventory turnover 12.0
Asset turnover 2.5
Return on stockholders equity 20%
Profit margin on sales 4%
Required: Compute the missing amount in the paris-perfume.com financial statement information, indicated by in the table above.
3. Shown below is activity for one of the products of Denver Office Equipment:
January 1 balance, 500 units @ $55 $27,500
Purchases
January 10 500 units @ $60
January 20 1,000 units @ $63
Sales:
January 12 800 units
January 28 750 units
a. Compute the ending inventory and cost of goods sold assuming Denver uses FIFO.
b. Compute the ending inventory and cost of goods sold assuming Denver uses LIFO and a perpetual inventory system.
c. Compute the ending inventory and cost of goods sold assuming Denver uses average cost and a periodic inventory system.
d. Compute the ending inventory and cost of goods sold assuming Denver uses average cost and a perpetual inventory system.
e. Compute the ending inventory and cost of goods sold assuming Denver uses LIFO and a periodic inventory system.
Part B: Ten questions worth 4 points each. Show all work.
1. The following information ($ in millions) comes from a recent annual report of Amazon.com, Inc.:
Net sales $10,711)
Total assets 4,363)
End of year balance in cash 1,022)
Total stockholders equity 431)
Gross profit (Sales Cost of Sales) 2,456)
Net increase in cash for the year 9)
Operating expenses 2,067)
Net operating cash flow 702)
Other income (expense), net (12)
a. Compute Amazon s balance in cash at the beginning of the year.
b. Compute Amazon s total liabilities at the end of the year.
c. Compute cost of goods sold for the year.
d. Compute the income before income tax for Amazon.
2. The current asset section of Seifert & Seifert, CPA s balance sheet consists of cash, accounts receivable, investments, and prepaid expenses. The 2011 balance sheet reported the following: cash, $110,000; investments, $22,000; prepaid expenses, $18,000; noncurrent assets, $422,000; and shareholders equity, $350,000. The current ratio at the end of the year was 1.6 and the debt to equity ratio was .8. Required: Determine the following 2011 amounts and ratios:
a. Current liabilities.
b. Long-term liabilities.
c. Accounts receivable.
d. The acid-test ratio.
3. Canton Corporation reported the following items in its adjusted trial balance for the year ended December 31, 2011:
Income from continuing operations before income taxes $110,000)
Extraordinary gain on property condemnsation 28,000)
Extraordinary loss on natural disaster (50,000)
Canton is subject to a 30% tax rate.
Required: Prepare the December 31, 2011, income statement for Canton Corporation, starting with income from continuing operations before income taxes.
4. In 2011, KP Building Inc. began work on a four-year construction project (called Cincy One ). The contract price is $300 million. KP uses the percentage-of-completion method of accounting. At the end of 2011, the following financial statement informationindicates the results to date for Cincy One:
INCOME STATEMENT
Gross Profit (before-taxes) recognized in 2011 $22 million
BALANCE SHEET
Accounts Receivable from construction billings $10 million
Construction in progress $66 million
Less: Billings on construction ($75 million)
Net billings in excess of construction in progress $9 million
Required: Compute the following, placing your answer in the spaces provided andshowing supporting computations:
Items to compute:
Cash collected by KP on Cincy One during 2011
Actual costs incurred by KP on Cincy One during 2011
At 12/31/2011, the estimated remaining costs to complete Cincy One
The percentage of Cincy One that was completed during 2011
5. On June 30, 2011, Gunderson Electronics issued 8% stated rate bonds with a face amount of $300 million. The bonds mature on June 30, 2031 (20 years). The market rate of interest for similar bond issues was 10% (5% semiannual rate). Interest is paid semiannually (4%) on June 30 and December 31, beginning on December 31, 2011.
Required:
a. Determine the price of the bonds on June 30, 2011.
b. Calculate the interest expense Gunderson reports in 2011 for these bonds. 6. During Burns Company s first year of operations, credit sales totaled $140,000 and collections on credit sales totaled $105,000. Burns estimates that bad debt losses will be 1.5% of credit sales. By year-end, Burns had written off $300 of specific accounts as uncollectible.
Required:
a. Prepare all appropriate journal entries relative to uncollectible accounts and bad debt expense.
b. Show the year-end balance sheet presentation for accounts receivable.
7. Appleton Inc. adopted dollar-value LIFO on January 1, 2011, when the inventory value was $1,200,000. The December 31, 2011, ending inventory at year-end costs was $1,430,000 and the cost index for the year is 1.1.
Required: Compute the dollar-value LIFO inventory valuation for the December 31 2011, inventory.
8. DK Super Stores Inc. uses the average cost retail method to estimate its ending inventory. Information at June 30, 2011, is as follows:
Cost Retail
Beginning inventory $105,000
Net purchases 375,000
Net sales 380,000
Ending inventory 64,000
Required: Compute the cost-to-retail percentage used by DK.
9. Schefter Mining operates a copper mine in Wyoming. Acquisition, exploration, and development costs totaled $8.2 million. Extraction activities began on July 1, 2011. After the copper is extracted in approximately six years, Schefter is obligated to restore the land to its original condition, including constructing a park. The company s controller has provided the following three cash flow possibilities for the restoration
costs:
Cash Flow Probability
1. $700,000 30%
2. $ 800,000 25%
3. $ 900,000 45%
The company s credit-adjusted, risk-free rate of interest is 5%, and its fiscal year ends on December 31.
Required:
a. What is the initial cost of the copper mine? (Round computations to nearest whole dollar.)
b. How much accretion expense will Schefter report in its 2011 income statement?
c. What is the carrying value (book value) of the asset retirement obligation that Schefter will report in its 2011 balance sheet?
d. Assume that actual restoration costs incurred in 2017 totaled $860,000. What amount of gain or loss will Schefter recognize on retirement of the liability?
10. On March 30, 2011, Calvin Exploration purchased a drilling machine for $840,000. The estimated useful life of the machine is 10 years, and no residual value is anticipated. An important component of the machine is the drill housing component that will need to be replaced in five years. The $200,000 cost of the drill housing component is included in the $840,000 cost of the machine. Calvin uses the straight-line depreciation method for all machinery. The company s fiscal year ends on December 31.
Required:
a. Calculate depreciation on the drilling machine for 2011 and 2012 applying the typical U.S. GAAP treatment.
b. Repeat requirement 1 applying IFRS.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Your company’s accounts payable clerk is asked to fill in for your accounts receivable clerk. Many things look unfamiliar to her, and she needs some explanations. You start by saying, “Accounts receivable is claims from monies due to the company.” Continue your explanation with the following:
- Explain
- the classification of receivables.
- how companies handle uncollectible accounts.
- revenue recognition when the right of return exists.
- Visit the SEC’s Web site (www.sec.gov), and then do the following:
- Review a sample of financial statements submitted by an SEC registrant.
- Include the URL in your post.
- After reviewing the notes to the financial statements, list the types of information you found about the following:
- The type of accounts receivable the registrant had
- The classification
- How discounts are handled (if given)
- How the company treats uncollectible accounts
In your own words, please post a response to the Discussion Board and comment on at least 1 other posting. You will be graded on the quality of your postings.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A small equipment company is preparing its annual financial statements in anticipation of applying for a loan. During the last week of the year, the company received a shipment of inventory but has not paid for it. The invoice indicates that the company owes $5,000 for the purchase. The owner, Randy Ray, has decided to omit this asset and the related liability from the year-end balance sheet, reasoning that it is okay because he is omitting both of them, which means there is no difference in owners equity.
For this assignment you are to address the following:
- What is your opinion of Randy s reasoning? (1 paragraph)
- Explain the circumstances under which Randy s decision would be acceptable under GAAP and circumstances under which it would definitely be unacceptable. (3 to 4 paragraphs).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Research Paper
Course Research Paper (Due ASAP)
In order to understand activity-based costing and how it differs from a traditional costing system, you will review and analyze JetBlue airways Form 10-K report. In an 8-10 page paper, analyze JetBlue’s strategy. The following concepts should be covered in your paper:
1. What is JetBlue’s strategy for success in the marketplace? Does the company rely on customer intimacy, operational excellence, or product leadership customer value proposition? Use evidence to support your conclusion.
2. What business risks does JetBlue face that may threaten the company’s ability to satisfy stockholder expectations? What are some examples of control activities that the company could use to reduce these risks? (Hint: Focus on pages 17-23 of the 10-k.)
3. How can the concept of unit-level activities be applied to an airline? More specifically, what are two examples of unit-level activities for JetBlue? What steps has JetBlue taken to manage these unit-level activities more efficiently?
4. How can the concept of batch-level activities be applied to an airline? What are two examples of batch-level activities for JetBlue? What steps has JetBlue taken to manage these batch-level activities more efficiently?
5. What is one example of a customer-level activity and an organization-sustaining activity for JetBlue?
6. Give an example of a transactions driver and a duration driver that could be used to assign fuel costs to a particular flight departure. Which of the two activity measures would be more accurate and why?
This paper requires that students use the APA format in writing course papers. Therefore, the APA rules for formatting, quoting, paraphrasing, citing, and listing of sources are to be followed. Make sure you include a title page and reference page in addition to your 8-10 pages of text. Your paper must contain at least five current references and may include Internet sources, books, your text book, and professional journals or similar resources. Note: your sources must be considered scholarly sources.
Other information:
2004 Form 10-K report in the link or weblink
http://library.corporate-ir.net/library/13/131/131045/items/211507/200410k.pdf
Course Textbook
Zimmerman, J. L. (2009). Accounting for decision making and control(6th ed.). New York, NY: McGraw Hill.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Evaluate the difficulties companies are faced in implementing a control framework against fraud under Sarbanes-Oxley (SOX). In your evaluation, discuss how the external financial audit can assist in determining fraud.
Analyze how the SOX framework can prevent business model fraud in financial accounting and managerial accounting. Contrast the differences in the framework for financial accounting and managerial accounting.
2
From the e-Activity, assess the effectiveness of the current Institute of Management Accountants (IMA) code of professional conduct in promoting -ethical behavior and providing guidance for the dilemmas managerial accountants are confronted with today. In your assessment, compare the IMA code of conduct to the AICPA code of professional conduct and its effectiveness.
From the e-Activity, assess the aspects of your job that are most likely to be challenged ethically and suggest how you will handle these situations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
General Electric Capital, a division of General Electric, uses long- term debt extensively. In early 2002, GE Capital issued $11 billion in long-term debt to investors, and then within days filed legal documents to prepare for another $50 billion long-term debt issue. As a result of the $50 billion filing, the price of the initial $11 billion offering declined (due to higher risk of more debt).
Bill Gross, a manager of a bond investment fund, denounced a lack in candor related to GE s recent debt deal. He said, it was the most recent and most egregious example of how bondholders are mistreated. Gross argued that GE was not forthright when GE Capital recently issued $11 billion in bonds, one of the largest issues ever from a U.S. corporation. What bothered Gross is that three days after the issue the company announced its intention to sell as much as $50 billion in additional debt, warrants, preferred stock, guarantees, letters of credit, and promissory notes at some future date.
In your opinion, did GE Capital act unethically by selling $11 billion of long-term debt without telling those investors that a few days later it would be filing documents to prepare for another $50 billion debt offering? Please explain why the action is unethical and if the action is illegal as well.
Source: Alban, J. (2002, March 25). Gross shakes the bond market; GE calms it, a bit. Barron s.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Show how each of the following transactions affects the accounting equation:
June 1 Issued 60,000 shares of $0.04 par value common stock for cash of $110,600
August 1 Issued 2,500 shares of $105 par value preferred stock for cash of $154 a share
2) Smith Jones Marketing Company has 3,000 shares of nine-percent, $60 par cumulative preferred stock outstanding and 4,900 shares of $3.75 par value common stock outstanding. The company began operations on April 1, 2010. The Cash dividends declared and paid during each of the first 3 years of smith Jones Marketing operations are shown. Calculate the amounts that went to the preferred and the common shareholders (SHs) each year.
3) Combs Company purchased back 11,000 shares of their $8 par value common stock for 98,000 on May 1, 2012. On Aug 1, 2011 they reissued those shares for $109,000. Please show the affect of both transactions on the accounting equation.
4) Hutch Corporation finished their fiscal year ending 3/31/2010 with $88,000 of net income. They issued dividends of 22,000 at year end. At the of year on 3/31/2011, they had a net loss of ($46,000)and did not distribute any dividends. In the fiscal year ending 3/31/2012 their net income was 55,000 and dividend ends were 15,000. What is the projected ending retained earnings balance as of 3/31/2012 assuming that 2010 was their first year of business.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.
(TCO A) Below you will find selected information (in millions) from Coca-Cola Co. s 2012 Annual Report:
|
Income Taxes Payable
|
$471
|
|
Short-term Investments and Marketable Securities
|
8,109
|
|
Cash
|
8,442
|
|
Other non-current Liabilities
|
10,449
|
|
Common Stock
|
1,760
|
|
Receivables
|
4,812
|
|
Other Current Assets
|
2,973
|
|
Long-term Investments
|
10,448
|
|
Other Non-current Assets
|
3,585
|
|
Property, Plant and Equipment
|
23,486
|
|
Trademarks
|
6,527
|
|
Other Intangible Assets
|
20,810
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
53
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
9,010
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
8,680
|
|
Short Term Notes Payable
|
17,874
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
2,781
|
|
Other Current Liabilities
|
796
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
14,736
|
|
Paid-in-Capital in Excess of Par Value
|
11,379
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
55,038
|
|
Inventories
|
3,264
|
|
Treasury Stock
|
35,009
|
Other information taken from the Annual Report:
|
Sales Revenue for 2012
|
$48,017
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold for 2012
|
19,053
|
|
Net Income for 2012
|
9,019
|
|
Inventory Balance on 12/31/11
|
3,092
|
|
Net Accounts Receivable Balance on 12/31/11
|
4,920
|
|
Total Assets on 12/31/11
|
79,974
|
|
Equity Balance on 12/31/11
|
31,921
|
Required:
1. Using the information provided prepare a Balance Sheet. Separate the current assets from non-current assets and provide a total for each. Also separate the current liabilities from the non-current liabilities and provide a total for each.
2. Using the Balance Sheet from your answer above calculate; Current Ratio, Days in Inventory, Average Collection Period, Return on Assets Ratio, Debt to Total Assets and Return on common stockholders equity ratio. (Make sure to show all your work)
(Points : 36)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The purpose of a corporate annual report is to communicate to stockholders and other interested parties its financial statements. The annual report is a summary of the corporation s operations over the previous 12 month time period and states the corporation s plans for the future. Many annual reports are created to resemble a corporate brochure, using lots of pictures, color, charts and graphs. Despite the fancy look, the main purpose of the report is to provide the year s financial data, which comes from the corporation s accounting system.
Instructions:
Obtain a current Annual Report for any U.S. company you are interested in analyzing. You may download it from its Website or from the LRC database called Mergent Online. Each student must choose a different company to analyze; therefore students must receive approval of your selected company from your professor by Week 2 of the class.
Write a 2-3 page paper in which you:
- Identify and explain the main sections of the annual report.
- Discuss the key factors that influenced the company s financial performance during the year.
- Discuss the primary assets held by the company.
- Explain how management characterizes the internal control environment of the company.
Your assignment must:
- Be typed, double-spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
- Include a cover page containing the tile of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. State the company name and reporting period on which you will be reporting on the cover page, such as Coca-Cola, Fiscal Year 2010 The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required page length
The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:
- Identify and explain the fundamental concepts and principles in accounting, the components of the accounting equation, the primary financial accounting equation and financial statements and reports.
- Analyze the basic concepts related to accounting information systems.
- Use technology and information resources to research issue in financial accounting.
- Write clearly and concisely about financial accounting using proper writing mechanics.
Grading for this assignment will be based on answer quality, logic/organization of the paper, and language and writing skills.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exam #3
1. Explain why a company would offer terms on their sales invoice such as 2/10, n/30. (10 Points)
2. The HeadSet Company sells headsets (very creative name for a company). The management of the HeadSetcompany does not like to prepare journal entries so they called you for help. .
Following is the information they provided you
Selling price of Headset is $45
Purchase price for the Headset is $29.
May 1 Purchased 3,000 Headsets from Vendor #1 with terms of 2/10, n/30, FOB Destination.
May 2 Freight bill for May 1 purchase was $350, and was paid on May 2.
May 3 Returned 250 Headsets to Vendor #1
May 10 Paid the amount owed to Vendor #1
May 12 Sold 1,800 Headsets to Customer Collaborate.
May 14 Customer Collaborate returned 75 injured Headsets
May 20 Received amount owed from Customer Collaborate
Required
A. Prepare the journal entries for the above transactions
B. Prepare a partial income statement (Gross sales through Gross Profit)
C. Compute the gross profit % from your partial income statement
D. Explain the meaning of your answer in C — short sentence.
(Total Points for Problem 30)
3. The Did Our Customers Pay on Time Company wants to prepare their aging schedule for December 3, 2013. They started the aging schedule but decided to call you to help them finish You are such a nice person so you said yes. Following is the information that was provided to you.
|
Name
|
Total
|
Not Past Due
|
1-30 days Past Due
|
31 60 Days Past Due
|
61 -90 Days Past Due
|
91 120 Days Past Due
|
Over 120 Days Past Due
|
|
Sub Total
|
$654,000
|
$320,400
|
$137,340
|
$78.480
|
$52,320
|
$45,748
|
$19,620
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Estimated % uncollectible
|
|
3%
|
7%
|
18%
|
26%
|
47%
|
72%
|
The following customers were not include in the above Aging Schedule
Customer A Invoice Due Date 11/14/2013 Invoice amount $2,500
Customer B Invoice Due Date 9/09/2013 Invoice Amount $3,700
Customer C Invoice Due Date 01/21/2014 Invoice Amount $4,200
The current balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Account is $27,450 credit.
Required:
1. Finish the aging schedule with the remaining information.
2. Prepare the journal entry to update the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
3. Based on your aging schedule determine the dollar amount that will be reported on the balance sheet for net receivables.
4. Your boss told you that the estimated % that were used in the aging schedule for Estimated Uncollectible Percentages should be reduced in half (each % reduced by half). How will that change affect the income statement and balance sheet?
(Total Points for the Problem 25)
#4. Assume that on Jan 18, 2014, your Customer Late Pay declared bankruptcy. The customer owes the company $5,800.
a. Prepare the journal entry to write of the balance for Customer Late Pay
b. Explain how the journal entry affect the income statement
(Total Points for the Problem 10)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The answer should be at most 1 paragraogh for both of these questions.
1.
Describe three issues/problems that a company could encounter when trying to determine the actual cost of a good or service to be used in the cost of goods sold. For each of your issues, provide an example of a company or industry where these issues could be present.
2.
We ve all experienced (or heard about) the challenges that the airlines have been facing. Read the Zacks Investment Research article, Airline Industry Stock Outlook August 2012 Identify three factors that are affecting airline company s ability to break even. For each of your factors, discuss how these have an impact on the breakeven (contribution margin, fixed costs, variable costs, a combination, etc.), and what happens if these factors increase or decrease.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
400 words
For this assignment, research at least 3 different types of computerized accounting software.
- Provide a background on each including what they offer and how they are different.
- Include at least 3 pros and cons for each, while taking into consideration the types of businesses.
On December 1, 2011, Larry and Samantha West formed a corporation called Farm Branch Rentals. The new corporation was able to begin operations immediately by purchasing the assets and taking over the location of LMNOP Rentals, an equipment rental company that was going out of business.
With this in mind, Samantha and Larry want you to explain to them the pros and cons of converting from a manual to a computerized accounting system, as well as give a recommendation of software or hardware that would work best for their business. Submit your explanation in a memo.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Discussion 4
Create an outline for Project 5.
Project 4
600 to 900 words
Research and analyze a company that has had publicly known problems with their internal control.
- Analyze what went wrong that caused the system of internal control to fail, and what could have been done differently to prevent the problems.
- Make 4 recommendations or suggestions on how the company could have improved its internal control system.
The deliverable for this project is a paper of 600-900 words. This does not include the title or references. All references must be properly cited in APA format.
Project 5
Deliverable Length:1000-1250 words (includes Phase 4 Key Assignment of 600-900 words)
Points Possible:250 Due Date:11/10/2013
Finalize your key assignment out line that you submitted for discussion 4
Incorporate the following into your paper:
- Feedback received from your classmates and the instructor on the key assignment that you started in the previous phase.
Also, incorporate into the assignment the following scenario and the questions that follow it:
- You are the head of an investigative team and your supervisor has asked you to put together a presentation for the next training session for new team members. Your focus is on the financial statements of a corporation.
- What kind of information would be found on the financial statements.
- Explain how the users of these statements ( i.e., investors, creditors, or government agencies) could use the information to help make better informed decisions.
- How would you determine if any fraudulent or illegal activity has taken place?
Your final paper should be 3 4 pages in length. This does not include the title or reference pages. All references must be cited using proper APA format.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Four different competent accountants independently agree on the amount and method of reporting an economic event. The concept demonstrated is:
A. Reliability.
B. Comparability.
C. Completeness.
D. Verifiability.
E. All of the above
2. Which of the following best demonstrates the full disclosure principle?
A. The multi-step income statement.
B. The auditors’ report.
C. The company’s tax return.
D. Notes to financial statements.
E. None of the above.
3. Disclosure notes to a company’s financial statements:
A. Are relatively unimportant facts that don’t belong in the basic financial statements.
B. Document the source of financial statement facts, like literary footnotes.
C. Are an integral part of a company’s financial statements.
D. Are irrelevant facts that are immaterial in amount.
E. None of the above.
4. An important argument in support of historical cost information is:
A. Relevance.
B. Predictive quality for future cash flows.
C. Materiality.
D. Verifiability.
E. All of the above
5. Primecoat Corporation could disseminate its annual financial statements two days earlier if it shifted substantial human resources from other operations to the annual report project. Management decided the value of the earlier report was not worth the added commitment of resources. The concept best demonstrated is:
A. Timeliness.
B. Materiality.
C. Relevance.
D. Cost effectiveness.
E. All of the above.
6. Mega Loan Company has very stringent credit requirements and, accordingly, has negligible losses from uncollectible accounts. The company’s independent accountants did not protest when, contrary to GAAP, the company recorded bad debt expense only when specific accounts were determined to be uncollectible, rather than use an allowance for uncollectible accounts. The concept demonstrated is:
A. Comparability.
B. Faithful representation.
C. Cost effectiveness.
D. Materiality.
E. Two of the above are correct.
7. Recognizing expected losses immediately, but deferring expected gains, is an example of:
A. Materiality.
B. Conservatism.
C. Cost effectiveness.
D. Timeliness.
E. All of the above
8. According to the conceptual framework, verifiability implies:
A. Legal evidence.
B. Logic.
C. Consensus.
D. Legal verdict.
E. None of the above.
9. Land was acquired in 2012 for a future building site at a cost of $40,000. The assessed valuation for tax purposes is $27,000, a qualified appraiser placed its value at $48,000, and a recent firm offer for the land was for a cash payment of $46,000. The land should be reported in the financial statements at:
A. $40,000.
B. $27,000.
C. $46,000.
D. $48,000.
E. None of the above.
10. Of the following, the most important objective for financial reporting is to provide information useful for:
A. Making decisions.
B. Determining taxable income.
C. Providing accountability.
D. Increasing future profits.
E. Two of the above.
11. The balance in retained earnings at the end of the year is determined by retained earnings at the beginning of the year:
A. Plus revenues minus liabilities.
B. Plus accruals minus deferrals.
C. Plus net income minus dividends.
D. Plus assets minus liabilities.
E. None of the above.
12. Fink Insurance collected premiums of $18,000,000 from its customers during the current year. The adjusted balance in the unearned premiums account increased from $6 million to $8 million dollars during the year. What was Fink’s revenue from earned insurance premiums for the current year?
A. $10,000,000.
B. $16,000,000.
C. $18,000,000.
D. $20,000,000.
E. None of the above.
13. On November 1, 2012, Tim’s Toys borrows $30,000,000 at 9% to finance the holiday sales season. The note is for a six-month term and both principal and interest are payable at maturity. What should be the balance of interest payable for the loan as of December 31, 2012?
A. $112,500.
B. $225,000.
C. $450,000.
D. $1,350,000.
E. None of the above.
14. Eve’s Apples opened business on January 1, 2011, and paid for two insurance policies effective that date. The liability policy was $36,000 for eighteen months, and the crop damage policy was $12,000 for a two-year term. What was the balance in Eve’s prepaid insurance as of December 31, 2011?
A. $9,000.
B. $18,000.
C. $30,000.
D. $48,000.
E. None of the above.
15. In its first year of operations Acme Corp. had income before tax of $400,000. Acme made income tax payments totaling $150,000 during the year and has an income tax rate of 40%. What would be the balance in income tax payable at the end of the year?
A. $160,000 credit.
B. $150,000 credit.
C. $10,000 credit.
D. $10,000 debit.
E. None of the above.
16. Carolina Mills purchased $270,000 in supplies this year. The supplies account increased by $10,000 during the year to an ending balance of $66,000. What was supplies expense for Carolina Mills during the year?
A. $300,000.
B. $280,000.
C. $260,000.
D. $240,000.
E. None of the above.
17. The adjusting entry required to record accrued expenses includes:
A. A debit to an expense.
B. A debit to an asset.
C. A credit to an asset.
D. A credit to liability.
E. Two of the above.
18. The adjusting entry required when amounts previously recorded as unearned revenues are earned includes:
A. A debit to a liability.
B. A debit to an asset.
C. A credit to a liability.
D. A credit to an asset.
E. A debit to an expense.
19. On December 31, 2012, Coolwear, Inc. had balances in its accounts receivable and allowance for uncollectible accounts of $48,400 and $0, respectively. No receivables were written off during the year. At the end of 2012, Coolwear estimated that $2,100 in receivables would not be collected. Bad debt expense for 2012 would be:
A. $0.
B. $46,300.
C. $1,050.
D. $2,100.
E. None of the above.
20. A sale on account would be recorded by:
A. Debiting revenue.
B. Crediting assets.
C. Crediting liabilities.
D. Debiting assets.
E. None of the above.
21-23. Carter Appliances is preparing its annual report for the current fiscal year. The company’s controller has asked for your help in determining how best to disclose information about the following items:
21. A subsequent event. (B) in a separate disclosure note
22. Inventory costing method. (A) in the summary of significant accounting policies note
23. Allowance for uncollectible accounts. (C) on the face of the balance sheet
Required: Indicate whether the above items should be disclosed (A) in the summary of significant accounting policies note, (B) in a separate disclosure note, or (C) on the face of the balance sheet or (D) not included in the annual report.
24. The balance sheet reports:
A. Net income at a point in time.
B. Cash flows for a period of time.
C. Assets and equities at a point in time.
D. Assets and equities for a period of time.
E. Assets and liabilities for a period of time.
25. Notes payable:
A. Is a current liability account.
B. Usually has a debit balance.
C. Is a non-current liability account.
D. Is an investment.
E. Cannot determine its classification without additional information.
26. Assets do not include:
A. Funds for special purposes.
B. Investments.
C. Paid-in capital.
D. Unexpired insurance.
E. Two of the above are not assets.
27. Cash equivalents would not include:
A. Cash not available for current operations.
B. Money market funds.
C. United States treasury bills.
D. Bank drafts.
E. All of the above.
28. Accrued expenses:
A. Can be repaid in services rather than cash.
B. Result from payment before services are received.
C. Result from services received before payment.
D. Are deferred charges to expense.
E. Two of the above are correct.
29. The principal concern with accounting for related party transactions is:
A. The size of the transactions.
B. Differences between economic substance and legal form.
C. The absence of legally binding contracts.
D. The lack of accurate data to record transactions.
E. All of the above.
30. A subsequent event for an entity with a December 31, 2012, year-end would not include:
A. A change in the estimated useful lives of equipment in January 2013.
B. An issuance of bonds in January 2013.
C. An acquisition of another company in January 2013.
D. A major uncertainty at December 31, resolved in January 2013.
E. All of the above.
31. Popson Inc. incurred a material loss which was not unusual in character, but was clearly an infrequent occurrence. This loss should be reported as:
A. An extraordinary loss.
B. A separate line item between income from continuing operations and income from discontinued operations.
C. A separate line item within income from continuing operations.
D. A separate line item within income from noncontinuing operations.
E. A separate line item in the retained earnings statement.
32. Freda’s Florist reported the following before-tax income statement items for the year ended December 31, 2012:
Operating income 250,000
Extraordinary gain 70,000
All income statement items are subject to a 40% income tax rate. In its 2012 income statement, Freda’s separately stated income tax expense would be _______________and total income tax expense would be____________________.
33. The principal benefit of separately reporting discontinued operations and extraordinary items is to enhance:
A. Predictive ability.
B. Consistency in reporting.
C. Intraperiod continuity.
D. Comprehensive reporting.
E. All of the above.
34. On August 1, 2012, Rocket Retailers adopted a plan to discontinue its catalog sales division, which qualifies as a separate component of the business according to GAAP regarding discontinued operations. The disposal of the division was expected to be concluded by June 30, 2013. On January 31, 2013, Rocket’s fiscal year-end, the following information relative to the discontinued division was accumulated:
Operating loss Feb. 1, 2012 Jan. 31, 2013 115,000
Estimated operating losses Feb. 1 to June 30, 2013 80,000
Impairment of division assets at Jan. 31, 2012 10,000
In its income statement for the year ended January 31, 2012, Rocket would report a before-tax loss on discontinued operations of ___________________.
35. On October 28, 2012, Mercedes Company committed to a plan to sell a division that qualified as a component of the entity according to GAAP regarding discontinued operations and was properly classified as held for sale on December 31, 2012, the end of the company’s fiscal year.
The division’s loss from operations for 2012 was $2,000,000.The division’s book value and fair value less cost to sell on December 31 were $3,000,000 and $2,500,000, respectively. What before-tax amount should Mercedes report on discontinued operations in its 2012 income statement? (State the amount followed by gain OR loss OR impairment loss)
36. Major Co. reported 2012 income of $300,000 from continuing operations before income taxes and a before-tax extraordinary loss of $80,000. All income is subject to a 30% tax rate. In the 2012 income statement, Major Co. would show the following line-item amounts for income tax expense __and net income________.
37 and 38. Misty Company reported the following before-tax items during the current year:
Sales 600
Operating expenses 250
Restructuring charges 20
Extraordinary loss 50
Misty’s effective tax rate is 40%.
37. What would be Misty’s income before extraordinary item(s)?
38. What would be Misty’s net income for the current year? $
39. The Maytag Corporation’s income statement includes income from continuing operations, a loss from discontinued operations, and extraordinary items. Earnings per share information would be provided for:
A. Net income only.
B. Income from continuing operations and net income only.
C. Income from continuing operations, loss from discontinued operations and net income only.
D. Income from continuing operations, loss from discontinued operations, extraordinary items and net income.
40. The statement of cash flows reports cash flows from the activities of:
A. Operating, purchasing, and investing.
B. Borrowing, paying, and investing.
C. Financing, investing, and operating.
D. Using, investing, and financing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following assignment must be completed by the expected due date. Attached grading criteria must also be strictly followed. Thank you!
Applying Balanced Scorecard
In many cases, managers end up in trouble as they direct their focus exclusively on cost savings. Cost cutting is always emphasized, but other impacts, such as decreased quality, can be overlooked. These overlooked impacts can have a significant effect on the revenue and profitability of an organization. The balanced scorecard is a measure to assure that management is not exclusively driven by cost, but balanced with other measures that also can significantly influence the performance of an organization.
Using the module readings and the Argosy University online library resources, research balanced scorecard and its application.
Select a service industry organization of your choice. Complete the following for the selected organization:
- Recommend at least two performance measures in each of the balanced scorecard categories.
- Explain each of your recommendations.
- Using these measures as examples, explain how use of the balanced scorecard can increase the economic value added within the organization.
Write your initial response in 4 5 paragraphs. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.
|
Initial response:
- Was insightful, original, accurate, and timely.
- Was substantive and demonstrated advanced understanding of concepts.
- Compiled/synthesized theories and concepts drawn from a variety of sources to support statements and conclusions.
|
16 |
|
|
|
|
Writing:
- Wrote in a clear, concise, formal, and organized manner.
- Responses were error free.
- Information from sources, where applicable, was paraphrased appropriately and accurately cited.
|
8 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This assignment must be done by the stated due date. All grading criteria must be strictly followed.
Applying Decision-Making Skills
As a manager, part of your role is to develop strategy, and share this strategy with various stakeholders within the organization. This assignment will allow you to take your findings as a manager and communicate these findings to those who are affected.
Your company has been presented with a decision on replacing a piece of equipment for a new computerized version that promotes efficiency for the upcoming year. As manager you will need to decide whether or not the purchase of the new equipment is a worthwhile investment and to communicate your recommendations to Executive Management for a final decision. To be convincing, sufficient support for your recommendations must be provided in order to be considered valid and accepted.
| Existing Equipment |
| Original Cost |
60,000 |
| Present Book Value |
30,000 |
| Annual Cash Operating Costs |
145,000 |
| Current Market Value |
15,000 |
| Market Value in Ten Years |
0 |
| Remaining useful Life |
10 years |
| Replacement Equipment |
| Cost |
600,000 |
| Annual Cash Operating Costs |
50,000 |
| Market Value in Ten Years |
0 |
| Useful Life |
10 years |
| Other Information |
| Cost of Capital |
10% |
| Payback requirement |
6 years |
In this assignment, use the information above to develop a comprehensive analysis using NPV, Payback Method, and IRR to develop a recommendation on replacing the existing equipment with a new computerized version. Develop an executive summary of your findings in a Microsoft PowerPoint presentation format to present to Executive Management.
Do the following in your presentation:
- Include a statement of the problem or topic, a concise analysis of the findings, and a recapitulation of any main conclusions or recommendations.
- Be sure to incorporate specific details to highlight or support the summary including calculations.
- Using your knowledge of capital budgeting techniques, explain how principles of capital budgeting, such as the payback method, IRR, and NPV, can be used to assess the potential projects and assist in the decision-making process.
Develop a 10-12 slide presentation in PowerPoint format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention:
| Grading Criteria |
Maximum Points |
| Wrote a statement of the problem or topic, a concise analysis of the findings, and a recapitulation of any main conclusions or recommendations. |
28 |
| Explained the summary using specific details including calculations. |
28 |
| Explained how principles of capital budgeting, such as the payback method, IRR, and NPV, can be used to assess the potential projects and assist in the decision-making process displaying knowledge of capital budgeting techniques. |
36 |
| Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; and displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. |
8 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACCOUNTING 450/550 Review Project
Part 1: Adjusting entries, 2012 adjusted trial balance and corrected 12/31/11 balance sheet.
Due: Tuesday 7/9/13 at the beginning of class. Part 2: Using the solution to part 1 which will be made available after part 1 is turned in on blackboard, you are to prepare the income statement, statement of stockholders equity, statement of cash flows, balance sheet; all in proper form You have the option of preparing a statement of comprehensive income or to incorporate that into the statement of stockholders equity.
Both parts must be typed in 10 or 12 font.
NOTE: Important! Make a copy of your solution. The solution to the problem will be posted on blackboard after you turn in the project.
Purpose of this assignment:
- Review the adjustment/correction process including sophisticated topics from accounting 350/351/352.
- Prepare all of the financial statements in proper form.
These are foundational to this course and your career as accountants.
Setting:
You have been hired by Dillard to prepare adjusting entries and financial statements for 2012. Previously Rinky Dink Accounting had been performing such tasks.
Ignore tax effects.
The trial balance at 12/31/12 before you work your magic and the balance sheet at 12/31/11 are included in a separate excel file.
- The investments account at 12/31/12 contains stocks that were all purchased during 2011. In discussions with the CFO, you determine that they were made to invest excess cash. The company expects that they will need the cash within the next year. Here is information that you gather regarding that portfolio (in 000 s):
|
Company
|
Initial Investment Cost
|
Market Value at 12/31/11
|
Market Value at 12/31/12
|
|
DAG
|
$300
|
$330
|
$320
|
|
GLS
|
50
|
55
|
40
|
|
HRG
|
100
|
78
|
95
|
You also discuss with the CFO the Investment in Timberside Corporation. You discover that this Investment was first made 3 years ago on 1/1/10 and that the investment cost was $700,000 . The investment in 30% of the voting stock of Timberside was made in order to be able to have representation on its board since Timberside is a key supplier of the inventory that Dillard sells. Dillard wants to have a say in the quality control and other decisions that Timberside makes. You dig around and realize that the $700,000 investment cost was exactly equal to 30% of the book value of equity of Timberside on 1/1/10. You also determine that Dillard has been recording dividend revenue when it receives payment. During 2010, Dillard received $10,000 in dividends, in 2011 $25,000 and are $25,000 in 2012. Timberside has reported income during 2010, 2011 and 2012 of $300,000, $350,000 and $330,000 respectively.
On 1/1/08, Dillard purchased 300, $1,000 face 8% Mickey Mouse Corporation bonds, interest paid semi-annually on 7/1 and 12/31, with a maturity term of 10 years. The purchase price was $280,488.
- You discover that Dillard bought and installed equipment for $170,000 on 1/1/10. The equipment s use will result in environmental damage that will need to be cleaned up when the equipment is retired. The estimated life of the equipment is 10 years on 1/1/10. The environmental clean-up cost is estimated to be $50,000. The $50,000 will all be paid at the end of the equipment s life. You notice that the equipment was expensed when originally purchased. A discount rate of 6% is reasonable discount rate for the clean-up cost. Straight-line with no salvage value is appropriate.
- The company uses the percentage of accounts receivable method and historically does not collect 5% of its ending accounts receivable.
- The company has been recording warranty expense as it has been paid. The company first warranted its products, 4 years ago, beginning 1/1/09. Warranty costs paid by year are listed below:
|
Year
|
Warranty costs paid
|
|
2009
|
$7,000
|
|
2010
|
$10,000
|
|
2011
|
$12,000
|
|
2012
|
$11,000
|
After exploring the timing of sales during the year and what seems like the company will pay given experience, you compute the following warranty liabilities at each year end.
|
Original Sale year
|
Estimated liability on 12/31/09
|
Estimated liability on 12/31/10
|
Estimated liability on 12/31/11
|
Estimated liability at 12/31/12
|
|
2009
|
$4,000
|
$1,000
|
0
|
0
|
|
2010
|
|
9,000
|
$1,000
|
0
|
|
2011
|
|
|
7,000
|
$2,000
|
|
2012
|
|
|
|
4,000
|
|
Total
|
$4,000
|
$10,000
|
$8,000
|
$6,000
|
- Additional information: Dillard purchased equipment for $300,000 cash this year. This transaction was properly recorded.
- You discover that the reported ending inventory for 2010, 2011 and 2012 were all wrong. This is first detected by you this year. Inventory on 12/31/10 was understated by $50,000, on 12/31/11 understated by $80,000 and on 12/31/12 overstated by $90,000. These appear to be independent errors.
- The 10-year $400,000, 8% note payable was issued on 4/1/08 and pays interest on 3/31 and 9/30 each year.
- On 1/1/10, Dillard entered into a 5-year lease agreement for equipment. The equipment s estimated life was 6 years. The 5 annual lease payments are due on 12/31 each year except there were two payments the first year, on on 1/1 and one on 12/31. The lease payments are $10,000 each. Dillard guarantees a residual value of $10,000. An incremental borrowing rate of 7% would be appropriate.
- 2011 is the first year that Dillard had a separate Treasury Stock account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are the newly hired accountant for The Gift Shop. The owner has just received the December 31, 2008 bank statement and has asked you to prepare the monthly bank reconciliation.
- Write the procedure documentation for the monthly bank reconciliation process in a professional manner.
- It will be the desktop guide used by others in the event of your absence to prepare the financial statements for The Gift Shop.
- It may be in the form of a memorandum or as a numbered listing of items, depending on your individual preference.
- Prepare the monthly bank reconciliation for The Gift Shop based on the information provided.
Additional information needed for bank reconciliation preparation follows:
- Cash per the unadjusted trial balance is $12,675.
- Cash balance per the bank statement is $12,780.
- Check #115 has not cleared the bank. It was written for $645.
- A deposit of $1,000 cleared the bank but was not recorded in the general ledger.
- A check for $250 was found in the owner’s desk drawer.
- A deposit of $1,250 was taken to the bank after 2 p.m. on December 31, 2008 and was not posted by the bank until January 1, 2009.
- Errors were noted in the following checks:
- Check #121 was recorded for $325 but cleared the bank as $320.
- Check #125 was recorded for $585 but cleared the bank as $600.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the Library and the Internet, identify a publically held multinational company of your choice. Research its filings to the SEC, particularly the 10-K and 10-Qs. Also, examine its annual report online. You will then prepare an APA research paper including the follow elements:
- What assumptions is the financial reporting model based on?
- What principles support the financial reporting model?
- Who oversees the accounting profession?
- What is the role of Congress in settling the concerns that arise with accounting firms and their clients?
- Describe how the annual report differs from the 10-K. What is contained in the annual report that is not in the 10-K and vice versa.
- How does the 10-K report differ in content from the 10-Q What is the reason for the difference?
- Describe 2 disclosures in the 10-K that were surprising or interesting to you Why were they interesting or surprising to you?
Please submit your assignment.
Submitting your assignment in APA format means, at a minimum, you will need the following:
- TITLE PAGE. Remember the Running head: AND TITLE IN ALL CAPITALS
- ABSTRACT. A summary of your paper not an introduction. Begin writing in third person voice.
- BODY. The body of your paper begins on the page following the title page and abstract page and must be double-spaced (be careful not to triple- or quadruple-space between paragraphs). The type face should be 12-pt. Times Roman or 12-pt. Courier in regular black type. Do not use color, bold type, or italics except as required for APA level headings and references. The deliverable length of the body of your paper for this assignment is 4-5 pages. In-body academic citations to support your decisions and analysis are required. A variety of academic sources is encouraged.
- REFERENCE PAGE. References that align with your in-body academic sources are listed on the final page of your paper. The references must be in APA format using appropriate spacing, hang indention, italics, and upper and lower case usage as appropriate for the type of resource used. Remember, the Reference Page is not a bibliography but a further listing of the abbreviated in-body citations used in the paper. Every referenced item must have a corresponding in-body citation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The Modified Accelerated Cost Recovery System (MACRS) specifies which of the following depreciation methods for buildings
A. 150% declining-balance.
B. Double-declining-balance.
C. Straight line.
D. Buildings are not depreciable assets.
2. The Modified Accelerated Cost Recovery System (MACRS) specifies which of the following depreciation methods for land
A. 150% declining-balance.
B. Double-declining-balance.
C. Straight line.
D. Land is not a depreciable asset.
3. If an organization has an obligation to pay $5,000 to a supplier two years from now, the present value of the obligation:
A. is less than $5,000.
B. is $5,000.
C. is more than $5,000.
D. could be calculated using an annuity factor from the present value tables.
4. Depreciation, in accounting, is a process that results in:
A. depreciable assets being reported in the balance sheet at their fair market value.
B. accumulating cash for the replacement of the asset.
C. an accurate measurement of the economic usefulness of an asset.
D. spreading the cost of an asset over its useful life to the entity.
Use the below present value tables for problems 5, 6 and 7
5. The present value of $3,000 to be received in 7 years at 10% is:
A. $616.22
B. $1,539.60
C. $3,000.00
D. $5,845.67
6. The present value of $3,000 to be received every year for 9 years, at 10%, is:
A. $7,073.80
B. $12,273.00
C. $17,277.00
D. $27,000.00
7. The present value of an obligation of $4,000 payable in 7 years at 8% is:
A. $1,760
B. $2,334
C. $3,206
D. $3,680
8. A particular common stock has an annual cash dividend of $2.00 per share and is predicted to have a market value of $30 per share 5 years from now. Assuming a discount rate of 10%, a fair market price for the stock today is:
A. $20.00
B. $26.21
C. $37.58
D. $56.21
9. Psyche Company wants to acquire Trim Company. Trim’s ROI has been above average for its industry; net income has averaged $70,000 a year more than the industry average. These “excess” earnings are expected to continue at this amount for 5 years. Assuming a discount rate of 8%, how much goodwill will arise from Psyches’ purchase of Trim
A. $40,836
B. $88,157
C. $279,489
D. $350,000
10. Leasehold is an example of which of the following types of assets
A. Current asset.
B. Property, plant and equipment.
C. Goodwill.
D. Intangible asset.
11. The principal challenge to calculating depletion is estimating:
A. the cost of the asset.
B. the salvage value of the exploration equipment.
C. the demand for the product.
D. the quantity of material to be recovered.
12. Long-lived, intangible assets such as leasehold improvements, patents, and copyrights are all subject to:
A. depreciation
B. amortization
C. depletion
D. consolidation
13. When a depreciable asset is sold:
A. a gain arises if the sales proceeds exceed the net book value.
B. a loss arises if the sales proceeds exceed the net book value.
C. any cash received results in a gain.
D. depreciation expense is adjusted so there is no gain or loss.
14. Goodwill is an asset that arises because the present value of an acquired company’s estimated future earnings, discounted at the acquiring firm’s ROI:
A. is less than the fair market value of the net assets of the acquired company.
B. is more than the fair market value of the net assets of the acquired company.
C. is more than the fair market value of the net assets of the acquiring company.
D. is less than the fair market value of the net assets of the acquiring company.
15. The intangible asset “goodwill:”
A. represents the management team’s assessment of its value to the company.
B. may arise when one company purchases another company.
C. arises because the market value of a company’s assets is greater than cost.
D. all of the above are correct.
16. Many current liabilities are affected by accrual accounting entries. This happens because:
A. liabilities are usually paid when they are incurred.
B. accrual accounting involves recognizing liabilities before they are paid.
C. the only way to reduce a liability account balance is with an adjusting entry.
D. accrual accounting frequently involves recognizing liabilities before they are incurred.
17. Which of the following is not usually associated with bonds
A. Coupon rate.
B. Maturity value.
C. Face amount.
D. Maturity rate.
18. An Accounts Payable could result from which of the following transactions
A. Purchasing accounts for cash.
B. Purchasing property, plant and equipment on credit.
C. Purchasing goods and services from suppliers on credit.
D. All of the above.
19. The current liability for Wages Payable (or Accrued Payroll) represents the:
A. gross pay earned by employees for which they have not yet been paid.
B. net pay earned by employees for which they have not yet been paid.
C. employer’s federal and state payroll tax obligation.
D. employer’s liability for various with holdings taken out of the gross pay earned by employees.
20. The financial leverage characteristic of long-term debt results in:
A. a reduction of the risk that creditors will not be paid.
B. a magnification of ROE relative to what it would be without long-term debt.
C. a magnification of ROI relative to what it would be without long-term debt.
D. the deductibility, for income tax purposes, of dividends to stockholders.
21. When a company issues a bond at a premium:
A. the company is more profitable than most companies in its industry.
B. investors perceive the bond to be a very safe investment.
C. the investors’ interest income will be less than the interest received each year.
D. the investors’ interest income will be more than the interest received each year.
22. Which of the following is not sometimes associated with bonds
A. Debenture.
B. Callable.
C. Cumulative.
D. Convertible
23. If the market price of a bond exceeds its face amount:
A. the coupon rate is less than the market interest rate.
B. the coupon rate is more than the market interest rate.
C. the company’s ROI and working capital have been increasing over time.
D. the maturity rate has been declining.
24. The market value of a bond is the sum of the present value of future interest payments and the present value of the amount to be repaid at maturity, discounted at:
A. the market rate.
B. the coupon rate.
C. the dividend rate.
D. the prime rate.
25. Financial leverage refers to which of the following
A. The difference between the rate of return earned on assets (ROI) and the rate of return earned on owners’ equity (ROE).
B. The difference between the rate of return earned on current assets and the rate of return earned on retained earnings.
C. The leverage a firm obtains from increasing production.
D. Decreasing fixed costs per unit by increasing production.
26. When a company issues a bond at a discount:
A. the company will pay less than the face amount of the bond at its maturity.
B. the company will pay more than the face amount of the bond at its maturity.
C. the company’s interest expense will be less than the interest paid each year.
D. the company’s interest expense will be more than the interest paid each year.
27. When bonds are issued at a premium:
A. interest expense on the bonds will be less than the interest paid.
B. interest expense on the bonds will be more than the interest paid.
C. the bonds are sold for less than their face amount.
D. the coupon interest rate is less than the market interest rate.
28. Which of the following is (are) a true statement(s) pertaining to bonds
A. Bonds can be sold at a discount, par, or payable.
B. Bonds can be sold at a discount, par, or premium.
C. The SEC sets the market price of a bond.
D. The issuing firm sets the price of a bond.
E. None of the above.
29. Which of the following is true regarding bond discounts and/or premiums
A. Bond discount is amortized but bond premium is not.
B. Bond premium is amortized but bond discount is not.
C. Neither bond discount nor premium is amortized.
D. Both bond discount and premium are amortized.
30. The amortization of bond discount:
A. increases the cash paid to bondholders for interest.
B. results in bond interest expense being greater than the interest paid to bondholders.
C. results in bond interest expense being less than the interest paid to bondholders.
D. reduces the carrying value of bonds payable on the balance sheet.
31. Factors that usually affect retained earnings directly include:
A. net income or loss, and dividends.
B. extraordinary items and losses from discontinued operations.
C. stock dividends and gains or losses from the sale of treasury stock.
D. net income or loss, and the issuance of stock at an amount in excess of par value.
32. In comparison to the owners’ equity section of a corporation’s balance sheet, owners’ equity of a proprietorship or partnership:
A. normally does not make a distinction between invested capital and retained earnings.
B. normally uses “Capital” accounts for each individual owner, rather than a “Retained Earnings” account for all of the owners.
C. normally uses a “Drawings” account for each individual owner, rather than a “Dividends” account for all of the owners.
D. all of the above.
33. The declaration of a cash dividend by the directors results in:
A. a decrease in cash and a decrease in retained earnings.
B. a decrease in retained earnings and an increase in current liabilities.
C. a decrease in net income and a decrease in cash.
D. a decrease in net income and an increase in current liabilities.
34. In most states, par value of issued shares represents:
A. Legal capital.
B. No par capital.
C. Noncontrolling capital.
D. Corporate capital.
35. The term preemptive right pertains to which of the following
A. The Board of Directors rights in liquidation.
B. Present shareholders right to purchase shares from any additional share issuances.
C. Present shareholders right to purchase treasury shares when reissued.
D. Preferred stockholders right to dividends.
36. Balance sheet disclosures for preferred stock include all of the following except:
A. The number of shares issued.
B. The number of shares outstanding.
C. The liquidating or redemption value.
D. The credit or market value.
E. The number of shares authorized.
37. The declaration date pertains to:
A. The date used to determine who receives dividends.
B. The date on which the board of directors declares it’s going to liquidate the firm.
C. The date on which the board of directors declares a dividend.
D. The date a dividend is paid.
38. Fred Jones owns 56 shares of the Robust Corporation’s stock. Robust announces a 3 for 2 stock split. How many shares will Fred have after this split
A. 178 shares.
B. 112 shares.
C. 84 shares.
D. 56 shares.
39. Braco has 40,000 shares of $100 par value common stock outstanding, and 10,000 shares in the treasury. The number of additional shares that would be issued in a 5% stock dividend is:
A. 500
B. 1,000
C. 1,500
D. 2,000
40. When a stock dividend is declared and issued:
A. total paid-in capital does not change.
B. total owners’ equity does not change.
C. the balance in the retained earnings account is decreased by the par value of the shares issued in the dividend.
D. total paid-in capital is decreased by the market value of the shares issued in the dividend.
41. When a company splits its common stock 3 for 1:
A. total paid-in capital increases by a factor of 3.
B. the balance in the retained earnings account is decreased by the market value of the shares issued.
C. the market value of the company’s stock falls by two-thirds.
D. the shareholders are assured of receiving larger cash dividends.
42. The principal reason for a company having a common stock split is to:
A. increase the total cash dividends paid to stockholders.
B. capitalize retained earnings.
C. decrease total owners’ equity.
D. decrease the market value per share of common stock.
43. When a firm purchases its own shares for the treasury:
A. total owners’ equity is decreased.
B. total owners’ equity is increased.
C. the balance in the retained earnings account is decreased.
D. paid-in capital is decreased.
44. If a firm sells treasury stock for more than its cost:
A. a gain is recognized in the income statement.
B. the balance in the retained earnings account is increased.
C. additional paid-in capital is increased.
D. total owners’ equity does not change.
45. The statement of changes in retained earnings for the year shows:
A. the retained earnings balance at the beginning of the year.
B. amounts received from the sale of additional common stock during the year.
C. extraordinary gains or losses during the year.
D. the effect of a stock split during the year.
46. Which of the following is an accurate statement regarding a statement of cash flows
A. Only cash items that affect the income statement are included.
B. Only material cash items that affect the income statement are included.
C. Material non-cash transactions are included.
D. Immaterial financing activities that affect cash do not need to be included.
E. None of the above.
47. In the statement of cash flows, the amount of depreciation and amortization expense is added back to net income because:
A. these expenses do not affect cash, but were subtracted in the determination of net income.
B. these expenses affect investing activities, not operating activities.
C. the cash disbursements for these accrued expenses will be made in a future period.
D. these expenses are recognized for accounting purposes, but they do not represent economic costs.
48. In the statement of cash flows, an increase in the accounts receivable balance from the beginning of the period to the end of the period would:
A. be added to net income because this represents earned revenues that have not been collected.
B. be subtracted from net income because this represents earned revenue provided by operating earnings.
C. be added to net income because this means that revenues were less than cash collected.
D. be subtracted from net income because this means that revenues were more than cash collected.
49. Revenue may be recognized:
A. from the sale of a company’s own common stock.
B. if a company trades inventory at its usual sale value for newspaper advertising.
C. if management believes the market value of land held for future development rises.
D. in 2010 from the sale of subscriptions of a magazine to be published in 2011.
50. The term, “realization,” in revenue recognition refers to which of the following
A. The entity has completed, or substantially completed, the activities it must perform to be entitled to the revenue benefits.
B. The product or service has been exchanged for cash, claims to cash, or an asset that is readily convertible to a known amount of cash or claims to cash.
C. The entity has received an irrevocable order for goods or services.
D. Cash has been received with an irrevocable order for goods or services.
E. None of the above.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
3.(TCO C) Please review the following real-world Hewlett Packard Statement of Cash flows and address the 2 questions below:
|
Cash flow from operating activities
|
In millions
|
In millions
|
|
|
For the year ended 2012
|
For the year ended 2011
|
|
Net (loss) earnings
|
$(12,650)
|
$7,074
|
|
Depreciation and amortization
|
5,095
|
4,984
|
|
Impairment of goodwill and purchased intangible assets
|
18,035
|
885
|
|
Stock-based compensation expense
|
635
|
685
|
|
Provision for doubtful accounts
|
142
|
81
|
|
Provision for inventory
|
277
|
217
|
|
Restructuring charges
|
2,266
|
645
|
|
Deferred taxes on earnings
|
(711)
|
166
|
|
Excess tax benefit from stock-based competition
|
(12)
|
(163)
|
|
Other, net
|
265
|
(46)
|
|
Accounts and financing receivables
|
1,269
|
(227)
|
|
Inventory
|
890
|
(1,252)
|
|
Accounts payable
|
(1,414)
|
275
|
|
Taxes on earnings
|
(320)
|
610
|
|
Restructuring
|
(840)
|
(1,002)
|
|
Other assets and liabilities
|
(2,356)
|
(293)
|
|
Net cash provided by operating activities
|
10,571
|
12,639
|
|
Cash flows from investing activities:
|
|
|
|
Investment in property, plant, and equipment
|
(3,706)
|
(4,539)
|
|
Proceeds from sale of property, plant, and equipment
|
617
|
999
|
|
Purchases of available-for-sale securities and other investments
|
(972)
|
(96)
|
|
Maturities and sales of available-for-sale securities and other investment
|
662
|
68
|
|
Payments in connection with business acquisitions, net of cash acquired
|
(141)
|
(10,480)
|
|
Proceeds from business divestiture, net
|
87
|
89
|
|
Net cash used in investing activities
|
(3,453)
|
(13,959)
|
|
Cash flow from financing activities:
|
|
|
|
(Payments) issuance of commercial paper and notes payable, net
|
(2,775)
|
(1,270)
|
|
Issuance of debt
|
5,154
|
11,942
|
|
Payment of debt
|
(4,333)
|
(2,336)
|
|
Issuance of common stock under employee stock plans
|
716
|
896
|
|
Repurchase of common stock
|
(1,619)
|
(10,117)
|
|
Excess tax benefit from stock-based compensation
|
12
|
163
|
|
Cash dividends paid
|
(1,015)
|
(844)
|
|
Net cash used in financing activities
|
(3,860)
|
(1,566)
|
|
Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
|
3,258
|
(2,886)
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period
|
8,043
|
10,929
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period
|
$11,301
|
$8,043
|
Required:
1)Please calculate the percentage increase or decrease in cash for the total line of the operating, investing, and financing sections bolded above and explain the major reasons for the increase or decrease for each of these sections.
2) Please calculate the free cash flow for 2012 and explain the meaning of this ratio.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Course Project B |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Clark Paints: The Production Department has been investigating possible ways to trim total production costs. One possibility currently being examined is to make the paint cans instead of purchasing them. The equipment needed would cost $200,000, with a disposal value of $40,000, and it would be able to produce 5,500,000 cans over the life of the machinery. The Production Department estimates that approximately 1,100,000 cans would be needed for each of the next five years. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| The company would hire three new employees. These three individuals would be full-time employees, working 2,000 hours per year and earning $12.00 per hour. They would also receive the same benefits as other production employees, 18% of wages, in addition to $2,500 of health benefits. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| It is estimated that the raw materials will cost 25 per can and that other variable costs would be 5 per can. Since there is currently unused space in the factory, no additional fixed costs would be incurred if this proposal is accepted. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| It is expected that cans would cost 45 each if purchased from the current supplier. The company’s minimum rate of return (hurdle rate) has been determined to be 12% for all new projects, and the current tax rate of 35% is anticipated to remain unchanged. The pricing for a gallon of paint, as well as the number of units sold, will not be affected by this decision. The unit-of-production depreciation method would be used if the new equipment is purchased. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Required: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 1. Based on the above information and using Excel, calculate the following items for this proposed equipment purchase: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Annual cash flows over the expected life of the equipment; |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Payback period; |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Annual rate of return; |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Net present value; and |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Internal rate of return. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 2. Would you recommend the acceptance of this proposal? Why or why not? Prepare a short, double-spaced Word paper elaborating and supporting your answer. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining account balances: percent of revenue allowance method
of accounting for uncollectible accounts
The following information pertains to Leslie s Floor Store sales on account and accounts receivable.
LO 2
Accounts receivable balance, January 1, 2012 $ 52,500
Allowance for doubtful accounts, January 1, 2012 4,725
Sales on account, 2012 925,000
Cost of goods sold, 2012 615,000
Collections of accounts receivable, 2012 835,000
After several collection attempts, Leslie s wrote off $3,100 of accounts that could not be
collected. Leslie s estimates that bad debts expense will be 0.5 percent of sales on account.
Required
a. Compute the following amounts.
(1) Using the allowance method, the amount of uncollectible accounts expense for 2012.
(2) Net realizable value of receivables at the end of 2012.
b. Explain why the uncollectible accounts
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Capmade manufactures baseball caps. The Accounting Faculty orders 150 caps for the students with HELLO imprinted on them. Capmade has the following set of standards for the manufacture of baseball caps.
DM: yard of fabric per cap
$4.00 per yard of fabric
DL: 1 labor hour per cap
$11.00 per labor hour
After the caps were shipped, MadHatter analyzed the actual data from production and discovered the following results.
DM: yard of fabric per cap
$2.85 per yard of fabric
DL: 1.4 labor hours per cap
$9..50 per labor hour
Assignment:
1.
Determine the DM and DL budgets.
2.
Calculate the Quantity and Price Variances for each budget and indicate whether each is favorable or unfavorable.
3.
Provide explanations for the variances.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1
Using these data from the comparative balance sheet of Rosalez Company, perform horizontal analysis.
Question 2
Using these data from the comparative balance sheet of Rosalez Company, perform vertical analysis.
Question 3
Vertical analysis (common-size) percentages for Vallejo Company s sales, cost of goods sold, and expenses are listed here.
Question 4
Horizontal analysis (trend analysis) percentages for Spartan Company s sales, cost of goods sold, and expenses are listed here.
Question 5
These selected condensed data are taken from recent balance sheets of Bob Evans Farms (in thousands).
Question 6
Staples, Inc. is one of the largest suppliers of office products in the United States. It had net income of $738.7 million and sales of $24,275.5 million in 2009. Its total assets were $13,073.1 million at the beginning of the year and $13,717.3 million at the end of the year. What is Staples, Inc. s asset turnover ratio and profit margin ratio (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25 or 2.05%.)
Question 7
Selected data taken from a recent year s financial statements of trading card company Topps Company, Inc. are as follows (in millions)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
9. T/F The amount of current capital is calculated as follows:
CAPITAL ACCOUNT BALANCE+NET INCOME-DRAWING ACCOUNT BALANCE=CURENT CAPITAL
10. T/F The two kinds of equities reported on the income statement are liabilities and owner s equity.
11. T/F The balance sheet reports information about the elements in the accounting equation.
12. T/F The owners drawing account is closed to the owners capital account.
13. T/F A balance sheet is a financial statement that reports assers, liabilities, and owners equity on a specific date.
14. T/F The income summary account is a temporary account that does not have a normal balance
15. T/F The temporary accounts are reduced to zero at the end of each fiscal period.
16. T/F Temporary accounts with zero balances are listed on the post-closing trial balance.
17. T/F All balances sheet accounts are closed to the income summary account.
18. T/F The information needed to prepare a balance sheet is obtained from a work sheet s Account Title column and the Balance Sheet columns.
19. T/F Reporting revenue earned and the expenses incurred to earn that revenue in the same fiscal period is an application of the accounting concept Matching Expenses with Revenue
20. T/F Expense accounts are closed by posting a credit to each expense account and debiting the income summary for the total of all expense account balances.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tom Emory and Jim Morris strolled back to their plant from the administrative offices of Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company. Tom is manager of the machine shop in the company’s factory; Jim is manager of the equipment maintenance department.
The men had just attended the monthly performance evaluation meeting for plant department heads. These meetings had been held on the third Tuesday of each month since Robert Ferguson, Jr., the president’s son, had become plant manager a year earlier.
As they were walking, Tom Emory spoke: Boy, I hate those meetings! I never know whether my department’s accounting reports will show good or bad performance. I’m beginning to expect the worst. If the accountants say I saved the company a dollar, I’m called Sir, but if I spend even a little too much boy, do I get in trouble. I don’t know if I can hold on until I retire.
Tom had just been given the worst evaluation he had ever received in his long career with Ferguson & Son. He was the most respected of the experienced machinists in the company. He had been with the company for many years and was promoted to supervisor of the machine shop when the company expanded and moved to its present location. The president (Robert Ferguson, Sr.) had often stated that the company’s success was due to the high-quality work of machinists like Tom. As supervisor, Tom stressed the importance of craftsmanship and told his workers that he wanted no sloppy work coming from his department.
When Robert Ferguson, Jr., became the plant manager, he directed that monthly performance comparisons be made between actual and budgeted costs for each department. The departmental budgets were intended to encourage the supervisors to reduce inefficiencies and to seek cost reduction opportunities. The company controller was instructed to have his staff tighten the budget slightly whenever a department attained its budget in a given month; this was done to reinforce the plant manager’s desire to reduce costs. The young plant manager often stressed the importance of continued progress toward attaining the budget; he also made it known that he kept a file of these performance reports for future reference when he succeeded his father.
Tom Emory’s conversation with Jim Morris continued as follows:
Emory: I really don’t understand. We’ve worked so hard to meet the budget, and the minute we do so they tighten it on us. We can’t work any faster and still maintain quality. I think my men are ready to quit trying. Besides, those reports don’t tell the whole story. We always seem to be interrupting the big jobs for all those small rush orders. All that setup and machine adjustment time is killing us. And quite frankly, Jim, you were no help. When our hydraulic press broke down last month, your people were nowhere to be found. We had to take it apart ourselves and got stuck with all that idle time.
Morris:I’m sorry about that, Tom, but you know my department has had trouble making budget, too. We were running well behind at the time of that problem, and if we had spent a day on that old machine, we would never have made it up. Instead, we made the scheduled inspections of the forklift trucks because we knew we could do those in less than the budgeted time.
Emory: Well, Jim, at least you have some options. I’m locked into what the scheduling department assigns to me and you know they’re being harassed by sales for those special orders. Incidentally, why didn’t your report show all the supplies you guys wasted last month when you were working in Bill’s department?
Morris:We’re not out of the woods on that deal yet. We charged the maximum we could to other work and haven’t even reported some of it yet.
Emory: Well, I’m glad you have a way of getting out of the pressure. The accountants seem to know everything that’s happening in my department, sometimes even before I do. I thought all that budget and accounting stuff was supposed to help, but it just gets me into trouble. It’s all a big pain. I’m trying to put out quality work; they’re trying to save pennies.
Review the case. Respond to the following:
- Identify the problems that appear to exist in Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company’s budgetary control system and explain how the problems are likely to reduce the effectiveness of the system. (approximately 1 page)
- Explain how Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company’s budgetary control system could be revised to improve its effectiveness. (approximately 1 2 pages)
- Explain how the use of an activity-based costing system could change the results of the budget, if utilized. (approximately 1 page)
- As stated in the case, many employees have quit trying and have altered behavior on the job. Provide specific ways for how you would use a budget to change employee behavior and align goals in the organization. Explain how goal alignment can improve profitability and overall return to the shareholders of the company. (approximately 1 page)
- Synthesize data to explain the concept of ROI and describe how the use of an activity-based costing system can improve the company s ROI and the potential impact on free cash flow. (approximately 1 page)
Write a 5 6-page report in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M6_A2.doc.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Accounting |
| Question Detail:
Financial Ratios
Liquidity ratios.Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:
|
Edison
|
Stagg
|
Thornton
|
|
Cash
|
$4,000
|
$2,500
|
$1,000
|
|
Short-term investments
|
3,000
|
2,500
|
2,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
2,000
|
2,500
|
3,000
|
|
Inventory
|
1,000
|
2,500
|
4,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
800
|
800
|
800
|
|
Accounts payable
|
200
|
200
|
200
|
|
Notes payable: short-term
|
3,100
|
3,100
|
3,100
|
|
Accrued payables
|
300
|
300
|
300
|
|
Long-term liabilities
|
3,800
|
3,800
|
3,800
|
- Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?
Computation and evaluation of activity ratios.The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:
|
19X5
|
19X4
|
|
Net credit sales
|
$832,000
|
$760,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
440,000
|
350,000
|
|
Cash, Dec. 31
|
125,000
|
110,000
|
|
Average Accounts receivable
|
180,000
|
140,000
|
|
Average Inventory
|
70,000
|
50,000
|
|
Accounts payable, Dec. 31
|
115,000
|
108,000
|
- Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 19X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.
Profitability ratios, trading on the equity.Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 19X7:
|
Net sales
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
120,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
80,000
|
|
Preferred dividends
|
25,000
|
|
Net income
|
130,000
|
|
Average assets
|
1,100,000
|
|
Average common stockholders’ equity
|
400,000
|
- Compute the gross profit margin ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.
- Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly ex plain.
Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Current Assets
|
$ 76,000
|
$ 80,000
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)
|
99,000
|
90,000
|
|
Intangibles
|
25,000
|
50,000
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
40,800
|
48,000
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
143,000
|
160,000
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
16,200
|
12,000
|
|
Net Sales
|
500,000
|
500,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
332,500
|
350,000
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
93,500
|
85,000
|
Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Current Assets
|
$ 76,000
|
$ 80,000
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)
|
99,000
|
90,000
|
|
Intangibles
|
25,000
|
50,000
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
40,800
|
48,000
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
143,000
|
160,000
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
16,200
|
12,000
|
|
Net Sales
|
500,000
|
500,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
332,500
|
350,000
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
93,500
|
85,000
|
Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
6. Ratio computation. The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.
|
LONE PINE COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)
|
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Assets
|
|
Current Assets
|
|
Cash and Short-Term Investments
|
$ 400
|
$ 600
|
|
Accounts Receivable (net)
|
3,000
|
2,400
|
|
Inventories
|
2,000
|
2,200
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$5,400
|
$5,200
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment
|
|
Land
|
$1,700
|
$ 600
|
|
Buildings and Equipment (net)
|
1,500
|
1,000
|
|
Total Property, Plant, and Equipment
|
$3,200
|
$1,600
|
|
Total Assets
|
$8,600
|
$6,800
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
$1,800
|
$1,700
|
|
Notes Payable
|
1,100
|
1,900
|
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
$2,900
|
$3,600
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
|
Bonds Payable
|
4,100
|
2,100
|
|
Total Liabilities
|
$7,000
|
$5,700
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
|
Common Stock
|
$ 200
|
$ 200
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
1,400
|
900
|
|
Total Stockholders Equity
|
$1,600
|
$1,100
|
|
Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
|
$8,600
|
$6,800
|
|
LONE PINE COMPANY
Statement of Income and Retained Earnings
For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)
|
|
Net Sales*
|
$36,000
|
|
Less: Cost of Goods Sold
|
$20,000
|
|
Selling Expense
|
6,000
|
|
Administrative Expense
|
4,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
400
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
2,000
|
32,400
|
|
Net Income
|
$ 3,600
|
|
Retained Earnings, Jan. 1
|
900
|
|
$ 4,500
|
|
Cash Dividends Declared and Paid
|
3,100
|
|
Retained Earnings, Dec. 31
|
$ 1,400
|
|
*All sales are on account.
|
Instructions
Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calcu lations to two decimal places when necessary:
a. Quick ratio
b. Current ratio
c. Inventory-turnover ratio
d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio
e. Return-on-assets ratio
f. Net-profit-margin ratio
g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity
h. Debt-to-total assets
i. Number of times that interest is earned
j. Dividend payout rate
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Your father runs a small auto body shop. He has decided to computerize his records and has asked you to explain the basics of accounting to him so that he can enter the data into his accounting software.
- Explain to him the rules of debits and credits for the balance sheet and income statement.
- Provide examples from the manufacturing industry of:
- a journal entry that would be recorded that impacts the balance sheet.
- a journal entry that would be recorded affecting the income statement.
- Please provide the assumptions behind the transactions and the full journal entries.
________________________________________________________________________________________
You have been asked to speak at a career fair for high school students in your home town.
Specifically, you are making a presentation about your role as an accountant.
- Describe for the students the primary objectives of accounting.
- Explain the basic terminology of the accounting process or financial reporting.
- Explain how accounting has affected your personal life emphasizing professional ethics.
- Explain the role that technology has played in small business
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting practices and principles are at the heart of a manager s role. To understand the needs of operating a department, it is necessary to understand the importance of accounting in identifying operational needs.
Cite at least two sources other than your text with reference page.
Format your paper consistent with APA guidelines.
NO PLAGIARISM
Post paper as an attachment.
Write a 800- to 1000-word paper, identifying the role of the health care manager, comparing productive and nonproductive time. Consider the following:
How are costs tied to staffing?
What is the difference between the annualized method and the scheduled-position method?
Why annualize staffing?
What is the benefit of recording productive and nonproductive time, if at all?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exercise 20-11 Merchandising: Budgeted cash disbursements LO P1
| Hector Company reports the following: |
|
July |
August |
September |
| Sales |
$ |
28,000 |
$ |
36,000 |
$ |
40,000 |
| Purchases |
|
17,360 |
|
22,320 |
|
28,000 |
|
|
Payments for purchases are made in the month after purchase. Selling expenses are 16% of sales, administrative expenses are 11% of sales, and both are paid in the month of sale. Rent expense of $1,800 is paid monthly. Depreciation expense is $1,400 per month.
|
|
Prepare a schedule of budgeted cash disbursements for August and September.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This information relates to Pickert Real Estate Agency.
|
Oct. 1
|
Stockholders invested $30,000 in exchange for common stock of the corporation.
|
|
Oct. 2
|
Hires an administrative assistant at an annual salary of $42,000.
|
|
Oct. 3
|
Buys office furniture for $4,600, on account.
|
|
Oct. 6
|
Sells a house and lot for M.E. Petty; commissions due from Petty, $10,800 (not paid by Petty at this time).
|
|
Oct. 10
|
Receives cash of $140 as commission for acting as rental agent renting an apartment.
|
|
Oct. 27
|
Pays $700 on account for the office furniture purchased on October 3.
|
|
Oct. 30
|
Pays the administrative assistant $3,500 in salary for October.
|
Post the transactions to T-accounts and complete the following trial balance.(If answer is zero, please enter 0, do not leave any fields blank.)
This is the trial balance of Slocombe Company on September 30.
|
SLOCOMBE COMPANY
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
September 30, 2010
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$8,300
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
2,600
|
|
|
Supplies
|
2,100
|
|
|
Equipment
|
8,000
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$5,100
|
|
Unearned Revenue
|
|
900
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
15,000
|
|
$21,000
|
$21,000
|
The October transactions were as follows.
|
Oct. 5
|
|
Received $1,300 in cash from customers for accounts receivable due.
|
|
10
|
|
Billed customers for services performed $5,100.
|
|
15
|
|
Paid employee salaries $1,400.
|
|
17
|
|
Performed $600 of services for customers who paid in advance in August.
|
|
20
|
|
Paid $1,500 to creditors for accounts payable due.
|
|
29
|
|
Paid a $300 cash dividend.
|
|
31
|
|
Paid utilities $500.
|
Post to ledger accounts and then complete the following trial balance.(If answer is zero please enter 0, do not leave any fields blank.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This is question 1)
Halloway Company has issued three different bonds during 2011. Interest is payable
semiannually on each of these bonds.
1.On January 1, 2011, 1,000, 8%, 5-year, $1,000 bonds dated January 1, 2011, were issued at face
value.
2.On July 1, $800,000, 9%, 5-year bonds dated July 1, 2011, were issued at 102.
3.On September 1, $200,000, 7%, 5-year bonds dated September 1, 2011, were issued at 98.
Prepare the journal entry to record each bond transaction at the date of issuance.
This is question 2)
The balance sheet for Lemay Company reports the following information on July 1,2011.
Long-term liabilities
Bonds payable $1,000,000
Less: Discount on bonds payable 60,000 $940,000
Lemay decides to redeem these bonds at 101 after paying semiannual interest. Prepare the journal
entry to record the redemption on July 1, 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1
The ledger of Hixson Company at the end of the current year shows Accounts Receivable $120,000, Sales $840,000, and Sales Returns and Allowances $30,000.
If Hixson uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectible accounts, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming Hixson determines that Fell’s $1,400 balance is uncollectible.
If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $2,100 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be (1) 1% of net sales, and (2) 10% of accounts receivable.
If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a debit balance of $200 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be (1) 0.75% of net sales and (2) 6% of accounts receivable.
Question 2
Information related to plant assets, natural resources, and intangibles at the end of 2011 for Spain Company is as follows: buildings $1,100,000; accumulated depreciation-buildings $650,000; goodwill $410,000; coal mine $500,000; accumulated depletion-coal mine $108,000. Complete the partial balance sheet of Spain Company for these items. (List assets with smallest net book value first. Enter all amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary.)
Question 3
Match the statement with the term most directly associated with it.
Goodwill Amortization
Intangible assets Franchise
Research and development costs
1. Rights, privileges, and competitive advantages that result from the ownership of long-lived assets that do not possess physical substance.
2. The allocation of the cost of an intangible asset to expense in a rational and systematic manner.
3. A right to sell certain products or services, or use certain trademarks or trade names within a designated geographic area.
4. Costs incurred by a company that often lead to patents or new products. These costs must be expensed as incurred.
5. The excess of the cost of a company over the fair market value of the net assets acquired.
Question 4
Presented below are selected transactions at Ingles Company for 2011.
Jan. 1 Retired a piece of machinery that was purchased on January 1, 2001. The machine cost $62,000 on that date. It had a useful life of 10 years with no salvage value. (Assume depreciation is up to date as of December 31, 2010.)
June 30 Sold a computer that was purchased on January 1, 2008. The computer cost $40,000. It had a useful life of 5 years with no salvage value. The computer was sold for $14,000.
Dec. 31 Discarded a delivery truck that was purchased on January 1, 2007. The truck cost $39,000. It was depreciated based on a 6-year useful life with a $3,000 salvage value.
Journalize all entries required on the above dates, including entries to update depreciation, where applicable, on assets disposed of. Ingles Company uses straight-line depreciation.(For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)
Question 5
Beka Company owns equipment that cost $50,000 when purchased on January 1, 2008. It has been depreciated using the straight-line method based on estimated salvage value of $5,000 and an estimated useful life of 5 years.
Prepare Beka Company’s journal entries to record the sale of the equipment in these four independent situations.
Sold for $28,000 on January 1, 2011. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)
Sold for $28,000 on May 1, 2011. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)
Sold for $11,000 on January 1, 2011. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)
Question 6
At December 31, 2011, Jimenez Company reported the following as plant assets.
Land $4,000,000
Buildings $28,500,000
Less: Accumulated depreciation-buildings 12,100,000 16,400,000
Equipment 48,000,000
Less: Accumulated depreciation-equipment 5,000,000 43,000,000
Total plant assets $63,400,000
During 2012, the following selected cash transactions occurred.
April 1 Purchased land for $2,130,000.
May 1 Sold equipment that cost $780,000 when purchased on January 1, 2008. The equipment was sold for $450,000.
June 1 Sold land purchased on June 1, 2002, for $1,500,000. The land cost $400,000.
July 1 Purchased equipment for $2,000,000.
Dec. 31 Retired equipment that cost $500,000 when purchased on December 31, 2002. No salvage value was received.
Journalize the above transactions. The company uses straight-line depreciation for buildings and equipment. The buildings are estimated to have a 50-year life and no salvage value. The equipment is estimated to have a 10-year useful life and no salvage value. Update depreciation on assets disposed of at the time of sale or retirement. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)
Record adjusting entries for depreciation for 2012.
Complete the plant assets section of Jimenez’s balance sheet at December 31, 2012. (List in the same order as the partial balance sheet presented in the problem. Enter all amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting 291
Comprehensive Problem
Fall Semester 2013
The Baker Company is a merchandising enterprise that uses the
perpetual inventory system. Account balances for the company as
of September 30, 2013, the last day of the fiscal year, are as
follows:
Cash $ 31,165
Accounts Receivable 126,100
Merchandise Inventory 435,000
Prepaid Insurance 10,600
Store Supplies 3,750
Office Supplies 1,700
Store Equipment 225,000
Accumulated Depreciation –
Store Equipment 40,300
Office Equipment 72,000
Accumulated Depreciation –
Office Equipment 17,200
Accounts Payable 66,700
Salaries Payable 0
Unearned Rent 1,200
Notes Payable:
Due within 12 months 35,000
Due beyond 12 months 160,000
Bertha Baker, Capital 332,100
Bertha Baker, Drawing 50,000
Sales 1,147,500
Sales Returns & Allowances 15,500
Sales Discounts 6,000
Cost of Merchandise Sold 601,200
Sales Salaries Expense 86,400
Advertising Expense 29,450
Depreciation Expense Store
Equipment 0
Store Supplies Expense 0
Miscellaneous Selling Expense 1,885
Office Salaries Expense 60,000
Rent Expense 30,000
Insurance Expense 0
Depreciation Expense Office
Equipment 0
Office Supplies Expense 0
Miscellaneous Administrative Expense 1,650
Rent Income 0
Interest Expense 12,600
2
Data needed for year-end adjustments follow:
Physical merchandise inventory on September 30 $418,500
Insurance expired during the year 6,000
Supplies on hand on September 30:
Store Supplies 1,500
Office Supplies 700
Depreciation for the year:
Store Equipment 8,500
Office Equipment 4,500
Salaries Payable as of September 30:
Sales Salaries 3,450
Office Salaries 2,550
Unearned Rent as of September 30 400
Instructions:
a. Prepare a work sheet for the fiscal year ended September 30,
2013. (Form 10W) [Example: page 176B]
b. Prepare a multiple-step income statement for the fiscal year
ended September 30, 2013. (Form 3C) [Example: page 256)
c. Prepare a statement of owner s equity for the fiscal year
ended September 30, 2013, assuming no additional investments
by the owner during the year. (Form 2C) [Example: page 259)
d. Prepare a report form of balance sheet as of September 30,
2013, assuming that the current portion of notes payable is
$35,000. (Form 3C) [Example: page 259]
e. Journalize adjusting entries as of September 30, 2013. (Form
GJ) [Example: pages 121 and 274]
f. Journalize closing entries as of September 30, 2013.
g. Prepare a post-closing trial balance as of September 30,
2013.
Ground Rules: Solution to problem must be:
a. Turned in by Monday, December 2, 2013. Late turn-ins will
not be accepted.
b. Hand written in pencil (not ink) on the blank working papers
provided for you.
c. Presented in a neat, orderly and professional manner. 3
Note: Work which does not comply in all respects with ground
rules stated above will be assigned a grade of zero.
Check Figures:
Unadjusted Trial Balance columns: $1,800,000
Adjustments columns: $45,550
Adjusted Trial Balance columns: $1,819,000
Net Income: $258,865
Income Statement columns: $1,148,300
Balance Sheet columns: $929,565
Capital balance as of March 31, 1011: $540,965
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Discussion
Primary Task Response:Within the Discussion Board area, write 400 600 words that respond to the following questions with your thoughts, ideas, and comments. This will be the foundation for future discussions by your classmates. Be substantive and clear, and use examples to reinforce your ideas.
Select 2 companies in the same industry (for example, the home improvement industry or the candy industry). Use the Internet to find the companies’ financial statements. From the financial statements, list the different components from the Stockholder’s Equity section. Read the footnotes to the financial statements to see what they disclose about their Stockholder’s Equity section. Which parts do they have in common? Is there anything about their Stockholder’s Equity that is distinctive to the business? Share with the class what you have found.
Project 3
The organization that you work for has been thinking about implementing an ERP system. They have asked you to prepare a summary of this topic. Research the subject of ERP implementations to determine what problems and issues companies have encountered while implementing this kind of system.
- How have employees handled a change to an ERP system?
- What are some advantages and disadvantages of ERP?
- Will an ERP system help or hinder internal control?
Using the library, the Internet, and other resources, research this topic. Prepare a presentation on ERP for a board of directors meeting.
The presentation should be 3-6 slides, not including the title or references. All references must be cited using proper APA format.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected amounts at December 31, 2003, from the Hay and Barnabas Company s information system appear as follows:
|
Cash paid employees for salaries and wages
|
$300,000
|
|
Cash collected from sales customers
|
$1,850,000
|
|
Bonds payable
|
$500,000
|
|
Cash
|
$150,000
|
|
Common stock
|
$60,000
|
|
Equipment
|
$840,000
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
$30,000
|
|
Inventory
|
$250,000
|
|
Prepaid rent
|
$140,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
$130,000
|
|
Salaries and wages expense
|
$328,000
|
|
Sales
|
$2,000,000
|
You are to complete each of the following tasks.
Part A
There are five adjustments that need to be made before the financial statements can be prepared at year end. Show the effect of each of the following (a e) on the accounting equation.
- The equipment (purchased on January 1, 2003) has a useful life of 12 years with no salvage value (Straight-line method is used).
- Interest accrued on the bonds payable is $20,000 as of December 31, 2003.
- Unexpired insurance at December 31, 2003 is $7,000.
- The rent payment of $140,000 covered the four months from December 1, 2003 through March 31, 2004.
- Salaries and wages of $28,000 were earned but unpaid at December 31, 2003.
Part B
Indicate the proper balance sheet classification of each of the preceding 12 financial statement items on the December 31, 2003, balance sheet. If the account title would not appear on the balance sheet, indicate the financial statement on which it would be found.
- Current assets
- Property, plant, and equipment
- Current liabilities
- Long-term liabilities
- Stockholders equity
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:
Social Security taxes: 6% on the first $55,000 earned
Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned
Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
State income taxes: 5% of gross earnings
Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned
Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned
The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end.
a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:
Social Security taxes
Medicare taxes
Federal income taxes withheld
State income taxes
Insurance withholdings
b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:
Matching Social Security taxes
Matching Medicare taxes
State unemployment taxes
Federal unemployment taxes
2. Current liabilities: entries and disclosure. A review of selected financial activities of Visconti s during 20XX disclosed the following:
12/1 Borrowed $20,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3- month, 15% note payable. Interest and principal are due at maturity.
2/10 Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates that 2% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit.
12/22 Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
12/26 Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a note payable due in 60 days.
12/31 Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162.
12/31 Accrued 3 days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on October 31 to record accrued interest.
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of October 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
3. Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:
8/2: Borrowed $75,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 120-day note.
8/20: Issued a $40,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $40,000 de livery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest rate.
9/10: Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.
9/11: Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and car ries a 14% interest rate.
10/10: The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.
10/31: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.
11/30: Paid note to Bank of Kingville
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on October 31 to record accrued interest.
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of October 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
Additional Requirements
Level of Detail: Show all work
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 1 – Picture Pretty manufactures picture frames. Sales for August are expected to be 10,000 units of various sizes. Historically, the average frame requires four feet of framing, one square foot of glass, and two square feet of backing. Beginning inventory includes 1,500 feet of framing, 500 square feet of glass, and 500 square feet of backing. Prices are $0.30 per foot of framing, $6.00 per square foot of glass, and $2.25 per square foot of backing. Ending inventory should be 150% of beginning inventory. Purchases are paid for in the month acquired.
Question 1: Determine the quantity of framing, glass, and backing that is to be purchased during August. (five points)
Question 2: Determine the total costs of direct materials for August purchases. (five points)
Problem 2 –Russell Company has the following projected account balances for June 30, 20X2:
| Accounts payable |
$40,000 |
|
Sales |
$800,000 |
| Accounts receivable |
100,000 |
|
Capital stock |
400,000 |
| Depreciation, factory |
24,000 |
|
Retained earnings |
? |
| Inventories (5/31 & 6/30) |
180,000 |
|
Cash |
56,000 |
| Direct materials used |
200,000 |
|
Equipment, net |
240,000 |
| Office salaries |
80,000 |
|
Buildings, net |
400,000 |
| Insurance, factory |
4,000 |
|
Utilities, factory |
16,000 |
| Plant wages |
140,000 |
|
Selling expenses |
60,000 |
| Bonds payable |
160,000 |
|
Maintenance, factory |
28,000 |
Question 1: Calculate the budgeted net income for June 20X2.(five points)
Question 2: Calculate the budgeted total assets as of June 30, 20X2. (five points)
Problem 3 – Tylon’s Hardware uses a flexible budget to develop planning information for its warehouse operations. For 20X2, the company anticipated that it would have 96,000 sales units for 664 customer shipments. Average storage bin usage for various inventories was estimated to be 200 per day. The costs and cost drivers were determined to be as follows:
| Item |
Fixed |
Variable |
Cost driver |
| Product handling |
$10,000 |
$1.25 |
per 100 units |
| Storage |
– |
3.00 |
per storage bin |
| Utilities |
1,000 |
1.50 |
per 100 units |
| Shipping clerks |
1,000 |
1.00 |
per shipment |
| Supplies |
– |
0.50 |
per shipment |
During the year, the warehouse processed 90,000 units for 600 customer shipments. The workers used 225 storage bins on average each day to sort, store, and process goods for shipment. The actual costs for 20X2 were:
| Item |
Actual costs |
| Product handling |
$10,900 |
| Storage |
465 |
| Utilities |
2,020 |
| Shipping clerks |
1,400 |
| Supplies |
340 |
Question 1: Determine the 20X2 static budget variances. (five points)
Question 2: Determine the 20X2 flexible budget variances. (five points)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have been asked to speak at a career fair for high school students in your home town.
Specifically, you are making a presentation about your role as an accountant.
- Describe for the students the primary objectives of accounting.
- Explain the basic terminology of the accounting process or financial reporting.
- Explain how accounting has affected your personal life emphasizing professional ethics.
- Explain the role that technology has played in small business accounting.
Please include APA in-text citations and references.
Background on Course Research Requirements: In the business world, it is important to use research to strengthen points made in presentations and projects. Learning to use the search functions in databases for research is a crucial critical thinking skill that complements other research techniques.
There are two main types of databases. The most popular databases are ABI Inform Global, Academic Search Premier, and Business Source Premier. You must stay away from inferior Web sites with anonymous writers; articles found on consultant Web sites; and materials on sites like QuickMBA.com, MarketingProfs.com, etc. Dictionaries and encyclopedias most often repeat the information from textbooks. Acceptable internet resources include, among others, government sites (especially for statistics). Wikipedia or any open source Web sites are not permitted.
Deliverable length 3 pages
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Accounting 301 Project_Zippy Lines, Inc._Financial statement |
| Question Detail:
Accounting 301 Project
Due December 5, 2013
Zippy Lines, Inc. is a small company based in Colorado. Zippy Lines, Inc. sells specialty outdoor sporting goods and equipment used by mountain climbers. Zippy Lines sells its goods to outdoor adventure firms and holds instructional classes. It is in its second year of operation.
Kirk Krazen, the accountant for the company was hurt in a climbing accident and the company has requested that you prepare the monthly close for January 2013, including preparation of the monthly financial statements. The company s fiscal year coincides with the calendar year. The monthly financial statements should include a balance sheet, income statement and cash flow statement for the month.
The company s president, Al Titude, has provided you with access to all of the company s books and records and you have gathered the information that is discussed below.
The company has one bank account in which all of its operating expenses are paid and all of its cash receipts are deposited. The company s general ledger records the cash disbursement transactions, and reflects the cash receipts. Exhibit 1 is a list of accounts and balances as of January 31, 2013 taken from the general ledger.
Exhibit 2 is a list of all of the transactions shown on the general ledger account for cash (Account 1010001).
A copy of the company s bank statement for January is provided in Exhibit 3.
The company maintains a subsidiary ledger for accounts receivable. All of the company s accounts receivable balances have been updated to reflect the cash receipt, and a journal entry to the cash account and the accounts receivable has been made. There are 20 outdoor adventure firms that have accounts with Zippy with terms N30, 10 of these firms had an open balance as of January. A copy of the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger is provided in Exhibit 4. The allowance for doubtful accounts was $1,500 as of December 31, 2012. The allowance is based on estimated default rates and set at 1% of balances currently due and balances past due less than 30 days, 2% on balances past due 30 to 60 days, 15% on balances past due over 60 but less than 90 days, and 30% of balances past due more than 90 days.
The company uses lower of cost or market to value its inventory. The company uses a periodic inventory system and applies FIFO cost flow assumption. Exhibit 5 contains information on its inventory.
The monthly adjusting entries have not been prepared. The following information has been gathered to support the closing process. The staff has done a physical count of inventory and supplies and found the following balances as of January 31, 2013:
– Supplies – $17,250
– Inventory items shown in Exhibit 5 (valued at Lower of Cost or Market, FIFO) (see Exhibit 5)
Below are other items to consider for adjusting entries:
– The company has a note with TP Bank for $250,000 that is due on July 1, 2016. The note has an interest rate of 10%, which is payable on June 30th of each year.
– Employees earn $1,024 per day and have received payment through January 28th, so they are owed 3 days wages. There was no salary accrued as of December 31, 2012.
– The payment for health and all other benefits is $6,125 every two months. In December, the company issued the payment and it cleared in January. No payment was made in January.
– The prepaid insurance balance is for an annual property and liability policy with an annual cost of $36,000, which was purchased on July 1, 2012 and expires on June 30, 2013.
– The company visited Big Corporation on January 31st and held an instructional course for a team-building activity for Big Corporation. Zippy charges $10,000 for the class, but has not been paid, prepared the invoice or recorded the revenue.
– The accrued expense of $2,125 on December 31, 2012 represented unpaid consulting bills. The company paid the consultant $1,575 on January 14th and has an estimated balance of $3,250 open as of January 31, 2013.
– The company uses straight-line depreciation. The depreciation periods are 20 years for the building, 10 for the equipment and 5 for office equipment. There is no salvage value for any of the property, plant and equipment assets.
Requirements
- Prepare a bank reconciliation and any journal entries.
- Prepare a trial balances as of January 31, 2013
- Calculate the allowance for doubtful accounts, inventory, monthly depreciation, interest, cost of goods sold etc., and prepare all necessary adjusting entries for the month of January.
- Prepare an adjusted trial balance for the month of January.
- Prepare the financial statements for the month of January (income statement, statement of retained earnings, balance sheet and statement of cash flow (either direct or indirect basis).
EXHIBIT 1
Below is a list of accounts with their balances as of January 31, 2013 and December 31, 2012:
|
Account Number
|
Account Name
|
January 31, 2013
|
December 31, 2012
|
|
1000001
|
Cash
|
60,660
|
$45,125
|
|
1000002
|
Accounts receivable
|
27,200
|
17,500
|
|
1000003
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
1,500 CR
|
1,500 CR
|
|
1000004
|
Inventory
|
33,150
|
33,150
|
|
1000005
|
Supplies
|
21,300
|
21,300
|
|
1000006
|
Prepaid insurance
|
18,000
|
18,000
|
|
1010001
|
P,P & E Store Equipment
|
178,000
|
178,000
|
|
1010002
|
Accumulated depreciation Store Equipment
|
17,800 CR
|
17,800 CR
|
|
1010003
|
P,P & E Office Equipment
|
25,000
|
25,000
|
|
1010004
|
Accumulated depreciation Office Equipment
|
5,000 CR
|
5,000 CR
|
|
1010005
|
P,P & E Building
|
617,500
|
617,500
|
|
1010006
|
Accumulated depreciation building
|
30,875CR
|
30,875 CR
|
|
2000001
|
Accounts payable
|
34,410 CR
|
31,525 CR
|
|
2000002
|
Accrued expenses
|
2,125 CR
|
2,125 CR
|
|
2000003
|
Salaries payable
|
0 CR
|
0 CR
|
|
2000004
|
Interest payable
|
12,500 CR
|
12,500 CR
|
|
2010001
|
Notes payable
|
250,000 CR
|
250,000 CR
|
|
3000001
|
Common stock
|
100,000 CR
|
100,000 CR
|
|
3000002
|
Capital in excess of par
|
400,000 CR
|
400,000 CR
|
|
3000003
|
Retained earnings
|
104,250 CR
|
104,250 CR
|
|
3000004
|
Dividends
|
0
|
$0
|
|
4000001
|
Sales Revenue
|
121,000 CR
|
– $0 –
|
|
5000001
|
Purchases
|
75,000
|
$0
|
|
5000002
|
Cost of goods sold
|
0
|
$0
|
|
5010001
|
Salary expense
|
20,480
|
$0
|
|
5010002
|
Benefits expense
|
0
|
$0
|
|
5010003
|
Supplies expense
|
0
|
$0
|
|
5010004
|
Insurance expense
|
0
|
$0
|
|
5010005
|
Utilities expense
|
895
|
$0
|
|
5010006
|
Travel expenses
|
275
|
$0
|
|
5010007
|
Advertising expenses
|
425
|
$0
|
|
5010008
|
Interest expense
|
0
|
$0
|
|
5010009
|
Bank fees
|
0
|
$0
|
|
5010010
|
Consulting expenses
|
1,575
|
$0
|
|
5010011
|
Depreciation expense
|
0
|
$0
|
|
5010012
|
Bad debt expense
|
0
|
$0
|
Exhibit 2 Detail of transactions on ACCT 100001, Cash.
|
Date
|
Description
|
Amount
|
DR/CR
|
Balance
|
DR/CR
|
|
12/31/12
|
Beginning Balance
|
DR
|
$45,125
|
DR
|
|
1/4/13
|
Cash receipts
|
$61,500
|
DR
|
$106,625
|
DR
|
|
1/4/13
|
Payment for inventory
|
$62,115
|
CR
|
$44,510
|
DR
|
|
1/7/13
|
Payment for salaries
|
$5,120
|
CR
|
$39,390
|
DR
|
|
1/11/13
|
Payment for utilities
|
$895
|
CR
|
$38,495
|
DR
|
|
1/14/13
|
Payment for salaries
|
$5,120
|
CR
|
$33,375
|
DR
|
|
1/14/13
|
Payment for consulting
|
$1,575
|
CR
|
$31,800
|
DR
|
|
1/14/13
|
Cash receipts
|
$26,525
|
DR
|
$58,325
|
DR
|
|
1/21/13
|
Payment for salaries
|
$5,120
|
CR
|
$53,205
|
DR
|
|
1/27/13
|
Cash receipts
|
$13,275
|
DR
|
$66,480
|
DR
|
|
1/28/13
|
Payment for salaries
|
$5,120
|
CR
|
$61,360
|
DR
|
|
1/28/13
|
Payment for travel
|
$275
|
CR
|
$61,085
|
DR
|
|
1/28/13
|
Payment for advertising
|
$425
|
CR
|
$60,660
|
DR
|
Note: Entries for cash receipts on accounts receivables have not been made for January. The outstanding checks as of December 31, 2012 was $6,125. There were no outstanding deposits.
Exhibit 3 Summary of Bank statement
TDC Bank
Denver, CO
Beginning balance .$51,250
Deposits ..$61,300
Checks cleared (51,890)
Bank fees (600)
Ending balance ..$60,060
Exhibit 4 Accounts receivable subsidiary ledger
|
Name
|
Balance
12/31/12
|
New Sales
|
Cash Receipts
|
Balance 3/31/13
|
Aging Schedule
|
|
Due or
|
31-60
|
61-90
|
>90
|
|
Johnson Guides
|
$1,200
|
35,000
|
33,850
|
$2,350
|
$2,350
|
|
Adirondack Adventures
|
$4,000
|
8,500
|
7,000
|
$5,500
|
$4,500
|
$1,000
|
|
Colorado Climbers
|
$2,000
|
12,500
|
12,000
|
$2,500
|
$2,500
|
|
Outdoor Ways
|
$3,150
|
$6,000
|
$3,000
|
$6,150
|
$3,150
|
|
Kincade Climbers
|
$650
|
950
|
600
|
$1,000
|
$950
|
$50
|
|
Spartan Adventures
|
$500
|
3,250
|
500
|
$3,200
|
$3,200
|
|
Nature s Highway
|
$750
|
500
|
$1,250
|
$500
|
$750
|
|
Billings Mountains
|
$2,250
|
$2,250
|
$250
|
$2,000
|
|
Sky Adventures
|
$2,000
|
4,350
|
4,350
|
$2,000
|
$2,000
|
|
Spirit Adventures
|
$1,000
|
$1,000
|
$1,000
|
|
Total
|
$17,500
|
$71,000
|
$61,300
|
$28,100
|
$20,400
|
$4,000
|
$2,000
|
$800
|
Exhibit 5 Inventory
- Ending Counts:
|
Item Name
|
Units
|
Replacement Cost
|
Selling Price
|
Selling Costs
|
Normal Profit %
|
|
Ropes
|
100
|
10
|
25
|
5
|
30%
|
|
Climbing shoes
|
800
|
35
|
60
|
5
|
25%
|
|
Climbing Hardware
|
100
|
20
|
35
|
5
|
20%
|
|
Helmets
|
600
|
25
|
40
|
5
|
30%
|
- Ropes
|
Date
|
Units
|
Unit Cost
|
Total
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
1/1/13
|
50
|
9
|
450
|
|
Purchase
|
1/11/13
|
100
|
9.5
|
950
|
|
Purchase
|
1/18/13
|
200
|
10
|
2000
|
|
Purchase
|
1/25/13
|
200
|
10
|
2000
|
|
End
|
1/31/13
|
100
|
- Climbing Shoes
|
Date
|
Units
|
Unit Cost
|
Total
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
1/1/13
|
600
|
32
|
19,200
|
|
Purchase
|
1/11/13
|
1000
|
33
|
33,000
|
|
Purchase
|
1/18/13
|
200
|
34
|
6,400
|
|
Purchase
|
1/25/13
|
1000
|
35
|
35,000
|
|
End
|
1/31/13
|
800
|
- Climbing Hardware
|
Date
|
Units
|
Unit Cost
|
Total
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
1/1/13
|
50
|
18
|
900
|
|
Purchase
|
1/11/13
|
100
|
19
|
1,900
|
|
Purchase
|
1/18/13
|
200
|
20
|
4,000
|
|
Purchase
|
1/25/13
|
200
|
20
|
4,000
|
|
End
|
1/31/13
|
100
|
- Helmets
|
Date
|
Units
|
Unit Cost
|
Total
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
1/1/13
|
500
|
24
|
12,000
|
|
Purchase
|
1/11/13
|
1,000
|
24
|
24,000
|
|
Purchase
|
1/18/13
|
800
|
25
|
20,000
|
|
Purchase
|
1/25/13
|
1,000
|
25
|
25,000
|
|
End
|
1/31/13
|
600
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Writea paper of no more than 750 words in which you respond to the Broadening Your Perspective 18-1 activity titled “Decision Making Across the Organization” in Ch. 18 of Accounting.
Martinez Company has decided to introduce a new product. The new product can b manufactured by either a capital-intensive method or a labor-intensive method. The manufacturing method will not affect the quality of the product The estimated manufacturing costs by the two methods are as follows:
Capital Labor
Intensive Intensive
Direct materials $5 per unit $5.50 per unit
Direct labor $6 per unit $8.00 per unit
Variable overhead $ 3 per unit $ 4.50 per unit
Fixed manufacturing costs $ 2,508,000 $ 1,538,000
Martinez’s market research department has recommended an introductory unit sales price of $ 30. The incremental selling expenses are estimated to be $502,000 annually plus $2 for each unit sold regardless of manufaturing method.
a. Calculate the estimated break-even point in annual unit sales of the new product if Martinez company uses the:
1. Capital – intensive manufacuring method
2. Labor – intensive manufacturting method
b. Determine the annual unit sales volume at which Martinez Company would be indifferent between the two manufacturing methods.
c. Explain the circumstance under which Martinez should employ each of the two manufacturing methods.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 2: Required Assignment 1 Cost and Decision-Making Analysis
Cheryl Montoya picked up the phone and called her boss, Wes Chan, Vice President of Marketing at Piedmont Fasteners Corporation.
|
Cheryl: Wes, I’m not sure how to go about answering the questions that came up at the meeting with the President yesterday.
Wes: What’s the problem .
Cheryl: The president wanted to know the break-even point for each of the company’s products, but I am having trouble figuring them out.
Wes: I’m sure you can handle it, Cheryl. And, by the way, I need your analysis on my desk tomorrow morning at 8:00 sharp in time for the follow-up meeting at 9:00.
|
Piedmont Fasteners Corporation makes three different clothing fasteners at its manufacturing facility in North Carolina. Data concerning these products appear below:
|
Velcro |
Metal |
Nylon |
| Normal annual sales volume |
100,000 units |
200,000 units |
400,000 units |
| Unit selling price |
$1.65 |
$1.50 |
$0.85 |
| Variable cost per unit |
$1.25 |
$0.70 |
$0.25 |
Total fixed expenses are $400,000 per year.
All three products are sold in highly competitive markets, so the company is unable to raise its prices without losing unacceptably large numbers of customers.
The company has a very effective lean production system, so there is no beginning or ending work in process or finished-goods inventories.
Using the module readings, the Argosy University online library resources, and the Internet, research break-even point and costing systems. Analyze the case based on your research and what you have learned so far in the course.
Respond to the following:
- Calculate the company’s overall break-even point in total sales dollars. Explain your methodology (approximately 2 pages).
- Of the total fixed costs of $400,000: $20,000 could be avoided if the Velcro product were dropped, $80,000 if the Metal product were dropped, and $60,000 if the Nylon product were dropped. The remaining fixed costs of $240,000 consist of common fixed costs such as administrative salaries and rent on the factory building that could be avoided only by going out of business entirely (approximately 2 pages):
- Calculate the break-even point in units for each product. Explain your methodology.
- Determine the overall profit of the company if the company sells exactly the break-even quantity of each product. Present your results.
- Evaluate costing systems for this company. Explain if this company should be using a job-order or process-costing system to accumulate costs (1 page).
Be sure to include your calculations in Microsoft Excel format.
Write a 5 6-page report in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.
Grading Criteria is as follows: Must be strickly followed!
| Calculated the company’s overall break-even point in total sales dollars and explained your methodology. |
32 |
| Calculated the break-even point in units for each product in the scenario and explained your methodology. |
52 |
| Explained what the overall profit of the company will be if the company sells exactly the break-even quantity of each product and showed your results. |
16 |
| Compared and explained if this company should be using a job-order or process-costing system to accumulate costs. |
80 |
| Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; and displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. |
20 |
| Total: |
200 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are an accountant at a local CPA firm that is auditing the accounting records of ABC Company. You have been asked to educate the accounting department about the limitations of the internal control system in preparation for an upcoming audit. During your audit, you have identified that because of a weak internal control system, an adjusting entry for prepaid insurance was not recorded for the first 3 months of the year at $500 per month.
- Identify the limitations of the internal control system. Provide at least 3 limitations.
- Provide at least 2 examples of internal control procedures, and explain how these procedures can be implemented.
- Identify symptoms of a lack of internal control.
- Explain the impact of the missing journal entry on the financial statements of the company.
APA FORMAT IN TEXT CITATION OF REFERENCES
DELIVERABLE LENGTH 3 PAGE
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Choose a public company in the food industry. Analyze the financial statements and assess whether the financial performance has improved or declined year-over-year.
Analysis techniques include the following:
- Comparative financial statements
- Trend analysis
- Ratio analysis
- Percentage analysis
Presentation of 8 PowerPoint slides that includes the following:
- At least 3 slides relevant to the analysis prepared
- An analysis of the performance of the firm based on the analysis tools used
- A summary of the company’s financial performance and assessment of whether it has improved or declined year-over-year in terms of profitability, asset utilization, and liquidity
Background on Course Research Requirements: In the business world, it is important to use research to strengthen points made in presentations and projects. Learning to use the search functions in databases for research is a crucial critical thinking skill that complements other research techniques.
There are two main types of databases. You must stay away from inferior Web sites with anonymous writers; articles found on consultant Web sites, and materials on Web sites that are not reputable. Dictionaries and encyclopedias most often repeat the information from textbooks. Acceptable Internet resources include, among others, government sites (especially for statistics).
Wikipedia or any open source Web sites are not permitted.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.Assume that the following data relative to Eddy Company for 2014 is available:
Net Income$1,400,000
Transactions in Common Shares ChangeCumulative
Jan. 1, 2014, Beginning number500,000
Mar. 1, 2014, Purchase of treasury shares(60,000)440,000
June 1, 2014, Stock split 2-1440,000880,000
Nov. 1, 2014, Issuance of shares120,0001,000,000
8% Cumulative Convertible Preferred Stock
Sold at par, convertible into 200,000 shares of common;
Outstanding for all of 2014.$1,000,000
Stock Options
Exercisable at the option price of $25 per share. Average
market price in 2014, $30. Outstanding for all of 2014.60,000 shares
REQUIRED:
Compute both basic and diluted earnings per share.
2.Your client has asked you to provide guidance on the following potential accounting changes:
(1)Change from straight-line method of depreciation to sum-of-the-years’-digits
(2)Change from the cash basis to accrual basis of accounting
(3)Change from FIFO to LIFO method for inventory valuation purposes
(4)Change from presentation of statements of individual companies to presentation of consolidated statements
(5)Change due to failure to record depreciation in a previous period
(6)Change in the realizability of certain receivables
(7)Change from LIFO to FIFO method for inventory valuation purposes
REQUIRED:
For each of the items above:
- Indicate the type of accounting change, using one of the following codes:
E – Change in estimate
EP – Change in estimate resulting from change in principle
N – Not an accounting change (correction of an error)
PP – Change in principle reported prospectively
PR – Change in principle reported retrospectively
R – Change in reporting entity
- Indicate whether or not restatement of prior year financial statements is necessary.
- Indicate whether the cumulative effect on prior years income is reported.
3. Yarman Inc. began business on January 1, 2013. Its pretax financial income for the first 2 years was as follows:
2013$ 95,000
2014$180,000
The following items caused the only differences between pretax financial income and taxable income.
- In 2013, the company collected $90,000 of rent; of this amount, $30,000 was earned in 2013; the other $60,000 will be earned equally over the 2014-2015 period. The full $90,000 was included in taxable income in 2013.
- The company pays $5,000 a year for life insurance on officers.
- In 2014, the company terminated a top executive and agreed to $60,000 of severance pay. The amount will be paid $20,000 per year for 2014-2016. The 2014 payment was made. The $60,000 was expensed in 2014. For tax purposes, the severance pay is deductible as it is paid.
- The enacted tax rates existing at December 31, 2013 are 35% for 2013 and 40% for 2014 and beyond.
REQUIRED:
(a)Determine taxable income for 2013 and 2014.
(b)Compute the total deferred tax asset / (liability) at the end of 2013 and 2014.
(c)Prepare the journal entry to record income taxes for 2013 and 2014.
(d)Compute net income for 2013 and 2014.
(e)Compute the effective income tax rate for 2013 and 2014.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.Assume that the following data relative to Eddy Company for 2014 is available:
Net Income$1,400,000
Transactions in Common Shares ChangeCumulative
Jan. 1, 2014, Beginning number500,000
Mar. 1, 2014, Purchase of treasury shares(60,000)440,000
June 1, 2014, Stock split 2-1440,000880,000
Nov. 1, 2014, Issuance of shares120,0001,000,000
8% Cumulative Convertible Preferred Stock
Sold at par, convertible into 200,000 shares of common;
Outstanding for all of 2014.$1,000,000
Stock Options
Exercisable at the option price of $25 per share. Average
market price in 2014, $30. Outstanding for all of 2014.60,000 shares
REQUIRED:
Compute both basic and diluted earnings per share.
2.Your client has asked you to provide guidance on the following potential accounting changes:
(1)Change from straight-line method of depreciation to sum-of-the-years’-digits
(2)Change from the cash basis to accrual basis of accounting
(3)Change from FIFO to LIFO method for inventory valuation purposes
(4)Change from presentation of statements of individual companies to presentation of consolidated statements
(5)Change due to failure to record depreciation in a previous period
(6)Change in the realizability of certain receivables
(7)Change from LIFO to FIFO method for inventory valuation purposes
REQUIRED:
For each of the items above:
- Indicate the type of accounting change, using one of the following codes:
E – Change in estimate
EP – Change in estimate resulting from change in principle
N – Not an accounting change (correction of an error)
PP – Change in principle reported prospectively
PR – Change in principle reported retrospectively
R – Change in reporting entity
- Indicate whether or not restatement of prior year financial statements is necessary.
- Indicate whether the cumulative effect on prior years income is reported.
3. Yarman Inc. began business on January 1, 2013. Its pretax financial income for the first 2 years was as follows:
2013$ 95,000
2014$180,000
The following items caused the only differences between pretax financial income and taxable income.
- In 2013, the company collected $90,000 of rent; of this amount, $30,000 was earned in 2013; the other $60,000 will be earned equally over the 2014-2015 period. The full $90,000 was included in taxable income in 2013.
- The company pays $5,000 a year for life insurance on officers.
- In 2014, the company terminated a top executive and agreed to $60,000 of severance pay. The amount will be paid $20,000 per year for 2014-2016. The 2014 payment was made. The $60,000 was expensed in 2014. For tax purposes, the severance pay is deductible as it is paid.
- The enacted tax rates existing at December 31, 2013 are 35% for 2013 and 40% for 2014 and beyond.
REQUIRED:
(a)Determine taxable income for 2013 and 2014.
(b)Compute the total deferred tax asset / (liability) at the end of 2013 and 2014.
(c)Prepare the journal entry to record income taxes for 2013 and 2014.
(d)Compute net income for 2013 and 2014.
(e)Compute the effective income tax rate for 2013 and 2014.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.Assume that the following data relative to Eddy Company for 2014 is available:
Net Income$1,400,000
Transactions in Common Shares ChangeCumulative
Jan. 1, 2014, Beginning number500,000
Mar. 1, 2014, Purchase of treasury shares(60,000)440,000
June 1, 2014, Stock split 2-1440,000880,000
Nov. 1, 2014, Issuance of shares120,0001,000,000
8% Cumulative Convertible Preferred Stock
Sold at par, convertible into 200,000 shares of common;
Outstanding for all of 2014.$1,000,000
Stock Options
Exercisable at the option price of $25 per share. Average
market price in 2014, $30. Outstanding for all of 2014.60,000 shares
REQUIRED:
Compute both basic and diluted earnings per share.
2.Your client has asked you to provide guidance on the following potential accounting changes:
(1)Change from straight-line method of depreciation to sum-of-the-years’-digits
(2)Change from the cash basis to accrual basis of accounting
(3)Change from FIFO to LIFO method for inventory valuation purposes
(4)Change from presentation of statements of individual companies to presentation of consolidated statements
(5)Change due to failure to record depreciation in a previous period
(6)Change in the realizability of certain receivables
(7)Change from LIFO to FIFO method for inventory valuation purposes
REQUIRED:
For each of the items above:
- Indicate the type of accounting change, using one of the following codes:
E – Change in estimate
EP – Change in estimate resulting from change in principle
N – Not an accounting change (correction of an error)
PP – Change in principle reported prospectively
PR – Change in principle reported retrospectively
R – Change in reporting entity
- Indicate whether or not restatement of prior year financial statements is necessary.
- Indicate whether the cumulative effect on prior years income is reported.
3. Yarman Inc. began business on January 1, 2013. Its pretax financial income for the first 2 years was as follows:
2013$ 95,000
2014$180,000
The following items caused the only differences between pretax financial income and taxable income.
- In 2013, the company collected $90,000 of rent; of this amount, $30,000 was earned in 2013; the other $60,000 will be earned equally over the 2014-2015 period. The full $90,000 was included in taxable income in 2013.
- The company pays $5,000 a year for life insurance on officers.
- In 2014, the company terminated a top executive and agreed to $60,000 of severance pay. The amount will be paid $20,000 per year for 2014-2016. The 2014 payment was made. The $60,000 was expensed in 2014. For tax purposes, the severance pay is deductible as it is paid.
- The enacted tax rates existing at December 31, 2013 are 35% for 2013 and 40% for 2014 and beyond.
REQUIRED:
(a)Determine taxable income for 2013 and 2014.
(b)Compute the total deferred tax asset / (liability) at the end of 2013 and 2014.
(c)Prepare the journal entry to record income taxes for 2013 and 2014.
(d)Compute net income for 2013 and 2014.
(e)Compute the effective income tax rate for 2013 and 2014.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
As a new employee at Canyon rental, an outdoor outfitters and supply shop, your boss has asked you to look at the internal control system within the store. He is seeking a loan for expansion and must have his books audited. The auditor asked about his control procedures and documentation. He has no idea what the auditor is talking about. Your boss has asked you to do what you need to understand the system and has asked for a memo with your observations and recommendations by the end of the week. Through interviews and observation you notice the following:
Purchase orders, and sales invoices are not pre-numbered due to the higher cost of printing the forms.To save time the sales clerk enters the sales at the end of the day into the accounting records, prepares the deposit and delivers it to the bank.The sales clerk a trusted and long-term employee grants sales returns at her discretion.The purchasing manager both orders merchandise and approves the payment for the order.Betty Gamble, the bookkeeper has not taken a vacation in three years.Checks are brought to the owner twice a week for signing. He is overwhelmed by all of the paperwork and has asked for the checks only on which he stamps his signature.
In your memo, give a summary of the elements of an effective internal control system. Comment on each of your observations and if there is a weakness provide a solution. Your memo should be 2-3 pages
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selecting a for-profit organization of interest, you will research an unusual or conflicting accounting principle that has impacted your chosen organization. The research will require you to present, review and analyze the organizations published accounting statements of the last two years. Specifically, your research paper will:
- Identify the core functions of each department, their strengths and weaknesses, and make recommendations for improvement, as appropriate.
- Identify and describe the underlying problem or conflict.
- Compare the alternative courses of action.
- Explain the effects at issue.
- Recommend options that would be consistent with the organization s accounting practices, accounting processes, and accounting-related departments.
- Include the last two years of published accounting statements.
Present your findings as a 3 pages Word document formatted in APA style
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Project 2 This one is APA format with references about 500 to 700 words
It sometimes seems like there is always an accounting scandal on the news. There have been plenty of investigations into the different businesses that had the accounting scandals. When the investigations are finished, the findings almost always show that an accounting gimmick was used to manipulate the financial statements. Research the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and prepare a presentation that pertains to intentional misrepresentation of financial statements, and describe the maximum penalty that the chief executive officer (CEO) and the chief financial officer (CFO) could face. All references must be cited in proper APA format.
Discussion 3 this is a discussion 500 to 700 words. no APA but references included Primary Task Response:Within the Discussion Board area, write 400 600 words that respond to the following questions with your thoughts, ideas, and comments. This will be the foundation for future discussions by your classmates. Be substantive and clear, and use examples to reinforce your ideas.The general manager of a business encounters many different types of business transactions. Provide an example for each of the following transactions that would describe the effect on the accounting equation. Each situation is independent of the other situations.
- The transaction would increase an asset account and increase a liability account.
- The transaction would decrease an asset account and decrease the owner s equity account.
- The transaction would increase an asset account and increase the owner s equity account.
- The transaction would decrease an asset account and decrease a liability account.
- The transaction would increase one asset account and decrease another asset account.
- The transaction would decrease one liability account and increase another liability account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have been asked to give a presentation to junior staff members on the objectives of financial reporting and the conceptual framework.
Prepare a professional, business-quality presentation including the following:
- 10 12 PowerPoint slides
- Professional tone and appearance
- Presentation well suited for the audience (junior staffers)
- Appropriate citations and references in APA style
- Information covering the following topics:
- Identify the 1 general objective of financial reporting.
- Describe the 3 specific objectives of financial reporting.
- Explain the relationship between the objectives of financial reporting.
- Explain the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) conceptual framework.
Please submit your assignment.
The following grading criteria will apply to this assignment:
|
Grading Criteria
|
- Create a PowerPoint presentation of 10 12 slides.
|
30%
|
- Identify the 1 general objective of financial reporting.
- Describe the 3 specific objectives of financial reporting.
|
30%
|
- Explain the relationship between the objectives of financial reporting.
- Explain the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) conceptual framework.
|
30%
|
- Good format, grammar and APA
|
10%
|
| TOTAL |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
5 7 Recording Capital Projects Fund Transactions. In Erikus County, the Parks and Recreation Department constructed a library in one of the county s high growth areas. The construction was funded by a number of sources. Below is selected information related to the funding and closing of the Library Capital Project Fund. All activity related to the library construction occurred within the 2011 fiscal year.
1. The county issued $6,000,000, 4 percent bonds, with interest payable semiannually on June 30 and December 31. The bonds sold for 101 on July 30, 2010. Proceeds from the bonds were to be used for construction of the library, with all interest and premiums received to be used to service the debt issue.
2. A $650,000 federal grant was received to help finance construction of the library.
3. The Library Special Revenue Fund transferred $250,000 for use in construction of the library.
4. A construction contract was awarded in the amount of $6,800,000.
5. The library was completed on June 1, 2011, four months ahead of schedule. Total construction expenditures for the library amounted to $6,890,000. When the project was completed, the cost of the library was allocated as follows: $200,000 to land, $6,295,000 to building, and the remainder to equipment.
6. The capital projects fund was closed. It was determined that remaining funds were related to the bond issue, and thus they were appropriately transferred to the debt service fund.
Required
Make all necessary entries in the capital projects fund general journal and the governmental activities general journal at the government-wide level.
5 8 Statement of Revenues, Expenditures, and Changes in Fund Balance. The pre-closing trial balance for the Annette County Public Works Capital Project Fund is provided below.
Required
a. Prepare the June 30, 2011, statement of revenues, expenditures, and changes in fund balance for the capital projects fund.
b. Has the capital project been completed? Explain your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Here are the 2 homework questions. The second one should be a strong paragraph with a cited reference.
1.EXERCISE 3 10 Applying Overhead; Computing Unit Product Cost [LO2, LO3]
A company assigns overhead cost to completed jobs on the basis of 120% of direct labor cost. The job cost sheet for Job 413 shows that $12,000 in direct materials has been used on the job and that $8,000 in direct labor cost has been incurred. A total of 200 units were produced in Job 413.
Required:
What is the total manufacturing cost assigned to Job 413? What is the unit product cost for Job 413?
(check figure unit production cost 148)
2.Why do companies use a predetermined overhead rate rather than actual overhead costs to apply overhead to jobs?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Ottoboni Corporation had two operating divisions, one manufacturing division and a finance division. Both divisions are considered separate components. The finance division has been unprofitable, and on October 3, 2006, Ottoboni adopted a formal plan to sell the division. The sale was completed on March 19, 2007. At December 31, 2006, the division was considered held for sale
On December 31, 2006, the company s fiscal year-end, the book value of the assets of the finance division was $2,100,000. On that date, the fair value of the assets, less costs to sell, was $1,900,000. The before-tax operating loss of the division for the year was $270,000.The company s effective tax rate is 40%. The after-tax income from continuing operations for 2006 is $600,000.
Instructions:
1. Prepare a partial income statement for 2006 beginning with income from continuing operations. Ignore EPS disclosures.
2. Repeat instruction 1 assuming that the estimated net sales price of the finance division s assets was $2,400,000, instead of $1,900,000.
NOTE: In this exercise, a partial income statement is required for instruction 2
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Bilibong Company had three distinct operating divisions, each of which qualifies as a separate component. The sports equipment division had been unprofitable, and on June 1, 2006, the company adopted a plan to sell the assets of the division. The actual sale was effected on December 3, 2006, at a price of $1,200,000. The sale resulted in a before-tax gain of $300,000
The division incurred before-tax operating losses of $380,000 from the beginning of the year through December 3. The income tax rate is 40%. Bilibong s after-tax income from its continuing operations is $500,000.
Required:
Prepare an income statement for 2006 beginning with income from continuing operations. Include appropriate EPS disclosures assuming 200,000 shares of common stock were outstanding throughout the year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Carmen s Household Appliances
carries an inventory of clocks and other household items. The business began thesecondquarter of 2013 with 15 clocks (Lomani Quartz Brand) at atotal costof $36,000. The following transactions, relating to the clocks(Lomani Quartz Brand),took place during the quarter: April 5
|
Purchased 30 clocks at a cost of $2,490 each.
|
|
April 30
|
The sales for April were 18 clocks which yielded
totalsales revenue of $81,000.
|
|
May 1
|
A new batch of 15 clocks was purchased
on accountat a cost of $2,250 each. These units attracted an additional shipping cost of $350 on each clock. It is customary for Carmen s Household Appliances to includefreight-inas part of the cost of the units in their inventory record.
|
|
May 16
|
Upon inspection, five (5) of the clocks purchased on May 1 were found to be badly soiled and were returned to the supplier.
|
|
May 30
|
During the month 20 clocks were sold at a price of $5,000 each.
|
|
June 2
|
Ariana Stone, a customer to whom 5 clocks were sold at the
close of businesson May 30th, returned 2 of the clocks, as she had purchased an incorrect quantity.
|
|
June 12
|
To meet the increased demand for the commodity, a further 14 clocks were purchased at a cost of $3,000 each, however a
trade discountof 5% was received on each clock.
|
|
June 30
|
22 clocks were sold during June at a unit selling price of $5,300.
|
|
June 30
|
A physical count of inventory was carried out at the close of business, which revealed that there were only 8 clocks on hand.
|
Prepare a
perpetual inventoryledger card forclocks(Lomani Quartz Brand), clearly showing the value of ending inventory at June 30th, 2013, and the total amount to be assigned to cost of goods sold for the period.(20 marks)
ii)
Given that marketing & selling and administrative costs for the quarter were $16,550 and $23,710 respectively, prepare an income statement forCarmen s Household Appliancesfor the period, to determine the profit earned on theLomani Quartz clocks.(6 mark
You are told that 8 of the clocks sold on May 30
th, 2013 wereon account. State the journal entries necessary to record the transactions on May 1stand May 30th, assuming the company uses a: – Periodic inventory system
– Perpetual inventory system
(8 marks) iv)Assuming that the business used theaverage costmethod, what would be the value of the units sold on April 30?(Show all workings to explain your answer)(3 marks)
v)
Briefly explain the impact of inflation on ending inventory, cost of goods sold and gross profit under both the FIFO and LIFO methods of inventory valuation.(
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
- One client had indicated that they were interested in purchasing $42,500 worth of products, so the bookkeeper recorded the transaction. However, the client has not actually committed to the purchase.
- The bookkeeper already corrected the sales account. However, the bookkeeper may have made a mistake when computing cost of goods sold. She included total production costs for 2013 and did not adjust ending inventory for the $42,500 worth of units left at the end of the year. The amount of ending inventory was determined using a physical count.
|
Nybrostrand Company
|
|
31-Dec-13
|
|
Trial Balance (accounts in alphabetical order)
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
$ 78,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$ 36,500
|
|
|
Cash
|
30,000
|
|
|
Common stock
|
|
10,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
24,350
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
307,000
|
|
|
Equipment (net of depreciation)
|
415,000
|
|
|
Insurance
|
1,400
|
|
|
Inventory
|
34,000
|
|
|
Long-term debt
|
|
127,000
|
|
Marketing
|
4,500
|
|
|
Paid-in capital
|
|
50,000
|
|
Property taxes
|
16,900
|
|
|
Rent
|
28,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
|
|
Revenues
|
|
586,000
|
|
Salaries
|
50,000
|
|
|
Utilities
|
6,700
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total
|
954,350
|
851,000
|
|
|
|
Prepare an income statement for the company in good format. Always include the name of the company and the period covered in the title. Don’t forget dollar signs where appropriate. You do not need to include the balance sheet. Consequently, you will not need all the accounts listed above. How does the income or loss compare to the original income statement? Explain the importance of the matching concept.
The submission should be 2 to 4 pages and need to include answers to all the questions listed above. Show computations, discuss the results and include references in APA format.
We use Word, Must get C or better, if bad grade or unfinished I get Full refund..
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. (TCO A) Which of the following is an advantage of corporations relative to partnerships and sole proprietorships? (Points: 5)
Reduced legal liability for investors.
Harder to transfer ownership.
Lower taxes.
Most common form of organization.
2. (TCO A) Buying assets needed to operate a business is an example of a(n) (Points: 5)
delivering activity.
financing activity.
investing activity.
operating activity.
3. (TCO A) For 2007 Landford Corporation reported net income of $30,000; net sales $400,000; and average share outstanding 6,000. There were no preferred stock dividends. What was the 2007 earnings per share? (Points: 5)
$4.66
$0.20
$66.67
$5.00
4. (TCO C) Free cash flow provides an indication of a company s ability to (Points: 5)
generate cash to invest in new capital expenditures.
generate net income.
generate cash to pay dividends.
both a and c.
5. (TCO C) The dividend account (Points: 5)
is increased with a debit.
is decreased with a credit.
is not an expense account.
all of the above
6. (TCO A, B) Kerner Company showed the following balances at the end of its first year:
Cash $10,000
Prepaid insurance 1,000
Accounts receivable 5,000
Accounts payable 4,000
Notes payable 6,000
Common stock 2,000
Dividends 1,000
Revenues 30,000
Expenses 25,000
What did Kerner Company show as total credits on its trial balance?
(Points: 5)
$43,000
$41,000
$42,000
$44,000
7. (TCO B, E) Under the accrual basis of accounting (Points: 5)
cash must be received before revenue is recognized.
net income is calculated by matching cash outflows against cash inflows.
events that change a company’s financial statements are recognized in the period they occur rather than in the period in which cash is paid or received.
the ledger accounts must be adjusted to reflect a cash basis of accounting before financial statements are prepared under generally accepted accounting principles.
8. (TCO A, B) Reese Company purchased office supplies costing $4,000 and debited Office Supplies for the full amount. At the end of the accounting period, a physical count of office supplies revealed $1,600 still on hand. The appropriate adjusting journal entry to be made at the end of the period would be (Points: 5)
Debit Office Supplies Expense, $1,600; Credit Office Supplies, $1,600.
Debit Office Supplies, $2,400; Credit Office Supplies Expense, $2,400.
Debit Office Supplies Expense, $2,400; Credit Office Supplies, $2,400.
Debit Office Supplies, $1,600; Credit Office Supplies Expense, $1,600.
9. (TCO E) Baxtor Company purchased merchandise inventory with an invoice price of $5,000 and credit terms of 2/10, n/30. What is the net cost of the goods if Baxtor Company pays within the discount period? (Points: 5)
$5,000
$4,920
$4,900
$4,000
10. (TCO B) At the beginning of the year, Midtown Athletic had an inventory of $400,000. During the year, the company purchased goods costing $1,600,000. If Midtown Athletic reported ending inventory of $600,000 and sales of $2,000,000, their cost of goods sold and gross profit rate must be (Points: 5)
$1,000,000 and 50%
$1,400,000 and 30%
$1,000,000 and 30%
$1,400,000 and 70%
11. (TCO D) In a period of increasing prices, which inventory flow assumption will result in the lowest amount of income tax expense? (Points: 5)
FIFO
LIFO
Average Cost Method
Income tax expense for the period will be the same under all assumptions.
12. (TCO D) An aircraft company would most likely have a (Points: 5)
high inventory turnover.
low profit margin.
high volume.
low inventory turnover.
13. (TCO D) A very small company would have the most difficulty in implementing which of the following internal control activities? (Points: 5)
Separation of duties
Limited access to assets
Periodic independent verification by and external auditor.
Sound personnel procedures
14. (TCO D) Which of the following is not a suggested procedure to establish internal control over cash disbursements? (Points: 5)
Anyone can sign the checks.
Different individuals approve and make the payments.
Blank checks are stored with limited access.
The bank statement is reconciled monthly.
15. (TCO A, B, D) An aging of a company’s accounts receivable indicates that $4,000 is estimated to be uncollectible. If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a $1,200 debit balance, the adjustment to record bad debts for the period will require a (Points: 5)
debit to Bad Debts Expense for $4,000.
debit to Allowance for Doubtful Accounts for $5,200.
debit to Bad Debts Expense for $5,200.
credit to Allowance for Doubtful Accounts for $4,000.
. (TCO A, B, D) Using the percentage of receivables method for recording bad debts expense, estimated uncollectible accounts are $10,000 at the end of the year. If the balance of the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is $2,000 credit before adjustment; what is the amount of bad debt expense for that period? (Points: 5)
$10,000
$8,000
$12,000
$2,000
2. (TCO A, E) Brown Clinic purchases land for $120,000 cash. The clinic assumes $1,500 in property taxes due on the land. The title and attorney fees totaled $1,000. The clinic has the land graded for $2,200. What amount does Brown Clinic record as the cost for the land? (Points: 5)
$122,200
$120,000
$124,700
$122,500
3. (TCO A, E) Equipment was purchased for $60,000. Freight charges amounted to $2,800 and there was a cost of $8,000 for building a foundation and installing the equipment. It is estimated that the equipment will have a $12,000 salvage value at the end of its 5-year useful life. Depreciation expense each year using the straight-line method will be (Points: 5)
$14,160.
$11,760.
$9,840.
$9,600.
4. (TCO D) Ron’s Pharmacy has collected $600 in sales taxes during March. If sales taxes must be remitted to the state government monthly, what entry will Ron’s Pharmacy make to show the March remittance? (Points: 5)
Dr Sales Tax Expense 600
Cr Cash 600
Dr Sales Taxes Payable 600
Cr Cash 600
Dr Sales Tax Expense 600
Cr Sales Taxes Payable 600
No entry required.
5. (TCO D) Lopez Corporation issues 500, 10-year, 8%, $1,000 bonds dated January 1, 2007, at 96. The journal entry to record the issuance will show a (Points: 5)
debit to Cash of $500,000.
credit to Discount on Bonds Payable for $20,000.
credit to Bonds Payable for $480,000.
debit to Cash for $480,000.
6. (TCO A) If Kiner Company issues 1,000 shares of $5 par value common stock for $70,000, the account (Points: 5)
Common Stock will be credited for $5,000.
Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value will be credited for $5,000.
Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value will be credited for $70,000.
Cash will be debited for $65,000.
7. (TCO A, C) Outstanding stock of the Apex Corporation included 20,000 shares of $5 par common stock and 5,000 shares of 6%, $10 par non-cumulative preferred stock. In 2006, Apex declared and paid dividends of $2,000. In 2007, Apex declared and paid dividends of $6,000. How much of the 2007 dividend was distributed to preferred shareholders? (Points: 5)
$4,000
$7,000
$3,000
None of the above
8. (TCO C) Accounts receivable arising from sales to customers amounted to $35,000 and $40,000 at the beginning and end of the year, respectively. Income reported on the income statement for the year was $120,000. Exclusive of the effect of other adjustments, the cash flows from operating activities to be reported on the statement of cash flows is (Points: 5)
$120,000.
$125,000.
$155,000.
$115,000.
9. (TCO C) Wilton Company reported net income of $40,000 for the year. During the year, accounts receivable increased by $7,000, accounts payable decreased by $3,000 and depreciation expense of $5,000 was recorded. Net cash provided by operating activities for the year is (Points: 5)
$30,000.
$45,000.
$39,000.
$35,000
10. (TCO F) One variation of the horizontal analysis is known as (Points: 5)
nonlinear analysis.
vertical analysis.
trend analysis.
common size analysis.
11. (TCO F) Vertical analysis is also known as (Points: 5)
perpendicular analysis.
common size analysis.
trend analysis.
straight-line analysis.
12. (TCO F) The best way to study the relationships among the components within a financial statement is to prepare (Points: 5)
a vertical analysis.
a trend analysis.
profitability analysis.
comparative analysis.
13. (TCO F) In vertical analysis, the base amount for studying salary & wages expense is generally (Points: 5)
net sales.
salary & wages expense in a previous year.
gross profit.
net income.
14. (TCO F) A common measure of profitability is the (Points: 5)
current ratio.
current cash debt coverage ratio.
return on common stockholders equity ratio.
debt to total assets.
15. (TCO F) Long-term creditors are usually most interested in evaluating (Points: 5)
liquidity.
marketability.
profitability.
solvency.
.
(TCO A) The partial financial statement items below were taken from the financial statements of Prone, Inc. This information can be used to correctly solve each of the ratios below. The information is in alphabetical order.
Accounts payable $ 28,000 Net income $ 48,000
Accounts receivable 66,000 Other current liabilities 17,000
Cash 54,000 Total assets 250,000
Gross profit 160,000 Total liabilities 200,000
Income before income taxes 54,000 Wages payable 5,000
Additional information: The number of average common shares outstanding during the year was 40,000.
Instructions: Compute the following:
(a) Current ratio.
(b) Working capital.
(c) Earnings per share.
(d) Debts to total assets ratio.
To earn full credit, you must show the formula you are using, show your computations and explain the meaning of each of your ratio results.
(Points: 25)
2. (TCO B & E) These financial statement items are for Snyder Corporation at year-end, July 31, 2010.
Salaries payable $ 2,580
Salaries expense 48,700
Utilities expense 22,600
Equipment 21,000
Accounts payable 4,100
Commission revenue 61,100
Rent revenue 8,500
Long-term note payable 1,800
Common stock 16,000
Cash 24,200
Accounts receivable 9,780
Accumulated depreciation 6,000
Dividends 5,000
Depreciation expense 4,000
Retained earnings (beginning of the year) 35,200
Instructions:
Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the year.
(Points: 25)
3. (TCO C) Using the indirect method, calculate the amount of cash flows from operating activities using the indirect method from the following data:
Net income $230,000
Beginning accounts receivable 22,000
Ending accounts receivable 26,000
Beginning prepaid expenses 5,000
Ending prepaid expenses 2,000
Beginning accounts payable 15,000
Ending accounts payable 14,000
Depreciation expense 55,000
Amortization of intangible asset 3,000
Dividends declared and paid 11,000
(Points: 25)
4. (TCO D) Your friend, Jeff, has opened a movie theater. Jeff states that he does not have time to develop and implement a system of internal controls.
a. Provide Jeff with the objectives of a system of internal control.
b. Explain to Jeff why he should develop a system of internal control. (Points: 25)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The cash records of Arora Company show the following.
For July:
| 1. |
|
The June 30 bank reconciliation indicated that deposits in transit total $708. During July, the general ledger account Cash shows deposits of $18,036, but the bank statement indicates that only $15,809 in deposits were received during the month. |
| 2. |
|
The June 30 bank reconciliation also reported outstanding checks of $975. During the month of July, Arora Company books show that $18,810 of checks were issued, yet the bank statement showed that $16,701 of checks cleared the bank in July. |
For September:
| 3. |
|
In September, deposits per bank statement totaled $25,263, deposits per books were $25,760, and deposits in transit at September 30 were $2,838. |
| 4. |
|
In September, cash disbursements per books were $23,086, checks clearing the bank were $24,244, and outstanding checks at September 30 were $2,456. |
There were no bank debit or credit memoranda, and no errors were made by either the bank or Arora Company.
Answer the following questions.
(a) In situation 1, what were the deposits in transit at July 31?
| The deposits in transit at July 31 |
|
$ |
(b) In situation 2, what were the outstanding checks at July 31?
| The outstanding checks at July 31 |
|
$ |
(c) In situation 3, what were the deposits in transit at August 31?
| The deposits in transit at August 31 |
|
$ |
(d) In situation 4, what were the outstanding checks at August 31?
| The outstanding checks at August 31 |
|
$ |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
-
[u01a2] Unit 1 Assignment 2
MISSING ACCOUNTING EQUATION DATA
Resources
- Missing Accounting Equation Data Scoring Guide.
- BUS3061 Unit 1 Excel Workbook Template
The accounting equation requires that it always be kept in balance after a business transaction has been processed. This requires the accountant to have applied knowledge of all parts of the equation, and be able to critically analyze when the equation is not in balance. This assignment provides you an opportunity to apply your accounting equation intelligence quotient.
Instructions
For this assignment, use worksheet u01a2 of the BUS3061 Unit 1 Excel Workbook Template (listed in Resources).
Using your knowledge about the accounting equation, answer the following questions. Be sure to show your calculations.
- The liabilities of the Smith Company are $120,000 and its owner’s equity is $232,000. What is the amount of the company’s total assets?
- The total assets of the Jones Company are $190,000 and its owner’s equity is $91,000. What is the amount of the company’s total liabilities?
- The total assets of the Greene Company are $800,000 and its liabilities are equal to one-half of its total assets. What is the amount of the company’s owner’s equity?
- Beginning the new year, the Orange Company had total assets of $800,000 and total liabilities of $300,000. If total assets increased by $150,000 during the year and total liabilities decreased by $80,000, what is the owner’s equity total at the end of the year?
- Beginning the new year, the Orange Company had total assets of $800,000 and total liabilities of $300,000. If, during the year, the Orange Company’s total liabilities increased by $100,000 and its owner’s equity decreased by $70,000, what is the company’s ending amount of total assets?
- Beginning the new year, the Orange Company had total assets of $800,000 and total liabilities of $300,000. If total assets decreased by $80,000 and its owner’s equity increased by $120,000 during the year, what is the company’s year-end total liabilities amount?
- Toggle Drawer
[u01a3] Unit 1 Assignment 3
ACCOUNTING CONVENTIONS AND PRINCIPLES
Resources
- Accounting Conventions and Principles Scoring Guide.
- BUS3061 Unit 1 Excel Workbook Template
Accounting conventions represent the principles, assumptions, and rules that guide an accountant as he or she analyzes the effects of business events on the accounting cycle and applies them to various cycle procedures. This assignment requires you to identify which of these conventions apply to a given business scenario to enhance your understanding of the foundation of accounting procedures and processes.
Instructions
For this assignment, use worksheet u01a3 on the BUS3061 Unit 1 Excel Workbook Template (listed in Resources).
Identify the applicable accounting convention for each of the following business scenarios. More than one convention may apply to each scenario. Please explain your choices for each scenario.
Scenario 1: The Acme Company is undergoing a reorganization to improve its financial structure. As part of this process, the company is considering lowering its expense calculations to improve the bottom line net income.
Scenario 2: Regal Enterprises has purchased $45,000 worth new equipment for use in its manufacturing operations and would like to write off the cost of this equipment in just a couple of years, instead of the usual 10 years for this equipment type. The company’s president fears that the economic conditions in its industry will worsen and cause the company to sell the equipment sooner than expected.
Scenario 3: Bozrah Industries, a small independent retailer, wants to change its accounting system from cash-based to accrual-based, and is concerned about how this change will affect the recording of sales and expenses.
Scenario 4: Randolph, Inc. has experienced major turnover in its accounting department, and the new head of accounting has been going through the current records of transactions. A couple of those transactions appear problematic. The first contains an error of $10,000 that the previous accountant decided was not large enough to adjust before the financial statements were prepared. This error would understate income and make the company look more profitable than it actually is.
Scenario 5: The Morrison Company receives much of its revenue from those customers who buy or rent furniture and appliances on the installment plan. Because the company uses an accrual-based accounting system, revenue is recognized at the point of sale, even though cash comes in on a monthly basis from customers. Lately, the company’s accountant is questioning the use of the accrual basis for recognizing revenue, because several customers have defaulted on their contracts, causing problems in the accounting system.
Scenario 6: Charter Communications has recently found itself at the wrong end of multiple lawsuits for failure to provide necessary services according to their contractual obligations. Senior management does not want to disclose the potential liability of these lawsuits on its financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
: Review of Accounting Ethics
Due Week 3 and worth 200 points
Many organizations have been in the news over the past few years due to accounting ethical breaches that have affected their customers, employees, or the general public. Search the Internet or the Strayer Library to locate a story in the news that depicts an accounting ethical breach. You may select from any type of organization about which you have information or a curiosity.
Write a four to five (4-5) page paper in which you:
1. Given the corporate ethical breaches in recent times, assess whether or not you believe that the current business and regulatory environment is more conducive to ethical behavior. Provide support for your answer.
2. Based on your research, describe the organization, the accounting ethical breach and the impact to the organization related to ethical breach.
3. Determine how the organizational ethical issue was detected and how management failed to create an ethical environment.
4. Analyze the accounts impacted and / or accounting guidelines violated and the resulting impact to the business operation.
5. As a CFO, recommend which measures could have been taken to prevent this ethical breach and how each measure should be implemented in the future.
- Use at least four (4) quality academic resources in this assignment. Note:Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
2012 Strayer University. All Rights Reserved. This document contains Strayer University Confidential and Proprietary information and may not be copied, further distributed, or otherwise disclosed in whole or in part, without the expressed written permission of Strayer University. ACC 557 Student Version 1128 (1200 5-8-2013) Final Page 9 of 19
Assignment 2: You Are an Entrepreneur!
Due Week 6 and worth 280 points
Student life does not generally afford a great deal of free time to pursue your personal interests; however, at one point, you may have considered turning a personal interest or hobby into an official enterprise. Today, you have finally decided to turn that hobby into a business but have realized that you need start-up capital from a lender or investor.
To obtain funding, you need to convince a lender / investor that your business is more than a hobby. You need to demonstrate that you have a firm grasp of your business, the accounting practices that impact your business, the controls needed to safeguard assets, and which accounting system will produce accurate and relevant financial information.
Write a six to eight (6-8) page business plan in which you:
1. Describe the type of business you have created including:
a. The product or service, and general staffing plan. Provide a rationale for your plan.
b. The form of your business and the benefits it offers your particular business,
c. A chart of accounts specific to your business, including a rationale as to the selection of each account. (
Note:The chart of accounts is a blueprint of your business for the lender/investor. It should report the expected resources that you will consume in your business (assets), the sources of those resources (liabilities and equity), the sources of revenue, and expenditures that you expect to incur to earn those revenues. You may build a detailed chart that includes business units, divisions, product lines, etc.)
2. Based on the form of your business, analyze whether or not you will be required to use Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) or International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) accounting methods and how the IFRS / GAAP convergence will impact your business. Suggest how you will incorporate any changes into your books and records. (
Note:You need to demonstrate to the lender/investor that you have recognized possible changes to GAAP that may impact the accounting and reporting of your accounting events.)
3. Prepare a pro forma balance sheet and income statement providing the assumptions made and support the valuations assigned.
4. Considering the value of assets (assigned per your balance sheet) used within your business, recommend two (2) specific internal controls that you will implement to protect your company s assets and resources, justifying how each will provide assurances to management. (NOTE: Safeguarding assets and protecting personal data are paramount to ensuring the viability of a business. Demonstrate to the lender/investor that your assets will be safeguarded and customer information (if applicable) will be protected.)
5. Based on the internal control recommendations that you made, suggest how you will implement each within your business environment, indicating how challenges or resistances will be overcome.
6. Evaluate the impact of the regulatory environment, including the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and other regulatory requirements, on your business venture, giving considering to how you intend to comply with the requirements and the general impact to decision making within your business.
7. Use at least four (4) quality academic resources in this assignment.
Note:Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1)
|
Walberg Associates, antique dealers, purchased the contents of an estate for $38,700. Terms of the purchase were FOB shipping point, and the cost of transporting the goods to Walberg Associates’ warehouse was $1,800. Walberg Associates insured the shipment at a cost of $270. Prior to putting the goods up for sale, they cleaned and refurbished them at a cost of $610.
|
|
Determine the cost of the inventory acquired from the estate
2)
| Laker Company reported the following January purchases and sales data for its only product. |
| Date |
Activities |
Units Acquired at Cost |
Units Sold at Retail |
|
Jan. |
1 |
|
Beginning inventory |
|
160 |
units |
@ $7.20 |
= |
$ |
1,152 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Jan. |
10 |
|
Sales |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
95 |
units |
@$15.20 |
|
|
Jan. |
20 |
|
Purchase |
|
230 |
units |
@ $6.20 |
= |
|
1,426 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Jan. |
25 |
|
Sales |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
155 |
units |
@$15.20 |
|
|
Jan. |
30 |
|
Purchase |
|
100 |
units |
@ $5.20 |
= |
|
520 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Totals |
|
490 |
units |
|
|
$ |
3,098 |
|
250 |
units |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Laker uses a perpetual inventory system. For specific identification, ending inventory consists of 240 units, where 100 are from the January 30 purchase, 80 are from the January 20 purchase, and 60 are from beginning inventory.
|
| 1. |
Complete comparative income statements for the month of January for Laker Company for the four inventory methods. Assume expenses are $1,700, and that the applicable income tax rate is 35%. (Do not round your Intermediate calculations.)
|
| 2. |
Which method yields the highest net income?
|
|
|
|
|
FIFO |
|
Specific identification |
|
LIFO |
|
Weighted average |
|
| 3. |
Does net income using weighted average fall between that using FIFO and LIFO?
|
|
|
|
|
| 4. |
If costs were rising instead of falling, which method would yield the highest net income?
|
|
|
|
|
Weighted average |
|
FIFO |
|
LIFO |
|
Specific identification |
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Vibrant Company had $1,050,000 of sales in each of three consecutive years 2012 2014, and it purchased merchandise costing $575,000 in each of those years. It also maintained a $350,000 physical inventory from the beginning to the end of that three-year period. In accounting for inventory, it made an error at the end of year 2012 that caused its year-end 2012 inventory to appear on its statements as $330,000 rather than the correct $350,000.
|
3.value:
10.00 points
| 1. |
Determine the correct amount of the company’s gross profit in each of the years 2012 2014
|
4.value:
10.00 points
| 2. |
Prepare comparative income statements to show the effect of this error on the company’s cost of goods sold and gross profit for each of the years 2012 2014.
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Warnerwoods Company uses a perpetual inventory system. It entered into the following purchases and sales transactions for March. |
|
Date |
Activities |
Units Acquired at Cost |
Units Sold at Retail |
|
Mar. |
1 |
|
Beginning inventory |
|
100 |
units |
@ $51.00/unit |
|
|
|
|
|
Mar. |
5 |
|
Purchase |
|
225 |
units |
@ $56.00/unit |
|
|
|
|
|
Mar. |
9 |
|
Sales |
|
|
|
|
|
260 |
units |
@ $86.00/unit |
|
Mar. |
18 |
|
Purchase |
|
85 |
units |
@ $61.00/unit |
|
|
|
|
|
Mar. |
25 |
|
Purchase |
|
150 |
units |
@ $63.00/unit |
|
|
|
|
|
Mar. |
29 |
|
Sales |
|
|
|
|
|
130 |
units |
@ $96.00/unit |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Totals |
|
560 |
units |
|
|
390 |
units |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Required: |
| 1. |
Compute cost of goods available for sale and the number of units available for sale.
|
| 2. |
Compute the number of units in ending inventory. |
| 3. |
Compute the cost assigned to ending inventory using (a) FIFO, (b) LIFO, (c) weighted average, and (d)specific identification. For specific identification, the March 9 sale consisted of 65 units from beginning inventory and 195 units from the March 5 purchase; the March 29 sale consisted of 45 units from the March 18 purchase and 85 units from the March 25 purchase. (Round your average cost per unit to 2 decimal places.)
|
| 4. |
Compute gross profit earned by the company for each of the four costing methods. For specific identification, the March 9 sale consisted of 65 units from beginning inventory and 195 units from the March 5 purchase; the March 29 sale consisted of 45 units from the March 18 purchase and 85 units from the March 25 purchase. (Round average cost per unit to 2 decimal places.)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
10.value:
10.00 points
| Laker Company reported the following January purchases and sales data for its only product. |
| Date |
Activities |
Units Acquired at Cost |
Units Sold at Retail |
|
Jan. |
1 |
|
Beginning inventory |
|
260 |
units |
@ $9.20 |
= |
$ |
2,392 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Jan. |
10 |
|
Sales |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
145 |
units |
@$17.20 |
|
|
Jan. |
20 |
|
Purchase |
|
330 |
units |
@ $8.20 |
= |
|
2,706 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Jan. |
25 |
|
Sales |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
255 |
units |
@$17.20 |
|
|
Jan. |
30 |
|
Purchase |
|
200 |
units |
@ $7.20 |
= |
|
1,440 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Totals |
|
790 |
units |
|
|
$ |
6,538 |
|
400 |
units |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Laker uses a perpetual inventory system. For specific identification, ending inventory consists of 390 units, where 200 are from the January 30 purchase, 80 are from the January 20 purchase, and 110 are from beginning inventory.
|
| 1. |
Complete comparative income statements for the month of January for Laker Company for the four inventory methods. Assume expenses are $2,700, and that the applicable income tax rate is 39%. (Do not round your Intermediate calculations.)
|
|
|
| 2. |
Which method yields the highest net income?
|
|
|
|
|
Weighted average |
|
FIFO |
|
LIFO |
|
Specific identification |
|
| 3. |
Does net income using weighted average fall between that using FIFO and LIFO?
|
|
|
|
|
| 4. |
If costs were rising instead of falling, which method would yield the highest net income?
|
|
|
|
|
Specific identification |
|
FIFO |
|
LIFO |
|
Weighted average
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
3.Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:
|
2-Aug: Borrowed $55,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 90-day, 12% note.
|
|
20-Aug: Issued a $50,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $50,000 delivery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest r ate.
|
|
10-Sep: Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued
|
|
a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.
|
|
11-Sep: Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account
|
|
payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and carries a 14% interest rate.
|
|
10-Oct: The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.
|
|
11-Oct: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.
|
|
30-Oct: Paid note to Bank of Kingsville.
|
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest. (Daily interest is calculated utilizing the 360 day method).
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of December 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.value:
25.00 points
Exercise 20-4 Merchandising: Preparing a budgeted income statement and balance sheet LO P2
|
Following information relates to Acco Co.
|
| a. |
Beginning cash balance on July 1: $35,000. |
| b. |
Cash receipts from sales: 30% is collected in the month of sale, 50% in the next month, and 20% in the second month after sale (uncollectible accounts are negligible and can be ignored). Sales amounts are: May (actual), $1,204,000; June (actual), $840,000; and July (budgeted), $980,000.
|
| c. |
Payments on merchandise purchases: 60% in the month of purchase and 40% in the month following purchase. Purchases amounts are: June (actual), $301,000; and July (budgeted), $600,000.
|
| d. |
Budgeted cash disbursements for salaries in July: $147,700. |
| e. |
Budgeted depreciation expense for July: $8,400. |
| f. |
Other cash expenses budgeted for July: $105,000. |
| g. |
Accrued income taxes due in July: $80,000 (related to June). |
| h. |
Bank loan interest paid July 31: $4,620. |
| Additional Information: |
| a. |
Cost of goods sold is 44% of sales. |
| b. |
Inventory at the end of June is $56,000 and at the end of July is $224,800. |
| c. |
Salaries payable on June 30 are $35,000 and are expected to be $28,000 on July 31. |
| d. |
The equipment account balance is $1,120,000 on July 31. On June 30, the accumulated depreciation on equipment is $196,000.
|
| e. |
The $4,620 cash payment of interest represents the 1% monthly expense on a bank loan of $462,000.
|
| f. |
Income taxes payable on July 31 are $101,528, and the income tax rate applicable to the company is 35%.
|
| g. |
The only other balance sheet accounts are: Common Stock, with a balance of $396,000 on June 30; and Retained Earnings, with a balance of $750,400 on June 30.
|
|
Prepare a budgeted income statement for the month of July and a budgeted balance sheet for July 31
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exercise 20-11 Merchandising: Budgeted cash disbursements LO P1
| Hector Company reports the following: |
|
July |
August |
September |
| Sales |
$ |
19,000 |
$ |
27,000 |
$ |
31,000 |
| Purchases |
|
11,210 |
|
15,930 |
|
19,000 |
|
|
Payments for purchases are made in the month after purchase. Selling expenses are 20% of sales, administrative expenses are 10% of sales, and both are paid in the month of sale. Rent expense of $2,000 is paid monthly. Depreciation expense is $1,600 per month.
|
|
Prepare a schedule of budgeted cash disbursements for August and September.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Page 1
| 1. (TCO 1) The principle managers follow when they only investigate significant departures from the plan is commonly known as (Points : 4) |
small amounts don’t matter only materials and labor deserve attention management by exception exceptional costs yield exception results
|
| 2. (TCO 1) A company has a cost that is $2.00 per unit at a volume of 12,000 units and $2.00 per unit at a volume of 16,000 units. What type of cost is this? (Points : 4) |
Fixed Variable Sunk Incremental
|
| 3. (TCO 2) Ice Box Company manufactures refrigerators. Which of the following items is most likely to be an indirect material cost for Ice Box Company? (Points : 4) |
Factory supervisor s salary Lubricant for refrigerator door hinges Glass shelves for the refrigerators Refrigerator motors
|
| 4. (TCO 2) A form used to accumulate the cost of producing an item is called a(n) (Points : 4) |
job-cost sheet material requisition balance sheet invoice
|
| 5. (TCO 3) Equivalent units are calculated by (Points : 4) |
taking the units needed to complete the beginning inventory, adding units started and taking the equivalent units in ending inventory taking the units completed plus the equivalent units in ending inventory. taking the total units to account for and subtracting equivalent units in ending inventory taking units started plus units transferred out.
|
| 6. (TCO 3) The Freedom Corporation s painting department had a beginning inventory of 580 units, which had direct material costs of $22,715. During June, 9,290 units were started and costs of $1,268,085 were incurred for direct material. Ending inventory consists of 1,000 units, which are 35% complete with respect to direct material. What is the cost per equivalent unit for direct material? (Points : 4) |
$40.00 $137.00 $140.00 $159.00
|
| 7. (TCO 4) Regression analysis (Points : 4) |
uses all the available data points to estimate a cost equation can be performed by many spreadsheet programs provides an equation that can be used to estimate total costs at different levels all of the above
|
| 8. (TCO 4) The number of units that must be sold to exactly cover its fixed and variable costs is the (Points : 4) |
contribution margin break-even point relevant range margin of safety
|
| 9. (TCO 5) Which of the following is treated as a product cost in full costing? (Points : 4) |
Sales commissions Administrative salaries Factory supervisor Security at corporate headquarters
|
| 10. (TCO 5) Which of the following is not true when units sold exceed units produced? (Points : 4) |
Full costing and variable costing will yield the same net income. Full costing will assign some fixed manufacturing costs to the units in ending inventory. Net income will be higher under variable costing than under full costing. Inventory levels will decrease.
|
| 11. (TCO 6) Cost-plus contracts are common in which of the following industries? (Points : 4) |
Manufactured home builders Soft drink bottlers Defense contractors Newspaper publishers
|
| 12. (TCO 6) The traditional approach to cost allocation (Points : 4) |
tends to over-cost high volume core products. usually requires more cost pools than ABC. attempts to identify the activities that cause costs. produces more accurate costs than any other method.
|
| 13. (TCO 7) Which of the following is not a term used to describe the additional costs incurred as a result of selecting one decision over another? (Points : 4) |
Differential costs
Sunk costs
Relevant costs
Incremental costs
Page 2
| 1. (TCO 7) The value of benefits foregone by selecting one alternative over another is a(n) (Points : 4) |
sunk cost incremental benefit differential revenue opportunity cost
|
| 2. (TCO 8) Which of the following statements about price, demand and profit is most generally true? (Points : 4) |
As price increases, demand increases As demand increases, prices increase As prices increase, demand decreases As price increases, profits decrease
|
| 3. (TCO 8) Which of the following should be true in order for a company to accept a special order? (Points : 4) |
Variable costs are less than fixed costs Incremental revenues exceed incremental costs Opportunity costs are zero The order is for a current customer
|
| 4. (TCO 9) Present value techniques (Points : 4) |
ignore cash flows that will occur more than ten years in the future. are a way of converting future dollars into equivalent current dollars. provide more conservative results than similar time value of money computations. treat dollars received today the same as dollars received in the future.
|
| 5. (TCO 9) The internal rate of return (Points : 4) |
takes into account the time value of money. is the rate of return that equates the present value of future cash flows to the initial investment. both A and B neither A nor B
|
| 6. (TCO 10) Which of the following is not a reason that actual results may deviate from planned performance? (Points : 4) |
A bottom-up approach to budgeting was used. Managers have done a particularly good or particularly poor job of managing operations. Conditions have changed since the budget was developed. The budget was poorly conceived and constructed.
|
| 7. (TCO 10) The cash budget alerts management to all of the following except? (Points : 4) |
Stockouts will cause customer dissatisfaction The cash balance will be very low Excess cash will be available for investment Significant capital acquisitions are planned
|
| 8. (TCO 10) The standard cost is (Points : 4) |
same as actual cost the cost that should have been incurred to produce an item or service useful only to manufacturing firms calculated after production is completed
|
| 9. (TCO 10) Which of the following are components of a direct labor variance? (Points : 4) |
Rate and efficiency Attainable and ideal Price and quantity Volume and controllable
|
| 10. (TCO 10) The type of center that has responsibility for generating revenue as well as controlling costs is a(n) (Points : 4) |
investment center. cost center. business center. profit center.
|
| 11. (TCO 10) Which of the following is not an advantage of decentralization for a company? (Points : 4) |
Subunit managers have better information. Subunit managers will act to benefit the organization as a whole. Subunit managers can respond quicker to changing circumstances. Subunit managers can receive training to move into top level management positions.
|
| 12. (TCO 10) The ratio that measures the return earned independently of how the firm is financed is the (Points : 4) |
return on stockholders’ equity.
price earnings ratio.
earnings per share.
return on assets.
Page 3
1. (TCO 1) Many U.S. businesses have changed their management philosophies to become more competitive. These changes include:
- Marketing strategies aimed at global markets.
- Emphasis on customer satisfaction, including focus on product quality.
- Large investments in new production technologies.
- Creation of management teams with representatives from many functional areas.
- Development of real-time business information systems.
How can managerial accounting support these changes so that businesses can compete successfully? (Points : 20)
|
2. (TCO 6) Pacific Airlines has three service departments; ticketing, baggage handling, and aircraft maintenance. Costs of these departments are allocated to two revenue producing departments, domestic and international flights. Costs for the service departments are not separated into fixed and variable and the totals are as follows:
| Ticketing |
$4,000,000 |
| Baggage handling |
$2,000,000 |
| Aircraft maintenance |
$6,000,000 |
Air miles are as follows:
| Domestic |
5,000,000 |
| International |
20,000,000 |
(a) Allocate the service department costs based on air miles. (b) Evaluate World Airlines use of air miles as a basis for allocation. Do you think the cause-and-effect relationship is strong? (c) Suggest alternative methods to allocate the service department costs. (Points : 25)
|
| 3. (TCO 10) Gina’s Boutique makes custom jewelry. One item, the guru necklace, is a best seller and sales in units for the first quarter are as follows:
January 100,000 units February 150,000 units March 180,000 units
Desired ending inventory is budgeted at 20% of next month sales.
Compute production for February.
(Points : 25)
|
4. (TCO 2) Singleton Company is trying to determine a predetermined manufacturing overhead. Estimated overhead for the upcoming year is $600,000. Budgeted machine hours are 120,000 hours, and budgeted labor hours are 15,000 hours at a rate of $20.00 per hour. Compute the predetermined overhead rate based on:
(a) Machine hours
(b) Direct labor hours
(c) Direct labor dollars
(Points : 25)
Page 4
| 1. (TCO 9) An investment of $185,575 is expected to generate returns of $65,000 per year for each of the next four years. What is the investment’s internal rate of return? (Points : 25)
|
| 2. (TCO 4) Legal Docs Inc is a legal services firm that files incorporation papers for small businesses. They charge $1,000 per application. This year’s income statement shows the following:
Sales $1,295,000 Variable Expenses $1,023,000 Contribution margin $272,000 Fixed costs $250,000 Profit $22,000
Required: (a) Compute the break-even point in units. (b) Compute the contribution margin ratio. (c) Compute the current margin of safety. (d) How many applications must the company sell to make a profit of $350,000?
(Points : 25)
|
3. (TCO 5) The following data has been taken from Air-Tite company in its first year of business.
Units produced 100,000
Units sold 80,000
Units in ending inventory 20,000
Fixed manufacturing overhead $400,000
(a) Compute the amount of fixed manufacturing overhead that would be expensed in the current year if full absorption costing is used.
(b) Compute the amount of fixed manufacturing overhead that would be expensed in the current year if variable costing is used.
(c) Compute the amount of fixed manufacturing overhead that would be included in ending inventory under full absorption costing.
(Points : 25)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On October 29, 2010, Lue Co. began operations by purchasing razors for resale. Lue uses the perpetual inventory method. The razors have a 90-day warranty that requires the company to replace any nonworking razor. When a razor is returned, the company discards it and mails a new one from Merchandise Inventory to the customer. The company’s cost per new razor is $18 and its retail selling price is $80 in both 2010 and 2011. The manufacturer has advised the company to expect warranty costs to equal 7% of dollar sales. The following transactions and events occurred.
Required
1.Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and adjustments for 2010 and 2011.
2.How much warranty expense is reported for November 2010 and for December 2010?
3.How much warranty expense is reported for January 2011?
4.What is the balance of the Estimated Warranty Liability account as of December 31, 2010?
5.What is the balance of the Estimated Warranty Liability account as of January 31, 2011?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kalifo Company manufactures a line of electric garden tools that are sold in general hardware stores. The company’s controller, Sylvia Harlow, has just received the sales forecast for the coming year for Kalifo’s three products: weeders, hedge clippers, and leaf blowers. Kalifo has experienced considerable variations in sales volumes and variable costs over the past two years, and Harlow believes the forecast should be carefully evaluated from a cost-volume-profit viewpoint. The preliminary budget information for 1996 is presented below.
|
Weeders |
Hedge Clippers |
Leaf Blowers |
| Unit Sales |
50,000 |
50,000 |
100,000 |
| Unit Selling Price |
$28.00 |
$36.00 |
$48.00 |
| Variable Manufacturing Cost/Unit |
13.00 |
12.00 |
25.00 |
| Variable Selling Cost per unit |
5.00 |
4.00 |
6.00 |
For 1996, Kalifo’s fixed factory overhead is budgeted at $2 million, and the company’s fixed selling and administrative expenses are forecast to be $600,000. Kalifo has a tax rate of 40 percent.
Required:
- Determine Kalifo Co.’s budgeted net income for 1996.
- Assuming that the sales mix remains as budgeted, determine how many units of each product Kalifo must sell in order to break even in 1996.
- Determine the total dollar sales Kalifo must sell in 1996 in order to earn an after-tax net income of $450,000.
- After preparing the original estimates, Kalifo determines that its variable manufacturing cost of leaf blowers will increase 20 percent and the variable selling cost of hedge clippers can be expected to increase $1 per unit. However, Kalifo has decided not to change the selling price of either product. In addition, Kalifo learns that its leaf blower is perceived as the best value on the market, and it can expect to sell three times as many leaf blowers as any other product. Under these circumstances, determine how many units of each product Kalifo will have to sell to break even in 1996.
- Explain the limitations of cost-volume-profit analysis that Sylvia Harlow should consider when evaluating Kalifo’s 1996 budget
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hal Smith opened Smith’s Repairs on March 1 of the current year. During March, the following transactions occurred and were recorded in the company’s books:
1. Smith invested $28,000 cash in the business.
2. Smith contributed $106,000 of equipment to the business.
3. The company paid $2,600 cash to rent office space for the month.
4. The company received $19,000 cash for repair services provided during March.
5. The company paid $6,800 for salaries for the month.
6. The company provided $3,600 of services to customers on account.
7. The company paid cash of $560 for monthly utilities.
8. The company received $3,700 cash in advance of providing repair services to a customer.
9. Smith withdrew $5,600 for his personal use from the company.
Based on this information, net income for March would be:
$12,640.
incorrect $16,340.
$7,040.
$10,740.
$16,440.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P 12-3 Securities available-for-sale; bond investment; effective interest
(Note: This problem is a variation of Problem 12-1, modified to categorize the investment as securities available-for-sale.)
Fuzzy Monkey Technologies, Inc., purchased as a long-term investment $80 million of 8% bonds, dated January 1, on January 1, 2013. Management intends to have the investment available for sale when circumstances warrant. For bonds of similar risk and maturity the market yield was 10%. The price paid for the bonds was $66 million. Interest is received semiannually on June 30 and December 31. Due to changing market conditions, the fair value of the bonds at December 31, 2013, was $70 million.
Required:
|
1.
|
|
Prepare the journal entry to record Fuzzy Monkey’s investment on January 1, 2013.
|
|
2.
|
|
Prepare the journal entry by Fuzzy Monkey to record interest on June 30, 2013 (at the effective rate).
|
|
3.
|
|
Prepare the journal entries by Fuzzy Monkey to record interest on December 31, 2013 (at the effective rate).
|
|
4.
|
|
At what amount will Fuzzy Monkey report its investment in the December 31, 2013, balance sheet? Why? Prepare any entry necessary to achieve this reporting objective.
|
|
5.
|
|
How would Fuzzy Monkey’s 2013 statement of cash flows be affected by this investment?
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P 12-1 Securities held-to-maturity; bond investment; effective interest
Fuzzy Monkey Technologies, Inc., purchased as a long-term investment $80 million of 8% bonds, dated January 1, on January 1, 2013. Management has the positive intent and ability to hold the bonds until maturity. For bonds of similar risk and maturity the market yield was 10%. The price paid for the bonds was $66 million. Interest is received semiannually on June 30 and December 31. Due to changing market conditions, the fair value of the bonds at December 31, 2013, was $70 million.
Required:
|
1.
|
|
Prepare the journal entry to record Fuzzy Monkey’s investment on January 1, 2013.
|
|
2.
|
|
Prepare the journal entry by Fuzzy Monkey to record interest on June 30, 2013 (at the effective rate).
|
|
3.
|
|
Prepare the journal entries by Fuzzy Monkey to record interest on December 31, 2013 (at the effective rate).
|
|
4.
|
|
At what amount will Fuzzy Monkey report its investment in the December 31, 2013, balance sheet? Why?
|
|
5.
|
|
How would Fuzzy Monkey’s 2013 statement of cash flows be affected by this investment?
P 12-2 Trading securities; bond investment; effective interest
[This problem is a variation of Problem 12-1, modified to categorize the investment as trading securities.]
Fuzzy Monkey Technologies, Inc., purchased as a short-term investment $80 million of 8% bonds, dated January 1, on January 1, 2013. Management intends to include the investment in a short-term, active trading portfolio. For bonds of similar risk and maturity the market yield was 10%. The price paid for the bonds was $66 million. Interest is received semiannually on June 30 and December 31. Due to changing market conditions, the fair value of the bonds at December 31, 2013, was $70 million.
Required:
|
1.
|
|
Prepare the journal entry to record Fuzzy Monkey’s investment on January 1, 2013.
|
|
2.
|
|
Prepare the journal entry by Fuzzy Monkey to record interest on June 30, 2011 (at the effective rate).
|
|
3.
|
|
Prepare the journal entries by Fuzzy Monkey to record interest on December 31, 2013 (at the effective rate).
|
|
4.
|
|
At what amount will Fuzzy Monkey report its investment in the December 31, 2013, balance sheet? Why? Prepare any entry necessary to achieve this reporting objective.
|
|
5.
|
|
How would Fuzzy Monkey’s 2013 statement of cash flows be affected by this investment?
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 1: Discussion Absorption versus Variable Costing
There are several ways a company can allocate overhead costs to products produced or services provided. Two of these methods are absorption costing and variable costing. This assignment will allow you to explore the two methods of costing and compare/contrast the different uses of each costing system.
Using the module readings and the Argosy University online library resources, research absorption and variable costing. Use your research and/or your experiences as a working professional to complete this assignment.
Respond to the following:
Explain the differences between absorption costing and variable costing.
Explain, with the help of an example, how a company could use a variable costing system, as well as an absorption costing system. You have the option of using the company you work for as an example.
Explain which method is better for the company being discussed.
Support your recommendation with references to your readings or scholarly articles.
Write your initial response in 4 5 paragraphs. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.
Assignment 1 Grading Criteria
Initial response:
Was insightful, original, accurate, and timely.
Was substantive and demonstrated advanced understanding of concepts.
Compiled/synthesized theories and concepts drawn from a variety of sources to support statements and conclusions.
16 Points
Writing:
Wrote in a clear, concise, formal, and organized manner.
Responses were error free.
Information from sources, where applicable, was paraphrased appropriately and accurately cited.
8 Points
Total: 24 Points
This assignment is due in 60 hours(July 31st at 8am
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Finlon Upholstery Inc. uses a job-order costing system to accumulate manufacturing costs. The company’s work-in-process on December 31, 2001, consisted of one job (no. 2077), which was carried on the year-end balance sheet at $156,800. There was no finished-goods inventory on this date.
Finlon applies manufacturing overhead to production on the basis of direct-labor cost. (The budgeted direct-labor cost is the company’s practical capacity, in terms of direct-labor hours multiplied by the budgeted direct-labor rate.) Budgeted totals for 2002 for direct labor and manufacturing overhead are $4,200,000 and $5,460,000, respectively. Actual results for the year are as follows:
| Actual Results |
| Direct Materials Used |
$5,600,000.00 |
| Direct Labor |
$4,350,000.00 |
| Indirect Material Used |
$65,000.00 |
| Indirect Labor |
$2,860,000.00 |
| Factory Depreciation |
$1,740,000.00 |
| Factory Insurance |
$59,000.00 |
| Factory Utilities |
$830,000.00 |
| Selling and Administrative Expenses |
$2,160,000.00 |
| Total |
$17,664,000.00 |
Job no. 2077 was completed in January 2002, and there was no work in process at year-end. All jobs produced during 2002 were sold with the exception of Job no. 2143, which contained direct-material costs of $156,000 and direct-labor charges of $85,000. The company charges any under- or over-applied overhead to the cost of goods sold category.
Using the above information, do the following:
- Calculate the company s predetermined overhead application rate.
- Calculate the additions to the work-in-process inventory account for the direct material used, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.
- Calculate the finished-goods inventory for the 12/31/01 balance sheet.
- Calculate the over-applied or under-applied overhead at year-end.
- Explain if it is appropriate to include selling and administrative expenses in the cost of goods sold category.
Perform your calculations in an Excel spreadsheet and copy the calculations into a Word document.
Write a 1-page paper in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
During August, Arena Company sells $349,000 in product that has a one year warranty. Experience shows that warranty expenses average about 5% of the selling price. The warranty liability account has a balance of $11,100 before adjustment. Customers returned product for warranty repairs during the month that used $7,700 in parts for repairs. The entry to record the estimated warranty expense for the month is:
Debit Warranty Expense $17,450; credit Estimated Warranty Liability $17,450.
Debit Estimated Warranty Liability $7,700; credit Warranty Expense $7,700.
Debit Estimated Warranty Liability $17,450; credit Warranty Expense $17,450.
Debit Warranty Expense $6,350; credit Estimated Warranty Liability $6,350.
Debit Warranty Expense $14,050; credit Estimated Warranty Liability $14,050.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are making a detailed analysis of the financial statements and accounting records of two companies: Adams Company and Bar Company. They are in the same industry, and price levels have been rising steadily for several years. In the course of your investigation, you observe that the inventory value shown on the Adams company balance sheet is quite close to the current replacement cost of the merchandise on hand. However, for Bar Company, the carrying value of the inventory is far below current replacement cost.
- Discuss what method of inventory valuation is probably used by each company.
- If we assume that the two companies are identical, except for the inventory valuation method used, Discuss which company has probably been reporting higher net income in recent years and how would you know.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Write a response to the following scenario:
Chen, Inc. purchases 1,000 shares of its own previously issued $5 per common stock for $12,000. Assuming the shares are held in the treasury, what effect does this transaction have on (a) net income, (b) total assets, (c) total paid-in capital, and (d) total stockholders equity?
The treasury stock purchased in the above question was resold by Chen, Inc. for $15,000. What effect does this transaction have on (a) net income, (b) total assets, (c) total paid-in capital, and (d) total stockholders equity?
Formatyour response consistent with APA guidelines.
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I have to create a Balance Sheet with the below information for an assignment due in a few hours.
Below you will find selected information (in millions) from Coca-Cola Co. s 2012 Annual Report:
|
Income Taxes Payable
|
$471
|
|
Short-term Investments and Marketable Securities
|
8,109
|
|
Cash
|
8,442
|
|
Other non-current Liabilities
|
10,449
|
|
Common Stock
|
1,760
|
|
Receivables
|
4,812
|
|
Other Current Assets
|
2,973
|
|
Long-term Investments
|
10,448
|
|
Other Non-current Assets
|
3,585
|
|
Property, Plant and Equipment
|
23,486
|
|
Trademarks
|
6,527
|
|
Other Intangible Assets
|
20,810
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
53
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
9,010
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
8,680
|
|
Short Term Notes Payable
|
17,874
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
2,781
|
|
Other Current Liabilities
|
796
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
14,736
|
|
Paid-in-Capital in Excess of Par Value
|
11,379
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
55,038
|
|
Inventories
|
3,264
|
|
Treasury Stock
|
35,009
|
Other information taken from the Annual Report:
|
Sales Revenue for 2012
|
$48,017
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold for 2012
|
19,053
|
|
Net Income for 2012
|
9,019
|
|
Inventory Balance on 12/31/11
|
3,092
|
|
Net Accounts Receivable Balance on 12/31/11
|
4,920
|
|
Total Assets on 12/31/11
|
79,974
|
|
Equity Balance on 12/31/11
|
31,921
|
Required:
1. Using the information provided prepare a Balance Sheet. Separate the current assets from non-current assets and provide a total for each. Also separate the current liabilities from the non-current liabilities and provide a total for each.
2. Using the Balance Sheet from your answer above calculate; Current Ratio, Days in Inventory, Average Collection Period, Return on Assets Ratio, Debt to Total Assets and Return on common stockholders equity ratio. (Make sure to show all your work)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider the following scenario:
You are a senior level manager in a large company:
- List and explain the types of accounting information that are important to you and your staff when making decisions.
- Explain how your managerial accountant uses technology to develop and communicate this information throughout your large company.
Suggestions for Responding to Peer Posts
- Did he or she list different information than you for making decisions?
- In what other ways can the information he or she provided help to make decisions or achieve company goals?
- How did the strategies he or she described for developing and communicating the information differ from yours
|
Grading Criteria
|
Percentage
|
|
List and explain types of accounting information for making decisions
|
40%
|
|
Using technology to develop and communicate this information
|
40%
|
|
Response to Peer Posts
|
15%
|
|
APA citation and references (where applicable) or % will be assessed to peer posts
|
5%
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P2-20 The relationship between financial leverage and profitabilityPelican Paper, Inc., and Timberland Forest, Inc., are rivals in the manufacture of craft papers. Some financial statement values for each company follow. Use them in a ratio analysis that compares the firms financial leverage and profitability.
Item Pelican Paper, Inc. Timberland Forest, Inc.
Total assets $10,000,000 $10,000,000
Total equity (all common) 9,000,000 5,000,000
Total debt 1,000,000 5,000,000
Annual interest 100,000 500,000
Total sales $25,000,000 $25,000,000
EBIT 6,250,000 6,250,000
Earnings available for
Common stockholders 3,690,000 3,450,000
a.Calculate the following debt and coverage ratios for the two companies. Discuss their financial risk and ability to cover the costs in relation to each other.
b.Calculate the following profitability ratios for the two companies. Discuss their profitability relative to each other.
c.In what way has the larger debt of Timberland Forest made it more profitable than Pelican Paper? What are the risks that Timberland s investors undertake when they choose to purchase its stock instead of Pelican s?
P5 3Risk preferencesSharon Smith, the financial manager for Barnett Corporation, wishes to evaluate three prospective investments: X, Y, and Z. Currently, the firm earns 12% on its investments, which have a risk index of 6%. The expected return and expected risk of the investments are as follows:
Expected Expected
Investment return risk index
X 14% 7%
Y 12 8
Z 10 9
a.If Sharon wererisk-indifferent,which investments would she select? Explain why.
b.If she wererisk-averse,which investments would she select? Why?
c.If she wererisk-seeking,which investments would she select? Why?
d.Given the traditional risk preference behavior exhibited by financial managers, which investment would be preferred? Why?
P5 4Risk analysisSolar Designs is considering an investment in an expanded product line. Two possible types of expansion are being considered. After investigating the possible outcomes, the company made the estimates shown in the following table:
Expansion A Expansion B
Initial investment $12,000 $12,000
Annual rate of return
Pessimistic 16% 10%
Most likely 20% 20%
Optimistic 24% 30%
a.Determine therangeof the rates of return for each of the two projects.
b.Which project is less risky? Why?
c.If you were making the investment decision, which one would you choose? Why? What does this imply about your feelings toward risk?
d.Assume that expansion B s most likely outcome is 21% per year and that all other facts remain the same. Does this change your answer to partc?Why?
P4-10 Basic scenario analysisMurdock Paints is in the process of evaluating two mutually exclusive additions to its processing capacity. The firm s financial analysts have developed pessimistic, most likely, and optimistic estimates of the annual cash inflows associated with each project. These estimates are shown in the table on page 488.
Project A Project B
Initial investment (CF0) $8,000 $8,000
Outcome Annual cash inflows (CF)
Pessimistic $ 200 $ 900
Most likely 1,000 1,000
Optimistic 1,800 1,100
a.Determine therangeof annual cash inflows for each of the two projects.
b.Assume that the firm s cost of capital is 10% and that both projects have 20-year lives. Construct a table similar to this for the NPVs for each project. Include therangeof NPVs for each project.
c.Do partsaandbprovide consistent views of the two projects? Explain.
d.Which project do you recommend? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Discussion Questions
|
12-1.
|
What are the important administrative considerations in the capital budgeting process?
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
12-3.
|
What are the weaknesses of the payback method?
|
|
|
|
|
12-5.
|
What does the term mutually exclusive investments mean?
|
|
|
|
|
12-6.
|
How does the modified internal rate of return include concepts from both the traditional internal rate of return and the net present value methods?
|
|
12-7.
|
If a corporation has projects that will earn more than the cost of capital, should it ration capital?
|
|
|
|
|
12-8.
|
What is the net present value profile? What three points should be determined to graph the profile?
|
|
|
|
|
12-9.
|
How does an asset’s ADR (asset depreciation range) relate to its MACRS category?
|
|
|
|
Chapter 12
Problems
1. Assume a corporation has earnings before depreciation and taxes of $90,000, depreciation of $40,000, and that it is in a 30 percent tax bracket. Compute its cash flow using the format below.
Earnings before depreciation and taxes _____
Depreciation _____
Earnings before taxes _____
Taxes @ 30% _____
Earnings after taxes _____
Depreciation _____
Cash flow _____
2. a. In problem 1, how much would cash flow be if there were only $10,000 in depreciation? All other factors are the same.
b. How much cash flow is lost due to the reduced depreciation between problems
1 and 2a?
3. Assume a firm has earnings before depreciation and taxes of $200,000 and no depreciation. It is in a 40 percent tax bracket.
a. Compute its cash flow.
b. Assume it has $200,000 in depreciation. Recompute its cash flow.
c. How large a cash flow benefit did the depreciation provide?
4. Bob Cole, the president of a New York Stock Exchange-listed firm, is very short term oriented and interested in the immediate consequences of his decisions. Assume a project that will provide an increase of $3 million in cash flow because of favorable tax consequences, but carries a three-cent decline in earning per share because of a write-off against first quarter earnings. What decision might Mr. Cole make?
5. Assume a $100,000 investment and the following cash flows for two alternatives.
|
Year
|
Investment A
|
Investment B
|
|
1
|
$30,000
|
$40,000
|
|
2
|
50,000
|
30,000
|
|
3
|
20,000
|
15,000
|
|
4
|
60,000
|
15,000
|
|
5
|
|
50,000
|
Which of the two alternatives would you select under the payback method?
6. Assume a $40,000 investment and the following cash flows for two alternatives.
|
Year
|
Investment X
|
Investment Y
|
|
1
|
$ 6,000
|
$15,000
|
|
2
|
8,000
|
20,000
|
|
3
|
9,000
|
10,000
|
|
4
|
17,000
|
|
|
5
|
20,000
|
|
Which of the alternatives would you select under the payback method?
7. Referring back to problem 6, if the inflow in the fifth year for Investment X were $20,000,000 instead of $20,000, would your answer change under the payback method?
8. The Short-Line Railroad is considering a $100,000 investment in either of two companies. The cash flows are as follows:
|
Year
|
Electric Co.
|
Water Works
|
|
1………………
|
$70,000
|
$15,000
|
|
2………………
|
15,000
|
15,000
|
|
3………………
|
15,000
|
70,000
|
|
4-10………….
|
10,000
|
10,000
|
a. Using the payback method, what will the decision be?
b. Explain why the answer in part a can be misleading.
9. X-treme Vitamin Company is considering two investments, both of which cost $10,000. The cash flows are as follows:
|
Year
|
Project A
|
Project B
|
|
1……………….
|
$12,000
|
$10,000
|
|
2……………….
|
8,000
|
6,000
|
|
3……………….
|
6,000
|
16,000
|
a. Which of the two projects should be chosen based on the payback method?
b. Which of the two projects should be chosen based on the net present value method? Assume a cost of capital of 10 percent.
c. Should a firm normally have more confidence in answer a or answer b?
10. You buy a new piece of equipment for $16,980, and you receive a cash inflow of $3,000 per year for 12 years. What is the internal rate of return?
11. Warner Business Products is considering the purchase of a new machine at a cost of $11,070. The machine will provide $2,000 per year in cash flow for eight years. Warner s cost of capital is 13 percent. Using the internal rate of return method, evaluate this project and indicate whether it should be undertaken.
12. Elgin Restaurant Supplies is analyzing the purchase of manufacturing equipment that will cost $20,000. The annual cash inflows for the next three years will be:
|
Year
|
Cash Flow
|
|
1…………….
|
$10,000
|
|
2…………….
|
9,000
|
|
3…………….
|
6,500
|
a. Determine the internal rate of return using interpolation.
b. With a cost of capital of 12 percent, should the machine be purchased?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Corrieten Company purchased equipment and incurred these costs:
Cash price $24,000
Sales taxes 1,200
Insurance during transit 200
Installation and testing 400
Total costs $25,800
What amount should be recorded as the cost of the equipment?
A. $24,000.
B. $25,200.
C. $25,400.
D. $25,800.
2. Harrington Corporation recently leased a number of trucks from Andre Corporation. In inspecting the books of Harrington Corporation, you notice that the trucks have not been recorded as assets on its balance sheet. From this you can conclude that Harrington is accounting for this transaction as a(n):
A. operating lease.
B. capital lease.
C. purchase.
D. None of the above.
3. Depreciation is a process of:
A. valuation.
B. cost allocation.
C. cash accumulation.
D. appraisal.
4. Cuso Company purchased equipment on January 1, 2006, at a total invoice cost of $400,000. The equipment has an estimated salvage value of $10,000 and an estimated useful life of 5 years. What is the amount of accumulated depreciation at December 31, 2007, if the straight-line method of depreciation is used?
A. $80,000.
B. $160,000.
C. $78,000.
D. $156,000.
5. A company would minimize its depreciation expense in the first year of owning an asset if it used:
A. a high estimated life, a high salvage value, and declining-balance depreciation.
B. a low estimated life, a high salvage value, and straight-line depreciation.
C. a high estimated life, a high salvage value, and straight-line depreciation.
D. a low estimated life, a low salvage value, and declining-balance depreciation.
6. When there is a change in estimated depreciation:
A. previous depreciation should be corrected.
B. current and future years’ depreciation should be revised.
C. only future years’ depreciation should be revised.
D. None of the above.
7. Additions to plant assets:
A. are revenue expenditures.
B. increase a Repair Expense account.
C. increase a Purchases account.
D. are capital expenditures.
8. Which of the following measures provides an indication of how efficient a company is in employing its assets?
A. Current ratio.
B. Profit margin ratio.
C. Debt to total assets ratio.
D. Asset turnover ratio.
9. Pierce Company incurred $150,000 of research and development costs in its laboratory to develop a new product. It spent $20,000 in legal fees for a patent granted on January 2, 2007. On July 31, 2007, Pierce paid $15,000 for legal fees in a successful defense of the patent. What is the total amount that should be debited to Patents through July 31, 2007?
A. $150,000.
B. $35,000.
C. $185,000.
D. Some other amount.
10. Indicate which one of these statements is true.
A. Since intangible assets lack physical substance, they need to be disclosed only in the notes to the financial statements.
B. Goodwill should be reported as a contra account in the stockholders’ equity section.
C. Totals of major classes of assets can be shown in the balance sheet, with asset details disclosed in the notes to the financial statements.
D. Intangible assets are typically combined with plant assets and natural resources and then shown in the property, plant, and equipment section.
11. If a company reports goodwill as an intangible asset on its books, what is the one thing you know with certainty?
A. The company is a valuable company worth investing in.
B. The company has a well-established brand name.
C. The company purchased another company.
D. The goodwill will generate a lot of positive business for the company for many years to come.
12. Kant Enterprises purchased a truck for $11,000 on January 1, 2006. The truck will have an estimated salvage value of $1,000 at the end of 5 years. If you use the units-of-activity method, the balance in accumulated depreciation at December 31, 2007, can be computed by the following formula:
A. ($11,000/Total estimated activity) x Units of activity for 2007.
B. ($10,000/Total estimated activity) x Units of activity for 2007.
C. ($11,000/Total estimated activity) x Units of activity for 2006 and 2007.
D. ($10,000/Total estimated activity) x Units of activity for 2006 and 2007.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider the following scenario:
The Ski Pro Corporation, which produces and sells to wholesalers a highly successful line of water skis, has decided to diversify to stabilize sales throughout the year. The company is considering the production of cross-country skis.
After considerable research, a cross-country ski line has been developed. Because of the conservative nature of the company management, however, Minnetonka s president has decided to introduce only one type of the new ski for this coming winter. If the product is a success, further expansion in future years will be initiated.
The ski selected is a mass-market ski with a special binding. It will be sold to wholesalers for $80 per pair. Because of availability capacity, no additional fixed charges will be incurred to produce the skis. A $100,000 fixed charge will be absorbed by the skis, however, to allocate a fair share of the company s present fixed costs to the new product.
Using the estimated sales and production of 10,000 pairs of skis as the expected volume, the accounting department has developed the following cost per pair of skis and bindings:
Direct Labor: $35
Direct Material: $30
Total Overhead: $15
Total: $80
Ski Pro has approached a subcontractor to discuss the possibility of purchasing the bindings. The purchase price of the bindings from the subcontractor would be $5.25 per binding, or $10.50 per pair. If the Ski Pro Corporation accepts the purchase proposal, it is predicted that direct-labor and variable-overhead costs would be reduced by 10% and direct-material costs would be reduced by 20%.
Write a 1 2 page paper, and create a spreadsheet that answers the following questions:
- Should the Ski Pro Corporation make or buy the bindings? Show calculations to support your answer.
- What would be the maximum purchase price acceptable to the Ski Pro Corporation for the bindings? Support your answer with an appropriate explanation.
- Instead of sales of 10,000 pairs of skis, revised estimates show sales volume at 12,500 pairs. At this new volume, additional equipment, at an annual rental of $10,000 must be acquired to manufacture the bindings. This incremental cost would be the only additional fixed cost required even if sales increased to 30,000 pairs. (This 30,000 level is the goal for the third year of production.) Under these circumstances, should the Ski Pro Corporation make or buy the bindings? Show calculations to support your answer.
- What qualitative factors (that is, issues with vendors, customers, or within the product itself) should the Ski Pro Corporation consider in determining whether they should make or buy the bindings?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider the following scenario:
Your CFO, in her initial work, needs to decide whether to set up a job order costing system or a process type costing system. She has asked you to make a recommendation based on the following information. You plan to meet with her in the morning. Write 4 6 paragraphs in response to the following, and provide support for your recommendation:
- Compare and contrast job order costing to process costing methods.
- What kind of system works best in what kinds of companies?
- What kind of system makes sense for your company, given that you plan to start with only one version of your product but at some point in the future may offer a variety of options?
Recommendations for Responding to Peer Posts
- Review a peer s post that made a recommendation for the costing method that you did not. Did any of the points he or she made make you reconsider your position as to which costing method would be best
- If so, what points made you change your mind?
- If not, what additional arguments can you make that would directly refute the points that he or she made.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Andre has asked you to evaluate his business, Andre s Hair Styling. Andre has five barbers working for him. (Andre is not one of them.) Each barber is paid $9.90 per hour and works a 40-hour week and a 50-week year, regardless of the number of haircuts. Rent and other fixed expenses are $1,750 per month. Hair shampoo used on all clients is .40 per client. Assume that the only service performed is the giving of haircuts (including shampoo), the unit price of which is $12. Andre has asked you to find the following information.
- Find the contribution margin per haircut. Assume that the barbers’ compensation is a fixed cost. Show calculations to support your answer.
- Determine the annual break-even point, in number of haircuts. Support your answer with an appropriate explanation. Show calculations to support your answer.
- What will be the operating income if 20,000 haircuts are performed? Show calculations to support your answer.
- Suppose Andre revises the compensation method. The barbers will receive $4 per hour plus $6 for each haircut. What is the new contribution margin per haircut? What is the annual break-even point (in number of haircuts)? Show calculations to support your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 2: Manufacturing Overhead
Borealis Manufacturing has just completed a major change in its quality control (QC) process. Previously, products had been reviewed by QC inspectors at the end of each major process, and the company’s 10 QC inspectors were charged to the operation or job as direct labor. In an effort to improve efficiency and quality, a computerized video QC system was purchased for $250,000. The system consists of a minicomputer, fifteen video cameras, and other peripheral hardware and software. The new system uses cameras stationed by QC engineers at key points in the production process. Each time an operation changes or there is a new operation, the cameras are moved, and a new master picture is loaded into the computer by a QC engineer. The camera takes pictures of the units in process, and the computer compares them to the picture of a good unit. Any differences are sent to a QC engineer, who removes the bad units and discusses the flaws with the production supervisors. The new system has replaced the 10 QC inspectors with two QC engineers.
The operating costs of the new QC system, including the salaries of the QC engineers, have been included as factory overhead in calculating the company’s plant-wide manufacturing-overhead rate, which is based on direct-labor dollars. The company’s president is confused. His vice president of production has told him how efficient the new system is. Yet there is a large increase in the overhead rate. The computation of the rate before and after automation is as follows:
|
Before |
After |
| Budgeted Manufacturing Overhead |
1,900,000 |
2,100,000 |
| Budgeted Direct Labor Cost |
1,000,000 |
700,000 |
| Budgeted Overhead Rate |
190% |
300% |
Three hundred percent, lamented the president. How can we compete with such a high overhead rate
Research manufacturing overhead.
Review the situation. Complete the following:
- Define manufacturing overhead, and:
- Cite three examples of typical costs that would be included in manufacturing overhead.
- Explain why companies develop predetermined overhead rates.
- Explain why the increase in the overhead rate should not have a negative financial impact on Borealis Manufacturing.
- Explain how Borealis Manufacturing could change its overhead application system to eliminate confusion over product costs.
- Describe how an activity-based costing system might benefit Borealis Manufacturing.
Write a 3 4-pages paper in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acc349 Week 5 (BE9-6, BE9-8, E8-11, E11-6)
BE9-6
For Eckert Inc., variable manufacturing overhead costs are expected to be $20,000 in the first quarter of 2011, with $4,000 increments in each of the remaining three quarters. Fixed overhead costs are estimated to be $35,000 in each quarter.
Prepare the manufacturing overhead budget by quarters and in total for the year.
BE9-8
Paige Company has completed all of its operating budgets. The sales budget for the year shows 50,000 units and total sales of $2,000,000. The total unit cost of making one unit of sales is $22. Selling and administrative expenses are expected to be $300,000. Income taxes are estimated to be $150,000.
Prepare a budgeted income statement for the year ending December 31, 2011.
E8-11 (a,b)
Cawley Company’s Small Motor Division manufactures a number of small motors used in household and office appliances. The Household Division of Cawley then assembles and packages such items as blenders and juicers. Both divisions are free to buy and sell any of their components internally or externally. The following costs relate to small motor LN233 on a per unit basis.
Fixed cost per unit 5
Variable cost per unit 8
Selling price per unit 30
Instructions
a. Assuming that the Small Motor Division has excess capacity, compute the minimum acceptable price for the transfer of small motor LN233 to the Household Division.
b. Assuming that the Small Motor Division does not have excess capacity, compute the minimum acceptable price for the transfer of the small motor to the Household Division.
E11-6
Kendra Company’s standard labor cost of producing one unit of Product DD is 4 hours at the rate of $12.00 per hour. During August, 40,800 hours of labor are incurred at a cost of $12.10 per hour to produce 10,000 units of Product DD.
Instructions
a. Compute the total labor variance.
b. Compute the labor price and quantity variances.
c. Repeat (b), assuming the standard is 4.2 hours of direct labor at $12.25 per hour.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
FINAL EXAM: ACC/400
S. Duhn
The condensed financial statements of Westward Corporation for 2006 are presented below.
Westward Corporation Westward Corporation
Balance Sheet Income Statement
December 31, 2006 For the Year Ended December 31, 2006
Assets Revenues $2,000,000
Current assets Expenses
Cash and temporary Cost of goods sold 1,080,000
investments $ 30,000 Selling and administrative
Accounts receivable 70,000 expenses 495,000
Inventories 120,000 Interest expense 30,000
Total current assets 220,000 Total expenses 1,605,000
Property, plant, and Income before income taxes 395,000
equipment (net) 780,000 Income tax expense 140,000
Total assets $1,000,000 Net income $ 255,000
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Current liabilities $ 80,000
Long-term liabilities 300,000
Common stockholders’ equity 620,000
Total liabilities and
stockholders’ equity $1,000,000
Westward Corporation Westward Corporation
Balance Sheet Income Statement
December 31, 2005 For the Year Ended December 31, 2005
Assets Revenues $2,500,000
Current assets Expenses
Cash and temporary Cost of goods sold 1,750,000
investments $ 40,000 Selling and administrative
Accounts receivable 90,000 expenses 500,000
Inventories 150,000 Interest expense 30,000
Total current assets 280,000 Total expenses 2,280,000
Property, plant, and Income before income taxes 220,000
equipment (net) 800,000 Income tax expense 77,000
Total assets $1,080,000 Net income $ 143,000
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Current liabilities $ 140,000
Long-term liabilities 320,000
Common stockholders’ equity 620,000
Total liabilities and
stockholders’ equity $1,080,000
Additional data as of December 31, 2004: Inventory = $100,000; Total assets = $900,000; Common stockholders’ equity = $540,000.
Instructions
- Compute the following listed ratios for 2006 and 2005 showing supporting calculations.
(a) Current ratio = ___________________________________________________________.
(b) Debt to total assets = _____________________________________________________.
(c) Times interest earned = ___________________________________________________.
(d) Inventory turnover = ______________________________________________________.
(e) Profit margin ratio = ______________________________________________________.
(f) Return on common stockholders’ equity = ____________________________________.
(g) Return on assets = _______________________________________________________.
- Perform horizontal and vertical analysis on Westward both income statement and balance sheet, show your results.
- Assess the financial performance of Westward, given the analysis tools used above.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
FINAL EXAM: ACC/400
S. Duhn
The condensed financial statements of Westward Corporation for 2006 are presented below.
Westward Corporation Westward Corporation
Balance Sheet Income Statement
December 31, 2006 For the Year Ended December 31, 2006
Assets Revenues $2,000,000
Current assets Expenses
Cash and temporary Cost of goods sold 1,080,000
investments $ 30,000 Selling and administrative
Accounts receivable 70,000 expenses 495,000
Inventories 120,000 Interest expense 30,000
Total current assets 220,000 Total expenses 1,605,000
Property, plant, and Income before income taxes 395,000
equipment (net) 780,000 Income tax expense 140,000
Total assets $1,000,000 Net income $ 255,000
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Current liabilities $ 80,000
Long-term liabilities 300,000
Common stockholders’ equity 620,000
Total liabilities and
stockholders’ equity $1,000,000
Westward Corporation Westward Corporation
Balance Sheet Income Statement
December 31, 2005 For the Year Ended December 31, 2005
Assets Revenues $2,500,000
Current assets Expenses
Cash and temporary Cost of goods sold 1,750,000
investments $ 40,000 Selling and administrative
Accounts receivable 90,000 expenses 500,000
Inventories 150,000 Interest expense 30,000
Total current assets 280,000 Total expenses 2,280,000
Property, plant, and Income before income taxes 220,000
equipment (net) 800,000 Income tax expense 77,000
Total assets $1,080,000 Net income $ 143,000
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Current liabilities $ 140,000
Long-term liabilities 320,000
Common stockholders’ equity 620,000
Total liabilities and
stockholders’ equity $1,080,000
Additional data as of December 31, 2004: Inventory = $100,000; Total assets = $900,000; Common stockholders’ equity = $540,000.
Instructions
- Compute the following listed ratios for 2006 and 2005 showing supporting calculations.
(a) Current ratio = ___________________________________________________________.
(b) Debt to total assets = _____________________________________________________.
(c) Times interest earned = ___________________________________________________.
(d) Inventory turnover = ______________________________________________________.
(e) Profit margin ratio = ______________________________________________________.
(f) Return on common stockholders’ equity = ____________________________________.
(g) Return on assets = _______________________________________________________.
- Perform horizontal and vertical analysis on Westward both income statement and balance sheet, show your results.
- Assess the financial performance of Westward, given the analysis tools used above.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exercise 5-5
Bruno Company has decided to expand its operations. The bookkeeper recently completed the balance sheet presented below in order to obtain additional funds for expansion.
BRUNO COMPANY
BALANCE SHEET
DECEMBER 31, 2012
Current assets
Cash $263,380
Accounts receivable (net) 343,380
Inventories (lower-of-average-cost-or-market) 404,380
Equity investments (trading) at cost (fair value $121,260) 141,260
Property, plant, and equipment
Buildings (net) 571,260
Equipment (net) 161,260
Land held for future use 176,260
Intangible assets
Goodwill 83,380
Cash surrender value of life insurance 93,380
Prepaid expenses 15,380
Current liabilities
Accounts payable 136,260
Notes payable (due next year) 128,380
Pension obligation 83,260
Rent payable 52,380
Premium on bonds payable 56,380
Long-term liabilities
Bonds payable 501,260
Stockholders equity
Common stock, $1.00 par, authorized 400,000 shares, issued 293,380 293,380
Additional paid-in capital 183,380
Retained earnings ?
Prepare a revised balance sheet given the available information. Assume that the accumulated depreciation balance for the buildings is $163,380 and for the office equipment, $108,380. The allowance for doubtful accounts has a balance of $20,380. The pension obligation is considered a long-term liability. (List current assets in order of liquidity. List property plant and equipment in order of buildings and equipment.)
Exercise 5-12
Presented below is the trial balance of Vivaldi Corporation at December 31, 2012.
Debit
Credit
Cash
$200,380
Sales
$7,902,370
Debt Investments (trading) (cost, $145,000)
155,370
Cost of Goods Sold
4,802,370
Debt Investments (long-term)
302,380
Equity Investments (long-term)
280,380
Notes Payable (short-term)
92,370
Accounts Payable
457,370
Selling Expenses
2,002,370
Investment Revenue
64,880
Land
260,000
Buildings
1,043,380
Dividends Payable
139,380
Accrued Liabilities
98,370
Accounts Receivable
437,370
Accumulated Depreciation Buildings
352,000
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
27,370
Administrative Expenses
901,880
Interest Expense
212,880
Inventory
600,380
Extraordinary Gain
81,880
Notes Payable (long-term)
903,380
Equipment
602,370
Bonds Payable
1,003,380
Accumulated Depreciation Equipment
60,000
Franchises
160,000
Common Stock ($5 par)
1,002,370
Treasury Stock
193,370
Patents
195,000
Retained Earnings
81,380
Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par
83,380
$12,349,880
$12,349,880
Calculate ending retained earnings and prepare a balance sheet at December 31, 2012, for Vivaldi Corporation. Ignore income taxes. (List current assets in order of liquidity. List property plant and equipment in order of land, building and equipment.)
Exercise 5-15
Presented below is a condensed version of the comparative balance sheets for Sondergaard Corporation for the last two years at December 31.
2012
2011
Cash $307,092 $152,568
Accounts receivable 352,080 361,860
Investments 101,712 144,744
Equipment 582,888 469,440
Less: Accumulated depreciation equipment (207,336 ) (174,084 )
Current liabilities 262,104 295,356
Capital stock 312,960 312,960
Retained earnings 561,372 346,212
Additional information:
Investments were sold at a loss (not extraordinary) of $13,692; no equipment was sold; cash dividends paid were $97,800; and net income was $312,960.
(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2012 for Sondergaard Corporation. (Show amounts that decrease cash flow with either a – sign e.g. -15,000 or in parenthesis e.g. (15,000).)
Exercise 24-4
As loan analyst for Madison Bank, you have been presented the following information.
Plunkett Co.
Herring Co.
Assets
Cash $126,600 $323,600
Receivables 226,500 303,100
Inventories 561,500 518,600
Total current assets 914,600 1,145,300
Other assets 494,000 616,400
Total assets $1,408,600 $1,761,700
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
Current liabilities $308,200 $350,700
Long-term liabilities 400,500 494,000
Capital stock and retained earnings 699,900 917,000
Total liabilities and stockholders equity $1,408,600 $1,761,700
Annual sales $948,900 $1,514,800
Rate of gross profit on sales 30 % 35 %
Each of these companies has requested a loan of $50,680 for 6 months with no collateral offered. In as much as your bank has reached its quota for loans of this type, only one of these requests is to be granted.
Compute the various ratios for each company. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.25.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1
The common stock of Warner Inc. is currently selling at $117 per share. The directors wish to reduce the share price and increase share volume prior to a new issue. The per share par value is $8; book value is $73 per share. 6.01 million shares are issued and outstanding.
Prepare the necessary journal entries assuming the following. (If no entry is required, select “No Entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts.Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
|
(a)
|
|
The board votes a 2-for-1 stock split.
|
|
(b)
|
|
The board votes a 100% stock dividend.
|
Question 2
On January 5, 2012, Phelps Corporation received a charter granting the right to issue 5,400 shares of $103 par value, 6% cumulative and nonparticipating preferred stock, and 52,700 shares of $10 par value common stock. It then completed these transactions.
|
Jan. 11
|
|
Issued 21,720 shares of common stock at $18 per share.
|
|
Feb. 1
|
|
Issued to Sanchez Corp. 4,500 shares of preferred stock for the following assets: equipment with a fair value of $59,390; a factory building with a fair value of $172,900; and land with an appraised value of $326,300.
|
|
July 29
|
|
Purchased 1,850 shares of common stock at $19 per share. (Use cost method.)
|
|
Aug. 10
|
|
Sold the 1,850 treasury shares at $14 per share.
|
|
Dec. 31
|
|
Declared a $0.30 per share cash dividend on the common stock and declared the preferred dividend.
|
|
Dec. 31
|
|
Closed the Income Summary account. There was a $183,440 net income.
|
(a) Record the journal entries for the transactions listed above.(Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125. If no entry is required, select “No Entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually. Record entries in the order displayed in the problem statement.)
(b) Prepare the stockholders equity section of Phelps Corporation s balance sheet as of December 31, 2012.(For preferred stock, common stock and treasury stock enter the account name only and do not provide the descriptive information provided in the question.)
Question 3
On January 1, 2012, Bailey Industries had stock outstanding as follows.
|
6% Cumulative preferred stock, $119 par value, issued and outstanding 10,800 shares
|
|
$1,285,200
|
|
Common stock, $10 par value, issued and outstanding 241,200 shares
|
|
2,412,000
|
To acquire the net assets of three smaller companies, Bailey authorized the issuance of an additional 176,400 common shares. The acquisitions took place as shown below.
|
Date of Acquisition
|
|
Shares Issued
|
|
Company A April 1, 2012
|
|
63,600
|
|
Company B July 1, 2012
|
|
85,200
|
|
Company C October 1, 2012
|
|
27,600
|
On May 14, 2012, Bailey realized a $106,800 (before taxes) insurance gain on the expropriation of investments originally purchased in 2000.
On December 31, 2012, Bailey recorded net income of $321,600 before tax and exclusive of the gain.
Assuming a 43% tax rate, compute the earnings per share data that should appear on the financial statements of Bailey Industries as of December 31, 2012. Assume that the expropriation is extraordinary. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. $2.55.)
Question 4
Charles Austin of the controller s office of Thompson Corporation was given the assignment of determining the basic and diluted earnings per share values for the year ending December 31, 2013. Austin has compiled the information listed below.
|
1.
|
|
The company is authorized to issue 8,400,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. As of December 31, 2012, 2,100,000 shares had been issued and were outstanding.
|
|
2.
|
|
The per share market prices of the common stock on selected dates were as follows.
|
|
|
Price per Share
|
|
July 1, 2012
|
|
$20
|
|
January 1, 2013
|
|
21
|
|
April 1, 2013
|
|
25
|
|
July 1, 2013
|
|
11
|
|
August 1, 2013
|
|
10.5
|
|
November 1, 2013
|
|
9
|
|
December 31, 2013
|
|
10
|
|
3.
|
|
A total of 728,400 shares of an authorized 1,353,600 shares of convertible preferred stock had been issued on July 1, 2012. The stock was issued at its par value of $25, and it has a cumulative dividend of $3 per share. The stock is convertible into common stock at the rate of one share of convertible preferred for one share of common. The rate of conversion is to be automatically adjusted for stock splits and stock dividends. Dividends are paid quarterly on September 30, December 31, March 31, and June 30.
|
|
4.
|
|
Thompson Corporation is subject to a 40% income tax rate.
|
|
5.
|
|
The after-tax net income for the year ended December 31, 2013, was $11,640,000.
|
The following specific activities took place during 2013.
|
1.
|
|
January 1 A 5% common stock dividend was issued. The dividend had been declared on December 1, 2012, to all stockholders of record on December 29, 2012.
|
|
2.
|
|
April 1 A total of 391,200 shares of the $3 convertible preferred stock was converted into common stock. The company issued new common stock and retired the preferred stock. This was the only conversion of the preferred stock during 2013.
|
|
3.
|
|
July 1 A 2-for-1 split of the common stock became effective on this date. The board of directors had authorized the split on June 1.
|
|
4.
|
|
August 1 A total of 312,000 shares of common stock were issued to acquire a factory building.
|
|
5.
|
|
November 1 A total of 33,900 shares of common stock were purchased on the open market at $9 per share. These shares were to be held as treasury stock and were still in the treasury as of December 31, 2013.
|
|
6.
|
|
Common stock cash dividends Cash dividends to common stockholders were declared and paid as follows.
|
|
|
April 15 $0.30 per share
|
|
|
October 15 $0.20 per share
|
|
7.
|
|
Preferred stock cash dividends Cash dividends to preferred stockholders were declared and paid as scheduled.
|
(a) Determine the number of shares used to compute basic earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2013.(Round answer to 0 decimal places, e.g. 1,500.)
|
Number of shares to compute basic earnings per share
|
|
|
(b)Determine the number of shares used to compute diluted earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2013.(Round answer to 0 decimal places, e.g. 1,500.)
|
Number of shares to compute diluted earnings per share
|
|
|
(c)Compute the adjusted net income to be used as the numerator in the basic earnings per share calculation for the year ended December 31, 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. (TCO A, B, C) External users want answers to all of the following questions except:
Is the company earning satisfactory income?
Will the company be able to pay its debts as they come due?
Did the company use a budget to plan its expenses?
How does the company compare in profitability with competitors?
2. (TCO C) Issuing shares of stock in exchange for cash is an example of a(n):
delivering activity.
investing activity.
financing activity.
operating activity.
3. (TCO C) Which activities involve putting the resources of the business into action to generate a profit?
Delivering
Financing
Investing
Operating
4. (TCO A) The cost of assets consumed or services used is also known as:
a revenue.
an expense.
a liability.
an asset.
5. (TCO C) Edwards Company recorded the following cash transactions for the year:
Paid $45,000 for salaries.
Paid $20,000 to purchase office equipment.
Paid $5,000 for utilities.
Paid $2,000 in dividends.
Collected $75,000 from customers.
What was Edwards’ net cash provided by operating activities
$25,000
$5,000
$30,000
$23,000
6. (TCO A) In a classified balance sheet, assets are usually classified as:
current assets; long-term assets; property, plant, and equipment; and tangible assets.
current assets; long-term investments; property, plant, and equipment; and common stocks.
current assets; long-term investments; and tangible assets.
current assets; long-term investments; property, plant, and equipment; and intangible assets..
7. (TCO A) Which of the following is not considered an asset
Equipment
Dividends
Accounts receivable
Inventory
8. (TCO A) These are selected account balances on December 31, 2010.
-Land (location of the corporation’s office building) $50,000
-Land (held for future use) 75,000
-Corporate Office Building 300,000
-Inventory 100,000
-Equipment 225,000
-Office Furniture 50,000
-Accumulated Depreciation 150,000
What is the total NET amount of property, plant, and equipment that will appear on the balance sheet
$650,000
$550,000
$475,000
$800,000
9. (TCO B) For 2010, Mossland Corporation reported net income of $28,000; net sales $400,000; and average share outstanding 6,000. There were no preferred stock dividends. What was the 2010 earnings per share?
$4.67
$0.25
$66.67
$14.86
10. (TCO B) Morten Corporation had beginning retained earnings of $764,000 and ending retained earnings of $833,000. During the year they issued common stock totaling $47,000. There were no dividends issued. What was their net income for the year? (Points : 3)
$69,000
$22,000
$116,000
$91,000
11. (TCO D) Money collected from customers before the work is done is treated as:
prepaid expenses
accrued revenues
unearned revenues
accrued expenses
12. (TCO D) Which one of the following is not a part of an account
Credit side
Trial balance
Debit side
Title
13. (TCO D) Which of the following describes the classification and normal balance of the retained earnings account
Asset, debit
Stockholders’ equity, credit
Revenues, credit
Expense, debit
14. (TCO D) A debit is the normal balance for which account listed below?
Furniture
Accounts payable
Rent revenue
Capital stock issued
15. (TCO D) Which pair of accounts follows the rules of debit and credit in relation to increases and decreases in the same manner
Dividends payable and rent expense
Repair expense and notes payable
Prepaid insurance and advertising expense
Service revenues and equipment
1. (TCO E) One of the accounting concepts upon which adjustments for prepayments and accruals are based is:
matching.
cost.
monetary unit.
economic entity.
2. (TCO E) In a service-type business, revenue is considered earned:
at the end of the month.
at the end of the year.
when the service is performed.
when cash is received.
3. (TCO E) On April 1, 2010, M Corporation paid $48,000 cash for equipment that will be used in business operations. The equipment will be used for four years and will have no residual value. M records depreciation expense of $9,000 for the calendar year ending December 31, 2010. Which accounting principle has been violated
Revenue recognition principle
No principle has been violated because M has correctly matched the expense for using the equipment to the period during which it generated revenue.
no violation
Matching principle because the cash was paid in 2007 and should be expensed in 2007.
Cost principle
4. (TCO E) The following is selected information from M Corporation for the fiscal year ending October 31, 2010:
Cash received from customers $300,000
Revenue earned 350,000
Cash paid for expenses 170,000
Expenses incurred 200,000
Based on the accrual basis of accounting, what is M Corporation’s net income for the year ending October 31, 2010? $140,000
$114,000
$82,000
$150,000
5. (TCO E) Adjusting entries are made to ensure that:
expense are recognized in the period in which they are incurred.
revenues are recorded in the period in which they are earned.
balance sheet and income statement accounts have correct balances at the end of an accounting period.
All of the above
6. (TCO A, B) Detailed records of movements in merchandise (each purchase and sale) are not maintained in the inventory account in a:
perpetual inventory system.
periodic inventory system.
double entry accounting system.
business that sells expensive merchandise.
7. (TCO B) Hunter Company purchased merchandise inventory with an invoice price of $12,000 and credit terms of 2/10, n/30. What is the net cost of the goods if Hunter Company pays within the discount period
$11,040
$10,800
$11,760
$12,000
8. (TCO A, B) Lindy’s Market recorded the following events involving a recent purchase of merchandise:
Received goods for $80,000, terms 2/10, n/30.
Returned $2,000 of the shipment for credit.
Paid $500 freight on the shipment.
Paid the invoice within the discount period.
As a result of these events, the company’s merchandise inventory:
increased by $76,440.
increased by $78,000.
increased by $76,940.
increased by $76,840.
9. (TCO A) The Freight-in account:
increases the cost of merchandise purchased.
is contra to the Purchases account.
is a permanent account.
has a normal credit balance.
10. (TCO A) Which statement is false
Taking a physical inventory involves actually counting, weighing, or measuring each kind of inventory on hand.
No matter whether a periodic or perpetual inventory system is used, all companies need to determine inventory quantities at the end of each accounting period.
An inventory count is generally more accurate when goods are not being sold or received during the counting.
Companies that use a perpetual inventory system must take a physical inventory to determine inventory on hand on the balance sheet date and to determine cost of goods sold for the accounting period.
.
11. (TCO A) Of the following companies, which one would not likely employ the specific identification method for inventory costing
Music store specializing in piano sales
Custom Jewelry store
Antique shop
Hardware store
.
12. (TCO A) Which of the following statements is true regarding inventory cost flow assumptions
A company may use more than one cost-flow assumption concurrently for different product lines.
A company must comply with the method specified by industry standards.
A company must use the same method for domestic and foreign operations.
A company may never change its inventory costing method once it has chosen a method.
13. (TCO A) In a period of declining prices, which of the following inventory methods generally results in the lowest balance sheet figure for inventory?
Average cost method
LIFO method
FIFO method
Need more information to answer
14. (TCO B) The figure for which of the following items is determined at a different time under the perpetual inventory method than under the periodic method
Sales
Cost of Goods Sold
Purchases
Accounts Receivable
15. (TCO B) Two categories of expenses in merchandising companies are:
cost of goods sold and financing expenses.
operating expenses and financing expenses.
cost of goods sold and operating expenses.
sales and cost of goods sold.
1. (TCO D) A classmate is considering dropping his accounting class because he cannot understand the rules of debits and credits. Explain the rules of debits and credits in a way that will help him understand them. Cite examples for each of the major sections of the balance sheet (assets, liabilities and stockholders’ equity) and the income statement (revenues and expenses).
2. (TCOs B & E) The following information is available for Partin Company:
Sales $598,000
Sales Returns and Allowances 20,000
Cost of Goods Sold 398,000
Selling expense 69,000
Administrative expense 25,000
Interest expense 19,000
Interest revenue 20,000
Instructions:
1. Use the above information to prepare a multiple-step income statement for the year ended December 31, 2007.
2. Compute the profit margin ratio and gross profit rate. Partin Company s assets at the beginning of the year were $770,000, and were $830,000 at the end of the year. To qualify for full credit, you must state the formula you are using, show your computations, and explain your findings.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting project
COURSE PROJECT A INSTRUCTIONS
You have just been hired as a new management trainee by Earrings Unlimited, a distributor of earrings to various retail outlets located in shopping malls across the country. In the past, the company has done very little in the way of budgeting and at certain times of the year has experienced a shortage of cash.
Since you are well trained in budgeting, you have decided to prepare comprehensive budgets for the upcoming second quarter in order to show management the benefits that can be gained from an integrated budgeting program. To this end, you have worked with accounting and other areas to gather the information assembled below.
The company sells many styles of earrings, but all are sold for the same price $10 per pair. Actual sales of earrings for the last three months and budgeted sales for the next six months follow (in pairs of earrings):
The concentration of sales before and during May is due to Mother’s Day. Sufficient inventory should be on hand at the end of each month to supply 40% of the earrings sold in the following month.
Suppliers are paid $4 for a pair of earrings. One-half of a month’s purchases is paid for in the month of purchase; the other half is paid for in the following month. All sales are on credit, with no discount, and payable within 15 days. The company has found, however, that only 20% of a month’s sales are collected in the month of sale. An additional 70% is collected in the following month, and the remaining 10% is collected in the second month following sale. Bad debts have been negligible.
Monthly operating expenses for the company are given below:
Insurance is paid on an annual basis, in November of each year.
The company plans to purchase $16,000 in new equipment during May and $40,000 in new equipment during June; both purchases will be for cash. The company declares dividends of $15,000 each quarter, payable in the first month of the following quarter.
A listing of the company’s ledger accounts as of March 31 is given below:
The company maintains a minimum cash balance of $50,000. All borrowing is done at the beginning of a month; any repayments are made at the end of a month.
The company has an agreement with a bank that allows the company to borrow in increments of $1,000 at the beginning of each month. The interest rate on these loans is 1% per month and for simplicity we will assume that interest is not compounded. At the end of the quarter, the company would pay the bank all of the accumulated interest on the loan and as much of the loan as possible (in increments of $1,000), while still retaining at least $50,000 in cash.
Required:
Prepare a master budget for the three-month period ending June 30. Include the following detailed budgets:
1.
oa. A sales budget, by month and in total.
ob. A schedule of expected cash collections from sales, by month and in total.
oc. A merchandise purchases budget in units and in dollars. Show the budget by month and in total.
od. A schedule of expected cash disbursements for merchandise purchases, by month and in total.
2. A cash budget. Show the budget by month and in total. Determine any borrowing that would be needed to maintain the minimum cash balance of $50,000.
3. A budgeted income statement for the three-month period ending June 30. Use the contribution approach.
4. A budgeted balance sheet as of June 30
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which of the following accounts of a governmental unit is credited to close it at the end of the fiscal year?
* Reserve for Encumbrances
* Other Financing Sources-Transfers In
* Encumbrances Control
* Appropriations Control
2. In its Statement of Net Assets, a government reported: Assets of $90 million, including $30 million in capital assets (net) and liabilities of $50 million, including long-term debt of $15 million, all related to capital asset acquisition. The government also reported $5 million of net assets that were restricted for payment of debt service. The government’s unrestricted net assets would be reported as:
* $10 million
* $25 million
* $20 million
* $30 million
3. A donor pledged $100,000 to the fund raising drive of a local government to assist its police officers in obtaining the latest technology. The pledge was made on July 16, 2008 but was conditioned on the government raising an additional $100,000 from other donors. By the fiscal year-end of June 30, 2009, the local government had raised only $5,000 from other donors. What entry would be made for the initial pledge by the local government during the year ended June 30, 2009?
* Debit a receivable and credit a revenue
* Debit a receivable and credit Fund Balance
* No entry
* Debit a receivable and credit deferred revenues, a liability
4. What are the three major sections of the Comprehensive Annual Financial Report?
* Introductory Section, Financial Section, Budgetary Comparison.
* Introductory Section, Financial Section, Statistical Section.
* Introductory Section, Financial Section, Reporting Infrastructure.
* Introductory Section, Financial Section, Management Discussion and Analysis.
5. When payrolls and other liabilities are incurred and must be paid before substantial amounts of cash will be collected, what type of short-term note is desirable and secured by a government’s power to tax?
* Tax Relief Note Payable
* Tax Anticipation Note Payable
* Tax Budget Note Payable
* Tax Encumbrances Note Payable
6. What is a Special Revenue Fund?
* A fund created to account for all resources and revenues to be used for the construction or acquisition of capital assets
* A fund used to account for revenues from specific taxes or other revenue sources that by law are designated to finance particular activities of the government other than capital projects
* A fund used to account for revenues from general taxes or other revenue sources that by law are designated to finance general activities of the government
* A fund used to account for all revenue transactions of a governmental unit that are not accounted for in another fund
7. What type of serial bond schedules an increase each year in annual principal repayment approximately equivalent to the decrease in interest payments?
* Irregular
* Deferred
* Annuity
* Regular
8. What is the effect on the General Funds unreserved fund balance when capital assets are purchased during a year from General Fund revenues?
* None of the above, capital assets must be purchased through a capital projects fund
* Unreserved fund balance is decreased
* Unreserved fund balance is increased
* There is no effect, since one asset (cash) is replaced by another (capital asset)
9. Which of the following choices regarding the government-wide Statement of Net Assets is TRUE?
* The government-wide Statement of Net Assets includes all resources entrusted to the government; including governmental, proprietary and fiduciary
* A reporting entity (primary government plus component units) total column is required
* The government-wide Statement of Net Assets reflects capital assets, net of accumulated depreciation, for both governmental and business-type activities
* The government-wide Statement of Net Assets must be prepared in a classified format; that is, both assets and liabilities must be separated between current and long-term categories
10. Governmental units use which fund type to account for services provided to the general public on a user-charge basis?
* Internal service fund
* Permanent fund
* Enterprise fund
* General fund
11. The City of Lonesome Pines levied property taxes for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009 in the amount of $8,000,000. It is estimated that 2% will not be collected. During the year ended June 30, 2009, $7,200,000 in property taxes were collected. It is estimated that $400,000 will be collected during the next 60 days, $240,000 will be collected after 60 days and $160,000 will not be collected. What is the maximum amount Lonesome Pines can recognize as property tax revenue for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009 in its Governmental Funds Statement of Revenues, Expenditures and Changes in Fund Balances, assuming there were no unpaid property taxes at the end of the previous year?
* $8,000,000
* $7,600,000
* $7,200,000
* $7,840,000
12. In 2008 a faculty member at a private college received a grant from the National Science Foundation to conduct basic research on tree frogs in the amount of $350,000. Expenses associated with the grant totaled $225,000 in 2009. In the Statement of Activities for 2009, the college should show:
* revenues of $225,000 and expenses of $225,000 in Unrestricted Net Assets
* revenues of $350,000 and expenses of $225,000 in Temporarily Restricted Net Assets
* revenues of $225,000 and expenses of $225,000 in Temporarily Restricted Net Assets
* expenses of $ 225,000 in Unrestricted Net Assets and a decrease in Temporarily Restricted Net Assets of $ 225,000
13. Assume a government is determined to be a special-purpose government engaged in business-type activities only. Which of the following financial statements would be required?
* Statement of Net Assets, Statement of Revenues, Expenses and Changes in Net Assets, Statement of Cash Flows
* Statement of Net Assets and Statement of Activities
* Balance Sheet, Statement of Revenues, Expenditures and Changes in end Balances
* Statement of Net Assets, Statement of Activities, Statement of Cash Flows
14. When would a special revenue fund be deemed to have satisfied the eligibility requirement of a reimbursement-type federal grant under GASB Statement 33?
* Only as work is completed for a project
* When work has started for the project
* Only after work is completely finished for the project
* When a plan for use of the funds has been developed and approved
15. If taxes or special assessments are levied by the General Fund and then-transferred to the debt service fund, they are:
* included as transfers out in the General Fund but are not budgeted as revenue in that fund
* recorded as revenues of the debt service fund
* included in the revenues budget of the general fund and budgeted by that fund as transfers out to the debt service fund
* recorded as an expense and voucher payable by the general fund and are recorded as a revenue and receivable by the debt service fund.
16. A government had the following transfers reported in its governmental funds Statement of Revenues, Expenditures and Changes in Fund Balances: (1) a transfer from the General Fund to a debt service fund in the amount of $l,000,000; (2) a transfer from the General Fund to an enterprise fund in the amount of $1,200,000; and (3) a transfer from the General Fund to an internal service fund in the amount of $400,000. The amount that would be shown as a transfer out in the governmental activities column in the Statement of Activities would be:
* $1,400,000
* $1,200,000
* $2,600,000
* $800,000
17. In which fund type is interest on long term debt typically not accrued, yet is recognized as an expenditure in the year in which interest is legally due?
* Enterprise fund
* Debt service fund
* Internal service fund
* Pension fund
18. A public college had tuition and fees of $20,000,000. Scholarships, for which no services were required, amounted to $2,000,000. Graduate assistantships, for which services were required, amounted to $1,000,000. The amount to be reported by the public college as net tuition and fees would be:
* $19,000,000
* $18,000,000
* $20,000,000
* $17,000,000
19. Each of the following is one of the four classes into which nonexchange transactions apply in accordance with GASB Statement No. 33 EXCEPT:
* voluntary nonexchange transactions
* mandatory exchange transactions
* derived tax revenues
* imposed nonexchange revenues
20. The fund statements for governmental funds are presented using:
* Economic Resources Measurement focus and the Modified Accrual Basis of Accounting
* Economic Resources Measurement focus and the Accrual Basis of Accounting
* Current Financial Resources Measurement focus and the Modified Accrual Basis of Accounting
* Current Financial Resources Measurement focus and the Accrual Basis of Accounting
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
21. The FASB has the authority to set accounting standards for all of the following organizations EXCEPT:
* educational foundations established to support a private college or university
* public colleges
* private colleges
* for profit proprietary schools
22. A local government was awarded a federal grant in the amount of $600,000 to provide for a summer employment program for young people. The grant was a reimbursement grant and was awarded on April 30, 2009. The local government expended the resources as follows: June, 2009, $220,000; July 2009, $200,000; August, 2009, $180,000. The federal government provided the funds the following months. The local government would recognize revenues for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009 in which amount?
* $ – 0
* $600,000
* $220,000
* $420,000
23. To compute the net debt per capita, a user of financial statements would need to look at (in the CAFR):
* The debt and the amount available to pay that debt in the governmental funds Balance Sheet and the population from the statistical section
* The debt in the government-wide Statement of Net Assets, the amount available to pay that debt in the governmental funds Balance Sheet and the population from the statistical section
* The debt in the governmental funds Balance Sheet, the amount available in the government-wide Statement of Net Assets and the population from the statistical section
* All three items from the government-wide Statement of Net Assets
24. All the following choices would be considered a special-purpose government for financial reporting purposes EXCEPT:
* a public school system
* an art museum
* a public hospital
* a county board of supervisors
25. Under the terms of the Single Audit Act and its amendments, what percentage of federal awards expenditures must be selected for audit?
* High Risk Auditee: 50%; Low Risk Auditee: 0%
* High Risk Auditee: 50%; Low Risk Auditee: 25%
* High Risk Auditee: 100%; Low Risk Auditee: 25%
* High Risk Auditee: 100%; Low Risk Auditee: 50%
26. Under GASB rules for the financial reporting entity:
* bounties are component units of the state government
* blended and discretely presented component units are to be reported in government-wide financial statements but not in fund financial statements
* component units are included if the primary government is financially accountable for their operations
* component units must be reported in columns (discrete presentation) separate from the funds of a primary government.
27. Which of the following choices regarding the proprietary fund financial statements is TRUE?
* The Statement of Cash Flows may be prepared using either the direct or the indirect methods
* Statements include the Statement of Net Assets (or Balance Sheet), Statement of Revenues, Expenses and Changes in Fund Net Assets and Statement of Cash Flows
* The Statement of Net Assets (or Balance Sheet) reflects equity as contributed equity and retained earnings
* Normally, reconciliation is required between the proprietary fund financial statements and the business-type activities column in the government-wide financial statements
28. GASB Statement 31, Accounting and Financial Reporting for Certain Investments and for External Investment Pools, applies to all of the following investment types EXCEPT:
* external investment pools
* investments of pension funds
* open-end mutual funds
* debt securities
29. The City of Greenville had a balance in the Reserve for Encumbrances account at the end of 2008 in the amount of $30,000. During 2009, all purchase orders related to the $30,000 were filled and the invoice amount was $30,500. Which of the following would be TRUE regarding the Statement of Revenues, Expenditures and Changes in fund balances for 2009? (assume encumbrances do not lapse)
* The amount shown for expenditures would include only the $500
* The amount shown for expenditures would include the $30,500
* The amount shown for expenditures would include only the $30,000
* The amount shown for expenditures would not include items related to orders placed in 2008
30. The City of Springfield has three pension plans: a locally administered police plan for which it is trustee, a statewide cost sharing plan and a statewide agency plan. The city would include in its CAFR financial statements for:
* the locally administered plan plus the statewide agency plan
* all three plans
* both statewide plans
* the locally administered plan only
31. Under GASB rules for the financial reporting entity:
* component units must be reported in columns (discrete presentation) separate from the funds of a primary government
* component units are included if the primary government is financially accountable for their operations
* blended and discretely presented component units are to be reported in government-wide financial statements but not in fund financial statements
* counties are component units of the State Government
32. A governmental funds Statement of Revenues, Expenditures and Changes in Fund Balances reported expenditures of $30 million, including capital outlay expenditures of $2 million. Capital assets for that government cost $70 million, including land of $10 million. Depreciable assets are amortized over 20 years, on average. The reconciliation from governmental changes in fund balances to governmental activities changes in net assets would reflect:
* an increase of $ l million
* a decrease of $1 million
* a decrease of $3 million
* an increase of $2 million
33. Ford County levies for its General Fund $1,000,000 in property taxes. In addition, the county is responsible for collecting $2,000,000 in property taxes for the consolidated school district and $500,000 in property taxes for a town within the county. 2% of all taxes levied are expected to be uncollectible. When recording the levies in an agency fund, what amount would Ford County record as Taxes Receivable for Other Governments Current and Due to Other Governments?
* $2,450,000
* $2,500,000
* $3,430,000
* $3,500,000
34. Funds that are used to account for activities similar to those often engaged in by profit-seeking businesses are:
* agency funds
* proprietary funds
* capital project funds
* special revenue funds
35. What type of fund is used when resources are provided mainly through business like transactions to parties external to the government?
* Internal Service Funds
* Agency Funds
* Enterprise Funds
* Capital Projects Funds
36. Which part of the financial section of the CAFR is considered “”Required Supplementary Information?””
* Find Financial Statements
* Auditor s Report
* Management s Discussion and Analysis
* Government-wide Financial Statements
37. According to NACUBO guidelines, what is the correct treatment for recognizing summer school revenues and expenses when a college’s fiscal year ends on June 30?
* Recognize expenses in the year in which they were billed and the expenses in the year in which they were incurred
* Recognize the entire amount of revenues and expenses in the year in which the term is predominantly conducted
* Apportion the revenues and expenses to the two fiscal years, following accrual accounting practices similar to those employed by commercial enterprises
* Recognize the entire amount of revenues and expenses in the year in which the term began
38. Proprietary funds utilize what basis of accounting?
* Budgetary
* Modified accrual
* Cash
* Accrual
39. Which organization promulgates the Government Auditing Standards?
* The Securities and Exchange Commission
* The U.S. Government Accountability Office
* The American Institute of Certified Public Accountants
* The U.S. Office of Management and Budget
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exercise 7-7
LaSalle Company established a petty cash fund on May 1, cashing a check for $100. The company reimbursed the fund on June 1 and July 1 with the following results.
June 1: Cash in fund $1.75. Receipts: delivery expense $31.25; postage expense $41; and miscellaneous expense $25.
July 1: Cash in fund $3.25. Receipts: delivery expense $21; entertainment expense $51; and miscellaneous expense $24.75.
On July 10, LaSalle increased the fund from $100 to $150.00.
Prepare journal entries for LaSalle Company. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
Exercise 7-14
Nayak Company has recorded the following items in its financial records.
Cash in bank $41,000
Cash in plant expansion fund 100,000
Cash on hand 8,000
Highly liquid investments 34,000
Petty cash 500
Receivables from customers 89,000
Stock investments 61,000
The cash in bank is subject to a compensating balance of $5,000. The highly liquid investments had maturities of 3 months or less when they were purchased. The stock investments will be sold in the next 6 to 12 months. The plant expansion project will begin in 3 years.
What amount should Nayak report as Cash and cash equivalents on its balance sheet?
Problem 7-3A
On May 31, 2014, Terrell Company had a cash balance per books of $6,781.50. The bank statement from Home Town State Bank on that date showed a balance of $6,804.60. A comparison of the statement with the cash account revealed the following facts.
1. The statement included a debit memo of $40 for the printing of additional company checks.
2. Cash sales of $836.15 on May 12 were deposited in the bank. The cash receipts journal entry and the deposit slip were incorrectly made for $886.15. The bank credited Terrell Company for the correct amount.
3. Outstanding checks at May 31 totaled $276.25. Deposits in transit were $1,916.15.
4. On May 18, the company issued check No. 1181 for $685 to Barry Dietz on account. The check, which cleared the bank in May, was incorrectly journalized and posted by Terrell Company for $658.
5. A $3,000 note receivable was collected by the bank for Terrell Company on May 31 plus $80 interest. The bank charged a collection fee of $20. No interest has been accrued on the note.
6. Included with the cancelled checks was a check issued by Bridges Company to Jon Newton for $600 that was incorrectly charged to Terrell Company by the bank.
7. On May 31, the bank statement showed an NSF charge of $680 for a check issued by Sandy Grifton, a customer, to Terrell Company on account.
(a) Prepare the bank reconciliation at May 31, 2014. (Reconcile the bank balance first and then the book balance.)
(b) Prepare the necessary adjusting entries for Terrell Company at May 31, 2014. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC/561 Final Exam – 30 questions
1. Which of the following is an advantage of corporations relative to partnerships and sole proprietorships?
2.The group of users of accounting information charged with achieving the goals of the business is its
3.Which of the following financial statements is concerned with the company at a point in time?
4.An income statement
5.The most important information needed to determine if companies can pay their current obligations is the
6.A liquidity ratio measures the
7.The convention of consistency refers to consistent use of accounting principles
8.Horizontal analysis is also known as
9.Horizontal analysis is a technique for evaluating a series of financial statement data over a period of time
10.Vertical analysis is a technique that expresses each item in a financial statement
11.Process costing is used when
12.An important feature of a job order cost system is that each job
13.In a process cost system, product costs are summarized:
14.An activity that has a direct cause-effect relationship with the resources consumed is a(n)
15.Activity-based costing
16.A cost which remains constant per unit at various levels of activity is a
17.The break-even point is where
18.Fixed costs are $600,000 and the contribution margin per unit is $150. What is the break-even point?
19.When a company assigns the costs of direct materials, direct labor, and both variable and fixed manufacturing overhead to products, that company is using
20.If a division manager’s compensation is based upon the division’s net income, the manager may decide to meet the net income targets by increasing production when using
21.An unrealistic budget is more likely to result when it
22. A major element in budgetary control is
23.The purpose of the sales budget report is to
24.The accumulation of accounting data on the basis of the individual manager who has the authority to make day-to-day decisions about activities in an area is called
25.Variance reports are
26.Internal reports that review the actual impact of decisions are prepared by
27.The process of evaluating financial data that change under alternative courses of action is called
28.Seasons Manufacturing manufactures a product with a unit variable cost of $100 and a unit sales price of $176. Fixed manufacturing costs were $480,000 when 10,000 units were produced and sold. The company has a one-time opportunity to sell an additional 1,000 units at $140 each in a foreign market which would not affect its present sales. If the company has sufficient capacity to produce the additional units, acceptance of the special order would affect net income as follows
29.Carter, Inc. can make 100 units of a necessary component part with the following costs:
| Direct Materials |
$120,000 |
| Direct Labor |
20,000 |
| Variable Overhead |
60,000 |
| Fixed Overhead |
40,000 |
If Carter can purchase the component externally for $220,000 and only $10,000 of the fixed costs can be avoided, what is the correct make-or-buy decision?
30.A company has a process that results in 15,000 pounds of Product A that can be sold for $16 per pound. An alternative would be to process Product A further at a cost of $200,000 and then sell it for $28 per pound. Should management sell Product A now or should Product A be processed further and then sold? What is the effect of the action?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BE1-7
Indicate which statement you would examine to find each of the following items: income statement (I), balance sheet (B), retained earnings statement (R), or statement of cash flows (C).
(a) Revenue during the period.
(b) Supplies on hand at the end of the year.
(c) Cash received from issuing new bonds during the period.
(d) Total debts outstanding at the end of the period.
Hint: Determine proper financial statement.
BE1-8
Use the basic accounting equation to answer these questions.
(a) The liabilities of Cummings Company are $90,000 and the stockholders’ equity is $230,000. What is the amount of Cummings Company’s total assets?
(b) The total assets of Haldeman Company are $170,000 and its stockholders’ equity is $90,000. What is the amount of its total liabilities?
(c) The total assets of Dain Co. are $800,000 and its liabilities are equal to one-fourth of its total assets. What is the amount of Dain Co.’s stockholders’ equity?
Hint: Use basic accounting equation.
BE1-9
At the beginning of the year, Fuqua Company had total assets of $800,000 and total liabilities of $500,000.
(a) If total assets increased $150,000 during the year and total liabilities decreased $80,000, what is the amount of stockholders’ equity at the end of the year?
(b) During the year, total liabilities increased $100,000 and stockholders’ equity decreased $70,000. What is the amount of total assets at the end of the year?
(c) If total assets decreased $90,000 and stockholders’ equity increased $110,000 during the year, what is the amount of total liabilities at the end of the year?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The statement of cash flows is used for _____.
A. showing the relationship of net income to changes in current assets
B. determining a company s acceptable level of debt financing
C. revealing commitments that may restrict future courses of action
D. evaluating the creditworthiness of the organization
2) Nonoperating items on the income statement _____.
A. are revenues and expenses arising from adjusting entries
B. include interest income and expense
C. appear only on corporate income statements
D. appear on the income statement immediately after gross profit
3) The difference between a single-step and multiple-step income statement is that a single-step income statement _____.
A. groups all revenues together and all expenses together, whereas a multiple-step income statement separates certain revenues and expenses from each other and presents subtotals
B. calculates net income using one method, whereas a multiple-step income statement calculates net income using two or more methods
C. calculates gross profit and operating income, whereas a multiple-step income statement does not
D. shows only 1 year’s net income, whereas a multiple-step income statement shows multiple years’ net income
4) Which one of the following statements is true?
A. The statement of cash flows reports the cash receipts but not cash payments of an entity over a period of time.
B. Both the statement of cash flows and the income statement determine the net income for a company.
C. Transactions affecting the sale and the purchase or production of goods and services are reported in the financing activities section of the statement of cash flows.
D. Investing activities in the statement of cash flows include acquiring and selling long-term assets.
5) The _____ accounting convention uses the acquisition cost minus depreciation in valuing an asset on the balance sheet.
A. continuity
B. conservatism
C. cost-benefit
D. materiality
6) A new corporation issuing a common, no-par value stock for cash would include a journal entry a debit to _____.
A. paid-in capital and a credit to retained earnings.
B. cash and a credit to common stock.
C. retained earnings and a credit to cash.
D. cash and a credit to retained income.
7) Which type of organization would most likely have work-in-process inventory?
A. A retail store
B. A manufacturing company
C. A service organization
D. A real-estate investment trust
8) _____ is a measure of income or profit divided by the investment required to obtain that income or profit.
A. Return on sales
B. Capital turnover
C. Return on investment
D. Residual income
9) The following information is available for the Peter Company:
Sales: $150,000
Invested capital: $156,250
ROI: 10%
The return on sales is _____.
A. 10.00%
B. 10.42%
C. 62.50%
D. 9.60%
10) The following information is available for the Peter Company:
Sales: $500,000
Invested capital: $312,500
ROI: 10%
The return on sales is _____.
A. 10.00%
B. 6.250%
C. 1.000%
D. 62.50%
11) Company A s revenues are $300 on invested capital of $240. Expenses are currently 70% of sales. If Angelo Company can reduce its capital investment by 20% in Company A, return on investment will be _____.
A. 75%
B. 93.75%
C. 18.75%
D. 46.88%
12) When the variable costing method is used, fixed factory overhead appears on the income statement as a _____.
A. component of cost of goods sold
B. fixed expense
C. production-volume variance
D. component of gross profit
13) In absorption costing, costs are separated into the major categories of _____.
A. manufacturing and nonmanufacturing
B. manufacturing and fixed
C. fixed and variable
D. variable and nonmanufacturing
14) _____ is another term for variable costing.
A. Full costing
B. Direct costing
C. Traditional costing
D. Absorption costing
15) Budgeted service department cost rates protects the user departments from _____.
A. service department efficiencies
B. price fluctuations
C. service outages
D. employee control
16) _____ is an example of the external financial-reporting purpose of the cost management systems.
A. The cost of a manufacturing process
B. The product mix to optimize profitability
C. The amount of inventory that should appear on the balance sheet
D. Budget reporting
17) The level of sales at which revenues equal expenses and net income is zero is called the _____.
A. margin of safety
B. contribution margin
C. break-even point
D. marginal income point
18) Output measures of both resources and activities are _____.
A. cost drivers
B. stages of production
C. fixed activities
D. variable activities
19) The break-even point is where _____.
A. total sales revenue equals total cost plus desired profit.
B. the contribution margin equals net income plus fixed costs.
C. total sales revenue equals total cost.
D. the variable cost equals total cost.
20) _____ budgeting is when budgets are formulated with the active participation of all affected employees.
A. Financial
B. Team
C. Participative
D. Shared
21) _____ is the logical integration of management accounting tools to gather and report data and to evaluate performance.
A. An internal control system
B. A quality control system
C. A financial-reporting system
D. A management control system
22) _____ are components of a master budget.
A. A strategic plan and an operating budget
B. An operating budget and a capital budget
C. A continuous budget and a static budget
D. A cash budget and an activity budget
23) An important factor considered by sales forecasters is _____.
A. production employee requirements.
B. expectations of the board of directors.
C. competitors activities.
D. the desired level of sales.
24) _____ models are mathematical models of the master budget that can react to any set of assumptions about sales, costs, and product mix.
A. Variance analysis
B. Financial planning
C. Accounting
D. Futuring
25) Which of the following is an objective of budgeting?
A. Budgeting provides benchmarks against which performance can be measured.
B. Budgeting provides a fixed fiscal plan that should not be changed during the year.
C. Budgeting helps managers build favorable variances into the performance-evaluation process.
D. Budgeting is done exclusively by the chief fiscal officer for control purposes.
26) An organization’s budget program should be used
A. to have power over employees.
B. to assign blame to managers that do not meet budgetary goals.
C. to help managers plan and control the organization s performance.
D. to help the chief fiscal officer to allocate resources to the favored projects of the executives.
27) The activity-based costing may reveal _________, whereas traditional costing cannot.
A. high-volume products are overcosted
B. low-volume products are overcosted
C. both high- and low-volume products are overcosted
D. both high- and low-volume products are undercosted
28) _____ is a method of approximating cost functions.
A. Cost Driver Analysis
B. Transaction analysis
C. Product analysis
D. Account analysis
29) In relation to a cost function, the term reliability refers to _____.
A. whether the costs and activities can be easily observed
B. whether the cost function conforms to a given mathematical model
C. how well the cost function predicts future costs
D. how well the cost function explains past cost behavior
30) One of the simplest methods to measure a linear cost function from past data is the _____.
A. regression analysis method
B. high low method
C. least squares regression method
D. visual-fit method
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Westan Corporation uses a predetermined overhead rate of $23.10 per direct labor-hour. This predetermined rate was based on a cost formula that estimated $277,200 of total manufacturing overhead for an estimated activity level of 12,000 direct labor-hours.
|
|
The company incurred actual total manufacturing overhead costs of $266,000 and 12,600 total direct labor-hours during the period.
|
| Kirkaid Company recorded the following transactions for the just completed month: |
| a. |
$84,000 in raw materials were requisitioned for use in production. Of this amount, $72,000 was for direct materials and the remainder was for indirect materials.
|
| b. |
Total labor wages of $108,000 were incurred. Of this amount, $105,000 was for direct labor and the remainder was for indirect labor.
|
| c. |
Additional actual manufacturing overhead costs of $197,000 were incurred. |
| d. |
A total of $218,000 in manufacturing overhead was applied to jobs. |
| Required: |
| Determine the underapplied or overapplied overhead for the month. |
| Required: |
|
Determine the amount of manufacturing overhead that would have been applied to all jobs during the period.
|
A company assigns overhead cost to completed jobs on the basis of 120% of direct labor cost. The job cost sheet for Job 413 shows that $12,000 in direct materials has been used on the job and that $8,000 in direct labor cost has been incurred. A total of 200 units were produced in Job 413.
|
| Required: |
| a. |
What is the total manufacturing cost assigned to Job 413?
| b. |
What is the unit product cost for Job 413?
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Impairment of assets
Rossi Ltd has a division that represents a separate cash generating unit. At 30 June 2012, the carrying amounts of the assets of the division, valued pursuant to the cost model, are as follows:
|
Assets:
|
$
|
|
Plant and equipment
|
400,000
|
|
Less: accumulated depreciation
|
(90,000)
|
|
Land
|
300,000
|
|
Inventory
|
30,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
20,000
|
|
Patents and trademarks
|
50,000
|
|
Goodwill
|
90,000
|
|
Carrying amount of cash generating unit
|
800,000
|
The receivables were regarded as collectable, and the inventory s fair value less costs to sell was equal to its carrying amount. The patents and trademarks have a fair value less costs to sell of $40,000, and the land has a fair value less costs to sell of $270,000.
The directors of Rossi estimate that, at 30 June 2012, the fair value less costs to sell of the division amounts to $650,000, while the value in use of the division is $660,000.
As a result, management increased the depreciation of the plant and equipment from $30,000 p.a. to $40,000 for the year ended 30 June 2013.
By 30 June 2013, the recoverable amount of the cash generating unit was calculated to be $53,000 greater than the carrying amount of the assets of the unit.
Required:
Determine how Rossi Ltd should account for the results of the impairment test at 30 June 2012 and 30 June 2013, and prepare any necessary journal entries. Show all workings.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Critical Thinking Question:
Answer the following questions:
Why are noncash transactions, such as the exchange of common stock for a building for example, included on a statement of cash flows? How are these noncash transactions disclosed?
2. Classification of activities
Classify each of the following transactions as arising from an operating (O), investing (I), financing (F), or noncash investing/financing (N) activity.
a. ________ Received $80,000 from the sale of land.
b. ________ Received $3,200 from cash sales.
c. ________ Paid a $5,000 dividend.
d. ________ Purchased $8,800 of merchandise for cash.
e. ________ Received $100,000 from the issuance of common stock.
f. ________ Paid $1,200 of interest on a note payable.
g. ________ Acquired a new laser printer by paying $650.
h. ________ Acquired a $400,000 building by signing a $400,000 mortgage note.
3. Overview of direct and indirect methods
Evaluate the comments that follow as being True or False. If the comment is false, briefly explain why.
a. Both the direct and indirect methods will produce the same cash flow from operating activities.
b. Depreciation expense is added back to net income when the indirect method is used.
c. One of the advantages of using the direct method rather than the indirect method is that larger cash flows from financing activities will be reported.
d. The cash paid to suppliers is normally disclosed on the statement of cash flows when the indirect method of statement preparation is employed.
e. The dollar change in the Merchandise Inventory account appears on the statement of cash flows only when the direct method of statement preparation is used.
4.Equipment transaction and cash flow reporting
|
Dec. 31, 20X4
|
Dec. 31, 20X3
|
|
Property, Plant & Equipment:
Land
|
$94,000
|
$94,000
|
|
Equipment
|
652,000
|
527,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
-316,000
|
-341,000
|
New equipment purchased during 20×4 totaled $280,000. The 20×4 income statement disclosed equipment depreciation expense of $41,000 and a $9,000 loss on the sale of equipment.
a. Determine the cost and accumulated depreciation of the equipment sold during 20X4.
b. Determine the selling price of the equipment sold.
c. Show how the sale of equipment would appear on a statement of cash flows prepared by using the indirect method.
5. Cash flow information: Direct and indirect methods
The comparative year-end balance sheets of Sign Graphics, Inc., revealed the following activity in the company’s current accounts:
|
20X5
|
20X4
|
Increase / Decrease)
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$55,400
|
$35,200
|
$20,200
|
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
83,800
|
88,000
|
-4,200
|
|
|
Inventory
|
243,400
|
233,800
|
9,600
|
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
25,400
|
24,200
|
1,200
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$123,600
|
$140,600
|
($17,000)
|
|
|
Taxes payable
|
43,600
|
49,200
|
-5,600
|
|
|
Interest payable
|
9,000
|
6,400
|
2,600
|
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
38,800
|
60,400
|
-21,600
|
|
|
Note payable
|
44,000
|
|
44,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The accounts payable were for the purchase of merchandise. Prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities relate to the firm’s selling and administrative expenses. The company’s condensed income statement follows.
|
SIGN GRAPHICS INC.
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
for the Year Ended December 31, 20×5
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sales
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$713,800
|
|
|
Less: Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
|
323,000
|
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
|
|
|
|
$390,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Less: Selling & administrative expenses
|
|
$186,000
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
|
|
|
|
17,000
|
|
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
|
|
|
|
27,000
|
|
230,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Add: gain on sale of land
|
|
|
|
|
$160,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
21,800
|
|
|
Income before taxes
|
|
|
|
|
$182,600
|
|
|
Income taxes
|
|
|
|
|
|
36,800
|
|
|
Net income
|
|
|
|
|
|
$145,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other data:
1. Long-term investments were purchased for cash at a cost of $74,600.
2. Cash proceeds from the sale of land totaled $76,200.
3. Store equipment of $44,000 was purchased by signing a short-term note payable. Also, a $150,000 telecommunications system was acquired by issuing 3,000 shares of preferred stock.
4. A long-term note of $49,400 was repaid.
5. Twenty thousand shares of common stock were issued at $5.19 per share.
6. The company paid cash dividends amounting to $128,600.
Instructions:
a. Prepare the operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows, assuming use of:
1. The direct method.
2. The indirect method.
b. Prepare the investing and financing activities sections of the statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This is an essay exam consisting of six short answer questions and one essay question, worth a total of 55 points. You must answer all questions. Please limit your response to each short answer question to one paragraph (approximately 50-100 words) and the essay to a maximum of two pages. For specific information related to grading criteria for the exams, refer to the grading policy in the syllabus.
.
Short Answer Questions (7 points each)
- Name and describe the functions of marketing as discussed in the text?
- Identify and describe the stages in the product life cycle. Provide an example, other than ones given in the text, of a product at each stage of the lifecycle.
- What are the five characteristics that distinguish digital communication from traditional communication? Provide a definition for each.
- What is the accounting equation? Define and give examples of each component of the equation.
- There are three major financial instruments for companies to raise long term funds. Name and discuss each of the three.
Essay Question (20 points)
Shown below are Cooper Corporation s financial statements. Analyze the financial statements using ratio analysis (i.e., calculate the ratios to two decimal points and specify what they indicate or represent). Present your ratio analysis in essay form, presented by category of ratios including a discussion of the meaning of each category and each ratio. What further information would you need for a meaningful analysis?
| Income Statement (In millions) |
|
|
Balance Sheet (In millions) |
|
|
| Net Revenue (Sales) |
$13,450 |
|
Assets |
| Cost of Goods Sold |
$7,078 |
|
Current assets |
| Gross Profit |
$6,372 |
|
Cash |
$850 |
|
Net Receivables |
$2,796 |
| Selling and administrative expenses |
$4,910 |
|
Inventories |
$2,268 |
| Interest Expense |
$134 |
|
Other current assets |
$666 |
| Income before Taxes |
$1,328 |
|
Total current assets |
$6,580 |
|
| Taxes |
$544 |
|
Facilities, net of depreciation |
$708 |
| Net Income |
$784 |
|
Goodwill |
$1,168 |
|
Deferred Assets |
$378 |
| Shares Outstanding |
118 |
|
Other non-current assets |
$608 |
| Dividends Paid |
$236 |
|
Total Assets |
$9,442 |
|
|
Liabilities and Owner Equity |
|
Current Liabilities |
|
Accounts payable |
$988 |
|
Notes payable |
$928 |
|
Taxes Payable |
$378 |
|
Accrued Liabilities |
$1,184 |
|
Other current liabilities |
$404 |
|
Total current liabilities |
$3,882 |
|
Long-term Debt |
$1,748 |
|
Deferred Taxes |
$140 |
|
Other non-current liabilities |
$290 |
|
Total Liabilities |
$6,060 |
|
|
Shareholders’ Equity |
|
Common stock |
$234 |
|
Retained Earnings |
$3,148 |
|
Total Shareholders’ Equity |
$3,382 |
|
|
Total Liabilities and Equity |
$9,442 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Part 2
- Discuss the revenue principle and the matching principle as per the generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP).
- Contrast the percentage-of-completion method of revenue recognition versus the completed contract method.
- Solve this accounting problem for the ABC grocery company relating to revenue and expense recognition as per GAAP: ABC Corporation uses the percentage-of-completion method of accounting. In 2010, ABC entered into a contract for a contract price of $2,000,000.
|
2010
|
|
Costs incurred during the year
|
600,000
|
|
Estimated costs to complete as of Dec 31
|
900,000
|
|
Billings during the year
|
400,000
|
|
Collections during the year
|
300,000
|
- What portion of the total contract price is recognized as revenue in 2010?
- What is the profit recognized for 2010?
- Prepare the journal entries for 2010 under the percentage completion method
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Individual
Effect of Unethical Behavior Article Analysis
|
Write a 350- to 700-word article analysis in which you identify situations that might lead to unethical practices and behavior in accounting.
Examine the effect of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 on financial statements.
Prepare at least one question based on your article analysis for class discussion.
Cite one article from the Electronic Reserve Readings, the Internet, or other resources.
Format your paper consistent with APA guidelines.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The accountant for Klein Photography has posted adjusting entries (a)-(e) to the following selected accounts at December 31, 2012.
Accounts receivable Supplies
46,000 5,000 (b) 2,400
(a) 2,000
Accumulated depr.-furniture Accumulated depr.-building
8,000 30,000
(c) 800 (d) 6,200
Salary Payable Klein, capital
(e) 700 47,000
Klein, drawing Service revenue
57,000 108,000
(a) 2,000
Salary expense Supplies expense
25,400 (b) 2,400
(e) 700
Depreciation expense-furniture Depreciation expense-furniture
(c) 800 (d) 6,200
Requirements:
1. Journalize Klein Photography s closing entries at December 31, 2012
2. Determine Klein Photography s ending Klein, capital balance at December 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Two Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in theappropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Analysis of stockholders’ equity
Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X8. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 20X8 and 20X7 follow.
|
20X8
|
20X7
|
|
Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10%
|
$600,000
|
$500,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par value
|
2,350,000
|
1,550,000
|
|
|
|
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par value
|
|
|
|
Preferred
|
24,000
|
|
|
Common
|
4,620,000
|
3,600,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
8,470,000
|
6,920,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$16,064,000
|
$12,570,000
|
a. Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X8.
b. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X8.
c. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 20X8?
d. Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X8? By what amount?
2. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization
Northern Corporation issued $800,000 of 7% bonds on March 1, 20X8. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow.
Case A The bonds are issued at 100.
Case B The bonds are issued at 96.
Case C The bonds are issued at 105.
Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization.
Instructions:
|
Complete the following table:
|
|
|
|
|
Case A
|
Case B
|
Case C
|
- Cash inflow on the issuance date
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Total cash outflow through maturity
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Amortization for the year ended December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Unamortized premium as of December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Unamortized discount as of December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Bond carrying value as of December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
3. Definitions of manufacturing concepts
J & B Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:
Materials and supplies used
Brass $80,000
Repair parts 18,000
Machine lubricants 8,000
Wages and salaries Machine operators 140,000
Production supervisors 62,000
Maintenance personnel 39,000
Other factory overhead Variable 29,000
Fixed 48,000
Sales commissions 20,000
Compute:
a. Total direct materials consumed
b. Total direct labor
c. Total prime cost
d. Total conversion cost
4. Scheduleof cost of goods manufactured, income statement
The following information was taken from the ledger of Jakob Industries, Inc.:
|
Direct labor
|
$75,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$63,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
36,000
|
|
Work in. process
|
|
|
Sales
|
310,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
32,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
|
|
Dec. 31
|
21,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
115,000
|
|
Direct material purchases
|
87,000
|
|
Dec. 31
|
131,000
|
|
Depreciation: factory
|
21,000
|
|
Raw (direct) materials on hand
|
Indirect materials used
|
11,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
31,000
|
|
Indirect labor
|
26,000
|
|
Dec. 31
|
40,000
|
|
Factory taxes
|
8,000
|
|
|
|
Factory utilities
|
12,000
|
Prepare the following:
a. A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.
b. An income statement for the year ended December 31.
5. Manufacturing statements and cost behavior
Sioux Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $38 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.
|
Per Unit
|
Variable Cost
|
Fixed Cost
|
|
Direct materials
|
$4.00
|
$
|
|
Direct labor
|
7.0
|
|
|
Factory overhead
|
9.0
|
70,000
|
|
Selling
|
|
80,000
|
|
Administrative
|
|
135,000
|
Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 18,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Sioux carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.
Instructions:
a. Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.
b. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
c. On the basis of the information presented:
1. Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
2. What is the likely effect on the $4.00 unit cost of direct materials if next year’s production increases? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Two Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in theappropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Analysis of stockholders’ equity
Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X8. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 20X8 and 20X7 follow.
|
20X8
|
20X7
|
|
Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10%
|
$600,000
|
$500,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par value
|
2,350,000
|
1,550,000
|
|
|
|
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par value
|
|
|
|
Preferred
|
24,000
|
|
|
Common
|
4,620,000
|
3,600,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
8,470,000
|
6,920,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$16,064,000
|
$12,570,000
|
a. Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X8.
b. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X8.
c. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 20X8?
d. Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X8? By what amount?
2. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization
Northern Corporation issued $800,000 of 7% bonds on March 1, 20X8. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow.
Case A The bonds are issued at 100.
Case B The bonds are issued at 96.
Case C The bonds are issued at 105.
Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization.
Instructions:
|
Complete the following table:
|
|
|
|
|
Case A
|
Case B
|
Case C
|
- Cash inflow on the issuance date
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Total cash outflow through maturity
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Amortization for the year ended December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Unamortized premium as of December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Unamortized discount as of December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Bond carrying value as of December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
3. Definitions of manufacturing concepts
J & B Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:
Materials and supplies used
Brass $80,000
Repair parts 18,000
Machine lubricants 8,000
Wages and salaries Machine operators 140,000
Production supervisors 62,000
Maintenance personnel 39,000
Other factory overhead Variable 29,000
Fixed 48,000
Sales commissions 20,000
Compute:
a. Total direct materials consumed
b. Total direct labor
c. Total prime cost
d. Total conversion cost
4. Scheduleof cost of goods manufactured, income statement
The following information was taken from the ledger of Jakob Industries, Inc.:
|
Direct labor
|
$75,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$63,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
36,000
|
|
Work in. process
|
|
|
Sales
|
310,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
32,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
|
|
Dec. 31
|
21,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
115,000
|
|
Direct material purchases
|
87,000
|
|
Dec. 31
|
131,000
|
|
Depreciation: factory
|
21,000
|
|
Raw (direct) materials on hand
|
Indirect materials used
|
11,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
31,000
|
|
Indirect labor
|
26,000
|
|
Dec. 31
|
40,000
|
|
Factory taxes
|
8,000
|
|
|
|
Factory utilities
|
12,000
|
Prepare the following:
a. A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.
b. An income statement for the year ended December 31.
5. Manufacturing statements and cost behavior
Sioux Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $38 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.
|
Per Unit
|
Variable Cost
|
Fixed Cost
|
|
Direct materials
|
$4.00
|
$
|
|
Direct labor
|
7.0
|
|
|
Factory overhead
|
9.0
|
70,000
|
|
Selling
|
|
80,000
|
|
Administrative
|
|
135,000
|
Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 18,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Sioux carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.
Instructions:
a. Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.
b. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
c. On the basis of the information presented:
1. Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
2. What is the likely effect on the $4.00 unit cost of direct materials if next year’s production increases? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BE17-3
Carow Corporation purchased, as a held-to-maturity investment, $60,000 of the 8%, 5-year bonds of Harrison, Inc. for $65,118, which provides a 6% return. The bonds pay interest semiannually. Prepare Carows’ journal entries for (a) the purchase of the investment, and (b) the receipt of semiannual interest and premium amortization. Assume effective interest amortization is used. (Round answers to zero decimal places, e.g. 25,510. List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)
BE17-4
Hendricks Corporation purchased trading investment bonds for $50,000 at par. At December 31, Hendricks received annual interest of $2,000, and the fair value of the bonds was $47,400. Prepare Hendricks’ journal entries for (a) the purchase of the investment, (b) the interest received, and (c) the fair value adjustment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BE17-5
Fairbanks Corporation purchased 400 shares of Sherman Inc. common stock as an available-for-sale investment for $13,200. During the year, Sherman paid a cash dividend of $3.25 per share. At year-end, Sherman stock was selling for $34.50 per share. Prepare Fairbanks’s journal entries to record (a) the purchase of the investment, (b) the dividends received, and (c) the fair value adjustment.
BE17-6
Fairbanks Corporation purchased 400 shares of Sherman Inc. common stock as an investment in Equity Investments (Trading) for $13,200. During the year, Sherman paid a cash dividend of $3.25 per share. At year-end, Sherman stock was selling for $34.50 per share. Prepare Fairbanks’s journal entries to record (a) the purchase of the investment, (b) the dividends received, and (c) the fair value adjustment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculating revenue, cost of sales, expenses and income (loss).
Fill in the blanks in the following separate income statements.Identify any negative amount by putting it in (parentheses).
Business Name
Mark’s, Corp.Phoenix Co.Mike’s BikesCal’s Cars Don’s Dogs
Income StatementIncome StatementIncome StatementIncome Statement Income Statement
For the Year EndedFor the Month EndedFor the Quarter Ended For the Year EndedFor the Month Ended
April 30 2012April 30 2012April 30 2012April 30 2012April 30 2012
Sales 85,000 80,000 25,000 18,000
Cost of Sales
Beginning Inventory 10,000 34,100 3,750 7,000 2,600
Purchases 30,000 32,000 8,000
Goods Available for Sale
Ending Inventory (5,400) (4,500) (6,600)
Cost of Goods Sold 35,000 31,800 5,600
Gross Profit 1,875 45,600
Operating Expenses 9,000 21,300 6,075 2,600 10,000
Net Income 26,900 (4,200) 43,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Preview |
| 1.ACC225 Entire Class/W1/ |
| 2.ACC225 Entire Class/W1/ACC225 Week 1 CheckPoint Financial Statements.doc |
| 3.ACC225 Entire Class/W1/ACC225 Week 1 DQs.doc |
| 4.ACC225 Entire Class/W1/ACC225 Week 1 Exercises Accounting and Business Organizations.zip |
| 5.ACC225 Entire Class/W1/Exercise 1-1.doc |
| 6.ACC225 Entire Class/W1/Exercise 1-4.doc |
| 7.ACC225 Entire Class/W2/ |
| 8.ACC225 Entire Class/W2/ACC225 Week 2 Assignment Preparing Journal Entries and Trial Balances.zip |
| 9.ACC225 Entire Class/W2/ACC225 Week 2 CheckPoint Debits and Credits.zip |
| 10.ACC225 Entire Class/W2/Exercise 2-4.xlsx |
| 11.ACC225 Entire Class/W2/Exercise 2-5.xlsx |
| 12.ACC225 Entire Class/W2/Problem 2-2A.xlsx |
| 13.ACC225 Entire Class/W2/QS 2-3.doc |
| 14.ACC225 Entire Class/W2/QS 2-4.doc |
| 15.ACC225 Entire Class/W2/QS 2-5.doc |
| 16.ACC225 Entire Class/W3/ |
| 17.ACC225 Entire Class/W3/._ACC225 Week 3 DQs.doc |
| 18.ACC225 Entire Class/W3/._Exercise 3-1.doc |
| 19.ACC225 Entire Class/W3/._Exercise 3-7.doc |
| 20.ACC225 Entire Class/W3/._QS 3-1.doc |
| 21.ACC225 Entire Class/W3/._QS 3-9.doc |
| 22.ACC225 Entire Class/W3/ACC225 Week 3 CheckPoint Adjustments and Accrual and Cash Basis Accounting.zip |
| 23.ACC225 Entire Class/W3/ACC225 Week 3 CheckPoint Adjustments and Accrual and Cash Basis Accounting/ |
| 24.ACC225 Entire Class/W3/ACC225 Week 3 CheckPoint Adjustments and Accrual and Cash Basis Accounting/Exercise 3-1.doc |
| 25.ACC225 Entire Class/W3/ACC225 Week 3 CheckPoint Adjustments and Accrual and Cash Basis Accounting/Exercise 3-7.doc |
| 26.ACC225 Entire Class/W3/ACC225 Week 3 CheckPoint Adjustments and Accrual and Cash Basis Accounting/QS 3-1.doc |
| 27.ACC225 Entire Class/W3/ACC225 Week 3 CheckPoint Adjustments and Accrual and Cash Basis Accounting/QS 3-9.doc |
| 28.ACC225 Entire Class/W3/ACC225 Week 3 DQs.doc |
| 29.ACC225 Entire Class/W3/Exercise 3-1.doc |
| 30.ACC225 Entire Class/W3/Exercise 3-7.doc |
| 31.ACC225 Entire Class/W3/QS 3-1.doc |
| 32.ACC225 Entire Class/W3/QS 3-9.doc |
| 33.ACC225 Entire Class/W4/ |
| 34.ACC225 Entire Class/W4/ACC225 Week 4 Assignment Preparing Entries and Statements .zip |
| 35.ACC225 Entire Class/W4/ACC225 Week 4 CheckPoint Preparing Balance Sheets and Statements .zip |
| 36.ACC225 Entire Class/W4/Exercise 4-4.xlsx |
| 37.ACC225 Entire Class/W4/Exercise 4-5.xlsx |
| 38.ACC225 Entire Class/W4/Problem 4-5A.xlsx |
| 39.ACC225 Entire Class/W4/Problem 4-6A.xlsx |
| 40.ACC225 Entire Class/W4/QS 4-2.xlsx |
| 41.ACC225 Entire Class/W5/ |
| 42.ACC225 Entire Class/W5/ACC225 Week 5 CheckPoint Inventory Systems and Calculating Revenues, Expenses, and Income.zip |
| 43.ACC225 Entire Class/W5/ACC225 Week 5 DQs.doc |
| 44.ACC225 Entire Class/W5/Exercise 5-13.xlsx |
| 45.ACC225 Entire Class/W5/Exercise 5-9.xlsx |
| 46.ACC225 Entire Class/W5/QS 5-8.xlsx |
| 47.ACC225 Entire Class/W6/ |
| 48.ACC225 Entire Class/W6/ACC225 Week 6 Assignment Estimating Inventory and Preparing Multiple-Step and Single-Step Income .zip |
| 49.ACC225 Entire Class/W6/ACC225 Week 6 CheckPoint Computing Inventory Balances and Lower of Cost or Market .zip |
| 50.ACC225 Entire Class/W6/Exercise 6-1.xlsx |
| 51.ACC225 Entire Class/W6/Exercise 6-5.xlsx |
| 52.ACC225 Entire Class/W6/Problem 5-4A.xlsx |
| 53.ACC225 Entire Class/W6/Problem 6-1A.xlsx |
| 54.ACC225 Entire Class/W6/Problem 6-6A.xlsx |
| 55.ACC225 Entire Class/W6/Problem 6-6B.xlsx |
| 56.ACC225 Entire Class/W6/QS 6-1.xlsx |
| 57.ACC225 Entire Class/W7/ |
| 58.ACC225 Entire Class/W7/ACC225 Week 7 CheckPoint Accounting Information Systems and Special Journals .zip |
| 59.ACC225 Entire Class/W7/ACC225 Week 7 DQs.doc |
| 60.ACC225 Entire Class/W7/Exercise 7-1.xlsx |
| 61.ACC225 Entire Class/W7/Exercise 7-10.xlsx |
| 62.ACC225 Entire Class/W7/Exercise 7-4.xlsx |
| 63.ACC225 Entire Class/W7/Exercise 7-7.xlsx |
| 64.ACC225 Entire Class/W7/QS 7-1.xlsx |
| 65.ACC225 Entire Class/W7/QS 7-3.xlsx |
| 66.ACC225 Entire Class/W8/ |
| 67.ACC225 Entire Class/W8/ACC225 Week 8 Assignment Internal Control and Bank Reconciliations .zip |
| 68.ACC225 Entire Class/W8/ACC225 Week 8 CheckPoint Internal Control and Bank Reconciliations.zip |
| 69.ACC225 Entire Class/W8/Exercise 8-3.xlsx |
| 70.ACC225 Entire Class/W8/Exercise 8-4.xlsx |
| 71.ACC225 Entire Class/W8/Problem 8-1A.xlsx |
| 72.ACC225 Entire Class/W8/Problem 8-3A.xlsx |
| 73.ACC225 Entire Class/W8/Problem 8-4A.xlsx |
| 74.ACC225 Entire Class/W8/QS 8-6.xlsx |
| 75.ACC225 Entire Class/W9/ |
| 76.ACC225 Entire Class/W9/._ACC225 Week 9 Final Project Comprehensive Problem-Perpetual.xlsx |
| 77.ACC225 Entire Class/W9/ACC225 Week 9 Capstone Discussion Question.doc |
| 78.ACC225 Entire Class/W9/ACC225 Week 9 Final Project Comprehensive Problem-Perpetual.xlsx |
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalize the following merchandising transactions for your company assuming you use:
(a) a periodic inventory system or in a second set of circumstances,
(b) a perpetual inventory system.
1. On April 1 you purchase merchandise for $2,500 on credit with terms of 2/5, n/30, FOB shipping point: invoice dated April 1.
2. On April 5, you pay cash (using a check) for the April 1 purchase.
3. On April 7, you discover and return $200 of defective merchandise purchased on April 1. You receive a cash refund.
4. On April 10, you pay $100 cash for transportation costs with the April 1 purchase.
5. On April 13, you sell merchandise for $2,000 on credit. Your terms are n/30. The merchandise had originally cost $1,000.
6. On April 16, your customer returned $200 of the merchandise from the April 13 transaction The merchandise had a $100 cost.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
All of the company’s accounting work is completed through the end of September and its ledgers show September 30 balances.
During October the company experiences the following transactions and events.
Terms for all credit sales are 2/10, n/30 unless otherwise stated differently.
Consider purchase payment discounts to be a reduction in inventory.
When recording a check, the check total is listed on the journal line, not each part. Review your Demonstration Problems.
XINEF COMPANY
Inv. No.Check
Date DescriptionNameor DateNo.TermsAmount
Oct1 Paid rent (80% selling space, 20% office space)Realty Management LLC101 $4,000
2 Sold merchandise on credit (cost $4,400)Harker Company11012/10, n/60 6,600
2 Issued credit memo on returned merch.Buckeye, Inc. Sep. 28 200
Total selling price (gross)Buckeye, Inc. Sep. 28 4,800
3 Received credit memo on returned merch.Dallas Products Sep. 29 800
4 Purchased merchandise on creditAmes Supply Co. Oct 4 n/10 EOM 35,000
Purchased store supplies on creditAmes Supply Co. Oct 4 n/10 EOM 600
Purchased office supplies on creditAmes Supply Co. Oct 4 n/10 EOM 100
5 Received payment less discount and returnBuckeye, Inc. Sep. 28 2/10 EOM
8 Paid inv. less 2 % discount and Oct 3 returnDallas Products Sep. 29 102
9 Sold store supplies for cash at cost 400
10 Purchased office equipment on creditAmes Supply Co. Oct 10 n/10 EOM 4,000
11 Received payment less discountHarker Company Oct 2
11 Purchased merchandise on creditGarland, Inc. Oct 10 2/10, n/30 9,000
12 Received credit memo on returned merch.Ames Supply Co. Oct 10 800
15 Check issued for sales salariesPayroll103 5,000
Check issued for office salariesPayroll103 3,000
15 Cash sales for first half of month (cost $40,000) 60,000
16 Sold merchandise on credit (cost $2,000)Harker Company11022/10, n/60 4,000
17 Purchased merchandise on creditNorwalk Corp. Oct 14 2/10, n/60 15,000
19 Paid invoice less discountGarland, Inc. Oct 10 104
22 Sold merchandise on credit (cost $5,000)Sigma Services11032/10, n/60 7,000
23 Paid invoice less discountNorwalk Corp. Oct 14 105
24 Purchased merchandise on creditAmes Supply Co. Oct 23 n/10 EOM 8,000
Purchased store supplies on creditAmes Supply Co. Oct 23 n/10 EOM 600
Purchased office supplies on creditAmes Supply Co. Oct 23 n/10 EOM 300
25 Purchased merchandise on creditDallas Products Oct 23 2/10, n/30 3,000
26 Sold merchandise on credit (cost $8,000)Static Corp.11042/10, n/60 14,000
26 Paid Sep electric billUnited Power106 1,200
29 Issued check to owner for personal useMark G107 7,000
30 Received payment less discountSigma Services Oct 22
30 Check issued for sales salariesPayroll108 6,000
Check issued for office salariesPayroll108 3,000
31 Cash sales for second half of month (cost $45,000) 70,000
Additional information:
a. The annual insurance premium is $3,600; the policy runs from October through September.
b. Ending store supplies inventory 2,500
c. Ending office supplies inventory 500
d. Estimated depreciation of store equipment 600
e. Estimated depreciation of office equipment 300
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Preview |
| 1.ACC230/W 1/ |
| 2.ACC230/W 1/ACC230 W 1 Assessing Financial Statements.doc |
| 3.ACC230/W 1/ACC230 W 1 DQ 1.doc |
| 4.ACC230/W 1/ACC230 W 1 DQ 2.doc |
| 5.ACC230/W 2/ |
| 6.ACC230/W 2/ACC230 W 2 Differentiating Depreciation Methods.doc |
| 7.ACC230/W 2/ACC230 W 2 Lucent Technologies Case.doc |
| 8.ACC230/W 3/ |
| 9.ACC230/W 3/ACC230 W 3 DQ 1.doc |
| 10.ACC230/W 3/ACC230 W 3 DQ 2.doc |
| 11.ACC230/W 3/ACC230 W 3 Preparing an Income Statement.doc |
| 12.ACC230/W 4/ |
| 13.ACC230/W 4/ACC230 W 4 Analyzing and Income Statement.doc |
| 14.ACC230/W 4/ACC230 W 4 Web Sites Search.doc |
| 15.ACC230/W 5/ |
| 16.ACC230/W 5/ACC230 W 5 DQ 1.doc |
| 17.ACC230/W 5/ACC230 W 5 DQ 2.doc |
| 18.ACC230/W 5/ACC230 W 5 Preparing a Statement of Cash Flows.doc |
| 19.ACC230/W 6/ |
| 20.ACC230/W 6/ACC230 W 6 Analyzing Statements of Cash Flows.doc |
| 21.ACC230/W 6/ACC230 W 6 Candela Corporation Case.doc |
| 22.ACC230/W 7/ |
| 23.ACC230/W 7/ACC230 W 7 DQ 1.doc |
| 24.ACC230/W 7/ACC230 W 7 DQ 2.doc |
| 25.ACC230/W 7/ACC230 W 7 Nortel Networks Case.doc |
| 26.ACC230/W 8/ |
| 27.ACC230/W 8/ACC230 W 8 Analyzing Financial Data.xls |
| 28.ACC230/W 8/ACC230 W 8 Interpreting Financial Ratios.doc |
| 29.ACC230/W 8/ACC230 W 8 Presenting to Stakeholders.doc |
| 30.ACC230/W 9/ |
| 31.ACC230/W 9/ACC230 W 9 Capstone Discussion Question.doc |
| 32.ACC230/W 9/ACC230 W 9 Final Presentation.ppt |
| 33.ACC230/W 9/ACC230 W 9 Final Project Evaluating Financial Health.doc |
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1 of 38
Where would the total of all of a company’s customer accounts in the accounts receivable ledger at year-end be found?
The cost of goods sold account in the general ledger
The accounts payable account in the general ledger
The sales account in the general ledger
The accounts receivable account in the general ledger
Question 2 of 38
Which of the following is NOT true of an effective accounting system?
The system must accommodate changes in the business over time.
The system must provide minimal benefits at whatever cost is necessary.
The system must work smoothly with your personnel and organizational structure.
The system has internal controls to help the owner(s) control the business
.
Question 3 of 38
Which of the following are characteristics of an effective manual accounting system, but NOT characteristics of an effective computerized accounting system?
Flexibility
Control
Compatibility
All of these features are needed by both accounting systems.
Question 4 of 38
Which of the following is generally used by small businesses?
QuickBooks or Peachtree
SAP, Oracle, or PeopleSoft
Both of the above
Neither of the above
Question 5 of 38
Which of the following is a spreadsheet?
PowerPoint
Word
Access
Excel
Question 6 of 38
A check was written by a business for $329, but recorded in the cash payments journal as $239. How would this error be included on the bank reconciliation?
A deduction on the book side
An addition on the book side
An addition on the bank side
A deduction on the bank side
Question 7 of 38
Which of the following items does NOT cause a difference in the bank balance and the book balance on a bank reconciliation?
Deposits in transit
Outstanding checks
Canceled checks
Nonsufficient funds checks
Question 8 of 38
Which of the following describes the internal control component “control procedures?”
A company must identify its risks.
Control procedures are designed to ensure that the business’s goals are achieved.
Control procedures are the “tone at the top” of the business.
Internal auditors monitor company controls to safeguard assets and external auditors monitor the controls to ensure that the accounting records are accurate.
Question 9 of 38
At the West Texas Clothing Store, the same employee who sold merchandise rings up returned merchandise and refunds the cash. Which internal control procedure is being violated by West Texas Clothing Store?
A company must identify its risks.
The “tone at the top” requires that the owner and managers set a good example.
External auditors will monitor internal controls.
All transactions must be properly authorized.
Question 10 of 38
Which of the following is a common tactic to overcome internal controls?
Firewalls
Separation of duties
Collusion
Encryption
Question 11 of 38
Table 9.1
The following information is from the 2008 records of Armadillo Camera Shop:
Accounts Receivable, December 31, 2008$20,000(debit)
Allowance for uncollectible accounts, December 31, 2008, prior to adjustment600(debit)
Net credit sales for 200895,000
Accounts written off as uncollectible during 20087,000
Cash sales during 200827,000
Refer to Table 9.1. Uncollectible accounts expense is estimated by the aging-of-accounts-receivable method. Management estimates that $2,850 of accounts receivable will be uncollectible. Which of the following will be the amount of Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts after adjustment?
$3,450
$2,850
$7,000
$2,250
Question 12 of 38
What is the maturity value of a note?
The principal amount plus interest due
The principal amount minus total interest due
The principal amount times the interest rate
The face amount of the note
Question 13 of 38
The allowance for uncollectible accounts currently has a credit balance of $200. The company’s management estimates that 2.5% of net credit sales will be uncollectible. Net credit sales are $115,000. What will be the amount of allowance for uncollectible accounts reported on the balance sheet?
$3,075
$2,675
$2,875
$3,275
Question 14 of 38
Goodwill of $20,000 was recorded upon the purchase of Smith Repair Parts. The company has been very successful and has increased in value during its first year of operation under its new management. How much amortization should be recorded for the first year?
$-0-
$2,000
$4,000
$1,000
Question 15 of 38
Which of the following would be expensed rather than capitalized?
Oil change and lubrication
Major engine overhaul
Addition to storage capacity
Modification for new use
Question 16 of 38
In which of the following periods should the expense for warranty costs be recorded?
The period when the product is repaired or replaced
The period when cash is collected for the sale of the product
The period when cash is paid to repair or replace the product
The period when the product is sold
Question 17 of 38
A company issues two thousand $1,000 bonds at 98. Which of the following is the entry to record this transaction?
A
B
C
D
Question 18 of 38
How much cash will be received if a corporation issues $6,000,000 of 10% bonds at 102?
$6,012,000
$6,000,000
$6,120,000
$5,880,000
Question 19 of 38
Which of the following statements about the information included on a statement of cash flows is TRUE?
The statement of cash flows contains information about the business’s percentage change in each item of revenue and expense.
The statement of cash flows contains information about the differences between net income and additions to retained earnings.
The statement of cash flows contains information about stock splits and stock dividends distributed by the company.
The statement of cash flows contains information about the business’s ability to generate positive cash flows in future periods.
Question 20 of 38
Case 16.1
A company uses the indirect method to prepare the statement of cash flows. It presents the following amounts on its December 31, 2007, financial statements.
December 31, 2006December 31, 2007
Accounts receivable$100,000$110,000
Cost of goods sold560,000
Sales revenue830,000
Accounts payable*67,00075,000
Inventory105,00086,000
Salary payable10,00013,000
Salary expense45,00049,000
*Relates solely to the acquisition of inventory
Refer to Case 16.1. What will appear in the operating activities section related to inventory?
The decrease of $19,000 will be subtracted from net income.
The decrease of $19,000 will be added to net income.
The decrease of $19,000 will be added to cost of goods sold.
The decrease of $19,000 will be subtracted from cost of goods sold.
Question 21 of 38
Which of the following is generally the base amount when performing vertical analysis of a balance sheet?
A net asset is generally the base amount when performing vertical analysis of a balance sheet.
Stockholders’ equity is generally the base amount when performing vertical analysis of a balance sheet.
Total liabilities is generally the base amount when performing vertical analysis of a balance sheet.
Total assets is generally the base amount when performing vertical analysis of a balance sheet.
Question 22 of 38
Case 17.3
The following is a summary of information presented on the income statement of HR Flowers for December 31, 2007.
Account20072006
Net sales revenue$487,000100.00%$500,000
Cost of goods sold400,00082.14%395,000
Gross profit157,00032.24%105,000
Selling and general expenses70,00014.37%50,000
Net income before income tax expense87,00017.86%55,000
Income tax expense24,0004.93%16,500
Net income$ 63,00012.94%$ 38,500
Refer to Case 17.3. What would vertical analysis report with respect to 2007 net sales revenue?
Vertical analysis would report a 2.60% decrease in net sales revenue.
Vertical analysis would report cost of goods sold as 79.19% of net sales revenue.
Vertical analysis would report a dividend yield of $8.20.
Vertical analysis would report net sales revenue as the 100% base amount.
Question 23 of 38
A company received a bank statement showing a balance of $62,300. Reconciling items were outstanding checks of $1,450 and a deposit in transit of $8,500. What is the company’s adjusted bank balance?
$70,850
$72,250
$60,850
$69,350
Question 24 of 38
Which of the following are the two methods of accounting for uncollectible receivables?
The direct write-off method and the liability method
The asset method and the sales method
The allowance method and the liability method
The allowance method and the direct write-off method
Question 25 of 38
Table 10.1
On January 1, 2011, Zane Manufacturing Company purchased a machine for $40,000. The company expects to use the machine a total of 24,000 hours over the next 6 years. The estimated sales price of the machine at the end of 6 years is $4,000. The company used the machine 8,000 hours in 2011 and 12,000 in 2012.
Refer to Table 10.1. What is depreciation expense for 2012 if the company uses units-of-production depreciation?
$18,000
$6,000
$10,000
$9,000
Question 26 of 38
Lowery Food Market owns refrigeration equipment that cost $10,000 and has accumulated depreciation of $7,400. The company exchanges the equipment for new equipment worth $12,000. In addition to the old equipment, the company pays $10,000 for the new equipment. Which of the following is the correct entry to record the transaction?
Refrigeration equipment 12,000 Accumulated depreciation 7,400 Loss on exchange of equipment 600 Cash 10,000 Refrigeration equipment 10,000
Refrigeration equipment 10,000 Accumulated depreciation 10,000 Gain on exchange of equipment 600 Cash 12,000 Refrigeration equipment 7,400
Refrigeration equipment 12,000 Accumulated depreciation 7,400 Cash 10,000 Refrigeration equipment 9,400
None of the above
Question 27 of 38
Which of the following is the type of account that represents taxes withheld from employees’ gross pay?
Asset
Expense
Contra asset
Liability
Question 28 of 38
In which journal would a return of merchandise purchased on account be recorded?
The sales journal
The cash payments journal
The cash receipts journal
The purchases journal
The general journal
Question 29 of 38
Which of the following is a method of establishing control over collections of accounts receivable?
Designate an authorized check signer.
Allow no one but the bookkeeper to handle cash.
Set up a petty cash fund.
Establish a bank lock-box system.
Question 30 of 38
Case 16.1
A company uses the indirect method to prepare the statement of cash flows. It presents the following amounts on its December 31, 2007, financial statements.
December 31, 2006December 31, 2007
Accounts receivable$100,000$110,000
Cost of goods sold560,000
Sales revenue830,000
Accounts payable*67,00075,000
Inventory105,00086,000
Salary payable10,00013,000
Salary expense45,00049,000
*Relates solely to the acquisition of inventory
Refer to Case 16.1. What will appear in the operating activities section related to accounts payable?
The increase of $8,000 will be added to net income.
The increase of $8,000 will be subtracted from cost of goods sold.
The increase of $8,000 will be added to cost of goods sold.
The increase of $8,000 will be subtracted from net income.
Question 31 of 38
Current liabilities are obligations due within:
one month or within the company’s normal operating cycle, if it is shorter than one month.
one month or within the company’s normal operating cycle, if it is longer than one month.
one year or within the company’s normal operating cycle, if it is shorter than one year.
one year or within the company’s normal operating cycle, if it is longer than one year.
Question 32 of 38
Current liabilities fall into two categories, which are referred to as:
contingent liabilities and contra-liabilities.
unearned liabilities and accrued liabilities.
liabilities of a known amount and estimated liabilities.
contingent liabilities and noncontingent liabilities.
Question 33 of 38
Kosovo Company has $45 million in long-term debt, payable in annual installments of $15 million. How much of the debt should be reported as current and as long-term liabilities?
Current Liabilities
$15 million Long-Term Liabilities 30000
Current Liabilities
$7.5 millionLong-Term Liabilities $40 million
Current Liabilities
$0 millionLong-Term Liabilities $45 million
Current Liabilities
$45 million Long-Term Liabilities $0 million
Question 34 of 38
Potential liabilities that depend on future events arising out of past events are called:
estimated liabilities.
contingent liabilities.
actual liabilities.
long-term liabilities.
Question 35 of 38
Which of the following statements about capital leases is incorrect?
A capital lease is non-cancellable.
A capital lease is a long-term financial obligation.
Under a capital lease, the lessee’s books do not report the leased asset.
Under a capital lease, the lessee records a lease liability at the beginning of the lease term.
Question 36 of 38
Bonds with a face value of $150,000 are issued at 98. The statement of cash flows would report a:
cash inflow of $3,000 in the investing activities section.
cash inflow of $3,000 in the financing activities section.
cash inflow of $147,000 in the financing activities section.
cash inflow of $147,000 in the investing activities section.
Question 37 of 38
Which of the following is not an advantage of forming a corporation, as opposed to organizing as a partnership or proprietorship?
A corporation is a separate legal entity distinct from its owners.
Ease of transferring ownership
Limited liability of stockholders
Limited taxation
Question 38 of 38
Limited liability of a corporation means that:
shareholders are not responsible for the decisions of management.
the corporation is not required to pay dividends.
a shareholders’ potential loss is limited to their investment in the corporation.
the corporation is not required to earn net income.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1 of 37
Kelly Petroleum Products owns furniture that was purchased for $19,600. Accumulated depreciation is $17,300. The furniture was sold for $3,800. Which of the following is the correct entry to record the transaction?
Furniture19,600
Cash2,700
Gain on sale of furniture5,000
Accumulated depreciation17,300
Furniture19,600
Gain on sale of furniture3,800
Cash2,700
Accumulated depreciation17,300
Accumulated depreciation17,300
Cash3,800
Furniture31,100
Accumulated depreciation17,300
Cash3,800
Gain on sale of furniture1,500
Furniture19,600
Question 2 of 37
If a corporation issues only one class of stock, it must be:
common.
contributed.
either common or preferred.
preferred.
Question 3 of 37
The price that the stockholder pays to acquire stock from the corporation is the:
stated price.
issue price.
authorized price.
par price.
Question 4 of 37
Treasury stock is a(n):
asset account.
liability account.
contra-equity account.
contra-asset account.
Question 5 of 37
A company may declare a stock split to:
reduce total equity.
decrease the market value of the stock.
avoid playing a cash dividend.
reduce retained earnings.
Question 6 of 37
The stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet for Minturn Mine Corporation is shown below:
Paid-in capital
Preferred stock, 7%, $50 par value, 10,000 shares authorized, 7,000 shares issued, redemption value $56 per share$350,000
Paid-in capital in excess of par value-preferred50,000
Common stock, $10 par value, 50,000 shares authorized, 18,000 shares issued180,000
Paid-in capital in excess of par value-common20,000
Total Paid-in capital$600,000
Retained earnings300,000
Total stockholders equity$900,000
Assume there are 2 years’ dividends in arrears on the preferred stock, including the current year. The book value per share for preferred stock is:
$66.50.
$57.
$60.50.
$63.
Question 7 of 37
An investor who wishes to know whether a company is successful in using its assets to earn income for the individuals who finance the business should review the:
earnings per share.
return on assets.
times-interest ratio earned.
return on equity.
Question 8 of 37
Return on equity is a ratio that:
a) cannot be calculated if the company has preferred stock in addition to common stock.
b) is calculated by dividing net income plus preferred dividends by average common stockholders’ equity.
c) shows the relationship between net income available for common stockholders and average common stockholders’ equity.
d) Both A and B are correct.
Question 9 of 37
Which of the following are included in the cost of land?
The cost of paving
The cost of fencing
The cost of clearing the land
The cost of outdoor lighting
Question 10 of 37
Which of the following is included in the cost of a plant asset?
Amounts paid to ready the asset for its intended use
The purchase price of the plant asset
The taxes paid
All of the above
Question 11 of 37
Which of the following depreciation methods allocates an equal amount of depreciation to each year?
Straight-line
Declining-balance
Units-of-production
All of the above
Question 12 of 37
Which of the following depreciation methods allocates a fixed amount of depreciation to each miles driven, copies made, or some other number of components?
Straight-line
Declining-balance
Units-of-production
All of the above
Question 13 of 37
Which of the following depreciation methods writes off more depreciation near the start of an asset’s life than in later years?
Units-of-production
Straight-line
Declining-balance
All of the above
Question 14 of 37
Which of the following is the purpose of accumulated depreciation?
Accumulated depreciation’s purpose is to provide details about the cost expiration of natural assets.
Accumulated depreciation’s purpose is to provide details about the cost expiration of plant assets.
Accumulated depreciation is an expense.
Accumulated depreciation’s purpose is to provide details about the cost expiration of intangible assets.
Question 15 of 37
Table 10.1
On January 1, 2011, Zane Manufacturing Company purchased a machine for $40,000. The company expects to use the machine a total of 24,000 hours over the next 6 years. The estimated sales price of the machine at the end of 6 years is $4,000. The company used the machine 8,000 hours in 2011 and 12,000 in 2012.
Refer to Table 10.1. What is depreciation expense for 2011, if the company uses double-declining balance depreciation?
$6,667
$6,000
$12,000
$13,333
Question 16 of 37
Table 10.1
On January 1, 2011, Zane Manufacturing Company purchased a machine for $40,000. The company expects to use the machine a total of 24,000 hours over the next 6 years. The estimated sales price of the machine at the end of 6 years is $4,000. The company used the machine 8,000 hours in 2011 and 12,000 in 2012.
Refer to Table 10.1. What is depreciation expense for 2012, if the company uses double-declining balance depreciation?
$8,889
$6,000
$13,333
$10,000
Question 17 of 37
A company purchased a computer on July 1, 2009. The computer has an estimated useful life of 5 years and will have no salvage value. It is estimated that the computer can be used for 5,000 hours. The computer was used for 450 hours during 2009. If the goal is to reduce taxable income to the lowest amount, which method should be elected and how much depreciation can be deducted in 2009?
Double declining-balance, $2,000
Straight-line, $1,000
Units-of-production, $900
None of the above
Question 18 of 37
Which of the following items is included in the journal entry if a company sells equipment at a price greater than its book value?
A credit to accumulated depreciation
A debit to equipment for its book value
A credit to gain on sale of equipment
A debit to loss on sale of equipment
Question 19 of 37
Which of the following items is included in the journal entry if a company sells equipment at a price less than its book value?
A debit to equipment for its book value
A credit to gain on sale of equipment
A credit to accumulated depreciation
A debit to loss on sale of equipment
Question 20 of 37
Which of the following items should be depleted?
Natural resources
Land
Intangible property
Tangible property, plant, and equipment other than land
Question 21 of 37
Which of the following is the proper accounting treatment for a purchased patent?
A purchased patent must be capitalized and amortized over 70 years or less.
A purchased patent must be capitalized and amortized over 20 years or less.
A purchased patent must be expensed.
A purchased patent must be capitalized and expensed each year to the extent that the value has declined.
Question 22 of 37
Case 17.4
The following is a summary of information presented on the income statements of Haley Publications and Johnston Publications for December 31, 2007.
Haley PublicationsJohnston Publications
Account2007%2007%
Net sales revenue$487,000100.00%$500,000100.00%
Cost of goods sold400,00082.14%395,00079.00%
Gross profit87,00017.86%105,00021.00%
Selling and general expenses30,0006.16%50,00010.00%
Income from operations57,00011.70%55,00011.00%
Income tax expense17,1003.51%16,5003.30%
Net income$39,9008.19%$38,5007.70%
Refer to Case 17.4. Which company has the better relationship between gross profit and net sales revenue?
The companies have the same relationship between gross profit and net sales revenue.
Haley Company has the better relationship between gross profit and net sales revenue.
Johnston Company has the better relationship between gross profit and net sales revenue.
It is impossible to determine which company has the better relationship between gross profit and net sales revenue using the information presented.
Question 23 of 37
Which of the following types of analysis include common-size financial statements?
Common-size financial statements are a type of ratio analysis.
Common-size financial statements are a type of trend analysis.
Common-size financial statements are a type of vertical analysis.
Common-size financial statements are a type of horizontal analysis.
Question 24 of 37
Which of the following is the formula to compute day’s sales in receivable?
The formula is net credit sales / average inventory.
The formula is net credit sales / average net accounts receivable.
The formula is average net accounts receivable / one day’s sales.
The formula is cost of goods sold / average inventory.
Question 25 of 37
Which of the following is the formula to compute the price/earnings ratio?
The formula is (total stockholders’ equity preferred equity) / number of shares of common stock outstanding.
The formula is (net income preferred dividends) / number of shares of common stock outstanding.
The formula is market price per share of common stock / earnings per share.
The formula is annual dividend per share of common stock / market price per share of common stock.
Question 26 of 37
Case 17.5
Bevington Studio reported the following income statement and balance sheet amounts on December 31, 2007.
20072006
Net sales revenue (all credit)$950,000
Cost of goods sold630,000
Gross profit320,000
Selling and general expenses230,000
Interest expense20,000
Net income$70,000
Current assets$60,000$55,000
Long-term assets465,000445,000
Total assets – 12/31$525,000$500,000
Current liabilities$25,000$20,000
Long-term liabilities105,000205,000
Common stockholders equity – 12/31395,000275,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity$525,000$500,000
Inventory and prepaid expenses account for $20,000 of the 2007 current assets.
Average inventory for 2007 is $15,000.
Average net accounts receivable for 2007 is $30,000.
Average one-day sales are $3,150.
There are 7,000 shares of common stock outstanding.
Total dividends paid during 2007 were $140,000.
The market price per share of common stock is $21.
Refer to Case 17.5. What is the debt ratio for 2007?
.55
.25
.29
.71
Question 27 of 37
Case 17.5
Bevington Studio reported the following income statement and balance sheet amounts on December 31, 2007.
20072006
Net sales revenue (all credit)$950,000
Cost of goods sold630,000
Gross profit320,000
Selling and general expenses230,000
Interest expense20,000
Net income$70,000
Current assets$60,000$55,000
Long-term assets465,000445,000
Total assets – 12/31$525,000$500,000
Current liabilities$25,000$20,000
Long-term liabilities105,000205,000
Common stockholders equity – 12/31395,000275,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity$525,000$500,000
Inventory and prepaid expenses account for $20,000 of the 2007 current assets.
Average inventory for 2007 is $15,000.
Average net accounts receivable for 2007 is $30,000.
Average one-day sales are $3,150.
There are 7,000 shares of common stock outstanding.
Total dividends paid during 2007 were $140,000.
The market price per share of common stock is $21.
Refer to Case 17.5. What is the company’s times-interest-earned ratio?
31.5 times
47.5 times
4.5 times
16.0 times
Question 28 of 37
Case 17.5
Bevington Studio reported the following income statement and balance sheet amounts on December 31, 2007.
20072006
Net sales revenue (all credit)$950,000
Cost of goods sold630,000
Gross profit320,000
Selling and general expenses230,000
Interest expense20,000
Net income$70,000
Current assets$60,000$55,000
Long-term assets465,000445,000
Total assets – 12/31$525,000$500,000
Current liabilities$25,000$20,000
Long-term liabilities105,000205,000
Common stockholders equity – 12/31395,000275,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity$525,000$500,000
Inventory and prepaid expenses account for $20,000 of the 2007 current assets.
Average inventory for 2007 is $15,000.
Average net accounts receivable for 2007 is $30,000.
Average one-day sales are $3,150.
There are 7,000 shares of common stock outstanding.
Total dividends paid during 2007 were $140,000.
The market price per share of common stock is $21.
Refer to Case 17.5. What is the company’s rate of return on net sales?
.063
.111
.219
.074
Question 29 of 37
Case 17.5
Bevington Studio reported the following income statement and balance sheet amounts on December 31, 2007.
20072006
Net sales revenue (all credit)$950,000
Cost of goods sold630,000
Gross profit320,000
Selling and general expenses230,000
Interest expense20,000
Net income$70,000
Current assets$60,000$55,000
Long-term assets465,000445,000
Total assets – 12/31$525,000$500,000
Current liabilities$25,000$20,000
Long-term liabilities105,000205,000
Common stockholders equity – 12/31395,000275,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity$525,000$500,000
Inventory and prepaid expenses account for $20,000 of the 2007 current assets.
Average inventory for 2007 is $15,000.
Average net accounts receivable for 2007 is $30,000.
Average one-day sales are $3,150.
There are 7,000 shares of common stock outstanding.
Total dividends paid during 2007 were $140,000.
The market price per share of common stock is $21.
Refer to Case 17.5. What is the company’s rate of return on common stockholders’ equity?
.171
.209
.133
.269
Question 30 of 37
Case 17.5
Bevington Studio reported the following income statement and balance sheet amounts on December 31, 2007.
20072006
Net sales revenue (all credit)$950,000
Cost of goods sold630,000
Gross profit320,000
Selling and general expenses230,000
Interest expense20,000
Net income$70,000
Current assets$60,000$55,000
Long-term assets465,000445,000
Total assets – 12/31$525,000$500,000
Current liabilities$25,000$20,000
Long-term liabilities105,000205,000
Common stockholders equity – 12/31395,000275,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity$525,000$500,000
Inventory and prepaid expenses account for $20,000 of the 2007 current assets.
Average inventory for 2007 is $15,000.
Average net accounts receivable for 2007 is $30,000.
Average one-day sales are $3,150.
There are 7,000 shares of common stock outstanding.
Total dividends paid during 2007 were $140,000.
The market price per share of common stock is $21.
Refer to Case 17.5. What is the company’s earnings per share?
$12.88
$45.71
$42.86
$10.00
Question 31 of 37
The statement of cash flows is designed to fulfill all of the following purposes, except to:
evaluate management decisions.
show the relationship of net income to changes in the company’s cash.
assess the collectability of accounts receivable.
help predict future cash flows.
Question 32 of 37
The declaration of dividends by the board of directors would be reported on a statement of cash flows as:
a cash inflow under the financing activities.
a cash outflow under the investing activities.
a cash outflow under the financing activities.
nothing-this activity would not be reported on a statement of cash flows.
Question 33 of 37
Which of the following would be reported on a statement of cash flows as a financing activity?
Interest paid on bonds payable
Purchase of treasury stock
Distribution of stock dividend
All of the above
Question 34 of 37
Under the indirect method of preparing a statement of cash flows, cash disbursed for the acquisition of a plant asset is:
added in the investing activities section.
subtracted in the investing activities section.
added in the financing activities section.
subtracted in the operating activities section.
Question 35 of 37
Porter Business Products acquired equipment on January 1, 2008 for $470,000. The equipment has an estimated useful life of 5 years and an estimated residual value of $30,000. The equipment is expected to produce 150,000 units. During 2008, the equipment produced 24,000 units and during 2009, the equipment produced 60,000 units. Calculate depreciation expense for 2008 and 2009 using the straight-line method.
Depreciation Method20082009
Straight-line Double-decllining balance Units-of-production
$88,000; $88,000
$188,000; $112,800
$70,320; $175,800
Question 36 of 37
Perform a horizontal analysis of current liabilities on the following company’s balance sheet. Which of the following is the correct answer if both the amount and the percentage of change are calculated.
Change
Account20072006 Amount Percent
Current assets$121,000$100,000
Accounts receivable117,000125,000
Merchandise inventory70,00085,000
Current liabilities63,50050,000
Long-term liabilities100,000100,000
Common stock50,00050,000
Retained earnings94,500110,000
$-15,500 and -14.1%
$13,500 and 27.0%
$-13,500 and -27.0%
$21,000 and 21.0%
Question 37 of 37
The following data is provided for last year: Net income was $210,000. Current receivables and prepaid expenses increased by $10,000 and $2,000, respectively. Current payables decreased by $8,000. Under the indirect method, the cash flows from operating activities would be:
$190,000.
$206,000.
$214,000.
$230,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1 of 38
Which of the following is a correct accounting equation?
Assets + Revenue = Liabilities + Expenses
Assets + Liabilities = Owner’s equity
Assets + Revenue = Owner’s equity
Assets = Liabilities + Owner’s equity
Question 2 of 38
Which of the following financial statements lists the entity’s assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity as of a specific date?
income statement
balance sheet
statement of owner’s equity
statement of cash flows
Question 3 of 38
David has decided to open an auto-detailing business. He will pick up an automobile from the client, take it to his parents’ garage, detail it, and return it to the client. If he does all of the work himself and takes no legal steps to form a special organization, which type of business organization, in effect, has he chosen?
corporation
partnership
limited liability company
proprietorship
Question 4 of 38
Net income is $29, 000. Beginning owner’s equity is $34, 000. Ending owner’s equity is $55, 000. What were cash withdrawals?
$60, 000
$18, 000
$ 5, 000
$ 8, 000
Question 5 of 38
Accounting information may be generated for a variety of purposes. The key product(s) of accounting is (are) which of the following documents?
financial statements
work papers
remittance advices
spreadsheets
Question 6 of 38
A business purchased $200 of supplies on account and recorded the following journal entry:
Supplies200
Accounts payable200
SuppliesAccounts Payable
SuppliesAccounts Payable
SuppliesAccounts Payable
SuppliesAccounts Payable
Question 7 of 38
Which of the following is a method used to detect errors when the two columns of the trial balance are NOT equal?
Compute the difference in the columns and search the trial balance for a transposition if the difference is evenly divisible by 9.
Compute the difference in the columns, divide the difference between total debits and total credits by 2 and search for the amount in the trial balance.
Compute the difference in the columns and search the trial balance for the missing amount.
All of the above are suggested methods for detecting errors.
Question 8 of 38
Which of the following journal entries would be recorded if a business received cash of $1000 on account for services performed at an earlier date?
Cash1,000
Service Revenue1,000
Accounts Receivable1,000
Service Revenue1,000
Service Revenue1,000
Accounts Receivable1,000
Cash1,000
Accounts Receivable1,000
Question 9 of 38
Which of the following statements about revenue is correct?
Revenues decrease owner’s equity, so a revenue account’s normal balance is a credit balance.
Revenues decrease owner’s equity, so a revenue account’s normal balance is a debit balance.
Revenues increase owner’s equity, so a revenue account’s normal balance is a credit balance.
Revenues increase owner’s equity, so a revenue account’s normal balance is a debit balance.
Question 10 of 38
Which of the following statements about expenses is correct?
Expenses decrease owner’s equity, so an expense account’s normal balance is a credit balance.
Expenses increase owner’s equity, so an expense account’s normal balance is a credit balance.
Expenses increase owner’s equity, so an expense account’s normal balance is a debit balance.
Expenses decrease owner’s equity, so an expense account’s normal balance is a debit balance.
Question 11 of 38
If a company is using the accrual method of accounting, when is revenue recorded?
When services are rendered, even though cash may be received at a later date.
When cash is received, even though services may be rendered at a later date.
Only when cash is received at the completion of the services.
Only when cash is received after the completion of the services.
Question 12 of 38
Under which of the following methods of accounting is an expense recorded when it is incurred, regardless of when cash is paid?
Receivable
Deferral
Cash
Accrual
Question 13 of 38
The accountant for Hobson Electrical Repair Company failed to make an adjusting entry to record $5,000 of unpaid salaries for the last two weeks of the year. Which of the following is true?
Total revenue is overstated.
Total revenue is understated.
Total expenses are overstated.
Total expenses are understated.
Question 14 of 38
Which of the following accounts would appear in the Income Statement credit column on the work sheet?
Prepaid insurance
Unearned service revenue
Depreciation expense
Service revenue earned
Question 15 of 38
Totals of various columns from the worksheet are shown below. What is the net income or loss?
Income StatementBalance Sheet
Debit
$8,500Credit
$6,750Debit
$4,300Credit
$6,050
Net income of $4,300
Net income of $1,750
Net loss of $1,750
Net loss of $4,300
Question 16 of 38
Revenues total $10,200. Expenses total $7,300. Owner s withdrawals total $2,600. What is the balance in the Income Summary account prior to closing net income or loss to the owner s capital account?
Credit balance of $300
Balance of $0
Debit balance of $2,900
Credit balance of $2,900
Question 17 of 38
Which of the following is NOT a long-term asset?
Accounts receivable
Buildings
Land
Equipment
Question 18 of 38
Which of the following correctly describes the rate of inventory turnover?
The rate of inventory turnover indicates how many days it takes from the time an order is received to the day it is shipped.
The rate of inventory turnover indicates how quickly inventory is received from the supplier after the order is placed.
The rate of inventory turnover indicates how many days it takes the inventory to travel between the seller’s warehouse and the buyer’s warehouse.
The rate of inventory turnover indicates how rapidly inventory is sold.
Question 19 of 38
Which of the following statements concerning the Inventory account is true?
a) The Inventory account is used only for goods purchased for resale.
b) Inventory is an asset until it is sold.
c) The Inventory account is used for goods purchased for resale and for supplies to be used by the business.
d) Both A and B are true.
Question 20 of 38
Ending inventory for the current accounting period is overstated by $2,700. What effect will this error have on cost of goods sold and net income?
Cost of Goods SoldNet Income
Option A)UnderstatedOverstated
Option B)UnderstatedUnderstated
Option C)OverstatedUnderstated
Option B)OverstatedOverstated
A
B
C
D
Question 21 of 38
Ending inventory for the current period is understated. What effect will this error have on owner’s equity?
Owner’s equity will be overstated at the end of the current period and understated at the end of the next period.
Owner’s equity will be overstated at the end of the current period, but is will be correct at the end of the next period.
Owner’s equity will be overstated at the end of the current period and overstated at the end of the next period.
Owner’s equity will be understated at the end of the current period, but it will be correct at the end of the next period.
Question 22 of 38
Table 1.3
The following is a list of account balances (all except owner’s equity) for Wilson Mowing Company, as of December 31 of the first year of operation:
Accounts receivable$2,500
Accounts payable3,500
Salary expense4,500
Repairs expense800
Truck8,500
Equipment6,300
Notes payable8,200
Cash6,800
Supplies expense1,600
Service revenue31,900
Gasoline expense3,800
Salary payable200
The owner, J.D. Wilson, invested $3, 000 at the beginning of the year and withdrew $12, 000 during the year for his personal use.
Refer to Case 1.3. At the end of the year, what is net income?
$12, 200
$21, 200
$24, 100
$11, 900
Question 23 of 38
Which of the following concepts (principles) would be most likely to require an assumption that the entity will remain in operation for the foreseeable future?
entity concept
going-concern concept
reliability concept
cost principle
Question 24 of 38
Which of the following statements correctly describes a trial balance?
A trial balance is also known as a balance sheet.
A trial balance is also known as the chart of accounts.
A trial balance is the first step in the accounting cycle.
A trial balance is a list of all accounts with their balances.
Question 25 of 38
The accountant for Duman Legal Services failed to make an adjusting entry for supplies inventory that had been used for the year. Which of the following is true?
Total liabilities are overstated.
Total liabilities are understated.
Total assets are overstated.
Total assets are understated.
Question 26 of 38
Which of the following is the time span during which cash is paid for goods and services, which are then sold to customers from whom the business then collects cash?
Long-term asset
Liquidity
Operating cycle
Current ratio
Question 27 of 38
Which of the following accounts is an asset?
Service Revenue
Salary Expense
Accounts Payable
Prepaid Expenses
Question 28 of 38
What is TRUE if the Income Statement debit column on the worksheet exceeds the income statement credit column on a worksheet?
a) The owner’s capital account increased during the period.
b) The company has net income.
c) The company has a net loss.
d) Both A and C are true.
Question 29 of 38
Which of the following is the most popular inventory costing method in the United States?
Specific unit cost
Average cost
Last in first out
First in first out
Question 30 of 38
A $5, 000 account payable is paid. How is the accounting equation affected?
Assets decrease $5, 000; liabilities decrease $5, 000.
Assets increase $5, 000; liabilities increase $5, 000.
Assets increase $5, 000; owner’s equity decreases $5, 000.
Assets decrease $5, 000; owner’s equity increases $5, 000 .
Question 31 of 38
Which of the following accounts is a liability?
Service Revenue
Accounts Payable
Salary Expense
Prepaid Expenses
Question 32 of 38
Accrued revenue is which of the following?
Revenue that the business has collected but not yet earned
Revenue that will be collected and earned in the future
Revenue that the business has earned but not collected
Revenue that has been collected and earned
Question 33 of 38
Which of the following does “FOB Destination” mean?
a) The seller pays the transportation costs.
b) The buyer pays the transportation costs.
c) Both A and B are true
d) Neither A nor B are true.
Question 34 of 38
Under which of the following methods of accounting is an expense recorded ONLY when cash is paid?
Receivable
Accrual
Deferral
Cash
Question 35 of 38
Which of the following entries would be recorded ONLY if a company is using the accrual method of accounting?
a)
Cash1,000
Service Revenue1,000
b)
Salary Expense1,000
Cash1,000
c)
Cash1,000
Accounts Receivable1,000
d) Both A and C
Question 36 of 38
Which of the following is the revenue principle?
The principle that ensures that information is reported at regular intervals
The principle that determines when to record revenue
The principle that determines when to record expenses
None of the above
Question 37 of 38
An accrued expense is which of the following?
An expense that the business has paid but not yet incurred
An expense that has been paid and incurred
An expense that the business has incurred but not yet paid
An expense that will be incurred and paid in the future
Question 38 of 38
A prepaid expense is which of the following?
An expense that will be incurred and paid in the future
An expense that has been paid and incurred
An expense that the business has incurred but not yet paid
An expense that the business has paid but not yet incurred
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1 of 37
Accounts receivable is an example of which of the following?
Prepaid expense
An accrued expense
Unearned revenue
Accrued revenue
Question 2 of 37
On August 1, 2011, Xcel Auto Repair paid $6,000 for six months rent. After adjusting entries are made, what will be the balance of Prepaid Rent on December 31, 2011?
$4,000
$6,000
$2,000
$1,000
Question 3 of 37
At the end of the current year, the accountant for Navistar Graphics failed to make an adjusting entry for wages due to the company’s employees for the last week in December. The wages will be paid in January. What is one of the effects of this error?
Total assets are overstated.
Net income is understated.
Total liabilities are overstated.
Net income is overstated.
Question 4 of 37
What is the effect of the adjusting entry for depreciation expense?
The entry increases total assets and increases total expenses.
The entry decreases total assets and increases total expenses.
The entry increases total liabilities and increases total expenses.
The entry decreases total liabilities and increases total expenses.
Question 5 of 37
A business pays salaries of $140,000 on the first and fifteenth days of every month. Which of the following is the adjusting entry required on December 31, 2008?
Debit $140,000 to Salaries Expense, credit $140,000 to Salaries Payable
Debit $140,000 to Salaries Receivable, credit $140,000 to Salaries Payable
Debit $140,000 to Salaries Expense, credit $140,000 to Salaries Receivable
No adjusting entry required
Question 6 of 37
What type of account is Accumulated Depreciation and what is its normal balance?
Expense, debit
Revenue, debit
Contra asset, credit
Liability, credit
Question 7 of 37
What is the term for the difference between the Equipment account and the Accumulated Depreciation Equipment account?
Contra asset
Market value
Cost account
Book value
Question 8 of 37
How do the adjusting entries differ from other journal entries?
Adjusting entries never affect cash.
Adjusting entries are made only at the end of the period.
Adjusting entries debit or credit at least one income statement account and at least one balance sheet account.
All of the above
Question 9 of 37
The adjusting process has two purposes. Which of the following represents these two purposes?
a) 1) Measure net income or loss and 2) Update the balance sheet
b) 1) Compute ending capital and 2) Journalize the period’s activity
c) Both A and B are correct.
d) None of the above
Question 10 of 37
Which of the following is TRUE of plant asset accounts and their related accumulated depreciation accounts?
The allocation of a plant asset’s cost to expenses is called depreciation.
Accumulated depreciation is a contra-asset account that has a normal balance of a credit amount.
Accounting for plant assets is the same as accounting for a prepaid expense.
All of the above are true.
Question 11 of 37
Under which of the following inventory costing methods is the cost of goods sold based on the cost of the oldest purchases?
Specific unit cost
Average cost
Last in first out
First in first out
Question 12 of 37
Under which of the following inventory costing methods is the cost of goods sold based on the average cost of the purchases during the period?
Specific unit cost
Average cost
Last in first out
First in first out
Question 13 of 37
Under which of the following inventory costing methods is ending inventory based on the cost of the oldest purchases?
Specific unit cost
Average cost
Last in first out
First in first out
Question 14 of 37
Under which of the following inventory costing methods is ending inventory based on the cost of the most recent purchases?
Specific unit cost
Average cost
Last in first out
First in first out
Question 15 of 37
A company purchased 100 units for $20 each on January 31. It purchased 100 units for $30 on February 28. It sold 150 units for $45 each from March 1 through December 31. If the company uses the LIFO inventory costing method, which of the following amounts will be the amount of inventory on the December 31 balance sheet?
$1,000
$2,250
$1,500
$1,250
Question 16 of 37
Samson Company had the following balances and transactions during 2009.
Beginning inventory 10 units at $70
March 10 sold 8 units for $100
June 10 purchased 20 units at $80
October 30 sold 15 units for $100
What would the company’s inventory amount be on the December 31, 2009, balance sheet, if the perpetual FIFO costing method is used?
(Answers are rounded to the nearest dollar.)
$560
$537
$554
$490
$540
Question 17 of 37
Which of the following requires that financial statement should report the least favorable figures?
Accounting conservatism
Materiality concept
Disclosure principle
Consistency principle
Question 18 of 37
Which of the following are common schemes for “cooking the books” involving inventory that are used to increase net income?
a) Overstate ending inventory.
b) Create fictitious sales.
c) Bribe the auditing firm.
d) Both A and B are common schemes.
Question 19 of 37
Where does net income appear on a worksheet?
Net income appears only in the Balance Sheet credit column.
Net income appears in the Income Statement credit column and in the Balance Sheet debit column.
Net income appears only in the Income Statement debit column.
Net income appears in the Balance Sheet credit column and in the Income Statement debit column.
Question 20 of 37
Which of the following situations would indicate that an error has been made?
The total of the debit column of Adjustments does not equal the total of the credit column of Adjustments.
The total of the debit column of the Balance Sheet does not equal the total of the debit column of the Income Statement.
The total of the debit column of the Trial Balance does not equal the total of the debit column of the Adjusted Trial Balance.
All of these situations are the result of an error.
Question 21 of 37
Where can closing entries be found?
On a company’s worksheet
On a company’s balance sheet
In a company’s general journal
On a company’s statement of owner’s equity
Question 22 of 37
Which of the following accounts will be closed by debiting the Income Summary?
Accounts Payable
Accumulated Depreciation
Service Revenue
Depreciation Expense
Question 23 of 37
Which of the following accounts will be closed by crediting the Income Summary?
Accounts Payable
Service Revenue
Depreciation Expense
Accumulated Depreciation
Question 24 of 37
Which of the following accounts are temporary accounts that must be closed at the end of the year?
Assets, liabilities and owner’s equity
Assets, liabilities and owner’s withdrawals
Revenues, expenses and owner’s capital
Revenues, expenses and owner’s withdrawals
Question 25 of 37
To what account is the balance in the Income Summary closed?
The Income Summary is closed to the owner’s withdrawals account.
The Income Summary is closed to the owner’s capital or Retained Earnings account.
The Income Summary is closed to the net income account.
None of the above.
Question 26 of 37
Which of the following is considered a rule-of-thumb strong current ratio for businesses?
.8
.6
1.5
1.0
Question 27 of 37
Adkins Company has a current ratio of 1.0 and a debt ratio of .7. Wilson Company has a current ratio of 1.4 and a debt ratio of .5. Which of the following statements is true?
The two companies’ debt ratios and current ratios vary in different directions and the companies appear to be in similar financial shape.
Wilson appears to be in better financial shape than Adkins.
The two companies’ debt ratios and current ratios vary in different directions and these results do not make sense.
Adkins appears to be in better financial shape than Wilson.
Question 28 of 37
Which of the following is generally a merchandiser’s major cost?
Salary expense
Buildings
Cost of goods sold
Advertising
Question 29 of 37
A company uses the perpetual inventory method. Which of the following entries would be made to record a sale of merchandise on account?
a) The accounting entry would be a debit to Accounts Receivable and a credit to Sales Revenue.
b) The accounting entry would be a debit to Sales Revenue and a credit to Accounts Receivable.
c) The accounting entry would be a debit to Cost of Goods Sold and a credit to Inventory.
d) Both A and C would be necessary to record the sale.
Question 30 of 37
Table 5.1
Sales revenue $460,000
Costs of goods sold 300,000
Operating expenses 85,000
Sales discounts 20,000
Sales returns and allowances 15,000
Interest Revenue 5,000
Refer to Table 5.1. What is net sales revenue?
$425,000
$400,000
$455,000
$415,000
Question 31 of 37
Table 5.1
Sales revenue $460,000
Costs of goods sold 300,000
Operating expenses 85,000
Sales discounts 20,000
Sales returns and allowances 15,000
Interest Revenue 5,000
Refer to Table 5.1. What is gross profit?
$160,000
$140,000
$90,000
$125,000
Question 32 of 37
A company uses the perpetual inventory system. The inventory account balance is $50,000. An actual count of inventory reveals that actual inventory is $43,000. Which of the following would be included in the required adjusting entry?
A $50,000 debit to Cost of Goods Sold would be required.
A $7,000 credit to Inventory would be required.
A $7,000 credit to Cost of Goods Sold would be required.
A $43,000 credit to Inventory would be required.
Question 33 of 37
Which of the following is subtracted from gross profit to arrive at operating income?
Operating expenses
Cost of goods sold
Sales discounts and sales returns and allowances
Cost of goods available for sale
Question 34 of 37
A company’s cost of goods sold is $1,000,000. Its average inventory is $100,000. Which of the following is its rate of inventory turnover?
100
10
.1
.01
Question 35 of 37
Which of the following is represented by the inventory account on the balance sheet?
Ending inventory
Cost of merchandise available for sale
Cost of goods sold
Beginning inventory
Question 36 of 37
A business makes a cash payment of rent. Which of the following occurs?
An asset is credited and a liability is debited.
An asset is debited and a liability is credited.
A liability is debited and an expense is credited.
An asset is credited and an expense is debited.
Question 37 of 37
Which of the following journal entries would be recorded if a business performed services for $400 cash and $1,000 on account?
Service Revenue 1,000
Cash 400
Accounts Receivable 1,400
Cash 400
Accounts Receivable 1,000
Service Revenue 1,400
Cash 1,400
Accounts Receivable 1,000
Service Revenue 400
Service revenue 1,400
Cash 1,000
Accounts Payable 400
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
his part is worth 75 points.
Please make sure you have answered all questions prior to submitting. Once submitted, you will not be able to return. After 1.5 hours have passed, part 2 of the exam will automatically be saved and submitted. There is a timer in the upper right hand corner of the exam to help you keep track.
Part 2
Question 1 of 37 Accounts receivable is an example of which of the following?
|
Prepaid expense
|
|
An accrued expense
|
|
Unearned revenue
|
|
Accrued revenue
|
Question 2 of 37 On August 1, 2011, Xcel Auto Repair paid $6,000 for six months rent. After adjusting entries are made, what will be the balance of Prepaid Rent on December 31, 2011?
|
$4,000
|
|
$6,000
|
|
$2,000
|
|
$1,000
|
Question 3 of 37 On December 31, 2010, the balance in Pinnacle Exploration Company’s Unearned Revenue was $4,200. In January, 2011, the company received an advance payment of $12,000 for services to be performed. By May 31, adjustments had been made to recognize $8,500 of the revenue. What would be the balance in Unearned Revenue on May 31, 2011?
|
$16,200
|
|
$3,500
|
|
$8,500
|
|
$7,700
|
Question 4 of 37 At the end of the current year, the accountant for Navistar Graphics failed to make an adjusting entry for wages due to the company’s employees for the last week in December. The wages will be paid in January. What is one of the effects of this error?
|
Total assets are overstated.
|
|
Net income is understated.
|
|
Total liabilities are overstated.
|
|
Net income is overstated.
|
Question 5 of 37 What is the effect of the adjusting entry for depreciation expense?
|
The entry increases total assets and increases total expenses.
|
|
The entry decreases total assets and increases total expenses.
|
|
The entry increases total liabilities and increases total expenses.
|
|
The entry decreases total liabilities and increases total expenses.
|
Question 6 of 37 The adjusting entry to record supplies expense accomplishes which of the following?
|
Decreases a liability and increases a revenue
|
|
Decreases a liability and increases an expense
|
|
Increases an asset and increases an expense
|
|
Decreases an asset and increases an expense
|
Question 7 of 37 The adjusting entry to record unearned revenue that has now been earned accomplishes which of the following?
|
Increases an asset and increases an expense
|
|
Decreases a liability and increases an expense
|
|
Decreases an asset and increases an expense
|
|
Decreases a liability and increases a revenue
|
Question 8 of 37 Plant assets are long-lived tangible assets used in the operation of a business. The allocation of a plant asset’s cost to expense is which of the following?
|
Revenue allocation
|
|
Depreciation
|
|
The revenue principle
|
|
Historical cost
|
Question 9 of 37 The accountant for Wilson Consulting Company failed to make an adjusting entry to record $3,000 of unearned service revenue that has now been earned. Which of the following is true?
|
Total liabilities are overstated.
|
|
Total liabilities are understated.
|
|
Total assets are overstated.
|
|
Total assets are understated.
|
Question 10 of 37 Which of the following reports a company’s financial position?
|
Balance sheet
|
|
Income statement
|
|
Statement of owner’s equity
|
|
Adjusted trial balance
|
Question 11 of 37 All of the financial statements include which of the following elements?
|
Title of the statement
|
|
Date, or period, covered by the statement
|
|
Name of the company
|
|
All of the above
|
Question 12 of 37 Which of the following is TRUE of plant asset accounts and their related accumulated depreciation accounts?
|
The allocation of a plant asset’s cost to expenses is called depreciation.
|
|
Accumulated depreciation is a contra-asset account that has a normal balance of a credit amount.
|
|
Accounting for plant assets is the same as accounting for a prepaid expense.
|
|
All of the above are true.
|
Question 13 of 37 Under which of the following inventory costing methods is the cost of goods sold based on the cost of the oldest purchases?
|
Specific unit cost
|
|
Average cost
|
|
Last in first out
|
|
First in first out
|
Question 14 of 37 Under which of the following inventory costing methods is the cost of goods sold based on the average cost of the purchases during the period?
|
Specific unit cost
|
|
Average cost
|
|
Last in first out
|
|
First in first out
|
Question 15 of 37 A company purchased 100 units for $20 each on January 31. It purchased 100 units for $30 on February 28. It sold 150 units for $45 each from March 1 through December 31. If the company uses the LIFO inventory costing method, which of the following amounts will be the amount of inventory on the December 31 balance sheet?
|
$1,000
|
|
$2,250
|
|
$1,500
|
|
$1,250
|
Question 16 of 37 Which of the following inventory costing methods yields the highest ending inventory when prices increase during the accounting period?
|
Specific unit cost
|
|
Average cost
|
|
Last in first out
|
|
First in first out
|
Question 17 of 37 Which of the following inventory costing methods is often adopted when a company sells relatively few costly items?
|
Specific unit cost
|
|
Average cost
|
|
Last in first out
|
|
First in first out
|
Question 18 of 37 On December 31 of the current year, the trial balance for a company reports the following amounts:
|
Cost of goods available for sale
|
$1,074,450
|
|
Ending inventory (FIFO)
|
85,430
|
|
Replacement cost of ending inventory
|
91,730
|
What amount must be reported for cost of goods sold on the income statement?
|
$897,290
|
|
$1,074,450
|
|
$982,720
|
|
$989,020
|
Question 19 of 37 Which of the following are common schemes for “”cooking the books”” involving inventory that are used to increase net income?
|
a) Overstate ending inventory.
|
|
b) Create fictitious sales.
|
|
c) Bribe the auditing firm.
|
|
d) Both A and B are common schemes.
|
Question 20 of 37 Which of the following statements is a TRUE statement concerning the worksheet?
|
The worksheet is a ledger.
|
|
The worksheet is a document used to summarize data to prepare the financial statements.
|
|
The worksheet is a journal.
|
|
The worksheet is a financial statement.
|
Question 21 of 37 Which of the following is the correct order of the steps for preparing the worksheet?
- Compute each account’s adjusted balance by combining the trial balance and adjustment figures. Enter each account’s adjusted amount in the Adjusted Trail Balance columns.
- Enter the account titles and their unadjusted balances in the Trial Balance columns of the worksheet and total the columns.
- Extend (copy) the asset, liability, and owner’s equity amounts from the Adjusted Trial Balance to the Balance Sheet columns. Copy the revenue and expense amounts to the Income Statement columns. Total the statement columns.
- Enter the adjusting entries in the Adjustments columns and total the amounts.
- On the income statement column, compute net income. Enter net income as the balancing amount on the income statement and balance sheet columns. Total the income statement and balance sheet columns.
|
II, IV, I, III, V
|
|
IV, I, III, V, II
|
|
III, V, IV, I, II
|
|
I, II, III, IV, V
|
Question 22 of 37 Which of the following statements is a TRUE statement about the worksheet?
|
Net income appears in the Income Statement debit column.
|
|
Net income appears in the Adjusted Trial Balance debit column.
|
|
Net income appears in the Income Statement credit column.
|
|
Net income appears in the Balance Sheet debit column.
|
Question 23 of 37 Where does net income appear on a worksheet?
|
Net income appears only in the Balance Sheet credit column.
|
|
Net income appears in the Income Statement credit column and in the Balance Sheet debit column.
|
|
Net income appears only in the Income Statement debit column.
|
|
Net income appears in the Balance Sheet credit column and in the Income Statement debit column.
|
Question 24 of 37 In which of the columns of the worksheet would the owner’s capital account be found?
|
In the Trial Balance debit column, the Adjusted Trial Balance debit column and the Balance Sheet debit column
|
|
In the Trial Balance credit column, the Adjusted Trial Balance credit column and the Balance Sheet credit column
|
|
In the Balance Sheet debit column and the Income Statement credit column
|
|
In the Balance Sheet credit column and the Income Statement debit column
|
Question 25 of 37 Which of the following situations would indicate that an error has been made?
|
The total of the debit column of Adjustments does not equal the total of the credit column of Adjustments.
|
|
The total of the debit column of the Balance Sheet does not equal the total of the debit column of the Income Statement.
|
|
The total of the debit column of the Trial Balance does not equal the total of the debit column of the Adjusted Trial Balance.
|
|
All of these situations are the result of an error.
|
Question 26 of 37 Which of the following accounts will be closed by debiting the Income Summary?
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
Question 27 of 37 Adkins Company has a current ratio of 1.0 and a debt ratio of .7. Wilson Company has a current ratio of 1.4 and a debt ratio of .5. Which of the following statements is true?
|
The two companies’ debt ratios and current ratios vary in different directions and the companies appear to be in similar financial shape.
|
|
Wilson appears to be in better financial shape than Adkins.
|
|
The two companies’ debt ratios and current ratios vary in different directions and these results do not make sense.
|
|
Adkins appears to be in better financial shape than Wilson.
|
Question 28 of 37 A company that uses the perpetual inventory method purchases inventory of $1,000 on account with terms of 2/10 net/30. Which of the following entries would be made to record the payment for the inventory if the payment is made within 10 days?
|
The accounting entry would be a $1,000 debit to Accounts Payable and a $1,000 credit to Cash.
|
|
The accounting entry would be a $1,000 debit to Accounts Payable, a $20 credit to Inventory and a $980 credit to Cash.
|
|
The accounting entry would be a $980 debit to Accounts Payable, a $20 debit to Inventory and a $1,000 credit to Cash.
|
|
The accounting entry would be a $20 debit to Inventory, a $1,000 debit to Accounts Payable and a $1,020 credit to Cash.
|
Question 29 of 37 Which of the following is generally a merchandiser’s major cost?
|
Salary expense
|
|
Buildings
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
Advertising
|
Question 30 of 37 A company uses the perpetual inventory method. Which of the following entries would be made to record a sale of merchandise on account?
|
a) The accounting entry would be a debit to Accounts Receivable and a credit to Sales Revenue.
|
|
b) The accounting entry would be a debit to Sales Revenue and a credit to Accounts Receivable.
|
|
c) The accounting entry would be a debit to Cost of Goods Sold and a credit to Inventory.
|
|
d) Both A and C would be necessary to record the sale.
|
Question 31 of 37 Which of the following is Net Sales Revenue?
|
Sales less Sales Returns and Allowances
|
|
Sales less Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
Sales less Sales Discounts
|
|
Sales less Sales Discounts and Sales Returns and Allowances
|
Question 32 of 37 Table 5.1
|
Sales revenue
|
$460,000
|
|
Costs of goods sold
|
300,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
85,000
|
|
Sales discounts
|
20,000
|
|
Sales returns and allowances
|
15,000
|
|
Interest Revenue
|
5,000
|
Refer to Table 5.1. What is gross profit?
|
$160,000
|
|
$140,000
|
|
$90,000
|
|
$125,000
|
Question 33 of 37 Which of the following is subtracted from gross profit to arrive at operating income?
|
Operating expenses
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
Sales discounts and sales returns and allowances
|
|
Cost of goods available for sale
|
Question 34 of 37 A company’s cost of goods sold is $1,000,000. Its average inventory is $100,000. Which of the following is its rate of inventory turnover?
Question 35 of 37 A business receives cash in payment of accounts receivable. Which of the following occurs?
|
An asset is debited and a liability is credited.
|
|
A liability is debited and a liability is credited.
|
|
An asset is credited and a liability is debited.
|
|
An asset is debited and an asset is credited.
|
Question 36 of 37 A business makes a cash payment of rent. Which of the following occurs?
|
An asset is credited and a liability is debited.
|
|
An asset is debited and a liability is credited.
|
|
A liability is debited and an expense is credited.
|
|
An asset is credited and an expense is debited.
|
Question 37 of 37 The following entries were made by the accountant of Patel Pastries during its first month of operations.
- James Patel, the owner, deposited $3,000 in the company’s new checking account.
- Mr. Patel paid the first month’s rent of $400.
- Mr. Patel purchased equipment by signing a note payable of $11,000.
- Cash sales for the month were $4,500.
- Mr. Patel purchased cooking supplies for $1,400.
After the accountant posts these entries to the general ledger, what is the balance in the cash account?
|
$16,700
|
|
$7,500
|
|
$5,700
|
|
$7,100
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which financial statement is used to determine cash generated from operations?
A. Income statement
B. Statement of operations
C. Statement of cash flows
D. Retained earnings statement
2. In terms of sequence, in what order must the four basic financial statements be prepared?
A. Balance sheet, income statement, statement of cash flows, and capital statement
B. Income statement, capital statement, statement of cash flows, and balance sheet
C. Balance sheet, capital statement, statement of cash flows, and income statement
D. Income statement, capital statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows
3. In classifying transactions, which of the following is true in regard to assets?
A. Normal balances and increases are debits
B. Normal balances and decreases are credits
C. Normal balances can either be debits or credits for assets
D. Normal balances are debits and increases can be debits or credits
4. An increase in an expense account must be
A. debited
B. credited
C. either debited or credited, depending on the circumstances
D. capitalized
5. ABC Corporation issues 100 shares of $1 par common stock at $5 per share, which of the following is the correct journal entry?
A.
Cash $100
Common Stock $100
B.
Cash $500
Common Stock $500
C.
Cash $500
Paid-in Capital, Excess of Par $400
Common Stock $100
D.
Cash $100
Paid-in Capital, Excess of Par $400
Common Stock $500
6. In the first month of operations, the total of the debit entries to the cash account amounted to $1,400 and the total of the credit entries to the cash account amounted to $600. The cash account has a
A. $600 credit balance
B. $1,400 debit balance
C. $800 debit balance
D. $800 credit balance
7. Which ledger contains control accounts?
A. Accounts receivable subsidiary ledger
B. General ledger
C. Accounts payable subsidiary ledger
D. General revenue and expense ledger
8. Smith is a customer of ABC Corporation. Smith typically purchases merchandise from ABC on account. Which ledger would ABC use to keep track of the details of Smith s account?
A. Accounts receivable subsidiary ledger
B. Accounts receivable control ledger
C. General ledger
D. Accounts payable subsidiary ledger
9. Under the cash basis of accounting
A. revenue is recognized when services are performed
B. expenses are matched with the revenue that is produced
C. cash must be received before revenue is recognized
D. a promise to pay is sufficient to recognize revenue
10. Under the accrual basis of accounting
A. cash must be received before revenue is recognized
B. net income is calculated by matching cash outflows against cash inflows
C. events that change a company s financial statements are recognized in the period they occur rather than in the period in which the cash is paid or received
D. the ledger accounts must be adjusted to reflect a cash basis of accounting before financial statements are prepared under generally accepted accounting principles
11. The Vintage Laundry Company purchased $6,500 worth of laundry supplies on June 2 and recorded the purchase as an asset. On June 30, an inventory of the laundry supplies indicated only $2,000 on hand. The adjusting entry that should be made by the company on June 30 is
A. debit Laundry Expense, $2,000; credit Laundry Expense $2,000
B. debit Laundry Expense, $4,500; credit Laundry Supplies Expense, $4,500
C. debit Laundry Supplies, $2,000; credit Laundry Supplies Expense, $2,000
D. debit Laundry Supplies Expense, $4,500; credit Laundry Supplies, $4,500
12. Greese Company purchased office supplies costing $4,000 and debited Office Supplies for the full amount. At the end of the accounting period, a physical count of office supplies revealed $1,100 still on hand. The appropriate adjusting journal entry to be made at the end of the period would be
A. debit Office Supplies Expense, $1,100; credit Office Supplies, $1,100
B. debit Office Supplies, $2,900; credit Office Supplies Expense, $2,900
C. debit Office Supplies Expense, $2,900; credit Office Supplies, $2,900
D. debit Office Supplies, $1,100; credit Office Supplies Expense, $1,100
13. Based on the account balance below, what is the total of the debit and credit columns of the adjusted trial balance?
Service revenue $3,300
Equipment $6,400
Cash 1,525
Prepaid insurance 1,225
Unearned revenue 5,320
Depreciation expense 640
Salary 1,050
Accum. depreciation 1,280
Common stock 390
Retained earnings 550
a. $9,150
b. $10,840
c. $9,560
d. $10,430
14. An adjusted trial balance
A. is prepared after the financial statements are completed
B. proves the equality of the total debit balances and total credit balances of ledger accounts after all adjustments have been made
C. is a required financial statement under generally accepted accounting principles
D. cannot be used to prepare financial statements
15. Given the following adjusted trial balance:
Debit Credit
Cash $781
Accounts receivable 1,049
Inventory 1,562
Prepaid rent 43
Property, plant & equipment 150
Accumulated depreciation 26
Accounts payable 41
Unearned revenue 61
Common stock 103
Retained earnings 3,305
Service revenue 134
Interest revenue 28
Salary expense 80
Travel expense 33
Total $3,698 $3,698
Net income for the year is
A. $248
B. $135
C. $162
D. $49
16. Given the following adjusted trial balance, what will be the totals for the debit and credit columns of the post-closing trial balance?
Debit Credit
Cash $1,562
Accounts receivable 2,098
Inventory 3,124
Prepaid rent 86
Property, plant, & equipment 300
Accumulated depreciation $52
Accounts payable 82
Unearned revenue 172
Common stock 206
Retained earnings 6,610
Service revenue 218
Interest revenue 56
Salary expense 160
Travel expense 66
Totals 7,396 $7,396
A. $7,396
B. $7,118
C. $7,334
D. $7,170
17. Given the following adjusted trial balance:
Debit Credit
Cash $781
Accounts receivable1,049
Inventory 1,562
Prepaid rent 43
Property, plant & equipment 150
Accumulated depreciation $26
Accounts payable 41
Unearned revenue 61
Common stock 103
Retained earnings 3,305
Service revenue 134
Interest revenue 28
Salary expense 80
Travel expense 33
Total $3,698 $3,698
After closing entries have been posted, the balance in retained earnings will be
A. $3,256
B. $3,170
C. $3,440
D. $3,354
18. Net income is recorded on the work sheet under the
A. debit column of the adjusted trial balance and the credit column of retained earnings
B. debit column of the income statement and the credit column of the balance sheet
C. credit column of the adjusted trial balance and the debit column of retained earnings
D. credit column of the income statement and the debit column of the balance sheet
19. At the beginning of the year, Uptown Athletic had an inventory of $400,000. During the year, the company purchased goods costing $1,500,000. If Uptown Athletic reported ending inventory of $600,000 and sales of $2,000,000, their cost of goods sold and gross profit rate would be
A. $900,000 and 65%
B. $1,300,000 and 35%
C. $900,000 and 35%
D. $1,300,000 and 65%
20. During the year, Sarah s Pet Shop s merchandise inventory decreased by $30,000. If the company s cost of goods sold for the year was $450,000, purchases would have been
A. $480,000
B. $420,000
C. $390,000
D. Insufficient data to determine
21. At the beginning of the year, Wildcat Athletic had an inventory of $200,000. During the year, the company purchased goods costing $700,000. If Wildcat Athletic reported ending inventory of $300,000 and sales of $1,000,000, their cost of goods sold and gross profit rate would be
A. $400,000 and 60%
B. $600,000 and 40%
C. $400,000 and 40%
D. $600,000 and 60%
22. The entry to record of sale of $900 with terms of 2/10, n/30 will include a
A. debit to Sales Discount for $18
B. debit to Sales Revenue for $882
C. credit to Accounts Receivable for $900
D. credit to Sales Revenue for $900
23. Dobler Company uses a periodic inventory system. Details for the inventory account for the month of January 2012 are as follows:
Units Per unit price Total
Balance, 1/1/2012 200 $5.00 $1,000
Purchase, 1/15/2012 100 5.30 530
Purchase, 1/28/2012 100 5.50 550
An end of the month (1/31/2012), inventory showed that 140 units were on hand. If the company uses LIFO, what is the value of the ending inventory?
A. $737
B. $700
C. $762
D. $1,380
24. The difference between ending inventory using LIFO and ending inventory using FIFO is referred to as
A. FIFO reserve
B. inventory reserve
C. LIFO reserve
D. periodic reserve
25. A consistent application of an inventory costing method enhances
A. conservatism
B. accuracy
C. comparability
D. efficiency
26. The accountant at Patton Company has determined that income before income taxes amounted to $11,000 using the FIFO costing assumption. If the income tax rate is 30% and the amount of income taxes paid would be $300 greater if the LIFO assumption were used, what would be the amount of income before taxes under the LIFO assumption?
A. $11,300
B. $12,000
C. $10,000
D. $10,700
27. A very small company would have the most difficulty in implementing which of the following internal control activities?
A. Separation of duties
B. Limited access to assets
C. Periodic independent verification
D. Sound personnel procedures
28. A system of internal control
A. is infallible
B. can be rendered ineffective by employee collusion
C. invariably will have costs exceeding benefits
D. is premised on the concept of absolute assurance
29. The custodian of a company asset should
A. have access to the accounting record for that asset
B. be someone outside the company
C. not have access to the accounting record for that asset
D. be an accountant
30. The Sarbanes Oxley Act (2002) applies to
A. U.S. companies but not international companies
B. international companies but not U.S. companies
C. U.S. and Canadian companies but not other international companies
D. U.S. and international companies
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Baker Company is a merchandising enterprise that uses the perpetual inventory system. Account balances for the company as of September 30, 2013, the last day of the fiscal year, are as follows:
Cash $ 31,165
Accounts Receivable 126,100
Merchandise Inventory 435,000
Prepaid Insurance 10,600
Store Supplies 3,750
Office Supplies 1,700
Store Equipment 225,000
Accumulated Depreciation –
Store Equipment 40,300
Office Equipment 72,000
Accumulated Depreciation –
Office Equipment 17,200
Accounts Payable 66,700
Salaries Payable 0
Unearned Rent 1,200
Notes Payable:
Due within 12 months 35,000
Due beyond 12 months 160,000
Bertha Baker, Capital 332,100
Bertha Baker, Drawing 50,000
Sales 1,147,500
Sales Returns & Allowances 15,500
Sales Discounts 6,000
Cost of Merchandise Sold 601,200
Sales Salaries Expense 86,400
Advertising Expense 29,450
Depreciation Expense Store
Equipment 0
Store Supplies Expense 0
Miscellaneous Selling Expense 1,885
Office Salaries Expense 60,000
Rent Expense 30,000
Insurance Expense 0
Depreciation Expense Office
Equipment 0
Office Supplies Expense 0
Miscellaneous Administrative Expense 1,650
Rent Income 0
Interest Expense 12,600
Data needed for year-end adjustments follow:
Physical merchandise inventory on September 30 $418,500
Insurance expired during the year 6,000
Supplies on hand on September 30:
Store Supplies 1,500
Office Supplies 700
Depreciation for the year:
Store Equipment 8,500
Office Equipment 4,500
Salaries Payable as of September 30:
Sales Salaries 3,450
Office Salaries 2,550
Unearned Rent as of September 30 400
Instructions:
a. Prepare a work sheet for the fiscal year ended September 30, 2013.
b. Prepare a multiple-step income statement for the fiscal year ended September 30, 2013.
c. Prepare a statement of owner s equity for the fiscal year ended September 30, 2013, assuming no additional investments by the owner during the year.
d. Prepare a report form of balance sheet as of September 30, 2013, assuming that the current portion of notes payable is $35,000.
e. Journalize adjusting entries as of September 30, 2013.
f. Journalize closing entries as of September 30, 2013.
g. Prepare a post-closing trial balance as of September 30, 2013.
Check Figures:
Unadjusted Trial Balance columns: $1,800,000
Adjustments columns: $45,550
Adjusted Trial Balance columns: $1,819,000
Net Income: $258,865
Income Statement columns: $1,148,300
Balance Sheet columns: $929,565
Capital balance as of March 31, 1011: $540,965
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which financial statement is used to determine cash generated from operations?
A. Income statement
B. Statement of operations
C. Statement of cash flows
D. Retained earnings statement
2. In terms of sequence, in what order must the four basic financial statements be prepared?
A. Balance sheet, income statement, statement of cash flows, and capital statement
B. Income statement, capital statement, statement of cash flows, and balance sheet
C. Balance sheet, capital statement, statement of cash flows, and income statement
D. Income statement, capital statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows
3. In classifying transactions, which of the following is true in regard to assets?
A. Normal balances and increases are debits
B. Normal balances and decreases are credits
C. Normal balances can either be debits or credits for assets
D. Normal balances are debits and increases can be debits or credits
4. An increase in an expense account must be
A. debited
B. credited
C. either debited or credited, depending on the circumstances
D. capitalized
5. ABC Corporation issues 100 shares of $1 par common stock at $5 per share, which of the following is the correct journal entry?
A.
Cash $100
Common Stock $100
B.
Cash $500
Common Stock $500
C.
Cash $500
Paid-in Capital, Excess of Par $400
Common Stock $100
D.
Cash $100
Paid-in Capital, Excess of Par $400
Common Stock $500
6. In the first month of operations, the total of the debit entries to the cash account amounted to $1,400 and the total of the credit entries to the cash account amounted to $600. The cash account has a
A. $600 credit balance
B. $1,400 debit balance
C. $800 debit balance
D. $800 credit balance
7. Which ledger contains control accounts?
A. Accounts receivable subsidiary ledger
B. General ledger
C. Accounts payable subsidiary ledger
D. General revenue and expense ledger
8. Smith is a customer of ABC Corporation. Smith typically purchases merchandise from ABC on account. Which ledger would ABC use to keep track of the details of Smith s account?
A. Accounts receivable subsidiary ledger
B. Accounts receivable control ledger
C. General ledger
D. Accounts payable subsidiary ledger
9. Under the cash basis of accounting
A. revenue is recognized when services are performed
B. expenses are matched with the revenue that is produced
C. cash must be received before revenue is recognized
D. a promise to pay is sufficient to recognize revenue
10. Under the accrual basis of accounting
A. cash must be received before revenue is recognized
B. net income is calculated by matching cash outflows against cash inflows
C. events that change a company s financial statements are recognized in the period they occur rather than in the period in which the cash is paid or received
D. the ledger accounts must be adjusted to reflect a cash basis of accounting before financial statements are prepared under generally accepted accounting principles
11. The Vintage Laundry Company purchased $6,500 worth of laundry supplies on June 2 and recorded the purchase as an asset. On June 30, an inventory of the laundry supplies indicated only $2,000 on hand. The adjusting entry that should be made by the company on June 30 is
A. debit Laundry Expense, $2,000; credit Laundry Expense $2,000
B. debit Laundry Expense, $4,500; credit Laundry Supplies Expense, $4,500
C. debit Laundry Supplies, $2,000; credit Laundry Supplies Expense, $2,000
D. debit Laundry Supplies Expense, $4,500; credit Laundry Supplies, $4,500
12. Greese Company purchased office supplies costing $4,000 and debited Office Supplies for the full amount. At the end of the accounting period, a physical count of office supplies revealed $1,100 still on hand. The appropriate adjusting journal entry to be made at the end of the period would be
A. debit Office Supplies Expense, $1,100; credit Office Supplies, $1,100
B. debit Office Supplies, $2,900; credit Office Supplies Expense, $2,900
C. debit Office Supplies Expense, $2,900; credit Office Supplies, $2,900
D. debit Office Supplies, $1,100; credit Office Supplies Expense, $1,100
13. Based on the account balance below, what is the total of the debit and credit columns of the adjusted trial balance?
Service revenue $3,300
Equipment $6,400
Cash 1,525
Prepaid insurance 1,225
Unearned revenue 5,320
Depreciation expense 640
Salary 1,050
Accum. depreciation 1,280
Common stock 390
Retained earnings 550
a. $9,150
b. $10,840
c. $9,560
d. $10,430
14. An adjusted trial balance
A. is prepared after the financial statements are completed
B. proves the equality of the total debit balances and total credit balances of ledger accounts after all adjustments have been made
C. is a required financial statement under generally accepted accounting principles
D. cannot be used to prepare financial statements
15. Given the following adjusted trial balance:
Debit Credit
Cash $781
Accounts receivable 1,049
Inventory 1,562
Prepaid rent 43
Property, plant & equipment 150
Accumulated depreciation 26
Accounts payable 41
Unearned revenue 61
Common stock 103
Retained earnings 3,305
Service revenue 134
Interest revenue 28
Salary expense 80
Travel expense 33
Total $3,698 $3,698
Net income for the year is
A. $248
B. $135
C. $162
D. $49
16. Given the following adjusted trial balance, what will be the totals for the debit and credit columns of the post-closing trial balance?
Debit Credit
Cash $1,562
Accounts receivable 2,098
Inventory 3,124
Prepaid rent 86
Property, plant, & equipment 300
Accumulated depreciation $52
Accounts payable 82
Unearned revenue 172
Common stock 206
Retained earnings 6,610
Service revenue 218
Interest revenue 56
Salary expense 160
Travel expense 66
Totals 7,396 $7,396
A. $7,396
B. $7,118
C. $7,334
D. $7,170
17. Given the following adjusted trial balance:
Debit Credit
Cash $781
Accounts receivable1,049
Inventory 1,562
Prepaid rent 43
Property, plant & equipment 150
Accumulated depreciation $26
Accounts payable 41
Unearned revenue 61
Common stock 103
Retained earnings 3,305
Service revenue 134
Interest revenue 28
Salary expense 80
Travel expense 33
Total $3,698 $3,698
After closing entries have been posted, the balance in retained earnings will be
A. $3,256
B. $3,170
C. $3,440
D. $3,354
18. Net income is recorded on the work sheet under the
A. debit column of the adjusted trial balance and the credit column of retained earnings
B. debit column of the income statement and the credit column of the balance sheet
C. credit column of the adjusted trial balance and the debit column of retained earnings
D. credit column of the income statement and the debit column of the balance sheet
19. At the beginning of the year, Uptown Athletic had an inventory of $400,000. During the year, the company purchased goods costing $1,500,000. If Uptown Athletic reported ending inventory of $600,000 and sales of $2,000,000, their cost of goods sold and gross profit rate would be
A. $900,000 and 65%
B. $1,300,000 and 35%
C. $900,000 and 35%
D. $1,300,000 and 65%
20. During the year, Sarah s Pet Shop s merchandise inventory decreased by $30,000. If the company s cost of goods sold for the year was $450,000, purchases would have been
A. $480,000
B. $420,000
C. $390,000
D. Insufficient data to determine
21. At the beginning of the year, Wildcat Athletic had an inventory of $200,000. During the year, the company purchased goods costing $700,000. If Wildcat Athletic reported ending inventory of $300,000 and sales of $1,000,000, their cost of goods sold and gross profit rate would be
A. $400,000 and 60%
B. $600,000 and 40%
C. $400,000 and 40%
D. $600,000 and 60%
22. The entry to record of sale of $900 with terms of 2/10, n/30 will include a
A. debit to Sales Discount for $18
B. debit to Sales Revenue for $882
C. credit to Accounts Receivable for $900
D. credit to Sales Revenue for $900
23. Dobler Company uses a periodic inventory system. Details for the inventory account for the month of January 2012 are as follows:
Units Per unit price Total
Balance, 1/1/2012 200 $5.00 $1,000
Purchase, 1/15/2012 100 5.30 530
Purchase, 1/28/2012 100 5.50 550
An end of the month (1/31/2012), inventory showed that 140 units were on hand. If the company uses LIFO, what is the value of the ending inventory?
A. $737
B. $700
C. $762
D. $1,380
24. The difference between ending inventory using LIFO and ending inventory using FIFO is referred to as
A. FIFO reserve
B. inventory reserve
C. LIFO reserve
D. periodic reserve
25. A consistent application of an inventory costing method enhances
A. conservatism
B. accuracy
C. comparability
D. efficiency
26. The accountant at Patton Company has determined that income before income taxes amounted to $11,000 using the FIFO costing assumption. If the income tax rate is 30% and the amount of income taxes paid would be $300 greater if the LIFO assumption were used, what would be the amount of income before taxes under the LIFO assumption?
A. $11,300
B. $12,000
C. $10,000
D. $10,700
27. A very small company would have the most difficulty in implementing which of the following internal control activities?
A. Separation of duties
B. Limited access to assets
C. Periodic independent verification
D. Sound personnel procedures
28. A system of internal control
A. is infallible
B. can be rendered ineffective by employee collusion
C. invariably will have costs exceeding benefits
D. is premised on the concept of absolute assurance
29. The custodian of a company asset should
A. have access to the accounting record for that asset
B. be someone outside the company
C. not have access to the accounting record for that asset
D. be an accountant
30. The Sarbanes Oxley Act (2002) applies to
A. U.S. companies but not international companies
B. international companies but not U.S. companies
C. U.S. and Canadian companies but not other international companies
D. U.S. and international companies
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P2-6ACondensed balance sheet and income statement data for Sievert Corporation are presented here and on the next page.
SIEVERT CORPORATION
Balance Sheets
December 31
Assets 2012 2011
Cash $ 28,000 $ 20,000
Receivables (net) 70,000 62,000
Other current assets 90,000 73,000
Long-term investments 62,000 60,000
Plant and equipment (net) 510,000 470,000
Total assets $760,000 $685,000
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
Current liabilities $ 75,000 $ 70,000
Long-term debt 80,000 90,000
Common stock 330,000 300,000
Retained earnings 275,000 225,000
Total liabilities and stockholders equity $760,000 $685,000
SIEVERT CORPORATION
Income Statements
For the Years Ended December 31
2012 2011
Sales $750,000 $680,000
Cost of goods sold 440,000 400,000
Operating expenses (including income taxes) 240,000 220,000
Net income $ 70,000 $ 60,000
Additional information:
Cash from operating activities $82,000 $56,000
Cash used for capital expenditures $45,000 $38,000
Dividends paid $20,000 $15,000
Average number of shares outstanding 33,000 30,000
Instructions
Compute these values and ratios for 2011 and 2012.
(a) Earnings per share.
(b) Working capital.
(c) Current ratio.
(d) Debt to total assets ratio.
(e) Free cash flow.
(f ) Based on the ratios calculated, discuss briefly the improvement or lack thereof in financial position and operating results from 2011 to 2012 of Sievert Corporation.
P13-2AThe comparative statements of Lucille Company are presented here.
LUCILLE COMPANY
Income Statements
For the Years Ended December 31
2012 2011
Net sales $1,890,540 $1,750,500
Cost of goods sold 1,058,540 1,006,000
Gross profit 832,000 744,500
Selling and administrative expenses 500,000 479,000
Income from operations 332,000 265,500
Other expenses and losses
Interest expense 22,000 20,000
Income before income taxes 310,000 245,500
Income tax expense 92,000 73,000
Net income $218,000 $ 172,500
LUCILLE COMPANY
Balance Sheets
December 31
Assets 2012 2011
Current assets
Cash $ 60,100 $ 64,200
Short-term investments 74,000 50,000
Accounts receivable 117,800 102,800
Inventory 126,000 115,500
Total current assets 377,900 332,500
Plant assets (net) 649,000 520,300
Total assets $1,026,900 $852,800
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
Current liabilities
Accounts payable $ 160,000 $145,400
Income taxes payable 43,500 42,000
Total current liabilities 203,500 187,400
Bonds payable 220,000 200,000
Total liabilities 423,500 387,400
Stockholders equity
Common stock ($5 par) 290,000 300,000
Retained earnings 313,400 165,400
Total stockholders equity 603,400 465,400
Total liabilities and stockholders equity $1,026,900 $852,800
All sales were on account. Net cash provided by operating activities for 2012 was $220,000.
Capital expenditures were $136,000, and cash dividends were $70,000.
Instructions
Compute the following ratios for 2012.
(a) Earnings per share. (h) Days in inventory.
(b) Return on common stockholders equity. (i) Times interest earned.
(c) Return on assets. (j) Asset turnover.
(d) Current ratio. (k) Debt to total assets.
(e) Receivables turnover. (l) Current cash debt coverage.
(f ) Average collection period. (m) Cash debt coverage.
(g) Inventory turnover. (n) Free cash flow.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC3300 Excel Spreadsheet Project Fall 2013
On December 31, 2012, Barker Inc. provided consulting services to Carr Company at an agreed price of $151,121. Barker accepted $60,000 down and agreed to accept the balance in four equal installments of $30,000 to be received each December 31, beginning December 31, 2013. An assumed interest rate of 12% is imputed.
Instructions:
Using Excel, prepare the amortization schedule and then record all required journal entries that would be made by Barker on the following dates (a) December 31, 2012; (b) December 31, 2013; (c) December 31, 2014; (d) December 31, 2015; and (e) December 31, 2016.
You will be assessed on the following skills:
(1) correct data entered,
(2) correct and accessible formulas,
(3) column headings and labels,
(4) titles merged and centered, and
(5) spreadsheet formatting and printing.
Each student must submit the completed spreadsheet to me by email
Include the following in the subject line of your email: ACC3300 Excel Project Fall 2013, Your Name
Failure to use the appropriate subject line in the email will result in grade reduction of 1 letter grade.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acct 346: Bravo Baking Company
Bravo Baking Company began operations in May of 2010 with the production and sales of speciality breads. The company has experienced a good market demand for its high protein, low carbohydrate product called “Hi-Lo”. Hi-Lo’s success has required that Bravo continue to make only this one product, however, Bravo’s customers, the local retailers, have been asking for more specialty breads from the company. The decision to expand will be made in the coming weeks.
Tab 1 Product vs Period Costs
Tab 2 Cost of Goods Manufactured Schedule
Tab 3 Break Even Analysis
Tab 4 Incremental Analysis
Tab 5 Capital Budgeting
Tab 6 Variance Analysis
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week One Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document).
1. Critical Thinking Question:
Answer the following questions:
What is the purpose of the statement of cash flows What are the three main categories and give examples for each category?
2. Classification of activities
Classify each of the following transactions as arising from an operating (O), investing (I), financing (F), or noncash investing/financing (N) activity.
a. ________ Acquired a new laser printer by paying $950.
b. ________ Received $70,000 from the issuance of common stock.
c. ________ Paid $1,500 of interest on a note payable.
d. ________ Purchased $9,800 of merchandise for cash.
e. ________ Received $10,200 from cash sales.
f. ________ Paid a $15,000 dividend.
g. ________ Acquired a $500,000 building by signing a $500,000 mortgage note.
h. ________ Received $60,000 from the sale of land.
3. Overview of direct and indirect methods
Evaluate the comments that follow as being True or False. If the comment is false, briefly explain why.
a. The dollar change in the Merchandise Inventory account appears on the statement of cash flows only when the direct method of statement preparation is used.
b. Depreciation expense is added back to net income when the indirect method is used.
c. The cash paid to suppliers is normally disclosed on the statement of cash flows when the indirect method of statement preparation is employed.
d. One of the advantages of using the direct method rather than the indirect method is that larger cash flows from financing activities will be reported.
e. Both the direct and indirect methods will produce the same cash flow from operating activities.
4. Equipment transaction and cash flow reporting
|
Property, plant, & equipment
|
Dec. 31, 20X8
|
Dec. 31, 20X7
|
|
Land
|
$72,000
|
$72,000
|
|
Equipment
|
630,000
|
520,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
-308,000
|
-325,000
|
New equipment purchased during 20×8 totaled $175,000. The 20×8 income statement disclosed equipment depreciation expense of $34,000 and a $2,000 loss on the sale of equipment.
a. Determine the cost and accumulated depreciation of the equipment sold during 20X8.
b. Determine the selling price of the equipment sold.
c. Show how the sale of equipment would appear on a statement of cash flows prepared by using the indirect method.
5. Cash flow information: Direct and indirect methods
The comparative year-end balance sheets of USA Graphics, Inc., revealed the following activity in the company’s current accounts:
|
20X8
|
20X7
|
Increase / Decrease)
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$55,400
|
$35,200
|
$20,200
|
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
83,800
|
88,000
|
-4,200
|
|
|
Inventory
|
243,400
|
233,800
|
9,600
|
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
25,400
|
24,200
|
1,200
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$123,600
|
$140,600
|
($17,000)
|
|
|
Taxes payable
|
43,600
|
49,200
|
-5,600
|
|
|
Interest payable
|
9,000
|
6,400
|
2,600
|
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
38,800
|
60,400
|
-21,600
|
|
|
Note payable
|
44,000
|
|
44,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The accounts payable were for the purchase of merchandise. Prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities relate to the firm’s selling and administrative expenses. The company’s condensed income statement follows.
|
USA GRAPHICS INC.
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
for the Year Ended December 31, 20X8
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sales
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$691,800
|
|
|
Less: Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
|
223,000
|
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
|
|
|
|
$468,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Less: Selling & administrative expenses
|
|
$177,000
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
|
|
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
|
|
|
|
27,000
|
|
222,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Add: gain on sale of land
|
|
|
|
|
$246,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
18,800
|
|
|
Income before taxes
|
|
|
|
|
$265,600
|
|
|
Income taxes
|
|
|
|
|
|
38,300
|
|
|
Net income
|
|
|
|
|
|
$227,300
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other data:
1. Long-term investments were purchased for cash at a cost of $64,200.
2. Cash proceeds from the sale of land totaled $74,200.
3. Store equipment of $34,000 was purchased by signing a short-term note payable. Also, a $140,000 telecommunications system was acquired by issuing 3,000 shares of preferred stock.
4. A long-term note of $42,200 was repaid.
5. Twenty thousand shares of common stock were issued at $5.19 per share.
6. The company paid cash dividends amounting to $125,000.
Instructions:
a. Prepare the operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows, assuming use of:
1. The direct method.
2. The indirect method.
b. Prepare the investing and financing activities sections of the statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Analysis of stockholders’ equity
Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X8. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 20X8 and 20X7 follow.
20X8 20X7
Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10% $600,000 $500,000
Common stock, $10 par value 2,350,0001,550,000
Paid-in capital in excess of par value
Preferred 24,000
Common 4,620,0003,600,000
Retained earnings 8,470,0006,920,000
Total stockholders’ equity $16,064,000 $12,570,000
a.Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X8.
b.Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X8.
c.By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 20X8
d.Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X8? By what amount
2. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization
Northern Corporation issued $800,000 of 7% bonds on March 1, 20X8. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow.
Case A The bonds are issued at 100.
Case B The bonds are issued at 96.
Case C The bonds are issued at 105.
Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization.
Instructions:
Complete the following table:
Case ACase BCase C
a. Cash inflow on the issuance date_____________________
b.Total cash outflow through maturity_____________________
c.Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue _____________________
d.Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X8 _____________________
e.Amortization for the year ended December 31, 20X8 _____________________
f.Unamortized premium as of December 31, 20X8 _____________________
g.Unamortized discount as of December 31, 20X8 _____________________
h.Bond carrying value as of December 31, 20X8 _____________________
3. Definitions of manufacturing concepts
J & B Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:
Materials and supplies used
Brass$80,000
Repair parts18,000
Machine lubricants 8,000
Wages and salaries Machine operators 140,000
Production supervisors 62,000
Maintenance personnel 39,000
Other factory overhead Variable 29,000
Fixed 48,000
Sales commissions20,000
Compute:
a.Total direct materials consumed
b.Total direct labor
c.Total prime cost
d.Total conversion cost
4. Schedule of cost of goods manufactured, income statement
The following information was taken from the ledger of Jakob Industries, Inc.:
Direct labor$75,000 Administrative expenses$63,000
Selling expenses36,000Work in. process
Sales310,000Jan. 132,000
Finished goodsDec. 3121,000
Jan. 1115,000Direct material purchases87,000
Dec. 31131,000Depreciation: factory21,000
Raw (direct) materials on handIndirect materials used11,000
Jan. 131,000Indirect labor26,000
Dec. 3140,000Factory taxes8,000
Factory utilities12,000
Prepare the following:
a.A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.
b.An income statement for the year ended December 31.
5. Manufacturing statements and cost behavior
Sioux Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $38 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.
Per Unit Variable Cost Fixed Cost
Direct materials $4.00 $
Direct labor 7.0
Factory overhead 9.070,000
Selling 80,000
Administrative 135,000
Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 18,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Sioux carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.
Instructions:
a.Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.
b.Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
c.On the basis of the information presented:
1. Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
2. What is the likely effect on the $4.00 unit cost of direct materials if next year’s production increases? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week Two Assignment
Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document).
1. Analysis of stockholders’ equity
Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X6. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 20X6 and 20X5 follow:
|
|
20X6
|
20X5
|
|
Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10%
|
$580,000
|
$500,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par value
|
2,350,000
|
1,750,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par value
|
|
|
|
Preferred
|
24,000
|
|
|
Common
|
4,620,000
|
3,600,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
8,470,000
|
6,920,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$16,044,000
|
$12,770,000
|
a. Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X6.
b. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X6.
c. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 20X6?
d. Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X6? By what amount?
2. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization
Southlake Corporation issued $900,000 of 8% bonds on March 1, 20X1. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow.
Case A The bonds are issued at 100.
Case B The bonds are issued at 96.
Case C The bonds are issued at 105.
Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization.
Instructions:
|
Complete the following table:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Case A
|
Case B
|
Case C
|
|
1. Cash inflow on the issuance date
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
2. Total cash outflow through maturity
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
3. Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
4. Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
5. Amortization for the year ended December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
6. Unamortized premium as of December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
7. Unamortized discount as of December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
|
8. Bond carrying value as of December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
3. Definitions of manufacturing concepts
Interstate Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:
Materials and supplies used
Brass $75,000
Repair parts 16,000
Machine lubricants 9,000
Wages and salaries Machine operators 128,000
Production supervisors 64,000
Maintenance personnel 41,000
Other factory overhead Variable 35,000
Fixed 46,000
Sales commissions 20,000
Compute:
a. Total direct materials consumed
b. Total direct labor
c. Total prime cost
d. Total conversion cost
4. Schedule of cost of goods manufactured, income statement
The following information was taken from the ledger of Jefferson Industries, Inc.:
|
Direct labor
|
$85,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$59,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
34,000
|
|
Work in. process:
|
|
|
Sales
|
300,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
29,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
|
|
Dec. 31
|
21,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
115,000
|
|
Direct material purchases
|
88,000
|
|
Dec. 31
|
131,000
|
|
Depreciation: factory
|
18,000
|
|
Raw (direct) materials on hand
|
Indirect materials used
|
10,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
31,000
|
|
Indirect labor
|
24,000
|
|
Dec. 31
|
40,000
|
|
Factory taxes
|
8,000
|
|
|
|
|
Factory utilities
|
11,000
|
Prepare the following:
a. A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.
b. An income statement for the year ended December 31.
5. Manufacturing statements and cost behavior
Tampa Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $36 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.
|
Per Unit
|
Variable Cost
|
Fixed Cost
|
|
Direct materials
|
$4.50
|
$
|
|
Direct labor
|
6.5
|
|
|
Factory overhead
|
9
|
50,000
|
|
Selling
|
|
70,000
|
|
Administrative
|
|
135,000
|
Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 17,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Tampa carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.
Instructions:
a. Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.
b. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
c. On the basis of the information presented:
1. Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
2. What is the likely effect on the $4.50 unit cost of direct materials if next year’s production increases? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Three Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Overhead application: Working backward
The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
|
Division A
|
Division B
|
|
Actual machine hours
|
26,500
|
?
|
|
Estimated machine hours
|
20,000
|
?
|
|
Overhead application rate
|
$5.00
|
$6.00
|
|
Actual overhead
|
$120,000
|
?
|
|
Estimated overhead
|
?
|
$90,000
|
|
Applied overhead
|
?
|
$87,000
|
|
Over- (under-) applied overhead
|
?
|
$8,500
|
Find the unknowns for each of the divisions.
2. Computationsusing a job order system
Spencer Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
Work in process $ 36,200
Finished goods 86,900
Cost of goods sold 130,700
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($22,400) and no. 103 ($13,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $116,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
101
|
|
$6,000
|
|
101
|
|
$7,800
|
|
117
|
|
18,500
|
|
103
|
|
20,800
|
|
116
|
|
34,200
|
|
117
|
|
44,000
|
|
Other
|
|
36,800
|
|
116
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
$95,500
|
|
Other
|
|
25,900
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$116,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Job no. 117 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $23,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.
b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.
c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.
d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.
3. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 20X8 operations of Houston Products:
|
Quarter 1
|
Quarter 2
|
Quarter 3
|
Quarter 4
|
|
Shipping costs
|
$56,200
|
$58,620
|
$61,000
|
$59,400
|
|
Orders shipped
|
120
|
135
|
170
|
145
|
The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
a. Determine the variable cost per order shipped.
b. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.
c. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 20X9 if activity amounts to 570 orders.
4. Break-even and other CVP relationships
Pine Hospital has average revenue of $190 per patient day. Variable costs are $50 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,620,000 per year.
a. How many patient days does the hospital need to break even?
b. What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $560,000?
c. If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?
5. Direct and absorption costing
The information that follows pertains to XYZ Products for the year ended December 31, 20X8.
|
Inventory, 1/1/X8
|
26,000 units
|
|
Units manufactured
|
80,000
|
|
Units sold
|
83,000
|
|
Inventory, 12/31/X8
|
? units
|
|
Manufacturing costs:
|
|
Direct materials
|
$4 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
$5 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
$9 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
$300,000
|
|
Selling & administrative expenses:
|
|
Variable
|
$2 per unit
|
|
Fixed
|
$136,000
|
The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Instructions:
a. Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.
b. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:
1. Direct costing.
2. Absorption costing.
c. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X8, by using direct costing.
d. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X8, by using absorption costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week Three Assignment
1.Overhead application: Working backward
The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
|
|
Division A
|
Division B
|
|
Actual machine hours
|
22,500
|
?
|
|
Estimated machine hours
|
20,000
|
?
|
|
Overhead application rate
|
$4.50
|
$5.00
|
|
Actual overhead
|
$110,000
|
?
|
|
Estimated overhead
|
?
|
$90,000
|
|
Applied overhead
|
?
|
$86,000
|
|
Over- (under-) applied overhead
|
?
|
$6,500
|
FIND THE UNKNOWNS FOR EACH OF THE DIVISIONS.
2.Computations using a job order system
General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
Work in process $ 35,200
Finished goods 86,900
Cost of goods sold 128,700
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
101
|
|
$5,000
|
|
101
|
|
$7,800
|
|
115
|
|
19,500
|
|
103
|
|
20,800
|
|
116
|
|
36,200
|
|
115
|
|
42,000
|
|
Other
|
|
35,800
|
|
116
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
|
$96,500
|
|
Other
|
|
25,900
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$114,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
a.Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.
b.Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.
c.Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.
d.Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.
3.High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 20X6 operations of Heritage Products:
|
|
Quarter 1
|
Quarter 2
|
Quarter 3
|
Quarter 4
|
|
Shipping costs
|
$58,200
|
$58,620
|
$60,125
|
$59,400
|
|
Orders shipped
|
120
|
140
|
175
|
150
|
The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
a.Determine the variable cost per order shipped.
b.Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.
c.If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 20X7 if activity amounts to 570 orders.
4.Break-even and other CVP relationships
Cedars Hospital has average revenue of $180 per patient day. Variable costs are $45 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,320,000 per year.
a.How many patient days does the hospital need to break even?
b.What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $540,000?
c.If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?
5.Direct and absorption costing
The information that follows pertains to Consumer Products for the year ended December 31, 20X6.
|
Inventory, 1/1/X6
|
24,000 units
|
|
Units manufactured
|
80,000
|
|
Units sold
|
82,000
|
|
Inventory, 12/31/X6
|
? units
|
|
Manufacturing costs:
|
|
Direct materials
|
$3 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
$5 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
$9 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
$280,000
|
|
Selling & administrative expenses:
|
|
Variable
|
$2 per unit
|
|
Fixed
|
$136,000
|
The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Instructions:
a.Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.
b.Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:
1.Direct costing.
2.Absorption costing.
c.Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using direct costing.
d.Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using absorption costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC206 Week Three Assignment
Week Three Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Overhead application: Working backward
The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
|
|
Division A
|
Division B
|
|
Actual machine hours
|
26,500
|
?
|
|
Estimated machine hours
|
20,000
|
?
|
|
Overhead application rate
|
$5.00
|
$6.00
|
|
Actual overhead
|
$120,000
|
?
|
|
Estimated overhead
|
?
|
$90,000
|
|
Applied overhead
|
?
|
$87,000
|
|
Over- (under-) applied overhead
|
?
|
$8,500
|
FIND THE UNKNOWNS FOR EACH OF THE DIVISIONS.
2. Computations using a job order system
Spencer Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
Work in process $ 36,200
Finished goods 86,900
Cost of goods sold 130,700
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($22,400) and no. 103 ($13,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $116,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
101
|
|
$6,000
|
|
101
|
|
$7,800
|
|
117
|
|
18,500
|
|
103
|
|
20,800
|
|
116
|
|
34,200
|
|
117
|
|
44,000
|
|
Other
|
|
36,800
|
|
116
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
|
$95,500
|
|
Other
|
|
25,900
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$116,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Job no. 117 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $23,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
a.Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.
b.Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.
c.Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.
d.Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.
3. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 20X8 operations of Houston Products:
|
|
Quarter 1
|
Quarter 2
|
Quarter 3
|
Quarter 4
|
|
Shipping costs
|
$56,200
|
$58,620
|
$61,000
|
$59,400
|
|
Orders shipped
|
120
|
135
|
170
|
145
|
The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
a.Determine the variable cost per order shipped.
b.Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.
c.If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 20X9 if activity amounts to 570 orders.
4. Break-even and other CVP relationships
Pine Hospital has average revenue of $190 per patient day. Variable costs are $50 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,620,000 per year.
a.How many patient days does the hospital need to break even?
b.What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $560,000?
c.If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?
5. Direct and absorption costing
The information that follows pertains to XYZ Products for the year ended December 31, 20X8.
|
Inventory, 1/1/X8
|
26,000 units
|
|
Units manufactured
|
80,000
|
|
Units sold
|
83,000
|
|
Inventory, 12/31/X8
|
? units
|
|
Manufacturing costs:
|
|
Direct materials
|
$4 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
$5 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
$9 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
$300,000
|
|
Selling & administrative expenses:
|
|
Variable
|
$2 per unit
|
|
Fixed
|
$136,000
|
The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Instructions:
a.Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.
b.Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:
1.Direct costing.
2.Absorption costing.
c.Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X8, by using direct costing.
d.Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X8, by using absorption costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. In a manufacturing operation, depreciation of the plant and plant equipment should be debited to Depreciation expense.
True
False
2. Which of the following describes the cost of goods manufactured?
The cost of the goods that were sold during the period
The total cost of all goods that were completed, or partially completed during the period
The cost of those goods which were completed during the period
The total costs in inventory at the end of the period
3. The following information pertains to Bright Toy Company’s operating activities for 2012. The company sells light box toys and sold 10,000 units in 2012.
Purchases $ 126,000
Selling and Administrative Expenses 90,000
Merchandise inventory, 1/1/2012 14,000
Merchandise inventory, 12/31/2012 10,000
Sales Revenue 250,000
What is the gross profit for 2012?
$120,000
$130,000
$140,000
$136,000
None of these is correct
4. All manufacturing overhead costs incurred are accumulated as debits to a general ledger account titled Manufacturing overhead.
True
False
5. Archangel Manufacturing has just finished the year 2012. They created a predetermined manufacturing overhead allocation rate at the beginning of the year based on a percentage of direct labor costs. Below are various data:
Total manufacturing overhead estimated at the beginning of the year: $140,000
Total direct labor costs estimated at the beginning of the year: $350,000
Total direct labor hours estimated at the beginning of the year: 12,000 direct labor hours
Actual manufacturing overhead costs for the year: $159,000
Actual direct labor costs for the year: $362,000
Actual direct labor hours for the year: 12,400 direct labor hours
Based on the data above, how much manufacturing overhead was allocated to production? (Please round to nearest whole dollar.)
$825,360
$905,000
$144,800
$159,280
None of these is correct
6. When materials are requisitioned for a job, the materials inventory account is debited. (Points : 1)
True
False
7. The following information pertains to Bright Toy Company’s operating activities for 2012. The company sells light box toys and sold 10,000 units in 2012.
Purchases $ 126,000
Selling and Administrative Expenses 90,000
Merchandise inventory, 1/1/2012 14,000
Merchandise inventory, 12/31/2012 10,000
Sales Revenue 250,000
What is the cost of goods sold for 2012?
$104,000
$124,000
$130,000
$140,000
None of these is correct
8. Process costing is used by companies that produce large numbers of identical units in a continuous fashion.
True
False
9. Selected data for Young Company for 2012 is presented below:
Direct labor incurred $30,000
Indirect labor incurred 21,000
Factory depreciation 5,000
Factory utilities 7,000
Indirect materials used 2,000
Direct materials used 12,000
Property taxes on factory building 3,000
Sales commissions 8,000
What is the manufacturing overhead?
$47,000
$50,000
$38,000
$46,000
None of these is correct
10. Indirect materials and indirect labor are tracked to individual job costing records and recorded in the Work in process account.
True
False
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Four Assignment
Please complete the following 3 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Comprehensive budgeting
The balance sheet of Williams Company as of December 31, 20X8, follows.
|
WILLIAMS COMPANY
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
December 31, 12X8
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$4,595
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
10,000
|
|
Finished goods (575 units x $7.00)
|
|
4,025
|
|
Direct materials (2,760 units x $0.50)
|
|
1,380
|
|
Plant & equipment
|
$50,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
10,000
|
40,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$60,000
|
|
Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable to suppliers
|
|
$14,000
|
|
Common stock
|
$25,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
21,000
|
46,000
|
|
Total liabilities &. stockholders’ equity
|
|
$60,000
|
The following information has been extracted from the firm’s accounting records:
1. All sales are made on account at $20 per unit. Sixty percent of the sales are collected in the month of sale; the remaining 40% are collected in the following month. Forecasted sales for the first five months of 20X9 are: January, 1,600 units,- February, 1,700 units; March, 1,900 units; April, 2,100 units; May, 2,200 units.
2. Management wants to maintain the finished goods inventory at 30% of the following month’s sales.
3. Williams uses four units of direct material in each finished unit. The direct material price has been stable and is expected to remain so over the next six months. Management wants to maintain the ending direct materials inventory at 60% of the following month’s production needs.
4. Seventy percent of all purchases are paid in the month of purchase; the remaining 30% are paid in the subsequent month.
5. Williams product requires 30 minutes of direct labor time. Each hour of direct labor costs $9.
Instructions:
a. Rounding computations to the nearest dollar, prepare the following for January through March:
1) Sales budget
2) Schedule of cash collections
3) Production budget
4) Direct material purchases budget
5) Schedule of cash disbursements for material purchases
6) Direct labor budget
b. Determine the balances in the following accounts as of March 31:
1) Accounts Receivable
2) Direct Materials
3) Accounts Payable
2. Basic flexible budgeting
Sydney, Inc., has the following budgeted production costs:
|
Direct materials
|
$0.45 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.80 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
2.30 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
|
Supervision
|
$26,000
|
|
Maintenance
|
18,000
|
|
Other
|
12,000
|
The company normally manufactures between 20,000 and 25,000 units each quarter. Should output exceed 25,000 units, maintenance and other fixed costs are expected to increase by $6,000 and $4,500, respectively.
During the recent quarter ended March 31, Sydney produced 25,500 units and incurred the following costs:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
$11,710
|
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
47,175
|
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
53,940
|
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
|
|
|
|
Supervision
|
|
24,500
|
|
|
Maintenance
|
|
23,700
|
|
|
Other
|
|
16,800
|
|
|
Total production costs
|
|
$177,825
|
|
Instructions:
a. Prepare a flexible budget for 21,000, 23,000, and 24,500 units of activity.
b. Was Sydney s experience in the quarter cited better or worse than anticipated? Prepare an appropriate performance report and explain your answer.
c. Explain the benefit of using flexible budgets (as opposed to static budgets) in the measurement of performance.
3. Straightforward variance analysis
Andy Enterprises uses a standard costing system. The standard cost sheet for product no. 551 follows.
|
Direct materials: 4 units @ $6.50
|
|
$26.00
|
|
Direct labor: 8 hours @ $8.50
|
|
68.00
|
|
Variable factory overhead: 8 hours
|
@ $7.00
|
56.00
|
|
Fixed factory overhead: 8 hours
|
@ 2.5
|
20.00
|
|
Total standard cost per unit
|
|
$170.00
|
|
|
|
|
The following information pertains to activity for December:
1. Direct materials acquired during the month amounted to 26,350 units at $6.40 per unit. All materials were consumed in operations.
2. Andy incurred an average wage rate of $8.75 for 51,400 hours of activity.
3. Total overhead incurred amounted to $508,400. Budgeted fixed overhead totals $1.8 million and is spread evenly throughout the year.
4. Actual production amounted to 6,500 completed units.
Instructions:
a. Compute Andy s direct material variances.
b. Compute Andy’s direct labor variances.
c. Compute Andy’s variances for factory overhead.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week 4 Assignment
Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable).
1. Comprehensive budgeting
The balance sheet of Watson Company as of December 31, 20X1, follows.
|
WATSON COMPANY
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
December 31, 12X1
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$4,595
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
10,000
|
|
Finished goods (575 units x $7.00)
|
|
4,025
|
|
Direct materials (2,760 units x $0.50)
|
|
1,380
|
|
Plant & equipment
|
$50,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
10,000
|
40,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$60,000
|
|
Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable to suppliers
|
|
$14,000
|
|
Common stock
|
$25,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
21,000
|
46,000
|
|
Total liabilities &. stockholders’ equity
|
|
$60,000
|
The following information has been extracted from the firm’s accounting records:
1.All sales are made on account at $20 per unit. Sixty percent of the sales are collected in the month of sale; the remaining 40% are collected in the following month. Forecasted sales for the first five months of 20X2 are: January, 1,500 units,- February, 1,600 units; March, 1,800 units; April, 2,000 units; May, 2,100 units.
2.Management wants to maintain the finished goods inventory at 30% of the following month’s sales.
3.Watson uses four units of direct material in each finished unit. The direct material price has been stable and is expected to remain so over the next six months. Management wants to maintain the ending direct materials inventory at 60% of the following month’s production needs.
4.Seventy percent of all purchases are paid in the month of purchase; the remaining 30% are paid in the subsequent month.
5.Watson’s product requires 30 minutes of direct labor time. Each hour of direct labor costs $7.
Instructions:
a.Rounding computations to the nearest dollar, prepare the following for January through March:
1) Sales budget
2) Schedule of cash collections
3) Production budget
4) Direct material purchases budget
5) Schedule of cash disbursements for material purchases
6) Direct labor budget
b.Determine the balances in the following accounts as of March 31:
1) Accounts Receivable
2) Direct Materials
3) Accounts Payable
2. Basic flexible budgeting
Centron, Inc., has the following budgeted production costs:
|
Direct materials
|
$0.40 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.80 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
2.20 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
|
Supervision
|
$24,000
|
|
Maintenance
|
18,000
|
|
Other
|
12,000
|
The company normally manufactures between 20,000 and 25,000 units each quarter. Should output exceed 25,000 units, maintenance and other fixed costs are expected to increase by $6,000 and $4,500, respectively.
During the recent quarter ended March 31, Centron produced 25,500 units and incurred the following costs:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
$10,710
|
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
47,175
|
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
51,940
|
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
|
|
|
|
Supervision
|
|
24,500
|
|
|
Maintenance
|
|
23,700
|
|
|
Other
|
|
16,800
|
|
|
Total production costs
|
|
$174,825
|
|
Instructions:
a.Prepare a flexible budget for 20,000, 22,500, and 25,000 units of activity.
b.Was Centron’s experience in the quarter cited better or worse than anticipated? Prepare an appropriate performance report and explain your answer.
c.Explain the benefit of using flexible budgets (as opposed to static budgets) in the measurement of performance.
3. Straightforward variance analysis
Arrow Enterprises uses a standard costing system. The standard cost sheet for product no. 549 follows.
|
Direct materials: 4 units @ $6.50
|
|
$26.00
|
|
Direct labor: 8 hours @ $8.50
|
|
68
|
|
Variable factory overhead: 8 hours
|
@ $7.00
|
56
|
|
Fixed factory overhead: 8 hours
|
@ 2.5
|
20
|
|
Total standard cost per unit
|
|
$170.00
|
The following information pertains to activity for December:
1.Direct materials acquired during the month amounted to 26,350 units at $6.40 per unit. All materials were consumed in operations.
2.Arrow incurred an average wage rate of $8.75 for 51,400 hours of activity.
3.Total overhead incurred amounted to $508,400. Budgeted fixed overhead totals $1.8 million and is spread evenly throughout the year.
4.Actual production amounted to 6,500 completed units.
Instructions:
a.Compute Arrow’s direct material variances.
b.Compute Arrow’s direct labor variances.
c.Compute Arrow’s variances for factory overhead.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Four Assignment
Please complete the following 3 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable).
1. Comprehensive budgeting
The balance sheet of Williams Company as of December 31, 20X8, follows.
|
WILLIAMS COMPANY
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
December 31, 12X8
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$4,595
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
10,000
|
|
Finished goods (575 units x $7.00)
|
|
4,025
|
|
Direct materials (2,760 units x $0.50)
|
|
1,380
|
|
Plant & equipment
|
$50,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
10,000
|
40,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$60,000
|
|
Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable to suppliers
|
|
$14,000
|
|
Common stock
|
$25,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
21,000
|
46,000
|
|
Total liabilities &. stockholders’ equity
|
|
$60,000
|
The following information has been extracted from the firm’s accounting records:
- All sales are made on account at $20 per unit. Sixty percent of the sales are collected in the month of sale; the remaining 40% are collected in the following month. Forecasted sales for the first five months of 20X9 are: January, 1,600 units,- February, 1,700 units; March, 1,900 units; April, 2,100 units; May, 2,200 units.
- Management wants to maintain the finished goods inventory at 30% of the following month’s sales.
- Williams uses four units of direct material in each finished unit. The direct material price has been stable and is expected to remain so over the next six months. Management wants to maintain the ending direct materials inventory at 60% of the following month’s production needs.
- Seventy percent of all purchases are paid in the month of purchase; the remaining 30% are paid in the subsequent month.
- Williams product requires 30 minutes of direct labor time. Each hour of direct labor costs $9.
Instructions:
A. Rounding computations to the nearest dollar, prepare the following for January through March:
1) Sales budget
2) Schedule of cash collections
3) Production budget
4) Direct material purchases budget
5) Schedule of cash disbursements for material purchases
6) Direct labor budget
B. Determine the balances in the following accounts as of March 31:
1) Accounts Receivable
2) Direct Materials
3) Accounts Payable
2. Basic flexible budgeting
Sydney, Inc., has the following budgeted production costs:
|
Direct materials
|
$0.45 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.80 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
2.30 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
|
Supervision
|
$26,000
|
|
Maintenance
|
18,000
|
|
Other
|
12,000
|
The company normally manufactures between 20,000 and 25,000 units each quarter. Should output exceed 25,000 units, maintenance and other fixed costs are expected to increase by $6,000 and $4,500, respectively.
During the recent quarter ended March 31, Sydney produced 25,500 units and incurred the following costs:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
$11,710
|
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
47,175
|
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
53,940
|
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
|
|
|
|
Supervision
|
|
24,500
|
|
|
Maintenance
|
|
23,700
|
|
|
Other
|
|
16,800
|
|
|
Total production costs
|
|
$177,825
|
|
Instructions:
a. Prepare a flexible budget for 21,000, 23,000, and 24,500 units of activity.
b. Was Sydney s experience in the quarter cited better or worse than anticipated? Prepare an appropriate performance report and explain your answer.
c. Explain the benefit of using flexible budgets (as opposed to static budgets) in the measurement of performance.
3. Straightforward variance analysis
Andy Enterprises uses a standard costing system. The standard cost sheet for product no. 551 follows.
|
Direct materials: 4 units @ $6.50
|
|
$26.00
|
|
Direct labor: 8 hours @ $8.50
|
|
68.00
|
|
Variable factory overhead: 8 hours
|
@ $7.00
|
56.00
|
|
Fixed factory overhead: 8 hours
|
@ 2.5
|
20.00
|
|
Total standard cost per unit
|
|
$170.00
|
|
|
|
|
The following information pertains to activity for December:
- Direct materials acquired during the month amounted to 26,350 units at $6.40 per unit. All materials were consumed in operations.
- Andy incurred an average wage rate of $8.75 for 51,400 hours of activity.
- Total overhead incurred amounted to $508,400. Budgeted fixed overhead totals $1.8 million and is spread evenly throughout the year.
- Actual production amounted to 6,500 completed units.
Instructions:
a. Compute Andy s direct material variances.
b. Compute Andy’s direct labor variances.
c. Compute Andy’s variances for factory overhead.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Five Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Basic present value calculations
Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar:
a. A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at an 11% rate of return.
b. An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at an 11% rate of return.
c. A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 12% rate of return.
d. An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has an 11% rate of return.
2. Cash flow calculationsand net present value
On January 2, 20X7, Brian Rein invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.70 per share in 20X7 and 20X8; the dividend was raised to $3.30 per share in 20X9. On December 31, 20X9, Rein sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,100. Rein uses the net-present- value method and desires a 16% return on investments.
a. Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note:Rein is entitled to the 20X9 dividend.
b. Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar.
c. Given the results of part (b), should Rein have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain.
3. Net present value
The City of Brighton is studying a 550-acre site on Route 401 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows:
Purchase cost: $400 per acre
Site preparation: $180,000
The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Brighton, which shares a facility in Bath Township with other municipalities, estimates that the new location will save $40,000 in annual operating costs.
a. Should the landfill be acquired if Brighton desires an 8% return on its investment? Use the net-present-value method to determine your answer.
4. Net-present-value
ABC Entertainment is considering the acquisition of a sight-seeing boat for summer tours along the Mississippi River. The following information is available:
|
Cost of boat
|
$550,000
|
|
Service life
|
10 summer seasons
|
|
Disposal value at the end of 10 seasons
|
$100,000
|
|
Capacity per trip
|
260 passengers
|
|
Fixed operating costs per season (including straight-line depreciation)
|
$160,000
|
|
Variable operating costs per trip
|
$1,000
|
|
Ticket price
|
$6 per passenger
|
All operating costs, except depreciation, require cash outlays. On the basis of similar operations in other parts of the country, management anticipates that each trip will be sold out and that 130,000 passengers will be carried each season. Ignore income taxes.
Instructions:
By using the net-present-value method, determine whether ABC Entertainment should acquire the boat. Assume a 14% desired return on all investments,- round calculations to the nearest dollar.
5. Equipment replacement decision
Richardson Enterprises is studying the replacement of some equipment that originally cost $74,000. The equipment is expected to provide six more years of service if $8,500 of major repairs are performed in two years. Annual cash operating costs total $28,000. Richardson can sell the equipment now for $37,000; the estimated residual value in six years is $5,000.
New equipment is available that will reduce annual cash operating costs to $21,000. The equipment costs $105,000, has a service life of six years, and has an estimated residual value of $13,000. Company sales will total $430,000 per year with either the existing or the new equipment. Richardson has a minimum desired return of 12% and depreciates all equipment by the straight-line method.
Instructions:
a. By using the net-present-value method, determine whether Richardson should keep its present equipment or acquire the new equipment. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar, and ignore income taxes.
b. Richardson s management feels that the time value of money should be considered in all long-term decisions. Briefly discuss the rationale that underlies management’s belief.
Please use the following Present and Future Value Tables below as a resource to solving the assigned problems:
Future Value of $1
Present Value of $1
Present Value of Ordinary Annuity
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC206 Week Five Problems
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Basic present value calculations
Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar:
a. A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at a 12% rate of return.
b. An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at a 14% rate of return.
c. A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 10% rate of return.
d. An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has a 16% rate of return.
2. Cash flow calculations and net present value
On January 2, 20X1, XXXXX XXXXXe invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.60 per share in 20X1 and 20X2; the dividend was raised to $3.10 per share in 20X3. On December 31, 20X3, Greene sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,000. Greene uses the net-present- value method and desires a 16% return on investments.
a. Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note: Greene is entitled to the 20X3 dividend.
b. Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar.
c. Given the results of part (b), should Greene have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain.
3. Straightforward net present value and internal rate of return
The City of Bedford is studying a 600-acre site on Route 356 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows:
Purchase cost: $450 per acre
Site preparation: $175,000
The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Bedford, which shares a facility in Bath Township with other municipalities, estimates that the new location will save $40,000 in annual operating costs.
a. Should the landfill be acquired if Bedford desires an 8% return on its investment? Use the net-present-value method to determine your answer.
4. Straightforward net-present-value and payback computations
STL Entertainment is considering the acquisition of a sight-seeing boat for summer tours along the Mississippi River. The following information is available:
Cost of boat $500,000
Service life 10 summer seasons
Disposal value at the end of 10 seasons $100,000
Capacity per trip 300 passengers
Fixed operating costs per season (including straight-line depreciation) $160,000
Variable operating costs per trip $1,000
Ticket price $5 per passenger
All operating costs, except depreciation, require cash outlays. On the basis of similar operations in other parts of the country, management anticipates that each trip will be sold out and that 120,000 passengers will be carried each season. Ignore income taxes.
Instructions:
By using the net-present-value method, determine whether STL Entertainment should acquire the boat. Assume a 14% desired return on all investments- round calculations to the nearest dollar.
5. Equipment replacement decision
Columbia Enterprises is studying the replacement of some equipment that originally cost $74,000. The equipment is expected to provide six more years of service if $8,700 of major repairs are performed in two years. Annual cash operating costs total $27,200. Columbia can sell the equipment now for $36,000; the estimated residual value in six years is $5,000.
New equipment is available that will reduce annual cash operating costs to $21,000. The equipment costs $103,000, has a service life of six years, and has an estimated residual value of $13,000. Company sales will total $430,000 per year with either the existing or the new equipment. Columbia has a minimum desired return of 12% and depreciates all equipment by the straight-line method.
Instructions:
a. By using the net-present-value method, determine whether Columbia should keep its present equipment or acquire the new equipment. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar, and ignore income taxes.
b. Columbia’s management feels that the time value of money should be considered in all long-term decisions. Briefly discuss the rationale that underlies management’s belief.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Three Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Overhead application: Working backward
The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
|
Division A
|
Division B
|
|
Actual machine hours
|
26,500
|
?
|
|
Estimated machine hours
|
20,000
|
?
|
|
Overhead application rate
|
$5.00
|
$6.00
|
|
Actual overhead
|
$120,000
|
?
|
|
Estimated overhead
|
?
|
$90,000
|
|
Applied overhead
|
?
|
$87,000
|
|
Over- (under-) applied overhead
|
?
|
$8,500
|
Find the unknowns for each of the divisions.
2. Computationsusing a job order system
Spencer Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
Work in process $ 36,200
Finished goods 86,900
Cost of goods sold 130,700
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($22,400) and no. 103 ($13,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $116,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
101
|
|
$6,000
|
|
101
|
|
$7,800
|
|
117
|
|
18,500
|
|
103
|
|
20,800
|
|
116
|
|
34,200
|
|
117
|
|
44,000
|
|
Other
|
|
36,800
|
|
116
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
$95,500
|
|
Other
|
|
25,900
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$116,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Job no. 117 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $23,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.
b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.
c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.
d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.
3. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 20X8 operations of Houston Products:
|
Quarter 1
|
Quarter 2
|
Quarter 3
|
Quarter 4
|
|
Shipping costs
|
$56,200
|
$58,620
|
$61,000
|
$59,400
|
|
Orders shipped
|
120
|
135
|
170
|
145
|
The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
a. Determine the variable cost per order shipped.
b. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.
c. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 20X9 if activity amounts to 570 orders.
4. Break-even and other CVP relationships
Pine Hospital has average revenue of $190 per patient day. Variable costs are $50 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,620,000 per year.
a. How many patient days does the hospital need to break even?
b. What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $560,000?
c. If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?
5. Direct and absorption costing
The information that follows pertains to XYZ Products for the year ended December 31, 20X8.
|
Inventory, 1/1/X8
|
26,000 units
|
|
Units manufactured
|
80,000
|
|
Units sold
|
83,000
|
|
Inventory, 12/31/X8
|
? units
|
|
Manufacturing costs:
|
|
Direct materials
|
$4 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
$5 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
$9 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
$300,000
|
|
Selling & administrative expenses:
|
|
Variable
|
$2 per unit
|
|
Fixed
|
$136,000
|
The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Instructions:
a. Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.
b. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:
1. Direct costing.
2. Absorption costing.
c. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X8, by using direct costing.
d. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X8, by using absorption costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Three Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Overhead application: Working backward
The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
|
Division A
|
Division B
|
|
Actual machine hours
|
26,500
|
?
|
|
Estimated machine hours
|
20,000
|
?
|
|
Overhead application rate
|
$5.00
|
$6.00
|
|
Actual overhead
|
$120,000
|
?
|
|
Estimated overhead
|
?
|
$90,000
|
|
Applied overhead
|
?
|
$87,000
|
|
Over- (under-) applied overhead
|
?
|
$8,500
|
Find the unknowns for each of the divisions.
2. Computationsusing a job order system
Spencer Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
Work in process $ 36,200
Finished goods 86,900
Cost of goods sold 130,700
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($22,400) and no. 103 ($13,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $116,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
101
|
|
$6,000
|
|
101
|
|
$7,800
|
|
117
|
|
18,500
|
|
103
|
|
20,800
|
|
116
|
|
34,200
|
|
117
|
|
44,000
|
|
Other
|
|
36,800
|
|
116
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
$95,500
|
|
Other
|
|
25,900
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$116,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Job no. 117 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $23,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.
b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.
c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.
d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.
3. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 20X8 operations of Houston Products:
|
Quarter 1
|
Quarter 2
|
Quarter 3
|
Quarter 4
|
|
Shipping costs
|
$56,200
|
$58,620
|
$61,000
|
$59,400
|
|
Orders shipped
|
120
|
135
|
170
|
145
|
The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
a. Determine the variable cost per order shipped.
b. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.
c. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 20X9 if activity amounts to 570 orders.
4. Break-even and other CVP relationships
Pine Hospital has average revenue of $190 per patient day. Variable costs are $50 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,620,000 per year.
a. How many patient days does the hospital need to break even?
b. What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $560,000?
c. If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?
5. Direct and absorption costing
The information that follows pertains to XYZ Products for the year ended December 31, 20X8.
|
Inventory, 1/1/X8
|
26,000 units
|
|
Units manufactured
|
80,000
|
|
Units sold
|
83,000
|
|
Inventory, 12/31/X8
|
? units
|
|
Manufacturing costs:
|
|
Direct materials
|
$4 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
$5 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
$9 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
$300,000
|
|
Selling & administrative expenses:
|
|
Variable
|
$2 per unit
|
|
Fixed
|
$136,000
|
The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Instructions:
a. Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.
b. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:
1. Direct costing.
2. Absorption costing.
c. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X8, by using direct costing.
d. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X8, by using absorption costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Three Exercise Assignment
Inventory
1. Specific identification method. Boston Galleries uses the specific identification method for inventory valuation. Inventory information for several oil paintings follows.
Painting Cost
1/2 Beginning inventory Woods $11,000
4/19 Purchase Sunset 21,800
6/7 Purchase Earth 31,200
12/16 Purchase Moon 4,000
Woods and Moon were sold during the year for a total of $35,000. Determine the firm s
a. cost of goods sold.
b. gross profit.
c. ending inventory.
2. Inventory valuation methods: basic computations. The January beginning inven tory of the White Company consisted of 300 units costing $40 each. During the first quarter, the company purchased two batches of goods: 700 Units at $44 on February 21 and 800 units at $50 on March 28. Sales during the first quarter were 1,400 units at $75 per unit. The White Company uses a periodic inventory system. Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods.
FIFO LIFO Weighted Average
Goods available for sale $ $ $
Ending inventory, March 31
Cost of goods sold
3. Perpetual inventory system: journal entries. At the beginning of 20X3, Beehler Company implemented a computerized perpetual inventory system. The first transactions that occurred during 20X3 follow:
1/2/20X3 Purchases on account: 500 units @ $4 = $2,000
1/15/20X3 Sales on account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550
1/20/20X3 Purchases on Account: 200 units @ $5 = $1,000
1/25/20X3 Sales on Account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550
The company president examined the computer-generated journal entries for these transactions and was confused by the absence of a Purchases account.
a. Duplicate the journal entries that would have appeared on the computer printout under FIFO & LIFO.
b. Calculate the balance in the firm s Inventory account under each method.
c. Briefly explain the absence of the Purchases account to the company president.
4. Inventory valuation methods: computations and concepts. Wave Riders Surfboard Company began business on January 1 of the current year. Purchases of surfboards were as follows:
1/3: 100 boards @ $125
3/17: 50 boards @ $130
5/9: 246 boards @ $140
7/3: 400 boards @ $150
10/23: 74 boards @ $160
Wave Riders sold 710 boards at an average price of $250 per board. The company uses a periodic inventory system.
Instructions
a. Calculate cost of goods sold, ending inventory, and gross profit under each of the following inventory valuation methods:
First-in, first-out
Last-in, first-out
Weighted average
b. Which of the three methods would be chosen if management s goal is to
(1) produce an up-to-date inventory valuation on the balance sheet
(2) show the lowest net income for tax purposes
5. Depreciation methods. Betsy Ross Enterprises purchased a delivery van for $30,000 in January 20X7. The van was estimated to have a service life of 5 years and a resid ual value of $6,000. The company is planning to drive the van 20,000 miles annually. Compute depreciation expense for 20X8 by using each of the following methods:
a. Units-of-output, assuming 17,000 miles were driven during 20X8
b. Straight-line
c. Double-declining-balance
6. Depreciation computations. Alpha Alpha Alpha, a college fraternity, purchased a new heavy-duty washing machine on January 1, 20X3. The machine, which cost $1,000, had an estimated residual value of $100 and an estimated service life of 4 years (1,800 washing cycles). Calculate the following:
a. The machine s book value on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the straight-line depreciation method.
b. Depreciation expense for 20X4, assuming use of the units-of-output depreciation method. Actual washing cycles in 20X4 totaled 500.
c. Accumulated depreciation on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the double-declining-balance depreciation method.
7. Depreciation computations: change in estimate. Aussie Imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for $50,000 on January 1, 20X3. At the time of acquisition, the machine was estimated to have a service life of 5 years (25,000 operating hours) and a residual value of $5,000. During the 5 years of operations (20X3 – 20X7), the machine was used for 5,100, 4,800, 3,200, 6,000, and 5,900 hours, respectively.
Instructions
a. Compute depreciation for 20X3 – 20X7 by using the following methods: straight line, units of output, and double-declining-balance.
b. On January 1, 20X5, management shortened the remaining service life of the machine to 20 months. Assuming use of the straight-line method, compute the company s depreciation expense for 20X5.
c. Briefly describe what you would have done differently in part (a) if Aussie Imports had paid $47,800 for the machinery rather than $50,000. In addition, assume that the company incurred $800 of freight charges $1,400 for machine setup and testing, and $300 for insurance during the first year of use.
Due July: 12, 2013
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Two Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in theappropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Analysis of stockholders’ equity
Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X8. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 20X8 and 20X7 follow.
|
20X8
|
20X7
|
|
Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10%
|
$600,000
|
$500,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par value
|
2,350,000
|
1,550,000
|
|
|
|
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par value
|
|
|
|
Preferred
|
24,000
|
|
|
Common
|
4,620,000
|
3,600,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
8,470,000
|
6,920,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$16,064,000
|
$12,570,000
|
a. Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X8.
b. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X8.
c. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 20X8?
d. Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X8? By what amount?
2. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization
Northern Corporation issued $800,000 of 7% bonds on March 1, 20X8. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow.
Case A The bonds are issued at 100.
Case B The bonds are issued at 96.
Case C The bonds are issued at 105.
Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization.
Instructions:
|
Complete the following table:
|
|
|
|
|
Case A
|
Case B
|
Case C
|
- Cash inflow on the issuance date
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Total cash outflow through maturity
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Amortization for the year ended December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Unamortized premium as of December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Unamortized discount as of December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Bond carrying value as of December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
3. Definitions of manufacturing concepts
J & B Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:
Materials and supplies used
Brass $80,000
Repair parts 18,000
Machine lubricants 8,000
Wages and salaries Machine operators 140,000
Production supervisors 62,000
Maintenance personnel 39,000
Other factory overhead Variable 29,000
Fixed 48,000
Sales commissions 20,000
Compute:
a. Total direct materials consumed
b. Total direct labor
c. Total prime cost
d. Total conversion cost
4. Scheduleof cost of goods manufactured, income statement
The following information was taken from the ledger of Jakob Industries, Inc.:
|
Direct labor
|
$75,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$63,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
36,000
|
|
Work in. process
|
|
|
Sales
|
310,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
32,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
|
|
Dec. 31
|
21,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
115,000
|
|
Direct material purchases
|
87,000
|
|
Dec. 31
|
131,000
|
|
Depreciation: factory
|
21,000
|
|
Raw (direct) materials on hand
|
Indirect materials used
|
11,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
31,000
|
|
Indirect labor
|
26,000
|
|
Dec. 31
|
40,000
|
|
Factory taxes
|
8,000
|
|
|
|
Factory utilities
|
12,000
|
Prepare the following:
a. A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.
b. An income statement for the year ended December 31.
5. Manufacturing statements and cost behavior
Sioux Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $38 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.
|
Per Unit
|
Variable Cost
|
Fixed Cost
|
|
Direct materials
|
$4.00
|
$
|
|
Direct labor
|
7.0
|
|
|
Factory overhead
|
9.0
|
70,000
|
|
Selling
|
|
80,000
|
|
Administrative
|
|
135,000
|
Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 18,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Sioux carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.
Instructions:
a. Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.
b. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
c. On the basis of the information presented:
1. Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
2. What is the likely effect on the $4.00 unit cost of direct materials if next year’s production increases? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Two Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in theappropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Analysis of stockholders’ equity
Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X8. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 20X8 and 20X7 follow.
|
20X8
|
20X7
|
|
Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10%
|
$600,000
|
$500,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par value
|
2,350,000
|
1,550,000
|
|
|
|
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par value
|
|
|
|
Preferred
|
24,000
|
|
|
Common
|
4,620,000
|
3,600,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
8,470,000
|
6,920,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$16,064,000
|
$12,570,000
|
a. Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X8.
b. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X8.
c. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 20X8?
d. Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X8? By what amount?
2. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization
Northern Corporation issued $800,000 of 7% bonds on March 1, 20X8. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow.
Case A The bonds are issued at 100.
Case B The bonds are issued at 96.
Case C The bonds are issued at 105.
Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization.
Instructions:
|
Complete the following table:
|
|
|
|
|
Case A
|
Case B
|
Case C
|
- Cash inflow on the issuance date
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Total cash outflow through maturity
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Amortization for the year ended December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Unamortized premium as of December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Unamortized discount as of December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Bond carrying value as of December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
3. Definitions of manufacturing concepts
J & B Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:
Materials and supplies used
Brass $80,000
Repair parts 18,000
Machine lubricants 8,000
Wages and salaries Machine operators 140,000
Production supervisors 62,000
Maintenance personnel 39,000
Other factory overhead Variable 29,000
Fixed 48,000
Sales commissions 20,000
Compute:
a. Total direct materials consumed
b. Total direct labor
c. Total prime cost
d. Total conversion cost
4. Scheduleof cost of goods manufactured, income statement
The following information was taken from the ledger of Jakob Industries, Inc.:
|
Direct labor
|
$75,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$63,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
36,000
|
|
Work in. process
|
|
|
Sales
|
310,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
32,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
|
|
Dec. 31
|
21,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
115,000
|
|
Direct material purchases
|
87,000
|
|
Dec. 31
|
131,000
|
|
Depreciation: factory
|
21,000
|
|
Raw (direct) materials on hand
|
Indirect materials used
|
11,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
31,000
|
|
Indirect labor
|
26,000
|
|
Dec. 31
|
40,000
|
|
Factory taxes
|
8,000
|
|
|
|
Factory utilities
|
12,000
|
Prepare the following:
a. A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.
b. An income statement for the year ended December 31.
5. Manufacturing statements and cost behavior
Sioux Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $38 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.
|
Per Unit
|
Variable Cost
|
Fixed Cost
|
|
Direct materials
|
$4.00
|
$
|
|
Direct labor
|
7.0
|
|
|
Factory overhead
|
9.0
|
70,000
|
|
Selling
|
|
80,000
|
|
Administrative
|
|
135,000
|
Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 18,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Sioux carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.
Instructions:
a. Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.
b. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
c. On the basis of the information presented:
1. Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
2. What is the likely effect on the $4.00 unit cost of direct materials if next year’s production increases? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You ve just been hired onto ABC Company as the corporate controller. ABC Company is a manufacturing firm that specializes in making cedar roofing and siding shingles. The company currently has annual sales of around $1.2 million, a 25% increase from the previous year. The company has an aggressive growth target of reaching $3 million annual sales within the next 3 years. The CEO has been trying to find additional products that can leverage the current ABC employee skillset as well as the manufacturing facilities.
As the controller of ABC Company, the CEO has come to you with a new opportunity that he s been working on. The CEO would like to use the some of the shingle scrap materials to build cedar dollhouses. While this new product line would add additional raw materials and be more time-intensive to manufacture than the cedar shingles, this new product line will be able to leverage ABC s existing manufacturing facilities as well as the current staff. Although this product line will require added expenses, it will provide additional revenue and gross profit to help reach the growth targets. The CEO is relying on you to help decide how this project can be afforded Provide details about the estimated product costs, what is needed to break even on the project, and what level of return this product is expected to provide.
In order to help out the CEO, you need to prepare a six- to eight-page report that will contain the following information (including exhibits, but excluding your references and title page). Refer to the accompanying Excel spreadsheet (available through your online course) for some specific cost and profit information to complete the calculations.
Final Paper Spreadsheet
I. An overall risk profile of the company based on current economic and industry issues that it may be facing.
II. Current company cash flow
a. You need to complete a cash flow statement for the company using the direct method.
b. Once you ve completed the cash flow statement, answer the following questions:
i. What does this statement of cash flow tell you about the sources and uses of the company funds?
ii. Is there anything ABC Company can do to improve the cash flow?
iii. Can this project be financed with current cash flow from the company? Why or why not?
iv. If the company needs additional financing beyond what ABC Company can provide internally (either now or sometime throughout the life of the project), how would you suggest the company obtain the additional financing, equity or corporate debt, and why?
III. Product cost: ABC Company believes that it has an additional 5,000 machine hours available in the current facility before it would need to expand. ABC Company uses machine hours to allocate the fixed factory overhead, and units sold to allocate the fixed sales expenses. Bases on current research, ABC Company expects that it will take twice as long to produce the expansion product as it currently takes to produce its existing product.
a. What is the product cost for the expansion product under absorption and variable costing?
b. By adding this new expansion product, it helps to absorb the fixed factory and sales expenses. How much cheaper does this expansion make the existing product?
c. Assuming ABC Company wants a 40% gross margin for the new product, what selling price should it set for the expansion product
d. Assuming the same sales mix of these two products, what are the contribution margins and break-even points by product?
IV. Potential investments to accelerate profit: ABC company has the option to purchase additional equipment that will cost about $42,000, and this new equipment will produce the following savings in factory overhead costs over the next five years:
Year 1, $15,000
Year 2, $13,000
Year 3, $10,000
Year 4, $10,000
Year 5, $6,000
ABC Company uses the net-present-value method to analyze investments and desires a minimum rate of return of 12% on the equipment.
a. What is the net present value of the proposed investment (ignore income taxes and depreciation)?
b. Assuming a 5-year straight-line depreciation, how will this impact the factory s fixed costs for each of the 5 years (and the implied product costs)? What about cash flow?
c. Considering the cash flow impact of the equipment as well as the time-value of money, would you recommend that ABC Company purchases the equipment? Why or why not
V. Conclusion:
a. What are the major risk factors that you see in this project?
b. As the controller and a management accountant, what is your responsibility to this project?
c. What do you recommend the CEO do?
Writing the Final Paper
1. Must be six to eight double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:
a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted
3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document at least three, but no more than five sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Occidental Produce Company has 40,000 shares of common stock outstanding and 2,000 shares of preferred stock outstanding. The common stock is $0.01 par value; the preferred stock is 4% non-cumulative, with $100 par value. On October 15, 2014, the company declares a total dividend payment of $40,000. What is the total amount of dividends that will be paid to the common shareholders? (Points : 1)
$40,000
$32,000
$ 400
$ 4,500
None of these is correct
2. Which of the following is a TRUE statement about a corporation? (Points : 1)
The owners of a corporation have co-ownership of the property of the corporation.
A corporation is not taxed on the corporation’s business income.
A corporation has a limited life.
The owners of a corporation have limited liability for the corporation’s debts.
3. The purchase of treasury stock requires a credit to the Common stock account. (Points : 1)
True
False
4. Which of the following is an advantage of preferred stock? (Points : 1)
Preferred shareholders are guaranteed that they will not take a loss on their investment.
Preferred shareholders have higher voting rights than common shareholders.
Preferred shareholders may sell their shares for a price higher than that of common stock.
Preferred shareholders have the first claim on dividend funds.
5. All forms and classes of stock carry voting rights. (Points : 1)
True
False
6. A corporation is a separate legal entity formed under the laws of a particular state. (Points : 1)
True
False
7. Cash dividends affect only stockholders’ equity accounts. (Points : 1)
True
False
8. On June 30, 2014, Stephans Company showed the following data on the equity section of their balance sheet:
Stockholders’ equity
Common stock, $1 par100,000 shares authorized$40,000
40,000 shares issued
Paid-in capital in excess of par260,000
Retained earnings940,000
Total stockholder’s equity$1,240,000
On July 1, 2014, Stephans distributed a 5% stock dividend. The market value of the stock at that time was $13 per share. Following this transaction, the total shareholders equity would go down by $26,000. (Points : 1)
True
False
9. On June 30, 2013, Stephans Company showed the following data on the equity section of their balance sheet:
Stockholders’ equity
Common stock, $1 par100,000 shares authorized$40,000
40,000 shares issued
Paid-in capital in excess of par260,000
Retained earnings940,000
Total stockholder’s equity$1,240,000
On July 1, 2013, Stephans distributed a 5% stock dividend. The market value of the stock at that time was $13 per share. Following this transaction, what would be the new number of shares issued shown on the balance sheet? (Points : 1)
26,000
66,000
42,000
105,000
None of these is correct
10. If preferred stock is non-cumulative, then the company does NOT need to pay dividends that were passed in previous years. (Points : 1)
True
False
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC206 Week One Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate
1. Critical Thinking Question:
Answer the following questions:
Why are noncash transactions, such as the exchange of common stock for a building for example, included on a statement of cash flows? How are these noncash transactions disclosed?
2. Classification of activities
Classify each of the following transactions as arising from an operating (O), investing (I), financing (F), or noncash investing/financing (N) activity.
a. ________ Received $80,000 from the sale of land.
b. ________ Received $3,200 from cash sales.
c. ________ Paid a $5,000 dividend.
d. ________ Purchased $8,800 of merchandise for cash.
e. ________ Received $100,000 from the issuance of common stock.
f. ________ Paid $1,200 of interest on a note payable.
g. ________ Acquired a new laser printer by paying $650.
h. ________ Acquired a $400,000 building by signing a $400,000 mortgage note.
3. Overview of direct and indirect methods
Evaluate the comments that follow as being True or False. If the comment is false, briefly explain why.
a. Both the direct and indirect methods will produce the same cash flow from operating activities.
b. Depreciation expense is added back to net income when the indirect method is used.
c. One of the advantages of using the direct method rather than the indirect method is that larger cash flows from financing activities will be reported.
d. The cash paid to suppliers is normally disclosed on the statement of cash flows when the indirect method of statement preparation is employed.
e. The dollar change in the Merchandise Inventory account appears on the statement of cash flows only when the direct method of statement preparation is used.
4. Equipment transaction and cash flow reporting
Dec. 31, 20X4 Dec. 31, 20X3
Property, Plant & Equipment:
Land $94,000 $94,000
Equipment 652,000527,000
Less: Accumulated depreciation-316,000-341,000
New equipment purchased during 20×4 totaled $280,000. The 20×4 income statement disclosed equipment depreciation expense of $41,000 and a $9,000 loss on the sale of equipment.
a. Determine the cost and accumulated depreciation of the equipment sold during 20X4.
b. Determine the selling price of the equipment sold.
c. Show how the sale of equipment would appear on a statement of cash flows prepared by using the indirect method.
5. Cash flow information: Direct and indirect methods
The comparative year-end balance sheets of Sign Graphics, Inc., revealed the following activity in the company’s current accounts:
20X520X4 Increase / Decrease)
Current assets
Cash $55,400$35,200 $20,200
Accounts receivable (net)83,80088,000 -4,200
Inventory 243,400233,800 9,600
Prepaid expenses 25,400 24,200 1,200
Current liabilities
Accounts payable$123,600$140,600($17,000)
Taxes payable 43,600 49,200-5,600
Interest payable 9,000 6,4002,600
Accrued liabilities38,80060,400-21,600
Note payable 44,000 44,000
The accounts payable were for the purchase of merchandise. Prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities relate to the firm’s selling and administrative expenses. The company’s condensed income statement follows.
SIGN GRAPHICS INC.
Income Statement
for the Year Ended December 31, 20×5
Sales $713,800
Less: Cost of goods sold 323,000
Gross profit $390,800
Less: Selling & administrative expenses $186,000
Depreciation expense 17,000
Interest expense 27,000 230,000
$160,800
Add: gain on sale of land 21,800
Income before taxes $182,600
Income taxes 36,800
Net income $145,800
Other data:
1. Long-term investments were purchased for cash at a cost of $74,600.
2. Cash proceeds from the sale of land totaled $76,200.
3. Store equipment of $44,000 was purchased by signing a short-term note payable. Also, a $150,000 telecommunications system was acquired by issuing 3,000 shares of preferred stock.
4. A long-term note of $49,400 was repaid.
5. Twenty thousand shares of common stock were issued at $5.19 per share.
6. The company paid cash dividends amounting to $128,600.
Instructions:
a. Prepare the operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows, assuming use of:
1. The direct method.
2. The indirect method.
b. Prepare the investing and financing activities sections of the statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 19-1
Veronica Company allocates overhead costs to jobs on the basis of direct labor-hours. Its estimated average monthly factory costs for 2005 were as follows:
Average Monthly Costs
Direct material cost $60,000
Direct labor cost 300,000
Overhead cost 180,000
Its estimated average monthly direct labor-hours are 20,000. Among the jobs worked on November 2005 were two jobs, G and H, for which the following information was collected:
Job G Job H
Direct material cost $10,000 $10,000
Direct labor cost 28,000 32,000
Direct labor-hours 2,400 2,800
Required:
a) Compute the overhead rate for Veronica Company.
b) Compute the total production costs of jobs G and H.
c) At what amounts would customers be billed if the company’s practice was to charge 180 percent of the production cost of each job?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that you have been asked to place a value on the ownership position in Briarwood Hospital. Its
projected profit and loss statements and retention requirements are shown below (in millions):
Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5
Net revenues $225.0 $240.0 $250.0 $260.0 $275.0
Cash expenses $200.0 $205.0 $210.0 $215.0 $225.0
Depreciation $11.0 $12.0 $13.0 $14.0 $15.0
Earnings before interest and taxes $14.0 $23.0 $27.0 $31.0 $35.0
Interest $8.0 $9.0 $9.0 $10.0 $10.0
Earnings before taxes $6.0 $14.0 $18.0 $21.0 $25.0
Taxes (40 percent) $2.4 $5.6 $7.2 $8.4 $10.0
Net profit $3.6 $8.4 $10.8 $12.6 $15.0
Estimated retentions $10.0 $10.0 $10.0 $10.0 $10.0
Briarwood’s cost of equity is 16 percent, its cost of debt is 10 percent, and its optimal capital structure is 40 percent debt and 60 percent equity. The best estimate for Briarwood’s long-term growth rate is 4 percent. Furthermore, the hospital currently has $80 million in debt outstanding.
a. What is the equity value of the hospital using the Free Operating Cash Flow (FOCF) method
b. Suppose that the expected long-term growth rate was 6 percent. What impact would this change have on the equity value of the business according to the FOCF method What if the growth rate were only 2 percent
c. What is the equity value of the hospital using the Free Cash Flow to Equityhloders (FCFE) method
d. Suppose that the expected long-term growth rate was 6 percent. What impact would this change have on the equity value of the business according to the FCFE method What if the growth rate were only 2 percent
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Toy Box Inc. is contemplating expanding their sales of their children s toys. The have an opportunity to stock and sell the X toy that has been a big hit with children everywhere. They need to order the X toys from the manufacturer in a minimum order of 100 at a cost of $12 each. They could resell the X toy in their store for $22 each.
Due to anticipated demand, Toy Box Inc. will need to hire an additional part-time cashier at $600 a month which will be classified as a fixed-cost attributable to the X toy. Also, they have offered a $1 sales commission per toy to their floor sales representative. They will also include a package of trading cards with every purchase of an X toy, which will cost them an additional $2 each.
Required:
To make the project worthwhile, Toy Box Inc. would require a $5,000 profit per month. What level of sales in units and in dollars would be required to reach this target profit? Show all computations.
Assume that the venture is undertaken and an order is placed for 100 X toys. What would be Toy Box s break-even point in units and in sales dollars? Show computations and explain the reasoning behind your answer. You can ignore the fixed cost of $600 for this part.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Part A (30 points)
Record the following transactions in the basic accounting equation:
a.Brian invests $10,000 cash to begin an accounting service.
b.The company buys office furniture for cash, $600.
c.The company buys additional office furniture on account, $300.
d.The company makes a payment on the office furniture, $200.
Brian’s Accounting Service
ASSETS = LIABILITIES + OWNER’S EQUITY
Cash + Office Furniture = Accounts Payable + Brian’s Capital
Part B (40 points)
The following is a list of accounts and their balances for Benson Company for the month ended June 30, 20xx. Prepare a trial balance in good form.
Cash $1,370
Accounts Payable 770
Office Equipment 900
Benson, Capital 1,500
Benson, Withdrawals 500
Accounts Receivable 1,600
Service Fees 2,730
Salaries Expense 630
Part C (30 points)
The following transactions occurred during June for Campus Cycle Shop. Record the transactions below in the T accounts. Place the letter of the transaction next to the entry. Foot and calculate the ending balances of the T accounts where appropriate.
a.Tyler invested $6,500 in the bike service from his personal savings account.
b.Bought office equipment for cash, $900.
c.Performed bike service for a customer on account, $1,000.
d.Company cell phone bill received, but not paid, $80.
e.Collected $500 from customer in transaction c.
f.Tyler withdrew $300 for personal use.
Part D (20 points)
Prepare in proper form journal entries for the following transactions. Omit explanations.
October
2 Owner made a cash investment into the company $5,000
8 Bought supplies on account $100.
10 Paid salaries, $700
15 Paid for supplies purchased on October 8
21 Received company telephone bill, to be paid later, $30
Part E (5 points each for a possible total of 50 points)
Record the following selected transactions for January in a two-column journal, identifying each entry by letter:
a.Earned $7,000 fees; customer will pay later.
b.Purchased equipment for $45,000, paying $20,000 in cash and the remainder on credit
c.Paid $3,000 for rent for January.
d.Purchased $2,500 of supplies on account.
e.A. Allen $1,000 investment in the company.
f.Received $7,000 in cash for fees earned previously.
g.Paid $1,200 to creditors on account.
h.Paid wages of $6,250.
i.Received $7,150 from customers on account.
j.A. Allen withdrawal of $1,750.
Part F
1.(10 points) From the following items in the income statement columns of the worksheet of Friend’s Tutoring at December 31, prepare the closing entries without explanation, assuming that a $1,000 withdrawal was made during the period.
Income Statement
Account Debit Credit
Tutoring Fees 3,450
Wages Expense 700
Rent Expense 600
Supplies Expense 450
Insurance Expense 250
2,000 3,450
Net Income 1,450
$3,450 $3,450
2.(5 points each for a possible total of 20 points) A summary of selected ledger accounts appear below for S. Ball for the current calendar year.
Answer the following questions.
a.What was the total amount of withdrawals for the year?
b.What was the net income?
c.What was the total revenue?
d.What were the total expenses?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question3
Cardinal Paz Corp. carries an account in its general ledger called Investments, which contained debits for investment purchases, and no credits, with the following descriptions.
| Feb. 1, 2012 |
|
Sharapova Company common stock, $109 par, 218 shares |
|
$43,400 |
| April 1 |
|
U.S. government bonds, 10%, due April 1, 2022, interest payable April 1 and October 1, 111 bonds of $1,000 par each |
|
111,000 |
| July 1 |
|
McGrath Company 12% bonds, par $53,600, dated March 1, 2012, purchased at 104 plus accrued interest, interest payable annually on March 1, due March 1, 2032 |
|
57,888 |
(a) Prepare entries necessary to classify the amounts into proper accounts, assuming that all the securities are classified as available-for-sale. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
| Account Titles and Explanation |
Debit |
Credit |
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
(b) Prepare the entry to record the accrued interest and the amortization of premium on December 31, 2012, using the straight-line method. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $2,500. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
| Account Titles and Explanation |
Debit |
Credit |
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
(c) The fair values of the investments on December 31, 2012, were:
| Sharapova Company common stock |
|
$32,650 |
| U.S. government bonds |
|
145,580 |
| McGrath Company bonds |
|
60,400 |
What entry or entries, if any, would you recommend be made (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $2,500. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
| Account Titles and Explanation |
Debit |
Credit |
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
(d) The U.S. government bonds were sold on July 1, 2013, for $120,940 plus accrued interest. Give the proper entry. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
| Account Titles and Explanation |
Debit |
Credit |
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
List Of Accounts
Question 3
|
Bonds Payable Call Option Cash Cost of Goods Sold Debt Investments Dividend Receivable Dividend Revenue Equity Investments Fair Value Adjustment Futures Contract Gain on Sale of Investments Interest Expense Interest Receivable Interest Revenue Inventory Investments Loss on Impairment Loss on Investments Loss on Settlement of Call Option Loss on Settlement of Put Option Memo Entry No Entry Notes Payable Put Option Retained Earnings Revenue from Investment Sales Revenue Swap Contract Unrealized Holding Gain or Loss – Equity Unrealized Holding Gain or Loss – Income
——————————————————————————————————————–
Brooks Corp. is a medium-sized corporation specializing in quarrying stone for building construction. The company has long dominated the market, at one time achieving a 70% market penetration. During prosperous years, the company s profits, coupled with a conservative dividend policy, resulted in funds available for outside investment. Over the years, Brooks has had a policy of investing idle cash in equity securities. In particular, Brooks has made periodic investments in the company s principal supplier, Norton Industries. Although the firm currently owns 12% of the outstanding common stock of Norton Industries, Brooks does not have significant influence over the operations of Norton Industries.
Cheryl Thomas has recently joined Brooks as assistant controller, and her first assignment is to prepare the 2012 year-end adjusting entries for the accounts that are valued by the fair value rule for financial reporting purposes. Thomas has gathered the following information about Brooks s pertinent accounts.
| 1. |
|
Brooks has trading securities related to Delaney Motors and Patrick Electric. During this fiscal year, Brooks purchased 100,000 shares of Delaney Motors for $1,400,000; these shares currently have a market value of $1,600,000. Brooks investment in Patrick Electric has not been profitable; the company acquired 50,000 shares of Patrick in April 2012 at $20 per share, a purchase that currently has a value of $720,000. |
| 2. |
|
Prior to 2012, Brooks invested $22,500,000 in Norton Industries and has not changed its holdings this year. This investment in Norton Industries was valued at $21,500,000 on December 31, 2011. Brooks 12% ownership of Norton Industries has a current market value of $22,225,000. |
Instructions:
For both classes of securities presented above, describe how the results of the valuation adjustments made to reflect the application of the fair value rule would be reflected in the body of and notes to Brooks 2012 financial statements.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CA17-1 (Issues Raised about Investment Securities) You have just started work for Warren Co. as part of the controller s group involved in current financial reporting problems. Jane Henshaw, controller for Warren, is interested in your accounting background because the company has experienced a series of financial reporting surprises over the last few years. Recently, the controller has learned from the company s auditors that there is authoritative literature that may apply to its investment in securities. She assumes that you are familiar with this pronouncement and asks how the following situations should be reported in the financial statements.
Situation:
An available-for-sale security whose fair value is currently less than cost is classified as noncurrent but is to be reclassified as current.
Instructions
What is the effect upon carrying value and earnings for the situations above? Assume that this situations is unrelated. (100-250 word count)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On December 21, 2012, Zurich Company provided you with the following information regarding its trading securities.
| December 31, 2012 |
| Investments (Trading) |
|
Cost |
|
Fair Value |
|
Unrealized Gain (Loss) |
| Stargate Corp. stock |
|
$23,880 |
|
$22,880 |
|
$(1,000 |
) |
| Carolina Co. stock |
|
12,840 |
|
11,840 |
|
(1,000 |
) |
| Vectorman Co. stock |
|
23,880 |
|
24,440 |
|
560 |
|
| Total of portfolio |
|
$60,600 |
|
$59,160 |
|
(1,440 |
) |
| Previous fair value adjustment balance |
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
|
| Fair value adjustment Cr. |
|
|
|
|
|
$(1,440 |
) |
During 2013, Carolina Company stock was sold for $12,520. The fair value of the stock on December 31, 2013, was: Stargate Corp. stock $23,150; Vectorman Co. stock $24,310.
| (a) |
|
Prepare the adjusting journal entry needed on December 31, 2012. |
| (b) |
|
Prepare the journal entry to record the sale of the Carolina Company stock during 2013. |
| (c) |
|
Prepare the adjusting journal entry needed on December 31, 2013. |
(Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
| No. |
Account Titles and Explanation |
Debit |
Credit |
| (a) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| (b) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| (c) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
List Of Accounts
Bonds Payable Call Option Cash Cost of Goods Sold Debt Investments Dividend Receivable Dividend Revenue Equity Investments Fair Value Adjustment Futures Contract Gain on Sale of Investments Interest Expense Interest Receivable Interest Revenue Inventory Investments Loss on Impairment Loss on Investments Loss on Settlement of Call Option Loss on Settlement of Put Option Memo Entry No Entry Notes Payable Put Option Retained Earnings Revenue from Investment Sales Revenue Swap Contract Unrealized Holding Gain or Loss – Equity Unrealized Holding Gain or Loss – Income |
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below are two independent situations.
Situation 1
Hatcher Cosmetics acquired 10% of the 206,400 shares of common stock of Ramirez Fashion at a total cost of $14 per share on March 18, 2012. On June 30, Ramirez declared and paid a $84,100 cash dividend. On December 31, Ramirez reported net income of $125,200 for the year. At December 31, the market price of Ramirez Fashion was $15 per share. The securities are classified as available-for-sale.
Situation 2
Holmes, Inc. obtained significant influence over Nadal Corporation by buying 26% of Nadal s 32,900 outstanding shares of common stock at a total cost of $11 per share on January 1, 2012. On June 15, Nadal declared and paid a cash dividend of $41,100. On December 31, Nadal reported a net income of $86,100 for the year.
Prepare all necessary journal entries in 2012 for both situations. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
| Date |
Account Titles and Explanation |
Debit |
Credit |
| Hatcher Cosmetics |
| March 18, 2012 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| June 30, 2012 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Dec. 31, 2012 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Holmes Inc. |
| Jan. 1, 2012 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| June 15, 2012 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Dec. 31, 2012 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
List Of Accounts
Bonds Payable Call Option Cash Cost of Goods Sold Debt Investments Dividend Receivable Dividend Revenue Equity Investments Fair Value Adjustment Futures Contract Gain on Sale of Investments Interest Expense Interest Receivable Interest Revenue Inventory Investments Loss on Impairment Loss on Investments Loss on Settlement of Call Option Loss on Settlement of Put Option Memo Entry No Entry Notes Payable Put Option Retained Earnings Revenue from Investment Sales Revenue Swap Contract Unrealized Holding Gain or Loss – Equity Unrealized Holding Gain or Loss – Income |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CASE #1: Sophia Wise Computer Sales is a merchandiser and purchases its products directly from manufacturers. In turn, it sells those products to its various customers. One of its customers is Hillary Zabkar Electronics. The following transactions took place between Sophia Wise (seller) and its customer, Hillary Zabkar Electronics during the month of December:
Dec 1 Sold merchandise to Hillary Zabkar on credit for $5,000, terms 3/10, n/30. The items sold had a cost of $3,500
Dec 3 Purchased merchandise from a manufacturer for cash, $720.
Dec 4 Purchased merchandise from a manufacturer on credit for $2,600, terms 1/20, n/30.
Dec 5 Issued a credit memorandum for $300 to its customer Hillary Zabkar Electronics who returned merchandise purchased Nov 29th. The returned items had a cost of $210
Dec 11 Received payment for merchandise sold Dec 1
Dec 15 Received a credit memorandum from a manufacturer for the return of faulty merchandise purchased on Dec 4 for $600.
Dec 18 Paid freight charges of $200 for merchandise ordered last month (FOB shipping point)
Dec 23 Paid for the merchandise purchased Dec 4 less the portion that was returned
Dec 24 Sold merchandise to Hillary Zabkar on credit for $7,000, terms 2/10, n/30. The items had a cost of $4,900
Dec 31 Received payment for merchandise sold on Dec 24
Problem #1
Assuming a perpetual inventory system, prepare the required journal entries that Sophia Wise Computer Sales must make to record these transactions:
Problem #2
Assuming a periodic inventory system, prepare the required journal entries that Sophia Wise Computer Sales must make to record these transactions:
Problem #3
Assuming a perpetual inventory system, prepare the required journal entries that Hillary Zabkar Electronics must make to record these transactions:
Problem #4
Assuming a periodic inventory system, prepare the required journal entries that Hillary Zabkar Electronics must make to record these transactions:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem – VI Multiple-Step Income Statement
Below is a partial listing of the adjusted account balances of Murray Department Store at year end
on December 31, 2005.
Accounts Receivable $ 19,000
Cost of Goods Sold 255,000
Selling Expenses (includes depreciation) 35,000
Interest Expense 1,000
Accumulated Depreciation Building 10,000
Sales Discounts 22,000
Merchandise Inventory 45,000
Administrative Expenses (includes depreciation) 15,000
Sales 330,000
Accounts Payable 14,000
Interest Revenue 800
Instructions
Using whatever data you believe appropriate, prepare a multiple-step income statement for Murray
Department Store for the year ended December 31, 2005
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC202 Week 1 E10-3 E10-6 E11-1 E11-6 E11-15 P10-20 P11-21 P11-25 P11-28
10-3) Classifying cost:product or G, S, and A/assets or expense
Use the following format to classify each cost as a product cost or a general,selling and administrative (G,S &A)cost, Also indicate whether the cost would be recorded as an asset or an expense. The first item is shown as an example
10-6) Identifying product cost in a manufacturing company
Tiffany Crissler was talking to another accounting student; Bill Tyrone. Upon discussing that the accounting department offered an upper level course in cost measurement, Tiffany remarked to Bill, “How difficult can it be?” My parents own a toy store. All you have to do to figure out how much something costs is look at the invoice Surely you don’t need an entire course to teach you how to read an invoice.
11-1) Identify cost behaviors
Deer Valley Kitchen, a fast food restaurant company,operates a chain of restaurant across the nation. Each restaurant employs eight people;one is a manager who is paid a salary plus a bonus equal to 3 percent of sales; two cooks, one dishwasher, and four waitresses, are paid salaries. Each manager is budgeted $3000 per month for advertising cost
11-6)Fixed versus variable cost behavior
Lovvern Trophies makes and sell trophies it distributes to little league ballplayers. The company normally produces and sells between 8,000 and 14,000 trophies per year. The following data apply to various activity levels.
11-15) Break-even point
Connor Corporation sells product for $25 each that have variable costs of $13 per unit. Connors annual fixed costs is $264,000
REQUIRED:Determine the break even point in units and dollars Problem 10- 20 Effect of product versus period costs on financial statements
Hoen Manufacturing Company experienced the following accounting events during its first year of operation. With the exception of the adjusting entries for depreciation, all transactions are cash transactions.
CONT…
Problem 11- 21 Identifying cost behavior
Identify the following costs as fixed or variable. Costs related to plane trips between Seattle, Washington, and Orlando, Florida, follow. Pilots are paid on a per trip basis.
CONT…
Problem 11- 25 Effects of operating leverage on profitability
Webster Training Services ( WTS) provides instruction on the use of computer software for the employees of its corporate clients. It offers courses in the clients offices on the clients equipment. The only major expense WTS incurs is instructor salaries; it pays instructors $ 5,000 per course taught. WTS recently agreed to offer a course of instruction to the employees of Chambers Incorporated at a price of $ 400 per student. Chambers estimated that 20 students would attend the course. Base your answer on the preceding information.
CONT…
Problem 11- 28 Determining the break- even point and preparing a contribution margin income statement
Inman Manufacturing Company makes a product that it sells for $ 60 per unit. The company incurs variable manufacturing costs of $ 24 per unit. Variable selling expenses are $ 12 per unit, annual fixed manufacturing costs are $ 189,000, and fixed selling and administrative costs are $ 141,000 per year.
CONT…
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC202 Week 4 E15-1 E15-2 E15-4 E15-5 P15-18 P15-19 P15-20
E15-1 Indicate whether each of the following variances is favorable or unfavorable. The first one has been done as an example.
Cont…
E15-2 Compute variances for the following items and indicate whether each variance is favorable (F) orunfavorable (U).
Cont…
E15-4 Use the information provided in Exercise 8-3A.
a. Determine the sales and variable cost volume variances.
b. Classify the variances as favorable (F) or unfavorable (U).
Cont…
E15-5 Use the standard price and cost data provided in Exercise 8-3A. Assume that the actual sales
price is $7.65 per unit and that the actual variable cost is $4.25 per unit. The actual fixed manufacturing
cost is $2,500, and the actual selling and administrative costs are $1,025.
Cont…
P15-18Todhunter Publications established the following standard price and costs for a hardcover picture book that the company produces.
Cont…
P15-19 Use the standard price and cost data supplied in Problem 8-18A. Assume that Todhunter actually produced and sold 31,000 books. The actual sales price and costs incurred follow.
Cont…
P15-20 Luke Chou, the president of Digitech Computer Services, needs your help. He wonders aboutthe potential effects on the firm s net income if he changes the service rate that the firm charges its customers. The following basic data pertain to fiscal year 2012.
Cont…
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Focus of the Final Paper
Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions. Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references.
Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:
Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?
Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet
Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.
Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.
Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.
Writing the Final Paper
1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:
a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted
3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week One Exercise Assignment
Basic Accounting Equations
1. Recognition of normal balances
The following items appeared in the accounting records of Triguero’s, a retail music store that also sponsors concerts. Classify each of the items as an asset, liability; revenue; or expense from the company’s viewpoint. Also indicate the normal account balance of each item.
a. Amounts paid to a mall for rent.
b. Amounts to be paid in 10 days to suppliers.
c. A new fax machine purchased for office use.
d. Land held as an investment.
e. Amounts due from customers.
f. Daily sales of merchandise sold.
g. Promotional costs to publicize a concert.
h. A long-term loan owed to Citizens Bank.
i. The albums, tapes, and CDs held for sale to customers.
2.Basic journal entries
The following transactions pertain to the Jennifer Royall Company:
-
|
May 1
|
Jennifer Royall invested cash of $25,000 and land valued at $15,000 into the business.
|
|
5
|
Provided $1,000 of services to Jason Ratchford, a client, on account.
|
|
9
|
Paid $1,250 of salaries to an employee.
|
|
14
|
Acquired a new computer for $4,200, on account.
|
|
20
|
Collected $800 from Jason Ratchford for services provided on May 5.
|
|
24
|
Borrowed $2,500 from BestBanc by securing a six-month loan.
|
Prepare journal entries (and explanations) to record the preceding transactions and events.
3. Balance sheet preparation. The following data relate to Preston Company as of December 31, 20XX:
Building $40,000 Accounts receivable $24,000
Cash 21,000 Loan payable 30,000
J. Preston, Capital 65,000 Land 21,000
Accounts payable ?
Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 20XX. (See Exhibit 1.1 and 1.4)
4. Basic transaction processing. On November 1 of the current year, Richard Simmons established a sole proprietorship. The following transactions occurred during the month:
1: Simmons invested $32,000 into the business for $32,000 in common stock.
2: Paid $5,000 to acquire a used minivan.
3: Purchased $1,800 of office furniture on account.
4: Performed $2,100 of consulting services on account.
5: Paid $300 of repair expenses.
6: Received $800 from clients who were previously billed in item 4.
7: Paid $500 on account to the supplier of office furniture in item 3.
8: Received a $150 electric bill, to be paid next month.
9: Simmons withdrew $800 from the business.
10: Received $250 in cash from clients for consulting services rendered.
Instructions
a. Arrange the following asset, liability, and owner s equity elements of the accounting equation: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Office Furniture, Van, Accounts Payable, Common Stock/Dividends, and Revenues/Expenses. (See Exhibit 1.5)
b. Record each transaction on a separate line. After all transactions have been recorded, compute the balance in each of the preceding items.
c. Answer the following questions for Simmons.
(1) How much does the company owe to its creditors at month-end? On which financial statement(s) would this information be found?
(2) Did the company have a good month from an accounting viewpoint? Briefly explain.
5. Transaction analysis and statement preparation. The transactions that follow
relate to Burton Enterprises for March 20X1, the company s first month of activity.
|
3/1
|
Joanne Burton, the owner, invested $20,000 cash into the business.
|
|
3/4
|
Performed $2,400 of services on account.
|
|
3/7
|
Acquired a small parcel of land by paying $6,000 cash
|
|
3/12
|
Received $500 from a client who was billed previously on March 4.
|
|
3/15
|
Paid $200 to the Journal Herald for advertising expense.
|
|
3/18
|
Acquired 9,000 of equipment from Park Central Outfitters by Paying
|
|
|
$7,000 down and agreeing to remit the balance owed within two weeks (A/P).
|
|
3/22
|
Received $300 cash from clients for services.
|
|
3/24
|
Paid $1,500 on account to Park Central Outfitters in partial settlement of
|
|
|
the balance due from the transaction on March 18.
|
|
3/28
|
Rented a car from United Car Rental for use on March 28. Total charges
|
|
|
amounted to $125, with United billing Burton for the amount due.
|
|
3/31
|
Paid $600 for March wages
|
|
3/31
|
Processed a $600 cash withdrawal (dividend) from the business for Joanne Burton
|
Instructions
a. Determine the impact of each of the preceding transactions on Burton s assets,
liabilities, and owner s equity. See exhibit 1.5. Use the following format:
Assets = Liabilities + Owner s Equity
Cash, Accounts Receivable, Land, Equipment Accounts Payable (+)Common Stock (+) Revenues
(-) Dividends (-) Expenses
a. Record each transaction on a separate line. Calculate balances only after the last transaction has been recorded.
b. Prepare an income statement, a statement of retained earnings, and a balance sheet, (See Exhibit 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4)
6. Entry and trial balance preparation. Lee Adkins is a portrait artist. The following schedule represents Lee s combined chart of accounts and trial balance as of May 31.
Account number Account name Debit Credit
|
110
|
Cash
|
$ 2,700
|
|
|
120
|
Accounts Receivable
|
12,100
|
|
|
130
|
Equipment and Supplies
|
2,800
|
|
|
140
|
Studio
|
45,000
|
|
|
210
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$2,600
|
|
310
|
Lee Adkins, Capital
|
|
57,400
|
|
320
|
Lee Adkins, Drawing
|
30,000
|
|
|
410
|
Professional Fee Revenue
|
|
39,000
|
|
510
|
Advertising Expense
|
2,300
|
|
|
520
|
Salaries Expense
|
2,100
|
|
|
540
|
Utilities Expense
|
2,000
|
|
|
|
$99,000
|
$99,000
|
The general ledger also revealed account no. 530, Legal and Accounting Expense. The following transactions occurred during June:
|
6/2
|
Collected $3,000 on account from customers
|
|
6/7
|
Sold 25% of the equipment and supplies to a young artist for $700 cash
|
|
6/10
|
Received a $300 invoice from the accountant for preparing last quarter’s financial Statements.
|
|
6/15
|
Paid $1,900 to creditors on account.
|
|
|
6/27
|
Adkins withdrew $2,000 cash for personal use.
|
|
6/30
|
Billed a customer $3,000 for a portrait painted this month.
|
|
|
|
a. Record the necessary journal entries for June on page 2 of the company s general journal. (See Exhibit 2.6)
b. Open running balance ledger T accounts by entering account titles, account numbers, and May 31 balances. (See exhibit 2.3 and 2.4)
c. Post the journal entries to the T accounts.
d. Prepare a trial balance as of June 30. (See exhibit 2.9)
7. Journal entry preparation. On January 1 of the current year, Peter Houston invested $80,000 cash into his company MuniServ. The cash was obtained from an owner investment by Peter Houston of $50,000 and a $30,000 bank loan. Shortly thereafter, the company acquired selected assets of a bankrupt competitor. The acquisition included land ($10,000), a building ($40,000), and vehicles ($10,000). MuniServ paid $45,000 at the time of the transaction and agreed to remit the remaining balance due of $15,000 (an account payable) by February 15.
During January, the company had additional cash outlays for the following items:
-
|
Purchases of store equipment
|
$4,600
|
|
Note payment
|
500
|
|
Salaries expense
|
2,300
|
|
Advertising expense
|
700
|
|
|
|
The January utility bill of $200 was received on January 31 and will be paid next month. MuniServ rendered services to clients on account amounting to $9,400. All customers have been billed; by month end, $3,700 had been received in settlement of account balances.
Instructions
-
Present journal entries that reflect MuniServ’s January transactions, including the $80,000 raised from the owner investment and loan. (See exhibit 2.6)
-
Compute the total debits, total credits, and ending balance that would be found in the company’s Cash account. (Post to T Accounts, see exhibit 2.3 and 2.4)
c. Determine the amount that would be shown on the January 31 trial balance for Accounts
Payable. Is the balance a debit or a credit?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC20Final Paper
Focus of the Final Paper
Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions. Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references.
Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:
Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?
Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet
Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.
Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.
Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.
Writing the Final Paper
1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:
a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted
3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
5: Principles of Accounting I
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week One Exercise Assignment
Basic Accounting Equations
1. Recognition of normal balances
The following items appeared in the accounting records of Triguero’s, a retail music store that also sponsors concerts. Classify each of the items as an asset, liability; revenue; or expense from the company’s viewpoint. Also indicate the normal account balance of each item.
a. Amounts paid to a mall for rent.
b. Amounts to be paid in 10 days to suppliers.
c. A new fax machine purchased for office use.
d. Land held as an investment.
e. Amounts due from customers.
f. Daily sales of merchandise sold.
g. Promotional costs to publicize a concert.
h. A long-term loan owed to Citizens Bank.
i. The albums, tapes, and CDs held for sale to customers.
2. Basic journal entries
The following transactions pertain to the Jennifer Royall Company:
May 1 Jennifer Royall invested cash of $25,000 and land valued at $15,000 into the business.
5 Provided $1,000 of services to Jason Ratchford, a client, on account.
9 Paid $1,250 of salaries to an employee.
14 Acquired a new computer for $4,200, on account.
20 Collected $800 from Jason Ratchford for services provided on May 5.
24 Borrowed $2,500 from BestBanc by securing a six-month loan.
Prepare journal entries (and explanations) to record the preceding transactions and events.
3. Balance sheet preparation. The following data relate to Preston Company as of December 31, 20XX:
Building $40,000 Accounts receivable $24,000
Cash 21,000 Loan payable 30,000
J. Preston, Capital 65,000 Land 21,000
Accounts payable ?
Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 20XX. (See Exhibit 1.1 and 1.4)
4. Basic transaction processing. On November 1 of the current year, Richard Simmons established a sole proprietorship. The following transactions occurred during the month:
1: Simmons invested $32,000 into the business for $32,000 in common stock.
2: Paid $5,000 to acquire a used minivan.
3: Purchased $1,800 of office furniture on account.
4: Performed $2,100 of consulting services on account.
5: Paid $300 of repair expenses.
6: Received $800 from clients who were previously billed in item 4.
7: Paid $500 on account to the supplier of office furniture in item 3.
8: Received a $150 electric bill, to be paid next month.
9: Simmons withdrew $800 from the business.
10: Received $250 in cash from clients for consulting services rendered.
Instructions
a. Arrange the following asset, liability, and owner s equity elements of the account ing equation: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Office Furniture, Van, Accounts Payable, Common Stock/Dividends, and Revenues/Expenses. (See Exhibit 1.5)
b. Record each transaction on a separate line. After all transactions have been recorded, compute the balance in each of the preceding items.
c. Answer the following questions for Simmons.
(1) How much does the company owe to its creditors at month-end? On which financial statement(s) would this information be found?
(2) Did the company have a good month from an accounting viewpoint? Briefly explain.
5. Transaction analysis and statement preparation. The transactions that follow
relate to Burton Enterprises for March 20X1, the company s first month of activity.
3/1 Joanne Burton, the owner, invested $20,000 cash into the business.
3/4 Performed $2,400 of services on account.
3/7 Acquired a small parcel of land by paying $6,000 cash
3/12 Received $500 from a client who was billed previously on March 4.
3/15 Paid $200 to the Journal Herald for advertising expense.
3/18 Acquired 9,000 of equipment from Park Central Outfitters by Paying $7,000 down and agreeing to remit the balance owed within two weeks (A/P).
3/22 Received $300 cash from clients for services.
3/24 Paid $1,500 on account to Park Central Outfitters in partial settlement of the balance due from the transaction on March 18.
3/28 Rented a car from United Car Rental for use on March 28. Total charges amounted to $125, with United billing Burton for the amount due.
3/31 Paid $600 for March wages
3/31 Processed a $600 cash withdrawal (dividend) from the business for Joanne Burton
Instructions
a. Determine the impact of each of the preceding transactions on Burton s assets,
liabilities, and owner s equity. See exhibit 1.5. Use the following format:
Assets = Liabilities + Owner s Equity
Cash, Accounts Receivable, Land, Equipment Accounts Payable (+)Common Stock (+) Revenues
(-) Dividends (-) Expenses
a. Record each transaction on a separate line. Calculate balances only after the last transaction has been recorded.
b. Prepare an income statement, a statement of retained earnings, and a balance sheet, (See Exhibit 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4)
6. Entry and trial balance preparation. Lee Adkins is a portrait artist. The following schedule represents Lee s combined chart of accounts and trial balance as of May 31.
Account number Account name Debit Credit
110 Cash $ 2,700
120 Accounts Receivable 12,100
130 Equipment and Supplies 2,800
140 Studio 45,000
210 Accounts Payable $2,600
310 Lee Adkins, Capital 57,400
320 Lee Adkins, Drawing 30,000
410 Professional Fee Revenue 39,000
510 Advertising Expense 2,300
520 Salaries Expense 2,100
540 Utilities Expense 2,000
$99,000 $99,000
The general ledger also revealed account no. 530, Legal and Accounting Expense. The following transactions occurred during June:
6/2 Collected $3,000 on account from customers
6/7 Sold 25% of the equipment and supplies to a young artist for $700 cash
6/10 Received a $300 invoice from the accountant for preparing last quarter’s financial Statements.
6/15 Paid $1,900 to creditors on account.
6/27 Adkins withdrew $2,000 cash for personal use.
6/30 Billed a customer $3,000 for a portrait painted this month.
a. Record the necessary journal entries for June on page 2 of the company s general journal. (See Exhibit 2.6)
b. Open running balance ledger T accounts by entering account titles, account num bers, and May 31 balances. (See exhibit 2.3 and 2.4)
c. Post the journal entries to the T accounts.
d. Prepare a trial balance as of June 30. (See exhibit 2.9)
7. Journal entry preparation. On January 1 of the current year, Peter Houston invested $80,000 cash into his company MuniServ. The cash was obtained from an owner investment by Peter Houston of $50,000 and a $30,000 bank loan. Shortly thereafter, the company ac quired selected assets of a bankrupt competitor. The acquisition included land ($10,000), a building ($40,000), and vehicles ($10,000). MuniServ paid $45,000 at the time of the transaction and agreed to remit the remaining balance due of $15,000 (an account payable) by February 15.
During January, the company had additional cash outlays for the following items:
Purchases of store equipment $4,600
Note payment 500
Salaries expense 2,300
Advertising expense 700
The January utility bill of $200 was received on January 31 and will be paid next month. MuniServ rendered services to clients on account amounting to $9,400. All customers have been billed; by month end, $3,700 had been received in settlement of account balances.
Instructions
a. Present journal entries that reflect MuniServ’s January transactions, including the $80,000 raised from the owner investment and loan. (See exhibit 2.6)
b. Compute the total debits, total credits, and ending balance that would be found in the company’s Cash account. (Post to T Accounts, see exhibit 2.3 and 2.4)
c. Determine the amount that would be shown on the January 31 trial balance for Accounts
Payable. Is the balance a debit or a credit?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Two Exercise Assignment
Revenue and Expenses
1. Recognition of concepts. Jim Armstrong operates a small company that books entertainers for theaters, parties, conventions, and so forth. The company s fiscal year ends on June 30. Consider the following items and classify each as either (1) prepaid expense, (2) unearned revenue, (3) accrued expense, (4) accrued revenue, or (5) none of the foregoing.
a. Interest owed on the company’s bank loan, to be paid in early July
b. Professional fees earned but not billed as of June 30
c. Office supplies on hand at year-end
d. An advance payment from a client for a performance next month at a convention
e. The payment in part (d) from the client’s point of view
f. Amounts paid on June 30 for a 1-year insurance policy
g. The bank loan payable in part (a)
h. Repairs to the firm’s copy machine, incurred and paid in June
2. Understanding the closing process. Examine the following list of accounts:
Note Payable Accumulated Depreciation: Building
Alex Kenzy, Drawing Accounts Payable
Product Revenue Cash
Accounts Receivable Supplies Expense
Utility Expense
Which of the preceding accounts
a. appear on a post-closing trial balance?
b. are commonly known as temporary, or nominal, accounts?
c. generate a debit to Income Summary in the closing process?
d. are closed to the capital account in the closing process?
3. Adjusting entries and financial statements. The following information pertains to Sally Corporation:
The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one half of this amount had been earned.
Sally Corporation provided $1,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31.
Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,000.
The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period.
The company paid $18,000 on October 1 of the current year to Vantage Property Management. The payment was for 6 months rent of Sally Corporation s headquarters, beginning on November 1. Sally Corporation s accounting year ends on December 31.
Instructions:
Analyze the five preceding cases individually and determine the following:
a. The type of adjusting entry needed at year-end (Use the following codes: A, adjustment of a prepaid expense; B, adjustment of an unearned revenue; C, adjustment to record an accrued expense; or D, adjustment to record an accrued revenue.)
b. The year-end journal entry to adjust the accounts
c. The income statement impact of each adjustment (e.g., increases total revenues by $500)
4. Adjusting entries. You have been retained to examine the records of Mary s Day Care Center as of December 31, 20X3, the close of the current reporting period. In the course of your examination, you discover the following:
On January 1, 20X3, the Supplies account had a balance of $1,350. During the year, $5,520 worth of supplies was purchased, and a balance of $1,620 remained unused on December 31.
Unrecorded interest owed to the center totaled $275 as of December 31.
All clients pay tuition in advance, and their payments are credited to the Unearned Tuition Revenue account. The account was credited for $65,500 on August 31. With the exception of $15,500 all amounts were for the current semester ending on December 31.
Depreciation on the school s van was $3,000 for the year.
On August 1, the center began to pay rent in 6-month installments of $24,000. Mary wrote a check to the owner of the building and recorded the check in Prepaid Rent, a new account.
Two salaried employees earn $400 each for a 5-day week. The employees are paid every Friday, and December 31 falls on a Thursday.
Mary s Day Care paid insurance premiums as follows, each time debiting Prepaid Insurance:
Date Paid Policy No. Length of Policy Amount
Feb. 1, 20X2 1033MCM19 1 year $540
Jan. 1, 20X3 7952789HP 1 year 912
Aug. 1, 20X3 XQ943675ST 2 years 840
Instructions
The center s accounts were last adjusted on December 31, 20X2. Prepare the adjusting entries necessary under the accrual basis of accounting.
5. Bank reconciliation and entries. The following information was taken from the accounting records of Palmetto Company for the month of January:
Balance per bank $6,150
Balance per company records 3,580
Bank service charge for January 20
Deposits in transit 940
Interest on note collected by bank 100
Note collected by bank 1,000
NSF check returned by the bank with the bank statement 650
Outstanding checks 3,080
Instructions:
a. Prepare Palmetto s January bank reconciliation.
b. Prepare any necessary journal entries for Palmetto.
6. Direct write-off method. Harrisburg Company, which began business in early 20X7, reported $40,000 of accounts receivable on the December 31, 20X7, balance sheet. Included in this amount was $550 for a sale made to Tom Mattingly in July. On January 4, 20X8, the company learned that Mattingly had filed for personal bankruptcy. Harrisburg uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectibles.
a. Prepare the journal entry needed to write off Mattingly s account.
b. Comment on the ability of the direct write-off method to value receivables on the year-end balance sheet.
7. Allowance method: analysis of receivables. At a January 20X2 meeting, the president of Sonic Sound directed the sales staff to move some product this year. The president noted that the credit evaluation department was being disbanded because it had restricted the company s growth. Credit decisions would now be made by the sales staff.
By the end of the year, Sonic had generated significant gains in sales, and the president was very pleased. The following data were provided by the accounting department:
20X2 20X1
Sales $23,987,000 $8,423,000
Accounts Receivable, 12/31 12,444,000 1,056,000
Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, 12/31 ? 23,000 cr.
The $12,444,000 receivables balance was aged as follows:
Age of Receivable Amount Percentage of Accounts Expected to Be Collected
Under 31 days $4,321,000 99%
31-60 days 4,890,000 90
61-90 days 1,067,000 80
Over 90 days 2,166,000 60
Assume that no accounts were written off during 20X2.
Instructions
a. Estimate the amount of Uncollectible Accounts as of December 31, 20X2.
b. What is the company s Uncollectible Accounts expense for 20X2?
c. Compute the net realizable value of Accounts Receivable at the end of 20X1 and 20X2.
d. Compute the net realizable value at the end of 20X1 and 20X2 as a percentage of respective year-end receivables balances. Analyze your findings and comment on the president s decision to close the credit evaluation department.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Three Exercise Assignment
Inventory
1. Specific identification method. Boston Galleries uses the specific identification method for inventory valuation. Inventory information for several oil paintings follows.
-
|
Painting
|
Cost
|
|
1/2 Beginning inventory
|
Woods
|
$21,000
|
|
4/19 Purchase
|
Sunset
|
21,800
|
|
6/7 Purchase
|
Earth
|
31,200
|
|
12/16 Purchase
|
Moon
|
4,000
|
WoodsandMoonwere sold during the year for a total of $35,000. Determine the firm s
a. cost of goods sold.
b. gross profit.
c. ending inventory.
2. Inventory valuation methods: basic computations. The January beginning inventory of the Gilette Company consisted of 300 units costing $40 each. During the first quarter, the company purchased two batches of goods: 700 Units at $44 on February 21 and 800 units at $50 on March 28. Sales during the first quarter were 1,400 units at $75 per unit. The White Company uses a periodic inventory system. Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods.
|
FIFO
|
LIFO
|
Weighted Average
|
|
|
|
|
|
Goods available for sale
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
Ending inventory, March 31
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
3.Perpetual inventory system: journal entries. At the beginning of 20X3, Beehler Company implemented a computerized perpetual inventory system. The first transactions that occurred during 20X3 follow:
-
1/2/20X3 Purchases on account: 500 units @$6 = $3,000
-
1/15/20X3 Sales on account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550
-
1/20/20X3 Purchases on Account: 200 units @ 5 = $1,000
-
1/25/20X3 Sales on Account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550
The company president examined the computer-generated journal entries for these transactions and was confused by the absence of a Purchases account.
a. Duplicate the journal entries that would have appeared on the computer printout under FIFO & LIFO
b. Calculate the balance in the firm s Inventory account under each method.
c. Briefly explain the absence of the Purchases account to the company president.
4. Inventory valuation methods: computations and concepts.
Wild Riders Surfboard Company began business on January 1 of the current year. Purchases of surfboards were as follows:
|
Date
|
Quantity
|
Unit Cost
|
Total Cost
|
|
1/3
|
100
|
$125
|
$12,500
|
|
4/3
|
200
|
$135
|
$27,000
|
|
6/3
|
100
|
$145
|
$14,500
|
|
7/3
|
100
|
$155
|
$15,500
|
|
Total
|
500
|
|
$69,500
|
Wild Riders sold 400 boards at $250 per board on the dates listed below. The company uses a perpetual inventory system.
|
Date
|
Quantity Sold
|
Unit Price
|
Total Sales
|
|
3/17
|
50
|
$250
|
$12,500
|
|
5/17
|
75
|
$250
|
$18,750
|
|
8/10
|
275
|
$250
|
$68,750
|
|
Total
|
400
|
|
$100,000
|
Instructions
a. Calculate cost of goods sold, ending inventory, and gross profit under each of the following inventory valuation methods:
-
First-in, first-out
-
Last-in, first-out
-
Weighted average
b. Which of the three methods would be chosen if management s goal is to
(1) produce an up-to-date inventory valuation on the balance sheet?
(2) show the lowest net income for tax purposes?
5. Depreciation methods.Mike Davis Enterprises purchased a delivery van for $40,000 in January 20X7. The van was estimated to have a service life of 5 years and a residual value of $6,000. The company is planning to drive the van 20,000 miles annually. Compute depreciation expense for 20X8 by using each of the following methods:
a. Units-of-output, assuming 17,000 miles were driven during 20X8
b. Straight-line
c. Double-declining-balance
6. Depreciation computations.Alpha Alpha Alpha, a college fraternity, purchased a new heavy-duty washing machine on January 1, 20X3. The machine, which cost $2,000, had an estimated residual value of $100 and an estimated service life of 4 years (1,800 washing cycles). Calculate the following:
a. The machine s book value on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the straight-line depreciation method
b. Depreciation expense for 20X4, assuming use of the units-of-output depreciation method. Actual washing cycles in 20X4 totaled 500.
c. Accumulated depreciation on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the double-declining-balance depreciation method.
7. Depreciation computations: change in estimate.Aussie Imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for $50,000 on January 1, 20X3. At the time of acquisition, the machine was estimated to have a service life of 5 years (25,000 operating hours) and a residual value of $5,000. During the 5 years of operations (20X3 – 20X7), the machine was used for 5,100, 4,800, 3,200, 6,000, and 5,900 hours, respectively.
Instructions
a. Compute depreciation for 20X3 – 20X7 by using the following methods: straight line, units of output, and double-declining-balance.
b. On January 1, 20X5, management shortened the remaining service life of the machine to 15 months. Assuming use of the straight-line method, compute the company s depreciation expense for 20X5.
c. Briefly describe what you would have done differently in part (a) if Aussie Imports had paid $47,800 for the machinery rather than $50,000 In addition, assume that the company incurred $800 of freight charges $1,400 for machine setup and testing, and $300 for insurance during the first year of use.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Four Exercise Assignment
Liability
1. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:
- Social Security taxes: 4% on the first $55,000 earned per employee
- Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned per employee
- Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
- State income taxes: 4% of gross earnings
- Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
- State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned per employee
- Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned per employee
The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end and no wages have been paid during the month.
a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:
- Social Security taxes
- Medicare taxes
- Federal income taxes withheld
- State income taxes
- Insurance withholdings
b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:
- Matching Social Security taxes
- Matching Medicare taxes
- State unemployment taxes
- Federal unemployment taxes
2. Current liabilities: entries and disclosure.A review of selected financial activities of Visconti s during 20XX disclosed the following:
|
|
|
|
|
|
1-Dec: Borrowed $10,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3-month, 15% note payable.
|
|
|
Interest and principal are due at maturity.
|
|
|
|
|
10-Dec: Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to
|
|
|
total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates
|
|
|
that 3% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit (parts only).
|
|
|
22-Dec: Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
|
26-Dec: Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a 15% note payable due in 60 days. (Assume 360 day year for interest)
|
|
|
31-Dec: Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162
|
|
|
|
31-Dec: Accrued three days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest.
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of December 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
3. Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:
|
2-Aug: Borrowed $55,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 90-day, 12% note.
|
|
20-Aug: Issued a $50,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $50,000 delivery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest rate.
|
|
10-Sep: Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued
|
|
a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.
|
|
11-Sep: Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account
|
|
payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and carries a 14% interest rate.
|
|
10-Oct: The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.
|
|
11-Oct: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.
|
|
30-Oct: Paid note to Bank of Kingsville.
|
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest. (Daily interest is calculated utilizing the 360 day method).
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of December 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Five Exercise Assignment
Financial Ratios
1.Liquidity ratios.Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:
|
|
Edison
|
Stagg
|
Thornton
|
|
Cash
|
$6,000
|
$5,000
|
$4,000
|
|
|
Short-term investments
|
3,000
|
2,500
|
2,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
2,000
|
2,500
|
3,000
|
|
|
Inventory
|
1,000
|
2,500
|
4,000
|
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
800
|
800
|
800
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
200
|
200
|
200
|
|
|
Notes payable: short-term
|
3,100
|
3,100
|
3,100
|
|
|
Accrued payables
|
300
|
300
|
300
|
|
|
Long-term liabilities
|
3,800
|
3,800
|
3,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
a. Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?
|
2.Computation and evaluation of activity ratios.The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
20X5
|
20X4
|
|
Net credit sales
|
$832,000
|
$760,000
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
530,000
|
400,000
|
|
|
Cash, Dec. 31
|
125,000
|
110,000
|
|
|
Average Accounts receivable
|
205,000
|
156,000
|
|
|
Average Inventory
|
70,000
|
50,000
|
|
|
Accounts payable, Dec. 31
|
115,000
|
108,000
|
|
|
Instructions
a. Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 20X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3. Profitability ratios, trading on the equity.Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 20X7:
|
|
|
|
Net sales
|
$1,750,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
120,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
80,000
|
|
Preferred dividends
|
25,000
|
|
Net income
|
130,000
|
|
Average assets
|
1,200,000
|
|
Average common stockholders’ equity
|
500,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
a. Compute the profit margin on sales ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.
b. Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly ex plain.
|
4. Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Current Assets
|
$86,000
|
$80,000
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)
|
99,000
|
90,000
|
|
Intangibles
|
25,000
|
50,000
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
40,800
|
48,000
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
153,000
|
160,000
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
16,200
|
12,000
|
|
Net Sales
|
500,000
|
500,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
322,500
|
350,000
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
93,500
|
85,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
a. Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
|
5.Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Current Assets
|
$86,000
|
$80,000
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)
|
99,000
|
80,000
|
|
Intangibles
|
25,000
|
50,000
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
40,800
|
48,000
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
153,000
|
150,000
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
16,200
|
12,000
|
|
Net Sales
|
500,000
|
500,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
322,500
|
350,000
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
93,500
|
85,000
|
|
|
|
|
a. Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
|
|
6. Ratio computation. The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
LONE PINE COMPANY
|
|
|
Comparative Balance Sheets
|
|
|
December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)
|
|
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Current Assets
|
|
|
Cash and Short-Term Investments
|
$400
|
|
$600
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable (net)
|
3,000
|
|
2,400
|
|
|
Inventories
|
3,000
|
|
2,300
|
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$6,400
|
|
$5,300
|
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment
|
|
|
Land
|
$1,700
|
|
$500
|
|
|
Buildings and Equipment (net)
|
1,500
|
|
1,000
|
|
|
Total Property, Plant, and Equipment
|
$3,200
|
|
$1,500
|
|
|
Total Assets
|
$9,600
|
|
$6,800
|
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
|
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
$2,800
|
|
$1,700
|
|
|
Notes Payable
|
1,100
|
|
1,900
|
|
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
$3,900
|
|
$3,600
|
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
|
|
Bonds Payable
|
4,100
|
|
2,100
|
|
|
Total Liabilities
|
$8,000
|
|
$5,700
|
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
|
|
Common Stock
|
$200
|
|
$200
|
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
1,400
|
|
900
|
|
|
Total Stockholders Equity
|
$1,600
|
|
$1,100
|
|
Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
|
$9,600
|
|
$6,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
LONE PINE COMPANY
|
|
|
Statement of Income and Retained Earnings
|
|
|
For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)
|
|
|
Net Sales*
|
|
$36,000
|
|
|
|
Less: Cost of Goods Sold
|
$20,000
|
|
|
|
|
Selling Expense
|
6,000
|
|
|
|
|
Administrative Expense
|
4,000
|
|
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
400
|
|
|
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
2,000
|
32,400
|
|
|
|
Net Income
|
|
$3,600
|
|
|
|
Retained Earnings, Jan. 1
|
|
900
|
|
|
|
Ending Retained Earnings
|
|
$4,500
|
|
|
|
Cash Dividends Declared and Paid
|
|
3,100
|
|
|
|
Retained Earnings, Dec. 31
|
|
$1,400
|
|
|
|
*All sales are on account.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Instructions
Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calcu lations to two decimal places when necessary:
a. Quick ratio
b. Current ratio
c. Inventory-turnover ratio
d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio
e. Return-on-assets ratio
f. Net-profit-margin ratio
g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity
h. Debt-to-total assets
i. Number of times that interest is earned
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Multiple Choice Question 37
Why are budgets useful in the planning process?
|
Multiple Choice Question 44
A common starting point in the budgeting process is
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 48
Which of the following statements about budget acceptance in an organization is true?
Multiple Choice Question 38
What is budgetary control?
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 44
The comparison of differences between actual and planned results
|
|
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 45
A static budget
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 93
A responsibility report should
Multiple Choice Question 100
The linens department of a large department store is
|
Multiple Choice Question 39
What is a standard cost?
|
|
|
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 48
Using standard costs
|
Multiple Choice Question 80
Unfavorable materials price and quantity variances are generally the responsibility of the
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Multiple Choice Question 38
A major accounting contribution to the managerial decision-making process in evaluating possible courses of action is to
Multiple Choice Question 45
In incremental analysis,
|
Multiple Choice Question 46
Incremental analysis is most useful
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 53
It costs Ross Co. $24 of variable and $10 of fixed costs to produce one bathroom scale which normally sells for $70. A foreign wholesaler offers to purchase 2,000 scales at $30 each. Ross would incur special shipping costs of $2 per scale if the order were accepted. Ross has sufficient unused capacity to produce the 2,000 scales. If the special order is accepted, what will be the effect on net income?
|
Multiple Choice Question 69
Carter, Inc. can make 100 units of a necessary component part with the following costs:
|
Direct Materials
|
$120,000
|
|
Direct Labor
|
20,000
|
|
Variable Overhead
|
60,000
|
|
Fixed Overhead
|
40,000
|
If Carter purchases the component externally, $30,000 of the fixed costs can be avoided. At what external price for the 100 units is the company indifferent between making or buying?
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 79
Mink Manufacturing is unsure of whether to sell its product assembled or unassembled. The unit cost of the unassembled product is $60 and Mink would sell it for $130. The cost to assemble the product is estimated at $42 per unit and the company believes the market would support a price of $170 on the assembled unit. What decision should Mink make?
Multiple Choice Question 90
A company decided to replace an old machine with a new machine. Which of the following is considered a relevant cost?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Exercise 20-3
Garza and Neely, CPAs, are preparing their service revenue (sales) budget for the coming year (2012). The practice is divided into three departments: auditing, tax, and consulting. Billable hours for each department, by quarter, are provided below.
|
Department
|
|
Quarter 1
|
|
Quarter 2
|
|
Quarter 3
|
|
Quarter 4
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Average hourly billing rates are: auditing $81, tax $94, and consulting $102.
Prepare the service revenue (sales) budget for 2012 by listing the departments and showing for each quarter and the year in total, billable hours, billable rate, and total revenue.
|
GARZA AND NEELY, CPAs Sales Revenue Budget For the Year Ending December 31, 2012
|
|
Quarter 1
|
Quarter 2
|
|
Dept.
|
Billable Hours
|
Billable Rate
|
Total Rev.
|
Billable Hours
|
Billable Rate
|
Total Rev.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
GARZA AND NEELY, CPAs Sales Revenue Budget For the Year Ending December 31, 2012
|
|
Quarter 3
|
Quarter 4
|
|
Dept.
|
Billable Hours
|
Billable Rate
|
Total Rev.
|
Billable Hours
|
Billable Rate
|
Total Rev.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
GARZA AND NEELY, CPAs Sales Revenue Budget For the Year Ending December 31, 2012
|
|
Year
|
|
Dept.
|
Billable Hours
|
Billable Rate
|
Total Rev.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Exercise 22-1
(b) Compute the standard cost of one unit of product. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.75.)
Brief Exercise 23-3
In Harley Company it costs $28 per unit ($19 variable and $9 fixed) to make a product that normally sells for $46. A foreign wholesaler offers to buy 4,450 units at $27 each. Harley will incur special shipping costs of $2 per unit. Assuming that Harley has excess operating capacity.
Indicate the net income (loss) Harley would realize by accepting the special order. (If an amount reduces the net income for Increase (Decrease) column then enter with a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -15,000 or parenthesis, e.g. (15,000). Enter all other amounts in all other columns as positive and subtract where necessary.)
|
|
Reject Order
|
|
Accept Order
|
|
Net Income Increase (Decrease)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The special order should beaccepted.
|
|
Brief Exercise 23-4
Vintech Manufacturing incurs unit costs of $7 ($5 variable and $2 fixed) in making a subassembly part for its finished product. A supplier offers to make 15,500 of the part at $5.90 per unit. If the offer is accepted, Vintech will save all variable costs but no fixed costs.
Prepare an analysis showing the total cost saving, if any, Vintech will realize by buying the part. (If an amount reduces the net income for Increase (Decrease) column then enter with a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -15,000 or parenthesis, e.g. (15,000). Enter all other amounts in all other columns as positive and subtract where necessary.)
|
|
Make
|
|
Buy
|
|
Net Income Increase (Decrease)
|
|
Variable manufacturing costs
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing costs
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Purchase price
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total annual cost
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The decision should be tomake the part.
|
|
|
|
Brief Exercise 23-6
Ridley Company has a factory machine with a book value of $80,300 and a remaining useful life of 5 years. A new machine is available at a cost of $192,400. This machine will have a 5-year useful life with no salvage value. The new machine will lower annual variable manufacturing costs from $552,400 to $364,800.
Prepare an analysis showing whether the old machine should be retained or replaced. (If an amount reduces the net income for Increase (Decrease) column then enter with a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -15,000 or parenthesis, e.g. (15,000). Enter all other amounts in all other columns as positive and subtract where necessary.)
|
|
Retain Equipment
|
|
Replace Equipment
|
|
Net 5-Year Income Increase (Decrease)
|
|
Variable manufacturing costs
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
New machine cost
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The old factory machine should bereplaced.
|
|
|
|
Question Attempts: 1 of 3 used
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1
Indicate which statement you would examine to find each of the following items: income statement, balance sheet, retained earnings statement, or statement of cash flows.
Question 2
Use the basic accounting equation to answer these questions.
(a) The liabilities of Daley Company are $98,780 and the stockholders equity is $234,900. What is the amount of Daley Company s total assets?
(b) The total assets of Laven Company are $175,600 and its stockholders equity is $88,600. What is the amount of its total liabilities?
(c) The total assets of Peterman Co. are $865,900 and its liabilities are equal to one fourth of its total assets. What is the amount of Peterman Co. s stockholders equity?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1
Using these data from the comparative balance sheet of Rosalez Company, perform horizontal analysis.
Question 2
Using these data from the comparative balance sheet of Rosalez Company, perform vertical analysis.
Question 3
Vertical analysis (common-size) percentages for Vallejo Company s sales, cost of goods sold, and expenses are listed here.
Question 4
Horizontal analysis (trend analysis) percentages for Spartan Company s sales, cost of goods sold, and expenses are listed here.
Question 5
These selected condensed data are taken from recent balance sheets of Bob Evans Farms (in thousands).
Question 6
Staples, Inc. is one of the largest suppliers of office products in the United States. It had net income of $738.7 million and sales of $24,275.5 million in 2009. Its total assets were $13,073.1 million at the beginning of the year and $13,717.3 million at the end of the year. What is Staples, Inc. s asset turnover ratio and profit margin ratio? (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25 or 2.05%.)
Question 7
Selected data taken from a recent year s financial statements of trading card company Topps Company, Inc. are as follows (in millions).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Duggan Company applies manufacturing overhead to jobs on the basis of machine hours used. Overhead costs are expected to total $353,920 for the year, and machine usage is estimated at 126,400 hours.
For the year, $368,283 of overhead costs are incurred and 130,100 hours are used.
Compute the manufacturing overhead rate for the year. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25.)
|
Manufacturing overhead rate
|
$
|
_________per machine hour
|
(b) What is the amount of under or over-applied overhead at December 31?
(c) Prepare the adjusting entry to assign the under or over-applied overhead for the year to cost of goods sold.
Exercise 16-3
The ledger of Custer Company has the following work in process account.
Work in Process Painting
|
5/1 Balance 4,170
5/31 Materials 7,190
5/31 Labor 3,510
5/31 Overhead 2,210
|
5/31 Transferred out ?
|
|
5/31 Balance ?
|
|
Production records show that there were 500 units in the beginning inventory, 30% complete, 1,460 units started, and 1,450 units transferred out. The beginning work in process had materials cost of $2,480 and conversion costs of $1,690. The units in ending inventory were 40% complete. Materials are entered at the beginning of the painting process.
Instructions
(a) How many units are in process at May 31?
(b) What is the unit materials cost for May?
(c) What is the unit conversion cost for May?
(d) What is the total cost of units transferred out in May?
(e) What is the cost of the May 31 inventory?
Exercise 17-1
Wilkins Inc. has two types of handbags: standard and custom. The controller has decided to use a plantwide overhead rate based on direct labor costs. The president has heard of activity-based costing and wants to see how the results would differ if this system were used. Two activity cost pools were developed: machining and machine setup. Presented below is information related to the company s operations.
Standard Custom
Direct labor costs $43,700 $102,000
Machine hours 1,500 1,380
Setup hours 96 440
Total estimated overhead costs are $298,400. Overhead cost allocated to the machining activity cost pool is $195,100, and $103,300 is allocated to the machine setup activity cost pool.
Instructions
(a) Compute the overhead rate using the traditional (plant-wide) approach.
(b) Compute the overhead rates using the activity-based costing approach.
(c) Determine the difference in allocation between the two approaches.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
15-5
Duggan Company applies manufacturing overhead to jobs on the basis of machine hours used. Overhead costs are expected to total $353,920 for the year, and machine usage is estimated at 126,400 hours.
For the year, $368,283 of overhead costs are incurred and 130,100 hours are used
16-3
The ledger of Custer Company has the following work in process account.
Work in Process Painting
Production records show that there were 500 units in the beginning inventory, 30% complete, 1,460 units started, and 1,450 units transferred out. The beginning work in process had materials cost of $2,480 and conversion costs of $1,690. The units
17-1
Wilkins Inc. has two types of handbags: standard and custom. The controller has decided to use a plantwide overhead rate based on direct labor costs. The president has heard of activity-based costing and wants to see how the results would differ if this system were used. Two activity cost pools were developed: machining and machine setup. Presented below is information related to the company s operations
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exercise 20-3
Garza and Neely, CPAs, are preparing their service revenue (sales) budget for the coming year (2012). The practice is divided into three departments: auditing, tax, and consulting. Billable hours for each department, by quarter, are provided below.
|
Department
|
|
Quarter 1
|
|
Quarter 2
|
|
Quarter 3
|
|
Quarter 4
|
|
Auditing
|
|
2,360
|
|
1,960
|
|
2,370
|
|
2,730
|
|
Tax
|
|
3,200
|
|
2,740
|
|
2,240
|
|
2,690
|
|
Consulting
|
|
1,680
|
|
1,680
|
|
1,680
|
|
1,680
|
Average hourly billing rates are: auditing $81, tax $94, and consulting $105.
Prepare the service revenue (sales) budget for 2012 by listing the departments and showing for each quarter and the year in total, billable hours, billable rate, and total revenue.
Exercise 22-1
Stanton Company is planning to produce 2,600 units of product in 2012. Each unit requires 2.00 pounds of materials at $7.70 per pound and a half-hour of labor at $13.00 per hour. The overhead rate is 40% of direct labor.
(a) Compute the budgeted amounts for 2012 for direct materials to be used, direct labor, and applied overhead.
(b) Compute the standard cost of one unit of product. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.75.)
Exercise 23-3
In Harley Company it costs $29 per unit ($19 variable and $10 fixed) to make a product that normally sells for $46. A foreign wholesaler offers to buy 3,080 units at $25 each. Harley will incur special shipping costs of $1 per unit. Assuming that Harley has excess operating capacity.
Indicate the net income (loss) Harley would realize by accepting the special order. (If an amount reduces the net income for Increase (Decrease) column then enter with a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -15,000 or parenthesis, e.g. (15,000). Enter all other amounts in all other columns as positive and subtract where necessary.)
Exercise 23-4
Vintech Manufacturing incurs unit costs of $7 ($4 variable and $3 fixed) in making a subassembly part for its finished product. A supplier offers to make 13,000 of the part at $5.70 per unit. If the offer is accepted, Vintech will save all variable costs but no fixed costs.
Prepare an analysis showing the total cost saving, if any, Vintech will realize by buying the part. (If an amount reduces the net income for Increase (Decrease) column then enter with a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -15,000 or parenthesis, e.g. (15,000). Enter all other amounts in all other columns as positive and subtract where necessary.)
Exercise 23-6
Ridley Company has a factory machine with a book value of $86,000 and a remaining useful life of 5 years. A new machine is available at a cost of $222,200. This machine will have a 5-year useful life with no salvage value. The new machine will lower annual variable manufacturing costs from $574,400 to $380,200.
Prepare an analysis showing whether the old machine should be retained or replaced. (If an amount reduces the net income for Increase (Decrease) column then enter with a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -15,000 or parenthesis, e.g. (15,000). Enter all other amounts in all other columns as positive and subtract where necessary.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acct 567, the following problems.
5 7 Recording Capital Projects Fund Transactions. In Erikus County, the Parks and Recreation Department constructed a library in one of the county s high growth areas. The construction was funded by a number of sources. Below is selected information related to the funding and closing of the Library Capital Project Fund. All activity related to the library construction occurred within the 2011 fiscal year.
1. The county issued $6,000,000, 4 percent bonds, with interest payable semiannually on June 30 and December 31. The bonds sold for 101 on July 30, 2010. Proceeds from the bonds were to be used for construction of the library, with all interest and premiums received to be used to service the debt issue.
2. A $650,000 federal grant was received to help finance construction of the library.
3. The Library Special Revenue Fund transferred $250,000 for use in construction of the library.
4. A construction contract was awarded in the amount of $6,800,000.
5. The library was completed on June 1, 2011, four months ahead of schedule. Total construction expenditures for the library amounted to $6,890,000. When the project was completed, the cost of the library was allocated as follows: $200,000 to land, $6,295,000 to building, and the remainder to equipment.
6. The capital projects fund was closed. It was determined that remaining funds were related to the bond issue, and thus they were appropriately transferred to the debt service fund.
Required
Make all necessary entries in the capital projects fund general journal and the governmental activities general journal at the government-wide level.
5 8 Statement of Revenues, Expenditures, and Changes in Fund Balance. The pre-closing trial balance for the Annette County Public Works Capital Project Fund is provided below.
Required
a. Prepare the June 30, 2011, statement of revenues, expenditures, and changes in fund balance for the capital projects fund.
b. Has the capital project been completed? Explain your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 3: You Are an Investment Analyst
As the representative from your accounting firm or practice, you are in charge of stock market analysis that will be presented to clients as part of professional consultation process. One of your high-profile clients is trying to determine the possible investment potential between two companies. However, before you can recommend investments to clients, you need to familiarize yourself with the background of the companies, analyze stock trends, research current events, and analyze financial statements. Select one (1) pair of these companies and conduct your analysis.
- Pepsi versus Coca Cola, or
- Amazon versus eBay
Write an eight to ten (8-10) page paper in which you:
- Analyze each company s history, product / services, major customers, major suppliers, and leadership and provide a synopsis of each company.
- Based on the stock price for the timeline listed below, present a graph that illustrates the stock price of each company. Indicate conclusions that can be drawn based on the trend:
a. The day of its initial public offering
b. January 1, 2012
c. January 1, 2011
d. January 1, 2010
- Research and summarize at least two (2) news events (this may include mergers, acquisitions, or political issues) that occurred from 2010 to the present day and the potential impact on the stock price of each company. Indicate how this influences your investment decision related to the company.
- Provide an overall financial analysis for each company that highlights the key characteristics for investment and how this may impact an investor s decision.
- Based on your review of the financial data for each company, indicate the accuracy and reliability of the data for making investment decision. Provide support for your conclusion.
- Recommend which company you consider as the better investment for your client and how you will present your recommendation. Support your recommendation with data from your analysis.
- Use at least four (4) quality academic resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.
Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:
- Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
- Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length.
The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:
- Analyze the accounting for corporation requirements related to stock valuation, dividends, and retained earnings.
- Determine how to value investments and how to report them based on that valuation.
- Use technology and information resources to research issues in financial accounting.
- Write clearly and concisely about financial accounting using proper writing mechanics.
Clickhere to view the grading rubric for this assignment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Search the Internet for information on a MNC, publicly-traded company. Download the annual report for the most recent year reported; review the information contained on the company Website and proxy statement for use in this assignment. Review and analyze the annual report and other pertinent information.
- Write a twelve to fifteen (12-15) page paper in which you create an executive summary of the company that discusses the company, industry, products and services, and competitive advantages in the marketplace.
- Evaluate the financial condition of the company and its ability to achieve the strategic objectives as discussed in the annual report.
- Analyze the company s profitability trends and recommend strategies for management to improve or capitalize on these trends.
- Evaluate the company s cash position. Articulate its ability to invest in capital projects in future years.
- Analyze the effectiveness of the company s inventory or service costing methods. Make a recommendation for improvement in this area.
- Evaluate the adequacy or risks of the internal control environment noted in the annual report by management, and internal and external auditors.
- Assess the risk to the company related to foreign currency translations, foreign economic events, and international financial reporting standard requirements in order to summarize the risk tolerance level for the company.
- From reading the annual report and reviewing the Website, determine where the company appears vulnerable for displaying unethical behavior.
- From the research conducted in this paper, predict where this company will be financially in five (5) years. Thoroughly provide your rationale for your prediction.
- Use seven (7) external sources as part of your assignment.
Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:
- Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
- Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required page length.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
6. (TCO 3) Amy needs to save $20,000 in cash to buy a new car five years from today. She expects to earn 6.5 percent, compounded annually, on her savings. How much does she need to deposit today, if this is the only money she saves for this purpose?
$12,468.07
$12,502.14
$14,597.62
$17,044.32
$17,129.01
7. (TCO 3) Paper Pro needed a new store. The company spent $65,000 to refurbish an old shop and create the current facility. The firm borrowed 75 percent of the refurbishment cost at eight percent interest for 11 years. What is the amount of each monthly payment?
$91.05
$284.13
$556.50
$682.87
$731.60
8. (TCO 3) Amy borrowed $5,000 from her bank three years ago. The loan term is five years. Each year, Amy must repay the bank $1,000 plus the annual interest. Which type of loan does Amy have?
amortized
blended discount
interest-only
pure discount
complex
9. (TCO 3) Fanta Cola has $1,000 par value bonds outstanding at 12 percent interest. The bonds mature in 25 years. What is the current price of the bond if the YTM is 16 percent? Assume annual payments.
$1315
$1300
$756
$1000
10. (TCO 6) The market where new securities are offered is called the _____ market.
primary
main
secondary
principal
dealer
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Regarding risk levels, financial managers should A. focus primarily on market fluctuations B. evaluate investor’s desire for risk C. avoid higher risk projects because they destroy value D. pursue higher risk projects because they increase value
2) Maximization of shareholder wealth is a concept in which A. virtually all earnings are paid as dividends to common stockholders. B. optimally increasing the long-term value of the firm is emphasized. C. profits are maximized on a quarterly basis. D. increased earnings is of primary importance.
3) Insider trading occurs when A. lawyers, investment bankers, and others buy common stock in companies represented by their firms. B. someone has information not available to the public which they use to profit from trading in stocks. C. any stock transactions occur in violation of the Federal Trade Commissions restrictions on monopolies. D. corporate officers buy stock in their company.
4) The statement of cash flows does NOT include which of the following sections? A. cash flows from investing activities B. cash flows from operating activities C. cash flows from financing activities D. cash flows from sales activities
5) Which of the following is an inflow of cash? A. the sale of the firm’s bonds B. funds spent in normal business operations C. the retirement of the firm’s bonds D. the purchase of a new factory
6) An increase in investments in long-term securities will: A. increase cash flow from financing activities. B. increase cash flow from investing activities. C. decrease cash flow from financing activities. D. decrease cash flow from investing activities.
7) In examining the liquidity ratios, the primary emphasis is the firm’s A. ability to pay short-term obligations on time. B. ability to effectively employ its resources. C. ability to earn an adequate return. D. overall debt position.
8) For a given level of profitability as measured by profit margin, the firm’s return on equity will A. increase as its debt-to assets ratio increases. B. increase as its debt-to-assets ratio decreases. C. decrease as its times-interest-earned ratio decreases. D. decrease as its current ratio increases.
9) If a firm has both interest expense and lease payments, A. times interest earned will be the same as fixed charge coverage. B. times interest earned will be smaller than fixed charge coverage. C. fixed charge coverage cannot be computed. D. times interest earned will be greater than fixed charge coverage.
Refer to the figure above. The firm’s debt to asset ratio is A. 25%. B. 58%. C. 48%. D. 33%.
11) Refer to the figure above. Megaframe’s current ratio is A. 1.5:1 B. 1.9:1 C. 3.2:1 D. 1.625:1
12) A firm’s long term assets = $75,000, total assets = $200,000, inventory = $25,000 and current liabilities = $50,000. A. current ratio = 1.5; quick ratio = 2.0 B. current ratio = 0.5; quick ratio = 1.5 C. current ratio = 2.5; quick ratio = 2.0 D. current ratio = 1.0; quick ratio = 2.0
13) The need for an increase or decrease in short-term borrowing can be predicted by A. a cash budget. B. ratio analysis. C. an income statement. D. trend analysis.
14) In order to estimate production requirements, we A. add beginning inventory to desired ending inventory and divide by two. B. add beginning inventory to projected sales in units and subtract desired ending inventory. C. add beginning inventory to desired ending inventory and subtract projected sales in units. D. add projected sales in units to desired ending inventory and subtract beginning inventory.
15) The percent-of-sales method of financial forecasting A. assumes that balance sheet accounts maintain a constant relationship to sales. B. is more detailed than a cash budget approach. C. provides a month-to-month breakdown of data. D. requires more time than a cash budget approach.
16) The pro forma income statement is important to the overall process of constructing pro forma statements because it allows us to determine a value for: A. interest expense. B. change in retained earnings. C. prepaid expenses. D. gross profit.
17) The key initial element in developing pro forma statements is A. a sales forecast. B. an income statement. C. a cash budget. D. a collections schedule.
18) In developing the pro forma income statement we follow four important steps: 1) compute other expenses, 2) determine a production schedule,
3) establish a sales projection, 4) determine profit by completing the actual pro forma statement. What is the correct order for these four steps? A. 2,1,3,4 B. 3,2,4,1 C. 1,2,3,4 D. 3,2,1,4
19) The concept of operating leverage involves the use of __________ to magnify returns at high levels of operation. A. marginal costs B. variable costs C. fixed costs D. semi-variable costs
20) The degree of operating leverage is computed as A. percent change in EPS divided by percent change in operating income. B. percent change in volume divided by percent change in operating profit. C. percent change in operating profit divided by percent change in net income. D. percent change in operating income divided by percent change in volume.
21) Financial leverage deals with: A. the entire income statement. B. the relationship of debt and equity in the capital structure. C. the relationship of fixed and variable costs. D. the entire balance sheet.
22) If TechCor has fixed costs of $80,000, variable costs of $1.20/unit, sales price/unit of $6, and depreciation expense of $25,000, what is their cash breakeven in units? A. 21,875 B. 11,458 C. 9,167 D. 45,833
23) The break-even point can be calculated as A. variable cost times contribution margin. B. total costs divided by contribution margin. C. variable costs divided by contribution margin. D. fixed cost divided by contribution margin.
24) In break-even analysis, the contribution margin is defined as A. variable cost minus fixed cost. B. price minus fixed cost. C. price minus variable cost. D. fixed cost minus variable cost.
25) Normally, permanent current assets should be financed by A. borrowed funds. B. short-term funds. C. long-term funds. D. internally generated funds.
26) When the yield curve is upward sloping, generally a financial manager should: A. wait for future financing B. utilize short-term financing C. utilize long-term financing D. lease
27) A conservatively financed firm would A. use equity to finance fixed assets, long-term debt to finance permanent assets, and short-term debt to finance fluctuating current assets. B. finance a portion of permanent assets and short-term assets with short-term debt. C. use long-term financing for all fixed assets and short-term financing for all other assets. D. use long-term financing for permanent current assets and fixed assets and a portion of the short-term fluctuating assets and use short-term financing for all other short-term assets
28) Which of the following combinations of asset structures and financing patterns is likely to create the most volatile earnings? A. Liquid assets and heavy long-term borrowing B. Illiquid assets and heavy long-term borrowing C. Illiquid assets and heavy short-term borrowing D. Liquid assets and heavy short-term borrowing
29) An aggressive working capital policy would have which of following characteristics? A. A high ratio of short-term debt to long-term sources of funds. B. A low ratio of short-term debt to fixed assets. C. A high ratio of long-term debt to fixed assets. D. A short average collection period.
30) Which of the following combinations of asset structures and financing patterns is likely to create the least volatile earnings? A. Liquid assets and heavy long-term borrowing B. Illiquid assets and heavy long-term borrowing C. Illiquid assets and heavy short-term borrowing D. Liquid assets and heavy short-term borrowing
31) The system whereby funds are moved between computer terminals without use of checks is A. a lock-box system. B. float. C. electronic funds transfer. D. magnetic character recognition.
32) “Float” takes place because A. a lag exists between writing a check and clearing it through the banking system. B. the level of cash on the firm’s books is equal to the level of cash in the bank. C. a firm is early in paying its bills. D. a customer writes “hot” checks.
33) In managing cash and marketable securities, what should be the manager’s primary concern? A. Acceptable return on investment B. Maximization of liquid assets C. Maximization of profit D. Liquidity and safety
34) Dun & Bradstreet is known for providing A. cash management systems to corporate treasurers. B. credit scoring reports that rank a company’s payment habits relative to its peer group. C. interest rate information to cash managers. D. consumer credit reports to credit card companies.
35) Variables important to credit scoring models include A. facility ownership. B. negative public records. C. age of company in years. D. all of these variables apply.
36) Which of the following is not a valid quantitative measure for accounts receivable collection policies? A. ratio of debt to equity B. aging of accounts receivables C. average collection period D. ratio of bad debts to credit sales
37) What is generally the largest source of short-term credit small firms? A. Installment loans B. Commercial paper C. Bank loans D. Trade credit
38) Commercial paper that is sold without going through a broker or dealer is known as A. book-entry transactions. B. dealer paper. C. direct paper. D. term paper.
39) Compensating balances A. generate returns to customers from interest bearing accounts. B. are created by having a sweep account. C. are used by banks as a substitute for charging service fees. D. are used to reward new accounts.
40) Firms exposed to the risk of interest rate changes may reduce that risk by A. hedging in the commodities market. B. hedging in the financial futures market. C. obtaining a Eurodollar loan. D. pledging or factoring accounts receivable.
41) General Rent-All’s officers arrange a $50,000 loan. The company is required to maintain a minimum checking account balance of 10% of the outstanding loan. This practice is called A. a discounted loan. B. a compensating balance. C. an installment loan. D. a balloon payment.
42) A large manufacturing firm has been selling on a 3/10, net 30 basis. The firm changes its credit terms to 2/20, net 90. What change might be expected on the balance sheets of its customers? A. Increased payables and decreased bank loans B. Increased receivables and increased bank loans C. Decreased receivables and increased bank loans D. Increased payables and increased bank loans
43) An annuity may be defined as A. a series of yearly payments. B. a series of payments of unequal amount. C. a payment at a fixed interest rate. D. a series of consecutive payments of equal amounts.
44) Increasing the number of periods will increase all of the following except A. the future value of $1. B. the present value of $1. C. the present value of an annuity. D. the future value of an annuity.
45) In determining the future value of a single amount, one measures A. the future value of an amount allowed to grow at a given interest rate. B. the present value of periodic payments at a given interest rate. C. the present value of an amount discounted at a given interest rate. D. the future value of periodic payments at a given interest rate.
46) Ali Shah sets aside 2,000 each year for 5 years. He then withdraws the funds on an equal annual basis for the next 4 years. If Ali wishes to determine the amount of the annuity to be withdrawn each year, he should use the following two tables in this order: A. future value of an annuity of $1; present value of a $1 B. future value of an annuity of $1; future value of a $1 C. future value of an annuity of $1; present value of an annuity of $1 D. present value of an annuity of $1; future value of an annuity of $1
47) If you were to put $1,000 in the bank at 6% interest each year for the next ten years, which table would you use to find the ending balance in your account? A. Present value of an annuity of $1 B. Future value of an annuity of $1 C. Future value of $1 D. Present value of $1
48) Mr. Blochirt is creating a college investment fund for his daughter. He will put in $850 per year for the next 15 years and expects to earn an 8% annual rate of return. How much money will his daughter have when she starts college? A. $24,003 B. $23,079 C. $12,263 D. $11,250
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P12-6 (Comprehensive Intangible Assets)
Montana Matt’s Golf Inc. was formed on July 1, 2009, when Matt Magilke purchased the Old Master Golf Company. Old Master provides video golf instruction at kiosks in shopping malls. Magilke plans to integrate the instruction business into his golf equipment and accessory stores. Magilke paid $770,000 cash for Old Master. At the time Old Master’s balance sheet reported assets of $650,000 and liabilities of $200,000 (thus owners’ equity was $450,000). The fair value of Old Master’s assets is estimated to be $800,000. Included in the assets is the Old Master trade name with a fair value of $10,000 and a copyright on some instructional books with a fair value of $24,000. The trade name has a remaining life of 5 years and can be renewed at nominal cost indefinitely. The copyright has a remaining life of 40 years. Instructions (a) Prepare the intangible assets section of Montana Matt’s Golf Inc. at December 31, 2009. How much amortization expense is included in Montana Matt’s income for the year ended December 31, 2009? Show all supporting computations. (b) Prepare the journal entry to record amortization expense for 2010. Prepare the intangible assets section of Montana Matt’s Golf Inc. at December 31, 2010. (No impairments are required to be recorded in 2010.) (c) At the end of 2011, is evaluating the results of the instructional business. Due to fierce competition from online and television (e.g., the Golf Channel), the Old Master reporting unit has been losing money. Its book value is now $500,000. The fair value of the Old Master reporting unit is $420,000. The implied value of goodwill is $90,000. Magilke has collected the following information related to the company’s intangible assets. Intangible Asset Exp.Cash Flows Fair Values Trade name $ 9,000 $ 3,000 Copyright $ 30,000 $ 25,000 Prepare the journal entries required, if any, to record impairments on Montana Matt’s intangible assets. (Assume that any amortization for 2011 has been recorded.) Show supporting computations.
QUESTION # 3 BE12-12 Nieland Industries had one patent recorded on its books as of January 1, 2010. This patent had a book value of $288,000 and a remaining useful life of 8 years. During 2010, Nieland incurred research and development costs of $96,000 and brought a patent infringement suit against a competitor. On December 1, 2010, Nieland received the good news that its patent was valid and that its competitor could not use the process Nieland had patented. The company incurred $85,000 to defend this patent. At what amount should patent(s) be reported on the December 31, 2010, balance sheet, assuming monthly amortization of patents? $ ?
QUESTION # 4 (Accounting for Patents) During 2007, Thompson Corporation spent $170,000 in research and development costs. As a result, a new product called the New Age Piano was patented. The patent was obtained on October 1, 2007, and had a legal life of 20 years and a useful life of 10 years. Legal costs of $24,000 related to the patent were incurred as of October 1, 2007. (a)Prepare all journal entries required in 2007 and 2008 as a result of the transactions above. Date Account/Description 2007 Research & Development Expense Debit? Cash Credit? (To record research and development costs) Account /Description Patents Debit? Cash Credit? ^(To record the patent) Account/Description Patent Amortization Expense Debit? Patents Credit? ^(To record amortization) 2008 Account/Description Patent amortization Expense Debit? Patents Credit? (b) On June 1, 2009, Thompson spent $12,400 to successfully prosecute a patent infringement. As a result, the estimate of useful life was extended to 12 years from June 1, 2009. Prepare all journal entries required in 2009 and 2010. (Round amounts to 0 decimal places, e.g. 2,510.) Date Account/Description 2009 Patents Debit? Cash Credit? (To record prosecution of patent infringement) Account/Description Patent Amortization Expense Debit? Patents Credit? (To record amortization) 2010 Patent Amortization Expense Debit? Patents Credit? (c) In 2011, Thompson determined that a competitor’s product would make the New Age Piano obsolete and the patent worthless by December 31, 2012. Prepare all journal entries required in 2011 and 2012. (Round amounts to 0 decimal places, e.g. 2,510.) Date Account/Description 2011 and 2012 Patent Amorization Expense Debit? Patents Credits?
E12-10)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ECONOMIC 112 Chapter 4 & 5 Exercise 3
Please complete the following 7 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 4 Exercise 3
3. Cost flows and overhead application
Cleveland Metals uses a job cost system and applies factory overhead to production at a predetermined rate of 180% of direct labor cost. Data pertaining to recent operations follow.
Job no. 636 was the only job in process on January 1 of the current year. The Work in Process account contained a $24,600 balance on this date.
Jobs no. 637, 638, and 639 were started during January.
Total direct material requisitions and direct labor incurred during January amounted to $89,200 and $114,500, respectively.
The only job that remained in process on January 31 was job no. 638, with costs of $15,000 for direct materials and $20,000 for direct labor.
a. Compute the total cost of the work in process inventory on January 31.
Chapter 4 Exercise 7
7. Overhead application: Working backward
The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
|
|
Division A
|
Division B
|
|
Actual machine hours
|
22,500
|
?
|
|
Estimated machine hours
|
20,000
|
?
|
|
Overhead application rate
|
$4.50
|
$5.00
|
|
Actual overhead
|
$110,000
|
?
|
|
Estimated overhead
|
?
|
$90,000
|
|
Applied overhead
|
?
|
$86,000
|
|
Over- (under-) applied overhead
|
?
|
$6,500
|
Find the unknowns for each of the divisions.
Chapter 4 Problem 2
2. Computationsusing a job order system
General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
Work in process $ 35,200
Finished goods 86,900
Cost of goods sold 128,700
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
101
|
|
$5,000
|
|
101
|
|
$7,800
|
|
115
|
|
19,500
|
|
103
|
|
20,800
|
|
116
|
|
36,200
|
|
115
|
|
42,000
|
|
Other
|
|
35,800
|
|
116
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
|
$96,500
|
|
Other
|
|
25,900
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$114,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.
b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.
c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.
d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.
Chapter 5 Exercise 1
1. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 20X6 operations of Heritage Products:
|
|
Quarter 1
|
Quarter 2
|
Quarter 3
|
Quarter 4
|
|
Shipping costs
|
$58,200
|
$58,620
|
$60,125
|
$59,400
|
|
Orders shipped
|
120
|
140
|
175
|
150
|
The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
a. Determine the variable cost per order shipped.
b. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.
c. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 20X7 if activity amounts to 570 orders.
Chapter 5 Exercise 2
The treasurer anticipates the following costs for the event, which will be held at the Regency Hotel:
Room rental $300
Dinner cost (per person) 25
Chartered buses 500
Favors and souvenirs (per person) 5
Band 900
Each person would pay $40 to attend; 200 attendees are expected.
a. Will the event be profitable for the sorority? Show computations.
b. How many people must attend for the sorority to break even?
c. Suppose the sorority encouraged its members to drive to the hotel and did not charter the buses. Further, a planned menu change will reduce the cost per meal by $2. If each member will still be charged $40, compute the contribution margin per person.
Chapter 5 Exercise 3
3. Break-even and other CVP relationships
Cedars Hospital has average revenue of $180 per patient day. Variable costs are $45 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,320,000 per year.
a. How many patient days does the hospital need to break even?
b. What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $540,000?
c. If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?
Chapter 5 Problem 6
6. Direct and absorption costing
The information that follows pertains to Consumer Products for the year ended December 31, 20X6.
|
Inventory, 1/1/X6
|
24,000 units
|
|
Units manufactured
|
80,000
|
|
Units sold
|
82,000
|
|
Inventory, 12/31/X6
|
? units
|
|
Manufacturing costs:
|
|
Direct materials
|
$3 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
$5 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
$9 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
$280,000
|
|
Selling & administrative expenses:
|
|
Variable
|
$2 per unit
|
|
Fixed
|
$136,000
|
The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Instructions:
a. Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.
b. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:
1. Direct costing.
2. Absorption costing.
c. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using direct costing
d. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using absorption costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
QUIZ Advanced Accounting
1. Which of the following situations best describes a business combination to be accounted for as a statutory merger?
Both companies in a combination continue to operate as separate, but related, legal entities.
Only one of the combining companies survives and the other loses its separate identity.
Two companies combine to form a new third company, and the original two companies are dissolved.
One company transfers assets to another company it has created.
2. The defense tactic that involves purchasing shares held by the would-be acquiring company at a price substantially in excess of their fair value is called
poison pill.
pac-man defense.
greenmail.
white knight.
3. The third period of business combinations started after World War II and is called
horizontal integration.
merger mania.
operating integration.
vertical integration.
4. The excess of the amount offered in an acquisition over the prior stock price of the acquired firm is the
bonus.
goodwill.
implied offering price.
takeover premium.
5. If the value implied by the purchase price of an acquired company exceeds the fair values of identifiable net assets, the excess should be
allocated to reduce any previously recorded goodwill and classify any remainder as an ordinary gain.
allocated to reduce current and long-lived assets.
allocated to reduce long-lived assets.
accounted for as goodwill.
6. In a business combination in which the total fair value of the identifiable assets acquired over liabilities assumed is greater than the consideration paid, the excess fair value is:
classified as an extraordinary gain.
allocated first to eliminate any previously recorded goodwill, and any remaining excess over the consideration paid is classified as an ordinary gain.
allocated first to reduce proportionately non-current assets then to non-monetary current assets, and any remaining excess over cost is classified as a deferred credit.
allocated first to reduce proportionately non-current, depreciable assets to zero, and any remaining excess over cost is classified as a deferred credit.
7. If an impairment loss is recorded on previously recognized goodwill due to the transitional goodwill impairment test, the loss should be treated as a(n):
loss from a change in accounting principles.
extraordinary loss
loss from continuing operations.
loss from discontinuing operations.
8. Under SFAS 141R, what value of the assets and liabilities are reflected in the financial statements on the acquisition date of a business combination?
Carrying value
Fair value
Book value
Average value
9. The fair value of net identifiable assets exclusive of goodwill of a reporting unit of X Company is $300,000. On X Company’s books, the carrying value of this reporting unit’s net assets is $350,000, including $60,000 goodwill. If the fair value of the reporting unit is $335,000, what amount of goodwill impairment will be recognized for this unit?
$0
$10,000
$25,000
$35,000
10. Majority-owned subsidiaries should be excluded from the consolidated statements when
control does not rest with the majority owner.
the subsidiary operates under governmentally imposed uncertainty.
a foreign subsidiary is domiciled in a country with foreign exchange restrictions or controls.
any of these circumstances exist.
11. Under the economic entity concept, consolidated financial statements are intended primarily for the benefit of the
stockholders of the parent company.
creditors of the parent company.
minority stockholders.
all of the above.
12. A newly acquired subsidiary has pre-existing goodwill on its books. The parent company s consolidated balance sheet will:
treat the goodwill the same as other intangible assets of the acquired company.
will always show the pre-existing goodwill of the subsidiary at its book value.
not show any value for the subsidiary s pre-existing goodwill.
do an impairment test to see if any of it has been impaired.
13. The Difference between Implied and Book Value account is:
an account necessary for the preparation of consolidated working papers.
used in allocating the amounts paid for recorded balance sheet accounts that are different than their fair values.
the excess implied value assigned to goodwill.
the unamortized excess that cannot be assigned to any related balance sheet accounts
14. An investor adjusts the investment account for the amortization of any difference between cost and book value under the
cost method.
complete equity method.
partial equity method.
complete and partial equity methods.
15. Under the partial equity method, the entry to eliminate subsidiary income and dividends includes a debit to
Dividend Income.
Dividends Declared – S Company.
Equity in Subsidiary Income.
Retained Earnings – S Company.
16. On the consolidated statement of cash flows, the parent s acquisition of additional shares of the subsidiary s stock directly from the subsidiary is reported as
an investing activity.
a financing activity.
an operating activity.
none of these.
17. P Company purchased 80% of the outstanding common stock of S Company on May 1, 2011, for a cash payment of $1,272,000. S Company s December 31, 2010 balance sheet reported common stock of $800,000 and retained earnings of $540,000. During the calendar year 2011, S Company earned $840,000 evenly throughout the year and declared a dividend of $300,000 on November 1. What is the amount needed to establish reciprocity under the cost method in the preparation of a consolidated workpaper on December 31, 2011?
$208,000
$260,000
$248,000
$432,000
18. In the preparation of a consolidated statements workpaper, dividend income recognized by a parent company for dividends distributed by its subsidiary is
included with parent company income from other sources to constitute consolidated net income.
assigned as a component of the noncontrolling interest.
allocated proportionately to consolidated net income and the noncontrolling interest.
eliminated.
19. When the implied value exceeds the aggregate fair values of identifiable net assets, the residual difference is accounted for as
excess of implied over fair value.
a deferred credit.
difference between implied and fair value.
goodwill.
20. The SEC requires the use of push down accounting when the ownership change is greater than
50%
80%
90%
95%
21. Under push down accounting, the workpaper entry to eliminate the investment account includes a
debit to Goodwill.
debit to Revaluation Capital.
credit to Revaluation Capital.
debit to Revaluation Assets.
22. In preparing consolidated working papers, beginning retained earnings of the parent company will be adjusted in years subsequent to acquisition with an elimination entry whenever:
a noncontrolling interest exists.
it does not reflect the equity method.
the cost method has been used only.
the complete equity method is in use.
23. Failure to eliminate intercompany sales would result in an overstatement of consolidated
net income.
gross profit.
cost of sales.
all of these.
24. The workpaper entry in the year of sale to eliminate unrealized intercompany profit in ending inventory includes a
credit to Ending Inventory (Cost of Sales).
credit to Sales.
debit to Ending Inventory (Cost of Sales).
debit to Inventory – Balance Sheet.
25. P Corporation acquired a 60% interest in S Corporation on January 1, 2011, at book value equal to fair value. During 2011, P sold merchandise that cost $135,000 to S for $189,000. One-third of this merchandise remained in S s inventory at December 31, 2011. S reported net income of $120,000 for 2011. P s income from S for 2011 is:
$36,000.
$50,400.
$54,000.
$61,200.
26. Paige, Inc. owns 80% of Sigler, Inc. During 2011, Paige sold goods with a 40% gross profit to Sigler. Sigler sold all of these goods in 2011. For 2011 consolidated financial statements, how should the summation of Paige and Sigler income statement items be adjusted?
Sales and cost of goods sold should be reduced by the intercompany sales.
Sales and cost of goods sold should be reduced by 80% of the intercompany sales.
Net income should be reduced by 80% of the gross profit on intercompany sales.
No adjustment is necessary.
27. In years subsequent to the year a 90% owned subsidiary sells equipment to its parent company at a gain, the noncontrolling interest in consolidated income is computed by multiplying the noncontrolling interest percentage by the subsidiary s reported net income
minus the net amount of unrealized gain on the intercompany sale.
plus the net amount of unrealized gain on the intercompany sale.
minus intercompany gain considered realized in the current period.
plus intercompany gain considered realized in the current period.
28. In years subsequent to the upstream intercompany sale of nondepreciable assets, the necessary consolidated workpaper entry under the cost method is to debit the
Noncontrolling interest and Retained Earnings (Parent) accounts, and credit the nondepreciable asset.
Retained Earnings (Parent) account and credit the nondepreciable asset.
Nondepreciable asset, and credit the Noncontrolling interest and Investment in Subsidiary accounts.
No entries are necessary.
29. In 2011, P Company sells land to its 80% owned subsidiary, S Company, at a gain of $50,000. What is the effect of this sale of land on consolidated net income assuming S Company still owns the land at the end of the year?
consolidated net income will be the same as if the sale had not occurred.
consolidated net income will be $50,000 less than it would had the sale not occurred.
consolidated net income will be $40,000 less than it would had the sale not occurred.
consolidated net income will be $50,000 greater than it would had the sale not occurred.
30. Several years ago, P Company bought land from S Company, its 80% owned subsidiary, at a gain of $50,000 to S Company. The land is still owned by P Company. The consolidated working papers for this year will require:
no entry because the gain happened prior to this year.
a credit to land for $50,000.
a debit to P s retained earnings for $50,000.
a debit to Noncontrolling interest for $50,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below are two independent situations.
Situation 1
Hatcher Cosmetics acquired 10% of the 215,000 shares of common stock of Ramirez Fashion at a total cost of $16 per share on March 18, 2012. On June 30, Ramirez declared and paid a $77,400 cash dividend. On December 31, Ramirez reported net income of $130,400 for the year. At December 31, the market price of Ramirez Fashion was $18 per share. The securities are classified as available-for-sale.
Situation 2
Holmes, Inc. obtained significant influence over Nadal Corporation by buying 27% of Nadal s 31,300 outstanding shares of common stock at a total cost of $10 per share on January 1, 2012. On June 15, Nadal declared and paid a cash dividend of $36,300. On December 31, Nadal reported a net income of $89,600 for the year.
Prepare all necessary journal entries in 2012 for both situations. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
Cardinal Paz Corp. carries an account in its general ledger called Investments, which contained debits for investment purchases, and no credits, with the following descriptions.
|
Feb. 1, 2012
|
|
Sharapova Company common stock, $100 par, 200 shares
|
|
$41,500
|
|
April 1
|
|
U.S. government bonds, 10%, due April 1, 2022, interest payable April 1 and October 1, 112 bonds of $1,000 par each
|
|
112,000
|
|
July 1
|
|
McGrath Company 12% bonds, par $53,600, dated March 1, 2012, purchased at 104 plus accrued interest, interest payable annually on March 1, due March 1, 2032
|
|
57,888
|
(a) Prepare entries necessary to classify the amounts into proper accounts, assuming that all the securities are classified as available-for-sale.(Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
(b) Prepare the entry to record the accrued interest and the amortization of premium on December 31, 2012, using the straight-line method.(Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $2,500. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
(c) The fair values of the investments on December 31, 2012, were:
What entry or entries, if any, would you recommend be made?(Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $2,500. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
(d) The U.S. government bonds were sold on July 1, 2013, for $120,650 plus accrued interest. Give the proper entry.(Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
Brooks Corp. is a medium-sized corporation specializing in quarrying stone for building construction. The company has long dominated the market, at one time achieving a 70% market penetration. During prosperous years, the company s profits, coupled with a conservative dividend policy, resulted in funds available for outside investment. Over the years, Brooks has had a policy of investing idle cash in equity securities. In particular, Brooks has made periodic investments in the company s principal supplier, Norton Industries. Although the firm currently owns 12% of the outstanding common stock of Norton Industries, Brooks does not have significant influence over the operations of Norton Industries.
Cheryl Thomas has recently joined Brooks as assistant controller, and her first assignment is to prepare the 2012 year-end adjusting entries for the accounts that are valued by the fair value rule for financial reporting purposes. Thomas has gathered the following information about Brooks s pertinent accounts.
|
1.
|
|
Brooks has trading securities related to Delaney Motors and Patrick Electric. During this fiscal year, Brooks purchased 100,000 shares of Delaney Motors for $1,400,000; these shares currently have a market value of $1,600,000. Brooks investment in Patrick Electric has not been profitable; the company acquired 50,000 shares of Patrick in April 2012 at $20 per share, a purchase that currently has a value of $720,000.
|
|
2.
|
|
Prior to 2012, Brooks invested $22,500,000 in Norton Industries and has not changed its holdings this year. This investment in Norton Industries was valued at $21,500,000 on December 31, 2011. Brooks 12% ownership of Norton Industries has a current market value of $22,225,000.
|
For both classes of securities presented above, describe how the results of the valuation adjustments made to reflect the application of the fair value rule would be reflected in the body of and notes to Brooks 2012 financial statements. (Refer to Problem 17-8.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The return on which one of the following is used as the risk-free rate of return
a. long-term corporate bonds
b. long-term government bonds
c. short-term corporate bonds
d. U.S. Treasury bills
e. the Consumer Price Index
2. The CEO of Jericho Industries just announced that the firm has received a patent for a product that will convert household garbage into usable fuel without creating any hazardous waste. This news is totally a surprise and seen as a major technological advancement. Which one of the following reactions to this development best indicates an efficient market
a. The price of Jericho stock remains unchanged.
b. The price of Jericho stock increases rapidly and then settles back to its original value.
c. The price of Jericho stock increases rapidly and then levels off at the higher value.
d. All stocks quickly increase in value and then all but Jericho stock fall back to their original values.
e. The value of all stocks suddenly increase and then level off at their higher values.
3. The stock of Webster’s Foods is priced at $31 a share and has a dividend yield of 2.8 percent. The firm pays constant annual dividends. What is the amount of the next dividend per share
a. $.740
b. $.868
c. $.927
d. $1.03
e. $1.07
4. Truman Florists pays a constant annual dividend of $2.20 per share on its stock. Last year at this time, the market rate of return on this stock was 12.6 percent. Today, the market rate has fallen to 9.7 percent. What would your capital gains yield have been if you had purchased this stock one year ago and then sold the stock today
a. 2.90 percent
b. 9.70 percent
c. 14.57 percent
d. 23.02 percent
e. 29.90 percent
5. Over the past 6 years, a stock produced returns of 11 percent, 20 percent, -7 percent, 18 percent, 12 percent, and 3 percent. Based on these six years, what range of returns would you expect to see 95 percent of the time
a.
10.61 percent to 15.47 percent
b.
10.61 percent to 24.30 percent
c.
10.61 percent to 29.61 percent
d.
11.40 percent to 15.47 percent
e.
11.40 percent to 24.30 percent
6. A stock has an average return of 13.6 percent and a standard deviation of 8.4 percent. In any one given year, you have a 95 percent chance that you will not lose more than _____ percent nor earn more than ____ percent if you invest in this security.
a.
5.2 percent to 22.0 percent
b.
3.2 percent to 30.4 percent
c. 3.2 percent to 30.4 percent
d. 5.2 percent to 22.0 percent
e. 13.6 percent to 38.8 percent
7. Over the last four years, the stock of Wagner’s Paints has had an arithmetic average return of 6.5 percent. Three of those four years produced returns of 9 percent, 3 percent, and
1 percent. What is the geometric average return for this 4-year period
a. 3.00 percent
b. 4.48 percent
c. 6.33 percent
d. 7.07 percent
e. 8.69 percent
8. The expected return on a security is currently based on a 75 percent chance of a 14 percent return given an economic boom and a 25 percent chance of a 6 percent return given a normal economy. Which of the following changes will increase the expected return on this security?
I. an increase in the probability of an economic boom
II. a decrease in the rate of return given a normal economy
III. an increase in the probability of a normal economy
IV. an increase in the rate of return given an economic boom
a. I and II only
b. I and IV only
c. II and III only
d. I, III, and IV only
e. I, II, III, and IV
9. Which one of the following portfolios has the least amount of systematic risk
a. a portfolio that duplicates the overall market
b. a portfolio comprised of 50 percent cash and 50 percent large-company stocks
c. a portfolio consisting of various U.S. Treasury bills
d. a stock portfolio with a portfolio beta of 1.8
e. a diversified portfolio with a portfolio beta of 0.7
10. The beta of a portfolio cannot be less than _____ nor greater than _____.
a. 0; 1
b. 1; 2
c. the lowest individual beta in the portfolio; 1
d. 1; the highest individual beta in the portfolio
e. the lowest individual beta in the portfolio; the highest individual beta in the portfolio
11. You own a portfolio of two stocks, A and B. Stock A is valued at $3,240 and has an expected return of 10.5 percent. Stock B has an expected return of 14.7 percent. What is the expected return on the portfolio if the portfolio value is $5,860
a. 11.20 percent
b. 12.38 percent
c. 12.46 percent
d. 14.03 percent
e. 14.29 percent
12. You want to create a $25,000 portfolio that consists of three stocks and has an expected return of 13 percent. Currently, you own $15,500 of stock A and $6,000 of stock B. The expected return for stock A is 14.5 percent, and for stock B it is 9.2 percent. What is the expected rate of return for stock C
a. 11.21 percent
b. 11.58 percent
c. 12.62 percent
d. 12.87 percent
e. 13.20 percent
13. You own a $90,000 portfolio that is invested in stock A and B. The portfolio beta is equal to the market beta. Stock A has an expected return of 14.1 percent and a beta of 1.2. Stock B has a beta of .76. What is the value of your investment in stock A
a. $39,333
b. $40,909
c. $49,091
d. $50,545
e. $50,667
14. Given the following information, what is the variance of a portfolio that is invested 25 percent in both stocks A and C, and 50 percent in stock B?
a. .000025
b. .000106
c. .000232
d. .001414
e. .005285
15. You would like to create a portfolio that is equally invested in a risk-free asset and two stocks. The one stock has a beta of .80. What does the beta of the second stock have to be if you want the portfolio risk to equal that of the overall market
a. 1.4
b. 1.6
c. 1.8
d. 2.0
e. 2.2
16. The risk-free rate is 3.5 percent and the expected return on the market is 11 percent. Stock A has a beta of 1.1 and an expected return of 12 percent. Stock B has a beta of .92 and an expected return of 10.25 percent. Are these stocks correctly priced? Why or why not
a. No; Stock A is underpriced and stock B is overpriced.
b. No; Stock A is overpriced and stock B is underpriced.
c. No; Stock A is overpriced but stock B is correctly priced.
d. No; Stock A is underpriced but stock B is correctly priced.
e. Yes; Both stocks are correctly priced.
17. Unsystematic risk:
I. is also called unique risk.
II. is also called asset-specific risk.
III. affects a limited number of assets.
IV. affects a large number of assets.
a. I and III only
b. II and IV only
c. I and IV only
d. I, II, and III only
e. I, II, and IV only
18. The common stock of Bywater, Inc. has 16 percent less systematic risk than the overall market. Currently, the market risk premium is 8.6 percent while the U.S. Treasury bill is yielding 5.2 percent. What is Bywater, Inc.’s cost of equity
a. 8.06 percent
b. 9.38 percent
c. 10.78 percent
d. 12.42 percent
e. 13.80 percent
19. A U.S. Treasury bill has a beta of _____ while the overall market has a beta of _____.
a. 0; 0
b. 0; 1
c. 1; 0
d. 1; 1
e. infinity; 1
20. The beta of a portfolio cannot be less than _____ nor greater than _____.
a. 0; 1
b. 1; 2
c. the lowest individual beta in the portfolio; 1
d. 1; the highest individual beta in the portfolio
e. the lowest individual beta in the portfolio; the highest individual beta in the portfolio
21. If a security plots below the security market line, then the security:
a. is under-priced.
b. is overpriced.
c. is correctly priced.
d. has a beta greater than 1.0.
e. has a beta less than 1.0.
22. The stock of Uptown Men’s Wear is expected to produce the following returns given the various states of the economy. What is the expected return on this stock?
a. 9.6 percent
b. 10.4 percent
c. 12.8 percent
d. 13.6 percent
e. 15.3 percent
23. Given the following information, what is the variance for this stock?
a. .004638
b. .006667
c. .012121
d. .017406
e. .019949
24. You own a portfolio that consists of $8,000 in stock A, $4,600 in stock B, $13,000 in stock C, and $5,500 in stock D. What is the portfolio weight of stock D
a. 17.68 percent
b. 17.91 percent
c. 18.42 percent
d. 19.07 percent
e. 19.46 percent
25. You own a portfolio of two stocks, A and B. Stock A is valued at $3,240 and has an expected return of 10.5 percent. Stock B has an expected return of 14.7 percent. What is the expected return on the portfolio if the portfolio value is $5,860
a. 11.20 percent
b. 12.38 percent
c. 12.46 percent
d. 14.03 percent
e. 14.29 percent
26. You want to create a $25,000 portfolio that consists of three stocks and has an expected return of 13 percent. Currently, you own $15,500 of stock A and $6,000 of stock B. The expected return for stock A is 14.5 percent, and for stock B it is 9.2 percent. What is the expected rate of return for stock C
a. 11.21 percent
b. 11.58 percent
c. 12.62 percent
d. 12.87 percent
e. 13.20 percent
27. A $16,000 portfolio is invested in a risk-free security and two stocks. The beta of stock A is .74 while the beta of stock B is 1.9. One-half of the portfolio is invested in the risk-free security. How much is invested in stock A if the beta of the portfolio is .60
a. $3,411.16
b. $4,141.41
c. $4,827.59
d. $5,258.25
e. $5,434.09
28. You have a portfolio comprised of the following. If the portfolio beta is 1.25, what is the beta of stock C?
a. .987
b. 1.006
c. 1.145
d. 1.212
e. 1.309
29. Stock A has an expected return of 14 percent and a beta of 1.3. Stock B has an expected return of 10 percent and a beta of .9. Both stocks have the same reward-to-risk ratio. What is the risk-free rate
a. 1.0 percent
b. 1.8 percent
c. 2.3 percent
d. 2.5 percent
e. 3.1 percent
30. A stock has a beta of 1.26 and an expected return of 14.8 percent. The risk-free rate is 3.6 percent. What is the slope of the security market line
a. 8.89 percent
b. 9.23 percent
c. 9.47 percent
d. 9.62 percent
e. 9.92 percent
31. The stock of Ernst Electric has a beta of .87. The market risk premium is 8.6 percent and the risk-free rate is 3.7 percent. What is the expected return on Ernst Electric stock
a. 7.96 percent
b. 10.58 percent
c. 11.18 percent
d. 12.20 percent
e. 12.30 percent
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P 11-15 Property, plant, and equipment and intangible assets; comprehensive
The Thompson Corporation, manufacturer of steel products, began operations on October 1, 2009. The accounting department of Thompson has started the fixed- asset and depreciation schedule presented below. You have been asked to assist in completing this schedule. In addition to ascertaining that the data already on the schedule are correct, you have obtained the following information from the company s records and personnel:
a. Depreciation is computed from the first of the month acquisition to the first of the month of disposition.
b. Land A and Building A were acquired from a predecessor corporation. Thompson paid 812,000 for the land and building together. At the time of acquisition, the land had a fair value of 72,000 and the building had a fair value of 828,000.
c. Land b was acquired on October 2, 2009, in exchange for 3,000 newly issued shares of Thompson s common stock. At the date of acquisition, the stock had a par value of $5 per share and a fair value of $25 per share. During October 2009, Thompson paid $10,400 to demolish an existing building on this land so it could construct a new building.
d. Construction of Building B on the newly acquired land began on October 1, 2010. By September 30, 2011, Thompson had paid $210,000 of the estimated total construction costs of $300,000. Estimated completion and occupancy are July 2012.
e. E. Certain equipment was donated to the corporation by the city. An independent appraisal of the equipment when donated placed the fair value of $16,000 and the residual value at $2,000.
f. Machine A s total cost of $110,000 includes installation charges of $550 and normal repairs and maintenance of $11,000. Residual value is estimated at 5,500. Machine A was sold on February 1, 2011.
g. On October 1, 2010, Machine B was acquired with a down payment of $4,000 and the remaining payments to be made in 10 annual installments of $4,000 each beginning October 1, 2011. The prevailing interest rate was 8% .
|
Fixed Asset and Depreciation Schedule
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For Fiscal Years Ended September 30, 2010 and September 30, 2011
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation for
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Year Ended 9/30
|
|
|
Assets
|
Acquisition Date
|
Cost
|
Residual
|
Depreciation Method
|
Estimated Life in Years
|
2010
|
2011
|
|
Land A
|
10/1/2009
|
(1)
|
N/A
|
N/A
|
N/A
|
N/A
|
N/A
|
|
Building A
|
10/1/2009
|
(2)
|
47,500
|
SL
|
(3)
|
14,000
|
(4)
|
|
Land B
|
10/2/2009
|
(5)
|
N/A
|
N/A
|
N/A
|
N/A
|
N/A
|
|
Building B
|
under construction
|
210,000 to date
|
–
|
SL
|
30
|
–
|
(6)
|
|
Donated Equipment
|
10/2/2009
|
(7)
|
2,000
|
150% declining balance
|
10
|
(8)
|
(9)
|
|
Machine A
|
10/2/2009
|
(10)
|
5,500
|
Sum-of-the-digits
|
10
|
(11)
|
(12)
|
|
Machine B
|
10/1/2010
|
(13)
|
|
SL
|
15
|
_
|
(14)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
N/A= Not Applicable
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Required:Supply the correct amount for each numbered item on the schedule. Round each answer to the nearest dollar. (AICPA adapted)
P11-6 Depreciation methods: partial-year depreciation; sale of assets
On March 31, 2011, the Herzog Company purchased a factory complete with machinery and equipment. The allocation of the total purchase price of $1,000,000 to the various types of assets along with estimated useful lives and residual values are as follows:
|
Assets
|
Cost
|
Estimated Residual Value
|
Estimated Useful Life in Years
|
|
Land
|
100,000
|
N/A
|
N/A
|
|
building
|
500,000
|
none
|
25
|
|
Machinery
|
240,000
|
10% of cost
|
8
|
|
Equipment
|
160,000
|
13,000
|
6
|
|
Total
|
1,000,000
|
|
|
On June 28, 2012, machinery included in the March 31, 2011, purchase that cos $100,000 was sold for $80,000. Herzog uses the straight-line depreciation method for buildings and machinery and the sum-of-the-years -digits method for equipment. Partial-year depreciation is calculated based on the number of months an asset is in service.
Required:
1. Compare depreciation expense on the building, machinery, and equipment for 2011.
2. Prepare journal entries to record (1) depreciation on the machinery sold on June 29, 2012, and (2) the sale of machinery.
3. Compute depreciation expense on the building, remaining machinery, and equipment for 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P 11-15 Property, plant, and equipment and intangible assets; comprehensive
The Thompson Corporation, manufacturer of steel products, began operations on October 1, 2009. The accounting department of Thompson has started the fixed- asset and depreciation schedule presented below. You have been asked to assist in completing this schedule. In addition to ascertaining that the data already on the schedule are correct, you have obtained the following information from the company s records and personnel:
a. Depreciation is computed from the first of the month acquisition to the first of the month of disposition.
b. Land A and Building A were acquired from a predecessor corporation. Thompson paid 812,000 for the land and building together. At the time of acquisition, the land had a fair value of 72,000 and the building had a fair value of 828,000.
c. Land b was acquired on October 2, 2009, in exchange for 3,000 newly issued shares of Thompson s common stock. At the date of acquisition, the stock had a par value of $5 per share and a fair value of $25 per share. During October 2009, Thompson paid $10,400 to demolish an existing building on this land so it could construct a new building.
d. Construction of Building B on the newly acquired land began on October 1, 2010. By September 30, 2011, Thompson had paid $210,000 of the estimated total construction costs of $300,000. Estimated completion and occupancy are July 2012.
e. E. Certain equipment was donated to the corporation by the city. An independent appraisal of the equipment when donated placed the fair value of $16,000 and the residual value at $2,000.
f. Machine A s total cost of $110,000 includes installation charges of $550 and normal repairs and maintenance of $11,000. Residual value is estimated at 5,500. Machine A was sold on February 1, 2011.
g. On October 1, 2010, Machine B was acquired with a down payment of $4,000 and the remaining payments to be made in 10 annual installments of $4,000 each beginning October 1, 2011. The prevailing interest rate was 8% .
|
Fixed Asset and Depreciation Schedule
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For Fiscal Years Ended September 30, 2010 and September 30, 2011
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation for
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Year Ended 9/30
|
|
|
Assets
|
Acquisition Date
|
Cost
|
Residual
|
Depreciation Method
|
Estimated Life in Years
|
2010
|
2011
|
|
Land A
|
10/1/2009
|
(1)
|
N/A
|
N/A
|
N/A
|
N/A
|
N/A
|
|
Building A
|
10/1/2009
|
(2)
|
47,500
|
SL
|
(3)
|
14,000
|
(4)
|
|
Land B
|
10/2/2009
|
(5)
|
N/A
|
N/A
|
N/A
|
N/A
|
N/A
|
|
Building B
|
under construction
|
210,000 to date
|
–
|
SL
|
30
|
–
|
(6)
|
|
Donated Equipment
|
10/2/2009
|
(7)
|
2,000
|
150% declining balance
|
10
|
(8)
|
(9)
|
|
Machine A
|
10/2/2009
|
(10)
|
5,500
|
Sum-of-the-digits
|
10
|
(11)
|
(12)
|
|
Machine B
|
10/1/2010
|
(13)
|
|
SL
|
15
|
_
|
(14)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
N/A= Not Applicable
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Required:Supply the correct amount for each numbered item on the schedule. Round each answer to the nearest dollar. (AICPA adapted)
P11-6 Depreciation methods: partial-year depreciation; sale of assets
On March 31, 2011, the Herzog Company purchased a factory complete with machinery and equipment. The allocation of the total purchase price of $1,000,000 to the various types of assets along with estimated useful lives and residual values are as follows:
|
Assets
|
Cost
|
Estimated Residual Value
|
Estimated Useful Life in Years
|
|
Land
|
100,000
|
N/A
|
N/A
|
|
building
|
500,000
|
none
|
25
|
|
Machinery
|
240,000
|
10% of cost
|
8
|
|
Equipment
|
160,000
|
13,000
|
6
|
|
Total
|
1,000,000
|
|
|
On June 28, 2012, machinery included in the March 31, 2011, purchase that cos $100,000 was sold for $80,000. Herzog uses the straight-line depreciation method for buildings and machinery and the sum-of-the-years -digits method for equipment. Partial-year depreciation is calculated based on the number of months an asset is in service.
Required:
1. Compare depreciation expense on the building, machinery, and equipment for 2011.
2. Prepare journal entries to record (1) depreciation on the machinery sold on June 29, 2012, and (2) the sale of machinery.
3. Compute depreciation expense on the building, remaining machinery, and equipment for 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Substitute your numbers to get the answers.
20-3. Average hourly billing rates are: auditing , tax , and consulting Prepare the service revenue budget for 2012
22-1. Stanton company is planning to produce units of product in 2012. Each unit requires pounds of materials at per pound and a half hour of labor at per hour.
23-3. In Harley company it costs per unit ( variable and fixed) to make a product that normally sells for A foreign wholesaler offers to buy units at each.
23-4. Vintech manufacturing incurs unit costs of in making a subassembly part for its finished product. A suplier offers to make of the part at per unit.
23-6. Ridley company has a factory machine with a book value of and a remaining useful life of 5 years.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Since the calculations are done in Excel, you can substitute your numbers and get the answers.
Duggan Company applies manufacturing overhead to jobs on the basis of machine hours used. Overhead costs are expected to total $353,920 for the year, and machine usage is estimated at 126,400 hours.
For the year, $368,283 of overhead costs are incurred and 130,100 hours are used.
(a)
Compute the manufacturing overhead rate for the year. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25.)
Manufacturing overhead rate
$
_________per machine hour
(b) What is the amount of under or over-applied overhead at December 31?
(c) Prepare the adjusting entry to assign the under or over-applied overhead for the year to cost of goods sold.
Exercise 16-3
The ledger of Custer Company has the following work in process account.
Work in Process Painting
5/1 Balance 4,170
5/31 Materials 7,190
5/31 Labor 3,510
5/31 Overhead 2,210
5/31 Transferred out ?
5/31 Balance ?
Production records show that there were 500 units in the beginning inventory, 30% complete, 1,460 units started, and 1,450 units transferred out. The beginning work in process had materials cost of $2,480 and conversion costs of $1,690. The units in ending inventory were 40% complete. Materials are entered at the beginning of the painting process.
Instructions
(a) How many units are in process at May 31?
(a)
(b) What is the unit materials cost for May?
(c) What is the unit conversion cost for May?
(b) & (c)
(d) What is the total cost of units transferred out in May?
(e) What is the cost of the May 31 inventory?
Exercise 17-1
Wilkins Inc. has two types of handbags: standard and custom. The controller has decided to use a plantwide overhead rate based on direct labor costs. The president has heard of activity-based costing and wants to see how the results would differ if this system were used. Two activity cost pools were developed: machining and machine setup. Presented below is information related to the company s operations.
Standard Custom
Direct labor costs $43,700 $102,000
Machine hours 1,500 1,380
Setup hours 96 440
Total estimated overhead costs are $298,400. Overhead cost allocated to the machining activity cost pool is $195,100, and $103,300 is allocated to the machine setup activity cost pool.
Instructions
(a) Compute the overhead rate using the traditional (plant-wide) approach.
(b) Compute the overhead rates using the activity-based costing approach.
(c) Determine the difference in allocation between the two approaches.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 561 DECISION MAKING ACROSS THE ORGANIZATION
Writea paper of no more than 750 words in which you respond to the Broadening Your Perspective 18-1 activity titled “Decision Making Across the Organization” in Ch. 18 of Accounting.
Martinez Company has decided to introduce a new product. The new product can b manufactured by either a capital-intensive method or a labor-intensive method. The manufacturing method will not affect the quality of the product The estimated manufacturing costs by the two methods are as follows:
Capital Labor
Intensive Intensive
Direct materials $5 per unit $5.50 per unit
Direct labor $6 per unit $8.00 per unit
Variable overhead $ 3 per unit $ 4.50 per unit
Fixed manufacturing costs $ 2,508,000 $ 1,538,000
Martinez’s market research department has recommended an introductory unit sales price of $ 30. The incremental selling expenses are estimated to be $502,000 annually plus $2 for each unit sold regardless of manufaturing method.
a. Calculate the estimated break-even point in annual unit sales of the new product if Martinez company uses the:
1. Capital – intensive manufacuring method
2. Labor – intensive manufacturting method
b. Determine the annual unit sales volume at which Martinez Company would be indifferent between the two manufacturing methods.
c. Explain the circumstance under which Martinez should employ each of the two manufacturing methods.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Multiple Choice Question 49
Which of the following is an advantage of corporations relative to partnerships and sole proprietorships?
Harder to transfer ownership.
Lower taxes.
Most common form of organization.
Reduced legal liability for investors.
Multiple Choice Question 64
The group of users of accounting information charged with achieving the goals of the business is its
creditors.
investors.
managers.
auditors.
Multiple Choice Question 110
Which of the following financial statements is concerned with the company at a point in time?
Balance sheet.
Income statement.
Retained Earnings statement.
Statement of cash flows.
Multiple Choice Question 112
An income statement
presents the revenues and expenses for a specific period of time.
summarizes the changes in retained earnings for a specific period of time.
reports the assets, liabilities, and stockholders equity at a specific date.
reports the changes in assets, liabilities, and stockholders equity over a period of time.
Multiple Choice Question 118
The most important information needed to determine if companies can pay their current obligations is the
projected net income for next year.
net income for this year.
relationship between current assets and current liabilities.
relationship between short-term and long-term liabilities.
Multiple Choice Question 124
A liquidity ratio measures the
income or operating success of a company over a period of time.
percentage of total financing provided by creditors.
ability of a company to survive over a long period of time.
short-term ability of a company to pay its maturing obligations and to meet unexpected needs for cash.
Multiple Choice Question 165
The convention of consistency refers to consistent use of accounting principles
throughout the accounting periods.
within industries.
among accounting periods.
among firms.
Multiple Choice Question 90
Horizontal analysis is also known as
vertical analysis.
trend analysis.
common size analysis.
linear analysis
Multiple Choice Question 92
Horizontal analysis is a technique for evaluating a series of financial statement data over a period of time
that has been arranged from the highest number to the lowest number.
to determine the amount and/or percentage increase or decrease that has taken place.
to determine which items are in error.
that has been arranged from the lowest number to the highest number.
Multiple Choice Question 111
Vertical analysis is a technique that expresses each item in a financial statement
as a percent of the item in the previous year.
in dollars and cents.
as a percent of a base amount.
starting with the highest value down to the lowest value.
Multiple Choice Question 41
Process costing is used when
production is aimed at filling a specific customer order.
costs are to be assigned to specific jobs.
the production process is continuous.
dissimilar products are involved.
Multiple Choice Question 43
An important feature of a job order cost system is that each job
has its own distinguishing characteristics.
must be similar to previous jobs completed.
consists of one unit of output.
must be completed before a new job is accepted.
Multiple Choice Question 49
In a process cost system, product costs are summarized:
after each unit is produced.
on production cost reports.
when the products are sold.
on job cost sheets.
Multiple Choice Question 33
An activity that has a direct cause-effect relationship with the resources consumed is a(n)
cost pool.
cost driver.
overhead rate.
product activity.
Multiple Choice Question 40
Activity-based costing
accumulates overhead in one cost pool, then assigns the overhead to products and services by means of a cost driver.
allocates overhead directly to products and services based on activity levels.
assigns activity cost pools to products and services, then allocates overhead back to the activity cost pools.
allocates overhead to multiple activity cost pools, and it then assigns the activity cost pools to products and services by means of cost drivers.
Multiple Choice Question 40
A cost which remains constant per unit at various levels of activity is a
mixed cost.
variable cost.
fixed cost.
manufacturing cost.
Multiple Choice Question 105
The break-even point is where
total variable costs equal total fixed costs.
total sales equal total variable costs.
contribution margin equals total fixed costs.
total sales equal total fixed costs.
Multiple Choice Question 109
Fixed costs are $600,000 and the contribution margin per unit is $150. What is the break-even point?
4,000 units
$1,500,000
$4,000,000
1,500 units
Multiple Choice Question 94
When a company assigns the costs of direct materials, direct labor, and both variable and fixed manufacturing overhead to products, that company is using
product costing.
operations costing.
absorption costing.
variable costing.
Multiple Choice Question 122
If a division manager’s compensation is based upon the division’s net income, the manager may decide to meet the net income targets by increasing production when using
absorption costing, in order to increase net income.
variable costing, in order to decrease net income.
absorption costing, in order to decrease net income.
variable costing, in order to increase net income.
Multiple Choice Question 50
An unrealistic budget is more likely to result when it
has been developed by all levels of management.
is developed with performance appraisal usages in mind.
has been developed in a top down fashion.
has been developed in a bottom up fashion.
Multiple Choice Question 39
A major element in budgetary control is
the comparison of actual results with planned objectives.
the valuation of inventories.
approval of the budget by the stockholders.
the preparation of long-term plans.
Multiple Choice Question 43
The purpose of the sales budget report is to
control sales commissions.
control selling expenses.
determine whether sales goals are being met.
determine whether income objectives are being met.
Multiple Choice Question 89
The accumulation of accounting data on the basis of the individual manager who has the authority to make day-to-day decisions about activities in an area is called
static reporting.
master budgeting.
flexible accounting.
responsibility accounting
Multiple Choice Question 142
Variance reports are
(a) external financial reports.
(b) SEC financial reports.
(c) internal reports for management.
(d) all of these.
Multiple Choice Question 40
Internal reports that review the actual impact of decisions are prepared by
factory workers.
the controller.
management accountants.
department heads.
Multiple Choice Question 42
The process of evaluating financial data that change under alternative courses of action is called
cost-benefit analysis.
double entry analysis.
contribution margin analysis.
incremental analysis.
Multiple Choice Question 54
Seasons Manufacturing manufactures a product with a unit variable cost of $100 and a unit sales price of $176. Fixed manufacturing costs were $480,000 when 10,000 units were produced and sold. The company has a one-time opportunity to sell an additional 1,000 units at $140 each in a foreign market which would not affect its present sales. If the company has sufficient capacity to produce the additional units, acceptance of the special order would affect net income as follows:
Income would decrease by $8,000.
Income would increase by $8,000.
Income would increase by $140,000.
Income would increase by $40,000.
Multiple Choice Question 70
Carter, Inc. can make 100 units of a necessary component part with the following costs:
Direct Materials $120,000
Direct Labor 20,000
Variable Overhead 60,000
Fixed Overhead 40,000
If Carter can purchase the component externally for $220,000 and only $10,000 of the fixed costs can be avoided, what is the correct make-or-buy decision?
Buy and save $10,000
Make and save $30,000
Make and save $10,000
Buy and save $30,000
Multiple Choice Question 84
A company has a process that results in 15,000 pounds of Product A that can be sold for $16 per pound. An alternative would be to process Product A further at a cost of $200,000 and then sell it for $28 per pound. Should management sell Product A now or should Product A be processed further and then sold? What is the effect of the action?
Sell now, the company will be better off by $200,000.
Process further, the company will be better off by $180,000.
Sell now, the company will be better off by $20,000.
Process further, the company will be better off by $20,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Writea paper that is at least 750 words(papers less than 750 words, will receive a reduction in points) in which you respond to the Broadening Your Perspective 17-2 activity titled Managerial Perspective in Ch. 17 ofAccounting.
MANAGERIAL ANALYSIS
BYP17-2Ideal Manufacturing Company of Sycamore, Illinois, has supported a research and development
(R&D) department that has for many years been the sole contributor to the company s
new farm machinery products. The R&D activity is an overhead cost center that provides services
only to in-house manufacturing departments (four different product lines), all of which produce
agricultural/farm/ranch related machinery products.
The department has never sold its services outside, but because of its long history of success,
larger manufacturers of agricultural products have approached Ideal to hire its R&D department
for special projects. Because the costs of operating the R&D department have been spiraling uncontrollably,
Ideal s management is considering entertaining these outside approaches to absorb
the increasing costs. But, (1) management doesn t have any cost basis for charging R&D services
to outsiders, and (2) it needs to gain control of its R&D costs. Management decides to implement
an activity-based costing system in order to determine the charges for both outsiders and the inhouse
users of the department s services.
R&D activities fall into four pools with the following annual costs.
Market analysis $1,050,000
Product design 2,350,000
Product development 3,600,000
Prototype testing 1,400,000
Activity analysis determines that the appropriate cost drivers and their usage for the four activities
are:
Total
Activities Cost Drivers Estimated Drivers
Market analysis Hours of analysis 15,000 hours
Product design Number of designs 2,500 designs
Product development Number of products 90 products
Prototype testing Number of tests 500 tests
Instructions
(a) Compute the activity-based overhead rate for each activity cost pool.
(b) How much cost would be charged to an in-house manufacturing department that consumed
1,800 hours of market analysis time, was provided 280 designs relating to 10 products, and
requested 92 engineering tests?
(c) How much cost would serve as the basis for pricing an R&D bid with an outside company
on a contract that would consume 800 hours of analysis time, require 178 designs relating to
3 products, and result in 70 engineering tests?
(d) What is the benefit to Ideal Manufacturing of applying activity-based costing to its R&D activity
for both in-house and outside charging purposes?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Writea paper that is at least 750 words(papers less than 750 words, will receive a reduction in points) in which you respond to the Broadening Your Perspective 17-2 activity titled Managerial Perspective in Ch. 17 ofAccounting.
MANAGERIAL ANALYSIS
BYP17-2Ideal Manufacturing Company of Sycamore, Illinois, has supported a research and development
(R&D) department that has for many years been the sole contributor to the company s
new farm machinery products. The R&D activity is an overhead cost center that provides services
only to in-house manufacturing departments (four different product lines), all of which produce
agricultural/farm/ranch related machinery products.
The department has never sold its services outside, but because of its long history of success,
larger manufacturers of agricultural products have approached Ideal to hire its R&D department
for special projects. Because the costs of operating the R&D department have been spiraling uncontrollably,
Ideal s management is considering entertaining these outside approaches to absorb
the increasing costs. But, (1) management doesn t have any cost basis for charging R&D services
to outsiders, and (2) it needs to gain control of its R&D costs. Management decides to implement
an activity-based costing system in order to determine the charges for both outsiders and the inhouse
users of the department s services.
R&D activities fall into four pools with the following annual costs.
Market analysis $1,050,000
Product design 2,350,000
Product development 3,600,000
Prototype testing 1,400,000
Activity analysis determines that the appropriate cost drivers and their usage for the four activities
are:
Total
Activities Cost Drivers Estimated Drivers
Market analysis Hours of analysis 15,000 hours
Product design Number of designs 2,500 designs
Product development Number of products 90 products
Prototype testing Number of tests 500 tests
Instructions
(a) Compute the activity-based overhead rate for each activity cost pool.
(b) How much cost would be charged to an in-house manufacturing department that consumed
1,800 hours of market analysis time, was provided 280 designs relating to 10 products, and
requested 92 engineering tests?
(c) How much cost would serve as the basis for pricing an R&D bid with an outside company
on a contract that would consume 800 hours of analysis time, require 178 designs relating to
3 products, and result in 70 engineering tests?
(d) What is the benefit to Ideal Manufacturing of applying activity-based costing to its R&D activity
for both in-house and outside charging purposes?
broadening your perspective
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Brief Exercise 1-7
Indicate which statement you would examine to find each of the following items: income statement, balance sheet, retained earnings statement, or statement of cash flows.
|
|
Brief Exercise 1-8
Use the basic accounting equation to answer these questions.
(
(b) The total assets of Laven Company are $186,000 and its stockholders equity is $88,900. What is the amount of its total liabilities?
(c) The total assets of Peterman Co. are $939,000 and its liabilities are equal to one fourth of its total assets. What is the amount of Peterman Co. s stockholders equity?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
DQ 01:
What do you find interesting about each of the four financial statements, which include balance sheets, income statements, statements of cash flows, and statements of owners equity?
DQ 02:
Accounting is often called the language of business . Why do you think accounting is called the language of business?
DQ 03:
Why are the financial statements important to internal users such as employees, managers and directors of a company?
DQ 04:
If you are an investor in a company, which statement do you look at first and why?
DQ 05:
How do accountants and accounting help to connect to the numbers? What tools are used to accomplish this?
DQ 06:
The income statement is ongoing meaning that it measures a company s performance over time, (1 month, 3 months, a year): What are some questions that are answered by the income statement?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The proprietorship form of business organization
2. Most business enterprises in the United States are
3. A business organized as a separate legal entity is a
4. Which of the following is the best definition of an internal user of accounting information?
5. Which of the following groups uses accounting information primarily to insure the entity is operating within prescribed rules
6. Which of the following groups uses accounting information to determine whether the company can pay its obligations
7. Which of the following financial statements is divided into major categories of operating, investing, and financing activities?
8. Ending retained earnings for a period is equal to
9. The financial statement that summarizes the changes in retained earnings for a specific period of time is the
10. To show how successfully your business performed during a period of time, you would report its revenues and expense in the
11. Which financial statement is prepared first?
12. An income statement shows
13. Dawson Corporation has the following information available for 2011:
|
|
(in millions)
|
|
Issued common stock
|
$45
|
|
Retired common stock
|
$65
|
|
Paid dividends
|
$75
|
|
Net income
|
$130
|
|
Beginning common stock balance
|
$575
|
|
Beginning retained earnings balance
|
$425
|
Based in this information, what is Dawson’s Common Stock balance at the end of the year?
14. Declaring a cash dividend will
15. At December 31, 2012 Lowery Company had retained earnings of $2,184,000. During 2012 they issued stock for $98,000, and paid dividends of $34,000. Net income for 2012 was $402,000. The retained earnings balance at the beginning of 2012 was:
16. Which of the following organizations issues accounting standards for countries outside the United States?
17. Generally accepted accounting principles
18. The agency of the United States Government that oversees the U.S. financial markets is the
19. What organization issues U.S. accounting standards?
20. Two of the major characteristics that make accounting information useful are
21. If accounting information has relevance, it is useful in making predictions about
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 41
The proprietorship form of business organization
Question 45
Most business enterprises in the United States are
Question 46
A business organized as a separate legal entity is a
Question 57
Which of the following is the best definition of an internal user of accounting information?
Question 63
Which of the following groups uses accounting information primarily to insure the entity is operating within prescribed rules?
Question 65
Which of the following groups uses accounting information to determine whether the company can pay its obligations?
Question 99
Which of the following financial statements is divided into major categories of operating, investing, and financing activities?
Question 101
Ending retained earnings for a period is equal to:
|
|
Beginning retained earnings + Net income + Dividends
|
|
|
Beginning retained earnings Net income Dividends
|
|
|
Beginning retained earnings + Net income Dividends
|
|
|
Beginning retained earnings Net income + Dividends
|
Question 105
The financial statement that summarizes the changes in retained earnings for a specific period of time is the
|
|
retained earnings statement.
|
Question 106
To show how successfully your business performed during a period of time, you would report its revenues and expense in the
Question 116
Which financial statement is prepared first?
Question 117
An income statement shows
Question 103
Dawson Corporation has the following information available for 2011:
|
|
(in millions)
|
|
Issued common stock
|
$45
|
|
Retired common stock
|
$65
|
|
Paid dividends
|
$75
|
|
Net income
|
$130
|
|
Beginning common stock balance
|
$575
|
|
Beginning retained earnings balance
|
$425
|
Based in this information, what is Dawson’s Common Stock balance at the end of the year?
Question 109
Declaring a cash dividend will
Question 113
At December 31, 2012 Lowery Company had retained earnings of $2,184,000. During 2012 they issued stock for $98,000, and paid dividends of $34,000. Net income for 2012 was $402,000. The retained earnings balance at the beginning of 2012 was:
Question 158
Which of the following organizations issues accounting standards for countries outside the United States?
Question 159
Generally accepted accounting principles
|
Question 160
The agency of the United States government that oversees the U.S. financial markets is the
|
|
Question 161
What organization issues U.S. accounting standards?
Question 164
Two of the major characteristics that make accounting information useful are
Question 171
If accounting information has relevance, it is useful in making predictions about
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. 1. The proprietorship form of business organization
2. Most business enterprises in the United States are
3. A business organized as a separate legal entity is a
4. Which of the following is the best definition of an internal user of accounting information?
5. Which of the following groups uses accounting information primarily to insure the entity is operating within prescribed rules?
6. Which of the following groups uses accounting information to determine whether the company can pay its obligations?
7. Which of the following financial statements is divided into major categories of operating, investing, and financing activities?
8. Ending retained earnings for a period is equal to:
9. The financial statement that summarizes the changes in retained earnings for a specific period of time is the
10. To show how successfully your business performed during a period of time, you would report its revenues and expense in the
11. Which financial statement is prepared first?
12. An income statement shows
13. Dawson Corporation has the following information available for 2011:
|
|
(in millions)
|
|
Issued common stock
|
$45
|
|
Retired common stock
|
$65
|
|
Paid dividends
|
$75
|
|
Net income
|
$130
|
|
Beginning common stock balance
|
$575
|
|
Beginning retained earnings balance
|
$425
|
Based in this information, what is Dawson’s Common Stock balance at the end of the year?
14. Declaring a cash dividend will
15. At December 31, 2012 Lowery Company had retained earnings of $2,184,000. During 2012 they issued stock for $98,000, and paid dividends of $34,000. Net income for 2012 was $402,000. The retained earnings balance at the beginning of 2012 was:
16. Which of the following organizations issues accounting standards for countries outside the United States?
17. Generally accepted accounting principles
18. The agency of the United States Government that oversees the U.S. financial markets is the
19. What organization issues U.S. accounting standards?
20. Two of the major characteristics that make accounting information useful are
21. If accounting information has relevance, it is useful in making predictions about
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
DQ 01:
What are the main objectives of ratio analysis and why is this important to external users of the financial statements, such as investors.
DQ 02:
What are the main objectives of comparative analysis? Why is it important for external users of financial statements to perform this type of analysis on financial statements?
DQ 03:
As a corporate controller, I often use financial ratios in comparative analysis? What is comparative analysis? Why is it important and how is it useful to managers and internal users of financial statements?
DQ 04:
Why are liquidity ratios important in analyzing a company s financial health? What does it mean if a company cannot meet its financial obligations? How does this affect a company and its shareholders?
DQ 05:
If a company shows net income, does that mean they are a healthy company financially? Why or why not?
DQ 06:
How does ratio and/or comparative analysis assist companies whose profits are tied to a season?
Related Pr
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Multiple Choice Question 115
The relationship between current assets and current liabilities is important in evaluating a company’s
Multiple Choice Question 116
Which of the following is a measure of liquidity?
|
Multiple Choice Question 117
Current assets divided by current liabilities is known as the
|
|
|
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 88
Danner Corporation reported net sales of $600,000, $680,000, and $800,000 in the years 2011, 2012, and 2013, respectively. If 2011 is the base year, what percentage do 2013 sales represent of the base?
|
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 89
In analyzing financial statements, horizontal analysis is a
|
Multiple Choice Question 102
Assume the following cost of goods sold data for a company:
|
2013
|
$1,500,000
|
|
2012
|
1,200,000
|
|
2011
|
1,000,000
|
If 2011 is the base year, what is the percentage increase in cost of goods sold from 2011 to 2013?
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 105
Comparisons of data within a company are an example of the following comparative basis:
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 123
The following schedule is a display of what type of analysis?
|
|
Amount
|
Percent
|
|
Current assets
|
$100,000
|
25%
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
300,000
|
75%
|
|
Total assets
|
$400,000
|
100%
|
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 129
A common measure of profitability is the
Multiple Choice Question 134
Which one of the following would be considered a long-term solvency ratio?
Multiple Choice Question 137
The current ratio is
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 121
Richards, Inc. has the following income statement (in millions):
|
RICHARDS, INC.
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
For the Year Ended December 31, 2012
|
|
Net Sales
|
$180
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
60
|
|
Gross Profit
|
120
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
75
|
|
Net Income
|
$ 45
|
Using vertical analysis, what percentage is assigned to net income?
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The relationship between current assets and current liabilities is important in evaluating a company’s
2. Which of the following is a measure of liquidity?
3. Current assets divided by current liabilities is known as the
4. Danner Corporation reported net sales of $600,000, $680,000, and $800,000 in the years 2011, 2012, and 2013, respectively. If 2011 is the base year, what percentage do 2013 sales represent of the base?
5. In analyzing financial statements, horizontal analysis is a
6. Comparative balance sheets
7. Assume the following cost of goods sold data for a company:
|
2013
|
$1,500,000
|
|
2012
|
1,200,000
|
|
2011
|
1,000,000
|
If 2011 is the base year, what is the percentage increase in cost of goods sold from 2011 to 2013?
8. Comparisons of data within a company are an example of the following comparative basis:
9. The following schedule is a display of what type of analysis?
|
|
Amount
|
Percent
|
|
Current assets
|
$100,000
|
25%
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
300,000
|
75%
|
|
Total assets
|
$400,000
|
100%
|
10. A common measure of profitability is the
11. Which one of the following would be considered a long-term solvency ratio?
12. The current ratio is
13. Richards, Inc. has the following income statement (in millions):
|
RICHARDS, INC.
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
For the Year Ended December 31, 2012
|
|
Net Sales
|
$180
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
60
|
|
Gross Profit
|
120
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
75
|
|
Net Income
|
$ 45
|
Using vertical analysis, what percentage is assigned to net income?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.The relationship between current assets and current liabilities is important in evaluating a company’s
2.Which of the following is a measure of liquidity?
3.Current assets divided by current liabilities is known as the
4.Danner Corporation reported net sales of $600,000, $680,000, and $800,000 in the years 2011, 2012, and 2013, respectively. If 2011 is the base year, what percentage do 2013 sales represent of the base?
5.In analyzing financial statements, horizontal analysis is a
6.Comparative balance sheets
7.Assume the following cost of goods sold data for a company:
|
2013
|
$1,500,000
|
|
2012
|
1,200,000
|
|
2011
|
1,000,000
|
If 2011 is the base year, what is the percentage increase in cost of goods sold from 2011 to 2013?
8.Comparisons of data within a company are an example of the following comparative basis:
9.The following schedule is a display of what type of analysis?
|
|
Amount
|
Percent
|
|
Current assets
|
$100,000
|
25%
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
300,000
|
75%
|
|
Total assets
|
$400,000
|
100%
|
10.A common measure of profitability is the
11.Which one of the following would be considered a long-term solvency ratio?
12.The current ratio is
13.Richards, Inc. has the following income statement (in millions):
|
RICHARDS, INC.
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
For the Year Ended December 31, 2012
|
|
Net Sales
|
$180
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
60
|
|
Gross Profit
|
120
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
75
|
|
Net Income
|
$ 45
|
Using vertical analysis, what percentage is assigned to net income?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Alternative Costing Methods
The text presents job and processing costing systems as virtual polar extremes, there are many situations where it may be best for a company to use a hybrid system that combines attributes of both systems. Describe such a situation and discuss how the hybrid system may be better than either pure job or pure process systems.
Think Twice
Assume you own a business that makes two complementary products for which you allocated manufacturing overhead proportionally. A competitor is trying to undercut your price for one of the products. How might ABC costing help you better compete with this pending threat?
Activity Base Costing-
How do managers cost products or services using ABC systems?
When should managers consider using an ABC costing system? How should they decide to adopt this method?
Alternative Costing Methods
I would like you all to select a costing method: process, job, or activity based.
Describe the nature of your chosen method. What types of organizations should choose that method? How is this method different from the costing methods you did not choose?
I have implemented a job costing system in my company. If you were my corporate controller, how would you implement a job-costing system?
Why is process costing a better costing method for certain industries? What would happen if they used a job costing system?
Can we explain three major source documents and how they are used in job costing systems? Why are these source documents needed?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1
Using these data from the comparative balance sheet of Rosalez Company, perform horizontal analysis.
Question 2
Using these data from the comparative balance sheet of Rosalez Company, perform vertical analysis.
Question 3
Vertical analysis (common-size) percentages for Vallejo Company s sales, cost of goods sold, and expenses are listed here.
Question 4
Horizontal analysis (trend analysis) percentages for Spartan Company s sales, cost of goods sold, and expenses are listed here.
Question 5
These selected condensed data are taken from recent balance sheets of Bob Evans Farms (in thousands).
Question 6
Staples, Inc. is one of the largest suppliers of office products in the United States. It had net income of $738.7 million and sales of $24,275.5 million in 2009. Its total assets were $13,073.1 million at the beginning of the year and $13,717.3 million at the end of the year. What is Staples, Inc. s asset turnover ratio and profit margin ratio (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25 or 2.05%.)
Question 7
Selected data taken from a recent year s financial statements of trading card company Topps Company, Inc. are as follows (in millions).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acme Manufacturing Company of Portland, Oregon has a Research & Development department that currently provides services to in-house manufacturing departments. Other manufacuturers have expressed interested in using Acme’s R&D department for special projects. Management has decided to conduct an activity-based costing system in order to determine charges for both outside and in-house users of the department’s services.
| R&D activities fall into four pools with the following annual costs: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Market Analysis |
|
10,50,000 |
|
|
|
Product Design |
|
23,50,000 |
|
|
|
Product Development |
|
36,00,000 |
|
|
|
Prototype Testing |
|
14,00,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Activity analysis determines that the appropriate cost drivers and their usage for the four activities are: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Activities |
|
Cost Drivers |
|
Total Estimated Drivers |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Market Analysis |
|
Hours of analysis |
|
1500 hours |
|
Product Design |
|
Number of designs |
|
2500 designs |
|
Product Development |
|
Number of products |
|
90 products |
|
Prototype Testing |
|
Number of tests |
|
500 tests |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Multiple Choice Question 39
A variable cost is a cost that
Multiple Choice Question 42
An increase in the level of activity will have the following effects on unit costs for variable and fixed costs:
|
Unit Variable Cost
|
|
Unit Fixed Cost
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 43
A fixed cost is a cost which
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 86
Hollis Industries produces flash drives for computers, which it sells for $20 each. Each flash drive costs $14 of variable costs to make. During April, 1,000 drives were sold. Fixed costs for March were $2 per unit for a total of $1,000 for the month. How much is the contribution margin ratio?
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 87
Contribution margin
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 100
The equation which reflects a CVP income statement is
|
|
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 104
A company sells a product which has a unit sales price of $5, unit variable cost of $3 and total fixed costs of $150,000. The number of units the company must sell to break even is
|
|
|
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 93
Only direct materials, direct labor, and variable manufacturing overhead costs are considered product costs when using
|
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 96
Under absorption costing and variable costing, how are fixed manufacturing costs treated?
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 121
Management may be tempted to overproduce when using
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
DQ 01:
Please post a response only between 200 300 words to the following discussion question
What is a flexible budget? What types of organizations may use flexible budgets? Why are flexible budgets useful?
Next, imagine you are preparing a business s cash budget, which involves determining the amount of cash to keep on hand. How might the nature of the business affect your decision? Provide specific examples in your response
DQ 02:
Please post a response between 200 300 words to the following discussion question.
What are variances and why do these occur? When should one investigate budget variances? What factors would you consider when deciding whether to investigate a variance? As a manager, how you would you handle variances? Should managers be punished or rewarded depending on the variances in their departments?
Budgets-
DQ 03:
Imagine you are preparing a business s cash budget, which involves determining the amount of cash to keep on hand. How might the nature of the business affect your decision? Provide specific examples in your response.
Responsibility Reports and Standard Cost
DQ 04:
Review different budgets/reports used in your organization or in an organization with which you are familiar. What are the uses of the types of budgets you reviewed?
DQ 05:
There are some problems that can and may arise with managers and budgets. Can we explain and describe the cycle of bias by lower-level managers and bias-adjustment by upper-level managers that can spiral out of control and result in meaningless budgets?
DQ 06:
A budget is a very useful and important tool for any business. A budget is even important in our personal lives assisting us with our expenses. As a controller, I feel like I am constantly in budget mode as everything revolves around the corporate budget. As you begin to read the week four materials on budgets and the budgeting process, I am wondering your thoughts on the following: Can a budget contribute to good management?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 547 Final Exam / 100% correct answers
1) A family with $45,000 in assets and $22,000 of liabilities would have a net worth of
A. $67,000
B. $45,000
C. $22,000
D. $23,000
2) A budget deficit would result when a person’s or family’s
A. assets exceed liabilities
B. net worth decreases
C. actual expenses are greater than planned expenses
D. actual expenses are less than planned expenses
3) The payment items that should be budgeted first are
A. unplanned living expenses
B. fixed expenses
C. investment funds
D. variable expenses
4) Which of the following statements regarding tax credits is true?
A. None of the answer choices are correct.
B. Tax credits reduce taxable income dollar for dollar.
C. Tax credits reduce taxes payable dollar for dollar.
D. Tax credits provide a greater tax benefit the greater the taxpayer’s marginal tax rate.
5) The tax base for an individual tax return is
A. adjusted gross income minus from AGI deductions
B. realized income from whatever source derived
C. adjusted gross income
D. gross income
6) Which of the following statements regarding exemptions is correct?
A. Taxpayers subtract exemption deductions from adjusted gross income to determine taxable income.
B. Personal exemptions are more valuable than dependency exemptions.
C. Exemption amounts are considered to be for AGI deductions.
D. Taxpayers filing a married filing jointly return are limited to two exemptions on their tax returns.
7) Which of the following has the lowest authoritative weight?
A. Interpretive regulation
B. Legislative regulation
C. Revenue ruling
D. Private letter ruling
8) Which of the following has the highest authoritative weight?
A. Tax article
B. Text book
C. Revenue ruling
D. Private letter ruling
9) Jaime recently found a “favorable” trial level court opinion directly on point for her tax question. Which trial level court would he prefer to have issued the opinion?
A. Divorce Court
B. District Court
C. Tax Court
D. Circuit Court
10) Sam saved diligently for his college education by putting part of his pay into U.S. Series EE saving bonds. Sam purchased the bonds for $6,500, and this year he redeemed the bonds for $7,200. He has no other income this year. What amount must Sam include in his gross income?
A. $700 unless Sam uses the proceeds to pay for his college tuition and fees
B. $6,500
C. $7,200
D. A maximum of $350 if Sam uses the proceeds to pay for his college tuition and fees
11) Jill currently lives in the suburbs and commutes 25 miles to her office in downtown Freeport. She is considering quitting her current job to look for new employment in the downtown. Which of the following statements best describes how Jill can satisfy the distance test for deducting moving expenses if she accepts a new job in downtown Freeport?
A. Jill cannot satisfy the distance test if she accepts a job in downtown Freeport.
B. Jill must move 25 miles east from downtown Freeport.
C. Jill must move at least 25 miles further away from downtown Freeport.
D. Jill need not move her residence because she is starting a new job.
12) Congress allows self-employed taxpayers to deduct the cost of health insurance above the line (for AGI) because
A. health insurance premiums cannot be deducted otherwise
B. self-employed taxpayers need an alternate mechanism for reducing the cost of health care
C. employers are allowed to deduct social security (FICA) taxes as a business expense
D. this deduction provides a measure of equity between employees and the self-employed
13) Jim was in an auto accident this year. Jim paid $2,450 to repair his car after the accident, and his insurance only reimbursed him $400. Jim bought his car several years ago for $15,000. What casualty loss deduction from this accident can Jim combine with his other casualty losses in computing his itemized deductions?
A. $12,550
B. $2,050
C. $2,450
D. $1,550
14) Rhianna and Jay are married filing jointly in 2009. They have six children for whom they may claim the child tax credit. Their AGI was $123,440. What amount of child tax credit may they claim on their 2009 tax return?
A. $4,000
B. $6,000
C. $5,300
D. $12,000
15) Which of the following is a miscellaneous itemized deduction that is not subject to the 2 percent of AGI floor?
A. Tax preparation fees
B. Fees for investment advice
C. Gambling losses to the extent of gambling winnings
D. Employee business expenses
16) Beth’s business purchased only one asset during the current year. It placed in service machinery (7-year property) on December 1 with a basis of $50,000. Calculate the maximum depreciation expense (ignoring Section 179 or bonus expensing):
A. $10,000
B. $2,500
C. $1,785
D. $7,145
17) Bateman Corporation sold an office building that it used in its business for $800,000. Bateman bought the building ten years ago for $600,000 and has claimed $200,000 of depreciation expense. What is the amount and character of Bateman’s gain or loss?
A. $400,000 capital gain
B. $200,000 ordinary and $200,000 Section 1231 gain
C. $40,000 ordinary and $360,000 Section 1231 gain
D. $400,000 ordinary gain
18) Foreaker LLC sold a piece of land that it uses in its business for $52,000. Foreaker bought the land two years ago for $42,500. What is the character of Foreaker’s gain?
A. $9,500 Section 1250
B. $9,500 Section 1231
C. $9,500 Section 1221
D. $9,500 Section 1245
19) Which of the following would be considered passive income?
A. Capital gains from sale of mutual funds
B. Salary for part-time job
C. Rental real estate income
D. Dividends
20) Generally, which of the following does not correctly categorize the type of income?
A. Capital losses passive income/loss
B. Dividends portfolio income/loss
C. Rental real estate passive income/loss
D. Salary active income/loss
21) A taxpayer would not be considered a material participant if he met which one of these tests?
A. Participates in the activity for at least 500 hours a year
B. Participates more than 50 hours a year and participation is not less than any other participants for the year
C. Materially participates in the activity for any five of the preceding ten years
D. Participates on a regular, continuous, and substantial basis
22) What is the correct order of the loss limitation rules?
A. Tax basis, passive loss limits, at-risk amount
B. Passive loss limits, at-risk amount, tax basis
C. Tax basis, at-risk amount, passive loss limits
D. at-risk amount, tax basis, passive loss limits
23) Dan recently purchased a partnership interest in XYZ, Limited Partnership for $6,000. His share of debt in the partnership is $2,500, but he is not personally responsible for paying back the debt if the partnership cannot pay. Dan’s share of XYZ, LP’s loss for the year is $3,000. In addition, Dan reported $5,000 in long-term capital gains from the sale of a stock and $3,000 of income from another real estate partnership. What is Dan’s tax basis in XYZ, LP?
A. $16,500
B. $11,500
C. $6,000
D. $8,500
24) What happens when a taxpayer experiences a net loss from a rental home?
A. If the taxpayer is not allowed to deduct the loss due to the passive activity limitations, the loss is suspended and carried forward until the taxpayer generates passive income or until the taxpayer sells the property.
B. If the taxpayer is not an active participant in the rental, the taxpayer may be allowed to deduct the loss even if the taxpayer does not have any sources of passive income.
C. The taxpayer will not be allowed to deduct the loss under any circumstance if the taxpayer does not have passive income from other sources.
D. The loss is fully deductible against the taxpayer’s ordinary income, no matter the circumstances.
25) What document must LLCs file with the state to organize their business?
A. Partnership agreement
B. Articles of organization
C. Articles of incorporation
D. Certificate of LLC
26) What tax year-end must unincorporated entities with only one owner adopt?
A. The entity may adopt any year-end except for a calendar year-end.
B. The entity must adopt a calendar year-end.
C. The entity is free to adopt any tax year-end.
D. The entity must adopt the same year-end as its owner.
27) Which legal entity provides the least flexible legal arrangement for owners?
A. Sole Proprietorship
B. Partnership
C. Corporation
D. LLC
28) Which of the following requirements do not have to be met in a Section 351 transaction?
A. All transfers of property to a corporation must be made simultaneously to qualify for deferral.
B. Only property transferred to a corporation is eligible for deferral.
C. Each transferor of property must receive stock equal to at least 80 percent of the fair market value of the property transferred.
D. In the aggregate, the transferors of property to the corporation must collectively control the corporation immediately after the transfers.
29) Inez transfers property with a tax basis of $200 and a fair market value of $300 to a corporation in exchange for stock with a fair market value of $250 in a transaction that qualifies for deferral under Section 351. The corporation assumed a liability of $50 on the property transferred. What is the corporation’s tax basis in the property received in the exchange?
A. $300
B. $150
C. $200
D. $250
30) Camille transfers property with a tax basis of $800 and a fair market value of $1,200 to a corporation in exchange for stock with a fair market value of $850 and $350 in a transaction that qualifies for deferral under Section 351. Camille also incurred selling expenses of $100. What is the amount realized by Camille in the exchange?
A. $750
B. $1,200
C. $1,100
D. $850
31) BTW Corporation has taxable income in the current year that can be offset with an NOL from a previous year. What is the nature of the book-tax difference created by the net operating loss deduction in the current year?
A. Temporary; unfavorable
B. Permanent; favorable
C. Permanent; unfavorable
D. Temporary; favorable
32) A calendar-year corporation has negative current E&P of $(500) and accumulated positive E&P of $1,000. The corporation makes a $600 distribution to its sole shareholder. Which of the following statements is true?
A. Up to $600 of the distribution could be a dividend depending on the balance in accumulated earnings and profits on the date of the distribution.
B. $500 of the distribution will be a dividend because total earnings and profits is $500.
C. $0 of the distribution will be a dividend because current earnings and profits is negative.
D. $600 of the distribution will be a dividend because accumulated earnings and profits is $1,000.
33) Studios reported a net capital loss of $30,000 in year 5. It reported net capital gains of $14,000 in year 4 and $27,000 in year 6. What is the amount and nature of the book-tax difference in year 6 related to the net capital carryover?
A. $16,000 favorable
B. $11,000 unfavorable
C. $11,000 favorable
D. $16,000 unfavorable
34) Tammy owns 100 shares in Star Struck Corporation. The other 100 shares are owned by her husband Tommy. Which of the following statements is true?
A. A stock redemption that completely terminates Tammy’s direct interest in a corporation will be treated as a dividend if Tammy waives the family attribution rules and files a “triple i” agreement with the IRS.
B. A stock redemption that completely terminates Tammy’s direct interest in a corporation will be treated as an exchange for tax purposes.
C. A stock redemption that completely terminates Tammy’s direct interest in a corporation will be treated as a dividend for tax purposes.
D. A stock redemption that completely terminates Tammy’s direct interest in a corporation will be treated as an exchange if Tammy waives the family attribution rules and files a “triple i” agreement with the IRS.
35) El Toro Corporation declared a common stock dividend to all shareholders of record on June 30, 2010. Shareholders will receive 1 share of El Toro stock for each 2 shares of stock they already own. Raoul owns 300 shares of El Toro stock with a tax basis of $60 per share. The fair market value of the El Toro stock was $100 per share on June 30, 2010. What are the tax consequences of the stock dividend to Raoul?
A. $15,000 dividend and a tax basis in the new stock of $100 per share
B. $0 dividend income and a tax basis in the new stock of $100 per share
C. $0 dividend income and a tax basis in the new stock of $60 per share
D. $0 dividend income and a tax basis in the new stock of $20 per share
36) Comet Company is owned equally by Pat and his sister Pam, each of whom hold 100 shares in the company. Pam wants to reduce her ownership in the company, and it was decided that the company will redeem 50 of her shares for $1,000 per share on December 31, 2010. Pam’s income tax basis in each share is $500. Comet has total E&P of $250,000. What are the tax consequences to Pam as a result of the stock redemption?
A. $50,000 dividend and a tax basis in each of her remaining shares of $50
B. $25,000 capital gain and a tax basis in each of her remaining shares of $500
C. $25,000 capital gain and a tax basis in each of her remaining shares of $100
D. $50,000 dividend and a tax basis in each of her remaining shares of $100
37) Under which of the following circumstances will a partner recognize a loss from an operating distribution?
A. A partner will recognize a loss from an operating distribution when the partnership distributes money in an amount that is greater than the partner’s basis in the partnership interest.
B. A partner will never recognize a loss from an operating distribution.
C. A partner will recognize a loss from an operating distribution when the partnership distributes property other than money with an inside basis greater than the partner’s basis in the partnership interest.
D. A partner will recognize a loss from an operating distribution when the partnership distributes money in an amount that is less than the partner’s basis in the partnership interest.
38) Which of the following statements regarding disproportionate distributions is false?
A. Disproportionate distributions will only occur in liquidating distributions.
B. A disproportionate distribution occurs when a partner receives more than his or her proportionate share of the partnership’s hot assets.
C. A disproportionate distribution occurs when a partner receives less than his or her proportionate share of the partnership’s hot assets.
D. The tax provisions related to disproportionate distributions attempt to preserve the partners’ share of ordinary income potential.
39) Tone Loc and 89 of his biggest fans formed an S corporation, 2hit, Inc., as the original ninety shareholders. Tone then transferred some of his stock to his grandfather, four of Tone’s cousins, five of Tone’s children, three of Tone’s grandchildren, and 2 close friends. For the S corporation shareholder limit rules, how many shareholders does 2hit, Inc. have?
A. 97
B. 90
C. 92
D. 95
40) Clampett, Inc. (an S corporation) previously operated as a C corporation. Distributions from Clampett, Inc. are deemed to be paid in the following order:
A. Shareholder’s remaining stock basis, prior C corporation earnings and profit, the AAA account
B. Prior C corporation earnings and profit, the AAA account, shareholder’s remaining stock basis
C. Shareholder’s remaining stock basis, the AAA account, prior C corporation earnings and profit
D. The AAA account, prior C corporation earnings and profit, shareholder’s remaining stock basis
41) Clampett, Inc. has been an S corporation since its inception. On July 15, 2011, Clampett, Inc. distributed $50,000 to J.D. His basis in his Clampett, Inc. stock on January 1, 2011, was $45,000. For 2011, J.D. was allocated $10,000 of ordinary income from Clampett, Inc. and no separately stated items. What is the amount of income J.D. recognizes related to Clampett, Inc. in 2011?
A. $60,000
B. $20,000
C. $50,000
D. $10,000
42) Clampett, Inc. has been an S corporation since its inception. On July 15, 2011, Clampett, Inc. distributed $50,000 to J.D. His basis in his Clampett, Inc. stock on January 1, 2011, was $45,000. For 2011, J.D. was allocated $10,000 of ordinary income from Clampett, Inc. and no separately stated items. What is J.D.’s basis in his Clampett, Inc. stock after all transactions in 2011?
A. $40,000
B. $20,000
C. $30,000
D. $5,000
43) Erica and Brett decide to form their new motorcycle business as an LLC. Each will receive an equal profits (loss) interest by contributing cash, property, or both. In addition to the members’ contributions, their LLC will obtain a $50,000 nonrecourse loan from First Bank at the time it is formed. Brett contributes cash of $5,000 and a building he bought as a storefront for the motorcycles. The building has an FMV of $45,000, an adjusted basis of $30,000, and is secured by a $35,000 nonrecourse mortgage that the business LLC will assume. What is Brett’s outside tax basis in his LLC interest?
A. $37,500
B. $42,000
C. $40,000
D. $45,000
44) Gerald received a 33% capital and profit (loss) interest in XYZ Limited Partnership (LP). In exchange for this interest, Gerald contributed a building with an FMV of $30,000. His adjusted basis in the building was $15,000. In addition, the building was encumbered with a $9,000 nonrecourse mortgage that XYZ, LP assumed at the time the property was contributed. What is Gerald’s outside basis immediately after his contribution?
A. $6,000
B. $21,000
C. $9,000
D. $24,000
45) Sue and Andrew form SA general partnership. Each person receives an equal interest in the newly created partnership. Sue contributes $10,000 of cash and land with a FMV of $55,000. Her basis in the land is $20,000. Andrew contributes equipment with a FMV of $12,000 and a building with a FMV of $33,000. His basis in the equipment is $8,000, and his basis in the building is $20,000. How much gain must the SA general partnership recognize on the transfer of these assets from Sue and Andrew?
A. $0
B. $48,000
C. $4,000
D. $52,000
46) Vanessa contributed $20,000 of cash and land with a fair market value of $100,000 and an adjusted basis of $40,000 to Cook, Inc. (an S corporation) when it was formed. The land was encumbered by a $30,000 mortgage executed two years before. What is Vanessa’s tax basis in Cook, Inc. after formation?
A. $20,000
B. $60,000
C. $30,000
D. $80,000
47) Frank and Bob are equal members in Soxy Socks, LLC. When forming the LLC, Frank contributed $50,000 in cash and $50,000 worth of equipment. Frank’s adjusted basis in the equipment was $35,000. Bob contributed $50,000 in cash and $50,000 worth of land. Bob’s adjusted basis in the land was $30,000. On 3/15/04, Soxy Socks sells the land Bob contributed for $60,000. How much gain (loss) related to this transaction will Bob report on his X4 return?
A. $10,000
B. $25,000
C. $15,000
D. $35,000
48) What form does a partnership use when filing an annual informational return?
A. Form 1040
B. Form 1065
C. Form 1041
D. Form 1120
49) At his death, Trevor had a probate estate consisting of $4 million of property. Which of the following is a true statement about Trevor’s estate or estate tax?
A. Trevor must have a taxable estate of at least $4 million.
B. Trevor must have a gross estate of at least $4 million.
C. Trevor must have estate tax base (cumulative taxable transfers) of at least $4 million.
D. Trevor must have an adjusted gross estate of at least $4 million.
50) The estate and gift taxes share several common features. Which of the following characteristics are common to both the estate and gift taxes?
A. A unified credit and a marital deduction
B. A charitable deduction and the amount of the exemption equivalent
C. A gift-skipping election and a deduction for income taxes paid by the fiduciary
D. A charitable deduction and an annual exclusion
51) The estate and gift taxes share several common features. Which of the following characteristics are common to both the estate and gift taxes?
A. The same amount of unified credit
B. A charitable deduction and a marital deduction
C. A gift-skipping election and a charitable deduction
D. An annual exclusion
52) Which of the following is a completed taxable gift?
A. $20,000 in cash contributed to the committee to reelect Senator Cone.
B. $55,000 in cash transferred to a former spouse under a written property settlement shortly after a divorce.
C. $18,000 in cash given to a needy student to pay for college tuition.
D. $15,000 in cash given to Valley Hospital for the care of a neighbor who was in an auto accident.
53) Jonathan transferred $90,000 of cash to a trust this year for the benefit of Hannah, age 10. The trustee has the discretion to distribute income or corpus (principal) for Hannah’s benefit and is required to distribute all assets to Hannah (or her estate) not later than Hannah’s 21st birthday. What is the amount of the taxable gift?
A. $90,000
B. Zero There is no completed gift until the trustee makes a distribution from the trust.
C. $64,000
D. $77,000
54) This year Don and his son purchased real estate for an investment. The price of the property was $500,000, and the title named Don and his son as joint tenants with the right of survivorship. Don provided $320,000 of the purchase price, and his son provided the remaining $180,000. Has Don made a taxable gift and, if so, in what amount?
A. Don has made a taxable gift of $237,000.
B. Don has made a taxable gift of $57,000.
C. Don has made a taxable gift of $22,000.
D. Don has made a taxable gift of $70,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) A family with $45,000 in assets and $22,000 of liabilities would have a net worth of
2) A budget deficit would result when a person’s or family’s
3) The payment items that should be budgeted first are
4) Which of the following statements regarding tax credits is true?
5) The tax base for an individual tax return is
6) Which of the following statements regarding exemptions is correct?
7) Which of the following has the lowest authoritative weight?
8) Which of the following has the highest authoritative weight?
9) Jaime recently found a “favorable” trial level court opinion directly on point for her tax question. Which trial level court would he prefer to have issued the opinion?
10) Sam saved diligently for his college education by putting part of his pay into U.S. Series EE saving bonds. Sam purchased the bonds for $6,500, and this year he redeemed the bonds for $7,200. He has no other income this year. What amount must Sam include in his gross income?
11) Jill currently lives in the suburbs and commutes 25 miles to her office in downtown Freeport. She is considering quitting her current job to look for new employment in the downtown. Which of the following statements best describes how Jill can satisfy the distance test for deducting moving expenses if she accepts a new job in downtown Freeport?
12) Congress allows self-employed taxpayers to deduct the cost of health insurance above the line (for AGI) because
13) Jim was in an auto accident this year. Jim paid $2,450 to repair his car after the accident, and his insurance only reimbursed him $400. Jim bought his car several years ago for $15,000. What casualty loss deduction from this accident can Jim combine with his other casualty losses in computing his itemized deductions?
14) Rhianna and Jay are married filing jointly in 2009. They have six children for whom they may claim the child tax credit. Their AGI was $123,440. What amount of child tax credit may they claim on their 2009 tax return?
15) Which of the following is a miscellaneous itemized deduction that is not subject to the 2 percent of AGI floor?
16) Beth’s business purchased only one asset during the current year. It placed in service machinery (7-year property) on December 1 with a basis of $50,000. Calculate the maximum depreciation expense (ignoring Section 179 or bonus expensing):
17) Bateman Corporation sold an office building that it used in its business for $800,000. Bateman bought the building ten years ago for $600,000 and has claimed $200,000 of depreciation expense. What is the amount and character of Bateman’s gain or loss?
18) Foreaker LLC sold a piece of land that it uses in its business for $52,000. Foreaker bought the land two years ago for $42,500. What is the character of Foreaker’s gain?
19) Which of the following would be considered passive income?
20) Generally, which of the following does not correctly categorize the type of income?
21) A taxpayer would not be considered a material participant if he met which one of these tests?
22) What is the correct order of the loss limitation rules?
23) Dan recently purchased a partnership interest in XYZ, Limited Partnership for $6,000. His share of debt in the partnership is $2,500, but he is not personally responsible for paying back the debt if the partnership cannot pay. Dan’s share of XYZ, LP’s loss for the year is $3,000. In addition, Dan reported $5,000 in long-term capital gains from the sale of a stock and $3,000 of income from another real estate partnership. What is Dan’s tax basis in XYZ, LP?
24) What happens when a taxpayer experiences a net loss from a rental home?
25) What document must LLCs file with the state to organize their business?
26) What tax year-end must unincorporated entities with only one owner adopt?
27) Which legal entity provides the least flexible legal arrangement for owners?
28) Which of the following requirements do not have to be met in a Section 351 transaction?
29) Inez transfers property with a tax basis of $200 and a fair market value of $300 to a corporation in exchange for stock with a fair market value of $250 in a transaction that qualifies for deferral under Section 351. The corporation assumed a liability of $50 on the property transferred. What is the corporation’s tax basis in the property received in the exchange?
30) Camille transfers property with a tax basis of $800 and a fair market value of $1,200 to a corporation in exchange for stock with a fair market value of $850 and $350 in a transaction that qualifies for deferral under Section 351. Camille also incurred selling expenses of $100. What is the amount realized by Camille in the exchange?
31) BTW Corporation has taxable income in the current year that can be offset with an NOL from a previous year. What is the nature of the book-tax difference created by the net operating loss deduction in the current year?
32) A calendar-year corporation has negative current E&P of $(500) and accumulated positive E&P of $1,000. The corporation makes a $600 distribution to its sole shareholder. Which of the following statements is true?
33) Studios reported a net capital loss of $30,000 in year 5. It reported net capital gains of $14,000 in year 4 and $27,000 in year 6. What is the amount and nature of the book-tax difference in year 6 related to the net capital carryover?
34) Tammy owns 100 shares in Star Struck Corporation. The other 100 shares are owned by her husband Tommy. Which of the following statements is true?
35) El Toro Corporation declared a common stock dividend to all shareholders of record on June 30, 2010. Shareholders will receive 1 share of El Toro stock for each 2 shares of stock they already own. Raoul owns 300 shares of El Toro stock with a tax basis of $60 per share. The fair market value of the El Toro stock was $100 per share on June 30, 2010. What are the tax consequences of the stock dividend to Raoul?
36) Comet Company is owned equally by Pat and his sister Pam, each of whom hold 100 shares in the company. Pam wants to reduce her ownership in the company, and it was decided that the company will redeem 50 of her shares for $1,000 per share on December 31, 2010. Pam’s income tax basis in each share is $500. Comet has total E&P of $250,000. What are the tax consequences to Pam as a result of the stock redemption?
37) Under which of the following circumstances will a partner recognize a loss from an operating distribution?
38) Which of the following statements regarding disproportionate distributions is false?
39) Tone Loc and 89 of his biggest fans formed an S corporation, 2hit, Inc., as the original ninety shareholders. Tone then transferred some of his stock to his grandfather, four of Tone’s cousins, five of Tone’s children, three of Tone’s grandchildren, and 2 close friends. For the S corporation shareholder limit rules, how many shareholders does 2hit, Inc. have?
40) Clampett, Inc. (an S corporation) previously operated as a C corporation. Distributions from Clampett, Inc. are deemed to be paid in the following order:
41) Clampett, Inc. has been an S corporation since its inception. On July 15, 2011, Clampett, Inc. distributed $50,000 to J.D. His basis in his Clampett, Inc. stock on January 1, 2011, was $45,000. For 2011, J.D. was allocated $10,000 of ordinary income from Clampett, Inc. and no separately stated items. What is the amount of income J.D. recognizes related to Clampett, Inc. in 2011?
42) Clampett, Inc. has been an S corporation since its inception. On July 15, 2011, Clampett, Inc. distributed $50,000 to J.D. His basis in his Clampett, Inc. stock on January 1, 2011, was $45,000. For 2011, J.D. was allocated $10,000 of ordinary income from Clampett, Inc. and no separately stated items. What is J.D.’s basis in his Clampett, Inc. stock after all transactions in 2011?
43) Erica and Brett decide to form their new motorcycle business as an LLC. Each will receive an equal profits (loss) interest by contributing cash, property, or both. In addition to the members’ contributions, their LLC will obtain a $50,000 nonrecourse loan from First Bank at the time it is formed. Brett contributes cash of $5,000 and a building he bought as a storefront for the motorcycles. The building has an FMV of $45,000, an adjusted basis of $30,000, and is secured by a $35,000 nonrecourse mortgage that the business LLC will assume. What is Brett’s outside tax basis in his LLC interest?
44) Gerald received a 33% capital and profit (loss) interest in XYZ Limited Partnership (LP). In exchange for this interest, Gerald contributed a building with an FMV of $30,000. His adjusted basis in the building was $15,000. In addition, the building was encumbered with a $9,000 nonrecourse mortgage that XYZ, LP assumed at the time the property was contributed. What is Gerald’s outside basis immediately after his contribution?
45) Sue and Andrew form SA general partnership. Each person receives an equal interest in the newly created partnership. Sue contributes $10,000 of cash and land with a FMV of $55,000. Her basis in the land is $20,000. Andrew contributes equipment with a FMV of $12,000 and a building with a FMV of $33,000. His basis in the equipment is $8,000, and his basis in the building is $20,000. How much gain must the SA general partnership recognize on the transfer of these assets from Sue and Andrew?
46) Vanessa contributed $20,000 of cash and land with a fair market value of $100,000 and an adjusted basis of $40,000 to Cook, Inc. (an S corporation) when it was formed. The land was encumbered by a $30,000 mortgage executed two years before. What is Vanessa’s tax basis in Cook, Inc. after formation?
47) Frank and Bob are equal members in Soxy Socks, LLC. When forming the LLC, Frank contributed $50,000 in cash and $50,000 worth of equipment. Frank’s adjusted basis in the equipment was $35,000. Bob contributed $50,000 in cash and $50,000 worth of land. Bob’s adjusted basis in the land was $30,000. On 3/15/04, Soxy Socks sells the land Bob contributed for $60,000. How much gain (loss) related to this transaction will Bob report on his X4 return?
48) What form does a partnership use when filing an annual informational return?
49) At his death, Trevor had a probate estate consisting of $4 million of property. Which of the following is a true statement about Trevor’s estate or estate tax?
50) The estate and gift taxes share several common features. Which of the following characteristics are common to both the estate and gift taxes?
51) The estate and gift taxes share several common features. Which of the following characteristics are common to both the estate and gift taxes?
52) Which of the following is a completed taxable gift?
53) Jonathan transferred $90,000 of cash to a trust this year for the benefit of Hannah, age 10. The trustee has the discretion to distribute income or corpus (principal) for Hannah’s benefit and is required to distribute all assets to Hannah (or her estate) not later than Hannah’s 21st birthday. What is the amount of the taxable gift?
54) This year Don and his son purchased real estate for an investment. The price of the property was $500,000, and the title named Don and his son as joint tenants with the right of survivorship. Don provided $320,000 of the purchase price, and his son provided the remaining $180,000. Has Don made a taxable gift and, if so, in what amount?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) A family with $45,000 in assets and $22,000 of liabilities would have a net worth of
2) A budget deficit would result when a person’s or family’s
3) The payment items that should be budgeted first are
4) Which of the following statements regarding tax credits is true?
5) The tax base for an individual tax return is
6) Which of the following statements regarding exemptions is correct?
7) Which of the following has the lowest authoritative weight?
8) Which of the following has the highest authoritative weight?
9) Jaime recently found a “favorable” trial level court opinion directly on point for her tax question. Which trial level court would he prefer to have issued the opinion?
10) Sam saved diligently for his college education by putting part of his pay into U.S. Series EE saving bonds. Sam purchased the bonds for $6,500, and this year he redeemed the bonds for $7,200. He has no other income this year. What amount must Sam include in his gross income?
11) Jill currently lives in the suburbs and commutes 25 miles to her office in downtown Freeport. She is considering quitting her current job to look for new employment in the downtown. Which of the following statements best describes how Jill can satisfy the distance test for deducting moving expenses if she accepts a new job in downtown Freeport?
12) Congress allows self-employed taxpayers to deduct the cost of health insurance above the line (for AGI) because
13) Jim was in an auto accident this year. Jim paid $2,450 to repair his car after the accident, and his insurance only reimbursed him $400. Jim bought his car several years ago for $15,000. What casualty loss deduction from this accident can Jim combine with his other casualty losses in computing his itemized deductions?
14) Rhianna and Jay are married filing jointly in 2009. They have six children for whom they may claim the child tax credit. Their AGI was $123,440. What amount of child tax credit may they claim on their 2009 tax return?
15) Which of the following is a miscellaneous itemized deduction that is not subject to the 2 percent of AGI floor?
16) Beth’s business purchased only one asset during the current year. It placed in service machinery (7-year property) on December 1 with a basis of $50,000. Calculate the maximum depreciation expense (ignoring Section 179 or bonus expensing):
17) Bateman Corporation sold an office building that it used in its business for $800,000. Bateman bought the building ten years ago for $600,000 and has claimed $200,000 of depreciation expense. What is the amount and character of Bateman’s gain or loss?
18) Foreaker LLC sold a piece of land that it uses in its business for $52,000. Foreaker bought the land two years ago for $42,500. What is the character of Foreaker’s gain?
19) Which of the following would be considered passive income?
20) Generally, which of the following does not correctly categorize the type of income?
21) A taxpayer would not be considered a material participant if he met which one of these tests?
22) What is the correct order of the loss limitation rules?
23) Dan recently purchased a partnership interest in XYZ, Limited Partnership for $6,000. His share of debt in the partnership is $2,500, but he is not personally responsible for paying back the debt if the partnership cannot pay. Dan’s share of XYZ, LP’s loss for the year is $3,000. In addition, Dan reported $5,000 in long-term capital gains from the sale of a stock and $3,000 of income from another real estate partnership. What is Dan’s tax basis in XYZ, LP?
24) What happens when a taxpayer experiences a net loss from a rental home?
25) What document must LLCs file with the state to organize their business?
26) What tax year-end must unincorporated entities with only one owner adopt?
27) Which legal entity provides the least flexible legal arrangement for owners?
28) Which of the following requirements do not have to be met in a Section 351 transaction?
29) Inez transfers property with a tax basis of $200 and a fair market value of $300 to a corporation in exchange for stock with a fair market value of $250 in a transaction that qualifies for deferral under Section 351. The corporation assumed a liability of $50 on the property transferred. What is the corporation’s tax basis in the property received in the exchange?
30) Camille transfers property with a tax basis of $800 and a fair market value of $1,200 to a corporation in exchange for stock with a fair market value of $850 and $350 in a transaction that qualifies for deferral under Section 351. Camille also incurred selling expenses of $100. What is the amount realized by Camille in the exchange?
31) BTW Corporation has taxable income in the current year that can be offset with an NOL from a previous year. What is the nature of the book-tax difference created by the net operating loss deduction in the current year?
32) A calendar-year corporation has negative current E&P of $(500) and accumulated positive E&P of $1,000. The corporation makes a $600 distribution to its sole shareholder. Which of the following statements is true?
33) Studios reported a net capital loss of $30,000 in year 5. It reported net capital gains of $14,000 in year 4 and $27,000 in year 6. What is the amount and nature of the book-tax difference in year 6 related to the net capital carryover?
34) Tammy owns 100 shares in Star Struck Corporation. The other 100 shares are owned by her husband Tommy. Which of the following statements is true?
35) El Toro Corporation declared a common stock dividend to all shareholders of record on June 30, 2010. Shareholders will receive 1 share of El Toro stock for each 2 shares of stock they already own. Raoul owns 300 shares of El Toro stock with a tax basis of $60 per share. The fair market value of the El Toro stock was $100 per share on June 30, 2010. What are the tax consequences of the stock dividend to Raoul?
36) Comet Company is owned equally by Pat and his sister Pam, each of whom hold 100 shares in the company. Pam wants to reduce her ownership in the company, and it was decided that the company will redeem 50 of her shares for $1,000 per share on December 31, 2010. Pam’s income tax basis in each share is $500. Comet has total E&P of $250,000. What are the tax consequences to Pam as a result of the stock redemption?
37) Under which of the following circumstances will a partner recognize a loss from an operating distribution?
38) Which of the following statements regarding disproportionate distributions is false?
39) Tone Loc and 89 of his biggest fans formed an S corporation, 2hit, Inc., as the original ninety shareholders. Tone then transferred some of his stock to his grandfather, four of Tone’s cousins, five of Tone’s children, three of Tone’s grandchildren, and 2 close friends. For the S corporation shareholder limit rules, how many shareholders does 2hit, Inc. have?
40) Clampett, Inc. (an S corporation) previously operated as a C corporation. Distributions from Clampett, Inc. are deemed to be paid in the following order:
41) Clampett, Inc. has been an S corporation since its inception. On July 15, 2011, Clampett, Inc. distributed $50,000 to J.D. His basis in his Clampett, Inc. stock on January 1, 2011, was $45,000. For 2011, J.D. was allocated $10,000 of ordinary income from Clampett, Inc. and no separately stated items. What is the amount of income J.D. recognizes related to Clampett, Inc. in 2011?
42) Clampett, Inc. has been an S corporation since its inception. On July 15, 2011, Clampett, Inc. distributed $50,000 to J.D. His basis in his Clampett, Inc. stock on January 1, 2011, was $45,000. For 2011, J.D. was allocated $10,000 of ordinary income from Clampett, Inc. and no separately stated items. What is J.D.’s basis in his Clampett, Inc. stock after all transactions in 2011?
43) Erica and Brett decide to form their new motorcycle business as an LLC. Each will receive an equal profits (loss) interest by contributing cash, property, or both. In addition to the members’ contributions, their LLC will obtain a $50,000 nonrecourse loan from First Bank at the time it is formed. Brett contributes cash of $5,000 and a building he bought as a storefront for the motorcycles. The building has an FMV of $45,000, an adjusted basis of $30,000, and is secured by a $35,000 nonrecourse mortgage that the business LLC will assume. What is Brett’s outside tax basis in his LLC interest?
44) Gerald received a 33% capital and profit (loss) interest in XYZ Limited Partnership (LP). In exchange for this interest, Gerald contributed a building with an FMV of $30,000. His adjusted basis in the building was $15,000. In addition, the building was encumbered with a $9,000 nonrecourse mortgage that XYZ, LP assumed at the time the property was contributed. What is Gerald’s outside basis immediately after his contribution?
45) Sue and Andrew form SA general partnership. Each person receives an equal interest in the newly created partnership. Sue contributes $10,000 of cash and land with a FMV of $55,000. Her basis in the land is $20,000. Andrew contributes equipment with a FMV of $12,000 and a building with a FMV of $33,000. His basis in the equipment is $8,000, and his basis in the building is $20,000. How much gain must the SA general partnership recognize on the transfer of these assets from Sue and Andrew?
46) Vanessa contributed $20,000 of cash and land with a fair market value of $100,000 and an adjusted basis of $40,000 to Cook, Inc. (an S corporation) when it was formed. The land was encumbered by a $30,000 mortgage executed two years before. What is Vanessa’s tax basis in Cook, Inc. after formation?
47) Frank and Bob are equal members in Soxy Socks, LLC. When forming the LLC, Frank contributed $50,000 in cash and $50,000 worth of equipment. Frank’s adjusted basis in the equipment was $35,000. Bob contributed $50,000 in cash and $50,000 worth of land. Bob’s adjusted basis in the land was $30,000. On 3/15/04, Soxy Socks sells the land Bob contributed for $60,000. How much gain (loss) related to this transaction will Bob report on his X4 return?
48) What form does a partnership use when filing an annual informational return?
49) At his death, Trevor had a probate estate consisting of $4 million of property. Which of the following is a true statement about Trevor’s estate or estate tax?
50) The estate and gift taxes share several common features. Which of the following characteristics are common to both the estate and gift taxes?
51) The estate and gift taxes share several common features. Which of the following characteristics are common to both the estate and gift taxes?
52) Which of the following is a completed taxable gift?
53) Jonathan transferred $90,000 of cash to a trust this year for the benefit of Hannah, age 10. The trustee has the discretion to distribute income or corpus (principal) for Hannah’s benefit and is required to distribute all assets to Hannah (or her estate) not later than Hannah’s 21st birthday. What is the amount of the taxable gift?
54) This year Don and his son purchased real estate for an investment. The price of the property was $500,000, and the title named Don and his son as joint tenants with the right of survivorship. Don provided $320,000 of the purchase price, and his son provided the remaining $180,000. Has Don made a taxable gift and, if so, in what amount?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Javier and Anita Sanchez purchased a home on January 1, year 1 for $500,000 by paying $200,000 down and borrowing the remaining $300,000 with a 7 percent loan secured by the home. The loan requires interest-only payments for the first five years. The Sanchezes would itemize deductions even if they did not have any deductible interest. On January 1, the Sanchezes also borrowed money on a second loan secured by the home for $75,000. The interest rate on the loan is 8 percent and the Sanchezes make interest-only payments in year 1 on the second loan.
a. Assuming the Sanchezes use the second loan to landscape the yard to their home, what is the maximum amount of interest expense (on both loans combined) they are allowed to deduct year 1?
b. Assume the original facts and that the Sanchezes use the $75,000 loan proceeds for an extended family vacation. What is the maximum amount of interest expense (on both loans combined) they are allowed to deduct in year 1?
c. Assume the original facts, except that the Sanchezes borrow $120,000 on the second loan and they use the proceeds for an extended family vacation and other personal expenses. What is the maximum amount of interest expense (on both loans combined) they are allowed to deduct in year 1?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Javier and Anita Sanchez purchased a home on January 1, year 1 for $500,000 by paying $200,000 down and borrowing the remaining $300,000 with a 7 percent loan secured by the home. The loan requires interest-only payments for the first five years. The Sanchezes would itemize deductions even if they did not have any deductible interest. On January 1, the Sanchezes also borrowed money on a second loan secured by the home for $75,000. The interest rate on the loan is 8 percent and the Sanchezes make interest-only payments in year 1 on the second loan.
a. Assuming the Sanchezes use the second loan to landscape the yard to their home, what is the maximum amount of interest expense (on both loans combined) they are allowed to deduct year 1?
b. Assume the original facts and that the Sanchezes use the $75,000 loan proceeds for an extended family vacation. What is the maximum amount of interest expense (on both loans combined) they are allowed to deduct in year 1?
c. Assume the original facts, except that the Sanchezes borrow $120,000 on the second loan and they use the proceeds for an extended family vacation and other personal expenses. What is the maximum amount of interest expense (on both loans combined) they are allowed to deduct in year 1?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 548
Under GASB rules for the financial reporting entity
A.
According to GASB Statement No. 44, all of the following is a recommendation category for the CAFR s statistical section EXCEPT
Which of the following choices regarding the government-wide Statement of Net Assets is true?
Which of the following choices regarding the government-wide Statement of Activities is true?
Which of the following choices regarding the government-wide Statement of Activities is true?
Which of the following choices regarding the proprietary fund financial statements is true?
methods.
Which of the following choices regarding the fiduciary fund financial statements is true?
All of the following is likely to be recorded in a special revenue fund EXCEPT
Short-term loans which are backed by the taxing power of the governmental unit and used to meet working capital requirements are called
A local government was awarded a federal grant in the amount of $600,000 to provide for a summer employment program for young people. The grant was a reimbursement grant and was awarded on April 30, 2009. The local government expended the resources as follows: June, 2009, $220,000; July 2009, $200,000; August, 2009, $180,000. The federal government provided the funds the following months. The local government would recognize revenues for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009 in which amount
A donor pledged $100,000 to the fund raising drive of a local government to assist its police officers in obtaining the latest technology. The pledge was made on July 16, 2008 but was conditioned on the government raising an additional $100,000 from other donors. By the fiscal year-end of June 30, 2009, the local government had raised only $5,000 from other donors. What entry would be made for the initial pledge by the local government during the year ended June 30, 2009
The General Fund of the City of Richmond approved a tax levy for the calendar year 2009 in the amount of $1,600,000. Of that amount, $30,000 is expected to be uncollectible. During 2009, $1,400,000 was collected. During 2010, $100,000 was collected during the first 30 days, $40,000 was collected during the next 30 days and $30,000 was collected during the next 30 days. During the postaudit, you discovered that the city showed $1,570,000 in revenues. What adjusting entry would you need to make, assuming you decided to allow the maximum amount of revenues for 2009, using modified accrual accounting
The City of Greenville had a balance in the Reserve for Encumbrances account at the end of 2008 in the amount of $30,000. During 2009, all purchase orders related to the $30,000 were filled and the invoice amount was $30,500. Which of the following would be true regarding the Statement of Revenues, Expenditures and Changes in fund balances for 2009? (assume encumbrances do not lapse)
Under modified accrual accounting, revenues are recognized when measurable and
The City of Lonesome Pines levied property taxes for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009 in the amount of $8,000,000. It is estimated that 2% will not be collected. During the year ended June 30, 2009, $7,200,000 in property taxes were collected. It is estimated that $400,000 will be collected during the next 60 days, $240,000 will be collected after 60 days and $160,000 will not be collected. What is the maximum amount Lonesome Pines can recognize as property tax revenue for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009 in its Governmental Funds Statement of Revenues, Expenditures and Changes in Fund Balances, assuming there were no unpaid property taxes at the end of the previous year
D. $8,000,000
What is the effect on the General Funds unreserved fund balance when capital assets are purchased during a year from General Fund revenues?
The initial transfer of cash from the General Fund to establish a motor pool internal service fund would require the General Fund to credit cash and debit
When supplies ordered by a governmental unit are received at an actual price which is more than the estimated price on the purchase order, the Encumbrance Control account is
Which of the following accounts of a governmental unit is debited when supplies previously ordered are received
Which of the following accounts of a governmental unit is credited to close it at the end of the fiscal year?
The Expenditures control account in the General Fund is debited when
Prepare journal entries for nonexchange transactions on government-wide and fund statements. Each of the following is one of the four classes into which nonexchange transactions apply in accordance with GASB Statement No. 33 EXCEPT
Property taxes, special assessments, and fines and forfeits are types of nonexchange transactions, and assets should be recognized when an enforceable legal claim exists or when the resources are received, whichever is first. These are examples of
Under the modified accrual basis of accounting, GASB standards for property tax revenue recognition provide that revenue should not be recognized for property taxes collected
When payrolls and other liabilities are incurred and must be paid before substantial amounts of cash will be collected, what type of short-term note is desirable and secured by a government’s power to tax
What is a Special Revenue Fund
Expenditures are generally recorded and fund liabilities are recognized
When would a special revenue fund be deemed to have satisfied the eligibility requirement of a reimbursement-type federal grant under GASB Statement 33
Funds that are used to account for activities similar to those often engaged in by profit-seeking businesses are
Proprietary funds utilize what basis of accounting
Activities that produce goods or services to be provided to other departments or other governmental units would be reported in which fund?
Governmental units use which fund type to account for services provided to the general public on a user-charge basis
The estimated costs of closure of solid-waste landfills are measured using
In the Statement of Net Assets for proprietary funds, GASB requires a classified format where current assets, noncurrent assets, current liabilities, and noncurrent liabilities are presented
Impact fees imposed on commercial developers by an enterprise fund and not associated with specific projects or improvements are recorded as
Ford County levies for its General Fund $1,000,000 in property taxes. In addition, the county is responsible for collecting $2,000,000 in property taxes for the consolidated school district and $500,000 in property taxes for a town within the county. 2% of all taxes levied are expected to be uncollectible. When recording the levies in an agency fund, what amount would Ford County record as Taxes Receivable for Other Governments Current and Due to Other Governments
GASB Statement 31, Accounting and Financial Reporting for Certain Investments and for External Investment Pools, applies to all of the following investment types EXCEPT
The City of Sycamore has investments in bonds. These bonds have an amortized cost of $998,000 and a market value of $1,001,000. The market value is quoted and available in the financial press. The original cost of the bonds was $996,000. The par value at maturity will be $1,000,000. The amount at which the investments would be reported is
The tax agency fund of Fulton County collected $6,000,000 for a school district, $3,000,000 for the county general fund, and $4,000,000 for a municipality. County general fund employees handle the collections and a 3% collection fee is charged all units except the county. The total amount of revenue recognized by the county general fund would be
The City of Springfield has three pension plans: a locally administered police plan for which it is trustee, a statewide cost sharing plan, and a statewide agency plan. The city would include in its CAFR financial statements for
A statewide pension plan exists for all local governments in a certain state. The provisions of the plan indicate that each qualifying retiree receive 2% multiplied by the number of years active employment multiplied by the average salary for the past four years of service. The government calculates the actuarial liability on a statewide basis, not by individual government. The plan would be known as a
The County of Churchville is trustee for a multi-government investment pool and has established an investment trust fund. Included in the investment trust fund, for management purposes, are investments in the amount of $15 million from the County’s General Fund, $2 million from the County’s special revenue funds, and $112 million from other governments. Which of the following would be true
Which two governmental funds are commonly used to acquire capital assets
When a purchase order is issued under a Capital Projects Fund, how should the transaction be recorded
Which disqualifies a lease as a capital lease
If taxes or special assessments are levied by the General Fund and then transferred to the debt service fund, they are
In which fund type is interest on long-term debt typically not accrued, yet is recognized as an expenditure in the year in which interest is legally due
What type of serial bond schedules an increase each year in annual principal repayment approximately equivalent to the decrease in interest payments?
How would the government account for the unused bond proceeds
In its Statement of Net Assets, a government reported: Assets of $90 million including $30 million in capital assets (net) and liabilities of $50 million including long-term debt of $15 million all related to capital asset acquisition.
The government also reported $5 million of net assets that were restricted for payment of debt service. The government’s unrestricted net assets would be reported as
A governmental funds Statement of Revenues, Expenditures and Changes in Fund Balances reported expenditures of $30 million, including capital outlay expenditures of $2 million. Capital assets for that government cost $70 million, including land of $10 million. Depreciable assets are amortized over 20 years, on average. The reconciliation from governmental changes in fund balances to governmental activities changes in net assets would reflect
The City of Charlotte levied property taxes in 2009 in the amount of $10 million. It is estimated that 2% will be uncollectible. During 2009, $9,000,000 was collected and it is anticipated that $400,000 will be collected during the next 60 days. When moving from the changes in fund balances in the Statement of Revenues, Expenditures and Changes in Fund Balances to the changes in net assets in the Statement of Activities, what will be the adjustment
A government’s Statement of Revenues, Expenditures and Changes in Fund Balances reflected proceeds of bonds in the amount of $1,000,000. That statement also reflected expenditures for debt service in the amount of $3,000,000, including $2,600,000 for principal payments. Assuming no other changes, the effect when moving from the change in fund balances in the governmental funds Statement of Revenues, Expenditures and Changes in Fund Balances to the change in net assets for governmental activities in the Statement of Activities would be a
A government had the following transfers reported in its governmental funds Statement of Revenues, Expenditures and Changes in Fund Balances: (1) a transfer from the General Fund to a debt service fund in the amount of $1,000,000; (2) a transfer from the General Fund to an enterprise fund in the amount of $1,200,000; and (3) a transfer from the General Fund to an internal service fund in the amount of $400,000. The amount that would be shown as a transfer out in the governmental activities column in the Statement of Activities would be
A government reported an other financing source in the amount of $800,000, related to the sale of land in its governmental funds Statement of Revenues, Expenditures and Changes in Fund Balances. The land had a cost of $350,000. The adjustment in the reconciliation when moving from the governmental Funds Statement of Revenues, Expenditures and Changes in Fund Balances to the change in net assets for governmental activities in the Statement of Activities would be
A government incurred expenses for its infrastructure as follows: $15 million for general repairs; $13 million to extend the life of existing infrastructure; and $12 million for additions and betterments. The government chooses to use the modified approach to record infrastructure. The infrastructure has a basis of $400 million and would be depreciated over a 40 year life, if depreciation were charged. The amount that would be shown as expense in the Statement of Activities would be
Under GASB rules for the financial reporting entity
According to GASB Statement No. 44, all of the following is a recommended category for the CAFR’s statistical section EXCEPT
Which of the following choices regarding the government-wide Statement of Activities is true
D. Indirect program expenses may not be allocated to the other functional areas.
Which of the following statements regarding the government-wide Statement of Activities is true
Which of the following choices regarding the proprietary fund financial statements is true
Which of the following regarding the fiduciary fund financial statements is true?
The FASB has the authority to set accounting standards for all of the following organizations EXCEPT
The three classes of net assets required to be presented by a private college or university are
According to NACUBO guidelines, what is the correct treatment for recognizing summer school revenues and expenses when a college’s fiscal year ends on June 30
penses to the two fiscal years, following accrual accounting practices similar to those employed by commercial enterprises.
All the following choices are considered a split-interest agreement according to the
C. charitable gift annuities
D. pooled (life) income funds
A private university received $18,000,000 in tuition and fees during an academic year. Graduate assistantships, for which services were required, were awarded in the amount of $1,200,000. Scholarships, for which no services were required, were awarded in the amount of $1,400,000. The net tuition and fees that would be reported in the Statement of Activities would be
D. $15,400,000
In 2008 a faculty member at a private college received a grant from the National Science Foundation to conduct basic research on tree frogs in the amount of $350,000. Expenses associated with the grant totaled $225,000 in 2009. In the Statement of Activities for 2009, the college should show
A. revenues of $350,000 and expenses of $225,000 in Temporarily Restricted Net Assets
A donor made a cash contribution of $50,000 to a private college for the purpose of acquiring a building. The private college properly recorded the gift of cash as a temporarily restricted revenue. When the building is acquired, the college should
A. record the building as permanently restricted
All the following choices would be considered a special-purpose government for financial reporting purposes EXCEPT
A. a public school system
Special purpose local governments engaged only in fiduciary-type activities are required to prepare all of the following financial reports EXCEPT
Assume a government is a special-purpose entity engaged in fiduciary activities only. Which of the following financial statements would be required
Assume a government is determined to be a special-purpose government engaged in business-type activities only. Which of the following financial statements would be required
Assume a government is a special-purpose government engaged in only one governmental activity. Which financial statements would be required
A public college had tuition and fees of $20,000,000. Scholarships, for which no services were required, amounted to $2,000,000. Graduate assistantships, for which services were required, amounted to $1,000,000. The amount to be reported by the public college as net tuition and fees would be
A public college had tuition and fees for the year ended June 30, 2009 in the amount of $45,000,000. Scholarships, for which no services were required, amounted to $2,500,000. Graduate assistantships, for which services were required, amounted to $2,300,000. The amount to be reported by the college for net tuition and fee revenue would be
D. $45,000,000
Which organization promulgates the Government Auditing Standards
Under the terms of the Single Audit Act and its amendments, what percentage of federal awards expenditures must be selected for audit
The term opinion unit refers to which of the following
All of the following are considered to be a major user group by the GASB EXCEPT
To compute the net debt per capita, what would a user of financial statements need to look at in the CAFR
C. The debt in the governmental funds Balance Sheet, the amount available in the government-wide Statement of Net Assets, and the population from the statistical section
D. All three items from the government-wide Statement of Net Assets
In order to compute the operating ratio-enterprise funds, one would look in the CAFR
D. In the proprietary funds Statement of Cash Flows
In order to compute the ratio unreserved fund balance/revenues-General Fund, what would one look at in the CAFR?
The fund statements for governmental funds are presented using
What type of fund is used when resources are provided mainly through business like transactions to parties external to the government
Why did governmental accounting practices develop with a focus on the sources and uses of expendable funds rather than on net income
Financial reports for state and local governments are used for all the following EXCEPT to
A. assess financial condition and results of operations
Which of the following funds is used to account for the payment of principal and interest of general long-term debt of a government
The GASB is under the oversight of
Which of the following choices is a permanent fund classified under governmental funds?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
FIRST 10 IS SHOWN HERE. REST ARE IN THE ATTACHMENT WITH SOLUTIONS.
1. Under GASB rules for the financial reporting entity
A.component units are included if the primary government is financially accountable for their operations
B. counties are component units of the state government
C. blended and discretely presented component units are to be reported in government-wide financial statements but not in fund financial statements
D. component units must be reported in columns (discrete presentation) separate from the funds of a primary government
2. According to GASB Statement No. 44, all of the following is a recommendation category for the CAFR s statistical section EXCEPT
A. financial trends information
B. debt capacity information
C. comparative information
D. operating information
3. Which of the following choices regarding the government-wide Statement of Net Assets is true?
A. The government-wide Statement of Net Assets reflects capital assets, net of accumulated depreciation, for both governmental and business-type activities.
B. The government-wide Statement of Net Assets must be prepared in a classified format; that is, both assets and liabilities must be separated between current and long-term categories.
C. The government-wide Statement of Net Assets includes all resources entrusted to the government; including governmental, proprietary, and fiduciary.
D. A reporting entity primary government plus component units total column is required.
4. Which of the following choices regarding the government-wide Statement of Activities is true?
A. The government-wide Statement of Activities may reflect expenses either by function general government, public safety, and so forth or by object or natural classification salaries, supplies, and so forth.
B. The government-wide Statement of Activities is prepared using the modified accrual basis of accounting for governmental activities and using the accrual basis of accounting for business-type activities.
C. The government-wide Statement of Activities reflects all taxes as general revenues.
5. Which of the following choices regarding the government-wide Statement of Activities is true?
A. The Statement of Activities includes depreciation expense.
B. Transfers between governmental and business type activities are eliminated and do not appear on the government-wide Statement of Activities.
C. In the government-wide Statement of Activities, special items are those items that are both unusual, infrequent, and are not under the control of management.
D. Taxes levied for specific functions may be reported as program revenue.
6. Which of the following choices regarding the proprietary fund financial statements is true?
A. The Statement of Net Assets (Balance Sheet) reflects equity as contributed equity and retained earnings.
B. Normally, a reconciliation is required between the proprietary fund financial statements and the business-type activities column in the government-wide financial statements.
C. Statements include the Statement of Net Assets (Balance Sheet); Statement of Revenues, Expenses and Changes in Fund Net Assets: and Statement of Cash Flows.
D. The Statement of Cash Flows may be prepared using either the direct or indirect methods.
7. Which of the following choices regarding the fiduciary fund financial statements is true?
A. Fiduciary fund financial statements include the Statement of Fiduciary Net Assets and Statement of Changes in Fiduciary Net Assets.
B. Fiduciary fund financial statements are prepared using the current financial resources measurement focus and modified accrual basis of accounting.
C. Fiduciary fund financial statements reflect equity as reserved and unreserved.
D. Agency funds are reported only on the Statement of Changes in Fiduciary Net Assets.
8. All of the following is likely to be recorded in a special revenue fund EXCEPT
A. phone fees restricted to supporting the emergency 911 access system
B. hotel taxes restricted to promoting tourism
C. sales taxes restricted to courthouse additions
D. state motor fuel tax restricted to road maintenance
9. Short-term loans which are backed by the taxing power of the governmental unit and used to meet working capital requirements are called
A. tax anticipation notes
B. inter-fund loans
C. other financing sources
D. appropriation loan
10. A local government was awarded a federal grant in the amount of $600,000 to provide for a summer employment program for young people. The grant was a reimbursement grant and was awarded on April 30, 2009. The local government expended the resources as follows: June, 2009, $220,000; July 2009, $200,000; August, 2009, $180,000. The federal government provided the funds the following months. The local government would recognize revenues for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009 in which amount
A. $ – 0 –
B. $220,000
C. $420,000
D. $600,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wise Company owns 30% interest in the stock of Dark Corporation. During the year, Dark pays $20,000 in dividends to Wise, and reports $200,000 in net income. Wise Company’s investment in Dark will increase Wise’s net income by
On January 1, 2013, Audrey Corp. paid $800,000 for 100,000 shares of Off Company’s common stock, which represents 40% of Off’s outstanding common stock. Off reported net income of $200,000 and paid cash dividends of $60,000 during 2013. Audrey should report the investment in Off Company on its December 31, 2013, balance sheet at:
Corporations invest in other companies for all of the following reasons except to
|
|
increase trading of the other companies’ stock.
|
|
|
house excess cash until needed.
|
|
|
1) Dayton Corporation purchased 1,000 shares of Kart common stock at $77 per share plus $2,000 brokerage fees as a short-term investment. The shares were subsequently sold at $80 per share less $3,400 brokerage fees. The cost of the securities purchased and gain or loss on the sale were
Cost
Gain or Loss
$79,000
$2,400 loss
$77,000
$1,400 loss
$77,000
$3,000 gain
$79,000
$2,000 gain
2) The company whose stock is owned by the parent company is called the
sibling company.
controlled company.
subsidiary company.
investee company.
3) Debt investments that are held to maturity are recorded at
fair value.
maturity value.
original cost.
amortized cost.
4) The balance sheet presentation of an unrealized loss on a non-trading security is similar to the statement presentation of
discount on bonds payable.
treasury stock.
allowance for doubtful accounts.
prepaid expenses.
5) An unrealized loss on non-trading securities is
reported under Other Expenses and Losses in the income statement.
reported as a separate component of stockholders’ equity.
deducted from the cost of the investment.
closed-out at the end of the accounting period
6) The equity method of accounting for an investment in the common stock of another company should be used by the investor when the investment
enables the investor to exercise significant influence over the investee.
is obtained by an exchange of stock for stock.
ensures a source of supply of raw materials for the investor.
is composed of common stock and it is the investor’s intent to vote the common stock
7) On January 1, 2013, Danner Company purchased at face value, a $1,000, 8% bond that pays interest on January 1 and July 1. Danner Company has a calendar year end. The entry for the receipt of interest on July 1, 2013, is
Cash
80
Interest Revenue
80
Interest Receivable
80
Interest Revenue
80
Cash
40
Interest Revenue
40
Interest Receivable
40
Interest Revenue
40
8) If a company acquires a 40% common stock interest in another company,
the equity method is usually applicable.
all influence is classified as controlling.
the cost method is usually applicable.
the ability to exert significant influence over the activities of the investee does not exist.
9) If a short-term debt investment is sold, the Investment account is
debited for the cost of the bonds at the sale date.
credited for the cost of the bonds at the sale date.
credited for the face value of the bonds at the sale date.
credited for the fair value of the bonds at the sale date.
10) Cost and fair value data for the trading securities of Carson Company at December 31, 2013, are $115,000 and $85,000, respectively. Which of the following correctly presents the adjusting journal entry to record the securities at fair value?
Dec. 31
Unrealized Loss – Income
30,000
Trading Securities
30,000
Dec. 31
Fair Value Adjustment – Trading
30,000
Unrealized Gain – Income
30,000
Dec. 31
Unrealized Gain – Income
30,000
Trading Securities
30,000
Dec. 31
Unrealized Loss – Income
30,000
Fair Value Adjustment – Trading
30,000
11) Nadia Corp. has common stock of $5,500,000, retained earnings of $3,000,000, unrealized gains on trading securities of $100,000 and unrealized losses on non-trading securities of $200,000. What is the total amount of its stockholders’ equity?
$8,600,000
$8,300,000
$8,500,000
$8,400,000
12) On January 1, Talent Company purchased as a short-term investment a $1,000, 8% bond for $1,050. The bond pays interest on January 1 and July 1. The bond is sold on October 1 for $1,200 plus accrued interest. Interest has not been accrued since the last interest payment date. What is the entry to record the cash proceeds at the time the bond is sold?
Cash
1,200
Debt Investments
1,200
Cash
1,200
Debt Investments
1,050
Gain on Sale of Debt Investments
150
Cash
1,220
Debt Investments
1,050
Gain on Sale of Debt Investments
150
Interest Revenue
20
Cash
1,220
Debt Investments
1,200
Interest Revenue
20
13) Temper Co. purchased 60, 6% Irick Company bonds for $60,000 cash plus brokerage fees of $600. Interest is payable semiannually on July 1 and January 1. If 30 of the securities are sold on July 1 for $32,000 less $300 brokerage fees, the entry would include a credit to Gain on Sale of Debt Investments for
$2,000.
$1,700.
$1,400.
$2,300.
14) If the cost method is used to account for a long-term investment in common stock,
it is presumed that the investor has significant influence on the investee.
the Investment account may be, at times, greater than the acquisition cost.
the earning of net income by the investee is considered a proper basis for recognition of income by the investor.
net income of the investee is not considered earned by the investor until dividends are declared by the investee.
15) When bonds are sold, the gain or loss on sale is the difference between the
sales price and the cost of the bonds.
net proceeds and the cost of the bonds.
sales price and the fair value of the bonds.
net proceeds and the fair value of the bonds
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 1: Review of Accounting Ethics Due Week 3 and worth 200 points
Many organizations have been in the news over the past few years due to accounting ethical breaches that have affected their customers, employees, or the general public.
Search the Internet or the Strayer Library to locate a story in the news that depicts an accounting ethical breach.
You may select from any type of organization about which you have information or a curiosity. Write a four to five (4-5) page paperin which you:
Given the corporate ethical breaches in recent times, assess whether or not you believe that the current business and regulatory environment is more conducive to ethical behavior.
Provide support for your answer. Based on your research, describe the organization, the accounting ethical breach and the impact to the organization related to ethical breach.
Determine how the organizational ethical issue was detected and how management failed to create an ethical environment.
Analyze the accounts impacted and / or accounting guidelines violated and the resulting impact to the business operation.
As a CFO, recommend which measures could have been taken to prevent this ethical breach and how each measure should be implemented in the future.
Use at least four (4) quality academic resources in this assignment
. Note: Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.
Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements: Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; in text citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format.
Check with your professor for any additional instructions. Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length.
The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are: Examine accounting principles and concepts used in businesses. Prepare and record financial transactions in the accounting cycle according to GAAP and IFRS accounting methodology. Use technology and information resources to research issues in financial accounting. Write clearly and concisely about financial accounting using proper writing mechanics.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 1: Review of Accounting Ethics Due Week 3 and worth 200 points
Many organizations have been in the news over the past few years due to accounting ethical breaches that have affected their customers, employees, or the general public.
Search the Internet or the Strayer Library to locate a story in the news that depicts an accounting ethical breach.
You may select from any type of organization about which you have information or a curiosity. Write a four to five (4-5) page paperin which you:
Given the corporate ethical breaches in recent times, assess whether or not you believe that the current business and regulatory environment is more conducive to ethical behavior.
Provide support for your answer. Based on your research, describe the organization, the accounting ethical breach and the impact to the organization related to ethical breach.
Determine how the organizational ethical issue was detected and how management failed to create an ethical environment.
Analyze the accounts impacted and / or accounting guidelines violated and the resulting impact to the business operation.
As a CFO, recommend which measures could have been taken to prevent this ethical breach and how each measure should be implemented in the future.
Use at least four (4) quality academic resources in this assignment
. Note: Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.
Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements: Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; in text citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format.
Check with your professor for any additional instructions. Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length.
The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are: Examine accounting principles and concepts used in businesses. Prepare and record financial transactions in the accounting cycle according to GAAP and IFRS accounting methodology. Use technology and information resources to research issues in financial accounting. Write clearly and concisely about financial accounting using proper writing mechanics.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
As the representative from your accounting firm or practice, you are in charge of stock market analysis that will be presented to clients as part of professional consultation process. One of your high-profile clients is trying to determine the possible investment potential between two companies. However, before you can recommend investments to clients, you need to familiarize yourself with the background of the companies, analyze stock trends, research current events, and analyze financial statements. Select one (1) pair of these companies and conduct your analysis.
- Pepsi versus Coca Cola, or
- Amazon versus eBay
Write an eight to ten (8-10) page paper in which you:
1. Analyze each company s history, product / services, major customers, major suppliers, and leadership and provide a synopsis of each company.
2. Based on the stock price for the timeline listed below, present a graph that illustrates the stock price of each company. Indicate conclusions that can be drawn based on the trend:
a. The day of its initial public offering b. January 1, 2012
c. January 1, 2011
d. January 1, 2010
3. Research and summarize at least two (2) news events (this may include mergers, acquisitions, or political issues) that occurred from 2010 to the present day and the potential impact on the stock price of each company. Indicate how this influences your investment decision related to the company.
4. Provide an overall financial analysis for each company that highlights the key characteristics for investment and how this may impact an investor s decision.
5. Based on your review of the financial data for each company, indicate the accuracy and reliability of the data for making investment decision. Provide support for your conclusion.
6. Recommend which company you consider as the better investment for your client and how you will present your recommendation. Support your recommendation with data from your analysis.
7. Use at least four (4) quality academic resources in this assignment. Note:Wikipedia and other
Websites do not quality as academic resources. Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:
- Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
- Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length.
2001 Words
8 Sources
APA Format
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC/557 Assignment 3 You Are an Investment Analyst
Assignment 3 You Are an Investment Analyst
As the representative from your accounting firm or practice, you are in charge of stock market analysis that will be presented to clients as part of professional consultation process. One of your high-profile clients is trying to determine the possible investment potential between two companies. However, before you can recommend investments to clients, you need to familiarize yourself with the background of the companies, analyze stock trends, research current events, and analyze financial statements. Select one (1) pair of these companies and conduct your analysis.
- Pepsi versus Coca Cola, or
- Amazon versus eBay
Write an eight to ten (8-10) page paper in which you:
1. Analyze each company s history, product / services, major customers, major suppliers, and leadership and provide a synopsis of each company.
2. Based on the stock price for the timeline listed below, present a graph that illustrates the stock price of each company. Indicate conclusions that can be drawn based on the trend:
a. The day of its initial public offering b. January 1, 2012
c. January 1, 2011
d. January 1, 2010
3. Research and summarize at least two (2) news events (this may include mergers, acquisitions, or political issues) that occurred from 2010 to the present day and the potential impact on the stock price of each company. Indicate how this influences your investment decision related to the company.
4. Provide an overall financial analysis for each company that highlights the key characteristics for investment and how this may impact an investor s decision.
5. Based on your review of the financial data for each company, indicate the accuracy and reliability of the data for making investment decision. Provide support for your conclusion.
6. Recommend which company you consider as the better investment for your client and how you will present your recommendation. Support your recommendation with data from your analysis.
7. Use at least four (4) quality academic resources in this assignment. Note:Wikipedia and other
Websites do not quality as academic resources. Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:
- Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
- Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length.
ACC557 Assignment 3 You Are an Investment Analyst
ACC/557 Assignment 3 You Are an Investment Analyst
ACC 557 Assignment 3 You Are an Investment Analyst
Assignment 3 You Are an Investment Analyst
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exercise 8-3
The ledger of Elburn Company at the end of the current year shows Accounts Receivable $110,000, Sales Revenue $840,000, and Sales Returns and Allowances $28,000. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
(a) If Elburn uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectible accounts, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming Elburn determines that T. Thum s $1,400 balance is uncollectible.
(b) If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $2,100 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be (1) 1% of net sales, and (2) 10% of accounts receivable.
(c) If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a debit balance of $200 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be (1) 0.75% of net sales and (2) 6% of accounts receivable.
Exercise 8-5
At December 31, 2013, Crawford Company had a balance of $15,000 in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. During 2014, Crawford wrote off accounts totaling $14,100. One of those accounts ($1,800) was later collected. At December 31, 2014, an aging schedule indicated that the balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts should be $19,000.
Prepare journal entries to record the 2014 transactions of Crawford Company. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
Exercise 8-14
Lashkova Company had accounts receivable of $100,000 on January 1, 2014. The only transactions that affected accounts receivable during 2014 were net credit sales of $1,000,000, cash collections of $920,000, and accounts written off of $30,000.
(a) Compute the ending balance of accounts receivable.
(b) Compute the accounts receivable turnover ratio for 2014. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.50.)
(c) Compute the average collection period in days. (Round answer to 1 decimal place, e.g. 25.5.)
Problem 8-7A
On January 1, 2014, Derek Company had Accounts Receivable $139,000, Notes Receivable $30,000, and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $13,200. The note receivable is from Kaye Noonan Company. It is a 4-month, 12% note dated December 31, 2013. Derek Company prepares financial statements annually. During the year, the following selected transactions occurred.
Jan. 5 Sold $24,000 of merchandise to Zwingle Company, terms n/15.
20 Accepted Zwingle Company s $24,000, 3-month, 9% note for balance due.
Feb. 18 Sold $8,000 of merchandise to Gerard Company and accepted Gerard s $8,000, 6-month, 8% note for the amount due.
Apr. 20 Collected Zwingle Company note in full.
30 Received payment in full from Kaye Noonan Company on the amount due.
May 25 Accepted Isabella Inc. s $4,000, 3-month, 7% note in settlement of a past-due balance on account.
Aug. 18 Received payment in full from Gerard Company on note due.
25 The Isabella Inc. s note was dishonored. Isabella Inc. s is not bankrupt; future payment is anticipated.
Sept. 1 Sold $12,000 of merchandise to Fernando Company and accepted a $12,000, 6-month, 10% note for the amount due.
Journalize the transactions. (Record entries in the order displayed in the problem statement. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually. Round answers to the nearest whole dollar, e.g. 5,275.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 2: You Are an Entrepreneur!
Due Week 6 and worth 280 points
Student life does not generally afford a great deal of free time to pursue your personal interests; however, at one point, you may have considered turning a personal interest or hobby into an official enterprise. Today, you have finally decided to turn that hobby into a business but have realized that you need start-up capital from a lender or investor.
To obtain funding, you need to convince a lender / investor that your business is more than a hobby. You need to demonstrate that you have a firm grasp of your business, the accounting practices that impact your business, the controls needed to safeguard assets, and which accounting system will produce accurate and relevant financial information.
Write a six to eight (6-8) page business plan in which you:
- Describe the type of business you have created including:
a. The product or service, and general staffing plan. Provide a rationale for your plan.
b. The form of your business and the benefits it offers your particular business,
c. A chart of accounts specific to your business, including a rationale as to the selection of each account. (Note: The chart of accounts is a blueprint of your business for the lender/investor. It should report the expected resources that you will consume in your business (assets), the sources of those resources (liabilities and equity), the sources of revenue, and expenditures that you expect to incur to earn those revenues. You may build a detailed chart that includes business units, divisions, product lines, etc.)
- Based on the form of your business, analyze whether or not you will be required to use Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) or International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) accounting methods and how the IFRS / GAAP convergence will impact your business. Suggest how you will incorporate any changes into your books and records. (Note: You need to demonstrate to the lender/investor that you have recognized possible changes to GAAP that may impact the accounting and reporting of your accounting events.)
- Prepare a pro forma balance sheet and income statement providing the assumptions made and support the valuations assigned.
- Considering the value of assets (assigned per your balance sheet) used within your business, recommend two (2) specific internal controls that you will implement to protect your company s assets and resources, justifying how each will provide assurances to management. (NOTE: Safeguarding assets and protecting personal data are paramount to ensuring the viability of a business. Demonstrate to the lender/investor that your assets will be safeguarded and customer information (if applicable) will be protected.)
- Based on the internal control recommendations that you made, suggest how you will implement each within your business environment, indicating how challenges or resistances will be overcome.
- Evaluate the impact of the regulatory environment, including the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and other regulatory requirements, on your business venture, giving considering to how you intend to comply with the requirements and the general impact to decision making within your business.
- Use at least four (4) quality academic resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.
Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:
- Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
- Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length.
The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:
- Examine accounting principles and concepts used in businesses.
- Assess appropriate internal controls, regulatory requirements according to the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, and fraud prevention and detection.
- Use technology and information resources to research issues in financial accounting.
- Write clearly and concisely about financial accounting using proper writing mechanics.
Click here to view the grading rubric for this assignment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week 7 Quiz Questions
|
Multiple Choice Question 178
|
|
|
To qualify as natural resources in the accounting sense, assets must be
|
D
|
physically extracted in operations.
|
|
|
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 122
|
|
|
|
|
Sargent Corporation bought equipment on January 1, 2013. The equipment cost $180,000 and had an expected salvage value of $30,000. The life of the equipment was estimated to be 6 years. The book value of the equipment at the beginning of the third year using straight-line depreciation would be
|
Multiple Choice Question 207
|
|
|
Rooney Company incurred $420,000 of research and development cost in its laboratory to develop a patent granted on January 1, 2013. On July 31, 2013, Rooney paid $63,000 for legal fees in a successful defense of the patent. The total amount debited to Patents through July 31, 2013, should be:
|
|
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 92
|
|
|
|
|
Useful life is expressed in terms of use expected from the asset under the
|
B
|
declining-balance method.
|
|
C
|
units-of-activity method.
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 114
|
|
|
Moreno Company purchased equipment for $675,000 on January 1, 2012, and will use the double-declining-balance method of depreciation. It is estimated that the equipment will have a 3-year life and a $30,000 salvage value at the end of its useful life. The amount of depreciation expense recognized in the year 2014 will be
|
Multiple Choice Question 158
|
|
|
The book value of an asset will equal its fair market value at the date of sale if
|
A
|
a gain on disposal is recorded.
|
|
B
|
the plant asset is fully depreciated.
|
|
C
|
no gain or loss on disposal is recorded.
|
|
D
|
a loss on disposal is recorded.
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 154
|
|
|
If disposal of a plant asset occurs during the year, depreciation is
|
A
|
not recorded if the asset is scrapped.
|
|
B
|
recorded for the fraction of the year to the date of the disposal.
|
|
C
|
recorded for the whole year.
|
|
D
|
not recorded for the year.
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 141
|
|
|
A major disadvantage resulting from the use of bonds is that
|
A
|
interest must be paid on a periodic basis.
|
|
B
|
bondholders have voting rights.
|
|
D
|
earnings per share may be lowered.
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 173
|
|
|
A $600,000 bond was retired at 103 when the carrying value of the bond was $622,000. The entry to record the retirement would include a
|
A
|
gain on bond redemption of $18,000.
|
|
B
|
gain on bond redemption of $4,000.
|
|
C
|
loss on bond redemption of $18,000.
|
|
D
|
loss on bond redemption of $12,000.
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 199
|
|
|
The 2013 financial statements of Marker Co. contain the following selected data (in millions).
|
|
Current Assets
|
$75
|
|
|
Total Assets
|
140
|
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
40
|
|
|
Total Liabilities
|
95
|
|
|
Cash
|
8
|
The debt to total assets ratio is
On September 1, Joe’s Painting Service borrows $100,000 from National Bank on a 4-month, $100,000, 6% note. What entry must Joe’s Painting Service make on December 31 before financial statements are prepared?
|
A
|
Interest Expense2,000
Notes Payable2,000
|
|
B
|
Interest Expense2,000
Interest Payable2,000
|
|
C
|
Interest Payable2,000
Interest Expense2,000
|
|
D
|
Interest Expense6,000
Interest Payable6,000
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 65
|
|
|
|
|
The relationship of current assets to current liabilities is used in evaluating a company’s
|
C
|
revenue-producing ability.
|
|
D
|
short-term debt paying ability.
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 160
|
|
|
Each of the following accounts is reported as long-term liabilities except
|
A
|
Discount on Bonds Payable.
|
|
C
|
Premium on Bonds Payable.
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 67
|
|
|
In most companies, current liabilities are paid within
|
A
|
the operating cycle through the creation of other current liabilities.
|
|
B
|
one year through the creation of other current liabilities.
|
|
C
|
one year or the operating cycle out of current assets.
|
|
D
|
the operating cycle out of current assets.
|
|
Multiple Choice Question 157
|
|
|
Hernandez Corporation issues 3,000, 10-year, 8%, $1,000 bonds dated January 1, 2013, at 98. The journal entry to record the issuance will show a
|
A
|
debit to Cash for $2,960,000.
|
|
B
|
debit to Cash of $3,000,000.
|
|
C
|
credit to Discount on Bonds Payable for $60,000.
|
|
D
|
credit to Bonds Payable for $3,040,000.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Writea paper that is at least 750 words(papers less than 750 words, will receive a reduction in points) in which you respond to the Broadening Your Perspective 17-2 activity titled Managerial Perspective in Ch. 17 of Accounting.
MANAGERIAL ANALYSIS
BYP17-2Ideal Manufacturing Company of Sycamore, Illinois, has supported a research and development
(R&D) department that has for many years been the sole contributor to the company s
new farm machinery products. The R&D activity is an overhead cost center that provides services
only to in-house manufacturing departments (four different product lines), all of which produce
agricultural/farm/ranch related machinery products.
The department has never sold its services outside, but because of its long history of success,
larger manufacturers of agricultural products have approached Ideal to hire its R&D department
for special projects. Because the costs of operating the R&D department have been spiraling uncontrollably,
Ideal s management is considering entertaining these outside approaches to absorb
the increasing costs. But, (1) management doesn t have any cost basis for charging R&D services
to outsiders, and (2) it needs to gain control of its R&D costs. Management decides to implement
an activity-based costing system in order to determine the charges for both outsiders and the inhouse
users of the department s services.
R&D activities fall into four pools with the following annual costs.
Market analysis $1,050,000
Product design 2,350,000
Product development 3,600,000
Prototype testing 1,400,000
Activity analysis determines that the appropriate cost drivers and their usage for the four activities
are:
Total
Activities Cost Drivers Estimated Drivers
Market analysis Hours of analysis 15,000 hours
Product design Number of designs 2,500 designs
Product development Number of products 90 products
Prototype testing Number of tests 500 tests
Instructions
(a) Compute the activity-based overhead rate for each activity cost pool.
(b) How much cost would be charged to an in-house manufacturing department that consumed
1,800 hours of market analysis time, was provided 280 designs relating to 10 products, and
requested 92 engineering tests?
(c) How much cost would serve as the basis for pricing an R&D bid with an outside company
on a contract that would consume 800 hours of analysis time, require 178 designs relating to
3 products, and result in 70 engineering tests?
(d) What is the benefit to Ideal Manufacturing of applying activity-based costing to its R&D activity
for both in-house and outside charging purposes?
broadening your perspective
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 561 Managerial Analysis
Writea paper that is at least 750 words(papers less than 750 words, will receive a reduction in points) in which you respond to the Broadening Your Perspective 17-2 activity titled Managerial Perspective in Ch. 17 of Accounting.
MANAGERIAL ANALYSIS
BYP17-2Ideal Manufacturing Company of Sycamore, Illinois, has supported a research and development
(R&D) department that has for many years been the sole contributor to the company s
new farm machinery products. The R&D activity is an overhead cost center that provides services
only to in-house manufacturing departments (four different product lines), all of which produce
agricultural/farm/ranch related machinery products.
The department has never sold its services outside, but because of its long history of success,
larger manufacturers of agricultural products have approached Ideal to hire its R&D department
for special projects. Because the costs of operating the R&D department have been spiraling uncontrollably,
Ideal s management is considering entertaining these outside approaches to absorb
the increasing costs. But, (1) management doesn t have any cost basis for charging R&D services
to outsiders, and (2) it needs to gain control of its R&D costs. Management decides to implement
an activity-based costing system in order to determine the charges for both outsiders and the inhouse
users of the department s services.
R&D activities fall into four pools with the following annual costs.
Market analysis $1,050,000
Product design 2,350,000
Product development 3,600,000
Prototype testing 1,400,000
Activity analysis determines that the appropriate cost drivers and their usage for the four activities
are:
Total
Activities Cost Drivers Estimated Drivers
Market analysis Hours of analysis 15,000 hours
Product design Number of designs 2,500 designs
Product development Number of products 90 products
Prototype testing Number of tests 700 tests
Instructions
(a) Compute the activity-based overhead rate for each activity cost pool.
(b) How much cost would be charged to an in-house manufacturing department that consumed
1,800 hours of market analysis time, was provided 280 designs relating to 10 products, and
requested 92 engineering tests?
(c) How much cost would serve as the basis for pricing an R&D bid with an outside company
on a contract that would consume 800 hours of analysis time, require 178 designs relating to
3 products, and result in 70 engineering tests?
(d) What is the benefit to Ideal Manufacturing of applying activity-based costing to its R&D activity
for both in-house and outside charging purposes?
broadening your perspective
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Writea paper that is at least 750 words(papers less than 750 words, will receive a reduction in points) in which you respond to the Broadening Your Perspective 17-2 activity titled Managerial Perspective in Ch. 17 ofAccounting.
MANAGERIAL ANALYSIS
BYP17-2Ideal Manufacturing Company of Sycamore, Illinois, has supported a research and development
(R&D) department that has for many years been the sole contributor to the company s
new farm machinery products. The R&D activity is an overhead cost center that provides services
only to in-house manufacturing departments (four different product lines), all of which produce
agricultural/farm/ranch related machinery products.
The department has never sold its services outside, but because of its long history of success,
larger manufacturers of agricultural products have approached Ideal to hire its R&D department
for special projects. Because the costs of operating the R&D department have been spiraling uncontrollably,
Ideal s management is considering entertaining these outside approaches to absorb
the increasing costs. But, (1) management doesn t have any cost basis for charging R&D services
to outsiders, and (2) it needs to gain control of its R&D costs. Management decides to implement
an activity-based costing system in order to determine the charges for both outsiders and the inhouse
users of the department s services.
R&D activities fall into four pools with the following annual costs.
Market analysis $1,050,000
Product design 2,350,000
Product development 3,600,000
Prototype testing 1,400,000
Activity analysis determines that the appropriate cost drivers and their usage for the four activities
are:
Total
Activities Cost Drivers Estimated Drivers
Market analysis Hours of analysis 15,000 hours
Product design Number of designs 2,500 designs
Product development Number of products 90 products
Prototype testing Number of tests 500 tests
Instructions
(a) Compute the activity-based overhead rate for each activity cost pool.
(b) How much cost would be charged to an in-house manufacturing department that consumed
1,800 hours of market analysis time, was provided 280 designs relating to 10 products, and
requested 92 engineering tests?
(c) How much cost would serve as the basis for pricing an R&D bid with an outside company
on a contract that would consume 800 hours of analysis time, require 178 designs relating to
3 products, and result in 70 engineering tests?
(d) What is the benefit to Ideal Manufacturing of applying activity-based costing to its R&D activity
for both in-house and outside charging purposes?
broadening your perspective
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following is an advantage of corporations relative to partnerships and sole proprietorships?
The group of users of accounting information charged with achieving the goals of the business is its
Which of the following financial statements is concerned with the company at a pointin time?
An income statement
The most important information needed to determine if companies can pay theircurrent obligations is the
A liquidity ratio measures the
The convention of consistency refers to consistent use of accounting principles
Horizontal analysis is also known as
Horizontal analysis is a technique for evaluating a series of financial statement dataover a period of time
Vertical analysis is a technique that expresses each item in a financial statement
Process costing is used when
An important feature of a job order cost system is that each job
In a process cost system, product costs are summarized:
An activity that has a direct cause-effect relationship with the resources consumed is a(n)
Activity-based costing
A cost which remains constant per unit at various levels of activity is a
The break-even point is where
Fixed costs are $600,000 and the contribution margin per unit is $150. What is the break-even point
When a company assigns the costs of direct materials, direct labor, and both variableand fixed manufacturing overhead to products, that company is using
If a division manager s compensation is based upon the division s net income, themanager may decide to meet the net income targets by increasing production when using
An unrealistic budget is more likely to result when it
A major element in budgetary control is
The purpose of the sales budget report is to
The accumulation of accounting data on the basis of the individual manager who has the authority to make day-to-day decisions about activities in an area is called
Variance reports are
Internal reports that review the actual impact of decisions are prepared by
The process of evaluating financial data that change under alternative courses of action is called
Seasons Manufacturing manufactures a product with a unit variable cost of $100 anda unit sales price of $176. Fixed manufacturing costs were $480,000 when 10,000 units were produced and sold. The company has a one-time opportunity to sell an additional 1,000 units at $140 each in a foreign market which would not affect its present sales. If the company has sufficient capacity to produce the additional units, acceptance of the special order would affect net income as follows:
Carter, Inc. can make 100 units of a necessary component part with the following costs:
Direct Materials $120,000
Direct Labor 20,000
VariableOverhead 60,000
Fixed Overhead 40,000
If Carter can purchase the component externally for $220,000 and only $10,000 of the fixed costs can be avoided, what is the correct make-or-buy decision?
A company has a process that results in 15,000 pounds of Product A that can be sold for $16 per pound. An alternative would be to process Product A further at a cost of $200,000 and then sell it for $28 per pound. Should management sell Product A now or should Product A be processed further and then sold? What is the effect of the action?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Since the numbers maybe different, the calculations are done in Excel, so just substitute your numbers to get the answers.
18-8. Meriden company has a unit selling price of Compute the break-even point in units using the mathematical equation.
18-10. For Turgo company variable costs Complete the rquired sales in dollars needed to achieve management s target net income of
18-11. For Kozy company, actual sales are Compute the margin of safety in dollars and the margin of safety ratio.
19-16. Montana company produces basketballs. What are the total product costs for the company under variable costimg?
19-17. Polk company builds custom fishing lures
21-1. For the quarter ended March 31, 2012 Maris company
21-4. Gundy company expects to produce x units of product in 2012. Prepare a flexible manufacturing budget for the relevant range value using x unit increments
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
WEEK 3 DQS
ACC/422 Week 3 DQ 1
What is the purpose of depreciation?
Does the book value of a fixed asset (cost minus accumulated depreciation) communicate to a user what the asset is worth? Explain why or why not.
Should the financial statements reflect the value of fixed assets? Explain why or why not.
ACC/422 Week 3 DQ 2
What is an intangible asset?
Should all intangible assets be subject to amortization? Explain why or why not. Why are some intangible assets not amortized?
What is the implication to the financial statements?
ACC/422 Week 3 DQ 3
What are the different methods used to calculate depreciation?
How does a company decide which method it should utilize?
How does its choice affect the financial statements?
Should companies standardize the method of depreciation to enhance comparability? Explain your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Preview |
| 1.ACC 423 complete/Wk 1 DQ 1.doc |
| 2.ACC 423 complete/Wk 1 DQ 2.doc |
| 3.ACC 423 complete/Wk 1 Learning Team Charter.doc |
| 4.ACC 423 complete/Wk 1 Owners Equity Paper.doc |
| 5.ACC 423 complete/Wk 2 DQ 1.doc |
| 6.ACC 423 complete/Wk 2 DQ 2.doc |
| 7.ACC 423 complete/Wk 2 Learning Team Evaluation.doc |
| 8.ACC 423 complete/Wk 2 LT CA 16-4.doc |
| 9.ACC 423 complete/Wk 2 Weekly Reflection Paper.doc |
| 10.ACC 423 complete/Wk 3 DQ 1.doc |
| 11.ACC 423 complete/Wk 3 DQ 2.doc |
| 12.ACC 423 complete/Wk 3 LT CA 17-1.doc |
| 13.ACC 423 complete/Wk 3 Weekly Reflection Paper.doc |
| 14.ACC 423 complete/Wk 4 DQ 1.doc |
| 15.ACC 423 complete/Wk 4 DQ 2.doc |
| 16.ACC 423 complete/Wk 4 Solution P19-3.doc |
| 17.ACC 423 complete/Wk 4 Weekly Reflection Paper.doc |
| 18.ACC 423 complete/Wk 5 DQ 1.doc |
| 19.ACC 423 complete/Wk 5 DQ 2.doc |
| 20.ACC 423 complete/Wk 5 Weekly Reflection Paper.doc |
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 423 FINAL EXAM
1) Proceeds from an issue of debt securities having stock warrants should NOT be allocated between debt and equity features when
A. the allocation would result in a discount on the debt security
B. the warrants issued with the debt securities are nondetachable
C. exercise of the warrants within the next few fiscal periods seems remote
D. the market value of the warrants is NOT readily available
2) The conversion of preferred stock may be recorded by the
A. market value method
B. par value method
C. book value method
D. incremental method
3) The conversion of preferred stock into common stock requires that any excess of the par value of the common shares issued over the carrying amount of the preferred being converted should be
A. treated as a prior period adjustment
B. treated as a direct reduction of retained earnings
C. reflected currently in income as an extraordinary item
D. reflected currently in income, but NOT as an extraordinary item
4) A primary source of stockholders’ equity is
A. contributions by stockholders
B. both income retained by the corporation and contributions by stockholders
C. appropriated retained earnings
D. income retained by the corporation
5) Stockholders’ equity is generally classified into two major categories:
A. retained earnings and unappropriated capital
B. earned capital and contributed capital
C. appropriated capital and retained earnings
D. contributed capital and appropriated capital
6) When a corporation issues its capital stock in payment for services, the least appropriate basis for recording the transaction is the
A. market value of the shares issued
B. Any of these provides an appropriate basis for recording the transaction
C. par value of the shares issued
D. market value of the services received
7) Treasury shares are
A. shares held as an investment by the treasurer of the corporation
B. issued but NOT outstanding shares
C. shares held as an investment of the corporation
D. issued and outstanding shares
8) “Gains” on sales of treasury stock (using the cost method) should be credited to
A. paid-in capital from treasury stock
B. other income
C. capital stock
D. retained earnings
9) How should a “gain” from the sale of treasury stock be reflected when using the cost method of recording treasury stock transactions?
A. As ordinary earnings shown on the income statement
B. As an extraordinary item shown on the income statement
C. As paid-in capital from treasury stock transactions
D. As an increase in the amount shown for common stock
10) In computing earnings per share, the equivalent number of shares of convertible preferred stock are added as an adjustment to the denominator (number of shares outstanding). If the preferred stock is cumulative, which amount should then be added as an adjustment to the numerator (net earnings)?
A. Annual preferred dividend
B. Annual preferred dividend divided by the income tax rate
C. Annual preferred dividend times (one minus the income tax rate)
D. Annual preferred dividend times the income tax rate
11) When computing diluted earnings per share, convertible bonds are
A. ignored
B. assumed converted only if they are dilutive
C. assumed converted whether they are dilutive or antidilutive
D. assumed converted only if they are antidilutive
12) What effect will the acquisition of treasury stock have on stockholders’ equity and earnings per share, respectively?
A. Decrease and no effect
B. Increase and decrease
C. Increase and no effect
D. Decrease and increase
13) On May 1, 2007, Kent Corp. declared and issued a 10% common stock dividend. Prior to this dividend, Kent had 100,000 shares of $1 par value common stock issued and outstanding. The fair value of Kent ‘s common stock was $20 per share on May 1, 2007. As a result of this stock dividend, Kent’s total stockholders’ equity
A. did NOT change
B. increased by $200,000
C. decreased by $10,000
D. decreased by $200,000
14) How would the declaration and subsequent issuance of a 10% stock dividend by the issuer affect each of the following when the market value of the shares exceeds the par value of the stock?
Additional Common Stock | Paid-in Capital
A. Increase | Increase
B. No effect | No effect
C. Increase | No effect
D. No effect | Increase
15) At its date of incorporation, Wilson, Inc. issued 100,000 shares of its $10 par common stock at $11 per share. During the current year, Wilson acquired 20,000 shares of its common stock at a price of $16 per share and accounted for them by the cost method. Subsequently, these shares were reissued at a price of $12 per share. There have been no other issuances or acquisitions of its own common stock. What effect does the reissuance of the stock have on the following accounts?
Retained Earnings | Additional Paid-in Capital
A. No effect | No effect
B. Decrease | Decrease
C. Decrease | No effect
D. No effect | Decrease
16) Which of the following is correct about the effective-interest method of amortization?
A. The effective-interest method produces a constant rate of return on the book value of the investment from period to period.
B. The effective interest method applied to investments in debt securities is different from that applied to bonds payable.
C. Amortization of a premium decreases from period to period.
D. Amortization of a discount decreases from period to period
17) An unrealized holding loss on a company’s available-for-sale securities should be reflected in the current financial statements as
A. other comprehensive income and deducted in the equity section of the balance sheet.
B. an extraordinary item shown as a direct reduction from retained earnings
C. a note or parenthetical disclosure only
D. a current loss resulting from holding securities
18) An unrealized holding gain on a company’s available-for-sale securities should be reflected in the current financial statements as
A. other comprehensive income and included in the equity section of the balance sheet.
B. an extraordinary item shown as a direct increase to retained earnings
C. a note or parenthetical disclosure only
D. a current gain resulting from holding securities
19) Investments in debt securities should be recorded on the date of acquisition at
A. face value plus brokerage fees and other costs incident to the purchase
B. lower of cost or market
C. market value plus brokerage fees and other costs incident to the purchase
D. market value
20) Securities which could be classified as held-to-maturity are
A. warrants
B. redeemable preferred stock
C. municipal bonds
D. treasury stock
21) Which of the following is NOT a debt security?
A. Commercial paper
B. Convertible bonds
C. Loans receivable
D. All of these are debt securities
22) An investor has a long-term investment in stocks. Regular cash dividends received by the investor are recorded as
Fair Value Method | Equity Method
A. A reduction of the investment | A reduction of the investment
B. Income | Income
C. Income | A reduction of the investment
D. A reduction of the investment | Income
23) When a company holds between 20% and 50% of the outstanding stock of an investee, which of the following statements applies?
A. The investor should use the equity method to account for its investment unless circum-stances indicate that it is unable to exercise “significant influence” over the investee
B. The investor should always use the equity method to account for its investment
C. The investor must use the fair value method unless it can clearly demonstrate the ability to exercise “significant influence” over the investee
D. The investor should always use the fair value method to account for its investment
24) Bista Corporation declares and distributes a cash dividend that is a result of current earnings. How will the receipt of those dividends affect the investment account of the investor under each of the following accounting methods?
Fair Value Method | Equity Method
A. Increase | Decrease
B. No Effect | Decrease
C. No Effect | No Effect
D. Decrease | No Effect
25) Debt securities that are accounted for at amortized cost, NOT fair value, are
A. trading debt securities
B. held-to-maturity debt securities
C. available-for-sale debt securities
D. never-sell debt securities
26) Equity securities acquired by a corporation which are accounted for by recognizing unrealized holding gains or losses as other comprehensive income and as a separate component of stockholders’ equity are
A. trading securities where a company has holdings of less than 20%
B. available-for-sale securities where a company has holdings of less than 20%
C. securities where a company has holdings of between 20% and 50%
D. securities where a company has holdings of more than 50%
27) Use of the effective-interest method in amortizing bond premiums and discounts results in
A. a smaller amount of interest income over the life of the bond issue than would result from use of the straight-line method
B. a greater amount of interest income over the life of the bond issue than would result from use of the straight-line method
C. a varying amount being recorded as interest income from period to period
D. a variable rate of return on the book value of the investment
28) All of the following are characteristics of a derivative financial instrument EXCEPT the instrument
A. All of these are characteristics
B. has one or more underlyings and an identified payment provision
C. requires a large investment at the inception of the contract
D. requires or permits net settlement
29) The accounting for fair value hedges records the derivative at its
A. historical cost
B. amortized cost
C. carrying value
D. fair value
30) All of the following statements regarding accounting for derivatives are correct EXCEPT that
A. gains and losses resulting from hedge transactions are reported in different ways, depending upon the type of hedge
B. they should be recognized in the financial statements as assets and liabilities
C. they should be reported at fair value
D. gains and losses resulting from speculation should be deferred
31) Taxable income of a corporation differs from pretax financial income because of
Permanent Differences | Temporary Differences
A. Yes | No
B. No | No
C. No | Yes
D. Yes | Yes
32) The rationale for interperiod income tax allocation is to
A. adjust income tax expense on the income statement to be in agreement with income taxes payable on the balance sheet
B. recognize a tax asset or liability for the tax consequences of temporary differences that exist at the balance sheet date
C. recognize a distribution of earnings to the taxing agency
D. reconcile the tax consequences of permanent and temporary differences appearing on the current year’s financial statements
33) Interperiod income tax allocation causes
A. tax expense in the income statement to be presented with the specific revenues causing the tax
B. tax expense shown on the income statement to equal the amount of income taxes payable for the current year plus or minus the change in the deferred tax asset or liability balances for the year.
C. tax expense shown in the income statement to bear a normal relation to the tax liability
D. tax liability shown in the balance sheet to bear a normal relation to the income before tax reported in the income statement
34) At the December 31, 2007 balance sheet date, Garth Brooks Corporation reports an accrued receivable for financial reporting purposes but NOT for tax purposes. When this asset is recovered in 2008, a future taxable amount will occur and
A. Garth will record a decrease in a deferred tax liability in 2008
B. pretax financial income will exceed taxable income in 2008
C. Garth will record an increase in a deferred tax asset in 2008
D. total income tax expense for 2008 will exceed current tax expense for 2008
35) Which of the following differences would result in future taxable amounts?
A. Revenues or gains that are taxable before they are recognized in financial income
B. Expenses or losses that are tax deductible after they are recognized in financial income
C. Expenses or losses that are tax deductible before they are recognized in financial income
D. Revenues or gains that are recognized in financial income but are never included in taxable income
36) Which of the following are temporary differences that are normally classified as expenses or losses that are deductible after they are recognized in financial income?
A. Product warranty liabilities
B. Advance rental receipts
C. Fines and expenses resulting from a violation of law
D. Depreciable property
37) In a defined-contribution plan, a formula is used that
A. ensures that pension expense and the cash funding amount will be different
B. defines the benefits that the employee will receive at the time of retirement
C. ensures that employers are at risk to make sure funds are available at retirement
D. requires an employer to contribute a certain sum each period based on the formula
38) In accounting for a defined-benefit pension plan
A. the employer’s responsibility is simply to make a contribution each year based on the formula established in the plan
B. an appropriate funding pattern must be established to ensure that enough monies will be available at retirement to meet the benefits promised
C. the liability is determined based upon known variables that reflect future salary levels promised to employees
D. the expense recognized each period is equal to the cash contribution
39) Which of the following is NOT a characteristic of a defined-contribution pension plan?
A. The benefits to be received by employees are defined by the terms of the plan
B. The employer’s contribution each period is based on a formula
C. The benefit of gain or the risk of loss from the assets contributed to the pension fund are borne by the employee
D. The accounting for a defined-contribution plan is straightforward and uncomplicated
40) In accounting for a pension plan, any difference between the pension cost charged to expense and the payments into the fund should be reported as
A. a charge or credit to unrealized appreciation and depreciation
B. an offset to the liability for prior service cost
C. accrued or prepaid pension cost
D. an accrued actuarial liability
41) The projected benefit obligation is the measure of pension obligation that
A. is NOT sanctioned under generally accepted accounting principles for reporting the service cost component of pension expense
B. is required to be used for reporting the service cost component of pension expense
C. requires pension expense to be determined solely on the basis of the plan formula applied to years of service to date and based on existing salary levels
D. requires the longest possible period for funding to maximize the tax deduction
42) The relationship between the amount funded and the amount reported for pension expense is as follows:
A. pension expense may be greater than, equal to, or less than the amount funded
B. pension expense must equal the amount funded
C. pension expense will be less than the amount funded
D. pension expense will be more than the amount funded
43) On January 1, 2008, Pratt Corp. adopted a defined-benefit pension plan. The plan’s service cost of $300,000 was fully funded at the end of 2008. Prior service cost was funded by a contribution of $120,000 in 2008. Amortization of prior service cost was $48,000 for 2008. What is the amount of Pratt’s prepaid pension cost at December 31, 2008?
A. $180,000
B. $72,000
C. $120,000
D. $168,000
44) Reser Corp., a company whose stock is publicly traded, provides a noncontributory defined-benefit pension plan for its employees. The company’s actuary has provided the following information for the year ended December 31, 2008:
Projected benefit obligation$600,000
Accumulated benefit obligation525,000
Fair value of plan assets825,000
Service cost240,000
Interest on projected benefit obligation24,000
Amortization of unrecognized prior service cost60,000
Expected and actual return on plan assets82,500
The market-related asset value equals the fair value of plan assets. Prior contributions to the defined-benefit pension plan equaled the amount of net periodic pension cost accrued for the previous year end. No contributions have been made for 2008 pension cost. In its December 31, 2008 balance sheet, Reser should report an accrued pension cost of
A. $217,500
B. $406,500
C. $324,000.
D. $241,500
45) Effective January 1, 2007, Quayle Co. established a defined-benefit plan with no retro-active benefits. The first of the required equal annual contributions was paid on December 31, 2007. A 10% discount rate was used to calculate service cost and a 10% rate of return was assumed for plan assets. All information on covered employees for 2007 and 2008 is the same. How should the service cost for 2008 compare with 2007, and should the 2007 balance sheet report an accrued or a prepaid pension cost?
Service Cost for 2008 Compared to 2007 | Pension Cost Reported on the 2007 Balance Sheet
A. Greater than | Prepaid
B. Equal to | Accrued
C. Equal to | Prepaid
D. Greater than | Accrued
46) On January 1, 2005, Foley Corporation acquired machinery at a cost of $250,000. Foley adopted the double-declining balance method of depreciation for this machinery and had been recording depreciation over an estimated useful life of ten years, with no residual value. At the beginning of 2008, a decision was made to change to the straight-line method of depreciation for the machinery. The depreciation expense to be recorded for the machinery in 2008 is (round to the nearest dollar)
A. $25,000
B. $25,600
C. $18,286
D. $22,857
47) During 2008, a construction company changed from the completed-contract method to the percentage-of-completion method for accounting purposes but NOT for tax purposes. Gross profit figures under both methods for the past three years appear below:
Completed-ContractPercentage-of-Completion
2006$ 475,000$ 800,000
2007625,000950,000
2008700,0001,050,000
$1,800,000$2,800,000
Assuming an income tax rate of 40% for all years, the effect of this accounting change on prior periods should be reported by a credit of
A. $390,000 on the 2008 income statement
B. $600,000 on the 2008 income statement
C. $390,000 on the 2008 retained earnings statement
D. $600,000 on the 2008 retained earnings statement
48) Accrued salaries payable of $51,000 were NOT recorded at December 31, 2007. Office supplies on hand of $24,000 at December 31, 2008 were erroneously treated as expense instead of supplies inventory. Neither of these errors was discovered nor corrected. The effect of these two errors would cause
A. 2007 net income and December 31, 2007 retained earnings to be understated $51,000 each
B. 2008 net income to be understated $75,000 and December 31, 2008 retained earnings to be understated $24,000
C. 2008 net income and December 31, 2008 retained earnings to be understated $24,000 each
D. 2007 net income to be overstated $27,000 and 2008 net income to be understated $24,000
49) The estimated life of a building that has been depreciated 30 years of an originally estimated life of 50 years has been revised to a remaining life of 10 years. Based on this information, the accountant should
A. depreciate the remaining book value over the remaining life of the asset
B. continue to depreciate the building over the original 50-year life
C. adjust accumulated depreciation to its appropriate balance through retained earnings, based on a 40-year life, and then depreciate the adjusted book value as though the estimated life had always been 40 years
D. adjust accumulated depreciation to its appropriate balance, through net income, based on a 40-year life, and then depreciate the adjusted book value as though the estimated life had always been 40 years
50) Which type of accounting change should always be accounted for in current and future periods?
A. Change in reporting entity
B. Change in accounting principle
C. Correction of an error
D. Change in accounting estimate
51) When a company decides to switch from the double-declining balance method to the straight-line method, this change should be handled as a
A. change in accounting estimate
B. change in accounting principle
C. correction of an error
D. prior period adjustment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. no-par stock should be carried in the accounts at issue price without any additional paid-in capital reported.
2. Companies should record stock issued for services or noncash property at either the fair value of the stock issued or the fair value of the consideration received.
3. A primary source of stockholders’ equity is
4. Direct costs incurred to sell stock such as underwriting costs should be accounted for as
1. a reduction of additional paid-in capital.
2. an expense of the period in which the stock is issued.
3. an intangible asset.
5. When treasury stock is purchased for more than the par value of the stock and the cost method is used to account for treasury stock, what account(s) should be debited?
6. Chang Corporation issued $6,000,000 of 9%, ten-year convertible bonds on July 1, 2012 at 96.1 plus accrued interest. The bonds were dated April 1, 2012 with interest payable April 1 and October 1. Bond discount is amortized semiannually on a straight-line basis. On April 1, 2013, $1,200,000 of these bonds were converted into 500 shares of $20 par value common stock. Accrued interest was paid in cash at the time of conversion.
If “interest payable” were credited when the bonds were issued, what should be the amount of the debit to “interest expense” on October 1, 2012?
7. Chang Corporation issued $6,000,000 of 9%, ten-year convertible bonds on July 1, 2012 at 96.1 plus accrued interest. The bonds were dated April 1, 2010 with interest payable April 1 and October 1. Bond discount is amortized semiannually on a straight-line basis. On April 1, 2013, $1,200,000 of these bonds were converted into 500 shares of $20 par value common stock. Accrued interest was paid in cash at the time of conversion.
What was the effective interest rate on the bonds when they were issued?
8. In 2012, Eklund, Inc., issued for $103 per share, 80,000 shares of $100 par value convertible preferred stock. One share of preferred stock can be converted into three shares of Eklund’s $25 par value common stock at the option of the preferred stockholder. In August 2013, all of the preferred stock was converted into common stock. The market value of the common stock at the date of the conversion was $30 per share. What total amount should be credited to additional paid-in capital from common stock as a result of the conversion of the preferred stock into common stock?
9. On May 1, 2012, Payne Co. issued $500,000 of 7% bonds at 103, which are due on April 30, 2022. Twenty detachable stock warrants entitling the holder to purchase for $40 one share of Payne’s common stock, $15 par value, were attached to each $1,000 bond. The bonds without the warrants would sell at 96. On May 1, 2012, the fair value of Payne’s common stock was $35 per share and of the warrants was $2.
On May 1, 2012, Payne should record the bonds with a
10. On May 1, 2012, Marly Co. issued $1,000,000 of 7% bonds at 103, which are due on April 30, 2022. Twenty detachable stock warrants entitling the holder to purchase for $40 one share of Marly’s common stock, $15 par value, were attached to each $1,000 bond. The bonds without the warrants would sell at 96. On May 1, 2012, the fair value of Marly’s common stock was $35 per share and of the warrants was $2.
On May 1, 2012, Marly should credit Paid-in Capital from Stock Warrants for
11. Koehn Corporation accounts for its investment in the common stock of Sells Company under the equity method. Koehn Corporation should ordinarily record a cash dividend received from Sells as
12. When an investment in a held-to-maturity security is transferred to an available-for-sale security, the carrying value assigned to the available-for-sale security should be
13. All of the following statements regarding accounting for derivatives are correct except that
14. Which of the following are considered equity securities?
Convertible debt.
Redeemable preferred stock.
Call or put options.
15. Under U.S. GAAP, which of the following models may be used to determine if an investment is consolidated?
|
|
Risk-and-reward model
|
|
Voting-interest approach
|
16. A major distinction between temporary and permanent differences is
17. Which of the following differences would result in future taxable amounts?
18. Which of the following will not result in a temporary difference?
19. A company records an unrealized loss on short-term securities. This would result in what type of difference and in what type of deferred income tax?
|
|
Type of Difference
|
Deferred Tax
|
20. With regard to uncertain tax positions, the FASB requires that companies recognize a tax benefit when
21. The Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income (G/L) account is amortized only if it exceeds 10 percent of the larger of the beginning balances of the projected benefit obligation or the market-related plan assets value.
22. Under U.S. GAAP companies may either recognize actuarial gains and losses in income immediately or amortize them over the expected service lives of employees.
23. The projected benefit obligation is the measure of pension obligation that
24. Vested benefits
25. The interest on the projected benefit obligation component of pension expense
26. Ventura Corporation purchased machinery on January 1, 2012 for $840,000. The company used the sum-of-the-years’-digits method and no salvage value to depreciate the asset for the first two years of its estimated six-year life. In 2013, Ventura changed to the straight-line depreciation method for this asset. The following facts pertain:
|
|
|
2012
|
|
2013
|
|
Straight-line
|
|
$140,000
|
|
$140,000
|
|
Sum-of-the-years’-digits
|
|
240,000
|
|
200,000
|
Ventura is subject to a 40% tax rate. The cumulative effect of this accounting change on beginning retained earnings is
27. During 2013, a construction company changed from the completed-contract method to the percentage-of-completion method for accounting purposes but not for tax purposes. Gross profit figures under both methods for the past three years appear below:
|
|
|
Completed-Contract
|
|
Percentage-of-Completion
|
|
2011
|
|
|
$ 475,000
|
|
|
|
$ 700,000
|
|
|
2012
|
|
|
625,000
|
|
|
|
950,000
|
|
|
2013
|
|
|
700,000
|
|
|
|
1,050,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
$1,800,000
|
|
|
|
$2,700,000
|
|
Assuming an income tax rate of 40% for all years, the affect of this accounting change on prior periods should be reported by a credit of
28. On January 1, 2010, Nobel Corporation acquired machinery at a cost of $800,000. Nobel adopted the straight-line method of depreciation for this machine and had been recording depreciation over an estimated life of ten years, with no residual value. At the beginning of 2013, a decision was made to change to the double-declining balance method of depreciation for this machine.
The amount that Nobel should record as depreciation expense for 2013 is
29. Heinz Company began operations on January 1, 2012, and uses the FIFO method in costing its raw material inventory. Management is contemplating a change to the LIFO method and is interested in determining what effect such a change will have on net income. Accordingly, the following information has been developed:
|
Final Inventory
|
|
2012
|
|
2013
|
|
FIFO
|
|
$ 640,000
|
|
$ 712,000
|
|
LIFO
|
|
560,000
|
|
636,000
|
|
Net Income (computed under the FIFO method)
|
|
980,000
|
|
1,030,000
|
Based on the above information, a change to the LIFO method in 2013 would result in net income for 2013 of
30. Swift Company purchased a machine on January 1, 2010, for $500,000. At the date of acquisition, the machine had an estimated useful life of six years with no salvage. The machine is being depreciated on a straight-line basis. On January 1, 2013, Swift determined, as a result of additional information, that the machine had an estimated useful life of eight years from the date of acquisition with no salvage. An accounting change was made in 2013 to reflect this additional information.
Assume that the direct effects of this change are limited to the effect on depreciation and the related tax provision, and that the income tax rate was 30% in 2010, 2011, 2012, and 2013. What should be reported in Swift’s income statement for the year ended December 31, 2013, as the cumulative effect on prior years of changing the estimated useful life of the machine?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Brooks Corp. is a medium-sized corporation specializing in quarrying stone for building construction. The company has long dominated the market, at one time achieving a 70% market penetration. During prosperous years, the company s profits, coupled with a conservative dividend policy, resulted in funds available for outside investment. Over the years, Brooks has had a policy of investing idle cash in equity securities. In particular, Brooks has made periodic investments in the company s principal supplier, Norton Industries. Although the firm currently owns 12% of the outstanding common stock of Norton Industries, Brooks does not have significant influence over the operations of Norton Industries.
Cheryl Thomas has recently joined Brooks as assistant controller, and her first assignment is to prepare the 2012 year-end adjusting entries for the accounts that are valued by the fair value rule for financial reporting purposes. Thomas has gathered the following information about Brooks s pertinent accounts.
| 1. |
|
Brooks has trading securities related to Delaney Motors and Patrick Electric. During this fiscal year, Brooks purchased 100,000 shares of Delaney Motors for $1,400,000; these shares currently have a market value of $1,600,000. Brooks investment in Patrick Electric has not been profitable; the company acquired 50,000 shares of Patrick in April 2012 at $20 per share, a purchase that currently has a value of $720,000. |
| 2. |
|
Prior to 2012, Brooks invested $22,500,000 in Norton Industries and has not changed its holdings this year. This investment in Norton Industries was valued at $21,500,000 on December 31, 2011. Brooks 12% ownership of Norton Industries has a current market value of $22,225,000. |
For both classes of securities presented above, describe how the results of the valuation adjustments made to reflect the application of the fair value rule would be reflected in the body of and notes to Brooks 2012 financial statements. (Refer to Problem 17-8.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
|
Presented below are two independent situations.
Situation 1 Hatcher Cosmetics acquired 10% of the 215,000 shares of common stock of Ramirez Fashion at a total cost of $16 per share on March 18, 2012. On June 30, Ramirez declared and paid a $77,400 cash dividend. On December 31, Ramirez reported net income of $130,400 for the year. At December 31, the market price of Ramirez Fashion was $18 per share. The securities are classified as available-for-sale.
Situation 2 Holmes, Inc. obtained significant influence over Nadal Corporation by buying 27% of Nadal s 31,300 outstanding shares of common stock at a total cost of $10 per share on January 1, 2012. On June 15, Nadal declared and paid a cash dividend of $36,300. On December 31, Nadal reported a net income of $89,600 for the year.
Prepare all necessary journal entries in 2012 for both situations.(Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
|
|
|
|
.3
|
|
|
Cardinal Paz Corp. carries an account in its general ledger called Investments, which contained debits for investment purchases, and no credits, with the following descriptions.
|
Feb. 1, 2012
|
|
Sharapova Company common stock, $100 par, 200 shares
|
|
$41,500
|
|
April 1
|
|
U.S. government bonds, 10%, due April 1, 2022, interest payable April 1 and October 1, 112 bonds of $1,000 par each
|
|
112,000
|
|
July 1
|
|
McGrath Company 12% bonds, par $53,600, dated March 1, 2012, purchased at 104 plus accrued interest, interest payable annually on March 1, due March 1, 2032
|
|
57,888
|
(a) Prepare entries necessary to classify the amounts into proper accounts, assuming that all the securities are classified as available-for-sale.(Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
(b) Prepare the entry to record the accrued interest and the amortization of premium on December 31, 2012, using the straight-line method.(Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $2,500. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
(c) The fair values of the investments on December 31, 2012, were:
|
Sharapova Company common stock
|
|
$33,070
|
|
U.S. government bonds
|
|
147,900
|
|
McGrath Company bonds
|
|
58,620
|
What entry or entries, if any, would you recommend be made?(Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $2,500. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
(d) The U.S. government bonds were sold on July 1, 2013, for $120,650 plus accrued interest. Give the proper entry.(Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
|
|
|
Brooks Corp. is a medium-sized corporation specializing in quarrying stone for building construction. The company has long dominated the market, at one time achieving a 70% market penetration. During prosperous years, the company s profits, coupled with a conservative dividend policy, resulted in funds available for outside investment. Over the years, Brooks has had a policy of investing idle cash in equity securities. In particular, Brooks has made periodic investments in the company s principal supplier, Norton Industries. Although the firm currently owns 12% of the outstanding common stock of Norton Industries, Brooks does not have significant influence over the operations of Norton Industries.
Cheryl Thomas has recently joined Brooks as assistant controller, and her first assignment is to prepare the 2012 year-end adjusting entries for the accounts that are valued by the fair value rule for financial reporting purposes. Thomas has gathered the following information about Brooks s pertinent accounts.
|
1.
|
|
Brooks has trading securities related to Delaney Motors and Patrick Electric. During this fiscal year, Brooks purchased 100,000 shares of Delaney Motors for $1,400,000; these shares currently have a market value of $1,600,000. Brooks investment in Patrick Electric has not been profitable; the company acquired 50,000 shares of Patrick in April 2012 at $20 per share, a purchase that currently has a value of $720,000.
|
|
2.
|
|
Prior to 2012, Brooks invested $22,500,000 in Norton Industries and has not changed its holdings this year. This investment in Norton Industries was valued at $21,500,000 on December 31, 2011. Brooks 12% ownership of Norton Industries has a current market value of $22,225,000.
|
For both classes of securities presented above, describe how the results of the valuation adjustments made to reflect the application of the fair value rule would be reflected in the body of and notes to Brooks 2012 financial statements. (Refer to Problem 17-8.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
1) Proceeds from an issue of debt securities having stock warrants should NOT be allocated between debt and equity features when
|
|
A.
|
the allocation would result in a discount on the debt security.
|
|
B.
|
the warrants issued with the debt securities are nondetachable.
|
|
C.
|
exercise of the warrants within the next few fiscal periods seems remote.
|
|
D.
|
the market value of the warrants is NOT readily available.
|
|
|
|
|
2) The conversion of preferred stock may be recorded by the
|
|
A.
|
market value method.
|
|
B.
|
par value method.
|
|
C.
|
book value method.
|
|
D.
|
incremental method.
|
|
|
|
|
3) The conversion of preferred stock into common stock requires that any excess of the par value of the common shares issued over the carrying amount of the preferred being converted should be
|
|
A.
|
treated as a prior period adjustment.
|
|
B.
|
treated as a direct reduction of retained earnings.
|
|
C.
|
reflected currently in income as an extraordinary item.
|
|
D.
|
reflected currently in income, but NOT as an extraordinary item.
|
|
|
|
|
4) A primary source of stockholders’ equity is
|
|
A.
|
contributions by stockholders.
|
|
B.
|
both income retained by the corporation and contributions by stockholders.
|
|
C.
|
appropriated retained earnings.
|
|
D.
|
income retained by the corporation.
|
|
|
|
|
5) Stockholders’ equity is generally classified into two major categories:
|
|
A.
|
retained earnings and unappropriated capital.
|
|
B.
|
earned capital and contributed capital.
|
|
C.
|
appropriated capital and retained earnings.
|
|
D.
|
contributed capital and appropriated capital.
|
|
|
|
|
6) When a corporation issues its capital stock in payment for services, the least appropriate basis for recording the transaction is the
|
|
A.
|
market value of the shares issued.
|
|
B.
|
Any of these provides an appropriate basis for recording the transaction.
|
|
C.
|
par value of the shares issued.
|
|
D.
|
market value of the services received.
|
|
|
|
|
7) Treasury shares are
|
|
A.
|
shares held as an investment by the treasurer of the corporation.
|
|
B.
|
issued but NOT outstanding shares.
|
|
C.
|
shares held as an investment of the corporation.
|
|
D.
|
issued and outstanding shares.
|
|
|
|
|
8) “Gains” on sales of treasury stock (using the cost method) should be credited to
|
|
A.
|
paid-in capital from treasury stock.
|
|
B.
|
other income.
|
|
C.
|
capital stock.
|
|
D.
|
retained earnings.
|
|
|
|
|
9) How should a “gain” from the sale of treasury stock be reflected when using the cost method of recording treasury stock transactions?
|
|
A.
|
As ordinary earnings shown on the income statement.
|
|
B.
|
As an extraordinary item shown on the income statement.
|
|
C.
|
As paid-in capital from treasury stock transactions.
|
|
D.
|
As an increase in the amount shown for common stock.
|
|
|
|
|
10) In computing earnings per share, the equivalent number of shares of convertible preferred stock are added as an adjustment to the denominator (number of shares outstanding). If the preferred stock is cumulative, which amount should then be added as an adjustment to the numerator (net earnings)?
|
|
A.
|
Annual preferred dividend
|
|
B.
|
Annual preferred dividend divided by the income tax rate
|
|
C.
|
Annual preferred dividend times (one minus the income tax rate)
|
|
D.
|
Annual preferred dividend times the income tax rate
|
|
|
|
|
11) When computing diluted earnings per share, convertible bonds are
|
|
A.
|
ignored.
|
|
B.
|
assumed converted only if they are dilutive.
|
|
C.
|
assumed converted whether they are dilutive or antidilutive.
|
|
D.
|
assumed converted only if they are antidilutive.
|
|
|
|
|
12) What effect will the acquisition of treasury stock have on stockholders’ equity and earnings per share, respectively?
|
|
A.
|
Decrease and no effect
|
|
B.
|
Increase and decrease
|
|
C.
|
Increase and no effect
|
|
D.
|
Decrease and increase
|
|
|
|
|
13) On May 1, 2007, Kent Corp. declared and issued a 10% common stock dividend. Prior to this dividend, Kent had 100,000 shares of $1 par value common stock issued and outstanding. The fair value of Kent ‘s common stock was $20 per share on May 1, 2007. As a result of this stock dividend, Kent’s total stockholders’ equity
|
|
A.
|
did NOT change.
|
|
B.
|
increased by $200,000.
|
|
C.
|
decreased by $10,000.
|
|
D.
|
decreased by $200,000.
|
|
|
|
|
14) How would the declaration and subsequent issuance of a 10% stock dividend by the issuer affect each of the following when the market value of the shares exceeds the par value of the stock?
Additional Common Stock | Paid-in Capital
|
|
A.
|
Increase | Increase
|
|
B.
|
No effect | No effect
|
|
C.
|
Increase | No effect
|
|
D.
|
No effect | Increase
|
|
|
|
|
15) At its date of incorporation, Wilson, Inc. issued 100,000 shares of its $10 par common stock at $11 per share. During the current year, Wilson acquired 20,000 shares of its common stock at a price of $16 per share and accounted for them by the cost method. Subsequently, these shares were reissued at a price of $12 per share. There have been no other issuances or acquisitions of its own common stock. What effect does the reissuance of the stock have on the following accounts?
Retained Earnings | Additional Paid-in Capital
|
|
A.
|
No effect | No effect
|
|
B.
|
Decrease | Decrease
|
|
C.
|
Decrease | No effect
|
|
D.
|
No effect | Decrease
|
|
|
16) Which of the following is correct about the effective-interest method of amortization?
|
|
A.
|
The effective-interest method produces a constant rate of return on the book value of the investment from period to period.
|
|
B.
|
The effective interest method applied to investments in debt securities is different from that applied to bonds payable.
|
|
C.
|
Amortization of a premium decreases from period to period.
|
|
D.
|
Amortization of a discount decreases from period to period.
|
|
|
|
|
17) An unrealized holding loss on a company’s available-for-sale securities should be reflected in the current financial statements as
|
|
A.
|
other comprehensive income and deducted in the equity section of the balance sheet.
|
|
B.
|
an extraordinary item shown as a direct reduction from retained earnings.
|
|
C.
|
a note or parenthetical disclosure only.
|
|
D.
|
a current loss resulting from holding securities.
|
|
|
|
|
18) An unrealized holding gain on a company’s available-for-sale securities should be reflected in the current financial statements as
|
|
A.
|
other comprehensive income and included in the equity section of the balance sheet.
|
|
B.
|
an extraordinary item shown as a direct increase to retained earnings.
|
|
C.
|
a note or parenthetical disclosure only.
|
|
D.
|
a current gain resulting from holding securities.
|
|
|
|
|
19) Investments in debt securities should be recorded on the date of acquisition at
|
|
A.
|
face value plus brokerage fees and other costs incident to the purchase.
|
|
B.
|
lower of cost or market.
|
|
C.
|
market value plus brokerage fees and other costs incident to the purchase.
|
|
D.
|
market value.
|
|
|
|
|
20) Securities which could be classified as held-to-maturity are
|
|
A.
|
warrants.
|
|
B.
|
redeemable preferred stock.
|
|
C.
|
municipal bonds.
|
|
D.
|
treasury stock.
|
|
|
|
|
21) Which of the following is NOT a debt security?
|
|
A.
|
Commercial paper
|
|
B.
|
Convertible bonds
|
|
C.
|
Loans receivable
|
|
D.
|
All of these are debt securities.
|
|
|
|
|
22) An investor has a long-term investment in stocks. Regular cash dividends received by the investor are recorded as
Fair Value Method | Equity Method
|
|
A.
|
A reduction of the investment | A reduction of the investment
|
|
B.
|
Income | Income
|
|
C.
|
Income | A reduction of the investment
|
|
D.
|
A reduction of the investment | Income
|
|
|
|
|
23) When a company holds between 20% and 50% of the outstanding stock of an investee, which of the following statements applies?
|
|
A.
|
The investor should use the equity method to account for its investment unless circum-stances indicate that it is unable to exercise “significant influence” over the investee.
|
|
B.
|
The investor should always use the equity method to account for its investment.
|
|
C.
|
The investor must use the fair value method unless it can clearly demonstrate the ability to exercise “significant influence” over the investee.
|
|
D.
|
The investor should always use the fair value method to account for its investment.
|
|
|
|
|
24) Bista Corporation declares and distributes a cash dividend that is a result of current earnings. How will the receipt of those dividends affect the investment account of the investor under each of the following accounting methods?
Fair Value Method | Equity Method
|
|
A.
|
Increase | Decrease
|
|
B.
|
No Effect | Decrease
|
|
C.
|
No Effect | No Effect
|
|
D.
|
Decrease | No Effect
|
|
|
|
|
25) Debt securities that are accounted for at amortized cost, NOT fair value, are
|
|
A.
|
trading debt securities.
|
|
B.
|
held-to-maturity debt securities.
|
|
C.
|
available-for-sale debt securities.
|
|
D.
|
never-sell debt securities.
|
|
|
|
|
26) Equity securities acquired by a corporation which are accounted for by recognizing unrealized holding gains or losses as other comprehensive income and as a separate component of stockholders’ equity are
|
|
A.
|
trading securities where a company has holdings of less than 20%.
|
|
B.
|
available-for-sale securities where a company has holdings of less than 20%.
|
|
C.
|
securities where a company has holdings of between 20% and 50%.
|
|
D.
|
securities where a company has holdings of more than 50%.
|
|
|
|
|
27) Use of the effective-interest method in amortizing bond premiums and discounts results in
|
|
|
A. a smaller amount of interest income over the life of the bond issue than would result from use of the straight-line method.
|
|
|
B. a greater amount of interest income over the life of the bond issue than would result from use of the straight-line method.
|
|
|
C. a varying amount being recorded as interest income from period to period.
|
|
|
D. a variable rate of return on the book value of the investment.
|
|
|
|
|
28) All of the following are characteristics of a derivative financial instrument EXCEPT the instrument
|
|
A.
|
All of these are characteristics.
|
|
B.
|
has one or more underlyings and an identified payment provision.
|
|
C.
|
requires a large investment at the inception of the contract.
|
|
D.
|
requires or permits net settlement.
|
|
|
|
|
29) The accounting for fair value hedges records the derivative at its
|
|
A.
|
historical cost.
|
|
B.
|
amortized cost.
|
|
C.
|
carrying value.
|
|
D.
|
fair value.
|
|
|
|
|
30) All of the following statements regarding accounting for derivatives are correct EXCEPT that
|
|
A.
|
gains and losses resulting from hedge transactions are reported in different ways, depending upon the type of hedge.
|
|
B.
|
they should be recognized in the financial statements as assets and liabilities.
|
|
C.
|
they should be reported at fair value.
|
|
D.
|
gains and losses resulting from speculation should be deferred.
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.(TCO 2) Russell Company has the following projected account balances for June 30, 20X9:
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 60,000
|
Sales $ 800.000
|
800,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$ 100,000
|
Capital stock $ 400.000
|
400,000
|
|
Depreciation, factory
|
$ 36,000
|
Retained earnings
|
|
|
Inventories (5/31 & 6/30)
|
$ 180,000
|
Cash $ 56.000
|
56,000
|
|
Direct materials used
|
$ 210,000
|
Equipment, net $ 260.000
|
260,000
|
|
Office salaries
|
$ 92,000
|
Buildings, net $ 400.000
|
400,000
|
|
Insurance, factory
|
$ 4,000
|
Utilities, factory $ 16.000
|
16,000
|
|
Plant wages
|
$ 140,000
|
Selling expenses $ 50.000
|
50,000
|
|
Bonds payable
|
$ 160,000
|
Maintenance, factory $ 28.000
|
28,000
|
Prepare a budgeted income statement AND a budgeted balance sheet as of June 30, 20X9.
2.(TCO 5) Paul’s Medical Equipment Company manufactures hospital beds. Its most popular model, Deluxe, sells for $5,000. It has variable costs totaling $2,800 and fixed costs of $1,000 per unit, based on an average production run of 5,000 units. It normally has four production runs a year, with $500,000 in setup costs each time. Plant capacity can handle up to six runs a year for a total of 30,000 beds.
A competitor is introducing a new hospital bed similar to Deluxe that will sell for $4,000. Management believes it must lower the price to compete. Marketing believes that the new price will increase sales by 25% a year. The plant manager thinks that production can increase by 25% with the same level of fixed costs. The company sells all the Deluxe beds it can produce.
Question 1: What is the annual operating income from Deluxe at the price of $5,000?
Question 2: What is the annual operating income from Deluxe if the price is reduced to $4,000 and sales in units increase by 25%?
3.(TCO 7) Mercy Greeting Cards Incorporated is starting a new business venture and is in the process of evaluating its product lines. Information for one new product, traditional parchment grade cards, is as follows:
For 16 times each year, a new card design will be put into production. Each new design will require $100 in setup costs.
The parchment grade card product line incurred $75,000 in development costs and is expected to be produced over the next four years.
Direct costs of producing the designs average $0.50 each.
Indirect manufacturing costs are estimated at $50,000 per year.
Customer service expenses average $0.10 per card.
Current sales are expected to be 2,500 units of each card design. Each card sells for $3.50.
Sales units equal production units each year.
What is the total estimated life-cycle operating income?
4. (TCO 8) Motormart Company manufactures automobiles. The red car division sells its red cars for $25,000 each to the general public. The red cars have manufacturing costs of $12,500 each for variable and $5,000 each for fixed costs. The division’s total fixed manufacturing costs are $25,000,000 at the normal volume of 5,000 units.
The blue car division has been unable to meet the demand for its cars this year. It has offered to buy 1,000 cars from the red car division at the full cost of $16,000. The red car division has excess capacity and the 1,000 units can be produced without interfering with the outside sales of 5,000. The 6,000 volume is within the division’s relevant operating range.
Explain whether the red car division should accept the offer. Support your decision showing all calculations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Preview |
| 1.ACC 440 complete/Wk 1 DQ 1.doc |
| 2.ACC 440 complete/Wk 1 DQ 2.doc |
| 3.ACC 440 complete/Wk 1 DQ 3.doc |
| 4.ACC 440 complete/Wk 1 Summary.doc |
| 5.ACC 440 complete/Wk 1 Textbook Assignments.doc |
| 6.ACC 440 complete/Wk 2 DQ 1.doc |
| 7.ACC 440 complete/Wk 2 DQ 2.doc |
| 8.ACC 440 complete/Wk 2 DQ 3.doc |
| 9.ACC 440 complete/Wk 2 Summary.doc |
| 10.ACC 440 complete/Wk 2 Team Textbook Assignments Grades 2.xls |
| 11.ACC 440 complete/Wk 2 Team Textbook Assignments.xls |
| 12.ACC 440 complete/Wk 2 Textbook Assignments IASB DELIBERATIONS.doc |
| 13.ACC 440 complete/Wk 3 DQ 1.doc |
| 14.ACC 440 complete/Wk 3 DQ 2.doc |
| 15.ACC 440 complete/Wk 3 DQ 3.doc |
| 16.ACC 440 complete/Wk 3 Summary.doc |
| 17.ACC 440 complete/Wk 3 Team Textbook Assignments.doc |
| 18.ACC 440 complete/Wk 3 Textbook Assignments.xls |
| 19.ACC 440 complete/Wk 3.pdf |
| 20.ACC 440 complete/Wk 4 DQ 1.doc |
| 21.ACC 440 complete/Wk 4 DQ 2.doc |
| 22.ACC 440 complete/Wk 4 DQ 3.doc |
| 23.ACC 440 complete/Wk 4 Summary.doc |
| 24.ACC 440 complete/Wk 4 Team Textbook Assignments.doc |
| 25.ACC 440 complete/Wk 4 Textbook Assignments.doc |
| 26.ACC 440 complete/Wk 4 Textbook Assignments.xls |
| 27.ACC 440 complete/Wk 5 DQ 1.doc |
| 28.ACC 440 complete/Wk 5 DQ 2.doc |
| 29.ACC 440 complete/Wk 5 Summary.doc |
| 30.ACC 440 complete/Wk 5 Team Textbook Assignment.doc |
| 31.ACC 440 complete/Wk 5 Textbook Assignments.xls |
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 442 Final Exam
July 2013 Update
1) Which of the following is NOT considered cash for financial
reporting purposes?
2) What is the preferable presentation of accounts receivable from
officers, employees, or affiliated companies on a balance sheet?
3) Which of the following is considered cash?
4) If a company employs the gross method of recording accounts receivable from customers, then sales discounts taken should be reported as
5) Assuming that the ideal measure of short-term receivables in the
balance sheet is the discounted value of the cash to be received in the future,
failure to follow this practice usually does NOT make the balance sheet
misleading because
6) Which of the following methods of determining annual bad debt expense best achieves the matching concept?
7) The accountant for the Orion Sales Company is preparing the income statement for 2007 and the balance sheet at December 31, 2007. Orion uses the periodic inventory system. The January 1, 2007 merchandise inventory balance will appear
8) Eller Co. received merchandise on consignment. As of January 31, Eller included the goods in inventory, but did NOT record the transaction. The effect of this on its financial statements for January 31 would be
9. If the beginning inventory for 2006 is overstated, the effects of this error on cost of goods sold for 2006, net income for 2006, and assets at December 31, 2007, respectively, are
10) Assuming no beginning inventory, what can be said about the trend of inventory prices if cost of goods sold computed when inventory is valued using the FIFO method exceeds cost of goods sold when inventory is valued using the LIFO method?
11) Which method of inventory pricing best approximates specific identification of the actual flow of costs and units in most manufacturing situations?
12) All of the following costs should be charged against revenue in the period in which costs are incurred EXCEPT for
13) In no case can market in the lower-of-cost-or-market rule be more than
14) When the direct method is used to record inventory at market
15) An item of inventory purchased this period for $15.00 has been incorrectly written down to its current replacement cost of $10.00. It sells during the following period for $30.00, its normal selling price, with disposal costs of $3.00 and normal profit of $12.00. Which of the following statements is NOT true?
16) The retail inventory method is based on the assumption that the
17) A major advantage of the retail inventory method is that it
18) In 2006, Lucas Manufacturing signed a contract with a supplier to purchase raw materials in 2007 for $700,000. Before the December 31, 2006 balance sheet date, the market price for these materials dropped to $510,000. The journal entry to record this situation at December 31, 2006 will result in a credit that should be reported
19) The cost of land typically includes the purchase price and all of the following costs EXCEPT
20) Cotton Hotel Corporation recently purchased Holiday Hotel and the land on which it is located with the plan to tear down the Holiday Hotel and build a new luxury hotel on the site. The cost of the Holiday Hotel should be
21) If a corporation purchases a lot and building and subsequently tears down the building and uses the property as a parking lot, the proper accounting treatment of the cost of the building would depend on
22) The period of time during which interest must be capitalized ends when
23) Which of the following assets do NOT qualify for capitalization
of interest costs incurred during construction of the
assets?
24) When computing the amount of interest cost to be capitalized,
the concept of avoidable interest refers to
25) The King-Kong Corporation exchanges one plant asset for a
similar plant asset and gives cash in the exchange. The exchange is NOT expected
to cause a material change in the future cash flows for either entity. If a gain
on the disposal of the old asset is indicated, the gain
will
26) When a plant asset is acquired by issuance of common stock, the
cost of the plant asset is properly measured by the
27) The cost of a nonmonetary asset acquired in exchange for
another nonmonetary asset and the exchange has commercial substance is usually
recorded at
28) Which of the following principles best describes the conceptual
rationale for the methods of matching depreciation expense with
revenues?
29) If an industrial firm uses the units-of-production method for
computing depreciation on its only plant asset, factory machinery, the credit to
accumulated depreciation from period to period during the life of the firm
will
30) Which of the following most accurately reflects the concept of
depreciation as used in accounting?
31) Prentice Company purchased a depreciable asset for $200,000.
The estimated salvage ACC 422 Final Exam value is $20,000, and the estimated useful life is 10
years. The straight-line method will be used for depreciation. What is the
depreciation base of this asset?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Which of the following is NOT considered cash for financial
reporting purposes?
A. Coin, currency, and available funds
B. Money
orders, certified checks, and personal checks
C. Petty cash funds and change
funds
D. Postdated checks and I.O.U.’s
2) What is the preferable presentation of accounts receivable from
officers, employees, or affiliated companies on a balance sheet?
A. As assets
but separately from other receivables.
B. As offsets to capital.
C. As trade notes and accounts receivable if they otherwise qualify as current assets.
D. By means of footnotes only.
3) Which of the following is considered cash?
A. Money market
savings certificates
B. Certificates of deposit (CDs)
C. Postdated
checks
D. Money market checking accounts
4) If a company employs the gross method of recording accounts receivable from customers, then sales discounts taken should be reported as
A. an item of “other expense” in the income
statement
B. a deduction from accounts receivable in determining the net
realizable value of accounts receivable
C. a deduction from sales
in the income statement
D. sales discounts forfeited in the cost of goods sold section of the income
statement
5) Assuming that the ideal measure of short-term receivables in the
balance sheet is the discounted value of the cash to be received in the future,
failure to follow this practice usually does NOT make the balance sheet
misleading because
A. the allowance for uncollectible accounts includes a discount
element
B. the amount of the discount is NOT material
C. most short-term receivables are NOT interest-bearing
D. most receivables can be sold to a bank or factor
6) Which of the following methods of determining annual bad debt expense best achieves the matching concept?
A. Direct write-off
B. Percentage of average accounts receivable
C. Percentage of ending accounts receivable
D. Percentage of sales
7) The accountant for the Orion Sales Company is preparing the income statement for 2007 and the balance sheet at December 31, 2007. Orion uses the periodic inventory system. The January 1, 2007 merchandise inventory balance will appear
A. as an addition in the cost of goods sold section of the income statement and as a current asset on the balance sheet
B. only as an asset on the balance sheet
C. only in the cost of goods sold section of the income statement
D. as a deduction in the cost of goods sold section of the income
statement and as a current asset on the balance sheet
8) Eller Co. received merchandise on consignment. As of January 31, Eller included the goods in inventory, but did NOT record the transaction. The effect of this on its financial statements for January 31 would be
A. net income, current assets, and retained earnings were understated
B. net income, current assets, and retained earnings were overstated
C. net income was correct and current assets were understated
D. net income and current assets were overstated and current
liabilities were understated
9. If the beginning inventory for 2006 is overstated, the effects of this error on cost of goods sold for 2006, net income for 2006, and assets at December 31, 2007, respectively, are
A. understatement, overstatement, no effect
B. overstatement, understatement, overstatement
C. overstatement, understatement, no effect
D. understatement, overstatement, overstatement
10) Assuming no beginning inventory, what can be said about the trend of inventory prices if cost of goods sold computed when inventory is valued using the FIFO method exceeds cost of goods sold when inventory is valued using the LIFO method?
A. Price trend cannot be determined from information given
B. Prices decreased
C. Prices remained unchanged
D. Prices increased
The rest are in the attachment with solutions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| 1.ACC 455 complete/ACC455 Version 1.doc |
| 2.ACC 455 complete/Thumbs.db |
| 3.ACC 455 complete/Wk 1 DQ’s.doc |
| 4.ACC 455 complete/Wk 1 Tax Return Position Paper.doc |
| 5.ACC 455 complete/Wk 2 DQ’s.doc |
| 6.ACC 455 complete/Wk 2 Problem Set.doc |
| 7.ACC 455 complete/Wk 2 Team Outline.doc |
| 8.ACC 455 complete/Wk 3 DQ’s.doc |
| 9.ACC 455 complete/Wk 3 Team B Week Three Discussions and Problem Solutions.doc |
| 10.ACC 455 complete/Wk 4 DQ’s.doc |
| 11.ACC 455 complete/Wk 4 Problem Set.doc |
| 12.ACC 455 complete/Wk 4 Team B Outline.doc |
| 13.ACC 455 complete/Wk 5 DQ’s.doc |
| 14.ACC 455 complete/Wk 5 Team B Outline.doc |
| 15.ACC 455 complete/Wk 5 Team B Assignment.doc |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 455 Final Exam
JULY 2013 UPDATE
1) Which of the following statements regarding proposed regulations is not correct?
A. Proposed and temporary regulations are generally issued simultaneously.
B. Proposed regulations do not provide any insight into the IRS s interpretation of the tax law.
C. Proposed regulations expire after 3 years.
D. Practitioners and other interested parties may comment on proposed regulations.
2) Regulations are
A. presumed to be valid and to have almost the same weight as the IRC
B. equal in authority to legislation if interpretative
C. equal in authority to legislation
D. equal in authority to legislation if statutory
3) Which of the following courts is not a trial court for tax cases?
A. U.S. Tax Court
B. U.S. Court of Federal Claims
C. U.S. Bankruptcy Court
D. U.S. District Court
4) Which of the following statements is incorrect?
A. Limited partners liability for partnership debt is limited to their amount of investment.
B. In a general partnership, all partners have unlimited liability for partnership debts.
C. In a limited partnership, all partners participate in managerial decision-making.
D. All of the statements are correct.
5) Which of the following is an advantage of a sole proprietorship over other business forms?
A. Low tax rates on dividends
B. Ease of formation
C. Tax-exempt treatment of fringe benefits
D. The deduction for compensation paid to the owner
6) Which of the following statements is correct?
A. S shareholders are taxed on their proportionate share of earnings that are distributed.
B. S shareholders are taxed on their proportionate share of earnings whether or not distributed.
C. An owner of a C corporation is taxed on his or her proportionate share of earnings.
D. S shareholders are only taxed on distributions.
7) Three members form an LLC in the current year. Which of the following statements is incorrect?
A. The LLC can elect to be taxed as a C corporation with no special tax consequences.
B. If the LLC elects to use its default classification, it can elect to change its status to being taxed as a C corporation beginning with the third tax year after the initial classification.
C. The LLC s default classification under the check-the-box rules is as a partnership.
D. The LLC can elect to have its default classification ignored.
8) Identify which of the following statements is true.
A. Under the check-the-box regulations, an LLC that has one member (owner) may be disregarded as an entity separate from its owner.
B. An unincorporated business may not be taxed as a corporation.
C. A new LLC that is owned by four members elects to be taxed under its default classification (as a partnership) in its first year of operations. The entity is prohibited from changing its tax classification at any time in the future.
D. All are false.
9) Identify which of the following statements is true.
A. The check-the-box regulations permit an LLC to be taxed as a C corporation.
B. Under the check-the-box regulations, an LLC that has only two members (owners) default classification is as a partnership.
C. Once an election is made to change its classification, an entity cannot change again for 60 months.
D. All of the statements are true.
10) Rose and Wayne form a new corporation. Rose contributes cash for 85% of the stock and Wayne contributes services for 15% of the stock. The tax effect is
A. Rose and Wayne are not required to recognize their realized gains.
B. Wayne must report the FMV of the stock received as capital gain.
C. Rose and Wayne must recognize their realized gains, if any.
D. Wayne must report the FMV of the stock received as ordinary income.
11) Matt and Sheila form Krupp Corporation. Matt contributes property with a FMV of $55,000 and a basis of $35,000. Sheila contributes property with a FMV of $75,000 and a basis of $40,000. Matt sells his stock to Paul shortly after the exchange. The transaction will
A. qualify with respect to Sheila under Sec. 351 whether Matt qualifies or not
B. qualify under Sec. 351 if Matt can show the sale to Paul was not part of a prearranged plan
C. not qualify under Sec. 351
D. qualify under Sec. 351 only if an advance ruling has been obtained
12) For Sec. 351 purposes the term property does not include
13) Identify which of the following statements is true.
14) A new corporation may generally select one of the following accounting methods with the exception of
15) Identify which of the following statements is false.
16) Edison Corporation is organized on July 31. The corporation starts business on August 10. The corporation adopts a November 30 fiscal year end. The following expenses are incurred during the year:
Date Type Amount
6-30 Attorneys fees associated with obtaining charter $10,000
7-10 Underwriter fees for stock sale 25,000
7-15 Transfer cost for property contributed to the corporation for stock 3,000
6-30 Costs of organizational meetings 2,000
12-6 Legal fees to modify charter 4,000
What is the maximum amount of organizational expenditures that can be deducted by the corporation for its first tax year ending November 30?
17) Maxwell Corporation reports the following results:
Gross income from operations $ 90,000
Dividends received from 18%-owned domestic corporation 70,000
Expenses 100,000
Maxwell s dividends-received deduction is
18) Island Corporation has the following income and expense items for the year.
Gross receipts from sales $60,000
Dividends received from 15%-owned domestic corporation 40,000
Expenses connected with sales 30,000
The taxable income of Island Corporation is
19) Which of the following is not an adjustment in calculating AMTI?
20) Tax-exempt interest income on state and local municipal bonds which are not a private activity is
21) Which of the following statements about the alternative minimum tax depreciation rules is correct?
22) Maxwell Corporation reports the following results:
Year Current E&P Distributions
2005 $6,000 $4,000
2006 5,000 1,000
2007 1,000 -0-
Maxwell s dividends-received deduction is
23) Grant Corporation sells land (a noninventory item) with a basis of $57,000 for $100,000. Nichole will be paid on an installment basis in five equal annual payments starting in the current year. The E&P for the year of sale will be increased as a result of the sale (excluding federal income taxes) by
24) Identify which of the following statements is false.
25) Identify which of the following statements is true.
26) Identify which of the following statements is true.
27) For purposes of determining current E&P, which of the following items cannot be deducted in the year incurred?
28) A corporation distributes land and the related liability to Meg, its sole shareholder. The land has a FMV of $60,000 and is subject to a liability of $70,000. The corporation has current and accumulated E&P of $80,000. The corporation s adjusted basis for the property is $70,000. What effect does the transaction have on the corporation?
29) Hogg Corporation distributes $30,000 to its sole shareholder, Ima. At the time of the distribution, Hoggs E&P is $14,000 and Ima s basis in her stock is $10,000. Ima s gain from this transaction is
30) One consequence of a property distribution by a corporation to a shareholder is
A. the shareholder s basis in the distributed property is the same as the distributing corporation s basis
B. the amount of the distribution is increased by any liability assumed by the shareholder
C. the holding period of the distributed property includes the holding period of the distributing corporation
D. any liabilities assumed by the shareholder do not reduce the shareholder s basis
31) Which of the following is not a reason for a stock redemption?
32) Elijah owns 20% of Park Corporation s single class of stock. Elijah s basis in the stock is $8,000. Park s E&P is $28,000. If Park redeems all of Elijah s stock for $48,000, Elijah must report dividend income of
33) Which of the following is not a condition that permits a stock redemption to be treated as a sale?
34) Identify which of the following statements is true.
35) Identify which of the following statements is true.
36) The definition of a partnership does not include
37) Which of the following items is not separately stated for an S corporation?
38) Cactus Corporation, an S Corporation, had accumulated earnings and profits of $100,000 at the beginning of 2008. Tex and Shirley each own 50% of the stock. Cactus does not make any distributions during 2008, but had $200,000 of ordinary income. In 2009, ordinary income was $100,000 and distributions were $100,000. What is Tex s ordinary income for 2008?
39) Cactus Corporation, an S Corporation, had accumulated earnings and profits of $100,000 at the beginning of 2008. Tex and Shirley each own 50% of the stock. Cactus does not make any distributions during 2008, but had $200,000 of ordinary income. In 2009, ordinary income was $100,000 and distributions were $100,000. What is Tex s ordinary income for 2009?
40) On January 1, Helmut pays $2,000 for a 10% capital, profits and loss interest in a partnership, which has recourse liabilities of $20,000. The partners share economic risk of loss from recourse liabilities in the same way they share partnership losses. In the same year, the partnership incurs losses of $6,000 and the recourse liabilities increase by $5,000. Helmut and the partnership use a calendar tax year-end. Helmut s basis at year-end is
41) On January 2 of the current year, Calloway and Taylor contribute cash equally to form the CT Partnership. Calloway and Taylor share profits and losses in a ratio of 75% and 25%, respectively. The partnership s ordinary income for the year was $40,000. Calloway received a distribution of $5,000 during the year. What is Calloway s share of taxable income for the year?
42) On the first day of the partnership s tax year, Karen purchases a 50% interest in a general partnership for $30,000 cash and she materially participates in the operation of the partnership for the entire year. The partnership has $40,000 in recourse liabilities when Karen enters the partnership. Partners share the economic risk of loss from recourse liabilities in the same way they share partnership losses. There is no minimum gain related to the nonrecourse liability. During the year the partnership incurs a $120,000 loss and a $20,000 increase in liabilities. How much of the loss can Karen report on her tax return for the current year?
43) The total bases of all distributed property in the partner s hands following a nonliquidating distribution is limited to
44) The Internal Revenue Code includes which of the following assets in the definition of Sec. 751 properties?
45) Identify which of the following statements is true.
46) Which of the following conditions will not cause an S election to be terminated?
47) Identify which of the following statements is true.
48) Identify which of the following statements is false.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
TAX STRATEGY PROBLEM
Pedro Bourbone is the founder and owner of a highly successful small business and, over the past several years, has accumulated a significant amount of personal wealth. His portfolio of stocks and bonds is worth nearly $5,000,000 and generates income from dividends and interest of nearly $250,000 per year. With his salary from the business and his dividends and interest, Pedro has taxable income of approximately $600,000 per year and is clearly in the top individual marginal tax bracket. Pedro is married and has three children, ages 16, 14, and 12. Neither his wife nor his children are employed and have no income. Pedro has come to you as his CPA to discuss ways to reduce his individual tax liability as well as to discuss the potential estate tax upon his death. You mention the possibility of making gifts each year to his children. 1:1-48
Explain how annual gifts to his children will reduce both his income during lifetime and his estate tax at death.
CASE STUDY PROBLEM
John Gemstone, a wealthy client, has recently been audited by the IRS. The agent has questioned the following deduction items on Mr. Gemstone s tax return for the year under review:1-49 I:
A $10,000 loss deduction on the rental of his beach cottage.
A $20,000 charitable contribution deduction for the donation of a painting to a local art museum. The agent has questioned whether the painting is overvalued.
A $15,000 loss deduction from the operation of a cattle breeding ranch. The agent is concerned that the ranch is not a legitimate business (i.e., is a hobby).
Your supervisor has requested that you represent Mr. Gemstone in his discussions with the IRS.
a.What additional questions should you ask Mr. Gemstone in an attempt to substantiate the deductibility of the above items?
b. What tax research procedures might be applied to build the best possible case for your client?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 499 Final Project
Preparing Annual Report Documents
For this 4-5 page project, you will create the Financial Highlights, Presidents Letter to the Stockholders and Management Discussion and Analysis reports that would be contained in a company s annual report.
Companies normally issue these reports to the stockholders and other interested parties. These reports summarize the company s operating activities for the past year and plans for the future. There are many variations in the order and form for presenting the major sections of the annual report. Each week you will be addressing a different aspect of accounting and the business planning process. In the final project, you will use information gained from the weekly projects along with information obtained through research. These reports will be completed in Microsoft Word following APA format, and will require you to disclose your references. VERY IMPORTANT NOTE: For purposes of this Final Project, you will use the Financial Data and ratios for the Rainbow Paint Company. This data is found in Unit 4 and is the Review problem. That data includes a Comparative Balance Sheet, Income Statement and Statement of retained Earnings. You were given an opportunity to complete 19 different ratios for the Practice Set. All of that information is available for inclusion in this Final Project. You will NOT be using the Quixote Company data in this Final Project. The Rainbow Paint Company financial data and ratios will offer a much broader opportunity to present a more robust Annual Report than the Quixote Company data would. The Rainbow Paint Company data includes a full set of comparative financial statements for 2 years, whereas the Quixote Company data only presents start-up data for one month of operation.
Assignment checklist
Financial Highlights
Presidents Letter to the Stockholders
Management Discussion and Analysis
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Below you will find selected information (in millions) from Coca-Cola Co. s 2012 Annual Report: Income Taxes Payable $471 Short-term Investments and Marketable Securities 8,109 Cash 8,442 Other non-current Liabilities 10,449 Common Stock 1,760 Receivables 4,812 Other Current Assets 2,973 Long-term Investments 10,448 Other Non-current Assets 3,585 Property, Plant and Equipment 23,486 Trademarks 6,527 Other Intangible Assets 20,810 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 53 Accumulated Depreciation 9,010 Accounts Payable 8,680 Short Term Notes Payable 17,874 Prepaid Expenses 2,781 Other Current Liabilities 796 Long-Term Liabilities 14,736 Paid-in-Capital in Excess of Par Value 11,379 Retained Earnings 55,038 Inventories 3,264 Treasury Stock 35,009 Other information taken from the Annual Report: Sales Revenue for 2012 $48,017 Cost of Goods Sold for 2012 19,053 Net Income for 2012 9,019 Inventory Balance on 12/31/11 3,092 Net Accounts Receivable Balance on 12/31/11 4,920 Total Assets on 12/31/11 79,974 Equity Balance on 12/31/11 31,921 Required:
1. Using the information provided prepare a Balance Sheet. Separate the current assets from non-current assets and provide a total for each. Also separate the current liabilities from the non-current liabilities and provide a total for each.
2. Using the Balance Sheet from your answer above calculate; Current Ratio, Days in Inventory, Average Collection Period, Return on Assets Ratio, Debt to Total Assets and Return on common stockholders equity ratio. (Make sure to show all your work) (Points : 36)
2. The following selected data was retrieved from the Wal-Mart, Inc. financial statements for the year ending January 31, 2013: Accounts Payable $38,080 Accounts Receivable 6,768 Cash 7,781 Common Stock 3,952 Cost of Goods Sold 352,488 Income Tax Expense 7,981 Interest Expenses 2,064 Membership Revenues 3,048 Net Sales 466,114 Operating, Selling and Administrative Expenses 88,873 Retained Earnings 72,978 Required: Using the information provided above: 1. Prepare a multiple-step income statement 2. Calculate the Profit Margin, and Gross profit rate for the company. Be sure to provide the formula you are using, show your calculations, and discuss your findings/results. (Points : 36)
(TCO C) Please review the following real-world Hewlett Packard Statement of Cash flows and address the 2 questions below:
|
Cash flow from operating activities
|
In millions
|
In millions
|
|
For the year ended 2012
|
For the year ended 2011
|
|
Net (loss) earnings
|
$(12,650)
|
$7,074
|
|
Depreciation and amortization
|
5,095
|
4,984
|
|
Impairment of goodwill and purchased intangible assets
|
18,035
|
885
|
|
Stock-based compensation expense
|
635
|
685
|
|
Provision for doubtful accounts
|
142
|
81
|
|
Provision for inventory
|
277
|
217
|
|
Restructuring charges
|
2,266
|
645
|
|
Deferred taxes on earnings
|
(711)
|
166
|
|
Excess tax benefit from stock-based competition
|
(12)
|
(163)
|
|
Other, net
|
265
|
(46)
|
|
Accounts and financing receivables
|
1,269
|
(227)
|
|
Inventory
|
890
|
(1,252)
|
|
Accounts payable
|
(1,414)
|
275
|
|
Taxes on earnings
|
(320)
|
610
|
|
Restructuring
|
(840)
|
(1,002)
|
|
Other assets and liabilities
|
(2,356)
|
(293)
|
|
Net cash provided by operating activities
|
10,571
|
12,639
|
|
Cash flows from investing activities:
|
|
|
|
Investment in property, plant, and equipment
|
(3,706)
|
(4,539)
|
|
Proceeds from sale of property, plant, and equipment
|
617
|
999
|
|
Purchases of available-for-sale securities and other investments
|
(972)
|
(96)
|
|
Maturities and sales of available-for-sale securities and other investment
|
662
|
68
|
|
Payments in connection with business acquisitions, net of cash acquired
|
(141)
|
(10,480)
|
|
Proceeds from business divestiture, net
|
87
|
89
|
|
Net cash used in investing activities
|
(3,453)
|
(13,959)
|
|
Cash flow from financing activities:
|
|
|
|
(Payments) issuance of commercial paper and notes payable, net
|
(2,775)
|
(1,270)
|
|
Issuance of debt
|
5,154
|
11,942
|
|
Payment of debt
|
(4,333)
|
(2,336)
|
|
Issuance of common stock under employee stock plans
|
716
|
896
|
|
Repurchase of common stock
|
(1,619)
|
(10,117)
|
|
Excess tax benefit from stock-based compensation
|
12
|
163
|
|
Cash dividends paid
|
(1,015)
|
(844)
|
|
Net cash used in financing activities
|
(3,860)
|
(1,566)
|
|
Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
|
3,258
|
(2,886)
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period
|
8,043
|
10,929
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period
|
$11,301
|
$8,043
|
Required:
1) Please calculate the percentage increase or decrease in cash for the operating, investing, and financing sections and explain the major reasons for the increase or decrease for each of these sections.
) 2. Please calculate the free cash flow for 2012 and explain the meaning of this ratio.
You are CFO of Goforit, Inc., a wholesale distribution company specializing in emerging technologies. Your CEO is a brilliant marketer, but relies on you to explain issues and choices in accounting and finance. She has heard from other members of a CEO organization to which she belongs that a company s net income can vary widely depending on which accounting choices are made from the GAAP menu.
Assuming the goal is to maximize net income, choose an accounting treatment from each of the following scenarios, and explain to your CEO why the choice will produce the desired effect on reported Net Income for the current year. Include in your answer the effect of the choice on both the income statement and balance sheet.
Required:
Goforit carries significant electronics inventory in a competitive environment where prices are actually falling. Which inventory valuation method would you choose LIFO, FIFO, or average cost? Assume that unit purchases exceed unit sales.
b. Goforit has a large investment in warehouse equipment including conveyor belts, forklifts, and automated packaging systems. Which depreciation method would you choose: Straight line (SL) or double declining balance (DDB)?
5. (TCO F) Please review the following real-world ratios for Johnson & Johnson and Pfizer for the year ended 2012 and address the 2 questions below
|
Ratio Name
|
Johnson & Johnson
|
Pfizer
|
|
Profit margin
|
16.1%
|
24.7%
|
|
Inventory turnover ratio
|
3.1
|
1.7
|
|
Average collection period
|
59.4 days
|
69.1 days
|
|
Cash debt coverage ratio
|
.27
|
.16
|
|
Debt to Total assets
|
46.6%
|
127.5%
|
Required:
1) Please explain the meaning of each of the Pfizer ratios above.
2) Please state which company performed better for each ratio.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
1.(TCO A) Below you will find selected information (in millions) from Coca-Cola Co. s 2012 Annual Report:
|
Income Taxes Payable
|
$471
|
|
Short-term Investments and Marketable Securities
|
8,109
|
|
Cash
|
8,442
|
|
Other non-current Liabilities
|
10,449
|
|
Common Stock
|
1,760
|
|
Receivables
|
4,812
|
|
Other Current Assets
|
2,973
|
|
Long-term Investments
|
10,448
|
|
Other Non-current Assets
|
3,585
|
|
Property, Plant and Equipment
|
23,486
|
|
Trademarks
|
6,527
|
|
Other Intangible Assets
|
20,810
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
53
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
9,010
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
8,680
|
|
Short Term Notes Payable
|
17,874
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
2,781
|
|
Other Current Liabilities
|
796
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
14,736
|
|
Paid-in-Capital in Excess of Par Value
|
11,379
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
55,038
|
|
Inventories
|
3,264
|
|
Treasury Stock
|
35,009
|
Other information taken from the Annual Report:
|
Sales Revenue for 2012
|
$48,017
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold for 2012
|
19,053
|
|
Net Income for 2012
|
9,019
|
|
Inventory Balance on 12/31/11
|
3,092
|
|
Net Accounts Receivable Balance on 12/31/11
|
4,920
|
|
Total Assets on 12/31/11
|
79,974
|
|
Equity Balance on 12/31/11
|
31,921
|
Required:
1. Using the information provided prepare a Balance Sheet. Separate the current assets from non-current assets and provide a total for each. Also separate the current liabilities from the non-current liabilities and provide a total for each.
2. Using the Balance Sheet from your answer above, calculate the Current Ratio and Return on common stockholders equity ratio. (Make sure to show all your work).
(Points : 36)
|
|
Question 2.2.
(TCO B) The following selected data was retrieved from the Wal-Mart, Inc. financial statements for the year ending January 31, 2013:
|
Accounts Payable
|
$38,080
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
6,768
|
|
Cash
|
7,781
|
|
Common Stock
|
3,952
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
352,488
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
7,981
|
|
Interest Expenses
|
2,064
|
|
Membership Revenues
|
3,048
|
|
Net Sales
|
466,114
|
|
Operating, Selling and Administrative Expenses
|
88,873
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
72,978
|
Required:
Using the information provided above:
1. Prepare a multiple-step income statement
2. Calculate the Profit Margin, and Gross profit rate for the company. Be sure to provide the formula you are using, show your calculations, and discuss your findings/results.
(Points : 36)
|
Ads not by this site
|
Question 3.3.(TCO C) Please review the following real-world Hewlett Packard Statement of Cash flows and address the 2 questions below:
|
Cash flow from operating activities
|
In millions
|
In millions
|
|
For the year ended 2012
|
For the year ended 2011
|
|
Net (loss) earnings
|
$(12,650)
|
$7,074
|
|
Depreciation and amortization
|
5,095
|
4,984
|
|
Impairment of goodwill and purchased intangible assets
|
18,035
|
885
|
|
Stock-based compensation expense
|
635
|
685
|
|
Provision for doubtful accounts
|
142
|
81
|
|
Provision for inventory
|
277
|
217
|
|
Restructuring charges
|
2,266
|
645
|
|
Deferred taxes on earnings
|
(711)
|
166
|
|
Excess tax benefit from stock-based competition
|
(12)
|
(163)
|
|
Other, net
|
265
|
(46)
|
|
Accounts and financing receivables
|
1,269
|
(227)
|
|
Inventory
|
890
|
(1,252)
|
|
Accounts payable
|
(1,414)
|
275
|
|
Taxes on earnings
|
(320)
|
610
|
|
Restructuring
|
(840)
|
(1,002)
|
|
Other assets and liabilities
|
(2,356)
|
(293)
|
|
Net cash provided by operating activities
|
10,571
|
12,639
|
|
Cash flows from investing activities:
|
|
|
|
Investment in property, plant, and equipment
|
(3,706)
|
(4,539)
|
|
Proceeds from sale of property, plant, and equipment
|
617
|
999
|
|
Purchases of available-for-sale securities and other investments
|
(972)
|
(96)
|
|
Maturities and sales of available-for-sale securities and other investment
|
662
|
68
|
|
Payments in connection with business acquisitions, net of cash acquired
|
(141)
|
(10,480)
|
|
Proceeds from business divestiture, net
|
87
|
89
|
|
Net cash used in investing activities
|
(3,453)
|
(13,959)
|
|
Cash flow from financing activities:
|
|
|
|
(Payments) issuance of commercial paper and notes payable, net
|
(2,775)
|
(1,270)
|
|
Issuance of debt
|
5,154
|
11,942
|
|
Payment of debt
|
(4,333)
|
(2,336)
|
|
Issuance of common stock under employee stock plans
|
716
|
896
|
|
Repurchase of common stock
|
(1,619)
|
(10,117)
|
|
Excess tax benefit from stock-based compensation
|
12
|
163
|
|
Cash dividends paid
|
(1,015)
|
(844)
|
|
Net cash used in financing activities
|
(3,860)
|
(1,566)
|
|
Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
|
3,258
|
(2,886)
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period
|
8,043
|
10,929
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period
|
$11,301
|
$8,043
|
Required:
1) Please calculate the percentage increase or decrease in cash for the total line of the operating, investing, and financing sections bolded above and explain the major reasons for the increase or decrease for each of these sections.
2) Please calculate the free cash flow for 2012 and explain the meaning of this ratio.
(Points : 36)
|
|
Question 4.4.(TCO D) You are CFO of Goforit, Inc., a wholesale distribution company specializing in emerging technologies. Your CEO is a brilliant marketer, but relies on you to explain issues and choices in accounting and finance. She has heard from other members of a CEO organization to which she belongs that a company s net income can vary widely depending on which accounting choices are made from the GAAP menu.
Assuming the goal is to maximize net income, choose an accounting treatment from each of the following scenarios, and explain to your CEO why the choice will produce the desired effect on reported Net Income for the current year. Include in your answer the effect of the choice on both the income statement and balance sheet.
Required:
a. Goforit carries significant electronics inventory in a competitive environment where prices are actually falling. Which inventory valuation method would you choose LIFO, FIFO, or average cost Assume that unit purchases exceed unit sales.
b. Goforit has a large investment in warehouse equipment including conveyor belts, forklifts, and automated packaging systems. Which depreciation method would you choose: Straight line (SL) or double declining balance (DDB)
(Points : 36)
|
Ads not by this site
|
Question 5.5.(TCO F) Please review the following real-world ratios for Johnson & Johnson and Pfizer for the year ended 2012 and address the 2 questions below.
|
Ratio Name
|
Johnson & Johnson
|
Pfizer
|
|
|
|
|
Profit margin
|
16.1%
|
24.7%
|
|
Inventory turnover ratio
|
3.1
|
1.7
|
|
Average collection period
|
59.4 days
|
69.1 days
|
|
Cash debt coverage ratio
|
.27
|
.16
|
|
Debt to Total assets
|
46.6%
|
127.5%
|
Required:
1) Please explain the meaning of each of the Pfizer ratios above.
2) Please state which company performed better for each ratio.
(Points : 36)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.Whether a company uses process costing or job-order costing depends on its industry. A number of companies in different industries are listed below:
i. Brick manufacturer
ii. Contract printer that produces posters, books, and pamphlets to order
iii. Natural gas production company
iv. Dairy farm
v. Coal mining company
vi. Specialty coffee roaster (roasts small batches of specialty coffee beans)
For each company, indicate whether the company is most likely to use job-order costing or process costing.
2.Job 827 was recently completed. The following data have been recorded on its job cost sheet:
|
Direct materials
|
$61,050
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
1,332 labor hours
|
|
Direct labor wage rate
|
$14 per labor-hour
|
|
Machine Hours
|
1,480 machine hours
|
|
Number of units completed
|
3,700 units
|
The company applies manufacturing overhead on the basis of machine-hours. The predetermined overhead rate is $13 per machine-hour.
3.Harmon Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The Curing Department of Harmon Company reported the following information for the month of November.
|
Units
|
Percentage complete with respect to conversion
|
|
Work in process, November 1
|
10,000
|
80%
|
|
Units started
|
28,000
|
|
|
Completed and transferred out
|
30,000
|
|
|
Work in process, November 30
|
8,000
|
30%
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Costs for November
|
Materials
|
Conversion
|
|
Work in process, November 1
|
$34,500
|
$48,600
|
|
Added during the month
|
$146,000
|
$194,400
|
All materials are added at the beginning of the process.
Required: Compute the following items using the weighted-average method:
i. The equivalent units of production for materials.
ii. The cost per equivalent unit for conversion.
iii. The total cost assigned to units transferred out of the Curing Department during November.
iv. The cost assigned to work in process inventory as of November 30
4.Baroche Inc. uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The following data concern the operations of the company’s first processing department for a recent month.
|
Work in process, beginning:
|
|
|
Units in process
|
100
|
|
Percent complete with respect to materials.
|
70%
|
|
Percent complete with respect to conversion.
|
40%
|
|
Costs in in the beginning inventory:
|
|
|
Materials cost
|
$364
|
|
Conversion cost
|
$1,120
|
|
|
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
23,000
|
|
Units completed and transferred out
|
22,900
|
|
|
|
|
Costs added to production during the month:
|
|
|
Materials cost
|
$124,160
|
|
Conversion cost
|
$637,088
|
|
Work in proccss, ending
|
|
|
Units in process
|
200
|
|
Percent complete with respect to materials
|
80%
|
|
Percent complete with respect to conversion
|
70%
|
Using the weighted-average method:
i. Determine the equivalent units of production for materials and conversion costs.
ii. Determine the cost per equivalent unit for materials and conversion costs.
iii. Determine the cost of units transferred out of the department during the month.
iv. Determine the cost of ending work in process inventory in the department.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. If the net variance of a business using standard costing is significant relevant to total production cost, the net variance should be:
A. assigned to cost of goods sold.
B. allocated between work in process, finished goods, and cost of goods sold.
C. carried forward to the next accounting period.
D. none of the above.
2. If the net of all variances is immaterial relative to the total production costs incurred during the period, the net variance is:
A. treated as an adjustment to cost of goods sold.
B. ignored.
C. treated as an adjustment to work in process, finished goods, and cost of goods sold.
D. treated as an adjustment to manufacturing overhead.
3. The preferred format for a segmented income statement emphasizes:
A. direct and common fixed costs.
B. variable and fixed costs.
C. operating expenses and fixed costs.
D. variable costs and operating expenses.
4. Which of the following is a true statement pertaining to segment income statements
A. Only present the individual segments’ net income, not total company net income.
B. Only include variable costs.
C. Do not present a segment margin.
D. Do not include arbitrarily allocated common fixed expenses when calculating segment margin.
E. All of the above.
5. How is performance evaluated for a cost center
A. Actual costs incurred compared to budgeted costs.
B. Actual segment margin compared to budgeted segment margin.
C. Comparison of actual and budgeted return on investment (ROI) based on segment margin and assets controlled by the segment.
D. None of the above.
6. How is performance evaluated for a profit center
A. Actual costs incurred compared to budgeted costs.
B. Actual segment margin compared to budgeted segment margin.
C. Comparison of actual and budgeted return on investment (ROI) based on segment margin and assets controlled by the segment.
D. None of the above.
7. The key to analyzing a sell as is or process further decision is to determine that:
A. opportunity costs exceed sunk costs.
B. incremental revenues exceed incremental costs.
C. differential costs do not exist.
D. all allocated costs are included in the decision.
8. In a make or buy decision which of the following costs would be considered relevant
A. Avoidable costs.
B. Unavoidable costs.
C. Sunk costs.
D. Allocated costs.
9. Which of the following qualitative factors favors the buy option in the make or buy decision
A. Production scheduling.
B. Utilization of idle capacity.
C. Ability to control quality.
D. Technical expertise of supplier.
10. Product Z sells for $18 per unit as is but if it is enhanced it can be sold for $24 per unit. The enhancement process will cost $50,000 for 10,000 units. If the 10,000 units of Product Z are sold as is without further processing, the company:
A. will incur an incremental profit of $10,000.
B. will incur an opportunity cost of $10,000.
C. will incur an incremental profit of $1 per unit.
D. will incur an incremental loss of $6 per unit.
11. A(n) _____________ is the minimum cost that can be incurred, which when subtracted from the selling price, allows for a desired profit to be earned.
A. relevant cost.
B. opportunity cost.
C. incremental cost.
D. target cost.
12. Product X sells for $80 per unit in the marketplace and ABC Company requires a 35% minimum profit margin on all product lines. In order to compete in this market, the target cost for Product X must be equal to or lower than:
A. $28
B. $45
C. $52
D. $80
13. Which of the following costs are not relevant in a decision to continue or discontinue a segment of the organization
A. Avoidable costs.
B. Unavoidable costs.
C. Opportunity costs.
D. Differential costs.
14. The decision to continue or discontinue a segment of the business should focus on:
A. sales minus total variable expenses and total fixed expenses.
B. sales minus total variable expenses and avoidable fixed expenses of the segment.
C. sales minus total variable expenses and allocated fixed expenses of the business.
D. none of the above.
15. The decision for solving production mix problems involving multiple products and scarce production resources should focus on:
A. gross profit of each product.
B. sales price of each product.
C. contribution margin per unit of scarce resource.
D. contribution margin of each product.
16. XYZ Company produces three products: A, B, and C. Product A has a contribution margin of $20 and requires 1 hour of machine time. Product B has a contribution margin of $30 and requires 2 hours of machine time. Product C has a contribution margin of $36 and requires 1.5 hours of machine time. If machine hours are considered scarce, in what product mix order should XYZ Company schedule the production of Products A, B, and C for the available machine hours
A. First A, then B, then C.
B. First C, then A, then B.
C. First C, then B, then A.
D. First B, then C, then A.
17. A principal difference between operational budgeting and capital budgeting is the time frame of the budget. Because of this difference, capital budgeting:
A. is an activity that involves only the financial staff.
B. is done on a rolling budget period basis.
C. focuses on the present value of cash flows from investments.
D. is concerned with a long-term net income forecast.
18. Capital budgeting differs from operational budgeting because:
A. depreciation calculations are required.
B. it considers the time value of money.
C. operating expenses are not relevant.
D. capital budgets don’t affect cash flow.
19. Capital expenditure analysis, which leads to the capital budget, attempts to determine the impact of a proposed capital expenditure on the organization’s:
A. segment margin.
B. contribution margin.
C. ROI.
D. cost of capital.
Essay:
1. The cost formula for the maintenance department of the Eifel Co. is $6,500 per month plus $3.50 per machine hour used by the production department.
a. Calculate the maintenance cost that would be budgeted for the month of May in which 5,700 machine hours are planned to be used.
b. Prepare an appropriate performance report for the maintenance department assuming that 5,860 machine hours were actually used in the month of May, and the total maintenance cost incurred was $28,010.
2. Breaded Oak, Inc. has a policy that requires 20 percent of the expected sales of its product to be on hand at the end of the prior month. Forecasted sales, in units, for the months of January through April are as follows:
(a.) Calculate the number of units planned for ending inventory for January, February, and March.
(b.) Calculate the number of units budgeted to be produced in January, February, and March.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) An investment that costs $25,000 will produce annual cash flows of $5,000 for a period of 6 years. Further, the investment has an expected salvage value of $3,000. Given a desired rate of return of 12%, the investment will generate a (round your answer to the nearest whole dollar)
A. negative net present value of $2,923
B. positive net present value of $20,557
C. positive net present value of $1,520
D. negative net present value of $25,000
2) Mountain Brook Company is considering two investment opportunities whose cash flows are provided below:
Year Investment A Investment B
Year 0
($15,000)
($9,000)
Year 1
5,000
5,000
Year 2
5,000
4,000
Year 3
5,000
3,000
Year 4
4,000
1,000
The company’s hurdle rate is 12%. What is the present value index of Investment A?
A. 1.00
B. 0.97
C. 1.12
D. 1.01
3) Britannia Company has two investment opportunities. A cash flow schedule for the investments is provided below:
Year Investment A Investment B
Year 0
($5,000)
($6,000)
Year 1
2,000
3,000
Year 2
2,000
2,000
Year 3
2,000
2,000
Year 4
2,000
1,000
Assuming capital rationing is used, which of the following techniques would be most appropriate for choosing between Investment A and Investment B?
A. Payback technique
B. Present value index
C. Net present value technique
D. None of these techniques apply
4) Which of the following statements concerning payback analysis is true?
A. The payback method ignores the time value of money concept.
B. The payback method and the unadjusted rate of return are different approaches that will consistently lead to the same conclusion.
C. All of these are true.
D. An investment with a longer payback is preferable to an investment with a shorter payback.
5) Select the incorrect statement concerning the internal rate of return (IRR) method of evaluating capital projects.
A. A project whose IRR is less than the cost of capital should be rejected.
B. The higher the IRR the better.
C. The internal rate of return is that rate that makes the present value of the initial outlay equal to zero.
D. If a project has a positive net present value then its IRR will exceed the hurdle rate.
6) The rate of return that equates the present value of cash inflows and outflows is the
A. internal rate of return.
B. minimum rate of return.
C. none of these.
D. desired rate of return
7) An investment that costs $5,000 will produce annual cash flows of $2,000 for a period of 4 years. Given a desired rate of return of 10%, the investment will generate a present value index of
A. 1.268.
B. 0.789.
C. 7.745.
D. 2.500.
8) An investment that cost $48,000 provided annual cash inflows of $9,000 per year for six years. The desired rate of return is 10%. The actual return from the investment was
A. equal to the desired rate of return.
B. less than the desired rate of return.
C. the answer cannot be determined from the information provided.
D. greater than the desired rate of return.
9) Which of the following is the approximate internal rate of return for an investment that costs $45,880 and provides a $4,000 annuity for 20 years?
A. 6%
B. 5%
C. 10%
D. 8%
10) Yoplait Company employs material handling employees who move materials between production divisions at a labor cost of $160,000 a year. It is estimated that these employees move 75,000 pounds of material per year. If 6,000 pounds are moved in March, how much of the material handling cost should be assigned to products made in March?
A. $12,800
B. $12,000
C. $75,000
D. $26,666
11) Perrot Company has three divisions. For Perrot, a cost should be considered a direct cost if
A. it can be allocated to a division using an volume-based cost driver.
B. it meets certain guidelines imposed by generally accepted accounting principles.
C. it is a fixed cost.
D. it can be traced to a division in a cost-effective manner.
12) Joint products A and B emerge from common processing that costs $80,000 and yields 5,000 units of Product A and 4,000 units of Product B. Product A can be sold for $100 per unit. Product B can be sold for $80 per unit. What amount of the joint costs will be assigned to Product A if joint costs are allocated on the basis of number of units produced?
A. $48,780
B. $35,556
C. $44,444
D. $31,220
13) When a particular job is completed in a job order cost system, the general journal entry would include a
A. debit to Finished Goods Inventory and a credit to the appropriate job order cost sheet.
B. debit to Work in Process Inventory and a credit to Finished Goods Inventory.
C. debit to Work in Process and a credit to Manufacturing Overhead.
D. debit to Finished Goods Inventory and a credit to Work in Process Inventory.
14) Moore Company uses process costing. The following information was available for October:
Units Costs
Work in process Oct. 1
100
$ 7,500
Work in process Oct. 30
200
(A)
Transferred in
1,000
$12,500
Ending inventory is 50% complete. Based on the information given, (A) above would be what amount?
A. $4,000
B. $2,000
C. $1,650
D. $1,500
15) The Ragan Corporation uses a process cost system. The company started March with 2,300 units in Work in Process Dept. A. During the month 4,000 units were started. At the end of the month there were 3,200 units in ending Work in Process Dept. A inventory that were 30% complete. The beginning work in process balance was $240,540 and total manufacturing cost for the period was $608,000. Based on this information, the amount of cost transferred from Work in Process Dept. A to Work in Process Dept. B was
A. $254,562.
B. $200,640.
C. $647,900.
D. $543,233.
16) Brumlow Company has a contribution margin ratio of 25%. The company is considering a proposal that will increase sales by $100,000. What increase in profit can be expected assuming total fixed costs increase by $20,000?
A. $20,000
B. $15,000
C. $25,000
D. $5,000
17) Select the incorrect break-even equation from the following:
A. Total contribution margin = total variable costs
B. Total revenue = total costs
C. Total fixed costs / contribution margin ratio
D. Total contribution margin = total fixed costs
18) A product has a contribution margin of $6 per unit and selling price of $20 per unit. Fixed costs are $18,000. Assuming new technology doubles the unit contribution margin but increases total fixed costs by $15,000, what is the breakeven point in units?
A. 2,750 units
B. 5,500 units
C. 4,000 units
D. 1,250 units
19) Which of the following items is not needed to prepare an inventory purchases budget for a merchandising business?
A. Units in beginning inventory
B. Desired units in ending inventory
C. Expected unit selling price
D. Expected unit sales
20) Which of the following budgets or schedules uses data contained in the selling and administrative expense budget?
A. Cash receipts schedule
B. Sales budget
C. Inventory purchases budget
D. Cash payments schedule
21) Select the incorrectstatement about the master budget.
A. The master budget usually includes operating budgets, capital budgets and pro forma financial statements.
B. Preparing the master budget begins with the sales forecast.
C. The budgeting process usually begins with preparing the operating budgets.
D. The master budget is a group of detailed budgets and schedules representing the company’s operating and financial plans for the past accounting period.
22) Huntsville Company reported a $4,000 unfavorable direct labor price variance and a $1,500 favorable direct labor usage variance. Select the incorrect statement from the following.
A. It took the employees less time to produce the outputs than expected.
B. It is possible that the supervisor attempted to use more highly skilled (and paid) employees than allowed for by the direct labor standards.
C. The total direct labor variance is $2,500 unfavorable.
D. The standard direct labor rate must have exceeded the actual direct labor rate.
23) When would a variance be labeled as favorable?
A. When standard costs are less than actual costs
B. When actual costs are less than standard costs
C. When expected sales are greater than actual sales
D. When standard costs are equal to actual costs
24) Gonzalez Company makes a product that is expected to use 1.2 pounds of material per unit of product. The material has a standard cost of $2 per pound. Gonzalez actually used 1.25 pounds of material per unit of product made in January. The actual cost of material was $1.95 per pound. Based on this information alone, the condition of the variances for the January production would be
A. unfavorable for price and favorable for usage.
B. favorable for price and favorable for usage.
C. favorable for price and unfavorable for usage.
D. unfavorable for price and unfavorable for usage.
25) You are considering an investment in Delta Airlines stock and wish to assess the firm’s ability to generate earnings. All of the following ratios can be used to assess profitability except:
A. Asset turnover
B. Average days to collect receivables
C. Return on investment
D. Net margin
26) You are considering an investment in Coca Cola Company stock and wish to assess the firm’s long-term debt-paying ability and its use of debt financing. All of the following ratios can be used to assess solvency expect:
A. Net margin
B. Debt to assets ratio
C. Debt to equity ratio
D. Number of times interest is earned
27) You are considering an investment in IBM Company stock and wish to assess the firm’s short-term debt-paying ability. All of the following ratios are used to assess liquidity except:
A. Inventory turnover
B. Debt to equity ratio
C. Quick ratio
D. Accounts receivable turnover
28) Sometimes employees will deliberately overstate the amount of materials and/or labor that should be required to complete a job. The difference between inflated and realistic standards is known as
A. budget slack.
B. cooking the books.
C. lowballing.
D. making the numbers.
29) In monitoring process quality we might use which of the following statistics?
A. Percentage deviation from tolerance centers
B. Logarithmic control intervals
C. k values for the sample mean
D. Difference between the highest and lowest value in a sample
E. Absolute values
30) Which manager is usually held responsible for materials usage variances?
A. purchasing agent
B. marketing manager
C. plant manager
D. production supervisor
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For Eckert Inc. variable manufacturing overhead costs are expected to be $20,000 in the first quarter of 2011 with $4,000 increments in each of the remaining three quarters. Fixed overhead costs are estimated to be $35,000 in each quarter. Prepare the manufacturing overhead budget by quarters and in total for the year.
Paige Company has completed all of its operating budgets. The sales budget for the year shows 50,000 units and total sales of $2,000,000. The total unit cost of making one unit of sales is $22. Selling and administrative expenses are expected to be $300,000. Income taxes are estimated to be $150,000. Prepare a budgeted income statement for the year ending December 31, 2011. (Enter all amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary.)
Cawley Company’s Small Motor Division manufactures a number of small motors used in household and office appliances. The Household Division of Cawley then assembles and packages such items as blenders and juicers. Both divisions are free to buy and sell any of their components internally or externally. The following costs relate to small motor LN233 on a per unit basis.
|
Fixed cost per unit
|
$5
|
|
Variable cost per unit
|
8
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
30
|
- Assuming that the Small Motor Division has excess capacity, compute the minimum acceptable price for the transfer of small motor LN233 to the Household Division.
- Assuming that the Small Motor Division does not have excess capacity, compute the minimum acceptable price for the transfer of the small motor to the Household Division
Kendra Company’s standard labor cost of producing one unit of Product DD is 4 hours at the rate of $12.00 per hour. During August, 40,800 hours of labor are incurred at a cost of $12.10 per hour to produce 10,000 units of Product DD.
- Compute the total labor variance.
- Compute the labor price and quantity variances
- Repeat the previous question, assuming the standard is 4.2 hours of direct labor at $12.25 per hour.
Cawley Company’s Small Motor Division manufactures a number of small motors used in household and office appliances. The Household Division of Cawley then assembles and packages such items as blenders and juicers. Both divisions are free to buy and sell any of their components internally or externally. The following costs relate to small motor LN233 on a per unit basis.
Fixed cost per unit $ 5
Variable cost per unit $ 8
Selling price per unit $30
(a) Assuming that the Small Motor Division has excess capacity, compute the minimum acceptable price for the transfer of small motor LN233 to the Household Division
(b) Assuming that the Small Motor Division does not have excess capacity, compute the minimum acceptable price for the transfer of the small motor to the Household Division.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For Eckert Inc. variable manufacturing overhead costs are expected to be $20,000 in the first quarter of 2011 with $4,000 increments in each of the remaining three quarters. Fixed overhead costs are estimated to be $35,000 in each quarter. Prepare the manufacturing overhead budget by quarters and in total for the year.
Paige Company has completed all of its operating budgets. The sales budget for the year shows 50,000 units and total sales of $2,000,000. The total unit cost of making one unit of sales is $22. Selling and administrative expenses are expected to be $300,000. Income taxes are estimated to be $150,000. Prepare a budgeted income statement for the year ending December 31, 2011. (Enter all amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary.)
|
Cawley Company’s Small Motor Division manufactures a number of small motors used in household and office appliances. The Household Division of Cawley then assembles and packages such items as blenders and juicers. Both divisions are free to buy and sell any of their components internally or externally. The following costs relate to small motor LN233 on a per unit basis.
|
Fixed cost per unit
|
$5
|
|
Variable cost per unit
|
8
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
30
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Assuming that the Small Motor Division has excess capacity, compute the minimum acceptable price for the transfer of small motor LN233 to the Household Division.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Assuming that the Small Motor Division does not have excess capacity, compute the minimum acceptable price for the transfer of the small motor to the Household Division.
|
|
|
|
|
Kendra Company’s standard labor cost of producing one unit of Product DD is 4 hours at the rate of $12.00 per hour. During August, 40,800 hours of labor are incurred at a cost of $12.10 per hour to produce 10,000 units of Product DD.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Compute the total labor variance.
$
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Compute the labor price and quantity variances.
|
Labor price variance
|
$
|
|
|
Labor quantity variance
|
$
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Repeat the previous question, assuming the standard is 4.2 hours of direct labor at $12.25 per hour.
|
Labor price variance
|
$
|
|
|
Labor quantity variance
|
$
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ex. 7-11A
Executive Officers of Dominick Company are wrestling with their budget for the next year. The following are two different sales estimates provide by two difference sources.
|
Source of Estimate
|
First Quarter
|
Second Quarter
|
Third Quarter
|
Fourth Quarter
|
|
Sales Manager
|
$380,000
|
$310,000
|
$280,000
|
$480,000
|
|
Marketing Consultant
|
520,000
|
460,000
|
410,000
|
650,000
|
Dominick s past experience indicates that cost of goods sold is about 60 percent of sales revenue. The company tries to maintain 10 percent of the next quarters expected cost of goods sold as the current quarter s ending inventory. This year s ending inventory is $29,000. Next year s ending inventory is budgeted to be $30,000.
Required:
a. Prepare an inventory purchases budget using the sales manger s estimate.
b. B. Prepare an inventory purchases budget using the marketing consultant s estimate
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| In the month of June, Jose Hebert s Beauty Salon gave 3,580 haircuts, shampoos, and permanents at an average price of $38. During the month, fixed costs were $16,750 and variable costs were 75% of sales.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Your answer is partially correct. Try again. |
|
|
Determine the contribution margin in dollars, per unit and as a ratio. (Round contribution margin per unit and contribution margin ratio to 2 decimal places, e.g. $5.25 & 10.50%.)
| Contribution margin |
|
$ |
|
| Contribution margin per unit |
|
$ |
|
| Contribution margin ratio |
|
|
% |
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Course Description
This course concentrates on effective decision making as it relates to financial activities in a business enterprise. Course topics will include financial assets, liabilities, equity, business operations, financial management, and financial statement analysis. Students will have the necessary analytical tools to enhance business operations.
Course Topics & Objectives
Week One: Assets and Internal Controls
Compare and contrast current and noncurrent assets.
Identify significant accounting estimates.
Examine internal controls.
Week Two: Liabilities and Equity
Differentiate between current and noncurrent liabilities.
Compare and contrast the various types of equity accounts.
Week Three: Business Operations
Evaluate profitability in the organization.
Week Four: Financial Management
Compare and contrast lease versus purchase options.
Analyze the various components of the capital structure.
Week Five: Financial Statement Analysis
Apply various budgeting and forecasting techniques for decision making.
Examine the impact of the financial statements to the organization.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 400 Final Exam
1. Zelma Company’s last financial statements provided the following ratios:
Current ratio 3:2
Quick ratio 1:2
Accounts receivable turnover 9.0 times
Inventory turnover 8.0 times
Net income percentage 12.5%
Return on equity 22.6%
Return on assets 9.8%
To the nearest day, what is the operating cycle for Zelma?
a) 80 days
b) 86 days
c) 172 days
d) 129 days
2. The following events have been projected:
A. Cash sales and collections from customers totaling $980,000
B. Cash payments for operating expenses of $560,000
C. Cash payments for income taxes and interest expense of $45,000
D. Cash payments of prior period accruals of $80,000
E. Borrowed $50,000 cash by issuing a note payable
F. Cash dividends of $20,000
The beginning balance of cash is $45,000. What is the budgeted ending balance of cash?
a. $325,000
b. $370,000
c. $275,000
d. $245,000
3. On January 1, a business exchanged a plant asset with a cost of $18,000 and accumulated depreciation of $16,500 for a similar asset that had a list price of $23,000. The business received a trade-in allowance of $2,100 on the old plant asset. What was the result of the exchange?
a. A $600 gain on the disposal of a plant asset.
b. A $1,000 unrecognized gain on the exchange of a plant asset.
c. A cost basis of $22,400 for the new plant asset
d. A cost basis of $23,600 for the new plant asset
4. Which one of the following is not an objective of a system of internal controls?
a. Safeguard company assets
b. Overstate liabilities in order to be conservative
c. Enhance the accuracy and reliability of accounting records
d. Reduce the risks of errors
5. A company s past experience indicates that 60% of its credit sales are collected in the month of sale, 30% in the next month, and 5 % in the second month after the sale; the remainder is never collected. Budgeted credit sales were:
July $120,000
August 72,000
September 180,000
The cash inflow in the month of September is expected to be
a. $135,600
b. $102,600
c. $108,000
d. $129,600
6. A check for $275 is incorrectly recorded by a company as $257. On the bank reconciliation, the $18 error should be
a. Added to the balance per books.
b. Deducted from the balance per book.
c. Added to the balance per bank.
d. Deducted from the balance per bank.
7. The Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is necessary because
a. when recording uncollectible accounts expense, it is not possible to know which specific accounts will not pay.
b. uncollectible accounts that are written off must be accumulated in a separate account.
c. a liability results when a credit sale is made.
d. management needs to accumulate all the credit losses over the years.
8. Under the direct write-off method of accounting for uncollectible accounts, Bad Debts Expense is debited
a. when a credit sale is past due.
b. at the end of each accounting period.
c. whenever a pre-determined amount of credit sales have been made.
d. when an account is determined to be uncollectible
9. Manning Company uses the percentage of receivables method for recording bad debts expense. The accounts receivable balance is $200,000 and credit sales are $1,000,000. Management estimates that 5% of accounts receivable will be uncollectible. What adjusting entry will Manning Company make if the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $2,000 before adjustment?
a. Bad Debts Expense 10,000
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 10,000
b. Bad Debts Expense 8,000
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 8,000
c. Bad Debts Expense 8,000
Accounts Receivable 8,000
d. Bad Debts Expense 10,000
Accounts Receivable 10,000
10. The receivables turnover ratio
a. Is computed by dividing net credit sales for the accounting period by the cash realizable value of accounts receivable on the last day of the accounting period.
b. Can be used to compute the average collection period.
c. Is a method of evaluating the solvency of net accounts receivable.
d. Is only important to internal users of accounting information.
11. A measure of a company s solvency is the
a. acid-test ratio.
b. current ratio.
c. times interest earned ratio.
d. asset turnover ratio.
12. The times interest earned ratio is computed by dividing
a. net income by interest expense.
b. income before income taxes by interest expense.
c. income before interest expense by interest expense.
d. income before interest expense and income taxes by interest expense.
13. The 2007 financial statements of Shadow Co. contain the following selected data (in millions).
Current Assets $ 75
Total Assets 120
Current Liabilities 40
Total Liabilities 85
Cash 8
Interest Expense 5
Income Taxes 10
Net Income 16
The debt to total assets ratio is
a. 70.8%
b. 53.3%
c. 1.41%
d. 6.2 times
14. The statement “Bond prices vary inversely with changes in the market rate of interest” means that if the
a. market rate of interest increases, the contractual interest rate will decrease.
b. contractual interest rate increases, then bond prices will go down.
c. market rate of interest decreases, then bond prices will go up.
d. contractual interest rate increases, the market rate of interest will decrease.
15. A company would not acquire treasury stock
a. in order to reissue shares to officers.
b. as an asset investment.
c. in order to increase trading of the company s stock.
d. to have additional shares available to use in acquisitions of other companies.
16. Which of the following is the appropriate general journal entry to record the declaration of cash dividends?
a. Retained Earnings
Cash
b. Dividends Payable
Cash
c. Paid-in Capital
Dividends Payable
d. Retained Earnings
Dividends Payable
17. Allstate, Inc., has 10,000 shares of 6%, $100 par value, cumulative preferred stock and 100,000 shares of $1 par value common stock outstanding at December 31, 2007. If the board of directors declares a $50,000 dividend, the
a. preferred stockholders will receive 1/10th of what the common stockholders will receive.
b. preferred stockholders will receive the entire $50,000.
c. $50,000 will be held as restricted retained earnings and paid out at some future date.
d. preferred stockholders will receive $25,000 and the common stockholders will receive $25,000.
18. When a change in accounting principle occurs
a. prior years’ financial statements should not be changed to reflect the newly adopted principle.
b. the new principle should be used in reporting the results of operations of the current year.
c. the cumulative effect of the change in principle should be reflected on the income statement as of the beginning of the next year.
d. the cumulative effect of the change in accounting principle should be classified as an extraordinary item on the income statement.
19. Which of the following is not an irregular item on the income statement?
a. Discontinued operations
b. Extraordinary items
c. Other revenues and expenses
20. Vertical analysis is a technique that expresses each item in a financial statement
a. in dollars and cents.
b. as a percent of the item in the previous year.
c. as a percent of a base amount.
d. starting with the highest value down to the lowest value.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The final paper will be based on Appendix 6C Illustrative Audit Case: Keystone
Computers at pages 237-244 in your text. Write, in outline format but in
complete sentences, a 6 to10 page audit plan. It is recommended that you look at
Figure 18.8 on page 708, which shows the control objectives related to accounts
receivable.
In your audit plan cover the steps necessary to determine if you should
select the client, the internal control procedures which need to be reviewed,
the substantive tests [using accounts receivable a guide], and the final
reporting steps. Based on the actual facts in the case determine the emphasis
you want to place on various accounts. Also reflect back over your entire
accounting program and think about how the accounts are interrelated. For
example, when allowance for doubtful accounts is credited the offset is to bad
debt expense. Therefore one of the steps should be to trace the debit side of
the entry to the balance for bad debt expense.
Make you comments as specific as possible. Rather than say look for unusual
entries, say look for entries from unusual sources and rounded amounts with
focus on those near an accounting cut off. Use precise language. Rather than
saying you vouched accounts payable, say that you looked at the item to
determine that it was a bona fide business expense. Remember to focus on the key
audit objectives and support needed after applying the audit risk model.
Remember, the purpose of the Final Paper is for you to culminate the learning
achieved in the course by describing your understanding and application of
knowledge in the field of accounting.
The Final Paper should focus on real life, real time application of topics
covered in this course; the uses you have seen and the uses you can envision.
The paper must be submitted to your instructor no later than the last day of
class. Earlier submittal is appreciated.
Writing the Research Paper
The Final Paper:
- Must be six- to ten- double-spaced pages in length and formatted according
to APA style as outlined in the approved APA style guide.
- Must include a cover page that includes:
- Student s name
- Course name and number
- Title of paper
- Instructor s name
- Date submitted
- Must include an introductory paragraph with a succinct thesis statement.
- Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
- Must conclude with a restatement of the thesis and a conclusion paragraph.
- Must use at least three scholarly resources, including a minimum of one from
the Ashford Online Library.
- Must use APA style as outlined in the approved APA style guide to document
all sources.
- Must include, on the final page, a Reference Page that is completed
according to APA style as outlined in the approved APA style guide.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 421—- FINAL EXAM .
1 General-purpose financial statements are the product of
a. financial accounting.
b. managerial accounting.
c. both financial and managerial accounting.
d. neither financial nor managerial accounting
2 . Users of financial reports include all of the following except
a. creditors.
b. government agencies.
c. unions.
d. All of these are users.
3 . Which of the following statements is not an objective of financial reporting?
a. Provide information that is useful in investment and credit decisions.
b. Provide information about enterprise resources, claims to those resources, and changes to them.
c. Provide information on the liquidation value of an enterprise.
d. Provide information that is useful in assessing cash flow prospects.
4 . Accrual accounting is used because
a. cash flows are considered less important.
b. it provides a better indication of ability to generate cash flows than the cash basis.
c. it recognizes revenues when cash is received and expenses when cash is paid.
d. none of the above.
5 . Which of the following (a-c) are not true concerning a conceptual framework in accounting?
a. It should be a basis for standard-setting.
b. It should allow practical problems to be solved more quickly by reference to it.
c. It should be based on fundamental truths that are derived from the laws of nature.
d. All of the above (a-c) are true.
6 . In the conceptual framework for financial reporting, what provides “the why”–the goals and purposes of accounting?
a. Measurement and recognition concepts such as assumptions, principles, and constraints
b. Qualitative characteristics of accounting information
c. Elements of financial statements
d. Objectives of financial reporting
7 . Accounting information is considered to be relevant when it
a. can be depended on to represent the economic conditions and events that it is intended to represent.
b. is capable of making a difference in a decision.
c. is understandable by reasonably informed users of accounting information.
d. is verifiable and neutral.
8 . According to Statement of Financial Accounting Concepts No. 2, which of the following relates to both relevance and reliability?
a. Materiality
b. Understandability
c. Usefulness
d. All of these
9 . Factors that shape an accounting information system include the
a. nature of the business.
b. size of the firm.
c. volume of data to be handled.
d. all of these.
10 . A journal entry to record the sale of inventory on account will include a
a. debit to inventory.
b. debit to accounts receivable.
c. debit to sales.
d. credit to cost of goods sold.
11 . At the time a company prepays a cost
a. it debits an asset account to show the service or benefit it will receive in the future.
b. it debits an expense account to match the expense against revenues earned.
c. its credits a liability account to show the obligation to pay for the service in the future.
d. more than one of the above.
12 . Which of the following would not be a correct form for an adjusting entry?
a. A debit to a revenue and a credit to a liability
b. A debit to an expense and a credit to a liability
c. A debit to a liability and a credit to a revenue
d. A debit to an asset and a credit to a liability
13 . The major elements of the income statement are
a. revenue, cost of goods sold, selling expenses, and general expense.
b. operating section, nonoperating section, discontinued operations, extraordinary items, and cumulative effect.
c. revenues, expenses, gains, and losses.
d. all of these.
14 . Which of the following is not a generally practiced method of presenting the income statement?
a. Including prior period adjustments in determining net income
b. The single-step income statement
c. The consolidated statement of income
d. Including gains and losses from discontinued operations of a component of a business in determining net income
15 . In order to be classified as an extraordinary item in the income statement, an event or transaction should be
a. unusual in nature, infrequent, and material in amount.
b. unusual in nature and infrequent, but it need not be material.
c. infrequent and material in amount, but it need not be unusual in nature.
d. unusual in nature and material, but it need not be infrequent.
16 . Which of the following items will not appear in the retained earnings statement?
a. Net loss
b. Prior period adjustment
c. Discontinued operations
d. Dividends
17 . The revenue recognition principle provides that revenue is recognized when
a. it is realized.
b. it is realizable.
c. it is realized or realizable and it is earned.
d. none of these.
18 . Dot Point, Inc. is a retailer of washers and dryers and offers a three-year service contract on each appliance sold. Although Dot Point sells the appliances on an installment basis, all service contracts are cash sales at the time of purchase by the buyer. Collections received for service contracts should be recorded as
a. service revenue.
b. deferred service revenue.
c. a reduction in installment accounts receivable.
d. a direct addition to retained earnings.
19 . The percentage-of-completion method must be used when certain conditions exist. Which of the following is not one of those necessary conditions?
a. Estimates of progress toward completion, revenues, and costs are reasonably dependable.
b. The contractor can be expected to perform the contractual obligation.
c. The buyer can be expected to satisfy some of the obligations under the contract.
d. The contract clearly specifies the enforceable rights of the parties, the consideration to be exchanged, and the manner and terms of settlement.
20 . The principal disadvantage of using the percentage-of-completion method of recognizing revenue from long-term contracts is that it
a. is unacceptable for income tax purposes.
b. gives results based upon estimates which may be subject to considerable uncertainty.
c. is likely to assign a small amount of revenue to a period during which much revenue was actually earned.
d. none of these.
21 . Which of the following is a limitation of the balance sheet?
a. Many items that are of financial value are omitted.
b. Judgments and estimates are used.
c. Current fair value is not reported.
d. All of these
22 . The net assets of a business are equal to
a. current assets minus current liabilities.
b. total assets plus total liabilities.
c. total assets minus total stockholders’ equity.
d. none of these.
23 . The current assets section of the balance sheet should include
a. machinery.
b. patents.
c. goodwill.
d. inventory.
24 . Which of the following is a current asset?
a. Cash surrender value of a life insurance policy of which the company is the bene-ficiary.
b. Investment in equity securities for the purpose of controlling the issuing company.
c. Cash designated for the purchase of tangible fixed assets.
d. Trade installment receivables normally collectible in 18 months.
25 . An example of an item which is not an element of working capital is
a. accrued interest on notes receivable.
b. goodwill.
c. goods in process.
d. temporary investments.
26 . Which of the following should be disclosed in a Summary of Significant Accounting Policies?
a. Types of executory contracts
b. Amount for cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
c. Claims of equity holders
d. Depreciation method followed
27 . Which of the following subsequent events (post-balance-sheet events) would require adjustment of the accounts before issuance of the financial statements?
a. Loss of plant as a result of fire
b. Changes in the quoted market prices of securities held as an investment
c. Loss on an uncollectible account receivable resulting from a customer s major flood loss
d. Loss on a lawsuit, the outcome of which was deemed uncertain at year end.
28 . The basic limitations associated with ratio analysis include
a. the lack of comparability among firms in a given industry.
b. the use of estimated items in accounting.
c. the use of historical costs in accounting.
d. all of these.
29 . Cash equivalents are
a. treasury bills, commercial paper, and money market funds purchased with excess cash.
b. investments with original maturities of three months or less.
c. readily convertible into known amounts of cash.
d. all of these.
30 . An increase in inventory balance would be reported in a statement of cash flows using the indirect method (reconciliation method) as a(n)
a. addition to net income in arriving at net cash flow from operating activities.
b. deduction from net income in arriving at net cash flow from operating activities.
c. cash outflow from investing activities.
d. cash outflow from financing activities.
31 . Xanthe Corporation had the following transactions occur in the current year:
1. Cash sale of merchandise inventory.
2. Sale of delivery truck at book value.
3. Sale of Xanthe common stock for cash.
4. Issuance of a note payable to a bank for cash.
5. Sale of a security held as an available-for-sale investment.
6. Collection of loan receivable.
How many of the above items will appear as a cash inflow from investing activities on a statement of cash flows for the current year?
a. Five items
b. Four items
c. Three items
d. Two items
32 . A series of equal receipts at equal intervals of time when each receipt is received at the beginning of each time period is called an
a. ordinary annuity.
b. annuity in arrears.
c. annuity due.
d. unearned receipt
33 . Which of the following statements is true?
a. The higher the discount rate, the higher the present value.
b. The process of accumulating interest on interest is referred to as discounting.
c. If money is worth 10% compounded annually, $1,100 due one year from today is equivalent to $1,000 today.
d. If a single sum is due on December 31, 2010, the present value of that sum decreases as the date draws closer to December 31, 2010.
34 . Present value is
a. the value now of a future amount.
b. the amount that must be invested now to produce a known future value.
c. always smaller than the future value.
d. all of these.
35 . If an annuity due and an ordinary annuity have the same number of equal payments and the same interest rates, then
a. the present value of the annuity due is less than the present value of the ordinary annuity.
b. the present value of the annuity due is greater than the present value of the ordinary annuity.
c. the future value of the annuity due is equal to the future value of the ordinary annuity.
d. the future value of the annuity due is less than the future value of the ordinary annuity.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 421 Final Exam
JULY 2013 UPDATE
1) Why are certain costs of doing business capitalized when incurred and then depreciated or amortized over subsequent accounting cycles?
2) An accrued expense can best be described as an amount
3) If, during an accounting period, an expense item has been incurred and consumed but not yet paid for or recorded, then the end-of-period adjusting entry would involve
4) The information provided by financial reporting pertains to
5) One objective of financial reporting is to provide
6) The two primary qualities that make accounting information useful for decision making are
7) The body that has the power to prescribe the accounting practices and standards to be employed by companies that fall under its jurisdiction is the
8) The Financial Accounting Foundation
9) The major distinction between the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) and its predecessor, the Accounting Principles Board (APB), is
10) The occurrence which most likely would have no effect on 2007 net income (assuming that all amounts involved are material) is the
11) Which of the following would represent the least likely use of an income statement prepared for a business enterprise?
12) The single-step income statement emphasizes
13) Which of the following is not a reason why revenue is recognized at time of sale?
14) The process of formally recording or incorporating an item in the financial statements of an entity is
15) Which of the following is not an accurate representation concerning revenue recognition?
16) The correct order to present current assets is
17) The amount of time that is expected to elapse until an asset is realized or otherwise converted into cash is referred to as
18) One criticism not normally aimed at a balance sheet prepared using current accounting and reporting standards is
19) The focus of APB Opinion No. 22 is on the disclosure of accounting policies. This information is important to financial statement readers in determining
20) Events that occur after the December 31, 2008 balance sheet date (but before the balance sheet is issued) and provide additional evidence about conditions that existed at the balance sheet date and affect the reliazibility of accounts receivable should be
21) The full disclosure principle, as adopted by the accounting profession, is best described by which of the following?
22) Companies should disclose all of the following in interim reports except
23) Which of the following best characterizes the difference between a financial forecast and a financial projection?
24) A financial forecast per professional pronouncements presents to the best of the responsible party s knowledge and belief,
25) Which of the following ratios measures long-term solvency?
26) The payout ratio is calculated by dividing
27) Theoretically, in computing the receivables turnover, the numerator should include
28) The primary purpose of the statement of cash flows is to provide information
29) The first step in the preparation of the statement of cash flows requires the use of information included in which comparative financial statements?
30) A company borrows $10,000 and signs a 90-day nontrade note payable. In preparing a statement of cash flows (indirect method), this event would be reflected as a(n)
31) The amortization of bond premium on long-term debt should be presented in a statement of cash flows (using the indirect method for operating activities) as a(n)
32) In a statement of cash flows, the cash flows from investing activities section should report
33) In reporting extraordinary transactions on a statement of cash flows (indirect method), the
34) Which of the following tables would show the smallest factor for an interest rate of 10% for six periods?
35) Which table would show the largest factor for an interest rate of 8% for five periods?
36) Which of the following tables would show the smallest value for an interest rate of 5% for six periods?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 421 Final Exam / 100% correct answers
1) An accrued expense can best be described as an amount
A. not paid and currently matched with earnings.
B. not paid and not currently matched with earnings.
C. paid and currently matched with earnings.
D. paid and not currently matched with earnings.
2) When an item of revenue is collected and recorded in advance, it is normally called a(n) ___________ revenue.
A. cash
B. accrued
C. prepaid
D. unearned
3) When an item of expense is paid and recorded in advance, it is normally called a(n)
A. cash expense.
B. prepaid expense.
C. accrued expense.
D. estimated expense.
4) The information provided by financial reporting pertains to
A. an economy as a whole and to members of society as consumers, rather than to individual enterprises or industries.
B. individual business enterprises, rather than to industries or an economy as a whole or to members of society as consumers.
C. business industries, rather than to individual enterprises or an economy as a whole or to members of society as consumers.
D. individual business enterprises, industries, and an economy as a whole, rather than to members of society as consumers.
5) The two primary qualities that make accounting information useful for decision making are
A. reliability and comparability.
B. comparability and consistency.
C. materiality and timeliness.
D. relevance and reliability.
6) A common set of accounting standards and procedures are called
A. statements of financial accounting concepts.
B. financial accounting standards.
C. generally accepted accounting principles.
D. objectives of financial reporting.
7) The Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) was proposed by the
A. Special Study Group on establishment of Accounting Principles (Wheat Committee).
B. American Institute of Certified Public Accountants.
C. Accounting Principles Board.
D. Study Group on the Objectives of Financial Statements.
8) The major distinction between the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) and its predecessor, the Accounting Principles Board (APB), is
A. a majority of the members of the FASB are CPAs drawn from public practice.
B. the FASB issues exposure drafts of proposed standards.
C. all members of the FASB are fully remunerated, serve full time, and are independent of any companies or institutions.
D. all members of the FASB possess extensive experience in financial reporting.
9) The Financial Accounting Foundation
A. works with the Financial Accounting Standards Advisory Council to provide informa-tion to interested parties on financial reporting issues.
B. oversees the operations of the FASB.
C. oversees the operations of the AICPA.
D. provides information to interested parties on financial reporting issues.
10) Which of the following would represent the least likely use of an income statement prepared for a business enterprise?
A. Use by customers to determine a company’s ability to provide needed goods and services.
B. Use by government agencies to formulate tax and economic policy.
C. Use by investors interested in the financial position of the entity.
D. Use by labor unions to examine earnings closely as a basis for salary discussions.
11) The single-step income statement emphasizes
A. the gross profit figure.
B. extraordinary items and accounting changes more than these are emphasized in the multiple-step income statement.
C. the various components of income from continuing operations.
D. total revenues and total expenses.
12) Which of the following is not a generally practiced method of presenting the income statement?
A. Including prior period adjustments in determining net income
B. The consolidated statement of income
C. Including gains and losses from discontinued operations of a component of a business in determining net income
D. The single-step income statement
13) The process of formally recording or incorporating an item in the financial statements of an entity is
A. allocation.
B. realization.
C. recognition.
D. articulation.
14) Dot Point, Inc. is a retailer of washers and dryers and offers a three-year service contract on each appliance sold. Although Dot Point sells the appliances on an installment basis, all service contracts are cash sales at the time of purchase by the buyer. Collections received for service contracts should be recorded as
A. service revenue.
B. a reduction in installment accounts receivable.
C. a direct addition to retained earnings.
D. deferred service revenue.
15) In selecting an accounting method for a newly contracted long-term construction project, the principal factor to be considered should be
A. the terms of payment in the contract.
B. the method commonly used by the contractor to account for other long-term construc-tion contracts.
C. the inherent nature of the contractor’s technical facilities used in construction.
D. the degree to which a reliable estimate of the costs to complete and extent of progress toward completion is practicable.
16) The balance sheet contributes to financial reporting by providing a basis for all of the following except
A. computing rates of return.
B. determining the increase in cash due to operations.
C. assessing the liquidity and financial flexibility of the enterprise.
D. evaluating the capital structure of the enterprise.
17) The correct order to present current assets is
A. Cash, accounts receivable, prepaid items, inventories.
B. Cash, inventories, accounts receivable, prepaid items.
C. Cash, inventories, prepaid items, accounts receivable.
D. Cash, accounts receivable, inventories, prepaid items.
18) The amount of time that is expected to elapse until an asset is realized or otherwise converted into cash is referred to as
A. solvency.
B. exchangeability.
C. liquidity.
D. financial flexibility.
19) Events that occur after the December 31, 2008 balance sheet date (but before the balance sheet is issued) and provide additional evidence about conditions that existed at the balance sheet date and affect the realizability of accounts receivable should be
A. discussed only in the MD&A (Management’s Discussion and Analysis) section of the annual report.
B. used to record an adjustment directly to the Retained Earnings account
C. used to record an adjustment to Bad Debt Expense for the year ending December 31, 2008.
D. disclosed only in the Notes to the Financial Statements.
20) The focus of APB Opinion No. 22 is on the disclosure of accounting policies. This information is important to financial statement readers in determining
A. net income for the year.
B. whether the working capital position is adequate for future operations.
C. the value of obsolete items included in ending inventory.
D. whether accounting policies are consistently applied from year to year.
21) Which of the following should be disclosed in a Summary of Significant Accounting Policies?
A. Types of executory contracts
B. Depreciation method followed
C. Claims of equity holders
D. Amount for cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
22) Which of the following best characterizes the difference between a financial forecast and a financial projection?
A. Forecasts include a complete set of financial statements, while projections include only summary financial data.
B. A forecast includes data which can be verified about future expectations, while the data in a projection is not susceptible to verification.
C. A forecast attempts to provide information on what is expected to happen, whereas a projection may provide information on what is not necessarily expected to happen.
D. A forecast is normally for a full year or more and a projection presents data for less than a year.
23) Companies should disclose all of the following in interim reports except
A. basic and diluted earnings per share.
B. seasonal revenue, cost, or expenses.
C. post-balance-sheet events.
D. changes in accounting principles.
24) A financial forecast per professional pronouncements presents to the best of the responsible party’s knowledge and belief,
A. an entity’s expected financial position, results of operations, and cash flows.
B. an assessment of the company’s ability to be successful in the future under a number of different assumptions.
C. given one or more hypothetical assumptions, an entity’s expected financial position, results of operations, and cash flows.
D. an assessment of the company’s ability to be successful in the future.
25) The payout ratio is calculated by dividing
A. dividends per share by earnings per share.
B. cash dividends by net income less preferred dividends.
C. cash dividends by market price per share.
D. cash dividends by net income plus preferred dividends.
26) The calculation of the number of times interest is earned involves dividing
A. net income by annual interest expense.
B. net income plus income taxes by annual interest expense.
C. none of these.
D. net income plus income taxes and interest expense by annual interest expense.
27) The rate of return on common stock equity is calculated by dividing
A. net income by average common stockholders equity.
B. net income less preferred dividends by average common stockholders equity.
C. net income less preferred dividends by ending common stockholders equity.
D. net income by ending common stockholders equity.
28) A company borrows $10,000 and signs a 90-day nontrade note payable. In preparing a statement of cash flows (indirect method), this event would be reflected as a(n)
A. addition adjustment to net income in the cash flows from operating activities section.
B. cash outflow from investing activities.
C. cash inflow from financing activities.
D. cash inflow from investing activities.
29) An increase in inventory balance would be reported in a statement of cash flows using the indirect method (reconciliation method) as a(n)
A. addition to net income in arriving at net cash flow from operating activities.
B. deduction from net income in arriving at net cash flow from operating activities.
C. cash outflow from financing activities.
D. cash outflow from investing activities.
30) Of the following questions, which one would not be answered by the statement of cash flows?
A. Where did the cash come from during the period?
B. What was the cash used for during the period?
C. What was the change in the cash balance during the period?
D. Were all the cash expenditures of benefit to the company during the period?
31) In determining net cash flow from operating activities, a decrease in accounts payable during a period
A. means that income on an accrual basis is less than income on a cash basis.
B. requires an addition adjustment to net income under the indirect method.
C. requires a decrease adjustment to cost of goods sold under the direct method.
D. requires an increase adjustment to cost of goods sold under the direct method.
32) Riley Company reports its income from investments under the equity method and recognized income of $25,000 from its investment in Wood Co. during the current year, even though no dividends were declared or paid by Wood during the year. On Riley’s statement of cash flows (indirect method), the $25,000 should
A. not be shown.
B. be shown as cash inflow from investing activities.
C. be shown as a deduction from net income in the cash flows from operating activities section.
D. be shown as cash outflow from financing activities.
33) In a statement of cash flows, the cash flows from investing activities section should report
A. the issuance of common stock in exchange for a factory building.
B. stock dividends received.
C. the assignment of accounts receivable.
D. a major repair to machinery charged to accumulated depreciation.
34) Which of the following transactions would require the use of the present value of an annuity due concept in order to calculate the present value of the asset obtained or liability owed at the date of incurrence?
A. A capital lease is entered into with the initial lease payment due upon the signing of the lease agreement.
B. A ten-year 8% bond is issued on January 2 with interest payable semiannually on July 1 and January 1 yielding 7%.
C. A ten-year 8% bond is issued on January 2 with interest payable semiannually on July 1 and January 1 yielding 9%.
D. A capital lease is entered into with the initial lease payment due one month subse-quent to the signing of the lease agreement.
35) Which of the following tables would show the smallest factor for an interest rate of 10% for six periods?
A. Future value of an ordinary annuity of 1
B. Future value of an annuity due of 1
C. Present value of an annuity due of 1
D. Present value of an ordinary annuity of 1
36) Which table would you use to determine how much you would need to have deposited three years ago at 10% compounded annually in order to have $1,000 today?
A. Future value of 1 or present value of 1
B. Future value of an ordinary annuity of 1
C. Present value of an ordinary annuity of 1
D. Future value of an annuity due of 1
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 421—- FINAL EXAM .
1. A strength of the income statement as compared to the balance sheet is that items that cannot be measured reliably can be reported in the income statement.
2. A company that reports a discontinued operation or an extraordinary item has the option of reporting per share amounts for these items.
3. Limitations of the income statement include all of the following except
a. items that cannot be measured reliably are not reported.
b. only actual amounts are reported in determining net income.
c. income measurement involves judgment.
d. income numbers are affected by the accounting methods employed
4. Carpino Corporation has an extraordinary loss of $200,000, an unusual gain of $140,000, and a tax rate of 40%. At what amount should Carpino report each item?
Extraordinary loss Unusual gain
a. $(200,000) $140,000
b. (200,000) 84,000
c. (120,000) 140,000
d. (120,000) 84,000
5. The following items were among those that were reported on Nen Co.’s income statement for the year ended December 31, 2007:
a. Legal and audit fees $130,000
b. Rent for office space 180,000
c. Interest on inventory floor plan 210,000
d. Loss on abandoned equipment used in operations 35,000
e. The office space is used equally by Nen’s sales and accounting departments. What amount of the above-listed items should be classified as general and administrative expenses in Nen’s multiple-step income statement?
a. $220,000.
b. $255,000.
c. $310,000.
d. $430,000.
$130,000 + $90,000 = $220,000
6. Which of these is generally an example of an extraordinary item?
a. Loss incurred because of a strike by employees.
b. Write-off of deferred marketing costs believed to have no future benefit.
c. Gain resulting from the devaluation of the U.S. dollar.
d. Gain resulting from the state exercising its right of eminent domain on a piece of land used as a parking lot.
7. The most popular input measure used to determine the progress toward completion is the cost-to-cost basis. True
8. In selecting an accounting method for a newly contracted long-term construction project, the principal factor to be considered should be
a. the terms of payment in the contract.
b. the degree to which a reliable estimate of the costs to complete and extent of progress toward completion is practicable.
c. the method commonly used by the contractor to account for other long-term construc-tion contracts.
d. the inherent nature of the contractor’s technical facilities used in construction.
9. In certain cases, revenue is recognized at the completion of production even though no sale has been made. Which of the following statements is not true?
a. Examples involve precious metals or farm equipment.
b. The products possess immediate marketability at quoted prices.
c. No significant costs are involved in selling the product.
d. All of these statements are true.
10. Reese Construction Corporation contracted to construct a building for $1,500,000. Construction began in 2007 and was completed in 2008. Data relating to the contract are summarized below:
Year ended
December 31,
2007 2008
Costs incurred $600,000 $450,000
Estimated costs to complete 400,000
Reese uses the percentage-of-completion method as the basis for income recognition. For the years ended December 31, 2007, and 2008, respectively, Reese should report gross profit of
a. $270,000 and $180,000.
b. $900,000 and $600,000.
c. $300,000 and $150,000.
d. $0 and $450,000.
$600,000
($1,500,000 $1,000,000) = $300,000
$600,000 + $400,000
($1,500,000 $1,050,000) $300,000 = $150,000.
11. Maris, Inc. appropriately used the installment method of accounting to recognize income in its financial statement. Some pertinent data relating to this method of accounting include:
2007 2008
Installment sales $750,000 $900,000
Cost of sales 450,000 630,000
Gross profit $300,000 $270,000
Collections during year:
On 2007 sales 250,000 250,000
On 2008 sales 300,000
What amount to be realized gross profit should be reported on Maris’s income statement for 2008?
a. $165,000
b. $190,000
c. $220,000
d. $270,000
($300,000 $750,000) $250,000 = $100,000
[($270,000 $900,000) $300,000] + $100,000 = $190,000.
12. Penny Farms produced 800,000 pounds of cotton during the 2007 season. Penny sells all of its cotton to Bye Co., which has agreed to purchase Penny’s entire production at the prevailing market price. Recent legislation assures that the market price will not fall below $.70 per pound during the next two years. Penny’s costs of selling and distributing the cotton are immaterial and can be reasonably estimated. Penny reports its inventory at expected exit value. During 2007, Penny sold and delivered to Bye 600,000 pounds at the market price of $.70. Penny sold the remaining 200,000 pounds during 2008 at the market price of $.72. What amount of revenue should Penny recognize in 2007?
a. $420,000
b. $432,000
c. $560,000
d. $576,000
800,000 lbs. $.70 = $560,000
13. According to the FASB’s conceptual framework, the process of reporting an item in the financial statements of an entity is
a. recognition.
b. realization.
c. allocation.
d. matching.
1. The following items were among those that were reported on Nen Co.’s income statement for the year ended December 31, 2007:
Legal and audit fees $130,000
Rent for office space 180,000
Interest on inventory floor plan 210,000
Loss on abandoned equipment used in operations 35,000
The office space is used equally by Nen’s sales and accounting departments. What amount of the above-listed items should be classified as general and administrative expenses in Nen’s multiple-step income statement?
a. $220,000.
b. $255,000.
c. $310,000.
d. $430,000.
$130,000 + $90,000 = $220,000
1. _B_____ Balance sheet information is useful for all of the following except to
a. compute rates of return
b. analyze cash inflows and outflows for the period
c. evaluate capital structure
d. assess future cash flows
2. __C_____ The amount of time that is expected to elapse until an asset is realized or otherwise converted into cash is referred to as
a. solvency.
b. financial flexibility.
c. liquidity.
d. exchangeability.
3. __B_____ The correct order to present current assets is
a. cash, accounts receivable, prepaid items, inventories.
b. cash, accounts receivable, inventories, prepaid items.
c. cash, inventories, accounts receivable, prepaid items.
d. cash, inventories, prepaid items, accounts receivable.
4. _B_____ Which item below is not a current liability?
a. Unearned revenue
b. Stock dividends distributable
c. The currently maturing portion of long-term debt
d. Trade accounts payable
5. __D_____ Working capital is
a. capital which has been reinvested in the business.
b. unappropriated retained earnings.
c. cash and receivables less current liabilities.
d. none of these.
Quiz 5 continued over . . .
Quiz 5 continued.
6. __D_____ Which of the following is a contra account?
a. Premium on bonds payable
b. Unearned revenue
c. Patents
d. Accumulated depreciation
7. __D_____ Which of the following events will appear in the cash flows from financing activities section of the statement of cash flows?
a. Cash purchases of equipment.
b. Cash purchases of bonds issued by another company.
c. Cash received as repayment for funds loaned.
d. Cash purchase of treasury stock.
8. __B_____Houghton Company has the following items: common stock, $720,000; treasury stock, $85,000; deferred taxes, $100,000 and retained earnings, $313,000. What total amount should Houghton Company report as stockholders equity?
a. $848,000.
b. $948,000.
c. $1,048,000.
d. $1,118,000.
9. ___B____Keisler Corporation reports:
Cash provided by operating activities $200,000
Cash used by investing activities 110,000
Cash provided by financing activities 140,000
Beginning cash balance 70,000
What is Keisler s ending cash balance?
a. $230,000.
b. $300,000.
c. $450,000.
d. $520,000.
10. __C_____Sauder Corporation reports the following information:
Net income $250,000
Depreciation expense 70,000
Increase in accounts receivable 30,000
Sauder should report cash provided by operating activities of
a. $150,000.
b. $210,000.
c. $290,000.
d. $350,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 421—- FINAL EXAM .
The Financial Accounting Standards Board employs a “due process” system which
(Points: 5) has all CPAs in the United States vote on a new Statement. enables interested parties to express their views on issues under consideration. identifies the accounting issues that are the most important. requires that all accountants receive a copy of financial standards.
2. (TCO A) The IASB: (Points: 5) governs accounting standards in the U.S. is working on a convergence project with the FASB. sets the accounting standards for only European countries. plays only a minor part in accounting rule making throughout the world.
3. (TCO A) International GAAP, or i-GAAP: (Points: 5) has different standards than under U.S. GAAP. has some commonality with U.S. GAAP in many areas. is accepted by many countries throughout the world all of the above are true.
4. (TCO A) Information is neutral if it: (Points: 5) provides benefits which are at least equal to the costs of its preparation. can be compared with similar information about an enterprise at other points in time. would have no impact on a decision maker. is free from bias toward a predetermined result.
5. (TCO A) Which of the following elements of financial statements is not a component of comprehensive income? (Points: 5) Revenues Distributions to owners Losses Expenses
6. (TCO A) Issuance of common stock for cash affects which basic element of financial statements? (Points: 5) Revenues Losses Liabilities Equity
7. (TCO A) Which basic element of financial statements arise from peripheral or incidental transactions? (Points: 5) Assets Liabilities Gains Expenses
8. (TCO A) Which basic assumption may not be followed when a firm in bankruptcy reports financial results? (Points: 5) Economic entity assumption Going concern assumption Periodicity assumption Monetary unit assumption
9. (TCO A) What is the quality of information that enables users to better forecast future operations? (Points: 5) Reliability. Materiality. Comparability. Relevance.
10. (TCO A) Financial information exhibits the characteristic of consistency when (Points: 5) expenses are reported as charges against revenue in the period in which they are paid. accounting entities give accountable events the same accounting treatment from period to period. extraordinary gains and losses are not included on the income statement. accounting procedures are adopted which give a consistent rate of net income
11. (TCO A) Which of the following is true with regard to the element “comprehensive income”? (Points: 5) includes all changes in equity during a period except those resulting from investments by owners and distributions to owners. is optional for financial statement preparers. is not in accordance with GAAP. came into law with the passing of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.
Not 100% sure about 11
12. (TCO A) Which of the following basic accounting assumptions is threatened by the existence of severe inflation in the economy? (Points: 5) Monetary unit assumption. Periodicity assumption. Going-concern assumption. Economic entity assumption.
13. (TCO D) One criticism not normally aimed at a balance sheet prepared using current accounting and reporting standards is (Points: 5) failure to reflect current value information. the extensive use of separate classifications. an extensive use of estimates. failure to include items of financial value that cannot be recorded objectively.
14. (TCO D) The amount of time that is expected to elapse until an asset is realized or otherwise converted into cash is referred to as (Points: 5) solvency. financial flexibility. liquidity. exchangeability.
15. (TCO D) The net assets of a business are equal to (Points: 5) current assets minus current liabilities. total assets plus total liabilities. total assets minus total stockholders’ equity. none of these.
16. (TCO D) Houghton Company has the following items: common stock, $720,000; treasury stock, $85,000; deferred taxes, $100,000 and retained earnings, $313,000. What total amount should Houghton Company report as stockholders’ equity? (Points: 5) $848,000 $948,000 $1,048,000 $1,118,000
17. (TCO D) The current assets section of the balance sheet should include (Points: 5) machinery patents goodwill inventory
18. (TCO D) An example of an item which is not an element of working capital is: (Points: 5) accrued interest on notes receivable. goodwill. goods in process. temporary investments.
19. (TCO D) Which of the following is not an acceptable major asset classification? (Points: 5) Current assets Long-term assets Property, plant, and equipment Deferred charges
20. (TCO D) The presentation of long-term liabilities in the balance sheet should disclose: (Points: 5) maturity dates interest rates conversion rights all of the above
21. (TCO D) Equity or debt securities held to finance future construction of additional manufacturing plants should be classified on the balance sheet as: (Points: 5) current assets. property, plant and equipment. intangible assets. long-term investments.
22. (TCO D) Treasury stock should be reported as a(n) (Points: 5) current asset. investment other asset. reduction of stockholder’s equity.
If a business entity entered into certain related party transactions, it would be required to disclose all of the following information except the
A. nature of any future transactions planned between the parties and the terms involved.
B. dollar amount of the transactions for each of the periods for which an income state-ment is presented.
C. nature of the relationship between the parties to the transactions.
D. amounts due from or to related parties as of the date of each balance sheet presented.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 421 MCQS
1) Why are certain costs of doing business capitalized when incurred and then depreciated or amortized over subsequent accounting cycles?
2) An accrued expense can best be described as an amount
3) If, during an accounting period, an expense item has been incurred and consumed but not yet paid for or recorded, then the end-of-period adjusting entry would involve
4) The information provided by financial reporting pertains to
5) One objective of financial reporting is to provide
6) The two primary qualities that make accounting information useful for decision making are
7) The body that has the power to prescribe the accounting practices and standards to be employed by companies that fall under its jurisdiction is the
8) The Financial Accounting Foundation
9) The major distinction between the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) and its predecessor, the Accounting Principles Board (APB), is
10) The occurrence which most likely would have no effect on 2007 net income (assuming that all amounts involved are material) is the
11) Which of the following would represent the least likely use of an income statement prepared for a business enterprise?
12) The single-step income statement emphasizes
13) Which of the following is not a reason why revenue is recognized at time of sale?
14) The process of formally recording or incorporating an item in the financial statements of an entity is
15) Which of the following is not an accurate representation concerning revenue recognition?
16) The correct order to present current assets is
17) The amount of time that is expected to elapse until an asset is realized or otherwise converted into cash is referred to as
18) One criticism not normally aimed at a balance sheet prepared using current accounting and reporting standards is
19) The focus of APB Opinion No. 22 is on the disclosure of accounting policies. This information is important to financial statement readers in determining
20) Events that occur after the December 31, 2008 balance sheet date (but before the balance sheet is issued) and provide additional evidence about conditions that existed at the balance sheet date and affect the realizability of accounts receivable should be
21) The full disclosure principle, as adopted by the accounting profession, is best described by which of the following?
22) Companies should disclose all of the following in interim reports except
23) Which of the following best characterizes the difference between a financial forecast and a financial projection?
24) A financial forecast per professional pronouncements presents to the best of the responsible party’s knowledge and belief,
25) Which of the following ratios measures long-term solvency?
26) The payout ratio is calculated by dividing
27) Theoretically, in computing the receivables turnover, the numerator should include
28) The primary purpose of the statement of cash flows is to provide information
29) The first step in the preparation of the statement of cash flows requires the use of information included in which comparative financial statements?
30) A company borrows $10,000 and signs a 90-day nontrade note payable. In preparing a statement of cash flows (indirect method), this event would be reflected as a(n)
31) The amortization of bond premium on long-term debt should be presented in a statement of cash flows (using the indirect method for operating activities) as a(n)
32) In a statement of cash flows, the cash flows from investing activities section should report
33) In reporting extraordinary transactions on a statement of cash flows (indirect method), the
34)Which of the following tables would show the smallest factor for an interest rate of 10% for six periods
35) Which table would show the largest factor for an interest rate of 8% for five periods?
36) Which of the following tables would show the smallest value for an interest rate of 5% for six periods?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E2-2 (Qualitative Characteristics) The qualitative characteristics that make accounting information
useful for decision-making purposes are as follows.
Relevance Timeliness Representational faithfulness
Reliability Verifiability Comparability
Predictive value Neutrality Consistency
Feedback value
Instructions
Identify the appropriate qualitative characteristic(s) to be used given the information provided below.
(a) Qualitative characteristic being employed when companies in the same industry are using the same accounting principles.
(b) Quality of information that confirms users’ earlier expectations.
(c) Imperative for providing comparisons of a company from period to period.
(d) Ignores the economic consequences of a standard or rule.
(e) Requires a high degree of consensus among individuals on a given measurement.
(f) Predictive value is an ingredient of this primary quality of information.
(g) Two qualitative characteristics that are related to both relevance and reliability.
(h) Neutrality is an ingredient of this primary quality of accounting information.
(i) Two primary qualities that make accounting information useful for decision-making purposes
(j) Issuance of interim reports is an example of what primary ingredient of relevance
E2-4 (Assumptions, Principles, and Constraints) Presented below are the assumptions, principles, and constraints used in this chapter.
1. Economic entity assumption 5. Historical cost principle 9. Materiality
2. Going concern assumption 6. Matching principle 10. Industry practices
3. Monetary unit assumption 7. Full disclosure principle 11. Conservatism
4. Periodicity assumption 8. Cost-benefit relationship
Instructions
Identify by number the accounting assumption, principle, or constraint that describes each situation below.
Do not use a letter more than once.
(a) Allocates expenses to revenues in the proper period.
(b) Indicates that market value changes subsequent to purchase are not recorded in the accounts. (Do not use revenue recognition principle.)
(c) Ensures that all relevant financial information is reported.
(d) Rationale why plant assets are not reported at liquidation value. (Do not use historical cost principle.)
(e) Anticipates all losses, but reports no gains.
(f) Indicates that personal and business record keeping should be separately maintained.
(g) Separates financial information into time periods for reporting purposes.
(h) Permits the use of market value valuation in certain specific situations.
(i) Requires that information significant enough to affect the decision of reasonably informed users should be disclosed. (Do not use full disclosure principle.)
(j) Assumes that the dollar is the measuring stick used to report on financial performance.
E2-7 (Accounting Principles Comprehensive) Presented below are a number of business transactions that occurred during the current year for Fresh Horses, Inc.
Instructions
In each of the situations, discuss the appropriateness of the journal entries in terms of generally accepted accounting principles.
(a) The president of Fresh Horses, Inc. used his expense account to purchase a new Suburban solely for personal use. The following journal entry was made.
Miscellaneous Expense 29,000
Cash 29,000
(b) Merchandise inventory that cost $620,000 is reported on the balance sheet at $690,000, the expected selling price less estimated selling costs. The following entry was made to record this increase in value.
Merchandise Inventory 70,000
Revenue 70,000
(c) The company is being sued for $500,000 by a customer who claims damages for personal injury apparently caused by a defective product. Company attorneys feel extremely confident that the company will have no liability for damages resulting from the situation. Nevertheless, the company decides to make the following entry.
Loss from Lawsuit 500,000
Liability for Lawsuit 500,000
(d) Because the general level of prices increased during the current year, Fresh Horses, Inc. determined that there was a $16,000 understatement of depreciation expense on its equipment and decided to record it in its accounts. The following entry was made.
Depreciation Expense 16,000
Accumulated Depreciation 16,000
(e) Fresh Horses, Inc. has been concerned about whether intangible assets could generate cash in case of liquidation. As a consequence, goodwill arising from a purchase transaction during the current year and recorded at $800,000 was written off as follows.
Retained Earnings 800,000
Goodwill 800,000
(f) Because of a fire sale, equipment obviously worth $200,000 was acquired at a cost of $155,000.
The following entry was made.
Equipment 200,000
Cash 155,000
Revenue 45,000
E3-5 (Adjusting Entries) The ledger of Duggan Rental Agency on March 31 of the current year includes the following selected accounts before adjusting entries have been prepared.
Debit Credit
Prepaid Insurance $ 3,600
Supplies 2,800
Equipment 25,000
Accumulated Depreciation Equipment $ 8,400
Notes Payable 20,000
Unearned Rent Revenue 9,300
Rent Revenue 60,000
Interest Expense 0
Wage Expense 14,000
An analysis of the accounts shows the following.
1. The equipment depreciates $250 per month.
2. One-third of the unearned rent was earned during the quarter.
3. Interest of $500 is accrued on the notes payable.
4. Supplies on hand total $850.
5. Insurance expires at the rate of $300 per month.
Instructions
Prepare the adjusting entries at March 31, assuming that adjusting entries are made quarterly. Additional accounts are: Depreciation Expense; Insurance Expense; Interest Payable; and Supplies Expense. (Omit explanations.)
*P3-9 (Adjusting and Closing) Presented below is the December 31 trial balance of Nancy Drew
Boutique.
NANCY DREW BOUTIQUE
TRIAL BALANCE
DECEMBER 31
Debit Credit
Cash $ 18,500
Accounts Receivable 42,000
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $ 700
Inventory, December 31 80,000
Prepaid Insurance 5,100
Furniture and Equipment 84,000
Accumulated Depreciation Furniture and Equipment 35,000
Notes Payable 28,000
Common Stock 80,600
Retained Earnings 10,000
Sales 600,000
Cost of Goods Sold 398,000
Sales Salaries Expense 50,000
Advertising Expense 6,700
Administrative Salaries Expense 65,000
Office Expense 5,000
$754,300 $754,300
Instructions
(a) Construct T-accounts and enter the balances shown.
(b) Prepare adjusting journal entries for the following and post to the T-accounts. (Omit explanations.)
Open additional T-accounts as necessary. (The books are closed yearly on December 31.)
(1) Bad debts are estimated to be $1,400.
(2) Furniture and equipment is depreciated based on a 6-year life (no salvage value).
(3) Insurance expired during the year $2,550.
(4) Interest accrued on notes payable $3,360.
(5) Sales salaries earned but not paid $2,400.
(6) Advertising paid in advance $700.
(7) Office supplies on hand $1,500, charged to Office Expense when purchased.
(c) Prepare closing entries and post to the accounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 421 Week 4 Wiley Plus Assignment – Exercises
Problem 1
The income statement of Rodriquez Company is shown below.
|
RODRIQUEZ COMPANY INCOME STATEMENT FOR THE YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2012
|
|
Sales
|
|
|
|
$6,894,600
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
|
$1,893,870
|
|
|
|
Purchases
|
|
4,375,530
|
|
|
|
Goods available for sale
|
|
6,269,400
|
|
|
|
Ending inventory
|
|
1,608,650
|
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
4,660,750
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
|
|
2,233,850
|
|
Operating expenses
|
|
|
|
|
|
Selling expenses
|
|
440,640
|
|
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
|
703,840
|
|
1,144,480
|
|
Net income
|
|
|
|
$1,089,370
|
Additional information:
|
1.
|
|
Accounts receivable decreased $312,690 during the year.
|
|
2.
|
|
Prepaid expenses increased $178,550 during the year.
|
|
3.
|
|
Accounts payable to suppliers of merchandise decreased $281,970 during the year.
|
|
4.
|
|
Accrued expenses payable decreased $124,510 during the year.
|
|
5.
|
|
Administrative expenses include depreciation expense of $55,760.
|
Prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the direct method.
Problem 2
Presented below are two independent situations.
Situation A:
Chenowith Co. reports revenues of $200,680 and operating expenses of $110,380 in its first year of operations, 2012. Accounts receivable and accounts payable at year-end were $79,260 and $40,870, respectively. Assume that the accounts payable related to operating expenses. Ignore income taxes.
Using the direct method, compute net cash provided (used) by operating activities. (If an amount reduces the account balance then enter with negative sign.)
|
Net cash providedusedby operating activities
|
|
$
|
|
|
|
Situation B:
The income statement for Edgebrook Company shows cost of goods sold $307,650 and operating expenses (exclusive of depreciation) $231,760. The comparative balance sheet for the year shows that inventory increased $21,380, prepaid expenses decreased $7,680, accounts payable (related to merchandise) decreased $15,450, and accrued expenses payable increased $13,950.
Compute (a) cash payments to suppliers and (b) cash payments for operating expenses.
|
(a)
|
|
Cash payments to suppliers
|
|
$
|
|
(b)
|
|
Cash payments for operating expenses
|
|
$
|
Problem 3
Condensed financial data of Fairchild Company for 2012 and 2011 are presented below.
|
FAIRCHILD COMPANY COMPARATIVE BALANCE SHEET AS OF DECEMBER 31, 2012 AND 2011
|
|
|
2012
|
|
2011
|
|
Cash
|
|
$1,801
|
|
|
$1,091
|
|
|
Receivables
|
|
1,757
|
|
|
1,301
|
|
|
Inventory
|
|
1,594
|
|
|
1,900
|
|
|
Plant assets
|
|
1,897
|
|
|
1,707
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
|
(1,205
|
)
|
|
(1,170
|
)
|
|
Long-term investments (held-to-maturity)
|
|
1,299
|
|
|
1,462
|
|
|
|
$7,143
|
|
|
$6,291
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
$1,207
|
|
|
$796
|
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
|
203
|
|
|
245
|
|
|
Bonds payable
|
|
1,418
|
|
|
1,631
|
|
|
Common stock
|
|
1,893
|
|
|
1,706
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
2,422
|
|
|
1,913
|
|
|
|
$7,143
|
|
|
$6,291
|
|
|
FAIRCHILD COMPANY INCOME STATEMENT FOR THE YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2012
|
|
Sales
|
|
$6,851
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
4,691
|
|
Gross margin
|
|
2,160
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
|
930
|
|
Income from operations
|
|
1,230
|
|
Other revenues and gains
|
|
|
|
Gain on sale of investments
|
|
82
|
|
Income before tax
|
|
1,312
|
|
Income tax expense
|
|
531
|
|
Net income
|
|
$781
|
Additional information:
During the year, $78 of common stock was issued in exchange for plant assets. No plant assets were sold in 2012. Cash dividends were $272.
Prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method. (If an amount reduces the account balance then enter with negative sign.)
Problem 4
Condensed financial data of Fairchild Company for 2012 and 2011 are presented below.
|
FAIRCHILD COMPANY COMPARATIVE BALANCE SHEET AS OF DECEMBER 31, 2012 AND 2011
|
|
|
2012
|
|
2011
|
|
Cash
|
|
$1,803
|
|
|
$1,095
|
|
|
Receivables
|
|
1,755
|
|
|
1,291
|
|
|
Inventory
|
|
1,581
|
|
|
1,910
|
|
|
Plant assets
|
|
1,893
|
|
|
1,708
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
|
(1,194
|
)
|
|
(1,163
|
)
|
|
Long-term investments (held-to-maturity)
|
|
1,299
|
|
|
1,475
|
|
|
|
$7,137
|
|
|
$6,316
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
$1,205
|
|
|
$789
|
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
|
213
|
|
|
235
|
|
|
Bonds payable
|
|
1,411
|
|
|
1,649
|
|
|
Common stock
|
|
1,898
|
|
|
1,692
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
2,410
|
|
|
1,951
|
|
|
|
$7,137
|
|
|
$6,316
|
|
|
FAIRCHILD COMPANY INCOME STATEMENT FOR THE YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2012
|
|
Sales
|
|
$6,828
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
4,694
|
|
Gross margin
|
|
2,134
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
|
935
|
|
Income from operations
|
|
1,199
|
|
Other revenues and gains
|
|
|
|
Gain on sale of investments
|
|
80
|
|
Income before tax
|
|
1,279
|
|
Income tax expense
|
|
547
|
|
Net income
|
|
$732
|
Additional information:
During the year, $78 of common stock was issued in exchange for plant assets. No plant assets were sold in 2012. Cash dividends were $273.
Prepare a statement of cash flows using the direct method. (If an amount reduces the account balance then enter with negative sign.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E7-2
(Determine Cash Balance)Presented below are a number of independent situations. Instructions For each individual situation, determine the amount that should be reported as cash. If the item(s) is not reported as cash, explain the rationale. 1. Checking account balance $925,000; certificate of deposit $1,400,000; cash advance to subsidiary of $980,000; utility deposit paid to gas company $180. 2. Checking account balance $600,000; an overdraft in special checking account at same bank as normal checking account of $17,000; cash held in a bond sinking fund $200,000; petty cash fund $300; coins and currency on hand $1,350. 3. Checking account balance $590,000; postdated check from customer $11,000; cash restricted due to maintaining compensating balance requirement of $100,000; certified check from customer $9,800; postage stamps on hand $620. 4. Checking account balance at bank $37,000; money market balance at mutual fund (has checking privileges) $48,000; NSF check received from customer $800. 5. Checking account balance $700,000; cash restricted for future plant expansion $500,000; short-term Treasury bills $180,000; cash advance received from customer $900 (not included in checking account balance); cash advance of $7,000 to company executive, payable on demand; refundable deposit of $26,000 paid to federal government to guarantee performance on construction contract.
E7-7
(Recording Bad Debts)
Duncan Company reports the following financial information before adjustments.
Dr. Cr.
Accounts Receivable$100,000
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts$2,000
Sales (all on credit) 900,000
Sales Returns and Allowances 50,000
Instructions
Prepare the journal entry to record Bad Debt Expense assuming Duncan Company estimates bad debts at (a) 1% of net sales and (b) 5% of accounts receivable.
DescriptionDebitCredit
E7-18
On July 1, 2007, Agincourt Inc. made two sales.
1. It sold land having a fair market value of $700,000 in exchange for a 4-year non-interest-bearing promissory note in the face amount of $1,101,460. The land is carried on Agincourt’s books at a cost of $590,000.
2. It rendered services in exchange for a 3%, 8-year promissory note having a face value of $400,000 (interest payable annually).
Agincourt Inc. recently had to pay 8% interest for money that it borrowed from British National Bank. The customers in these two transactions have credit ratings that require them to borrow money at 12% interest.
Instructions
Record the two journal entries that should be recorded by Agincourt Inc. for the sales transactions above that took place on July 1, 2007. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list in order of magnitude. Round answers to 2 decimal places. Hint: Use tables in text.)
E7-20
(Analysis of Receivables)
Presented below is information for Jones Company.
1. Beginning-of-the-year Accounts Receivable balance was $15,000.
2. Net sales (all on account) for the year were $100,000. Jones does not offer cash discounts.
3. Collections on accounts receivable during the year were $70,000.
Instructions
(a) Prepare (summary) journal entries to record the items noted above.
E7-24
(Bank Reconciliation and Adjusting Entries)
Angela Lansbury Company deposits all receipts and makes all payments by check. The following information is available from the cash records.
June 30 Bank Reconciliation
Balance per bank$ 7,000
Add: Deposits in Transit 1,540
Deduct: Outstanding checks(2,000)
Balance per books$ 6,540
Month of July Results
Per BankPer Books
Balance July 31$8,650$9,250
July deposits 5,000 5,810
July checks4,000 3,100
July note collected (not included in July deposits)1,000-
July bank service charge15-
July NSF check from a customer, returned by the bank (recorded by bank as a charge)335-
Instructions
(a) Prepare a bank reconciliation going from balance per bank and balance per book to correct cash balance. (For multiple entries, list in order of magnitude. List all amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 422 Final Exam
JULY 2013 UPDATE
| 1) A cash equivalent is a short-term, highly liquid investment that is readily convertible into known amounts of cash and |
|
|
| 2) Which of the following is NOT considered cash for financial reporting purposes? |
|
|
|
| 3) Which of the following items should NOT be included in the Cash caption on the balance sheet? |
|
|
|
| 4) If a company employs the gross method of recording accounts receivable from customers, then sales discounts taken should be reported as |
|
|
|
| 5) The advantage of relating a company s bad debt expense to its outstanding accounts receivable is that this approach |
|
|
|
| 6) Which of the following is a generally accepted method of determining the amount of the adjustment to bad debt expense? |
|
|
| 7) If the beginning inventory for 2006 is overstated, the effects of this error on cost of goods sold for 2006, net income for 2006, and assets at December 31, 2007, respectively, are |
|
|
| 8) Valuation of inventories requires the determination of all of the following EXCEPT |
|
|
| 9) Eller Co. received merchandise on consignment. As of January 31, Eller included the goods in inventory, but did NOT record the transaction. The effect of this on its financial statements for January 31 would be |
|
|
| 10) Assuming no beginning inventory, what can be said about the trend of inventory prices if cost of goods sold computed when inventory is valued using the FIFO method exceeds cost of goods sold when inventory is valued using the LIFO method? |
|
|
|
| 11) Which method of inventory pricing best approximates specific identification of the actual flow of costs and units in most manufacturing situations? |
|
|
|
| 12) All of the following costs should be charged against revenue in the period in which costs are incurred EXCEPT |
| 13) When the direct method is used to record inventory at market |
|
A. |
|
a loss is recorded directly in the inventory account by crediting inventory and debiting loss on inventory |
|
|
| 14) An item of inventory purchased this period for $15.00 has been incorrectly written down to its current replacement cost of $10.00. It sells during the following period for $30.00, its normal selling price, with disposal costs of $3.00 and normal profit of $12.00. Which of the following statements is NOT true? |
|
|
|
| 15) In no case can market in the lower-of-cost-or-market rule be more than |
|
|
|
| 16) The gross profit method of inventory valuation is invalid when |
|
|
| 17) Which of the following is NOT a basic assumption of the gross profit method? |
|
|
|
| 18) In 2006, Lucas Manufacturing signed a contract with a supplier to purchase raw materials in 2007 for $700,000. Before the December 31, 2006 balance sheet date, the market price for these materials dropped to $510,000. The journal entry to record this situation at December 31, 2006 will result in a credit that should be reported |
|
|
|
| 19) The cost of land typically includes the purchase price and all of the following costs EXCEPT |
|
|
| 20) The cost of land does NOT include |
|
|
|
| 21) Cotton Hotel Corporation recently purchased Holiday Hotel and the land on which it is located with the plan to tear down the Holiday Hotel and build a new luxury hotel on the site. The cost of the Holiday Hotel should be |
|
|
|
| 22) To be consistent with the historical cost principle, overhead costs incurred by an enterprise constructing its own building should be |
|
|
| 23) Which of the following costs are capitalized for self-constructed assets? |
|
|
|
| 24) Which of the following assets do NOT qualify for capitalization of interest costs incurred during construction of the assets? |
|
|
|
| 25) The cost of a nonmonetary asset acquired in exchange for another nonmonetary asset and the exchange has commercial substance is usually recorded at |
|
|
|
| 26) Construction of a qualifying asset is started on April 1 and finished on December 1. The fraction used to multiply an expenditure made on April 1 to find weighted-average accumulated expenditures is |
|
|
|
| 27) When a plant asset is acquired by issuance of common stock, the cost of the plant asset is properly measured by the |
|
|
| 28) Which of the following principles best describes the conceptual rationale for the methods of matching depreciation expense with revenues? |
|
|
|
| 29) For income statement purposes, depreciation is a variable expense if the depreciation method used is |
|
|
|
| 30) If an industrial firm uses the units-of-production method for computing depreciation on its only plant asset, factory machinery, the credit to accumulated depreciation from period to period during the life of the firm will |
|
|
|
| 31) Lennon Company purchased a depreciable asset for $200,000. The estimated salvage value is $10,000, and the estimated useful life is 10,000 hours. Lennon used the asset for 1,100 hours in the current year. The activity method will be used for depreciation. What is the depreciation expense on this asset? |
|
|
| [$200,000 $10,000) 10,000] 1,100 = $20,900 |
| 32) Bigbie Company purchased a depreciable asset for $600,000. The estimated salvage value is $30,000, and the estimated useful life is 10,000 hours. Bigbie used the asset for 1,100 hours in the current year. The activity method will be used for depreciation. What is the depreciation expense on this asset? |
|
|
| [($600,000 $30,000) 10,000] 1,100 = $62,700 |
| 33) Starr Company purchased a depreciable asset for $150,000. The estimated salvage value is $10,000, and the estimated useful life is 8 years. The double-declining balance method will be used for depreciation. What is the depreciation expense for the second year on this asset? |
|
|
| $150,000 [(1 8) 2] = $37,500
($150,000 $37,500) [(1 8) 2] = $28,125
|
| 34) The cost of purchasing patent rights for a product that might otherwise have seriously competed with one of the purchaser s patented products should be |
|
|
|
| 35) Costs incurred internally to create intangibles are |
|
|
| 36) Factors considered in determining an intangible asset s useful life include all of the following EXCEPT |
|
|
|
| 37) Fleming Corporation acquired Out-of-Sight Products on January 1, 2008 for $4,000,000, and recorded goodwill of $750,000 as a result of that purchase. At December 31, 2008, the Out-of-Sight Products Division had a fair value of $3,400,000. The net identifiable assets of the Division (excluding goodwill) had a fair value of $2,900,000 at that time. What amount of loss on impairment of goodwill should Fleming record in 2008? |
|
|
| $3,400,000 $2,900,000 = $500,000$750,000 $500,000 = $250,000. |
| 38) Mining Company acquired a patent on an oil extraction technique on January 1, 2006 for $5,000,000. It was expected to have a 10 year life and no residual value. Mining uses straight-line amortization for patents. On December 31, 2007, the expected future cash flows expected from the patent were expected to be $600,000 per year for the next eight years. The present value of these cash flows, discounted at Mining s market interest rate, is $2,800,000. At what amount should the patent be carried on the December 31, 2007 balance sheet? |
|
|
| $5,000,000 [($5,000,000 10) 2] = $4,000,000 |
| 39) General Products Company bought Special Products Division in 2006 and appropriately booked $250,000 of goodwill related to the purchase. On December 31, 2007, the fair value of Special Products Division is $2,000,000 and it is carried on General Product s books for a total of $1,700,000, including the goodwill. An analysis of Special Products Division s assets indicates that goodwill of $200,000 exists on December 31, 2007. What goodwill impairment should be recognized by General Products in 2007? |
|
|
| Since $2,000,000 > $1,700,000, $0 impairment |
| 40) Easton Company and Lofton Company were combined in a purchase transaction. Easton was able to acquire Lofton at a bargain price. The sum of the market or appraised values of identifiable assets acquired less the fair value of liabilities assumed exceeded the cost to Easton. After revaluing noncurrent assets to zero, there was still some negative goodwill. Proper accounting treatment by Easton is to report the amount as |
|
|
|
| 41) Purchased goodwill should |
|
|
|
| 42) The intangible asset goodwill may be |
|
|
|
| 43) If a short-term obligation is excluded from current liabilities because of refinancing, the footnote to the financial statements describing this event should include all of the following information EXCEPT |
|
|
|
| 44) Which of the following items is a current liability? |
|
|
|
| 45) Which of the following statements is false? |
|
|
|
46) Simson Company has 35 employees who work 8-hour days and are paid hourly. On January 1, 2006 the company began a program of granting its employees 10 days of paid vacation each year. Vacation days earned in 2006 may first be taken on January 1, 2007. Information relative to these employees is as follows:
| Year |
Hourly Wages |
Vacation Days Earned by Each Employee |
Vacation Days Used by Each Employee |
| 2006 |
$25.80 |
10 |
0 |
| 2007 |
27.00 |
10 |
8 |
| 2008 |
$28.50 |
10 |
10 |
What is the amount of expense relative to compensated absences that should be reported on Simson s income statement for 2006?
|
|
|
| $25.80 8 10 35 = $72,240. |
| 47) A company offers a cash rebate of $1 on each $4 package of batteries sold during 2007. Historically, 10% of customers mail in the rebate form. During 2007, 6,000,000 packages of batteries are sold, and 210,000 $1 rebates are mailed to customers. What is the rebate expense and liability, respectively, shown on the 2007 financial statements dated December 31? |
|
6,000,000 .10 $1 = $600,000; $600,000 $210,000 = $390,000
|
|
| 48) Wellman Company self-insures its property for fire and storm damage. If the company were to obtain insurance on the property, it would cost them $1,000,000 per year. The company estimates that on average it will incur losses of $800,000 per year. During 2007, $350,000 worth of losses were sustained. How much total expense and/or loss should be recognized by Wellman Company for 2007? |
|
|
|
| 49) Mark Ward is a farmer who owns land which borders on the right-of-way of the Northern Railroad. On August 10, 2007, due to the admitted negligence of the Railroad, hay on the farm was set on fire and burned. Ward had had a dispute with the Railroad for several years concerning the ownership of a small parcel of land. The representative of the Railroad has offered to assign any rights which the Railroad may have in the land to Ward in exchange for a release of his right to reimbursement for the loss he has sustained from the fire. Ward appears inclined to accept the Railroad s offer. The Railroad s 2007 financial statements should include the following related to the incident: |
|
|
|
| 50) Which of the following contingencies need NOT be disclosed in the financial statements or the notes thereto? |
|
|
| 51) Which of the following sets of conditions would give rise to the accrual of a contingency under current generally accepted accounting principles? |
|
|
| 52) Bonds for which the owners names are NOT registered with the issuing corporation are called |
|
|
|
| 53) An example of an item which is NOT a liability is |
|
|
|
| 54) If bonds are issued initially at a premium and the effective-interest method of amortization is used, interest expense in the earlier years will be |
|
|
| 55) What impact does a bargain purchase option have on the present value of the minimum lease payments computed by the lessee? |
|
|
|
| 56) Minimum lease payments may include a |
|
|
|
| 57) Which of the following best describes current practice in accounting for leases? |
|
|
| 58) In order to properly record a direct-financing lease, the lessor needs to know how to calculate the lease receivable. The lease receivable in a direct-financing lease is best defined as |
|
|
|
| 59) In the earlier years of a lease, from the lessee s perspective, the use of the |
|
|
|
| 60) In a lease that is appropriately recorded as a direct-financing lease by the lessor, unearned income |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 422 Final Exam / 100% correct answers
1) A cash equivalent is a short-term, highly liquid investment that is readily convertible into known amounts of cash and
A. has a current market value that is greater than its original cost.
B. bears an interest rate that is at least equal to the prime rate of interest at the date of liquidation.
C. is so near its maturity that it presents insignificant risk of changes in interest rates.
D. is acceptable as a means to pay current liabilities.
2) Which of the following is NOT considered cash for financial reporting purposes?
A. Money orders, certified checks, and personal checks
B. Coin, currency, and available funds
C. Postdated checks and I.O.U.’s
D. Petty cash funds and change funds
3) Which of the following items should NOT be included in the Cash caption on the balance sheet?
A. Checks from other parties presently in the cash register
B. Amounts on deposit in checking account at the bank
C. Postage stamps on hand
D. Coins and currency in the cash register
4) If a company employs the gross method of recording accounts receivable from customers, then sales discounts taken should be reported as
A. an item of “other expense” in the income statement.
B. a deduction from accounts receivable in determining the net realizable value of accounts receivable.
C. sales discounts forfeited in the cost of goods sold section of the income statement.
D. a deduction from sales in the income statement.
5) The advantage of relating a company’s bad debt expense to its outstanding accounts receivable is that this approach
A. best relates bad debt expense to the period of sale.
B. is the only generally accepted method for valuing accounts receivable.
C. makes estimates of uncollectible accounts unnecessary.
D. gives a reasonably correct statement of receivables in the balance sheet.
6) Which of the following is a generally accepted method of determining the amount of the adjustment to bad debt expense?
A. A percentage of sales NOT adjusted for the balance in the allowance
B. A percentage of accounts receivable NOT adjusted for the balance in the allowance
C. An amount derived from aging accounts receivable and NOT adjusted for the balance in the allowance
D. A percentage of sales adjusted for the balance in the allowance
7) If the beginning inventory for 2006 is overstated, the effects of this error on cost of goods sold for 2006, net income for 2006, and assets at December 31, 2007, respectively, are
A. overstatement, understatement, no effect.
B. overstatement, understatement, overstatement.
C. understatement, overstatement, no effect.
D. understatement, overstatement, overstatement.
8) Valuation of inventories requires the deter mination of all of the following EXCEPT
A. the physical goods to be included in inventory.
B. the costs to be included in inventory.
C. the cost flow assumption to be adopted.
D. the cost of goods held on consign ment from other companies.
9) Eller Co. received merchandise on consignment. As of January 31, Eller included the goods in inventory, but did NOT record the transaction. The effect of this on its financial statements for January 31 would be
A. net income was correct and current assets were understated.
B. net income, current assets, and retained earnings were overstated.
C. net income, current assets, and retained earnings were understated.
D. net income and current assets were overstated and current liabilities were understated.
10) Assuming no beginning inventory, what can be said about the trend of inventory prices if cost of goods sold computed when inventory is valued using the FIFO method exceeds cost of goods sold when inventory is valued using the LIFO method?
A. Prices remained unchanged.
B. Prices decreased.
C. Price trend cannot be determined from information given.
D. Prices increased.
11) Which method of inventory pricing best approximates specific identification of the actual flow of costs and units in most manufacturing situations?
A. First-in, first-out
B. Average cost
C. Base stock
D. Last-in, first-out
12) All of the following costs should be charged against revenue in the period in which costs are incurred EXCEPT for
A. costs which will NOT benefit any future period.
B. manufacturing overhead costs for a product manufactured and sold in the same accounting period.
C. costs of normal shrinkage and scrap incurred for the manufacture of a product in ending inventory.
D. costs from idle manufacturing capacity resulting from an unexpected plant shutdown.
13) When the direct method is used to record inventory at market
A. a loss is recorded directly in the inventory account by crediting inventory and debiting loss on inventory decline.
B. the market value figure for ending inventory is substituted for cost and the loss is buried in cost of goods sold
C. only the portion of the loss attributable to inventory sold during the period is recorded in the financial statements.
D. there is a direct reduction in the selling price of the product that results in a loss being recorded on the income statement prior to the sale.
14) An item of inventory purchased this period for $15.00 has been incorrectly written down to its current replacement cost of $10.00. It sells during the following period for $30.00, its normal selling price, with disposal costs of $3.00 and normal profit of $12.00. Which of the following statements is NOT true?
A. The current year’s income is understated.
B. Income of the following year will be understated.
C. The closing inventory of the current year is understated.
D. The cost of sales of the following year will be understated.
15) In no case can “market” in the lower-of-cost-or-market rule be more than
A. estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business less reasonably predictable costs of completion and disposal.
B. estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business less reasonably predictable costs of completion and disposal, an allowance for an approximately normal profit margin, and an adequate reserve for possible future losses.
C. estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business less reasonably predictable costs of completion and disposal and an allowance for an approximately normal profit margin.
D. estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business.
16) The gross profit method of inventory valuation is invalid when
A. there is a substantial increase in inventory during the year.
B. none of these.
C. there is no beginning inventory because it is the first year of operation.
D. a portion of the inventory is destroyed.
17) Which of the following is NOT a basic assumption of the gross profit method?
A. Goods NOT sold must be on hand.
B. The total amount of purchases and the total amount of sales remain relatively unchanged from the comparable previous period.
C. If the sales, reduced to the cost basis, are deducted from the sum of the opening inventory plus purchases, the result is the amount of inventory on hand.
D. The beginning inventory plus the purchases equal total goods to be accounted for.
18) In 2006, Lucas Manufacturing signed a contract with a supplier to purchase raw materials in 2007 for $700,000. Before the December 31, 2006 balance sheet date, the market price for these materials dropped to $510,000. The journal entry to record this situation at December 31, 2006 will result in a credit that should be reported
A. as a current liability.
B. on the income statement.
C. as an appropriation of retained earnings.
D. as a valuation account to Inventory on the balance sheet.
19) The cost of land typically includes the purchase price and all of the following costs EXCEPT
A. street lights, sewers, and drainage systems cost.
B. assumption of any liens or mortgages on the property.
C. private driveways and parking lots.
D. grading, filling, draining, and clearing costs.
20) The cost of land does NOT include
A. costs of removing old buildings.
B. costs of improvements with limited lives.
C. costs of grading, filling, draining, and clearing.
D. special assessments.
21) Cotton Hotel Corporation recently purchased Holiday Hotel and the land on which it is located with the plan to tear down the Holiday Hotel and build a new luxury hotel on the site. The cost of the Holiday Hotel should be
A. written off as an extraordinary loss in the year the hotel is torn down.
B. capitalized as part of the cost of the land.
C. depreciated over the period from acquisition to the date the hotel is scheduled to be torn down.
D. capitalized as part of the cost of the new hotel.
22) To be consistent with the historical cost principle, overhead costs incurred by an enterprise constructing its own building should be
A. eliminated completely from the cost of the asset.
B. allocated on an opportunity cost basis.
C. allocated on the basis of lost production.
D. allocated on a pro rata basis between the asset and normal operations.
23) Which of the following costs are capitalized for self-constructed assets?
A. Labor and overhead only
B. Materials and overhead only
C. Materials and labor only
D. Materials, labor, and overhead
24) Which of the following assets do NOT qualify for capitalization of interest costs incurred during construction of the assets?
A. Assets intended for sale or lease that are produced as discrete projects.
B. Assets financed through the issuance of long-term debt.
C. Assets under construction for an enterprise’s own use.
D. Assets NOT currently undergoing the activities necessary to prepare them for their intended use.
25) The cost of a nonmonetary asset acquired in exchange for another nonmonetary asset and the exchange has commercial substance is usually recorded at
A. the fair value of the asset given up, and a gain but NOT a loss may be recognized.
B. the fair value of the asset received if it is equally reliable as the fair value of the asset given up.
C. the fair value of the asset given up, and a gain or loss is recognized.
D. either the fair value of the asset given up or the asset received, whichever one results in the largest gain (smallest loss) to the company.
26) Construction of a qualifying asset is started on April 1 and finished on December 1. The fraction used to multiply an expenditure made on April 1 to find weighted-average accumulated expenditures is
A. 8/12.
B. 9/12.
C. 8/8.
D. 11/12.
27) When a plant asset is acquired by issuance of common stock, the cost of the plant asset is properly measured by the
A. par value of the stock.
B. stated value of the stock.
C. book value of the stock.
D. market value of the stock.
28) Which of the following principles best describes the conceptual rationale for the methods of matching depreciation expense with revenues?
A. Associating cause and effect
B. Systematic and rational allocation
C. Immediate recognition
D. Partial recognition
29) For income statement purposes, depreciation is a variable expense if the depreciation method used is
A. units-of-production.
B. straight-line.
C. sum-of-the-years’-digits.
D. declining-balance.
30) If an industrial firm uses the units-of-production method for computing depreciation on its only plant asset, factory machinery, the credit to accumulated depreciation from period to period during the life of the firm will
A. be constant.
B. vary with unit sales.
C. vary with sales revenue.
D. vary with production.
31) Lennon Company purchased a depreciable asset for $200,000. The estimated salvage value is $10,000, and the estimated useful life is 10,000 hours. Lennon used the asset for 1,100 hours in the current year. The activity method will be used for depreciation. What is the depreciation expense on this asset?
A. $19,000
B. $20,900
C. $22,000
D. $190,000
32) Bigbie Company purchased a depreciable asset for $600,000. The estimated salvage value is $30,000, and the estimated useful life is 10,000 hours. Bigbie used the asset for 1,100 hours in the current year. The activity method will be used for depreciation. What is the depreciation expense on this asset?
A. $57,000
B. $62,700
C. $66,000
D. $570,000
33) Starr Company purchased a depreciable asset for $150,000. The estimated salvage value is $10,000, and the estimated useful life is 8 years. The double-declining balance method will be used for depreciation. What is the depreciation expense for the second year on this asset?
A. $17,500
B. $26,250
C. $28,125
D. $37,500
34) The cost of purchasing patent rights for a product that might otherwise have seriously competed with one of the purchaser’s patented products should be
A. charged off in the current period.
B. amortized over the remaining estimated life of the original patent covering the product whose market would have been impaired by competition from the newly patented product.
C. amortized over the legal life of the purchased patent.
D. added to factory overhead and allocated to production of the purchaser’s product.
35) Costs incurred internally to create intangibles are
A. capitalized.
B. expensed only if they have a limited life.
C. capitalized if they have an indefinite life.
D. expensed as incurred.
36) Factors considered in determining an intangible asset s useful life include all of the following EXCEPT
A. the expected use of the asset.
B. the amortization method used.
C. any legal or contractual provisions that may limit the useful life.
D. any provisions for renewal or extension of the asset s legal life
37) Fleming Corporation acquired Out-of-Sight Products on January 1, 2008 for $4,000,000, and recorded goodwill of $750,000 as a result of that purchase. At December 31, 2008, the Out-of-Sight Products Division had a fair value of $3,400,000. The net identifiable assets of the Division (excluding goodwill) had a fair value of $2,900,000 at that time. What amount of loss on impairment of goodwill should Fleming record in 2008?
A. $ -0-
B. $600,000
C. $250,000
D. $350,000
38) Mining Company acquired a patent on an oil extraction technique on January 1, 2006 for $5,000,000. It was expected to have a 10 year life and no residual value. Mining uses straight-line amortization for patents. On December 31, 2007, the expected future cash flows expected from the patent were expected to be $600,000 per year for the next eight years. The present value of these cash flows, discounted at Mining s market interest rate, is $2,800,000. At what amount should the patent be carried on the December 31, 2007 balance sheet?
A. $5,000,000
B. $2,800,000
C. $4,800,000
D. $4,000,000
39) General Products Company bought Special Products Division in 2006 and appropriately booked $250,000 of goodwill related to the purchase. On December 31, 2007, the fair value of Special Products Division is $2,000,000 and it is carried on General Product s books for a total of $1,700,000, including the goodwill. An analysis of Special Products Division s assets indicates that goodwill of $200,000 exists on December 31, 2007. What goodwill impairment should be recognized by General Products in 2007?
A. $0.
B. $300,000.
C. $200,000.
D. $50,000.
40) Easton Company and Lofton Company were combined in a purchase transaction. Easton was able to acquire Lofton at a bargain price. The sum of the market or appraised values of identifiable assets acquired less the fair value of liabilities assumed exceeded the cost to Easton. After revaluing noncurrent assets to zero, there was still some “negative goodwill.” Proper accounting treatment by Easton is to report the amount as
A. an extraordinary gain.
B. paid-in capital.
C. part of current income in the year of combination.
D. a deferred credit and amortize it.
41) Purchased goodwill should
A. be written off as soon as possible against retained earnings.
B. be written off by systematic charges as a regular operating expense over the period benefited.
C. be written off as soon as possible as an extraordinary item.
D. not be amortized.
42) The intangible asset goodwill may be
A. capitalized only when purchased.
B. capitalized only when created internally.
C. capitalized either when purchased or created internally.
D. written off directly to retained earnings.
43) If a short-term obligation is excluded from current liabilities because of refinancing, the footnote to the financial statements describing this event should include all of the following information EXCEPT
A. a general description of the financing arrangement.
B. the terms of any equity security issued or to be issued.
C. the terms of the new obligation incurred or to be incurred.
D. the number of financing institutions that refused to refinance the debt, if any.
44) Which of the following items is a current liability?
A. Bonds (for which there is an adequate sinking fund properly classified as a long-term investment) due in three months.
B. Bonds (for which there is an adequate appropriation of retained earnings) due in eleven months.
C. Bonds due in three years.
D. Bonds to be refunded when due in eight months, there being no doubt about the marketability of the refunding issue.
45) Which of the following statements is false?
A. A company may exclude a short-term obligation from current liabilities if the firm intends to refinance the obligation on a long-term basis and demonstrates an ability to complete the refinancing.
B. Under the cash basis method, warranty costs are charged to expense as they are paid.
C. Cash dividends should be recorded as a liability when they are declared by the board of directors.
D. FICA taxes withheld from employees’ payroll checks should never be recorded as a liability since the employer will eventually remit the amounts withheld to the appropriate taxing authority.
46) Simson Company has 35 employees who work 8-hour days and are paid hourly. On January 1, 2006 the company began a program of granting its employees 10 days of paid vacation each year. Vacation days earned in 2006 may first be taken on January 1, 2007. Information relative to these employees is as follows:
Year Hourly Wages Vacation Days Earned by Each Employee Vacation Days Used by Each Employee
2006 $25.80 10 0
2007 27.00 10 8
2008 $28.50 10 10
What is the amount of expense relative to compensated absences that should be reported on Simson s income statement for 2006?
A. $0.
B. $75,600.
C. $68,880.
D. $72,240.
47) A company offers a cash rebate of $1 on each $4 package of batteries sold during 2007. Historically, 10% of customers mail in the rebate form. During 2007, 6,000,000 packages of batteries are sold, and 210,000 $1 rebates are mailed to customers. What is the rebate expense and liability, respectively, shown on the 2007 financial statements dated December 31?
A. $600,000; $600,000
B. $390,000; $390,000
C. $600,000; $390,000
D. $210,000; $390,000
48) Wellman Company self insures its property for fire and storm damage. If the company were to obtain insurance on the property, it would cost them $1,000,000 per year. The company estimates that on average it will incur losses of $800,000 per year. During 2007, $350,000 worth of losses were sustained. How much total expense and/or loss should be recognized by Wellman Company for 2007?
A. $350,000 in losses and no insurance expense
B. $350,000 in losses and $450,000 in insurance expense
C. $0 in losses and $1,000,000 in insurance expense
D. $0 in losses and $800,000 in insurance expense
49) Mark Ward is a farmer who owns land which borders on the right-of-way of the Northern Railroad. On August 10, 2007, due to the admitted negligence of the Railroad, hay on the farm was set on fire and burned. Ward had had a dispute with the Railroad for several years concerning the ownership of a small parcel of land. The representative of the Railroad has offered to assign any rights which the Railroad may have in the land to Ward in exchange for a release of his right to reimbursement for the loss he has sustained from the fire. Ward appears inclined to accept the Railroad’s offer. The Railroad’s 2007 financial statements should include the following related to the incident:
A. recognition of a loss and creation of a liability for the value of the land.
B. recognition of a loss only.
C. disclosure in note form only.
D. creation of a liability only.
50) Which of the following contingencies need NOT be disclosed in the financial statements or the notes thereto?
A. Probable losses NOT reasonably estimable
B. Environmental liabilities that cannot be reasonably estimated
C. All of these must be disclosed.
D. Guarantees of indebtedness of others
51) Which of the following sets of conditions would give rise to the accrual of a contingency under current generally accepted accounting principles?
A. Amount of loss is reasonably estimable and event occurs infrequently.
B. Amount of loss is reasonably estimable and occurrence of event is probable.
C. Event is unusual in nature and event occurs infrequently.
D. Event is unusual in nature and occurrence of event is probable.
52) Bonds for which the owners’ names are NOT registered with the issuing corporation are called
A. bearer bonds.
B. term bonds.
C. secured bonds.
D. debenture bonds.
53) An example of an item which is NOT a liability is
A. dividends payable in stock.
B. advances from customers on contracts.
C. the portion of long-term debt due within one year.
D. accrued estimated warranty costs.
54) If bonds are issued initially at a premium and the effective-interest method of amortization is used, interest expense in the earlier years will be
A. greater than if the straight-line method were used.
B. greater than the amount of the interest payments.
C. less than if the straight-line method were used.
D. the same as if the straight-line method were used.
55) What impact does a bargain purchase option have on the present value of the minimum lease payments computed by the lessee?
A. No impact as the option does NOT enter into the transaction until the end of the lease term.
B. The minimum lease payments would be increased by the present value of the option price if, at the time of the lease agreement, it appeared certain that the lessee would exercise the option at the end of the lease and purchase the asset at the option price.
C. The lessee must decrease the present value of the minimum lease payments by the present value of the option price.
D. The lessee must increase the present value of the minimum lease payments by the present value of the option price.
56) Minimum lease payments may include a
A. penalty for failure to renew.
B. any of these.
C. guaranteed residual value.
D. bargain purchase option.
57) Which of the following best describes current practice in accounting for leases?
A. Leases are NOT capitalized.
B. All leases are capitalized.
C. All long-term leases are capitalized.
D. Leases similar to installment purchases are capitalized.
58) In order to properly record a direct-financing lease, the lessor needs to know how to calculate the lease receivable. The lease receivable in a direct-financing lease is best defined as
A. the amount of funds the lessor has tied up in the asset which is the subject of the direct-financing lease.
B. the total book value of the asset less any accumulated depreciation recorded by the lessor prior to the lease agreement.
C. the present value of minimum lease payments.
D. the difference between the lease payments receivable and the fair market value of the leased property.
59) In the earlier years of a lease, from the lessee’s perspective, the use of the
A. capital method will enable the lessee to report higher income, compared to the operating method.
B. operating method will cause debt to increase, compared to the capital method.
C. operating method will cause income to decrease, compared to the capital method.
D. capital method will cause debt to increase, compared to the operating method.
60) In a lease that is appropriately recorded as a direct-financing lease by the lessor, unearned income
A. should be amortized over the period of the lease using the interest method.
B. should be recognized at the lease’s expiration.
C. does NOT arise.
D. should be amortized over the period of the lease using the straight-line method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 422 Final Exam 1) Which of the following is NOT considered cash for financial reporting purposes?
2) What is the preferable presentation of accounts receivable from officers, employees, or affiliated companies on a balance sheet?
3) Which of the following is considered cash?
4) If a company employs the gross method of recording accounts receivable from customers, then sales discounts taken should be reported as 5) Assuming that the ideal measure of short-term receivables in the balance sheet is the discounted value of the cash to be received in the future, failure to follow this practice usually does NOT make the balance sheet misleading because 6) Which of the following methods of determining annual bad debt expense best achieves the matching concept? 7) The accountant for the Orion Sales Company is preparing the income statement for 2007 and the balance sheet at December 31, 2007. Orion uses the periodic inventory system. The January 1, 2007 merchandise inventory balance will appear 8) Eller Co. received merchandise on consignment. As of January 31, Eller included the goods in inventory, but did NOT record the transaction. The effect of this on its financial statements for January 31 would be 9. If the beginning inventory for 2006 is overstated, the effects of this error on cost of goods sold for 2006, net income for 2006, and assets at December 31, 2007, respectively, are 10) Assuming no beginning inventory, what can be said about the trend of inventory prices if cost of goods sold computed when inventory is valued using the FIFO method exceeds cost of goods sold when inventory is valued using the LIFO method? 11) Which method of inventory pricing best approximates specific identification of the actual flow of costs and units in most manufacturing situations? 12) All of the following costs should be charged against revenue in the period in which costs are incurred EXCEPT for 13) In no case can “market” in the lower-of-cost-or-market rule be more than 14) When the direct method is used to record inventory at market 15) An item of inventory purchased this period for $15.00 has been incorrectly written down to its current replacement cost of $10.00. It sells during the following period for $30.00, its normal selling price, with disposal costs of $3.00 and normal profit of $12.00. Which of the following statements is NOT true? 16) The retail inventory method is based on the assumption that the 17) A major advantage of the retail inventory method is that it 18) In 2006, Lucas Manufacturing signed a contract with a supplier to purchase raw materials in 2007 for $700,000. Before the December 31, 2006 balance sheet date, the market price for these materials dropped to $510,000. The journal entry to record this situation at December 31, 2006 will result in a credit that should be reported 19) The cost of land typically includes the purchase price and all of the following costs EXCEPT 20) Cotton Hotel Corporation recently purchased Holiday Hotel and the land on which it is located with the plan to tear down the Holiday Hotel and build a new luxury hotel on the site. The cost of the Holiday Hotel should be 21) If a corporation purchases a lot and building and subsequently tears down the building and uses the property as a parking lot, the proper accounting treatment of the cost of the building would depend on 22) The period of time during which interest must be capitalized ends when 23) Which of the following assets do NOT qualify for capitalization of interest costs incurred during construction of the assets? 24) When computing the amount of interest cost to be capitalized, the concept of “avoidable interest” refers to 25) The King-Kong Corporation exchanges one plant asset for a similar plant asset and gives cash in the exchange. The exchange is NOT expected to cause a material change in the future cash flows for either entity. If a gain on the disposal of the old asset is indicated, the gain will 26) When a plant asset is acquired by issuance of common stock, the cost of the plant asset is properly measured by the 27) The cost of a nonmonetary asset acquired in exchange for another nonmonetary asset and the exchange has commercial substance is usually recorded at 28) Which of the following principles best describes the conceptual rationale for the methods of matching depreciation expense with revenues? 29) If an industrial firm uses the units-of-production method for computing depreciation on its only plant asset, factory machinery, the credit to accumulated depreciation from period to period during the life of the firm will 30) Which of the following most accurately reflects the concept of depreciation as used in accounting?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
* Question 2
Presented below is information related to Rembrandt Inc.’s inventory.
(per unit) Skis Boots Parkas
Historical cost $211.47 $117.98 $58.99
Selling price 241.52 161.39 82.08
Cost to distribute 21.15 8.90 2.78
Current replacement cost 225.94 116.87 56.76
Normal profit margin 35.62 32.28 23.65
Determine the following:
(a) the two limits to market value (e.g., the ceiling and the floor) that should be used in the lower of cost or market computation for skis; (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 20.25.)
Ceiling $
Floor $
(b) the cost amount that should be used in the lower of cost or market comparison of boots; (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 20.25.)
Cost amount $
(c) the market amount that should be used to value parkas on the basis of the lower of cost or market. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 20.25.)
Market amount $
Question 3
Matlock Company uses a perpetualinventorysystem. Its beginning inventory consists of 61 units that cost $37 each. During June, the company purchased 183 units at $37 each, returned 7 units for credit, and sold 153 units at $61 each. Journalize the June transactions.
Description/Account Debit Credit
(To record inventory purchased.)
(To record inventory returned.)
(To record inventory sold.)
(To record cost of goods sold.)
Question 4
Amsterdam Company uses a periodic inventory system. For April, when the company sold 700 units, the following information is available.
Units Unit Cost Total Cost
April 1 inventory 250 $15 $3,750
April 15 purchase 400 18 7,200
April 23 purchase 350 20 7,000
1,000 $17,950
Compute the April 30 inventory and the April cost of goods sold using the averagecostmethod. (Round computations for cost per unit to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.25 and answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 2,250.)
Inventory $
Cost of goods sold $
Amsterdam Company uses a periodic inventory system. For April, when the company sold 600 units, the following information is available.
Units Unit Cost Total Cost
April 1 inventory 250 $16 $4,000
April 15 purchase 400 20 8,000
April 23 purchase 350 21 7,350
1,000 $19,350
Compute the April 30 inventory and the April cost of goods sold using the FIFO method.
Inventory $
Cost of goods sold $
* Question 6
(FIFO,LIFO, Average Cost Inventory)
Esplanade Company was formed on December 1, 2011. The following information is available from Esplanade’s inventory records for Product BAP.
Units Unit Cost
January 1, 2012 (beginning inventory) 780 $8.00
Purchases:
January 5, 2012 1,560 9.00
January 25, 2012 1,690 10.00
February 16, 2012 1,040 11.00
March 26, 2012 780 12.00
A physical inventory on March 31, 2012, shows 2,080 units on hand.
Prepare schedules to compute the ending inventory at March 31, 2012, under each of the following inventory methods. Assume Esplanade Company uses the periodic inventory method.
(a) FIFO
ESPLANADE COMPANY
Computation of Inventory for Product BAP
BAP under FIFO Inventory Method
March 31, 2012
Units Unit Cost Total Cost
March 26, 2012 $ $
February 16, 2012
January 25, 2012
March 31, 2012, inventory $
(b) LIFO
ESPLANADE COMPANY
Computation of Inventory for Product BAP
BAP under LIFO Inventory Method
March 31, 2012
Units Unit Cost Total Cost
Beginning inventory $ $
January 5, 2012
March 31, 2012, inventory $
(c) Weighted average (Round weighted average cost to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.25 and use this rounded amount for future calculations. Round the inventory on March to 0 decimal places, e.g. 1,250.)
ESPLANADE COMPANY
Computation of Inventory for Product BAP
BAP under Weighted Average Inventory Method
March 31, 2012
Units Unit Cost Total Cost
Beginning inventory $ $
January 5, 2012
January 25, 2012
February 16, 2012
March 26, 2012
$
Weighted Average cost $
March 31, 2012, inventory $
Question 7
Floyd Corporation has the following four items in its ending inventory.
Item Cost Replacement Cost Net Realizable Value (NRV) NRV Less Normal Profit Margin
Jokers $2,644 $2,710 $2,776 $2,115
Penguins 6,610 6,742 6,544 5,420
Riddlers 5,817 6,015 6,114 4,891
Scarecrows 4,230 3,953 5,063 4,059
Determine the final lower of cost or marketinventoryvalue for each item.
Jokers $
Penguins $
Riddlers $
Scarecrows $
Question 8
Kumar Inc. uses a perpetual inventory system. At January 1, 2013, inventory was $278,200 at both cost and market value. At December 31, 2013, the inventory was $371,800 at cost and $349,700 at market value. Prepare the necessary December 31 entry under:
(a) the cost of goods sold method
Description/Account Debit Credit
(b) the loss method
Description/Account Debit Credit
Question 9
Boyne Inc. had beginning inventory of $15,720 at cost and $26,200 at retail. Net purchases were $157,200 at cost and $222,700 at retail. Net markups were $13,100; net markdowns were $9,170; and sales were $205,670. Compute ending inventory at cost using the conventional retail method. (Round computation for cost-to-retail ratio percentage and answer to 0 decimal places, e.g. 25,250.)
Ending inventory $
Question 10
(Gross Profit Method)
Astaire Company uses the gross profit method to estimate inventory for monthly reporting purposes. Presented below is information for the month of May.
Inventory, May 1 $195,200
Purchases (gross) 780,800
Freight-in 36,600
Sales 1,220,000
Sales returns 85,400
Purchase discounts 14,640
(a) Compute the estimated inventory at May 31, assuming that the gross profit is 25% of sales.
Inventory $
(b) Compute the estimated inventory at May 31, assuming that the gross profit is 25% of cost.
Inventory $
Question 11
Previn Brothers Inc. purchased land at a price of $27,390. Closing costs were $1,460. An old building was removed at a cost of $14,160. What amount should be recorded as the cost of the land
$
Question 12
Garcia Corporation purchased a truck by issuing an $104,800, 4-year, zero-interest-bearing note to Equinox Inc. The market rate of interest for obligations of this nature is 10%. Prepare the journal entry to record the purchase of this truck. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 15,510. List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2. Hint: Use tables in text.)
Description/Account Debit Credit
Question 13
Mohave Inc. purchased land, building, and equipment from Laguna Corporation for a cash payment of $412,650. The estimated fair values of the assets are land $78,600, building $288,200, and equipment $104,800. At what amounts should each of the three assets be recorded? (Note: Do not round the computation of the % of total.)
Recorded Amount
Land $
Building $
Equipment $
Question 14
Fielder Company obtained land by issuing 2,000 shares of its $15 par value common stock. The land was recently appraised at $124,100. The common stock is actively traded at $60 per share. Prepare the journal entry to record the acquisition of the land. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)
Description/Account Debit Credit
Question 15
Navajo Corporation traded a used truck (cost $26,200, accumulated depreciation $23,580) for a small computer worth $4,847. Navajo also paid $1,310 in the transaction. Prepare the journal entry to record the exchange. (The exchange has commercial substance.) (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)
Description/Account Debit Credit
Question 16
Mehta Company traded a used welding machine (cost $10,530, accumulated depreciation $3,510) for office equipment with an estimated fair value of $5,850. Mehta also paid $3,510 cash in the transaction. Prepare the journal entry to record the exchange. (The exchange has commercial substance.) (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)
Description/Account Debit Credit
Question 18
Fernandez Corporation purchased a truck at the beginning of 2012 for $49,980. The truck is estimated to have a salvage value of $2,380 and a useful life of 190,400 miles. It was driven 27,370 miles in 2012 and 36,890 miles in 2013. Compute depreciation expense for 2012 and 2013.(Round answers to 0 decimal places, i.e. 2,250.)
2012 $
2013 $
Question 19
Lockhard Company purchased machinery on January 1, 2012, for $61,800. The machinery is estimated to have a salvage value of $6,180 after a useful life of 8 years.
(a) Compute 2012 depreciation expense using the double-declining balance method.
$
(b) Compute 2012 depreciation expense using the double-declining balance method assuming the machinery was purchased on October 1, 2012.(Round answer to 0 decimal places, i.e. 2,250.)
$
Question 20
Jurassic Company owns machinery that cost $1,235,700 and has accumulated depreciation of $494,280. The expected future net cash flows from the use of the asset are expected to be $686,500. The fair value of the equipment is $549,200. Prepare the journal entry, if any, to record the impairment loss.
Description/Account Debit Credit
Question 21
Everly Corporation acquires a coal mine at a cost of $536,800. Intangible development costs total $134,200. After extraction has occurred, Everly must restore the property (estimated fair value of the obligation is $107,360), after which it can be sold for $214,720. Everly estimates that 5,368 tons of coal can be extracted. If 939 tons are extracted the first year, prepare the journal entry to record depletion.
Description/Account Debit Credit
Question 22
Francis Corporation purchased an asset at a cost of $67,700 on March 1, 2012. The asset has a useful life of 8 years and a salvage value of $6,770. For tax purposes, the MACRS class life is 5 years. Compute tax depreciation for each year 2012 2017. (Round answers to 0 decimal places.)
2012 $
2013 $
2014 $
2015 $
2016 $
2017 $
uestion 23
Celine Dion Corporation purchases a patent from Salmon Company on January 1, 2012, for $50,180. The patent has a remaining legal life of 16 years. Celine Dion feels the patent will be useful for 10 years. Prepare Celine Dion’s journal entries to record the purchase of the patent and 2012 amortization.
Account/Description Debit Credit
(To record purchase of patent.)
(To record amortization.)
Question 24
Karen Austin Corporation has capitalized software costs of $701,400, and sales of this product the first year totaled $420,090. Karen Austin anticipates earning $980,210 in additional future revenues from this product, which is estimated to have an economic life of 4 years. Compute the amount of software cost amortization for the first year.
(a) Compute the amount of software cost amortization for the first year using the percent of revenue approach.
$
(b) Compute the amount of software cost amortization for the first year using the straight-line approach.
$
Question 26
Roley Corporation uses a periodic inventory system and the gross method of accounting for purchase discounts. On July 1, Roley purchased $80,000 of inventory, terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. Roley paid freight costs of $1,290. On July 3, Roley returned damaged goods and received credit of $8,000. On July 10, Roley paid for the goods. Prepare all necessary journal entries for Roley. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest, e.g. 10, 8, 6.)
Date Description/Account Debit Credit
July 1
Freight-in
July 3
July 10
Question 27
Takemoto Corporation borrowed $106,800 on November 1, 2012, by signing a $109,203, 3-month, zero-interest-bearing note. Prepare Takemoto’s November 1, 2012, entry; the December 31, 2012, annual adjusting entry; and the February 1, 2013, entry. (For multiple debit/credit en tries, list amounts from largest to smallest, e.g. 10, 8, 6. Round all answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 11,150.)
Date Description/Account Debit Credit
11/1/12
12/31/12
2/1/13
Cash
Question 28
Whiteside Corporation issues $682,000 of 9% bonds, due in 12 years, with interest payable semiannually. At the time of issue, the annual market rate for such bonds is 10%. Compute the issue price of the bonds. (Use the present value tables in the text. Round your answer to zero decimal places, e.g. 2,510.)
$
Question 29
Indiana Jones Company enters into a 7-year lease of equipment on January 1, 2012, which requires 7 annual payments of $35,940 each, beginning January 1, 2012. In addition, the lessee guarantees a residual value of $20,000 at lease-end. The equipment has a useful life of 7 years. Assume that for Lost Ark Company, the lessor, collectibility is reasonably predictable, there are no important uncertainties concerning costs, and the carrying amount of the machinery is $197,619. Prepare Lost Ark’s January 1, 2012, journal entries.
Description Debit Credit
$
$
(To record the lease)
$
$
(To record first lease payment)
Question 29
Indiana Jones Company enters into a 7-year lease of equipment on January 1, 2012, which requires 7 annual payments of $35,940 each, beginning January 1, 2012. In addition, the lessee guarantees a residual value of $20,000 at lease-end. The equipment has a useful life of 7 years. Assume that for Lost Ark Company, the lessor, collectibility is reasonably predictable, there are no important uncertainties concerning costs, and the carrying amount of the machinery is $197,619. Prepare Lost Ark’s January 1, 2012, journal entries.
Description Debit Credit
$
$
(To record the lease)
$
$
(To record first lease payment)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 290 Week 5 Learning Team Assignment Financial Reporting Problem, Part 2
Access the internet to acquire a copy of the most recent annual report for the public traded company used to complete the Financial Reporting Problem, Part 1 assignment due in week Four. Analyze the information contained in the company s balance sheet and income statement to answer the following questions:
- Are the assets included under the company s current assets listed in the proper order? Explain your answer.
- How are the company s assets classified?
- What are cash equivalents?
- What are the company s total current liabilities at the end of its most recent annual reporting period?
- What are the company s total current liabilities at the end of the previous annual reporting period?
- Considering all the information you have gathered, why might this information be important to potential creditors, investors, and employees?
Summarizethe analysis in a 1,050-1,400 word paper in a Microsoft Word document. Include a copy of the company s balance sheet and income statement. Format your paper and presentation consistent with APA guidelines.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.The Sarbanes-Oxley Act requires that all publicly traded companies maintain a system of internal controls. Internal controls can be defined as a plan to
2. The purchase of treasury stock
3. Marsh Company has other operating expenses of $240,000. There has been an increase in prepaid expenses of $16,000 during the year, and accrued liabilities are $24,000 lower than in the prior period. Using the direct method of reporting cash flows from operating activities, what were Marsh s cash payments for operating expenses?
A. $228,000
B. $232,000
C. $200,000
D. $280,000
4. In performing a vertical analysis, the base for cost of goods sold is
A. total selling expenses
B. net sales
C. total revenues
D. total expense
5. Blanco, Inc. has the following income statement (in millions):
BLANCO, INC.
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2011
Net Sales $200
Cost of Goods Sold 120
Gross Profit 80
Operating Expenses 44
Net Income $ 36
Using vertical analysis, what percentage is assigned to Net Income?
6. Where would the event purchased land for cash appear, if at all, on the indirect statement of cash flows?
7. Dawson Company issued 500 shares of no-par common stock for $4,500. Which of the following journal entries would be made if the stock has a stated value of $2 per share?
8. Andrews, Inc. paid $45,000 to buy back 9,000 shares of its $1 par value common stock. This stock was sold later at a selling price of $6 per share. The entry to record the sale includes a
9. Which of the following is a fundamental factor in having an effective, ethical corporate culture?
10. Two individuals at a retail store work the same cash register. You evaluate this situation as
11. The Sarbanes-Oxley Act imposed which new penalty for executives?
12. Hahn Company uses the percentage of sales method for recording bad debts expense. For the year, cash sales are $300,000 and credit sales are $1,200,000. Management estimates that 1% is the sales percentage to use. What adjusting entry will Hahn Company make to record the bad debts expense?
13. Using the percentage of receivables method for recording bad debts expense, estimated uncollectible accounts are $15,000. If the balance of the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is $3,000 credit before adjustment, what is the amount of bad debts expense for that period?
14. Intangible assets
15. Intangible assets are the rights and privileges that result from ownership of long-lived assets that
16. The book value of an asset is equal to the
17. Gains on an exchange of plant assets that has commercial substance are
18. Ordinary repairs are expenditures to maintain the operating efficiency of a plant asset and are referred to as
19. When an interest-bearing note matures, the balance in the Notes Payable account is
20. The interest charged on a $200,000 note payable, at a rate of 6%, on a 2-month note would be
21. Costs incurred to increase the operating efficiency or useful life of a plant asset are referred to as
22. If a corporation issued $3,000,000 in bonds which pay 10% annual interest, what is the annual net cash cost of this borrowing if the income tax rate is 30%?
23. Hilton Company issued a four-year interest-bearing note payable for $300,000 on January 1, 2011. Each January the company is required to pay $75,000 on the note. How will this note be reported on the December 31, 2012 balance sheet?
A. Long-term debt, $300,000.
B. Long-term debt, $225,000.
C. Long-term debt, $150,000; Long-term debt due within one year, $75,000.
D. Long-term debt, $225,000; Long-term debt due within one year, $75,000.
24. Acorporation issued $600,000, 10%, 5-year bonds on January 1, 2011 for 648,666, which reflects an effective-interest rate of 8%. Interest is paid semiannually on January 1 and July 1. If the corporation uses the effective-interest method of amortization of bond premium, the amount of bond interest expense to be recognized on July 1, 2011, is
A. $30,000
B. $24,000
C. $32,434
D. $25,946
25. When the effective-interest method of bond discount amortization is used
26. If a corporation has only one class of stock, it is referred to as
27. Capital stock to which the charter has assigned a value per share is called
28. ABC, Inc. has 1,000 shares of 5%, $100 par value, cumulative preferred stock and 50,000 shares of $1 par value common stock outstanding at December 31, 2011. What is the annual dividend on the preferred stock?
29. Manner, Inc. has 5,000 shares of 5%, $100 par value, noncumulative preferred stock and 20,000 shares of $1 par value common stock outstanding at December 31, 2011. There were no dividends declared in 2010. The board of directors declares and pays a $45,000 dividend in 2011. What is the amount of dividends received by the common stockholders in 2011?
30. When the selling price of treasury stock is greater than its cost, the company credits the difference to
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E13-1
Pioneer Corporation had these transactions during 2011.
(a)Issued $50,000 par value common stock for cash.
(b)Purchased a machine for $30,000, giving a long-term note in exchange.
(c)Issued $200,000 par value common stock upon conversion of bonds having a face value of
$200,000.
(d)Declared and paid a cash dividend of $18,000.
(e)Sold a long-term investment with a cost of $15,000 for $15,000 cash.
(f)Collected $16,000 of accounts receivable.
(g)Paid $18,000 on accounts payable.
Instructions
Analyze the transactions and indicate whether each transaction resulted in a cash flow from
operating activities, investing activities, financing activities, or noncash investing and financing
activities
E13-8
Here are comparative balance sheets for Taguchi Company.
TAGUCHI COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31
Assets 2011 2010
Cash $ 73,000 $ 22,000
Accounts receivable 85,000 76,000
Inventories 170,000 189,000
Land 75,000 100,000
Equipment 260,000 200,000
Accumulated depreciation (66,000) (32,000)
Total $597,000 $555,000
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
Accounts payable $ 39,000 $ 47,000
Bonds payable 150,000 200,000
Common stock ($1 par) 216,000 174,000
Retained earnings 192,000 134,000
Total $597,000 $555,000
Additional information:
1.Net income for 2011 was $103,000.
2.Cash dividends of $45,000 were declared and paid.
3.Bonds payable amounting to $50,000 were redeemed for cash $50,000.
4.Common stock was issued for $42,000 cash.
5.No equipment was sold during 2011, but land was sold at cost.
Instructions
Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2011 using the indirect method.
E13-8
Here are comparative balance sheets for Taguchi Company.
TAGUCHI COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31
Assets 2011 2010
Cash $ 73,000 $ 22,000
Accounts receivable 85,000 76,000
Inventories 170,000 189,000
Land 75,000 100,000
Equipment 260,000 200,000
Accumulated depreciation (66,000) (32,000)
Total $597,000 $555,000
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
Accounts payable $ 39,000 $ 47,000
Bonds payable 150,000 200,000
Common stock ($1 par) 216,000 174,000
Retained earnings 192,000 134,000
Total $597,000 $555,000
Additional information:
1.Net income for 2011 was $103,000.
2.Cash dividends of $45,000 were declared and paid.
3.Bonds payable amounting to $50,000 were redeemed for cash $50,000.
4.Common stock was issued for $42,000 cash.
5.No equipment was sold during 2011, but land was sold at cost.
Instructions
Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2011 using the indirect method.
14-1
Financial information for Blevins Inc. is presented below.
December 31, 2009 December 31, 2008
Current assets $125,000 $100,000
Plant assets (net) 396,000 330,000
Current liabilities 91,000 70,000
Long-term liabilities 133,000 95,000
Common stock, $1 par 161,000 115,000
Retained earnings 136,000 150,000
Instructions:
Prepare a schedule showing a horizontal analysis for 2009 using 2008 as the base year.
P13-9A
Condensed financial data of Arma Inc. follow.
ARMA INC.
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31
Assets 2011 2010
Cash $ 90,800 $ 48,400
Accounts receivable 92,800 33,000
Inventories 112,500 102,850
Prepaid expenses 28,400 26,000
Investments 138,000 114,000
Plant assets 270,000 242,500
Accumulated depreciation (50,000) (52,000)
Total $682,500 $514,750
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
Accounts payable $112,000 $ 67,300
Accrued expenses payable 16,500 17,000
Bonds payable 110,000 150,000
Common stock 220,000 175,000
Retained earnings 224,000 105,450
Total $682,500 $514,750
ARMA INC.
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2011
Sales $392,780
Less:
Cost of goods sold $135,460
Operating expenses, excluding
depreciation 12,410
Depreciation expense 46,500
Income taxes 27,280
Interest expense 4,730
Loss on sale of plant assets 7,500 233,880
Net income $158,900
Additional information:
1.New plant assets costing $85,000 were purchased for cash during the year.
2.Old plant assets having an original cost of $57,500 were sold for $1,500 cash.
3.Bonds matured and were paid off at face value for cash.
4.A cash dividend of $40,350 was declared and paid during the year.
Instructions
Prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method.
P13-10A
Data for Arma Inc. are presented in P13-9A. Further analysis reveals that accounts
payable pertain to merchandise creditors.
Instructions
Prepare a statement of cash flows for Arma Inc. using the direct method.
P14-2A
The comparative statements of Villa Tool Company are presented below.
VILLA TOOL COMPANY
Income Statements
For the Years Ended December 31
2012 2011
Net sales $1,818,500 $1,750,500
Cost of goods sold 1,011,500 996,000
Gross profit 807,000 754,500
Selling and administrative expense 516,000 479,000
Income from operations 291,000 275,500
Other expenses and losses
Interest expense 18,000 14,000
Income before income taxes 273,000 261,500
Income tax expense 81,000 77,000
Net income $ 192,000 $ 184,500
VILLA TOOL COMPANY
Balance Sheets
December 31
Assets 2012 2011
Current assets
Cash $ 60,100 $ 64,200
Short-term investments 69,000 50,000
Accounts receivable (net) 117,800 102,800
Inventory 123,000 115,500
Total current assets 369,900 332,500
Plant assets (net) 600,300 520,300
Total assets $970,200 $852,800
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
Current liabilities
Accounts payable $160,000 $145,400
Income taxes payable 43,500 42,000
Total current liabilities 203,500 187,400
Bonds payable 200,000 200,000
Total liabilities 403,500 387,400
Stockholders equity
Common stock ($5 par) 280,000 300,000
Retained earnings 286,700 165,400
Total stockholders equity 566,700 465,400
Total liabilities and stockholders equity $970,200 $852,800
Instructions
Compute the following ratios for 2012. (Weighted-average common shares in 2012 were 57,000,
and all sales were on account.)
(a)Earnings per share. (f)Receivables turnover.
(b)Return on common stockholders equity. (g)Inventory turnover.
(c)Return on assets. (h)Times interest earned.
(d)Current. (i)Asset turnover.
(e)Acid-test. (j)Debt to total assets.
716 Chapter 14 Financial Statement Analysis
Compute ratios from balance
sheet and income statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Impact of Unethical Behavior Analysis
Name
ACC/291
Date
Instructor Name
Unethical practices and behavior in accounting may often go unchecked because the actions may be the result of management or executives. Fear of negative reactions from management or other peers may silence a person causing them to turn a blind eye . Falsifying or altering business documents such as sales receipts, or tampering with reports may lead to unethical practices. According to Anonymous Employee (n.d.), “Among the most common unethical business behaviors of employees are making long-distance calls on business lines, duplicating software for use at home, falsifying the number of hours worked, or much more serious and illegal practices, such as embezzling money from the business, or falsifying business
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Click the Virtual Organization link on the student website to access the Virtual Organizations.
Select one of the Virtual Organizations as the basis for the assignment.
Obtain faculty approval of your selected organization before beginning the assignment.
Access the information contained in your selected organization s balance sheet and income statement to calculate the following:
Liquidity ratios
o Current ratio
o Acid-test,or quick, ratio
o Receivables turnover
o Inventory turnover
Profitability ratios
o Asset turnover
o Profit margin
o Return on assets
o Return on common stockholders equity
Solvency ratios
o Debt to total assets
o Times interest earned
Showyour calculations for each ratio.
Create a horizontal and vertical analysis for the balance sheet and the income statement.
Write a 350- to 700-word memo to the CEO of your selected organization in which you discuss your findings from your ratio calculations and your horizontal and vertical analysis. In your memo, address the following questions:
What do the liquidity, profitability, and solvency ratios reveal about the company s financial position?
Which users may be interested in each type of ratio?
What does the collected data reveal about the company s performance and position?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 291 Wiley Plus All Weeks
ACC 291 Week 2 Individual WileyPLUS Assignment Exercise E8-3 , BE9-13, 9-4 , E9-9 , E9-10, Problem 9-5A.
ACC 291 Week 3 Individual WileyPLUS E9-7 ,E10-5 , E10-10 , E10-11, E10-15 ,E10-18 Problem P10-5A,P10-9A.
ACC 291 Week 4 WileyPLUS Assignment Exercise 11-1 , E11-15, E11-16 Problem P11-6A, P11-8A.
ACC 291 Week 5 Wiley Plus E13-1_ E13-8_ E14-1_P13-9A_P13-10A and P14-2A.
ACC 291 Individual Exercises Week 1 – 4
ACC 291 Week 1 Individual Exercise E9.2
ACC 291 Week 2 Individual Exercises E 9-1, E 9-12 , E 9-7,Problem P9-7B
ACC 291 Week 3 Individual Exercise E 10-6, E 10-8, E 10-18,Problem P10-3A, P10-6A
ACC 291 Week 4 Individual Exercise E 11-15, E12-1, E12-2,Problem P11-6A
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fredonia Inc. had a bad year in 2013. For the first time in its history, it operated at a loss. The company s income statement showed the following results from selling 76,500 units of product: Net sales $1,484,100; total costs and expenses $1,722,200; and net loss $238,100. Costs and expenses consisted of the following.
|
|
Total |
|
Variable |
|
Fixed |
| Cost of goods sold |
|
$1,198,300 |
|
$775,600 |
|
$422,700 |
| Selling expenses |
|
420,800 |
|
78,000 |
|
342,800 |
| Administrative expenses |
|
103,100 |
|
41,000 |
|
62,100 |
|
|
$1,722,200 |
|
$894,600 |
|
$827,600 |
Management is considering the following independent alternatives for 2014.
| 1. |
|
Increase unit selling price 24% with no change in costs and expenses. |
| 2. |
|
Change the compensation of salespersons from fixed annual salaries totaling $195,100 to total salaries of $38,800 plus a 5% commission on net sales. |
| 3. |
|
Purchase new high-tech factory machinery that will change the proportion between variable and fixed cost of goods sold to 50:50. |
(a) Compute the break-even point in dollars for 2014.(Round contribution margin ratio to 4 decimal places e.g. 0.2512 and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 2,510.)
(b) Compute the break-even point in dollars under each of the alternative courses of action.(Round contribution margin ratio to 4 decimal places e.g. 0.2512 and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 2,510.)
|
|
|
|
Break-even point |
| 1. |
|
Increase selling price |
|
$ |
| 2. |
|
Change compensation |
|
$ |
| 3. |
|
Purchase machinery |
|
$ |
Which course of action do you recommend
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which of the following is the most appropriate and modern definition of accounting?
A) The information system that identifies, records, and communicates the economic events of an organization to interested users
B) A means of collecting information
C) The interconnected network of subsystems necessary to operate a business
D) Electronic collection, organization, and communication of vast amounts of information
2. Which of the following groups uses accounting information primarily to insure the entity is operating within prescribed rules?
A) Taxing authorities
B) Regulatory agencies
C) Labor Unions
D) Management
3. Which of the following would not be considered an internal user of accounting data for a company?
A) The president of a company
B) The controller of a company
C) Creditor of a company
D) Salesperson of a company
4. Stockholders’ equity is increased by
A) Dividends
B) Revenues
C) Expenses
D) Liabilities
5. The left side of an account is
A) Blank
B) a description of the account
C) the debit side
D) The balance of the account
6. Which one of the following is not a part of an account?
A) Credit side
B) Trial balance
C) Debit side
D) Title
7. The right side of an account
A) is the correct side
B) reflects all transactions for the accounting period
C) shows all the balances of the accounts in the system
D) is the credit side
8. The normal balance of any account is the
A) left side
B) right side
C) side which increases that account
D) side which decreases that account
9. The double-entry system requires that each transaction must be recorded
A) in at least two different accounts
B) in two sets of books
C) in a journal and in a ledger
D) first as a revenue and then as an expense
10. A credit is not the normal balance for which account listed below?
A) Common Stock account
B) Revenue account
C) Liability account
D) Dividends account
11. Which accounts normally have debit balances?
A) Assets, expenses, and revenues
B) Assets, expense, and retained earnings.
C) Assets, liabilities, and dividends
D) Assets, expenses, and dividends
12. Which accounts normally have credit balances?
A) Revenues, liabilities, and dividends
B) Revenues, liabilities, and assets
C) Revenues, liabilities, and retained earnings
D) Revenues, liabilities, and expenses
13. External users want answers to all of the following questions except
A) Is the company earning satisfactory income?
B) Will the company be able to pay its debts as they come due?
C) Will the company be able to afford employee pay raises this year?
D) How does the company compare in profitability with competitors?
14. Borrowing money is an example of a(n)
A) delivering activity
B) financing activity
C) investing activity
D) operating activity
15. Debt securities sold to investors that must be repaid at a particular date some years in the future are called
A) accounts payable
B) notes receivable
C) taxes payable
D) bonds payable
16. Debt and obligations of a business are referred to as
A) Assets
B) Equities
C) Liabilities
D) Expenses
17. The financial statement that summarizes the changes in retained earnings for a specific period of time is the
A) balance sheet
B) income statement
C) statement of cash flows
D) retained earnings statement
18. To show how successfully your business performed during a period of time, you would report its revenues and expense in the
A) balance sheet
B) income statement
C) statement of cash flows
D) retained earnings statement
19. Net income results when
A) Assets > Liabilities
B) Revenues = Expenses
C) Revenues > Expenses
D) Revenues
20. Net income will result during a time period when:
A) assets exceed liabilities
B) assets exceed revenues
C) expenses exceed revenues
D) revenues exceed expenses
21. Retained earnings at the end of the period is equal to
A) retained earnings at the beginning of the period plus net income minus liabilities
B) retained earnings at the beginning of the period plus net income minus dividends
C) net income
D) assets plus liabilities
22. Which of the following financial statements is concerned with the company at a point in time?
A) Balance sheet
B) Income statement
C) Retained Earnings statement
D) Statement of cash flows
23. The retained earnings statement would not show
A) the retained earnings beginning balance
B) revenues and expenses
C) Dividends
D) the ending retained earning balance
24. A balance sheet shows
A) revenues, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity
B) expenses, dividends, and stockholders’ equity
C) revenues, expenses, and dividends
D) assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity
25. The accounting equation may be expressed as:
A) Assets = Stockholders’ Equity Liabilities.
B) Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity.
C) Assets + Liabilities = Stockholders’ Equity.
D) Assets + Stockholders’ Equity = Liabilities.
26. Under the accrual basis of accounting
A) cash must be received before revenue is recognized
B) net income is calculated by matching cash outflows against cash inflows
C) events that change a company’s financial statements are recognized in the period they occur rather than in the period in which cash is paid or received
D) the ledger accounts must be adjusted to reflect a cash basis of accounting before financial statements are prepared under generally accepted accounting principles
27. Using accrual accounting, expenses are recorded and reported only
A) when they are incurred whether or not cash is paid
B) when they are incurred and paid at the same time
C) if they are paid before they are incurred
D) if they are paid after they are incurred
28. Which statement is correct?
A) As long as a company consistently uses the cash basis of accounting, generally accepted accounting principles allow its use.
B) The use of the cash basis of accounting violates both the revenue recognition and matching principles.
C) The cash basis of accounting is objective because no one can be certain of the amount of revenue until the cash is received.
D) As long as management is ethical, there are no problems with using the cash basis of accounting.
29. Which one of the following is not a tool in financial statement analysis?
A) Horizontal analysis
B) Circular analysis
C) Vertical analysis
D) Ratio analysis
30. If year one equals $800, year two equals $840, and year three equals $880, the percentage to be assigned for year three in a trend analysis, assuming that year 1 is the base year, is
A) 110%.
B) 105%.
C) 95%.
D) 100%.
31. Assume the following sales data for a company:
2008 $945,000
2007 780,000
2006 650,000
If 2006 is the base year, what is the percentage increase in sales from 2006 to 2007?
A) 25%
B) 20%
C) 125%
D) 143%
32. Ratios are most useful in identifying
A) Trends
B) Differences
C) Causes
D) Relationships
33. Return on assets ratio is most closely related to
A) profit margin and debt to total assets ratio
B) profit margin and asset turnover ratio
C) times interest earned and debt to stockholders’ equity ratio
D) profit margin and free cash flow
34. Return on common stockholders’ equity ratio is most closely related to
A) gross profit rate and operating expenses to sales ratio
B) profit margin and free cash flow
C) times interest earned and debt to stockholders’ equity ratio
D) return on asset ratio and leverage (debt to total assets ratio)
35. Which one of the following would be considered a long-term solvency ratio?
A) Receivables turnover
B) Return on total assets
C) Current cash debt coverage ratio
D) Debt to total assets ratio
36. The current ratio is
A) calculated by dividing current liabilities by current assets
B) used to evaluate a company’s liquidity and short-term debt paying ability
C) used to evaluate a company’s solvency and long-term debt paying ability
D) calculated by subtracting current liabilities from current assets
37. The current ratio is a
A) liquidity ratio
B) profitability ratio
C) long-term solvency ratio
D) cash flow ratio
38. The receivables turnover and inventory turnover ratios are used to analyze
A) long-term solvency
B) Profitability
C) Liquidity
D) Leverage
39. The asset turnover ratio is
A) net sales divided by net income
B) average total assets divided by net income
C) net sales divided by average total assets
D) average total assets divided by net sales
40. The assets turnover ratio measures
A) how often a company replaces its assets
B) how efficiently a company uses its assets to generate sales
C) the portion of the assets that have been financed by creditors
D) the overall rate of return on assets
41. The profit margin ratio is calculated by dividing
A) sales by cost of goods sold
B) gross profit by net sales
C) net income by stockholders’ equity
D) net income by net sales
42. The debt to total assets ratio measures
A) the company’s profitability
B) whether interest can be paid on debt in the current year
C) the proportion of interest paid relative to dividends paid
D) the percentage of the total assets provided by creditors
43. Which one of the following is not an objective of a system of internal controls?
A) Safeguard company assets
B) Overstate liabilities in order to be conservative
C) Enhance the accuracy and reliability of accounting records
D) Reduce the risks of errors
44. Internal control is defined, in part, as a plan that safeguards
A) all balance sheet accounts
B) Assets
C) Liabilities
D) capital stock
45. Internal controls are not designed to safeguard assets from
A) natural disasters
B) employee theft
C) Robbery
D) unauthorized use
46. Having one person responsible for the related activities of ordering merchandise, receiving goods, and paying for them
A) increases the potential for errors and fraud
B) decreases the potential for errors and fraud
C) is an example of good internal control
D) is a good example of safeguarding the company’s assets
47. From an internal control standpoint, the asset most susceptible to improper diversion and use is
A) prepaid insurance
B) Cash
C) Buildings
D) Land
48. Internal controls are concerned with
A) only manual systems of accounting
B) the extent of government regulations
C) safeguarding assets
D) preparing income tax returns
49. A consequence of separation of duties is that
A) theft by employees becomes impossible
B) operations become extremely inefficient because of constant training of employees
C) more employees will need to be bonded
D) theft is still possible when several employees are involved
50. A very small company would have the most difficulty in implementing which of the following internal control activities?
A) Separation of duties
B) Limited access to assets
C) Periodic independent verification
D) Sound personnel procedures
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Condensed balance sheet and income statement data for Sievert Corporation are presented here.
Sievert Corporation
Balance Sheets
December 31
Assets 2012 2011
Cash $28,000 $20,000
Receivables (net) 70,000 62,000
Other current assets 90,000 73,000
Long-term investments 62,000 60,000
Plant and equipment (net) 510,000 470,000
——————————- ———- ———–
Total assets $760,000 $685,000
================== ====== =======
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
Current liabilities $75,000 $70,000
Long-term debt 80,000 90,000
Common stock 330,000 300,000
Retained earnings 275,000 225,000
——————————- ———- ———–
Total liabilities and stockholders equity $760,000 $685,000
================== ====== =======
Sales $750,000 $680,000
Cost of goods sold 440,000 400,000
Operating expenses (including income taxes) 240,000 220,000
——————————- ———- ———–
Net income $70,000 $60,000
================== ====== =======
Additional information:
Cash from operating activities $82,000 $56,000
Cash used for capital expenditures $45,000 $38,000
Dividends paid $20,000 $15,000
Average number of shares outstanding 33,000 30,000
Instructions
Compute these values and ratios for 2011 and 2012.
(a) Earnings per share.
(b) Working capital.
(c) Current ratio.
(d) Debt to total assets ratio.
(e) Free cash flow.
(f ) Based on the ratios calculated, discuss briefly the improvement or lack thereof in financial position and operating results from 2011 to 2012 of Sievert Corporation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 305 Midterm Examination August 6, 2013
The exam must be submitted by Sunday, August 11, 2013 on or before 5:59 p.m. To receive full credit you must show ALL of your work!
1. On February 1, 2012, Marsh Contractors agreed to construct a building at a contract price of $5,400,000. Marsh estimated total construction costs would be $4,000,000 and the project would be finished in 2014. Information relating to the costs and billings for this contract is as follows:
|
|
2012
|
2013
|
2014
|
|
Total costs incurred to date
|
$1,500,000
|
$2,640,000
|
$4,600,000
|
|
Estimated costs to complete
|
2,500,000
|
1,760,000
|
-0-
|
|
Customer billings to date
|
2,200,000
|
4,000,000
|
5,600,000
|
|
Collections to date
|
2,000,000
|
3,500,000
|
5,500,000
|
Using the percentage-of-completion method, calculate the gross profit that should be recorded for 2012, 2013 and 2014. (30 points)
2. Ashleigh Company provides the following selected information related to its defined benefit pension plan for 2012.
|
Pension asset/liability, January 1
|
$25,000 Cr.
|
|
Accumulated benefit obligation, December 31
|
400,000
|
|
Actual and expected return on plan assets
|
10,000
|
|
Contributions in 2012
|
150,000
|
|
Fair value of plan assets, December 31
|
800,000
|
|
Settlement rate
|
10%
|
|
Projected benefit obligation, January 1
|
700,000
|
|
Service cost
|
80,000
|
Compute (a.) the pension expense and prepare the journal entry to record pension expense and the employer s contribution to the pension plan in 2012, if benefits paid in 2012 were $35,000 and (b.) prepare the pension worksheet for Ashleigh Company for 2012. (80 points)
3. Keele Company has the following securities in its investment portfolio on December 31, 2012 (all securities were purchased in 2012): (1) 3,000 shares of Anderson Company common stock which cost $58,500, (2) 10,000 shares of Munter Ltd. common stock which cost $580,000, and (3) 6,000 shares of King Company preferred stock which cost $255,000. The Fair Value Adjustment account shows a credit balance of $10,100 at the end of 2012. In 2013, Keele Company completed the following securities transactions; (a.) On January 15th, sold 3,000 shares of Anderson s common stock at $22 per share less fees of $2,150 and (b.) On April 17th, purchased 1,000 shares of Castle s common stock at $33.50 per share plus fees of $1,980. On December 31, 2013, the market values per share of these securities were: Munter $61, King $40 and Castle $29.
Perform the following: (a.) prepare the journal entry for the security sale on January 15, 2013; (b.) prepare the journal entry to record the security purchase on April 17, 2013 and (c.) compute the unrealized gains or losses of the revised investment portfolio and prepare the adjusting entry for Keele Company on December 31, 2013. (60 points)
4. At the end of the year, the Otaigbe Corporation has pretax financial income of $550,000. Included in the $550,000 is $70,000 interest income on municipal bonds, $25,000 fine for the dumping of hazardous waste, and depreciation of $60,000. Depreciation for tax purposes is $45,000. Compute the income taxes payable, assuming the tax rate is 30% for all periods. (15 points)
5. Wills and Turkvant Inc. have a deferred tax liability of $68,000 at the beginning of 2013. At the end of 2013, the company reports accounts receivable on the books at $90,000 and the tax basis at zero (the only temporary difference). If the enacted tax rate is 34% for all periods, and income taxes payable for the period is $230,000, determine the amount of total income tax expense to report for 2013. (15 points)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 305 Midterm Examination August 6, 2013 The exam must be submitted by Sunday, August 11, 2013 on or before 5:59 p.m. To receive full credit you must show ALL of your work! 1. On February 1, 2012, Marsh Contractors agreed to construct a building at a contract price of $5,400,000. Marsh estimated total construction costs would be $4,000,000 and the project would be finished in 2014. Information relating to the costs and billings for this contract is as follows: 2012 2013 2014 Total costs incurred to date $1,500,000 $2,640,000 $4,600,000 Estimated costs to complete 2,500,000 1,760,000 -0- Customer billings to date 2,200,000 4,000,000 5,600,000 Collections to date 2,000,000 3,500,000 5,500,000 Using the percentage-of-completion method, calculate the gross profit that should be recorded for 2012, 2013 and 2014. (30 points) 2. Ashleigh Company provides the following selected information related to its defined benefit pension plan for 2012. Pension asset/liability, January 1 $25,000 Cr. Accumulated benefit obligation, December 31 400,000 Actual and expected return on plan assets 10,000 Contributions in 2012 150,000 Fair value of plan assets, December 31 800,000 Settlement rate 10% Projected benefit obligation, January 1 700,000 Service cost 80,000
Compute (a.) the pension expense and prepare the journal entry to record pension expense and the employer s contribution to the pension plan in 2012, if benefits paid in 2012 were $35,000 and (b.) prepare the pension worksheet for Ashleigh Company for 2012. (80 points) 3. Keele Company has the following securities in its investment portfolio on December 31, 2012 (all securities were purchased in 2012): (1) 3,000 shares of Anderson Company common stock which cost $58,500, (2) 10,000 shares of Munter Ltd. common stock which cost $580,000, and (3) 6,000 shares of King Company preferred stock which cost $255,000. The Fair Value Adjustment account shows a credit balance of $10,100 at the end of 2012. In 2013, Keele Company completed the following securities transactions; (a.) On January 15th, sold 3,000 shares of Anderson s common stock at $22 per share less fees of $2,150 and (b.) On April 17th, purchased 1,000 shares of Castle s common stock at $33.50 per share plus fees of $1,980. On December 31, 2013, the market values per share of these securities were: Munter $61, King $40 and Castle $29. Perform the following: (a.) prepare the journal entry for the security sale on January 15, 2013; (b.) prepare the journal entry to record the security purchase on April 17, 2013 and (c.) compute the unrealized gains or losses of the revised investment portfolio and prepare the adjusting entry for Keele Company on December 31, 2013. (60 points) 4. At the end of the year, the Otaigbe Corporation has pretax financial income of $550,000. Included in the $550,000 is $70,000 interest income on municipal bonds, $25,000 fine for the dumping of hazardous waste, and depreciation of $60,000. Depreciation for tax purposes is $45,000. Compute the income taxes payable, assuming the tax rate is 30% for all periods. (15 points) 5. Wills and Turkvant Inc. have a deferred tax liability of $68,000 at the beginning of 2013. At the end of 2013, the company reports accounts receivable on the books at $90,000 and the tax basis at zero (the only temporary difference). If the enacted tax rate is 34% for all periods, and income taxes payable for the period is $230,000, determine the amount of total income tax expense to report for 2013. (15 points)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.The Higgins Company has just purchased a piece of equipment at a cost of $300,000. This equipment will reduce operating costs by $55,000 each year for the next eleven years. This equipment replaces old equipment which was sold for $14,000 cash. The new equipment has a payback period of: (Ignore income taxes.) (Round your answer to 1 decimal place.)
A.16.2 Years
B.5.5 Years
C.5.2 Years
D.11.10
2.The management of Serpas Corporation is considering the purchase of a machine that would cost $170,000, would last for 5 years, and would have no salvage value. The machine would reduce labor and other costs by $41,000 per year. The company requires a minimum pretax return of 11% on all investment projects. (Ignore income taxes.)
Click here to view Exhibit 13B-2 to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.
The net present value of the proposed project is closest to: (Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, intermediate and final answers to the nearest dollar amount.)
A.-18,464
B. 35,000
C.-33,811
D. 27,384
3. Lett Corporation is investigating buying a small used aircraft for the use of its executives. The aircraft would have a useful life of 12 years. The company uses a discount rate of 17% in its capital budgeting. The net present value of the investment, excluding the salvage value of the aircraft, is -$578,526. (Ignore income taxes.)
Click here to view Exhibit 13B-1 to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.
Management is having difficulty estimating the salvage value of the aircraft. How large would the salvage value of the aircraft have to be to make the investment in the aircraft financially attractive? (Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places and final answers to the nearest dollar amount.)
A.$3,806,092
B.$3,403,094
C.$98,349
D.$578,526
4.
The management of Londo Corporation is investigating buying a small used aircraft to use in making airborne inspections of its above-ground pipelines. The aircraft would have a useful life of 4 years. The company uses a discount rate of 10% in its capital budgeting. The net present value of the investment, excluding the intangible benefits, is $316,080. (Ignore income taxes.)
Click here to view Exhibit 13B-2 to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.
How large would the annual intangible benefit have to be to make the investment in the aircraft financially attractive? (Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places and final answer to the nearest dollar amount.)
$31,608
$316,080
$79,020
$99,710
5.
The management of Melchiori Corporation is considering the purchase of a machine that would cost $360,000, would last for 6 years, and would have no salvage value. The machine would reduce labor and other costs by $116,000 per year. The company requires a minimum pretax return of 14% on all investment projects. (Ignore income taxes.)
Click here to view Exhibit 13B-2, to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.
The present value of the annual cost savings of $116,000 is closest to: (Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places and final answer to the nearest dollar amount.)
$451,124
$175,448
$1,091,462
$696,000
6.
Gull Inc. is considering the acquisition of equipment that costs $550,000 and has a useful life of 6 years with no salvage value. The incremental net cash flows that would be generated by the equipment are: (Ignore income taxes.)
Incremental net
cash flows
Year 1$145,000
Year 2$195,000
Year 3$156,000
Year 4$165,000
Year 5$155,000
Year 6$135,000
Click here to view Exhibit 13B-1 to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.
If the discount rate is 13%, the net present value of the investment is closest to: (Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, intermediate and final answers to the nearest dollar amount.)
$435,000
$148,776
$89,228
$591,264
7.
Charley has a typing service. He estimates that a new computer will result in increased cash inflow $1,100 in Year 1, $1,500 in Year 2 and $2,500 in Year 3. (Ignore income taxes.)
Click here to view Exhibit 13B-1 to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.
If Charley’s required rate of return is 12%, the most that Charley would be willing to pay for the new computer would be: (Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, intermediate and final answers to the nearest dollar amount.)
$3,459
$2,296
$3,278
$3,958
8.
Shields Company has gathered the following data on a proposed investment project: (Ignore income taxes.)
Investment required in equipment$460,000
Annual cash inflows$77,000
Salvage value$0
Life of the investment16 years
Discount rate12%
The simple rate of return on the investment is closest to: (Round your answer to the closest interest rate.)
5%
10%
15%
11%
9.
Sibble Corporation is considering the purchase of a machine that would cost $330,000 and would last for 7 years. At the end of 7 years, the machine would have a salvage value of $25,000. By reducing labor and other operating costs, the machine would provide annual cost savings of $63,000. The company requires a minimum pretax return of 11% on all investment projects. (Ignore income taxes.)
Click here to view Exhibit 13B-1 and Exhibit 13B-2 to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.
The net present value of the proposed project is closest to: (Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, intermediate and final answers to the nearest dollar amount.)
$45,194
$33,144
$8,144
$21,094
10.
Shields Company has gathered the following data on a proposed investment project: (Ignore income taxes.)
Investment required in equipment$470,000
Annual cash inflows$77,000
Salvage value$0
Life of the investment20 years
Discount rate14%
Click here to view Exhibit 13B-2 to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.
The internal rate of return on the investment is closest to: (Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places and final answer to the closest interest rate.)
12%
14%
16%
18%
11.
Cezar Corporation’s comparative balance sheet appears below:
Cezar Corporation
Comparative Balance Sheet
Ending
BalanceBeginning
Balance
Assets:
Current assets:
Cash and cash equivalents$ 84,000 $ 51,000
Accounts receivable33,900 41,000
Inventory76,200 71,000
Total current assets194,100 163,000
Property, plant, and equipment535,500 510,000
Less accumulated depreciation195,500 171,000
Net property, plant, equipment340,000 339,000
Total assets$534,100 $502,000
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Current liabilities:
Accounts payable$ 27,800 $ 31,000
Accrued liabilities61,800 71,000
Income taxes payable63,600 61,000
Total current liabilities153,200 163,000
Bonds payable96,200 91,000
Total liabilities249,400 254,000
Stockholders’ equity:
Common stock42,000 51,000
Retained earnings242,700 197,000
Total stockholders’ equity284,700 248,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity$534,100 $502,000
The company did not dispose of any property, plant, and equipment during the year. Its net income for the year was $48,400 and its cash dividends were $2,700. The company did not retire any bonds payable or issue any common stock during the year. Its net cash provided by operating activities and net cash used in financing activities are:
net cash provided by operating activities, $31,600; net cash used in financing activities,$7,900
net cash provided by operating activities, $31,600; net cash used in financing activities,$6,500
net cash provided by operating activities, $65,000; net cash used in financing activities,$6,500
net cash provided by operating activities, $65,000; net cash used in financing activities,$7,900
12.
Nordquist Company’s net income last year was $31,000. The company did not sell or retire any property, plant, and equipment last year. Changes in selected balance sheet accounts for the year appear below:
Increases
(Decreases)
Asset and Contra-Asset Accounts:
Accounts receivable$15,500
Inventory$(4,000)
Prepaid expenses$11,000
Accumulated depreciation$28,000
Liability Accounts:
Accounts payable$15,000
Accrued liabilities$(8,500)
Income taxes payable$3,100
Based solely on this information, the net cash provided by operating activities under the indirect method on the statement of cash flows would be:
$68,600
$15,900
$46,100
$91,100
13. Last year Burford Company’s cash account decreased by $33,000. Net cash used in investing activities was $8,800. Net cash provided by financing activities was $29,500. On the statement of cash flows, the net cash flow provided by (used in) operating activities was:
$20,700
$(53,700)
$(33,000)
$(12,300)
14.
Mccloe Corporation’s balance sheet and income statement appear below:
Mccloe Corporation
Comparative Balance Sheet
Ending
BalanceBeginning
Balance
Assets:
Cash and cash equivalents$ 58 $ 43
Accounts receivable48 62
Inventory78 62
Property, plant and equipment535 520
Less: accumulated depreciation275 262
Total assets$444 $425
Liabilities and stockholders’ equity:
Accounts payable$ 71 $ 57
Accrued liabilities44 28
Income taxes payable57 57
Bonds payable77 144
Common stock47 42
Retained earnings148 97
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity$444 $425
Income Statement
Sales$568
Cost of goods sold360
Gross margin208
Selling and administrative expenses141
Net operating income67
Gain on sale of plant and equipment22
Income before taxes89
Income taxes32
Net income$ 57
Cash dividends were $6. The company did not issue any bonds or repurchase any of its own common stock during the year. The net cash provided by (used in) financing activities for the year was:
rev: 05_24_2013_QC_31013
$(67)
$(68)
$(6)
$5
15.
Lueckenhoff Corporation’s most recent balance sheet appears below:
Lueckenhoff Corporation
Comparative Balance Sheet
Ending
BalanceBeginning
Balance
Assets:
Cash and cash equivalents$ 44 $ 40
Accounts receivable59 52
Inventory86 80
Property, plant and equipment790 732
Less: accumulated depreciation289 206
Total assets$690 $698
Liabilities and stockholders’ equity:
Accounts payable$ 37 $ 34
Bonds payable460 668
Common stock72 64
Retained earnings121 (68)
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity$690 $698
The company’s net income for the year was $242 and it did not sell or retire any property, plant, and equipment during the year. Cash dividends were $53. The net cash provided by (used in) operating activities for the year was:
$315
$73
$169
$368
16.
Hocking Corporation’s comparative balance sheet appears below:
Hocking Corporation
Comparative Balance Sheet
Ending
BalanceBeginning
Balance
Assets:
Current assets:
Cash and cash equivalents$ 47,000 $ 27,000
Accounts receivable22,300 27,000
Inventory61,700 57,000
Prepaid expenses15,300 17,000
Total current assets146,300 128,000
Property, plant, and equipment356,000 337,000
Less accumulated depreciation176,000 144,000
Net property, plant, and equipment180,000 193,000
Total assets$326,300 $321,000
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Current liabilities:
Accounts payable$ 21,700 $ 18,000
Accrued liabilities65,700 57,000
Income taxes payable49,700 47,000
Total current liabilities137,100 122,000
Bonds payable64,500 77,000
Total liabilities201,600 199,000
Stockholders’ equity:
Common stock34,300 38,000
Retained earnings90,400 84,000
Total stockholders’ equity124,700 122,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity$326,300 $321,000
The company’s net income (loss) for the year was $8,800 and its cash dividends were $2,400. It did not sell or retire any property, plant, and equipment during the year.
The company’s net cash used in investing activities is:
$19,000
$36,700
$13,000
$51,000
17. Hocking Corporation’s comparative balance sheet appears below:
Hocking Corporation
Comparative Balance Sheet
Ending
BalanceBeginning
Balance
Assets:
Current assets:
Cash and cash equivalents$ 57,000 $ 37,000
Accounts receivable31,300 37,000
Inventory72,700 67,000
Prepaid expenses24,300 27,000
Total current assets185,300 168,000
Property, plant, and equipment374,000 347,000
Less accumulated depreciation196,000 164,000
Net property, plant, and equipment178,000 183,000
Total assets$363,300 $351,000
Liabilities and stockholders’ equity
Current liabilities:
Accounts payable$ 32,700 $ 28,000
Accrued liabilities76,700 67,000
Income taxes payable60,700 57,000
Total current liabilities170,100 152,000
Bonds payable59,000 87,000
Total liabilities229,100 239,000
Stockholders’ equity:
Common stock45,400 48,000
Retained earnings88,800 64,000
Total stockholders’ equity134,200 112,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity$363,300 $351,000
The company’s net income (loss) for the year was $31,000 and its cash dividends were $6,200. It did not sell or retire any property, plant, and equipment during the year. The company uses the indirect method to determine the net cash provided by operating activities.
The company’s net cash provided by operating activities is:
$89,500
$78,100
$83,800
$51,800
18. Boole Corporation’s net cash provided by operating activities was $125; its capital expenditures were $68; and its cash dividends were $27. The company’s free cash flow was:
$30
$98
$57
$220
19.
Financial statements of Ansbro Corporation follow:
Ansbro Corporation
Comparative Balance Sheet
Ending
BalanceBeginning
Balance
Assets:
Cash and cash equivalents$ 38 $ 35
Accounts receivable94 86
Inventory53 45
Property, plant and equipment738 620
Less: accumulated depreciation358 313
Total assets$565 $473
Liabilities and stockholders’ equity:
Accounts payable$ 71 $ 80
Bonds payable165 250
Common stock104 86
Retained earnings225 57
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity$565 $473
Income Statement
Sales$775
Cost of goods sold438
Gross margin337
Selling and administrative expenses104
Net operating income233
Income taxes40
Net income$ 193
Cash dividends were $25. The company did not dispose of any property, plant, and equipment. It did not issue any bonds payable or repurchase any of its own common stock. The following questions pertain to the company’s statement of cash flows.
The net cash provided by (used in) investing activities for the year was:
$118
$(73)
$73
$(118)
20.
Schleich Corporation’s most recent balance sheet appears below:
Schleich Corporation
Comparative Balance Sheet
Ending
BalanceBeginning
Balance
Assets:
Cash and cash equivalents$ 42 $ 31
Accounts receivable40 27
Inventory52 67
Property, plant and equipment744 552
Less: accumulated depreciation286 264
Total assets$592 $413
Liabilities and stockholders’ equity:
Accounts payable$ 57 $ 74
Accrued liabilities22 20
Income taxes payable45 30
Bonds payable107 168
Common stock87 82
Retained earnings274 39
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity$592 $413
Net income for the year was $330. Cash dividends were $62. The company did not sell or retire any property, plant, and equipment during the year. The net cash provided by (used in) operating activities for the year was:
$306
$24
$465
$354
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Sherene Nili manages a company that produces wedding gowns. She produces both a custm product that is made to order and a standard product that is sold in bridal salons. Her accountant prepared the following forecasted income statement for March, which is a busy month: Custom Dresses Standard Dresses Total Number of dresses 10 20 30 Sales Revenue $50,000 $25,000 $75,000 Materials $10,000 $8,000 $18,000 Labor $20,000 9,000 29,000 Machine Depreciation 600 300 900 Rent 4,200 2,800 7,000 Heat and Light 1,000 600 1,600 Other production costs 2,800 Marketing and Administration 7,700 Total costs $67,000 Operating profit 8,000 Ms. Nili already has orders for the 10 custom dresses reflected in the March forecasted income statement. The depreciation charges are for machines used in teh respective product lines. Machines depreciate at the rateof $1 per hour based on hours used, so these are variable costs. In March, cutting and sewing machines are expected to operate for 900 hours, of which 600 hours will be used to make custom dresses. The rent is for the building space, which has been leased for several years at $7,000 per month. The rent, heat, and ligh are allocated to the product lines based on the amount of floor space occupied. A valued customer, who is a wedding consultant, has asked Ms. Nili for a special favor. This customer has a client who wants to get married in early April. Ms. Nili’s company is working at capacity and would have to give up some other business to make this dress. She can’t renege on custom orders already agreed to, bt she can reduce the number of standard dresses produced in March to 10. Ms. Nili would lose permanently the opportunity to make up the lost production of standard dresses because she has no unused capacity for the foreseeable future. The customer is willing to pay $25,000 for the special order. Materials and labor for the order wil cost $6,000 and $10,000, respectively. The special order would require 140 hours of machine time.Ms. Nili’s company would save 150 hours of machine time from the standard dress business given up. Rent, heat and light, and other production costs would not be affected by the specal order. A) Should Ms. Nili take the order? Explain you answer. B) What is the minimum price s. Nili should accept to take the special order? C) What are the other factore, if any, besides price that she should consider? |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 340 Final Exam
1. Three objectives of a company’s internal control system should be safeguarding assets, checking the accuracy and reliability of accounting data, and promoting operational efficiency. A fourth objective of a company’s internal control system should be:
a. Preventing embezzlement of assets
b. Encouraging adherence to prescribed managerial policies
c. Avoiding the payment of overtime to company employees
d. Revising standards for production costs on a weekly basis
2. Control activities and monitoring are one and the same. T or F
3. General controls within IT environments that affect personnel include:
a. Use of computer accounts
b. Separation of duties
c. Informal knowledge of employees
d. all of the above affect personnel
4. Contingency planning includes the development of a formal disaster recovery plan T or F
5. What has been the effect on accountants in those organizations which have computerized their data processing functions?
a. The need for accountants has disappeared
b. The accountants have become “pure” bookkeepers
c. The accountants have become involved in more decision making activities
d. The accountants’ decision making activities have drastically declined
6. Since accountants are not normally computer programmers working within the information processing subsystem, it is unnecessary for them to understand the capabilities and limitations of computers
T or F
7. An advantage of an extranet is that:
a. It can disseminate information corporate wide
b. It can be accessed by selected trading partners
c. Users can employ common web browsers to access information in them
d. all of the above
8. Intranets do not use the same software as the Internet. T or F
9. Data flow diagrams:
a. Accomplish the same purpose as system flowcharts
b. Are different from system flowcharts since they focus on a logical view of the information system
c. Are useless for planning a new system
d. Are never used in analyzing an existing system
10. Three major objectives of a data collection process are accuracy, timeliness, and cost-effectiveness T or F
11. Business process reengineering:
a. Is an incremental approach to redesigning business processes
b. Involves redesigning business processes from scratch
c. Is rarely successful in cutting an organization s costs
d. Is always welcomed by an organization s employees
12. An e-business portal is a gateway to outside web sites and services T or F
13. Enterprise-wide AISs:
a. Almost never pay for themselves
b. Do not include many more features than middle-range accounting software packages
c. Are seldom used by multinational organizations
d. Integrate an organization s financial functions with its other functional areas
14. The concurrency concern in database operations refers to the need to convert foreign currency amounts into dollar terms before reporting them to subschema viewers. T or F
15. In the REA framework, which of these would be recorded as an event
a. Hiring a new president of the company
b. Taking an initial sales order from a customer
c. Buying a piece of equipment for cash
d. all of these would be recorded as events
16. Three of the largest concerns when creating databases are data integrity, processing accuracy, and data security. T or F
17. The purpose of the entity relationship (E-R) model is to help database designers:
a. Identify data redundancies
b. Create databases in third normal form
c. Design databases and depict data relationships
d. Answer structured queries about the data in accounting databases
18. Database management systems are important to accountants because:
a. They automate file storage tasks and enable managers to generate worthwhile financial reports
b. They eliminate data redundancy
c. They are unique data structures which accountants have never used before
d. They are easy to develop and therefore save money
e. They are energy efficient
19. One purpose of generalized auditing packages is to enable an auditor to examine the contents of computer files of interest without having to write a computer program himself/herself.
T or F
20. Which of these is not generally a reason to outsource:
a. Retain control over data
b. Attractive business solution
c. Lower data processing costs
d. Avoid seasonal fluctuations
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. (TCO 1) A difference between actual costs and planned costs (Points : 4)
should be investigated if the amount is exceptional.
indicates that the planned cost was poorly estimated.
indicates that the manager is doing a poor job.
should be ignored unless it involves the cost of ingredients.
2. (TCO 1) Which of the following is not likely to be a fixed cost? (Points : 4)
Direct materials
Rent
Depreciation
Salary of the human resources director
3. (TCO 2) Which of the following is a manufacturing cost? (Points : 4)
Direct material
Advertising expense
Depreciation of the office equipment used by the sales staff
Salary of the company president
4. (TCO 2) A job-order costing system is likely used by a (Points : 4)
soft drink bottler
breakfast cereal manufacturer
paint manufacturer
custom home builder
5. (TCO 3) Why is it necessary to compute equivalent units separately for materials and conversion costs? (Points : 4)
Mistakes are made in the accounting for these costs
Materials and conversion enter the production process at different rates
Conversion costs are more difficult to estimate
None of the above reasons are true
6. (TCO 3) In the assembly department, all the direct materials are added at the beginning of the processing. Beginning Work in Process inventory consists of 2,000 units with a direct materials cost of $31,860. During the period, 15,000 units are started and direct materials costing $250,000 are charged to the department. If there are 1,000 units in ending inventory, what is the cost per equivalent unit? (Points : 4)
$15.93
$15.63
$14.83
$16.58
7. (TCO 4) The range of activity for which estimates of cost behavior are likely to be accurate is the (Points : 4)
incremental range
margin of safety
relevant range
range of opportunity
8. (TCO 4) The contribution margin per unit is the difference between (Points : 4)
total revenue and total fixed costs
selling price and variable costs per unit
anticipated level of sales and break-even sales
budgeted fixed costs and actual fixed costs
9. (TCO 5) Which of the following is treated as a product cost in full costing? (Points : 4)
Sales commissions
Administrative salaries
Factory supervisor
Security at corporate headquarters
10. (TCO 5) When the number of units sold is equal to the number of units produced, net income using full costing will be (Points : 4)
greater than net income under variable costing
equal to net income using variable costing
less than income using variable costing
none of the above
11. (TCO 6) A contract which specifies that the suppler will be paid for the cost of production as well as some fixed amount or percentage of cost is called a(n) (Points : 4)
approved overrun.
cost-plus contract.
allocation plan.
indirect cost budget.
12. (TCO 6) The traditional approach to cost allocation (Points : 4)
tends to over-cost high volume core products.
usually requires more cost pools than ABC.
attempts to identify the activities that cause costs.
produces more accurate costs than any other method.
13. (TCO 7) Which of the following is not a term used to describe the additional costs incurred as a result of selecting one decision over another? (Points : 4)
Differential costs
Sunk costs
Relevant costs
Incremental costs
1. (TCO 7) Two or more products that result from common inputs are called (Points : 4)
split products
joint products
combination products
common products
2. (TCO 8) Activity based pricing seeks to (Points : 4)
charge customers with the costs they are creating.
make greater profits by charging all customers more.
maintain all customers in the customer base.
all of the above.
3. (TCO 8) When deciding to accept or reject a special order, which of the following costs would most likely not be relevant? (Points : 4)
The wages of direct labor to make the order.
Depreciation on the machinery used to make the order.
The raw material used to make the order.
The electricity used to run the machine to make the order.
4. (TCO 9) The required rate of return used to compute net present value is related to the firm’s (Points : 4)
contribution margin.
depreciation methods.
fixed costs.
cost of capital.
5. (TCO 9) Projects with a negative present value will always have a(n) (Points : 4)
payback period longer than three years.
internal rate of return less than the required rate of return.
negative accounting rate of return.
series of cash outflows that total more than the initial cost of the project.
6. (TCO 10) In a bottom-up approach to budgeting (Points : 4)
the CFO alone determines the budget.
only the budget for the next month is prepared.
lower level managers are the primary source of budget information.
the production budget is prepared before the sales budget.
7. (TCO 10) Which budget is prepared first? (Points : 4)
Cash disbursement budget
Production budget
Capital budget
Sales budget
8. (TCO 10) The difference between standard costs and budgeted costs is that standard costs (Points : 4)
refer to a single unit while budgeted costs refer to the cost, at standard, for the total number of budgeted units.
are calculated under ideal conditions, while budgeted costs are calculated for attainable conditions.
are calculated for material while budgeted costs are calculated for labor.
are part of the management accounting system, while budgets are part of the financial accounting system.
9. (TCO 10) Which of the following are components of a direct labor variance? (Points : 4)
Rate and efficiency
Attainable and ideal
Price and quantity
Volume and controllable
10. (TCO 10) The type of center that has responsibility for generating revenue as well as controlling costs is a(n) (Points : 4)
investment center.
cost center.
business center.
profit center.
11. (TCO 10) Which of the following is not an advantage of decentralization for a company? (Points : 4)
Subunit managers have better information.
Subunit managers will act to benefit the organization as a whole.
Subunit managers can respond quicker to changing circumstances.
Subunit managers can receive training to move into top level management positions.
12. (TCO 10) Which ratio measures the rate earned on total capital provided by the owners? (Points : 4)
Return on assets
Return on stockholders’ equity
Earnings per share
Price earnings ratio
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
If you are looking for something else, email me atarchmage@homeworkmarket.com.
1. (TCO 1) Distinguish between product costs and period costs. Define both types of costs and provide examples. (Points : 20)
2. (TCO 6) Booth Financial Services, LLC has two revenue producing departments, Financial Planning and Business Consulting. The accounting department is trying to determine the best method to allocate $1,000,000 of common costs (secretarial staff, reception personnel, etc), either by salary or number of employees. Information on the revenue departments are as follows:
DepartmentEmployeesSalaries
Financial Planning150 employees$10,000,000
Business Consulting50 employees$5,000,000
(a) Allocate the $1,000,000 common costs to the two revenue departments using both methods.
(b) Why are allocations called arbitrary? (Points : 25)
3. (TCO 10) Charlie Corp sells it products on both credit and cash basis. Monthly sales are sold 20% for cash, 80% for credit. Credit sales are collected 40% in the month of sale and 60% the following month. Sales for the first quarter are as follows:
January $100,000
February $150,000
March $125,000
Compute cash collections for February. (Points : 25)
4. (TCO 2) Singleton Company is trying to determine a predetermined manufacturing overhead. Estimated overhead for the upcoming year is $600,000. Budgeted machine hours are 120,000 hours, and budgeted labor hours are 15,000 hours at a rate of $20.00 per hour. Compute the predetermined overhead rate based on:
(a) Machine hours
(b) Direct labor hours
(c) Direct labor dollars (Points : 25)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
If you are looking for something else, email me atarchmage@homeworkmarket.com.
1. (TCO 1) A difference between actual costs and planned costs (Points : 4)
should be investigated if the amount is exceptional.
indicates that the planned cost was poorly estimated.
indicates that the manager is doing a poor job.
should be ignored unless it involves the cost of ingredients.
2. (TCO 1) Which of the following is not likely to be a fixed cost? (Points : 4)
Direct materials
Rent
Depreciation
Salary of the human resources director
3. (TCO 2) Which of the following is a manufacturing cost? (Points : 4)
Direct material
Advertising expense
Depreciation of the office equipment used by the sales staff
Salary of the company president
4. (TCO 2) A job-order costing system is likely used by a (Points : 4)
soft drink bottler
breakfast cereal manufacturer
paint manufacturer
custom home builder
5. (TCO 3) Why is it necessary to compute equivalent units separately for materials and conversion costs? (Points : 4)
Mistakes are made in the accounting for these costs
Materials and conversion enter the production process at different rates
Conversion costs are more difficult to estimate
None of the above reasons are true
6. (TCO 3) In the assembly department, all the direct materials are added at the beginning of the processing. Beginning Work in Process inventory consists of 2,000 units with a direct materials cost of $31,860. During the period, 15,000 units are started and direct materials costing $250,000 are charged to the department. If there are 1,000 units in ending inventory, what is the cost per equivalent unit? (Points : 4)
$15.93
$15.63
$14.83
$16.58
7. (TCO 4) The range of activity for which estimates of cost behavior are likely to be accurate is the (Points : 4)
incremental range
margin of safety
relevant range
range of opportunity
8. (TCO 4) The contribution margin per unit is the difference between (Points : 4)
total revenue and total fixed costs
selling price and variable costs per unit
anticipated level of sales and break-even sales
budgeted fixed costs and actual fixed costs
9. (TCO 5) Which of the following is treated as a product cost in full costing? (Points : 4)
Sales commissions
Administrative salaries
Factory supervisor
Security at corporate headquarters
10. (TCO 5) When the number of units sold is equal to the number of units produced, net income using full costing will be (Points : 4)
greater than net income under variable costing
equal to net income using variable costing
less than income using variable costing
none of the above
11. (TCO 6) A contract which specifies that the suppler will be paid for the cost of production as well as some fixed amount or percentage of cost is called a(n) (Points : 4)
approved overrun.
cost-plus contract.
allocation plan.
indirect cost budget.
12. (TCO 6) The traditional approach to cost allocation (Points : 4)
tends to over-cost high volume core products.
usually requires more cost pools than ABC.
attempts to identify the activities that cause costs.
produces more accurate costs than any other method.
13. (TCO 7) Which of the following is not a term used to describe the additional costs incurred as a result of selecting one decision over another? (Points : 4)
Differential costs
Sunk costs
Relevant costs
Incremental costs
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
If you are looking for something else, email me atarchmage@homeworkmarket.com.
1.(TCO 9) An investment of $185,575 is expected to generate returns of $65,000 per year for each of the next four years. What is the investment’s internal rate of return? (Points : 25)
2. (TCO 4) Legal Docs Inc is a legal services firm that files incorporation papers for small businesses. They charge $1,000 per application. This year’s income statement shows the following:
Sales $1,295,000
Variable Expenses $1,023,000
Contribution margin $272,000
Fixed costs $250,000
Profit $22,000
Required:
(a) Compute the break-even point in units.
(b) Compute the contribution margin ratio.
(c) Compute the current margin of safety.
(d) How many applications must the company sell to make a profit of $350,000? (Points : 25)
3. (TCO 5) The following data has been taken from Air-Tite company in its first year of business.
Units produced 200,000
Units sold 180,000
Units in ending inventory 20,000
Fixed manufacturing overhead $600,000
(a) Compute the amount of fixed manufacturing overhead that would be expensed in the current year if full absorption costing is used.
(b) Compute the amount of fixed manufacturing overhead that would be expensed in the current year if variable costing is used.
(c) Compute the amount of fixed manufacturing overhead that would be included in ending inventory under full absorption costing. (Points : 25)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
If you are looking for something else, email me atarchmage@homeworkmarket.com.
1. (TCO 7) Two or more products that result from common inputs are called (Points : 4)
split products
joint products
combination products
common products
2. (TCO 8) Activity based pricing seeks to (Points : 4)
charge customers with the costs they are creating.
make greater profits by charging all customers more.
maintain all customers in the customer base.
all of the above.
3. (TCO 8) When deciding to accept or reject a special order, which of the following costs would most likely not be relevant? (Points : 4)
The wages of direct labor to make the order.
Depreciation on the machinery used to make the order.
The raw material used to make the order.
The electricity used to run the machine to make the order.
4. (TCO 9) The required rate of return used to compute net present value is related to the firm’s (Points : 4)
contribution margin.
depreciation methods.
fixed costs.
cost of capital.
5. (TCO 9) Projects with a negative present value will always have a(n) (Points : 4)
payback period longer than three years.
internal rate of return less than the required rate of return.
negative accounting rate of return.
series of cash outflows that total more than the initial cost of the project.
6. (TCO 10) In a bottom-up approach to budgeting (Points : 4)
the CFO alone determines the budget.
only the budget for the next month is prepared.
lower level managers are the primary source of budget information.
the production budget is prepared before the sales budget.
7. (TCO 10) Which budget is prepared first? (Points : 4)
Cash disbursement budget
Production budget
Capital budget
Sales budget
8. (TCO 10) The difference between standard costs and budgeted costs is that standard costs (Points : 4)
refer to a single unit while budgeted costs refer to the cost, at standard, for the total number of budgeted units.
are calculated under ideal conditions, while budgeted costs are calculated for attainable conditions.
are calculated for material while budgeted costs are calculated for labor.
are part of the management accounting system, while budgets are part of the financial accounting system.
9. (TCO 10) Which of the following are components of a direct labor variance? (Points : 4)
Rate and efficiency
Attainable and ideal
Price and quantity
Volume and controllable
10. (TCO 10) The type of center that has responsibility for generating revenue as well as controlling costs is a(n) (Points : 4)
investment center.
cost center.
business center.
profit center.
11. (TCO 10) Which of the following is not an advantage of decentralization for a company? (Points : 4)
Subunit managers have better information.
Subunit managers will act to benefit the organization as a whole.
Subunit managers can respond quicker to changing circumstances.
Subunit managers can receive training to move into top level management positions.
12. (TCO 10) Which ratio measures the rate earned on total capital provided by the owners? (Points : 4)
Return on assets
Return on stockholders’ equity
Earnings per share
Price earnings ratio
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
If you are looking for something else, email me atarchmage@homeworkmarket.com.
Bravo Baking Company began operations in May of 2010 with the production and sales of specialty breads. The company has experienced a good market demand for its high protein, low carbohydrate product called “Hi-Lo” Hi-Lo’s success has required that Bravo continue to make only this one product, however, Bravo’s customers, the local retailers, have been asking for more specialty breads from the company. The decision to expand will be made in the coming weeks.
Weekly Assignments: Complete the assigned Tab each week.
In each worksheet there are several Green colored cells. These cells must be filled in with your response.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week Two Assignment
Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Analysis of stockholders’ equity
Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X6. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 20X6 and 20X5 follow:
20X6 20X5
Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10% $580,000 $500,000
Common stock, $10 par value 2,350,000 1,750,000
Paid-in capital in excess of par value
Preferred 24,000
Common 4,620,000 3,600,000
Retained earnings 8,470,000 6,920,000
Total stockholders’ equity $16,044,000 $12,770,000
a. Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X6.
b. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X6.
c. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 20X6?
d. Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X6? By what amount?
2. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization
Southlake Corporation issued $900,000 of 8% bonds on March 1, 20X1. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow.
Case A The bonds are issued at 100.
Case B The bonds are issued at 96.
Case C The bonds are issued at 105.
Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization.
Instructions:
Complete the following table:
Case A Case B Case C
a. Cash inflow on the issuance date _______ _______ _______
b. Total cash outflow through maturity _______ _______ _______
c. Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue _______ _______ _______
d. Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
e. Amortization for the year ended December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
f. Unamortized premium as of December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
g. Unamortized discount as of December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
h. Bond carrying value as of December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
3. Definitions of manufacturing concepts
Interstate Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:
Materials and supplies used
Brass $75,000
Repair parts 16,000
Machine lubricants 9,000
Wages and salaries Machine operators 128,000
Production supervisors 64,000
Maintenance personnel 41,000
Other factory overhead Variable 35,000
Fixed 46,000
Sales commissions 20,000
Compute:
a. Total direct materials consumed
b. Total direct labor
c. Total prime cost
d. Total conversion cost
4. Schedule of cost of goods manufactured, income statement
The following information was taken from the ledger of Jefferson Industries, Inc.:
Direct labor $85,000 Administrative expenses $59,000
Selling expenses 34,000 Work in. process:
Sales 300,000 Jan. 1 29,000
Finished goods Dec. 31 21,000
Jan. 1 115,000 Direct material purchases 88,000
Dec. 31 131,000 Depreciation: factory 18,000
Raw (direct) materials on hand Indirect materials used 10,000
Jan. 1 31,000 Indirect labor 24,000
Dec. 31 40,000 Factory taxes 8,000
Factory utilities 11,000
Prepare the following:
a. A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.
b. An income statement for the year ended December 31.
5. Manufacturing statements and cost behavior
Tampa Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $36 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.
Per Unit Variable Cost Fixed Cost
Direct materials $4.50 $
Direct labor 6.5
Factory overhead 9 50,000
Selling 70,000
Administrative 135,000
Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 17,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Tampa carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.
Instructions:
a. Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.
b. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
c. On the basis of the information presented:
1. Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
2. What is the likely effect on the $4.50 unit cost of direct materials if next year’s production increases? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Analysis of stockholders’ equity
Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X6. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 20X6 and 20X5 follow:
20X6 20X5
Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10% $580,000 $500,000
Common stock, $10 par value 2,350,000 1,750,000
Paid-in capital in excess of par value
Preferred 24,000
Common 4,620,000 3,600,000
Retained earnings 8,470,000 6,920,000
Total stockholders’ equity $16,044,000 $12,770,000
a. Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X6.
b. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X6.
c. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 20X6?
d. Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X6? By what amount?
2. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization
Southlake Corporation issued $900,000 of 8% bonds on March 1, 20X1. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow.
Case A The bonds are issued at 100.
Case B The bonds are issued at 96.
Case C The bonds are issued at 105.
Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization.
Instructions:
Complete the following table:
Case A Case B Case C
a. Cash inflow on the issuance date _______ _______ _______
b. Total cash outflow through maturity _______ _______ _______
c. Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue _______ _______ _______
d. Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
e. Amortization for the year ended December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
f. Unamortized premium as of December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
g. Unamortized discount as of December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
h. Bond carrying value as of December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
3. Definitions of manufacturing concepts
Interstate Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:
Materials and supplies used
Brass $75,000
Repair parts 16,000
Machine lubricants 9,000
Wages and salaries Machine operators 128,000
Production supervisors 64,000
Maintenance personnel 41,000
Other factory overhead Variable 35,000
Fixed 46,000
Sales commissions 20,000
Compute:
a. Total direct materials consumed
b. Total direct labor
c. Total prime cost
d. Total conversion cost
4. Schedule of cost of goods manufactured, income statement
The following information was taken from the ledger of Jefferson Industries, Inc.:
Direct labor $85,000 Administrative expenses $59,000
Selling expenses 34,000 Work in. process:
Sales 300,000 Jan. 1 29,000
Finished goods Dec. 31 21,000
Jan. 1 115,000 Direct material purchases 88,000
Dec. 31 131,000 Depreciation: factory 18,000
Raw (direct) materials on hand Indirect materials used 10,000
Jan. 1 31,000 Indirect labor 24,000
Dec. 31 40,000 Factory taxes 8,000
Factory utilities 11,000
Prepare the following:
a. A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.
b. An income statement for the year ended December 31.
5. Manufacturing statements and cost behavior
Tampa Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $36 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.
Per Unit Variable Cost Fixed Cost
Direct materials $4.50 $
Direct labor 6.5
Factory overhead 9 50,000
Selling 70,000
Administrative 135,000
Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 17,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Tampa carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.
Instructions:
a. Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.
b. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
c. On the basis of the information presented:
1. Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
2. What is the likely effect on the $4.50 unit cost of direct materials if next year’s production increases? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
QUESTIONS :
Chapter 6 Exercise 2
2. Schedule of cash collections
Sugarland Company sells a single product and anticipates opening a new facility in Charlotte on May 1 of the current year. Expected sales during the first three months of activity are: May, $60,000; June, $80,000; and July, $85,000. Thirty percent of all sales are for cash; the remaining 70% are on account. Credit sales have the following collection pattern:
Collected in the month of sale 60%
Collected in the month following sale 35
Uncollectible 5
- Prepare a schedule of cash collections for May through July.
- Compute the expected balance in Accounts Receivable as of July 31.
Chapter 6 Exercise 4
4. Production and cash-outlay computations
RPR, Inc., anticipates that 120,000 units of product K will be sold during May. Each unit of product K requires four units of raw material A. Actual inventories as of May 1 and budgeted inventories as of May 31 follow.
|
|
1-May
|
31-May
|
|
Product K (Units)
|
55,000
|
60,000
|
|
Rate Materials A (Units)
|
40,000
|
37,000
|
Each unit of raw material A costs $8; RPR pays for all purchases in the month of acquisition. Invoices that account for 80% of the cost of materials acquired will be paid within 10 days of receipt, entitling the company to a 2% cash discount.
- Determine the number of units of product K to be manufactured in May.
- Compute the May cash outlay for purchases of raw material A.
Chapter 6 Exercise 5
5. Abbreviated cash budget; financing emphasis
An abbreviated cash budget for Big Chuck Enterprises follows.
|
|
July
|
August
|
September
|
|
Beginning cash balance
|
$10,000
|
$
|
$
|
|
Add: Cash receipts
|
50,000
|
63,000
|
71,000
|
|
Deduct: Cash payments
|
-64,000
|
-58,000
|
-64,000
|
|
Cash excess (deficiency) before financing
|
($4,000)
|
$
|
$
|
|
Financing
|
|
|
|
|
Borrowing to maintain minimum balance
|
|
|
|
|
Principal repayment
|
|
|
|
|
Interest payment
|
|
|
|
|
Ending cash balance
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
Big Chuck wishes to maintain a $10,000 minimum cash balance at all times. Additional financing is available (and retired) in $1,000 multiples at a 12% interest rate. Assume that borrowings take place at the beginning of the month; retirements, in contrast, occur at the end of the month. Interest is paid at the time of repaying principal and computed on the portion of principal repaid.
- Find the unknowns in Big Chuck’s abbreviated cash budget.
- Determine the outstanding loan balance as of September 30, after any repayments have been made.
Chapter 6 Problem 3
3. Comprehensive budgeting
The balance sheet of Watson Company as of December 31, 20X1, follows.
|
WATSON COMPANY
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
December 31, 12X1
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$4,595
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
10,000
|
|
Finished goods (575 units x $7.00)
|
|
4,025
|
|
Direct materials (2,760 units x $0.50)
|
|
1,380
|
|
Plant & equipment
|
$50,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
10,000
|
40,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$60,000
|
|
Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable to suppliers
|
|
$14,000
|
|
Common stock
|
$25,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
21,000
|
46,000
|
|
Total liabilities &. stockholders’ equity
|
|
$60,000
|
The following information has been extracted from the firm’s accounting records:
- All sales are made on account at $20 per unit. Sixty percent of the sales are collected in the month of sale; the remaining 40% are collected in the following month. Forecasted sales for the first five months of 20X2 are: January, 1,500 units,- February, 1,600 units; March, 1,800 units; April, 2,000 units; May, 2,100 units.
- Management wants to maintain the finished goods inventory at 30% of the following month’s sales.
- Watson uses four units of direct material in each finished unit. The direct material price has been stable and is expected to remain so over the next six months. Management wants to maintain the ending direct materials inventory at 60% of the following month’s production needs.
- Seventy percent of all purchases are paid in the month of purchase; the remaining 30% are paid in the subsequent month.
- Watson’s product requires 30 minutes of direct labor time. Each hour of direct labor costs $7.
Instructions:
- Rounding computations to the nearest dollar, prepare the following for January through March:
1) Sales budget
2) Schedule of cash collections
3) Production budget
4) Direct material purchases budget
5) Schedule of cash disbursements for material purchases
6) Direct labor budget
- Determine the balances in the following accounts as of March 31:
1) Accounts Receivable
2) Direct Materials
3) Accounts Payable
Chapter 7 Exercise 3
3. Variances for direct materials and direct labor
Banner Company manufactures flags of various countries. Each flag has a standard of eight square feet of fabric and three hours of direct labor time. Information about recent production activity follows.
Actual cost of fabric: $4.50 per square foot
Fabric consumed: 32,080 square feet
Standard price per square foot of fabric: $4.25
Standard direct labor rate: $10.00 per hour
Actual direct labor rate: $10.20 per hour
Actual labor hours worked: 11,940
Actual production completed: 4,000 flags
- Compute the materials price variance and the materials quantity variance.
- Compute the labor rate variance and the labor efficiency variance.
Chapter 7 Exercise 5
5. Overhead variances
Nova Manufacturing applies factory overhead to products on the basis of direct labor hours. At the beginning of the current year, the company’s accountant made the following estimates for the forthcoming period:
- Estimated variable overhead: $500,000
- Estimated fixed overhead: $400,000
- Estimated direct labor hours: 40,000
It is now 12 months later. Actual total overhead incurred in the manufacture of 7,900 units amounted to $895,100. Actual labor hours totaled 39,800. Assuming a direct labor standard of five hours per finished unit, calculate the following:
- Variable overhead efficiency variance
- Fixed overhead volume variance
- Overhead spending variance
Chapter 7 Problem 1
1. P26-A1 Basic flexible budgeting (L.O. 2)
Centron, Inc., has the following budgeted production costs:
|
Direct materials
|
$0.40 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.80 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
2.20 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
|
Supervision
|
$24,000
|
|
Maintenance
|
18,000
|
|
Other
|
12,000
|
The company normally manufactures between 20,000 and 25,000 units each quarter. Should output exceed 25,000 units, maintenance and other fixed costs are expected to increase by $6,000 and $4,500, respectively.
During the recent quarter ended March 31, Centron produced 25,500 units and incurred the following costs:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
$10,710
|
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
47,175
|
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
51,940
|
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
|
|
|
|
Supervision
|
|
24,500
|
|
|
Maintenance
|
|
23,700
|
|
|
Other
|
|
16,800
|
|
|
Total production costs
|
|
$174,825
|
|
Instructions:
- Prepare a flexible budget for 20,000, 22,500, and 25,000 units of activity.
- Was Centron’s experience in the quarter cited better or worse than anticipated? Prepare an appropriate performance report and explain your answer.
- Explain the benefit of using flexible budgets (as opposed to static budgets) in the measurement of performance.
Chapter 7 Problem 5
5. P26-B3 Straightforward variance analysis (L.O. 5)
Arrow Enterprises uses a standard costing system. The standard cost sheet for product no. 549 follows.
|
Direct materials: 4 units @ $6.50
|
|
$26.00
|
|
Direct labor: 8 hours @ $8.50
|
|
68
|
|
Variable factory overhead: 8 hours
|
@ $7.00
|
56
|
|
Fixed factory overhead: 8 hours
|
@ 2.5
|
20
|
|
Total standard cost per unit
|
|
$170.00
|
The following information pertains to activity for December:
- Direct materials acquired during the month amounted to 26,350 units at $6.40 per unit. All materials were consumed in operations.
- Arrow incurred an average wage rate of $8.75 for 51,400 hours of activity.
- Total overhead incurred amounted to $508,400. Budgeted fixed overhead totals $1.8 million and is spread evenly throughout the year.
- Actual production amounted to 6,500 completed units.
Instructions:
- Compute Arrow’s direct material variances.
- Compute Arrow’s direct labor variances.
- Compute Arrow’s variances for factory overhead.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
The marketing department of Graber Corporation has submitted the following sales forecast for the upcoming fiscal year.
|
|
1st Quarter |
2nd Quarter |
3rd Quarter |
4th Quarter |
| Budgeted unit sales |
15,000 |
14,000 |
13,000 |
14,000 |
|
|
The selling price of the company s product is $24.00 per unit. Management expects to collect 75% of sales in the quarter in which the sales are made, 20% in the following quarter, and 5% of sales are expected to be uncollectible. The beginning balance of accounts receivable, all of which is expected to be collected in the first quarter, is $66,000.
|
|
The company expects to start the first quarter with 2,250 units in finished goods inventory. Management desires an ending finished goods inventory in each quarter equal to 15% of the next quarter s budgeted sales. The desired ending finished goods inventory for the fourth quarter is 2,450 units.
|
| 1a. |
Compute the company s total sales.
|
| 1b. |
Complete the schedule of expected cash collections. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required.)
|
| 2. |
Prepare the company s production budget for the upcoming fiscal year. (Input all amounts as positive values. Do not round intermediate calculations.)
|
|
The production department of Priston Company has submitted the following forecast of units to be produced by quarter for the upcoming fiscal year.
|
|
1st Quarter |
2nd Quarter |
3rd Quarter |
4th Quarter |
| Units to be produced |
7,000 |
8,000 |
9,000 |
6,000 |
|
|
In addition, the beginning raw materials inventory for the 1st Quarter is budgeted to be 5,250 pounds and the beginning accounts payable for the 1st Quarter is budgeted to be $13,300.
|
|
Each unit requires three pounds of raw material that costs $2.00 per pound. Management desires to end each quarter with a raw materials inventory equal to 25% of the following quarter s production needs. The desired ending inventory for the 4th Quarter is 4,500 pounds. Management plans to pay for 70% of raw material purchases in the quarter acquired and 30% in the following quarter. Each unit requires 0.5 direct labor-hours and direct labor-hour workers are paid $14 per hour.
|
| Required: |
| 1a. |
Prepare the company s direct materials budget for the upcoming fiscal year. (Input all amounts as positive values. Do not round intermediate calculations.)
|
| 1b. |
Prepare a schedule of expected cash disbursements for purchases of materials for the upcoming fiscal year.(Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Do not round intermediate calculations.)
|
| 2. |
Complete the company’s direct labor budget for the upcoming fiscal year, assuming that the direct labor workforce is adjusted each quarter to match the number of hours required to produce the forecasted number of units produced.
|
|
The Production Department of Harveton Corporation has submitted the following forecast of units to be produced by quarter for the upcoming fiscal year.
|
|
1st Quarter |
2nd Quarter |
3rd Quarter |
4th Quarter |
| Units to be produced |
9,000 |
8,000 |
7,000 |
8,000 |
|
| Each unit requires 1.00 direct labor-hours and direct labor-hour workers are paid $12.00 per hour. |
|
In addition, the variable manufacturing overhead rate is $1.50 per direct labor-hour. The fixed manufacturing overhead is $82,000 per quarter. The only noncash element of manufacturing overhead is depreciation, which is $34,000 per quarter.
|
| Required: |
| 1. |
Prepare the company s direct labor budget for the upcoming fiscal year, assuming that the direct labor workforce is adjusted each quarter to match the number of hours required to produce the forecasted number of units produced.
|
2.Prepare the company s manufacturing overhead budget. (Input all amounts as positive values.)
|
Colerain Corporation is a merchandising company that is preparing a profit plan for the third quarter of the calendar year. The company s balance sheet as of June 30 is shown below:
|
Colerain Corporation Balance Sheet June 30 |
| Assets |
| Cash |
$ |
93,000 |
| Accounts receivable |
|
152,000 |
| Inventory |
|
45,000 |
| Plant and equipment, net of depreciation |
|
330,000 |
|
|
|
| Total assets |
$ |
620,000 |
|
|
|
| Liabilities and Stockholders Equity |
|
|
| Accounts payable |
$ |
68,100 |
| Common stock |
|
430,000 |
| Retained earnings |
|
121,900 |
|
|
|
| Total liabilities and stockholders equity |
$ |
620,000 |
|
|
|
|
| Colerain s managers have made the following additional assumptions and estimates: |
| 1. |
Estimated sales for July, August, September, and October will be $250,000, $270,000, $260,000, and $280,000, respectively.
|
| 2. |
All sales are on credit and all credit sales are collected. Each month s credit sales are collected 30% in the month of sale and 70% in the month following the sale. All of the accounts receivable at June 30 will be collected in July.
|
| 3. |
Each month s ending inventory must equal 30% of the cost of next month s sales. The cost of goods sold is 60% of sales. The company pays for 50% of its merchandise purchases in the month of the purchase and the remaining 50% in the month following the purchase. All of the accounts payable at June 30 will be paid in July.
|
| 4. |
Monthly selling and administrative expenses are always $85,000. Each month $6,000 of this total amount is depreciation expense and the remaining $79,000 relates to expenses that are paid in the month they are incurred.
|
| 5. |
The company does not plan to borrow money or pay or declare dividends during the quarter ended September 30. The company does not plan to issue any common stock or repurchase its own stock during the quarter ended September 30.
|
| 1. |
Prepare a schedule of expected cash collections for July, August, and September. Also compute total cash collections for the quarter ended September 30th. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required.)
|
| 2a. |
Prepare a merchandise purchases budget for July, August, and September. Also compute total merchandise purchases for the quarter ended September 30th. (Input all amounts as positive values. Do not round intermediate calculations.)
|
| Merchandise Purchases Budget |
|
| 2b. |
Prepare a schedule of expected cash disbursements for merchandise purchases for July, August, and September. Also compute total cash disbursements for merchandise purchases for the quarter ended September 30th. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required.)
|
| Schedule of Expected Cash Disbursements Merchandise Purchases |
|
| 3. |
Prepare an income statement for the quarter ended September 30th. (Input all amounts as positive values except losses which should be indicated by a minus sign. Do not round intermediate calculations. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required.)
|
| 4. |
Prepare a balance sheet as of September 30th. (Be sure to list the assets and liabilities in order of their liquidity. Do not round intermediate calculations.)
|
|
Nordic Company, a merchandising company, prepares its master budget on a quarterly basis. The following data have been assembled to assist in preparation of the master budget for the second quarter.
|
| a. |
As of March 31 (the end of the prior quarter), the company s balance sheet showed the following account balances:
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Cash |
$ |
10,000 |
|
|
| Accounts receivable |
|
40,000 |
|
|
| Inventory |
|
12,600 |
|
|
| Buildings and equipment (net) |
|
210,000 |
|
|
| Accounts payable |
|
|
$ |
16,800 |
| Capital stock |
|
|
|
150,000 |
| Retained earnings |
|
|
|
105,800 |
|
|
|
|
$ |
272,600 |
$ |
272,600 |
|
|
|
|
| b. |
Actual sales for March and budgeted sales for April July are as follows: |
|
|
| March (actual) |
$50,000 |
| April |
$70,000 |
| May |
$80,000 |
| June |
$85,000 |
| July |
$40,000 |
|
| c. |
Sales are 20% for cash and 80% on credit. All payments on credit sales are collected in the month following the sale. The accounts receivable at March 31 are a result of March credit sales.
|
| d. |
The company s gross margin percentage is 40% of sales. (In other words, cost of goods sold is 60% of sales.) |
| e. |
Monthly selling and administrative expenses are budgeted as follows: salaries and wages, $6,500 per month; shipping, 6% of sales; advertising, $5,000 per month; other expenses, 4% of sales. Depreciation, including depreciation on new assets acquired during the quarter, will be $3,000 for the quarter.
|
| f. |
Each month s ending inventory should equal 30% of the following month s cost of goods sold. |
| g. |
Half of a month s inventory purchases are paid for in the month of purchase and half in the following month.
|
| h. |
Equipment purchases during the quarter will be as follows: April, $9,500; and May, $6,000.
|
| i. |
Dividends totaling $3,500 will be declared and paid in June. |
| j. |
Management wants to maintain a minimum cash balance of $8,000. The company has an agreement with a local bank that allows the company to borrow in increments of $1,000 at the beginning of each month, up to a total loan balance of $20,000. The interest rate on these loans is 1% per month, and for simplicity, we will assume that interest is not compounded. The company would, as far as it is able, repay the loan plus accumulated interest at the end of the quarter.
|
| Required: |
| Using the data above, complete the following statements and schedules for the second quarter: |
| 1. |
Schedule of expected cash collections: |
| 2a. |
Merchandise purchases budget. (Input all amounts as positive values.)
|
| 2b. |
Schedule of expected cash disbursements for merchandise purchases: (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required.)
|
| 3.
|
Schedule of expected cash disbursements for selling and administrative expenses:
|
| 4. |
Cash budget. (Input all amounts as positive values except cash deficiency, repayments and interest which should be indicated by a minus sign. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Total Financing should be indicated with a minus sign when the company is repaying amounts that were previously borrowed.)
|
| 5. |
Prepare an absorption costing income statement for the quarter ending June 30. (Input all amounts as positive values.)
|
| 6. |
Prepare a balance sheet as of June 30. (Be sure to list the assets and liabilities in order of their liquidity.)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Gator Divers is a company that provides diving services such as underwater ship repairs to clients in the Tampa Bay area. The company s planning budget for March appears below:
|
Gator Divers Planning Budget For the Month Ended March 31 |
| Budgeted diving-hours (q) |
|
250 |
| Revenue ($440q) |
$ |
110,000 |
|
|
|
| Expenses: |
|
|
| Wages and salaries ($11,000 + $120q) |
|
41,000 |
| Supplies ($3q) |
|
750 |
| Equipment rental ($2,000 + $22q) |
|
7,500 |
| Insurance ($4,000) |
|
4,000 |
| Miscellaneous ($520 + $1.48q) |
|
890 |
|
|
|
| Total expense |
|
54,140 |
|
|
|
| Net operating income |
$ |
55,860 |
|
|
|
|
| Required: |
|
During March, the company s activity was actually 240 diving-hours. Prepare a flexible budget for that level of activity. (Input all amounts as positive values. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount.)
|
Harmon Household Products, Inc., manufactures a number of consumer items for general household use. One of these products, a chopping board, requires an expensive hardwood. During a recent month, the company manufactured 3,800 chopping boards using 2,318 board feet of hardwood. The hardwood cost the company $17,617.
|
|
The company s standards for one chopping board are 0.55 board feet of hardwood, at a cost of $8.00 per board foot.
|
| Required: |
| 1a. |
According to the standards, what cost for wood should have been incurred to make 3,800 chopping blocks?
|
| 1b. |
How much greater or less is this than the cost that was incurred? (Input the amount as a positive value. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance)
|
|
Break down the difference computed in (1) above into a materials quantity variance and a materials price variance.(Input all amounts as positive values. Do not round intermediate calculations. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance)
|
|
AirMeals, Inc., prepares in-flight meals for a number of major airlines. One of the company s products is stuffed cannelloni with roasted pepper sauce, fresh baby corn, and spring salad. During the most recent week, the company prepared 13,000 of these meals using 2,820 direct labor-hours. The company paid these direct labor workers a total of $28,059 for this work, or $9.95 per hour.
|
|
According to the standard cost card for this meal, it should require 0.22 direct labor-hours at a cost of $9.70 per hour.
|
| Required: |
| 1a. |
According to the standards, what direct labor cost should have been incurred to prepare 13,000 meals?
|
| 1b. |
How much does this differ from the actual direct labor cost (Input the amount as a positive value. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance.). Round your answer to the nearest whole number.)
|
|
| 2. |
Break down the difference computed in (1) above into a labor efficiency variance and a labor rate variance. (Input all amounts as positive values. Do not round intermediate calculations. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance.)
|
|
Order Up, Inc., provides order fulfillment services for dot.com merchants. The company maintains warehouses that stock items carried by its dot.com clients. When a client receives an order from a customer, the order is forwarded to Order Up, which pulls the item from storage, packs it, and ships it to the customer. The company uses a predetermined variable overhead rate based on direct labor-hours.
|
|
In the most recent month, 170,000 items were shipped to customers using 6,700 direct labor-hours. The company incurred a total of $17,085 in variable overhead costs.
|
|
According to the company s standards, 0.04 direct labor-hours are required to fulfill an order for one item and the variable overhead rate is $2.60 per direct labor-hour.
|
| Required: |
| 1a. |
According to the standards, what variable overhead cost should have been incurred to fill the orders for the 170,000 items?
|
| Total standard variable overhead cost |
$ |
| 1b. |
How much does this differ from the actual variable overhead cost (Indicate the effect of variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input the amount as a positive value. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required.)
|
| Variable overhead variance |
$ |
(Click to select)NoneFU |
| 2. |
Break down the difference computed in (1) above into a variable overhead efficiency variance and a variable overhead rate variance. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required.)
|
|
|
|
| Variable overhead efficiency variance |
$ |
(Click to select)NoneFU |
| Variable overhead rate variance |
$ |
(Click to select)UFNone |
|
Portland Company’s Ironton Plant produces precast ingots for industrial use. Carlos Santiago, who was recently appointed general manager of the Ironton Plant, has just been handed the plant s contribution format income statement for October. The statement is shown below:
|
|
Budgeted |
Actual |
| Sales (7,000 ingots) |
$ |
265,000 |
$ |
265,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
| Variable expenses: |
|
|
|
|
| Variable cost of goods sold* |
|
79,240 |
|
97,525 |
| Variable selling expenses |
|
19,000 |
|
19,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
| Total variable expenses |
|
98,240 |
|
116,525 |
|
|
|
|
|
| Contribution margin |
|
166,760 |
|
148,475 |
|
|
|
|
|
| Fixed expenses: |
|
|
|
|
| Manufacturing overhead |
|
67,000 |
|
67,000 |
| Selling and administrative |
|
85,000 |
|
85,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
| Total fixed expenses |
|
152,000 |
|
152,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
| Net operating income (loss) |
$ |
14,760 |
$ |
(3,525) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| *Contains direct materials, direct labor, and variable manufacturing overhead. |
|
Mr. Santiago was shocked to see the loss for the month, particularly because sales were exactly as budgeted. He stated, “I sure hope the plant has a standard cost system in operation. If it doesn’t, I won’t have the slightest idea of where to start looking for the problem.”
|
|
The plant does use a standard cost system, with the following standard variable cost per ingot:
|
|
Standard Quantity or Hours |
Standard Price or Rate |
Standard Cost |
| Direct materials |
3.5 pounds |
$ |
2.10 per pound |
$ |
7.35 |
| Direct labor |
0.4 hours |
$ |
7.60 per hour |
|
3.04 |
| Variable manufacturing overhead |
0.3 hours* |
$ |
3.10 per hour |
|
0.93 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Total standard variable cost |
|
|
|
$ |
11.32 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| During October the plant produced 7,000 ingots and incurred the following costs: |
| a. |
Purchased 29,500 pounds of materials at a cost of $2.55 per pound. There were no raw materials in inventory at the beginning of the month.
|
| b. |
Used 24,300 pounds of materials in production. (Finished goods and work in process inventories are insignificant and can be ignored.)
|
| c. |
Worked 3,400 direct labor-hours at a cost of $7.30 per hour. |
| d. |
Incurred total variable manufacturing overhead cost of $8,400 for the month. A total of 2,400 machine-hours was recorded.
|
| It is the company s policy to close all variances to cost of goods sold on a monthly basis. |
| 1. |
Compute the following variances for October: |
| a. |
Direct materials price and quantity variances. (Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance.)
|
|
|
|
| Materials price variance |
$ |
(Click to select)UFNone |
| Materials quantity variance |
$ |
(Click to select)NoneFU |
|
| b. |
Direct labor rate and efficiency variances. (Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance.)
|
|
|
|
| Labor rate variance |
$ |
(Click to select)NoneFU |
| Labor efficiency variance |
$ |
(Click to select)NoneFU |
|
| c. |
Variable overhead rate and efficiency variances. (Input all amounts as positive values. Do not round your intermediate calculations. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance.)
|
|
|
|
| Variable overhead rate variance |
$ |
(Click to select)FUNone |
| Variable overhead efficiency variance |
$ |
(Click to select)FNoneU |
|
| 2a. |
Summarize the variances that you computed in (1) above by showing the net overall favorable or unfavorable variance for October. (Input the amount as a positive value. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance.)
|
| Net variance |
$ |
(Click to select)UFNone |
| 3. |
Pick out the two most significant variances that you computed in (1) above. (You may select more than one answer. Single click the box with the question mark to produce a check mark for a correct answer and double click the box with the question mark to empty the box for a wrong answer.)
|
|
|
|
|
Materials price variance |
|
Labor efficiency variance |
|
Variable overhead efficiency variance |
|
Labor rate variance |
|
Variable overhead rate variance |
|
Materials quantity variance |
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Classify the following items as (a) an addition to the bank balance, (b) a subtraction from the bank balance, (c) an addition to the book balance, or (d) a subtraction from the book balance:
_____ $20 in service charges
_____ A $300 check deposited that was returned NSF
_____ An outstanding check that you wrote for $2,000
_____ A deposit in transit of $5,500
_____ Bank Error: the bank credited your account for a deposit made by another customer
2. During 2011, Jimmy Enterprises completed the following transactions:
a. Sales revenue on account, $550,000.
b. Collections on account, $325,000
c. Write-offs of uncollectible, $13,000
d. Uncollectible account expense, 5% of sales revenue
Required:
1. Prepare the journal entries for the above transactions.
2. Suppose Robotics, Inc. s inventory records for a particular item indicated the following transactions in September:
September 1 Beginning Inventory 6 units @ $29
September 10 Purchase 19 units @ $32
September 22 Purchase 12 units @ $30
September 27 Purchase 4 units @ $31
Required: The company sold 22 units on September 30. Compute the ending inventory and cost of goods sold using each of the following methods:
1. LIFO
2. FIFO
3. Average Cost
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EXERCISE 7-1
Hutton Company uses a sales journal, a purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash disbursement journal, and a general journal. The following transactions occur in the month of March:
Mar. 2 Sold merchandise costing $300 to B. Fager for $450 cash, invoice no. 5703.
5 Purchased $2,300 of merchandise on credit from Marsh Corp.
7 Sold merchandise costing $800 to J. Dryer for $1,150, terms 2_10, n_30, invoice no. 5704.
8 Borrowed $8,000 cash by signing a note payable to the bank.
12 Sold merchandise costing $200 to R. Land for $320, terms n_30, invoice no. 5705.
16 Received $1,127 cash from J. Dryer to pay for the purchase of March 7.
19 Sold used store equipment for $900 cash to Malone, Inc.
25 Sold merchandise costing $350 to T. Burton for $550, terms n_30, invoice no. 5706.
Prepare headings for a sales journal like the one in Exhibit 7.5. Journalize the March transactions that
should be recorded in this sales journal.
EXERCISE 7-4
Moeder Co. uses a sales journal, a purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash disbursements journal, and a general journal. The following transactions occur in the month of November.
Nov. 3 Purchased $3,100 of merchandise on credit from Hargrave Co., terms n_20.
7 Sold merchandise costing $840 on credit to J. York for $900, subject to a $18 sales discount
if paid by the end of the month.
9 Borrowed $2,750 cash by signing a note payable to the bank.
13 J. Emling, the owner, contributed $4,000 cash to the company.
18 Sold merchandise costing $130 to B. Box for $230 cash.
22 Paid Hargrave Co. $3,100 cash for the merchandise purchased on November 3.
27 Received $882 cash from J. York in payment of the November 7 purchase.
30 Paid salaries of $1,600 in cash.
Prepare headings for a cash receipts journal like the one in Exhibit 7.7. Journalize the November
transactions that should be recorded in the cash receipts journal.
EXERCISE 7-7
Redmon Company uses a sales journal, a purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash disbursements
journal, and a general journal. The following transactions occur in the month of June.
June 1 Purchased $8,100 of merchandise on credit from Vick, Inc., terms n_30.
8 Sold merchandise costing $900 on credit to R. Panke for $1,500 subject to a $30 sales discount
if paid by the end of the month.
14 Purchased $240 of store supplies from Poe Company on credit, terms n_30.
17 Purchased $260 of office supplies on credit from Rehmer Company, terms n_30.
24 Sold merchandise costing $400 to L. Barnett for $630 cash.
28 Purchased store supplies from Piburn s for $90 cash.
29 Paid Vick, Inc., $8,100 cash for the merchandise purchased on June 1.
Prepare headings for a purchases journal like the one in Exhibit 7.9. Journalize the June transactions
that should be recorded in the purchases journal.
EXERCISE 7-10
Politte Supply uses a sales journal, a purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash disbursements
journal, and a general journal. The following transactions occur in the month of April.
Apr. 3 Purchased merchandise for $2,750 on credit from Scott, Inc., terms 2_10, n_30.
9 Issued check no. 210 to Kidman Corp. to buy store supplies for $450.
12 Sold merchandise costing $400 on credit to C. Myers for $670, terms n_30.
17 Issued check no. 211 for $1,500 to pay off a note payable to City Bank.
20 Purchased merchandise for $3,500 on credit from LeBron, terms 2_10, n_30.
29 Issued check no. 212 to LeBron to pay the amount due for the purchase of April 20, less
the discount.
30 Paid salary of $1,700 to B. Decker by issuing check no. 213.
31 Issued check no. 214 to Scott, Inc., to pay the amount due for the purchase of April 3.
Prepare headings for a cash disbursements journal like the one in Exhibit 7.11. Journalize the April transactions that should be recorded in the cash disbursements journal.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Given Data P08-4A:
CLARK COMPANY Cash balance $26,193 Bank statement balance 28,020 Outstanding checks: No. 3031 1,380 No. 3040 (returned with July statement) 552 No. 3065 336 No. 3069 2,148 Check No. 3056 (rent pmt.): Amount entered in books 1,230 Actual amount 1,250 Clark note collection: Total collected by bank 9,000 Collection fee charged 45 Jim Shaw check: Amount of NSF check 795 NSF charge by bank 10 Bank service charge 15 Deposit not yet credited by bank 10,152
Additional information for analysis:
(a) Unadjusted cash account balance $26,193 Reported unadjusted cash account balance 26,139
(b) Note collection is added to bank statement cash balance on reconciliation ($9,000 less $45 collection fee)
Check figures:
(1) Reconciled balance $34,308
(2) Credit Note Receivable 9,000
1. Prepare Bank reconciliation
2. For each of the following errors, explain the effect on (i) the adjusted bank statement cash balance and (ii) the adjusted cash account book balance.
a. Unadjusted cash balance of $26,193 is listed on reconciliation as $26,139.
b. Collection of $9,000 note less $45 collection fee is added to bank statement cash balance on reconciliation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
2 of 35
Contribution margin per unit is best described by which of the following?
|
|
Sales price per unit minus fixed cost per unit
|
|
|
Sales price per unit minus variable cost unit
|
|
|
Sales price per unit minus fixed and variable costs per unit
|
|
|
Units sold time contribution margin ratio
|
Question
7 of 35
Blue Technologies manufactures and sells DVD players. Great Products Company has offered Blue Technologies $22 per DVD player for 10,000 DVD players. Blue Technologies’ normal selling price is $30 per DVD player. The total manufacturing cost per DVD player is $12 and consists of variable costs of $14 per DVD player and fixed overhead costs of $4 per DVD player. (NOTE: Assume excess capacity and no effect on regular sales.)
How much are the expected increase (decrease) in revenues and expenses from the special sales order?
|
|
Expected increase in revenues $220,000; expected increase in expenses $140,000
|
|
|
Expected increase in revenues $220,000; expected increase in expenses $40,000
|
|
|
Expected increase in revenues $300,000; expected increase in expenses $140,000
|
|
|
Expected increase in revenues $220,000; expected increase in expenses $120,000
|
Question
12 of 35
Which of the following budgets projects cash inflows and outflows and the budgeted balance sheet?
|
|
Purchases budget
|
|
|
Capital expenditures budget
|
|
|
Financial budget
|
|
|
Cash budget
|
Question
13 of 35
Romona Company expects its November sales to be 20% higher than its October sales of $165,000. All sales are on credit and are collected as follows: 35% in the month of the sale and 60% in the following month. Purchases were $110,000 in October and are expected to be $140,000 in November. Purchases are paid 40% in the month of purchase and 60% in the following month. The cash balance on November 1 is $13,500. The cash balance on November 30 will be
|
|
$46,300.
|
|
|
$59,800.
|
|
|
$2,050.
|
|
|
$32,800.
|
Question
14 of 35
June sales were $5,000 while projected sales for July and August were $6,500 and $7,000, respectively. Sales are 35% cash and 65% credit. All credit sales are collected in the month following the sale. What are the expected collections for July?
|
|
$7,975
|
|
|
$5,525
|
|
|
$6,825
|
|
|
$5,975
|
Question
16 of 35
Honda’s East Liberty Auto Plant which builds Honda cars is most likely treated asa(n)
|
|
cost center.
|
|
|
investment center.
|
|
|
profit center.
|
|
|
revenue center.
|
Question
17 of 35
A product line at PepsiCo (such as the Pepsi Max product line) is most likely treated asa(n)
|
|
cost center.
|
|
|
profit center.
|
|
|
investment center.
|
|
|
revenue center.
|
Question
18 of 35
The CEO of Banana Republic, a division of The Gap, Inc., would be in charge ofa(n)
|
|
cost center.
|
|
|
investment center.
|
|
|
profit center.
|
|
|
revenue center.
|
Question
19 of 35
The manager of a local CVS drugstore would be in charge ofa(n)
|
|
cost center.
|
|
|
investment center.
|
|
|
revenue center.
|
|
|
profit center.
|
Question
20 of 35
The store manager for the Dick’s Sporting Goods location in Columbus, Ohio, is in charge ofa(n)
|
|
cost center.
|
|
|
investment center.
|
|
|
profit center.
|
|
|
revenue center.
|
Question
21 of 35
The manager of the accounting department at Adidas would be in charge ofa(n)
|
|
investment center.
|
|
|
cost center.
|
|
|
profit center.
|
|
|
revenue center.
|
Question
22 of 35
Sole Purpose manufactures beach shoes that use a canvas as the main raw material. Data related to the shoes for June follows:
|
Standard quantity per unit of output (yards)
|
4.5
|
|
Standard price per yard
|
$10.50
|
|
Actual materials purchased in yards
|
16,500
|
|
Actual cost of materials purchased
|
$90,450
|
|
Actual materials used in production (yards)
|
16,000
|
|
Actual outputs in units
|
3,600
|
What is the materials quantity variance for canvas for June?
|
|
$1,645 favorable
|
|
|
$2,100 favorable
|
|
|
$1,645 unfavorable
|
|
|
$2,100 unfavorable
|
Question
23 of 35
Madden Corporation manufactures t-shirts, which is its only product. The standards for t-shirts are as follows:
|
Standard direct materials cost per yard
|
$ 8
|
|
Standard direct materials quantity per t-shirt (yards)
|
1.5
|
During the month of May, the company produced 1,250 t-shirts. Related production data for the month follows:
|
Actual yards of direct material purchased
|
1,400
|
|
Actual direct materials total cost
|
$ 15,500
|
Whatis the direct materials price variance for the month?
|
|
$4,300 unfavorable
|
|
|
$4,300 favorable
|
|
|
$3,800 favorable
|
|
|
$3,800 unfavorable
|
Question
24 of 35
Michael Corporation manufactures railroad cars, which is its only product. The standards for the railroad cars are as follows:
|
Standard tons of direct material (steel) per car
|
4
|
|
Standard cost per ton of steel
|
$ 17.00
|
During the month of March, the company produced 1,650 cars. Related production data for the month follows:
|
Actual materials purchased and used (tons)
|
6,650
|
|
Actual direct materials total cost
|
$ 115,000
|
What is the direct materials quantity variance for the month?
|
|
$ 850 favorable
|
|
|
$ 850 unfavorable
|
|
|
$ 1,950 favorable
|
|
|
$ 1,950 unfavorable
|
Question
25 of 35
How is the direct labor rate variance calculated?
|
|
The difference between the standard labor rate and the actual labor rate multiplied by the actual labor hours used
|
|
|
The difference between the standard labor rate and the actual labor rate multiplied by the standard allowable hours
|
|
|
The difference between the standard labor hours and the allowable labor hours
|
|
|
The difference between the standard labor rate and the actual labor rate
|
Question
26 of 35
A favorable direct labor efficiency variance might indicate that
|
|
higher skilled workers were used that performed the task slower than expected.
|
|
|
higher skilled workers were used that performed the task faster than expected.
|
|
|
lower skilled workers were paid a higher wage than expected.
|
|
|
lower skilled workers were paid a lower wage than expected.
|
Question
27 of 35
An unfavorable direct labor rate variance indicates which of the following?
|
|
Both actual quantity and actual cost of direct labor hours exceeded standard quantity and standard cost of hours for actual output.
|
|
|
The actual quantity of direct labor hours worked exceeded the standard quantity of hours for actual output.
|
|
|
The actual direct labor cost per hour exceeded the standard direct labor cost per hour for actual quantity of direct labor hours.
|
|
|
The actual cost of direct labor per hour was less than the standard cost of direct labor per hour.
|
Question
28 of 35
A favorable direct labor efficiency variance and an unfavorable direct labor rate variance might indicate which of the following?
|
|
Unskilled workers using more actual hours than standard, paid at a higher rate per hour than the standard rate
|
|
|
Unskilled workers using less actual hours than standard, paid a lesser rate per hour than the standard rate
|
|
|
Skilled workers using less actual hours than standard, paid at a higher rate per hour than the standard rate
|
|
|
Skilled workers using more actual hours than standard, paid at a higher rate per hour than the standard rate
|
Question
32 of 35
How does depreciation affect the calculation of a project’s payback period?
|
|
Depreciation is deducted from the annual cash inflows.
|
|
|
Depreciation is added to the annual cash inflows.
|
|
|
Depreciation is only deducted if the payback period exceeds five years.
|
|
|
Depreciation does not affect the payback calculation.
|
Question
33 of 35
Gomez Corporation is considering two alternative investment proposals with the following data:
|
|
Proposal X
|
Proposal Y
|
|
Investment
|
$ 850,000
|
$ 468,000
|
|
Useful life
|
8 years
|
8 years
|
|
Estimated annual net cash inflows for eight years
|
$ 125,000
|
$ 78,000
|
|
Residual value
|
$ 40,000
|
$ –
|
|
Depreciation method
|
Straight-line
|
Straight-line
|
|
Required rate of return
|
14%
|
10%
|
What is the accounting rate of return for Proposal X?
|
|
2.88 %
|
|
|
14.71 %
|
|
|
26.62 %
|
|
|
2.79%
|
Question
34 of 35
(Use present value tables in textbook.) Vino Winery is considering the purchase of a state-of-the-art bottling machine. The new machine will cost $28,250 and will have a useful life of 10 years. The new machine will provide net cash savings of $5,000 per year. What is the internal rate of return (IRR) for the new bottling machine?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Preview |
| 1.ACC 250 Week 4 CheckPoint Bellwether Garden Supply Payroll Check Register.pdf |
| 2.ACC 250 Week 4 CheckPoint Bellwether Garden Supply Payroll Journal.pdf |
| 3.ACC 250 WEEK 4 DQ 1 and DQ 2.doc |
| 4.ACC 250 Week 5 Assignment Bellwether Garden and Supply General Ledger Trial Balance.pdf |
| 5.ACC 250 Week 5 Assignment Bellwether Garden and Supply Job Profitability Report.pdf |
| 6.ACC 250 WEEK 5 CheckPoint Chart of Accounts.doc |
| 7.ACC 250 Week 6 CheckPoint Financial Statements.pdf |
| 8.ACC 250 WEEK 6 DQ 1 and DQ 2.doc |
| 9.ACC 250 Week 7 Assignment Time and Billing.pdf |
| 10.ACC 250 WEEK 7 CheckPoint Ticket Memo.doc |
| 11.ACC 250 WEEK 8 CheckPoint Creating a New Company DAY 5.zip |
| 12.ACC 250 WEEK 8 DQ 1 and DQ 2.doc |
| 13.ACC 250 Week 9 Capstone CheckPoint Printing and Adjusting Entries.zip |
| 14.ACC 250 WEEK 9 Final Project.zip |
| 15.ACC 250 WEEK 1 Assignment Accounting Software Memo.doc |
| 16.ACC 250 WEEK 1 CheckPoint Choosing Accounting Software.doc |
| 17.ACC 250 Week 2 CheckPoint Bellwether Garden Supply Back Up and Restore Data.pdf |
| 18.ACC 250 WEEK 2 DQ 1 and DQ 2.doc |
| 19.ACC 250 Week 3 Assignment Bellwether Garden Supply Customer Ledgers.pdf |
| 20.ACC 250 Week 3 Assignment Bellwether Garden Supply Invoice Register.pdf |
| 21.ACC 250 Week 3 CheckPoint Bellwether Garden Supply Vendor Ledger Transactions.pdf |
| 22.ACC 250 Week 3 CheckPoint Bellwether Garden Supply Vendor Transactions Cash Dispursements Journal.pdf |
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 280
1. Liabilities of a company would not include
a. notes payable.
b. accounts payable.
c. wages payable.
d. cash.
2. According the matching principle, the cost of inventory becomes an expense
a. when the inventory is purchased.
b. when the inventory is paid for.
c. when the inventory is sold.
d. when the inventory is used.
3. If total liabilities decreased by $15,000 and stockholders’ equity increased by $5,000 during a period of time, then total assets must change by what amount and direction during that same period?
a. $20,000 increase
b. $10,000 decrease
c. $10,000 increase
d. $15,000 decrease
4. Notification by the bank that a deposited customer check was returned NSF requires that the company make the following adjusting entry:
a. Accounts Receivable
Cash
b. Cash
Accounts Receivable
c. Miscellaneous Expense
Accounts Receivable
d. No adjusting entry is necessary
5. Walker Clothing Store had a balance in the Accounts Receivable account of $780,000 at the beginning of the year and a balance of $820,000 at the end of the year. Net credit sales during the year amounted to $8,000,000. The average collection period of the receivables in terms of days was
a. 30 days.
b. 365 days.
c. 10 days.
d. 37 days.
6. Zendejas Company purchased a ruler for $2.00. The ruler is expected to last for ten years. Tony, the accountant, expensed the cost of the ruler in the year of the purchase. Which constraint has Tony taken into account when making his accounting decision?
a. Conservatism
b. Faithful Representation
c. Neutrality
d. Materiality
7. A debit to an asset account indicates
a. an error.
b. a credit was made to a liability account.
c. a decrease in the asset.
d. an increase in the asset.
Information below is for question # 8.
Risen Company had $250,000 of current assets and $90,000 of current liabilities before borrowing $50,000 from the bank with a 3-month note payable.
8. What effect did the borrowing transaction have on the amount of Risen Company’s working capital?
a. No effect
b. $50,000 increase
c. $90,000 increase
d. $50,000 decrease
9. The current assets of Kile Company are $150,000. The current liabilities are $120,000. The current ratio expressed as a proportion is
a. 125%.
b. 1.25 : 1
c. .80 : 1
d. $150,000 $120,000.
10 . If a corporation distributes cash to its stockholders, then
a. there has been a violation of accounting principles.
b. stockholders’ equity will increase.
c. stockholders’ equity will decrease.
d. there will be a new liability showing the stockholders’ owes money to the business.
Problem # 1:
Instructions
Prepare a correct income statement: Hint: you will need to adjust the numbers in the income statement below, with the additional data below the problem (Try some journal entries, and post them to the proper account), and then do the income statement. Your choice on whether you show the entries, although it may help, and show me how you got the numbers!
Total Points: 8
Todd Insurance Agency prepares monthly financial statements. Presented below is an income statement for the month of June that is correct on the basis of information considered.
TODD S INSURANCE AGENCY
Income Statement
For the Month Ended June 30
Revenues
Premium Commission Revenue……………………………………………. $35,000
Expenses
Salary expense……………………………………………………………………. $6,000
Advertising expense…………………………………………………………….. 800
Rent expense………………………………………………………………………. 4,200
Depreciation expense…………………………………………………………… 2,800
Total expenses…………………………………………………………………….. 13,800
Net income…………………………………………………………………………………. $21,200
Additional Data: When the income statement was prepared, the company accountant neglected to take into consideration the following information:
1. A utility bill for $2,000 was received on the last day of the month for electric and gas service for the month of June.
2. A company insurance salesman sold a life insurance policy to a client for a premium of $35,000. The agency billed the client for the policy and is entitled to a commission of 20%.
3. Supplies on hand at the beginning of the month were $3,000. The agency purchased additional supplies during the month for $3,500 in cash and $2,200 of supplies were on hand at June 30.
4. The agency purchased a new car at the beginning of the month for $19,200 cash. The car will depreciate $4,800 per year.
5. Salaries owed to employees at the end of the month total $5,300. The salaries will be paid on July 5.
Problem # 2
Instructions: Please read the information below, the instructions, and then follow the instructions. First do the entries, and make sure you adjust any accounts that are necessary. Please show all calculations that you want to, as it will help.
Total Points 4:
(a) Journalize the entries required to complete the closing of the accounts.
(b) Prepare an retained earnings statement for the year ended December 31, 2008.
All revenue and expense accounts have been closed at the end of the calendar year for the Staley Bears Company. The Income Summary account has total debits of $520,000 and total credits of $600,000. As of the same date, Retained Earnings has a balance of $115,000, and Dividends has a balance of $48,000.
Problem # 3
Instructions:
(a) Calculate the balance of Retained Earnings that would appear on a balance sheet at December 31, 2008. (For this, just do a basic retained earnings calculation, but no formal statement is required)!
(b) Prepare a classified balance sheet for Ken s Concepts at December 31, 2008 assuming the note payable is a long-term liability.
Total Points: 8
The financial statement columns of the worksheet for Ken s Concepts at December 31, 2008, are as follows:
KEN S CONCEPTS
Worksheet
For the Year Ended December 31, 2008
Income Statement Balance Sheet
Accounts Debit Credit Debit Credit
Cash 15,000
Accounts Receivable 7,000
Supplies 4,000
Prepaid Insurance 6,000
Audio Equipment 209,000
Accumulated Depreciation Audio Equipment 29,000
Accounts Payable 19,000
Note Payable 70,000
Salaries Payable 3,000
Common Stock 20,000
Retained Earnings 92,000
Dividends 14,000
Audio Revenue 123,000
Advertising Expense 21,000
Depreciation Expense 12,000
Insurance Expense 3,000
Rent Expense 17,000
Salaries Expense 42,000
Supplies Expense 6,000
Totals 101,000 123,000 255,000 233,000
Net Income 22,000 22,000
123,000 123,000 255,000 255,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exercise 15-1Financial information for Blevins Inc. is presented below.
December 31, 2009 December 31, 2008
Current assets $125,000 $100,000
Plant assets (net) 396,000 330,000
Current liabilities 91,000 70,000
Long-term liabilities 133,000 95,000
Common stock, $1 par 161,000 115,000
Retained earnings 136,000 150,000
Instructions
Prepare a schedule showing a horizontal analysis for 2009 using 2008 as the base year.
E15-2 Operating data for Gallup Corporation are presented below.
2009 2008
Sales $750,000 $600,000
Cost of goods sold 465,000 390,000
Selling expenses 120,000 72,000
Administrative expenses 60,000 54,000
Income tax expense 33,000 24,000
Net income 72,000 60,000
Instructions
Prepare a schedule showing a vertical analysis for 2009 and 2008.
E15-11 Scully Corporation s comparative balance sheets are presented below.
SCULLY CORPORATION
Balance Sheets
December 31
2008 2007
Cash $ 4,300 $ 3,700
Accounts receivable 21,200 23,400
Inventory 10,000 7,000
Land 20,000 26,000
Building 70,000 70,000
Accumulated depreciation (15,000) (10,000)
Total $110,500 $120,100
Accounts payable $ 12,370 $ 31,100
Common stock 75,000 69,000
Retained earnings 23,130 20,000
Total $110,500 $120,100
Scully s 2008 income statement included net sales of $100,000, cost of goods sold of $60,000, and net income of $15,000.
Instructions
Compute the following ratios for 2008.
(a) Current ratio.
(b) Acid-test ratio.
(c) Receivables turnover.
(d) Inventory turnover.
(e) Profit margin.
(f) Asset turnover.
(g) Return on assets.
(h) Return on common stockholders equity.
(i) Debt to total assets ratio.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 290 Whole Class Wk 1-5 All Assignments, DQs and Summaries
Week 1 Financial Statements Paper
Write a 700- to 1,050-word paper in which you do the following:
Identify the four basic financial statements.
Describe the purpose of each of the four financial statements.
Discuss how the financial statements would be useful to internal users, such as to managers and employees.
Discuss how the financial statements would be useful to external users, such as investors and creditors.
Format the paper consistent with APA guidelines.
Week 2
Resource:Chapter 1 and Chapter 2 of Financial Accounting
Complete Chapter 1: Questions # 5, 12, 14, 16 and Exercise E1-10
Chapter 2: Question: # 6
Resource:Chapter 2 and Chapter 3 of Financial Accounting
Complete Chapter 2: Exercises E2-10, E2-12, and Chapter 3: Problem 3-3A
Week 3
Resource: Ch. 4 of Financial Accounting
Complete Chapter 4: Questions # 2, 3, 4; Brief Exercises BE4-2, BE4-12, BE4-14 and BE4-15 and Exercise E4-5
Resource:Chapter 3 and Chapter 4 of Financial Accounting
Complete Chapter 3: Problem 3-5A and Chapter 4: Exercises E4-3 and E4-15.
Week 4
Resource: Ch. 5 and 6 of Financial Accounting
Complete Chapter 5: Brief Exercises BE5-1, BE5-3, BE5-4, BE5-7 and Chapter 6: Brief Exercises BE6-1, BE6-2 and BE6-3
Resource:Chapter 5 and Chapter 6 of Financial Accounting
Complete Chapter 5: Problem P5-7A and Chapter 6: Problem P6-3A
Week 5
Learning Team
Internal Control Paper/Presentation
Internal Controls Paper:
Prepare a 5-7 page paper, in which your entire team analyzes and answers the following:
a. What is the purpose of internal control?
b. Why is internal control important?
c. How can internal controls help or hinder a company s success?
For the reminder of the paper, each team memberwill discuss and provide examples from current (or prior) professional private, public, not-for-profit, government or military experience, to answer the following individually:
d. Who is (or was) responsible for establishing internal controls within the organization In your opinion, are (were) they successful in accomplishing employee adherence to the corporate controls Why or why not?
e. Identify and discuss three examples of internal controls that your organization uses (used)?
f. How does (did) your organization determine if its internal controls are (were) effective and adhered to
Properly cite all references for this paper.
Internal Controls Presentation:
The team will prepare a 15-20 minute oral presentation (accompanied by approximately 5-8 Microsoft PowerPoint slides) illustrating each member s individual portion of the paper (items d, e and f as identified above). During the presentation the team members will briefly share one or more of their own real-life examples.
Discussion Questions
What are the four basic financial statements? What is the primary purpose of each of the four basic financial statements? In your opinion, which financial statement is the most important? Explain why.
How would the financial statements be useful to managers and employees? How would the financial statements be useful to investors and creditors?
What are debits and credits? How are debits and credits used to record business transactions Why do accountants debit asset accounts to increase them but credit liability accounts to increase them? Why do accountants debit expenses to increase them but credit revenues to increase them?
What is accrual accounting? Why do generally accepted accounting principles require accrual accounting What is the difference between accrual and cash accounting? When might an accountant use cash basis accounting without violating generally accepted accounting principles?
What is the revenue recognition principle? What is the expense recognition principle? Why are they important to financial reporting?
What are adjusting entries and why are they necessary What accounts are subject to adjusting journal entries and why What are the types of adjusting entries (provide examples)?
When is the trial balance prepared What does the trial balance tell you What does the trial balance not tell you. How would you explain the purpose of the adjusted trial balance?
What are the steps in completing the accounting cycle? How do the different steps affect the financial statements? What is the effect on the financial statements of missing a step when completing the accounting cycle?
What are the four closing journal entries? Why are they necessary What are reversing entries? Why are they used? What are the pros and cons of using reversing entries? Why are reversing entries optional?
What is the main purpose of a financial statement worksheet and its benefits How has automation aided the preparation, accuracy, and use of the financial statement worksheet?
How would you calculate cost of goods sold? What items make up cost of goods sold How does beginning and ending inventory affect cost of goods sold?
What are the journal entries a merchandising organization would use to record the purchase and subsequent sale of merchandise? How would these transactions differ with a periodic versus a perpetual inventory system?
Why do generally accepted accounting principles require the use of lower of cost or market in valuing inventory What are the three different inventory cost flow assumptions commonly used in commerce today and allowed by generally accepted accounting principles? How does a company determine what cost flow assumption they should use?
What is the control environment? How does the control environment affect a company s internal controls? What are the negative and positive elements of a control environment What are two examples of strong and weak internal controls in organizations where you have worked or have first-hand knowledge?
How would you describe the key internal controls that should be in place to protect cash in a cash rich environment such as a merchandiser?
What is the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002? Why did it come about How have the new rules in the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 affected the way accounting departments and companies operate? What are some positive outcomes from these changes?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 290 Whole Class Wk 1-5 All Assignments, DQs and Summaries
Week 1 Financial Statements Paper
Write a 700- to 1,050-word paper in which you do the following:
Identify the four basic financial statements.
Describe the purpose of each of the four financial statements.
Discuss how the financial statements would be useful to internal users, such as to managers and employees.
Discuss how the financial statements would be useful to external users, such as investors and creditors.
Format the paper consistent with APA guidelines.
Week 2
Resource:Chapter 1 and Chapter 2 of Financial Accounting
Complete Chapter 1: Questions # 5, 12, 14, 16 and Exercise E1-10
Chapter 2: Question: # 6
Resource:Chapter 2 and Chapter 3 of Financial Accounting
Complete Chapter 2: Exercises E2-10, E2-12, and Chapter 3: Problem 3-3A
Week 3
Resource: Ch. 4 of Financial Accounting
Complete Chapter 4: Questions # 2, 3, 4; Brief Exercises BE4-2, BE4-12, BE4-14 and BE4-15 and Exercise E4-5
Resource:Chapter 3 and Chapter 4 of Financial Accounting
Complete Chapter 3: Problem 3-5A and Chapter 4: Exercises E4-3 and E4-15.
Week 4
Resource: Ch. 5 and 6 of Financial Accounting
Complete Chapter 5: Brief Exercises BE5-1, BE5-3, BE5-4, BE5-7 and Chapter 6: Brief Exercises BE6-1, BE6-2 and BE6-3
Resource:Chapter 5 and Chapter 6 of Financial Accounting
Complete Chapter 5: Problem P5-7A and Chapter 6: Problem P6-3A
Week 5
Learning Team
Internal Control Paper/Presentation
Internal Controls Paper:
Prepare a 5-7 page paper, in which your entire team analyzes and answers the following:
a. What is the purpose of internal control?
b. Why is internal control important?
c. How can internal controls help or hinder a company s success?
For the reminder of the paper, each team memberwill discuss and provide examples from current (or prior) professional private, public, not-for-profit, government or military experience, to answer the following individually:
d. Who is (or was) responsible for establishing internal controls within the organization? In your opinion, are (were) they successful in accomplishing employee adherence to the corporate controls? Why or why not?
e. Identify and discuss three examples of internal controls that your organization uses (used)?
f. How does (did) your organization determine if its internal controls are (were) effective and adhered to?
Properly cite all references for this paper.
Internal Controls Presentation:
The team will prepare a 15-20 minute oral presentation (accompanied by approximately 5-8 Microsoft PowerPoint slides) illustrating each member s individual portion of the paper (items d, e and f as identified above). During the presentation the team members will briefly share one or more of their own real-life examples.
Discussion Questions
What are the four basic financial statements? What is the primary purpose of each of the four basic financial statements? In your opinion, which financial statement is the most important? Explain why.
How would the financial statements be useful to managers and employees? How would the financial statements be useful to investors and creditors?
What are debits and credits? How are debits and credits used to record business transactions? Why do accountants debit asset accounts to increase them but credit liability accounts to increase them? Why do accountants debit expenses to increase them but credit revenues to increase them?
What is accrual accounting? Why do generally accepted accounting principles require accrual accounting? What is the difference between accrual and cash accounting? When might an accountant use cash basis accounting without violating generally accepted accounting principles?
What is the revenue recognition principle? What is the expense recognition principle? Why are they important to financial reporting?
What are adjusting entries and why are they necessary? What accounts are subject to adjusting journal entries and why? What are the types of adjusting entries (provide examples)?
When is the trial balance prepared? What does the trial balance tell you? What does the trial balance not tell you. How would you explain the purpose of the adjusted trial balance?
What are the steps in completing the accounting cycle? How do the different steps affect the financial statements? What is the effect on the financial statements of missing a step when completing the accounting cycle?
What are the four closing journal entries? Why are they necessary? What are reversing entries? Why are they used? What are the pros and cons of using reversing entries? Why are reversing entries optional?
What is the main purpose of a financial statement worksheet and its benefits? How has automation aided the preparation, accuracy, and use of the financial statement worksheet?
How would you calculate cost of goods sold? What items make up cost of goods sold? How does beginning and ending inventory affect cost of goods sold?
What are the journal entries a merchandising organization would use to record the purchase and subsequent sale of merchandise? How would these transactions differ with a periodic versus a perpetual inventory system?
Why do generally accepted accounting principles require the use of lower of cost or market in valuing inventory? What are the three different inventory cost flow assumptions commonly used in commerce today and allowed by generally accepted accounting principles? How does a company determine what cost flow assumption they should use?
What is the control environment? How does the control environment affect a company s internal controls? What are the negative and positive elements of a control environment? What are two examples of strong and weak internal controls in organizations where you have worked or have first-hand knowledge?
How would you describe the key internal controls that should be in place to protect cash in a cash rich environment such as a merchandiser?
What is the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002? Why did it come about? How have the new rules in the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 affected the way accounting departments and companies operate? What are some positive outcomes from these changes?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 290 FINAL EXAMS (July 2013 Update)
1) Which financial statement is used to determine cash generated from operations?
2) In terms of sequence, in what order must the four basic financial statements be prepared?
3. In classifying transactions, which of the following is true in regard to assets?
4. An increase in an expense account must be
5. ABC Corporation issues 100 shares of $1 par common stock at $5 per share, which of the following is the correct journal entry?
Cash (debit) .500
Common stock (credit) .100
Paid in capital in excess of par value (credit) ..400
6. In the first month of operations, the total of the debit entries to the cash account amounted to $1,400 and the total of the credit entries to the cash account amounted to $600. The cash account has a
7. Which ledger contains control accounts?
8. Smith is a customer of ABC Corporation. Smith typically purchases merchandise from ABC on account. Which ledger would ABC use to keep track of the details of Smith s account?
9. Under the cash basis of accounting
10. Under the accrual basis of accounting
11. The Vintage Laundry Company purchased $6,500 worth of laundry supplies on June 2 and recorded the purchase as an asset. On June 30, an inventory of the laundry supplies indicated only $2,000 on hand. The adjusting entry that should be made by the company on June 30 is
12. Greese Company purchased office supplies costing $4,000 and debited Office Supplies for the full amount. At the end of the accounting period, a physical count of office supplies revealed $1,100 still on hand. The appropriate adjusting journal entry to be made at the end of the period would be
14. An adjusted trial balance
15. Given the following adjusted trial balance:
Net income for the year is
16. Given the following adjusted trial balance, what will be the totals for the debit and credit columns of the post-closing trial balance?
17. 3.2.1 Given the following adjusted trial balance:
18. Net income is recorded on the work sheet under the
19. At the beginning of the year, Uptown Athletic had an inventory of $400,000. During the year, the company purchased goods costing $1,500,000. If Uptown Athletic reported ending inventory of $600,000 and sales of $2,000,000, their cost of goods sold and gross profit rate would be
20. During the year, Sarah s Pet Shop s merchandise inventory decreased by $30,000. If the company s cost of goods sold for the year was $450,000, purchases would have been
21. At the beginning of the year, Wildcat Athletic had an inventory of $200,000. During the year, the company purchased goods costing $700,000. If acc 290 final exam Wildcat Athletic reported ending inventory of $300,000 and sales of $1,000,000, their cost of goods sold and gross profit rate would be
22. The entry to record of sale of $900 with terms of 2/10, n/30 will include a
23.Dobler Company uses a periodic inventory system. Details for the inventory account for the month of January 2012 are as follows: An end of the month (1/31/2012), inventory showed that 140 units were on hand. If the company uses LIFO, what is the value of the ending inventory?
24. The difference between ending inventory using LIFO and ending inventory using FIFO is referred to as
25. A consistent application of an inventory costing method enhances
26. The accountant at Patton Company has determined that income before income taxes amounted to $11,000 using the FIFO costing assumption. If the income tax rate is 30% and the amount of income taxes paid would be $300 acc290 final exam greater if the LIFO assumption were used, what would be the amount of income before taxes under the LIFO assumption?
27. A very small company would have the most difficulty in implementing which of the following internal control activities?
28. A system of internal control
29. The custodian of a company asset should
30. The Sarbanes Oxley Act (2002) applies to
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acc 290 Final Exam MCQs
1) Which financial statement is used to determine cash generated from operations?
2) In terms of sequence, in what order must the four basic financial statements be prepared?
3. In classifying transactions, which of the following is true in regard to assets?
4. An increase in an expense account must be
5. ABC Corporation issues 100 shares of $1 par common stock at $5 per share, which of the following is the correct journal entry?
6. In the first month of operations, the total of the debit entries to the cash account amounted to $1,400 and the total of the credit entries to the cash account amounted to $600. The cash account has a
7. Which ledger contains control accounts?
8. Smith is a customer of ABC Corporation. Smith typically purchases merchandise from ABC on account. Which ledger would ABC use to keep track of the details of Smith s account?
9. Under the cash basis of accounting:
10. Under the accrual basis of accounting:
the rest are in the solutions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acc 290 Final Exam MCQs
1) Which financial statement is used to determine cash generated from operations?
2) In terms of sequence, in what order must the four basic financial statements be prepared?
3. In classifying transactions, which of the following is true in regard to assets?
4. An increase in an expense account must be
5. ABC Corporation issues 100 shares of $1 par common stock at $5 per share, which of the following is the correct journal entry?
6. In the first month of operations, the total of the debit entries to the cash account amounted to $1,400 and the total of the credit entries to the cash account amounted to $600. The cash account has a
7. Which ledger contains control accounts?
the rest are in the solutions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acc 290 Final Exam MCQs
) Which financial statement is used to determine cash generated from operations?
A. Income statement
B. Statement of operations
C. Statement of cash flows
D. Retained earnings statement
2) In terms of sequence, in what order must the four basic financial statements be prepared?
A. Balance sheet, income statement, statement of cash flows, and capital statement
B. Income statement, capital statement, statement of cash flows, and balance sheet
C. Balance sheet, capital statement, statement of cash flows, and income statement
D. Income statement, capital statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows
3. In classifying transactions, which of the following is true in regard to assets?
A. Normal balances and increases are debits
B. Normal balances and decreases are credits
C. Normal balances can either be debits or credits for assets
D. Normal balances are debits and increases can be debits or credits
4. An increase in an expense account must be
A. debited
B. credited
C. either debited or credited, depending on the circumstances
D. capitalized
5. ABC Corporation issues 100 shares of $1 par common stock at $5 per share, which of the following is the correct journal entry?
C. Correct ANSWER (Go with this Option)
6. In the first month of operations, the total of the debit entries to the cash account amounted to $1,400 and the total of the credit entries to the cash account amounted to $600. The cash account has a
A. $600 credit balance
B. $1,400 debit balance
C. $800 debit balance
D. $800 credit balance
7. Which ledger contains control accounts?
A. Accounts receivable subsidiary ledger
B. General ledger
C. Accounts payable subsidiary ledger
D. General revenue and expense ledger
8. Smith is a customer of ABC Corporation. Smith typically purchases merchandise from ABC on account. Which ledger would ABC use to keep track of the details of Smith s account?
A. Accounts receivable subsidiary ledger
B. Accounts receivable control ledger
C. General ledger
D. Accounts payable subsidiary ledger
9. Under the cash basis of accounting
A. revenue is recognized when services are performed
B. expenses are matched with the revenue that is produced
C. cash must be received before revenue is recognized
D. a promise to pay is sufficient to recognize revenue
10. Under the accrual basis of accounting
A. cash must be received before revenue is recognized
B. net income is calculated by matching cash outflows against cash inflows
C. events that change a company s financial statements are recognized in the period they occur rather than in the period in which the cash is paid or received
D. the ledger accounts must be adjusted to reflect a cash basis of accounting before financial statements are prepared under generally accepted accounting principles
11. The Vintage Laundry Company purchased $6,500 worth of laundry supplies on June 2 and recorded the purchase as an asset. On June 30, an inventory of the laundry supplies indicated only $2,000 on hand. The adjusting entry that should be made by the company on June 30 is
A. debit Laundry Expense, $2,000; credit Laundry Expense $2,000
B. debit Laundry Expense, $4,500; credit Laundry Supplies Expense, $4,500
C. debit Laundry Supplies, $2,000; credit Laundry Supplies Expense, $2,000
D. debit Laundry Supplies Expense, $4,500; credit Laundry Supplies, $4,500
12. Greese Company purchased office supplies costing $4,000 and debited Office Supplies for the full amount. At the end of the accounting period, a physical count of office supplies revealed $1,100 still on hand. The appropriate adjusting journal entry to be made at the end of the period would be
A. debit Office Supplies Expense, $1,100; credit Office Supplies, $1,100
B. debit Office Supplies, $2,900; credit Office Supplies Expense, $2,900
C. debit Office Supplies Expense, $2,900; credit Office Supplies, $2,900
D. debit Office Supplies, $1,100; credit Office Supplies Expense, $1,100
13. An adjusted trial balance
A. is prepared after the financial statements are completed
B. proves the equality of the total debit balances and total credit balances of ledger accounts after all adjustments have been made
C. is a required financial statement under generally accepted accounting principles
D. cannot be used to prepare financial statements
14. Given the following adjusted trial balance:
Net income for the year is
A. $248
B. $135
C. $162
D. $49
15. Given the following adjusted trial balance, what will be the totals for the debit and credit columns of the post-closing trial balance?
A. $7,396
B. $7,118
C. $7,334
D. $7,170
16. 3.2.1 Given the following adjusted trial balance:
A. $3,256
B. $3,170
C. $3,440
D. $3,354
17. Net income is recorded on the work sheet under the
A. debit column of the adjusted trial balance and the credit column of retained earnings
B. debit column of the income statement and the credit column of the balance sheet
C. credit column of the adjusted trial balance and the debit column of retained earnings
D. credit column of the income statement and the debit column of the balance sheet
18. At the beginning of the year, Uptown Athletic had an inventory of $400,000. During the year, the company purchased goods costing $1,500,000. If Uptown Athletic reported ending inventory of $600,000 and sales of $2,000,000, their cost of goods sold and gross profit rate would be
A. $900,000 and 65%
B. $1,300,000 and 35%
C. $900,000 and 35%
D. $1,300,000 and 65%
19. During the year, Sarah s Pet Shop s merchandise inventory decreased by $30,000. If the company s cost of goods sold for the year was $450,000, purchases would have been
A. $480,000
B. $420,000
C. $390,000
D. Insufficient data to determine
20. At the beginning of the year, Wildcat Athletic had an inventory of $200,000. During the year, the company purchased goods costing $700,000. If Wildcat Athletic reported ending inventory of $300,000 and sales of $1,000,000, their cost of goods sold and gross profit rate would be
A. $400,000 and 60%
B. $600,000 and 40%
C. $400,000 and 40%
D. $600,000 and 60%
21. The entry to record of sale of $900 with terms of 2/10, n/30 will include a
A. debit to Sales Discount for $18
B. debit to Sales Revenue for $882
C. credit to Accounts Receivable for $900
D. credit to Sales Revenue for $900
22.Dobler Company uses a periodic inventory system. Details for the inventory account for the month of January 2012 are as follows:
An end of the month (1/31/2012), inventory showed that 140 units were on hand. If the company uses LIFO, what is the value of the ending inventory?
A. $737
B. $700
C. $762
D. $1,380
23. The difference between ending inventory using LIFO and ending inventory using FIFO is referred to as
A. FIFO reserve
B. inventory reserve
C. LIFO reserve
D. periodic reserve
24. A consistent application of an inventory costing method enhances
A. conservatism
B. accuracy
C. comparability
D. efficiency
25. The accountant at Patton Company has determined that income before income taxes amounted to $11,000 using the FIFO costing assumption. If the income tax rate is 30% and the amount of income taxes paid would be $300 greater if the LIFO assumption were used, what would be the amount of income before taxes under the LIFO assumption?
A. $11,300
B. $12,000
C. $10,000
D. $10,700
26. A very small company would have the most difficulty in implementing which of the following internal control activities?
A. Separation of duties
B. Limited access to assets
C. Periodic independent verification
D. Sound personnel procedures
27. A system of internal control
A. is infallible
B. can be rendered ineffective by employee collusion
C. invariably will have costs exceeding benefits
D. is premised on the concept of absolute assurance
28. The custodian of a company asset should
A. have access to the accounting record for that asset
B. be someone outside the company
C. not have access to the accounting record for that asset
D. be an accountant
29. The Sarbanes Oxley Act (2002) applies to
A. U.S. companies but not international companies
B. international companies but not U.S. companies
C. U.S. and Canadian companies but not other international companies
D. U.S. and international companies
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 290 FINAL EXAMS
1) Which financial statement is used to determine cash generated from operations?
2) In terms of sequence, in what order must the four basic financial statements be prepared?
3. In classifying transactions, which of the following is true in regard to assets?
4. An increase in an expense account must be
5. ABC Corporation issues 100 shares of $1 par common stock at $5 per share, which of the following is the correct journal entry?
Cash (debit) ………….500
Common stock (credit) ……….100
Paid in capital in excess of par value (credit) ………..400
6. In the first month of operations, the total of the debit entries to the cash account amounted to $1,400 and the total of the credit entries to the cash account amounted to $600. The cash account has a
7. Which ledger contains control accounts?
8. Smith is a customer of ABC Corporation. Smith typically purchases merchandise from ABC on account. Which ledger would ABC use to keep track of the details of Smith s account?
9. Under the cash basis of accounting
10. Under the accrual basis of accounting
11. The Vintage Laundry Company purchased $6,500 worth of laundry supplies on June 2 and recorded the purchase as an asset. On June 30, an inventory of the laundry supplies indicated only $2,000 on hand. The adjusting entry that should be made by the company on June 30 is
0
12. Greese Company purchased office supplies costing $4,000 and debited Office Supplies for the full amount. At the end of the accounting period, a physical count of office supplies revealed $1,100 still on hand. The appropriate adjusting journal entry to be made at the end of the period would be
13. Based on the account balance below, what is the total of the debit and credit columns of the adjusted trial balance?
14. An adjusted trial balance
15. Given the following adjusted trial balance:
Net income for the year is
16. Given the following adjusted trial balance, what will be the totals for the debit and credit columns of the post-closing trial balance?
17. 3.2.1 Given the following adjusted trial balance:
18. Net income is recorded on the work sheet under the
19. At the beginning of the year, Uptown Athletic had an inventory of $400,000. During the year, the company purchased goods costing $1,500,000. If Uptown Athletic reported ending inventory of $600,000 and sales of $2,000,000, their cost of goods sold and gross profit rate would be
20. During the year, Sarah s Pet Shop s merchandise inventory decreased by $30,000. If the company s cost of goods sold for the year was $450,000, purchases would have been
21. At the beginning of the year, Wildcat Athletic had an inventory of $200,000. During the year, the company purchased goods costing $700,000. If acc 290 final exam Wildcat Athletic reported ending inventory of $300,000 and sales of $1,000,000, their cost of goods sold and gross profit rate would be
22. The entry to record of sale of $900 with terms of 2/10, n/30 will include a
23.Dobler Company uses a periodic inventory system. Details for the inventory account for the month of January 2012 are as follows: An end of the month (1/31/2012), inventory showed that 140 units were on hand. If the company uses LIFO, what is the value of the ending inventory?
24. The difference between ending inventory using LIFO and ending inventory using FIFO is referred to as
A. FIFO reserve
B. inventory reserve
C. LIFO reserve
D. periodic reserve
25. A consistent application of an inventory costing method enhances
A. conservatism
B. accuracy
C. comparability
D. efficiency
26. The accountant at Patton Company has determined that income before income taxes amounted to $11,000 using the FIFO costing assumption. If the income tax rate is 30% and the amount of income taxes paid would be $300 acc290 final exam greater if the LIFO assumption were used, what would be the amount of income before taxes under the LIFO assumption?
A. $11,300
B. $12,000
C. $10,000
D. $10,700
27. A very small company would have the most difficulty in implementing which of the following internal control activities?
A. Separation of duties
B. Limited access to assets
C. Periodic independent verification
D. Sound personnel procedures
28. A system of internal control
A. is infallible
B. can be rendered ineffective by employee collusion
C. invariably will have costs exceeding benefits
D. is premised on the concept of absolute assurance
29. The custodian of a company asset should
A. has access to the accounting record for that asset
B. be someone outside the company
C. not has access to the accounting record for that asset
D. be an accountant
30. The Sarbanes Oxley Act (2002) applies to
A. U.S. companies but not international companies
B. international companies but not U.S. companies
C. U.S. and Canadian companies but not other international companies
D. U.S. and international companies
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 290 Week 4 Learning Team Assignment Financial Reporting Problem, Part 1
Browse the Internet to acquire a copy of the most recent annual report for a publicly traded company. Analyze the information contained in the company s balance sheet and income statement to answer the following questions:
What are the company s total assets at the end of its most recent annual reporting period? Why is this important?
What are the total assets at the end of the previous annual reporting period?
How much cash and cash equivalents did the company have at the end of its most recent annual reporting period?
What amount of accounts payable did the company have at the end of its most recent annual reporting period?
What amount of accounts payable did the company have at the end of the previous annual reporting period?
What are the company s net revenues for the last three annual reporting periods?
What is the change in dollars in the company s net income from its most recent annual reporting period to the previous annual reporting period?
What are the company s total current assets at the end of its most recent annual reporting period?
What are the total current assets at the end of the previous annual reporting period?
What in the information above would be important to a potential investor, employee, and so on?
Summarizethe analysis in a 1,050-1,400 word paper in a Microsoft Word document. Include a copy of the company s balance sheet and income statement. Format your paper consistent with APA guidelines.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Basic present value calculations
Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar:
a. A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at a 12% rate of return.
b. An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at a 14% rate of return.
c. A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 10% rate of return.
d. An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has a 16% rate of return.
2. Cash flow calculationsand net present value
On January 2, 20X1, Bruce Greene invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.60 per share in 20X1 and 20X2; the dividend was raised to $3.10 per share in 20X3. On December 31, 20X3, Greene sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,000. Greene uses the net-present- value method and desires a 16% return on investments.
a. Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note:Greene is entitled to the 20X3 dividend.
b. Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar.
c. Given the results of part (b), should Greene have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain.
3. Straightforwardnet present value and internal rate of return
The City of Bedford is studying a 600-acre site on Route 356 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows:
Purchase cost: $450 per acre
Site preparation: $175,000
The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Bedford, which shares a facility in Bath Township with other municipalities, estimates that the new location will save $40,000 in annual operating costs.
a. Should the landfill be acquired if Bedford desires an 8% return on its investment? Use the net-present-value method to determine your answer.
4. Straightforward net-present-value and payback computations
STL Entertainment is considering the acquisition of a sight-seeing boat for summer tours along the Mississippi River. The following information is available:
|
Cost of boat
|
$500,000
|
|
Service life
|
10 summer seasons
|
|
Disposal value at the end of 10 seasons
|
$100,000
|
|
Capacity per trip
|
300 passengers
|
|
Fixed operating costs per season (including straight-line depreciation)
|
$160,000
|
|
Variable operating costs per trip
|
$1,000
|
|
Ticket price
|
$5 per passenger
|
All operating costs, except depreciation, require cash outlays. On the basis of similar operations in other parts of the country, management anticipates that each trip will be sold out and that 120,000 passengers will be carried each season. Ignore income taxes.
Instructions:
By using the net-present-value method, determine whether STL Entertainment should acquire the boat. Assume a 14% desired return on all investments- round calculations to the nearest dollar.
5. Equipment replacement decision
Columbia Enterprises is studying the replacement of some equipment that originally cost $74,000. The equipment is expected to provide six more years of service if $8,700 of major repairs are performed in two years. Annual cash operating costs total $27,200. Columbia can sell the equipment now for $36,000; the estimated residual value in six years is $5,000.
New equipment is available that will reduce annual cash operating costs to $21,000. The equipment costs $103,000, has a service life of six years, and has an estimated residual value of $13,000. Company sales will total $430,000 per year with either the existing or the new equipment. Columbia has a minimum desired return of 12% and depreciates all equipment by the straight-line method.
Instructions:
a. By using the net-present-value method, determine whether Columbia should keep its present equipment or acquire the new equipment. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar, and ignore income taxes.
b. Columbia’s management feels that the time value of money should be considered in all long-term decisions. Briefly discuss the rationale that underlies management’s belief.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You ve just been hired onto ABC Company as the corporate controller. ABC Company is a manufacturing firm that specializes in making cedar roofing and siding shingles. The company currently has annual sales of around $1.2 million, a 25% increase from the previous year. The company has an aggressive growth target of reaching $3 million annual sales within the next 3 years. The CEO has been trying to find additional products that can leverage the current ABC employee skillset as well as the manufacturing facilities.
As the controller of ABC Company, the CEO has come to you with a new opportunity that he s been working on. The CEO would like to use the some of the shingle scrap materials to build cedar dollhouses. While this new product line would add additional raw materials and be more time-intensive to manufacture than the cedar shingles, this new product line will be able to leverage ABC s existing manufacturing facilities as well as the current staff. Although this product line will require added expenses, it will provide additional revenue and gross profit to help reach the growth targets. The CEO is relying on you to help decide how this project can be afforded Provide details about the estimated product costs, what is needed to break even on the project, and what level of return this product is expected to provide.
In order to help out the CEO, you need to prepare a six- to eight-page report that will contain the following information (including exhibits, but excluding your references and title page). Refer to the accompanying Excel spreadsheet (available through your online course) for some specific cost and profit information to complete the calculations.
I. An overall risk profile of the company based on current economic and industry issues that it may be facing.
II. Current company cash flow
a. You need to complete a cash flow statement for the company using the direct method.
b. Once you ve completed the cash flow statement, answer the following questions:
i. What does this statement of cash flow tell you about the sources and uses of the company funds?
ii. Is there anything ABC Company can do to improve the cash flow?
iii. Can this project be financed with current cash flow from the company? Why or why not?
iv. If the company needs additional financing beyond what ABC Company can provide internally (either now or sometime throughout the life of the project), how would you suggest the company obtain the additional financing, equity or corporate debt, and why?
III. Product cost: ABC Company believes that it has an additional 5,000 machine hours available in the current facility before it would need to expand. ABC Company uses machine hours to allocate the fixed factory overhead, and units sold to allocate the fixed sales expenses. Bases on current research, ABC Company expects that it will take twice as long to produce the expansion product as it currently takes to produce its existing product.
a. What is the product cost for the expansion product under absorption and variable costing?
b. By adding this new expansion product, it helps to absorb the fixed factory and sales expenses. How much cheaper does this expansion make the existing product?
c. Assuming ABC Company wants a 40% gross margin for the new product, what selling price should it set for the expansion product?
d. Assuming the same sales mix of these two products, what are the contribution margins and break-even points by product?
IV. Potential investments to accelerate profit: ABC company has the option to purchase additional equipment that will cost about $42,000, and this new equipment will produce the following savings in factory overhead costs over the next five years:
Year 1, $15,000
Year 2, $13,000
Year 3, $10,000
Year 4, $10,000
Year 5, $6,000
ABC Company uses the net-present-value method to analyze investments and desires a minimum rate of return of 12% on the equipment.
a. What is the net present value of the proposed investment (ignore income taxes and depreciation)?
b. Assuming a 5-year straight-line depreciation, how will this impact the factory s fixed costs for each of the 5 years (and the implied product costs)? What about cash flow?
c. Considering the cash flow impact of the equipment as well as the time-value of money, would you recommend that ABC Company purchases the equipment? Why or why not?
V. Conclusion:
a. What are the major risk factors that you see in this project?
b. As the controller and a management accountant, what is your responsibility to this project?
c. What do you recommend the CEO do?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter Eight Problems
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 8 Exercise 1:
1. Basic present value calculations
Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar:
a.
A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at a 12% rate of return.
b.
An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at a 14% rate of return.
c.
A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 10% rate of return.
d.
An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has a 16% rate of return.
Chapter 8 Exercise 4:
4. Cash flow calculationsand net present value
On January 2, 20X1, Bruce Greene invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.60 per share in 20X1 and 20X2; the dividend was raised to $3.10 per share in 20X3. On December 31, 20X3, Greene sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,000. Greene uses the net-present- value method and desires a 16% return on investments.
a.
Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note:Greene is entitled to the 20X3 dividend.
b.
Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar.
c.
Given the results of part (b), should Greene have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain.
Chapter 8 exercise 5:
5. Straightforwardnet present value and internal rate of return
The City of Bedford is studying a 600-acre site on Route 356 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows:
Purchase cost: $450 per acre
Site preparation: $175,000
The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Bedford, which shares a facility in Bath Township with other municipalities, estimates that the new location will save $40,000 in annual operating costs.
a.
Should the landfill be acquired if Bedford desires an 8% return on its investment? Use the net-present-value method to determine your answer.
Chapter 8 Problem 1:
1. Straightforward net-present-value and payback computations
STL Entertainment is considering the acquisition of a sight-seeing boat for summer tours along the Mississippi River. The following information is available:
|
Cost of boat
|
$500,000
|
|
Service life
|
10 summer seasons
|
|
Disposal value at the end of 10 seasons
|
$100,000
|
|
Capacity per trip
|
300 passengers
|
|
Fixed operating costs per season (including straight-line depreciation)
|
$160,000
|
|
Variable operating costs per trip
|
$1,000
|
|
Ticket price
|
$5 per passenger
|
All operating costs, except depreciation, require cash outlays. On the basis of similar operations in other parts of the country, management anticipates that each trip will be sold out and that 120,000 passengers will be carried each season. Ignore income taxes.
Instructions:
By using the net-present-value method, determine whether STL Entertainment should acquire the boat. Assume a 14% desired return on all investments- round calculations to the nearest dollar.
Chapter 8 Problem 4:
4. Equipment replacement decision
Columbia Enterprises is studying the replacement of some equipment that originally cost $74,000. The equipment is expected to provide six more years of service if $8,700 of major repairs are performed in two years. Annual cash operating costs total $27,200. Columbia can sell the equipment now for $36,000; the estimated residual value in six years is $5,000.
New equipment is available that will reduce annual cash operating costs to $21,000. The equipment costs $103,000, has a service life of six years, and has an estimated residual value of $13,000. Company sales will total $430,000 per year with either the existing or the new equipment. Columbia has a minimum desired return of 12% and depreciates all equipment by the straight-line method.
Instructions:
a.
By using the net-present-value method, determine whether Columbia should keep its present equipment or acquire the new equipment. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar, and ignore income taxes.
b.
Columbia’s management feels that the time value of money should be considered in all long-term decisions. Briefly discuss the rationale that underlies management’s belief.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC206 Week Five Problems
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Basic present value calculations
Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar:
a. A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at a 12% rate of return.
b. An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at a 14% rate of return.
c. A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 10% rate of return.
d. An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has a 16% rate of return.
2. Cash flow calculationsand net present value
On January 2, 20X1, Bruce Greene invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.60 per share in 20X1 and 20X2; the dividend was raised to $3.10 per share in 20X3. On December 31, 20X3, Greene sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,000. Greene uses the net-present- value method and desires a 16% return on investments.
a. Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note:Greene is entitled to the 20X3 dividend.
b. Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar.
c. Given the results of part (b), should Greene have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain.
3. Straightforwardnet present value and internal rate of return
The City of Bedford is studying a 600-acre site on Route 356 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows:
Purchase cost: $450 per acre
Site preparation: $175,000
The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Bedford, which shares a facility in Bath Township with other municipalities, estimates that the new location will save $40,000 in annual operating costs.
a. Should the landfill be acquired if Bedford desires an 8% return on its investment? Use the net-present-value method to determine your answer.
4. Straightforward net-present-value and payback computations
STL Entertainment is considering the acquisition of a sight-seeing boat for summer tours along the Mississippi River. The following information is available:
|
Cost of boat
|
$500,000
|
|
Service life
|
10 summer seasons
|
|
Disposal value at the end of 10 seasons
|
$100,000
|
|
Capacity per trip
|
300 passengers
|
|
Fixed operating costs per season (including straight-line depreciation)
|
$160,000
|
|
Variable operating costs per trip
|
$1,000
|
|
Ticket price
|
$5 per passenger
|
All operating costs, except depreciation, require cash outlays. On the basis of similar operations in other parts of the country, management anticipates that each trip will be sold out and that 120,000 passengers will be carried each season. Ignore income taxes.
Instructions:
By using the net-present-value method, determine whether STL Entertainment should acquire the boat. Assume a 14% desired return on all investments- round calculations to the nearest dollar.
5. Equipment replacement decision
Columbia Enterprises is studying the replacement of some equipment that originally cost $74,000. The equipment is expected to provide six more years of service if $8,700 of major repairs are performed in two years. Annual cash operating costs total $27,200. Columbia can sell the equipment now for $36,000; the estimated residual value in six years is $5,000.
New equipment is available that will reduce annual cash operating costs to $21,000. The equipment costs $103,000, has a service life of six years, and has an estimated residual value of $13,000. Company sales will total $430,000 per year with either the existing or the new equipment. Columbia has a minimum desired return of 12% and depreciates all equipment by the straight-line method.
Instructions:
a. By using the net-present-value method, determine whether Columbia should keep its present equipment or acquire the new equipment. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar, and ignore income taxes.
b. Columbia’s management feels that the time value of money should be considered in all long-term decisions. Briefly discuss the rationale that underlies management’s belief.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 8 Exercise 1:
1. Basic present value calculations
Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar:
A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at a 12% rate of return. An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at a 14% rate of return. A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 10% rate of return. An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has a 16% rate of return. Chapter 8 Exercise 4:
4. Cash flow calculations and net present value
On January 2, 19X1, Bruce Greene invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.60 per share in 19X1 and 19X2; the dividend was raised to $3.10 per share in 19X3. On December 31, 19X3, Greene sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,000. Greene uses the net-present- value method and desires a 16% return on investments.
Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note: Greene is entitled to the 19X3 dividend. Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar. Given the results of part (b), should Greene have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain. Chapter 8 exercise 5:
5. Straightforwardnet present value and internal rate of return
The City of Bedford is studying a 600-acre site on Route 356 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows:
Purchase cost: $450 per acre
Site preparation: $175,000
The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Bedford, which shares a facility in Bath Township with other municipalities, estimates that the new location will save $40,000 in annual operating costs.
Should the landfill be acquired if Bedford desires an 8% return on its investment? Use the net-present-value method to determine your answer. Compute the internal rate of return on this project. Chapter 8 Problem 1:
1. Straightforward net-present-value and payback computations
STL Entertainment is considering the acquisition of a sight-seeing boat for summer tours along the Mississippi River. The following information is available:
Cost of boat
$500,000
Service life
10 summer seasons
Disposal value at the end of 10 seasons
$100,000
Capacity per trip
300 passengers
Fixed operating costs per season (including straight-line depreciation)
$160,000
Variable operating costs per trip
$1,000
Ticket price
$5 per passenger
All operating costs, except depreciation, require cash outlays. On the basis of similar operations in other parts of the country, management anticipates that each trip will be sold out and that 120,000 passengers will be carried each season. Ignore income taxes.
Instructions:
By using the net-present-value method, determine whether STL Entertainment should acquire the boat. Assume a 14% desired return on all investments,- round calculations to the nearest dollar.
Chapter 8 Problem 4:
4. Equipment replacement decision
Columbia Enterprises is studying the replacement of some equipment that originally cost $74,000. The equipment is expected to provide six more years of service if $8,700 of major repairs are performed in two years. Annual cash operating costs total $27,200. Columbia can sell the equipment now for $36,000; the estimated residual value in six years is $5,000.
New equipment is available that will reduce annual cash operating costs to $21,000. The equipment costs $103,000, has a service life of six years, and has an estimated residual value of $13,000. Company sales will total $430,000 per year with either the existing or the new equipment. Columbia has a minimum desired return of 12% and depreciates all equipment by the straight-line method.
Instructions:
By using the net-present-value method, determine whether Columbia should keep its present equipment or acquire the new equipment. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar, and ignore income taxes. Columbia’s management feels that the time value of money should be considered in all long-term decisions. Briefly discuss the rationale that underlies management’s belief.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter Eight Problems
Chapter 8 Exercise 1:
1. Basic present value calculations
Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar:
a. A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at a 12% rate of return.
b. An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at a 14% rate of return.
c. A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 10% rate of return.
d. An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has a 16% rate of return.
Chapter 8 Exercise 4:
4. Cash flow calculationsand net present value
On January 2, 20X1, Bruce Greene invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.60 per share in 20X1 and 20X2; the dividend was raised to $3.10 per share in 20X3. On December 31, 20X3, Greene sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,000. Greene uses the net-present- value method and desires a 16% return on investments.
a. Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note:Greene is entitled to the 20X3 dividend.
b. Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar.
c. Given the results of part (b), should Greene have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain.
Chapter 8 exercise 5:
5. Straightforwardnet present value and internal rate of return
The City of Bedford is studying a 600-acre site on Route 356 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows:
Purchase cost: $450 per acre
Site preparation: $175,000
The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Bedford, which shares a facility in Bath Township with other municipalities, estimates that the new location will save $40,000 in annual operating costs.
a. Should the landfill be acquired if Bedford desires an 8% return on its investment? Use the net-present-value method to determine your answer.
Chapter 8 Problem 1:
1. Straightforward net-present-value and payback computations
STL Entertainment is considering the acquisition of a sight-seeing boat for summer tours along the Mississippi River. The following information is available:
|
Cost of boat
|
$500,000
|
|
Service life
|
10 summer seasons
|
|
Disposal value at the end of 10 seasons
|
$100,000
|
|
Capacity per trip
|
300 passengers
|
|
Fixed operating costs per season (including straight-line depreciation)
|
$160,000
|
|
Variable operating costs per trip
|
$1,000
|
|
Ticket price
|
$5 per passenger
|
All operating costs, except depreciation, require cash outlays. On the basis of similar operations in other parts of the country, management anticipates that each trip will be sold out and that 120,000 passengers will be carried each season. Ignore income taxes.
Instructions:
By using the net-present-value method, determine whether STL Entertainment should acquire the boat. Assume a 14% desired return on all investments- round calculations to the nearest dollar.
Chapter 8 Problem 4:
4. Equipment replacement decision
Columbia Enterprises is studying the replacement of some equipment that originally cost $74,000. The equipment is expected to provide six more years of service if $8,700 of major repairs are performed in two years. Annual cash operating costs total $27,200. Columbia can sell the equipment now for $36,000; the estimated residual value in six years is $5,000.
New equipment is available that will reduce annual cash operating costs to $21,000. The equipment costs $103,000, has a service life of six years, and has an estimated residual value of $13,000. Company sales will total $430,000 per year with either the existing or the new equipment. Columbia has a minimum desired return of 12% and depreciates all equipment by the straight-line method.
Instructions:
a. By using the net-present-value method, determine whether Columbia should keep its present equipment or acquire the new equipment. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar, and ignore income taxes.
b. Columbia’s management feels that the time value of money should be considered in all long-term decisions. Briefly discuss the rationale that underlies management’s belief.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter Eight Problems
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 8 Exercise 1:
1. Basic present value calculations
Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar:
a. A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at a 12% rate of return.
b. An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at a 14% rate of return.
c. A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 10% rate of return.
d. An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has a 16% rate of return.
Chapter 8 Exercise 4:
4. Cash flow calculationsand net present value
On January 2, 20X1, Bruce Greene invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.60 per share in 20X1 and 20X2; the dividend was raised to $3.10 per share in 20X3. On December 31, 20X3, Greene sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,000. Greene uses the net-present- value method and desires a 16% return on investments.
a. Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note:Greene is entitled to the 20X3 dividend.
b. Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar.
c. Given the results of part (b), should Greene have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain.
Chapter 8 exercise 5:
5. Straightforwardnet present value and internal rate of return
The City of Bedford is studying a 600-acre site on Route 356 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows:
Purchase cost: $450 per acre
Site preparation: $175,000
The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Bedford, which shares a facility in Bath Township with other municipalities, estimates that the new location will save $40,000 in annual operating costs.
a. Should the landfill be acquired if Bedford desires an 8% return on its investment? Use the net-present-value method to determine your answer.
Chapter 8 Problem 1:
1. Straightforward net-present-value and payback computations
STL Entertainment is considering the acquisition of a sight-seeing boat for summer tours along the Mississippi River. The following information is available:
|
Cost of boat
|
$500,000
|
|
Service life
|
10 summer seasons
|
|
Disposal value at the end of 10 seasons
|
$100,000
|
|
Capacity per trip
|
300 passengers
|
|
Fixed operating costs per season (including straight-line depreciation)
|
$160,000
|
|
Variable operating costs per trip
|
$1,000
|
|
Ticket price
|
$5 per passenger
|
All operating costs, except depreciation, require cash outlays. On the basis of similar operations in other parts of the country, management anticipates that each trip will be sold out and that 120,000 passengers will be carried each season. Ignore income taxes.
Instructions:
By using the net-present-value method, determine whether STL Entertainment should acquire the boat. Assume a 14% desired return on all investments- round calculations to the nearest dollar.
Chapter 8 Problem 4:
4. Equipment replacement decision
Columbia Enterprises is studying the replacement of some equipment that originally cost $74,000. The equipment is expected to provide six more years of service if $8,700 of major repairs are performed in two years. Annual cash operating costs total $27,200. Columbia can sell the equipment now for $36,000; the estimated residual value in six years is $5,000.
New equipment is available that will reduce annual cash operating costs to $21,000. The equipment costs $103,000, has a service life of six years, and has an estimated residual value of $13,000. Company sales will total $430,000 per year with either the existing or the new equipment. Columbia has a minimum desired return of 12% and depreciates all equipment by the straight-line method.
Instructions:
a. By using the net-present-value method, determine whether Columbia should keep its present equipment or acquire the new equipment. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar, and ignore income taxes.
b. Columbia’s management feels that the time value of money should be considered in all long-term decisions. Briefly discuss the rationale that underlies management’s belief.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Five Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Basic present value calculations
Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar:
a. A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at an 11% rate of return.
b. An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at an 11% rate of return.
c. A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 12% rate of return.
d. An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has an 11% rate of return.
2. Cash flow calculationsand net present value
On January 2, 20X7, Brian Rein invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.70 per share in 20X7 and 20X8; the dividend was raised to $3.30 per share in 20X9. On December 31, 20X9, Rein sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,100. Rein uses the net-present- value method and desires a 16% return on investments.
a. Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note: Rein is entitled to the 20X9 dividend.
b. Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar.
c. Given the results of part (b), should Rein have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain.
3. Net present value
The City of Brighton is studying a 550-acre site on Route 401 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows:
Purchase cost: $400 per acre
Site preparation: $180,000
The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Brighton, which shares a facility in Bath Township with other municipalities, estimates that the new location will save $40,000 in annual operating costs.
a. Should the landfill be acquired if Brighton desires an 8% return on its investment? Use the net-present-value method to determine your answer.
4. Net-present-value
ABC Entertainment is considering the acquisition of a sight-seeing boat for summer tours along the Mississippi River. The following information is available:
|
Cost of boat
|
$550,000
|
|
Service life
|
10 summer seasons
|
|
Disposal value at the end of 10 seasons
|
$100,000
|
|
Capacity per trip
|
260 passengers
|
|
Fixed operating costs per season (including straight-line depreciation)
|
$160,000
|
|
Variable operating costs per trip
|
$1,000
|
|
Ticket price
|
$6 per passenger
|
All operating costs, except depreciation, require cash outlays. On the basis of similar operations in other parts of the country, management anticipates that each trip will be sold out and that 130,000 passengers will be carried each season. Ignore income taxes.
Instructions:
By using the net-present-value method, determine whether ABC Entertainment should acquire the boat. Assume a 14% desired return on all investments,- round calculations to the nearest dollar.
5. Equipment replacement decision
Richardson Enterprises is studying the replacement of some equipment that originally cost $74,000. The equipment is expected to provide six more years of service if $8,500 of major repairs are performed in two years. Annual cash operating costs total $28,000. Richardson can sell the equipment now for $37,000; the estimated residual value in six years is $5,000.
New equipment is available that will reduce annual cash operating costs to $21,000. The equipment costs $105,000, has a service life of six years, and has an estimated residual value of $13,000. Company sales will total $430,000 per year with either the existing or the new equipment. Richardson has a minimum desired return of 12% and depreciates all equipment by the straight-line method.
Instructions:
a. By using the net-present-value method, determine whether Richardson should keep its present equipment or acquire the new equipment. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar, and ignore income taxes.
b. Richardson s management feels that the time value of money should be considered in all long-term decisions. Briefly discuss the rationale that underlies management’s belief.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter Eight Problems
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 8 Exercise 1:
1. Basic present value calculations
Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar:
- A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at a 12% rate of return.
- An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at a 14% rate of return.
- A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 10% rate of return.
- An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has a 16% rate of return.
Chapter 8 Exercise 4:
4. Cash flow calculationsand net present value
On January 2, 20X1, Bruce Greene invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.60 per share in 20X1 and 20X2; the dividend was raised to $3.10 per share in 20X3. On December 31, 20X3, Greene sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,000. Greene uses the net-present- value method and desires a 16% return on investments.
- Prepare a chronological list of the investment s cash flows. Note:Greene is entitled to the 20X3 dividend.
- Compute the investment s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar.
- Given the results of part (b), should Greene have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain.
Chapter 8 exercise 5:
5. Straightforwardnet present value and internal rate of return
The City of Bedford is studying a 600-acre site on Route 356 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows:
Purchase cost: $450 per acre
Site preparation: $175,000
The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Bedford, which shares a facility in Bath Township with other municipalities, estimates that the new location will save $40,000 in annual operating costs.
- Should the landfill be acquired if Bedford desires an 8% return on its investment? Use the net-present-value method to determine your answer.
Chapter 8 Problem 1:
1. Straightforward net-present-value and payback computations
STL Entertainment is considering the acquisition of a sight-seeing boat for summer tours along the Mississippi River. The following information is available:
| Cost of boat |
$500,000 |
| Service life |
10 summer seasons |
| Disposal value at the end of 10 seasons |
$100,000 |
| Capacity per trip |
300 passengers |
| Fixed operating costs per season (including straight-line depreciation) |
$160,000 |
| Variable operating costs per trip |
$1,000 |
| Ticket price |
$5 per passenger |
All operating costs, except depreciation, require cash outlays. On the basis of similar operations in other parts of the country, management anticipates that each trip will be sold out and that 120,000 passengers will be carried each season. Ignore income taxes.
Instructions:
By using the net-present-value method, determine whether STL Entertainment should acquire the boat. Assume a 14% desired return on all investments- round calculations to the nearest dollar.
Chapter 8 Problem 4:
4. Equipment replacement decision
Columbia Enterprises is studying the replacement of some equipment that originally cost $74,000. The equipment is expected to provide six more years of service if $8,700 of major repairs are performed in two years. Annual cash operating costs total $27,200. Columbia can sell the equipment now for $36,000; the estimated residual value in six years is $5,000.
New equipment is available that will reduce annual cash operating costs to $21,000. The equipment costs $103,000, has a service life of six years, and has an estimated residual value of $13,000. Company sales will total $430,000 per year with either the existing or the new equipment. Columbia has a minimum desired return of 12% and depreciates all equipment by the straight-line method.
Instructions:
- By using the net-present-value method, determine whether Columbia should keep its present equipment or acquire the new equipment. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar, and ignore income taxes.
- Columbia s management feels that the time value of money should be considered in all long-term decisions. Briefly discuss the rationale that underlies management s belief.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You ve just been hired onto ABC Company as the corporate controller. ABC Company is a manufacturing firm that specializes in making cedar roofing and siding shingles. The company currently has annual sales of around $1.2 million, a 25% increase from the previous year. The company has an aggressive growth target of reaching $3 million annual sales within the next 3 years. The CEO has been trying to find additional products that can leverage the current ABC employee skillset as well as the manufacturing facilities.
As the controller of ABC Company, the CEO has come to you with a new opportunity that he s been working on. The CEO would like to use the some of the shingle scrap materials to build cedar dollhouses. While this new product line would add additional raw materials and be more time-intensive to manufacture than the cedar shingles, this new product line will be able to leverage ABC s existing manufacturing facilities as well as the current staff. Although this product line will require added expenses, it will provide additional revenue and gross profit to help reach the growth targets. The CEO is relying on you to help decide how this project can be afforded Provide details about the estimated product costs, what is needed to break even on the project, and what level of return this product is expected to provide.
In order to help out the CEO, you need to prepare a six- to eight-page report that will contain the following information (including exhibits, but excluding your references and title page). Refer to the accompanying Excel spreadsheet (available through your online course) for some specific cost and profit information to complete the calculations.
Final Paper Spreadsheet
I. An overall risk profile of the company based on current economic and industry issues that it may be facing.
II. Current company cash flow
a. You need to complete a cash flow statement for the company using the direct method.
b. Once you ve completed the cash flow statement, answer the following questions: i. What does this statement of cash flow tell you about the sources and uses of the company?
ii. Is there anything ABC Company can do to improve the cash flow?
iii. Can this project be financed with current cash flow from the company? Why or why not?
iv. If the company needs additional financing beyond what ABC Company can provide internally (either now or sometime throughout the life of the project), how would you suggest the company obtain the additional financing, equity or corporate debt, and why?
III. Product cost: ABC Company believes that it has an additional 5,000 machine hours available in the current facility before it would need to expand. ABC Company uses machine hours to allocate the fixed factory overhead, and units sold to allocate the fixed sales expenses. ABC Company expects that it will take twice as long to produce the expansion product as it currently takes to produce its existing product.
a. What is the product cost for the expansion product?
b. By adding this new expansion product, it helps to absorb the fixed factory and sales expenses. How much cheaper does this expansion make the existing product?
c. Assuming ABC Company wants a 40% gross margin for the new product, what selling price should it set for the expansion product?
d. Assuming the same sales mix of these two products, what are the contribution margins and break-even points by product?
IV. Potential investments to accelerate profit: ABC company has the option to purchase additional equipment that will cost about $42,000, and this new equipment will produce the following savings in factory overhead costs over the next five years:
Year 1, $15,000
Year 2, $13,000
Year 3, $10,000
Year 4, $10,000
Year 5, $6,000
ABC Company uses the net-present-value method to analyze investments and desires a minimum rate of return of 12% on the equipment.
a. What is the net present value of the proposed investment ignore income taxes and depreciation?
b. Assuming a 5-year straight-line depreciation, how will this impact the factory s fixed costs for each of the 5 years (and the implied product costs)? What about cash flow?
c. Considering the cash flow impact of the equipment as well as the time-value of money, would you recommend that ABC Company purchases the equipment? Why or why not?
V. Conclusion:
a. What are the major risk factors that you see in this project?
b. As the controller and a management accountant, what is your responsibility to this project?
c. What do you recommend the CEO do?
Writing the Final Paper
1. Must be six to eight double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following: a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted 3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You ve just been hired onto ABC Company as the corporate controller. ABC Company is a manufacturing firm that specializes in making cedar roofing and siding shingles. The company currently has annual sales of around $1.2 million, a 25% increase from the previous year. The company has an aggressive growth target of reaching $3 million annual sales within the next 3 years. The CEO has been trying to find additional products that can leverage the current ABC employee skillset as well as the manufacturing facilities.
As the controller of ABC Company, the CEO has come to you with a new opportunity that he s been working on. The CEO would like to use the some of the shingle scrap materials to build cedar dollhouses. While this new product line would add additional raw materials and be more time-intensive to manufacture than the cedar shingles, this new product line will be able to leverage ABC s existing manufacturing facilities as well as the current staff. Although this product line will require added expenses, it will provide additional revenue and gross profit to help reach the growth targets. The CEO is relying on you to help decide how this project can be afforded Provide details about the estimated product costs, what is needed to break even on the project, and what level of return this product is expected to provide.
In order to help out the CEO, you need to prepare a six- to eight-page report that will contain the following information (including exhibits, but excluding your references and title page). Refer to the accompanying Excel spreadsheet (available through your online course) for some specific cost and profit information to complete the calculations.
Final Paper Spreadsheet
I. An overall risk profile of the company based on current economic and industry issues that it may be facing.
II. Current company cash flow
a. You need to complete a cash flow statement for the company using the direct method.
b. Once you ve completed the cash flow statement, answer the following questions:
i. What does this statement of cash flow tell you about the sources and uses of the company funds?
ii. Is there anything ABC Company can do to improve the cash flow?
iii. Can this project be financed with current cash flow from the company? Why or why not?
iv. If the company needs additional financing beyond what ABC Company can provide internally (either now or sometime throughout the life of the project), how would you suggest the company obtain the additional financing, equity or corporate debt, and why?
III. Product cost: ABC Company believes that it has an additional 5,000 machine hours available in the current facility before it would need to expand. ABC Company uses machine hours to allocate the fixed factory overhead, and units sold to allocate the fixed sales expenses. Bases on current research, ABC Company expects that it will take twice as long to produce the expansion product as it currently takes to produce its existing product.
a. What is the product cost for the expansion product under absorption and variable costing?
b. By adding this new expansion product, it helps to absorb the fixed factory and sales expenses. How much cheaper does this expansion make the existing product?
c. Assuming ABC Company wants a 40% gross margin for the new product, what selling price should it set for the expansion product
d. Assuming the same sales mix of these two products, what are the contribution margins and break-even points by product?
IV. Potential investments to accelerate profit: ABC company has the option to purchase additional equipment that will cost about $42,000, and this new equipment will produce the following savings in factory overhead costs over the next five years:
Year 1, $15,000
Year 2, $13,000
Year 3, $10,000
Year 4, $10,000
Year 5, $6,000
ABC Company uses the net-present-value method to analyze investments and desires a minimum rate of return of 12% on the equipment.
a. What is the net present value of the proposed investment (ignore income taxes and depreciation)?
b. Assuming a 5-year straight-line depreciation, how will this impact the factory s fixed costs for each of the 5 years (and the implied product costs)? What about cash flow?
c. Considering the cash flow impact of the equipment as well as the time-value of money, would you recommend that ABC Company purchases the equipment? Why or why not
V. Conclusion:
a. What are the major risk factors that you see in this project?
b. As the controller and a management accountant, what is your responsibility to this project?
c. What do you recommend the CEO do?
Writing the Final Paper
1. Must be six to eight double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:
a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted
3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document at least three, but no more than five sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Focus of the Final Paper
You ve just been hired onto ABC Company as the corporate controller. ABC Company is a manufacturing firm that specializes in making cedar roofing and siding shingles. The company currently has annual sales of around $1.2 million, a 25% increase from the previous year. The company has an aggressive growth target of reaching $3 million annual sales within the next 3 years. The CEO has been trying to find additional products that can leverage the current ABC employee skillset as well as the manufacturing facilities.
As the controller of ABC Company, the CEO has come to you with a new opportunity that he s been working on. The CEO would like to use the some of the shingle scrap materials to build cedar dollhouses. While this new product line would add additional raw materials and be more time-intensive to manufacture than the cedar shingles, this new product line will be able to leverage ABC s existing manufacturing facilities as well as the current staff. Although this product line will require added expenses, it will provide additional revenue and gross profit to help reach the growth targets. The CEO is relying on you to help decide how this project can be afforded Provide details about the estimated product costs, what is needed to break even on the project, and what level of return this product is expected to provide.
In order to help out the CEO, you need to prepare a six- to eight-page report that will contain the following information (including exhibits, but excluding your references and title page). Refer to the accompanying Excel spreadsheet (available through your online course) for some specific cost and profit information to complete the calculations.
Final Paper Spreadsheet
I. An overall risk profile of the company based on current economic and industry issues that it may be facing.
II. Current company cash flow
a. You need to complete a cash flow statement for the company using the direct method.
b. Once you ve completed the cash flow statement, answer the following questions:
i. What does this statement of cash flow tell you about the sources and uses of the company funds?
ii. Is there anything ABC Company can do to improve the cash flow?
iii. Can this project be financed with current cash flow from the company? Why or why not?
iv. If the company needs additional financing beyond what ABC Company can provide internally (either now or sometime throughout the life of the project), how would you suggest the company obtain the additional financing, equity or corporate debt, and why?
III. Product cost: ABC Company believes that it has an additional 5,000 machine hours available in the current facility before it would need to expand. ABC Company uses machine hours to allocate the fixed factory overhead, and units sold to allocate the fixed sales expenses. Bases on current research, ABC Company expects that it will take twice as long to produce the expansion product as it currently takes to produce its existing product.
a. What is the product cost for the expansion product under absorption and variable costing?
b. By adding this new expansion product, it helps to absorb the fixed factory and sales expenses. How much cheaper does this expansion make the existing product?
c. Assuming ABC Company wants a 40% gross margin for the new product, what selling price should it set for the expansion product
d. Assuming the same sales mix of these two products, what are the contribution margins and break-even points by product?
IV. Potential investments to accelerate profit: ABC company has the option to purchase additional equipment that will cost about $42,000, and this new equipment will produce the following savings in factory overhead costs over the next five years:
Year 1, $15,000
Year 2, $13,000
Year 3, $10,000
Year 4, $10,000
Year 5, $6,000
ABC Company uses the net-present-value method to analyze investments and desires a minimum rate of return of 12% on the equipment.
a. What is the net present value of the proposed investment (ignore income taxes and depreciation)?
b. Assuming a 5-year straight-line depreciation, how will this impact the factory s fixed costs for each of the 5 years (and the implied product costs)? What about cash flow?
c. Considering the cash flow impact of the equipment as well as the time-value of money, would you recommend that ABC Company purchases the equipment? Why or why not
V. Conclusion:
a. What are the major risk factors that you see in this project?
b. As the controller and a management accountant, what is your responsibility to this project?
c. What do you recommend the CEO do?
Writing the Final Paper
1. Must be six to eight double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:
a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted
3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document at least three, but no more than five sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Focus of the Final Paper
You ve just been hired onto ABC Company as the corporate controller. ABC Company is a manufacturing firm that specializes in making cedar roofing and siding shingles. The company currently has annual sales of around $1.2 million, a 25% increase from the previous year. The company has an aggressive growth target of reaching $3 million annual sales within the next 3 years. The CEO has been trying to find additional products that can leverage the current ABC employee skillset as well as the manufacturing facilities.
As the controller of ABC Company, the CEO has come to you with a new opportunity that he s been working on. The CEO would like to use the some of the shingle scrap materials to build cedar dollhouses. While this new product line would add additional raw materials and be more time-intensive to manufacture than the cedar shingles, this new product line will be able to leverage ABC s existing manufacturing facilities as well as the current staff. Although this product line will require added expenses, it will provide additional revenue and gross profit to help reach the growth targets. The CEO is relying on you to help decide how this project can be afforded Provide details about the estimated product costs, what is needed to break even on the project, and what level of return this product is expected to provide.
In order to help out the CEO, you need to prepare a six- to eight-page report that will contain the following information (including exhibits, but excluding your references and title page). Refer to the accompanying Excel spreadsheet (available through your online course) for some specific cost and profit information to complete the calculations.
http://vizedhtmlcontent.next.ecollege.com/pub/content/e93b62a7-1ac4-4d2d-93a1-3b2265b1ff87/Copy_of_Copy_of_Final_Paper_Spreadsheet__Student_Copy.xlsx Final Paper Spreadsheet
I. An overall risk profile of the company based on current economic and industry issues that it may be facing.
II. Current company cash flow
a. You need to complete a cash flow statement for the company using the direct method.
b. Once you ve completed the cash flow statement, answer the following questions:
i. What does this statement of cash flow tell you about the sources and uses of the company funds?
ii. Is there anything ABC Company can do to improve the cash flow?
iii. Can this project be financed with current cash flow from the company? Why or why not?
iv. If the company needs additional financing beyond what ABC Company can provide internally (either now or sometime throughout the life of the project), how would you suggest the company obtain the additional financing, equity or corporate debt, and why?
III. Product cost: ABC Company believes that it has an additional 5,000 machine hours available in the current facility before it would need to expand. ABC Company uses machine hours to allocate the fixed factory overhead, and units sold to allocate the fixed sales expenses. Based on current research, ABC Company expects that it will take twice as long to produce the expansion product as it currently takes to produce its existing product.
a. What is the product cost for the expansion product under absorption and variable costing?
b. By adding this new expansion product, it helps to absorb the fixed factory and sales expenses. How much cheaper does this expansion make the existing product?
c. Assuming ABC Company wants a 40% gross margin for the new product, what selling price should it set for the expansion product?
d. Assuming the same sales mix of these two products, what are the contribution margins and break-even points by product?
IV. Potential investments to accelerate profit: ABC company has the option to purchase additional equipment that will cost about $42,000, and this new equipment will produce the following savings in factory overhead costs over the next five years:
Year 1, $15,000
Year 2, $13,000
Year 3, $10,000
Year 4, $10,000
Year 5, $6,000
ABC Company uses the net-present-value method to analyze investments and desires a minimum rate of return of 12% on the equipment.
a. What is the net present value of the proposed investment (ignore income taxes and depreciation)?
b. Assuming a 5-year straight-line depreciation, how will this impact the factory s fixed costs for each of the 5 years (and the implied product costs)? What about cash flow?
c. Considering the cash flow impact of the equipment as well as the time-value of money, would you recommend that ABC Company purchases the equipment? Why or why not?
V. Conclusion:
a. What are the major risk factors that you see in this project?
b. As the controller and a management accountant, what is your responsibility to this project?
c. What do you recommend the CEO do?
Writing the Final Paper
1. Must be six to eight double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:
a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted
3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document at least three, but no more than five sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Critical Thinking Question:
Answer the following questions:
Why are noncash transactions, such as the exchange of common stock for a building for example, included on a statement of cash flows? How are these noncash transactions disclosed?
2. Classification of activities
Classify each of the following transactions as arising from an operating (O), investing (I), financing (F), or noncash investing/financing (N) activity.
a. ________ Received $80,000 from the sale of land.
b. ________ Received $3,200 from cash sales.
c. ________ Paid a $5,000 dividend.
d. ________ Purchased $8,800 of merchandise for cash.
e. ________ Received $100,000 from the issuance of common stock.
f. ________ Paid $1,200 of interest on a note payable.
g. ________ Acquired a new laser printer by paying $650.
h. ________ Acquired a $400,000 building by signing a $400,000 mortgage note.
3. Overview of direct and indirect methods
Evaluate the comments that follow as being True or False. If the comment is false, briefly explain why.
a. Both the direct and indirect methods will produce the same cash flow from operating activities.
b. Depreciation expense is added back to net income when the indirect method is used.
c. One of the advantages of using the direct method rather than the indirect method is that larger cash flows from financing activities will be reported.
d. The cash paid to suppliers is normally disclosed on the statement of cash flows when the indirect method of statement preparation is employed.
e. The dollar change in the Merchandise Inventory account appears on the statement of cash flows only when the direct method of statement preparation is used.
4. Equipment transaction and cash flow reporting
Dec. 31, 20X4 Dec. 31, 20X3
Property, Plant & Equipment:
Land
$94,000
$94,000
Equipment 652,000 527,000
Less: Accumulated depreciation -316,000 -341,000
New equipment purchased during 20×4 totaled $280,000. The 20×4 income statement disclosed equipment depreciation expense of $41,000 and a $9,000 loss on the sale of equipment.
a. Determine the cost and accumulated depreciation of the equipment sold during 20X4.
b. Determine the selling price of the equipment sold.
c. Show how the sale of equipment would appear on a statement of cash flows prepared by using the indirect method.
5. Cash flow information: Direct and indirect methods
The comparative year-end balance sheets of Sign Graphics, Inc., revealed the following activity in the company’s current accounts:
20X5 20X4 Increase / Decrease)
Current assets
Cash $55,400 $35,200 $20,200
Accounts receivable (net) 83,800 88,000 -4,200
Inventory 243,400 233,800 9,600
Prepaid expenses 25,400 24,200 1,200
Current liabilities
Accounts payable $123,600 $140,600 ($17,000)
Taxes payable 43,600 49,200 -5,600
Interest payable 9,000 6,400 2,600
Accrued liabilities 38,800 60,400 -21,600
Note payable 44,000 44,000
The accounts payable were for the purchase of merchandise. Prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities relate to the firm’s selling and administrative expenses. The company’s condensed income statement follows.
SIGN GRAPHICS INC.
Income Statement
for the Year Ended December 31, 20×5
Sales $713,800
Less: Cost of goods sold 323,000
Gross profit $390,800
Less: Selling & administrative expenses $186,000
Depreciation expense 17,000
Interest expense 27,000 230,000
Add: gain on sale of land $160,800
21,800
Income before taxes $182,600
Income taxes 36,800
Net income $145,800
Other data:
1. Long-term investments were purchased for cash at a cost of $74,600.
2. Cash proceeds from the sale of land totaled $76,200.
3. Store equipment of $44,000 was purchased by signing a short-term note payable. Also, a $150,000 telecommunications system was acquired by issuing 3,000 shares of preferred stock.
4. A long-term note of $49,400 was repaid.
5. Twenty thousand shares of common stock were issued at $5.19 per share.
6. The company paid cash dividends amounting to $128,600.
Instructions:
a. Prepare the operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows, assuming use of:
1. The direct method.
2. The indirect method.
b. Prepare the investing and financing activities sections of the statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Critical Thinking Question:
Answer the following questions:
Why are noncash transactions, such as the exchange of common stock for a building for example, included on a statement of cash flows? How are these noncash transactions disclosed?
2. Classification of activities
Classify each of the following transactions as arising from an operating (O), investing (I), financing (F), or noncash investing/financing (N) activity.
a. ________ Received $80,000 from the sale of land.
b. ________ Received $3,200 from cash sales.
c. ________ Paid a $5,000 dividend.
d. ________ Purchased $8,800 of merchandise for cash.
e. ________ Received $100,000 from the issuance of common stock.
f. ________ Paid $1,200 of interest on a note payable.
g. ________ Acquired a new laser printer by paying $650.
h. ________ Acquired a $400,000 building by signing a $400,000 mortgage note.
3. Overview of direct and indirect methods
Evaluate the comments that follow as being True or False. If the comment is false, briefly explain why.
a. Both the direct and indirect methods will produce the same cash flow from operating activities.
b. Depreciation expense is added back to net income when the indirect method is used.
c. One of the advantages of using the direct method rather than the indirect method is that larger cash flows from financing activities will be reported.
d. The cash paid to suppliers is normally disclosed on the statement of cash flows when the indirect method of statement preparation is employed.
e. The dollar change in the Merchandise Inventory account appears on the statement of cash flows only when the direct method of statement preparation is used.
4. Equipment transaction and cash flow reporting
Dec. 31, 20X4 Dec. 31, 20X3
Property, Plant & Equipment:
Land
$94,000
$94,000
Equipment 652,000 527,000
Less: Accumulated depreciation -316,000 -341,000
New equipment purchased during 20×4 totaled $280,000. The 20×4 income statement disclosed equipment depreciation expense of $41,000 and a $9,000 loss on the sale of equipment.
a. Determine the cost and accumulated depreciation of the equipment sold during 20X4.
b. Determine the selling price of the equipment sold.
c. Show how the sale of equipment would appear on a statement of cash flows prepared by using the indirect method.
5. Cash flow information: Direct and indirect methods
The comparative year-end balance sheets of Sign Graphics, Inc., revealed the following activity in the company’s current accounts:
20X5 20X4 Increase / Decrease)
Current assets
Cash $55,400 $35,200 $20,200
Accounts receivable (net) 83,800 88,000 -4,200
Inventory 243,400 233,800 9,600
Prepaid expenses 25,400 24,200 1,200
Current liabilities
Accounts payable $123,600 $140,600 ($17,000)
Taxes payable 43,600 49,200 -5,600
Interest payable 9,000 6,400 2,600
Accrued liabilities 38,800 60,400 -21,600
Note payable 44,000 44,000
The accounts payable were for the purchase of merchandise. Prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities relate to the firm’s selling and administrative expenses. The company’s condensed income statement follows.
SIGN GRAPHICS INC.
Income Statement
for the Year Ended December 31, 20×5
Sales $713,800
Less: Cost of goods sold 323,000
Gross profit $390,800
Less: Selling & administrative expenses $186,000
Depreciation expense 17,000
Interest expense 27,000 230,000
Add: gain on sale of land $160,800
21,800
Income before taxes $182,600
Income taxes 36,800
Net income $145,800
Other data:
1. Long-term investments were purchased for cash at a cost of $74,600.
2. Cash proceeds from the sale of land totaled $76,200.
3. Store equipment of $44,000 was purchased by signing a short-term note payable. Also, a $150,000 telecommunications system was acquired by issuing 3,000 shares of preferred stock.
4. A long-term note of $49,400 was repaid.
5. Twenty thousand shares of common stock were issued at $5.19 per share.
6. The company paid cash dividends amounting to $128,600.
Instructions:
a. Prepare the operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows, assuming use of:
1. The direct method.
2. The indirect method.
b. Prepare the investing and financing activities sections of the statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Critical Thinking Question:
Answer the following questions:
Why are noncash transactions, such as the exchange of common stock for a building for example, included on a statement of cash flows? How are these noncash transactions disclosed?
2. Classification of activities
Classify each of the following transactions as arising from an operating (O), investing (I), financing (F), or noncash investing/financing (N) activity.
a. ________ Received $80,000 from the sale of land.
b. ________ Received $3,200 from cash sales.
c. ________ Paid a $5,000 dividend.
d. ________ Purchased $8,800 of merchandise for cash.
e. ________ Received $100,000 from the issuance of common stock.
f. ________ Paid $1,200 of interest on a note payable.
g. ________ Acquired a new laser printer by paying $650.
h. ________ Acquired a $400,000 building by signing a $400,000 mortgage note.
3. Overview of direct and indirect methods
Evaluate the comments that follow as being True or False. If the comment is false, briefly explain why.
a. Both the direct and indirect methods will produce the same cash flow from operating activities.
b. Depreciation expense is added back to net income when the indirect method is used.
c. One of the advantages of using the direct method rather than the indirect method is that larger cash flows from financing activities will be reported.
d. The cash paid to suppliers is normally disclosed on the statement of cash flows when the indirect method of statement preparation is employed.
e. The dollar change in the Merchandise Inventory account appears on the statement of cash flows only when the direct method of statement preparation is used.
4. Equipment transaction and cash flow reporting
Dec. 31, 20X4 Dec. 31, 20X3
Property, Plant & Equipment:
Land
$94,000
$94,000
Equipment 652,000 527,000
Less: Accumulated depreciation -316,000 -341,000
New equipment purchased during 20×4 totaled $280,000. The 20×4 income statement disclosed equipment depreciation expense of $41,000 and a $9,000 loss on the sale of equipment.
a. Determine the cost and accumulated depreciation of the equipment sold during 20X4.
b. Determine the selling price of the equipment sold.
c. Show how the sale of equipment would appear on a statement of cash flows prepared by using the indirect method.
5. Cash flow information: Direct and indirect methods
The comparative year-end balance sheets of Sign Graphics, Inc., revealed the following activity in the company’s current accounts:
20X5 20X4 Increase / Decrease)
Current assets
Cash $55,400 $35,200 $20,200
Accounts receivable (net) 83,800 88,000 -4,200
Inventory 243,400 233,800 9,600
Prepaid expenses 25,400 24,200 1,200
Current liabilities
Accounts payable $123,600 $140,600 ($17,000)
Taxes payable 43,600 49,200 -5,600
Interest payable 9,000 6,400 2,600
Accrued liabilities 38,800 60,400 -21,600
Note payable 44,000 44,000
The accounts payable were for the purchase of merchandise. Prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities relate to the firm’s selling and administrative expenses. The company’s condensed income statement follows.
SIGN GRAPHICS INC.
Income Statement
for the Year Ended December 31, 20×5
Sales $713,800
Less: Cost of goods sold 323,000
Gross profit $390,800
Less: Selling & administrative expenses $186,000
Depreciation expense 17,000
Interest expense 27,000 230,000
Add: gain on sale of land $160,800
21,800
Income before taxes $182,600
Income taxes 36,800
Net income $145,800
Other data:
1. Long-term investments were purchased for cash at a cost of $74,600.
2. Cash proceeds from the sale of land totaled $76,200.
3. Store equipment of $44,000 was purchased by signing a short-term note payable. Also, a $150,000 telecommunications system was acquired by issuing 3,000 shares of preferred stock.
4. A long-term note of $49,400 was repaid.
5. Twenty thousand shares of common stock were issued at $5.19 per share.
6. The company paid cash dividends amounting to $128,600.
Instructions:
a. Prepare the operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows, assuming use of:
1. The direct method.
2. The indirect method.
b. Prepare the investing and financing activities sections of the statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week 4 Assignment: Chapter 6 and 7 Problems
Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 6 Problem 3
1. Comprehensive budgeting
The balance sheet of Watson Company as of December 31, 20X1, follows.
|
WATSON COMPANY
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
December 31, 12X1
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$4,595
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
10,000
|
|
Finished goods (575 units x $7.00)
|
|
4,025
|
|
Direct materials (2,760 units x $0.50)
|
|
1,380
|
|
Plant & equipment
|
$50,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
10,000
|
40,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$60,000
|
|
Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable to suppliers
|
|
$14,000
|
|
Common stock
|
$25,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
21,000
|
46,000
|
|
Total liabilities &. stockholders’ equity
|
|
$60,000
|
The following information has been extracted from the firm’s accounting records:
1.
All sales are made on account at $20 per unit. Sixty percent of the sales are collected in the month of sale; the remaining 40% are collected in the following month. Forecasted sales for the first five months of 20X2 are: January, 1,500 units,- February, 1,600 units; March, 1,800 units; April, 2,000 units; May, 2,100 units.
2.
Management wants to maintain the finished goods inventory at 30% of the following month’s sales.
3.
Watson uses four units of direct material in each finished unit. The direct material price has been stable and is expected to remain so over the next six months. Management wants to maintain the ending direct materials inventory at 60% of the following month’s production needs.
4.
Seventy percent of all purchases are paid in the month of purchase; the remaining 30% are paid in the subsequent month.
5.
Watson’s product requires 30 minutes of direct labor time. Each hour of direct labor costs $7.
Instructions:
a.
Rounding computations to the nearest dollar, prepare the following for January through March:
1) Sales budget
2) Schedule of cash collections
3) Production budget
4) Direct material purchases budget
5) Schedule of cash disbursements for material purchases
6) Direct labor budget
b.
Determine the balances in the following accounts as of March 31:
1) Accounts Receivable
2) Direct Materials
3) Accounts Payable
Chapter 7 Problem 1
2. Basic flexible budgeting
Centron, Inc., has the following budgeted production costs:
|
Direct materials
|
$0.40 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.80 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
2.20 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
|
Supervision
|
$24,000
|
|
Maintenance
|
18,000
|
|
Other
|
12,000
|
The company normally manufactures between 20,000 and 25,000 units each quarter. Should output exceed 25,000 units, maintenance and other fixed costs are expected to increase by $6,000 and $4,500, respectively.
During the recent quarter ended March 31, Centron produced 25,500 units and incurred the following costs:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
$10,710
|
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
47,175
|
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
51,940
|
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
|
|
|
|
Supervision
|
|
24,500
|
|
|
Maintenance
|
|
23,700
|
|
|
Other
|
|
16,800
|
|
|
Total production costs
|
|
$174,825
|
|
Instructions:
a.
Prepare a flexible budget for 20,000, 22,500, and 25,000 units of activity.
b.
Was Centron’s experience in the quarter cited better or worse than anticipated? Prepare an appropriate performance report and explain your answer.
c.
Explain the benefit of using flexible budgets (as opposed to static budgets) in the measurement of performance.
Chapter 7 Problem 5
3. Straightforward variance analysis
Arrow Enterprises uses a standard costing system. The standard cost sheet for product no. 549 follows.
|
Direct materials: 4 units @ $6.50
|
|
$26.00
|
|
Direct labor: 8 hours @ $8.50
|
|
68
|
|
Variable factory overhead: 8 hours
|
@ $7.00
|
56
|
|
Fixed factory overhead: 8 hours
|
@ 2.5
|
20
|
|
Total standard cost per unit
|
|
$170.00
|
The following information pertains to activity for December:
1.
Direct materials acquired during the month amounted to 26,350 units at $6.40 per unit. All materials were consumed in operations.
2.
Arrow incurred an average wage rate of $8.75 for 51,400 hours of activity.
3.
Total overhead incurred amounted to $508,400. Budgeted fixed overhead totals $1.8 million and is spread evenly throughout the year.
4.
Actual production amounted to 6,500 completed units.
Instructions:
a.
Compute Arrow’s direct material variances.
b.
Compute Arrow’s direct labor variances.
c.
Compute Arrow’s variances for factory overhead.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week One Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Critical Thinking Question:
Answer the following questions:
What is the purpose of the statement of cash flows? What are the three main categories and give examples for each category?
2.Classification of activities
Classify each of the following transactions as arising from an operating (O), investing (I), financing (F), or noncash investing/financing (N) activity.
a. ________ Acquired a new laser printer by paying $950.
b. ________ Received $70,000 from the issuance of common stock.
c. ________ Paid $1,500 of interest on a note payable.
d. ________ Purchased $9,800 of merchandise for cash.
e. ________ Received $10,200 from cash sales.
f. ________ Paid a $15,000 dividend.
g. ________ Acquired a $500,000 building by signing a $500,000 mortgage note.
h. ________ Received $60,000 from the sale of land.
3. Overview of direct and indirect methods
Evaluate the comments that follow as being True or False. If the comment is false, briefly explain why.
a. The dollar change in the Merchandise Inventory account appears on the statement of cash flows only when the direct method of statement preparation is used.
b. Depreciation expense is added back to net income when the indirect method is used.
c. The cash paid to suppliers is normally disclosed on the statement of cash flows when the indirect method of statement preparation is employed.
d. One of the advantages of using the direct method rather than the indirect method is that larger cash flows from financing activities will be reported.
e. Both the direct and indirect methods will produce the same cash flow from operating activities.
4. Equipment transaction and cash flow reporting
|
Property, plant, & equipment
|
Dec. 31, 20X8
|
Dec. 31, 20X7
|
|
Land
|
$72,000
|
$72,000
|
|
Equipment
|
630,000
|
520,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
-308,000
|
-325,000
|
New equipment purchased during 20×8 totaled $175,000. The 20×8 income statement disclosed equipment depreciation expense of $34,000 and a $2,000 loss on the sale of equipment.
a. Determine the cost and accumulated depreciation of the equipment sold during 20X8.
b. Determine the selling price of the equipment sold.
c. Show how the sale of equipment would appear on a statement of cash flows prepared by using the indirect method.
5.Cash flow information: Direct and indirect methods
The comparative year-end balance sheets of USA Graphics, Inc., revealed the following activity in the company’s current accounts:
|
20X8
|
20X7
|
Increase / Decrease)
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$55,400
|
$35,200
|
$20,200
|
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
83,800
|
88,000
|
-4,200
|
|
|
Inventory
|
243,400
|
233,800
|
9,600
|
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
25,400
|
24,200
|
1,200
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$123,600
|
$140,600
|
($17,000)
|
|
|
Taxes payable
|
43,600
|
49,200
|
-5,600
|
|
|
Interest payable
|
9,000
|
6,400
|
2,600
|
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
38,800
|
60,400
|
-21,600
|
|
|
Note payable
|
44,000
|
|
44,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The accounts payable were for the purchase of merchandise. Prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities relate to the firm’s selling and administrative expenses. The company’s condensed income statement follows.
|
USA GRAPHICS INC.
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
for the Year Ended December 31, 20X8
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sales
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$691,800
|
|
|
Less: Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
|
223,000
|
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
|
|
|
|
$468,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Less: Selling & administrative expenses
|
|
$177,000
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
|
|
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
|
|
|
|
27,000
|
|
222,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Add: gain on sale of land
|
|
|
|
|
$246,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
18,800
|
|
|
Income before taxes
|
|
|
|
|
$265,600
|
|
|
Income taxes
|
|
|
|
|
|
38,300
|
|
|
Net income
|
|
|
|
|
|
$227,300
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other data:
1. Long-term investments were purchased for cash at a cost of $64,200.
2. Cash proceeds from the sale of land totaled $74,200.
3. Store equipment of $34,000 was purchased by signing a short-term note payable. Also, a $140,000 telecommunications system was acquired by issuing 3,000 shares of preferred stock.
4. A long-term note of $42,200 was repaid.
5. Twenty thousand shares of common stock were issued at $5.19 per share.
6. The company paid cash dividends amounting to $125,000.
Instructions:
a. Prepare the operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows, assuming use of:
1. The direct method.
2. The indirect method.
b. Prepare the investing and financing activities sections of the statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please complete the following five exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Overhead application: Working backward
The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
Division A Division B
Actual machine hours 22,500 ?
Estimated machine hours 20,000 ?
Overhead application rate $4.50 $5.00
Actual overhead $110,000 ?
Estimated overhead ? $90,000
Applied overhead ? $86,000
Over- (under-) applied overhead ? $6,500
FIND THE UNKNOWNS FOR EACH OF THE DIVISIONS.
2. Computations using a job order system
General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
Work in process $ 35,200
Finished goods 86,900
Cost of goods sold 128,700
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
Direct Materials Direct Labor
Job No. Amount Job No. Amount
101 $5,000 101 $7,800
115 19,500 103 20,800
116 36,200 115 42,000
Other 35,800 116 18,000
$96,500 Other 25,900
$114,500
Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.
b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.
c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.
d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.
3. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 20X6 operations of Heritage Products:
Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarter 3 Quarter 4
Shipping costs $58,200 $58,620 $60,125 $59,400
Orders shipped 120 140 175 150
The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
a. Determine the variable cost per order shipped.
b. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.
c. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 20X7 if activity amounts to 570 orders.
4. Break-even and other CVP relationships
Cedars Hospital has average revenue of $180 per patient day. Variable costs are $45 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,320,000 per year.
a. How many patient days does the hospital need to break even?
b. What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $540,000?
c. If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?
5. Direct and absorption costing
The information that follows pertains to Consumer Products for the year ended December 31, 20X6.
Inventory, 1/1/X6 24,000 units
Units manufactured 80,000
Units sold 82,000
Inventory, 12/31/X6 ? units
Manufacturing costs:
Direct materials $3 per unit
Direct labor $5 per unit
Variable factory overhead $9 per unit
Fixed factory overhead $280,000
Selling & administrative expenses:
Variable $2 per unit
Fixed $136,000
The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Instructions:
a. Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.
b. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:
1. Direct costing.
2. Absorption costing.
c. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using direct costing.
d. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using absorption costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Overhead application: Working backward
The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
Division A Division B
Actual machine hours 22,500 ?
Estimated machine hours 20,000 ?
Overhead application rate $4.50 $5.00
Actual overhead $110,000 ?
Estimated overhead ? $90,000
Applied overhead ? $86,000
Over- (under-) applied overhead ? $6,500
FIND THE UNKNOWNS FOR EACH OF THE DIVISIONS.
2. Computations using a job order system
General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
Work in process $ 35,200
Finished goods 86,900
Cost of goods sold 128,700
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
Direct Materials Direct Labor
Job No. Amount Job No. Amount
101 $5,000 101 $7,800
115 19,500 103 20,800
116 36,200 115 42,000
Other 35,800 116 18,000
$96,500 Other 25,900
$114,500
Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.
b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.
c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.
d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.
3. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 20X6 operations of Heritage Products:
Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarter 3 Quarter 4
Shipping costs $58,200 $58,620 $60,125 $59,400
Orders shipped 120 140 175 150
The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
a. Determine the variable cost per order shipped.
b. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.
c. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 20X7 if activity amounts to 570 orders.
4. Break-even and other CVP relationships
Cedars Hospital has average revenue of $180 per patient day. Variable costs are $45 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,320,000 per year.
a. How many patient days does the hospital need to break even?
b. What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $540,000?
c. If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?
5. Direct and absorption costing
The information that follows pertains to Consumer Products for the year ended December 31, 20X6.
Inventory, 1/1/X6 24,000 units
Units manufactured 80,000
Units sold 82,000
Inventory, 12/31/X6 ? units
Manufacturing costs:
Direct materials $3 per unit
Direct labor $5 per unit
Variable factory overhead $9 per unit
Fixed factory overhead $280,000
Selling & administrative expenses:
Variable $2 per unit
Fixed $136,000
The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Instructions:
a. Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.
b. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:
1. Direct costing.
2. Absorption costing.
c. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using direct costing.
d. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using absorption costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter Two and Three Problems
Chapter 2 Exercise 1
1. Issuance of stock
Prepare journal entries to record the issuance of 100,000 shares of common stock at $20 per share for each of the following independent cases:
- Jackson Corporation has common stock with a par value of $1 per share.
- Royal Corporation has no-par common with a stated value of $5 per share.
- French Corporation has no-par common; no stated value has been assigned
Chapter 2 Exercise 3
3. Analysis of stockholders equity
Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X6. The stockholders equity sections of the company s balance sheets at the end of 20X6 and 20X5 follow.
|
20X6
|
20X5
|
|
Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10%
|
$580,000
|
$500,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par value
|
2,350,000
|
1,750,000
|
|
|
|
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par value
|
|
|
|
Preferred
|
24,000
|
|
|
Common
|
4,620,000
|
3,600,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
8,470,000
|
6,920,000
|
|
Total stockholders equity
|
$16,044,000
|
$12,770,000
|
- Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X6.
- Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X6.
- By what amount did the company s paid-in capital increase during 20X6?
- Did Star s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X6? By what amount?
Chapter 2 Problem 1
1. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization
Southlake Corporation issued $900,000 of 8% bonds on March 1, 20X1. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow.
- Case A The bonds are issued at 100.
- Case B The bonds are issued at 96.
- Case C The bonds are issued at 105.
Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization.
Instructions:
|
Complete the following table:
|
|
|
|
|
Case A
|
Case B
|
Case C
|
- Cash inflow on the issuance date
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Total cash outflow through maturity
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Amortization for the year ended December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Unamortized premium as of December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Unamortized discount as of December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Bond carrying value as of December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
Chapter 3 Exercise 1
1. Product costs and period costs
The costs that follow were extracted from the accounting records of several different manufacturers:
- Weekly wages of an equipment maintenance worker
- Marketing costs of a soft drink bottler
- Cost of sheet metal in a Honda automobile
- Cost of president s subscription to Fortune magazine
- Monthly operating costs of pollution control equipment used in a steel mill
- Weekly wages of a seamstress employed by a jeans maker
- Cost of compact discs (CDs) for newly recorded releases of Rush, Billy Joel, and Bryan Adams
- Determine which of these costs are product costs and which are period costs.
- For the product costs only, determine those that are easily traced to the finished product and those that are not.
Chapter 3 Exercise 2
2. Definitions of manufacturing concepts
Interstate Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:
Materials and supplies used
Brass $75,000
Repair parts 16,000
Machine lubricants 9,000
Wages and salaries Machine operators 128,000
Production supervisors 64,000
Maintenance personnel 41,000
Other factory overhead Variable 35,000
Fixed 46,000
Sales commissions 20,000
Compute:
- Total direct materials consumed
- Total direct labor
- Total prime cost
- Total conversion cost
Chapter 3 Exercise 5
5. Schedule of cost of goods manufactured, income statement
The following information was taken from the ledger of Jefferson Industries, Inc.:
|
Direct labor
|
$85,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$59,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
34,000
|
|
Work in. process
|
|
|
Sales
|
300,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
29,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
|
|
Dec. 31
|
21,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
115,000
|
|
Direct material purchases
|
88,000
|
|
Dec. 31
|
131,000
|
|
Depreciation: factory
|
18,000
|
|
Raw (direct) materials on hand
|
Indirect materials used
|
10,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
31,000
|
|
Indirect labor
|
24,000
|
|
Dec. 31
|
40,000
|
|
Factory taxes
|
8,000
|
|
|
|
Factory utilities
|
11,000
|
Prepare the following:
- A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.
- An income statement for the year ended December 31.
Chapter 3 Problem 3
Manufacturing statements and cost behavior
Tampa Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $36 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.
|
Per Unit
|
Variable Cost
|
Fixed Cost
|
|
Direct materials
|
$4.50
|
$
|
|
Direct labor
|
6.5
|
|
|
Factory overhead
|
9
|
50,000
|
|
Selling
|
|
70,000
|
|
Administrative
|
|
135,000
|
Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 17,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Tampa carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.
Instructions:
- Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.
- Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
- On the basis of the information presented:
Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
What is the likely effect on the $4.50 unit cost of direct materials if next year s production increases? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Two Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Analysis of stockholders’ equity
Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X8. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 20X8 and 20X7 follow.
| |
20X8
|
20X7
|
|
Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10%
|
$600,000
|
$500,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par value
|
2,350,000
|
1,550,000
|
| |
|
|
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par value
|
|
|
|
Preferred
|
24,000
|
|
|
Common
|
4,620,000
|
3,600,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
8,470,000
|
6,920,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$16,064,000
|
$12,570,000
|
a. Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X8.
b. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X8.
c. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 20X8?
d. Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X8? By what amount?
2. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization
Northern Corporation issued $800,000 of 7% bonds on March 1, 20X8. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow.
Case A The bonds are issued at 100.
Case B The bonds are issued at 96.
Case C The bonds are issued at 105.
Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization.
Instructions:
|
Complete the following table:
|
|
|
|
| |
Case A
|
Case B
|
Case C
|
- Cash inflow on the issuance date
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Total cash outflow through maturity
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Amortization for the year ended December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Unamortized premium as of December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Unamortized discount as of December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Bond carrying value as of December 31, 20X8
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
3. Definitions of manufacturing concepts
J & B Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:
Materials and supplies used
Brass $80,000
Repair parts 18,000
Machine lubricants 8,000
Wages and salaries Machine operators 140,000
Production supervisors 62,000
Maintenance personnel 39,000
Other factory overhead Variable 29,000
Fixed 48,000
Sales commissions 20,000
Compute:
a. Total direct materials consumed
b. Total direct labor
c. Total prime cost
d. Total conversion cost
4. Schedule of cost of goods manufactured, income statement
The following information was taken from the ledger of Jakob Industries, Inc.:
|
Direct labor
|
$75,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$63,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
36,000
|
|
Work in. process
|
|
|
Sales
|
310,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
32,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
|
|
Dec. 31
|
21,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
115,000
|
|
Direct material purchases
|
87,000
|
|
Dec. 31
|
131,000
|
|
Depreciation: factory
|
21,000
|
|
Raw (direct) materials on hand
|
Indirect materials used
|
11,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
31,000
|
|
Indirect labor
|
26,000
|
|
Dec. 31
|
40,000
|
|
Factory taxes
|
8,000
|
| |
|
|
Factory utilities
|
12,000
|
Prepare the following:
a. A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.
b. An income statement for the year ended December 31.
5. Manufacturing statements and cost behavior
Sioux Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $38 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.
|
Per Unit
|
Variable Cost
|
Fixed Cost
|
|
Direct materials
|
$4.00
|
$
|
|
Direct labor
|
7.0
|
|
|
Factory overhead
|
9.0
|
70,000
|
|
Selling
|
|
80,000
|
|
Administrative
|
|
135,000
|
Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 18,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Sioux carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.
Instructions:
a. Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.
b. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
c. On the basis of the information presented:
1. Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
2. What is the likely effect on the $4.00 unit cost of direct materials if next year’s production increases? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter Two and Three Problems
Please complete the following 7 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 2 Exercise 1
1. Issuance of stock
Prepare journal entries to record the issuance of 100,000 shares of common stock at $20 per share for each of the following independent cases:
- Jackson Corporation has common stock with a par value of $1 per share.
- Royal Corporation has no-par common with a stated value of $5 per share.
- French Corporation has no-par common; no stated value has been assigned
Chapter 2 Exercise 3
3. Analysis of stockholders equity
Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X6. The stockholders equity sections of the company s balance sheets at the end of 20X6 and 20X5 follow.
|
20X6
|
20X5
|
| Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10% |
$580,000
|
$500,000
|
| Common stock, $10 par value |
2,350,000
|
1,750,000
|
|
|
|
| Paid-in capital in excess of par value |
|
|
| Preferred |
24,000
|
|
| Common |
4,620,000
|
3,600,000
|
| Retained earnings |
8,470,000
|
6,920,000
|
| Total stockholders equity |
$16,044,000
|
$12,770,000
|
- Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X6.
- Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X6.
- By what amount did the company s paid-in capital increase during 20X6?
- Did Star s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X6? By what amount?
Chapter 2 Problem 1
1. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization
Southlake Corporation issued $900,000 of 8% bonds on March 1, 20X1. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow.
- Case A The bonds are issued at 100.
- Case B The bonds are issued at 96.
- Case C The bonds are issued at 105.
Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization.
Instructions:
| Complete the following table: |
|
|
|
|
Case A
|
Case B
|
Case C
|
- Cash inflow on the issuance date
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Total cash outflow through maturity
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Amortization for the year ended December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Unamortized premium as of December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Unamortized discount as of December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Bond carrying value as of December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
Chapter 3 Exercise 1
1. Product costs and period costs
The costs that follow were extracted from the accounting records of several different manufacturers:
- Weekly wages of an equipment maintenance worker
- Marketing costs of a soft drink bottler
- Cost of sheet metal in a Honda automobile
- Cost of president s subscription to Fortune magazine
- Monthly operating costs of pollution control equipment used in a steel mill
- Weekly wages of a seamstress employed by a jeans maker
- Cost of compact discs (CDs) for newly recorded releases of Rush, Billy Joel, and Bryan Adams
- Determine which of these costs are product costs and which are period costs.
- For the product costs only, determine those that are easily traced to the finished product and those that are not.
Chapter 3 Exercise 2
2. Definitions of manufacturing concepts
Interstate Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:
Materials and supplies used
Brass $75,000
Repair parts 16,000
Machine lubricants 9,000
Wages and salaries Machine operators 128,000
Production supervisors 64,000
Maintenance personnel 41,000
Other factory overhead Variable 35,000
Fixed 46,000
Sales commissions 20,000
Compute:
- Total direct materials consumed
- Total direct labor
- Total prime cost
- Total conversion cost
Chapter 3 Exercise 5
5. Scheduleof cost of goods manufactured, income statement
The following information was taken from the ledger of Jefferson Industries, Inc.:
| Direct labor |
$85,000
|
|
Administrative expenses |
$59,000
|
| Selling expenses |
34,000
|
|
Work in. process |
|
| Sales |
300,000
|
|
Jan. 1 |
29,000
|
| Finished goods |
|
|
Dec. 31 |
21,000
|
| Jan. 1 |
115,000
|
|
Direct material purchases |
88,000
|
| Dec. 31 |
131,000
|
|
Depreciation: factory |
18,000
|
| Raw (direct) materials on hand |
Indirect materials used |
10,000
|
| Jan. 1 |
31,000
|
|
Indirect labor |
24,000
|
| Dec. 31 |
40,000
|
|
Factory taxes |
8,000
|
|
|
|
Factory utilities |
11,000
|
Prepare the following:
- A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.
- An income statement for the year ended December 31.
Chapter 3 Problem 3
3. Manufacturing statements and cost behavior
Tampa Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $36 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.
| Per Unit |
Variable Cost
|
Fixed Cost
|
| Direct materials |
$4.50
|
$
|
| Direct labor |
6.5
|
|
| Factory overhead |
9
|
50,000
|
| Selling |
|
70,000
|
| Administrative |
|
135,000
|
Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 17,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Tampa carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.
Instructions:
- Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.
- Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
- On the basis of the information presented:
- Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
- What is the likely effect on the $4.50 unit cost of direct materials if next year s production increases? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter 2 Exercise 1
1. Issuance of stock
Prepare journal entries to record the issuance of 100,000 shares of common stock at $20 per share for each of the following independent cases:
- Jackson Corporation has common stock with a par value of $1 per share.
- Royal Corporation has no-par common with a stated value of $5 per share.
- French Corporation has no-par common; no stated value has been assigned
Chapter 2 Exercise 3
3. Analysis of stockholders equity
Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X6. The stockholders equity sections of the company s balance sheets at the end of 20X6 and 20X5 follow.
|
20X6
|
20X5
|
| Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10% |
$580,000
|
$500,000
|
| Common stock, $10 par value |
2,350,000
|
1,750,000
|
|
|
|
| Paid-in capital in excess of par value |
|
|
| Preferred |
24,000
|
|
| Common |
4,620,000
|
3,600,000
|
| Retained earnings |
8,470,000
|
6,920,000
|
| Total stockholders equity |
$16,044,000
|
$12,770,000
|
- Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X6.
- Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X6.
- By what amount did the company s paid-in capital increase during 20X6?
- Did Star s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X6? By what amount?
Chapter 2 Problem 1
1. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization
Southlake Corporation issued $900,000 of 8% bonds on March 1, 20X1. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow.
- Case A The bonds are issued at 100.
- Case B The bonds are issued at 96.
- Case C The bonds are issued at 105.
Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization.
Instructions:
| Complete the following table: |
|
|
|
|
Case A
|
Case B
|
Case C
|
- Cash inflow on the issuance date
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Total cash outflow through maturity
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Amortization for the year ended December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Unamortized premium as of December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Unamortized discount as of December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Bond carrying value as of December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
Chapter 3 Exercise 1
1. Product costs and period costs
The costs that follow were extracted from the accounting records of several different manufacturers:
- Weekly wages of an equipment maintenance worker
- Marketing costs of a soft drink bottler
- Cost of sheet metal in a Honda automobile
- Cost of president s subscription to Fortune magazine
- Monthly operating costs of pollution control equipment used in a steel mill
- Weekly wages of a seamstress employed by a jeans maker
- Cost of compact discs (CDs) for newly recorded releases of Rush, Billy Joel, and Bryan Adams
- Determine which of these costs are product costs and which are period costs.
- For the product costs only, determine those that are easily traced to the finished product and those that are not.
Chapter 3 Exercise 2
2. Definitions of manufacturing concepts
Interstate Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:
Materials and supplies used
Brass $75,000
Repair parts 16,000
Machine lubricants 9,000
Wages and salaries Machine operators 128,000
Production supervisors 64,000
Maintenance personnel 41,000
Other factory overhead Variable 35,000
Fixed 46,000
Sales commissions 20,000
Compute:
- Total direct materials consumed
- Total direct labor
- Total prime cost
- Total conversion cost
Chapter 3 Exercise 5
5. Scheduleof cost of goods manufactured, income statement
The following information was taken from the ledger of Jefferson Industries, Inc.:
| Direct labor |
$85,000
|
|
Administrative expenses |
$59,000
|
| Selling expenses |
34,000
|
|
Work in. process |
|
| Sales |
300,000
|
|
Jan. 1 |
29,000
|
| Finished goods |
|
|
Dec. 31 |
21,000
|
| Jan. 1 |
115,000
|
|
Direct material purchases |
88,000
|
| Dec. 31 |
131,000
|
|
Depreciation: factory |
18,000
|
| Raw (direct) materials on hand |
Indirect materials used |
10,000
|
| Jan. 1 |
31,000
|
|
Indirect labor |
24,000
|
| Dec. 31 |
40,000
|
|
Factory taxes |
8,000
|
|
|
|
Factory utilities |
11,000
|
Prepare the following:
- A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.
- An income statement for the year ended December 31.
Chapter 3 Problem 3
3. Manufacturing statements and cost behavior
Tampa Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $36 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.
| Per Unit |
Variable Cost
|
Fixed Cost
|
| Direct materials |
$4.50
|
$
|
| Direct labor |
6.5
|
|
| Factory overhead |
9
|
50,000
|
| Selling |
|
70,000
|
| Administrative |
|
135,000
|
Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 17,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Tampa carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.
Instructions:
- Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.
- Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
- On the basis of the information presented:
- Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
- What is the likely effect on the $4.50 unit cost of direct materials if next year s production increases? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week Three Assignment
Please complete the following five exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Overhead application: Working backward
The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
|
Division A
|
Division B
|
|
Actual machine hours
|
22,500
|
?
|
|
Estimated machine hours
|
20,000
|
?
|
|
Overhead application rate
|
$4.50
|
$5.00
|
|
Actual overhead
|
$110,000
|
?
|
|
Estimated overhead
|
?
|
$90,000
|
|
Applied overhead
|
?
|
$86,000
|
|
Over- (under-) applied overhead
|
?
|
$6,500
|
Find the unknowns for each of the divisions.
2. Computationsusing a job order system
General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
Work in process $ 35,200
Finished goods 86,900
Cost of goods sold 128,700
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
101
|
|
$5,000
|
|
101
|
|
$7,800
|
|
115
|
|
19,500
|
|
103
|
|
20,800
|
|
116
|
|
36,200
|
|
115
|
|
42,000
|
|
Other
|
|
35,800
|
|
116
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
$96,500
|
|
Other
|
|
25,900
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$114,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.
b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.
c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.
d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.
3. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 20X6 operations of Heritage Products:
|
Quarter 1
|
Quarter 2
|
Quarter 3
|
Quarter 4
|
|
Shipping costs
|
$58,200
|
$58,620
|
$60,125
|
$59,400
|
|
Orders shipped
|
120
|
140
|
175
|
150
|
The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
a. Determine the variable cost per order shipped.
b. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.
c. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 20X7 if activity amounts to 570 orders.
4. Break-even and other CVP relationships
Cedars Hospital has average revenue of $180 per patient day. Variable costs are $45 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,320,000 per year.
a. How many patient days does the hospital need to break even?
b. What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $540,000?
c. If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?
5. Direct and absorption costing
The information that follows pertains to Consumer Products for the year ended December 31, 20X6.
|
Inventory, 1/1/X6
|
24,000 units
|
|
Units manufactured
|
80,000
|
|
Units sold
|
82,000
|
|
Inventory, 12/31/X6
|
? units
|
|
Manufacturing costs:
|
|
Direct materials
|
$3 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
$5 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
$9 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
$280,000
|
|
Selling & administrative expenses:
|
|
Variable
|
$2 per unit
|
|
Fixed
|
$136,000
|
The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Instructions:
a. Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.
b. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:
1. Direct costing.
2. Absorption costing.
c. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using direct costing.
d. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using absorption costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please complete the following 7 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 4 Exercise 3
3. Cost flows and overhead application
Cleveland Metals uses a job cost system and applies factory overhead to production at a predetermined rate of 180% of direct labor cost. Data pertaining to recent operations follow.
Job no. 636 was the only job in process on January 1 of the current year. The Work in Process account contained a $24,600 balance on this date. Jobs no. 637, 638, and 639 were started during January. Total direct material requisitions and direct labor incurred during January amounted to $89,200 and $114,500, respectively. The only job that remained in process on January 31 was job no. 638, with costs of $15,000 for direct materials and $20,000 for direct labor.
Compute the total cost of the work in process inventory on January 31. Compute the cost of jobs completed during January, and present the proper journal entry to reflect job completion. Chapter 4 Exercise 7
7. Overhead application: Working backward
The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
Division A
Division B
Actual machine hours
22,500
?
Estimated machine hours
20,000
?
Overhead application rate
$4.50
$5.00
Actual overhead
$110,000
?
Estimated overhead
?
$90,000
Applied overhead
?
$86,000
Over- (under-) applied overhead
?
$6,500
Find the unknowns for each of the divisions.
Chapter 4 Problem 2
2. Computations using a job order system
General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
Work in process $ 35,200
Finished goods 86,900
Cost of goods sold 128,700
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
Document*
Date
Department
Hours
Amount
MR 1165
19-Mar
Machining
$5,600
MR 1169
21-Mar
Machining
3,500
TT 1450-52
23-Mar
Machining
45
400
MUR 46
23-Mar
Machining
105
MR 4330
27-Mar
Finishing
700
TT 1475-76
31-Mar
Machining
30
300
MUR 47
31-Mar
Machining
50
TT 6608-13
31-Mar
Finishing
200
2,000
Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
Compute the total overhead applied to production during May. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31. Chapter 5 Exercise 1
1. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 19X6 operations of Heritage Products:
Quarter 1
Quarter 2
Quarter 3
Quarter 4
Shipping costs
$58,200
$58,620
$60,125
$59,400
Orders shipped
120
140
175
150
The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
Determine the variable cost per order shipped. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 19X7 if activity amounts to 570 orders. Chapter 5 Exercise 2
The treasurer anticipates the following costs for the event, which will be held at the Regency Hotel:
Room rental $300
Dinner cost (per person) 25
Chartered buses 500
Favors and souvenirs (per person) 5
Band 900
Each person would pay $40 to attend; 200 attendees are expected.
Will the event be profitable for the sorority? Show computations. How many people must attend for the sorority to break even? Suppose the sorority encouraged its members to drive to the hotel and did not charter the buses. Further, a planned menu change will reduce the cost per meal by $2. If each member will still be charged $40, compute the contribution margin per person. Chapter 5 Exercise 3
3. Break-even and other CVP relationships
Cedars Hospital has average revenue of $180 per patient day. Variable costs are $45 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,320,000 per year.
How many patient days does the hospital need to break even? What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $540,000? If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)? Chapter 5 Problem 6
6. Direct and absorption costing
The information that follows pertains to Consumer Products for the year ended December 31, 19X6.
Inventory, 1/1/X6
24,000 units
Units manufactured
80,000
Units sold
82,000
Inventory, 12/31/X6
? units
Manufacturing costs:
Direct materials
$3 per unit
Direct labor
$5 per unit
Variable factory overhead
$9 per unit
Fixed factory overhead
$280,000
Selling & administrative expenses:
Variable
$2 per unit
Fixed
$136,000
Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Instructions:
Compute the number of units in the ending inventory. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of: Direct costing. Absorption costing. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 19X6, by using direct costing. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 19X6, by using absorption costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please complete the following 7 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 4 Exercise 3
3. Cost flows and overhead application
Cleveland Metals uses a job cost system and applies factory overhead to production at a predetermined rate of 180% of direct labor cost. Data pertaining to recent operations follow.
Job no. 636 was the only job in process on January 1 of the current year. The Work in Process account contained a $24,600 balance on this date. Jobs no. 637, 638, and 639 were started during January. Total direct material requisitions and direct labor incurred during January amounted to $89,200 and $114,500, respectively. The only job that remained in process on January 31 was job no. 638, with costs of $15,000 for direct materials and $20,000 for direct labor.
Compute the total cost of the work in process inventory on January 31. Compute the cost of jobs completed during January, and present the proper journal entry to reflect job completion. Chapter 4 Exercise 7
7. Overhead application: Working backward
The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
Division A
Division B
Actual machine hours
22,500
?
Estimated machine hours
20,000
?
Overhead application rate
$4.50
$5.00
Actual overhead
$110,000
?
Estimated overhead
?
$90,000
Applied overhead
?
$86,000
Over- (under-) applied overhead
?
$6,500
Find the unknowns for each of the divisions.
Chapter 4 Problem 2
2. Computations using a job order system
General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
Work in process $ 35,200
Finished goods 86,900
Cost of goods sold 128,700
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
Document*
Date
Department
Hours
Amount
MR 1165
19-Mar
Machining
$5,600
MR 1169
21-Mar
Machining
3,500
TT 1450-52
23-Mar
Machining
45
400
MUR 46
23-Mar
Machining
105
MR 4330
27-Mar
Finishing
700
TT 1475-76
31-Mar
Machining
30
300
MUR 47
31-Mar
Machining
50
TT 6608-13
31-Mar
Finishing
200
2,000
Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
Compute the total overhead applied to production during May. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31. Chapter 5 Exercise 1
1. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 19X6 operations of Heritage Products:
Quarter 1
Quarter 2
Quarter 3
Quarter 4
Shipping costs
$58,200
$58,620
$60,125
$59,400
Orders shipped
120
140
175
150
The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
Determine the variable cost per order shipped. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 19X7 if activity amounts to 570 orders. Chapter 5 Exercise 2
The treasurer anticipates the following costs for the event, which will be held at the Regency Hotel:
Room rental $300
Dinner cost (per person) 25
Chartered buses 500
Favors and souvenirs (per person) 5
Band 900
Each person would pay $40 to attend; 200 attendees are expected.
Will the event be profitable for the sorority? Show computations. How many people must attend for the sorority to break even? Suppose the sorority encouraged its members to drive to the hotel and did not charter the buses. Further, a planned menu change will reduce the cost per meal by $2. If each member will still be charged $40, compute the contribution margin per person. Chapter 5 Exercise 3
3. Break-even and other CVP relationships
Cedars Hospital has average revenue of $180 per patient day. Variable costs are $45 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,320,000 per year.
How many patient days does the hospital need to break even? What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $540,000? If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)? Chapter 5 Problem 6
6. Direct and absorption costing
The information that follows pertains to Consumer Products for the year ended December 31, 19X6.
Inventory, 1/1/X6
24,000 units
Units manufactured
80,000
Units sold
82,000
Inventory, 12/31/X6
? units
Manufacturing costs:
Direct materials
$3 per unit
Direct labor
$5 per unit
Variable factory overhead
$9 per unit
Fixed factory overhead
$280,000
Selling & administrative expenses:
Variable
$2 per unit
Fixed
$136,000
Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Instructions:
Compute the number of units in the ending inventory. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of: Direct costing. Absorption costing. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 19X6, by using direct costing. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 19X6, by using absorption costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter 4 and 5 Problems
Please complete the following 7 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 4 Exercise 3
3. Cost flows and overhead application
Cleveland Metals uses a job cost system and applies factory overhead to production at a predetermined rate of 180% of direct labor cost. Data pertaining to recent operations follow.
Job no. 636 was the only job in process on January 1 of the current year. The Work in Process account contained a $24,600 balance on this date. Jobs no. 637, 638, and 639 were started during January. Total direct material requisitions and direct labor incurred during January amounted to $89,200 and $114,500, respectively. The only job that remained in process on January 31 was job no. 638, with costs of $15,000 for direct materials and $20,000 for direct labor.
Compute the total cost of the work in process inventory on January 31. Compute the cost of jobs completed during January, and present the proper journal entry to reflect job completion. Chapter 4 Exercise 7
7. Overhead application: Working backward
The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
Division A
Division B
Actual machine hours
22,500
?
Estimated machine hours
20,000
?
Overhead application rate
$4.50
$5.00
Actual overhead
$110,000
?
Estimated overhead
?
$90,000
Applied overhead
?
$86,000
Over- (under-) applied overhead
?
$6,500
Find the unknowns for each of the divisions.
Chapter 4 Problem 2
2. Computations using a job order system
General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
Work in process $ 35,200
Finished goods 86,900
Cost of goods sold 128,700
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
Document*
Date
Department
Hours
Amount
MR 1165
19-Mar
Machining
$5,600
MR 1169
21-Mar
Machining
3,500
TT 1450-52
23-Mar
Machining
45
400
MUR 46
23-Mar
Machining
105
MR 4330
27-Mar
Finishing
700
TT 1475-76
31-Mar
Machining
30
300
MUR 47
31-Mar
Machining
50
TT 6608-13
31-Mar
Finishing
200
2,000
Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
Compute the total overhead applied to production during May. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31. Chapter 5 Exercise 1
1. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 19X6 operations of Heritage Products:
Quarter 1
Quarter 2
Quarter 3
Quarter 4
Shipping costs
$58,200
$58,620
$60,125
$59,400
Orders shipped
120
140
175
150
The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
Determine the variable cost per order shipped. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 19X7 if activity amounts to 570 orders. Chapter 5 Exercise 2
The treasurer anticipates the following costs for the event, which will be held at the Regency Hotel:
Room rental $300
Dinner cost (per person) 25
Chartered buses 500
Favors and souvenirs (per person) 5
Band 900
Each person would pay $40 to attend; 200 attendees are expected.
Will the event be profitable for the sorority? Show computations. How many people must attend for the sorority to break even? Suppose the sorority encouraged its members to drive to the hotel and did not charter the buses. Further, a planned menu change will reduce the cost per meal by $2. If each member will still be charged $40, compute the contribution margin per person. Chapter 5 Exercise 3
3. Break-even and other CVP relationships
Cedars Hospital has average revenue of $180 per patient day. Variable costs are $45 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,320,000 per year.
How many patient days does the hospital need to break even? What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $540,000? If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)? Chapter 5 Problem 6
6. Direct and absorption costing
The information that follows pertains to Consumer Products for the year ended December 31, 19X6.
Inventory, 1/1/X6
24,000 units
Units manufactured
80,000
Units sold
82,000
Inventory, 12/31/X6
? units
Manufacturing costs:
Direct materials
$3 per unit
Direct labor
$5 per unit
Variable factory overhead
$9 per unit
Fixed factory overhead
$280,000
Selling & administrative expenses:
Variable
$2 per unit
Fixed
$136,000
Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Instructions:
Compute the number of units in the ending inventory. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of: Direct costing. Absorption costing. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 19X6, by using direct costing. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 19X6, by using absorption costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week 3 Assignment: Chapter 4 and 5 Problems
Please complete the following 7 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 4 Exercise 7 7. Overhead application: Working backward The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review: Division A Division B Actual machine hours 22,500 ? Estimated machine hours 20,000 ? Overhead application rate $4.50 $5.00 Actual overhead $110,000 ? Estimated overhead ? $90,000 Applied overhead ? $86,000 Over- (under-) applied overhead ? $6,500 FIND THE UNKNOWNS FOR EACH OF THE DIVISIONS.
Chapter 4 Problem 2 2. Computations using a job order system General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
Work in process $ 35,200 Finished goods 86,900 Cost of goods sold 128,700
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
Direct Materials Direct Labor Job No. Amount Job No. Amount 101 $5,000 101 $7,800 115 19,500 103 20,800 116 36,200 115 42,000 Other 35,800 116 18,000 $96,500 Other 25,900 $114,500
Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions: a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May. b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory. c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May. d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.
Chapter 5 Exercise 1 1. High-low method The following cost data pertain to 20X6 operations of Heritage Products: Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarter 3 Quarter 4 Shipping costs $58,200 $58,620 $60,125 $59,400 Orders shipped 120 140 175 150 The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs. a. Determine the variable cost per order shipped. b. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter. c. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 20X7 if activity amounts to 570 orders.
Chapter 5 Exercise 3 3. Break-even and other CVP relationships Cedars Hospital has average revenue of $180 per patient day. Variable costs are $45 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,320,000 per year. a. How many patient days does the hospital need to break even? b. What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $540,000? c. If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?
Chapter 5 Problem 6 6. Direct and absorption costing The information that follows pertains to Consumer Products for the year ended December 31, 20X6. Inventory, 1/1/X6 24,000 units Units manufactured 80,000 Units sold 82,000 Inventory, 12/31/X6 ? units Manufacturing costs: Direct materials $3 per unit Direct labor $5 per unit Variable factory overhead $9 per unit Fixed factory overhead $280,000 Selling & administrative expenses: Variable $2 per unit Fixed $136,000
The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Instructions: a. Compute the number of units in the ending inventory. b. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of: 1. Direct costing. 2. Absorption costing. c. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using direct costing. d. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using absorption costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
DQ 01:
Describe three issues/problems that a company could encounter when trying to determine the actual cost of a good or service to be used in the cost of goods sold. For each of your issues, provide an example of a company or industry where these issues could be present.
DQ 02:
We ve all experienced (or heard about) the challenges that the airlines have been facing. Read the Zacks Investment Research article, Airline Industry Stock Outlook August 2012 Identify three factors that are affecting airline company s ability to break even. For each of your factors, discuss how these have an impact on the breakeven (contribution margin, fixed costs, variable costs, a combination, etc.), and what happens if these factors increase or decrease.
Journal
Hershey Company
Go the Hershey website to learn how to make Hershey chocolate. Review the process and take a look at some of the videos. Pay particular attention to the process steps of milling and pressing, mixing the ingredients, and refining.
In at least one paragraph, describe the costing system that you would recommend Hershey use to account for its cost of goods sold and why. Include a few product costs you think would be traceable, which costs should be allocated, and how Hershey should account and apply the manufacturing overhead costs.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter 4 and 5 Problems
Please complete the following 7 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 4 Exercise 3
3. Cost flows and overhead application
Cleveland Metals uses a job cost system and applies factory overhead to production at a predetermined rate of 180% of direct labor cost. Data pertaining to recent operations follow.
Job no. 636 was the only job in process on January 1 of the current year. The Work in Process account contained a $24,600 balance on this date.
Jobs no. 637, 638, and 639 were started during January.
Total direct material requisitions and direct labor incurred during January amounted to $89,200 and $114,500, respectively.
The only job that remained in process on January 31 was job no. 638, with costs of $15,000 for direct materials and $20,000 for direct labor.
a. Compute the total cost of the work in process inventory on January 31.
b. Compute the cost of jobs completed during January, and present the proper journal entry to reflect job completion.
Chapter 4 Exercise 7
7. Overhead application: Working backward
The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
|
Division A
|
Division B
|
|
Actual machine hours
|
22,500
|
?
|
|
Estimated machine hours
|
20,000
|
?
|
|
Overhead application rate
|
$4.50
|
$5.00
|
|
Actual overhead
|
$110,000
|
?
|
|
Estimated overhead
|
?
|
$90,000
|
|
Applied overhead
|
?
|
$86,000
|
|
Over- (under-) applied overhead
|
?
|
$6,500
|
Find the unknowns for each of the divisions.
Chapter 4 Problem 2
2. Computationsusing a job order system
General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
Work in process $ 35,200
Finished goods 86,900
Cost of goods sold 128,700
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
101
|
|
$5,000
|
|
101
|
|
$7,800
|
|
115
|
|
19,500
|
|
103
|
|
20,800
|
|
116
|
|
36,200
|
|
115
|
|
42,000
|
|
Other
|
|
35,800
|
|
116
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
$96,500
|
|
Other
|
|
25,900
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$114,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.
b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.
c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.
d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.
Chapter 5 Exercise 1
1. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 19X6 operations of Heritage Products:
|
Quarter 1
|
Quarter 2
|
Quarter 3
|
Quarter 4
|
|
Shipping costs
|
$58,200
|
$58,620
|
$60,125
|
$59,400
|
|
Orders shipped
|
120
|
140
|
175
|
150
|
The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
a. Determine the variable cost per order shipped.
b. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.
c. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 19X7 if activity amounts to 570 orders.
Chapter 5 Exercise 2
The treasurer anticipates the following costs for the event, which will be held at the Regency Hotel:
Room rental $300
Dinner cost (per person) 25
Chartered buses 500
Favors and souvenirs (per person) 5
Band 900
Each person would pay $40 to attend; 200 attendees are expected.
a. Will the event be profitable for the sorority? Show computations.
b. How many people must attend for the sorority to break even?
c. Suppose the sorority encouraged its members to drive to the hotel and did not charter the buses. Further, a planned menu change will reduce the cost per meal by $2. If each member will still be charged $40, compute the contribution margin per person.
Chapter 5 Exercise 3
3. Break-even and other CVP relationships
Cedars Hospital has average revenue of $180 per patient day. Variable costs are $45 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,320,000 per year.
a. How many patient days does the hospital need to break even?
b. What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $540,000?
c. If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?
Chapter 5 Problem 6
6. Direct and absorption costing
The information that follows pertains to Consumer Products for the year ended December 31, 19X6.
|
Inventory, 1/1/X6
|
24,000 units
|
|
Units manufactured
|
80,000
|
|
Units sold
|
82,000
|
|
Inventory, 12/31/X6
|
? units
|
|
Manufacturing costs:
|
|
Direct materials
|
$3 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
$5 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
$9 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
$280,000
|
|
Selling & administrative expenses:
|
|
Variable
|
$2 per unit
|
|
Fixed
|
$136,000
|
The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Instructions:
a. Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.
b. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:
1. Direct costing.
2. Absorption costing.
c. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 19X6, by using direct costing.
d. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 19X6, by using absorption costing.
DQ 01:
Describe three issues/problems that a company could encounter when trying to determine the actual cost of a good or service to be used in the cost of goods sold. For each of your issues, provide an example of a company or industry where these issues could be present.
DQ 02:
We ve all experienced (or heard about) the challenges that the airlines have been facing. Read the Zacks Investment Research article, Airline Industry Stock Outlook August 2012 Identify three factors that are affecting airline company s ability to break even. For each of your factors, discuss how these have an impact on the breakeven (contribution margin, fixed costs, variable costs, a combination, etc.), and what happens if these factors increase or decrease.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter 4 and 5 Problems
Please complete the following 7 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 4 Exercise 3
3. Cost flows and overhead application
Cleveland Metals uses a job cost system and applies factory overhead to production at a predetermined rate of 180% of direct labor cost. Data pertaining to recent operations follow.
Job no. 636 was the only job in process on January 1 of the current year. The Work in Process account contained a $24,600 balance on this date.
Jobs no. 637, 638, and 639 were started during January.
Total direct material requisitions and direct labor incurred during January amounted to $89,200 and $114,500, respectively.
The only job that remained in process on January 31 was job no. 638, with costs of $15,000 for direct materials and $20,000 for direct labor.
a. Compute the total cost of the work in process inventory on January 31.
b. Compute the cost of jobs completed during January, and present the proper journal entry to reflect job completion.
Chapter 4 Exercise 7
7. Overhead application: Working backward
The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
|
Division A
|
Division B
|
|
Actual machine hours
|
22,500
|
?
|
|
Estimated machine hours
|
20,000
|
?
|
|
Overhead application rate
|
$4.50
|
$5.00
|
|
Actual overhead
|
$110,000
|
?
|
|
Estimated overhead
|
?
|
$90,000
|
|
Applied overhead
|
?
|
$86,000
|
|
Over- (under-) applied overhead
|
?
|
$6,500
|
Find the unknowns for each of the divisions.
Chapter 4 Problem 2
2. Computationsusing a job order system
General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
Work in process $ 35,200
Finished goods 86,900
Cost of goods sold 128,700
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
101
|
|
$5,000
|
|
101
|
|
$7,800
|
|
115
|
|
19,500
|
|
103
|
|
20,800
|
|
116
|
|
36,200
|
|
115
|
|
42,000
|
|
Other
|
|
35,800
|
|
116
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
$96,500
|
|
Other
|
|
25,900
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$114,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.
b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.
c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.
d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.
Chapter 5 Exercise 1
1. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 20X6 operations of Heritage Products:
|
Quarter 1
|
Quarter 2
|
Quarter 3
|
Quarter 4
|
|
Shipping costs
|
$58,200
|
$58,620
|
$60,125
|
$59,400
|
|
Orders shipped
|
120
|
140
|
175
|
150
|
The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
a. Determine the variable cost per order shipped.
b. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.
c. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 20X7 if activity amounts to 570 orders.
Chapter 5 Exercise 2
The treasurer anticipates the following costs for the event, which will be held at the Regency Hotel:
Room rental $300
Dinner cost (per person) 25
Chartered buses 500
Favors and souvenirs (per person) 5
Band 900
Each person would pay $40 to attend; 200 attendees are expected.
a. Will the event be profitable for the sorority? Show computations.
b. How many people must attend for the sorority to break even?
c. Suppose the sorority encouraged its members to drive to the hotel and did not charter the buses. Further, a planned menu change will reduce the cost per meal by $2. If each member will still be charged $40, compute the contribution margin per person.
Chapter 5 Exercise 3
3. Break-even and other CVP relationships
Cedars Hospital has average revenue of $180 per patient day. Variable costs are $45 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,320,000 per year.
a. How many patient days does the hospital need to break even?
b. What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $540,000?
c. If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?
Chapter 5 Problem 6
6. Direct and absorption costing
The information that follows pertains to Consumer Products for the year ended December 31, 20X6.
|
Inventory, 1/1/X6
|
24,000 units
|
|
Units manufactured
|
80,000
|
|
Units sold
|
82,000
|
|
Inventory, 12/31/X6
|
? units
|
|
Manufacturing costs:
|
|
Direct materials
|
$3 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
$5 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
$9 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
$280,000
|
|
Selling & administrative expenses:
|
|
Variable
|
$2 per unit
|
|
Fixed
|
$136,000
|
The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Instructions:
a. Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.
b. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:
1. Direct costing.
2. Absorption costing.
c. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using direct costing.
d. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using absorption costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter 4 and 5 Problems
Please complete the following 7 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 4 Exercise 3
3. Cost flows and overhead application
Cleveland Metals uses a job cost system and applies factory overhead to production at a predetermined rate of 180% of direct labor cost. Data pertaining to recent operations follow.
Job no. 636 was the only job in process on January 1 of the current year. The Work in Process account contained a $24,600 balance on this date.
Jobs no. 637, 638, and 639 were started during January.
Total direct material requisitions and direct labor incurred during January amounted to $89,200 and $114,500, respectively.
The only job that remained in process on January 31 was job no. 638, with costs of $15,000 for direct materials and $20,000 for direct labor.
a. Compute the total cost of the work in process inventory on January 31.
b. Compute the cost of jobs completed during January, and present the proper journal entry to reflect job completion.
Chapter 4 Exercise 7
7. Overhead application: Working backward
The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
|
Division A
|
Division B
|
|
Actual machine hours
|
22,500
|
?
|
|
Estimated machine hours
|
20,000
|
?
|
|
Overhead application rate
|
$4.50
|
$5.00
|
|
Actual overhead
|
$110,000
|
?
|
|
Estimated overhead
|
?
|
$90,000
|
|
Applied overhead
|
?
|
$86,000
|
|
Over- (under-) applied overhead
|
?
|
$6,500
|
Find the unknowns for each of the divisions.
Chapter 4 Problem 2
2. Computationsusing a job order system
General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
Work in process $ 35,200
Finished goods 86,900
Cost of goods sold 128,700
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
101
|
|
$5,000
|
|
101
|
|
$7,800
|
|
115
|
|
19,500
|
|
103
|
|
20,800
|
|
116
|
|
36,200
|
|
115
|
|
42,000
|
|
Other
|
|
35,800
|
|
116
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
$96,500
|
|
Other
|
|
25,900
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$114,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.
b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.
c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.
d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.
Chapter 5 Exercise 1
1. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 20X6 operations of Heritage Products:
|
Quarter 1
|
Quarter 2
|
Quarter 3
|
Quarter 4
|
|
Shipping costs
|
$58,200
|
$58,620
|
$60,125
|
$59,400
|
|
Orders shipped
|
120
|
140
|
175
|
150
|
The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
a. Determine the variable cost per order shipped.
b. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.
c. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 20X7 if activity amounts to 570 orders.
Chapter 5 Exercise 2
The treasurer anticipates the following costs for the event, which will be held at the Regency Hotel:
Room rental $300
Dinner cost (per person) 25
Chartered buses 500
Favors and souvenirs (per person) 5
Band 900
Each person would pay $40 to attend; 200 attendees are expected.
a. Will the event be profitable for the sorority? Show computations.
b. How many people must attend for the sorority to break even?
c. Suppose the sorority encouraged its members to drive to the hotel and did not charter the buses. Further, a planned menu change will reduce the cost per meal by $2. If each member will still be charged $40, compute the contribution margin per person.
Chapter 5 Exercise 3
3. Break-even and other CVP relationships
Cedars Hospital has average revenue of $180 per patient day. Variable costs are $45 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,320,000 per year.
a. How many patient days does the hospital need to break even?
b. What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $540,000?
c. If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?
Chapter 5 Problem 6
6. Direct and absorption costing
The information that follows pertains to Consumer Products for the year ended December 31, 20X6.
|
Inventory, 1/1/X6
|
24,000 units
|
|
Units manufactured
|
80,000
|
|
Units sold
|
82,000
|
|
Inventory, 12/31/X6
|
? units
|
|
Manufacturing costs:
|
|
Direct materials
|
$3 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
$5 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
$9 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
$280,000
|
|
Selling & administrative expenses:
|
|
Variable
|
$2 per unit
|
|
Fixed
|
$136,000
|
The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Instructions:
a. Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.
b. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:
1. Direct costing.
2. Absorption costing.
c. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using direct costing.
d. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using absorption costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Three Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1.Overhead application: Working backward
The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
|
|
Division A
|
Division B
|
|
Actual machine hours
|
26,500
|
?
|
|
Estimated machine hours
|
20,000
|
?
|
|
Overhead application rate
|
$5.00
|
$6.00
|
|
Actual overhead
|
$120,000
|
?
|
|
Estimated overhead
|
?
|
$90,000
|
|
Applied overhead
|
?
|
$87,000
|
|
Over- (under-) applied overhead
|
?
|
$8,500
|
Find the unknowns for each of the divisions.
2.Computationsusing a job order system
Spencer Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
Work in process $ 36,200
Finished goods 86,900
Cost of goods sold 130,700
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($22,400) and no. 103 ($13,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $116,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
101
|
|
$6,000
|
|
101
|
|
$7,800
|
|
117
|
|
18,500
|
|
103
|
|
20,800
|
|
116
|
|
34,200
|
|
117
|
|
44,000
|
|
Other
|
|
36,800
|
|
116
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
|
$95,500
|
|
Other
|
|
25,900
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$116,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Job no. 117 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $23,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.
b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.
c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.
d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.
3. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 20X8 operations of Houston Products:
|
|
Quarter 1
|
Quarter 2
|
Quarter 3
|
Quarter 4
|
|
Shipping costs
|
$56,200
|
$58,620
|
$61,000
|
$59,400
|
|
Orders shipped
|
120
|
135
|
170
|
145
|
The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
a. Determine the variable cost per order shipped.
b. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.
c. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 20X9 if activity amounts to 570 orders.
4.Break-even and other CVP relationships
Pine Hospital has average revenue of $190 per patient day. Variable costs are $50 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,620,000 per year.
a. How many patient days does the hospital need to break even?
b. What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $560,000?
c. If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?
5. Direct and absorption costing
The information that follows pertains to XYZ Products for the year ended December 31, 20X8.
|
Inventory, 1/1/X8
|
26,000 units
|
|
Units manufactured
|
80,000
|
|
Units sold
|
83,000
|
|
Inventory, 12/31/X8
|
? units
|
|
Manufacturing costs:
|
|
Direct materials
|
$4 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
$5 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
$9 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
$300,000
|
|
Selling & administrative expenses:
|
|
Variable
|
$2 per unit
|
|
Fixed
|
$136,000
|
The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Instructions:
a. Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.
b. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:
1. Direct costing.
2. Absorption costing.
c. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X8, by using direct costing.
d. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X8, by using absorption costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Three Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Overhead application: Working backward
The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
|
|
Division A
|
Division B
|
|
Actual machine hours
|
26,500
|
?
|
|
Estimated machine hours
|
20,000
|
?
|
|
Overhead application rate
|
$5.00
|
$6.00
|
|
Actual overhead
|
$120,000
|
?
|
|
Estimated overhead
|
?
|
$90,000
|
|
Applied overhead
|
?
|
$87,000
|
|
Over- (under-) applied overhead
|
?
|
$8,500
|
Find the unknowns for each of the divisions.
2. Computations using a job order system
Spencer Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
Work in process $ 36,200
Finished goods 86,900
Cost of goods sold 130,700
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($22,400) and no. 103 ($13,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $116,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
101
|
|
$6,000
|
|
101
|
|
$7,800
|
|
117
|
|
18,500
|
|
103
|
|
20,800
|
|
116
|
|
34,200
|
|
117
|
|
44,000
|
|
Other
|
|
36,800
|
|
116
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
|
$95,500
|
|
Other
|
|
25,900
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$116,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Job no. 117 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $23,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.
b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.
c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.
d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.
3. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 20X8 operations of Houston Products:
|
|
Quarter 1
|
Quarter 2
|
Quarter 3
|
Quarter 4
|
|
Shipping costs
|
$56,200
|
$58,620
|
$61,000
|
$59,400
|
|
Orders shipped
|
120
|
135
|
170
|
145
|
The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
a. Determine the variable cost per order shipped.
b. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.
c. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 20X9 if activity amounts to 570 orders.
4. Break-even and other CVP relationships
Pine Hospital has average revenue of $190 per patient day. Variable costs are $50 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,620,000 per year.
a. How many patient days does the hospital need to break even?
b. What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $560,000?
c. If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?
5. Direct and absorption costing
The information that follows pertains to XYZ Products for the year ended December 31, 20X8.
|
Inventory, 1/1/X8
|
26,000 units
|
|
Units manufactured
|
80,000
|
|
Units sold
|
83,000
|
|
Inventory, 12/31/X8
|
? units
|
|
Manufacturing costs:
|
|
Direct materials
|
$4 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
$5 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
$9 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
$300,000
|
|
Selling & administrative expenses:
|
|
Variable
|
$2 per unit
|
|
Fixed
|
$136,000
|
The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Instructions:
a. Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.
b. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:
1. Direct costing.
2. Absorption costing.
c. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X8, by using direct costing.
d. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X8, by using absorption costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week 4 Assignment
Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Comprehensive budgeting
The balance sheet of Watson Company as of December 31, 20X1, follows.
|
WATSON COMPANY
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
December 31, 12X1
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$4,595
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
10,000
|
|
Finished goods (575 units x $7.00)
|
|
4,025
|
|
Direct materials (2,760 units x $0.50)
|
|
1,380
|
|
Plant & equipment
|
$50,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
10,000
|
40,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$60,000
|
|
Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable to suppliers
|
|
$14,000
|
|
Common stock
|
$25,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
21,000
|
46,000
|
|
Total liabilities &. stockholders’ equity
|
|
$60,000
|
The following information has been extracted from the firm’s accounting records:
1. All sales are made on account at $20 per unit. Sixty percent of the sales are collected in the month of sale; the remaining 40% are collected in the following month. Forecasted sales for the first five months of 20X2 are: January, 1,500 units,- February, 1,600 units; March, 1,800 units; April, 2,000 units; May, 2,100 units.
2. Management wants to maintain the finished goods inventory at 30% of the following month’s sales.
3. Watson uses four units of direct material in each finished unit. The direct material price has been stable and is expected to remain so over the next six months. Management wants to maintain the ending direct materials inventory at 60% of the following month’s production needs.
4. Seventy percent of all purchases are paid in the month of purchase; the remaining 30% are paid in the subsequent month.
5. Watson’s product requires 30 minutes of direct labor time. Each hour of direct labor costs $7.
Instructions:
a. Rounding computations to the nearest dollar, prepare the following for January through March:
1) Sales budget
2) Schedule of cash collections
3) Production budget
4) Direct material purchases budget
5) Schedule of cash disbursements for material purchases
6) Direct labor budget
b. Determine the balances in the following accounts as of March 31:
1) Accounts Receivable
2) Direct Materials
3) Accounts Payable
2. Basic flexible budgeting
Centron, Inc., has the following budgeted production costs:
|
Direct materials
|
$0.40 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.80 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
2.20 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
|
Supervision
|
$24,000
|
|
Maintenance
|
18,000
|
|
Other
|
12,000
|
The company normally manufactures between 20,000 and 25,000 units each quarter. Should output exceed 25,000 units, maintenance and other fixed costs are expected to increase by $6,000 and $4,500, respectively.
During the recent quarter ended March 31, Centron produced 25,500 units and incurred the following costs:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
$10,710
|
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
47,175
|
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
51,940
|
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
|
|
|
|
Supervision
|
|
24,500
|
|
|
Maintenance
|
|
23,700
|
|
|
Other
|
|
16,800
|
|
|
Total production costs
|
|
$174,825
|
|
Instructions:
a. Prepare a flexible budget for 20,000, 22,500, and 25,000 units of activity.
b. Was Centron’s experience in the quarter cited better or worse than anticipated? Prepare an appropriate performance report and explain your answer.
c. Explain the benefit of using flexible budgets (as opposed to static budgets) in the measurement of performance.
3. Straightforward variance analysis
Arrow Enterprises uses a standard costing system. The standard cost sheet for product no. 549 follows.
|
Direct materials: 4 units @ $6.50
|
|
$26.00
|
|
Direct labor: 8 hours @ $8.50
|
|
68
|
|
Variable factory overhead: 8 hours
|
@ $7.00
|
56
|
|
Fixed factory overhead: 8 hours
|
@ 2.5
|
20
|
|
Total standard cost per unit
|
|
$170.00
|
The following information pertains to activity for December:
1. Direct materials acquired during the month amounted to 26,350 units at $6.40 per unit. All materials were consumed in operations.
2. Arrow incurred an average wage rate of $8.75 for 51,400 hours of activity.
3. Total overhead incurred amounted to $508,400. Budgeted fixed overhead totals $1.8 million and is spread evenly throughout the year.
4. Actual production amounted to 6,500 completed units.
Instructions:
a. Compute Arrow’s direct material variances.
b. Compute Arrow’s direct labor variances.
c. Compute Arrow’s variances for factory overhead.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week 4 Assignment: Chapter 6 and 7 Problems
Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 6 Problem 3
1. Comprehensive budgeting
The balance sheet of Watson Company as of December 31, 20X1, follows.
|
WATSON COMPANY
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
December 31, 12X1
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$4,595
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
10,000
|
|
Finished goods (575 units x $7.00)
|
|
4,025
|
|
Direct materials (2,760 units x $0.50)
|
|
1,380
|
|
Plant & equipment
|
$50,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
10,000
|
40,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$60,000
|
|
Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable to suppliers
|
|
$14,000
|
|
Common stock
|
$25,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
21,000
|
46,000
|
|
Total liabilities &. stockholders’ equity
|
|
$60,000
|
The following information has been extracted from the firm’s accounting records:
1. All sales are made on account at $20 per unit. Sixty percent of the sales are collected in the month of sale; the remaining 40% are collected in the following month. Forecasted sales for the first five months of 20X2 are: January, 1,500 units,- February, 1,600 units; March, 1,800 units; April, 2,000 units; May, 2,100 units.
2. Management wants to maintain the finished goods inventory at 30% of the following month’s sales.
3. Watson uses four units of direct material in each finished unit. The direct material price has been stable and is expected to remain so over the next six months. Management wants to maintain the ending direct materials inventory at 60% of the following month’s production needs.
4. Seventy percent of all purchases are paid in the month of purchase; the remaining 30% are paid in the subsequent month.
5. Watson’s product requires 30 minutes of direct labor time. Each hour of direct labor costs $7.
Instructions:
a. Rounding computations to the nearest dollar, prepare the following for January through March:
1) Sales budget
2) Schedule of cash collections
3) Production budget
4) Direct material purchases budget
5) Schedule of cash disbursements for material purchases
6) Direct labor budget
b. Determine the balances in the following accounts as of March 31:
1) Accounts Receivable
2) Direct Materials
3) Accounts Payable
Chapter 7 Problem 1
2. Basic flexible budgeting
Centron, Inc., has the following budgeted production costs:
|
Direct materials
|
$0.40 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.80 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
2.20 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
|
Supervision
|
$24,000
|
|
Maintenance
|
18,000
|
|
Other
|
12,000
|
The company normally manufactures between 20,000 and 25,000 units each quarter. Should output exceed 25,000 units, maintenance and other fixed costs are expected to increase by $6,000 and $4,500, respectively.
During the recent quarter ended March 31, Centron produced 25,500 units and incurred the following costs:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
$10,710
|
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
47,175
|
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
51,940
|
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
|
|
|
|
Supervision
|
|
24,500
|
|
|
Maintenance
|
|
23,700
|
|
|
Other
|
|
16,800
|
|
|
Total production costs
|
|
$174,825
|
|
Instructions:
a. Prepare a flexible budget for 20,000, 22,500, and 25,000 units of activity.
b. Was Centron’s experience in the quarter cited better or worse than anticipated? Prepare an appropriate performance report and explain your answer.
c. Explain the benefit of using flexible budgets (as opposed to static budgets) in the measurement of performance.
Chapter 7 Problem 5
3. Straightforward variance analysis
Arrow Enterprises uses a standard costing system. The standard cost sheet for product no. 549 follows.
|
Direct materials: 4 units @ $6.50
|
|
$26.00
|
|
Direct labor: 8 hours @ $8.50
|
|
68
|
|
Variable factory overhead: 8 hours
|
@ $7.00
|
56
|
|
Fixed factory overhead: 8 hours
|
@ 2.5
|
20
|
|
Total standard cost per unit
|
|
$170.00
|
The following information pertains to activity for December:
1. Direct materials acquired during the month amounted to 26,350 units at $6.40 per unit. All materials were consumed in operations.
2. Arrow incurred an average wage rate of $8.75 for 51,400 hours of activity.
3. Total overhead incurred amounted to $508,400. Budgeted fixed overhead totals $1.8 million and is spread evenly throughout the year.
4. Actual production amounted to 6,500 completed units.
Instructions:
a. Compute Arrow’s direct material variances.
b. Compute Arrow’s direct labor variances.
c. Compute Arrow’s variances for factory overhead.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter 6 and 7 Problems
Chapter 6 Exercise 2
2. Schedule of cash collections
Sugarland Company sells a single product and anticipates opening a new facility in Charlotte on May 1 of the current year. Expected sales during the first three months of activity are: May, $60,000; June, $80,000; and July, $85,000. Thirty percent of all sales are for cash; the remaining 70% are on account. Credit sales have the following collection pattern:
Collected in the month of sale 60%
Collected in the month following sale 35
Uncollectible 5
- Prepare a schedule of cash collections for May through July.
- Compute the expected balance in Accounts Receivable as of July 31.
Chapter 6 Exercise 4
4. Production and cash-outlay computations
RPR, Inc., anticipates that 120,000 units of product K will be sold during May. Each unit of product K requires four units of raw material A. Actual inventories as of May 1 and budgeted inventories as of May 31 follow.
|
|
1-May
|
31-May
|
|
Product K (Units)
|
55,000
|
60,000
|
|
Rate Materials A (Units)
|
40,000
|
37,000
|
Each unit of raw material A costs $8; RPR pays for all purchases in the month of acquisition. Invoices that account for 80% of the cost of materials acquired will be paid within 10 days of receipt, entitling the company to a 2% cash discount.
- Determine the number of units of product K to be manufactured in May.
- Compute the May cash outlay for purchases of raw material A.
|
|
July
|
August
|
September
|
|
Beginning cash balance
|
$10,000
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
|
Add: Cash receipts
|
50,000
|
63,000
|
71,000
|
|
Deduct: Cash payments
|
-64,000
|
-58,000
|
-64,000
|
|
Cash excess (deficiency) before financing
|
($4,000)
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
|
Financing
|
|
|
|
|
Borrowing to maintain minimum balance
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Principal repayment
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Interest payment
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Ending cash balance
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
Chapter 6 Exercise 5
5. Abbreviated cash budget; financing emphasis
An abbreviated cash budget for Big Chuck Enterprises follows.
Big Chuck wishes to maintain a $10,000 minimum cash balance at all times. Additional financing is available (and retired) in $1,000 multiples at a 12% interest rate. Assume that borrowings take place at the beginning of the month; retirements, in contrast, occur at the end of the month. Interest is paid at the time of repaying principal and computed on the portion of principal repaid.
- Find the unknowns in Big Chuck’s abbreviated cash budget.
- Determine the outstanding loan balance as of September 30, after any repayments have been made.
Chapter 6 Problem 3
3. Comprehensive budgeting
The balance sheet of Watson Company as of December 31, 19X1, follows.
|
WATSON COMPANY
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
December 31, 19X1
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$4,595
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
10,000
|
|
Finished goods (575 units x $7.00)
|
|
4,025
|
|
Direct materials (2,760 units x $0.50)
|
|
1,380
|
|
Plant & equipment
|
$50,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
10,000
|
40,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$60,000
|
|
Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable to suppliers
|
|
$14,000
|
|
Common stock
|
$25,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
21,000
|
46,000
|
|
Total liabilities &. stockholders’ equity
|
|
$60,000
|
Chapter 7 Exercise 3
3. Variances for direct materials and direct labor
Banner Company manufactures flags of various countries. Each flag has a standard of eight square feet of fabric and three hours of direct labor time. Information about recent production activity follows.
Actual cost of fabric: $4.50 per square foot
Fabric consumed: 32,080 square feet
Standard price per square foot of fabric: $4.25
Standard direct labor rate: $10.00 per hour
Actual direct labor rate: $10.20 per hour
Actual labor hours worked: 11,940
Actual production completed: 4,000 flags
- Compute the materials price variance and the materials quantity variance.
- Compute the labor rate variance and the labor efficiency variance.
Chapter 7 Exercise 5
5. Overhead variances
Nova Manufacturing applies factory overhead to products on the basis of direct labor hours. At the beginning of the current year, the company’s accountant made the following estimates for the forthcoming period:
- Estimated variable overhead: $500,000
- Estimated fixed overhead: $400,000
- Estimated direct labor hours: 40,000
It is now 12 months later. Actual total overhead incurred in the manufacture of 7,900 units amounted to $895,100. Actual labor hours totaled 39,800. Assuming a direct labor standard of five hours per finished unit, calculate the following:
- Variable overhead efficiency variance
- Fixed overhead volume variance
- Overhead spending variance
Chapter 7 Problem 1
1. P26-A1 Basic flexible budgeting (L.O. 2)
Centron, Inc., has the following budgeted production costs:
|
Direct materials
|
$0.40 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.80 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
2.20 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
|
|
Supervision
|
$24,000
|
|
Maintenance
|
18,000
|
|
Other
|
12,000
|
The company normally manufactures between 20,000 and 25,000 units each quarter. Should output exceed 25,000 units, maintenance and other fixed costs are expected to increase by $6,000 and $4,500, respectively.
During the recent quarter ended March 31, Centron produced 25,500 units and incurred the following costs:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
$10,710
|
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
47,175
|
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
51,940
|
|
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
|
|
|
|
Supervision
|
|
24,500
|
|
|
Maintenance
|
|
23,700
|
|
|
Other
|
|
16,800
|
|
|
Total production costs
|
|
$174,825
|
|
Instructions:
- Prepare a flexible budget for 20,000, 22,500, and 25,000 units of activity.
- Was Centron’s experience in the quarter cited better or worse than anticipated? Prepare an appropriate performance report and explain your answer.
- Explain the benefit of using flexible budgets (as opposed to static budgets) in the measurement of performance.
Chapter 7 Problem 5
5. P26-B3 Straightforward variance analysis (L.O. 5)
Arrow Enterprises uses a standard costing system. The standard cost sheet for product no. 549 follows.
|
Direct materials: 4 units @ $6.50
|
|
$26.00
|
|
Direct labor: 8 hours @ $8.50
|
|
68
|
|
Variable factory overhead: 8 hours
|
@ $7.00
|
56
|
|
Fixed factory overhead: 8 hours
|
@ 2.5
|
20
|
|
Total standard cost per unit
|
|
$170.00
|
The following information pertains to activity for December:
- Direct materials acquired during the month amounted to 26,350 units at $6.40 per unit. All materials were consumed in operations.
- Arrow incurred an average wage rate of $8.75 for 51,400 hours of activity.
- Total overhead incurred amounted to $508,400. Budgeted fixed overhead totals $1.8 million and is spread evenly throughout the year.
- Actual production amounted to 6,500 completed units.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Four Assignment
Please complete the following 3 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Comprehensive budgeting
The balance sheet of Williams Company as of December 31, 20X8, follows.
|
WILLIAMS COMPANY
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
December 31, 12X8
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$4,595
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
10,000
|
|
Finished goods (575 units x $7.00)
|
|
4,025
|
|
Direct materials (2,760 units x $0.50)
|
|
1,380
|
|
Plant & equipment
|
$50,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
10,000
|
40,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$60,000
|
|
Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable to suppliers
|
|
$14,000
|
|
Common stock
|
$25,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
21,000
|
46,000
|
|
Total liabilities &. stockholders’ equity
|
|
$60,000
|
The following information has been extracted from the firm’s accounting records:
1. All sales are made on account at $20 per unit. Sixty percent of the sales are collected in the month of sale; the remaining 40% are collected in the following month. Forecasted sales for the first five months of 20X9 are: January, 1,600 units,- February, 1,700 units; March, 1,900 units; April, 2,100 units; May, 2,200 units.
2. Management wants to maintain the finished goods inventory at 30% of the following month’s sales.
3. Williams uses four units of direct material in each finished unit. The direct material price has been stable and is expected to remain so over the next six months. Management wants to maintain the ending direct materials inventory at 60% of the following month’s production needs.
4. Seventy percent of all purchases are paid in the month of purchase; the remaining 30% are paid in the subsequent month.
5. Williams product requires 30 minutes of direct labor time. Each hour of direct labor costs $9.
Instructions:
a. Rounding computations to the nearest dollar, prepare the following for January through March:
1) Sales budget
2) Schedule of cash collections
3) Production budget
4) Direct material purchases budget
5) Schedule of cash disbursements for material purchases
6) Direct labor budget
b. Determine the balances in the following accounts as of March 31:
1) Accounts Receivable
2) Direct Materials
3) Accounts Payable
2. Basic flexible budgeting
Sydney, Inc., has the following budgeted production costs:
|
Direct materials
|
$0.45 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.80 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
2.30 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
|
Supervision
|
$26,000
|
|
Maintenance
|
18,000
|
|
Other
|
12,000
|
The company normally manufactures between 20,000 and 25,000 units each quarter. Should output exceed 25,000 units, maintenance and other fixed costs are expected to increase by $6,000 and $4,500, respectively.
During the recent quarter ended March 31, Sydney produced 25,500 units and incurred the following costs:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
$11,710
|
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
47,175
|
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
53,940
|
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
|
|
|
|
Supervision
|
|
24,500
|
|
|
Maintenance
|
|
23,700
|
|
|
Other
|
|
16,800
|
|
|
Total production costs
|
|
$177,825
|
|
Instructions:
a. Prepare a flexible budget for 21,000, 23,000, and 24,500 units of activity.
b. Was Sydney s experience in the quarter cited better or worse than anticipated? Prepare an appropriate performance report and explain your answer.
c. Explain the benefit of using flexible budgets (as opposed to static budgets) in the measurement of performance.
3. Straightforward variance analysis
Andy Enterprises uses a standard costing system. The standard cost sheet for product no. 551 follows.
|
Direct materials: 4 units @ $6.50
|
|
$26.00
|
|
Direct labor: 8 hours @ $8.50
|
|
68.00
|
|
Variable factory overhead: 8 hours
|
@ $7.00
|
56.00
|
|
Fixed factory overhead: 8 hours
|
@ 2.5
|
20.00
|
|
Total standard cost per unit
|
|
$170.00
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following information pertains to activity for December:
1. Direct materials acquired during the month amounted to 26,350 units at $6.40 per unit. All materials were consumed in operations.
2. Andy incurred an average wage rate of $8.75 for 51,400 hours of activity.
3. Total overhead incurred amounted to $508,400. Budgeted fixed overhead totals $1.8 million and is spread evenly throughout the year.
4. Actual production amounted to 6,500 completed units.
Instructions:
a. Compute Andy s direct material variances.
b. Compute Andy’s direct labor variances.
c. Compute Andy’s variances for factory overhead.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter 6 and 7 Problems
Chapter 6 Exercise 2
2. Schedule of cash collections
Sugarland Company sells a single product and anticipates opening a new facility in Charlotte on May 1 of the current year. Expected sales during the first three months of activity are: May, $60,000; June, $80,000; and July, $85,000. Thirty percent of all sales are for cash; the remaining 70% are on account. Credit sales have the following collection pattern:
Collected in the month of sale 60%
Collected in the month following sale 35
Uncollectible 5
- Prepare a schedule of cash collections for May through July.
- Compute the expected balance in Accounts Receivable as of July 31.
Chapter 6 Exercise 4
4. Production and cash-outlay computations
RPR, Inc., anticipates that 120,000 units of product K will be sold during May. Each unit of product K requires four units of raw material A. Actual inventories as of May 1 and budgeted inventories as of May 31 follow.
|
1-May
|
31-May
|
| Product K (Units) |
55,000 |
60,000 |
| Rate Materials A (Units) |
40,000 |
37,000 |
Each unit of raw material A costs $8; RPR pays for all purchases in the month of acquisition. Invoices that account for 80% of the cost of materials acquired will be paid within 10 days of receipt, entitling the company to a 2% cash discount.
- Determine the number of units of product K to be manufactured in May.
- Compute the May cash outlay for purchases of raw material A.
|
July |
August |
September |
| Beginning cash balance |
$10,000
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
| Add: Cash receipts |
50,000
|
63,000
|
71,000
|
| Deduct: Cash payments |
-64,000
|
-58,000
|
-64,000
|
| Cash excess (deficiency) before financing |
($4,000)
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
| Financing |
|
|
|
| Borrowing to maintain minimum balance |
?
|
?
|
?
|
| Principal repayment |
?
|
?
|
?
|
| Interest payment |
?
|
?
|
?
|
| Ending cash balance |
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
Chapter 6 Exercise 5
5. Abbreviated cash budget; financing emphasis
An abbreviated cash budget for Big Chuck Enterprises follows.
Big Chuck wishes to maintain a $10,000 minimum cash balance at all times. Additional financing is available (and retired) in $1,000 multiples at a 12% interest rate. Assume that borrowings take place at the beginning of the month; retirements, in contrast, occur at the end of the month. Interest is paid at the time of repaying principal and computed on the portion of principal repaid.
- Find the unknowns in Big Chuck s abbreviated cash budget.
- Determine the outstanding loan balance as of September 30, after any repayments have been made.
Chapter 6 Problem 3
3. Comprehensive budgeting
The balance sheet of Watson Company as of December 31, 19X1, follows.
|
WATSON COMPANY
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
December 31, 19X1
|
| Assets |
|
|
| Cash |
|
$4,595
|
| Accounts receivable |
|
10,000
|
| Finished goods (575 units x $7.00) |
|
4,025
|
| Direct materials (2,760 units x $0.50) |
|
1,380
|
| Plant & equipment |
$50,000
|
|
| Less: Accumulated depreciation |
10,000
|
40,000
|
| Total assets |
|
$60,000
|
| Liabilities & Stockholders Equity |
|
|
| Accounts payable to suppliers |
|
$14,000
|
| Common stock |
$25,000
|
|
| Retained earnings |
21,000
|
46,000
|
| Total liabilities &. stockholders equity |
|
$60,000
|
Chapter 7 Exercise 3
3. Variances for direct materials and direct labor
Banner Company manufactures flags of various countries. Each flag has a standard of eight square feet of fabric and three hours of direct labor time. Information about recent production activity follows.
Actual cost of fabric: $4.50 per square foot
Fabric consumed: 32,080 square feet
Standard price per square foot of fabric: $4.25
Standard direct labor rate: $10.00 per hour
Actual direct labor rate: $10.20 per hour
Actual labor hours worked: 11,940
Actual production completed: 4,000 flags
- Compute the materials price variance and the materials quantity variance.
- Compute the labor rate variance and the labor efficiency variance.
Chapter 7 Exercise 5
5. Overhead variances
Nova Manufacturing applies factory overhead to products on the basis of direct labor hours. At the beginning of the current year, the company s accountant made the following estimates for the forthcoming period:
- Estimated variable overhead: $500,000
- Estimated fixed overhead: $400,000
- Estimated direct labor hours: 40,000
It is now 12 months later. Actual total overhead incurred in the manufacture of 7,900 units amounted to $895,100. Actual labor hours totaled 39,800. Assuming a direct labor standard of five hours per finished unit, calculate the following:
- Variable overhead efficiency variance
- Fixed overhead volume variance
- Overhead spending variance
Chapter 7 Problem 1
1. P26-A1 Basic flexible budgeting (L.O. 2)
Centron, Inc., has the following budgeted production costs:
| Direct materials |
$0.40 per unit |
| Direct labor |
1.80 per unit |
| Variable factory overhead |
2.20 per unit |
| Fixed factory overhead |
|
| Supervision |
$24,000 |
| Maintenance |
18,000 |
| Other |
12,000 |
The company normally manufactures between 20,000 and 25,000 units each quarter. Should output exceed 25,000 units, maintenance and other fixed costs are expected to increase by $6,000 and $4,500, respectively.
During the recent quarter ended March 31, Centron produced 25,500 units and incurred the following costs:
| Direct Materials |
|
$10,710
|
|
| Direct Labor |
|
47,175
|
|
| Variable factory overhead |
51,940
|
|
|
| Fixed factory overhead |
|
|
|
| Supervision |
|
24,500
|
|
| Maintenance |
|
23,700
|
|
| Other |
|
16,800
|
|
| Total production costs |
|
$174,825
|
|
Instructions:
- Prepare a flexible budget for 20,000, 22,500, and 25,000 units of activity.
- Was Centron s experience in the quarter cited better or worse than anticipated? Prepare an appropriate performance report and explain your answer.
- Explain the benefit of using flexible budgets (as opposed to static budgets) in the measurement of performance.
Chapter 7 Problem 5
5. P26-B3 Straightforward variance analysis (L.O. 5)
Arrow Enterprises uses a standard costing system. The standard cost sheet for product no. 549 follows.
| Direct materials: 4 units @ $6.50 |
|
$26.00 |
| Direct labor: 8 hours @ $8.50 |
|
68 |
| Variable factory overhead: 8 hours |
@ $7.00 |
56 |
| Fixed factory overhead: 8 hours |
@ 2.5 |
20 |
| Total standard cost per unit |
|
$170.00 |
The following information pertains to activity for December:
- Direct materials acquired during the month amounted to 26,350 units at $6.40 per unit. All materials were consumed in operations.
- Arrow incurred an average wage rate of $8.75 for 51,400 hours of activity.
- Total overhead incurred amounted to $508,400. Budgeted fixed overhead totals $1.8 million and is spread evenly throughout the year.
- Actual production amounted to 6,500 completed units.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter 4 and 5 Problems
Please complete the following 7 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 4 Exercise 3
3. Cost flows and overhead application
Cleveland Metals uses a job cost system and applies factory overhead to production at a predetermined rate of 180% of direct labor cost. Data pertaining to recent operations follow.
- Job no. 636 was the only job in process on January 1 of the current year. The Work in Process account contained a $24,600 balance on this date.
- Jobs no. 637, 638, and 639 were started during January.
- Total direct material requisitions and direct labor incurred during January amounted to $89,200 and $114,500, respectively.
- The only job that remained in process on January 31 was job no. 638, with costs of $15,000 for direct materials and $20,000 for direct labor.
- Compute the total cost of the work in process inventory on January 31.
- Compute the cost of jobs completed during January, and present the proper journal entry to reflect job completion.
Chapter 4 Exercise 7
7. Overhead application: Working backward
The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
|
Division A
|
Division B
|
|
Actual machine hours
|
22,500
|
?
|
|
Estimated machine hours
|
20,000
|
?
|
|
Overhead application rate
|
$4.50
|
$5.00
|
|
Actual overhead
|
$110,000
|
?
|
|
Estimated overhead
|
?
|
$90,000
|
|
Applied overhead
|
?
|
$86,000
|
|
Over- (under-) applied overhead
|
?
|
$6,500
|
Find the unknowns for each of the divisions.
Chapter 4 Problem 2
2. Computations using a job order system
General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
Work in process $ 35,200
Finished goods 86,900
Cost of goods sold 128,700
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
101
|
|
$5,000
|
|
101
|
|
$7,800
|
|
115
|
|
19,500
|
|
103
|
|
20,800
|
|
116
|
|
36,200
|
|
115
|
|
42,000
|
|
Other
|
|
35,800
|
|
116
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
$96,500
|
|
Other
|
|
25,900
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$114,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
- Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.
- Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.
- Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.
- Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.
Chapter 5 Exercise 1
1. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 20X6 operations of Heritage Products:
|
Quarter 1
|
Quarter 2
|
Quarter 3
|
Quarter 4
|
|
Shipping costs
|
$58,200
|
$58,620
|
$60,125
|
$59,400
|
|
Orders shipped
|
120
|
140
|
175
|
150
|
The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
- Determine the variable cost per order shipped.
- Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.
- If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 20X7 if activity amounts to 570 orders.
Chapter 5 Exercise 2
The treasurer anticipates the following costs for the event, which will be held at the Regency Hotel:
Room rental $300
Dinner cost (per person) 25
Chartered buses 500
Favors and souvenirs (per person) 5
Band 900
Each person would pay $40 to attend; 200 attendees are expected.
- Will the event be profitable for the sorority? Show computations.
- How many people must attend for the sorority to break even?
- Suppose the sorority encouraged its members to drive to the hotel and did not charter the buses. Further, a planned menu change will reduce the cost per meal by $2. If each member will still be charged $40, compute the contribution margin per person.
Chapter 5 Exercise 3
3. Break-even and other CVP relationships
Cedars Hospital has average revenue of $180 per patient day. Variable costs are $45 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,320,000 per year.
- How many patient days does the hospital need to break even?
- What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $540,000?
- If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?
Chapter 5 Problem 6
6. Direct and absorption costing
The information that follows pertains to Consumer Products for the year ended December 31, 20X6.
|
Inventory, 1/1/X6
|
24,000 units
|
|
Units manufactured
|
80,000
|
|
Units sold
|
82,000
|
|
Inventory, 12/31/X6
|
? units
|
|
Manufacturing costs:
|
|
Direct materials
|
$3 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
$5 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
$9 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
$280,000
|
|
Selling & administrative expenses:
|
|
Variable
|
$2 per unit
|
|
Fixed
|
$136,000
|
The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Final Paper
Focus of the Final Paper
You ve just been hired onto ABC Company as the corporate controller. ABC Company is a manufacturing firm that specializes in making cedar roofing and siding shingles. The company currently has annual sales of around $1.2 million, a 25% increase from the previous year. The company has an aggressive growth target of reaching $3 million annual sales within the next 3 years. The CEO has been trying to find additional products that can leverage the current ABC employee skillset as well as the manufacturing facilities.
As the controller of ABC Company, the CEO has come to you with a new opportunity that he s been working on. The CEO would like to use the some of the shingle scrap materials to build cedar dollhouses. While this new product line would add additional raw materials and be more time-intensive to manufacture than the cedar shingles, this new product line will be able to leverage ABC s existing manufacturing facilities as well as the current staff. Although this product line will require added expenses, it will provide additional revenue and gross profit to help reach the growth targets. The CEO is relying on you to help decide how this project can be afforded Provide details about the estimated product costs, what is needed to break even on the project, and what level of return this product is expected to provide.
In order to help out the CEO, you need to prepare a six- to eight-page report that will contain the following information (including exhibits, but excluding your references and title page). Refer to the accompanying Excel spreadsheet (available through your online course) for some specific cost and profit information to complete the calculations.
Final Paper Spreadsheet
I. An overall risk profile of the company based on current economic and industry issues that it may be facing.
II. Current company cash flow
a. You need to complete a cash flow statement for the company using the direct method.
b. Once you ve completed the cash flow statement, answer the following questions:
i. What does this statement of cash flow tell you about the sources and uses of the company funds?
ii. Is there anything ABC Company can do to improve the cash flow?
iii. Can this project be financed with current cash flow from the company? Why or why not?
iv. If the company needs additional financing beyond what ABC Company can provide internally (either now or sometime throughout the life of the project), how would you suggest the company obtain the additional financing, equity or corporate debt, and why?
III. Product cost: ABC Company believes that it has an additional 5,000 machine hours available in the current facility before it would need to expand. ABC Company uses machine hours to allocate the fixed factory overhead, and units sold to allocate the fixed sales expenses. Bases on current research, ABC Company expects that it will take twice as long to produce the expansion product as it currently takes to produce its existing product.
a. What is the product cost for the expansion product under absorption and variable costing?
b. By adding this new expansion product, it helps to absorb the fixed factory and sales expenses. How much cheaper does this expansion make the existing product?
c. Assuming ABC Company wants a 40% gross margin for the new product, what selling price should it set for the expansion product
d. Assuming the same sales mix of these two products, what are the contribution margins and break-even points by product?
IV. Potential investments to accelerate profit: ABC company has the option to purchase additional equipment that will cost about $42,000, and this new equipment will produce the following savings in factory overhead costs over the next five years:
Year 1, $15,000
Year 2, $13,000
Year 3, $10,000
Year 4, $10,000
Year 5, $6,000
ABC Company uses the net-present-value method to analyze investments and desires a minimum rate of return of 12% on the equipment.
a. What is the net present value of the proposed investment (ignore income taxes and depreciation)?
b. Assuming a 5-year straight-line depreciation, how will this impact the factory s fixed costs for each of the 5 years (and the implied product costs)? What about cash flow?
c. Considering the cash flow impact of the equipment as well as the time-value of money, would you recommend that ABC Company purchases the equipment? Why or why not
V. Conclusion:
a. What are the major risk factors that you see in this project?
b. As the controller and a management accountant, what is your responsibility to this project?
c. What do you recommend the CEO do?
Writing the Final Paper
1. Must be six to eight double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:
a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted
3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document at least three, but no more than five sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Final Paper
Focus of the Final Paper
You ve just been hired onto ABC Company as the corporate controller. ABC Company is a manufacturing firm that specializes in making cedar roofing and siding shingles. The company currently has annual sales of around $1.2 million, a 25% increase from the previous year. The company has an aggressive growth target of reaching $3 million annual sales within the next 3 years. The CEO has been trying to find additional products that can leverage the current ABC employee skillset as well as the manufacturing facilities.
As the controller of ABC Company, the CEO has come to you with a new opportunity that he s been working on. The CEO would like to use the some of the shingle scrap materials to build cedar dollhouses. While this new product line would add additional raw materials and be more time-intensive to manufacture than the cedar shingles, this new product line will be able to leverage ABC s existing manufacturing facilities as well as the current staff. Although this product line will require added expenses, it will provide additional revenue and gross profit to help reach the growth targets. The CEO is relying on you to help decide how this project can be afforded Provide details about the estimated product costs, what is needed to break even on the project, and what level of return this product is expected to provide.
In order to help out the CEO, you need to prepare a six- to eight-page report that will contain the following information (including exhibits, but excluding your references and title page). Refer to the accompanying Excel spreadsheet (available through your online course) for some specific cost and profit information to complete the calculations.
Final Paper Spreadsheet
I. An overall risk profile of the company based on current economic and industry issues that it may be facing.
II. Current company cash flow
a. You need to complete a cash flow statement for the company using the direct method.
b. Once you ve completed the cash flow statement, answer the following questions:
i. What does this statement of cash flow tell you about the sources and uses of the company funds?
ii. Is there anything ABC Company can do to improve the cash flow?
iii. Can this project be financed with current cash flow from the company? Why or why not?
iv. If the company needs additional financing beyond what ABC Company can provide internally (either now or sometime throughout the life of the project), how would you suggest the company obtain the additional financing, equity or corporate debt, and why?
III. Product cost: ABC Company believes that it has an additional 5,000 machine hours available in the current facility before it would need to expand. ABC Company uses machine hours to allocate the fixed factory overhead, and units sold to allocate the fixed sales expenses. Bases on current research, ABC Company expects that it will take twice as long to produce the expansion product as it currently takes to produce its existing product.
a. What is the product cost for the expansion product under absorption and variable costing?
b. By adding this new expansion product, it helps to absorb the fixed factory and sales expenses. How much cheaper does this expansion make the existing product?
c. Assuming ABC Company wants a 40% gross margin for the new product, what selling price should it set for the expansion product
d. Assuming the same sales mix of these two products, what are the contribution margins and break-even points by product?
IV. Potential investments to accelerate profit: ABC company has the option to purchase additional equipment that will cost about $42,000, and this new equipment will produce the following savings in factory overhead costs over the next five years:
Year 1, $15,000
Year 2, $13,000
Year 3, $10,000
Year 4, $10,000
Year 5, $6,000
ABC Company uses the net-present-value method to analyze investments and desires a minimum rate of return of 12% on the equipment.
a. What is the net present value of the proposed investment (ignore income taxes and depreciation)?
b. Assuming a 5-year straight-line depreciation, how will this impact the factory s fixed costs for each of the 5 years (and the implied product costs)? What about cash flow?
c. Considering the cash flow impact of the equipment as well as the time-value of money, would you recommend that ABC Company purchases the equipment? Why or why not
V. Conclusion:
a. What are the major risk factors that you see in this project?
b. As the controller and a management accountant, what is your responsibility to this project?
c. What do you recommend the CEO do?
Writing the Final Paper
1. Must be six to eight double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:
a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted
3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document at least three, but no more than five sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Critical Thinking Question:
Answer the following questions:
Why are noncash transactions, such as the exchange of common stock for a building for example, included on a statement of cash flows? How are these noncash transactions disclosed?
2. Classification of activities
Classify each of the following transactions as arising from an operating (O), investing (I), financing (F), or noncash investing/financing (N) activity.
a. ________ Received $80,000 from the sale of land.
b. ________ Received $3,200 from cash sales.
c. ________ Paid a $5,000 dividend.
d. ________ Purchased $8,800 of merchandise for cash.
e. ________ Received $100,000 from the issuance of common stock.
f. ________ Paid $1,200 of interest on a note payable.
g. ________ Acquired a new laser printer by paying $650.
h. ________ Acquired a $400,000 building by signing a $400,000 mortgage note.
3. Overview of direct and indirect methods
Evaluate the comments that follow as being True or False. If the comment is false, briefly explain why.
a. Both the direct and indirect methods will produce the same cash flow from operating activities.
b. Depreciation expense is added back to net income when the indirect method is used.
c. One of the advantages of using the direct method rather than the indirect method is that larger cash flows from financing activities will be reported.
d. The cash paid to suppliers is normally disclosed on the statement of cash flows when the indirect method of statement preparation is employed.
e. The dollar change in the Merchandise Inventory account appears on the statement of cash flows only when the direct method of statement preparation is used.
4. Equipment transaction and cash flow reporting
Dec. 31, 20X4 Dec. 31, 20X3
Property, Plant & Equipment:
Land
$94,000
$94,000
Equipment 652,000 527,000
Less: Accumulated depreciation -316,000 -341,000
New equipment purchased during 20×4 totaled $280,000. The 20×4 income statement disclosed equipment depreciation expense of $41,000 and a $9,000 loss on the sale of equipment.
a. Determine the cost and accumulated depreciation of the equipment sold during 20X4.
b. Determine the selling price of the equipment sold.
c. Show how the sale of equipment would appear on a statement of cash flows prepared by using the indirect method.
5. Cash flow information: Direct and indirect methods
The comparative year-end balance sheets of Sign Graphics, Inc., revealed the following activity in the company’s current accounts:
20X5 20X4 Increase / Decrease)
Current assets
Cash $55,400 $35,200 $20,200
Accounts receivable (net) 83,800 88,000 -4,200
Inventory 243,400 233,800 9,600
Prepaid expenses 25,400 24,200 1,200
Current liabilities
Accounts payable $123,600 $140,600 ($17,000)
Taxes payable 43,600 49,200 -5,600
Interest payable 9,000 6,400 2,600
Accrued liabilities 38,800 60,400 -21,600
Note payable 44,000 44,000
The accounts payable were for the purchase of merchandise. Prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities relate to the firm’s selling and administrative expenses. The company’s condensed income statement follows.
SIGN GRAPHICS INC.
Income Statement
for the Year Ended December 31, 20×5
Sales $713,800
Less: Cost of goods sold 323,000
Gross profit $390,800
Less: Selling & administrative expenses $186,000
Depreciation expense 17,000
Interest expense 27,000 230,000
Add: gain on sale of land $160,800
21,800
Income before taxes $182,600
Income taxes 36,800
Net income $145,800
Other data:
1. Long-term investments were purchased for cash at a cost of $74,600.
2. Cash proceeds from the sale of land totaled $76,200.
3. Store equipment of $44,000 was purchased by signing a short-term note payable. Also, a $150,000 telecommunications system was acquired by issuing 3,000 shares of preferred stock.
4. A long-term note of $49,400 was repaid.
5. Twenty thousand shares of common stock were issued at $5.19 per share.
6. The company paid cash dividends amounting to $128,600.
Instructions:
a. Prepare the operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows, assuming use of:
1. The direct method.
2. The indirect method.
b. Prepare the investing and financing activities sections of the statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Critical Thinking Question:
Answer the following questions:
Why are noncash transactions, such as the exchange of common stock for a building for example, included on a statement of cash flows? How are these noncash transactions disclosed?
2. Classification of activities
Classify each of the following transactions as arising from an operating (O), investing (I), financing (F), or noncash investing/financing (N) activity.
a. ________ Received $80,000 from the sale of land.
b. ________ Received $3,200 from cash sales.
c. ________ Paid a $5,000 dividend.
d. ________ Purchased $8,800 of merchandise for cash.
e. ________ Received $100,000 from the issuance of common stock.
f. ________ Paid $1,200 of interest on a note payable.
g. ________ Acquired a new laser printer by paying $650.
h. ________ Acquired a $400,000 building by signing a $400,000 mortgage note.
3. Overview of direct and indirect methods
Evaluate the comments that follow as being True or False. If the comment is false, briefly explain why.
a. Both the direct and indirect methods will produce the same cash flow from operating activities.
b. Depreciation expense is added back to net income when the indirect method is used.
c. One of the advantages of using the direct method rather than the indirect method is that larger cash flows from financing activities will be reported.
d. The cash paid to suppliers is normally disclosed on the statement of cash flows when the indirect method of statement preparation is employed.
e. The dollar change in the Merchandise Inventory account appears on the statement of cash flows only when the direct method of statement preparation is used.
4. Equipment transaction and cash flow reporting
|
Dec. 31, 20X4
|
Dec. 31, 20X3
|
|
Property, Plant & Equipment:
Land
|
$94,000
|
$94,000
|
|
Equipment
|
652,000
|
527,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
-316,000
|
-341,000
|
New equipment purchased during 20×4 totaled $280,000. The 20×4 income statement disclosed equipment depreciation expense of $41,000 and a $9,000 loss on the sale of equipment.
a. Determine the cost and accumulated depreciation of the equipment sold during 20X4.
b. Determine the selling price of the equipment sold.
c. Show how the sale of equipment would appear on a statement of cash flows prepared by using the indirect method.
5. Cash flow information: Direct and indirect methods
The comparative year-end balance sheets of Sign Graphics, Inc., revealed the following activity in the company’s current accounts:
|
20X5
|
20X4
|
Increase / Decrease)
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$55,400
|
$35,200
|
$20,200
|
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
83,800
|
88,000
|
-4,200
|
|
|
Inventory
|
243,400
|
233,800
|
9,600
|
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
25,400
|
24,200
|
1,200
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$123,600
|
$140,600
|
($17,000)
|
|
|
Taxes payable
|
43,600
|
49,200
|
-5,600
|
|
|
Interest payable
|
9,000
|
6,400
|
2,600
|
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
38,800
|
60,400
|
-21,600
|
|
|
Note payable
|
44,000
|
|
44,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The accounts payable were for the purchase of merchandise. Prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities relate to the firm’s selling and administrative expenses. The company’s condensed income statement follows.
|
SIGN GRAPHICS INC.
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
for the Year Ended December 31, 20×5
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sales
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$713,800
|
|
|
Less: Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
|
323,000
|
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
|
|
|
|
$390,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Less: Selling & administrative expenses
|
|
$186,000
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
|
|
|
|
17,000
|
|
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
|
|
|
|
27,000
|
|
230,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Add: gain on sale of land
|
|
|
|
|
$160,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
21,800
|
|
|
Income before taxes
|
|
|
|
|
$182,600
|
|
|
Income taxes
|
|
|
|
|
|
36,800
|
|
|
Net income
|
|
|
|
|
|
$145,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other data:
1. Long-term investments were purchased for cash at a cost of $74,600.
2. Cash proceeds from the sale of land totaled $76,200.
3. Store equipment of $44,000 was purchased by signing a short-term note payable. Also, a $150,000 telecommunications system was acquired by issuing 3,000 shares of preferred stock.
4. A long-term note of $49,400 was repaid.
5. Twenty thousand shares of common stock were issued at $5.19 per share.
6. The company paid cash dividends amounting to $128,600.
Instructions:
a. Prepare the operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows, assuming use of:
1. The direct method.
2. The indirect method.
b. Prepare the investing and financing activities sections of the statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week 1 Assignment: Chapter One Problems
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 1 Exercise 1:
1. Classification of activities
Classify each of the following transactions as arising from an operating (O), investing (I), financing (F), or noncash investing/financing (N) activity.
a.
________ Received $80,000 from the sale of land.
b.
________ Received $3,200 from cash sales.
c.
________ Paid a $5,000 dividend.
d.
________ Purchased $8,800 of merchandise for cash.
e.
________ Received $100,000 from the issuance of common stock.
f.
________ Paid $1,200 of interest on a note payable.
g.
________ Acquired a new laser printer by paying $650.
h.
________ Acquired a $400,000 building by signing a $400,000 mortgage note.
Chapter 1 Exercise 4:
4. Overview of direct and indirect methods
Evaluate the comments that follow as being True or False. If the comment is false, briefly explain why.
a.
Both the direct and indirect methods will produce the same cash flow from operating activities.
b.
Depreciation expense is added back to net income when the indirect method is used.
c.
One of the advantages of using the direct method rather than the indirect method is that larger cash flows from financing activities will be reported.
d.
The cash paid to suppliers is normally disclosed on the statement of cash flows when the indirect method of statement preparation is employed.
e.
The dollar change in the Merchandise Inventory account appears on the statement of cash flows only when the direct method of statement preparation is used.
Chapter 1 Exercise 6:
6. Equipment transaction and cash flow reporting
|
Dec. 31, 20X4
|
Dec. 31, 20X3
|
|
Property, Plant & Equipment:
Land
|
$94,000
|
$94,000
|
|
Equipment
|
652,000
|
527,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
-316,000
|
-341,000
|
New equipment purchased during 20×4 totaled $280,000. The 20×4 income statement disclosed equipment depreciation expense of $41,000 and a $9,000 loss on the sale of equipment.
a.
Determine the cost and accumulated depreciation of the equipment sold during 20X4.
b.
Determine the selling price of the equipment sold.
c.
Show how the sale of equipment would appear on a statement of cash flows prepared by using the indirect method.
Chapter 1 Problem 3:
3. Cash flow information: Direct and indirect methods
The comparative year-end balance sheets of Sign Graphics, Inc., revealed the following activity in the company’s current accounts:
|
20X5
|
20X4
|
Increase / Decrease)
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$55,400
|
$35,200
|
$20,200
|
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
83,800
|
88,000
|
-4,200
|
|
|
Inventory
|
243,400
|
233,800
|
9,600
|
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
25,400
|
24,200
|
1,200
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$123,600
|
$140,600
|
($17,000)
|
|
|
Taxes payable
|
43,600
|
49,200
|
-5,600
|
|
|
Interest payable
|
9,000
|
6,400
|
2,600
|
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
38,800
|
60,400
|
-21,600
|
|
|
Note payable
|
44,000
|
|
44,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The accounts payable were for the purchase of merchandise. Prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities relate to the firm’s selling and administrative expenses. The company’s condensed income statement follows.
|
SIGN GRAPHICS INC.
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
for the Year Ended December 31, 20×5
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sales
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$713,800
|
|
|
Less: Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
|
323,000
|
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
|
|
|
|
$390,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Less: Selling & administrative expenses
|
|
$186,000
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
|
|
|
|
17,000
|
|
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
|
|
|
|
27,000
|
|
230,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Add: gain on sale of land
|
|
|
|
|
$160,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
21,800
|
|
|
Income before taxes
|
|
|
|
|
$182,600
|
|
|
Income taxes
|
|
|
|
|
|
36,800
|
|
|
Net income
|
|
|
|
|
|
$145,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other data:
1.
Long-term investments were purchased for cash at a cost of $74,600.
2.
Cash proceeds from the sale of land totaled $76,200.
3.
Store equipment of $44,000 was purchased by signing a short-term note payable. Also, a $150,000 telecommunications system was acquired by issuing 3,000 shares of preferred stock.
4.
A long-term note of $49,400 was repaid.
5.
Twenty thousand shares of common stock were issued at $5.19 per share.
6.
The company paid cash dividends amounting to $128,600.
Instructions:
a.
Prepare the operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows, assuming use of:
1.
The direct method.
2.
The indirect method.
b.
Prepare the investing and financing activities sections of the statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Ch 1 Critical Thinking Question 5:
Answer the following questions:
Why are noncash transactions, such as the exchange of common stock for a building for example, included on a statement of cash flows? How are these noncash transactions disclosed?
Chapter 1 Exercise 1:
1. Classification of activities
Classify each of the following transactions as arising from an operating (O), investing (I), financing (F), or noncash investing/financing (N) activity.
- ________ Received $80,000 from the sale of land.
- ________ Received $3,200 from cash sales.
- ________ Paid a $5,000 dividend.
- ________ Purchased $8,800 of merchandise for cash.
- ________ Received $100,000 from the issuance of common stock.
- ________ Paid $1,200 of interest on a note payable.
- ________ Acquired a new laser printer by paying $650.
- ________ Acquired a $400,000 building by signing a $400,000 mortgage note.
Chapter 1 Exercise 4:
4. Overview of direct and indirect methods
Evaluate the comments that follow as being True or False. If the comment is false, briefly explain why.
- Both the direct and indirect methods will produce the same cash flow from operating activities.
- Depreciation expense is added back to net income when the indirect method is used.
- One of the advantages of using the direct method rather than the indirect method is that larger cash flows from financing activities will be reported.
- The cash paid to suppliers is normally disclosed on the statement of cash flows when the indirect method of statement preparation is employed.
- The dollar change in the Merchandise Inventory account appears on the statement of cash flows only when the direct method of statement preparation is used.
Chapter 1 Exercise 6:
6. Equipment transaction and cash flow reporting
|
Dec. 31, 20X4 |
Dec. 31, 20X3 |
| Property, Plant & Equipment:
Land
|
$94,000
|
$94,000
|
| Equipment |
652,000 |
527,000 |
| Less: Accumulated depreciation |
-316,000 |
-341,000 |
New equipment purchased during 20 4 totaled $280,000. The 20 4 income statement disclosed equipment depreciation expense of $41,000 and a $9,000 loss on the sale of equipment.
- Determine the cost and accumulated depreciation of the equipment sold during 20X4.
- Determine the selling price of the equipment sold.
- Show how the sale of equipment would appear on a statement of cash flows prepared by using the indirect method.
Chapter 1 Problem 3:
3. Cash flow information: Direct and indirect methods
The comparative year-end balance sheets of Sign Graphics, Inc., revealed the following activity in the company s current accounts:
|
20X5 |
20X4 |
Increase / Decrease) |
| Current assets |
|
|
|
| Cash |
$55,400 |
$35,200 |
$20,200 |
|
| Accounts receivable (net) |
83,800 |
88,000 |
-4,200 |
|
| Inventory |
243,400 |
233,800 |
9,600 |
|
| Prepaid expenses |
25,400 |
24,200 |
1,200 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Current liabilities |
|
|
|
|
| Accounts payable |
$123,600 |
$140,600 |
($17,000) |
|
| Taxes payable |
43,600 |
49,200 |
-5,600 |
|
| Interest payable |
9,000 |
6,400 |
2,600 |
|
| Accrued liabilities |
38,800 |
60,400 |
-21,600 |
|
| Note payable |
44,000 |
|
44,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
The accounts payable were for the purchase of merchandise. Prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities relate to the firm s selling and administrative expenses. The company s condensed income statement follows.
|
SIGN GRAPHICS INC.
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
for the Year Ended December 31, 20 5
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Sales |
|
|
|
|
|
|
$713,800
|
|
| Less: Cost of goods sold |
|
|
|
|
323,000
|
|
| Gross profit |
|
|
|
|
|
$390,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Less: Selling & administrative expenses |
|
$186,000
|
|
|
|
| Depreciation expense |
|
|
|
|
17,000
|
|
|
|
| Interest expense |
|
|
|
|
27,000
|
|
230,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Add: gain on sale of land |
|
|
|
|
$160,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
21,800
|
|
| Income before taxes |
|
|
|
|
$182,600
|
|
| Income taxes |
|
|
|
|
|
36,800
|
|
| Net income |
|
|
|
|
|
$145,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other data:
- Long-term investments were purchased for cash at a cost of $74,600.
- Cash proceeds from the sale of land totaled $76,200.
- Store equipment of $44,000 was purchased by signing a short-term note payable. Also, a $150,000 telecommunications system was acquired by issuing 3,000 shares of preferred stock.
- A long-term note of $49,400 was repaid.
- Twenty thousand shares of common stock were issued at $5.19 per share.
- The company paid cash dividends amounting to $128,600.
Instructions:
- Prepare the operating activities section of the company s statement of cash flows, assuming use of:
- The direct method.
- The indirect method.
- Prepare the investing and financing activities sections of the statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
DQ: 01
What information does the cash flow statement provide that you cannot see in the other financial statements (income statement, balance sheet, owner s equity)? What elements of the cash flow statement do you think are most important for company management to monitor and why? Is this different for investors?
DQ: 02
Go to http://finance.yahoo.com. Enter in AAPL and click on the get quote button, and it will bring up information on Apple. On the left hand side you ll see a section on Financials. Within that section, click on the cash flow. Review the cash flow statement for Apple. How would you summarize Apple s cash flow position and what does this statement tell you about where the money is coming from and where it s going? What would you suggest Apple s do to improve its cash position and why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week 1 Assignment: Chapter One Problems
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Ch 1 Critical Thinking Question 5:
Answer the following questions:
Why are noncash transactions, such as the exchange of common stock for a building for example, included on a statement of cash flows? How are these noncash transactions disclosed?
Chapter 1 Exercise 1:
1. Classification of activities
Classify each of the following transactions as arising from an operating (O), investing (I), financing (F), or noncash investing/financing (N) activity.
a. ________ Received $80,000 from the sale of land.
b. ________ Received $3,200 from cash sales.
c. ________ Paid a $5,000 dividend.
d. ________ Purchased $8,800 of merchandise for cash.
e. ________ Received $100,000 from the issuance of common stock.
f. ________ Paid $1,200 of interest on a note payable.
g. ________ Acquired a new laser printer by paying $650.
h. ________ Acquired a $400,000 building by signing a $400,000 mortgage note.
Chapter 1 Exercise 4:
4. Overview of direct and indirect methods
Evaluate the comments that follow as being True or False. If the comment is false, briefly explain why.
a. Both the direct and indirect methods will produce the same cash flow from operating activities.
b. Depreciation expense is added back to net income when the indirect method is used.
c. One of the advantages of using the direct method rather than the indirect method is that larger cash flows from financing activities will be reported.
d. The cash paid to suppliers is normally disclosed on the statement of cash flows when the indirect method of statement preparation is employed.
e. The dollar change in the Merchandise Inventory account appears on the statement of cash flows only when the direct method of statement preparation is used.
Chapter 1 Exercise 6:
6. Equipment transaction and cash flow reporting
|
Dec. 31, 20X4
|
Dec. 31, 20X3
|
|
Property, Plant & Equipment:
Land
|
$94,000
|
$94,000
|
|
Equipment
|
652,000
|
527,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
-316,000
|
-341,000
|
New equipment purchased during 20×4 totaled $280,000. The 20×4 income statement disclosed equipment depreciation expense of $41,000 and a $9,000 loss on the sale of equipment.
a. Determine the cost and accumulated depreciation of the equipment sold during 20X4.
b. Determine the selling price of the equipment sold.
c. Show how the sale of equipment would appear on a statement of cash flows prepared by using the indirect method.
Chapter 1 Problem 3:
3. Cash flow information: Direct and indirect methods
The comparative year-end balance sheets of Sign Graphics, Inc., revealed the following activity in the company’s current accounts:
|
20X5
|
20X4
|
Increase / Decrease)
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$55,400
|
$35,200
|
$20,200
|
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
83,800
|
88,000
|
-4,200
|
|
|
Inventory
|
243,400
|
233,800
|
9,600
|
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
25,400
|
24,200
|
1,200
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$123,600
|
$140,600
|
($17,000)
|
|
|
Taxes payable
|
43,600
|
49,200
|
-5,600
|
|
|
Interest payable
|
9,000
|
6,400
|
2,600
|
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
38,800
|
60,400
|
-21,600
|
|
|
Note payable
|
44,000
|
|
44,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The accounts payable were for the purchase of merchandise. Prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities relate to the firm’s selling and administrative expenses. The company’s condensed income statement follows.
|
SIGN GRAPHICS INC.
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
for the Year Ended December 31, 20×5
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sales
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$713,800
|
|
|
Less: Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
|
323,000
|
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
|
|
|
|
$390,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Less: Selling & administrative expenses
|
|
$186,000
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
|
|
|
|
17,000
|
|
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
|
|
|
|
27,000
|
|
230,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Add: gain on sale of land
|
|
|
|
|
$160,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
21,800
|
|
|
Income before taxes
|
|
|
|
|
$182,600
|
|
|
Income taxes
|
|
|
|
|
|
36,800
|
|
|
Net income
|
|
|
|
|
|
$145,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other data:
1. Long-term investments were purchased for cash at a cost of $74,600.
2. Cash proceeds from the sale of land totaled $76,200.
3. Store equipment of $44,000 was purchased by signing a short-term note payable. Also, a $150,000 telecommunications system was acquired by issuing 3,000 shares of preferred stock.
4. A long-term note of $49,400 was repaid.
5. Twenty thousand shares of common stock were issued at $5.19 per share.
6. The company paid cash dividends amounting to $128,600.
Instructions:
a. Prepare the operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows, assuming use of:
1. The direct method.
2. The indirect method.
b. Prepare the investing and financing activities sections of the statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter 1 Exercise 1:
1. Classification of activities Classify each of the following transactions as arising from an operating (O), investing (I), financing (F), or noncash investing/financing (N) activity.
a. ________ Received $80,000 from the sale of land.
b. ________ Received $3,200 from cash sales.
c. ________ Paid a $5,000 dividend.
d. ________ Purchased $8,800 of merchandise for cash.
e. ________ Received $100,000 from the issuance of common stock.
f. ________ Paid $1,200 of interest on a note payable.
g. ________ Acquired a new laser printer by paying $650.
h. ________ Acquired a $400,000 building by signing a $400,000 mortgage note.
Chapter 1 Exercise 4:
4. Overview of direct and indirect methods
Evaluate the comments that follow as being True or False. If the comment is false, briefly explain why.
a. Both the direct and indirect methods will produce the same cash flow from operating activities.
b. Depreciation expense is added back to net income when the indirect method is used.
c. One of the advantages of using the direct method rather than the indirect method is that larger cash flows from financing activities will be reported.
d. The cash paid to suppliers is normally disclosed on the statement of cash flows when the indirect method of statement preparation is employed.
e. The dollar change in the Merchandise Inventory account appears on the statement of cash flows only when the direct method of statement preparation is used.
Chapter 1 Exercise 6:
6. Equipment transaction and cash flow reporting
Dec. 31, 19X4
Dec. 31, 19X3
Land
$94,000
$94,000
Equipment
652,000
527,000
Less: Accumulated depreciation
-316,000
-341,000
a. Determine the cost and accumulated depreciation of the equipment sold during 19X4.
b. Determine the selling price of the equipment sold.
c. Show how the sale of equipment would appear on a statement of cash flows prepared by using the indirect method.
Chapter 1 Problem 3:
3. Cash flow information: Direct and indirect methods The comparative year-end balance sheets of Sign Graphics, Inc., revealed the following activity in the company’s current accounts:
19X5
19X4
Increase / Decrease)
Current assets
Cash
$55,400
$35,200
$20,200
Accounts receivable (net)
83,800
88,000
-4,200
Inventory
243,400
233,800
9,600
Prepaid expenses
25,400
24,200
1,200
Current liabilities
Accounts payable
$123,600
$140,600
($17,000)
Taxes payable
43,600
49,200
-5,600
Interest payable
9,000
6,400
2,600
Accrued liabilities
38,800
60,400
-21,600
Note payable
44,000
44,000
The accounts payable were for the purchase of merchandise. Prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities related to the firm’s selling and administrative expenses. The company’s condensed income statement follows.
SIGN GRAPHICS, INC.
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 19X5
Sales
$713,800
Less:
Cost of goods sold
323,000
= Gross profit
$390,800
Less:
Selling & administrative expenses
$186,000
Depreciation expense
17,000
Interest expense
27,000
Total operating expenses:
230,000
$160,800
Add:
Gain on sale of land
21,800
Income before taxes Income taxes
$182,600
36,800
Net income
$145,800
Other data:
1. Long-term investments were purchased for cash at a cost of $74,600.
2. Cash proceeds from the sale of land totaled $76,200.
3. Store equipment of $44,000 was purchased by signing a short-term note payable. Also, a $150,000 telecommunications system was acquired by issuing 3,000 shares of preferred stock.
4. A long-term note of $49,400 was repaid.
5. Twenty thousand shares of common stock were issued at $5.19 per share.
6. The company paid cash dividends amounting to $128,600.
Instructions:
a. Prepare the operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows, assuming use of:
1. The direct method.
2. The indirect method.
b. Prepare the investing and financing activities sections of the statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week One Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Critical Thinking Question:
Answer the following questions:
What is the purpose of the statement of cash flows What are the three main categories and give examples for each category?
2. Classification of activities
Classify each of the following transactions as arising from an operating (O), investing (I), financing (F), or noncash investing/financing (N) activity.
a. ________ Acquired a new laser printer by paying $950.
b. ________ Received $70,000 from the issuance of common stock.
c. ________ Paid $1,500 of interest on a note payable.
d. ________ Purchased $9,800 of merchandise for cash.
e. ________ Received $10,200 from cash sales.
f. ________ Paid a $15,000 dividend.
g. ________ Acquired a $500,000 building by signing a $500,000 mortgage note.
h. ________ Received $60,000 from the sale of land.
3. Overview of direct and indirect methods
Evaluate the comments that follow as being True or False. If the comment is false, briefly explain why.
a. The dollar change in the Merchandise Inventory account appears on the statement of cash flows only when the direct method of statement preparation is used.
b. Depreciation expense is added back to net income when the indirect method is used.
c. The cash paid to suppliers is normally disclosed on the statement of cash flows when the indirect method of statement preparation is employed.
d. One of the advantages of using the direct method rather than the indirect method is that larger cash flows from financing activities will be reported.
e. Both the direct and indirect methods will produce the same cash flow from operating activities.
4. Equipment transaction and cash flow reporting
|
Property, plant, & equipment
|
Dec. 31, 20X8
|
Dec. 31, 20X7
|
|
Land
|
$72,000
|
$72,000
|
|
Equipment
|
630,000
|
520,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
-308,000
|
-325,000
|
New equipment purchased during 20×8 totaled $175,000. The 20×8 income statement disclosed equipment depreciation expense of $34,000 and a $2,000 loss on the sale of equipment.
a. Determine the cost and accumulated depreciation of the equipment sold during 20X8.
b. Determine the selling price of the equipment sold.
c. Show how the sale of equipment would appear on a statement of cash flows prepared by using the indirect method.
5. Cash flow information: Direct and indirect methods
The comparative year-end balance sheets of USA Graphics, Inc., revealed the following activity in the company’s current accounts:
|
|
20X8
|
20X7
|
Increase / Decrease)
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$55,400
|
$35,200
|
$20,200
|
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
83,800
|
88,000
|
-4,200
|
|
|
Inventory
|
243,400
|
233,800
|
9,600
|
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
25,400
|
24,200
|
1,200
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$123,600
|
$140,600
|
($17,000)
|
|
|
Taxes payable
|
43,600
|
49,200
|
-5,600
|
|
|
Interest payable
|
9,000
|
6,400
|
2,600
|
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
38,800
|
60,400
|
-21,600
|
|
|
Note payable
|
44,000
|
|
44,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The accounts payable were for the purchase of merchandise. Prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities relate to the firm’s selling and administrative expenses. The company’s condensed income statement follows.
|
USA GRAPHICS INC.
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
for the Year Ended December 31, 20X8
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sales
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$691,800
|
|
|
Less: Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
|
223,000
|
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
|
|
|
|
$468,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Less: Selling & administrative expenses
|
|
$177,000
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
|
|
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
|
|
|
|
27,000
|
|
222,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Add: gain on sale of land
|
|
|
|
|
$246,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
18,800
|
|
|
Income before taxes
|
|
|
|
|
$265,600
|
|
|
Income taxes
|
|
|
|
|
|
38,300
|
|
|
Net income
|
|
|
|
|
|
$227,300
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other data:
1. Long-term investments were purchased for cash at a cost of $64,200.
2. Cash proceeds from the sale of land totaled $74,200.
3. Store equipment of $34,000 was purchased by signing a short-term note payable. Also, a $140,000 telecommunications system was acquired by issuing 3,000 shares of preferred stock.
4. A long-term note of $42,200 was repaid.
5. Twenty thousand shares of common stock were issued at $5.19 per share.
6. The company paid cash dividends amounting to $125,000.
Instructions:
a. Prepare the operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows, assuming use of:
1. The direct method.
2. The indirect method.
b. Prepare the investing and financing activities sections of the statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week 1 Assignment: Chapter One Problems
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Ch 1 Critical Thinking Question 5:
Answer the following questions:
Why are noncash transactions, such as the exchange of common stock for a building for example, included on a statement of cash flows? How are these noncash transactions disclosed?
Chapter 1 Exercise 1:
1. Classification of activities
Classify each of the following transactions as arising from an operating (O), investing (I), financing (F), or noncash investing/financing (N) activity.
- ________ Received $80,000 from the sale of land.
- ________ Received $3,200 from cash sales.
- ________ Paid a $5,000 dividend.
- ________ Purchased $8,800 of merchandise for cash.
- ________ Received $100,000 from the issuance of common stock.
- ________ Paid $1,200 of interest on a note payable.
- ________ Acquired a new laser printer by paying $650.
- ________ Acquired a $400,000 building by signing a $400,000 mortgage note.
Chapter 1 Exercise 4:
4. Overview of direct and indirect methods
Evaluate the comments that follow as being True or False. If the comment is false, briefly explain why.
- Both the direct and indirect methods will produce the same cash flow from operating activities.
- Depreciation expense is added back to net income when the indirect method is used.
- One of the advantages of using the direct method rather than the indirect method is that larger cash flows from financing activities will be reported.
- The cash paid to suppliers is normally disclosed on the statement of cash flows when the indirect method of statement preparation is employed.
- The dollar change in the Merchandise Inventory account appears on the statement of cash flows only when the direct method of statement preparation is used.
Chapter 1 Exercise 6:
6. Equipment transaction and cash flow reporting
|
Dec. 31, 20X4 |
Dec. 31, 20X3 |
| Property, Plant & Equipment:
Land
|
$94,000
|
$94,000
|
| Equipment |
652,000 |
527,000 |
| Less: Accumulated depreciation |
-316,000 |
-341,000 |
New equipment purchased during 20 4 totaled $280,000. The 20 4 income statement disclosed equipment depreciation expense of $41,000 and a $9,000 loss on the sale of equipment.
- Determine the cost and accumulated depreciation of the equipment sold during 20X4.
- Determine the selling price of the equipment sold.
- Show how the sale of equipment would appear on a statement of cash flows prepared by using the indirect method.
Chapter 1 Problem 3:
3. Cash flow information: Direct and indirect methods
The comparative year-end balance sheets of Sign Graphics, Inc., revealed the following activity in the company s current accounts:
|
20X5 |
20X4 |
Increase / Decrease) |
| Current assets |
|
|
|
| Cash |
$55,400 |
$35,200 |
$20,200 |
|
| Accounts receivable (net) |
83,800 |
88,000 |
-4,200 |
|
| Inventory |
243,400 |
233,800 |
9,600 |
|
| Prepaid expenses |
25,400 |
24,200 |
1,200 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Current liabilities |
|
|
|
|
| Accounts payable |
$123,600 |
$140,600 |
($17,000) |
|
| Taxes payable |
43,600 |
49,200 |
-5,600 |
|
| Interest payable |
9,000 |
6,400 |
2,600 |
|
| Accrued liabilities |
38,800 |
60,400 |
-21,600 |
|
| Note payable |
44,000 |
|
44,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
The accounts payable were for the purchase of merchandise. Prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities relate to the firm s selling and administrative expenses. The company s condensed income statement follows.
|
SIGN GRAPHICS INC.
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
for the Year Ended December 31, 20 5
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Sales |
|
|
|
|
|
|
$713,800
|
|
| Less: Cost of goods sold |
|
|
|
|
323,000
|
|
| Gross profit |
|
|
|
|
|
$390,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Less: Selling & administrative expenses |
|
$186,000
|
|
|
|
| Depreciation expense |
|
|
|
|
17,000
|
|
|
|
| Interest expense |
|
|
|
|
27,000
|
|
230,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Add: gain on sale of land |
|
|
|
|
$160,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
21,800
|
|
| Income before taxes |
|
|
|
|
$182,600
|
|
| Income taxes |
|
|
|
|
|
36,800
|
|
| Net income |
|
|
|
|
|
$145,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other data:
- Long-term investments were purchased for cash at a cost of $74,600.
- Cash proceeds from the sale of land totaled $76,200.
- Store equipment of $44,000 was purchased by signing a short-term note payable. Also, a $150,000 telecommunications system was acquired by issuing 3,000 shares of preferred stock.
- A long-term note of $49,400 was repaid.
- Twenty thousand shares of common stock were issued at $5.19 per share.
- The company paid cash dividends amounting to $128,600.
Instructions:
- Prepare the operating activities section of the company s statement of cash flows, assuming use of:
- The direct method.
- The indirect method.
- Prepare the investing and financing activities sections of the statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week Two Assignment
Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in theappropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Analysis of stockholders’ equity
Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X6. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 20X6 and 20X5 follow:
|
20X6
|
20X5
|
|
Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10%
|
$580,000
|
$500,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par value
|
2,350,000
|
1,750,000
|
|
|
|
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par value
|
|
|
|
Preferred
|
24,000
|
|
|
Common
|
4,620,000
|
3,600,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
8,470,000
|
6,920,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$16,044,000
|
$12,770,000
|
a. Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X6.
b. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X6.
c. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 20X6?
d. Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X6? By what amount?
2. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization
Southlake Corporation issued $900,000 of 8% bonds on March 1, 20X1. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow.
Case A The bonds are issued at 100.
Case B The bonds are issued at 96.
Case C The bonds are issued at 105.
Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization.
Instructions:
|
Complete the following table:
|
|
|
|
|
Case A
|
Case B
|
Case C
|
- Cash inflow on the issuance date
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Total cash outflow through maturity
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Amortization for the year ended December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Unamortized premium as of December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Unamortized discount as of December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Bond carrying value as of December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
3. Definitions of manufacturing concepts
Interstate Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:
Materials and supplies used
Brass $75,000
Repair parts 16,000
Machine lubricants 9,000
Wages and salaries Machine operators 128,000
Production supervisors 64,000
Maintenance personnel 41,000
Other factory overhead Variable 35,000
Fixed 46,000
Sales commissions 20,000
Compute:
a. Total direct materials consumed
b. Total direct labor
c. Total prime cost
d. Total conversion cost
4. Scheduleof cost of goods manufactured, income statement
The following information was taken from the ledger of Jefferson Industries, Inc.:
|
Direct labor
|
$85,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$59,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
34,000
|
|
Work in. process:
|
|
|
Sales
|
300,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
29,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
|
|
Dec. 31
|
21,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
115,000
|
|
Direct material purchases
|
88,000
|
|
Dec. 31
|
131,000
|
|
Depreciation: factory
|
18,000
|
|
Raw (direct) materials on hand
|
Indirect materials used
|
10,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
31,000
|
|
Indirect labor
|
24,000
|
|
Dec. 31
|
40,000
|
|
Factory taxes
|
8,000
|
|
|
|
Factory utilities
|
11,000
|
Prepare the following:
a. A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.
b. An income statement for the year ended December 31.
5. Manufacturing statements and cost behavior
Tampa Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $36 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.
|
Per Unit
|
Variable Cost
|
Fixed Cost
|
|
Direct materials
|
$4.50
|
$
|
|
Direct labor
|
6.5
|
|
|
Factory overhead
|
9
|
50,000
|
|
Selling
|
|
70,000
|
|
Administrative
|
|
135,000
|
Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 17,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Tampa carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.
Instructions:
a. Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.
b. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
c. On the basis of the information presented:
1. Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
2. What is the likely effect on the $4.50 unit cost of direct materials if next year’s production increases? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter Two and Three Problems.
Please complete the following 7 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 2 Exercise 1
1. Issuance of stock
Prepare journal entries to record the issuance of 100,000 shares of common stock at $20 per share for each of the following independent cases:
a. Jackson Corporation has common stock with a par value of $1 per share.
b. Royal Corporation has no-par common with a stated value of $5 per share.
c. French Corporation has no-par common; no stated value has been assigned.
Chapter 2 Exercise 3
3. Analysis of stockholders’ equity
Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 19X6. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 19X6 and 19X5 follow.
19X6
19X5
Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10%
$580,000
$500,000
Common stock, $10 par value
2,350,000
1,750,000
Paid-in capital in excess of par value
Preferred
24,000
Common
4,620,000
3,600,000
Retained earnings
8,470,000
6,920,000
Total stockholders’ equity
$16,044,000
$12,770,000
a. Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 19X6.
b. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 19X6.
c. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 19X6?
d. Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 19X6? By what amount?
Chapter 2 Problem 1
1. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization
Southlake Corporation issued $900,000 of 8% bonds on March 1, 19X1. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow. Case A The bonds are issued at 100. Case B The bonds are issued at 96. Case C The bonds are issued at 105.
Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization.
Instructions:
Complete the following table:
Case A
Case B
Case C
a. Cash inflow on the issuance date
_______
_______
_______
b. Total cash outflow through maturity
_______
_______
_______
c. Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue
_______
_______
_______
d. Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 19X1
_______
_______
_______
e. Amortization for the year ended December 31, 19X1
_______
_______
_______
f. Unamortized premium as of December 31, 19X1
_______
_______
_______
g. Unamortized discount as of December 31, 19X1
_______
_______
_______
h. Bond carrying value as of December 31, 19X1
_______
_______
_______
Chapter 3 Exercise 1
1. Product costs and period costs
The costs that follow were extracted from the accounting records of several different manufacturers:
1. Weekly wages of an equipment maintenance worker
2. Marketing costs of a soft drink bottler
3. Cost of sheet metal in a Honda automobile
4. Cost of president’s subscription to Fortune magazine
5. Monthly operating costs of pollution control equipment used in a steel mill
6. Weekly wages of a seamstress employed by a jeans maker
7. Cost of compact discs (CDs) for newly recorded releases of Rush, Billy Joel, and Bryan Adams
a. Determine which of these costs are product costs and which are period costs.
b. For the product costs only, determine those that are easily traced to the finished product and those that are not.
Chapter 3 Exercise 2
2. Definitions of manufacturing concepts Interstate Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:
Materials and supplies used
Brass $75,000
Repair parts 16,000
Machine lubricants 9,000
Wages and salaries Machine operators 128,000
Production supervisors 64,000
Maintenance personnel 41,000
Other factory overhead Variable 35,000
Fixed 46,000
Sales commissions 20,000
Compute:
a. Total direct materials consumed
b. Total direct labor
c. Total prime cost
d. Total conversion cost
Chapter 3 Exercise 5
5. Schedule of cost of goods manufactured, income statement
The following information was taken from the ledger of Jefferson Industries, Inc.:
Direct labor
$85,000
Administrative expenses
$59,000
Selling expenses
34,000
Work in. process
Sales
300,000
Jan. 1
29,000
Finished goods
Dec. 31
21,000
Jan. 1
115,000
Direct material purchases
88,000
Dec. 31
131,000
Depreciation: factory
18,000
Raw (direct) materials on hand
Indirect materials used
10,000
Jan. 1
31,000
Indirect labor
24,000
Dec. 31
40,000
Factory taxes
8,000
Factory utilities
11,000
Prepare the following:
a. A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.
b. An income statement for the year ended December 31.
Chapter 3 Problem 3 3. Manufacturing statements and cost behavior
Tampa Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $36 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.
Per Unit
Variable Cost
Fixed Cost
Direct materials
$4.50
$
Direct labor
6.5
Factory overhead
9
50,000
Selling
70,000
Administrative
135,000
Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 17,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Tampa carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.
Instructions:
a. Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.
b. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
c. On the basis of the information presented:
1. Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
2. What is the likely effect on the $4.50 unit cost of direct materials if next year’s production increases?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 2 Exercise 3
1. Analysis of stockholders’ equity
Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X6. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 20X6 and 20X5 follow:
20X6 20X5
Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10% $580,000 $500,000
Common stock, $10 par value 2,350,000 1,750,000
Paid-in capital in excess of par value
Preferred 24,000
Common 4,620,000 3,600,000
Retained earnings 8,470,000 6,920,000
Total stockholders’ equity $16,044,000 $12,770,000
a. Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X6.
b. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X6.
c. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 20X6
d. Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X6? By what amount
Chapter 2 Problem 1
2. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization
Southlake Corporation issued $900,000 of 8% bonds on March 1, 20X1. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow.
Case A The bonds are issued at 100.
Case B The bonds are issued at 96.
Case C The bonds are issued at 105.
Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization.
Instructions:
Complete the following table:
Case A Case B Case C
a. Cash inflow on the issuance date _______ _______ _______
b. Total cash outflow through maturity _______ _______ _______
c. Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue _______ _______ _______
d. Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
e. Amortization for the year ended December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
f. Unamortized premium as of December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
g. Unamortized discount as of December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
h. Bond carrying value as of December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
Chapter 3 Exercise 2
3. Definitions of manufacturing concepts
Interstate Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:
Materials and supplies used
Brass $75,000
Repair parts 16,000
Machine lubricants 9,000
Wages and salaries Machine operators 128,000
Production supervisors 64,000
Maintenance personnel 41,000
Other factory overhead Variable 35,000
Fixed 46,000
Sales commissions 20,000
Compute:
a. Total direct materials consumed
b. Total direct labor
c. Total prime cost
d. Total conversion cost
Chapter 3 Exercise 5
4. Schedule of cost of goods manufactured, income statement
The following information was taken from the ledger of Jefferson Industries, Inc.:
Direct labor $85,000 Administrative expenses $59,000
Selling expenses 34,000 Work in. process:
Sales 300,000 Jan. 1 29,000
Finished goods Dec. 31 21,000
Jan. 1 115,000 Direct material purchases 88,000
Dec. 31 131,000 Depreciation: factory 18,000
Raw (direct) materials on hand Indirect materials used 10,000
Jan. 1 31,000 Indirect labor 24,000
Dec. 31 40,000 Factory taxes 8,000
Factory utilities 11,000
Prepare the following:
a. A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.
b. An income statement for the year ended December 31.
Chapter 3 Problem 3
5. Manufacturing statements and cost behavior
Tampa Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $36 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.
Per Unit Variable Cost Fixed Cost
Direct materials $4.50 $
Direct labor 6.5
Factory overhead 9 50,000
Selling 70,000
Administrative 135,000
Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 17,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Tampa carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.
Instructions:
a. Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.
b. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
c. On the basis of the information presented:
1. Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
2. What is the likely effect on the $4.50 unit cost of direct materials if next year’s production increases? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter Two and Three Problems.
Please complete the following 7 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 2 Exercise 1
1. Issuance of stock
Prepare journal entries to record the issuance of 100,000 shares of common stock at $20 per share for each of the following independent cases:
a. Jackson Corporation has common stock with a par value of $1 per share.
b. Royal Corporation has no-par common with a stated value of $5 per share.
c. French Corporation has no-par common; no stated value has been assigned.
Chapter 2 Exercise 3
3. Analysis of stockholders’ equity
Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 19X6. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 19X6 and 19X5 follow.
19X6
19X5
Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10%
$580,000
$500,000
Common stock, $10 par value
2,350,000
1,750,000
Paid-in capital in excess of par value
Preferred
24,000
Common
4,620,000
3,600,000
Retained earnings
8,470,000
6,920,000
Total stockholders’ equity
$16,044,000
$12,770,000
a. Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 19X6.
b. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 19X6.
c. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 19X6?
d. Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 19X6? By what amount?
Chapter 2 Problem 1
1. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization
Southlake Corporation issued $900,000 of 8% bonds on March 1, 19X1. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow. Case A The bonds are issued at 100. Case B The bonds are issued at 96. Case C The bonds are issued at 105.
Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization.
Instructions:
Complete the following table:
Case A
Case B
Case C
a. Cash inflow on the issuance date
_______
_______
_______
b. Total cash outflow through maturity
_______
_______
_______
c. Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue
_______
_______
_______
d. Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 19X1
_______
_______
_______
e. Amortization for the year ended December 31, 19X1
_______
_______
_______
f. Unamortized premium as of December 31, 19X1
_______
_______
_______
g. Unamortized discount as of December 31, 19X1
_______
_______
_______
h. Bond carrying value as of December 31, 19X1
_______
_______
_______
Chapter 3 Exercise 1
1. Product costs and period costs
The costs that follow were extracted from the accounting records of several different manufacturers:
1. Weekly wages of an equipment maintenance worker
2. Marketing costs of a soft drink bottler
3. Cost of sheet metal in a Honda automobile
4. Cost of president’s subscription to Fortune magazine
5. Monthly operating costs of pollution control equipment used in a steel mill
6. Weekly wages of a seamstress employed by a jeans maker
7. Cost of compact discs (CDs) for newly recorded releases of Rush, Billy Joel, and Bryan Adams
a. Determine which of these costs are product costs and which are period costs.
b. For the product costs only, determine those that are easily traced to the finished product and those that are not.
Chapter 3 Exercise 2
2. Definitions of manufacturing concepts Interstate Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:
Materials and supplies used
Brass $75,000
Repair parts 16,000
Machine lubricants 9,000
Wages and salaries Machine operators 128,000
Production supervisors 64,000
Maintenance personnel 41,000
Other factory overhead Variable 35,000
Fixed 46,000
Sales commissions 20,000
Compute:
a. Total direct materials consumed
b. Total direct labor
c. Total prime cost
d. Total conversion cost
Chapter 3 Exercise 5
5. Schedule of cost of goods manufactured, income statement
The following information was taken from the ledger of Jefferson Industries, Inc.:
Direct labor
$85,000
Administrative expenses
$59,000
Selling expenses
34,000
Work in. process
Sales
300,000
Jan. 1
29,000
Finished goods
Dec. 31
21,000
Jan. 1
115,000
Direct material purchases
88,000
Dec. 31
131,000
Depreciation: factory
18,000
Raw (direct) materials on hand
Indirect materials used
10,000
Jan. 1
31,000
Indirect labor
24,000
Dec. 31
40,000
Factory taxes
8,000
Factory utilities
11,000
Prepare the following:
a. A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.
b. An income statement for the year ended December 31.
Chapter 3 Problem 3 3. Manufacturing statements and cost behavior
Tampa Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $36 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.
Per Unit
Variable Cost
Fixed Cost
Direct materials
$4.50
$
Direct labor
6.5
Factory overhead
9
50,000
Selling
70,000
Administrative
135,000
Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 17,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Tampa carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.
Instructions:
a. Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.
b. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
c. On the basis of the information presented:
1. Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
2. What is the likely effect on the $4.50 unit cost of direct materials if next year’s production increases?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week 2 Assignment
Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Analysis of stockholders’ equity
Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X6. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 20X6 and 20X5 follow:
20X6 20X5
Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10% $580,000 $500,000
Common stock, $10 par value 2,350,000 1,750,000
Paid-in capital in excess of par value
Preferred 24,000
Common 4,620,000 3,600,000
Retained earnings 8,470,000 6,920,000
Total stockholders’ equity $16,044,000 $12,770,000
a. Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X6.
b. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X6.
c. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 20X6?
d. Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X6? By what amount?
2. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization
Southlake Corporation issued $900,000 of 8% bonds on March 1, 20X1. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow.
Case A The bonds are issued at 100.
Case B The bonds are issued at 96.
Case C The bonds are issued at 105.
Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization.
Instructions:
Complete the following table:
Case A Case B Case C
a. Cash inflow on the issuance date _______ _______ _______
b. Total cash outflow through maturity _______ _______ _______
c. Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue _______ _______ _______
d. Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
e. Amortization for the year ended December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
f. Unamortized premium as of December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
g. Unamortized discount as of December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
h. Bond carrying value as of December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
3. Definitions of manufacturing concepts
Interstate Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:
Materials and supplies used
Brass $75,000
Repair parts 16,000
Machine lubricants 9,000
Wages and salaries Machine operators 128,000
Production supervisors 64,000
Maintenance personnel 41,000
Other factory overhead Variable 35,000
Fixed 46,000
Sales commissions 20,000
Compute:
a. Total direct materials consumed
b. Total direct labor
c. Total prime cost
d. Total conversion cost
4. Schedule of cost of goods manufactured, income statement
The following information was taken from the ledger of Jefferson Industries, Inc.:
Direct labor $85,000 Administrative expenses $59,000
Selling expenses 34,000 Work in. process:
Sales 300,000 Jan. 1 29,000
Finished goods Dec. 31 21,000
Jan. 1 115,000 Direct material purchases 88,000
Dec. 31 131,000 Depreciation: factory 18,000
Raw (direct) materials on hand Indirect materials used 10,000
Jan. 1 31,000 Indirect labor 24,000
Dec. 31 40,000 Factory taxes 8,000
Factory utilities 11,000
Prepare the following:
a. A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.
b. An income statement for the year ended December 31.
5. Manufacturing statements and cost behavior
Tampa Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $36 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.
Per Unit Variable Cost Fixed Cost
Direct materials $4.50 $
Direct labor 6.5
Factory overhead 9 50,000
Selling 70,000
Administrative 135,000
Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 17,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Tampa carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.
Instructions:
a. Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.
b. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
c. On the basis of the information presented:
1. Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
2. What is the likely effect on the $4.50 unit cost of direct materials if next year’s production increases? Why ?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
DQ: 01
1. What is callable preferred stock? Why do corporations issue such stock? Given the different features that are associated with stock (callable, cumulative, preferred, etc.), what type of stock would you want to buy personally and why?
Guided Response :
Review your peers posts. Respond to at least two of your classmates, letting them know if you agree with their type of desired stock and whether your answer would change (and why) based on:
a. Different economic conditions
b. State of the company (if the company is in a growth phase versus a mature state).
DQ:2
Review the roles of management accounting within a company. What is the most important role of management accounting? How is that different than financial accounting?
Journal:
Institute of Management Accounting
While there are many instances of overlap between financial accounting and management accounting, each group s primary focus is different. Review the Institute of Management Accounting s (IMA) website, specifically the About IMA and the Resources and Publications sections of the website. Are you surprised by the topics that management accountants are focusing on? Why or why not? What interests you more, financial accounting or management accounting?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week Two Assignment
Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Analysis of stockholders’ equity
Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X6. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 20X6 and 20X5 follow:
20X6 20X5
Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10% $580,000 $500,000
Common stock, $10 par value 2,350,000 1,750,000
Paid-in capital in excess of par value
Preferred 24,000
Common 4,620,000 3,600,000
Retained earnings 8,470,000 6,920,000
Total stockholders’ equity $16,044,000 $12,770,000
a. Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X6.
b. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X6.
c. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 20X6?
d. Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X6? By what amount?
2. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization
Southlake Corporation issued $900,000 of 8% bonds on March 1, 20X1. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow.
Case A The bonds are issued at 100.
Case B The bonds are issued at 96.
Case C The bonds are issued at 105.
Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization.
Instructions:
Complete the following table:
Case A Case B Case C
a. Cash inflow on the issuance date _______ _______ _______
b. Total cash outflow through maturity _______ _______ _______
c. Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue _______ _______ _______
d. Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
e. Amortization for the year ended December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
f. Unamortized premium as of December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
g. Unamortized discount as of December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
h. Bond carrying value as of December 31, 20X1 _______ _______ _______
3. Definitions of manufacturing concepts
Interstate Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:
Materials and supplies used
Brass $75,000
Repair parts 16,000
Machine lubricants 9,000
Wages and salaries Machine operators 128,000
Production supervisors 64,000
Maintenance personnel 41,000
Other factory overhead Variable 35,000
Fixed 46,000
Sales commissions 20,000
Compute:
a. Total direct materials consumed
b. Total direct labor
c. Total prime cost
d. Total conversion cost
4. Schedule of cost of goods manufactured, income statement
The following information was taken from the ledger of Jefferson Industries, Inc.:
Direct labor $85,000 Administrative expenses $59,000
Selling expenses 34,000 Work in. process:
Sales 300,000 Jan. 1 29,000
Finished goods Dec. 31 21,000
Jan. 1 115,000 Direct material purchases 88,000
Dec. 31 131,000 Depreciation: factory 18,000
Raw (direct) materials on hand Indirect materials used 10,000
Jan. 1 31,000 Indirect labor 24,000
Dec. 31 40,000 Factory taxes 8,000
Factory utilities 11,000
Prepare the following:
a. A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.
b. An income statement for the year ended December 31.
5. Manufacturing statements and cost behavior
Tampa Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $36 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.
Per Unit Variable Cost Fixed Cost
Direct materials $4.50 $
Direct labor 6.5
Factory overhead 9 50,000
Selling 70,000
Administrative 135,000
Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 17,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Tampa carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.
Instructions:
a. Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.
b. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
c. On the basis of the information presented:
1. Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
2. What is the likely effect on the $4.50 unit cost of direct materials if next year’s production increases? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week 2 exercise:Chapter Two and Three Problems
Please complete the following 7 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in theappropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Chapter 2 Exercise 1
1. Issuance of stock
Prepare journal entries to record the issuance of 100,000 shares of common stock at $20 per share for each of the following independent cases:
a. Jackson Corporation has common stock with a par value of $1 per share.
b. Royal Corporation has no-par common with a stated value of $5 per share.
c. French Corporation has no-par common; no stated value has been assigned
Chapter 2 Exercise 3
3. Analysis of stockholders’ equity
Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X6. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 20X6 and 20X5 follow.
|
20X6
|
20X5
|
|
Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10%
|
$580,000
|
$500,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par value
|
2,350,000
|
1,750,000
|
|
|
|
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par value
|
|
|
|
Preferred
|
24,000
|
|
|
Common
|
4,620,000
|
3,600,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
8,470,000
|
6,920,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$16,044,000
|
$12,770,000
|
a. Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X6.
b. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X6.
c. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 20X6?
d. Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X6? By what amount?
Chapter 2 Problem 1
1. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization
Southlake Corporation issued $900,000 of 8% bonds on March 1, 20X1. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow.
Case A The bonds are issued at 100.
Case B The bonds are issued at 96.
Case C The bonds are issued at 105.
Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization.
Instructions:
|
Complete the following table:
|
|
|
|
|
Case A
|
Case B
|
Case C
|
- Cash inflow on the issuance date
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Total cash outflow through maturity
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Amortization for the year ended December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Unamortized premium as of December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Unamortized discount as of December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
- Bond carrying value as of December 31, 20X1
|
_______
|
_______
|
_______
|
Chapter 3 Exercise 1
1. Product costs and period costs
The costs that follow were extracted from the accounting records of several different manufacturers:
1. Weekly wages of an equipment maintenance worker
2. Marketing costs of a soft drink bottler
3. Cost of sheet metal in a Honda automobile
4. Cost of president’s subscription to Fortune magazine
5. Monthly operating costs of pollution control equipment used in a steel mill
6. Weekly wages of a seamstress employed by a jeans maker
7. Cost of compact discs (CDs) for newly recorded releases of Rush, Billy Joel, and Bryan Adams
a. Determine which of these costs are product costs and which are period costs.
b. For the product costs only, determine those that are easily traced to the finished product and those that are not.
Chapter 3 Exercise 2
2. Definitions of manufacturing concepts
Interstate Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:
Materials and supplies used
Brass $75,000
Repair parts 16,000
Machine lubricants 9,000
Wages and salaries Machine operators 128,000
Production supervisors 64,000
Maintenance personnel 41,000
Other factory overhead Variable 35,000
Fixed 46,000
Sales commissions 20,000
Compute:
a. Total direct materials consumed
b. Total direct labor
c. Total prime cost
d. Total conversion cost
Chapter 3 Exercise 5
5. Scheduleof cost of goods manufactured, income statement
The following information was taken from the ledger of Jefferson Industries, Inc.:
|
Direct labor
|
$85,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$59,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
34,000
|
|
Work in. process
|
|
|
Sales
|
300,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
29,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
|
|
Dec. 31
|
21,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
115,000
|
|
Direct material purchases
|
88,000
|
|
Dec. 31
|
131,000
|
|
Depreciation: factory
|
18,000
|
|
Raw (direct) materials on hand
|
Indirect materials used
|
10,000
|
|
Jan. 1
|
31,000
|
|
Indirect labor
|
24,000
|
|
Dec. 31
|
40,000
|
|
Factory taxes
|
8,000
|
|
|
|
Factory utilities
|
11,000
|
Prepare the following:
a. A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.
b. An income statement for the year ended December 31.
Chapter 3 Problem 3
3. Manufacturing statements and cost behavior
Tampa Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $36 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.
|
Per Unit
|
Variable Cost
|
Fixed Cost
|
|
Direct materials
|
$4.50
|
$
|
|
Direct labor
|
6.5
|
|
|
Factory overhead
|
9
|
50,000
|
|
Selling
|
|
70,000
|
|
Administrative
|
|
135,000
|
Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 17,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Tampa carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.
Instructions:
a. Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.
b. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
c. On the basis of the information presented:
1. Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
2. What is the likely effect on the $4.50 unit cost of direct materials if next year’s production increases? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Four Exercise Assignment Liability
1. Partner investments; journal entries.The LP partnership was formed on January 1, 19X7, by investments from Bill Levy and Marv Parcells. Levy contributed $30,000 cash and $80,000 of land. Parcells contributed cash of $50,000 and equipment with a value of $20,000.
a. Prepare the journal entries needed to record the investments of Levy and Parcells.
2. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:
Social Security taxes: 6% on the first $55,000 earned
Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned
Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
State income taxes: 5% of gross earnings
Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned
Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned
The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end.
a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:
Social Security taxes
Medicare taxes
Federal income taxes withheld
State income taxes
Insurance withholdings
b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:
Matching Social Security taxes
Matching Medicare taxes
State unemployment taxes
Federal unemployment taxes
3. Current liabilities: entries and disclosure.A review of selected financial activities of Visconti s during 20XX disclosed the following:
12/1
Borrowed $20,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3- month, 15% note payable. Interest and principal are due at maturity.
2/10
Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates that 2% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit.
12/22
Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
12/26
Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a note payable due in 60 days.
12/31
Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162.
12/31
Accrued 3 days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on October 31 to record accrued interest.
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of October 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
4. Issuance of stock: organization costs.Snowbound Corporation was incorporated in July. The firm s charter authorized the sale of 200,000 shares of $10 par-value common stock. The following transactions occurred during the year:
7/1:
Sold 45,000 shares of common stock to investors for $18 per share. Cash was collected and the shares were issued.
8/11
Sold 20,000 shares to investors for $22 per share. Cash was collected and the shares were issued.
9/1 Declared a cash dividend on 9/1 for $1.00 a share for shareholders on record 10/1 with payment being made on 11/1.
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries for the two stock issues.
b. Prepare journal entries for the cash dividend declaration and payment.
5. Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:
8/2:
Borrowed $75,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 120-day note.
8/20:
Issued a $40,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $40,000 de livery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest rate.
9/10:
Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.
9/11:
Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and car ries a 14% interest rate.
10/10:
The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.
10/31: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.
11/30: Paid note to Bank of Kingville
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on October 31 to record accrued interest.
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of October 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Four Exercise Assignment
Liability
1. Partner investments; journal entries.The LP partnership was formed on January 1, 19X7, by investments from Bill Levy and Marv Parcells. Levy contributed $30,000 cash and $80,000 of land. Parcells contributed cash of $50,000 and equipment with a value of $20,000.
a. Prepare the journal entries needed to record the investments of Levy and Parcells.
2. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:
Social Security taxes: 6% on the first $55,000 earned
Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned
Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
State income taxes: 5% of gross earnings
Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned
Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned
The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end.
a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:
Social Security taxes
Medicare taxes
Federal income taxes withheld
State income taxes
Insurance withholdings
b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:
Matching Social Security taxes
Matching Medicare taxes
State unemployment taxes
Federal unemployment taxes
3. Current liabilities: entries and disclosure.A review of selected financial activities of Visconti s during 20XX disclosed the following:
|
12/1
|
Borrowed $20,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3- month, 15% note payable. Interest and principal are due at maturity.
|
|
2/10
|
Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates that 2% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit.
|
|
12/22
|
Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
12/26
|
Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a note payable due in 60 days.
|
|
12/31
|
Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162.
|
|
12/31
|
Accrued 3 days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.
|
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on October 31 to record accrued interest.
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of October 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
4. Issuance of stock: organization costs.Snowbound Corporation was incorporated in July. The firm s charter authorized the sale of 200,000 shares of $10 par-value common stock. The following transactions occurred during the year:
|
7/1:
|
Sold 45,000 shares of common stock to investors for $18 per share. Cash was collected and the shares were issued.
|
|
|
|
|
8/11
|
Sold 20,000 shares to investors for $22 per share. Cash was collected and the shares were issued.
|
9/1 Declared a cash dividend on 9/1 for $1.00 a share for shareholders on record 10/1 with payment being made on 11/1.
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries for the two stock issues.
b. Prepare journal entries for the cash dividend declaration and payment.
5.Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:
|
8/2:
|
Borrowed $75,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 120-day note.
|
|
8/20:
|
Issued a $40,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $40,000 de livery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest rate.
|
|
9/10:
|
Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.
|
|
9/11:
|
Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and car ries a 14% interest rate.
|
|
10/10:
|
The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.
|
10/31: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.
11/30: Paid note to Bank of Kingville
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on October 31 to record accrued interest.
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of October 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Four Exercise Assignment
Liability
1. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:
- Social Security taxes: 6% on the first $55,000 earned
- Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned
- Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
- State income taxes: 5% of gross earnings
- Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
- State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned
- Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned
The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end.
a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:
- Social Security taxes
- Medicare taxes
- Federal income taxes withheld
- State income taxes
- Insurance withholdings
b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:
- Matching Social Security taxes
- Matching Medicare taxes
- State unemployment taxes
- Federal unemployment taxes
2. Current liabilities: entries and disclosure.A review of selected financial activities of Visconti s during 20XX disclosed the following:
| 12/1 |
Borrowed $20,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3- month, 15% note payable. Interest and principal are due at maturity. |
| 2/10 |
Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates that 2% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit. |
| 12/22 |
Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30. |
| 12/26 |
Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a note payable due in 60 days. |
| 12/31 |
Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162. |
| 12/31 |
Accrued 3 days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400. |
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on October 31 to record accrued interest.
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of October 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
3. Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:
| 8/2: |
Borrowed $75,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 120-day note. |
| 8/20: |
Issued a $40,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $40,000 de livery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest rate. |
| 9/10: |
Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed. |
| 9/11: |
Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and car ries a 14% interest rate. |
| 10/10: |
The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full. |
10/31: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.
11/30: Paid note to Bank of Kingville
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on October 31 to record accrued interest.
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of October 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Four Exercise Assignment
Liability
1. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:
Social Security taxes: 4% on the first $55,000 earned per employee
Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned per employee
Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
State income taxes: 4% of gross earnings
Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned per employee
Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned per employee
The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end and no wages have been paid during the month.
a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:
Social Security taxes
Medicare taxes
Federal income taxes withheld
State income taxes
Insurance withholdings
b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:
Matching Social Security taxes
Matching Medicare taxes
State unemployment taxes
Federal unemployment taxes
2. Current liabilities: entries and disclosure. A review of selected financial activities of Visconti s during 20XX disclosed the following:
|
|
|
|
|
|
1-Dec: Borrowed $10,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3-month, 15% note payable.
|
|
|
Interest and principal are due at maturity.
|
|
|
|
|
10-Dec: Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to
|
|
|
total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates
|
|
|
that 3% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit (parts only).
|
|
|
22-Dec: Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
|
26-Dec: Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a 15% note payable due in 60 days. (Assume 360 day year for interest)
|
|
|
31-Dec: Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162
|
|
|
|
31-Dec: Accrued three days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest.
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of December 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
3. Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:
|
2-Aug: Borrowed $55,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 90-day, 12% note.
|
|
20-Aug: Issued a $50,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $50,000 delivery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest r ate.
|
|
10-Sep: Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued
|
|
a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.
|
|
11-Sep: Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account
|
|
payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and carries a 14% interest rate.
|
|
10-Oct: The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.
|
|
11-Oct: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.
|
|
30-Oct: Paid note to Bank of Kingsville.
|
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest. (Daily interest is calculated utilizing the 360 day method).
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of December 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
DQ: 01
Ratios provide the users of financial statements with a great deal of information about the entity. Do ratios tell the whole story How could liquidity ratios be used by investors to determine whether or not to invest in a company?
DQ: 02
Profit Margin
|
Year Ending December 2012
|
Year Ending December 2011
|
Year Ending December 2010
|
| Revenues |
40,000 |
35,000 |
33,000 |
| Operating Expenses |
|
|
|
| Salaries |
15,000 |
10,000 |
9,000 |
| Maintenance and Repairs |
6,000 |
9,000 |
10,000 |
| Rental Expense |
2,500 |
2,500 |
2,500 |
| Depreciation |
2,000 |
2,000 |
2,000 |
| Fuel |
4,000 |
3,500 |
2,500 |
| Total Operating Expenses |
29,500 |
27,000 |
26,000 |
| Operating Income |
10,500 |
8,000 |
7,000 |
| Sales and Administrative Expenses |
6,000 |
4,000 |
3,000 |
| Interest Expense |
2,500 |
2,000 |
1,000 |
| Net Income |
2,000 |
2,000 |
3,000 |
Above is a comparative income statement for Cecil, Inc. for the years 2010, 2011, and 2012. Calculate the profit margin for each of these years. Comment on the profit margin trend.
Most Important Ratio Journal
Reflect for a moment on the ratios (working capital, current ratio, quick ratio, debt to asset, debt to equity, times interest earned, gross margin and net margin) presented this week. If you were considering investing in a company what ratio would be the most important to you Formulate and argument to defend your position.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Five Exercise Assignment Financial Ratios
1. Liquidity ratios.Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:
Edison
Stagg
Thornton
Cash
$4,000
$2,500
$1,000
Short-term investments
3,000
2,500
2,000
Accounts receivable
2,000
2,500
3,000
Inventory
1,000
2,500
4,000
Prepaid expenses
800
800
800
Accounts payable
200
200
200
Notes payable: short-term
3,100
3,100
3,100
Accrued payables
300
300
300
Long-term liabilities
3,800
3,800
3,800
Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?
2. Computation and evaluation of activity ratios.The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:
19X5
19X4
Net credit sales
$832,000
$760,000
Cost of goods sold
440,000
350,000
Cash, Dec. 31
125,000
110,000
Average Accounts receivable
180,000
140,000
Average Inventory
70,000
50,000
Accounts payable, Dec. 31
115,000
108,000
Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 19X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.
3. Profitability ratios, trading on the equity.Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 19X7:
Net sales
$1,500,000
Interest expense
120,000
Income tax expense
80,000
Preferred dividends
25,000
Net income
130,000
Average assets
1,100,000
Average common stockholders’ equity
400,000
Compute the gross profit margin ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places. Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly ex plain.
4. Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
20X2
20X1
Current Assets
$ 76,000
$ 80,000
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)
99,000
90,000
Intangibles
25,000
50,000
Current Liabilities
40,800
48,000
Long-Term Liabilities
143,000
160,000
Stockholders Equity
16,200
12,000
Net Sales
500,000
500,000
Cost of Goods Sold
332,500
350,000
Operating Expenses
93,500
85,000
Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work
.
5. Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
20X2
20X1
Current Assets
$ 76,000
$ 80,000
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)
99,000
90,000
Intangibles
25,000
50,000
Current Liabilities
40,800
48,000
Long-Term Liabilities
143,000
160,000
Stockholders Equity
16,200
12,000
Net Sales
500,000
500,000
Cost of Goods Sold
332,500
350,000
Operating Expenses
93,500
85,000
Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
6. Ratio computation. The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.
LONE PINE COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)
20X2
20X1
Assets
Current Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments
$ 400
$ 600
Accounts Receivable (net)
3,000
2,400
Inventories
2,000
2,200
Total Current Assets
$5,400
$5,200
Property, Plant, and Equipment
Land
$1,700
$ 600
Buildings and Equipment (net)
1,500
1,000
Total Property, Plant, and Equipment
$3,200
$1,600
Total Assets
$8,600
$6,800
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
Current Liabilities
Accounts Payable
$1,800
$1,700
Notes Payable
1,100
1,900
Total Current Liabilities
$2,900
$3,600
Long-Term Liabilities
Bonds Payable
4,100
2,100
Total Liabilities
$7,000
$5,700
Stockholders Equity
Common Stock
$ 200
$ 200
Retained Earnings
1,400
900
Total Stockholders Equity
$1,600
$1,100
Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
$8,600
$6,800
LONE PINE COMPANY
Statement of Income and Retained Earnings
For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)
Net Sales*
$36,000
Less: Cost of Goods Sold
$20,000
Selling Expense
6,000
Administrative Expense
4,000
Interest Expense
400
Income Tax Expense
2,000
32,400
Net Income
$ 3,600
Retained Earnings, Jan. 1
900
$ 4,500
Cash Dividends Declared and Paid
3,100
Retained Earnings, Dec. 31
$ 1,400
*All sales are on account.
Instructions
Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calcu lations to two decimal places when necessary:
a. Quick ratio
b. Current ratio
c. Inventory-turnover ratio
d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio
e. Return-on-assets ratio
f. Net-profit-margin ratio
g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity
h. Debt-to-total assets
i. Number of times that interest is earned
j. Dividend payout rate
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Five Exercise Assignment Financial Ratios
1.Liquidity ratios.Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:
Edison
Stagg
Thornton
Cash
$4,000
$2,500
$1,000
Short-term investments
3,000
2,500
2,000
Accounts receivable
2,000
2,500
3,000
Inventory
1,000
2,500
4,000
Prepaid expenses
800
800
800
Accounts payable
200
200
200
Notes payable: short-term
3,100
3,100
3,100
Accrued payables
300
300
300
Long-term liabilities
3,800
3,800
3,800
Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?
2.Computation and evaluation of activity ratios.The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:
19X5
19X4
Net credit sales
$832,000
$760,000
Cost of goods sold
440,000
350,000
Cash, Dec. 31
125,000
110,000
Average Accounts receivable
180,000
140,000
Average Inventory
70,000
50,000
Accounts payable, Dec. 31
115,000
108,000
Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 19X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.
3.Profitability ratios, trading on the equity.Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 19X7:
Net sales
$1,500,000
Interest expense
120,000
Income tax expense
80,000
Preferred dividends
25,000
Net income
130,000
Average assets
1,100,000
Average common stockholders’ equity
400,000
Compute the gross profit margin ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places. Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly ex plain.
4. Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
20X2
20X1
Current Assets
$ 76,000
$ 80,000
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)
99,000
90,000
Intangibles
25,000
50,000
Current Liabilities
40,800
48,000
Long-Term Liabilities
143,000
160,000
Stockholders Equity
16,200
12,000
Net Sales
500,000
500,000
Cost of Goods Sold
332,500
350,000
Operating Expenses
93,500
85,000
Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work
.
5. Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
20X2
20X1
Current Assets
$ 76,000
$ 80,000
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)
99,000
90,000
Intangibles
25,000
50,000
Current Liabilities
40,800
48,000
Long-Term Liabilities
143,000
160,000
Stockholders Equity
16,200
12,000
Net Sales
500,000
500,000
Cost of Goods Sold
332,500
350,000
Operating Expenses
93,500
85,000
Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
6. Ratio computation. The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.
LONE PINE COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)
20X2
20X1
Assets
Current Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments
$ 400
$ 600
Accounts Receivable (net)
3,000
2,400
Inventories
2,000
2,200
Total Current Assets
$5,400
$5,200
Property, Plant, and Equipment
Land
$1,700
$ 600
Buildings and Equipment (net)
1,500
1,000
Total Property, Plant, and Equipment
$3,200
$1,600
Total Assets
$8,600
$6,800
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
Current Liabilities
Accounts Payable
$1,800
$1,700
Notes Payable
1,100
1,900
Total Current Liabilities
$2,900
$3,600
Long-Term Liabilities
Bonds Payable
4,100
2,100
Total Liabilities
$7,000
$5,700
Stockholders Equity
Common Stock
$ 200
$ 200
Retained Earnings
1,400
900
Total Stockholders Equity
$1,600
$1,100
Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
$8,600
$6,800
LONE PINE COMPANY
Statement of Income and Retained Earnings
For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)
Net Sales*
$36,000
Less: Cost of Goods Sold
$20,000
Selling Expense
6,000
Administrative Expense
4,000
Interest Expense
400
Income Tax Expense
2,000
32,400
Net Income
$ 3,600
Retained Earnings, Jan. 1
900
$ 4,500
Cash Dividends Declared and Paid
3,100
Retained Earnings, Dec. 31
$ 1,400
*All sales are on account.
Instructions
Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calcu lations to two decimal places when necessary:
a. Quick ratio
b. Current ratio
c. Inventory-turnover ratio
d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio
e. Return-on-assets ratio
f. Net-profit-margin ratio
g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity
h. Debt-to-total assets
i. Number of times that interest is earned
j. Dividend payout rate
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Five Exercise Assignment
Financial Ratios
- Liquidity ratios.Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:
|
Edison
|
Stagg
|
Thornton
|
|
Cash
|
$6,000
|
$5,000
|
$4,000
|
|
Short-term investments
|
3,000
|
2,500
|
2,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
2,000
|
2,500
|
3,000
|
|
Inventory
|
1,000
|
2,500
|
4,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
800
|
800
|
800
|
|
Accounts payable
|
200
|
200
|
200
|
|
Notes payable: short-term
|
3,100
|
3,100
|
3,100
|
|
Accrued payables
|
300
|
300
|
300
|
|
Long-term liabilities
|
3,800
|
3,800
|
3,800
|
- Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?
- Computation and evaluation of activity ratios.The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:
|
|
20X5
|
20X4
|
|
Net credit sales
|
$832,000
|
$760,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
530,000
|
400,000
|
|
Cash, Dec. 31
|
125,000
|
110,000
|
|
Average Accounts receivable
|
205,000
|
156,000
|
|
Average Inventory
|
70,000
|
50,000
|
|
Accounts payable, Dec. 31
|
115,000
|
108,000
|
|
Instructions
- Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 20X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.
|
3. Profitability ratios, trading on the equity.Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 20X7:
|
Net sales
|
$1,750,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
120,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
80,000
|
|
Preferred dividends
|
25,000
|
|
Net income
|
130,000
|
|
Average assets
|
1,200,000
|
|
Average common stockholders’ equity
|
500,000
|
- Compute the profit margin on sales ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.
- Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly ex plain.
- Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
|
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Current Assets
|
$86,000
|
$80,000
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)
|
99,000
|
90,000
|
|
Intangibles
|
25,000
|
50,000
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
40,800
|
48,000
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
153,000
|
160,000
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
16,200
|
12,000
|
|
Net Sales
|
500,000
|
500,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
322,500
|
350,000
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
93,500
|
85,000
|
- Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
|
5.Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Current Assets
|
$86,000
|
$80,000
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)
|
99,000
|
80,000
|
|
Intangibles
|
25,000
|
50,000
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
40,800
|
48,000
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
153,000
|
150,000
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
16,200
|
12,000
|
|
Net Sales
|
500,000
|
500,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
322,500
|
350,000
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
93,500
|
85,000
|
- Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
|
6. Ratio computation. The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.
|
|
LONE PINE COMPANY
|
|
Comparative Balance Sheets
|
|
December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)
|
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Assets
|
|
Current Assets
|
|
Cash and Short-Term Investments
|
$400
|
$600
|
|
Accounts Receivable (net)
|
3,000
|
2,400
|
|
Inventories
|
3,000
|
2,300
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$6,400
|
$5,300
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment
|
|
Land
|
$1,700
|
$500
|
|
Buildings and Equipment (net)
|
1,500
|
1,000
|
|
Total Property, Plant, and Equipment
|
$3,200
|
$1,500
|
|
Total Assets
|
$9,600
|
$6,800
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
$2,800
|
$1,700
|
|
Notes Payable
|
1,100
|
1,900
|
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
$3,900
|
$3,600
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
|
Bonds Payable
|
4,100
|
2,100
|
|
Total Liabilities
|
$8,000
|
$5,700
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
|
Common Stock
|
$200
|
$200
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
1,400
|
900
|
|
Total Stockholders Equity
|
$1,600
|
$1,100
|
|
Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
|
$9,600
|
$6,800
|
|
LONE PINE COMPANY
|
|
Statement of Income and Retained Earnings
|
|
For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)
|
|
Net Sales*
|
$36,000
|
|
Less: Cost of Goods Sold
|
$20,000
|
|
Selling Expense
|
6,000
|
|
Administrative Expense
|
4,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
400
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
2,000
|
32,400
|
|
Net Income
|
$3,600
|
|
Retained Earnings, Jan. 1
|
900
|
|
Ending Retained Earnings
|
$4,500
|
|
Cash Dividends Declared and Paid
|
3,100
|
|
Retained Earnings, Dec. 31
|
$1,400
|
|
*All sales are on account.
|
Instructions
Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calcu lations to two decimal places when necessary:
a. Quick ratio
b. Current ratio
c. Inventory-turnover ratio
d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio
e. Return-on-assets ratio
f. Net-profit-margin ratio
g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity
h. Debt-to-total assets
i. Number of times that interest is earned
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Acc 205 week 5 exercise assignment |
| Question Detail: Week Five Exercise Assignment
Financial Ratios
- Liquidity ratios.Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:
|
Edison
|
Stagg
|
Thornton
|
|
Cash
|
$6,000
|
$5,000
|
$4,000
|
|
Short-term investments
|
3,000
|
2,500
|
2,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
2,000
|
2,500
|
3,000
|
|
Inventory
|
1,000
|
2,500
|
4,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
800
|
800
|
800
|
|
Accounts payable
|
200
|
200
|
200
|
|
Notes payable: short-term
|
3,100
|
3,100
|
3,100
|
|
Accrued payables
|
300
|
300
|
300
|
|
Long-term liabilities
|
3,800
|
3,800
|
3,800
|
- Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?
- Computation and evaluation of activity ratios.The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:
|
|
20X5
|
20X4
|
|
Net credit sales
|
$832,000
|
$760,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
530,000
|
400,000
|
|
Cash, Dec. 31
|
125,000
|
110,000
|
|
Average Accounts receivable
|
205,000
|
156,000
|
|
Average Inventory
|
70,000
|
50,000
|
|
Accounts payable, Dec. 31
|
115,000
|
108,000
|
|
Instructions
- Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 20X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.
|
3. Profitability ratios, trading on the equity.Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 20X7:
|
Net sales
|
$1,750,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
120,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
80,000
|
|
Preferred dividends
|
25,000
|
|
Net income
|
130,000
|
|
Average assets
|
1,200,000
|
|
Average common stockholders’ equity
|
500,000
|
- Compute the profit margin on sales ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.
- Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly ex plain.
- Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
|
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Current Assets
|
$86,000
|
$80,000
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)
|
99,000
|
90,000
|
|
Intangibles
|
25,000
|
50,000
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
40,800
|
48,000
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
153,000
|
160,000
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
16,200
|
12,000
|
|
Net Sales
|
500,000
|
500,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
322,500
|
350,000
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
93,500
|
85,000
|
- Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
|
5.Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Current Assets
|
$86,000
|
$80,000
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)
|
99,000
|
80,000
|
|
Intangibles
|
25,000
|
50,000
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
40,800
|
48,000
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
153,000
|
150,000
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
16,200
|
12,000
|
|
Net Sales
|
500,000
|
500,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
322,500
|
350,000
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
93,500
|
85,000
|
- Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
|
6. Ratio computation. The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.
|
|
LONE PINE COMPANY
|
|
Comparative Balance Sheets
|
|
December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)
|
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Assets
|
|
Current Assets
|
|
Cash and Short-Term Investments
|
$400
|
$600
|
|
Accounts Receivable (net)
|
3,000
|
2,400
|
|
Inventories
|
3,000
|
2,300
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$6,400
|
$5,300
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment
|
|
Land
|
$1,700
|
$500
|
|
Buildings and Equipment (net)
|
1,500
|
1,000
|
|
Total Property, Plant, and Equipment
|
$3,200
|
$1,500
|
|
Total Assets
|
$9,600
|
$6,800
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
$2,800
|
$1,700
|
|
Notes Payable
|
1,100
|
1,900
|
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
$3,900
|
$3,600
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
|
Bonds Payable
|
4,100
|
2,100
|
|
Total Liabilities
|
$8,000
|
$5,700
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
|
Common Stock
|
$200
|
$200
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
1,400
|
900
|
|
Total Stockholders Equity
|
$1,600
|
$1,100
|
|
Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
|
$9,600
|
$6,800
|
|
LONE PINE COMPANY
|
|
Statement of Income and Retained Earnings
|
|
For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)
|
|
Net Sales*
|
$36,000
|
|
Less: Cost of Goods Sold
|
$20,000
|
|
Selling Expense
|
6,000
|
|
Administrative Expense
|
4,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
400
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
2,000
|
32,400
|
|
Net Income
|
$3,600
|
|
Retained Earnings, Jan. 1
|
900
|
|
Ending Retained Earnings
|
$4,500
|
|
Cash Dividends Declared and Paid
|
3,100
|
|
Retained Earnings, Dec. 31
|
$1,400
|
|
*All sales are on account.
|
Instructions
Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calcu lations to two decimal places when necessary:
a. Quick ratio
b. Current ratio
c. Inventory-turnover ratio
d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio
e. Return-on-assets ratio
f. Net-profit-margin ratio
g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity
h. Debt-to-total assets
i. Number of times that interest is earned
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| ACC 205 Week 5 Exercise Assignment Solutions (Brand New 100% accuarte answer solved by a CMA) |
| Question Detail:
Week Five Exercise Assignment
Financial Ratios
- Liquidity ratios.Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:
|
Edison
|
Stagg
|
Thornton
|
|
Cash
|
$6,000
|
$5,000
|
$4,000
|
|
Short-term investments
|
3,000
|
2,500
|
2,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
2,000
|
2,500
|
3,000
|
|
Inventory
|
1,000
|
2,500
|
4,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
800
|
800
|
800
|
|
Accounts payable
|
200
|
200
|
200
|
|
Notes payable: short-term
|
3,100
|
3,100
|
3,100
|
|
Accrued payables
|
300
|
300
|
300
|
|
Long-term liabilities
|
3,800
|
3,800
|
3,800
|
- Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?
- Computation and evaluation of activity ratios.The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:
|
|
20X5
|
20X4
|
|
Net credit sales
|
$832,000
|
$760,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
530,000
|
400,000
|
|
Cash, Dec. 31
|
125,000
|
110,000
|
|
Average Accounts receivable
|
205,000
|
156,000
|
|
Average Inventory
|
70,000
|
50,000
|
|
Accounts payable, Dec. 31
|
115,000
|
108,000
|
|
Instructions
- Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 20X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.
|
3. Profitability ratios, trading on the equity.Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 20X7:
|
Net sales
|
$1,750,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
120,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
80,000
|
|
Preferred dividends
|
25,000
|
|
Net income
|
130,000
|
|
Average assets
|
1,200,000
|
|
Average common stockholders’ equity
|
500,000
|
- Compute the profit margin on sales ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.
- Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly ex plain.
- Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
|
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Current Assets
|
$86,000
|
$80,000
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)
|
99,000
|
90,000
|
|
Intangibles
|
25,000
|
50,000
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
40,800
|
48,000
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
153,000
|
160,000
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
16,200
|
12,000
|
|
Net Sales
|
500,000
|
500,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
322,500
|
350,000
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
93,500
|
85,000
|
- Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
|
5.Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Current Assets
|
$86,000
|
$80,000
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)
|
99,000
|
80,000
|
|
Intangibles
|
25,000
|
50,000
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
40,800
|
48,000
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
153,000
|
150,000
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
16,200
|
12,000
|
|
Net Sales
|
500,000
|
500,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
322,500
|
350,000
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
93,500
|
85,000
|
- Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
|
6. Ratio computation. The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.
|
|
LONE PINE COMPANY
|
|
Comparative Balance Sheets
|
|
December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)
|
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Assets
|
|
Current Assets
|
|
Cash and Short-Term Investments
|
$400
|
$600
|
|
Accounts Receivable (net)
|
3,000
|
2,400
|
|
Inventories
|
3,000
|
2,300
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$6,400
|
$5,300
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment
|
|
Land
|
$1,700
|
$500
|
|
Buildings and Equipment (net)
|
1,500
|
1,000
|
|
Total Property, Plant, and Equipment
|
$3,200
|
$1,500
|
|
Total Assets
|
$9,600
|
$6,800
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
$2,800
|
$1,700
|
|
Notes Payable
|
1,100
|
1,900
|
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
$3,900
|
$3,600
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
|
Bonds Payable
|
4,100
|
2,100
|
|
Total Liabilities
|
$8,000
|
$5,700
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
|
Common Stock
|
$200
|
$200
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
1,400
|
900
|
|
Total Stockholders Equity
|
$1,600
|
$1,100
|
|
Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
|
$9,600
|
$6,800
|
|
LONE PINE COMPANY
|
|
Statement of Income and Retained Earnings
|
|
For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)
|
|
Net Sales*
|
$36,000
|
|
Less: Cost of Goods Sold
|
$20,000
|
|
Selling Expense
|
6,000
|
|
Administrative Expense
|
4,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
400
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
2,000
|
32,400
|
|
Net Income
|
$3,600
|
|
Retained Earnings, Jan. 1
|
900
|
|
Ending Retained Earnings
|
$4,500
|
|
Cash Dividends Declared and Paid
|
3,100
|
|
Retained Earnings, Dec. 31
|
$1,400
|
|
*All sales are on account.
|
Instructions
Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calcu lations to two decimal places when necessary:
a. Quick ratio
b. Current ratio
c. Inventory-turnover ratio
d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio
e. Return-on-assets ratio
f. Net-profit-margin ratio
g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity
h. Debt-to-total assets
i. Number of times that interest is earned
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Five Exercise Assignment
Financial Ratios
- 1. Liquidity ratios.Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:
|
Edison |
Stagg |
Thornton |
| Cash |
$4,000 |
$2,500 |
$1,000 |
|
| Short-term investments |
3,000 |
2,500 |
2,000 |
|
| Accounts receivable |
2,000 |
2,500 |
3,000 |
|
| Inventory |
1,000 |
2,500 |
4,000 |
|
| Prepaid expenses |
800 |
800 |
800 |
|
| Accounts payable |
200 |
200 |
200 |
|
| Notes payable: short-term |
3,100 |
3,100 |
3,100 |
|
| Accrued payables |
300 |
300 |
300 |
|
| Long-term liabilities |
3,800 |
3,800 |
3,800 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?
- 2. Computation and evaluation of activity ratios.The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:
|
19X5 |
19X4 |
| Net credit sales |
$832,000 |
$760,000 |
|
| Cost of goods sold |
440,000 |
350,000 |
|
| Cash, Dec. 31 |
125,000 |
110,000 |
|
| Average Accounts receivable |
180,000 |
140,000 |
|
| Average Inventory |
70,000 |
50,000 |
|
| Accounts payable, Dec. 31 |
115,000 |
108,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 19X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.
- 3. Profitability ratios, trading on the equity.Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 19X7:
| Net sales |
$1,500,000 |
| Interest expense |
120,000 |
| Income tax expense |
80,000 |
| Preferred dividends |
25,000 |
| Net income |
130,000 |
| Average assets |
1,100,000 |
| Average common stockholders equity |
400,000 |
- Compute the gross profit margin ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.
- Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly ex plain.
- Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
| Current Assets |
$ 76,000 |
$ 80,000 |
| Property, Plant, and Equipment (net) |
99,000 |
90,000 |
| Intangibles |
25,000 |
50,000 |
| Current Liabilities |
40,800 |
48,000 |
| Long-Term Liabilities |
143,000 |
160,000 |
| Stockholders Equity |
16,200 |
12,000 |
| Net Sales |
500,000 |
500,000 |
| Cost of Goods Sold |
332,500 |
350,000 |
| Operating Expenses |
93,500 |
85,000 |
|
|
|
|
Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
- Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
| Current Assets |
$ 76,000 |
$ 80,000 |
| Property, Plant, and Equipment (net) |
99,000 |
90,000 |
| Intangibles |
25,000 |
50,000 |
| Current Liabilities |
40,800 |
48,000 |
| Long-Term Liabilities |
143,000 |
160,000 |
| Stockholders Equity |
16,200 |
12,000 |
| Net Sales |
500,000 |
500,000 |
| Cost of Goods Sold |
332,500 |
350,000 |
| Operating Expenses |
93,500 |
85,000 |
|
|
|
|
Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
6. Ratio computation. The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.
|
LONE PINE COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)
|
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
| Assets |
| Current Assets |
| Cash and Short-Term Investments |
$ 400 |
$ 600 |
| Accounts Receivable (net) |
3,000 |
2,400 |
| Inventories |
2,000 |
2,200 |
| Total Current Assets |
$5,400 |
$5,200 |
| Property, Plant, and Equipment |
| Land |
$1,700 |
$ 600 |
| Buildings and Equipment (net) |
1,500 |
1,000 |
| Total Property, Plant, and Equipment |
$3,200 |
$1,600 |
| Total Assets |
$8,600 |
$6,800 |
| Liabilities and Stockholders Equity |
| Current Liabilities |
| Accounts Payable |
$1,800 |
$1,700 |
| Notes Payable |
1,100 |
1,900 |
| Total Current Liabilities |
$2,900 |
$3,600 |
| Long-Term Liabilities |
| Bonds Payable |
4,100 |
2,100 |
| Total Liabilities |
$7,000 |
$5,700 |
| Stockholders Equity |
| Common Stock |
$ 200 |
$ 200 |
| Retained Earnings |
1,400 |
900 |
| Total Stockholders Equity |
$1,600 |
$1,100 |
| Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity |
$8,600 |
$6,800 |
|
|
|
|
|
LONE PINE COMPANY
Statement of Income and Retained Earnings
For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)
|
| Net Sales* |
$36,000
|
| Less: Cost of Goods Sold |
$20,000 |
| Selling Expense |
6,000 |
| Administrative Expense |
4,000 |
| Interest Expense |
400 |
| Income Tax Expense |
2,000
|
32,400 |
| Net Income |
$ 3,600
|
| Retained Earnings, Jan. 1 |
900
|
|
$ 4,500
|
| Cash Dividends Declared and Paid |
3,100
|
| Retained Earnings, Dec. 31 |
$ 1,400
|
| *All sales are on account. |
|
|
|
|
Instructions
Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calcu lations to two decimal places when necessary:
a. Quick ratio
b. Current ratio
c. Inventory-turnover ratio
d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio
e. Return-on-assets ratio
f. Net-profit-margin ratio
g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity
h. Debt-to-total assets
i. Number of times that interest is earned
j. Dividend payout rate
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Five Exercise Assignment
Financial Ratios
1. Liquidity ratios. Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:
|
|
Edison
|
Stagg
|
Thornton
|
|
Cash
|
$6,000
|
$5,000
|
$4,000
|
|
|
Short-term investments
|
3,000
|
2,500
|
2,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
2,000
|
2,500
|
3,000
|
|
|
Inventory
|
1,000
|
2,500
|
4,000
|
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
800
|
800
|
800
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
200
|
200
|
200
|
|
|
Notes payable: short-term
|
3,100
|
3,100
|
3,100
|
|
|
Accrued payables
|
300
|
300
|
300
|
|
|
Long-term liabilities
|
3,800
|
3,800
|
3,800
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?
|
2. Computation and evaluation of activity ratios. The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
20X5
|
20X4
|
|
Net credit sales
|
$832,000
|
$760,000
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
530,000
|
400,000
|
|
|
Cash, Dec. 31
|
125,000
|
110,000
|
|
|
Average Accounts receivable
|
205,000
|
156,000
|
|
|
Average Inventory
|
70,000
|
50,000
|
|
|
Accounts payable, Dec. 31
|
115,000
|
108,000
|
|
|
Instructions
a. Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 20X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3. Profitability ratios, trading on the equity. Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 20X7:
|
|
|
|
Net sales
|
$1,750,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
120,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
80,000
|
|
Preferred dividends
|
25,000
|
|
Net income
|
130,000
|
|
Average assets
|
1,200,000
|
|
Average common stockholders’ equity
|
500,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- Compute the profit margin on sales ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.
- Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly ex plain.
|
4. Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
|
| |
|
|
|
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Current Assets
|
$86,000
|
$80,000
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)
|
99,000
|
90,000
|
|
Intangibles
|
25,000
|
50,000
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
40,800
|
48,000
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
153,000
|
160,000
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
16,200
|
12,000
|
|
Net Sales
|
500,000
|
500,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
322,500
|
350,000
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
93,500
|
85,000
|
| |
|
|
|
|
a. Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
|
5.Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Current Assets
|
$86,000
|
$80,000
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)
|
99,000
|
80,000
|
|
Intangibles
|
25,000
|
50,000
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
40,800
|
48,000
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
153,000
|
150,000
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
16,200
|
12,000
|
|
Net Sales
|
500,000
|
500,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
322,500
|
350,000
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
93,500
|
85,000
|
| |
|
|
|
a. Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
|
|
6. Ratio computation. The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
LONE PINE COMPANY
|
|
|
Comparative Balance Sheets
|
|
|
December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)
|
|
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Current Assets
|
|
|
Cash and Short-Term Investments
|
$400
|
|
$600
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable (net)
|
3,000
|
|
2,400
|
|
|
Inventories
|
3,000
|
|
2,300
|
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$6,400
|
|
$5,300
|
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment
|
|
|
Land
|
$1,700
|
|
$500
|
|
|
Buildings and Equipment (net)
|
1,500
|
|
1,000
|
|
|
Total Property, Plant, and Equipment
|
$3,200
|
|
$1,500
|
|
|
Total Assets
|
$9,600
|
|
$6,800
|
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
|
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
$2,800
|
|
$1,700
|
|
|
Notes Payable
|
1,100
|
|
1,900
|
|
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
$3,900
|
|
$3,600
|
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
|
|
Bonds Payable
|
4,100
|
|
2,100
|
|
|
Total Liabilities
|
$8,000
|
|
$5,700
|
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
|
|
Common Stock
|
$200
|
|
$200
|
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
1,400
|
|
900
|
|
|
Total Stockholders Equity
|
$1,600
|
|
$1,100
|
|
Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
|
$9,600
|
|
$6,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
LONE PINE COMPANY
|
|
|
Statement of Income and Retained Earnings
|
|
|
For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)
|
|
|
Net Sales*
|
|
$36,000
|
|
|
|
Less: Cost of Goods Sold
|
$20,000
|
|
|
|
|
Selling Expense
|
6,000
|
|
|
|
|
Administrative Expense
|
4,000
|
|
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
400
|
|
|
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
2,000
|
32,400
|
|
|
|
Net Income
|
|
$3,600
|
|
|
|
Retained Earnings, Jan. 1
|
|
900
|
|
|
|
Ending Retained Earnings
|
|
$4,500
|
|
|
|
Cash Dividends Declared and Paid
|
|
3,100
|
|
|
|
Retained Earnings, Dec. 31
|
|
$1,400
|
|
|
|
*All sales are on account.
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Instructions
Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calcu lations to two decimal places when necessary:
a. Quick ratio
b. Current ratio
c. Inventory-turnover ratio
d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio
e. Return-on-assets ratio
f. Net-profit-margin ratio
g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity
h. Debt-to-total assets
i. Number of times that interest is earned
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Final Paper
Focus of the Final Paper
Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions.
Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:
Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?
Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet
Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.
Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.
Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Final Paper
Focus of the Final Paper
Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions.
Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:
Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?
Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet
Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.
Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.
Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.
Partner investments; journal entries
.The LP partnership was formed on January 1, 19X7, by investments from Bill Levy and Marv Parcells. Levy contributed $30,000 cash and $80,000 of land. Parcells contributed cash of $50,000 and equipment with a value of $20,000.
a. Prepare the journal entries needed to record the investments of Levy and Parcells.
2.
Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:
Social Security taxes: 6% on the first $55,000 earned
Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned
Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
State income taxes: 5% of gross earnings
Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned
Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned
The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end.
a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:
Social Security taxes
Medicare taxes
Federal income taxes withheld
State income taxes
Insurance withholdings
b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:
Matching Social Security taxes
Matching Medicare taxes
State unemployment taxes
Federal unemployment taxes
3. Current liabilities: entries and disclosure.A review of selected financial activities of Visconti s during 20XX disclosed the following:
12/1
Borrowed $20,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3- month, 15% note payable. Interest and principal are due at maturity.
2/10
Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates that 2% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit.
12/22
Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
12/26
Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a note payable due in 60 days.
12/31
Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162.
12/31
Accrued 3 days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on October 31 to record accrued interest.
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of October 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
4.
Issuance of stock: organization costs.Snowbound Corporation was incorporated in July. The firm s charter authorized the sale of 200,000 shares of $10 par-value common stock. The following transactions occurred during the year:
7/1:
Sold 45,000 shares of common stock to investors for $18 per share. Cash was collected and the shares were issued.
8/11
Sold 20,000 shares to investors for $22 per share. Cash was collected and the shares were issued.
9/1 Declared a cash dividend on 9/1 for $1.00 a share for shareholders on record 10/1 with payment being made on 11/1.
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries for the two stock issues.
b. Prepare journal entries for the cash dividend declaration and payment.
5.
Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:
8/2:
Borrowed $75,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 120-day note.
8/20:
Issued a $40,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $40,000 de livery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest rate.
9/10:
Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.
9/11:
Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and car ries a 14% interest rate.
10/10:
The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.
10/31: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full. 11/30: Paid note to Bank of Kingville Instructions a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions. b. Prepare adjusting entries on October 31 to record accrued interest. c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of October 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Inventory 1.
Specific identification method. Boston Galleries uses the specific identification method for inventory valuation. Inventory information for several oil paintings follows.
Painting
Cost 1/2 Beginning inventory
Woods $11,000 4/19 Purchase
Sunset 21,800 6/7 Purchase
Earth 31,200 12/16 Purchase
Moon 4,000
Woodsand
Moonwere sold during the year for a total of $35,000. Determine the firm s a. cost of goods sold. b. gross profit. c. ending inventory. 2.
Inventory valuation methods: basic computations. The January beginning inven tory of the White Company consisted of 300 units costing $40 each. During the first quarter, purchases were: Date Quantity Cost 1/15 700 $45 1/31 1200 $48 2/12 800 $46 2/27 650 $51 Sales during the first quarter were. Date Sold 1/19 500 2/2 600 2/13 500 2/28 100 The White Company uses a perpetual inventory system. Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods. FIFO
LIFO Weighted Average Goods available for sale $ $ $ Ending inventory, March 31 Cost of goods sold
3.
Perpetual inventory system: journal entries. At the beginning of 20X3, Beehler Company implemented a computerized perpetual inventory system. The following transactions occurred: Purchases on account: 500 units @$4 = $2,000 Sales on account: 300 units @ $5 = $1,500 Purchases on account: 600 units @$5 = $3,000 Sales on account: 300 units @ $5 = $1,500 a. Prepare journal entries for the above purchases and sales. b. Calculate the balance in the firm s Inventory account. 4.
Inventory valuation methods: computations and concepts. Wave Riders Surfboard Company began business on January 1 of the current year. Below are the transactions for the year : 1/3: Purchase 100 boards @$125 3/17: Sold 50 boards @ $250 4/3: Purchase 200 boards @$135 5/17: Sold 75 boards @ $250 6/3: Purchase 100 boards @$145 1/3: Purchase 100 boards @$155 3/17: Sold 300 boards @ $250 1/3: Purchase 100 boards @$140 Wave Riders uses a perpetual inventory system.
Instructions a. Calculate cost of goods sold, ending inventory, and gross profit under each of the following inventory valuation methods: First-in, first-out Last-in, first-out Weighted average b. Which of the three methods would be chosen if management s goal is to (1) produce an up-to-date inventory valuation on the balance sheet? (2) approximate the physical flow of a sand and gravel dealer? 5.
Depreciation methods.Betsy Ross Enterprises purchased a delivery van for $30,000 in January 20X7. The van was estimated to have a service life of 5 years and a resid ual value of $6,000. The company is planning to drive the van 20,000 miles annually. Compute depreciation expense for 20X8 by using each of the following methods: a. Units-of-output, assuming 17,000 miles were driven during 20X8 b. Straight-line c. Double-declining-balance 6.
Depreciation computations.Alpha Alpha Alpha, a college fraternity, purchased a new heavy-duty washing machine on January 1, 20X3. The machine, which cost $1,000, had an estimated residual value of $100 and an estimated service life of 4 years (1,800 washing cycles). Calculate the following: a. The machine s book value on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the straight-line depreciation method b. Depreciation expense for 20X4, assuming use of the units-of-output depreciation method. Actual washing cycles in 20X4 totaled 500. c. Accumulated depreciation on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the double-declining-balance depreciation method. 7.
Depreciation computations: change in estimate.Aussie Imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for $50,000 on January 1, 20X3. At the time of acquisition, the machine was estimated to have a service life of 5 years (25,000 operating hours) and a residual value of $5,000. During the 5 years of operations (20X3 – 20X7), the machine was used for 5,100, 4,800, 3,200, 6,000, and 5,900 hours, respectively.
Instructions a. Compute depreciation for 20X3 – 20X7 by using the following methods: straight line, units of output, and double-declining-balance. b. On January 1, 20X5, management shortened the remaining service life of the machine to 20 months. Assuming use of the straight-line method, compute the company s depreciation expense for 20X5. c. Briefly describe what you would have done differently in part (a) if Aussie Imports had paid $47,800 for the machinery rather than $50,000 In addition, assume that the company incurred $800 of freight charges $1,400 for machine setup and testing, and $300 for insurance during the first year of use.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Two Exercise Assignment
Revenue and Expenses
1. Recognition of concepts. Ron Carroll operates a small company that books enter tainers for theaters, parties, conventions, and so forth. The company s fiscal year ends on June 30. Consider the following items and classify each as either (1) pre paid expense, (2) unearned revenue, (3) accrued expense, (4) accrued revenue, or (5) none of the foregoing.
a. Amounts paid on June 30 for a 1-year insurance policy
b. Professional fees earned but not billed as of June 30
c. Repairs to the firm s copy machine, incurred and paid in June
d. An advance payment from a client for a performance next month at a convention
e. The payment in part (d) from the client s point of view
f. Interest owed on the company s bank loan, to be paid in early July
g. The bank loan payable in part (f)
h. Office supplies on hand at year-end
2. Analysis of prepaid account balance. The following information relates to Action Sign Company for 20X2:
|
Insurance expense
|
$4,350
|
|
Prepaid insurance, December 31, 20X2
|
1,900
|
|
Cash outlays for insurance during 20X2
|
6,200
|
Compute the balance in the Prepaid Insurance account on January 1, 20X2.
3. Understanding the closing process. Examine the following list of accounts:
|
Interest Payable
|
Accumulated Depreciation: Equipment
|
|
Alex Kenzy, Drawing
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
Service Revenue
|
Cash
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
Interest Expense
|
Which of the preceding accounts
a. appear on a post-closing trial balance?
b. are commonly known as temporary, or nominal, accounts?
c. generate a debit to Income Summary in the closing process?
d. are closed to the capital account in the closing process?
4. Adjusting entries and financial statements. The following information pertains to Fixation Enterprises:
The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one third of this amount had been earned.
Fixation provided $2,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31.
Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,650.
The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period.
The company paid $18,000 on October 1 of the current year to Vantage Property Management. The payment was for 6 months rent of Fixation s headquarters, beginning on November 1.
Fixation s accounting year ends on December 31.
Instructions
Analyze the five preceding cases individually and determine the following:
a. The typeof adjusting entry needed at year-end (Use the following codes: A, adjust ment of a prepaid expense; B, adjustment of an unearned revenue; C, adjustment to record an accrued expense; or D, adjustment to record an accrued revenue.)
b. The year-end journal entry to adjust the accounts
c. The income statement impact of each adjustment (e.g., increases total revenues by $500)
5. Adjusting entries. You have been retained to examine the records of Kathy s Day Care Center as of December 31, 20X3, the close of the current reporting period. In the course of your examination, you discover the following:
On January 1, 20X3, the Supplies account had a balance of $2,350. During the year, $5,520 worth of supplies was purchased, and a balance of $1,620 remained unused on December 31.
Unrecorded interest owed to the center totaled $275 as of December 31.
All clients pay tuition in advance, and their payments are credited to the Unearned Tuition Revenue account. The account was credited for $75,500 on August 31. With the exception of $15,500 all amounts were for the current semester ending on December 31.
Depreciation on the school s van was $3,000 for the year.
On August 1, the center began to pay rent in 6-month installments of $21,000. Kathy wrote a check to the owner of the building and recorded the check in Pre paid Rent, a new account.
Two salaried employees earn $400 each for a 5-day week. The employees are paid every Friday, and December 31 falls on a Thursday.
Kathy s Day Care paid insurance premiums as follows, each time debiting Pre paid Insurance:
|
Date Paid
|
Policy No.
|
Length of Policy
|
Amount
|
|
Feb. 1, 20X2
|
1033MCM19
|
1 year
|
$540
|
|
Jan. 1, 20X3
|
7952789HP
|
1 year
|
912
|
|
Aug. 1, 20X3
|
XQ943675ST
|
2 years
|
840
|
Instructions
The center s accounts were last adjusted on December 31, 20X2. Prepare the adjusting entries necessary under the accrual basis of accounting.
6. Bank reconciliation and entries. The following information was taken from the accounting records of Palmetto Company for the month of January:
|
Balance per bank
|
$6,150
|
|
Balance per company records
|
3,580
|
|
Bank service charge for January
|
20
|
|
Deposits in transit
|
940
|
|
Interest on note collected by bank
|
100
|
|
Note collected by bank
|
1,000
|
|
NSF check returned by the bank with the bank statement
|
650
|
|
Outstanding checks
|
3,080
|
Instructions:
a. Prepare Palmetto s January bank reconciliation.
b. Prepare any necessary journal entries for Palmetto.
7. Direct write-off method. Harrisburg Company, which began business in early 20X7, reported $40,000 of accounts receivable on the December 31, 20X7, balance sheet. Included in this amount was $550 for a sale made to Tom Mattingly in July. On January 4, 20X8, the company learned that Mattingly had filed for personal bankruptcy. Harrisburg uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectibles.
a. Prepare the journal entry needed to write off Mattingly s account.
b. Comment on the ability of the direct write-off method to value receivables on the year-end balance sheet.
8.Allowance method: estimation and balance sheet disclosure. The following pre- adjusted information for the Maverick Company is available on December 31:
Accounts receivable $107,000
Allowance for uncollectible accounts 5,400 (credit balance)
Credit sales 250,000
a. Prepare the journal entries necessary to record Maverick s uncollectible accounts expense under each of the following assumptions:
(1) Uncollectible accounts are estimated to be 5% of Credit Sales.
(2) Uncollectible accounts are estimated to be 14% of Accounts Receivable.
b. How would Maverick s Accounts Receivable appear on the December 31 balance sheet under assumption (1) of part (a)?
c. How would Maverick s Accounts Receivable appear on the December 31 balance sheet under assumption (2) of part (a)?
9. Direct write-off and allowance methods: matching approach. The December 31, 20X2, year-end trial balance of Targa Company revealed the following account information:
|
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$252,000
|
|
Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts
|
$ 3,000
|
|
Sales
|
855,000
|
Instructions
a. Determine the adjusting entry for bad debts under each of the following condi tions:
(1) An aging schedule indicates that $12,420 of accounts receivable will be uncollectible.
(2) Uncollectible accounts are estimated at 2% of net sales.
b. On January 19, 20X3, Targa learned that House Company, a customer, had declared bankruptcy. Present the proper entry to write off House s $950 balance using the allowance method.
c. Repeat the requirement in part (b), using the direct write-off method.
d. In light of the House bankruptcy, examine the allowance and direct write-off methods in terms of their ability to properly match revenues and expenses.
10. Allowance method: analysis of receivables. At a January 20X2 meeting, the presi dent of Sonic Sound directed the sales staff to move some product this year. The president noted that the credit evaluation department was being disbanded be cause it had restricted the company s growth. Credit decisions would now be made by the sales staff.
By the end of the year, Sonic had generated significant gains in sales, and the president was very pleased. The following data were provided by the accounting department:
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Sales
|
$23,987,000
|
$8,423,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable, 12/31
|
12,444,000
|
1,056,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, 12/31
|
?
|
23,000 cr.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The $12,444,000 receivables balance was aged as follows:
|
Age of Receivable
|
Amount
|
Percentage of Accounts Expected to Be Collected
|
|
Under 31 days
|
$5,321,000
|
99%
|
|
31260 days
|
3,890,000
|
90
|
|
61290 days
|
1,067,000
|
80
|
|
Over 90 days
|
2,166,000
|
60
|
Assume that no accounts were written off during 20X2.
Instructions
a. Estimate the amount of Uncollectible Accounts as of December 31, 20X2.
b. What is the company s Uncollectible Accounts expense for 20X2?
c. Compute the net realizable value of Accounts Receivable at the end of 20X1 and 20X2.
d. Compute the net realizable value at the end of 20X1 and 20X2 as a percentage of respective year-end receivables balances. Analyze your findings and comment on the president s decision to close the credit evaluation department.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Two Exercise Assignment
Revenue and Expenses
1. Recognition of concepts. Jim Armstrong operates a small company that books enter tainers for theaters, parties, conventions, and so forth. The company s fiscal year ends on June 30. Consider the following items and classify each as either (1) pre paid expense, (2) unearned revenue, (3) accrued expense, (4) accrued revenue, or (5) none of the foregoing.
a Interest owed on the company’s bank loan, to be paid in early July
b Professional fees earned but not billed as of June 30
c Office supplies on hand at year-end
d An advance payment from a client for a performance next month at a convention
e The payment in part (d) from the client’s point of view
f Amounts paid on June 30 for a 1-year insurance policy
g The bank loan payable in part (a)
h Repairs to the firm’s copy machine, incurred and paid in June
2. Understanding the closing process. Examine the following list of accounts:
|
Note Payable
|
Accumulated Depreciation: Building
|
|
Alex Kenzy, Drawing
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
Product Revenue
|
Cash
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
Utility Expense
|
Which of the preceding accounts
a. appear on a post-closing trial balance?
b. are commonly known as temporary, or nominal, accounts?
c. generate a debit to Income Summary in the closing process?
d. are closed to the capital account in the closing process?
3. Adjusting entries and financial statements. The following information pertains to Sally Corporation:
The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one half of this amount had been earned.
Sally Corporation provided $1,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31.
Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,000.
The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period.
The company paid $18,000 on October 1 of the current year to Vantage Property Management. The payment was for 6 months rent of Sally Corporation s headquarters, beginning on November 1.
Sally Corporation s accounting year ends on December 31.
Instructions
Analyze the five preceding cases individually and determine the following:
a. The typeof adjusting entry needed at year-end (Use the following codes: A, adjust ment of a prepaid expense; B, adjustment of an unearned revenue; C, adjustment to record an accrued expense; or D, adjustment to record an accrued revenue.)
b. The year-end journal entry to adjust the accounts
c. The income statement impact of each adjustment (e.g., increases total revenues by $500)
4. Adjusting entries. You have been retained to examine the records of Mary s Day Care Center as of December 31, 20X3, the close of the current reporting period. In the course of your examination, you discover the following:
On January 1, 20X3, the Supplies account had a balance of $1,350. During the year, $5,520 worth of supplies was purchased, and a balance of $1,620 remained unused on December 31.
Unrecorded interest owed to the center totaled $275 as of December 31.
All clients pay tuition in advance, and their payments are credited to the Unearned Tuition Revenue account. The account was credited for $65,500 on August 31. With the exception of $15,500 all amounts were for the current semester ending on December 31.
Depreciation on the school s van was $3,000 for the year.
On August 1, the center began to pay rent in 6-month installments of $24,000. Mary wrote a check to the owner of the building and recorded the check in Pre paid Rent, a new account.
Two salaried employees earn $400 each for a 5-day week. The employees are paid every Friday, and December 31 falls on a Thursday.
Mary s Day Care paid insurance premiums as follows, each time debiting Pre paid Insurance:
|
Date Paid
|
Policy No.
|
Length of Policy
|
Amount
|
|
Feb. 1, 20X2
|
1033MCM19
|
1 year
|
$540
|
|
Jan. 1, 20X3
|
7952789HP
|
1 year
|
912
|
|
Aug. 1, 20X3
|
XQ943675ST
|
2 years
|
840
|
Instructions
The center s accounts were last adjusted on December 31, 20X2. Prepare the adjusting entries necessary under the accrual basis of accounting.
5. Bank reconciliation and entries. The following information was taken from the accounting records of Palmetto Company for the month of January:
|
Balance per bank
|
$6,150
|
|
Balance per company records
|
3,580
|
|
Bank service charge for January
|
20
|
|
Deposits in transit
|
940
|
|
Interest on note collected by bank
|
100
|
|
Note collected by bank
|
1,000
|
|
NSF check returned by the bank with the bank statement
|
650
|
|
Outstanding checks
|
3,080
|
Instructions:
a. Prepare Palmetto s January bank reconciliation.
b. Prepare any necessary journal entries for Palmetto.
6. Direct write-off method. Harrisburg Company, which began business in early 20X7, reported $40,000 of accounts receivable on the December 31, 20X7, balance sheet. Included in this amount was $550 for a sale made to Tom Mattingly in July. On January 4, 20X8, the company learned that Mattingly had filed for personal bankruptcy. Harrisburg uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectibles.
a. Prepare the journal entry needed to write off Mattingly s account.
b. Comment on the ability of the direct write-off method to value receivables on the year-end balance sheet.
7. Allowance method: analysis of receivables. At a January 20X2 meeting, the presi dent of Sonic Sound directed the sales staff to move some product this year. The president noted that the credit evaluation department was being disbanded be cause it had restricted the company s growth. Credit decisions would now be made by the sales staff.
By the end of the year, Sonic had generated significant gains in sales, and the president was very pleased. The following data were provided by the accounting department:
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Sales
|
$23,987,000
|
$8,423,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable, 12/31
|
12,444,000
|
1,056,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, 12/31
|
?
|
23,000 cr.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The $12,444,000 receivables balance was aged as follows:
|
Age of Receivable
|
Amount
|
Percentage of Accounts Expected to Be Collected
|
|
Under 31 days
|
$4,321,000
|
99%
|
|
31260 days
|
4,890,000
|
90
|
|
61290 days
|
1,067,000
|
80
|
|
Over 90 days
|
2,166,000
|
60
|
Assume that no accounts were written off during 20X2.
Instructions
a. Estimate the amount of Uncollectible Accounts as of December 31, 20X2.
b. What is the company s Uncollectible Accounts expense for 20X2?
c. Compute the net realizable value of Accounts Receivable at the end of 20X1 and 20X2.
d. Compute the net realizable value at the end of 20X1 and 20X2 as a percentage of respective year-end receivables balances. Analyze your findings and comment on the president s decision to close the credit evaluation department.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Revenue and Expenses 1.
Recognition of concepts. Ron Carroll operates a small company that books enter tainers for theaters, parties, conventions, and so forth. The company s fiscal year ends on June 30. Consider the following items and classify each as either (1) pre paid expense, (2) unearned revenue, (3) accrued expense, (4) accrued revenue, or (5) none of the foregoing. a. Amounts paid on June 30 for a 1-year insurance policy b. Professional fees earned but not billed as of June 30 c. Repairs to the firm s copy machine, incurred and paid in June d. An advance payment from a client for a performance next month at a convention e. The payment in part (d) from the client s point of view f. Interest owed on the company s bank loan, to be paid in early July g. The bank loan payable in part (f) h. Office supplies on hand at year-end 2.
Analysis of prepaid account balance. The following information relates to Action Sign Company for 20X2: Insurance expense $4,350 Prepaid insurance, December 31, 20X2 1,900 Cash outlays for insurance during 20X2 6,200 Compute the balance in the Prepaid Insurance account on January 1, 20X2. 3.
Understanding the closing process. Examine the following list of accounts: Interest Payable Accumulated Depreciation: Equipment Alex Kenzy, Drawing Accounts Payable Service Revenue Cash Accounts Receivable Supplies Expense Interest Expense Which of the preceding accounts a. appear on a post-closing trial balance? b. are commonly known as temporary, or nominal, accounts? c. generate a debit to Income Summary in the closing process? d. are closed to the capital account in the closing process? 4.
Adjusting entries and financial statements. The following information pertains to Fixation Enterprises: The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one third of this amount had been earned. Fixation provided $2,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31. Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,650. The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period. The company paid $18,000 on October 1 of the current year to Vantage Property Management. The payment was for 6 months rent of Fixation s headquarters, beginning on November 1. Fixation s accounting year ends on December 31.
Instructions Analyze the five preceding cases individually and determine the following: a. The
typeof adjusting entry needed at year-end (Use the following codes: A, adjust ment of a prepaid expense; B, adjustment of an unearned revenue; C, adjustment to record an accrued expense; or D, adjustment to record an accrued revenue.) b. The year-end journal entry to adjust the accounts c. The income statement impact of each adjustment (e.g., increases total revenues by $500) 5.
Adjusting entries. You have been retained to examine the records of Kathy s Day Care Center as of December 31, 20X3, the close of the current reporting period. In the course of your examination, you discover the following: On January 1, 20X3, the Supplies account had a balance of $2,350. During the year, $5,520 worth of supplies was purchased, and a balance of $1,620 remained unused on December 31. Unrecorded interest owed to the center totaled $275 as of December 31. All clients pay tuition in advance, and their payments are credited to the Unearned Tuition Revenue account. The account was credited for $75,500 on August 31. With the exception of $15,500 all amounts were for the current semester ending on December 31. Depreciation on the school s van was $3,000 for the year. On August 1, the center began to pay rent in 6-month installments of $21,000. Kathy wrote a check to the owner of the building and recorded the check in Pre paid Rent, a new account. Two salaried employees earn $400 each for a 5-day week. The employees are paid every Friday, and December 31 falls on a Thursday. Kathy s Day Care paid insurance premiums as follows, each time debiting Pre paid Insurance: Date Paid Policy No. Length of Policy Amount Feb. 1, 20X2 1033MCM19 1 year $540 Jan. 1, 20X3 7952789HP 1 year 912 Aug. 1, 20X3 XQ943675ST 2 years 840
Instructions The center s accounts were last adjusted on December 31, 20X2. Prepare the adjusting entries necessary under the accrual basis of accounting. 6.
Bank reconciliation and entries. The following information was taken from the accounting records of Palmetto Company for the month of January: Balance per bank $6,150 Balance per company records 3,580 Bank service charge for January 20 Deposits in transit 940 Interest on note collected by bank 100 Note collected by bank 1,000 NSF check returned by the bank with the bank statement 650 Outstanding checks 3,080
Instructions: a. Prepare Palmetto s January bank reconciliation. b. Prepare any necessary journal entries for Palmetto. 7.
Direct write-off method. Harrisburg Company, which began business in early 20X7, reported $40,000 of accounts receivable on the December 31, 20X7, balance sheet. Included in this amount was $550 for a sale made to Tom Mattingly in July. On January 4, 20X8, the company learned that Mattingly had filed for personal bankruptcy. Harrisburg uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectibles. a. Prepare the journal entry needed to write off Mattingly s account. b. Comment on the ability of the direct write-off method to value receivables on the year-end balance sheet. 8.
Allowance method: estimation and balance sheet disclosure. The following pre- adjusted information for the Maverick Company is available on December 31: Accounts receivable $107,000 Allowance for uncollectible accounts 5,400 (credit balance) Credit sales 250,000 a. Prepare the journal entries necessary to record Maverick s uncollectible accounts expense under each of the following assumptions: (1) Uncollectible accounts are estimated to be 5% of Credit Sales. (2) Uncollectible accounts are estimated to be 14% of Accounts Receivable. b. How would Maverick s Accounts Receivable appear on the December 31 balance sheet under assumption (1) of part (a)? c. How would Maverick s Accounts Receivable appear on the December 31 balance sheet under assumption (2) of part (a)? 9.
Direct write-off and allowance methods: matching approach. The December 31, 20X2, year-end trial balance of Targa Company revealed the following account information:
Debits
Credits Accounts Receivable $252,000 Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts $ 3,000 Sales 855,000
Instructions a. Determine the adjusting entry for bad debts under each of the following condi tions: (1) An aging schedule indicates that $12,420 of accounts receivable will be uncollectible. (2) Uncollectible accounts are estimated at 2% of net sales. b. On January 19, 20X3, Targa learned that House Company, a customer, had declared bankruptcy. Present the proper entry to write off House s $950 balance using the allowance method. c. Repeat the requirement in part (b), using the direct write-off method. d. In light of the House bankruptcy, examine the allowance and direct write-off methods in terms of their ability to properly match revenues and expenses. 10.
Allowance method: analysis of receivables. At a January 20X2 meeting, the presi dent of Sonic Sound directed the sales staff to move some product this year. The president noted that the credit evaluation department was being disbanded be cause it had restricted the company s growth. Credit decisions would now be made by the sales staff. By the end of the year, Sonic had generated significant gains in sales, and the president was very pleased. The following data were provided by the accounting department:
20X2
20X1 Sales $23,987,000 $8,423,000 Accounts Receivable, 12/31 12,444,000 1,056,000 Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, 12/31 ? 23,000 cr.
The $12,444,000 receivables balance was aged as follows:
Age of Receivable
Amount
Percentage of Accounts Expected to Be Collected Under 31 days $5,321,000 99% 31260 days 3,890,000 90 61290 days 1,067,000 80 Over 90 days 2,166,000 60 Assume that no accounts were written off during 20X2.
Instructions a. Estimate the amount of Uncollectible Accounts as of December 31, 20X2. b. What is the company s Uncollectible Accounts expense for 20X2? c. Compute the net realizable value of Accounts Receivable at the end of 20X1 and 20X2. d. Compute the net realizable value at the end of 20X1 and 20X2 as a percentage of respective year-end receivables balances. Analyze your findings and comment on the president s decision to close the credit evaluation department.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Potential investments to accelerate profit: ABC company has the option to purchase additional equipment that will cost about $42,000, and this new equipment will produce the following savings in factory overhead costs over the next five years:
Year 1, $15,000
Year 2, $13,000
Year 3, $10,000
Year 4, $10,000
Year 5, $6,000
ABC Company uses the net-present-value method to analyze investments and desires a minimum rate of return of 12% on the equipment.
a. What is the net present value of the proposed investment ignore income taxes and depreciation?
b. Assuming a 5-year straight-line depreciation, how will this impact the factory s fixed costs for each of the 5 years (and the implied product costs)? What about cash flow?
Considering the cash flow impact of the equipment as well as the time-value of money, would you recommend that ABC Company purchases the equipment? Why or why not?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Three Exercise Assignment
Inventory
1. Specific identification method. Boston Galleries uses the specific identification method for inventory valuation. Inventory information for several oil paintings follows.
|
Painting
|
Cost
|
|
1/2 Beginning inventory
|
Woods
|
$11,000
|
|
4/19 Purchase
|
Sunset
|
21,800
|
|
6/7 Purchase
|
Earth
|
31,200
|
|
12/16 Purchase
|
Moon
|
4,000
|
|
|
|
|
Woodsand Moonwere sold during the year for a total of $35,000. Determine the firm s
a. cost of goods sold.
b. gross profit.
c. ending inventory.
2. Inventory valuation methods: basic computations. The January beginning inven tory of the White Company consisted of 300 units costing $40 each. During the first quarter, the company purchased two batches of goods: 700 Units at $44 on February 21 and 800 units at $50 on March 28. Sales during the first quarter were 1,400 units at $75 per unit. The White Company uses a periodic inventory system. Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods.
Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods.
Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods.
|
FIFO
|
LIFO
|
Weighted Average
|
|
|
|
|
|
Goods available for sale
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
Ending inventory, March 31
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3. 3.Perpetual inventory system: journal entries. At the beginning of 20X3, Beehler Company implemented a computerized perpetual inventory system. The first transactions that occurred during 20X3 following.
Purchases on account: 500 units @$4 = $2,000
Sales on account: 300 of the above units = $2,550
Returns on account: 75 of the above unsold units
The company president examined the computer-generated journal entries for these transactions and was confused by the absence of a Purchases account.
a. Duplicate the journal entries that would have prepared on the computer printout.
b. Calculate the balance in the firm s Inventory account.
c. Briefly explain the absence of the Purchases account to the company president.
4.Inventory valuation methods: computations and concepts. Wave Riders Surfboard Company began business on January 1 of the current year. Purchases of surfboards were as follows:
|
1/3:
|
Purchase 100 boards @$125
|
|
3/17:
|
Sold 50 boards @ $130
|
|
5/9:
|
5/9: 246 boards @140
|
|
7/3:
|
400 boards @ $150
|
|
10/23:
|
74 boards @$160
|
Wave Riders sold 710 boards at an average price of $250 per board. The company uses a periodic inventory system.
Instructions
a. Calculate cost of goods sold, ending inventory, and gross profit under each of the following inventory valuation methods:
First-in, first-out
Last-in, first-out
Weighted average
b. Which of the three methods would be chosen if management s goal is to
(1) Produce an up-to-date inventory valuation on the balance sheet?
(2) Approximate the physical flow of a sand and gravel dealer?
(3) Report low earnings (for tax purposes) for a separate electronics company that has been experiencing declining purchase prices?
5. Depreciation methods.Betsy Ross Enterprises purchased a delivery van for $30,000 in January 20X7. The van was estimated to have a service life of 5 years and a resid ual value of $6,000. The company is planning to drive the van 20,000 miles annually. Compute depreciation expense for 20X8 by using each of the following methods:
a. Units-of-output, assuming 17,000 miles were driven during 20X8
b. Straight-line
c. Double-declining-balance
6. Depreciation computations.Alpha Alpha Alpha, a college fraternity, purchased a new heavy-duty washing machine on January 1, 20X3. The machine, which cost $1,000, had an estimated residual value of $100 and an estimated service life of 4 years (1,800 washing cycles). Calculate the following:
a. The machine s book value on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the straight-line depreciation method
b. Depreciation expense for 20X4, assuming use of the units-of-output depreciation method. Actual washing cycles in 20X4 totaled 500.
c. Accumulated depreciation on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the double-declining-balance depreciation method.
7. Depreciation computations: change in estimate.Aussie Imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for $50,000 on January 1, 20X3. At the time of acquisition, the machine was estimated to have a service life of 5 years (25,000 operating hours) and a residual value of $5,000. During the 5 years of operations (20X3 – 20X7), the machine was used for 5,100, 4,800, 3,200, 6,000, and 5,900 hours, respectively.
Instructions
a. Compute depreciation for 20X3 – 20X7 by using the following methods: straight line, units of output, and double-declining-balance.
b. On January 1, 20X5, management shortened the remaining service life of the machine to 20 months. Assuming use of the straight-line method, compute the company s depreciation expense for 20X5.
c. Briefly describe what you would have done differently in part (a) if Aussie Imports had paid $47,800 for the machinery rather than $50,000 In addition, assume that the company incurred $800 of freight charges $1,400 for machine setup and testing, and $300 for insurance during the first year of use.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Three Exercise Assignment
Inventory
1. Specific identification method. Boston Galleries uses the specific identification method for inventory valuation. Inventory information for several oil paintings follows.
|
Painting
|
Cost
|
|
1/2 Beginning inventory
|
Woods
|
$11,000
|
|
4/19 Purchase
|
Sunset
|
21,800
|
|
6/7 Purchase
|
Earth
|
31,200
|
|
12/16 Purchase
|
Moon
|
4,000
|
|
|
|
|
Woodsand Moonwere sold during the year for a total of $35,000. Determine the firm s
a. cost of goods sold.
b. gross profit.
c. ending inventory.
2. Inventory valuation methods: basic computations. The January beginning inven tory of the White Company consisted of 300 units costing $40 each. During the first quarter, the company purchased two batches of goods: 700 Units at $44 on February 21 and 800 units at $50 on March 28. Sales during the first quarter were 1,400 units at $75 per unit. The White Company uses a periodic inventory system. Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods.
Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods.
Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods.
|
FIFO
|
LIFO
|
Weighted Average
|
|
|
|
|
|
Goods available for sale
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
Ending inventory, March 31
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3. 3.Perpetual inventory system: journal entries. At the beginning of 20X3, Beehler Company implemented a computerized perpetual inventory system. The first transactions that occurred during 20X3 following.
Purchases on account: 500 units @$4 = $2,000
Sales on account: 300 of the above units = $2,550
Returns on account: 75 of the above unsold units
The company president examined the computer-generated journal entries for these transactions and was confused by the absence of a Purchases account.
a. Duplicate the journal entries that would have prepared on the computer printout.
b. Calculate the balance in the firm s Inventory account.
c. Briefly explain the absence of the Purchases account to the company president.
4.Inventory valuation methods: computations and concepts. Wave Riders Surfboard Company began business on January 1 of the current year. Purchases of surfboards were as follows:
|
1/3:
|
Purchase 100 boards @$125
|
|
3/17:
|
Sold 50 boards @ $130
|
|
5/9:
|
5/9: 246 boards @140
|
|
7/3:
|
400 boards @ $150
|
|
10/23:
|
74 boards @$160
|
Wave Riders sold 710 boards at an average price of $250 per board. The company uses a periodic inventory system.
Instructions
a. Calculate cost of goods sold, ending inventory, and gross profit under each of the following inventory valuation methods:
First-in, first-out
Last-in, first-out
Weighted average
b. Which of the three methods would be chosen if management s goal is to
(1) Produce an up-to-date inventory valuation on the balance sheet?
(2) Approximate the physical flow of a sand and gravel dealer?
(3) Report low earnings (for tax purposes) for a separate electronics company that has been experiencing declining purchase prices?
5. Depreciation methods.Betsy Ross Enterprises purchased a delivery van for $30,000 in January 20X7. The van was estimated to have a service life of 5 years and a resid ual value of $6,000. The company is planning to drive the van 20,000 miles annually. Compute depreciation expense for 20X8 by using each of the following methods:
a. Units-of-output, assuming 17,000 miles were driven during 20X8
b. Straight-line
c. Double-declining-balance
6. Depreciation computations.Alpha Alpha Alpha, a college fraternity, purchased a new heavy-duty washing machine on January 1, 20X3. The machine, which cost $1,000, had an estimated residual value of $100 and an estimated service life of 4 years (1,800 washing cycles). Calculate the following:
a. The machine s book value on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the straight-line depreciation method
b. Depreciation expense for 20X4, assuming use of the units-of-output depreciation method. Actual washing cycles in 20X4 totaled 500.
c. Accumulated depreciation on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the double-declining-balance depreciation method.
7. Depreciation computations: change in estimate.Aussie Imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for $50,000 on January 1, 20X3. At the time of acquisition, the machine was estimated to have a service life of 5 years (25,000 operating hours) and a residual value of $5,000. During the 5 years of operations (20X3 – 20X7), the machine was used for 5,100, 4,800, 3,200, 6,000, and 5,900 hours, respectively.
Instructions
a. Compute depreciation for 20X3 – 20X7 by using the following methods: straight line, units of output, and double-declining-balance.
b. On January 1, 20X5, management shortened the remaining service life of the machine to 20 months. Assuming use of the straight-line method, compute the company s depreciation expense for 20X5.
c. Briefly describe what you would have done differently in part (a) if Aussie Imports had paid $47,800 for the machinery rather than $50,000 In addition, assume that the company incurred $800 of freight charges $1,400 for machine setup and testing, and $300 for insurance during the first year of use.
DQ 1. The controller of Sagehen Enterprises believes that the company should switch from the LIFO method to the FIFO method. The controllers bonus is based on the next income. It is the controllers belief that the switch in inventory methods would increase the net income of the company. What are the differences between the LIFO and FIFO methods?
DQ 2. A variety of depreciation methods are used to allocate the cost of an asset to all of the accounting periods benefited by the use of the asset. Your client has just purchased a piece of equipment for $100,000. Explain the concept of depreciation. Which of the following depreciation methods would you recommend: straight-line depreciation, double declining balance method, or an alternative method?
Inventory Journal
Reflect for a moment on the LIFO (Last in First Out) and FIFO (First in First Out) inventory methods. If you were starting a small manufacturing company, what inventory method do you believe would provide the most accurate financial statements? Why do you believe this is the case?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Three Exercise Assignment
Inventory
1. Specific identification method. Boston Galleries uses the specific identification method for inventory valuation. Inventory information for several oil paintings follows.
|
Painting
|
Cost |
| 1/2 Beginning inventory |
Woods |
$11,000 |
| 4/19 Purchase |
Sunset |
21,800 |
| 6/7 Purchase |
Earth |
31,200 |
| 12/16 Purchase |
Moon |
4,000 |
|
|
|
|
Woodsand Moonwere sold during the year for a total of $35,000. Determine the firm s
a. cost of goods sold.
b. gross profit.
c. ending inventory.
2. Inventory valuation methods: basic computations. The January beginning inven tory of the White Company consisted of 300 units costing $40 each. During the first quarter, the company purchased two batches of goods: 700 Units at $44 on February 21 and 800 units at $50 on March 28. Sales during the first quarter were 1,400 units at $75 per unit. The White Company uses a periodic inventory system. Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods.
|
FIFO
|
LIFO
|
Weighted Average
|
|
|
|
|
Goods available for sale
|
$ |
$ |
$ |
| Ending inventory, March 31 |
| Cost of goods sold |
|
|
|
|
|
|
3. 3. Perpetual inventory system: journal entries. At the beginning of 20X3, Beehler Company implemented a computerized perpetual inventory system. The first transactions that occurred during 20X3 following.
- Purchases on account: 500 units @$4 = $2,000
- Sales on account: 300 of the above units = $2,550
- Returns on account: 75 of the above unsold units
The company president examined the computer-generated journal entries for these transactions and was confused by the absence of a Purchases account.
a. Duplicate the journal entries that would have prepared on the computer printout.
b. Calculate the balance in the firm s Inventory account.
c. Briefly explain the absence of the Purchases account to the company president.
4. Inventory valuation methods: computations and concepts. Wave Riders Surfboard Company began business on January 1 of the current year. Purchases of surfboards were as follows:
|
1/3:
|
Purchase 100 boards @$125 |
|
3/17:
|
Sold 50 boards @ $130 |
|
5/9:
|
5/9: 246 boards @140 |
|
7/3:
|
400 boards @ $150 |
|
10/23:
|
74 boards @$160 |
Wave Riders sold 710 boards at an average price of $250 per board. The company uses a periodic inventory system.
Instructions
a. Calculate cost of goods sold, ending inventory, and gross profit under each of the following inventory valuation methods:
- First-in, first-out
- Last-in, first-out
- Weighted average
b. Which of the three methods would be chosen if management s goal is to
(1) produce an up-to-date inventory valuation on the balance sheet?
(2) approximate the physical flow of a sand and gravel dealer?
(3) report low earnings (for tax purposes) for a separate electronics company that has been experiencing declining purchase prices?
5. Depreciation methods.Betsy Ross Enterprises purchased a delivery van for $30,000 in January 20X7. The van was estimated to have a service life of 5 years and a resid ual value of $6,000. The company is planning to drive the van 20,000 miles annually. Compute depreciation expense for 20X8 by using each of the following methods:
a. Units-of-output, assuming 17,000 miles were driven during 20X8
b. Straight-line
c. Double-declining-balance
6. Depreciation computations.Alpha Alpha Alpha, a college fraternity, purchased a new heavy-duty washing machine on January 1, 20X3. The machine, which cost $1,000, had an estimated residual value of $100 and an estimated service life of 4 years (1,800 washing cycles). Calculate the following:
a. The machine s book value on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the straight-line depreciation method
b. Depreciation expense for 20X4, assuming use of the units-of-output depreciation method. Actual washing cycles in 20X4 totaled 500.
c. Accumulated depreciation on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the double-declining-balance depreciation method.
7. Depreciation computations: change in estimate.Aussie Imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for $50,000 on January 1, 20X3. At the time of acquisition, the machine was estimated to have a service life of 5 years (25,000 operating hours) and a residual value of $5,000. During the 5 years of operations (20X3 20X7), the machine was used for 5,100, 4,800, 3,200, 6,000, and 5,900 hours, respectively.
Instructions
a. Compute depreciation for 20X3 20X7 by using the following methods: straight line, units of output, and double-declining-balance.
b. On January 1, 20X5, management shortened the remaining service life of the machine to 20 months. Assuming use of the straight-line method, compute the company s depreciation expense for 20X5.
c. Briefly describe what you would have done differently in part (a) if Aussie Imports had paid $47,800 for the machinery rather than $50,000 In addition, assume that the company incurred $800 of freight charges $1,400 for machine setup and testing, and $300 for insurance during the first year of use.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Three Exercise Assignment
Inventory
1. Specific identification method. Boston Galleries uses the specific identification method for inventory valuation. Inventory information for several oil paintings follows.
|
Painting
|
Cost
|
|
1/2 Beginning inventory
|
Woods
|
$21,000
|
|
4/19 Purchase
|
Sunset
|
21,800
|
|
6/7 Purchase
|
Earth
|
31,200
|
|
12/16 Purchase
|
Moon
|
4,000
|
| |
|
|
|
Woods and Moon were sold during the year for a total of $35,000. Determine the firm s
a. cost of goods sold.
b. gross profit.
c. ending inventory.
2. Inventory valuation methods: basic computations. The January beginning inven tory of the Gilette Company consisted of 300 units costing $40 each. During the first quarter, the company purchased two batches of goods: 700 Units at $44 on February 21 and 800 units at $50 on March 28. Sales during the first quarter were 1,400 units at $75 per unit. The White Company uses a periodic inventory system. Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods.
|
FIFO
|
LIFO
|
Weighted Average
|
|
|
|
|
|
Goods available for sale
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
Ending inventory, March 31
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
3. Perpetual inventory system: journal entries. At the beginning of 20X3, Beehler Company implemented a computerized perpetual inventory system. The first transactions that occurred during 20X3 follow:
1/2/20X3 Purchases on account: 500 units @$6 = $3,000
1/15/20X3 Sales on account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550
1/20/20X3 Purchases on Account: 200 units @ 5 = $1,000
1/25/20X3 Sales on Account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550
The company president examined the computer-generated journal entries for these transactions and was confused by the absence of a Purchases account.
a. Duplicate the journal entries that would have appearedon the computer printout under FIFO & LIFO
b. Calculate the balance in the firm s Inventory account under each method.
c. Briefly explain the absence of the Purchases account to the company president.
4. Inventory valuation methods: computations and concepts.
Wild Riders Surfboard Company began business on January 1 of the current year. Purchases of surfboards were as follows:
|
Date
|
Quantity
|
Unit Cost
|
Total Cost
|
|
1/3
|
100
|
$125
|
$12,500
|
|
4/3
|
200
|
$135
|
$27,000
|
|
6/3
|
100
|
$145
|
$14,500
|
|
7/3
|
100
|
$155
|
$15,500
|
|
Total
|
500
|
|
$69,500
|
Wild Riders sold 400 boards at $250 per board on the dates listed below. The company uses a perpetual inventory system.
|
Date
|
Quantity Sold
|
Unit Price
|
Total Sales
|
|
3/17
|
50
|
$250
|
$12,500
|
|
5/17
|
75
|
$250
|
$18,750
|
|
8/10
|
275
|
$250
|
$68,750
|
|
Total
|
400
|
|
$100,000
|
Instructions
a. Calculate cost of goods sold, ending inventory, and gross profit under each of the following inventory valuation methods:
First-in, first-out
Last-in, first-out
Weighted average
b. Which of the three methods would be chosen if management s goal is to
(1) produce an up-to-date inventory valuation on the balance sheet?
(2) show the lowest net income for tax purposes?
5. Depreciation methods. Mike Davis Enterprises purchased a delivery van for $40,000 in January 20X7. The van was estimated to have a service life of 5 years and a resid ual value of $6,000. The company is planning to drive the van 20,000 miles annually. Compute depreciation expense for 20X8 by using each of the following methods:
a. Units-of-output, assuming 17,000 miles were driven during 20X8
b. Straight-line
c. Double-declining-balance
6. Depreciation computations. Alpha Alpha Alpha, a college fraternity, purchased a new heavy-duty washing machine on January 1, 20X3. The machine, which cost $2,000, had an estimated residual value of $100 and an estimated service life of 4 years (1,800 washing cycles). Calculate the following:
a. The machine s book value on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the straight-line depreciation method
b. Depreciation expense for 20X4, assuming use of the units-of-output depreciation method. Actual washing cycles in 20X4 totaled 500.
c. Accumulated depreciation on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the double-declining-balance depreciation method.
7. Depreciation computations: change in estimate. Aussie Imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for $50,000 on January 1, 20X3. At the time of acquisition, the machine was estimated to have a service life of 5 years (25,000 operating hours) and a residual value of $5,000. During the 5 years of operations (20X3 – 20X7), the machine was used for 5,100, 4,800, 3,200, 6,000, and 5,900 hours, respectively.
Instructions
a. Compute depreciation for 20X3 – 20X7 by using the following methods: straight line, units of output, and double-declining-balance.
b. On January 1, 20X5, management shortened the remaining service life of the machine to 15 months. Assuming use of the straight-line method, compute the company s depreciation expense for 20X5.
c. Briefly describe what you would have done differently in part (a) if Aussie Imports had paid $47,800 for the machinery rather than $50,000 In addition, assume that the company incurred $800 of freight charges $1,400 for machine setup and testing, and $300 for insurance during the first year of use.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Four Exercise Assignment
Liability
1. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:
Social Security taxes: 4% on the first $55,000 earned per employee
Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned per employee
Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
State income taxes: 4% of gross earnings
Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned per employee
Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned per employee
The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end and no wages have been paid during the month.
a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:
Social Security taxes
Medicare taxes
Federal income taxes withheld
State income taxes
Insurance withholdings
b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:
Matching Social Security taxes
Matching Medicare taxes
State unemployment taxes
Federal unemployment taxes
2. Current liabilities: entries and disclosure.A review of selected financial activities of Visconti s during 20XX disclosed the following:
|
|
|
|
|
|
1-Dec: Borrowed $10,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3-month, 15% note payable.
|
|
|
Interest and principal are due at maturity.
|
|
|
|
|
10-Dec: Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to
|
|
|
total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates
|
|
|
that 3% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit (parts only).
|
|
|
22-Dec: Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
|
26-Dec: Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a 15% note payable due in 60 days. (Assume 360 day year for interest)
|
|
|
31-Dec: Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162
|
|
|
|
31-Dec: Accrued three days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest for each of the notes payable.
3.Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:
|
2-Aug: Borrowed $55,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 90-day, 12% note.
|
|
20-Aug: Issued a $50,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $50,000 delivery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest r ate.
|
|
10-Sep: Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued
|
|
a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.
|
|
11-Sep: Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account
|
|
payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and carries a 14% interest rate.
|
|
10-Oct: The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.
|
|
11-Oct: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.
|
|
30-Oct: Paid note to Bank of Kingsville.
|
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest. (Daily interest is calculated utilizing the 360 day method).
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of December 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Four Exercise Assignment
Liability
1. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:
Social Security taxes: 4% on the first $55,000 earned per employee
Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned per employee
Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
State income taxes: 4% of gross earnings
Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned per employee
Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned per employee
The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end and no wages have been paid during the month.
a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:
Social Security taxes
Medicare taxes
Federal income taxes withheld
State income taxes
Insurance withholdings
b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:
Matching Social Security taxes
Matching Medicare taxes
State unemployment taxes
Federal unemployment taxes
2. Current liabilities: entries and disclosure.A review of selected financial activities of Visconti s during 20XX disclosed the following:
|
|
|
|
|
|
1-Dec: Borrowed $10,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3-month, 15% note payable.
|
|
|
Interest and principal are due at maturity.
|
|
|
|
|
10-Dec: Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to
|
|
|
total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates
|
|
|
that 3% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit (parts only).
|
|
|
22-Dec: Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
|
26-Dec: Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a 15% note payable due in 60 days. (Assume 360 day year for interest)
|
|
|
31-Dec: Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162
|
|
|
|
31-Dec: Accrued three days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest.
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of December 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
3.Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:
|
2-Aug: Borrowed $55,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 90-day, 12% note.
|
|
20-Aug: Issued a $50,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $50,000 delivery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest r ate.
|
|
10-Sep: Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued
|
|
a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.
|
|
11-Sep: Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account
|
|
payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and carries a 14% interest rate.
|
|
10-Oct: The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.
|
|
11-Oct: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.
|
|
30-Oct: Paid note to Bank of Kingsville.
|
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest. (Daily interest is calculated utilizing the 360 day method).
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of December 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
acc 205 week 4 assignment liability
new for 2013
1.Partner investments; journal entries.The LP partnership was formed on January 1, 19X7, by investments from Bill Levy and Marv Parcells. Levy contributed $30,000 cash and $80,000 of land. Parcells contributed cash of $50,000 and equipment with a value of $20,000.
a. Prepare the journal entries needed to record the investments of Levy and Parcells.
2. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:
Social Security taxes: 6% on the first $55,000 earned
Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned
Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
State income taxes: 5% of gross earnings
Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned
Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned
The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end.
a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:
Social Security taxes
Medicare taxes
Federal income taxes withheld
State income taxes
Insurance withholdings
3. Current liabilities: entries and disclosure.A review of selected financial activities of Visconti s during 20XX disclosed the following:
|
12/1
|
Borrowed $20,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3- month, 15% note payable. Interest and principal are due at maturity.
|
|
2/10
|
Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates that 2% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit.
|
|
12/22
|
Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
12/26
|
Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a note payable due in 60 days.
|
|
12/31
|
Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162.
|
|
12/31
|
Accrued 3 days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.
|
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
4. Issuance of stock: organization costs.Snowbound Corporation was incorporated in July. The firm s charter authorized the sale of 200,000 shares of $10 par-value common stock. The following transactions occurred during the year:
|
7/1:
|
Sold 45,000 shares of common stock to investors for $18 per share. Cash was collected and the shares were issued.
|
|
|
|
|
8/11
|
Sold 20,000 shares to investors for $22 per share. Cash was collected and the shares were issued.
|
9/1 Declared a cash dividend on 9/1 for $1.00 a share for shareholders on record 10/1 with payment being made on 11/1.
Instructions
a.Prepare journal entries for the two stock issues.
5. Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:
|
8/2:
|
Borrowed $75,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 120-day note.
|
|
8/20:
|
Issued a $40,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $40,000 de livery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest rate.
|
|
9/10:
|
Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.
|
|
9/11:
|
Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and car ries a 14% interest rate.
|
|
10/10:
|
The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.
|
10/31: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.
11/30: Paid note to Bank of Kingville
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on October 31 to record accrued interest.
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of October 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.Partner investments; journal entries.The LP partnership was formed on January 1, 19X7, by investments from Bill Levy and Marv Parcells. Levy contributed $30,000 cash and $80,000 of land. Parcells contributed cash of $50,000 and equipment with a value of $20,000.
a. Prepare the journal entries needed to record the investments of Levy and Parcells.
2. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:
Social Security taxes: 6% on the first $55,000 earned
Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned
Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
State income taxes: 5% of gross earnings
Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned
Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned
The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end.
a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:
Social Security taxes
Medicare taxes
Federal income taxes withheld
State income taxes
Insurance withholdings
3. Current liabilities: entries and disclosure.A review of selected financial activities of Visconti s during 20XX disclosed the following:
|
12/1
|
Borrowed $20,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3- month, 15% note payable. Interest and principal are due at maturity.
|
|
2/10
|
Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates that 2% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit.
|
|
12/22
|
Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
12/26
|
Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a note payable due in 60 days.
|
|
12/31
|
Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162.
|
|
12/31
|
Accrued 3 days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.
|
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
4. Issuance of stock: organization costs.Snowbound Corporation was incorporated in July. The firm s charter authorized the sale of 200,000 shares of $10 par-value common stock. The following transactions occurred during the year:
|
7/1:
|
Sold 45,000 shares of common stock to investors for $18 per share. Cash was collected and the shares were issued.
|
|
|
|
|
8/11
|
Sold 20,000 shares to investors for $22 per share. Cash was collected and the shares were issued.
|
9/1 Declared a cash dividend on 9/1 for $1.00 a share for shareholders on record 10/1 with payment being made on 11/1.
Instructions
a.Prepare journal entries for the two stock issues.
Ads not by this site
5. Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:
|
8/2:
|
Borrowed $75,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 120-day note.
|
|
8/20:
|
Issued a $40,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $40,000 de livery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest rate.
|
|
9/10:
|
Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.
|
|
9/11:
|
Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and car ries a 14% interest rate.
|
|
10/10:
|
The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.
|
10/31: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.
11/30: Paid note to Bank of Kingville
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on October 31 to record accrued interest.
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of October 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
DQ: 01
What is a current liability From the perspective of a user of financial statements, why do you believe current liabilities are separated from long-term liabilities Based on your current experience as well as any additional research you may have done provide two examples of situations where businesses collect monies from customers and employees and reports these amounts as a current liability.
DQ: 02
A client comes to you thinking about starting a consulting business. Your client is specifically interested in what type of entity should be created for this new business. Based on your readings or any additional research you may have done, discuss the advantages and disadvantages of the following: sole proprietorship, partnership, and corporation. Based on these advantages and disadvantages provide a clear recommendation to your client.
Journal
The current liability section of the balance sheet lists the liabilities that are due within the next 12 months. Reflecting on your current financial situation, apply the concept of current liabilities. What does this analysis tell you about your future obligations What did you learn from this experience?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Four Exercise Assignment Liability
1. Partner investments; journal entries.The LP partnership was formed on January 1, 19X7, by investments from Bill Levy and Marv Parcells. Levy contributed $30,000 cash and $80,000 of land. Parcells contributed cash of $50,000 and equipment with a value of $20,000.
a. Prepare the journal entries needed to record the investments of Levy and Parcells.
2. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:
Social Security taxes: 6% on the first $55,000 earned
Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned
Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
State income taxes: 5% of gross earnings
Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned
Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned
The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end.
a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:
Social Security taxes
Medicare taxes
Federal income taxes withheld
State income taxes
Insurance withholdings
b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:
Matching Social Security taxes
Matching Medicare taxes
State unemployment taxes
Federal unemployment taxes
3. Current liabilities: entries and disclosure.A review of selected financial activities of Visconti s during 20XX disclosed the following:
12/1
Borrowed $20,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3- month, 15% note payable. Interest and principal are due at maturity.
2/10
Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates that 2% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit.
12/22
Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
12/26
Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a note payable due in 60 days.
12/31
Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162.
12/31
Accrued 3 days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on October 31 to record accrued interest.
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of October 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
4. Issuance of stock: organization costs.Snowbound Corporation was incorporated in July. The firm s charter authorized the sale of 200,000 shares of $10 par-value common stock. The following transactions occurred during the year:
7/1:
Sold 45,000 shares of common stock to investors for $18 per share. Cash was collected and the shares were issued.
8/11
Sold 20,000 shares to investors for $22 per share. Cash was collected and the shares were issued.
9/1 Declared a cash dividend on 9/1 for $1.00 a share for shareholders on record 10/1 with payment being made on 11/1.
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries for the two stock issues.
b. Prepare journal entries for the cash dividend declaration and payment.
5. Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:
8/2:
Borrowed $75,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 120-day note.
8/20:
Issued a $40,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $40,000 de livery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest rate.
9/10:
Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.
9/11:
Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and car ries a 14% interest rate.
10/10:
The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.
10/31: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.
11/30: Paid note to Bank of Kingville
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on October 31 to record accrued interest.
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of October 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Two Exercise Assignment
Revenue and Expenses
1. Recognition of concepts. Jim Armstrong operates a small company that books enter tainers for theaters, parties, conventions, and so forth. The company s fiscal year ends on June 30. Consider the following items and classify each as either (1) pre paid expense, (2) unearned revenue, (3) accrued expense, (4) accrued revenue, or (5) none of the foregoing.
a Interest owed on the company’s bank loan, to be paid in early July
b Professional fees earned but not billed as of June 30
c Office supplies on hand at year-end
d An advance payment from a client for a performance next month at a convention
e The payment in part (d) from the client’s point of view
f Amounts paid on June 30 for a 1-year insurance policy
g The bank loan payable in part (a)
h Repairs to the firm’s copy machine, incurred and paid in June
2. Understanding the closing process. Examine the following list of accounts:
|
Note Payable
|
Accumulated Depreciation: Building
|
|
Alex Kenzy, Drawing
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
Product Revenue
|
Cash
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
Utility Expense
|
Which of the preceding accounts
a. appear on a post-closing trial balance?
b. are commonly known as temporary, or nominal, accounts?
c. generate a debit to Income Summary in the closing process?
d. are closed to the capital account in the closing process?
3. Adjusting entries and financial statements. The following information pertains to Sally Corporation:
The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one half of this amount had been earned.
Sally Corporation provided $1,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31.
Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,000.
The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period.
The company paid $18,000 on October 1 of the current year to Vantage Property Management. The payment was for 6 months rent of Sally Corporation s headquarters, beginning on November 1.
Sally Corporation s accounting year ends on December 31.
Instructions
Analyze the five preceding cases individually and determine the following:
a. The typeof adjusting entry needed at year-end (Use the following codes: A, adjust ment of a prepaid expense; B, adjustment of an unearned revenue; C, adjustment to record an accrued expense; or D, adjustment to record an accrued revenue.)
b. The year-end journal entry to adjust the accounts
c. The income statement impact of each adjustment (e.g., increases total revenues by $500)
4. Adjusting entries. You have been retained to examine the records of Mary s Day Care Center as of December 31, 20X3, the close of the current reporting period. In the course of your examination, you discover the following:
On January 1, 20X3, the Supplies account had a balance of $1,350. During the year, $5,520 worth of supplies was purchased, and a balance of $1,620 remained unused on December 31.
Unrecorded interest owed to the center totaled $275 as of December 31.
All clients pay tuition in advance, and their payments are credited to the Unearned Tuition Revenue account. The account was credited for $65,500 on August 31. With the exception of $15,500 all amounts were for the current semester ending on December 31.
Depreciation on the school s van was $3,000 for the year.
On August 1, the center began to pay rent in 6-month installments of $24,000. Mary wrote a check to the owner of the building and recorded the check in Pre paid Rent, a new account.
Two salaried employees earn $400 each for a 5-day week. The employees are paid every Friday, and December 31 falls on a Thursday.
Mary s Day Care paid insurance premiums as follows, each time debiting Pre paid Insurance:
|
Date Paid
|
Policy No.
|
Length of Policy
|
Amount
|
|
Feb. 1, 20X2
|
1033MCM19
|
1 year
|
$540
|
|
Jan. 1, 20X3
|
7952789HP
|
1 year
|
912
|
|
Aug. 1, 20X3
|
XQ943675ST
|
2 years
|
840
|
Instructions
The center s accounts were last adjusted on December 31, 20X2. Prepare the adjusting entries necessary under the accrual basis of accounting.
5. Bank reconciliation and entries. The following information was taken from the accounting records of Palmetto Company for the month of January:
|
Balance per bank
|
$6,150
|
|
Balance per company records
|
3,580
|
|
Bank service charge for January
|
20
|
|
Deposits in transit
|
940
|
|
Interest on note collected by bank
|
100
|
|
Note collected by bank
|
1,000
|
|
NSF check returned by the bank with the bank statement
|
650
|
|
Outstanding checks
|
3,080
|
Instructions:
a. Prepare Palmetto s January bank reconciliation.
b. Prepare any necessary journal entries for Palmetto.
6. Direct write-off method. Harrisburg Company, which began business in early 20X7, reported $40,000 of accounts receivable on the December 31, 20X7, balance sheet. Included in this amount was $550 for a sale made to Tom Mattingly in July. On January 4, 20X8, the company learned that Mattingly had filed for personal bankruptcy. Harrisburg uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectibles.
a. Prepare the journal entry needed to write off Mattingly s account.
b. Comment on the ability of the direct write-off method to value receivables on the year-end balance sheet.
7. Allowance method: analysis of receivables. At a January 20X2 meeting, the presi dent of Sonic Sound directed the sales staff to move some product this year. The president noted that the credit evaluation department was being disbanded be cause it had restricted the company s growth. Credit decisions would now be made by the sales staff.
By the end of the year, Sonic had generated significant gains in sales, and the president was very pleased. The following data were provided by the accounting department:
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Sales
|
$23,987,000
|
$8,423,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable, 12/31
|
12,444,000
|
1,056,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, 12/31
|
?
|
23,000 cr.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The $12,444,000 receivables balance was aged as follows:
|
Age of Receivable
|
Amount
|
Percentage of Accounts Expected to Be Collected
|
|
Under 31 days
|
$4,321,000
|
99%
|
|
31260 days
|
4,890,000
|
90
|
|
61290 days
|
1,067,000
|
80
|
|
Over 90 days
|
2,166,000
|
60
|
Assume that no accounts were written off during 20X2.
Instructions
a. Estimate the amount of Uncollectible Accounts as of December 31, 20X2.
b. What is the company s Uncollectible Accounts expense for 20X2?
c. Compute the net realizable value of Accounts Receivable at the end of 20X1 and 20X2.
d. Compute the net realizable value at the end of 20X1 and 20X2 as a percentage of respective year-end receivables balances. Analyze your findings and comment on the president s decision to close the credit evaluation department.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
DQ 1 Accounting Cycle
Financial statements are a product of the accounting cycle. Think about two different companies: a manufacturing company, and a retail company. Why would different companies have different accounting cycles? Would you expect the steps of the accounting cycle to be the same for each company? Why or why not?
DQ 2 Bank Reconciliation
What is the purpose of bank reconciliation? What are the reasons for differences between the cash reported in the accounting records and the cash balance in the bank statements? Analyze several of your peers posts. Let at least two of your peers know what happens to the discrepancies between the book balance and the bank balance. Could these differences just be written off?
Income Statement Journal
The income statement measures the income and expenses of a company over a specific period of time. Reflecting on your personal financial statement for the past month, can you apply the principles of the income statement What did you learn from this experience?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
DQ 1 Accounting Cycle
Financial statements are a product of the accounting cycle. Think about two different companies: a manufacturing company, and a retail company. Why would different companies have different accounting cycles? Would you expect the steps of the accounting cycle to be the same for each company? Why or why not?
DQ 2 Bank Reconciliation
What is the purpose of bank reconciliation? What are the reasons for differences between the cash reported in the accounting records and the cash balance in the bank statements? Analyze several of your peers posts. Let at least two of your peers know what happens to the discrepancies between the book balance and the bank balance. Could these differences just be written off?
Income Statement Journal
The income statement measures the income and expenses of a company over a specific period of time. Reflecting on your personal financial statement for the past month, can you apply the principles of the income statement What did you learn from this experience?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Two Exercise Assignment
Revenue and Expenses
1. Recognition of concepts. Ron Carroll operates a small company that books enter tainers for theaters, parties, conventions, and so forth. The company s fiscal year ends on June 30. Consider the following items and classify each as either (1) pre paid expense, (2) unearned revenue, (3) accrued expense, (4) accrued revenue, or (5) none of the foregoing.
a. Amounts paid on June 30 for a 1-year insurance policy
b. Professional fees earned but not billed as of June 30
c. Repairs to the firm s copy machine, incurred and paid in June
d. An advance payment from a client for a performance next month at a convention
e. The payment in part (d) from the client s point of view
f. Interest owed on the company s bank loan, to be paid in early July
g. The bank loan payable in part (f)
h. Office supplies on hand at year-end
2. Analysis of prepaid account balance. The following information relates to Action Sign Company for 20X2:
| Insurance expense |
$4,350 |
| Prepaid insurance, December 31, 20X2 |
1,900 |
| Cash outlays for insurance during 20X2 |
6,200
|
Compute the balance in the Prepaid Insurance account on January 1, 20X2.
3. Understanding the closing process. Examine the following list of accounts:
| Interest Payable |
Accumulated Depreciation: Equipment |
| Alex Kenzy, Drawing |
Accounts Payable |
| Service Revenue |
Cash |
| Accounts Receivable |
Supplies Expense |
| Interest Expense |
Which of the preceding accounts
a. appear on a post-closing trial balance?
b. are commonly known as temporary, or nominal, accounts?
c. generate a debit to Income Summary in the closing process?
d. are closed to the capital account in the closing process?
4. Adjusting entries and financial statements. The following information pertains to Fixation Enterprises:
- The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one third of this amount had been earned.
- Fixation provided $2,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31.
- Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,650.
- The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period.
- The company paid $18,000 on October 1 of the current year to Vantage Property Management. The payment was for 6 months rent of Fixation s headquarters, beginning on November 1.
Fixation s accounting year ends on December 31.
Instructions
Analyze the five preceding cases individually and determine the following:
a. The typeof adjusting entry needed at year-end (Use the following codes: A, adjust ment of a prepaid expense; B, adjustment of an unearned revenue; C, adjustment to record an accrued expense; or D, adjustment to record an accrued revenue.)
b. The year-end journal entry to adjust the accounts
c. The income statement impact of each adjustment (e.g., increases total revenues by $500)
5. Adjusting entries. You have been retained to examine the records of Kathy s Day Care Center as of December 31, 20X3, the close of the current reporting period. In the course of your examination, you discover the following:
- On January 1, 20X3, the Supplies account had a balance of $2,350. During the year, $5,520 worth of supplies was purchased, and a balance of $1,620 remained unused on December 31.
- Unrecorded interest owed to the center totaled $275 as of December 31.
- All clients pay tuition in advance, and their payments are credited to the Unearned Tuition Revenue account. The account was credited for $75,500 on August 31. With the exception of $15,500 all amounts were for the current semester ending on December 31.
- Depreciation on the school s van was $3,000 for the year.
- On August 1, the center began to pay rent in 6-month installments of $21,000. Kathy wrote a check to the owner of the building and recorded the check in Pre paid Rent, a new account.
- Two salaried employees earn $400 each for a 5-day week. The employees are paid every Friday, and December 31 falls on a Thursday.
- Kathy s Day Care paid insurance premiums as follows, each time debiting Pre paid Insurance:
| Date Paid |
Policy No. |
Length of Policy |
Amount |
| Feb. 1, 20X2 |
1033MCM19 |
1 year |
$540
|
| Jan. 1, 20X3 |
7952789HP |
1 year |
912
|
| Aug. 1, 20X3 |
XQ943675ST |
2 years |
840
|
Instructions
The center s accounts were last adjusted on December 31, 20X2. Prepare the adjusting entries necessary under the accrual basis of accounting.
6. Bank reconciliation and entries. The following information was taken from the accounting records of Palmetto Company for the month of January:
| Balance per bank |
$6,150 |
| Balance per company records |
3,580 |
| Bank service charge for January |
20 |
| Deposits in transit |
940 |
| Interest on note collected by bank |
100 |
| Note collected by bank |
1,000 |
| NSF check returned by the bank with the bank statement |
650 |
| Outstanding checks |
3,080 |
Instructions:
a. Prepare Palmetto s January bank reconciliation.
b. Prepare any necessary journal entries for Palmetto.
7. Direct write-off method. Harrisburg Company, which began business in early 20X7, reported $40,000 of accounts receivable on the December 31, 20X7, balance sheet. Included in this amount was $550 for a sale made to Tom Mattingly in July. On January 4, 20X8, the company learned that Mattingly had filed for personal bankruptcy. Harrisburg uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectibles.
a. Prepare the journal entry needed to write off Mattingly s account.
b. Comment on the ability of the direct write-off method to value receivables on the year-end balance sheet.
8. Allowance method: estimation and balance sheet disclosure. The following pre- adjusted information for the Maverick Company is available on December 31:
- Accounts receivable $107,000
- Allowance for uncollectible accounts 5,400 (credit balance)
- Credit sales 250,000
a. Prepare the journal entries necessary to record Maverick s uncollectible accounts expense under each of the following assumptions:
(1) Uncollectible accounts are estimated to be 5% of Credit Sales.
(2) Uncollectible accounts are estimated to be 14% of Accounts Receivable.
b. How would Maverick s Accounts Receivable appear on the December 31 balance sheet under assumption (1) of part (a)?
c. How would Maverick s Accounts Receivable appear on the December 31 balance sheet under assumption (2) of part (a)?
9. Direct write-off and allowance methods: matching approach. The December 31, 20X2, year-end trial balance of Targa Company revealed the following account information:
| Debits |
Credits |
| Accounts Receivable |
$252,000 |
| Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts |
$ 3,000 |
| Sales |
855,000 |
Instructions
a. Determine the adjusting entry for bad debts under each of the following condi tions:
(1) An aging schedule indicates that $12,420 of accounts receivable will be uncollectible.
(2) Uncollectible accounts are estimated at 2% of net sales.
b. On January 19, 20X3, Targa learned that House Company, a customer, had declared bankruptcy. Present the proper entry to write off House s $950 balance using the allowance method.
c. Repeat the requirement in part (b), using the direct write-off method.
d. In light of the House bankruptcy, examine the allowance and direct write-off methods in terms of their ability to properly match revenues and expenses.
10. Allowance method: analysis of receivables. At a January 20X2 meeting, the presi dent of Sonic Sound directed the sales staff to move some product this year. The president noted that the credit evaluation department was being disbanded be cause it had restricted the company s growth. Credit decisions would now be made by the sales staff.
By the end of the year, Sonic had generated significant gains in sales, and the president was very pleased. The following data were provided by the accounting department:
| 20X2 |
20X1 |
| Sales |
$23,987,000 |
$8,423,000 |
|
| Accounts Receivable, 12/31 |
12,444,000 |
1,056,000 |
|
| Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, 12/31 |
? |
23,000 cr. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
The $12,444,000 receivables balance was aged as follows:
| Age of Receivable |
Amount |
Percentage of Accounts Expected to Be Collected |
| Under 31 days |
$5,321,000 |
99% |
| 31260 days |
3,890,000 |
90 |
| 61290 days |
1,067,000 |
80 |
| Over 90 days |
2,166,000 |
60 |
Assume that no accounts were written off during 20X2.
Instructions
a. Estimate the amount of Uncollectible Accounts as of December 31, 20X2.
b. What is the company s Uncollectible Accounts expense for 20X2?
c. Compute the net realizable value of Accounts Receivable at the end of 20X1 and 20X2.
d. Compute the net realizable value at the end of 20X1 and 20X2 as a percentage of respective year-end receivables balances. Analyze your findings and comment on the president s decision to close the credit evaluation department.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Two Exercise Assignment
Revenue and Expenses
1. Recognition of concepts. Jim Armstrong operates a small company that books enter tainers for theaters, parties, conventions, and so forth. The company s fiscal year ends on June 30. Consider the following items and classify each as either (1) pre paid expense, (2) unearned revenue, (3) accrued expense, (4) accrued revenue, or (5) none of the foregoing.
a Interest owed on the company’s bank loan, to be paid in early July
b Professional fees earned but not billed as of June 30
c Office supplies on hand at year-end
d An advance payment from a client for a performance next month at a convention
e The payment in part (d) from the client’s point of view
f Amounts paid on June 30 for a 1-year insurance policy
g The bank loan payable in part (a)
h Repairs to the firm’s copy machine, incurred and paid in June
2. Understanding the closing process. Examine the following list of accounts:
|
Note Payable
|
Accumulated Depreciation: Building
|
|
Alex Kenzy, Drawing
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
Product Revenue
|
Cash
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
Utility Expense
|
Which of the preceding accounts
a. appear on a post-closing trial balance?
b. are commonly known as temporary, or nominal, accounts?
c. generate a debit to Income Summary in the closing process?
d. are closed to the capital account in the closing process?
3. Adjusting entries and financial statements. The following information pertains to Sally Corporation:
The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one half of this amount had been earned.
Sally Corporation provided $1,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31.
Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,000.
The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period.
The company paid $18,000 on October 1 of the current year to Vantage Property Management. The payment was for 6 months rent of Sally Corporation s headquarters, beginning on November 1.
Sally Corporation s accounting year ends on December 31.
Instructions
Analyze the five preceding cases individually and determine the following:
a. The type of adjusting entry needed at year-end (Use the following codes: A, adjust ment of a prepaid expense; B, adjustment of an unearned revenue; C, adjustment to record an accrued expense; or D, adjustment to record an accrued revenue.)
b. The year-end journal entry to adjust the accounts
c. The income statement impact of each adjustment (e.g., increases total revenues by $500)
4. Adjusting entries. You have been retained to examine the records of Mary s Day Care Center as of December 31, 20X3, the close of the current reporting period. In the course of your examination, you discover the following:
On January 1, 20X3, the Supplies account had a balance of $1,350. During the year, $5,520 worth of supplies was purchased, and a balance of $1,620 remained unused on December 31.
Unrecorded interest owed to the center totaled $275 as of December 31.
All clients pay tuition in advance, and their payments are credited to the Unearned Tuition Revenue account. The account was credited for $65,500 on August 31. With the exception of $15,500all amounts were for the current semester ending on December 31.
Depreciation on the school s van was $3,000 for the year.
On August 1, the center began to pay rent in 6-month installments of $24,000. Mary wrote a check to the owner of the building and recorded the check in Pre paid Rent, a new account.
Two salaried employees earn $400 each for a 5-day week. The employees are paid every Friday, and December 31 falls on a Thursday.
Mary s Day Care paid insurance premiums as follows, each time debiting Pre paid Insurance:
|
Date Paid
|
Policy No.
|
Length of Policy
|
Amount
|
|
Feb. 1, 20X2
|
1033MCM19
|
1 year
|
$540
|
|
Jan. 1, 20X3
|
7952789HP
|
1 year
|
912
|
|
Aug. 1, 20X3
|
XQ943675ST
|
2 years
|
840
|
Instructions
The center s accounts were last adjusted on December 31, 20X2. Prepare the adjusting entries necessary under the accrual basis of accounting.
5. Bank reconciliation and entries. The following information was taken from the accounting records of Palmetto Company for the month of January:
|
Balance per bank
|
$6,150
|
|
Balance per company records
|
3,580
|
|
Bank service charge for January
|
20
|
|
Deposits in transit
|
940
|
|
Interest on note collected by bank
|
100
|
|
Note collected by bank
|
1,000
|
|
NSF check returned by the bank with the bank statement
|
650
|
|
Outstanding checks
|
3,080
|
Instructions:
a. Prepare Palmetto s January bank reconciliation.
b. Prepare any necessary journal entries for Palmetto.
6. Direct write-off method. Harrisburg Company, which began business in early 20X7, reported $40,000 of accounts receivable on the December 31, 20X7, balance sheet. Included in this amount was $550 for a sale made to Tom Mattingly in July. On January 4, 20X8, the company learned that Mattingly had filed for personal bankruptcy. Harrisburg uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectibles.
a. Prepare the journal entry needed to write off Mattingly s account.
b. Comment on the ability of the direct write-off method to value receivables on the year-end balance sheet.
7. Allowance method: analysis of receivables. At a January 20X2 meeting, the presi dent of Sonic Sound directed the sales staff to move some product this year. The president noted that the credit evaluation department was being disbanded be cause it had restricted the company s growth. Credit decisions would now be made by the sales staff.
By the end of the year, Sonic had generated significant gains in sales, and the president was very pleased. The following data were provided by the accounting department:
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Sales
|
$23,987,000
|
$8,423,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable, 12/31
|
12,444,000
|
1,056,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, 12/31
|
?
|
23,000 cr.
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
The $12,444,000 receivables balance was aged as follows:
|
Age of Receivable
|
Amount
|
Percentage of Accounts Expected to Be Collected
|
|
Under 31 days
|
$4,321,000
|
99%
|
|
31260 days
|
4,890,000
|
90
|
|
61290 days
|
1,067,000
|
80
|
|
Over 90 days
|
2,166,000
|
60
|
Assume that no accounts were written off during 20X2.
Instructions
a. Estimate the amount of Uncollectible Accounts as of December 31, 20X2.
b. What is the company s Uncollectible Accounts expense for 20X2?
c. Compute the net realizable value of Accounts Receivable at the end of 20X1 and 20X2.
d. Compute the net realizable value at the end of 20X1 and 20X2 as a percentage of respective year-end receivables balances. Analyze your findings and comment on the president s decision to close the credit evaluation department.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
acc 205 week 3
1. Specific identification method. Boston Galleries uses the specific identification method for inventory valuation. Inventory information for several oil paintings follows.
|
Painting
|
Cost
|
|
1/2 Beginning inventory
|
Woods
|
$21,000
|
|
4/19 Purchase
|
Sunset
|
21,800
|
|
6/7 Purchase
|
Earth
|
31,200
|
|
12/16 Purchase
|
Moon
|
4,000
|
|
|
|
|
Woodsand Moonwere sold during the year for a total of $35,000. Determine the firm s
a. cost of goods sold.
b. gross profit.
c. ending inventory.
2. Inventory valuation methods: basic computations. The January beginning inven tory of the Gilette Company consisted of 300 units costing $40 each. During the first quarter, the company purchased two batches of goods: 700 Units at $44 on February 21 and 800 units at $50 on March 28. Sales during the first quarter were 1,400 units at $75 per unit. The White Company uses a periodic inventory system. Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods.
|
FIFO
|
LIFO
|
Weighted Average
|
|
|
|
|
|
Goods available for sale
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
Ending inventory, March 31
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.Perpetual inventory system: journal entries. At the beginning of 20X3, Beehler Company implemented a computerized perpetual inventory system. The first transactions that occurred during 20X3 follow:
1/2/20X3 Purchases on account: 500 units @$6 = $3,000
1/15/20X3 Sales on account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550
1/20/20X3 Purchases on Account: 200 units @ 5 = $1,000
1/25/20X3 Sales on Account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550
The company president examined the computer-generated journal entries for these transactions and was confused by the absence of a Purchases account.
a. Duplicate the journal entries that would have appeared on the computer printout under FIFO & LIFO
b. Calculate the balance in the firm s Inventory account under each method.
c. Briefly explain the absence of the Purchases account to the company president.
4. Inventory valuation methods: computations and concepts.
Wild Riders Surfboard Company began business on January 1 of the current year. Purchases of surfboards were as follows:
|
Date
|
Quantity
|
Unit Cost
|
Total Cost
|
|
1/3
|
100
|
$125
|
$12,500
|
|
4/3
|
200
|
$135
|
$27,000
|
|
6/3
|
100
|
$145
|
$14,500
|
|
7/3
|
100
|
$155
|
$15,500
|
|
Total
|
500
|
|
$69,500
|
Wild Riders sold 400 boards at $250 per board on the dates listed below. The company uses a perpetual inventory system.
|
Date
|
Quantity Sold
|
Unit Price
|
Total Sales
|
|
3/17
|
50
|
$250
|
$12,500
|
|
5/17
|
75
|
$250
|
$18,750
|
|
8/10
|
275
|
$250
|
$68,750
|
|
Total
|
400
|
|
$100,000
|
Instructions
a. Calculate cost of goods sold, ending inventory, and gross profit under each of the following inventory valuation methods:
First-in, first-out
Last-in, first-out
Weighted average
b. Which of the three methods would be chosen if management s goal is to
(1) produce an up-to-date inventory valuation on the balance sheet?
(2) show the lowest net income for tax purposes?
5. Depreciation methods.Mike Davis Enterprises purchased a delivery van for $40,000 in January 20X7. The van was estimated to have a service life of 5 years and a resid ual value of $6,000. The company is planning to drive the van 20,000 miles annually. Compute depreciation expense for 20X8 by using each of the following methods:
a. Units-of-output, assuming 17,000 miles were driven during 20X8
b. Straight-line
c. Double-declining-balance
6. Depreciation computations.Alpha Alpha Alpha, a college fraternity, purchased a new heavy-duty washing machine on January 1, 20X3. The machine, which cost $2,000, had an estimated residual value of $100 and an estimated service life of 4 years (1,800 washing cycles). Calculate the following:
a. The machine s book value on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the straight-line depreciation method
b. Depreciation expense for 20X4, assuming use of the units-of-output depreciation method. Actual washing cycles in 20X4 totaled 500.
c. Accumulated depreciation on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the double-declining-balance depreciation method.
7. Depreciation computations: change in estimate.Aussie Imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for $50,000 on January 1, 20X3. At the time of acquisition, the machine was estimated to have a service life of 5 years (25,000 operating hours) and a residual value of $5,000. During the 5 years of operations (20X3 – 20X7), the machine was used for 5,100, 4,800, 3,200, 6,000, and 5,900 hours, respectively.
Instructions
a. Compute depreciation for 20X3 – 20X7 by using the following methods: straight line, units of output, and double-declining-balance.
b. On January 1, 20X5, management shortened the remaining service life of the machine to 15 months. Assuming use of the straight-line method, compute the company s depreciation expense for 20X5.
c. Briefly describe what you would have done differently in part (a) if Aussie Imports had paid $47,800 for the machinery rather than $50,000 In addition, assume that the company incurred $800 of freight charges $1,400 for machine setup and testing, and $300 for insurance during the first year of use.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Three Exercise Assignment
Inventory
1. Specific identification method. Boston Galleries uses the specific identification method for inventory valuation. Inventory information for several oil paintings follows.
-
|
Painting
|
Cost
|
|
1/2 Beginning inventory
|
Woods
|
$21,000
|
|
4/19 Purchase
|
Sunset
|
21,800
|
|
6/7 Purchase
|
Earth
|
31,200
|
|
12/16 Purchase
|
Moon
|
4,000
|
WoodsandMoonwere sold during the year for a total of $35,000. Determine the firm s
a. cost of goods sold.
b. gross profit.
c. ending inventory.
2. Inventory valuation methods: basic computations. The January beginning inventory of the Gilette Company consisted of 300 units costing $40 each. During the first quarter, the company purchased two batches of goods: 700 Units at $44 on February 21 and 800 units at $50 on March 28. Sales during the first quarter were 1,400 units at $75 per unit. The White Company uses a periodic inventory system. Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods.
|
FIFO
|
LIFO
|
Weighted Average
|
|
|
|
|
|
Goods available for sale
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
Ending inventory, March 31
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
3.Perpetual inventory system: journal entries. At the beginning of 20X3, Beehler Company implemented a computerized perpetual inventory system. The first transactions that occurred during 20X3 follow:
-
1/2/20X3 Purchases on account: 500 units @$6 = $3,000
-
1/15/20X3 Sales on account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550
-
1/20/20X3 Purchases on Account: 200 units @ 5 = $1,000
-
1/25/20X3 Sales on Account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550
The company president examined the computer-generated journal entries for these transactions and was confused by the absence of a Purchases account.
a. Duplicate the journal entries that would have appeared on the computer printout under FIFO & LIFO
b. Calculate the balance in the firm s Inventory account under each method.
c. Briefly explain the absence of the Purchases account to the company president.
4. Inventory valuation methods: computations and concepts.
Wild Riders Surfboard Company began business on January 1 of the current year. Purchases of surfboards were as follows:
|
Date
|
Quantity
|
Unit Cost
|
Total Cost
|
|
1/3
|
100
|
$125
|
$12,500
|
|
4/3
|
200
|
$135
|
$27,000
|
|
6/3
|
100
|
$145
|
$14,500
|
|
7/3
|
100
|
$155
|
$15,500
|
|
Total
|
500
|
|
$69,500
|
Wild Riders sold 400 boards at $250 per board on the dates listed below. The company uses a perpetual inventory system.
|
Date
|
Quantity Sold
|
Unit Price
|
Total Sales
|
|
3/17
|
50
|
$250
|
$12,500
|
|
5/17
|
75
|
$250
|
$18,750
|
|
8/10
|
275
|
$250
|
$68,750
|
|
Total
|
400
|
|
$100,000
|
Instructions
-
Calculate cost of goods sold, ending inventory, and gross profit under each of the following inventory valuation methods:
-
First-in, first-out
-
Last-in, first-out
-
Weighted average
b. Which of the three methods would be chosen if management s goal is to
(1) produce an up-to-date inventory valuation on the balance sheet?
(2) show the lowest net income for tax purposes?
5. Depreciation methods.Mike Davis Enterprises purchased a delivery van for $40,000 in January 20X7. The van was estimated to have a service life of 5 years and a residual value of $6,000. The company is planning to drive the van 20,000 miles annually. Compute depreciation expense for 20X8 by using each of the following methods:
a. Units-of-output, assuming 17,000 miles were driven during 20X8
b. Straight-line
c. Double-declining-balance
6. Depreciation computations.Alpha Alpha Alpha, a college fraternity, purchased a new heavy-duty washing machine on January 1, 20X3. The machine, which cost $2,000, had an estimated residual value of $100 and an estimated service life of 4 years (1,800 washing cycles). Calculate the following:
a. The machine s book value on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the straight-line depreciation method
b. Depreciation expense for 20X4, assuming use of the units-of-output depreciation method. Actual washing cycles in 20X4 totaled 500.
c. Accumulated depreciation on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the double-declining-balance depreciation method.
7. Depreciation computations: change in estimate.Aussie Imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for $50,000 on January 1, 20X3. At the time of acquisition, the machine was estimated to have a service life of 5 years (25,000 operating hours) and a residual value of $5,000. During the 5 years of operations (20X3 – 20X7), the machine was used for 5,100, 4,800, 3,200, 6,000, and 5,900 hours, respectively.
Instructions
a. Compute depreciation for 20X3 – 20X7 by using the following methods: straight line, units of output, and double-declining-balance.
b. On January 1, 20X5, management shortened the remaining service life of the machine to 15 months. Assuming use of the straight-line method, compute the company s depreciation expense for 20X5.
c. Briefly describe what you would have done differently in part (a) if Aussie Imports had paid $47,800 for the machinery rather than $50,000 In addition, assume that the company incurred $800 of freight charges $1,400 for machine setup and testing, and $300 for insurance during the first year of use.
- LIFO vs. FIFO
The controller of Sagehen Enterprises believes that the company should switch from the LIFO method to the FIFO method. The controller s bonus is based on the next income. It is the controller s belief that the switch in inventory methods would increase the net income of the company. What are the differences between the LIFO and FIFO methods?
Guided Response:
Analyze several of your peers posts. Let at least two of your peers know if a company is better off it switches from a LIFO method to a FIFO method? Explain your reasoning.
- Depreciation
A variety of depreciation methods are used to allocate the cost of an asset to all of the accounting periods benefited by the use of the asset. Your client has just purchased a piece of equipment for $100,000. Explain the concept of depreciation. Which of the following depreciation methods would you recommend: straight-line depreciation, double declining balance method, or an alternative method?
Guided Response:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
DQ 1. The controller of Sagehen Enterprises believes that the company should switch from the LIFO method to the FIFO method. The controllers bonus is based on the next income. It is the controllers belief that the switch in inventory methods would increase the net income of the company. What are the differences between the LIFO and FIFO methods?
DQ 2. A variety of depreciation methods are used to allocate the cost of an asset to all of the accounting periods benefited by the use of the asset. Your client has just purchased a piece of equipment for $100,000. Explain the concept of depreciation. Which of the following depreciation methods would you recommend: straight-line depreciation, double declining balance method, or an alternative method?
Inventory Journal
Reflect for a moment on the LIFO (Last in First Out) and FIFO (First in First Out) inventory methods. If you were starting a small manufacturing company, what inventory method do you believe would provide the most accurate financial statements? Why do you believe this is the case?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Specific identification method. Boston Galleries uses the specific identification method for inventory valuation. Inventory information for several oil paintings follows.
Painting Cost
1/2 Beginning inventory Woods $21,000
4/19 Purchase Sunset 21,800
6/7 Purchase Earth 31,200
12/16 Purchase Moon 4,000
$78,000 25,000
Woods and Moon were sold during the year for a total of $35,000. Determine the firm s
a. cost of goods sold.
b. gross profit.
c. ending inventory.
2. Inventory valuation methods: basic computations. The January beginning inven tory of the Gilette Company consisted of 300 units costing $40 each. During the first quarter, the company purchased two batches of goods: 700 Units at $44 on February 21 and 800 units at $50 on March 28. Sales during the first quarter were 1,400 units at $75 per unit. The White Company uses a periodic inventory system. Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods.
3. Perpetual inventory system: journal entries. At the beginning of 20X3, Beehler Company implemented a computerized perpetual inventory system. The first transactions that occurred during 20X3 follow:
1/2/20X3 Purchases on account: 500 units @$6 = $3,000
1/15/20X3 Sales on account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550
1/20/20X3 Purchases on Account: 200 units @ 5 = $1,000
1/25/20X3 Sales on Account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550
The company president examined the computer-generated journal entries for these transactions and was confused by the absence of a Purchases account.
a. Duplicate the journal entries that would have appearedon the computer printout under FIFO & LIFO
b. Calculate the balance in the firm s Inventory account under each method.
c. Briefly explain the absence of the Purchases account to the company president.
4. Inventory valuation methods: computations and concepts.
Wild Riders Surfboard Company began business on January 1 of the current year. Purchases of surfboards were as follows:
Date Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
3-Jan 100 $125 $12,500
3-Apr 200 $135 $27,000
3-Jun 100 $145 $14,500
3-Jul 100 $155 $15,500
Total 500 $69,500
Wild Riders sold 400 boards at $250 per board on the dates listed below. The company uses a perpetual inventory system.
Date Quantity Sold Unit Price Total Sales
17-Mar 50 $250 $12,500
17-May 75 $250 $18,750
10-Aug 275 $250 $68,750
Total 400 $100,000
Instructions
a. Calculate cost of goods sold, ending inventory, and gross profit under each of the following inventory valuation methods:
First-in, first-out
Last-in, first-out
Weighted average
b. Which of the three methods would be chosen if management s goal is to
(1) produce an up-to-date inventory valuation on the balance sheet?
(2) show the lowest net income for tax purposes
5. Depreciation methods. Mike Davis Enterprises purchased a delivery van for $40,000 in January 20X7. The van was estimated to have a service life of 5 years and a resid ual value of $6,000. The company is planning to drive the van 20,000 miles annually. Compute depreciation expense for 20X8 by using each of the following methods:
a. Units-of-output, assuming 17,000 miles were driven during 20X8
b. Straight-line
c. Double-declining-balance
6. Depreciation computations. Alpha Alpha Alpha, a college fraternity, purchased a new heavy-duty washing machine on January 1, 20X3. The machine, which cost $2,000, had an estimated residual value of $100 and an estimated service life of 4 years (1,800 washing cycles). Calculate the following:
a. The machine s book value on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the straight-line depreciation method
b. Depreciation expense for 20X4, assuming use of the units-of-output depreciation method. Actual washing cycles in 20X4 totaled 500.
c. Accumulated depreciation on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the double-declining-balance depreciation method.
7. Depreciation computations: change in estimate. Aussie Imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for $50,000 on January 1, 20X3. At the time of acquisition, the machine was estimated to have a service life of 5 years (25,000 operating hours) and a residual value of $5,000. During the 5 years of operations (20X3 – 20X7), the machine was used for 5,100, 4,800, 3,200, 6,000, and 5,900 hours, respectively.
Instructions
a. Compute depreciation for 20X3 – 20X7 by using the following methods: straight line, units of output, and double-declining-balance.
b. On January 1, 20X5, management shortened the remaining service life of the machine to 15 months. Assuming use of the straight-line method, compute the company s depreciation expense for 20X5.
c. Briefly describe what you would have done differently in part (a) if Aussie Imports had paid $47,800 for the machinery rather than $50,000 In addition, assume that the company incurred $800 of freight charges $1,400 for machine setup and testing, and $300 for insurance during the first year of use.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Three Exercise Assignment
Inventory
1. Specific identification method. Boston Galleries uses the specific identification method for inventory valuation. Inventory information for several oil paintings follows.
|
Painting
|
Cost
|
|
1/2 Beginning inventory
|
Woods
|
$21,000
|
|
4/19 Purchase
|
Sunset
|
21,800
|
|
6/7 Purchase
|
Earth
|
31,200
|
|
12/16 Purchase
|
Moon
|
4,000
|
|
|
|
|
Woodsand Moonwere sold during the year for a total of $35,000. Determine the firm s
a. cost of goods sold.
b. gross profit.
c. ending inventory.
2. Inventory valuation methods: basic computations. The January beginning inven tory of the Gilette Company consisted of 300 units costing $40 each. During the first quarter, the company purchased two batches of goods: 700 Units at $44 on February 21 and 800 units at $50 on March 28. Sales during the first quarter were 1,400 units at $75 per unit. The White Company uses a periodic inventory system. Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods.
|
FIFO
|
LIFO
|
Weighted Average
|
|
|
|
|
|
Goods available for sale
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
Ending inventory, March 31
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.Perpetual inventory system: journal entries. At the beginning of 20X3, Beehler Company implemented a computerized perpetual inventory system. The first transactions that occurred during 20X3 follow:
1/2/20X3 Purchases on account: 500 units @$6 = $3,000
1/15/20X3 Sales on account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550
1/20/20X3 Purchases on Account: 200 units @ 5 = $1,000
1/25/20X3 Sales on Account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550
The company president examined the computer-generated journal entries for these transactions and was confused by the absence of a Purchases account.
a. Duplicate the journal entries that would have appeared on the computer printout under FIFO & LIFO
b. Calculate the balance in the firm s Inventory account under each method.
c. Briefly explain the absence of the Purchases account to the company president.
4. Inventory valuation methods: computations and concepts.
Wild Riders Surfboard Company began business on January 1 of the current year. Purchases of surfboards were as follows:
|
Date
|
Quantity
|
Unit Cost
|
Total Cost
|
|
1/3
|
100
|
$125
|
$12,500
|
|
4/3
|
200
|
$135
|
$27,000
|
|
6/3
|
100
|
$145
|
$14,500
|
|
7/3
|
100
|
$155
|
$15,500
|
|
Total
|
500
|
|
$69,500
|
Wild Riders sold 400 boards at $250 per board on the dates listed below. The company uses a perpetual inventory system.
|
Date
|
Quantity Sold
|
Unit Price
|
Total Sales
|
|
3/17
|
50
|
$250
|
$12,500
|
|
5/17
|
75
|
$250
|
$18,750
|
|
8/10
|
275
|
$250
|
$68,750
|
|
Total
|
400
|
|
$100,000
|
Instructions
a. Calculate cost of goods sold, ending inventory, and gross profit under each of the following inventory valuation methods:
First-in, first-out
Last-in, first-out
Weighted average
b. Which of the three methods would be chosen if management s goal is to
(1) produce an up-to-date inventory valuation on the balance sheet?
(2) show the lowest net income for tax purposes?
5. Depreciation methods.Mike Davis Enterprises purchased a delivery van for $40,000 in January 20X7. The van was estimated to have a service life of 5 years and a resid ual value of $6,000. The company is planning to drive the van 20,000 miles annually. Compute depreciation expense for 20X8 by using each of the following methods:
a. Units-of-output, assuming 17,000 miles were driven during 20X8
b. Straight-line
c. Double-declining-balance
6. Depreciation computations.Alpha Alpha Alpha, a college fraternity, purchased a new heavy-duty washing machine on January 1, 20X3. The machine, which cost $2,000, had an estimated residual value of $100 and an estimated service life of 4 years (1,800 washing cycles). Calculate the following:
a. The machine s book value on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the straight-line depreciation method
b. Depreciation expense for 20X4, assuming use of the units-of-output depreciation method. Actual washing cycles in 20X4 totaled 500.
c. Accumulated depreciation on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the double-declining-balance depreciation method.
7. Depreciation computations: change in estimate.Aussie Imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for $50,000 on January 1, 20X3. At the time of acquisition, the machine was estimated to have a service life of 5 years (25,000 operating hours) and a residual value of $5,000. During the 5 years of operations (20X3 – 20X7), the machine was used for 5,100, 4,800, 3,200, 6,000, and 5,900 hours, respectively.
Instructions
a. Compute depreciation for 20X3 – 20X7 by using the following methods: straight line, units of output, and double-declining-balance.
b. On January 1, 20X5, management shortened the remaining service life of the machine to 15 months. Assuming use of the straight-line method, compute the company s depreciation expense for 20X5.
c. Briefly describe what you would have done differently in part (a) if Aussie Imports had paid $47,800 for the machinery rather than $50,000 In addition, assume that the company incurred $800 of freight charges $1,400 for machine setup and testing, and $300 for insurance during the first year of use.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACa6111_______________________Fall 2013___________________________Assignment 2
Case2: ABC Costing
Kiku Yamamoto is the controller of Watanabe, Inc., an electronic controls company located in Osaka. She recently attended a seminar on activity-based costing (ABC) in Tokyo. Watanabe’s traditional cost accounting system has three cost categories: direct materials, direct labor, and indirect produc tion costs. The company allocates indirect production costs on the basis of direct labor cost. The fol lowing is the 20X0 budget for the automotive controls department (in thousands of Japanese yen):
Direct materials 60,000
Direct labor 35,000
Indirect production costs 24,500
Totalcost 119,500
After Ms. Yamamoto attended the seminar, she suggested that Watanabe experiment with an ABC sys tem in the Automotive Controls Department. She identified four main activities that cause indirect pro duction costs in the department and selected a cost driver to use as a cost-allocation base for each activ ity as follows:
Activity Cost-Allocation Base Predicted 20X0 Cost ( 000)
|
Receiving
|
Direct materials cost
|
|
Assembly
|
Number of control units
|
|
Quality control
|
QC hours
|
|
Shipping
|
Number of boxes shipped
|
|
TOTAL
|
|
4,800
13,800
1,800
4,100
24,500
In20X0 the Automotive Controls Department expects to produce 92,000 control units, use 600 quality control hours, and ship 8,200 boxes.
1. Explain how Watanabe, Inc., allocates its indirect production costs using its traditional cost sys tem. Include a computation of the allocation rate used.
2. Explain how Watanabe, Inc., would allocate indirect production costs under Ms. Yamamoto’s proposed ABC system. Include a computation of all the allocation rates used.
3. Suppose Watanabe prices its products at 30% above total production cost. An order came in fromNissan for 5,000 control units. Yamamoto estimates that filling the order will require 8,000,000of direct materials cost and 2,000,000 of direct labor, It will require 50 hours of QC inspectiontime and will be shipped in 600 boxes,it. Compute the price charged for the 5,000 control units if Watanabe uses its traditional cost accounting system.
b. Compute the price charged for the 5,000 control units if Watanabe uses the ABC system pro posed by Ms. Yamamoto.
4. Explain why costs are different in the two costing systems. Include an indication of which costs you think arc most accurate and why.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. A new account is opened for each transaction entered into by a business firm.
True
False
2. The recording process becomes more efficient and informative if all transactions are recorded in one account.
True
False
3. When the volume of transactions is large, recording them in tabular form is more efficient than using journals and ledgers.
True
False
4. An account is often referred to as a T-account because of the way it is constructed.
True
False
5. A debit to an account indicates an increase in that account.
True
False
6. If a revenue account is credited, the revenue account is increased.
True
False
7. If an expense account is credited, the expense account is increased.
True
False
8. Debit and credit can be interpreted to mean increase and decrease, respectively.
True
False
9. The double-entry system of accounting refers to the placement of a double line at the end of a column of figures.
True
False
10. Liability accounts are increased by debits and have normal debit balances
True
False
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The simple rate of return is the same as the internal rate of return.
True
False
2. If two projects require the same amount of investment, then the preference ranking computed using either the profitability index or the net present value would be the same.
True
False
3. Preference decisions attempt to determine which of many alternative investment projects would be the best for the company to accept.
True
False
4. A very useful guide for making investment decisions is: The shorter payback period, the more profitable the project.
True
False
5. The cost of capital involves blending of costs of all sources of capital funds, both debt and equity
True
False
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Final Paper
Focus of the Final Paper
Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions.
Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:
Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?
Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet
Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.
Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.
Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.
Writing the Final Paper
1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:
a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted
3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Final Paper
Focus of the Final Paper
Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions.
Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:
Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?
Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet
Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.
Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.
Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.
Writing the Final Paper
1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:
a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted
3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Attached Files |
1374230829_ACC 205 Ashford.zip
| Preview |
| 1.ACC 205 Ashford/ACC205 Week 2 Assignment.doc |
| 2.ACC 205 Ashford/ACC205,Week 3,assignment.docx |
| 3.ACC 205 Ashford/ACC205,week3,discussions.doc |
| 4.ACC 205 Ashford/Ron_W1DQ2.doc |
| 5.ACC 205 Ashford/Ron_W2A1.xls |
| 6.ACC 205 Ashford/Ron_W2DQ1 (1).xls |
| 7.ACC 205 Ashford/Ron_W2DQ1.xls |
| 8.ACC 205 Ashford/Ron_W2DQ2.xls |
| 9.ACC 205 Ashford/Ron_W3A1.doc |
| 10.ACC 205 Ashford/Ron_W3DQ1.xls |
| 11.ACC 205 Ashford/Ron_W3DQ2.xls |
| 12.ACC 205 Ashford/Ron_W4A1.doc |
| 13.ACC 205 Ashford/Ron_W4DQ1.xls |
| 14.ACC 205 Ashford/Ron_W4DQ1.xlsx |
| 15.ACC 205 Ashford/Ron_W4DQ2.xlsx |
| 16.ACC 205 Ashford/Ron_W5_FinalPaper.doc |
| 17.ACC 205 Ashford/Ron_W5A1.xlsx |
| 18.ACC 205 Ashford/Ron_W5DQ1.xlsx |
| 19.ACC 205 Ashford/Ron_W5DQ2.xlsx |
| 20.Ron_W2DQ1 (1).xls |
| 21.Ron_W2A1.xls |
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 205 Week 3 Exercise Assignment
1. Specific identification method. Boston Galleries uses the specific identification method for inventory valuation. Inventory information for several oil paintings follows.
Painting Cost
1/2 Beginning inventory Woods $11,000
4/19 Purchase Sunset $21,800
6/7 Purchase Earth $31,200
12/16 Purchase Moon $4,000
Woods and Moon were sold during the year for a total of $35,000. Determine the firm s
a. cost of goods sold.
b. gross profit.
c. ending inventory.
2. Inventory valuation methods: basic computations. The January beginning inven tory of the White Company consisted of 300 units costing $40 each. During the first quarter, the company purchased two batches of goods: 700 Units at $44 on February 21 and 800 units at $50 on March 28. Sales during the first quarter were 1,400 units at $75 per unit. The White Company uses a periodic inventory system. Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods.
FIFO LIFO Weighted Average
Goods available for sale $ $ $
Ending inventory, March 31
Cost of goods sold
3. Perpetual inventory system: journal entries. At the beginning of 20X3, Beehler Company implemented a computerized perpetual inventory system. The first transactions that occurred during 20X3 following.
Purchases on account: 500 units @ $4 = $2,000
Sales on account: 300 of the above units = $2,550
Returns on account: 75 of the above unsold units
The company president examined the computer-generated journal entries for these transactions and was confused by the absence of a Purchases account.
a. Duplicate the journal entries that would have prepared on the computer printout.
b. Calculate the balance in the firm s Inventory account.
c. Briefly explain the absence of the Purchases account to the company president.
4. Inventory valuation methods: computations and concepts. Wave Riders Surfboard Company began business on January 1 of the current year. Purchases of surfboards were as follows:
1/3: Purchase 100 boards @ $125
3/17: Sold 50 boards @ $130
5/9: 5/9: 246 boards @140
7/3: 400 boards @ $150
10/23: 74 boards @ $160
Wave Riders sold 710 boards at an average price of $250 per board. The company uses a periodic inventory system.
Instructions
a. Calculate cost of goods sold, ending inventory, and gross profit under each of the following inventory valuation methods:
First-in, first-out
Last-in, first-out
Weighted average
b. Which of the three methods would be chosen if management s goal is to
(1) produce an up-to-date inventory valuation on the balance sheet?
(2) approximate the physical flow of a sand and gravel dealer?
(3) report low earnings (for tax purposes) for a separate electronics company that has been experiencing declining purchase prices?
5. Depreciation methods. Betsy Ross Enterprises purchased a delivery van for $30,000 in January 20X7. The van was estimated to have a service life of 5 years and a resid ual value of $6,000. The company is planning to drive the van 20,000 miles annually. Compute depreciation expense for 20X8 by using each of the following methods:
a. Units-of-output, assuming 17,000 miles were driven during 20X8
b. Straight-line
c. Double-declining-balance
6. Depreciation computations. Alpha Alpha Alpha, a college fraternity, purchased a new heavy-duty washing machine on January 1, 20X3. The machine, which cost $1,000, had an estimated residual value of $100 and an estimated service life of 4 years (1,800 washing cycles). Calculate the following:
a. The machine s book value on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the straight-line depreciation method
b. Depreciation expense for 20X4, assuming use of the units-of-output depreciation method. Actual washing cycles in 20X4 totaled 500.
c. Accumulated depreciation on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the double-declining-balance depreciation method.
7. Depreciation computations: change in estimate. Aussie Imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for $50,000 on January 1, 20X3. At the time of acquisition, the machine was estimated to have a service life of 5 years (25,000 operating hours) and a residual value of $5,000. During the 5 years of operations (20X3 – 20X7), the machine was used for 5,100, 4,800, 3,200, 6,000, and 5,900 hours, respectively.
Instructions
a. Compute depreciation for 20X3 – 20X7 by using the following methods: straight line, units of output, and double-declining-balance.
b. On January 1, 20X5, management shortened the remaining service life of the machine to 20 months. Assuming use of the straight-line method, compute the company s depreciation expense for 20X5.
c. Briefly describe what you would have done differently in part (a) if Aussie Imports had paid $47,800 for the machinery rather than $50,000 In addition, assume that the company incurred $800 of freight charges $1,400 for machine setup and testing, and $300 for insurance during the first year of use.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions. Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references.
Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:
Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?
Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet
Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.
Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.
Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.
Writing the Final Paper
1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:
a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted
3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Deadline is tonight.
Final Paper
Focus of the Final Paper
Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions. Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references.
Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:
Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?
Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet
Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.
Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.
Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.
Writing the Final Paper
1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:
a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted
3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Final Paper
Focus of the Final Paper
Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions. Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references.
Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:
Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?
Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet
Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.
Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.
Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.
Writing the Final Paper
1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:
a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted
3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week One Exercise Assignment
Basic Accounting Equations
1. Recognition of normal balances
The following items appeared in the accounting records of Triguero’s, a retail music store that also sponsors concerts. Classify each of the items as an asset, liability; revenue; or expense from the company’s viewpoint. Also indicate the normal account balance of each item.
a. Amounts paid to a mall for rent.
b. Amounts to be paid in 10 days to suppliers.
c. A new fax machine purchased for office use.
d. Land held as an investment.
e. Amounts due from customers.
f. Daily sales of merchandise sold.
g. Promotional costs to publicize a concert.
h. A long-term loan owed to Citizens Bank.
i. The albums, tapes, and CDs held for sale to customers.
2.Basic journal entries
The following transactions pertain to the Jennifer Royall Company:
|
May 1
|
Jenni fer Royall invested cash of $25,000 and land valued at $15,000 into the business.
|
|
5
|
Provided $1,000 of services to Jason Ratchford, a client, on account.
|
|
9
|
Paid $1,250 of salaries to an employee.
|
|
14
|
Acquired a new computer for $4,200, on account.
|
|
20
|
Collected $800 from Jason Ratchford for services provided on May 5.
|
|
24
|
Borrowed $2,500 from BestBanc by securing a six-month loan.
|
Prepare journal entries (and explanations) to record the preceding transactions and events.
3. Balance sheet preparation. The following data relate to Preston Company as of December 31, 20XX:
Building $40,000 Accounts receivable $24,000
Cash 21,000 Loan payable 30,000
J. Preston, Capital 65,000 Land 21,000
Accounts payable ?
Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 20XX. (See Exhibit 1.1 and 1.4)
4. Basic transaction processing. On November 1 of the current year, Richard Simmons established a sole proprietorship. The following transactions occurred during the month:
1: Simmons invested $32,000 into the business for $32,000 in common stock.
2: Paid $5,000 to acquire a used minivan.
3: Purchased $1,800 of office furniture on account.
4: Performed $2,100 of consulting services on account.
5: Paid $300 of repair expenses.
6: Received $800 from clients who were previously billed in item 4.
7: Paid $500 on account to the supplier of office furniture in item 3.
8: Received a $150 electric bill, to be paid next month.
9: Simmons withdrew $800 from the business.
10: Received $250 in cash from clients for consulting services rendered.
Instructions
a. Arrange the following asset, liability, and owner s equity elements of the account ing equation: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Office Furniture, Van, Accounts Payable, Common Stock/Dividends, and Revenues/Expenses. (See Exhibit 1.5)
b. Record each transaction on a separate line. After all transactions have been recorded, compute the balance in each of the preceding items.
c. Answer the following questions for Simmons.
(1) How much does the company owe to its creditors at month-end? On which financial statement(s) would this information be found?
(2) Did the company have a good month from an accounting viewpoint? Briefly explain.
5. Transaction analysis and statement preparation. The transactions that follow
relate to Burton Enterprises for March 20X1, the company s first month of activity.
|
3/1
|
Joanne Burton, the owner, invested $20,000 cash into the business.
|
|
3/4
|
Performed $2,400 of services on account.
|
|
3/7
|
Acquired a small parcel of land by paying $6,000 cash
|
|
3/12
|
Received $500 from a client who was billed previously on March 4.
|
|
3/15
|
Paid $200 to the Journal Herald for advertising expense.
|
|
3/18
|
Acquired 9,000 of equipment from Park Central Outfitters by Paying
|
| |
$7,000 down and agreeing to remit the balance owed within two weeks (A/P).
|
|
3/22
|
Received $300 cash from clients for services.
|
|
3/24
|
Paid $1,500 on account to Park Central Outfitters in partial settlement of
|
| |
the balance due from the transaction on March 18.
|
|
3/28
|
Rented a car from United Car Rental for use on March 28. Total charges
|
| |
amounted to $125, with United billing Burton for the amount due.
|
|
3/31
|
Paid $600 for March wages
|
|
3/31
|
Processed a $600 cash withdrawal (dividend) from the business for Joanne Burton
|
Instructions
a. Determine the impact of each of the preceding transactions on Burton s assets,
liabilities, and owner s equity. See exhibit 1.5. Use the following format:
Assets= Liabilities+ Owner s Equity
Cash, Accounts Receivable, Land, EquipmentAccounts Payable(+)Common Stock (+) Revenues
(-) Dividends(-) Expenses
a. Record each transaction on a separate line. Calculate balances only after the last transaction has been recorded.
b. Prepare an income statement, a statement of retained earnings, and a balance sheet, (See Exhibit 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4)
6.Entry and trial balance preparation. Lee Adkins is a portrait artist. The following schedule represents Lee s combined chart of accounts and trial balance as of May 31.
Account numberAccount nameDebitCredit
|
110
|
Cash
|
$ 2,700
|
|
|
120
|
Accounts Receivable
|
12,100
|
|
|
130
|
Equipment and Supplies
|
2,800
|
|
|
140
|
Studio
|
45,000
|
|
|
210
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$2,600
|
|
310
|
Lee Adkins, Capital
|
|
57,400
|
|
320
|
Lee Adkins, Drawing
|
30,000
|
|
|
410
|
Professional Fee Revenue
|
|
39,000
|
|
510
|
Advertising Expense
|
2,300
|
|
|
520
|
Salaries Expense
|
2,100
|
|
|
540
|
Utilities Expense
|
2,000
|
|
| |
$99,000
|
$99,000
|
| |
|
|
|
|
The general ledger also revealed account no. 530, Legal and Accounting Expense. The following transactions occurred during June:
| |
6/2
|
Collected $3,000 on account from customers
|
| |
6/7
|
Sold 25% of the equipment and supplies to a young artist for $700 cash
|
| |
6/10
|
Received a $300 invoice from the accountant for preparing last quarter’s financial Statements.
|
| |
6/15
|
Paid $1,900 to creditors on account.
|
|
| |
6/27
|
Adkins withdrew $2,000 cash for personal use.
|
| |
6/30
|
Billed a customer $3,000 for a portrait painted this month.
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
a. Record the necessary journal entries for June on page 2 of the company s general journal. (See Exhibit 2.6)
b. Open running balance ledger T accounts by entering account titles, account num bers, and May 31 balances. (See exhibit 2.3 and 2.4)
c. Post the journal entries to the T accounts.
b. Prepare a trial balance as of June 30. (See exhibit 2.9)
7. Journal entry preparation.On January 1 of the current year, Peter Houston invested $80,000 cash into his company MuniServ. The cash was obtained from an owner investment by Peter Houston of $50,000 and a $30,000 bank loan. Shortly thereafter, the company ac quired selected assets of a bankrupt competitor. The acquisition included land ($10,000), a building ($40,000), and vehicles ($10,000). MuniServ paid $45,000 at the time of the transaction and agreed to remit the remaining balance due of $15,000 (an account payable) by February 15.
During January, the company had additional cash outlays for the follow ing items:
|
Purchases of store equipment
|
$4,600
|
|
Note payment
|
500
|
|
Salaries expense
|
2,300
|
|
Advertising expense
|
700
|
| |
|
The January utility bill of $200 was received on January 31 and will be paid next month. MuniServ rendered services to clients on account amounting to $9,400. All customers have been billed; by month end, $3,700 had been received in settlement of account balances.
Instructions
a. Present journal entries that reflect MuniServ’s January transactions, including the $80,000 raised from the owner investment and loan. (See exhibit 2.6)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
DQ 1: As you have learned in this week s readings the Accounting Equation is Assets = Liabilities + Owners Equity. Is the accounting equation true in all instances? Provide sample transactions from your own experiences to demonstrate the validity of the Accounting Equation.
DQ2:what does the term account mean? What are the different classifications of accounts? How do the rules for debits and credits impact accounts? Please provide an example of how debits and credits impact accounts.
Balance Sheet Journal
The balance sheet is a financial snap shot of a company at a particular point in time. The balance sheet lists the assets, liabilities, and equity of the company. Reflect on your personal financial situation, can you apply the concepts of the balance sheet? What did you learn from this reflection?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week One Exercise Assignment
Basic Accounting Equations
1. Basic concepts.Jean’s Marine Supply specializes in the sale of boating equipment and acces sories. Identify the items that follow as an asset (A), liability (L), revenue (R), or expense (E) from the firm’s viewpoint.
a. The inventory of boating supplies owned by the company.
b. Monthly rental charges paid for store space.
c. A loan owed to Citizens Bank.
d. New computer equipment purchased to handle daily record keeping.
e. Daily sales made to customers.
f. Amounts due from customers.
g. Land owned by the company to be used as a future store site.
h. Weekly salaries paid to salespeople.
2. Basic computations. The following selected balances were extracted from the accounting records of Rossi Enterprises on December 31, 20X3:
Accounts Payable $3,200 Interest Expense $2,500
Accounts Receivable 14,800 Land 18,000
Auto Expense 1,900 Loan Payable 40,000
Building 30,000 Tax Expense 3,300
Cash 7,400 Utilities Expense 4,100
Fee Revenue 56,900 Wage Expense 37,500
a. Determine Rossi s total assets as of December 31.
b. Determine the company s total liabilities as of December 31.
c. Compute 20X3 net income or loss.
3. Balance sheet preparation. The following data relate to Preston Company as of December 31, 19XX:
Building $44,000 Accounts receivable $24,000
Cash 17,000 Loan payable 30,000
J. Preston, Owners Equity 65,000 Land 21,000
Accounts payable ?
Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 19XX. (See Exhibit 1.1 and 1.4)
4. Basic transaction processing. On November 1 of the current year, Richard Parker established a sole proprietorship. The following transactions occurred during the month:
1: Parker invested $19,000 into the business.
2: Paid $9,000 to acquire a used minivan.
3: Purchased $1,800 of office furniture on account.
4: Performed $2,100 of consulting services on account.
5: Paid $300 of repair expenses.
6: Received $800 from clients who were previously billed in item 4.
7: Paid $500 on account to the supplier of office furniture in item 3.
8: Received a $150 electric bill, to be paid next month.
9: Parker withdrew $600 from the business.
10: Received $250 in cash from clients for consulting services rendered.
Instructions
a. Arrange the following asset, liability, and owner s equity elements of the account ing equation: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Office Furniture, Van, Accounts Payable, Investments/Withdrawals, and Revenues/Expenses. (See Exhibit 5)
b. Record each transaction on a separate line. After all transactions have been recorded, compute the balance in each of the preceding items.
c. Answer the following questions for Parker.
(1) How much does the company owe to its creditors at month-end? On which financial statement(s) would this information be found?
(2) Did the company have a good month from an accounting viewpoint? Briefly explain.
5. Transaction analysis and statement preparation. The transactions that follow
relate to Burton Enterprises for March 20X1, the company s first month of activity.
3/1: Joanne Burton, the owner invested $20,000 into the business.
3/4: Performed $2,400 of services on account.
3/7: Acquired a small parcel of land by paying $6,000 cash.
3/12: Received $700 from a client, who was billed previously on March 4.
3/15: Paid $800 to the Journal Herald for advertising expense.
3/18: Acquired $9,000 of equipment from Park Central Outfitters by paying
$7,000 down and agreeing to remit the balance owed within the next
2 weeks, (Accounts Payable).
3/22: Received $300 cash from clients for services.
3/24: Paid $1,500 on account to Park Central Outfitters in partial settlement
of the balance due from the transaction on March 18.
3/28: Rented a car from United Car Rental for use on March 28. Total charges
amounted to $75, with United billing Burton for the amount due.
3/31: Paid $900 for March wages.
3/31: Processed a $600 cash withdrawal from the business for Joanne Burton.
Instructions
a. Determine the impact of each of the preceding transactions on Burton s assets,
liabilities, and owner s equity. See exhibit 1.5. Use the following format:
Assets = Liabilities + Owner s Equity
Cash, Accounts Receivable, Land, Equipment Accounts Payable (+)Investments (+) Revenues
(-) Withdrawals (-) Expenses
a. Record each transaction on a separate line. Calculate balances only after the last transaction has been recorded.
b. Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner s equity, and a balance sheet, (See Exhibit 1.1, 1.3 and 1.4)
6. Recognition of normal balances
The following items appeared in the accounting records of Triguero’s, a retail music store that also sponsors concerts. Classify each of the items as an asset, liability; revenue; or expense from the company’s viewpoint. Also indicate the normal account balance of each item.
a. The albums, tapes, and CDs held for sale to customers.
b. A long-term loan owed to Citizens Bank.
c. Promotional costs to publicize a concert.
d. Daily receipts for merchandise sold,
e. Amounts due from customers,
f. Land held as an investment,
g. A new fax machine purchased for office use.
h. Amounts to be paid in 10 days to suppliers,
i. Amounts paid to a mall for rent.
7.Basic journal entries
The following transactions pertain to the Jennifer Royall Company:
Apr. 1
Jenni fer Royall invested cash of $15,000 and land valued at $10,000 from into the business.
5
Provided $1,200 of services to Jason Ratchford, a client, on account.
9
Paid $250 of salaries to an employee.
14
Acquired a new computer for $3,200, on account.
20
Collected $800 from Jason Ratchford for services provided on April 5.
24
Borrowed $7,500 from BestBanc by securing a six-month loan.
Prepare journal entries (and explanations) to record the preceding transactions and events.
8. Trial balance preparation. Brighton, a sole proprietorship began operation on March 1 of the current year. The following account balances were extracted from the general led ger on March 31; all accounts have normal balances.
Accounts Payable
$ 12,000
Interest Expense
$ 300
Accounts Receivable
8,800
Land
?
Advertising Expense
5,700
Loan Payable
26,000
Bob Brighton, Owners Equity
30,000
Salaries Expense
11,100
Cash
22,500
Utilities Expense
700
Fees Earned 18,900
a. Determine the cost of the company s land by preparing a trial balance. (Remember, the trial balance debits must equal the credits, see Exhibit 2.9)
b. Determine the firm s net income for the period ending March 31.
9. Entry and trial balance preparation. Lee Adkins is a portrait artist. The following schedule represents Lee s combined chart of accounts and trial balance as of May 31.
Account number Account name Debit Credit
110
Cash
$ 2,700
120
Accounts Receivable
12,100
130
Equipment and Supplies
2,800
140
Studio
45,000
210
Accounts Payable
$2,600
310
Lee Adkins, Owners Equity
57,400
320
Lee Adkins, Drawing
30,000
410
Revenue
39,000
510
Advertising Expense
2,300
520
Salaries Expense
2,100
540
Utilities Expense
2,000
$99,000
$99,000
The general ledger also revealed account no. 530, Legal and Accounting Expense. The following transactions occurred during June:
6/2:
Collected $7,500 on account from customers.
6/7:
Sold 25% of the equipment and supplies to a young artist for $700 for cash
6/10:
Received a $500 bill from the accountant for preparing last quarter s financial statements.
6/15:
Paid $2,100 to creditors on account.
6/27:
Adkins withdrew $1,000 cash for personal use.
6/30:
Billed a customer $3,000 for a portrait painted this month.
a. Record the necessary journal entries for June on page 2 of the company s general journal. (See Exhibit 2.6)
b. Open running balance ledger T accounts by entering account titles, account num bers, and May 31 balances. (See exhibit 2.3 and 2.4)
c. Post the journal entries to the T accounts.
d. Prepare a trial balance as of June 30. (See exhibit 2.9)
10. Journal entry preparation.On January 1 of the current year, Peter Houston invested $100,000 cash into his company MuniServ. Shortly thereafter, the company ac quired selected assets of a bankrupt competitor. The acquisition included land ($15,000), a building ($40,000), and vehicles ($10,000). MuniServ paid $45,000 at the time of the transaction and agreed to remit the remaining balance due of $20,000 (an account payable) by February 15.
During January, the company had additional cash outlays for the follow ing items:
Purchases of store equipment
$4,600
Loan payment
500
Salaries expense
2,300
Advertising expense
700
The January utilities bill of $200 was received on January 31 and will be paid on February 10. MuniServ rendered services to clients on account amounting to $9,400 and $3,700 had been received in settlement.
Instructions
a. Present journal entries that reflect MuniServ’s January transactions, starting with the $100,000 investment. (See exhibit 2.6)
b. Compute the total debits, total credits, and ending balance that would befound in the company’s Cash account. (Post to T Accounts, see exhibit 2.3 and 2.4)
c. Prepare a trail balance as of January 31. (See exhibit 2.9)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PLEASE HAVE A CAREFUL LOOK AT THE FIGURES AND CHANGE IT ACCORDING TO YOUR QUESTION SET. THE TEMPLATE IS 100% ACCURATE.
Week One Exercise Assignment
Basic Accounting Equations
1. Basic concepts.Jean’s Marine Supply specializes in the sale of boating equipment and acces sories. Identify the items that follow as an asset (A), liability (L), revenue (R), or expense (E) from the firm’s viewpoint.
a. The inventory of boating supplies owned by the company.
b. Monthly rental charges paid for store space.
c. A loan owed to Citizens Bank.
d. New computer equipment purchased to handle daily record keeping.
e. Daily sales made to customers.
f. Amounts due from customers.
g. Land owned by the company to be used as a future store site.
h. Weekly salaries paid to salespeople.
2. Basic computations. The following selected balances were extracted from the accounting records of Rossi Enterprises on December 31, 20X3:
Accounts Payable $3,200 Interest Expense $2,500
Accounts Receivable 14,800 Land 18,000
Auto Expense 1,900 Loan Payable 40,000
Building 30,000 Tax Expense 3,300
Cash 7,400 Utilities Expense 4,100
Fee Revenue 56,900 Wage Expense 37,500
a. Determine Rossi s total assets as of December 31.
b. Determine the company s total liabilities as of December 31.
c. Compute 20X3 net income or loss.
3. Balance sheet preparation. The following data relate to Preston Company as of December 31, 19XX:
Building $44,000 Accounts receivable $24,000
Cash 17,000 Loan payable 30,000
J. Preston, Owners Equity 65,000 Land 21,000
Accounts payable ?
Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 19XX. (See Exhibit 1.1 and 1.4)
4. Basic transaction processing. On November 1 of the current year, Richard Parker established a sole proprietorship. The following transactions occurred during the month:
1: Parker invested $19,000 into the business.
2: Paid $9,000 to acquire a used minivan.
3: Purchased $1,800 of office furniture on account.
4: Performed $2,100 of consulting services on account.
5: Paid $300 of repair expenses.
6: Received $800 from clients who were previously billed in item 4.
7: Paid $500 on account to the supplier of office furniture in item 3.
8: Received a $150 electric bill, to be paid next month.
9: Parker withdrew $600 from the business.
10: Received $250 in cash from clients for consulting services rendered.
Instructions
a. Arrange the following asset, liability, and owner s equity elements of the account ing equation: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Office Furniture, Van, Accounts Payable, Investments/Withdrawals, and Revenues/Expenses. (See Exhibit 5)
b. Record each transaction on a separate line. After all transactions have been recorded, compute the balance in each of the preceding items.
c. Answer the following questions for Parker.
(1) How much does the company owe to its creditors at month-end? On which financial statement(s) would this information be found?
(2) Did the company have a good month from an accounting viewpoint? Briefly explain.
5. Transaction analysis and statement preparation. The transactions that follow
relate to Burton Enterprises for March 20X1, the company s first month of activity.
3/1: Joanne Burton, the owner invested $20,000 into the business.
3/4: Performed $2,400 of services on account.
3/7: Acquired a small parcel of land by paying $6,000 cash.
3/12: Received $700 from a client, who was billed previously on March 4.
3/15: Paid $800 to the Journal Herald for advertising expense.
3/18: Acquired $9,000 of equipment from Park Central Outfitters by paying
$7,000 down and agreeing to remit the balance owed within the next
2 weeks, (Accounts Payable).
3/22: Received $300 cash from clients for services.
3/24: Paid $1,500 on account to Park Central Outfitters in partial settlement
of the balance due from the transaction on March 18.
3/28: Rented a car from United Car Rental for use on March 28. Total charges
amounted to $75, with United billing Burton for the amount due.
3/31: Paid $900 for March wages.
3/31: Processed a $600 cash withdrawal from the business for Joanne Burton.
Instructions
a. Determine the impact of each of the preceding transactions on Burton s assets,
liabilities, and owner s equity. See exhibit 1.5. Use the following format:
Assets = Liabilities + Owner s Equity
Cash, Accounts Receivable, Land, Equipment Accounts Payable (+)Investments (+) Revenues
(-) Withdrawals (-) Expenses
a. Record each transaction on a separate line. Calculate balances only after the last transaction has been recorded.
b. Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner s equity, and a balance sheet, (See Exhibit 1.1, 1.3 and 1.4)
6. Recognition of normal balances
The following items appeared in the accounting records of Triguero’s, a retail music store that also sponsors concerts. Classify each of the items as an asset, liability; revenue; or expense from the company’s viewpoint. Also indicate the normal account balance of each item.
a. The albums, tapes, and CDs held for sale to customers.
b. A long-term loan owed to Citizens Bank.
c. Promotional costs to publicize a concert.
d. Daily receipts for merchandise sold,
e. Amounts due from customers,
f. Land held as an investment,
g. A new fax machine purchased for office use.
h. Amounts to be paid in 10 days to suppliers,
i. Amounts paid to a mall for rent.
7.Basic journal entries
The following transactions pertain to the Jennifer Royall Company:
|
Apr. 1
|
Jenni fer Royall invested cash of $15,000 and land valued at $10,000 from into the business.
|
|
5
|
Provided $1,200 of services to Jason Ratchford, a client, on account.
|
|
9
|
Paid $250 of salaries to an employee.
|
|
14
|
Acquired a new computer for $3,200, on account.
|
|
20
|
Collected $800 from Jason Ratchford for services provided on April 5.
|
|
24
|
Borrowed $7,500 from BestBanc by securing a six-month loan.
|
Prepare journal entries (and explanations) to record the preceding transactions and events.
8.Trial balance preparation. Brighton, a sole proprietorship began operation on March 1 of the current year. The following account balances were extracted from the general led ger on March 31; all accounts have normal balances.
|
Accounts Payable
|
$ 12,000
|
Interest Expense
|
$ 300
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
8,800
|
Land
|
?
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
5,700
|
Loan Payable
|
26,000
|
|
Bob Brighton, Owners Equity
|
30,000
|
Salaries Expense
|
11,100
|
|
Cash
|
22,500
|
Utilities Expense
|
700
|
|
Fees Earned 18,900
|
|
a. Determine the cost of the company s land by preparing a trial balance. (Remember, the trial balance debits must equal the credits, see Exhibit 2.9)
b. Determine the firm s net income for the period ending March 31.
9.Entry and trial balance preparation. Lee Adkins is a portrait artist. The following schedule represents Lee s combined chart of accounts and trial balance as of May 31.
Account number Account name Debit Credit
|
110
|
Cash
|
$ 2,700
|
|
|
120
|
Accounts Receivable
|
12,100
|
|
|
130
|
Equipment and Supplies
|
2,800
|
|
|
140
|
Studio
|
45,000
|
|
|
210
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$2,600
|
|
310
|
Lee Adkins, Owners Equity
|
|
57,400
|
|
320
|
Lee Adkins, Drawing
|
30,000
|
|
|
410
|
Revenue
|
|
39,000
|
|
510
|
Advertising Expense
|
2,300
|
|
|
520
|
Salaries Expense
|
2,100
|
|
|
540
|
Utilities Expense
|
2,000
|
|
|
|
$99,000
|
$99,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
The general ledger also revealed account no. 530, Legal and Accounting Expense. The following transactions occurred during June:
|
6/2:
|
Collected $7,500 on account from customers.
|
|
6/7:
|
Sold 25% of the equipment and supplies to a young artist for $700 for cash
|
|
6/10:
|
Received a $500 bill from the accountant for preparing last quarter s financial statements.
|
|
6/15:
|
Paid $2,100 to creditors on account.
|
|
6/27:
|
Adkins withdrew $1,000 cash for personal use.
|
|
6/30:
|
Billed a customer $3,000 for a portrait painted this month.
|
a. Record the necessary journal entries for June on page 2 of the company s general journal. (See Exhibit 2.6)
b. Open running balance ledger T accounts by entering account titles, account num bers, and May 31 balances. (See exhibit 2.3 and 2.4)
c. Post the journal entries to the T accounts.
d. Prepare a trial balance as of June 30. (See exhibit 2.9)
10. Journal entry preparation.On January 1 of the current year, Peter Houston invested $100,000 cash into his company MuniServ. Shortly thereafter, the company ac quired selected assets of a bankrupt competitor. The acquisition included land ($15,000), a building ($40,000), and vehicles ($10,000). MuniServ paid $45,000 at the time of the transaction and agreed to remit the remaining balance due of $20,000 (an account payable) by February 15.
During January, the company had additional cash outlays for the follow ing items:
|
Purchases of store equipment
|
$4,600
|
|
Loan payment
|
500
|
|
Salaries expense
|
2,300
|
|
Advertising expense
|
700
|
|
|
|
The January utilities bill of $200 was received on January 31 and will be paid on February 10. MuniServ rendered services to clients on account amounting to $9,400 and $3,700 had been received in settlement.
Instructions
a. Present journal entries that reflect MuniServ’s January transactions, starting with the $100,000 investment. (See exhibit 2.6)
b. Compute the total debits, total credits, and ending balance that would be found in the company’s Cash account. (Post to T Accounts, see exhibit 2.3 and 2.4)
c. Prepare a trail balance as of January 31. (See exhibit 2.9)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PLEASE HAVE A CAREFUL LOOK AT THE FIGURES AND CHANGE IT ACCORDING TO YOUR QUESTION SET. THE TEMPLATE IS 100% ACCURATE.
Week One Exercise Assignment
Basic Accounting Equations
1. Basic concepts.Jean’s Marine Supply specializes in the sale of boating equipment and acces sories. Identify the items that follow as an asset (A), liability (L), revenue (R), or expense (E) from the firm’s viewpoint.
a. The inventory of boating supplies owned by the company.
b. Monthly rental charges paid for store space.
c. A loan owed to Citizens Bank.
d. New computer equipment purchased to handle daily record keeping.
e. Daily sales made to customers.
f. Amounts due from customers.
g. Land owned by the company to be used as a future store site.
h. Weekly salaries paid to salespeople.
2. Basic computations. The following selected balances were extracted from the accounting records of Rossi Enterprises on December 31, 20X3:
Accounts Payable $3,200 Interest Expense $2,500
Accounts Receivable 14,800 Land 18,000
Auto Expense 1,900 Loan Payable 40,000
Building 30,000 Tax Expense 3,300
Cash 7,400 Utilities Expense 4,100
Fee Revenue 56,900 Wage Expense 37,500
a. Determine Rossi s total assets as of December 31.
b. Determine the company s total liabilities as of December 31.
c. Compute 20X3 net income or loss.
3. Balance sheet preparation. The following data relate to Preston Company as of December 31, 19XX:
Building $44,000 Accounts receivable $24,000
Cash 17,000 Loan payable 30,000
J. Preston, Owners Equity 65,000 Land 21,000
Accounts payable ?
Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 19XX. (See Exhibit 1.1 and 1.4)
4. Basic transaction processing. On November 1 of the current year, Richard Parker established a sole proprietorship. The following transactions occurred during the month:
1: Parker invested $19,000 into the business.
2: Paid $9,000 to acquire a used minivan.
3: Purchased $1,800 of office furniture on account.
4: Performed $2,100 of consulting services on account.
5: Paid $300 of repair expenses.
6: Received $800 from clients who were previously billed in item 4.
7: Paid $500 on account to the supplier of office furniture in item 3.
8: Received a $150 electric bill, to be paid next month.
9: Parker withdrew $600 from the business.
10: Received $250 in cash from clients for consulting services rendered.
Instructions
a. Arrange the following asset, liability, and owner s equity elements of the account ing equation: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Office Furniture, Van, Accounts Payable, Investments/Withdrawals, and Revenues/Expenses. (See Exhibit 5)
b. Record each transaction on a separate line. After all transactions have been recorded, compute the balance in each of the preceding items.
c. Answer the following questions for Parker.
(1) How much does the company owe to its creditors at month-end? On which financial statement(s) would this information be found?
(2) Did the company have a good month from an accounting viewpoint? Briefly explain.
5. Transaction analysis and statement preparation. The transactions that follow
relate to Burton Enterprises for March 20X1, the company s first month of activity.
3/1: Joanne Burton, the owner invested $20,000 into the business.
3/4: Performed $2,400 of services on account.
3/7: Acquired a small parcel of land by paying $6,000 cash.
3/12: Received $700 from a client, who was billed previously on March 4.
3/15: Paid $800 to the Journal Herald for advertising expense.
3/18: Acquired $9,000 of equipment from Park Central Outfitters by paying
$7,000 down and agreeing to remit the balance owed within the next
2 weeks, (Accounts Payable).
3/22: Received $300 cash from clients for services.
3/24: Paid $1,500 on account to Park Central Outfitters in partial settlement
of the balance due from the transaction on March 18.
3/28: Rented a car from United Car Rental for use on March 28. Total charges
amounted to $75, with United billing Burton for the amount due.
3/31: Paid $900 for March wages.
3/31: Processed a $600 cash withdrawal from the business for Joanne Burton.
Instructions
a. Determine the impact of each of the preceding transactions on Burton s assets,
liabilities, and owner s equity. See exhibit 1.5. Use the following format:
Assets = Liabilities + Owner s Equity
Cash, Accounts Receivable, Land, Equipment Accounts Payable (+)Investments (+) Revenues
(-) Withdrawals (-) Expenses
a. Record each transaction on a separate line. Calculate balances only after the last transaction has been recorded.
b. Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner s equity, and a balance sheet, (See Exhibit 1.1, 1.3 and 1.4)
6. Recognition of normal balances
The following items appeared in the accounting records of Triguero’s, a retail music store that also sponsors concerts. Classify each of the items as an asset, liability; revenue; or expense from the company’s viewpoint. Also indicate the normal account balance of each item.
a. The albums, tapes, and CDs held for sale to customers.
b. A long-term loan owed to Citizens Bank.
c. Promotional costs to publicize a concert.
d. Daily receipts for merchandise sold,
e. Amounts due from customers,
f. Land held as an investment,
g. A new fax machine purchased for office use.
h. Amounts to be paid in 10 days to suppliers,
i. Amounts paid to a mall for rent.
7.Basic journal entries
The following transactions pertain to the Jennifer Royall Company:
|
Apr. 1
|
Jenni fer Royall invested cash of $15,000 and land valued at $10,000 from into the business.
|
|
5
|
Provided $1,200 of services to Jason Ratchford, a client, on account.
|
|
9
|
Paid $250 of salaries to an employee.
|
|
14
|
Acquired a new computer for $3,200, on account.
|
|
20
|
Collected $800 from Jason Ratchford for services provided on April 5.
|
|
24
|
Borrowed $7,500 from BestBanc by securing a six-month loan.
|
Prepare journal entries (and explanations) to record the preceding transactions and events.
8.Trial balance preparation. Brighton, a sole proprietorship began operation on March 1 of the current year. The following account balances were extracted from the general led ger on March 31; all accounts have normal balances.
|
Accounts Payable
|
$ 12,000
|
Interest Expense
|
$ 300
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
8,800
|
Land
|
?
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
5,700
|
Loan Payable
|
26,000
|
|
Bob Brighton, Owners Equity
|
30,000
|
Salaries Expense
|
11,100
|
|
Cash
|
22,500
|
Utilities Expense
|
700
|
|
Fees Earned 18,900
|
|
a. Determine the cost of the company s land by preparing a trial balance. (Remember, the trial balance debits must equal the credits, see Exhibit 2.9)
b. Determine the firm s net income for the period ending March 31.
9.Entry and trial balance preparation. Lee Adkins is a portrait artist. The following schedule represents Lee s combined chart of accounts and trial balance as of May 31.
Account number Account name Debit Credit
|
110
|
Cash
|
$ 2,700
|
|
|
120
|
Accounts Receivable
|
12,100
|
|
|
130
|
Equipment and Supplies
|
2,800
|
|
|
140
|
Studio
|
45,000
|
|
|
210
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$2,600
|
|
310
|
Lee Adkins, Owners Equity
|
|
57,400
|
|
320
|
Lee Adkins, Drawing
|
30,000
|
|
|
410
|
Revenue
|
|
39,000
|
|
510
|
Advertising Expense
|
2,300
|
|
|
520
|
Salaries Expense
|
2,100
|
|
|
540
|
Utilities Expense
|
2,000
|
|
|
|
$99,000
|
$99,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
The general ledger also revealed account no. 530, Legal and Accounting Expense. The following transactions occurred during June:
|
6/2:
|
Collected $7,500 on account from customers.
|
|
6/7:
|
Sold 25% of the equipment and supplies to a young artist for $700 for cash
|
|
6/10:
|
Received a $500 bill from the accountant for preparing last quarter s financial statements.
|
|
6/15:
|
Paid $2,100 to creditors on account.
|
|
6/27:
|
Adkins withdrew $1,000 cash for personal use.
|
|
6/30:
|
Billed a customer $3,000 for a portrait painted this month.
|
a. Record the necessary journal entries for June on page 2 of the company s general journal. (See Exhibit 2.6)
b. Open running balance ledger T accounts by entering account titles, account num bers, and May 31 balances. (See exhibit 2.3 and 2.4)
c. Post the journal entries to the T accounts.
d. Prepare a trial balance as of June 30. (See exhibit 2.9)
10. Journal entry preparation.On January 1 of the current year, Peter Houston invested $100,000 cash into his company MuniServ. Shortly thereafter, the company ac quired selected assets of a bankrupt competitor. The acquisition included land ($15,000), a building ($40,000), and vehicles ($10,000). MuniServ paid $45,000 at the time of the transaction and agreed to remit the remaining balance due of $20,000 (an account payable) by February 15.
During January, the company had additional cash outlays for the follow ing items:
|
Purchases of store equipment
|
$4,600
|
|
Loan payment
|
500
|
|
Salaries expense
|
2,300
|
|
Advertising expense
|
700
|
|
|
|
The January utilities bill of $200 was received on January 31 and will be paid on February 10. MuniServ rendered services to clients on account amounting to $9,400 and $3,700 had been received in settlement.
Instructions
a. Present journal entries that reflect MuniServ’s January transactions, starting with the $100,000 investment. (See exhibit 2.6)
b. Compute the total debits, total credits, and ending balance that would be found in the company’s Cash account. (Post to T Accounts, see exhibit 2.3 and 2.4)
c. Prepare a trail balance as of January 31. (See exhibit 2.9)
DQ 1: As you have learned in this week s readings the Accounting Equation is Assets = Liabilities + Owners Equity. Is the accounting equation true in all instances? Provide sample transactions from your own experiences to demonstrate the validity of the Accounting Equation.
DQ2:what does the term account mean? What are the different classifications of accounts? How do the rules for debits and credits impact accounts? Please provide an example of how debits and credits impact accounts.
Balance Sheet Journal
The balance sheet is a financial snap shot of a company at a particular point in time. The balance sheet lists the assets, liabilities, and equity of the company. Reflect on your personal financial situation, can you apply the concepts of the balance sheet? What did you learn from this reflection?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week One Exercise Assignment
Basic Accounting Equations
1. Recognition of normal balances The following items appeared in the accounting records of Triguero s, a retail music store that also sponsors concerts. Classify each of the items as an asset, liability, revenue, or expense from the company s viewpoint. Also indicate the normal account balance of each item. a. The albums, tapes, and CDs held for sale to customers. b. A long-term loan owed to Citizens Bank. c. Promotional costs to publicize a concert. d. Daily sales of merchandise sold, e. Amounts due from customers, f. Land held as an investment, g. A new fax machine purchased for office use. h. Amounts to be paid in 10 days to suppliers, i. Amounts paid to a mall for rent.
2. Basic journal entries The following April transactions pertain to the Jennifer Royall Company: Apr. 1 Jenni fer Royall invested cash of $15,000 and land valued at $10,000 into the business. Apr. 5 provided $1,200 of services to Jason Ratchford, a client, on account. Apr. 9 paid $250 of salaries to an employee. Apr. 14 acquired a new computer for $3,200, on account. Apr. 20 collected $800 from Jason Ratchford for services provided on April 5. Apr. 24 borrowed $7,500 from BestBanc by securing a six-month loan. Prepare journal entries (and explanations) to record the preceding transactions and events.
3. Balance sheet preparation. The following data relate to Preston Company as of December 31, 20XX: Building $44,000 Accounts receivable $24,000 Cash 17,000 Loan payable 30,000 J. Preston, Capital 65,000 Land 21,000 Accounts payable ? Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 20XX. (See Exhibit 1.1 and 1.4)
4. Basic transaction processing. On November 1 of the current year, Richard Parker established a sole proprietorship. The following transactions occurred during the month: 1: Parker invested $19,000 into the business for $19,000 in common stock. 2: Paid $9,000 to acquire a used minivan. 3: Purchased $1,800 of office furniture on account. 4: Performed $2,100 of consulting services on account. 5: Paid $300 of repair expenses. 6: Received $800 from clients who were previously billed in item 4. 7: Paid $500 on account to the supplier of office furniture in item 3. 8: Received a $150 electric bill, to be paid next month. 9: Parker withdrew $600 from the business. 10: Received $250 in cash from clients for consulting services rendered. Instructions a. Arrange the following asset, liability, and owner s equity elements of the accounting equation: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Office Furniture, Van, Accounts Payable, Common Stock/Dividends, and Revenues/Expenses. (See Exhibit 1.5) b. Record each transaction on a separate line. After all transactions have been recorded, compute the balance in each of the preceding items. c. Answer the following questions for Parker. (1) How much does the company owe to its creditors at month-end? On which financial statement(s) would this information be found? (2) Did the company have a good month from an accounting viewpoint? Briefly explain.
5. Transaction analysis and statement preparation. The transactions that follow relate to Burton Enterprises for March 20X1, the company s first month of activity. 3/1: Joanne Burton, the owner invested $20,000 into the business for $20,000 of Common Stock. 3/4: Performed $2,400 of services on account. 3/7: Acquired a small parcel of land by paying $6,000 cash. 3/12: Received $700 from a client, who was billed previously on March 4. 3/15: Paid $800 to the Journal Herald for advertising expense. 3/18: Acquired $9,000 of equipment from Park Central Outfitters by paying $7,000 down and agreeing to remit the balance owed within the next 2 weeks, (Accounts Payable). 3/22: Received $300 cash from clients for services. 3/24: Paid $1,500 on account to Park Central Outfitters in partial settlement of the balance due from the transaction on March 18. 3/28: Rented a car from United Car Rental for use on March 28. Total charges amounted to $75, with United billing Burton for the amount due. 3/31: Paid $900 for March wages. 3/31: Processed a $600 cash withdrawal (dividend) from the business for Joanne Burton. Instructions a. Determine the impact of each of the preceding transactions on Burton s assets, liabilities, and owner s equity. See exhibit 1.5. Use the following format: Assets = Liabilities + Owner s Equity Cash, Accounts Receivable, Land, Equipment Accounts Payable (+)Common Stock (+) Revenues (-) Dividends (-) Expenses a. Record each transaction on a separate line. Calculate balances only after the last transaction has been recorded. b. Prepare an income statement, a statement of retained earnings, and a balance sheet (See Exhibit 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4).
6. Entry and trial balance preparation. Lee Adkins is a portrait artist. The following schedule represents Lee s combined chart of accounts and trial balance as of May 31. Account number Account name Debit Credit 110 Cash $ 2,700 120 Accounts Receivable 12,100 130 Equipment and Supplies 2,800 140 Studio 45,000 210 Accounts Payable $2,600 310 Lee Adkins, Capital 57,400 320 Lee Adkins, Drawing 30,000 410 Professional Fee Revenue 39,000 510 Advertising Expense 2,300 520 Salaries Expense 2,100 540 Utilities Expense 2,000 $99,000 $99,000 The general ledger also revealed account no. 530, Legal and Accounting Expense. The following transactions occurred during June: 6/2: Collected $7,500 on account from customers. 6/7: Sold 25% of the equipment and supplies to a young artist for $700 for cash. 6/10: Received a $500 invoice from the accountant for preparing last quarter s financial statements. 6/15: Paid $2,100 to creditors on account. 6/27: Adkins withdrew $1,000 cash for personal use. 6/30: Billed a customer $3,000 for a portrait painted this month. a. Record the necessary journal entries for June on page 2 of the company s general journal (See Exhibit 2.6). b. Open running balance ledger T accounts by entering account titles, account numbers, and May 31 balances (See exhibit 2.3 and 2.4). c. Post the journal entries to the T accounts. d. Prepare a trial balance as of June 30 (See exhibit 2.9).
7. Journal entry preparation. On January 1 of the current year, Peter Houston invested $100,000 cash into his company MuniServ. The cash was obtained from an owner investment by Peter Houston of $70,000 and a $30,000 notes payable. Shortly thereafter, the company acquired selected assets of a bankrupt competitor. The acquisition included land ($15,000), a building ($40,000), and vehicles ($10,000). MuniServ paid $45,000 at the time of the transaction and agreed to remit the remaining balance due of $20,000 (an account payable) by February 15. During January, the company had additional cash outlays for the following items: Purchases of store equipment $4,600 Note payment 500 Salaries expense 2,300 Advertising expense 700 The January utility bill of $200 was received on January 31 and will be paid next month. MuniServ rendered services to clients on account amounting to $9,400. All customers have been billed; by month end, $3,700 had been received in settlement of account balances. Instructions a. Present journal entries that reflect MuniServ s January transactions, including the $100,000 raised from the owner investment and loan (See exhibit 2.6). b. Compute the total debits, total credits, and ending balance that would be found in the company s Cash account (Post to T Accounts, see exhibit 2.3 and 2.4). c. Prepare a trail balance as of January 31 (See exhibit 2.9).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week One Exercise Assignment
Basic Accounting Equations
1. Recognition of normal balances
The following items appeared in the accounting records of Triguero’s, a retail music store that also sponsors concerts. Classify each of the items as an asset, liability; revenue; or expense from the company’s viewpoint. Also indicate the normal account balance of each item.
a. Amounts paid to a mall for rent.
b. Amounts to be paid in 10 days to suppliers.
c. A new fax machine purchased for office use.
d. Land held as an investment.
e. Amounts due from customers.
f. Daily sales of merchandise sold.
g. Promotional costs to publicize a concert.
h. A long-term loan owed to Citizens Bank.
i. The albums, tapes, and CDs held for sale to customers.
2.Basic journal entries
The following transactions pertain to the Jennifer Royall Company:
|
May 1
|
Jenni fer Royall invested cash of $25,000 and land valued at $15,000 into the business.
|
|
5
|
Provided $1,000 of services to Jason Ratchford, a client, on account.
|
|
9
|
Paid $1,250 of salaries to an employee.
|
|
14
|
Acquired a new computer for $4,200, on account.
|
|
20
|
Collected $800 from Jason Ratchford for services provided on May 5.
|
|
24
|
Borrowed $2,500 from BestBanc by securing a six-month loan.
|
Prepare journal entries (and explanations) to record the preceding transactions and events.
3. Balance sheet preparation. The following data relate to Preston Company as of December 31, 20XX:
Building $40,000 Accounts receivable $24,000
Cash 21,000 Loan payable 30,000
J. Preston, Capital 65,000 Land 21,000
Accounts payable ?
Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 20XX. (See Exhibit 1.1 and 1.4)
4. Basic transaction processing. On November 1 of the current year, Richard Simmons established a sole proprietorship. The following transactions occurred during the month:
1: Simmons invested $32,000 into the business for $32,000 in common stock.
2: Paid $5,000 to acquire a used minivan.
3: Purchased $1,800 of office furniture on account.
4: Performed $2,100 of consulting services on account.
5: Paid $300 of repair expenses.
6: Received $800 from clients who were previously billed in item 4.
7: Paid $500 on account to the supplier of office furniture in item 3.
8: Received a $150 electric bill, to be paid next month.
9: Simmons withdrew $800 from the business.
10: Received $250 in cash from clients for consulting services rendered.
Instructions
a. Arrange the following asset, liability, and owner s equity elements of the account ing equation: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Office Furniture, Van, Accounts Payable, Common Stock/Dividends, and Revenues/Expenses. (See Exhibit 1.5)
b. Record each transaction on a separate line. After all transactions have been recorded, compute the balance in each of the preceding items.
c. Answer the following questions for Simmons.
(1) How much does the company owe to its creditors at month-end? On which financial statement(s) would this information be found?
(2) Did the company have a good month from an accounting viewpoint? Briefly explain.
5. Transaction analysis and statement preparation. The transactions that follow
relate to Burton Enterprises for March 20X1, the company s first month of activity.
|
3/1
|
Joanne Burton, the owner, invested $20,000 cash into the business.
|
|
3/4
|
Performed $2,400 of services on account.
|
|
3/7
|
Acquired a small parcel of land by paying $6,000 cash
|
|
3/12
|
Received $500 from a client who was billed previously on March 4.
|
|
3/15
|
Paid $200 to the Journal Herald for advertising expense.
|
|
3/18
|
Acquired 9,000 of equipment from Park Central Outfitters by Paying
|
|
|
$7,000 down and agreeing to remit the balance owed within two weeks (A/P).
|
|
3/22
|
Received $300 cash from clients for services.
|
|
3/24
|
Paid $1,500 on account to Park Central Outfitters in partial settlement of
|
|
|
the balance due from the transaction on March 18.
|
|
3/28
|
Rented a car from United Car Rental for use on March 28. Total charges
|
|
|
amounted to $125, with United billing Burton for the amount due.
|
|
3/31
|
Paid $600 for March wages
|
|
3/31
|
Processed a $600 cash withdrawal (dividend) from the business for Joanne Burton
|
Instructions
a. Determine the impact of each of the preceding transactions on Burton s assets,
liabilities, and owner s equity. See exhibit 1.5. Use the following format:
Assets = Liabilities + Owner s Equity
Cash, Accounts Receivable, Land, Equipment Accounts Payable (+)Common Stock (+) Revenues
(-) Dividends (-) Expenses
a. Record each transaction on a separate line. Calculate balances only after the last transaction has been recorded.
b. Prepare an income statement, a statement of retained earnings, and a balance sheet, (See Exhibit 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4)
6. Entry and trial balance preparation. Lee Adkins is a portrait artist. The following schedule represents Lee s combined chart of accounts and trial balance as of May 31.
Account number Account name Debit Credit
|
110
|
Cash
|
$ 2,700
|
|
|
120
|
Accounts Receivable
|
12,100
|
|
|
130
|
Equipment and Supplies
|
2,800
|
|
|
140
|
Studio
|
45,000
|
|
|
210
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$2,600
|
|
310
|
Lee Adkins, Capital
|
|
57,400
|
|
320
|
Lee Adkins, Drawing
|
30,000
|
|
|
410
|
Professional Fee Revenue
|
|
39,000
|
|
510
|
Advertising Expense
|
2,300
|
|
|
520
|
Salaries Expense
|
2,100
|
|
|
540
|
Utilities Expense
|
2,000
|
|
|
|
$99,000
|
$99,000
|
| |
|
|
|
|
The general ledger also revealed account no. 530, Legal and Accounting Expense. The following transactions occurred during June:
|
6/2
|
Collected $3,000 on account from customers
|
|
6/7
|
Sold 25% of the equipment and supplies to a young artist for $700 cash
|
|
6/10
|
Received a $300 invoice from the accountant for preparing last quarter’s financial Statements.
|
|
6/15
|
Paid $1,900 to creditors on account.
|
|
|
6/27
|
Adkins withdrew $2,000 cash for personal use.
|
|
6/30
|
Billed a customer $3,000 for a portrait painted this month.
|
|
|
|
a. Record the necessary journal entries for June on page 2 of the company s general journal. (See Exhibit 2.6)
b. Open running balance ledger T accounts by entering account titles, account num bers, and May 31 balances. (See exhibit 2.3 and 2.4)
c. Post the journal entries to the T accounts.
d. Prepare a trial balance as of June 30. (See exhibit 2.9)
7. Journal entry preparation. On January 1 of the current year, Peter Houston invested $80,000 cash into his company MuniServ. The cash was obtained from an owner investment by Peter Houston of $50,000 and a $30,000 bank loan. Shortly thereafter, the company ac quired selected assets of a bankrupt competitor. The acquisition included land ($10,000), a building ($40,000), and vehicles ($10,000). MuniServ paid $45,000 at the time of the transaction and agreed to remit the remaining balance due of $15,000 (an account payable) by February 15.
During January, the company had additional cash outlays for the follow ing items:
|
Purchases of store equipment
|
$4,600
|
|
Note payment
|
500
|
|
Salaries expense
|
2,300
|
|
Advertising expense
|
700
|
|
|
|
The January utility bill of $200 was received on January 31 and will be paid next month. MuniServ rendered services to clients on account amounting to $9,400. All customers have been billed; by month end, $3,700 had been received in settlement of account balances.
Instructions
- Present journal entries that reflect MuniServ’s January transactions, including the $80,000 raised from the owner investment and loan. (See exhibit 2.6)
- Compute the total debits, total credits, and ending balance that would be found in the company’s Cash account. (Post to T Accounts, see exhibit 2.3 and 2.4)
c. Determine the amount that would be shown on the January 31 trial balance for Accounts
Payable. Is the balance a debit or a credit?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Recognition of concepts. Jim Armstrong operates a small company that books enter tainers for theaters, parties, conventions, and so forth. The company s fiscal year ends on June 30. Consider the following items and classify each as either (1) pre paid expense, (2) unearned revenue, (3) accrued expense, (4) accrued revenue, or (5) none of the foregoing.
a Interest owed on the company’s bank loan, to be paid in early July
b Professional fees earned but not billed as of June 30
c Office supplies on hand at year-end
d An advance payment from a client for a performance next month at a convention
e The payment in part (d) from the client’s point of view
f Amounts paid on June 30 for a 1-year insurance policy
g The bank loan payable in part (a)
h Repairs to the firm’s copy machine, incurred and paid in June
2. Understanding the closing process. Examine the following list of accounts:
|
Note Payable
|
Accumulated Depreciation: Building
|
|
Alex Kenzy, Drawing
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
Product Revenue
|
Cash
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
Utility Expense
|
Which of the preceding accounts
a. appear on a post-closing trial balance?
b. are commonly known as temporary, or nominal, accounts?
c. generate a debit to Income Summary in the closing process?
d. are closed to the capital account in the closing process?
3. Adjusting entries and financial statements. The following information pertains to Sally Corporation:
The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one half of this amount had been earned.
Sally Corporation provided $1,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31.
Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,000.
The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period.
The company paid $18,000 on October 1 of the current year to Vantage Property Management. The payment was for 6 months rent of Sally Corporation s headquarters, beginning on November 1.
Sally Corporation s accounting year ends on December 31.
Instructions
Analyze the five preceding cases individually and determine the following:
a. The type of adjusting entry needed at year-end (Use the following codes: A, adjust ment of a prepaid expense; B, adjustment of an unearned revenue; C, adjustment to record an accrued expense; or D, adjustment to record an accrued revenue.)
b. The year-end journal entry to adjust the accounts
c. The income statement impact of each adjustment (e.g., increases total revenues by $500)
The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one half of this amount had been earned.
1.) Sally Corporation provided $1,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31.
Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,000.
2.) The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period.
3.) The company paid $18,000 on October 1 of the current year to Vantage Property Management. The payment was for 6 months rent of Sally Corporation s headquarters, beginning on November 1.
Sally Corporation s accounting year ends on December 31.
4. Adjusting entries. You have been retained to examine the records of Mary s Day Care Center as of December 31, 20X3, the close of the current reporting period. In the course of your examination, you discover the following:
On January 1, 20X3, the Supplies account had a balance of $1,350. During the year, $5,520 worth of supplies was purchased, and a balance of $1,620 remained unused on December 31.
Unrecorded interest owed to the center totaled $275 as of December 31.
All clients pay tuition in advance, and their payments are credited to the Unearned Tuition Revenue account. The account was credited for $65,500 on August 31. With the exception of $15,500 all amounts were for the current semester ending on December 31.
Depreciation on the school s van was $3,000 for the year.
On August 1, the center began to pay rent in 6-month installments of $24,000. Mary wrote a check to the owner of the building and recorded the check in Pre paid Rent, a new account.
Two salaried employees earn $400 each for a 5-day week. The employees are paid every Friday, and December 31 falls on a Thursday.
Mary s Day Care paid insurance premiums as follows, each time debiting Pre paid Insurance:
|
Date Paid
|
Policy No.
|
Length of Policy
|
Amount
|
|
Feb. 1, 20X2
|
1033MCM19
|
1 year
|
$540
|
|
Jan. 1, 20X3
|
7952789HP
|
1 year
|
912
|
|
Aug. 1, 20X3
|
XQ943675ST
|
2 years
|
840
|
Instructions
The center s accounts were last adjusted on December 31, 20X2. Prepare the adjusting entries necessary under the accrual basis of accounting.
A. On January 1, 20X3, the Supplies account had a balance of $1,350. During the year, $5,520 worth of supplies was purchased, and a balance of $1,620 remained unused on December 31.
B. Unrecorded interest owed to the center totaled $275 as of December 31
C. All clients pay tuition in advance, and their payments are credited to the Unearned Tuition Revenue account. The account was credited for $65,500 on August 31. With the exception of $15,500 all amounts were for the current semester ending on December 31.
D. Depreciation on the school s van was $3,000 for the year.
E. On August 1, the center began to pay rent in 6-month installments of $24,000. Mary wrote a check to the owner of the building and recorded the check in Prepaid Rent, a new account.
F. Two salaried employees earn $400 each for a 5-day week. The employees are paid every Friday, and December 31 falls on a Thursday.
G. Mary s Day Care paid insurance premiums as follows, each time debiting Prepaid Insurance:
Date Paid Policy No. Length of Policy Amount
Feb. 1, 20X2 1033MCM19 1 year $540
Jan. 1, 20X3 7952789HP 1 year 912
Aug. 1, 20X3 XQ943675ST 2 years 840 .
5. Bank reconciliation and entries. The following information was taken from the accounting records of Palmetto Company for the month of January:
|
Balance per bank
|
$6,150
|
|
Balance per company records
|
3,580
|
|
Bank service charge for January
|
20
|
|
Deposits in transit
|
940
|
|
Interest on note collected by bank
|
100
|
|
Note collected by bank
|
1,000
|
|
NSF check returned by the bank with the bank statement
|
650
|
|
Outstanding checks
|
3,080
|
Instructions:
a. Prepare Palmetto s January bank reconciliation.
b. Prepare any necessary journal entries for Palmetto.
6. Direct write-off method. Harrisburg Company, which began business in early 20X7, reported $40,000 of accounts receivable on the December 31, 20X7, balance sheet. Included in this amount was $550 for a sale made to Tom Mattingly in July. On January 4, 20X8, the company learned that Mattingly had filed for personal bankruptcy. Harrisburg uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectibles.
a. Prepare the journal entry needed to write off Mattingly s account.
b. Comment on the ability of the direct write-off method to value receivables on the year-end balance sheet.
7. Allowance method: analysis of receivables. At a January 20X2 meeting, the presi dent of Sonic Sound directed the sales staff to move some product this year. The president noted that the credit evaluation department was being disbanded be cause it had restricted the company s growth. Credit decisions would now be made by the sales staff.
By the end of the year, Sonic had generated significant gains in sales, and the president was very pleased. The following data were provided by the accounting department:
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Sales
|
$23,987,000
|
$8,423,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable, 12/31
|
12,444,000
|
1,056,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, 12/31
|
?
|
23,000 cr.
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
The $12,444,000 receivables balance was aged as follows:
|
Age of Receivable
|
Amount
|
Percentage of Accounts Expected to Be Collected
|
|
Under 31 days
|
$4,321,000
|
99%
|
|
31260 days
|
4,890,000
|
90
|
|
61290 days
|
1,067,000
|
80
|
|
Over 90 days
|
2,166,000
|
60
|
Assume that no accounts were written off during 20X2.
Instructions
a. Estimate the amount of Uncollectible Accounts as of December 31, 20X2.
b. What is the company s Uncollectible Accounts expense for 20X2?
c. Compute the net realizable value of Accounts Receivable at the end of 20X1 and 20X2.
d. Compute the net realizable value at the end of 20X1 and 20X2 as a percentage of respective year-end receivables balances. Analyze your findings and comment on the president s decision to close the credit evaluation department.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC205 Week 2 Assignment Revenue and Expenses
1. Recognition of concepts. Ron Carroll operates a small company that books entertainers for theaters, parties, conventions, and so forth. The company s fiscal year ends on June 30. Consider the following items and classify each as either (1) prepaid expense, (2) unearned revenue, (3) accrued expense, (4) accrued revenue, or (5) none of the foregoing.
a. Amounts paid on June 30 for a 1-year insurance policy
b. Professional fees earned but not billed as of June 30
c. Repairs to the firm s copy machine, incurred and paid in June
d. An advance payment from a client for a performance next month at a convention
e. The payment in part (d) from the client s point of view
f. Interest owed on the company s bank loan, to be paid in early July
g. The bank loan payable in part (f)
h. Office supplies on hand at year-end
2. Analysis of prepaid account balance. The following information relates to Action Sign Company for 20X2:
Insurance expense
$4,350
Prepaid insurance, December 31, 20X2
1,900
Cash outlays for insurance during 20X2
6,200
Compute the balance in the Prepaid Insurance account on January 1, 20X2.
3. Understanding the closing process. Examine the following list of accounts:
Interest Payable
Accumulated Depreciation: Equipment
Alex Kenzy, Drawing
Accounts Payable
Service Revenue
Cash
Accounts Receivable
Supplies Expense
Interest Expense
Which of the preceding accounts
a. appear on a post-closing trial balance?
b. are commonly known as temporary, or nominal, accounts?
c. generate a debit to Income Summary in the closing process?
d. are closed to the capital account in the closing process?
4. Adjusting entries and financial statements. The following information pertains to Fixation Enterprises:
The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one third of this amount had been earned.
Fixation provided $2,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31.
Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,650.
The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period.
The company paid $18,000 on October 1 of the current year to Vantage Property Management. The payment was for 6 months rent of Fixation s headquarters, beginning on November 1.
Fixation s accounting year ends on December 31.
Instructions
Analyze the five preceding cases individually and determine the following:
a. The type of adjusting entry needed at year-end (Use the following codes: A, adjustment of a prepaid expense; B, adjustment of an unearned revenue; C, adjustment to record an accrued expense; or D, adjustment to record an accrued revenue.)
b. The year-end journal entry to adjust the accounts
c. The income statement impact of each adjustment (e.g., increases total revenues by $500)
5. Adjusting entries. You have been retained to examine the records of Kathy s Day Care Center as of December 31, 20X3, the close of the current reporting period. In the course of your examination, you discover the following:
On January 1, 20X3, the Supplies account had a balance of $2,350. During the year, $5,520 worth of supplies was purchased, and a balance of $1,620 remained unused on December 31.
Unrecorded interest owed to the center totaled $275 as of December 31.
All clients pay tuition in advance, and their payments are credited to the Unearned Tuition Revenue account. The account was credited for $75,500 on August 31. With the exception of $15,500 all amounts were for the current semester ending on December 31.
Depreciation on the school s van was $3,000 for the year.
On August 1, the center began to pay rent in 6-month installments of $21,000. Kathy wrote a check to the owner of the building and recorded the check in Prepaid Rent, a new account.
Two salaried employees earn $400 each for a 5-day week. The employees are paid every Friday, and December 31 falls on a Thursday.
Kathy s Day Care paid insurance premiums as follows, each time debiting Prepaid Insurance:
Date Paid
Policy No.
Length of Policy
Amount
Feb. 1, 20X2
1033MCM19
1 year
$540
Jan. 1, 20X3
7952789HP
1 year
912
Aug. 1, 20X3
XQ943675ST
2 years
840
Instructions
The center s accounts were last adjusted on December 31, 20X2. Prepare the adjusting entries necessary under the accrual basis of accounting.
6. Bank reconciliation and entries. The following information was taken from the accounting records of Palmetto Company for the month of January:
Balance per bank
$6,150
Balance per company records
3,580
Bank service charge for January
20
Deposits in transit
940
Interest on note collected by bank
100
Note collected by bank
1,000
NSF check returned by the bank with the bank statement
650
Outstanding checks
3,080
Instructions:
a. Prepare Palmetto s January bank reconciliation.
b. Prepare any necessary journal entries for Palmetto.
7. Direct write-off method. Harrisburg Company, which began business in early 20X7, reported $40,000 of accounts receivable on the December 31, 20X7, balance sheet. Included in this amount was $550 for a sale made to Tom Mattingly in July. On January 4, 20X8, the company learned that Mattingly had filed for personal bankruptcy. Harrisburg uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectibles.
a. Prepare the journal entry needed to write off Mattingly s account.
b. Comment on the ability of the direct write-off method to value receivables on the year-end balance sheet.
8. Allowance method: estimation and balance sheet disclosure. The following pre-adjusted information for the Maverick Company is available on December 31:
Accounts receivable $107,000
Allowance for uncollectible accounts 5,400 (credit balance)
Credit sales 250,000
a. Prepare the journal entries necessary to record Maverick s uncollectible accounts expense under each of the following assumptions:
(1) Uncollectible accounts are estimated to be 5% of Credit Sales.
(2) Uncollectible accounts are estimated to be 14% of Accounts Receivable.
b. How would Maverick s Accounts Receivable appear on the December 31 balance sheet under assumption (1) of part (a)?
c. How would Maverick s Accounts Receivable appear on the December 31 balance sheet under assumption (2) of part (a)?
9. Direct write-off and allowance methods: matching approach. The December 31, 20X2, year-end trial balance of Targa Company revealed the following account information:
Debits
Credits
Accounts Receivable
$252,000
Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts
$ 3,000
Sales
855,000
Instructions
a. Determine the adjusting entry for bad debts under each of the following conditions:
(1) An aging schedule indicates that $12,420 of accounts receivable will be uncollectible.
(2) Uncollectible accounts are estimated at 2% of net sales.
b. On January 19, 20X3, Targa learned that House Company, a customer, had declared bankruptcy. Present the proper entry to write off House s $950 balance using the allowance method.
c. Repeat the requirement in part (b), using the direct write-off method.
d. In light of the House bankruptcy, examine the allowance and direct write-off methods in terms of their ability to properly match revenues and expenses.
10. Allowance method: analysis of receivables. At a January 20X2 meeting, the president of Sonic Sound directed the sales staff to move some product this year. The president noted that the credit evaluation department was being disbanded because it had restricted the company s growth. Credit decisions would now be made by the sales staff.
By the end of the year, Sonic had generated significant gains in sales, and the president was very pleased. The following data were provided by the accounting department:
20X2
20X1
Sales
$23,987,000
$8,423,000
Accounts Receivable, 12/31
12,444,000
1,056,000
Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, 12/31
?
23,000 cr.
The $12,444,000 receivables balance was aged as follows:
Age of Receivable
Amount
Percentage of Accounts Expected to Be Collected
Under 31 days
$5,321,000
99%
31260 days
3,890,000
90
61290 days
1,067,000
80
Over 90 days
2,166,000
60
Assume that no accounts were written off during 20X2.
Instructions
a. Estimate the amount of Uncollectible Accounts as of December 31, 20X2.
b. What is the company s Uncollectible Accounts expense for 20X2?
c. Compute the net realizable value of Accounts Receivable at the end of 20X1 and 20X2.
d. Compute the net realizable value at the end of 20X1 and 20X2 as a percentage of respective year-end receivables balances. Analyze your findings and comment on the president s decision to close the credit evaluation department.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Two Exercise Assignment
Revenue and Expenses
1. Recognition of concepts. Jim Armstrong operates a small company that books enter tainers for theaters, parties, conventions, and so forth. The company s fiscal year ends on June 30. Consider the following items and classify each as either (1) pre paid expense, (2) unearned revenue, (3) accrued expense, (4) accrued revenue, or (5) none of the foregoing.
a Interest owed on the company’s bank loan, to be paid in early July
b Professional fees earned but not billed as of June 30
c Office supplies on hand at year-end
d An advance payment from a client for a performance next month at a convention
e The payment in part (d) from the client’s point of view
f Amounts paid on June 30 for a 1-year insurance policy
g The bank loan payable in part (a)
h Repairs to the firm’s copy machine, incurred and paid in June
2. Understanding the closing process. Examine the following list of accounts:
|
Note Payable
|
Accumulated Depreciation: Building
|
|
Alex Kenzy, Drawing
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
Product Revenue
|
Cash
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
Utility Expense
|
Which of the preceding accounts
a. appear on a post-closing trial balance?
b. are commonly known as temporary, or nominal, accounts?
c. generate a debit to Income Summary in the closing process?
d. are closed to the capital account in the closing process?
3. Adjusting entries and financial statements. The following information pertains to Sally Corporation:
The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one half of this amount had been earned.
Sally Corporation provided $1,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31.
Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,000.
The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period.
The company paid $18,000 on October 1 of the current year to Vantage Property Management. The payment was for 6 months rent of Sally Corporation s headquarters, beginning on November 1.
Sally Corporation s accounting year ends on December 31.
Instructions
Analyze the five preceding cases individually and determine the following:
a. The typeof adjusting entry needed at year-end (Use the following codes: A, adjust ment of a prepaid expense; B, adjustment of an unearned revenue; C, adjustment to record an accrued expense; or D, adjustment to record an accrued revenue.)
b. The year-end journal entry to adjust the accounts
c. The income statement impact of each adjustment (e.g., increases total revenues by $500)
4. Adjusting entries. You have been retained to examine the records of Mary s Day Care Center as of December 31, 20X3, the close of the current reporting period. In the course of your examination, you discover the following:
On January 1, 20X3, the Supplies account had a balance of $1,350. During the year, $5,520 worth of supplies was purchased, and a balance of $1,620 remained unused on December 31.
Unrecorded interest owed to the center totaled $275 as of December 31.
All clients pay tuition in advance, and their payments are credited to the Unearned Tuition Revenue account. The account was credited for $65,500 on August 31. With the exception of $15,500 all amounts were for the current semester ending on December 31.
Depreciation on the school s van was $3,000 for the year.
On August 1, the center began to pay rent in 6-month installments of $24,000. Mary wrote a check to the owner of the building and recorded the check in Pre paid Rent, a new account.
Two salaried employees earn $400 each for a 5-day week. The employees are paid every Friday, and December 31 falls on a Thursday.
Mary s Day Care paid insurance premiums as follows, each time debiting Pre paid Insurance:
|
Date Paid
|
Policy No.
|
Length of Policy
|
Amount
|
|
Feb. 1, 20X2
|
1033MCM19
|
1 year
|
$540
|
|
Jan. 1, 20X3
|
7952789HP
|
1 year
|
912
|
|
Aug. 1, 20X3
|
XQ943675ST
|
2 years
|
840
|
Instructions
The center s accounts were last adjusted on December 31, 20X2. Prepare the adjusting entries necessary under the accrual basis of accounting.
5. Bank reconciliation and entries. The following information was taken from the accounting records of Palmetto Company for the month of January:
|
Balance per bank
|
$6,150
|
|
Balance per company records
|
3,580
|
|
Bank service charge for January
|
20
|
|
Deposits in transit
|
940
|
|
Interest on note collected by bank
|
100
|
|
Note collected by bank
|
1,000
|
|
NSF check returned by the bank with the bank statement
|
650
|
|
Outstanding checks
|
3,080
|
Instructions:
a. Prepare Palmetto s January bank reconciliation.
b. Prepare any necessary journal entries for Palmetto.
6. Direct write-off method. Harrisburg Company, which began business in early 20X7, reported $40,000 of accounts receivable on the December 31, 20X7, balance sheet. Included in this amount was $550 for a sale made to Tom Mattingly in July. On January 4, 20X8, the company learned that Mattingly had filed for personal bankruptcy. Harrisburg uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectibles.
a. Prepare the journal entry needed to write off Mattingly s account.
b. Comment on the ability of the direct write-off method to value receivables on the year-end balance sheet.
7. Allowance method: analysis of receivables. At a January 20X2 meeting, the presi dent of Sonic Sound directed the sales staff to move some product this year. The president noted that the credit evaluation department was being disbanded be cause it had restricted the company s growth. Credit decisions would now be made by the sales staff.
By the end of the year, Sonic had generated significant gains in sales, and the president was very pleased. The following data were provided by the accounting department:
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Sales
|
$23,987,000
|
$8,423,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable, 12/31
|
12,444,000
|
1,056,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, 12/31
|
?
|
23,000 cr.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The $12,444,000 receivables balance was aged as follows:
|
Age of Receivable
|
Amount
|
Percentage of Accounts Expected to Be Collected
|
|
Under 31 days
|
$4,321,000
|
99%
|
|
31260 days
|
4,890,000
|
90
|
|
61290 days
|
1,067,000
|
80
|
|
Over 90 days
|
2,166,000
|
60
|
Assume that no accounts were written off during 20X2.
Instructions
a. Estimate the amount of Uncollectible Accounts as of December 31, 20X2.
b. What is the company s Uncollectible Accounts expense for 20X2?
c. Compute the net realizable value of Accounts Receivable at the end of 20X1 and 20X2.
d. Compute the net realizable value at the end of 20X1 and 20X2 as a percentage of respective year-end receivables balances. Analyze your findings and comment on the president s decision to close the credit evaluation department.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At January 1, 2012, Bella Company has beginning inventory of 2,000 DVD players. Bella estimates it will sell 10,000 units during the first quarter of 2012 with a 12% increase in sales each quarter. Bella s policy is to maintain an ending inventory equal to 25% of the next quarter s sales. Each DVD player costs $100 and is sold for $150. How much is budgeted sales revenue for the third quarter of 2012?
2,If a company plans to sell 48,000 units of product but sells 60,000, the most appropriate comparison of the cost data associated with the sales will be by a budget based on
3
Management by exception
|
|
means that only unfavorable differences will be investigated.
|
|
|
means that all differences will be investigated.
|
|
|
causes managers to be buried under voluminous paperwork.
|
|
|
means that material differences will be investigated.
|
4An investment center generated a contribution margin of $400,000, fixed costs of $200,000 and sales of $2,000,000. The center’s average operating assets were $800,000. How much is the return on investment?
5
Alma Manufacturing recorded operating data for its auto accessories division for the year.
| Sales |
|
$750,000 |
| Contribution margin |
|
150,000 |
| Total direct fixed costs |
|
90,000 |
| Average total operating assets |
|
400,000 |
How much is ROI for the year if management is able to identify a way to improve the contribution margin by $30,000, assuming fixed costs are held constant?
6,
To develop the flexible budget, management takes all of the following steps except identify the
|
|
activity index and the relevant range of activity.
|
|
|
variable costs and determine the budgeted variable cost per unit.
|
|
|
fixed costs and determine the budgeted fixed cost per unit.
|
|
|
All of these options are steps in developing the flexible budget.
|
7,
A flexible budget is appropriate for
|
Direct Labor Costs |
Manufacturing Overhead Costs |
,8,
At January 1, 2012, Bella Company has beginning inventory of 2,000 DVD players. Bella estimates it will sell 10,000 units during the first quarter of 2012 with a 12% increase in sales each quarter. Bella s policy is to maintain an ending inventory equal to 25% of the next quarter s sales. Each DVD player costs $100 and is sold for $150. How much is budgeted sales revenue for the third quarter of 2012?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At January 1, 2012, Bella Company has beginning inventory of 2,000 DVD players. Bella estimates it will sell 10,000 units during the first quarter of 2012 with a 12% increase in sales each quarter. Bella s policy is to maintain an ending inventory equal to 25% of the next quarter s sales. Each DVD player costs $100 and is sold for $150. How much is budgeted sales revenue for the third quarter of 2012?
2,If a company plans to sell 48,000 units of product but sells 60,000, the most appropriate comparison of the cost data associated with the sales will be by a budget based on
3
Management by exception
|
|
means that only unfavorable differences will be investigated.
|
|
|
means that all differences will be investigated.
|
|
|
causes managers to be buried under voluminous paperwork.
|
|
|
means that material differences will be investigated.
|
4An investment center generated a contribution margin of $400,000, fixed costs of $200,000 and sales of $2,000,000. The center’s average operating assets were $800,000. How much is the return on investment?
5
Alma Manufacturing recorded operating data for its auto accessories division for the year.
| Sales |
|
$750,000 |
| Contribution margin |
|
150,000 |
| Total direct fixed costs |
|
90,000 |
| Average total operating assets |
|
400,000 |
How much is ROI for the year if management is able to identify a way to improve the contribution margin by $30,000, assuming fixed costs are held constant?
6,
To develop the flexible budget, management takes all of the following steps except identify the
|
|
activity index and the relevant range of activity.
|
|
|
variable costs and determine the budgeted variable cost per unit.
|
|
|
fixed costs and determine the budgeted fixed cost per unit.
|
|
|
All of these options are steps in developing the flexible budget.
|
7,
A flexible budget is appropriate for
|
Direct Labor Costs |
Manufacturing Overhead Costs |
,8,
At January 1, 2012, Bella Company has beginning inventory of 2,000 DVD players. Bella estimates it will sell 10,000 units during the first quarter of 2012 with a 12% increase in sales each quarter. Bella s policy is to maintain an ending inventory equal to 25% of the next quarter s sales. Each DVD player costs $100 and is sold for $150. How much is budgeted sales revenue for the third quarter of 2012?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC is a partnership owned by Alders, Byron, and Calvin, who share profits and losses in the ratio of 1:3:4. The account balances of the partnership at June 30 follows:
ABC
Adjusted Trial Balance
June 30, 2014
Account Title
Cash $33,000DR
Non-Cash Assets $117,000DR
Notes Payable $32,000CR
Alders, Capital $22,000CR
Byron, Capital $50,000CR
Calvin, Capital $53,000CR
Alders, Withdrawals $9,000DR
Bryon, Withdrawals $27,000DR
Calvin, Withdrawals $49,000DR
Sales Revenue $164,000CR
Salaries Expense $74,000DR
Rent Expense $12,000DR
Total $321,000DR $321,000CR
Requirements:
1. Prepare the June 30 entries to close the revenue, expense, income summary, and withdrawal accounts.
2. Open each partner’s capital T-accounts with the adjusted balance, post the closing entries to their accounts, and determine each partner’s ending capital balance.
3. Prepare the June 30 entries to liquidate the partnership assuming the non-cash assets are sold for $120,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC Company’s current financial information (before/without expansion) Dec. 31,20X2 Dec. 31,20X1 Cash $50,000 $70,000 Accounts receivable (net) $120,000 $180,000 Merchandise inventory $350,000 $280,000 Property plant, & equipment $400,000 $300,000 Less: Accumulated depreciation $(170,000) $(100,000) Total assets $750,000 $730,000 Accounts payable $250,000 $210,000 Income taxes payable $40,000 $10,000 Common stock $240,000 $240,000 Retained earnings $220,000 $270,000 Total liabilities & stock, equity $750,000 $730,000 The firm’s accrual-basis income statement revealed the following data: Sales $1,200,000 Cost of goods sold $800,000 selling and administrative expenses $250,000 Depreciation expense $70,000 Income taxes $30,000 Dividends declared and paid during 19X2 $100,000 ABC purchased $100,000 of equipment for cash on August 14. (There was no interest expense.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Current company cash flow
a. You need to complete a cash flow statement for the company using the direct method.
b. Once you ve completed the cash flow statement, answer the following questions:
i. What does this statement of cash flow tell you about the sources and uses of the company funds?
ii. Is there anything ABC Company can do to improve the cash flow?
iii. Can this project be financed with current cash flow from the company? Why or why not?
iv. If the company needs additional financing beyond what ABC Company can provide internally (either now or sometime throughout the life of the project), how would you suggest the company obtain the additional financing, equity or corporate debt, and why?
ABC Company’s current financial information (before/without expansion)
Dec. 31,20X2 Dec. 31,20X1
Cash $50,000 $70,000
Accounts receivable (net) $120,000 $180,000
Merchandise inventory $350,000 $280,000
Property plant, & equipment $400,000 $300,000
Less: Accumulated depreciation $(170,000) $(100,000)
Total assets $750,000 $730,000
Accounts payable $250,000 $210,000
Income taxes payable $40,000 $10,000
Common stock $240,000 $240,000
Retained earnings $220,000 $270,000
Total liabilities & stock, equity $750,000 $730,000
The firm’s accrual-basis income statement revealed the following data:
Sales $1,200,000
Cost of goods sold $800,000
selling and administrative expenses $250,000
Depreciation expense $70,000
Income taxes $30,000
Dividends declared and paid during 19X2 $100,000
ABC purchased $100,000 of equipment for cash on August 14.
(There was no interest expense.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| ABC Corporation is a new company that buys and sells office supplies. Business began on January 1, 2012. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Given on the first two tabs are ABC’s 12/31/12 Unadjusted Trial Balance and a list of needed adjustments. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 1. Make all 14 adjustments on the “Adjusting Journal Entries” tab. Remember to include a description under each journal entry. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 2. Post the adjustments to the general ledger on the “12-31-12 T-Accounts” tab. You may have to add T-Accounts for new accounts. |
|
|
|
| Link your T-Account entries to your Journal Entries. PLEASE NOTE THAT THE “BB” (BEGINNING BALANCES) FOR THE |
|
|
|
| T-ACCOUNTS REPRESENT THE BALANCES AS OF 12/1/12. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 3. Once the 12/31/12 T-Accounts are complete, prepare the Adjusted Trial Balance. There may be some accounts with zero dollars, and you |
|
|
|
| may have to insert lines for new accounts. Link the Adjusted Trial Balance to your T-Accounts. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 4. Use the Adjusted Trial Balance numbers to complete the Income Statement, Statement of Retained Earnings, Balance Sheet, and Statement of Cash Flows. |
|
|
| For purposes of the Income Statement, prepare using the multiple step format and assume that Rent Revenue, any Unrealized Holding Gains/Losses, |
|
|
| Interest Expense, Interest Revenue, and any other Gains/Losses are NOT part of the major central ongoing operations of the company. |
|
|
|
| Link your financial statements to your Adjusted Trial Balance. Use the Income Statement and Balance Sheet to finish the partially completed Statement |
|
|
| of Cash Flows. Since this is ABC’s first year of operations, several line items on the Statement of Cash Flows have already been supplied to you. |
|
|
| If necessary, review financial statement preparation in Chapters 4 and 5 of your textbook for a quick refresher. Plan on using your knowledge gained in |
|
|
| completing Chapter 23 to help with the preparation of the Statement of Cash Flows. Additionally, since this is ABC Corporation’s first year of operations, |
|
|
| the adjusted trial balance for all current assets and liabilities represents the change during the year for Statement of Cash Flows analysis purposes. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 5. When the Financial Statements are complete, make the closing entries on the “Closing Entries” tab. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 6. When closing entries have been made, post the entries to the general ledger on the “After-Close T-Accounts” tab. Make sure your adjusting |
|
|
|
| journal entries are also on your After-Close T-Accounts. They will not automatically flow from tab-to-tab. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 7. The final step is the Post-Closing Trial Balance, which will use the ending balances from the 1/1/13 T-Accounts. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 8. Double-check your work. Here are a few things to check for: |
|
|
|
| -Adjusted Trial Balance: Make sure debit column and credit column total to the same figure at the bottom. |
|
|
|
| -Net income from the income statement will flow through to the Statement of Retained Earnings. |
|
|
|
| -Ending Retained Earnings from the Statement of Retained Earnings will flow through to the Balance Sheet. |
|
|
|
| -Ending Cash balance from the Balance Sheet should match your ending Cash balance on the Statement of Cash Flows. |
|
|
|
| -The Post-Closing Trial Balance should not have any revenue, expense, gain, or loss accounts. |
|
|
|
| -Check figure 1: Gross profit = $372,450. |
|
|
|
| -Check figure 2: Income before income taxes = $208,147. |
|
|
|
| -Check figure 3: Total Assets = $906,151. |
|
|
|
| -Check figure 4: Cash flow provided by operating activities = $2,840. |
|
|
|
| -Check figure 5: Adjusted Trial Balance debit and credit columns total $1,520,008. |
|
|
|
| -Remember: Neatness matters in Financial Statements. Print or Print Preview before submitting to make sure your statements are neat. |
|
|
|
| Otherwise, management may send back to you for revision! |
|
|
|
| -Include your work at the bottom of each tab as needed. |
|
|
|
| -Ask questions prior to the day/night before the due date. The due date is clearly indicated on the course schedule. |
|
|
|
| -Utilize formulas and worksheet linkings in your financial statements to improve accuracy and save time in completing the assignment. |
|
|
|
| -Please take advantage of Excel by using formulas to calculate groups of numbers (i.e. “Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity”). |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Final comments: This project is intended to make sure that you understand the accounting cycle as well as several key financial accounting transactions that you have |
|
|
|
| studied during your Intermediate Accounting series. It is very important to take the necessary time on this project to master these concepts. The concepts mastered in this |
|
|
|
| comprehensive problem will serve you well in Advanced Accounting and the rest of your accounting curriculum. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC is a partnership owned by Alders, Byron, and Calvin, who share profits and losses in the ratio of 1:3:4. The account balances of the partnership at June 30 follows:
ABC
Adjusted Trial Balance
June 30, 2014
Account Title
Cash $33,000DR
Non-Cash Assets $117,000DR
Notes Payable $32,000CR
Alders, Capital $22,000CR
Byron, Capital $50,000CR
Calvin, Capital $53,000CR
Alders, Withdrawals $9,000DR
Bryon, Withdrawals $27,000DR
Calvin, Withdrawals $49,000DR
Sales Revenue $164,000CR
Salaries Expense $74,000DR
Rent Expense $12,000DR
Total $321,000DR $321,000CR
Requirements:
1. Prepare the June 30 entries to close the revenue, expense, income summary, and withdrawal accounts.
2. Open each partner’s capital T-accounts with the adjusted balance, post the closing entries to their accounts, and determine each partner’s ending capital balance.
3. Prepare the June 30 entries to liquidate the partnership assuming the non-cash assets are sold for $120,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC is a partnership owned by Alders, Byron, and Calvin, who share profits and losses in the ratio of 1:3:4. The account balances of the partnership at June 30 follows:
ABC
Adjusted Trial Balance
June 30, 2014
Account Title
Cash $33,000DR
Non-Cash Assets $117,000DR
Notes Payable $32,000CR
Alders, Capital $22,000CR
Byron, Capital $50,000CR
Calvin, Capital $53,000CR
Alders, Withdrawals $9,000DR
Bryon, Withdrawals $27,000DR
Calvin, Withdrawals $49,000DR
Sales Revenue $164,000CR
Salaries Expense $74,000DR
Rent Expense $12,000DR
Total $321,000DR $321,000CR
Requirements:
1. Prepare the June 30 entries to close the revenue, expense, income summary, and withdrawal accounts.
2. Open each partner’s capital T-accounts with the adjusted balance, post the closing entries to their accounts, and determine each partner’s ending capital balance.
3. Prepare the June 30 entries to liquidate the partnership assuming the non-cash assets are sold for $120,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Abe Forrester and three of his friends from college have interested a group of venure capitalists in backing their business idea. The proposed operation would consist of a series of retail outlets to distribute and service a full line ot vacuum cleaners and accessories. These stores would be located in Dallas, Houston, and San Antonio. To finance the new venture two plans have been propsed:
-Plan A is an all-common-equity structure which $2.4million dollars would be raised by selling 84,000 shares of common stock.
-Plan B would involve issuing $1.5 million dollars in long-term bonds with effective interest rate of 11.6% plus 0.9 million would be raised by selling 42,000 shares of common stock. The debt funds raised under Plan B have no fixed maturity date, in that this amount of financial leverage is considered a permanent part of the firms capital sturcture.
Abe and his partners plan to use a 34% tax rate in their analysis and they have hired you on a consulting basis to do the following:
A: Find the EBIT indifference level associated with the two financing plans.
B: Prepare a pro forma income statement for the EBIT level SOLVED for in Part A. that shows that EPS will be the same regardless whether Plan A or B is chosen.
2. Three recent graduates of the computer science program at the university of Tennessee are forming a company that will write and distribute new application software for the iPhone. Initially the corporation will operate in the southern region of Tennessee, Georgia, North Carolina, and South Carolina. A small group of private investors in the Atlanta, Georgia area is interested in financing the startup company and two financing plans have been put forth for consideration:
The first plan (plan A) is an all-common-equity capital structure. 2.3 million dollars would be raised by selling common stock at $20 per common share
– Plan B would involve the use of financial leverage. 1.2 million dollars would be raised by selling bonds with an effective interest rate of 10.8% (per annum) and the remaining 1.1 million would be raised by selling common stock at the $20 price per share. The use of financial leverage is considered to be a permanent part of the firms capitalization, so no fixed maturity date is needed for the analysis. A 30% tax rate is deemed appropriate for the analysis.
A. Find the EBIT indifference level associated with the two financial plans.
B. A detailed financial analysis of the firms prospects suggests that the long term EBIT will be above $329,000 annually. Taking this into consideration, which plan will generate the higher EPS?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aber Company manufactures one product. On December 31, 2011, Aber adopted t he dollar-value LIFO inventory method. The inventory on that date using the dollar-value LIFO inventory method was $270,000. Inventory data are as follows:
|
|
|
Inventory at
|
Price index
|
|
|
Year
|
year-end prices
|
(base= year 2009)
|
|
|
2012
|
$378,000
|
1.05
|
|
|
2013
|
552,000
|
1.15
|
|
|
2014
|
575,000
|
1.25
|
Instructions
= Compute the inventory at December 31, 2012, 2013, and 2014, using the dollar-value LIFO method for each year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This is TASK 3
Introduction:
A variety of criteria and techniques can be used to determine how many units of a product to purchase or produce and what parameters to set for inventory management. In this task, apply the economic order quantity model and the economic production lot model to related decisions.
Given:
Company A s demand is uniform throughout the year and totals 18,000 units per year. Ordering costs total $38 per order. The annual holding cost rate is 26% of the value of the inventory. The per-unit cost of inventory is $12.
Company B s demand is uniform throughout the year and totals 15,000 units per year. The production setup costs total $84 per setup. The annual holding cost rate is 28% of the value of the inventory. The per-unit cost of finished product is $19. The production rate is constant and equivalent to 60,000 units per year.
Task:
Write a brief response in which you:
A. Determine the order size for Company A in the given scenario that would minimize total annual cost by using the economic order quantity model, showing all of your work.
B. Determine the lot size for Company B in the given scenario that would minimize total annual cost by using the economic production lot size model, showing all of your work.
C. When you use sources, include all in-text citations and references in APA format.
Note: Please save word-processing documents as *.rtf (Rich Text Format) or *.pdf (Portable Document Format) files.
Note: For definitions of terms commonly used in the rubric, see the attached Rubric Terms.
Note: When using sources to support ideas and elements in a paper or project, the submission MUST include APA formatted in-text citations with a corresponding reference list for any direct quotes or paraphrasing. It is not necessary to list sources that were consulted if they have not been quoted or paraphrased in the text of the paper or project.
Note: No more than a combined total of 30% of a submission can be directly quoted or closely paraphrased from sources, even if cited correctly. For tips on using APA style, please refer to the APA Handout web link included in the General Instructions section.
https://w.taskstream.com/RubricWizard/RubricPrintViewWithSession/PrintView?encLegacyRubricId=pkzffqzbf6cmze&platform=LAT
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Able Control Company, which manufactures electrical switches, uses a standard cost system and carries all
inventory at standard cost. The standard factory overhead cost per switch is based on DLHs.
Problem Information
Variable overhead 5 hours at $8.00 /hour $40.00
Fixed overhead* 5 hours at $12.00 /hour $60.00
Total standard overhead cost per unit produced $100.00
* Based on a practical capacity of 300,000 DLHs per month.
The following information is for the month of October:
Actual units produced 56,000
Practical capacity (in units) 60,000
Actual DLHs worked 275,000
Actual DL cost incurred $2,550,000
Actual variable overhead costs incurred $2,340,000
Actual fixed overhead costs incurred $3,750,000
The production manager argued during the last performance review that the company should use a more up-to-date base
for charging factory overhead costs to production. She commented that her factory had been highly automated in the last
two years and, as a result, now has hardly any labor. The factory hires only highly skilled workers to set up production runs
and to do periodic adjustments of machinery whenever the need arises.
Requirements
1. Compute the following for Able Control Company:
a. The fixed overhead spending variance for October.
b. The factory overhead production-volume variance for October.
c. The variable overhead spending variance for October.
d. The variable overhead efficiency variance for October.
2. Comment on the implications of the variances and suggest any action that the firm should take to improve
its operations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You must show all work and calculations by typing out the longhand formula, or post a screen shot of any online calculator used, or attach an excel file showing formulas/calculations in order to earn any credit
Introduction
The Course Project is an opportunity for you to apply concepts learned to a real-life simulation experience. Throughout the Course Project, you will assume that you work as a financial analyst for AirJet Best Parts, Inc. The Course Project is provided in two parts as follows:
Part I In Part I, you work with AirJet Best Parts, Inc. staff to identify the best loan options, as well as to valuate stocks and bonds.
Part II In Part II, you will provide the company with a recommendation for purchasing a new machine. You will base your recommendation on the Net Present Value (NPV) of the capital investment project using the cost of capital (WACC) as your discount rate.
About AirJet Best Parts, Inc.
AirJet Best Parts, Inc. is a company dedicated to the design and manufacturing of aviation and airplane technologies and parts. The company has commercial and military clients worldwide.
Task 1: Assessing loan options for AirJet Best Parts, Inc.
The company needs to finance $8,000,000 for a new factory in Mexico. The funds will be obtained through a commercial loan and by issuing corporate bonds. Here is some of the information regarding the APRs offered by two well-known commercial banks.
|
Bank
|
APR
|
Number of Times Compounded
|
|
National First
|
Prime Rate + 6.75%
|
Semiannually
|
|
Regions Best
|
13.17
|
Monthly
|
- Assuming that AirJet Parts, Inc. is considering loans from National First and Regions Best, what are the EARs for these two banks? Hint for National Bank: Go to the St. Louis Federal Reserve Board s website (http://research.stlouisfed.org/fred2/). Select Interest Rates and then Prime Bank Loan Rate . Use the latest MPRIME. Show your calculations.(15pts)
- Based on your calculations above, which of the two banks would you recommend and why? Explain your rationale. (15pts)
- AirJet Best Parts, Inc. has decided to take a $6,950,000 loan being offered by Regions Best at 8.6% APR for 5 years. What is the monthly payment amount on this loan? Do you agree with this decision? Explain your rationale. (20pts)
Task 2: Evaluating Competitor s Stock
AirJet Best Parts, Inc. is concerned regarding recent changes in its stock prices for the company and would like to determine the stock prices for key competitors. Key competitors include Raytheon, Boeing, Lockheed Martin, and theNorthrop Grumman Corporation.
- Using the dividend growth model and assuming a dividend growth rate of 5%, what is the rate of return for one of three key competitors? Use Yahoo Finance to obtain the latest dividend amount and price for one selected company. (15pts)
- Using the rate of return above, what should be the current share price of AirJet Best Parts, Inc. if the company maintains a constant 1% growth rate in dividends and the most recent dividend per share paid on the stock was $1.50? Show your calculations. (10 pts)
- Assume AirJet Best Parts has also a preferred stock issue. The most recent dividend per share paid on the stock was also $1.50, the same as the common stock. Which one would you think has a higher price, the preferred stock or the current stock? Explain your rationale. (5 pts)
- What would happen with the price you computed above if AirJet Best Parts, Inc. announces that dividends at the end of the year will increase? What if the required rate of return increases? What changes in dividends will affect the stock price and how? (10pts)
Task 3: Bond Evaluation
AirJet Best Parts, Inc.would like to issue 20-year bonds to obtain remaining funds for the new Mexico plant. The company currently has 7.5% semiannual coupon bonds in the market that sell for $1,062 and mature in 20 years.
- What coupon rate should AirJet Best Parts set on its new bonds to sell them at par value? (10 pts)
- What is the difference between the coupon rate and the YTM of bonds? (10 pts)
- What factors will contribute to the riskiness of these bonds? Explain in detail your rationale. (20 pts)
- What type of positive and negative covenants may AirJet Best Parts, Inc. use in future bond issues? (10pts)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Discussion Absorption versus Variable Costing
There are several ways a company can allocate overhead costs to products produced or services provided. Two of these methods are absorption costing and variable costing. This assignment will allow you to explore the two methods of costing and compare/contrast the different uses of each costing system.
Using the module readings and the Argosy University online library resources, research absorption and variable costing. Use your research and/or your experiences as a working professional to complete this assignment.
Respond to the following:
- Explain the differences between absorption costing and variable costing.
- Explain, with the help of an example, how a company could use a variable costing system, as well as an absorption costing system. You have the option of using the company you work for as an example.
- Explain which method is better for the company being discussed.
Support your recommendation with references to your readings or scholarly articles.
Write your initial response in 4 5 paragraphs. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fredonia Inc. had a bad year in 2013. For the first time in its history, it operated at a loss. The company s income statement showed the following results from selling 76,500 units of product: Net sales $1,484,100; total costs and expenses $1,722,200; and net loss $238,100. Costs and expenses consisted of the following.
|
|
Total |
|
Variable |
|
Fixed |
| Cost of goods sold |
|
$1,198,300 |
|
$775,600 |
|
$422,700 |
| Selling expenses |
|
420,800 |
|
78,000 |
|
342,800 |
| Administrative expenses |
|
103,100 |
|
41,000 |
|
62,100 |
|
|
$1,722,200 |
|
$894,600 |
|
$827,600 |
Management is considering the following independent alternatives for 2014.
| 1. |
|
Increase unit selling price 24% with no change in costs and expenses. |
| 2. |
|
Change the compensation of salespersons from fixed annual salaries totaling $195,100 to total salaries of $38,800 plus a 5% commission on net sales. |
| 3. |
|
Purchase new high-tech factory machinery that will change the proportion between variable and fixed cost of goods sold to 50:50. |
(a) Compute the break-even point in dollars for 2014.(Round contribution margin ratio to 4 decimal places e.g. 0.2512 and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 2,510.)
(b) Compute the break-even point in dollars under each of the alternative courses of action.(Round contribution margin ratio to 4 decimal places e.g. 0.2512 and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 2,510.)
|
|
|
|
Break-even point |
| 1. |
|
Increase selling price |
|
$ |
| 2. |
|
Change compensation |
|
$ |
| 3. |
|
Purchase machinery |
|
$
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Yard Tools manufactures lawnmowers, weed-trimmers, and chainsaws. Its sales mix and contribution margin per unit are as follows.
|
|
Sales Mix |
|
Contribution Margin per Unit |
| Lawnmowers |
|
20 |
% |
|
$40 |
| Weed-trimmers |
|
50 |
% |
|
$22 |
| Chainsaws |
|
30 |
% |
|
$40 |
Yard Tools has fixed costs of $5,282,710.
Compute the number of units of each product that Yard Tools must sell in order to break even under this product mix.
| Lawnmowers |
|
|
units |
| Weed-trimmers |
|
|
units |
| Chainsaws |
|
|
units |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment: Final Research Paper
In recent years, there has been an effort to develop a common set of accounting standards for nations and firms doing business around the world. For the final project, you are to discuss how the effort for a global set of accounting standards has increased the motivation or need to establish a global set of ethical standards. Include in your discussion the history of the 1) U.S. (AICPA) and 2) international ethical standards (IFAC). How are the U.S. and the international community developing a common set of ethical standards? What are some of the challenges faced by the two governing bodies?
The paper is to be 8 10 pages (of content) long and prepared in accordance with APA guidelines. There should also be a 1 2 paragraph abstract and a bibliography showing a significant variety of current, relevant sources that are used and cited in the paper. The paper is to be submitted via the course Dropbox by Day 7 of Unit 6.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
AC 505 Case Study II Springfield Express is a luxury passenger carrier in Texas. All seats are first class, and the following data are available:
Number of seats per passenger train car 90
Average load factor (percentage of seats filled) 70%
Average full passenger fare $160
Average variable cost per passenger $70
Fixed operating cost per month $3,150,000
a. What is the break-even point in passengers and revenues per month?
b. What is the break-even point in number of passenger train cars per month?
c. If Springfield Express raises its average passenger fare to $ 190, it is estimated that the average load factor will decrease to 60 percent. What will be the monthly break-even point in number of passenger cars?
d. (Refer to original data.) Fuel cost is a significant variable cost to any railway. If crude oil increases by $ 20 per barrel, it is estimated that variable cost per passenger will rise to $ 90. What will be the new break-even point in passengers and in number of passenger train cars?
e. Springfield Express has experienced an increase in variable cost per passenger to $ 85 and an increase in total fixed cost to $ 3,600,000. The company has decided to raise the average fare to $ 205. If the tax rate is 30 percent, how many passengers per month are needed to generate an after-tax profit of $ 750,000?
f. (Use original data). Springfield Express is considering offering a discounted fare of $ 120, which the company believes would increase the load factor to 80 percent. Only the additional seats would be sold at the discounted fare. Additional monthly advertising cost would be $ 180,000. How much pre-tax income would the discounted fare provide Springfield Express if the company has 50 passenger train cars per day, 30 days per month?
g. Springfield Express has an opportunity to obtain a new route that would be traveled 20 times per month. The company believes it can sell seats at $ 175 on the route, but the load factor would be only 60 percent. Fixed cost would increase by $ 250,000 per month for additional personnel, additional passenger train cars, maintenance, and so on. Variable cost per passenger would remain at $ 70.
1. Should the company obtain the route?
2. How many passenger train cars must Springfield Express operate to earn pre-tax income of $ 120,000 per month on this route?
3. If the load factor could be increased to 75 percent, how many passenger train cars must be operated to earn pre-tax income of $ 120,000 per month on this route?
4. What qualitative factors should be considered by Springfield Express in making its decision about acquiring this route?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The unadjusted trial balance amount for the Prepaid Rent account on December 31, 2013, is $3,600. The rental is for extra office space for 12 months. The rental started on April 1, 2013 and the $3,600 rental fee was paid on that date. The required adjusting entry on December 31, 2013 would require a
Debit to _______________ (Account Title)
For $_______________ (Amount)
2. Ned Sales had net credit sales in June of $100,000. On June 30, 2013 (before any adjustments) Accounts receivable are $20,000 and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a $100 debit balance. If Ned Sales estimates bad debt losses as 4% of net credit sales, the net realizable value of the Accounts Receivable AFTER the June 30, 2013 adjusting entry is:
$_______________ (Amount)
3. If Mel Corporation sells 60,000 shares of its new $1 par value common stock to investors for $14 per share, the required journal entry would require a credit to Common Stock for:
$_______________ (Amount)
4. Jen Industries purchased specialized equipment on July 1, 2011, that cost $85,000, has a residual value of $5,000, and a useful life of four years. Jen uses the sum of the year s digits method. The depreciation expense for the year 2013 is:
$_______________ (Amount)
5. On September 1, 2013, five months’ rent income totaling $5,000 was received on an office rental. The advance collection was originally recorded by a credit to Rental Revenue. The required adjusting entry at December 31, 2013 would require a:
Debit to _______________ (Account Title)
For $_______________ (Amount)
USE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION FOR QUESTIONS 6 and 7:
Janet Inc., has an inventory for notebooks on January 1 and purchases of this item during 2013 as follows:
|
Jan. 1
|
Beginning inventory…………………….
|
500 units @ $3.00
|
|
|
Mar. 5
|
Purchase…………………………………….
|
600 units @ $4.00
|
|
|
Sept. 3
|
Purchase…………………………………….
|
900 units @ $5.00
|
|
|
Nov. 4
|
Purchase…………………………………….
|
700 units @ $7.00
|
|
During 2013, Janet sold 1,200 notebooks at $10.00 each. Assume Janet uses a Periodic Inventory System.
6. Using FIFO, compute the cost of goods sold on December 31, 2013. $_________.
7. Using LIFO, compute the cost of the ending inventory on December 31, 2013. $_________.
8. During a period of falling prices, the cost flow assumption that will generally result in the highestamount of income taxes paid is: (State correct Inventory Cost Flow Method)
____________________
9. How would this year s total owners equity be affected by a common stock (not cash) dividend that had been declared and distributed this year?
a. Decrease
b. No effect
c. cannot tell based on this information
d. Increase
(Enter your multiple choice answer A, B, C, D for question 9)
(USE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION FOR QUESTIONS 10 and 11)
Bill Company (which uses a periodic inventory system)
has the following account balances after adjusting entries at December 31, 2013:
Cash $ 220,000
Depreciation Expense 20,000
Paid-in Capital from Treasury Stock Transactions, Common 50,000
Other Operating Expenses 45,000
Sales Discounts 5,000
Accumulated Depreciation- Equipment 30,000
Treasury Stock, Common (22,000 shares) 42,000
Preferred Stock 6% ($10 par) 85,000
Merchandise Inventory (1/1/2013) 100,000
Equipment 170,000
Accounts Receivable 90,000
Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value, Preferred 27,000
Purchases 700,000
Interest Expense 20,000
Unearned Revenue 8,000
Purchases Returns and Allowances 15,000
Salary Expense 80,000
Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value, Common 90,000
Dividends 10,000
Common Stock ($1 par) 167,000
Sales 940,000
Rent Expense 67,000
Bonds Payable (due 2042) 50,000
Accounts Payable 27,000
Retained Earnings (1/1/2013) 80,000
Merchandise inventory on December 31, 2013 is $130,000
10. The total stockholders equity at December 31, 2013 is:
$_____________ (amount)
11. The net income for 2013 is:
$_____________ (amount)
QUESTIONS 12- AND 13 ARE BASED ON THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:
The stockholders’ equity accounts (normal balances) of the Vermont Corp. as of December 31, 2013, appeared as follows:
Common stock, $1 par (100,000 shares authorized, 64,000 shares issued) $64,000
Preferred Stock, 10%, $5 Par (40,000 shares authorized, 10,000 shares issued) 50,000
Paid-in capital–excess over par value, common 70,000
Retained earnings 36,000
Treasury Stock (3,000 shares of common stock) 8,000
12. A stockholders’ equity section prepared at December 31, 2013, would report total stockholders’ equity of: $___________.
13. At December 31, 2013, the book value per share of the common stock is
(Assume no preferred dividends are in arrears) (round to nearest cent)
$___________.
USE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION FOR QUESTIONS 14 16.
Selected balance sheet account balances are: MO COMPANY
December 31
2013 2012
Cash $ 200,000 $ 300,000
Accounts Payable 45,000 60,000
Accounts Receivable 125,000 140,000
Salaries Payable 8,000 4,000
Land 120,000 140,000
Merchandise Inventory 130,000 150,000
Prepaid Rent 52,000 45,000
Income statement items for the year are:
Sales $800,000
Cost of Goods Sold 380,000
Salary Expense 90,000
Depreciation Expense 40,000
Rent Expense 100,000
14. Cash payments to suppliers for merchandise inventory during 2013 is
$ _____________
15. Cash collections from customers during 2013 is
$ _____________
16. Cash payments to employees for salary during 2013 is
$_____________
USE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION FOR QUESTIONS 17 20.
Assume that the following information is relevant for one of the bond issues of Fran Company:
Face value $900,000
Bond term 20 years
Stated interest rate 10% (paid semiannually)
Market interest rate 8%
Issue date July 1, 2013
Interest payment dates June 30 and December 31
Present Value Factors: 4% 5% 8% 10%
Present value of 1 for 20 periods 0.456 0.377 0.215 0.149
Present value of 1 for 40 periods 0.208 0.142 0.046 0.022
Present value of annuity for 20 periods 13.590 12.462 9.818 8.514
Present value of annuity for 40 periods 19.793 17.159 11.925 9.779
(Use only the present value factors shown above to make calculations.)
17. On July 1, 2013, the amount the bonds should sell for is
$___________
18. The total amount of bond interest to be paid in cash over the life of the bonds is:
$_____________
19. The amount of interest expense for 2013 using the effective interest method of amortization is
$__________ (show exact amount including cents)
20. The amount of bond interest paid in cash for 2014 is
$___________
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Use the following information to determine the gross margin for Pacific States Manufacturing for the year just ended (all amounts are in thousands ($000) of dollars:
Sales $31,800
Purchases of direct materials 7,000
Direct labor 5,000
Work in process inventory, 1/1 800
Work in process inventory, 12/31 3,000
Finished goods inventory, 1/1 4,000
Finished goods inventory, 12/31 5,300
Accounts payable, 1/1 1,700
Accounts payable, 12/31 1,500
Direct materials inventory, 1/1 6,000
Direct materials inventory, 12/31 1,000
Indirect labor 600
Indirect materials used 500
Utilities expense, factory 1,900
Depreciation on factory equipment 3,500
Gross Margin _________________
2. Which costs will change with a decrease in activity within the relevant range?
A) Total fixed costs and total variable cost.
B) Unit fixed costs and total variable cost.
C) Unit variable cost and unit fixed cost.
D) Unit fixed cost and total fixed cost.
3. An increase in the activity level within the relevant range results in:
A) an increase in fixed cost per unit.
B) a proportionate increase in total fixed costs.
C) an unchanged fixed cost per unit.
D) a decrease in fixed cost per unit.
Use the following
to answer questions 4-5:
The following information has been provided by the Evans Retail Stores, Inc., for the first quarter of the year:
Sales $350,000
Variable selling expense 35,000
Fixed selling expenses 25,000
Cost of goods sold (variable) 160,000
Fixed administrative expenses 55,000
Variable administrative expenses 15,000
4. The gross margin of Evans Retail Stores, Inc. for the first quarter is:
A) $210,000.
B) $140,000.
C) $220,000.
D) $190,000.
5. The contribution margin of Evans Retail Stores, Inc. for the first quarter is:
A) $300,000.
B) $140,000.
C) $210,000.
D) $190,000.
6. The total contribution margin decreases if sales volume remains the same and:
A) fixed expenses increase.
B) fixed expenses decrease.
C) variable expense per unit increases.
D) variable expense per unit decreases.
7. A company has provided the following data:
Sales 3,000 units
Sales price $70 per unit
Variable cost $50 per unit
Fixed cost $25,000
If the sales volume decreases by 25%, the variable cost per unit increases by 15%, and all other factors remain the same, net income will:
A) decrease by $31,875.
B) decrease by $15,000.
C) increase by $20,625.
D) decrease by $3,125.
8. Wallace, Inc., prepared the following budgeted data based on a sales forecast of $6,000,000:
Variable Fixed
Direct materials $1,600,000
Direct labor 1,400,000
Factory overhead 600,000 $ 900,000
Selling expenses 240,000 360,000
Administrative expenses 60,000 140,000
Total $3,900,000 $1,400,000
aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa
What would be the amount of sales dollars at the break-even point?
A) $2,250,000
B) $3,500,000
C) $4,000,000
D) $5,300,000
9. The following information pertains to Rica Company:
Sales (50,000 units) $1,000,000
Manufacturing costs:
Variable 340,000
Fixed 70,000
Selling and admin. expenses:
Variable 10,000
Fixed 60,000
How much is Rica’s break-even point in number of units?
A) 9,848
B) 10,000
C) 18,571
D) 26,000
Use the following to answer questions 10-11:
Dorian Company produces and sells a single product. The product sells for $60 per unit and has a contribution margin ratio of 40%. The company’s monthly fixed expenses are $28,800.
10. The variable expense per unit is:
A) $31.20.
B) $24.00.
C) $36.00.
D) $28.80.
11. The break-even point in sales dollars is:
A) $48,000.
B) $72,000.
C) $28,800.
D) $0.
12. An allocated portion of fixed manufacturing overhead is included in product costs under:
Absorption Variable
Costing costing
A) No No
B) No Yes
C) Yes No
D) Yes Yes
Use the following to answer questions 13-16:
Farron Company, which has only one
product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
Selling price $92
Units in beginning inventory 0
Units produced 8,700
Units sold 8,300
Units in ending inventory 400
Variable costs per unit:
Direct materials $13
Direct labor 55
Variable manufacturing overhead 1
Variable selling and administrative 5
Fixed costs:
Fixed manufacturing overhead $130,500
Fixed selling and administrative 8,300
13. What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?
A) $69
B) $84
C) $89
D) $74
14. What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?
A) $74
B) $89
C) $69
D) $84
15. What is the net income for the month under variable costing?
A) $10,600
B) ($17,000)
C) $16,600
D) $6,000
16. What is the net income for the month under absorption costing?
A) ($17,000)
B) $16,600
C) $6,000
D) $10,600
17. Orion Corporation is preparing a cash budget for the six months beginning January 1. Shown below are the company’s expected collection pattern and the budgeted sales for the period.
Expected collection pattern:
65% collected in the month of sale
20% collected in the month after sale
10% collected in the second month after sale
4% collected in the third month after sale
1% uncollectible
Budgeted sales:
January $160,000
February 185,000
March
190,000
April 170,000
May 200,000
June 180,000
The estimated total cash collections during April from sales and accounts receivables would be:
A) $155,900.
B) $167,000.
C) $171,666.
D) $173,400.
18. Avril Company makes collections on sales according to the following schedule:
30% in the month of sale
60% in the month following sale
8% in the second month following sale
The following sales are expected:
Expected Sales
January $100,000
February 120,000
March 110,000
Cash collections in March should be budgeted to be:
A) $110,000.
B) $110,800.
C) $105,000.
D) $113,000.
19. A labor efficiency variance resulting from the use of poor quality materials should be charged to:
A) the production manager.
B) the purchasing agent.
C) manufacturing overhead.
D) the engineering department.
20. An unfavorable labor efficiency variance indicates that:
A) The actual labor rate was higher than the standard labor rate.
B) The labor rate variance must also be unfavorable.
C) Actual labor hours worked exceeded standard labor hours for the production level achieved.
D) Overtime labor was used during the period.
21. A favorable labor rate variance indicates that
A) actual hours exceed standard hours.
B) standard hours exceed actual hours.
C) the actual rate exceeds the standard
rate.
D) the standard rate exceeds the actual rate.
Use the following to answer questions 22-25:
Cole laboratories makes and sells a lawn fertilizer called Fastgro. The company has developed standard costs for one bag of Fastgro as follows:
Standard
Standard Quantity Cost per Bag
Direct material 20 pounds $8.00
Direct labor 0.1 hours 1.10
Variable manuf. overhead 0.1 hours .40
The company had no beginning inventories of any kind on Jan. 1. Variable manufacturing overhead is applied to production on the basis of direct labor hours. During January, the following activity was recorded by the company:
Production of Fastgro: 4,000 bags
Direct materials purchased: 85,000 pounds at a cost of $32,300
Direct labor worked: 390 hours at a cost of $4,875
Variable manufacturing overhead incurred: $1,475
Inventory of direct materials on Jan. 31: 3,000 pounds
22. The materials price variance for January is:
A) $1,640 F.
B) $1,640 U.
C) $1,700 F.
D) $1,300 U.
23. The materials quantity variance for January is:
A) $800 U.
B) $300 U.
C) $300 F.
D) $750 F.
24. The labor rate variance for January is:
A) $475 F.
B) $475 U.
C) $585 F.
D) $585 U.
25. The labor efficiency variance for January is:
A) $475 F.
B) $350 U.
C) $130 U.
D) $110 F.
Use the following to answer questions 26-27:
The following selected data pertain to Beck Co.’s Beam Division for last year:
Sales $400,000
Variable
expenses $100,000
Traceable fixed expenses $250,000
Average operating assets $200,000
Minimum required rate of return 20%
26. How much is the residual income?
A) $40,000
B) $50,000
C) $10,000
D) $80,000
27. How much is the return on the investment?
A) 25%
B) 20%
C) 12.5%
D) 40%
28. One of the dangers of allocating common fixed costs to a product line is that such allocations can make the line appear less profitable than it really is.
A) True
B) False
29. In responsibility accounting, each segment in an organization should be charged with the costs for which it is responsible and over which it has control plus its share of common organizational costs.
A) True
B) False
30. Some managers believe that residual income is superior to return on investment as a means of measuring performance, since it encourages the manager to make investment decisions that are more consistent with the interests of the company as a whole.
A) True
B) False
31. The performance of the manager of Division A is measured by residual income. Which of the following would increase the manager’s performance measure?
A) Increase in average operating assets.
B) Decrease in average operating assets.
C) Increase in minimum required return.
D) Decrease in net operating income.
32. A segment of a business responsible for both revenues and expenses would be called:
A) a cost center.
B) an investment center.
C) a profit center.
D) residual income.
33. The Northern Division of the Smith Company had average operating assets totaling $150,000 last year. If the minimum required rate of return is 12%, and if last year’s net operating income at Northern was $20,000, then the residual income for Northern last year was:
A) $20,000.
B) $l8,000.
C) $5,000.
D) $2,000.
Use the following to answer questions 34 – 35:
The following information is available on Company A:
Sales $900,000
Net operating income 36,000
Stockholders’ equity 100,000
Average operating assets 180,000
Minimum required rate of return 15%
34. Company A’s residual income is:
A) $9,000.
B) $21,000.
C) $45,000.
D) $24,000.
35. Company A’s return on investment (ROI) is:
A) 4%.
B) 15%.
C) 20%.
D) 36%.
36. Gata Co. plans to discontinue a department that has a $48,000 contribution margin and $96,000 of fixed costs. Of these fixed costs, $42,000 cannot be avoided. What would be the effect of this discontinuance on Gata’s overall net operating income?
A) Increase of $48,000
B) Decrease of $48,000
C) Increase of $6,000
D) Decrease of $6,000
37. Pitkin Company produces a part used in the manufacture of one of its products. The unit product cost of the part is $33, computed as follows:
Direct materials $12
Direct labor 8
Variable manufacturing
overhead 3
Fixed manufacturing overhead . 10
Unit product cost $33
An outside supplier has offered to provide the annual requirement of 10,000 of the parts for only $27 each. The company estimates that 30% of the fixed manufacturing overhead costs above will continue if the parts are purchased from the outside supplier. Assume that direct labor is an avoidable cost in this decision. Based on these data, the per unit dollar advantage or disadvantage of purchasing the parts from the outside supplier would be:
A) $3 advantage.
B) $1 advantage.
C) $1 disadvantage.
D) $4 disadvantage.
38. Some investment projects require that a company expand its working capital to service the greater volume of business that will be generated. Under the net present value method, the investment of working capital should be treated as:
A) an initial cash outflow for which no discounting is necessary.
B) a future cash inflow for which discounting is necessary.
C) both an initial cash outflow for which no discounting is necessary and a future cash inflow for which discounting is necessary.
D) irrelevant to the net present value analysis.
39. Which of the following capital budgeting techniques consider(s) cash flow over the entire life of the project?
Internal rate of return Payback
A) Yes Yes
B) Yes No
C) No Yes
D) No No
Use the following to answer question 40:
(Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Treads Corporation is considering
the replacement of an old machine that is currently being used. The old machine is fully depreciated but can be used by the corporation for five more years. If Treads decides to replace the old machine, Picco Company has offered to purchase the old machine for $60,000. The old machine would have no salvage value in five years.
The new machine would be acquired from Hillcrest Industries for $1,000,000 in cash. The new machine has an expected useful life of five years with no salvage value. Due to the increased efficiency of the new machine, estimated annual cash savings of $300,000 would be generated.
Treads Corporation uses a discount rate of 12%.
40. The net present value of the project is closest to:
A) $171,000.
B) $136,400.
C) $141,500.
D) $560,000.
Use the following to answer questions 41-42:
(Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Oriental Company has gathered the following data on a proposed investment project:
Investment in depreciable equipment $200,000
Annual net cash flows $ 50,000
Life of the equipment 10 years
Salvage value -0-
Discount rate 10%
The company uses straight-line depreciation on all equipment.
41. The payback period for the investment would be:
A) 2.41 years.
B) 0.25 years.
C) 10 years.
D) 4 years.
42. The net present value of this investment would be:
A) ($14,350).
B) $107,250.
C) $77,200.
D) $200,000.
43. The Tse Manufacturing Company uses a job-order costing system and applies overhead to jobs using
a predetermined overhead rate. The company closes any balance in the Manufacturing Overhead account to Cost of Goods Sold. During the year the company’s Finished Goods inventory account was debited for $125,000 and credited for $110,000. The ending balance in the Finished Goods inventory account was $28,000. At the end of the year, manufacturing overhead was overapplied by $4,500. The balance in the Finished Goods inventory account at the beginning of the year was:
A. $28,000
B. $13,000
C. $17,500
D. $8,500
44. Matthias Corporation has provided data concerning the company’s Manufacturing Overhead account for the month of May. Prior to the closing of the overapplied or underapplied balance to Cost of Goods Sold, the total of the debits to the Manufacturing Overhead account was $53,000 and the total of the credits to the account was $69,000. Which of the following statements is true
A. Manufacturing overhead applied to Work in Process for the month was $69,000.
B. Manufacturing overhead for the month was underapplied by $16,000.
C. Manufacturing overhead transferred from Finished Goods to Cost of Goods Sold during the month was $53,000.
D. Actual manufacturing overhead incurred during the month was $69,000.
45. Yoder Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The following data pertain to operations in the first processing department for a recent month:
[pic]
45. What was the cost per equivalent unit for materials during the month
A. $0.30
B. $0.25
C. $0.20
D. $0.15
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
4. (18) Veeblefester Company manufactures two types of gizmo (Model A and Model B) in its Longmont plant.
|
|
Product information:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Model A
|
Model B
|
|
Direct material/unit
|
$40
|
$55
|
|
Direct labor/unit
|
|
$32
|
$47
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Budgeted volume (units)
|
8,000
|
10,000
|
|
Setups
|
|
50
|
30
|
|
Machine hours
|
|
16,000
|
24,000
|
|
Shipments
|
|
230
|
170
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Budgeted overhead for the year is $3,200,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
a) Compute the unit cost of each model if overhead is allocated on the basis of machine hours.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
b) Overhead costs are driven 55% by machining, 25% by setups, and 20% by shipments.
|
|
Compute the unit cost of each model if overhead is allocated with an ABC system, using
|
|
|
these three cost drivers.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
c) Model A currently sells for $300/unit. In order to meet budgeted sales volume, the
|
|
marketing department is advocating a 15% price cut. Is this advisable Explain.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
4) Company HTA had a free cash flow for the firm (FCFF) of $1,500,000 last year. It is expected the FCFF will keep a sustainable growth rate of 5%. The company has 2 million common shares outstanding. In addition, the following information has been gathered: Capital structure: D/E=0.2:0.8, Market value of Debt: VD =$5,000,000; Required return on equity: kE =15% Cost of debt before tax =6%, Tax rate: tc =25%; Determine the fair value of HTA stock.
5) Company JUK has a ROE of 25% and the company will not pay any dividend for the next 3 years. It is estimated that the company will pay $2 dividend per share after three years and then to level off to 5% per year forever.
The company has a beta of 2. Assume the risk-free interest rate is 4%, and the market risk premium is 8%.
1. What is your estimate of the fair price of a share of the stock?
2. If the market price of a share is equal to this intrinsic value, what is the P/E ratio?
3. What do you expect its price to be 1 year from now? Is the implied capital gain consistent with your estimate of the dividend yield and the market capitalization rate?
6.MicroSense, Inc., paid $2 dividends per share last year. It is estimated that the company s ROEs will be 12% and 10%, respectively, next two years. The plowback rate in next two years will be 0.6. It is expected that the dividends will grow at a sustainable rate of 3% per year after two years. Assume that the expected return on the market is 8%, the risk-free rate is 4%, and the beta of the stock is 1.4. What is the fair price of the stock?
7. An analyst uses the constant growth model to evaluate a company with the following data for a company:
Leverage ratio (asset/equity): 1.8
Total asset turnover: 1.5
Current ratio: 1.8
Net profit margin: 8%
Dividend payout ratio: 40%
Earnings per share in the past year: $0.85
The required rate on equity: 15%
Based on an analysis, the growth rate of the company will drop by 25 percent per year in the next two years and then keep it afterward. Assume that the company will keep its dividend policy unchanged.
1. Determine the growth rate of the company for each of next three years.
2. Use the multi-period DDM to estimate the intrinsic value of the company s stock.
3. Suppose after one year, everything else will be unchanged but the required rate on equity will decrease to 14%. What would be your holding period return for the year?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please use Microsoft Word only and make sure that the answers are shown within the pages margins. Clearly label your answers and submit the answers only (no need to resubmit the questions) showing all calculations.
Part I, Multiple Choice Questions
1. If a company purchases equipment for $65,000 by issuing a note payable:
A. Total assets will increase by $65,000.
B. Total assets will decrease by $65,000.
C. Total assets will remain the same.
D. The company’s total owners’ equity will decrease.
2. Which of the following is not a generally accepted accounting principle relating to the valuation of assets
A. The cost principle – in general, assets are valued at cost, rather than at estimated market values.
B. The objectivity principle – accountants prefer to use objective, rather than subjective, information as the basis for accounting information.
C. The safety principle – assets are valued at no more than the value for which they are insured.
D. The going-concern assumption – one reason for valuing assets such as buildings and equipment at cost rather than at their current market values is the assumption that the business will use these assets rather than sell them.
3. Decreases in owners’ equity are caused by:
A. Purchases of assets and payment of liabilities.
B. Purchases of assets and incurrence of liabilities.
C. Payment of liabilities and unprofitable operations.
D. Distributions of assets to the owner and unprofitable operations.
4. A trial balance consists of:
A. A two-column schedule of all debit and credit entries posted to ledger accounts.
B. A two-column financial statement intended for distribution to interested parties outside the business.
C. A two-column schedule showing the totals of all debits and of all credits made in journal entries.
D. A two-column schedule listing names and balances of all ledger accounts.
5. In February of each year, the Carlton Hotel holds a very popular wine tasting event. Tickets must be ordered and paid for in advance, and are typically sold out by November of the preceding year. The realization principle indicates that the revenue from these ticket sales should be recognized in the period in which the:
A. Order is placed.
B. Wine tasting is held.
C. Payments are received.
D. Expenses associated with the wine tasting are paid in full.
6. On June 18, Baltic Arena paid $6,600 to Marvin Maintenance, Inc. for cleaning the arena following a monster truck show held on June 9th. This transaction:
A. Is recorded by debiting the Retained Earnings account.
B. Is recorded by debiting Cash and crediting Cleaning Expense.
C. Causes a decrease in owners’ equity by increasing expenses for June.
D. May not be recorded until all revenue generated from the monster truck show has been collected in cash.
7. Which of the following businesses is likely to have the shortest operating cycle
A. A food store.
B. A department store.
C. An art store.
D. A car store.
8. Gross profit is the difference between:
A. Net sales and the cost of goods sold.
B. The cost of merchandise purchased and the cost of merchandise sold.
C. Net sales and net income.
D. Net sales and all expenses.
9. Hicksville’s Department Store uses a perpetual inventory system. At year-end, the balance in the Inventory controlling account is $1,200,000. Assuming that the inventory records have been maintained properly, a year-end physical inventory:
A. Is unnecessary.
B. Is needed to establish the ending inventory, as the $1,200,000 balance in the Inventory controlling account represents the beginning inventory.
C. Probably will indicate more than $1,200,000 in merchandise on hand.
D. Probably will indicate less than $1,200,000 in merchandise on hand.
10. When a bank reconciliation has been satisfactorily completed, the only related entries to be made in the depositor’s records are:
A. To correct errors made by the bank in recording the dollar amounts of cash transactions during the period.
B. To reconcile items that explain the difference between the balance per the books and the balance per the bank statement.
C. To record outstanding checks and bank service charges.
D. To record items that explain the difference between the balance per the accounting records and the adjusted cash balance.
11. The purpose of establishing a petty cash fund is to:
A. Achieve internal control over small cash disbursements not made by check.
B. Keep track of expenditures paid out of cash receipts from customers prior to deposit.
C. Ensure that the amount of cash in the bank does not become excessive.
D. Keep enough cash on hand in the office to cover all normal operating expenses of the business for a period of time.
12. The valuation principle of “mark-to-market” applied to investments classified as available for sale securities:
A. Affects the current period income statement, but not the balance sheet.
B. Enhances usefulness of the balance sheet in evaluating solvency of a business.
C. Applies to marketable securities and inventories.
D. Requires a corporation to adjust its capital stock account to reflect current market value of its outstanding capital stock.
13. During periods of inflation, when comparing LIFO with FIFO:
A. LIFO inventory and cost of sales would be higher.
B. LIFO inventory and cost of sales would be lower.
C. LIFO inventory would be lower and cost of sales would be higher.
D. LIFO inventory would be higher and cost of sales would be lower.
14. Which of the following will cause net income to be overstated for the following year
A. Current year’s ending inventory is understated.
B. Current year’s ending inventory is overstated.
C. Next year’s beginning inventory is overstated.
D. Next year’s ending inventory is understated.
15. The lower-of-cost-or-market rule:
A. Is used in conjunction with the other inventory cost flow assumptions.
B. Cannot be used if LIFO or FIFO are also used.
C. Can be used in conjunction with LIFO but not FIFO.
D. Can only be used with the specific identification cost flow assumption.
16. Tomassi Company paid $450,000 to acquire a piece of real estate consisting of land and an office building with a parking lot. In this situation:
A. The purchase price should be apportioned among the Land, Land Improvement, and Building accounts.
B. The entire purchase price should be debited to the Plant and Equipment account.
C. Land, Land Improvement, and Building accounts should each be debited for the respective appraisal value of each item.
D. Allocation of the entire $450,000 to Land results in an understatement of net income in the current and future accounting periods.
17. Which of the following statements about MACRS is not correct
A. MACRS is the only accelerated depreciation method that may be used on newly acquired assets for federal income tax purposes.
B. The method permits “depreciating” the asset to a tax basis of $0 over a specified recovery period.
C. If a company uses MACRS in its income tax returns, it also must use MACRS in its financial statements.
D. Most businesses would benefit from using MACRS rather than straight-line depreciation in their income tax returns.
18. Harvard Company purchased equipment having an invoice price of $11,500. The terms of sale were 2/10, n/30, and Harvard paid within the discount period. In addition, Harvard paid a $160 delivery charge, $185 installation charge, and $931 sales tax. The amount recorded as the cost of this equipment is:
A. $11,845.
B. $12,776.
C. $11,615.
D. $12,546
19. Ultimate Company is a defendant in a lawsuit alleging damages of $3 billion. The litigation is expected to continue for several years, and no reasonable estimate can be made at this time of Ultimate Company’s ultimate financial responsibility. This situation is an example of:
A. Off-balance-sheet financing.
B. A loss contingency which should be disclosed in notes to Ultimate Company’s financial statements.
C. An estimated liability which must appear in Ultimate Company’s balance sheet.
D. A loss in purchasing power caused by inflation.
20. On November 1, Metro Corporation borrowed $55,000 from a bank and signed a 12%, 90-day note payable in the amount of $55,000. The November 30 adjusting entry will be: (assume 360 days in year)
A. Debit Interest Expense $550 and credit Notes Payable $550.
B. Debit Interest Expense $550 and credit Interest Payable $550.
C. Debit Discount on Notes Payable $1,100 and credit Interest Payable $1,100.
D. Debit Interest Expense $550 and credit Cash $550.
21. Stone Corporation has 25 employees and incurs total wages and salaries expense of $900,000 per year. The following table shows various payroll amounts as a percentage of this annual wage and salaries expense:
In addition, Stone provides group health insurance for its entire workforce. The cost of this insurance is $350 per month for each employee.
Refer to the above data. The company’s annual payroll-related expenses amount to approximately:
A. $1,085,600.
B. $1,181,850.
C. $1,250,700.
D. Some other amount.
22. Coronet Corp. has total stockholders’ equity of $7,400,000. The company’s outstanding capital stock includes 100,000 shares of $10 par value common stock and 20,000 shares of 6%, $100 par value preferred stock. (No dividends are in arrears.) The book value per share of common stock is:
A. $39.
B. $49.
C. $54.
D. $74.
23. On September 1, 2009, Maryland Corporation’s common stock was selling at a market price of $200 per share. On that date, Maryland announced a 3 for 2 stock split. At what price would you expect the stock to trade immediately after the split goes into effect
A. $100
B. $200.
C. $133.33.
D. $225.
24. The following two items are disclosed in the stockholders’ equity section of Riverside Corporation’s December 31, 2009, balance sheet:
If the company had reacquired 700 shares of treasury stock in February of 2009, then for what amount was the other treasury stock sold for during 2009
A. $2 per share above its par value.
B. $2 per share.
C. $2 per share above its cost.
D. $22 per share above its cost.
25. The gross profit rate represents:
A. Total sales revenue.
B. The percentage change in net sales from the prior period.
C. The percentage of sales revenue remaining after providing for the cost of the merchandise sold.
D. Net income stated as a percentage of total sales revenue.
26. If a company has a current ratio of 2 to 1, and purchases inventory on credit, what will this do to its current ratio
A. Increase the current ratio.
B. Decrease the current ratio.
C. Does not change the current ratio.
D. Cannot be determined.
27. During the years 2009 through 2011, Powers, Inc., reported the following amounts of net income (dollars in thousands):
Relative to the prior year, the percentage change in net income:
A. Was the same in 2010 and 2011.
B. Was larger in 2011 than in 2010.
C. Was smaller in 2011 than in 2010.
D. Cannot be determined without knowing how many shares of stock were outstanding.
28. Flynn Corporation purchased bicycles from a British manufacturer at a price of 45,000 British pounds on November 15, 2009, with payment due in 60 days. Using the following exchange rates, what gain or loss from currency fluctuations should be recognized in 2009 and 2010?
A. A $2,250 loss in 2009 and a $900 gain in 2010.
B. No gain or loss in 2009 and a $1,350 loss in 2010.
C. A $2,250 gain in 2009 and a $900 loss in 2010.
D. No gain or loss in 2009 and a $1,350 gain in 2010.
29. Tuliptime, Inc. sold American fashions to a Japanese company at a price of 4 million yen. On the sale date, the exchange rate was $.0100 per Japanese yen, but when Tuliptime received payment from its customer, the exchange rate was $.0103 per Japanese yen. When the foreign receivable was collected, Tuliptime:
A. Credited Sales for $1,200.
B. Debited Cash for $40,000.
C. Credited Gain on Fluctuation of Foreign Currency for $1,200.
D. Debited Loss on Fluctuation of Foreign Currency for $1,200.
30. Gains and losses from fluctuations in exchange rates on transactions carried out in a foreign currency are reported in:
A. The balance sheet, as an adjustment to stockholders’ equity.
B. The income statement.
C. The footnotes to the financial statements.
D. The statement of retained earnings.
31. In comparison with a financial statement prepared in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles, a managerial accounting report is less likely to:
A. Focus upon the entire organization as the accounting entity.
B. Focus upon future accounting periods.
C. Make use of estimated amounts.
D. Be tailored to the specific needs of an individual decision maker.
32. The following information is available about the August transactions of the Helpful Tool Co:
The product costs to be deducted from revenue in August amount to:
A. $493,000.
B. $737,000.
C. $718,000.
D. $739,000.
33. In a manufacturing company, the cost of finished goods manufactured is equal to:
A. The beginning inventory of finished goods, plus net purchases, less the ending inventory of finished goods.
B. The sum of the manufacturing costs charged (debited) to the Work in Process Inventory account during the period.
C. The costs of direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead incurred in manufacturing the goods sold during the period.
D. The beginning inventory of work in process, plus total manufacturing costs for the period, less the ending inventory of work in process.
34. Overhead costs are assigned to production using an overhead application rate, whereas no such “application rate” is used to assign the costs of direct materials and direct labor to production. The reason for this difference in procedures is that:
A. Overhead is an indirect cost which cannot be traced easily and directly to specific units of product.
B. Overhead is always larger in dollar amount than either direct materials or direct labor.
C. The amounts of direct material and direct labor applicable to each unit of production cannot be determined as easily as the amount of overhead.
D. Overhead is always equal to a constant percentage of direct labor costs.
35. Moran Company uses a job order cost system and has established a predetermined overhead application rate for the current year of 150% of direct labor cost, based on budgeted overhead of $900,000 and budgeted direct labor cost of $600,000. Job no. 1 was charged with direct materials of $36,000 and with overhead of $27,000. What is the total cost of job no. 1
A. $64,000.
B. $81,000.
C. $91,000.
D. Cannot be determined without additional information.
36. Edwards Auto Body uses a job order cost system. Overhead is applied to jobs on the basis of direct labor hours. During the current period, Job No. 337 was charged $425 in direct materials, $475 in direct labor, and $190 in overhead. If direct labor costs an average of $16 per hour, the company’s overhead application rate is:
A. $7.27 per direct labor hour.
B. $6.40 per direct labor hour.
C. $17.50 per direct labor hour.
D. $40 per direct labor hour.
37. If unit sales prices are $7 and variable costs are $5 per unit how many units would have to be sold to break-even if fixed costs equal $8,000
A. 2,000
B. 3,000
C. 4,000
D. 3,800
38. If the unit sales price is $12, variable costs are $6 per unit and fixed costs are $26,000 what is the contribution ratio per unit
A. 40%
B. 50%
C. 60%
D. 70%
39. A product sells for $125, variable costs are $80 and fixed costs are $45,000. If the selling price can be increased by 20% with a similar increase in variable costs, how many less units would have to be sold to earn $300,000
A. 5595
B. 7667
C. 1278
D. 6389
40. The Fine Point Company currently produces all of the components for its one product; an electric pencil sharpener. The unit cost of manufacturing the motor for this pencil sharpener is:
The company is considering the possibility of buying this motor from a subcontractor and has been quoted a price of $3.60 per unit. The relevant cost of manufacturing the motor to be considered in reaching the decision is:
A. $4.75.
B. $4.15.
C. $3.55.
D. $4.05.
41. Seidman Company manufactures and sells 30,000 units of product X per month. Each unit of product X sells for $16 and has a contribution margin of $7. If product X is discontinued, $85,000 in fixed monthly overhead costs would be eliminated and there would be no effect on the sales volume of Seidman Company’s other products. If product X is discontinued, Seidman Company’s monthly income before taxes should:
A. Increase by $210,000.
B. Increase by $125,000.
C. Decrease by $210,000.
D. Decrease by $125,000.
42. Speedy Co. manufactures four products. Direct materials and direct labor are available in sufficient quantities, but machine capacity is limited to 3,000 hours. Cost and revenue data for the four products are given below:
Of the four products which is the most profitable for Speedy Co.
A. Product A.
B. Product B.
C. Product C.
D. Product D.
43. Wateredge Corporation has budgeted a total of $361,800 in costs and expenses for the upcoming quarter. Of this amount, $45,000 represents depreciation expense and $7,300 represents the expiration of prepayments. Wateredge’s current payables balance is $265,000 at the beginning of the quarter. Budgeted payments on current payables for the quarter amount to $370,000. The company’s estimated current payables balance at the end of the quarter is:
A. $179,500.
B. $204,500.
C. $203,500.
D. $310,000.
44. On October 1 of the current year, Molloy Corporation prepared a cash budget for October, November, and December. All of Molloy’s sales are made on account. The following information was used in preparing estimated cash collections:
Approximately 60% of all sales are collected in the month of the sale, 30% is collected in the following month, and 10% is collected in the month thereafter.
Refer to the information above. Budgeted collections from customers in October total:
A. $39,000.
B. $27,000.
C. $31,000.
D. $110,000.
45. Skelton Corporation had planned to produce 50,000 units of product during the first quarter of the current year. The company prepared the following budget on May 1:
During the first quarter, Carson produced 60,000 units and incurred total manufacturing costs of $180,000.
Refer to the information above. Which of the following amounts should not be included in Skelton’s flexible budget at a 60,000-unit level
A. Direct materials used, $43,200.
B. Direct labor, $54,000.
C. Variable overhead, $27,000.
D. Fixed manufacturing overhead, $70,200.
Part II, Problem (50 points)
Maria Chavez owns a catering company that serves food and beverages at parties and business functions. Chavez s business is seasonal, with a heavy schedule during the summer months and holidays and a lighter schedule at other times.
One of the major events Chavez s customers request is a cocktail party. She offers a standard cocktail party and has estimated the cost per guest as follows:
Food and beverages $15.00
Labor (0.5 hrs. @ $10.00/hr) 5.00
Overhead (0.5 hrs @ $13.98/hr) 6.99
——–
Total cost per guest $26.99
=====
The standard cocktail party lasts three hours and Chavez hires one worker for every six guests, so that works out to one-half hour of labor per guest. These workers are hired only as needed and are paid only for the hours they actually work.
When bidding on cocktail parties, Chavez adds a 15% markup to yield a price of about $31 per guest. She is confident about her estimates of the costs of food and beverages and labor but is not as comfortable with the estimate of overhead cost. The $13.98 overhead cost per labor hour was determined by dividing total overhead expenses for the last 12 months by total labor hours for the same period. Monthly data concerning overhead costs and labor-hours appear below:
Month Labor hrs Overhead expenses
January 2,500 $55,000
February 2,800 59,000
March 3,000 60,000
April 4,200 64,000
May 4,500 67,000
June 5,500 71,000
July 6,500 74,000
August 7,500 77,000
September 7,000 75,000
October 4,500 68,000
November 3,100 62,000
December 6,500 73,000
—— ——–
Total 57,600 $805,000
===== =======
Chavez has received a request to bid on a 180-guest fund-raising cocktail party to be given next month by an important local charity. (The party would last the usual three hours.) She would really like to win this contract; the guest list for this charity event includes many prominent individuals she would like to land as future clients. Maria is confident that these potential customers would be favorably impressed by her company s services at the charity event.
REQUIRED:
1. Estimate the contribution to profit of a standard 180-guest cocktail party if Chavez charges her usual price of $31 per guest. (In other words, by how much would her overall profit increase?)
2. How low could Chavez bid for the charity event in terms of a price per guest and still not lose money on the event itself?
3. The individual who is organizing the charity s fund-raising event has indicated that he has already received a bid under $30 from another catering company. Do you think Chavez should bid below her normal $31 per guest price for the charity event? Why or why not?
Part III, Problem (30 points)
Using the Adjusted Trial Balance shown below, prepare (a) an Income Statement and (b) a Statement of Retained Earnings for All Star Repairs.
Part IV, Problem (25 points)
From the following accounts and amounts prepare a balance sheet for the Swell Company for December 31, 2010. You must compute the amount for retained earnings to complete the balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are CFO of Goforit, Inc., a wholesale distribution company specializing in emerging technologies. Your CEO is a brilliant marketer, but relies on you to explain issues and choices in accounting and finance. She has heard from other members of a CEO organization to which she belongs that a company s net income can vary widely depending on which accounting choices are made from the GAAP menu.
Assuming the goal is to maximize net income, choose an accounting treatment from each of the following scenarios, and explain to your CEO why the choice will produce the desired effect on reported Net Income for the current year. Include in your answer the effect of the choice on both the income statement and balance sheet.
Required:
a. Goforit carries significant electronics inventory in a competitive environment where prices are actually falling. Which inventory valuation method would you choose LIFO, FIFO, or average cost Assume that unit purchases exceed unit sales.
b. Goforit has a large investment in warehouse equipment including conveyor belts, forklifts, and automated packaging systems. Which depreciation method would you choose: Straight line (SL) or double declining balance (DDB)?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A-5 Abby Ellen opened Abby s Toy House. As her newly hired accountant, your tasks are to:
1. Journalize the transactions for the month of March.
2. Record to subsidiary ledgers and post to the general ledger as appropriate.
3. Total and rule the journals.
4. Prepare a schedule of accounts receivable and a schedule of accounts payable.
The following is a partial chart of accounts for Abby s Toy House:
Assets Revenue
110 Cash 410 Toy Sales
112 Accounts receivable 412 Sales returns and allowances
114 Prepaid Rent 414 Sales discounts
121 Delivery Truck
Cost of Goods
Liabilities 510 Toy Purchases
210 Accounts Payable 512 Purchase Returns and Allowances
Owner s Equity 514 Purchase Discount
310 A. Ellen, Capital
Expenses
610 Salaries Expense
612 Cleaning Expense
200X
Mar. 1 Abby Ellen invested $8,000 in the toy store.
1 Paid three months rent in advance, check no. 1, $3,000
1 Purchased merchandise from Earl Miller Company on account, $4,000, invoice no. 410, dated March 2; terms 2/10, n/30.
3 Sold merchandise to Bill Burton on account, $1,000, invoice no. 1; terms 2/10, n/30.
6 Sold merchandise to Jim Rex on account, $700, invoice no. 2; terms 2/10, n/30.
8 Purchased merchandise from Earl Miller Co. on account, $1,200, invoice no. 415, dated March 9; terms 2/10, n/30.
9 Sold merchandise to Bill Burton on account, $600, invoice no. 3; terms 2/10, n/30.
9 Paid cleaning service, check no. 2, $300.
10 Jim Rex returned merchandise that cost $300 to Abby s Toy House. Abby issued credit memorandum no. 1 to Jim Rex for $300.
10 Purchased merchandise from Minnie Katz on account, $4,000, invoice no. 311, dated March 11; terms 1/15, n/60.
12 Paid Earl Miller Co. invoice no. 410, dated March 2, check no. 3.
13 Sold $1,300 of toy merchandise for cash.
13 Paid salaries, $600, check no. 4
14 Returned merchandise to Minnie Katz in the amount of $1,000. Abby s Toy House issued a debit memorandum no. 1 to Minnie Katz.
15 Sold merchandise for $4,000 cash.
16 Received payment from Jim Rex, invoice no. 2 (less returned merchandise) less discount.
16 Bill Burton paid invoice no.1.
16 Sold toy merchandise to Amy Rose on account, $4,000, invoice no. 4; terms 2/10, n/30.
20 Purchased delivery truck on account from Sam Katz Garage, $3,000, invoice3 no. 111, dated March 21 (no discount).
22 Sold to Bill Burton merchandise on account, $900, invoice no. 5; terms 2/10, n/30.
23 Paid Minnie Katz balance owed, check no. 5.
24 Sold toy merchandise on account to Amy Rose, $1,100, invoice no. 6; terms 2/10, n/30.
25 Purchased toy merchandise, $600, check no. 6.
26 Purchased toy merchandise from Woody Smith on account6, $4,800, invoice no. 211, dated March 27; terms 2/10, n/30.
28 Bill Burton paid invoice no. 5, dated March 22.
28 Amy Rose paid invoice no. 6, dated March 24.
28 Abby invested an additional $5,000 in the business.
28 Purchased merchandise from Earl Miller Co., $1,400, invoice no. 436, dated March 29; terms 2/10, n/30.
30 Paid Earl Miller Co. invoice no. 436, check no. 7.
30 Sold merchandise to Bonnie Flow Company on account, $3,000, invoice no. 7; terms 2/10, n/30.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
5. Direct and absorption costing
The information that follows pertains to XYZ Products for the year ended December 31, 20X8.
|
Inventory, 1/1/X8
|
24,000 units
|
|
Units manufactured
|
80,000
|
|
Units sold
|
104,000
|
|
Inventory, 12/31/X8
|
23000 units
|
|
Manufacturing costs:
|
|
Direct materials
|
$4 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
$5 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
$9 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
$300,000
|
|
Selling & administrative expenses:
|
|
Variable
|
$2 per unit
|
|
Fixed
|
$136,000
|
| 1.Direct costing. |
|
| Direct materials |
$4.00 |
| Direct labor |
$5.00 |
| Variable factory overhead |
$9.00 |
| Unit cost |
$18.00 |
|
|
|
|
| 2.Absorption costing. |
|
| Direct materials |
4.00 |
| Direct labor |
5.00 |
| Variable factory overhead |
9.00 |
| Fixed factory overhead |
1.70 |
| ($136000/80000) |
$20.50 |
|
|
| Assuming a unit cost of $26 per |
|
The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Homework
a. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X8, by using direct costing.
b. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X8, by using absorption costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
- XYZ Corporation operates a Marketing Research department. This department compiles information from published sources, and from its own consumer studies, to assist marketing personnel in forecasting product demand and making pricing and promotion decisions. A large marketing research firm has bid $260,000 per year for a three-year contract to perform the same services. For the most recent year, XYZ s controller determined the cost of operating the Marketing Research department to be $338,000:
Salary and fringes:
Senior researcher $71,000
Staff researcher 50,000
Clerical staff 72,000
VP Marketing (1) 56,000
Occupancy (2) 25,000
Subscriptions and travel (3) 64,000
(1) Represents 20% of cost of the VP, who is estimated to spend 20% of his time
On marketing research issues
(2) Occupancy costs are $25/sq ft: depreciation, $11; utilities, $10; maintenance, $4.
Utilities are 70% variable; maintenance is an allocation of fixed costs. There are no plans for alternate use of the space.
(3) Subscriptions and travel costs would be borne by outside research firm.
a. Determine the cost differential to XYZ of outsourcing versus retaining this function.
b. Discuss the factors that XYZ management should consider in making this decision.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.) Which of the following costs are included in the cost classification that is based on the time frame perspective
a. Variable cost and fixed cost.
b. Direct cost and indirect cost.
c. Product cost and period cost.
d. Committed cost and discretionary cost.
2.) A cost that is incurred because of a long-range policy decision is known as a:
a. discretionary cost.
b. committed cost.
c. continuous cost.
d. standard cost.
3.) Which of the following is not an important factor to consider when preparing a sales forecast
a. the state of the economy.
b. seasonal demand variations.
c. a change in the management team.
d. competitors’ actions.
4.) Which of the following is a plan for acquiring the resources needed to complete the manufacturing activities that will satisfy the organization’s sales forecast.
a. sales budget.
b. raw materials budget.
c. production budget.
d. direct labor budget.
5.) Which of the following lists the components of the master budget in correct chronological order
a. direct labor budget, production budget, cost of goods sold budget.
b. sales budget, production budget, cash budget.
c. sales budget, raw materials budget, production budget.
d. cash budget, production budget, manufacturing overhead budget.
6.) The raw materials budgeted to be purchased for the period is equal to:
a. ending inventory + raw material used – beginning inventory.
b. ending inventory + ending inventory – raw material used.
c. beginning inventory – ending inventory + raw material used.
d. beginning inventory + raw material used – ending inventory.
7.) The operating expense budget is based on the:
a. sales budget.
b. production budget.
c. manufacturing overhead budget.
d. cash budget.
8.) Depreciation on the office equipment would appear in which of the following budgets
a. production budget.
b. manufacturing overhead budget.
c. operating expense budget.
d. cash budget.
9.) Which of the following would not appear in the operating expense budget
a. sales commissions.
b. delivery expense.
c. advertising.
d. depreciation on the production equipment.
10.) What is the “key” to the entire operating budget
a. the forecast of operating activity.
b. the budgeted income statement.
c. the budgeted balance sheet.
d. the production/purchases budget.
11.) Which of the following is the last budgeted financial statement to be prepared
a. budgeted income statement.
b. budgeted balance sheet.
c. cash budget.
d. it doesn’t matter which one is prepared last.
12.) Which of the following lists the components of the master budget in correct chronological order
a. cash budget, budgeted income statement, budgeted balance sheet.
b. budgeted balance sheet, cash budget, budgeted income statement.
c. budgeted income statement, cash budget, budgeted balance sheet.
d. it doesn’t matter in which order they are prepared.
13.) A cash budget would not include:
a. sale of common stock.
b. payment of dividends.
c. payment of property taxes.
d. plant and building depreciation.
14.) An important reason for imposing a minimum cash balance in the cash budget is:
a. it provides a cushion that can absorb forecast errors.
b. it provides extra funds for managers to spend.
c. it makes the balance sheet look better.
d. all of these.
15.) A standard cost or production standard that is achievable under actual operating conditions is called a(n):
a. attainable standard.
b. ideal standard.
c. past experience standard.
d. average standard.
16.) Standard costs are comprised of two elements:
a. the quantity of input and the cost per unit of input.
b. the quality of input and the cost per unit of input.
c. the quantity of input and the cost per unit of output.
d. the quality of input and the cost per unit of output.
17.) ______________ standards allow inefficiencies from prior years to be incorporated into the budget, thus providing little incentive for improvement.
a. Ideal.
b. Engineered.
c. Attainable.
d. Past experience.
18.) A standard cost or production standard that assumes maximum operating conditions and 100% efficiency at all times is called a(n):
a. attainable standard.
b. ideal standard.
c. past experience standard.
d. average standard.
19.) Standard costs are used in which of the following phases of the management process
a. planning.
b. control.
c. organizing.
d. both a and b.
20.) Fixed costs classified according to the time frame perspective are known as:
a. direct cost and indirect cost.
b. constant and inconsistent cost.
c. committed cost and discretionary cost.
d. product cost and period cost.
21.) The concept of a standard used for planning and control purposes is most like a:
a. measure of ideal performance.
b. unit budget.
c. measure of maximum efficiency.
d. measure of historical performance.
22.) Standards are most appropriately used to:
a. reward workers and managers who meet them.
b. penalize workers and managers who do not meet them.
c. calculate the unit cost of a product or service.
d. support the planning and control processes of the firm.
23.) Standards are likely to be most useful when expressed in:
a. dollars per unit of input to the manufacturing process.
b. quantities per unit of output from the process being evaluated.
c. total costs for the accounting period for the department being evaluated.
d. terms easily related to by the individual whose performance is being evaluated.
24.) Developing a standard cost for a product or service will usually involve:
a. efforts of cost accounting personnel only.
b. focusing only on variable costs.
c. the same kind of communication involved in the overall budgeting process.
d. concentrating on historical costs and performance levels.
25.) Once standard costs for products or services have been developed:
a. they must be updated monthly to be useful.
b. they can be used for more than planning and control purposes.
c. they need not be revised unless the product or service is modified.
d. performance reports must be issued if the standards are to be useful.
26.) The kind of standard that is most useful for planning and control is:
a. an attainable standard.
b. an ideal, or engineered, standard.
c. a negotiated standard.
d. a past experience standard.
27.) Standard costing is developed and used for:
a. planning purposes.
b. control purposes.
c. product costing purposes.
d. all of these.
28.) What should the decision rule be to determine what budget variances to investigate
a. Investigate unfavorable variances only.
b. Investigate favorable variances only.
c. Investigate if the variance is significant.
d. Investigate all variances.
29.) The fixed manufacturing overhead variance caused by actual activity being different from the estimated activity used in calculating the predetermined overhead application rate is called the:
a. spending variance.
b. budget variance.
c. efficiency variance.
d. volume variance.
30.) The part of the variable overhead budget variance due to the difference between actual hours required and standard hours allowed for the work done is called the:
a. variable overhead spending variance.
b. variable overhead budget variance.
c. variable overhead efficiency variance.
d. variable overhead volume variance.
31.) The part of the variable overhead budget variance due to the difference between actual variable overhead cost and the standard cost allowed for the actual inputs used is called the:
a. variable overhead spending variance.
b. variable overhead budget variance.
c. variable overhead efficiency variance.
d. variable overhead volume variance.
32.) If the net variance of a business using standard costing is significant relevant to total production cost, the net variance should be:
a. assigned to cost of goods sold.
b. allocated between WIP and FG inventories and cost of goods sold.
c. carried forward to the next accounting period.
d. none of these.
33.) If the net of all variances is immaterial relative to the total production costs incurred during the period, the net variance is:
a. treated as an adjustment to cost of goods sold.
b. ignored.
c. treated as an adjustment to work in process, finished goods, and cost of goods sold.
d. treated as an adjustment to manufacturing overhead.
34.) Which of the following is a true statement pertaining to segment income statements
a. Only present the individual segments’ net income, not total company net income.
b. Only include variable costs.
c. Do not present a segment margin.
d. Do not include arbitrarily allocated common fixed expenses when calculating segment margin.
e. All of these.
35.) How is performance evaluated for a cost center
a. Actual costs incurred compared to budgeted costs.
b. Actual segment margin compared to budgeted segment margin.
c. Comparison of actual and budgeted return on investment (ROI) based on segment margin and assets controlled by the segment.
d. None of these.
3/200
36.) How is performance evaluated for a profit center
a. Actual costs incurred compared to budgeted costs.
b. Actual segment margin compared to budgeted segment margin.
c. Comparison of actual and budgeted return on investment (ROI) based on segment margin and assets controlled by the segment.
d. None of these.
37.) How is performance evaluated for an investment center
a. Actual costs incurred compared to budgeted costs.
b. Actual segment margin compared to budgeted segment margin.
c. Comparison of actual and budgeted return on investment (ROI) based on segment margin and assets controlled by the segment.
d. None of these.
38.) _____________ allows managers to focus their attention on maximizing an amount of earnings above a minimum required ROI:
a. optimization.
b. the DuPont model.
c. residual income.
d. transfer pricing.
39.) The term transfer price refers to:
a. The price at which a product or service is sold to a government entity.
b. The price at which a product or service is sold by one segment to another related segment.
c. The price at which a product or service is sold by a segment to an outside party.
d. None of these.
40.) A favorable materials quantity variance would occur if:
a. more material is purchased than is used.
b. actual pounds of materials used were less than the standard pounds allowed.
c. actual labor hours used was greater than the standard labor hours allowed.
d. actual pounds of materials used was greater than the standard pounds allowed.
41.) April Corporation developed the following per-unit standards for its product: 2 pounds of direct materials at $3.75 per pound. Last month, 2,000 pounds of direct materials were purchased for $7,600. The direct materials price variance for last month was:
a. $3,800 favorable.
b. $200 favorable.
c. $100 unfavorable.
d. $200 unfavorable.
42.) A set of integrated financial and operating performance measures that communicate an organization’s priorities associated with achieving strategic goals is known as a:
a. balanced scorecard.
b. segment report.
c. responsibility report.
d. master budget.
43.) Capital expenditure analysis, which leads to the capital budget, attempts to determine the impact of a proposed capital expenditure on theorganization’s:
a. segment margin.
b. contribution margin.
c. ROI.
d. cost of capital.
44.) The cost of capital used in the capital budgeting analytical process is primarily a function of:
a. ROE.
b. ROI.
c. the cost of acquiring the funds that will be invested.
d. the discount rate.
45.) For most firms, the cost of capital is probably in the range of:
a. the prime rate, plus or minus 2 percentage points.
b. less than 10%.
c. between 10% and 20%.
d. more than 20%.
46.) When the present value analysis of a proposed investment results in an indication that the proposal has a rate of return greater than the cost of capital, the investment might not be made because:
a. the quantitative analysis indicates that it should not be made.
b. management’s assessment of qualitative factors overrides the quantitative analysis.
c. the timing of the cash flows of the investment will not be as assumed in the present value calculation.
d. post-audits of prior investments have revealed that cash flow estimates were consistently less than actual cash flows realized.
47.) Which of the following is not an important qualitative factor to consider in the capital budgeting decision
a. regulations that mandate investment to meet safety, environmental, or access requirements.
b. technological developments within the industry may require nefacilities to maintain customers or market share at the cost of lower ROI for a period of time.
c. commitment to a segment of the business that requires capital investments to achieve or regain competitiveness even though that segment does not have as great an ROI as others.
d. all of these are important qualitative factors to consider.
48.) Which of the following is typically not important when calculating the net present value of a project
a. timing of cash flows from the project.
b. income tax effect of cash flows from the project.
c. method of financing the project.
d. amount of cash flows from the project.
49.) Depreciation expense is not a cash flow item but it will affect the calculation of which cash flow item
a. initial investment.
b. income taxes.
c. salvage value.
d. working capital.
50.) In order to calculate the net present value of a proposed investment, it is necessary to know:
a. the cash flows expected from the investment.
b. the net income expected from the investment.
c. the interest rate paid on funds borrowed to make the investment.
d. the cash dividends paid on the stock each year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Working with Budgets
Budgets are the driving force behind all organizations. Whether a manufacturing organization, or a service organization such as a medical or public accounting firm, budgets are used not only for planning purposes but also for performance monitoring and evaluation of areas within an organization.
More than likely, you are often required to work with budgets within your organization. Using the module reading and the Argosy University online library resources, research budgets including multiple budgets.
Respond to the following:
- Describe in detail the budgets that you work with.
- In your description, what was the objective of the budget i.e., to motivate employees or control costs? (A budget could have more than one objective.) Was the use of the budget successful in achieving the objective?
- Based on the effectiveness of the budget, what recommendations would you suggest to improve the communication and/or utilization of the budget(s)?
- Assume your organization has multiple budgets and you are to work with these. Explain how these budgets should be linked together.
Give reasons and examples in support of your responses.
Write your initial response in 4 5 paragraphs. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.
Grading Criteria:
| Assignment 1 Grading Criteria |
Maximum Points |
|
Initial response:
- Was insightful, original, accurate, and timely.
- Was substantive and demonstrated advanced understanding of concepts.
- Compiled/synthesized theories and concepts drawn from a variety of sources to support statements and conclusions.
|
16 |
|
|
|
Writing:
- Wrote in a clear, concise, formal, and organized manner.
- Responses were error free.
- Information from sources, where applicable, was paraphrased appropriately and accurately cited.
|
8 |
| Total: |
24 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Manufacturing Budget Analysis
|
Tom Emory and Jim Morris strolled back to their plant from the administrative offices of Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company. Tom is manager of the machine shop in the company’s factory; Jim is manager of the equipment maintenance department.
The men had just attended the monthly performance evaluation meeting for plant department heads. These meetings had been held on the third Tuesday of each month since Robert Ferguson, Jr., the president’s son, had become plant manager a year earlier.
As they were walking, Tom Emory spoke: Boy, I hate those meetings! I never know whether my department’s accounting reports will show good or bad performance. I’m beginning to expect the worst. If the accountants say I saved the company a dollar, I’m called Sir, but if I spend even a little too much boy, do I get in trouble. I don’t know if I can hold on until I retire.
Tom had just been given the worst evaluation he had ever received in his long career with Ferguson & Son. He was the most respected of the experienced machinists in the company. He had been with the company for many years and was promoted to supervisor of the machine shop when the company expanded and moved to its present location. The president (Robert Ferguson, Sr.) had often stated that the company’s success was due to the high-quality work of machinists like Tom. As supervisor, Tom stressed the importance of craftsmanship and told his workers that he wanted no sloppy work coming from his department.
When Robert Ferguson, Jr., became the plant manager, he directed that monthly performance comparisons be made between actual and budgeted costs for each department. The departmental budgets were intended to encourage the supervisors to reduce inefficiencies and to seek cost reduction opportunities. The company controller was instructed to have his staff tighten the budget slightly whenever a department attained its budget in a given month; this was done to reinforce the plant manager’s desire to reduce costs. The young plant manager often stressed the importance of continued progress toward attaining the budget; he also made it known that he kept a file of these performance reports for future reference when he succeeded his father.
Tom Emory’s conversation with Jim Morris continued as follows:
Emory: I really don’t understand. We’ve worked so hard to meet the budget, and the minute we do so they tighten it on us. We can’t work any faster and still maintain quality. I think my men are ready to quit trying. Besides, those reports don’t tell the whole story. We always seem to be interrupting the big jobs for all those small rush orders. All that setup and machine adjustment time is killing us. And quite frankly, Jim, you were no help. When our hydraulic press broke down last month, your people were nowhere to be found. We had to take it apart ourselves and got stuck with all that idle time.
Morris: I’m sorry about that, Tom, but you know my department has had trouble making budget, too. We were running well behind at the time of that problem, and if we had spent a day on that old machine, we would never have made it up. Instead, we made the scheduled inspections of the forklift trucks because we knew we could do those in less than the budgeted time.
Emory: Well, Jim, at least you have some options. I’m locked into what the scheduling department assigns to me and you know they’re being harassed by sales for those special orders. Incidentally, why didn’t your report show all the supplies you guys wasted last month when you were working in Bill’s department?
Morris: We’re not out of the woods on that deal yet. We charged the maximum we could to other work and haven’t even reported some of it yet.
Emory: Well, I’m glad you have a way of getting out of the pressure. The accountants seem to know everything that’s happening in my department, sometimes even before I do. I thought all that budget and accounting stuff was supposed to help, but it just gets me into trouble. It’s all a big pain. I’m trying to put out quality work; they’re trying to save pennies.
|
Review the case. Respond to the following:
- Identify the problems that appear to exist in Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company’s budgetary control system and explain how the problems are likely to reduce the effectiveness of the system. (approximately 1 page)
- Explain how Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company’s budgetary control system could be revised to improve its effectiveness. (approximately 1 2 pages)
- Explain how the use of an activity-based costing system could change the results of the budget, if utilized. (approximately 1 page)
- As stated in the case, many employees have quit trying and have altered behavior on the job. Provide specific ways for how you would use a budget to change employee behavior and align goals in the organization. Explain how goal alignment can improve profitability and overall return to the shareholders of the company. (approximately 1 page)
- Synthesize data to explain the concept of ROI and describe how the use of an activity-based costing system can improve the company s ROI and the potential impact on free cash flow. (approximately 1 page)
Write a 5 6-page report in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.
Grading Criteria:
| Assignment 2 Grading Criteria |
Maximum Points |
| Identified the problems that appear to exist in the company s budgetary control system and explained how the problems are likely to reduce the effectiveness of the system. |
64 |
| Explained how the company’s budgetary control system could be revised to improve its effectiveness. |
64 |
| Explained how the use of an activity-based costing system could change the results of the budget if utilized. |
44 |
| Identified ways of how one can use a budget to change employee behavior and align goals in the organization and explained how goal alignment can improve profitability and overall return to shareholders of the company. |
44 |
| Synthesized data to explain the concept of ROI, how the use of an activity-based costing system can improve the company s ROI, and the potential impact on free cash flow. |
56 |
| Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; and displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. |
28 |
| Total: |
300 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Minh Phan is going over the numbers one more time. He is about to make the most important sales
presentation of his young career, and wants everything to be right. His prospective client, Media
Systems, Inc., is one of the country s leading media and communications organizations. Media Systems
primary challenge is how to effectively manage its diverse customer base. The company has
70,000 publication subscribers, 58,000 advertisers, 30,000 telephone services customers, and
18,000 ISP (Internet service provider) customers. The company had little information about who its
customers truly were, which products they were using, and how satisfied they were with the service
they received. That s where Minh and his company, Customer Solution Technologies, LLC, came
in. Through the use of customer relationship management software, Minh believed Media Systems
would be able to substantially improve its ability to cross-sell and up-sell multiple media and communications
services to customers, while substantially reducing customer complaints.
1. What percentage of the total does each of the four customer groups represent? Round to the
nearest hundredth of a percent.
CASE STUDIES
2. Minh s data shows that on average, only 4.6% of customers were purchasing complementary services available within Media Systems.
By using his company s services, Minh was projecting that these percentages would triple across all user groups within one year. How
many customers would that equate to in total for each group? What would be the difference compared to current levels?
3. Customer complaint data showed that within the last year, complaints by category were as follows: publication subscribers, 1,174; advertisers,
423; telephone service customers, 4,411; and ISP customers 823. What percentage of customers (round to two decimal places)
complained within the last year in each category? If the CRM software were able to reduce complaints by 50% each year over the next
two years, how many complaints would there be by category at the end of that time period? What would the number of complaints at the
end of two years represent on a percentage basis?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
- Acme Company manufactures a variety of industrial products which are sold throughout the country. Fred Riley has been manager the Eastern Branch of Acme Company for the past three years. Starting in year 2, he was able to qualify for a $50,000 annual bonus for meeting a target growth rate of 10% of gross sales. Income statements for Eastern for the three year period are given below. Amounts are in the $ thousands.
|
|
|
Year 1
|
|
Year 2
|
|
Year 3
|
|
Gross sales
|
|
20,300
|
|
22,400
|
|
24,800
|
|
Returns and allowances
|
|
150
|
|
320
|
|
480
|
|
Net sales
|
|
20,150
|
|
22,080
|
|
24,320
|
|
COGS
|
|
13,100
|
|
15,020
|
|
17,170
|
|
Gross margin
|
|
7,050
|
|
7,060
|
|
7,150
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Operating expense:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Manager salary/bonus
|
|
100
|
|
150
|
|
150
|
|
Other branch overhead
|
|
840
|
|
870
|
|
910
|
|
Selling expense
|
|
840
|
|
1,020
|
|
1,190
|
|
Advertising
|
|
530
|
|
750
|
|
910
|
|
General and admin
|
|
4,060
|
|
4,480
|
|
4,960
|
|
Total
|
|
6370
|
|
7270
|
|
8120
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Branch Income
|
|
680
|
|
-210
|
|
-970
|
All advertising is local to the branch, and is controlled by the manager. Selling expense is all such expenses other than advertising, such as sales staff compensation and travel. General and administrative expense represents corporate overhead which is allocated at the rate of 20% of gross sales.
Required:
1) Comment on the effectiveness of the bonus plan used by Acme.
2) Because Eastern Branch is showing increasing losses, a senior vice president has suggested that the branch be closed. Comment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
#7Washington Company produced and sold 50,000 units of product and is operating at 80% of plant capacity. Unit information about its product is as follows:
Sales Price $68
Variable manufacturing cost $42
Fixed manufacturing cost ($600,000 50,000) 12 54
Profit per unit $14
The company received a proposal from Pear Company to buy 10,000 units of Washington Company’s product for $49 per unit. This is a one-time only order and acceptance of this proposal will not affect the company’s regular sales. The president of Washington Company is reluctant to accept the proposal because he is concerned that the company will lose money on the special order.
Instructions
Prepare a schedule reflecting an incremental analysis of this proposal and indicate the effect the acceptance of this order might have on the company’s income.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
76. Tony and Susan are starting a retail business selling formal wear for men and women.
They estimate profits and losses for the next five years to be: ($20,000), ($10,000),
($5,000), $10,000, and $50,000 respectively. Susan will work full time in the store
while Tony will be involved in managing the operations. Susan is married to Tom and
is in the 28% marginal tax bracket. Tony is single and has other sources of income that
put him in the 28% marginal tax bracket. Susan will be paid a salary of $30,000 for
the first five years, after which her compensation will be reviewed. Tony and Susan
each contribute $50,000 to get the business started. The remaining question facing
Tony and Susan is which business form to use for the business. They believe they
should operate as a partnership but have been informed that forming a corporation
might be a better option since it would limit their liability. Prepare an analysis to
determine whether Tony and Susan should operate their business as a partnership or a
corporation.
77. Tory, Becky, Hal, and Jere form TBHJ Partnership as equal owners. TBJH Partnership
rents heavy tools and equipment. Becky and Hal are married to each other while Tory
and Jere are brothers but are not related to Becky or Hal. Because Becky and Hal have
other jobs, Tory and Jere are to be the full-time managers of the business. Although Tory
and Jere will run the business full-time, Becky will help in the store on weekends and some
evenings. Hal will lend his financial expertise to the firm by doing the bookkeeping and
preparing the tax returns. Even though the four have equal ownership interests, it is not
clear how each owner is to be compensated so that there is equity among the partners yet
rewards for those engaged in specific tasks. Hal has told the others that they cannot
receive deductible salaries. However, he suggests that guaranteed payments be made to
each partner/employee for an agreed-upon amount based on the value of the services each
provides and/or the time spent at the store. Discuss the ramifications of employing this
plan and whether this is an equitable way to allocate compensation among the partners.
What are the implications of this arrangement for the partners and the partnership?
In each of the following problems, identify the tax issue(s) posed by the facts presented.
Determine the possible tax consequences of each issue that you identify.
57. Lydia owns 75% of Flower Farms, a partnership. She also owns land that she leases to
Flower Farms for $6,000 per month.
58. Michael buys a piece of property from JFK Partnership for $60,000 that has a
$70,000 basis. Michael owns 80% of JFK partnership.
59. Irene contributes land to Micro Development Partnership for a 30% interest. The
land s basis is $20,000, and it has a fair market value of $80,000. Micro reports a net
operating loss of $100,000 for the year. Irene devotes at least 12 hours a week to managing
the partnership operations.
60. Powell owns a 20% interest in Cooke Partnership. At the beginning of 2010, Powell s
basis is $22,000. Cooke reports a $90,000 operating loss in 2010, and Powell withdraws
$10,000 from the partnership. Cooke s 2011 operating income is $70,000, and
Powell withdraws $10,000 from the partnership.
61. Ramrod, Inc., sells a warehouse for $350,000. It purchased the warehouse 10 years ago
for $250,000 and had taken $75,000 in depreciation on the building to the date of sale.
62. Myrtle Coast Corporation has a $35,000 operating loss during the current year. Not
included in the loss is a $40,000 dividend it received from a corporation in which it
owns a 15% interest.
63. LMC, Inc., is equally owned by Larry, Maurice, and Charles. The owners are sports
agents. LMC s income consists solely of fees from the owners clients. During the
current year, LMC s net income from operations is $380,000, and it receives $20,000
in interest income. The corporation owns an interest in a limited partnership that generates
a $24,000 loss in the current year.
64. Assume the same facts as in problem 63, except that LMC, Inc., is an electing S
corporation.
65. Kummell Corporation reports a $200,000 taxable income in the current year.
Included in the taxable income calculation are $20,000 in dividends received from
less-than-20%-owned corporations, and $30,000 in charitable contributions.
66. Milena owns a 25% interest in Davis Company, an S corporation. Her basis in the
Davis stock is $40,000. Davis reports an operating loss of $200,000 in the current
year. Davis owes Milena $25,000 on a loan she made to the company several years
ago.
67. Charlene owns a 70% interest in Maupin Mopeds, which is organized as a partnership.
She wants to open another business and needs office space for it. She has
Maupin distribute a building worth $150,000 to her in lieu of her normal cash distribution.
Maupin s basis in the building is $55,000. Charlene s b
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Case 8-3 Template
INSTRUCTIONS: Read the case in the textbook. As a team, answer the questions in this spreadsheet, then save and submit the assignment as one Microsoft Excel attachment. Also, submit a 1-paragraph Microsoft Word document explaining any issues or successes you had in answering these questions. THE CASE INFORMATION: The Artist Palette sells high-end art supplies to the art students at three regional art and design schools in Philadelphia, Washington DC and Baltimore. It carries paints, brushes, drawing pads, frames, charcoal, pastels, and other supplies used in a variety of artistic media. Because the clientele is very discriminating, the Artist Palette tends to carry on the top lines in its inventory and it is known for having the best selection on hand. It is rare that an item is out of stock. Artist can visit the store, purchase from the Artist Palette catalog, or from the secure web site.
1. The Artist Palette purchases its inventory from a number of suppliers and each supplier offers different purchasing discounts. The manager of The Artist Palette, Mary Parma, is currently comparing two offers for purchasing modeling clay and supplies. The first company offers a chain discount of 20/10/5, and the second company offers a chain discount of 18/12/7 as long as the total purchases are $300.00 or more.
Assuming Parma purchases $300 worth of supplies, what is the net price from supplier 1? what is the net price from supplier 2?
From what supplier would one recommend Parma purchase her modeling clay and supplies?
2. What is the net decimal equivalent for supplier 1? For supplier 2?
3. What is the trade discount from supplier 1? From supplier 2?
4. The Artist s Palette recognizes that students may purchase supplies at the beginning of the term to cover all of their art class needs. Because this could represent a fairly substantial outlay, the Artist s Palette offers discounts to those students who pay sooner than required. Assume that if students buy more than $250 of art supplies in one visit, they may put it on a student account with terms of 2/10, n/30. If a student purchases $250 of supplies on September 16, what amount is due by September 26? How much would the student save by paying early?
5. Assume that if students buy more than $250 of art supplies in one visit, they may put the charge on a student account with terms of 2/10 EOM. If a student makes the purchase on September 16, on what day does the 2% discount expire? If the purchase is made on September 26, on what day does the 2% discount expire? If you were an art student, which method would you prefer: 2/10, n/30, or 2/10 EOM?
Case 9-1 Template
INSTRUCTIONS: Read the case in the textbook. As a team, answer the questions in this spreadsheet, then save and submit the assignment as one Microsoft Excel attachment. Also, submit a 1-paragraph Microsoft Word document explaining any issues or successes you had in answering these questions. CASE INFORMATION: Karen is an acupuncturist with a busy practice. In addition to acupuncture services, Karen sells teas, herbal supplements, and rice- filled heating pads. Because Karen s primary income is from acupuncture, she feels that she is providing the other items simply to fill a need and not as an important source of profits. As a matter of fact, the rice- filled heating pads are made by a patient who receives acupuncture for them instead of paying cash. The rice- filled pads cost Karen $ 5.00, $ 8.00, and $ 12.00, respectively, for small, medium, and large sizes. The ginger tea, relaxing tea, cold & flu tea, and detox tea cost her $ 2.59 per box plus $ 5.00 shipping and handling for 24 boxes. Karen uses a cost plus markup method, whereby she adds the same set amount to each box of tea. She figures that each box costs $ 2.59 plus $ 0.21 shipping and handling, which totals $ 2.80, then she adds $ 0.70 profit to each box and sells it for $ 3.50. Do you think this is a good pricing strategy? How would it compare to marking up by a percent-age of the cost?
1. What is the markup percentage for a box of ginger tea?
2. If the rice- filled heating pads sell for $ 7.00, $ 10.00, and $ 15.00 for small, medium, and large, respectively, what is the markup percentage on each one?
3. Karen wants to compare using the cost plus method to the percentage markup method. If she sells 2 small rice pads, 4 medium rice pads, 2 large rice pads, and 20 boxes of $ 3.50 tea in a month, how much profit does she accumulate? What markup percentage based on cost would she have to use to make the same amount of profit on this month s sales?
4. What prices should Karen charge (using the markup percentage) to obtain the same amount of profit as she did with the cost plus method? Do not include shipping.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
QUESTIONS :
|
1.Which of the following performance measures will decrease if there is an increase in the accounts receivable?
|
|
Return on Investment
|
Residual Income
|
|
(A)
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
(B)
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
(C)
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
(D)
|
No
|
No
|
|
Choice A Choice B Choice C Choice D
|
|
2.Delmar Corporation is considering the use of residual income as a measure of the performance of its divisions. Which major disadvantage of this method should the company consider before deciding to institute it
|
This method does not take into account differences in the size of divisions. Investments may be adopted that will decrease the overall return on investment. The minimum required rate of return may eliminate desirable investments. Residual income does not measure how effectively the division manager controls costs.
|
|
3. Given the following data: What is the return on the investment (ROI)?
|
Sales
|
$50.000
|
|
Net operating income
|
$5,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$20,000
|
|
Average operating assets
|
$25,000
|
|
Stockholder’s equity
|
$15,000
|
|
A. 10%
B. 20% C. 16.7% D. 80%
|
|
|
4.(TCO D) Financial data for Beaker Company for last year appear below.
|
Beaker Company
|
|
Statement of Financial Position
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Beginning
|
Ending
|
|
|
Balance
|
Balance
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$50,000
|
$70,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
20,000
|
25,000
|
|
Inventory
|
30,000
|
35,000
|
|
Plant and Equipment (net)
|
120,000
|
110,000
|
|
Investment in Cedar Company
|
80,000
|
100,000
|
|
Land (undeveloped)
|
170,000
|
170,000
|
|
Total Assets
|
$470,000
|
510,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$70,000
|
$90,000
|
|
Long-term debt
|
250,000
|
250,000
|
|
Owner’s equity
|
150,000
|
170,000
|
|
Total liabilities and owner’s equity
|
$470,000
|
$510,000
|
|
Beaker Company
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sales
|
|
$414,000
|
|
Less Operating Expenses
|
|
351,900
|
|
Net Operating Income
|
|
62,100
|
|
Less Interest and Taxes
|
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
$30,000
|
|
|
Tax Expense
|
10,000
|
40,000
|
|
Net Income
|
|
$22,000
|
The company paid dividends of $2,100 last year. The “Investment in Cedar Company” on the statement of financial position represents an investment in the stock of another company.
Required:
i. Compute the company’s margin, turnover, and return on investment for last year.
ii. The board of directors of Beaker Company has set a minimum required return of 20%. What was the company’s residual income last year?
|
|
5.Ferro Wares is a division of a major corporation. The following data are for the latest year of operations.
|
Sales
|
$33,040,000
|
|
Net Operating Income
|
$1,453,760
|
|
Average Operating Assets
|
$8,000,000
|
|
The company’s minimum required rate of return
|
18%
|
Required:
i. What is the division’s ROI?
ii. What is the division’s residual income? (Points : 15)
|
|
6. Tjelmeland Corporation is considering dropping product S85U. Data from the company’s accounting system appear below.
|
Sales
|
$360,000
|
|
Variable Expenses
|
$158,000
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Expenses
|
$119,000
|
|
Fixed Selling and Administrative Expenses
|
$94,000
|
All fixed expenses of the company are fully allocated to products in the company’s accounting system. Further investigation has revealed that $55,000 of the fixed manufacturing expenses and $71,000 of the fixed selling and administrative expenses are avoidable if product S85U is discontinued.
Required:
i. According to the company’s accounting system, what is the net operating income earned by product S85U? Show your work!
ii. What would be the effect on the company’s overall net operating income of dropping product S85U? Should the product be dropped? Show your work!
|
|
7.(TCO D) Rosiek Corporation uses part A55 in one of its products. The company’s accounting department reports the following costs of producing the 4,000 units of the part that are needed every year.
|
|
Per Unit
|
|
Direct Materials
|
$2.80
|
|
Direct Labor
|
$6.30
|
|
Variable Overhead
|
$8.50
|
|
Supervisor’s Salary
|
$2.60
|
|
Depreciation of Special Equipment
|
$6.80
|
|
Allocated General Overhead
|
$6.10
|
An outside supplier has offered to make the part and sell it to the company for $32.30 each. If this offer is accepted, the supervisor’s salary and all of the variable costs, including direct labor, can be avoided. The special equipment used to make the part was purchased many years ago and has no salvage value or other use. The allocated general overhead represents fixed costs of the entire company. If the outside supplier’s offer were accepted, only $4,000 of these allocated general overhead costs would be avoided. In addition, the space used to produce part A55 could be used to make more of one of the company’s other products, generating an additional segment margin of $26,000 per year for that product.
Required:
i. Prepare a report that shows the effect on the company’s total net operating income of buying part A55 from the supplier rather than continuing to make it inside the company.
ii. Which alternative should the company choose
|
8.(TCO D) Manning Co. manufactures and sells trophies for winners of athletic and other events. Its manufacturing plant has the capacity to produce 18,000 trophies each month; current monthly production is 15,300 trophies. The company normally charges $141 per trophy. Cost data for the current level of production are shown below.
|
Variable Costs
|
|
|
|
Direct Materials
|
$948,600
|
|
|
Direct Labor
|
$290,700
|
|
|
Selling and Administrative
|
$41,300
|
|
Fixed Costs
|
|
|
|
Manufacturing
|
$579,870
|
|
|
Selling and Administrative
|
$134,640
|
The company has just received a special one-time order for 900 trophies at $73 each. For this particular order, no variable selling and administrative costs would be incurred. This order would also have no effect on fixed costs.
Required:
Should the company accept this special order? Why
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
#9The current sections of May Inc.’s balance sheets at December 31, 2013 and 2014, are presented here.
May’s net income for 2014 was $203,000. Depreciation expense was $25,000.
2014 2013
Current assets
Cash $115,000 $99,000
Accounts receivable 105,000 89,000
Inventory 154,000 172,000
Prepaid expense 27,000 21,000
Total current assets $401,000 $381,000
Current liabilities
Accrued expenses payable $ 15,000 $ 5,000
Accounts payable 85,000 93,000
Total current liabilities $100,000 $ 98,000
Instructions
Prepare the net cash provided by operating activities section (ONLY!) of the company’s statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2014, using the indirect method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
9. The vice president of purchasing for a large national retailer has asked you to prepare
an analysis of retail sales by state. Data are available for the following variables:
Y (retsal) = Per capita retail sales in $
X1 (perinc) = Per capita personal income in $
X2 (unempl) = Unemployment rate in %
X3 (totpop) = State population in 000s
Excel regression output of a potential model is:
SUMMARY OUTPUT
Regression Statistics
Multiple R 0.673063624
R Square 0.453014642
Adjusted R Square 0.430223585
Standard Error 612.871189
Observations 50
ANOVA
df SS MS F Significance F
Regression 2 14931938.3 7465969.149 19.87686003 5.14537E-07
Residual 47 18029332.53 375611.0943
Total 49 32961270.82
Coefficients Standard Error t Stat P-value Lower 95% Upper 95%
Intercept 3054.280348 724.3827234 4.216390382 0.000109151 1597.811292 4510.749404
unempl -86.25168104 40.20459701 -2.14531888 0.037015057 -167.0884398 -5.414922307
perinc 0.253683705 0.048149492 5.268668342 3.2101E-06 0.156872664 0.350494746
(a) Comment on the effects of unemployment and per capita personal income.
(b) You think the prediction equation can be improved by adding state population
as an additional explanatory variable. You obtained the following output:
SUMMARY OUTPUT
Regression Statistics
Multiple R 0.687861707
R Square 0.473153727
Adjusted R Square 0.439525242
Standard Error 607.8480121
Observations 50
ANOVA
df SS MS F Significance F
Regression 3 15595748.15 5198582.716 14.07002785 1.12578E-06
Residual 46 17365522.67 369479.2058
Total 49 32961270.82
Coefficients Standard Error t Stat P-value Lower 95% Upper 95%
Intercept 2828.429295 737.9401735 3.832870736 0.000375307 1343.885177 4312.973414
unempl -71.32832666 41.40025242 -1.722895936 0.091481858 -154.6148904 11.95823702
perinc 0.272491364 0.049773611 5.474615138 1.66335E-06 0.172359776 0.372622951
totpop -0.024730373 0.018450316 -1.340376626 0.186566538 -0.061847621 0.012386875
4
i. Is this model better? Why/why not?
ii. For this model, write out an expression for sales.
iii. For this model, calculate a 95% confidence interval for predicted sales,
if unemployment is 8.1%, per capita income is $15,000 and the state’s
population is 6 million. Use a z-value of 1.96.
(c) Write down two additional explanatory variables which you think could help to
explain sales. Give a brief justification for each.
(25 marks)
10. (a) Time series are usually considered to have a combination of four components.
What are these components? For each of them, give one example of data for
which you would expect that component to be present.
(b) The following table gives average UK household electricity demand in kilowatt
hours (kWh) over the last five years. Quarter 1 represents Spring.
Year Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
2005 4.5 4.1 4.4 5.1
2006 4.9 4.6 4.6 5.3
2007 5.0 4.7 4.8 5.5
2008 5.2 5.0 5.1 5.6
2009 5.3 5.1 5.2 5.7
i. State two features about household electricity demand that are apparent
from these data.
ii. Show that the 4-point centred moving average for Quarter 3 in 2007 is
5.025.
iii. Calculate the ratio-to-moving-average (R2MA) for Quarter 3 in 2007.
iv. Compute the four seasonal indices using the following table of R2MA
v. The estimated trend line is found to be:
^y = 4:461 + 0:050x;
where x is the Quarter number (Q1 of 2005 corresponds to x = 1). Provide a forecast, to three decimal places, for average UK household electricity demand for the summer of 2015. Do you have any comment to make about this forecast?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A02 Principles of Accounting I Part A (40 points) Use the following information to complete the partial worksheet for Bill’s Company. Record the appropriate adjusting entries using the data below and extend the balances over to the adjusted trial balance columns. Merchandise inventory ending $10 Store supplies on hand 3 Depreciation on store equipment 2 Accrued salaries 1 Bill s Company Partial Worksheet For the Year Ended December 31st, 2012 Account Titles Trial Balance Adjustments Adjusted Trial Balance Debit Credit Debit Credit Debit Credit Merchandise Inv. 16 Store Supplies 10 Store Equipment 20 Accum. Depr. Store Equip. 6 Salaries Payable Income Summary Salary Expense 10 Depreciation Expense Store Supplies Exp. Part B (15 points each for a possible total of 60 points) The Bixby Co. had the following transactions involving the purchase of merchandise. Prepare the necessary general journal entries. Any applicable freight costs are prepaid by the seller. The perpetual inventory method is in use. June 16 Purchased merchandise having a price of $6,000 from the Shelby Manufacturing Co. on account with credit terms 10, n/30. Transportation terms F.O.B destination. June 16 Purchased merchandise having a price of $9,000 from the Ajax Supply House on account with credit terms 2/10, n/30. Transportation terms F.O.B shipping point. The freight costs were $175. June 17 Received the goods from Shelby. June 17 Received the goods from Ajax. June 20 Returned for credit merchandise with an invoice price of $800 to Ajax. June 25 Paid Shelby the amount owed. June 28 Paid Ajax the amount owed. June 30 Returned for cash, merchandise with an invoice price of $400 to Shelby. (1) Prepare the necessary general journal entry for June 16, Purchased merchandise having a price of $6,000 from the Shelby Manufacturing Co. on account with credit terms 2/10, n/30. Transportation terms F.O.B destination. __________________________________________ __________ __________ __________________________________________ __________ __________ __________________________________________ __________ __________ (2) Prepare the necessary general journal entry for June 17, Received the goods from Shelby. __________________________________________ __________ __________ __________________________________________ __________ __________ __________________________________________ __________ __________ (3) Prepare the necessary general journal entry for June 25. __________________________________________ __________ __________ __________________________________________ __________ __________ __________________________________________ __________ __________ (4) Prepare the necessary general journal entry for June 28. __________________________________________ __________ __________ __________________________________________ __________ __________ __________________________________________ __________ __________
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Part A (5 points each for a possible total of 15 points)
The following information is given for Tripp Company, which uses the indirect method.
Net income $20,000
Depreciation expense 3,000
Increase in accounts receivable 2,000
Payment of dividends 2,000
Proceeds from sale of equipment 6,000
Increase in accounts payable 4,000
Decrease in inventory 3,000
From the information provided, answer the following questions:
(1) The cash flow from operating activities is ________.
(2) The cash flow from investing activities is ________.
(3) The cash flow from financing activities is ________.
Part B (5 points each for a possible total of 25 points)
Selected data for Stick’s Design are given as of December 31, Year 1 and Year 2 (rounded to the nearest hundredth).
Year 2 Year 1
Net Credit Sales $25,000 $30,000
Cost of Goods Sold 16,000 18,000
Net Income 2,000 2,800
Cash 5,000 900
Accounts Receivable 3,000 2,000
Inventory 2,000 3,600
Current Liabilities 6,000 5,000
Compute the following:
(1) Current ratio for Year 2.
(2) Acid-test ratio for Year 2.
(3) Accounts receivable turnover for Year 2.
(4) Average collection period for Year 2.
(5) Inventory turnover for Year 2.
Part C (30 points)
Prepare an income statement showing departmental contribution margin based on the following:
Dept. X Dept. Y Rent Expense
Space (square feet) 17,500 35,000
Net Sales $60,000 $40,000
Cost of Goods Sold 18,000 16,000
Rent Expense (allocated based on square feet) $2,700
Part D (5 points each for a possible total of 30 points)
From the following transactions, prepare the appropriate general journal entries for the month of April.
(1) Raw materials costing $60,000 were issued from the storeroom.
(2) Direct labor of $53,000 was charged to production.
(3) Indirect labor costs of $17,000 were incurred.
(4) Overhead was applied at the rate of 40% of direct labor dollars.
(5) Completed products costing $42,000 were transferred to finished goods.
(6) Products costing $32,000 were sold.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
2. Spielberg takes $100 out of his piggy bank and deposits it in his Hollywood Bank checking account. By how much does the total amount of deposits in the banking system increase:
(i) if this $100 stays in the banking system as reserves, and
(ii) if banks hold reserves equal to 10 percent of deposits?
By how much does the money supply increase in each case? Note that money supply consists of currency and demand deposits.
3. Use AD-AS diagrams to explain the short-run and long-run effects of each of the following events on output and the price level. Assume that policymakers take no action.
a) A severe earthquake damages factories along the west coast
b) Stock market crash
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
QUESTIONS :
1.Committing a fraud because the employee feels “I deserve a pay raise. The company owes this to me” is
indicative of which part of the fraud triangle?
A.Rationalization
B.Realization
C.Perceived pressure
D.Perceived opportunity
2.Casey Company’s beginning inventory and purchases during the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012,
were as follows: (Note:The company uses a perpetual system of inventory.)
What is the cost of goods sold for Casey Company for 2012 using LIFO?
Units Unit Price Total Cost
January 1 Beginning Inventory 20 $12 $240
March 8 Sold 14
April 2 Purchase 30 $13 $390
June 5 Sold 25
Aug 6 Purchase 25 $14 $350
Total Cost of Inventory $980
Ending inventory is 14 units.
A.$784
B.$801
C.$308
D.$264
3.The balance sheet format that lists assets above liabilities is the _______ form.
A.report
B.liquidity
C.account
D.alphabetical
4.Isaiah Sporting Goods uses the perpetual average cost method of determining inventory costs. Below is
the inventory record for Product C124:
What is the average cost per unit after the receipt of the May 17 inventory (rounded to the nearest cent)?
Date Received Sold Cost/Unit Balance
April 22 534 $6.58 $3,513.72
May 17 433 $6.70 $2,901.10
June 21 389 $6.76 $2,629.64
August 2 436 $6.44 $2,807.84
A.$6.00
B.$7.40
C.$6.55
D.$6.63
5.Bill’s Bikes had sales for the week of $3,569, of which $2,900 was on credit and $659 was in cash sales.
The cost of the bikes sold was $1,888. The journal entries would include a
A.debit to Cost of Goods Sold for $1,888; credit to Sales of $1,888.
B.debit to Cash for $3,569; credit to Cost of Goods Sold for $3,569.
C.debit to Cash for $3569; credit to Sales for $3,569.
D.debit to Cost of Goods Sold for $1,888; credit to Inventory for $1,888.
6.ABC Corporation pays an invoice for $350 in time to take a 3% discount. The journal entry to record
the payment of this invoice is
A.debit Accounts Payable $350; credit Inventory $10.50, credit Cash $339.50.
B.debit Accounts Payable $350; credit Cash $350.
C.debit Accounts Payable $340; debit Inventory $10; credit Cash $350.
D.debit Accounts Payable $340; credit Cash $340.
7.Under Sarbanes-Oxley, those officers signing off on the reports must have evaluated the company’s
internal control within the previous
A.nine months.
B.90 days.
C.year.
D.six months.
8.Which of the following may notlimit the effectiveness of internal control systems in an organization?
A.Poorly designed controls
B.Costs not worth benefits
C.Duties not segregated
D.Understanding of policies and procedures
9.To overstate earnings, a company can
A.overstate expenses and overstate revenue.
B.understate expenses and understate revenue.
C.overstate receivables and understate payables.
D.understate unearned revenue and understate property, plant, and equipment.
11.Which of the following is an incorrectstatement if ending inventory is overstated?
A.Income tax is overstated.
B.Cost of goods sold is overstated.
C.Gross profit is overstated.
D.Net income is overstated.
12.Which of the following is an incorrectstatement if ending inventory is understated?
A.Cost of goods sold is overstated.
B.Net income is understated.
C.Income tax is understated.
D.Gross profit is overstated.
13.Besides using an overstatement of earnings to inflate a company’s stock price, overstating earnings may
also be used to
A.avoid paying dividends to stockholders.
B.deflate the amount of taxes the corporation pays.
C.avoid paying raises to employees.
D.ensure larger bonuses to upper management at year-end.
14.A low gross profit percentage means that
A.selling expenses are very low.
B.the cost of goods sold was relatively high.
C.the cost of goods sold was relatively low.
D.general and administrative expenses are very high.
15.Which items may notlimit the effectiveness of internal control systems in an organization?
A.Properly designed controls
B.Collusion
C.Costs not worth benefits
D.Overriding controls
16.New technology, like the latest cell phones and HDTV, would probably be costed using the
A.moving-average method of inventory costing.
B.FIFO method of inventory costing.
C.specific-identification method of inventory costing.
D.LIFO method of inventory costing.
17.Net sales times the historical gross profit percentage yields the estimated
A.ending inventory.
B.gross profit.
C.beginning inventory.
D.cost of goods sold.
18.Under a perpetual inventory system, the account to which transportation charges on incoming
merchandise is generally entered is
A.inventory.
B.delivery expense.
C.FOB shipping.
D.FOB destination.
19.If current assets decrease and current liabilities increase, the current ratio
A.decreases.
B.remains the same.
C.will change based on the change in total assets.
D.increases.
20.To pay the least income tax possible in periods of rising inventory costs, the company should use which
inventory costing method?
A.Specific identification
B.Average cost
C.FIFO
D.LIFO
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PART 2 :
QUESTIONS : Q26 TO Q50 :
26.
In the process of reconciling Marks Enterprises’ bank statement for September, Mr. Marks compiles the following information:
Cash balance per company books on September 30$ 6,270
Deposits in transit at month-end$ 1,310
Outstanding checks at month-end$ 630
Bank charge for printing new checks $ 50
Note receivable and interest collected by bank on Marks’ behalf $ 760
A check given to Marks during the month by a customer is returned
by the bank as NSF$ 490
The adjusted cash balance per the books on September 30 is:
$6,980
$6,490
$4,550
$5,830
$8,150
27.
On December 31 of the current year, a company’s unadjusted trial balance included the following: Accounts Receivable, debit balance of $97,900; Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, credit balance of $1,031. What amount should be debited to Bad Debts Expense, assuming 6% of outstanding accounts receivable at the end of the current year will be uncollectible?
$4,843.
$1,031.
$6,905.
$5,874.
$3,951.
28.
A company has $102,000 in outstanding accounts receivable and it uses the allowance method to account for uncollectible accounts. Experience suggests that 6% of outstanding receivables are uncollectible. The current debit balance (before adjustments) in the allowance for doubtful accounts is $920. The journal entry to record the adjustment to the allowance account includes a debit to Bad Debts Expense for:
$5,200
$6,120
$7,040
$920
None of these
29.
A company that uses the net method of recording invoices made a purchase of $900 with terms of 3/10, n/30. The entry to record the purchase would include:
A credit to Cash for $873.
A debit to Cash for $873.
A credit to Discounts Lost for $27.
A debit to Merchandise Inventory for $873.
A debit to Discounts Lost for $27.
30.
The interest accrued on $5,500 at 8% for 45 days is (Use 360 days a year. Do not round intermediate calculations):
$44.
$51.
$220.
$513.
$55.
31.
Marble Company purchased a machine costing $134,000, terms 3/10, n/30. The machine was shipped FOB shipping point and freight charges were $3,400. The machine requires special mounting and wiring connections costing $11,400. When installing the machine, $2,700 in damages occurred. Materials costing $2,900 are used in testing and adjusting the machine to produce a satisfactory product. Compute the cost recorded for this machine assuming Marble paid within the discount period.
$144,280.
$150,380.
$144,980.
$147,680.
$154,400.
32.
An employee earned $45,600 during the year working for an employer. The FICA tax rate for Social Security is 6.2% and the FICA tax rate for Medicare is 1.45%. The employee’s annual FICA taxes amount is:
$3,488.40.
$6,976.80.
$661.20.
Zero, since the employee’s pay exceeds the FICA limit.
$2,827.20.
33.
|
During August, Arena Company sells $363,000 in product that has a one year warranty. Experience shows that warranty expenses average about 4% of the selling price. The warranty liability account has a balance of $13,500 before adjustment. Customers returned product for warranty repairs during the month that used $10,100 in parts for repairs. The entry to record the customer warranty repairs is:
|
|
|
Debit Estimated Warranty Liability $10,100; credit Parts Inventory $10,100.
|
|
|
Debit Warranty Expense $14,520; credit Estimated Warranty Liability $14,520.
|
|
|
Debit Estimated Warranty Liability $14,520; credit Parts Inventory $14,520.
|
|
|
Debit Warranty Expense $10,100; credit Estimated Warranty Liability $10,100.
|
|
|
Debit Warranty Expense $11,120; credit Estimated Warranty Liability $11,120.
|
34.
Arena Company provides health insurance to its employees that costs $14,400 per month. In addition, the company contributes 4% of the employees’ $144,000 gross salary to a retirement program. The entry to record the accrued benefits for the month would include a:
Debit to Employee Retirement Program Payable $5,760.
Credit to Employee Benefits Expense $20,160.
Credit to Employee Benefits Expense $14,400.
Debit to Medical Insurance Payable $14,400.
Debit to Employee Benefits Expense $20,160.
35.
When originally purchased, a vehicle had an estimated useful life of 8 years. The vehicle cost $25,560 and its estimated salvage value is $3,000. After 4 years of straight-line depreciation, the asset’s total estimated useful life was revised from 8 years to 6 years and there was no change in the estimated salvage value. The depreciation expense in year 5 equals:
$2,820.00.
$5,640.00.
$2,988.00.
$5,808.00.
$11,280.00.
36.
Cambria owns equipment that cost $95,300 with accumulated depreciation of $65,200. Cambria asks $35,450 for the equipment but sells the equipment for $33,300. Compute the amount of gain or loss on the sale.
$5,350 gain.
$3,200 loss.
$2,150 gain.
$5,350 loss.
$3,200 gain.
37.
Harvel Company is required by law to collect and remit sales taxes to the state. If Havel has $8,500 of cash sales that are subject to an 7% sales tax, what is the journal entry to record the cash sales?
Debit Cash $9,095; credit Sales $8,500; credit Sales Taxes Payable $595.
Debit Accounts Receivable $9,095; credit Sales $8,500; credit Sales Taxes Payable $595.
Debit Cash $8,500; credit Sales $8,500; and record the sales tax when paid.
Debit Cash $8,500; credit Sales $7,905; credit Sales Taxes Payable $595.
Debit Sales Taxes Payable $595; debit Cash $7,905; credit Sales $8,500.
38.
On November 1, Carter Company signed a 120-day, 10% note payable, with a face value of $18,000. What is the adjusting entry for the accrued interest at December 31 on the note? (Use 360 days a year.)
No journal entry required.
Debit interest expense, $200; credit interest payable, $200.
Debit interest expense, $300; credit interest payable, $300.
Debit interest expense, $400; credit interest payable, $400.
Debit interest expense, $600; credit interest payable, $600.
39.
The following information is available on a depreciable asset owned by First Bank & Trust:
Purchase date October 1, Year 1
Purchase price $122,100
Salvage value $11,700
Useful life 12 years
Depreciation method straight-line
The asset’s book value is $103,700 on October 1, Year 3. On that date, management determines that the asset’s salvage value should be $6,700 rather than the original estimate of $11,700. Based on this information, the amount of depreciation expense the company should recognize during the last three months of Year 3 would be (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your final answer to two decimal places):
$2,358.04
$2,715.18
$2,132.50
$2,592.50
$2,425.00
40.
A company purchased property for $100,000. The property included a building, a parking lot, and land. The building was appraised at $56,000; the land at $49,800, and the parking lot at $19,200. Land should be recorded in the accounting records with an allocated cost of (Do not round intermediate calculations):
$49,800.
$100,000.
$45,840.
$12.
$39,840.
41.
A corporation had 13,500 shares of $5 par value common stock outstanding when the board of directors declared a stock dividend of 4,995 shares. At the time of the stock dividend, the market value per share was $19. The entry to record this dividend is:
Debit Common Stock Dividend Distributable $94,905; credit Retained Earnings $94,905.
Debit Retained Earnings $94,905; credit Common Stock Dividend Distributable $24,975; credit Paid-In Capital in Excess of Par Value, Common Stock $69,930.
Debit Retained Earnings $94,905; credit Common Stock Dividend Distributable $94,905.
Debit Retained Earnings $24,975; credit Common Stock Dividend Distributable $24,975.
No entry is needed.
42.
A company has 2,500 shares of $100 par preferred stock. It also has 20,000 shares of common stock outstanding, and its total stockholders’ equity equals $600,000. The book value per common share is:
$17.50.
$30.00.
$15.56.
$26.67.
$100.00.
43.
Shamrock Company had net income of $33,580. The weighted-average common shares outstanding were 9,200. The company sold 4,200 shares before the end of the year. There were no other stock transactions. The company’s earnings per share is:
$33.58.
$2.51.
$8.00.
$6.72.
$3.65.
44.
The partnership agreement for Smith Wesson & Davis, a general partnership, provided that profits be shared between the partners in the ratio of their financial contributions to the partnership. Smith contributed $140,000, Wesson contributed $84,000 and Davis contributed $28,000. In the partnership’s first year of operation, it incurred a loss of $247,500. What amount of the partnership’s loss, should be absorbed by Smith? (Do not round your intermediate calculations and round your final answer to the nearest whole dollar amount.)
$82,500
$123,750
$61,875
$137,500
$27,500
45.
Badger and Fox are forming a partnership. Badger contributes a building that has a market value of $332,000; the partnership assumes responsibility for a $116,000 note secured by a mortgage on the property. Fox invests $91,000 in cash and equipment that has a market value of $66,000. For the partnership, the amounts recorded for total assets and for total capital account are:
Total assets $373,000; total capital $373,000.
Total assets $489,000; total capital $373,000.
Total assets $605,000; total capital $605,000.
Total assets $489,000; total capital $489,000.
Total assets $373,000; total capital $489,000.
46.
Smith, West, and Krug form a partnership. Smith contributes $204,000, West contributes $170,000, and Krug contributes $306,000. Their partnership agreement calls for a 6% interest allowance on the partner’s capital balances with the remaining income or loss to be allocated equally. If the partnership reports income of $208,800 for its first year, what amount of income is credited to Krug’s capital account?
$56,000.
$68,240.
$69,600.
$74,360.
$66,200.
47.
A corporation declared and issued a 5% stock dividend on November 1. The following information was available immediately prior to the dividend:
Retained earnings $710,000
Shares issued and outstanding 56,000
Market value per share $19
Par value per share $5
The amount that contributed capital will increase (decrease) as a result of recording this stock dividend is:
$0.
$53,200.
$(14,000).
$(53,200).
$14,000.
48.
Smith, West, and Krug form a partnership. Smith contributes $198,000, West contributes $165,000, and Krug contributes $297,000. Their partnership agreement calls for the income or loss division to be based on the ratio of capital invested. If the partnership reports income of $167,000 for its first year, what amount of income is credited to Smith’s capital account? (Do not round your intermediate calculations.)
$55,667.
$75,150.
$57,600.
$41,750.
$50,100.
49.
The following data were reported by a corporation:
Authorized shares40,000
Issued shares35,000
Treasury shares13,500
The number of outstanding shares is:
26,500.
35,000.
53,500.
40,000.
21,500.
50.
Mack, Harris, and Huss are dissolving their partnership. Their partnership agreement allocates income and losses equally among the partners. The current period’s ending capital account balances are Mack, $15,400, Harris, $15,400, Huss, $(2,400). After all the assets are sold and liabilities are paid, but before any contributions to cover any deficiencies, there is $28,400 in cash to be distributed. Huss pays $2,400 to cover the deficiency in his account. The general journal entry to record the final distribution would be:
Debit Cash $28,400; debit Huss, Capital $2,400; credit Mack, Capital $15,400; credit Harris, Capital $15,400.
Debit Mack, Capital $15,400; debit Harris, Capital $15,400; credit Cash $30,800.
Debit Mack, Capital $15,400; debit Harris, Capital $15,400; credit Huss, Capital $2,400; credit Cash $28,400.
Debit Mack, Capital $9,466; debit Harris, Capital $9,467; debit Huss, Capital $9,467; credit Cash $28,400.
Debit Mack, Capital $14,200; debit Harris, Capital $14,200; credit Cash $28,400.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.Nelson Company’s activity for the first six months of 2004 is as follows:
|
Month
|
Machine
Hours
|
Electrical
Cost
|
|
January
|
4,000
|
$3,120
|
|
February
|
6,000
|
4,460
|
|
March
|
4,800
|
3,500
|
|
April
|
3,800
|
3,040
|
|
May
|
3,600
|
2,900
|
|
June
|
4,200
|
3,200
|
Using the high-low method, the variable rate per machine hour would be (Points : 5) $.40
$.65
$.67
$.70
|
2.In the decision to replace an old machine with a new machine, which of the following would be considered a relevant cost? (Points : 5)
|
|
|
The current disposal price of the old equipment The loss on the disposal of the old equipment Depreciation expense on the old equipment The book value of the old equipment
|
|
3.Clarkson Industries produces an electronic calculator that sells for $75 per unit. Variable costs are $45 per unit and fixed costs are $150,000 annually. The company has been averaging an annual income of $100,000 over the past five years. The break-even point for Clarkson Industries would be: (Points : 5)
|
2,000 units. 3,333 units. 5,000 units. 10,000 units.
|
|
4.Contribution margin is the amount remaining after (Points : 5)
|
variable expenses have been deducted from sales revenue. fixed expenses have been deducted from sales revenue. fixed expenses have been deducted from variable expenses. cost of goods sold has been deducted from sales revenues.
|
|
5.The Pohl Company uses a standard cost system in which manufacturing overhead is applied to units of product on the basis of machine hours. For June, the company’s manufacturing overhead flexible budget showed the following total budgeted costs at a denominator activity level of 20,000 machine hours:
|
Variable overhead
|
$26,000
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
30,000
|
During June, 17,000 machine hours were used to complete 13,000 units of product, and the following actual total overhead costs were incurred:
|
Variable overhead
|
$25,330
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
28,820
|
At standard, each unit of finished product requires 1.4 hours of machine time.
The fixed overhead budget variance for June was: (Points : 5)
|
$3,230 F. $3,230 U. $1,180 F. $1,180 U.
|
|
6.Newmax Co. is a manufacturing business. When it pays the workers who assemble its products, the cash account should be decreased and what account should be increased? (Points : 5)
|
Cost of goods sold Work-in-process inventory Manufacturing overhead Finished goods inventory
|
|
7.The Talbot Company produces wheels that are used in the production of bicycles. Talbot’s costs to produce 100,000 wheels annually are:
|
Direct materials
|
$ 30,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
50,000
|
|
Variable overhead
|
20,000
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
70,000
|
|
Total
|
$170,000
|
An outside supplier has offered to sell Talbot similar wheels for $1.25 per wheel. If the wheels were purchased from the outside supplier, $15,000 of annual fixed factory overhead could be avoided.
What is the highest price that Talbot could pay the outside supplier for the wheel and still be economically indifferent between making or buying the wheels? (Points : 5)
|
$1.70 $1.15 $1.00 $ .80
|
|
8.The cost of goods sold in a merchandising firm typically would be classified as a (Points : 5)
|
variable cost. fixed cost. mixed cost. step-variable cost.
|
|
9. Questions 9 and 10 refer to the following:
Jones Co. is considering buying a machine that cost $100,000. If purchased, Jones believes the new machine will reduce its operating cost by $20,000 per year for the next 10 years. At the end of 10 years the machine will have $0 salvage value. If acquired, Jones will depreciate the machine using the straight-line method.
Jones cost of capital is 12%. From present value tables, Jones had identified that the present value factor for an amount of 1, discounted at 12%, is .322, while the present value of a 10 year annuity of 1, discounted at 12%, is 5.65.
Ignoring income taxes, what is the payback period of this project? (Points : 5)
|
5.0 years 4.5 years 4.4 years 4.0 years
|
|
10.Ignoring income taxes, what is the net present value of this project? (Points : 5)
|
$ 5,760 $ 6,440 $12,200 $13,000
|
|
11.The individual generally responsible for explaining the direct-labor efficiency variance is the: (Points : 5)
|
the purchasing agent. the sales manager. the production manager.LINDA the industrial engineering department.
|
|
12.Allen Company collects 25% of a month’s sales in the month of sale, 70% in the month following sale, and 4% in the second month following sale. The remainder is uncollectible. Budgeted sales for the next three months are:
|
April
|
May
|
June
|
|
Budgeted sales
|
$100,000
|
$120,000
|
$110,000
|
Cash collections in Juneare budgeted would be: (Points : 5)
|
$115,500. $111,000. $110,000. $113,400.
|
|
13.Young Enterprises has budgeted sales in units for the next four months as follows:
|
June
|
10,000 units
|
|
July
|
8,000 units
|
|
August
|
12,000 units
|
|
September
|
14,800 units
|
Past experience has shown that the ending inventory for each month should be equal to 20% of the next month’s sales in units. Budgeted production for July should be: (Points : 5)
|
8,800 units. 8,400 units. 8,000 units. 7,200 units.
|
|
14.The Collins Company applies overhead to production orders on the basis of machine hours. At the beginning of 2002, the company made the following estimates:
|
Estimated
Amount
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
$100,000
|
|
Indirect labor cost
|
25,000
|
|
Advertising expense
|
30,000
|
|
Direct materials
|
50,000
|
|
Indirect materials
|
10,000
|
|
Depreciation on factory equipment
|
40,000
|
|
Machine hours to be worked
|
10,000
|
What predetermined overhead rate should Collins Co. use? (Points : 5)
|
$ 3.50 $ 7.50 $ 9.00 $12.00
|
|
15.The purpose of a flexible budget is to: (Points : 5)
|
reduce the total time in preparing the annual budget. compare actual and budgeted results at virtually any level of production. eliminate cyclical fluctuations in production reports by ignoring variable costs. allow management some latitude in meeting goals.
|
|
16.Following is information relating to Kew Co.’s Vale Division for 2001:
|
Sales
|
$500,000
|
|
Variable expenses
|
300,000
|
|
Fixed expenses
|
50,000
|
|
Average operating assets
|
1,000,000
|
|
Minimum desired return
|
12%
|
What was Vale’s residual income? (Points : 5)
|
$120,000 $150,000 $ 30,000 $ 80,000
|
|
17.The labor time required to assemble a product is an example of a: (Points : 5)
|
Unit-level activity. Batch-level activity. Product-level activity. Facility-level activity.
|
|
18.Anola Company has two products: A and B. The company uses activity- based costing to determine product costs. The estimated overhead costs and expected activity for each of the company’s three overhead activity centers are as follows:
|
Activity
Center
|
Estimated
Overhead
Costs
|
Expected Activity
|
|
Total
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
|
Activity 1
|
$18,000
|
500
|
300
|
200
|
|
Activity 2
|
$16,000
|
600
|
500
|
100
|
|
Activity 3
|
$27,000
|
900
|
600
|
300
|
The predetermined overhead rate under the activity-based costing system for Activity 3 is closest to: (Points : 5)
|
$30.00. $30.50. $90.00. $67.78.
|
|
19.A standard is: (Points : 5)
|
unrelated to budgeting since standards are used for control purposes only. normally set at the ideal rather than the practical level of cost, efficiency, or quantity. normally not applied to the variable portion of overhead. the budgeted cost for one unit of product.
|
|
20.Which of the following would be most appropriate for evaluating a cost center? (Points : 5)
|
Return on investment
Contribution margin percentage
A static budget
A standard costing system
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare Financial Statements from Adjusted Trial Balance Worksheet
The 2012 year-end adjusted balances taken from the general ledger of Cooperstown Services, Inc. are listed below in general ledger order.
|
Coopertown Suppliers, Inc.
|
|
|
DR
|
CR
|
|
Cash
|
$12,950
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
28,150
|
|
|
Supplies
|
8,400
|
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
9,500
|
|
|
Land
|
115,000
|
|
|
Buildings
|
360,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
260,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
|
$239,900
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
35,300
|
|
Salaries payable
|
|
7,300
|
|
Taxes payable
Common stock
|
|
5,200
31,500
|
|
Additional paid-in capital Common
Retained earnings
|
|
15,400
427,600
|
|
Dividends
|
25,400
|
|
|
Service revenue
|
|
475,000
|
|
Salaries expense
|
335,600
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
25,100
|
|
|
Supplies expense
|
12,950
|
|
|
Insurance expense
|
8,200
|
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
30,850
|
|
|
Utilities expense
|
5,100
|
|
|
Total
|
$1,237,200
|
$1,237,200
|
Transfer these accounts and balances to a spreadsheet worksheet and prepare an Income statement, a Classified Balance Sheet, and a Statement of Retained Earnings all in good form using proper headings for each statement. Note that Cooperstown is a service company so there is no cost of goods sold in its chart of accounts. Also, assume that all the liabilities are current liabilities. Keep in mind that you should not report any accounts without balances in your statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The 2012 year-end adjusted balances taken from the general ledger of Cooperstown Services, Inc. are listed below in general ledger order.
|
Coopertown Suppliers, Inc.
|
|
|
DR
|
CR
|
|
Cash
|
$12,950
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
28,150
|
|
|
Supplies
|
8,400
|
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
9,500
|
|
|
Land
|
115,000
|
|
|
Buildings
|
360,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
260,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
|
$239,900
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
35,300
|
|
Salaries payable
|
|
7,300
|
|
Taxes payable
Common stock
|
|
5,200
31,500
|
|
Additional paid-in capital Common
Retained earnings
|
|
15,400
427,600
|
|
Dividends
|
25,400
|
|
|
Service revenue
|
|
475,000
|
|
Salaries expense
|
335,600
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
25,100
|
|
|
Supplies expense
|
12,950
|
|
|
Insurance expense
|
8,200
|
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
30,850
|
|
|
Utilities expense
|
5,100
|
|
|
Total
|
$1,237,200
|
$1,237,200
|
Transfer these accounts and balances to a spreadsheet worksheet and prepare an Income statement, a Classified Balance Sheet, and a Statement of Retained Earnings all in good form using proper headings for each statement. Note that Cooperstown is a service company so there is no cost of goods sold in its chart of accounts. Also, assume that all the liabilities are current liabilities. Keep in mind that you should not report any accounts without balances in your statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
21.2 Balanced Books Bookkeeping Jessica and David are student interns at Balanced Books Bookkeeping. They have taken several business math and accounting classes and are now applying what they have learned to real-life situ- ations. They enjoy their internship, but they are sometimes surprised by the assignments they are given. Luckily, they work together, so they share the assignments and learn from each other. Their most recent assignment is to take a listing of accounts provided by one of Balanced Books clients and turn them into a balance sheet and income statement. David suggests that their client might ap- preciate it if they also performed a vertical analysis of each statement. Jessica suggests that they should also compute the current ratio and the acid-test ratio. 1. Create the financial statements for December 31, 2011, depict them in vertical format, and compute the current and acid test ratios. Account title Amount Account title Amount Cash $4,000 Accounts payable $3,500 Depreciation 2,000 Merchandise inventory 15,000 Carlton, equity 34,500 Accounts receivable 6,000 Cost of goods sold 85,000 Net sales 120,000 Rent expense 15,000 Insurance payable 500 Wages payable 1,500 Equipment 15,000 Utilities 6,500 Wages 8,000 Miscellaneous expenses 1,500 write a paragraph or so summarizing what you “took-away” from Case Study 21-2, p. 769. You can also include a real-world application of the tools used in each case study.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
21.2 Balanced Books Bookkeeping Jessica and David are student interns at Balanced Books Bookkeeping. They have taken several business math and accounting classes and are now applying what they have learned to real-life situ- ations. They enjoy their internship, but they are sometimes surprised by the assignments they are given. Luckily, they work together, so they share the assignments and learn from each other. Their most recent assignment is to take a listing of accounts provided by one of Balanced Books clients and turn them into a balance sheet and income statement. David suggests that their client might ap- preciate it if they also performed a vertical analysis of each statement. Jessica suggests that they should also compute the current ratio and the acid-test ratio. 1. Create the financial statements for December 31, 2011, depict them in vertical format, and compute the current and acid test ratios. Account title Amount Account title Amount Cash $4,000 Accounts payable $3,500 Depreciation 2,000 Merchandise inventory 15,000 Carlton, equity 34,500 Accounts receivable 6,000 Cost of goods sold 85,000 Net sales 120,000 Rent expense 15,000 Insurance payable 500 Wages payable 1,500 Equipment 15,000 Utilities 6,500 Wages 8,000 Miscellaneous expenses 1,500 write a paragraph or so summarizing what you “took-away” from Case Study 21-2, p. 769. You can also include a real-world application of the tools used in each case study.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mark Mitton, the liaison to the IS department, has eliminated all but the best three systems. Mark developed a list of required features, carefully reviewed each system, talked to other users, and interviewed appropriate systems representatives. Mark used a point-scoring system to assign weights to each requirement. Mark developed Table 21-4 to help him select the best system.
a. Use a spreadsheet to develop a point-scoring matrix and determine which system Mark should select.
b. Susan Shelton did not agree with Mark s weightings and suggested the following changes:
Flexibility
|
|
|
60
|
|
Reputation and reliability
|
50
|
|
Quality of support utilities
|
10
|
|
Graphics capability
|
10
|
When the changes are made, which vendor should Mark recommend
c. Mark s manager suggested the following changes to Susan s weightings:
Reputation and reliability
|
|
|
90
|
|
Installation assistance
|
40
|
|
Experience with similar systems
|
40
|
|
Training assistance
|
65
|
|
Internal memory size
|
10
|
Will the manager s changes affect the decision about which system to buy?
d. What can you conclude about point scoring from the changes made by Susan and Mark s manager? Develop your own weighting scale to evaluate the software packages. What other selection criteria would you use? Be prepared to discuss your results with the class.
e. What are the weaknesses of the point-scoring method?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
9. Jot Construction Company uses the percentage-of-completion method of accounting. In 2013, Jot began work on a contract it had received which provided for a contract price of $6,000,000. Additional information related to the project includes: costs incurred during the year were $1,400,000; estimated costs to complete as of December 31, 2013 were $2,100,000. What amount should Jot recognize as gross profit for the project in 2013?
|
$700,000 $1,000,000 $1,500,000 $2,500,000
|
|
10. Swift Builders, Inc. uses the completed-contract method of accounting for a $450,000 contract that it expects will take two years to complete. At December 31, 2013, the end of the first year of the contract, additional information related to the project includes: costs incurred to date were $290,000; estimated costs to complete were $180,000; billings to date were $325,000; collections to date were $300,000. What amount should Swift recognize as gross profit or loss for 2013?
|
$ -0- a $20,000 loss a $40,000 loss a $110,000 loss
|
|
11. Miller Company appropriately uses the installment method of accounting to recognize income in its financial statements. Pertinent data relating to this method of accounting includes: installment sales totaled $400,000 for 2013 and $500,000 for 2014; cost of sales were $260,000 for 2013 and $300,00 for 2014; in 2013 Miller collected $280,000 from 2013 sales; in 2014 Miller collected $100,000 from 2013 sales and $300,000 from 2014 sales. What amount should Miller report as realized gross profit on the 2014 income statement?
|
$155,000 $120,000 $98,000 $35,000
|
|
12. In a consignment sale, the consignor (Points : 6)
|
does not show the merchandise as an asset on its books. recognizes revenue only after receiving notification of sale and the cash remittance from the consignee. recognizes revenue when it ships merchandise to the consignee. periodically prepares an “account report” for the consignee.
|
|
13. If Collier Costumes, Inc. has the following items at year-end, how much should it report as cash on the balance sheet?
|
Cash in bank
|
$25,700
|
|
Cash on hand
|
$620
|
|
Post-dated checks
|
$1,680
|
|
Certificates of deposit
|
$80,000
|
|
$80,000 $28,000 $26,320 $620
|
|
14. At December 31, 2013, Vega Vacuum Corporation has cash in bank of 38,500, restricted cash in a separate account of $9,000, and a bank overdraft at another bank of $750. How much should it report as cash on the balance sheet?
|
$38,500 $29,500 $37,750 $46,750
|
|
15. Which of the following is not classified as cash on the balance sheet? (Points : 6)
|
Postage stamps Post-dated checks Cash restricted for plant expansion All of the above
|
|
16.Corresponds to CLO 4(d) The month-end bank statement for Guthrie Motors shows a balance of $152,000 and a bank service charge of $40. Outstanding checks are $35,000, a deposit of $10,000 was in transit at month end, and a check for $1,500 was erroneously charged by the bank against the account. The correct balance in the bank account at month end is (Points : 6)
|
$125,000 $125,460 $128,500 $128,460
|
|
17.Corresponds to CLO 5(a) As of December 31, Gammelguard Corporation has outstanding accounts receivable of $1.5 million. Sales on credit during the year were $9 million. The allowance for doubtful accounts has a credit balance of $20,000. If the company estimates that 9% of its outstanding receivables will be uncollectible, what will be the amount of bad debt expense recognized for the year? (Points : 6)
|
$115,000 $135,000 $155,000 $810,000
|
|
18.Corresponds to CLO 5(b) As of December 31, Wiliams Corporation has outstanding accounts receivable of $3.6 million. Sales on credit during the year were $12.5 million. The allowance for doubtful accounts has a credit balance of $62,000. If the company estimates that 1% of its net credit sales will be uncollectible, what will be the amount of bad debt expense recognized for the year? (Points : 6)
|
$63,000 $125,000 $187,000 $360,000
|
|
19.Corresponds to CLO 5(c) Kandris Corporation had a balance in accounts receivable of $450,000 and a balance in allowance for doubtful accounts of $34,000, when management decided the accounts receivable from Dunn Corporation of $1,800 had become uncollectible. What journal entry should Kandris Corporation make to write-off the uncollectible account? (Points : 6)
|
Debit Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, credit Accounts Receivable, $1,800 Debit Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, credit Bad Debt Expense, $1,800 Debit Bad Debt Expense, credit Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, $1,800 Debit Accounts Receivable, credit Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, $1,800
|
|
20.Corresponds to CLO 5(d) At December 31, Norman Industrial Inc. had account balances before year-end adjusting entries for accounts receivable and the related allowance for doubtful accounts of $850,000 and $79,000 respectively. An aging of accounts receivable indicated that $88,000 of December 31, receivables are expected to be uncollectible. The net realizable value of accounts receivable after adjustment is (Points : 6)
|
$938,000 $929,000 $771,000 $762,000
|
|
21.Corresponds to CLO 6(a) The following is a record of Axis Corporation’s inventory transactions for the current month:
|
June 1
|
Balance, 300 units @ $65 each
|
June 16
|
Sale, 400 units @ $90
|
|
June 14
|
Purchase 800 units @ $68 each
|
June 20
|
Sale, 500 units @ $90
|
|
June 25
|
Purchase 250 units @ $70
|
|
|
Axis uses the periodic inventory system. Using the FIFO method, what is the amount of cost of goods sold for the month?
(Points : 6)
|
$61,700 $60,300 $58,500 $31,100
|
|
22.Corresponds to CLO 6(b) The following is a record of Meyer Corporation’s inventory transactions for the current month:
|
October 1
|
Balance, 500 units @ $24 each
|
October 9
|
Sale, 500 units @ $51
|
|
October 12
|
Purchase 900 units @ $26 each
|
October 19
|
Sale, 800 units @ $51
|
|
October 25
|
Purchase 600 units @ $27 each
|
|
|
Meyer uses the periodic inventory system. Using the LIFO method, what is the amount of ending inventory on October 31?
(Points : 6)
|
$18,900 $16,800 $34,600 $17,200
|
|
23.Corresponds to CLO 6(c) The following is a record of Tiller Corporation’s inventory transactions for the current month:
|
January 1
|
Balance, 500 units @ $10 each
|
January 5
|
Sale, 290 units @ $25
|
|
January 11
|
Purchase, 300 units @ $12 each
|
January 13
|
Sale, 250 units @ $25
|
|
January 23
|
Purchase, 400 units @ $13 each
|
January 27
|
Sale, 310 units @ $25
|
Tiller uses the periodic inventory system. Using the weighted-average inventory method, what is the cost of goods sold for the month of January?
(Points : 6)
|
$14,004 $9,775 $4,085 $4,025
|
|
24.Corresponds to CLO 6(d) The following is a record of Caulder Corporation’s inventory transactions for the current month:
|
March 1
|
Balance, 500 units @ $40 each
|
March 12
|
Sale, 200 units @ $85
|
|
March 16
|
Purchase, 300 units @ $42 each
|
March 22
|
Sale, 350 units @ $85
|
|
March 28
|
Purchase, 300 units @ $43 each
|
|
|
Caulder uses the perpetual inventory system. Using the LIFO method, what is the ending inventory on March 31?
(Points : 6)
|
$22,900 $22,100 $22,600 $23,400
|
|
25.Corresponds to CLO 7(a) In the context of dollar-value LIFO, when inventory in base year dollars increases, (Points : 6)
|
The LIFO reserve decreases The LIFO price index increases A LIFO layer is created A LIFO layer is liquidated
|
|
26.Corresponds to CLO 7(b) Hemmer Corporation adopted the dollar-value LIFO method of inventory valuation on December 31, 2011. Its inventory at that date was 450,000 and the relevant price index was 100. Information regarding inventory for subsequent years is as follows:
|
Date
|
Inventory at Current Prices
|
Current Price Index
|
|
December 31, 2012
|
$513,600
|
107
|
|
December 31, 2013
|
$580,000
|
125
|
|
December 31, 2014
|
$650,000
|
130
|
What is the ending inventory at December 31, 2012 under dollar-value LIFO?
(Points : 6)
|
$464,000 $464,980 $482,100 $497,080
|
|
27.Corresponds to CLO 7(c) What is primary purpose of stating inventories at lower-of-cost-or-market? (Points : 6)
|
To report a loss when there is a decrease in the future utility below the original cost To be conservative To report a loss whenever there is a decrease in the future utility To permit future profits to be recognized
|
|
28.Corresponds to CLO 7(d) If the historical cost of product X is $64, the selling price of product X is $90, the costs to sell product X are $14, the replacement cost for product X is $55, and the normal profit margin is 30% of sales price, what is the market value that should be used in the lower-of-cost-or-market comparison? (Points : 6)
|
$64 $49 $76 $55
|
|
29.Corresponds to CLO 8(a) Energy Solutions Corporation estimates the cost of its physical inventory at November 30 for use in an interim financial statement. Management uses a gross profit rate on sales of 40%. The following information is available:
|
Inventory, November 1
|
$500,000
|
|
Purchases during November
|
$650,000
|
|
Sales during November
|
$900,000
|
The estimated cost of inventory at November 30 is
(Points : 6)
|
$360,000 $540,000 $610,000 $650,000
|
|
30.Corresponds to CLO 8(b) Which of the following is not a basic assumption of the gross profit method of estimating inventory? (Points : 6)
|
The beginning inventory plus the purchases equal total goods to be accounted for. Goods not sold must be on hand. The sales, reduced to cost, deducted from the sum of the opening inventory plus purchases, equal ending inventory. The total amount of purchases and the total amount of sales remain relatively unchanged from the comparable previous period.
|
|
31.Corresponds to CLO 8(c) Arrow Corporation uses the conventional retail inventory method to value its merchandise inventory. The following information is available for the current year:
|
|
Cost
|
Retail
|
|
Beginning Inventory
|
$30,000
|
$50,000
|
|
Purchases
|
$180,000
|
$250,000
|
|
Freight-In
|
$2,500
|
—-
|
|
Net Markups
|
|
$8,500
|
|
Net Markdowns
|
|
$10,000
|
|
Employee Discounts
|
|
$1,000
|
|
Sales
|
|
$205,000
|
What is the cost to retail ratio?
(Points : 6)
|
68.88% 68.07% 70.35% 70.83%
|
|
32.Corresponds to CLO 8(d) Capital City Corporation uses the conventional retail inventory method to determine its ending inventory at cost. The following information is available for the current year:
|
|
Cost
|
Retail
|
|
Beginning Inventory
|
$300,000
|
$420,000
|
|
Purchases
|
$1,450,000
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Net Markups
|
|
$80,000
|
|
Net Markdowns
|
|
$30,000
|
|
Sales
|
|
$1,900,000
|
Capital City determines that the cost-to-retail ratio is 70%. What is the ending inventory at cost?
(Points : 6)
|
$520,000 $399,000 $300,000 $570,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
25. All of the following qualitative considerations may impact upon capital investments analysis except:
a. time value of money
b. employee morale
c. the impact on product quality
d. manufacturing flexibility
26. All of the following are factors that may complicate capital investment analysis except:
a. the leasing alternative
b. changes in price levels
c. sunk cost
d. the federal income tax
27. The Nite Lite Factory produces two products – small lamps and desk lamps. It has two separate departments – finishing and production. The overhead budget for the finishing department is $550,000, using 500,000 direct labor hours. The overhead budget for the production department is $400,000 using 80,000 direct labor hours. If the budget estimates that a desk lamp will require 1 hours of finishing and 2 hours of production, how much factory overhead will be allocated to each unit of desk lamps using the multiple production department factory overhead rate method with an allocation base of direct labor hours?
a. $11.10
b. $4.91
c. $5.00
d. $10.00
28. Using a plant-wide factory overhead rate distorts product costs when:
a. products require different ratios of allocation-base usage in each production department
b. significant differences exist in the factory overhead rates used across different production departments
c. both A and B exist
d. either A or B exist
29. Which of the following is characteristic of a traditional cost system?
a. Many work in process account transactions
b. Reliance on financial performance measures
c. Many process control points
d. All of the above
30. The local college is aggressively working in reducing the time that a student needs to enroll for each semester. All except one of the following changes is helping in their efforts.
a. Counselors are specializing in common degree plans.
b. One application is good at the Community college and at the transferring University.
c. A one stop area includes registration, admissions, advising, and ID s. Each working closely with each other.
d. Reduce the number of degrees being offered.
Problems:
31. Diamond Company produces a chair that requires 5 yds. of material per unit. The standard price of one yard of material is $7.50. During the month, 8,500 chairs were manufactured, using 40,000 yards at a cost of $7.60. Determine the (a) price variance, (b) quantity variance, and (c) cost variance (6 points).
32. Some items are omitted from each of the following condensed divisional income statements of Willis Inc (8 points):
Division L Division M Division N
Sales $ (1) $320,000 $580,000
Cost of goods sold 480,000 120,000 $ (5)
Gross profit $220,000 $ (3) $180,000
Operating expenses 95,000 160,000 $ (6)
Income from operations $ (2) $ (4) $ 75,000
(a) Determine the amount of the missing items, identifying them by number.
(b) Based on income from operations, which division is the most profitable?
33. Delicious Cake Factory normally sells their specialty cake for $22. An offer to buy 100 cakes for $18 per cake was made by an organization hosting a national event in the city. The variable cost per cake is $12. A special decoration per cake will add another $1 to the cost. Determine the differential income or loss per cake from selling the cakes (10 points).
34.
Year 6% 10% 12%
1 .943 .909 .893
2 1.833 1.736 1.690
3 2.673 2.487 2.402
4 3.465 3.170 3.037
5 4.212 3.791 3.605
6 4.917 4.355 4.111
7 5.582 4.868 4.564
8 6.210 5.335 4.968
9 6.802 5.759 5.328
10 7.360 6.145 5.650
A project is estimated to cost $273,840 and provide annual cash flows of $60,000 for seven years. Determine the internal rate of return for this project, using the above table (6 points).
35. Nite Lite Factory produces two similar products – small lamps and desk lamps. The total plant budget is $800,000 with 640,000 estimated direct labor hours. It is further estimated that small lamp production will have 375,000 direct labor hours and desk lamp production will require 265,000 direct labor hours (10 points).
(a) Determine the single plant factory overhead rate based on direct labor hours.
(b) How much is the factory overhead cost per unit if each small lamp uses 3 hours per unit?
(c) How much is the factory overhead cost per unit if each desk lamp uses 2.5 hours per unit?
(d) How much total factory overhead will be allocated to the small lamp production if 130,000 units are produced during the period?
(e) How much total factory overhead will be allocated to the desk lamp production if 104,000 are produced during the period?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
QUESTIONS :
1.On September 30, the Cash account of Value Company had a normal balance of $5,700. During September, the account was debited for a total of $12,900 and credited for a total of $12,200. What was the balance in the Cash account at the beginning of September?
A $6,400 credit balance.
A $6,400 debit balance.
A $0 balance.
A $5,000 debit balance.
A $5,000 credit balance.
2.
A company had no office supplies available at the beginning of the year. During the year, the company purchased $370 worth of office supplies. On December 31, $135 worth of office supplies remained. How much should the company report as office supplies expense for the year?
$135.
$185.
$235.
$370.
$505.
3.
On January 1 of the current year, Bob’s Lawn Care Service reported owner’s capital totaling $124,400. During the current year, total revenues were $97,900 while total expenses were $83,600. Also, during the current year Bob withdrew $21,900 from the company. No other changes in equity occurred during the year. If, on December 31 of the current year, total assets are $196,000, the change in owner’s capital during the year was:
A decrease of $7,600.
An decrease of $36,200.
An increase of $7,600.
Impossible to determine from the information provided.
A increase of $36,200.
4.
On March 31, Phoenix, Inc. paid Melanie Publishing Company $21,600 for a 3-year subscription for five different magazines. The subscriptions started immediately. What amount should appear in the Prepaid Subscription account for Phoenix Company after adjustments on December 31 each year assuming Phoenix using a calendar reporting period?
$21,600; $16,200; $9,000; $1,800.
$5,400; $7,200; $7,200; $1,800.
$7,200; $7,200; $7,200.
$16,200; $9,000; $1,800; $0.
The answer cannot be determined based on the information given.
5.
A trial balance taken at year-end showed total credits exceed total debits by $5,760. This discrepancy could have been caused by:
The balance of $57,600 in Accounts Payable being entered in the trial balance as $640.
The balance of $6,400 in the Office Equipment account being entered on the trial balance as a debit of $640.
An error in the general journal where a $5,760 increase in Accounts Payable was recorded as a decrease in Accounts Payable.
A net income of $5,760.
An error in the general journal where a $5,760 increase in Accounts Receivable was recorded as an increase in Cash.
6.
A $190 credit to Office Equipment was credited to Fees Earned by mistake. By what amounts are the accounts under- or overstated as a result of this error?
Office Equipment, overstated $190; Fees Earned, overstated $190.
Office Equipment, overstated $380; Fees Earned, understated $190.
Office Equipment, understated $380; Fees Earned, overstated $190.
Office Equipment, understated $190; Fees Earned, overstated $190.
Office Equipment, overstated $190; Fees Earned, understated $190.
7.
On April 30, Holden Company had an Accounts Receivable balance of $19,600. During the month of May, total credits to Accounts Receivable were $53,600 from customer payments. The May 31 Accounts Receivable balance was $14,600. What was the amount of credit sales during May?
$5,000.
$48,600.
$34,200.
$58,600.
$53,600.
8.
On April 1, a company paid the $2,052 premium on a three-year insurance policy with benefits beginning on that date. What will be the insurance expense on the annual income statement for the year ended December 31? (Round your answer to 1 decimal places.)
$2,052.00.
$684.00.
$1,539.00.
$513.00.
$57.00.
9.
At the beginning of January of the current year, Thomas Law Center’s ledger reflected a normal balance of $52,000 for accounts receivable. During January, the company collected $14,800 from customers on account and provided additional services to customers on account totaling $12,500. Additionally, during January one customer paid Thomas $5,000 for services to be provided in the future. At the end of January, the balance in the accounts receivable account should be:
$49,300.
$54,300.
$2,300.
$49,700.
$54,700.
10.
Stride Along has total assets of $425 million. Its total liabilities are $110 million. Its equity is $315 million. Calculate the debt ratio.
38.6%.
13.5%.
34.9%.
25.9%.
14.9%.
11.
The following information is available for the Travis Travel Agency. After closing entries are posted, what will be the balance in the Jay Travis, Capital account?
Total revenues $128,000
Total expenses 61,500
Jay Travis, Capital 75,000
Jay Travis, Withdrawals 16,500
$66,500.
$75,000.
$125,000.
$141,500.
$281,000.
12.
A company normally sells its product for $30 per unit. However, the selling price has fallen to $25 per unit. This company’s current inventory consists of 100 units purchased at $26 per unit. Replacement cost has now fallen to $23 per unit. Calculate the value of this company’s inventory at the lower of cost or market.
$2,500.
$2,400.
$2,600.
$2,250.
$2,300.
13.
Use the information in the adjusted trial balance presented below to calculate current assets for Jones Company:
Account TitleDr.Cr.
Cash 24,000
Accounts receivable 17,000
Prepaid insurance 7,600
Equipment 110,000
Accumulated Depreciation – Equipment 55,000
Land 105,000
Accounts payable 18,000
Interest payable 2,900
Unearned revenue 6,000
Long-term notes payable 40,000
J. Jones, Capital 141,700
Totals 263,600 263,600
$21,700.
$48,600.
$26,900.
$103,600.
$44,200.
14.
A company has net sales and cost of goods sold of $754,000 and $544,600, respectively. Its net income is $17,730. The company’s gross margin and operating expenses are ________ and ___________, respectively.
$191,670; $209,400
$227,130; $526,870
$736,270; $191,670
$209,400; $191,670
$526,870; $227,130
15.
A company purchased $4,400 worth of merchandise. Transportation costs were an additional $400. The company later returned $325 worth of merchandise and paid the invoice within the 1% cash discount period. The total amount paid for this merchandise is:
$4,431.00.
$4434.25.
$4,075.00.
$4,475.00.
$4,356.00.
16.
Based on the following information from Raptor Company’s balance sheet, calculate the current ratio.
Current assets $ 87,000
Long-term investments 50,000
Plant assets 250,000
Current liabilities 39,000
Long-term liabilities 90,000
Raptor, Capital 258,000
.45.
3.51.
3.33.
1.06.
2.23.
17.
Herald Company had sales of $141,000, sales discounts of $3,200, and sales returns of $4,400. Herald Company’s net sales equals:
$141,000.
$133,400.
$148,600.
$137,800.
$7,600.
18.
Thelma Company reported cost of goods sold for Year 1 and Year 2 as follows:
Year 1Year 2
Beginning inventory$ 123,000 $ 130,600
Cost of goods purchased 250,600 278,000
Cost of goods available for sale 373,600 408,600
Ending inventory 130,600 135,600
Cost of goods sold$ 243,000 $ 273,000
Thelma Company made two errors: 1) ending inventory at the end of Year 1 was understated by $15,600 and 2) ending inventory at the end of Year 2 was overstated by $6,600. Given this information, the correct cost of goods sold figure for Year 2 would be:
$288,600
$279,600
$252,000
$266,400
$295,200
19.
Bentley records adjusting entries on December 31 year end. At December 31, employees had earned $12,500 of unpaid and unrecorded salaries. The next payday is January 3, during which $31,000 will be paid. Prepare the January 1 journal entry to reverse the effect of the December 31 salary expense accrual.
Debit Salaries expense $12,500; credit Salaries payable $12,500.
Debit Salaries expense $18,500; debit Salaries payable $12,500; credit Cash $31,000.
Debit Salaries payable $18,500; credit Cash $18,500.
Debit Salaries payable $12,500, credit Salaries expense $12,500.
Debit Salaries expense $18,500; credit Salaries payable $18,500.
20.
The Unadjusted Trial Balance columns of a work sheet total $84,500. The Adjustments columns contain entries for the following:
1.
Office supplies used during the period, $1,450.
2.
Expiration of prepaid rent, $950.
3.
Accrued salaries expense, $750.
4.
Depreciation expense, $1,050.
5.
Accrued service fees receivable, $650.
The Adjusted Trial Balance columns total is:
$79,650.
$84,500.
$86,950.
$87,150.
$89,350.
21.
The following information is available for Holland Company at December 31:
Money market fund balance$ 2,920
Certificate of deposit maturing June 30 of next year$ 16,300
Postdated checks from customers$ 1,800
Cash in bank account$ 23,731
NSF checks from customers returned by bank$ 780
Cash in petty cash fund $ 330
Inventory of postage stamps $ 31
U.S. Treasury bill purchased on December 15 and maturing
on February 28 of following year
$ 11,300
Based on this information, Holland Company should report Cash and Cash Equivalents on December 31 of:
$38,281
$40,861
$43,312
$54,581
$39,301
22.
A company had net sales of $540,000, total sales of $690,000, and an average accounts receivable of $83,000. Its accounts receivable turnover equals (Round your final answer to two decimal places):
0.15
0.78
0.12
6.51
8.31
23.
Martha Company has an established petty cash fund in the amount of $500. The fund was last reimbursed on November 30. At the end of December, the fund contained the following petty cash receipts:
December 4 Freight charge for merchandise purchased$ 56
December 7 Freight charge for delivery to customer$ 80
December 12 Purchase of office supplies$ 45
December 18 Donation to charitable organization$ 64
If, in addition to these receipts, the petty cash fund contains $246.00 of cash, the journal entry to reimburse the fund on December 31 will include:
A debit to Transportation-In of $101.
A debit to Transportation-Out of $101.
A credit to Cash Over and Short of $9.00.
A debit to Cash Over and Short of $9.00.
A credit to Office Supplies of $80.
24.
A company had net sales of $31,400 and ending accounts receivable of $2,800 for the current period. Its days’ sales uncollected equals. (Use 365 days a year and round your final answer to two decimal places):
24.55 days.
47.85 days.
32.55 days.
43.75 days.
11.21 days.
25.
Teller purchased merchandise from TechCom on October 17 of the current year and TechCom accepted Teller’s $8,400, 90-day, 8% note. What entry should TechCom make on January 15 of the next year when the note is paid? (Use 360 days a year. Do not round intermediate calculations.)
Debit Notes Receivable $8,400; debit Interest Receivable $168; credit Sales $8,568.
Debit Cash $8,568; credit Interest Revenue $28; credit Interest Receivable $140; credit Notes Receivable $8,400.
Debit Cash $4,920; credit Interest Revenue $100; credit Interest Receivable $20; credit Notes Receivable $4,800.
Debit Cash $8,568; credit Notes Receivable $8,568.
Debit Cash $8,568; credit Interest Revenue $168; credit Notes Receivable $8,400.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mr. Remick asks 9-year-old Anne to divide a pitcher of lemonade equally between two glasses, one each for her and her friend Kate. The two glasses are different shapes, with Anne’s being tall and thin and Kate’s being short and wide. After Anne pours the lemonade, Mr. Remick says to her, “Look, the lemonade in your glass is higher than the lemonade in Kate’s glass. Did you give yourself more than you gave Kate?” “No,” Anne replies, “my glass is skinnier.” Mr. Remick continues to ask Anne questions to determine how well she understands that height compensates for width in this situation. Mr. Remick’s strategy can best be described as illustrating:
A.Class inclusion
B.The clinical method
C.Equilibration
D.Reciprocal teaching
Which one of the following reflects class inclusion as Piaget described it?
A.Identifying a shape as a square one day but as a triangle the next
B.Understanding that some behaviors that are perfectly acceptable at home are unacceptable at school
C.Getting cows and horses confused
D.Realizing that things that are cars are also vehicles
Question 3 of 25
5.0 Points
Five-year-old Becky is playing with blocks, stacking them one on top of another until her towers eventually tumble, and then stacking them again. Which one of the following best reflects Piaget’s view of how Becky is probably learning in this situation?
A.Because she is probably still in the sensorimotor stage, she will remember what she learns about the blocks only while the blocks are still in front of her.
B.Because she builds one tower after another, she is obviously reinforced by seeing her towers tumble down.
C.She is actively thinking about and interpreting the results of her actions.
D.She is absorbing information about how the environment behaves (e.g., “objects fall”) without consciously thinking about it.
Question 4 of 25
5.0 Points
Which one of the following best reflects the use of the sensory register component of the human information processing system?
A.Carrie can remember the name of another girl just long enough to introduce her to someone else.
B.Bill can remember something he heard for a second or two even though he wasn’t paying attention.
C.Abe can remember a melody for several hours, even though he doesn’t remember the words.
D.Danika understands the concept of gravity because she can relate it to her own experiences.
To prepare for his test on Tuesday morning, Harry studied on Monday night. He remembered the information long enough to do well on the test on Tuesday but could not remember it for a surprise quiz a week later. Based on this information, how far in Harry’s information processing system did the information get?
A.It reached long-term memory.
B.It reached the sensory register.
C.It reached working memory.
D.It never got into the memory system at all.
Question 6 of 25
5.0 Points
Which one of the following situations reflects the typical duration of working memory?
A.Carol remembers most of the information that she has been learning about World War II in class this week, but she remembers very little of what she learned about World War I two weeks ago.
B.At noon, Barnie makes a mental list of the five homework assignments he needs to complete that night. At 3:00 he checks himself and realizes that he still remembers all five. However, by 7:00 p.m. he cannot recall two of the five assignments.
C.Darrell looks up the correct spelling of the word fossil, repeats the letters once, and closes the dictionary. But by the time he finds a piece of paper on which to write the word, he has forgotten how to spell it.
D.Arnie remembers his locker combination through the entire school year. By the end of summer vacation, however, he has forgotten it.
Question 7 of 25
5.0 Points
Four high school teachers have just learned that one of their students, Ralph, has scored extremely well on an intelligence test. Which teacher reveals a belief in the concept of g in intelligence?
A.Mr. Grant says, “Ralph has trouble remembering basic math facts, but he’s very good when it comes to solving challenging math problems.”
B.Mr. Hudson says, “No wonder Ralph performs consistently well in all of his classes!”
C.Ms. Wyman says, “I agree that Ralph writes very well, but his spelling is atrocious.”
D.Ms. Crawford says, “Ralph is an exceptional writer, but from what I’ve observed, his math skills are only average.”
Question 8 of 25
5.0 Points
Max is quite skilled in cartography, the art of making maps. Without knowing anything else about Max, in which of Gardner’s multiple intelligences would you expect him to be strong?
A.linguistic
B.spatial
C.bodily-kinesthetic
D.naturalist
Robert is a 15-year-old boy who has attended U.S. schools since he began kindergarten at age 5. With this fact in mind, identify the task that is most likely to require Robert’s fluid intelligence rather than his crystallized intelligence.
A.Applying algebra to a mathematical word problem
B.Finding Egypt on a map
C.Solving a new kind of puzzle
D.Writing a persuasive essay on a current issue in the news
Question 10 of 25
5.0 Points
Early explanations of language development rested heavily on the roles of modeling and reinforcement in learning language. Which one of the following children’s utterances casts doubt on the idea that modeling and reinforcement are sufficient to explain how children acquire language?
A.”No do dat no more!”
B.”Peek-a-boo, I see you!”
C.”Where are you going?”
D.”More!”
Question 11 of 25
5.0 Points
Three of the following children are behaving in ways consistent with what information processing theorists have learned about children’s early language capabilities. Which one is behaving consistently with what researchers have learned about what children can and cannot do in the first few years of life?
A.Claudia, who is 5 months old, pays more attention to her father when he talks to her using short, simple, sing-songy sentences.
B.Alec, who is 3 weeks old, seems more intrigued by rock and roll music than by his mother’s voice.
C.Donald, who is 16 months old, knows what a teddy bear is but has never heard the word lion before. When his mother shows him three teddy bears and a stuffed lion and says, “Show me the lion,” Donald hesitates and then points to the lion.
D.Bryn, who is 2 months old, seems to be more easily comforted by her father’s voice than by the voice of a strange man whose voice has a similar pitch but is significantly louder and in a different language.
Question 12 of 25
5.0 Points
Three-year-old Robert is visiting the local zoo with his preschool class. When his teacher exclaims, “Look at the giraffe!” Robert first looks at the teacher’s face and then follows her gaze to the strange creature she is looking at. Robert’s behavior in this situation reflects:
A.semantic bootstrapping
B.intersubjectivity
C.pragmatics
D.functionalism
Question 13 of 25
5.0 Points
As Charlie reads his science textbook, he encounters the word ecology for the first time and uses the context to figure out what the word means. Given what we know about how the brain functions, we could reasonably assume that:
A.Most of his mental “work” is being done in his midbrain.
B.Most of his mental “work” is being done in the occipital lobes, located at the back of his brain.
C.He is thinking primarily in his right hemisphere.
D.Many parts of his brain are involved in this task.
Question 14 of 25
5.0 Points
Seventeen-year-old Jonathan has suddenly started “hearing scary voices” in his head, and he worries that someone is “out to get” him. Which one of the following brain abnormalities might we suspect?
A.Schizophrenia
B.Neurofibromatosis
C.Fetal alcohol syndrome
D.Turner syndrome
Question 15 of 25
5.0 Points
Imagine that you are the parent of a newborn baby boy. A pediatrician tells you, “About half of the neurons that your son produced in the early weeks after conception have died off.” From this information, you should conclude that your son:
A.May have difficulty learning to read and write
B.Will need to be on a respirator for the first few weeks, possibly longer
C.Will have trouble with muscular coordination and will probably need intensive physical therapy
D.Is normal
Question 16 of 25
5.0 Points
The forbrain is important as
A.it controls basic survival needs such as breathing.
B.it is connected to the midbrain which has the “wrinkled cap”
C.it is responsible for complex thinking and emotional responses
Question 17 of 25
5.0 Points
The right and left hemisphere
A.is a division of the cortex only
B.will allow the left hemisphere to control the left side of the body
C.the right hemisphere has fewer neurological connections to regions of the brain
Question 18 of 25
5.0 Points
A brain has approximately how many neurons?
A.1,000,000
B.1,000,000,000
C.100,000,000,000
Question 19 of 25
5.0 Points
Sleep is important for children. According to your book, educators should do all the following for young children except:
A.offer a time for sleep during the day
B.recognize that sleep problems can be a sign of illness or stress
C.ask the parents about medication that will have sleep implications as a side effect.
Question 20 of 25
5.0 Points
In most people the left side of the brain does what
A.analysis
B.music appreciation
C.humor appreciation
Question 21 of 25
5.0 Points
The Cattell- Horn-Carroll Theory of cognitive abilities is important as it does all the following but…
A.it found childrend differ in fluid intelligence
B.it found they differe in crystalized intelligence
C.it is specific theory that has not changed since first developed
Question 22 of 25
5.0 Points
The following are all true of Glia cells except:
A.they out number neurons by about 100 to 1
B.they give neurons structural support and protection
C.they produce chemicals that neurons need to function properly
Question 23 of 25
5.0 Points
Cephalocaudal trend referrs to all but:
A.the vertical order of emerging skills
B.the skills they learn to control start to extend from head and progress down to legs
C.the skills they learn to control start to extend from head and progress down to toes
Question 24 of 25
5.0 Points
The book defines childhood obseity as:
A.above 20% of ideal weight
B.having a body fat index above 25%
C.having a body fat index of above 25% and above 20% of ideal weight
Question 25 of 25
5.0 Points
Gardner’s multiple intelligence looks at all but…
A.spatial intelligence
B.common sense
C.intrapersonal intelligence
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Beakins Company produces a single product. The standard cost card for the product follows:
|
|
Direct materials (4 yards @ $5 per yard)……………………………..
|
$20
|
|
|
Direct labor (1.5 hours @ $10 per hour)………………………………
|
$15
|
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead (1.5 hrs @ $4 per /hour)…….
|
$6
|
During a recent period the company produced 1,200 units of product. Various costs associated with the production of these units are given below:
|
|
Direct materials purchased (6,000 yards)…………..
|
$28,500
|
|
|
|
Direct materials used in production………………….
|
5,000
|
yards
|
|
|
Direct labor cost incurred (2,100 hours)…………….
|
$17,850
|
|
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead cost incurred…
|
$10,080
|
|
The company records all variances at the earliest possible point in time. Variable manufacturing overhead costs are applied to products on the basis of direct labor hours.
The labor rate variance for the period is:
|
|
$3,150 U
|
|
|
$2,700 F
|
|
|
$2,700 U
|
|
|
$3,150 F
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
3. Adjusting entries and financial statements. The following information pertains to Fixation Enterprises: The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one third of this amount had been earned. Fixation provided $2,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31. Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,650. The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period. The company paid $18,000 on October 1 of the current year to Vantage Property Management. The payment was for 6 months rent of Fixation s headquarters, beginning on November 1. Fixation s accounting year ends on December 31.
Instructions Analyze the five preceding cases individually and determine the following: a. The type of adjusting entry needed at year-end (Use the following codes: A, adjust ment of a prepaid expense; B, adjustment of an unearned revenue; C, adjustment to record an accrued expense; or D, adjustment to record an accrued revenue). b. The year-end journal entry to adjust the accounts. c. The income statement impact of each adjustment (e.g., increases total revenues by $500).
4. Adjusting entries. You have been retained to examine the records of Kathy s Day Care Center as of December 31, 20X3, the close of the current reporting period. In the course of your examination, you discover the following: On January 1, 20X3, the Supplies account had a balance of $2,350. During the year, $5,520 worth of supplies was purchased, and a balance of $1,620 remained unused on December 31. Unrecorded interest owed to the center totaled $275 as of December 31. All clients pay tuition in advance, and their payments are credited to the Unearned Tuition Revenue account. The account was credited for $75,500 on August 31. With the exception of $15,500 all amounts were for the current semester ending on December 31. Depreciation on the school s van was $3,000 for the year. On August 1, the center began to pay rent in 6-month installments of $21,000. Kathy wrote a check to the owner of the building and recorded the check in Pre paid Rent, a new account. Two salaried employees earn $400 each for a 5-day week. The employees are paid every Friday, and December 31 falls on a Thursday. Kathy s Day Care paid insurance premiums as follows, each time debiting Pre paid Insurance:
Date Paid Policy No. Length of Policy Amount Feb. 1, 20X2 1033MCM19 1 year $540 Jan. 1, 20X3 7952789HP 1 year 912 Aug. 1, 20X3 XQ943675ST 2 years 840 Instructions
The center s accounts were last adjusted on December 31, 20X2. Prepare the adjusting entries necessary under the accrual basis of accounting.
5. Bank reconciliation and entries. The following information was taken from the accounting records of Palmetto Company for the month of January: Balance per bank $6,150 Balance per company records $3,580 Bank service charge for January $20 Deposits in transit $940 Interest on note collected by bank $100 Note collected by bank $1,000 NSF check returned by the bank with the bank statement $650 Outstanding checks $3,080
Instructions: a. Prepare Palmetto s January bank reconciliation. b. Prepare any necessary journal entries for Palmetto.
6. Direct write-off method. Harrisburg Company, which began business in early 20X7, reported $40,000 of accounts receivable on the December 31, 20X7, balance sheet. Included in this amount was $550 for a sale made to Tom Mattingly in July. On January 4, 20X8, the company learned that Mattingly had filed for personal bankruptcy. Harrisburg uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectibles.
a. Prepare the journal entry needed to write off Mattingly s account. b. Comment on the ability of the direct write-off method to value receivables on the year-end balance sheet.
7. Allowance method: analysis of receivables. At a January 20X2 meeting, the presi dent of Sonic Sound directed the sales staff to move some product this year. The president noted that the credit evaluation department was being disbanded be cause it had restricted the company s growth. Credit decisions would now be made by the sales staff. By the end of the year, Sonic had generated significant gains in sales, and the president was very pleased. The following data were provided by the accounting department: 20X2 20X1 Sales $23,987,000 $8,423,000 Accounts Receivable, 12/31 12,444,000 1,056,000 Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, 12/31 ? 23,000 cr.
The $12,444,000 receivables balance was aged as follows: Age of Receivable Amount Percentage of Accounts Expected to Be Collected Under 31 days $5,321,000 99% 31260 days 3,890,000 90 61290 days 1,067,000 80 Over 90 days 2,166,000 60
Assume that no accounts were written off during 20X2. Instructions
a. Estimate the amount of Uncollectible Accounts as of December 31, 20X2. b. What is the company s Uncollectible Accounts expense for 20X2? c. Compute the net realizable value of Accounts Receivable at the end of 20X1 and 20X2. d. Compute the net realizable value at the end of 20X1 and 20X2 as a percentage of respective year-end receivables balances. Analyze your findings and comment on the president s decision to close the credit evaluation department.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
3 part Multiple problem: Compute cash payback, net present value, and internal rate of return.
1.Compute the cash payback period. Show work and give analysis for the following:
Company F is considering purchasing new equipment for $300,000. It is
expected that the equipment will produce annual net income of $10,000 over its 10-year
useful life. Annual depreciation will be $30,000.
2. Compute the net present value of each project. Show work, give analysis, and detail which project will be most acceptable for the following:
Company D is considering two different, mutually exclusive capital expenditure proposals.
(a) Project A will cost $395,000, has an expected useful life of 10 years, a salvage value of zero, and is expected to increase net annual cash flows by $70,000.
(b) Project B will cost $270,000, has an expected useful life of 10 years, a salvage value of zero, and is expected to increase net annual cash flows by $50,000. A discount rate of 9% is appropriate for both projects.
3. Compute the approximate internal rate of return. Show work and provide written analysis for the following:
DA Company is evaluating the purchase of a rebuilt spot-welding machine to be used in the manufacture of a new product. The machine will cost $170,000, has an estimated useful life of 7 years, a salvage value of zero, and will increase net annual cash flows by $33,740.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
30. The balance sheets at the end of each of the first two years of operations indicate the following:
2007 2006
Total current assets $250,000 $225,000
Total investments 50,000 25,000
Total fixed assets 450,000 300,000
Total current liabilities 100,000 37,500
Total long-term liabilities 200,000 112,500
Preferred 9% stock, $100 par 50,000 50,000
Common stock, $10 par 250,000 250,000
Paid-in capital in excess of par-
common stock 25,000 25,000
Retained earnings 125,000 125,000
If net income is $50,000 and interest expense is $20,000 for 2007, what are the earnings per share on common stock for 2007?
a. $1.82
b. $2.00
c. $2.80
d. $1.20
Problems:
31. On August 1, Clayton Co. issued $1,300,000 of 20-year, 9% bonds, dated August 1, for $1,225,000. Interest is payable semiannually on February 1 and August 1. Present the entries to record the following transactions for the current year (7 points):
(a) Issuance of the bonds.
(b) Accrual of interest and amortization of bond discount for the year, on December 31, using the straight-line method.
32. Excel Products Inc. pays its employees semimonthly. The summary of the payroll for December 31 indicated the following (10 points):
Salary expense $120,000
Federal income tax withheld 20,000
Of the payroll, $40,000 is subject to social security tax of 6%; $120,000 is subject to Medicare tax of 1.5%; $10,000 is subject to state unemployment tax of 4.3% and federal unemployment tax of 0.8%. Present the journal entries for payroll tax expense if the employees are paid (a) December 31 of the current year, (b) January 2 of the following year.
33. State the section(s) of the statement of cash flows prepared by the indirect method (operating activities, investing activities, financing activities, or not reported) and the amount that would be reported for each of the following transactions (9 points):
(a) Received $145,000 from the sale of land costing $70,000.
(b) Purchased investments for $50,000.
(c) Declared $35,000 cash dividends on stock. $5,000 dividends were payable at the beginning of the year, and $6,000 were payable at the end of the year.
(d) Acquired equipment for $32,000 cash.
(e) Declared and issued 100 shares of $20 par common stock as a stock dividend, when the market price of the stock was $32 a share.
(f) Recognized by an adjusting entry depreciation for the year, $48,000.
(g) Issued 85,000 shares of $10 par common stock for $25 a share, receiving cash.
(h) Issued $500,000 of 20-year, 10% bonds payable at 99.
(i) Borrowed $43,000 from Regional Bank, issuing a 5-year, 8% note for that amount.
34. The following information has been condensed from the December 31 balance sheets of Hanson Co. (5 points):
2010 2009
Assets:
Current assets $ 825,500 $ 674,300
Fixed assets (net) 1,473,600 1,275,300
Total assets $2,299,100 $1,949,600
Liabilities:
Current liabilities $ 313,500 $ 309,600
Long-term liabilities 703,000 545,000
Total liabilities $1,016,500 $ 854,600
Stockholders’ equity $1,282,600 $1,095,000
Total liabilities and
stockholders’ equity $2,299,100 $1,949,600
(a) Determine the ratio of fixed assets to long-term liabilities for 2010 and 2009.
(b) Determine the ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity for 2010 and 2009.
(c) Comment on the year-to-year changes for both ratios.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
31. Golden Sales has bought $135,000 in fixed assets on January 1st associated with sales equipment. The residual value of these assets is estimated at $10,000 after they service their 4 year service life. Golden Sales managers want to evaluate the options of depreciation (10 points).
(a) Compute the annual straight-line depreciation and provide the depreciation journal entry to be posted at the end of each of the years.
(b) Write the journal entries for each year of the service life for these assets using the double declining balance method.
32. The units of an item available for sale during the year were as follows:
Jan. 1 Inventory 20 units at $50
Feb. 4 Purchase 10 units at $52
July 7 Purchase 30 units at $55
Oct. 15 Purchase 15 units at $60
There are 30 units of the item in the physical inventory at December 31. The periodic inventory system is used. Determine the inventory cost using the first-in, first-out costing method (6 points).
33. Using the following bank reconciliation for Allen Co. for June 30, 2007, record the appropriate journal entries that would be necessary (7 points).
Allen Co.
Bank Reconciliation
June 30, 2007
Cash balance according to bank statement $8,000.00
Add deposits in transit not recorded by bank 500.00
$8,500.00
Deduct outstanding checks 2,200.00
Adjusted balance $6,300.00
Cash balance according to depositor’s records $3,675.00
Add: Note collected by bank, including
$50 interest $2,850.00
Error in recording cash sales of
$342 as $324 18.00 2,868.00
$6,543.00
Deduct: NSF check from XXXXX XXXXX $ 218.00
Bank service charges 25.00 243.00
Adjusted balance $6,300.00
34. Wolfe Company issued a 60-day, 8% note for $15,000, dated April 5, to Lamb Company on account (9 points).
(a) Determine the due date of the note.
(b) Determine the maturity value of the note.
(c) Journalize the entries to record the following:
(1) receipt of the note by the payee, and
(2) receipt by the payee of the amount due on the note at maturity. Round answers to the nearest $1.
35. ABC Country Club has acquired a lot to construct a clubhouse. ABC had the following costs related to the construction:
Architects Fees $20,000
Construction Labor 80,000
Engineers Fees 15,000
Fences around building 9,000
Grading and leveling 10,000
Insurance costs incurred during construction 7,000
Interest on money borrowed for construction 5,000
Land 37,000
Building Materials 237,000
Sales Taxes 3,000
Trees and Shrubs 6,000
Determine the cost of the Club House to be reported on the balance sheet. Please be sure to list each of the items included in the cost to determine the cost of the Club House
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CASE 3A AUERBACH ENTERPRISES
Auerbach Enterprises manufactures air conditioners for automobiles and trucks manufactured throughout North America. The company designs its products with flexibility to accommodate many makes and models of automobiles and trucks. The company s two main products are MaxiFlow and Alaska. MaxiFlow uses a few complex fabricated parts, but these have been found easy to assemble and test. On the other hand, Alaska uses many standard parts but has a complex assembly and testing process. MaxiFlow requires direct materials costs which total $135 per unit, while Alaska s direct materials requirements total $110 per unit. Direct labor costs per unit are $75 for MaxiFlow and $95 for Alaska.
Auerbach Enterprises uses machine hours as the cost driver to assign overhead costs to the air conditioners. The company has used a company-wide predetermined overhead rate in past years, but the new controller, Bennie Leon, is considering the use of departmental overhead rates beginning with the next year.
The following planning information is available for the next year for each the four manufacturing departments within the company:
Overhead Machine
Costs Hours
Radiator parts fabrication………….. $ 80,000 10,000
Radiator assembly, weld, and test…. 100,000 20,000
Compressor parts fabrication………. 120,000 5,000
Compressor assembly and test…….. 180,000 45,000
Total $480,000 80,000
Normally, the air conditioners are produced in batch sizes of 20 at a time. A production batch of 20 units requires the following number of hours in each department:
MaxiFlow Alaska
Radiator parts fabrication……….. 28 16
Radiator assembly, weld, and test……. 30 74
Compressor parts fabrication……… 32 8
Compressor assembly and test……… 26 66
Total 116 164
Required:
1. Compute the departmental overhead rates using machine hours as the cost driver.
2. Compute a company-wide overhead rate using machine hours as the cost driver.
3. Compute the overhead costs per batch of MaxiFlow and Alaska assuming:
(a) The company-wide rate.
(b) The departmental rates.
4. Compute the total costs per unit of MaxiFlow and Alaska assuming:
(a) The company-wide rate.
(b)
The departmental rates.
5. Is one product affected more than the other by use of departmental rates rather than a company-wide rate? Why or why not?
assignment requirment
In this case, you are provided the overhead cost data for the Auerbach
Enterprises. Management needs advice in determining how to allocate these costs
utilizing a job order costing system either department-wide or company-wide.
Address Questions 1through 5 located at the end of the case. Based on the case
questions, you are required to provide a three to five double-spaced written
report addressing management s concerns and providing recommendations. The
written report should be properly formatted according to APA guidelines and
demonstrate research and critical thinking skills. Conclusions and
recommendations should be supported by at least 2 scholarly sources from the
Ashford Library or other external sources, excluding the textbook.
For Questions 1 through 4, you will need to complete several calculations. Be
sure to label and clearly identify your work to demonstrate your understanding
of the concept even if you arrive at the incorrect answer. The calculations
should be included as part of your analysis and written recommendations required
for submission.
For Question 5, fully address management s concerns as part of your written
analysis and recommendation using the new or the previous calculations to
support your recommendation/explanation. The written analysis should be
supported by at least 2 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.
Week 2 Written Assignment should:
Demonstrate graduate level work including appropriate research and critical
thinking skills.
- Be presented as a written analysis (not a question/answer format).
- Incorporate case questions into the overall analysis.
- Follow APA formatting guidelines including title page, reference page and
in-text citations.
- Consists of three to five double-spaced pages of content.
- Provide at least 2 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Beakins Company produces a single product. The standard cost card for the product follows:
|
|
Direct materials (4 yards @ $5 per yard)……………………………..
|
$20
|
|
|
Direct labor (1.5 hours @ $10 per hour)………………………………
|
$15
|
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead (1.5 hrs @ $4 per /hour)…….
|
$6
|
During a recent period the company produced 1,200 units of product. Various costs associated with the production of these units are given below:
|
|
Direct materials purchased (6,000 yards)…………..
|
$28,500
|
|
|
|
Direct materials used in production………………….
|
5,000
|
yards
|
|
|
Direct labor cost incurred (2,100 hours)…………….
|
$17,850
|
|
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead cost incurred…
|
$10,080
|
|
The company records all variances at the earliest possible point in time. Variable manufacturing overhead costs are applied to products on the basis of direct labor hours.
The labor efficiency variance for the period is:
|
|
$3,000 U
|
|
|
$2,550 U
|
|
|
$2,550 F
|
|
|
$3,000 F
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The work-in-process inventory account of a manufacturing
company shows a balance of $3,000 at the end of an
accounting period. The job-cost sheets of the two incomplete
jobs show charges of $500 and $300 for direct
materials, and charges of $400 and $600 for direct labor.
From this information, it appears that the company is
using a predetermined overhead rate as a percentage of
direct labor costs. What percentage is the rate?
3,000 – (500+300) – (400+600) = 1,200 of overhead
1,200 overhead divided by the 1000 (400+600) of labor is 1.20. So the overhead rate is 120% of direct labor.
2. The break-even point in dollar sales for Rice Company is
$480,000 and the company s contribution margin ratio
is 40 percent. If Rice Company desires a profit of
$84,000, how much would sales have to total?
contribution margin 40% / variable costs are 60% / break-even point $480,000
480,000 x 60% = $288,000 variable costs at break-even point
480,000 – 288,000 = $192,000 fixed costs
192,000 + 84,000 + 0.60x = x
276,000 = 0.40x
x = $690,000 sales needed
This means fixed costs are $288,000 and variable are 192,000.
Each marginal dollar in sales costs $.40 variable and 0 fixed, so MS=(84,000/.6)=140,000.
break even sales of 480,000 + marginal sales of 140,000 = 620,000.
Fixed costs are 288,000.
Variable costs are 620000*.4=248000.
Total costs are 536,000.
Profits are 620,000-536,000=84,000.
3. Williams Company s direct labor cost is 25 percent of its
conversion cost. If the manufacturing overhead for the
last period was $45,000 and the direct material cost was
$25,000, how much is the direct labor cost?
60000 + 30000 = 90000 = 60% / 60 = 1500 = 1% x 100 = 150000 = 100% X .4 = 60000
The above solution is incorrect.
By definition, the conversion cost is the sum of the direct labor cost and the overhead.
Therefore, if we assume x is the conversion cost, then x = 0.4x + 60,000. The solution is conversion cost = 100,000. Hence, the direct labor cost = 40,000.
Note that the knowing the direct material cost is not necessary for the computation of the labor cost.I am really bad at math so i just have to think you are right on this one
4. Grading Company s cash and cash equivalents consist of
cash and marketable securities. Last year the company s
cash account decreased by $16,000 and its marketable
securities account increased by $22,000. Cash provided
by operating activities was $24,000. Net cash used for
financing activities was $20,000. Based on this information,
was the net cash flow from investing activities on
the statement of cash flows a net increase or decrease?
By how much?
Cash provided by operating activities = 24000
Cash used by financing activities = (20000)
Cash and cash equivalents net increase = 4000
Net increase/(decrease) in cash flow of investing activities = 21000 (because dollar difference between (10000) and 4000 is that of 21000 dollars, i.e., travelling from (10000) to 0 is first 10000 then from 1 to 11000, hence it makes up total of 21000.
5. Gladstone Footwear Corporation s flexible budget cost
formula for supplies, a variable cost, is $2.82 per unit of
output. The company s flexible budget performance report
for last month showed an $8,140 unfavorable spending
variance for supplies. During that month, 21,250 units
were produced. Budgeted activity for the month had
been 20,900 units. What is the actual cost per unit for
indirect materials?
Spending variance = (AP – SP) x AQ
Since the spending variance was $8,140 unfavorable we know that the actual price was more than the standard. We also have 3 known, spending variance, standard price, and actual quantity.
$8,140 U = (AP – 2.82) x 21,250 units.
Rearrange the formula, solve for AP to get 3.20305 or $3.20305 / unit.
6. Lyons Company consists of two divisions, A and B. Lyons
Company reported a contribution margin of $60,000 for
Division A, and had a contribution margin ratio of 30
percent in Division B, when sales in Division B were
$240,000. Net operating income for the company was
$22,000 and traceable fixed expenses were $45,000. How
much were Lyons Company s common fixed expenses?
Divisions
Total A% B
Company
Sales $240,000*
Variable expenses $
Contribution margin $
Traceable fixed expenses $
Segment Margin $
Common fixed expenses $
Net operating income $
7. Atlantic Company produces a single product. For the most
recent year, the company s net operating income computed
by the absorption costing method was $7,800, and its net
operating income computed by the variable costing method
was $10,500. The company s unit product cost was $15
under variable costing and $24 under absorption costing.
If the ending inventory consisted of 1,460 units, how
many units must have been in the beginning inventory?
Difference in Operating Income of 2,700 unfavorable under Absorption, with fixed cost per unit of $9, means a 300 unit decrease in Ending Inventory. Beginning Inventory then was 1760 units.
8. Black Company uses the weighted-average method in its
process costing system. The company s ending work-inprocess
inventory consists of 6,000 units, 75 percent
complete with respect to materials and 50 percent complete
with respect to labor and overhead. If the total
dollar value of the inventory is $80,000 and the cost per
equivalent unit for labor and overhead is $6.00, what is
the cost per equivalent unit for materials?
EU in Ending Work in Process – DM 6,000 x 75% = 4,500 / CC 6,000 x 50% = 3,000
Total WiP $80,000
CC 3,000 x $6 = $8,000
DM per EU = $62,000 / 4,500 = $13.7778 per EU
9. At Overland Company, maintenance cost is exclusively a
variable cost that varies directly with machine-hours. The
performance report for July showed that actual maintenance
costs totaled $11,315 and that the associated rate
variance was $146 unfavorable. If 7,300 machine-hours
were actually worked during July, what is the budgeted
maintenance cost per machine-hour?
10. The cost of goods sold in a retail store totaled $650,000.
Fixed selling and administrative expenses totaled $115,000
and variable selling and administrative expenses were
$420,000. If the store s contribution margin totaled
$590,000, how much were the sales?
The cost of goods sold in a retail store totaled $650,000. Fixed selling and administrative expenses totaled $115,000 and variable selling and administrative expenses were $420,000. If the store’s contribution margin totaled $590,000, how much were the sales
Sales – Variable Costs = Contribution Marginsales=1,010,000+650000+115000=$1,190,000
11. Denny Corporation is considering replacing a technologically
obsolete machine with a new state-of-the-art
numerically controlled machine. The new machine would
cost $600,000 and would have a 10-year useful life.
Unfortunately, the new machine would have no salvage
value. The new machine would cost $20,000 per year to
operate and maintain, but would save $125,000 per year
in labor and other costs. The old machine can be sold
now for scrap for $50,000. What percentage is the simple
rate of return on the new machine rounded to the nearest
tenth of a percent? (Ignore income taxes in this problem.)
Total Income gained = 50000 – 600000 + (125000 – 20000) * SPW = 0=>105000*SPW = 550000=>SPW = 5.2381=>((1+x)^10-1)/(1+x)^10x = 5.2381=>(1+x)^10 – 1 = 5.2381x(1+x)^10=>x = 0.139 = 13.9% approximately
take the units of the nos. as dollarssavings = $125,000maintenance per year = $20,000depreciation = 600000/100net profit = $45,000therefore investment = (600000+0)/2 = 300000rate of return = (45000/300000) * 100 =15%
12. Lounsberry Inc. regularly uses material O55P and currently
has in stock 375 liters of the material, for which it paid
$2,700 several weeks ago. If this were to be sold as is on
the open market as surplus material, it would fetch $6.35
per liter. New stocks of the material can be purchased
on the open market for $7.20 per liter, but it must be
purchased in lots of 1,000 liters. You ve been asked to
determine the relevant cost of 900 liters of the material
to be used in a job for a customer. What is the relevant
cost of the 900 liters of material O55P?
cost if it is purchased new = 1000*6.90 =6900 surplus = 360+1000-800=560 surplus sold = 560*6.35= 3556 bought 360 lt cost =2484 total cost = 6900+2484-3556= 5828
13. Harwichport Company has a current ratio of 3.0 and
an acid-test ratio of 2.8. Current assets equal $210,000,
of which $5,000 consists of prepaid expenses. The
remainder of current assets consists of cash, accounts
receivable, marketable securities, and inventory. What
is the amount of Harwichport Company s inventory?
210000/current liabilties = 3=> current liabilties = $70,000current ratio – acid ratio = inventories/current liabilities=> 3-2.8 = inventories/70,000=> inventories = $14,000
14. Tolla Company is estimating the following sales for the
first six months of next year:
January $350,000
February $300,000
March $320,000
April $410,000
May $450,000
June $470,000
Sales at Tolla are normally collected as 70 percent in the
month of sale, 25 percent in the month following the sale,
and the remaining 5 percent being uncollectible. Also, customers
paying in the month of sale are given a 2 percent
discount. Based on this information, how much cash
should Tolla expect to collect during the month of April?
Tolla Company is estimating the following sales for the first six months of next year: January $350,000 February $300,000 March $320,000 April $410,000 May $450,000 June $470,000 Sales at Tolla are normally collected as 70 percent in the month of sale, 25 percent in the month following the sale, and remaining 5 percent being uncollectible. Also, customers paying in the month, of sale are given a 2 percent discount. Based on this information, how many cash should Tolla expect to co
Tolla expect to collect during the month of AprilCash collection in April = 410000*70%*98% + 320000*25% =$361260
15. Trauscht Corporation has provided the following data
from its activity-based costing system:
The company makes 360 units of product P23F a year,
requiring a total of 725 machine-hours, 85 orders, and 45
inspection-hours per year. The product s direct materials
cost is $42.30 per unit and its direct labor cost is $14.55
per unit. The product sells for $132.10 per unit. According
to the activity-based costing system, what is the product
margin for product P23F?
16. Williams Company s direct labor cost is 30 percent of its
conversion cost. If the manufacturing overhead for the
last period was $59,500 and the direct materials cost
was $37,000, what is the direct labor cost?
17. In a recent period, 13,000 units were produced, and there
was a favorable labor efficiency variance of $23,000.
If 40,000 labor-hours were worked and the standard
wage rate was $13 per labor-hour, what would be the
standard hours allowed per unit of output?
18. The balance in White Company s work-in-process inventory
account was $15,000 on August 1 and $18,000 on
August 31. The company incurred $30,000 in direct labor
cost during August and requisitioned $25,000 in raw
materials (all direct material). If the sum of the debits to
the manufacturing overhead account total $28,000 for the
month, and if the sum of the credits totaled $30,000, then
was Finished Goods debited or credited? By how much?
19. A company has provided the following data:
Sales 4,000 units
Sales price $80 per unit
Variable cost $50 per unit
Fixed cost $30,000
If the dollar contribution margin per unit is increased
by 10 percent, total fixed cost is decreased by 15 percent,
and all other factors remain the same, will net operating
income increase or decrease? By how much?
20. For the current year, Paxman Company incurred
$175,000 in actual manufacturing overhead cost. The
manufacturing overhead account showed that overhead
was overapplied in the amount of $9,000 for the year.
If the predetermined overhead rate was $8.00 per
direct labor-hour, how many hours were worked
during the year?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
- XYZ Corporation operates a Marketing Research department. This department compiles information from published sources, and from its own consumer studies, to assist marketing personnel in forecasting product demand and making pricing and promotion decisions. A large marketing research firm has bid $280,000 per year for a three-year contract to perform the same services. For the most recent year, XYZ s controller determined the cost of operating the Marketing Research department to be $346,000:
Salary and fringes:
Senior researcher $68,000
Staff researcher 48,000
Clerical staff 70,000
VP Marketing (1) 62,000
Occupancy (2) 31,000
Subscriptions and travel (3) 67,000
(1) Represents 30% of cost of the VP, who is estimated to spend 30% of his time
on marketing research issues
(2) Occupancy costs are $31/sq ft: depreciation, $14; utilities, $11; maintenance, $6.
Utilities are 70% variable; maintenance is an allocation of fixed costs. There are no plans for alternate use of the space.
(3) Subscriptions and travel costs would be borne by outside research firm.
Required:
a. Determine the cost differential to XYZ of outsourcing versus retaining this function.
b. Discuss the factors that XYZ management should consider in making this decision.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. XYZ has been an S corporation since its inception six years ago. On January 1 of the current year, the corporation’s two equal shareholders, John and Jane, had adjusted bases of $150,000 and $175,000, respectively, for their S corporation’s stock. The shareholders plan to have the corporation distribute land with a $50,000 adjusted basis and a $200,000 FMV in the current year. Ordinary income is expected to be $180,000 in the current year. What tax issues should John and Jane consider with respect to the distribution?
2. Zap Corporation has always been an S corporation and is 100% owned by David. David has a basis of $40,000 in his Zap stock at the beginning of the year. During the year, Zap has an ordinary loss of $20,000 and a long-term capital gain of $10,000. In addition, Zap Corporation distributed $55,000 in cash to David on December 1. Will the distribution cause David to recognize a gain? If so, what are its amount and character?
3. An S corporation, reports the following results for the current year:
Ordinary income $70,000
Long-term capital gain $20,000
Municipal bond interest income $10,000
Domestic corporate dividends $6,000
Charitable contributions $16,000
The corporation AAA and accumulated E&P balances at the beginning of the year are $80,000 and $50,000, respectively. The corporation makes a $100,000 cash distribution to its sole shareholder on June 1 and a second $100,000 cash distribution on December 1. The shareholder’s basis for the S Corp stock on January 1 was $120,000. Discuss the tax consequences of these transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
#1Barnes Company is considering two alternatives to finance its purchase of a new $4,000,000 office building.
(a) Issue 400,000 shares of common stock at $10 per share.
(b) Issue 7%, 10-year bonds at par ($4,000,000).
Income before interest and taxes is expected to be $3,500,000. The company has a 30% tax rate and has 600,000 shares of common stock outstanding prior to the new financing.
Instructions
Calculate each of the following for each alternative:
(1) Net income.
(2) Earnings per share.
#2Smith Company has budgeted the following unit sales:
2015 Units
January 10,000
February 8,000
March 9,000
April 11,000
May 15,000
The finished goods units on hand on December 31, 2014, was 1,000 units. Each unit requires 2 pounds of raw materials that are estimated to cost an average of $3 per pound. It is the company’s policy to maintain a finished goods inventory at the end of each month equal to 10% of next month’s anticipated sales. They also have a policy of maintaining a raw materials inventory at the end of each month equal to 20% of the pounds needed for the following month’s production. There were 3,920 pounds of raw materials on hand at December 31, 2014.
Instructions
For the first quarter of 2015, prepare:
(1) a production budget
(2) a direct materials budget.
#3Fisanich Company purchased 35,000 shares of common stock of Pear Corporation as a long-term investment for $700,000. During the year, Pear Corporation reported net income of $300,000 and paid dividends of $100,000.
Instructions
(a) Assuming that the 35,000 shares represent a 10% interest in Pear Corporation:
1. Prepare the journal entry to record the investment in Pear Corporation stock.
2. Prepare any entries that Fisanich Company should make in accounting for its investment in Pear Corporation stock during the year.
3. What is the balance of the Stock Investments account on Fisanich Company’s books at the end of the year?
(b) Repeat requirements (a) 1. 2. and 3. above except assume that the 35,000 shares represent a 20% interest in Pear Corporation.
#4Adelphonse Corporation issued $2 million, 10-year, 6% bonds on January 1, 2014.
Instructions
Prepare the entry to record the sale of these bonds, assuming they were issued at:
(a) 98.
(b) 103.
.
#5Roland Corporation entered into the following transactions:
1. On January 1, 2014 Pear Car Rental leased a car to Roland Corporation for one year. Terms of the operating lease call for monthly payments of $650.
2. On January 1, 2014, Roland Corporation entered into an agreement to lease 20 machines from Pear Corporation. The terms of the lease agreement require an initial payment of $500,000 and then three annual rental payments of $600,000 beginning on December 31, 2014. The present value of the three rental payments is $1,492,108. The lease is a capital lease.
Instructions
Prepare the appropriate journal entries to be made by Roland Corporation in January related to the lease transactions.
#6Pear Corporation is issuing $600,000 of 8%, 5-year bonds when potential bond investors want a return of 10%. Interest is payable semiannually.
The present value of 1 factors are 4%, .67556 and 5%, .61391. The present value of an annuity factors are 4%, 8.1109 and 5%, 7.72173.
Instructions
Compute the market price (present value) of the bonds.
#7Washington Company produced and sold 50,000 units of product and is operating at 80% of plant capacity. Unit information about its product is as follows:
Sales Price $68
Variable manufacturing cost $42
Fixed manufacturing cost ($600,000 50,000) 12 54
Profit per unit $14
The company received a proposal from Pear Company to buy 10,000 units of Washington Company’s product for $49 per unit. This is a one-time only order and acceptance of this proposal will not affect the company’s regular sales. The president of Washington Company is reluctant to accept the proposal because he is concerned that the company will lose money on the special order.
Instructions
Prepare a schedule reflecting an incremental analysis of this proposal and indicate the effect the acceptance of this order might have on the company’s income.
#8A comparative balance sheet for Richardson-Lau Corporation is presented below:
RICHARDSON-LAU CORPORATION
Comparative Balance Sheet
2014 2013
Assets
Cash $ 36,000 $ 31,000
Accounts receivable (net) 70,000 60,000
Prepaid insurance 25,000 17,000
Land 18,000 40,000
Equipment 70,000 60,000
Accumulated depreciation (20,000) (13,000)
Total Assets $199,000 $195,000
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Accounts payable $ 11,000 $ 6,000
Bonds payable 27,000 19,000
Common stock 140,000 115,000
Retained earnings 21,000 55,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $199,000 $195,000
Additional information:
1. Net loss for 2014 is $20,000.
2. Cash dividends of $14,000 were declared and paid in 2014.
3. Land was sold for cash at a loss of $4,000. This was the only land transaction during the year.
4. Equipment with a cost of $15,000 and accumulated depreciation of $10,000 was sold for $5,000 cash.
5. $22,000 of bonds were retired during the year at carrying (book) value.
6. Equipment was acquired for common stock. The fair value of the stock at the time of the exchange was $25,000.
Instructions
Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended 2014, using the indirect method.
#9The current sections of May Inc.’s balance sheets at December 31, 2013 and 2014, are presented here.
May’s net income for 2014 was $203,000. Depreciation expense was $25,000.
2014 2013
Current assets
Cash $115,000 $99,000
Accounts receivable 105,000 89,000
Inventory 154,000 172,000
Prepaid expense 27,000 21,000
Total current assets $401,000 $381,000
Current liabilities
Accrued expenses payable $ 15,000 $ 5,000
Accounts payable 85,000 93,000
Total current liabilities $100,000 $ 98,000
Instructions
Prepare the net cash provided by operating activities section (ONLY!) of the company’s statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2014, using the indirect method.
#10On June 30, 2014, Robertson, Inc. sold $3,000,000 (face value) of bonds. The bonds are dated June 30, 2014, pay interest semiannually on December 31 and June 30, and will mature on June 30, 2017. The following schedule was prepared by the accountant for Robertson, Inc for 2014.
Semi-Annual Interest to Interest Unamortized Bond
Interest Period be Paid Expense Amortization Amount CarryingValue
$75,000 $2,936,625
1 $120,000 $131,625 $11,625 63,375 1,936,625
Instructions
On the basis of the above information, answer the following questions. (Round your answer to the nearest dollar or percent.)
1. What is the stated interest rate for this bond issue?
2. What is the market interest rate for this bond issue?
3. What was the selling price of the bonds as a percentage of the face value?
4. Prepare the journal entry to record the sale of the bond issue on June 30, 2014.
5. Prepare the journal entry to record the payment of interest and amortization on December 31, 2014.
Merry Christmas!!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. A $600,000 bond was retired at 98 when the carrying value of the bond was $592,000. The entry to record the retirement would include a (Points : 2) gain on bond redemption of $8,000.
loss on bond redemption of $8,000.
loss on bond redemption of $4,000.
gain on bond redemption of $4,000.
| Question 2. 2. Bond interest paid is (Points : 2) |
higher when bonds sell at a discount. lower when bonds sell at a premium. the same whether bonds sell at a discount or a premium. higher when bonds sell at a discount and lower when bonds sell at a premium. |
| Question 3. 3. A bond with a face value of $200,000 and a quoted price of 102 has a selling price of (Points : 2) |
$240,450. $204,050. $200,450. $204,500. |
Question 4. 4. Lake Company received proceeds of $188,500 on 10-year, 8% bonds issued on January 1, 2011. The bonds had a face value of $200,000, pay interest semi-annually on June 30 and December 31, and have a call price of 101. Lake uses the straight-line method of amortization. What is the amount of interest Lake must pay the bondholders in 2011? (Points : 2) |
$15,080 $16,000 $17,150 $14,850 |
Question 5. 5. Jarmin Company received proceeds of $188,500 on 10-year, 8% bonds issued on January 1, 2011. The bonds had a face value of $200,000, pay interest semi-annually on June 30 and December 31, and have a call price of 101. Jarmin uses the straight-line method of amortization. What is the carrying value of the bonds on January 1, 2013? (Points : 2) |
$200,000 $190,800 $197,700 $189,650 |
| Question 6. 6. A $600,000 bond was retired at 103 when the carrying value of the bond was $622,000. The entry to record the retirement would include a (Points : 2) |
gain on bond redemption of $18,000. loss on bond redemption of $12,000. loss on bond redemption of $18,000. gain on bond redemption of $4,000. |
| Question 7. 7. If bonds with a face value of $150,000 are converted into common stock when the carrying value of the bonds is $135,000, the entry to record the conversion will include a debit to (Points : 2) |
Bonds Payable for $150,000. Bonds Payable for $135,000. Discount on Bonds Payable for $15,000. Bonds Payable equal to the market price of the bonds on the date of conversion. |
| Question 8. 8. A bond trustee does not (Points : 2) |
issue the bonds. keep a record of each bondholder. hold conditional title to pledged property. maintain custody of unsold bonds. |
| Question 9. 9. Lark Corporation retires its $800,000 face value bonds at 105 on January 1, following the payment of annual interest. The carrying value of the bonds at the redemption date is $829,960. The entry to record the redemption will include a (Points : 2) |
credit of $10,040 to Loss on Bond Redemption. debit of $10,040 to Loss on Bond Redemption. credit of $10,040 to Premium on Bonds Payable. debit of $40,000 to Premium on Bonds Payable. |
| Question 10. 10. Hernandez Corporation issues 3,000, 10-year, 8%, $1,000 bonds dated January 1, 2012, at 98. The journal entry to record the issuance will show a (Points : 2) |
debit to Cash of $3,000,000. credit to Discount on Bonds Payable for $60,000. credit to Bonds Payable for $3,040,000. debit to Cash for $2,960,000. |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Miracle Company purchased treasury stock with a cost of $15,000 during 2012. During the year, the company paid dividends of $20,000 and issued bonds payable for proceeds of $866,000. Cash flows from financing activities for 2012 total (Points : 2) $846,000 net cash inflow.
$861,000 net cash inflow.
$866,000 net cash outflow.
$831,000 net cash inflow.
| Question 2. 2. The statement of cash flows reports each of the following except (Points : 2) |
cash receipts from operating activities. cash payments from investing activities. the net change in cash. cash sales. |
| Question 3. 3. The statement of cash flows (Points : 2) |
must be prepared on a daily basis. summarizes the operating, financing, and investing activities of an entity. is another name for the income statement. is a special section of the income statement. |
| Question 4. 4. Each of the following are particularly interested in the statement of cash flows except (Points : 2) |
creditors. employees. shareholders. government agencies. |
| Question 5. 5. Each of the following is an example of a significant noncash activity except (Points : 2) |
conversion of bonds into common stock. exchanges of plant assets. issuance of debt to purchase assets. stock dividends. |
| Question 6. 6. In Garland Company, land decreased $140,000 because of a cash sale for $140,000, the equipment account increased $40,000 as a result of a cash purchase, and Bonds Payable increased $130,000 from issuance for cash at face value. The net cash provided by investing activities is (Points : 2) |
$140,000. $230,000. $100,000. $110,000. |
| Question 7. 7. Indicate where the event purchased land and a building with a mortgage would appear, if at all, on the indirect statement of cash flows. (Points : 2) |
Operating activities section Investing activities section Financing activities section Does not represent a cash flow |
| Question 8. 8. The statement of cash flows should help investors and creditors assess each of the following except the (Points : 2) |
entity’s ability to generate future income. entity’s ability to pay dividends. reasons for the difference between net income and net cash provided by operating activities. cash investing and financing transactions during the period. |
| Question 9. 9. Generally, the most important category on the statement of cash flows is cash flows from (Points : 2) |
operating activities. investing activities. financing activities. significant noncash activities. |
| Question 10. 10. The category that is generally considered to be the best measure of a company’s ability to continue as a going concern is (Points : 2) |
cash flows from operating activities. cash flows from investing activities. cash flows from financing activities. usually different from year to year. |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Xeris, Inc. has 1,000 shares of 5%, $10 par value, cumulative preferred stock and 50,000 shares of $1 par value common stock outstanding at December 31, 2012. What is the annual dividend on the preferred stock? (Points : 2) $5 per share
$500 in total
$5,000 in total
$.05 per share
| Question 2. 2. Which one of the following is not necessary in order for a corporation to pay a cash dividend? (Points : 2) |
Adequate cash Approval of stockholders Declaration of dividends by the board of directors Retained earnings |
| Question 3. 3. Dividends Payable is classified as a (Points : 2) |
long-term liability. contra stockholders’ equity account to Retained Earnings. current liability. stockholders’ equity account. |
| Question 4. 4. The per share amount normally assigned by the board of directors to a small stock dividend is (Points : 2) |
the market value of the stock on the date of declaration. the average price paid by stockholders on outstanding shares. the par or stated value of the stock. zero. |
| Question 5. 5. Each of the following decreases retained earnings except a (Points : 2) |
cash dividend. liquidating dividend. stock dividend. All of these decrease retained earnings. |
| Question 6. 6. A corporation is not committed to a legal obligation when it declares (Points : 2) |
a cash dividend. either a cash dividend or a stock dividend. a stock dividend. a distribution date. |
| Question 7. 7. Dividends are predominantly paid in (Points : 2) |
earnings. property. cash. stock. |
| Question 8. 8. A stockholder who receives a stock dividend would (Points : 2) |
expect the market price per share to increase. own more shares of stock. expect retained earnings to increase. expect the par value of the stock to change. |
| Question 9. 9. Which of the following is not a significant date with respect to dividends? (Points : 2) |
The declaration date The incorporation date The record date The payment date |
| Question 10. 10. The per share amount normally assigned by the board of directors to a large stock dividend is (Points : 2) |
the market value of the stock on the date of declaration. the average price paid by stockholders on outstanding shares. the par or stated value of the stock. zero. |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
When the effective-interest method of bond discount amortization is used
A. the applicable interest rate used to compute interest expense is the prevailing market interest rate on the date of each interest payment date
B. the carrying value of the bonds will decrease each period
C. interest expense will not be a constant dollar amount over the life of the bond
D. interest paid to bondholders will be a function of the effective-interest rate on the date the bonds were issued
If a corporation has only one class of stock, it is referred to as
A. classless stock
B. preferred stock
C. solitary stock
D. common stock
Capital stock to which the charter has assigned a value per share is called
A. par value stock
B. no-par value stock
C. stated value stock
D. assigned value stock
ABC, Inc. has 1,000 shares of 5%, $100 par value, cumulative preferred stock and 50,000 shares of $1 par value common stock outstanding at December 31, 2011. What is the annual dividend on the preferred stock?
A. $50 per share
B. $5,000 in total
C. $500 in total
D. $.50 per share
Manner, Inc. has 5,000 shares of 5%, $100 par value, noncumulative preferred stock and 20,000 shares of $1 par value common stock outstanding at December 31, 2011. There were no dividends declared in 2010. The board of directors declares and pays a $45,000 dividend in 2011. What is the amount of dividends received by the common stockholders in 2011?
A. $0
B. $25,000
C. $45,000
D. $20,000
When the selling price of treasury stock is greater than its cost, the company credits the difference to
A. Gain on Sale of Treasury Stock
B. Paid-in Capital from Treasury Stock
C. Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value
D. Treasury Stock
The Sarbanes-Oxley Act requires that all publicly traded companies maintain a system of internal controls. Internal controls can be defined as a plan to
A.safeguard assets
B.monitor balance sheets
C.control liabilities
D.evaluate capital stock
The purchase of treasury stock
A. decreases common stock authorized
B. decreases common stock issued
C. decreases common stock outstanding
D. has no effect on common stock outstanding
Marsh Company has other operating expenses of $240,000. There has been an increase in prepaid expenses of $16,000 during the year, and accrued liabilities are $24,000 lower than in the prior period. Using the direct method of reporting cash flows from operating activities, what were Marsh’s cash payments for operating expenses?
A. $228,000
B. $232,000
C. $200,000
D. $280,000
Where would the event purchased land for cash appear, if at all, on the indirect statement of cash flows?
A. Operating activities section
B. Investing activities section
C. Financing activities section
D. Does not represent a cash flow
In performing a vertical analysis, the base for cost of goods sold is
A. total selling expenses
B. net sales
C. total revenues
D. total expense
Blanco, Inc. has the following income statement (in millions):
BLANCO, INC.
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2011
Net Sales ………………………… $200
Cost of Goods Sold ………………………… 120
Gross Profit ………………………… 80
Operating Expenses ………………………… 44
Net Income ………………………… $ 36
Using vertical analysis, what percentage is assigned to Net Income?
A. 100%
B. 82%
C. 18%
D. 25%
Dawson Company issued 500 shares of no-par common stock for $4,500. Which of the following journal entries would be made if the stock has a stated value of $2 per share?
A.
Cash ………………………………………………….. $4,500
Common Stock 4,500
B.
Cash ……………………………… $4,500
Common Stock 1,000
Paid-In Capital in Excess of Par 3,500
C.
Cash …………………. $4,500
Common Stock 1,000
Paid-In Capital in Excess of Stated Value 3,500
D.
Common Stock ………………………………………………….. $4,500
Cash 4,500
Andrews, Inc. paid $45,000 to buy back 9,000 shares of its $1 par value common stock. This stock was sold later at a selling price of $6 per share. The entry to record the sale includes a
A. credit to Paid-In Capital from Treasury Stock for $9,000
B. credit to Retained Earnings for $9,000
C. debit to Pain-In Capital from Treasury Stock for $45,000
D. debit to Retained Earnings for $45,000
Which of the following is a fundamental factor in having an effective, ethical corporate culture?
A. Efficient oversight by the company s Board of Directors
B. Workplace ethics
C. Code of conduct
D. Ethics management programs
Two individuals at a retail store work the same cash register. You evaluate this situation as
A. a violation of establishment of responsibility
B. a violation of segregation of duties
C. supporting the establishment of responsibility
D. supporting internal independent verification
The Sarbanes-Oxley Act imposed which new penalty for executives?
A. Fines
B. Suspension
C. Criminal prosecution for executives
D. Return of ill-gotten gains
Hahn Company uses the percentage of sales method for recording bad debts expense. For the year, cash sales are $300,000 and credit sales are $1,200,000. Management estimates that 1% is the sales percentage to use. What adjusting entry will Hahn Company make to record the bad debts expense?
A.
Bad Debts Expense ……………. ……………. $15,000
Allowances for Doubtful Accounts ……………. ……………. $15,000
B.
Bad Debts Expense ……………. ……………. $12,000
Allowances for Doubtful Accounts ……………. ……………. $12,000
C.
Bad Debts Expense ……………. ……………. $12,000
Accounts Receivable ……………. ……………. …………….. $12,000
D.
Bad Debts Expense ……………. ……………. $15,000
Accounts Receivable ……………. ……………. …………….. $15,000
Intangible assets
A. should be reported under the heading Property, Plant, and Equipment
B. should be reported as a separate classification on the balance sheet
C. should be reported as Current Assets on the balance sheet
D. are not reported on the balance sheet because they lack physical substance
Using the percentage of receivables method for recording bad debts expense, estimated uncollectible accounts are $15,000. If the balance of the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is $3,000 credit before adjustment, what is the amount of bad debts expense for that period?
A. $15,000
B. $12,000
C. $18,000
D. $8,000
Intangible assets are the rights and privileges that result from ownership of long-lived assets that
A. must be generated internally
B. are depletable natural resources
C. do not have physical substance
D. have been exchanged at a gain
The book value of an asset is equal to the
A. asset s market value less its historic cost
B. blue book value relied on by secondary markets
C. replacement cost of the asset
D. asset s cost less accumulated depreciation
Gains on an exchange of plant assets that has commercial substance are
A. deducted from the cost of the new asset acquired
B. deferred
C. not possible
D. recognized immediately
Ordinary repairs are expenditures to maintain the operating efficiency of a plant asset and are referred to as
A. capital expenditures
B. expense expenditures
C. improvements
D. revenue expenditures
When an interest-bearing note matures, the balance in the Notes Payable account is
A. less than the total amount repaid by the borrower
B. the difference between the maturity value of the note and the face value of the note
C. equal to the total amount repaid by the owner
D. greater than the total amount repaid by the owner
The interest charged on a $200,000 note payable, at a rate of 6%, on a 2-month note would be
A. $12,000
B. $6,000
C. $3,000
D. $2,000
Costs incurred to increase the operating efficiency or useful life of a plant asset are referred to as
A. capital expenditures
B. expense expenditures
C. ordinary repairs
D. revenue expenditures
If a corporation issued $3,000,000 in bonds which pay 10% annual interest, what is the annual net cash cost of this borrowing if the income tax rate is 30%?
A. $3,000,000
B. $90,000
C. $300,000
D. $210,000
Hilton Company issued a four-year interest-bearing note payable for $300,000 on January 1, 2011. Each January the company is required to pay $75,000 on the note. How will this note be reported on the December 31, 2012 balance sheet?
A. Long-term debt, $300,000.
B. Long-term debt, $225,000.
C. Long-term debt, $150,000; Long-term debt due within one year, $75,000.
D. Long-term debt, $225,000; Long-term debt due within one year, $75,000.
A corporation issued $600,000, 10%, 5-year bonds on January 1, 2011 for 648,666, which reflects an effective-interest rate of 8%. Interest is paid semiannually on January 1 and July 1. If the corporation uses the effective-interest method of amortization of bond premium, the amount of bond interest expense to be recognized on July 1, 2011, is
A. $30,000
B. $24,000
C. $32,434
D. $25,946
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
16-12 (Interest rate risk)
Two years ago your corporate treasurer purchased for the firm a 20 year bond at its par value of $1,000. The coupon rate on this security is 8 percent. Interest payments are made to bondholders once a year. Currently, bonds of this particular risk class are yielding investors 9 percent. A cash shortage has forced you to instruct your treasurer to liquidate the bond.
a. At what price will your bond be sold? Assume annual compounding.
b. What will be the amount of your gain or loss over the original purchase price?
c. What would be the amount of your gain or loss had the treasurer originally purchased a bond with a 4 year rather than a 20 year maturity? (Assume all characteristicf the bonds are identical except their maturity periods.)
d. What do we call this type of risk assumed by your corporate treasurer?
16-6 (Ratio analysis) Assuming a 360 – day year, calculate what the average investment in inventory would be for a firm, given the following information in each case.
a. The firm has sales of $600,000, a gross profit margin of 10 percent, and an inventory turnover ratio of 6.
b. The firm has a cost-of-goods-sold figure of $480,000 and an average age of inventory of 40 days.
c. The firm has a cost-of-goods-sold figure of $1.15 million and an inventory turnover rate of 5.
d. The firm has a sales figure of $25 million, a gross profit margin of 14 percent, and an average age of inventory of 45 days.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Earth Baby Inc. (EBI) recently celebrated its tenth anniversary. The company produces
organic baby products for health-conscious parents. These products include food, clothing,
and toys. Earth Baby has recently introduced a new line of premium organic baby foods. Extensive research and scientific testing indicate that babies raised on the new line of foods will have substantial health benefits. EBI is able to sell its products at prices higher than competitors because of its excellent reputation for superior products. EBI distributes its products through high-end grocery stores, pharmacies, and specialty retail baby stores.
Joan Alvarez, the founder and CEO of EBI recently received a proposal from an old business school classmate, Robert Bradley, the vice president of Great Deal Inc (GDI), a large discount retailer. Mr. Bradley proposes a joint venture between his company and EBI, citing the growing demand for organic products and the superior distribution channels of his organization. Under this venture EBI would make some minor modifications to the manufacturing process of some of its best-selling baby foods and the foods would then be packaged and sold by GDI. Under the agreement EBI would receive $3.10 per jar of baby food and would provide GDI a limited right to advertise the product as manufactured for Great Deal by EBI. Joan Alvarez set up a meeting with Fred Stanley, Earth Baby’s CFO, to discuss the profitability of the venture. Mr. Stanley made some initial calculations and determined that the direct materials, direct labor, and other variable costs needed for the GDI order would be about $2 per unit as compared to the full cost of $3(materials, labor, and overhead) for the equivalent EBI product.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem: 14-4 Financial Forecasting-percent of Sales. Tulley Appliances Inc. projects next year s sales to be $20 million. Current sales are $15 million, based on current assets of $5 million and fixed assets of $5 million. Firms net profit margin is 5 percent after taxes. Tulley forecasts that its current assets will rise in direct proportion to the increase in sales, but that its fiexed assets will increase by only $100,000. Currently, Tulley has $1.5 million in accounts payable (which vary directly with sales), $2 million in long-term debt (due in 10 years), and common equity (including $4 million in retained earnings) totaling $6.4 million. Tulley plans to pay $500,000 in common stock dividends next year. a. What are Tulley s total financing needs. Ie. , total assets for the coming year? b. Given the firm s projections and dividend payment plans, what are its discretionary financing needs? c. Based on your projections, and assuming that the $100,000 expansion in fixed assets will occur, what is the largest increase in sales the firm can support without having to resort to the use of discretionary sources of financing?
Problem 15-8; Cost of Accounts Receivable. Johnson Enterprises Inc. is involved in the manufacture of and sale of electronic components used in small AM/FM radios. The firm needs $300,000 to finance an anticipated expansion in receivables due to increased sales. Johnson s credit terms are net 60 and its average monthly credit sales are $200,000. IN general, the firms customer pay within the credit period: Thus, the firm s average accounts receivable balance is $400,000. Chuck Idol, Johnson s comptroller, approached the firm s bank with a request for a loan for the $300,000 using the firm s accounts receivable as collateral. The bank offered to make a loan at a rate of 2 percent over prime plus a 1 percent processing charge on all receivables pledged ($200,000 per month). Furthermore, the bank agreed to lend up to 75 percent of the face value of the receivables pledged. a. Estimate the cost of the receivables loan to Johnson when the firm borrows the $300,000. The prime rate is currently 11 percent. b. Idol also requested a line of credit for $300,000 from the bank. The bank agreed to grant the necessary line of credit at a rate of 3 percent over prime and required a 15 percent compensating balance. Johnson currently maintains an average demand deposit of $80,000. Estimate the cost of the line of credit to Johnson. c. Which source of credit should Johnson select? Why? 1. Interest
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please answer the following questions. Submit as a Microsoft Word document to the Dropbox when completed.
1. Determine whether each of the following is counted in the M1 measure of the money supply:
i. The coins in your piggy bank.
ii. The funds in your checking account at First National Bank.
iii. The funds in your savings account at Second National Bank.
iv. The traveler s check you have left over from your trip to Germany.
v. The available balance on your Citico Gold MasterCard.
2. Refer to the simplified balance sheet for a bank and answer the following questions.
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
|
Reserves
|
$10,000
|
Deposits
|
$70,000
|
|
Loans
|
$66,000
|
Stockholder’s equity
|
$6,000
|
a. If the required reserve ratio is 5 percent, how much in excess reserves does this bank hold?
b. What is the maximum amount this bank can expand its loans?
c. What will happen to the M1 money supply if it makes the loans in (b) above and those funds are deposited into another bank by the borrowers?
3. Assume the interest rate on a Treasury bill is 2 percent and will pay its owner $1,000 when it matures in one year.
i. What is the price of the Treasury bill in today s market?
ii. Suppose that the Fed engages in open market sales which results in the interest rate on new one-year Treasury bills rising to 3 percent. What will happen to the price of these existing Treasury bills with rates of 2 percent? Why?
4. Identify each of the following events as:
a) part of an expansionary fiscal policy
b) part of a contractionary fiscal policy
c) or not part of fiscal policy
i. The corporate income tax rate is increased.
ii. Defense spending is increased.
iii.Families are allowed to deduct all daycare expenses from their federal income taxes.
iv.The individual income tax rate is decreased.
v. The State of New York builds a new highway.
Directions for Submitting your Assignment
Complete your assignment in this Microsoft Word document and save it as Username-MT445Assignment-Unit#.doc (Example:TAllen-MT445Assignment-Unit9.doc). Submit your file by selecting the Unit 9: Assignment Dropbox by the end of Unit 9.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Able Control Company, which manufactures electrical switches, uses a standard cost system and carries all inventory at standard cost. The standard factory overhead cost per switch is based on direct labor hours:
Variable overhead 5 hours at $8.00 /hour $40.00
Fixed overhead* 5 hours at $12.00 /hour $60.00
Total standard overhead cost per unit produced $100.00
Based on a practical capacity of 300,000 direct labor hours per month.
The following information is for the month of October:
The company produced 56,000 switches although, 60,000 switches were scheduled to be produced
The company worked 275,000 direct labor hours at a total cost of $2,550,000
Variable overhead costs were $2,340,000
Fixed overhead costs were $3,750,000
The production manager argued during the last performance review that the company should use a more up-to-date base for charging factory overhead costs to production. She commented that her factory had been highly automated in the last two years and, as a result, now has hardly any labor. The factory hires only highly skilled workers to set up production runs and to do periodic adjustments of machinery whenever the need arises.
1. Compute the following for Able Control Company:
a) The fixed overhead spending variance for October
b) The production volume variance for October
c) The variable overhead spending variance for October
d) The variable over head efficiency variance for October
2. Comment on the implications of the variances and suggest any action that the company should take to improve its operations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You work for a medium sized privately held electronics firm which is considering transitioning to a publically held organization. Your boss found out that you were taking business courses at a University and has asked you to prepare a presentation for upper level management to explain the process by which a privately held company would transition to publicly held company. He has asked you to describe the general accounting processes involved in establishing an initial public offering (IPO), including but not limited to accounting for all assets, liabilities and equities of the firm. Prepare a 15-20 slide professional MS PowerPoint presentation which covers the following:
- Identify and explain the top five reasons private companies go public.
- Explain information the firm is required to provide to the investor with complete transparency.
- Compare and contrast the differences in accounting processes and procedures that medium sized companies such as yours go through when going public.
- Discuss any concerns you believe the company should guard against while transitioning from privately held to publicly held (shareholder apprehension, fair market value, etc.) and provide solutions to each concern.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Outline – My Personal Management Philosophy
Directions:
- To help you prepare your essay and to give me an opportunity to provide you with some critical feedback, you must prepare an outline of your essay.
- Your outline must include the 5 Functions of Management and the topics you plan to address under each. Be sure to include a reference to appropriate journal entries in your outline.
The purpose of the essay, “My Management Philosophy”is to allow you to summarize your management philosophy in your own words. Your paper should be approximately 1,500 – 2,000 words (about five pages long using a word processor, double spaced).
ESSAY:
Choose the following approaches when writing your essay:
- You are being interviewed for a management position which you greatly desire. One of the questions asked is “What is your management philosophy?” How would you respond? If you select to write your management philosophy using this option, at a minimum you should discuss how the 5 functions of management fit into your overall philosophy. Remember, the functions of management are: Planning and Decision Making; Organizing; Staffing and Leading; Controlling; and Staffing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
17-1A You are provided with the following transactions that took place during a recent fiscal year. Transaction Where Reported on Statement Cash Inflow, Outflow, or No Effect? (a) Recorded depreciation expense on the plant assets. (b) Recorded and paid interest expense. (c) Recorded cash proceeds from a sale of plant assets. (d) Acquired land by issuing common stock. (e) Paid a cash dividend to preferred stockholders. (f) Distributed a stock dividend to common stockholders. (g) Recorded cash sales. (h) Recorded sales on account. (i) Purchased inventory for cash. (j) Purchased inventory on account. Hint: Distinguish among operating, investing, and financing activities. (SO 2) Instructions Complete the table indicating whether each item (1) should be reported as an operating (O) activity, investing (I) activity, financing (F) activity, or as a noncash (NC) transaction reported in a separate schedule, and (2) represents a cash inflow or cash outflow or has no cash flow effect. Assume use of the indirect approach.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Breakfasttime Cereal Company manufactures two breakfast cereals in a joint process. Cost and quantity information is as follows:
Joint Cost Cereal Quantity at Split-Off Point Sales Price per Kilogram
$30,000 Yummies ………………… 12,000 kilograms ………………………………. $2.00
Crummies ……………….. 8,000 kilograms ………………………………. 2.50
Required: Use the physical-units method to allocate the company s joint production cost between
Yummies and Crummies.
Refer to the data given in the preceding exercise.
Required: Use the relative-sales-value method to allocate Breakfasttime Cereal Company s joint production
cost between Yummies and Crummies.
Refer to the data given in Exercise 17 20 . Breakfasttime Cereal Company has an opportunity to process its Crummies further into a mulch for ornamental shrubs. The additional processing operation costs $.50 per kilogram, and the mulch will sell for $3.50 per kilogram.
Required:
1. Should Breakfasttime s management decide to process Crummies into the mulch? Why?
2. Suppose the company does process Crummies into the mulch. Use the net-realizable-value method
to allocate the joint production cost between the mulch and the Yummies
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The company records all variances at the earliest possible point in time. Variable manufacturing overhead costs are applied to products on the basis of direct labor hours.
The materials quantity variance for the period is:
|
|
$950 U
|
|
|
$5,000 F
|
|
|
$1,000 U
|
|
|
$6,000 F
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.value: 10.00 points The following data relate to the operations of Picanuy Corporation, a wholesale distributor of consumer goods:
Current assets as of December 31: Cash $ 6,000 Accounts receivable $ 36,000 Inventory $ 9,800 Buildings and equipment, net $ 110,885 Accounts payable $ 32,550 Capital stock $ 100,000 Retained earnings $ 30,135
a. The gross margin is 30% of sales. (In other words, cost of goods sold is 70% of sales.) b. Actual and budgeted sales data are as follows:
December (actual) $ 60,000 January $ 70,000 February $ 80,000 March $ 85,000 April $ 55,000
c. Sales are 40% for cash and 60% on credit. Credit sales are collected in the month following sale. The accounts receivable at December 31 are the result of December credit sales. d. Each month s ending inventory should equal 20% of the following month s budgeted cost of goods sold. e. One-quarter of a month s inventory purchases is paid for in the month of purchase; the other three-quarters is paid for in the following month. The accounts payable at December 31 are the result of December purchases of inventory. f. Monthly expenses are as follows: commissions, $12,000; rent, $1,800; other expenses (excluding depreciation), 8% of sales. Assume that these expenses are paid monthly. Depreciation is $2,400 for the quarter and includes depreciation on new assets acquired during the quarter. g. Equipment will be acquired for cash: $3,000 in January and $8,000 in February. h. Management would like to maintain a minimum cash balance of $5,000 at the end of each month. The company has an agreement with a local bank that allows the company to borrow in increments of $1,000 at the beginning of each month, up to a total loan balance of $50,000. The interest rate on these loans is 1% per month, and for simplicity, we will assume that interest is not compounded. The company would, as far as it is able, repay the loan plus accumulated interest at the end of the quarter.
Required: Using the data above: 1. Complete the following schedule.
Schedule of Expected Cash Collections January February March Quarter – Total Cash sales $ 28,000 $ $ $ Credit sales 36,000 Total collections $ 64,000 $ $ $
2. Complete the following: (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Input all amounts as positive values.)
Merchandise Purchases Budget January February March Quarter – Total Budgeted cost of goods sold $ 49,000 * $ $ $ Add desired ending inventory 11,200 Total needs 60,200 Less beginning inventory 9,800 Required purchases $ 50,400 $ $ $ *$70,000 sales 70% = $49,000. $80,000 70% 20% = $11,200.
Schedule of Expected Cash Disbursements Merchandise Purchases January February March Quarter – Total December purchases $ 32,550 * $ $ $ 32,550 January purchases 12,600 37,800 50,400 February purchases March purchases Total disbursements $ 45,150 $ $ $ *Beginning balance of the accounts payable.
3. Complete the following schedule:
Schedule of Expected Cash Disbursements Selling and Administrative Expenses January February March Quarter – Total Commissions $ 12,000 $ $ $ Rent 1,800 Other expenses 5,600 Total disbursements $ 19,400 $ $ $
4. Complete the following cash budget: (Input all amounts as positive values except cash deficiency, repayments and interest which should be indicated by a minus sign. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Total Financing should be indicated with a minus sign when the company is repaying amounts that were previously borrowed.)
Picanuy Corporation Cash Budget January February March Quarter – Total Cash balance, beginning $ 6,000 $ $ $ Add cash collections 64,000 Total cash available 70,000 Less cash disbursements: For inventory 45,150 For operating expenses 19,400 For equipment 3,000 Total cash disbursements 67,550 Excess (deficiency) of cash 2,450 Financing: Borrowings Repayments Interest Total financing Cash balance, ending $ $ $ $
5. Prepare an absorption costing income statement for the quarter ended March 31. (Input all amounts as positive values.)
Picanuy Corporation Income Statement For the Quarter Ended March 31 $ Cost of goods sold: $ Selling and administrative expenses: $
6. Prepare a balance sheet as of March 31. (Be sure to list the assets and liabilities in order of their liquidity.)
Picanuy Corporation Balance Sheet March 31 Assets Current assets: $ Total current assets Total assets $ Liabilities and Stockholders Equity $ Stockholders’ equity: $ Total liabilities and stockholders equity $
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.Your boss has asked you (a communication specialist) to write an informative white paper about the business of developing new drugs for cancer patients. The content will be turned into a brochure for the public describing the four major issues: economic situation, special needs (e.g., health) of population being served, process, and benefits of the program. She asked you to include two (2) visuals to illustrate the issues.
2.The state school board chairperson has asked you (a consultant on health and wellness) to write an informative piece about the recent changes to the breakfast and lunch programs to improve nutrition and health. The content will be turned into a brochure for the public describing the four (4) major issues: economic situation, special needs (e.g., health) of population being served, process, and benefits of the program. He asked you to include two (2) visuals to illustrate the issues.
3.The director of a large regional food pantry has asked you (a volunteer for the organization) to write an informative piece about the organization s programs. The content will be turned into a brochure for the public describing the four (4) major issues: economic situation, special needs (e.g., health) population being served, process, and benefits of the program. She asked you to include two (2) visuals to illustrate the issues.
Based on the feedback from your instructor, revise your three to four (3-4) page paper in which you:
1.Provide a clear thesis statement.
2.Describe the economic issues.
3.Describe the special needs (e.g., health) of the population being served.
4.Describe the process (decisions, steps) involved in the program.
5.Explain the benefits of the program.
6.Include two (2) visuals that illustrated two (2) different claims.
7.Develop a coherently structured paper with an introduction, body, and conclusion.
8.Provide three (3) relevant and credible sources to support claims.
Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:
Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required page length.
The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:
Identify elements of visual and electronic resources and their uses in writing.
Associate the features of audience, purpose, and text with various genres.
Recognize the elements and correct use of a thesis statement.
Recognize how to organize ideas with transitional words, phrases, and sentences.
Incorporate relevant, correctly documented sources to substantiate claims.
Apply the writing process to develop various writing genres.
Write clearly and concisely about selected topics using proper writing mechanics.
Use technology and information resources to research selected issues for this course.
Grading for this assignment will be based on answer quality, logic/organization of the paper, and language and writing skills
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. (TCO 1) Which financial statement is prepared first?
Balance sheet
Income statement
Retained earnings statement
Statement of cash flows
2. (TCO 1) The information needed to determine whether a company is using accounting methods similar to those of its competitors, would be found in which of the following
auditor s report
balance sheet
management discussion and analysis section
notes to the financial statements
3. (TCO 4) Using the following balance sheet and income statement data, what is the earnings per share?
Current assets $ 7,000 Net income $ 12,000
Current liabilities 4,000 Stockholders equity 27,000
Average assets 40,000 Total liabilities 9,000
Total assets 30,000
Average common shares outstanding was 10,000 (Points : 4)
$3.60
$4.00
$1.20
$0.83
4. (TCO 4) Which measure would a long-term creditor be least interested in reviewing? (Points : 4)
free cash flow
debt to total assets ratio
current ratio
solvency measure
5. (TCO 2) Which pair of the listed accounts follows the rules of debits and credits, in relation to increases and decreases, in the same manner? (Points : 4)
Salary Expense and Notes Payable
Common Stock and Rent Expense
Accounts Receivable and Advertising Expense
Service Revenue and Equipment
6. (TCO 2) The usual sequence of steps in the recording process is which of the following? (Points : 4)
analyze each transaction, enter the transaction in the journal, and transfer the information to the ledger accounts
analyze each transaction, enter the transaction in the ledger, and transfer the information to the journal
analyze each transaction, enter the transaction in the book of accounts, and transfer the information to the journal
analyze each transaction, enter the transaction in the book of original entry, and transfer the information to the journal
7. (TCO 3) Joe is a warehouse custodian, and also maintains the accounting record of the inventory held at the warehouse. An assessment of this situation indicates ______________________ . (Points : 4)
documentation procedures are violated
independent internal verification is violated
segregation of duties is violated
establishment of responsibility is violated
8. (TCO 3) The following information was taken from Mitchell Company cash budget for the month of July:
Beginning cash balance $50,000
Cash receipts 48,000
Cash disbursements 68,000
If the company has a policy of maintaining end of the month cash balance of $50,000, the amount the company would have to borrow is which of the following
$20,000
$10,000
$30,000
$12,000
9. (TCO 11) Managerial accounting does which of the following
is concerned with costing products
is governed by generally accepted accounting principles
pertains to the entity as a whole and is highly aggregated
places emphasis on special-purpose information
10. (TCO 11) A manufacturing process requires small amounts of glue. The glue used in the production process is classified as which of the following
period cost
indirect material
direct material
miscellaneous expense
11. (TCO 11) Sales commissions are classified as which of the following
overhead costs
period costs
product costs
indirect labor
12. (TCO 11) Ranger Company reported total manufacturing costs of $65,000, manufacturing overhead totaling $13,000, and direct materials totaling $16,000. How much is direct labor cost
$49,000
$94,000
$29,000
$36,000
13. (TCO 11) Hardigan Manufacturing Company reported the following year-end information:
beginning work in process inventory, $80,000
cost of goods manufactured, $980,000
beginning finished goods inventory, $50,000
ending work in process inventory, $70,000
and ending finished goods inventory, $40,000
How much is Hardigan s cost of goods sold for the year?
$980,000
$990,000
$970,000
$1,000,000
14. (TCO 5) What effect do changes in activity have on fixed costs per unit? (Points : 4)
No effect. Fixed costs per unit stay the same at every activity level.
An inverse effect.
A directly proportional effect.
It depends on the particular level of activity.
15. (TCO 5) Which one of the following is not an assumption of CVP analysis? (Points : 4)
All units produced are sold.
Cost classifications are reasonably accurate.
Factors other than changes in activity may affect costs.
The sales mix remains constant.
1. (TCO 5) A company has total fixed costs of $180,000 and a contribution margin ratio of 30%. How much sales are necessary to break even
$540,000
$600,000
$54,000
$126,000
2. (TCO 5) How much sales are required to earn a target income of $70,000, if total fixed costs are $100,000 and the contribution margin ratio is 40%?
$400,000
$200,000
$330,000
$425,000
3. (TCO 6) For which one of the following budgeting aspects does the budget committee generally have the responsibility? (Points : 4)
Setting company goals.
Expressing the budget in financial terms.
Enforcing the budget.
Serves as a review board where managers can defend budget goals and requests.
4. (TCO 6) Which one of the following would most likely cause an unrealistic budget to result? (Points : 4)
All levels of management contributed to its development.
The budget has been developed in a participative approach.
The budget has been developed in a top down fashion.
The budget was developed after considerable planning.
5. (TCO 6) What three differences exist between long-range planning and budgeting? (Points : 4)
Amount of detail, content, and emphasis
Time periods involved, amount of detail, and content
Content, emphasis, and amount of detail
Emphasis, time periods involved, and amount of detail
6. (TCO 6) Which one of the following is a source of information used to prepare the budgeted income statement? (Points : 4)
Cash budget
Budgeted balance sheet
Selling and administrative expense budget
Capital expenditure budget
7. (TCO 7) When is a static budget most appropriate in evaluating a manager s performance? (Points : 4)
When actual costs incurred equal the amounts on the budget.
When the actual activity level is less than the master budget activity.
The static budget is not appropriate for evaluating managers.
When the company performed at the same activity level as the static budget level.
8. (TCO 7) Which type of center is the toy department in a Wal-Mart store? (Points : 4)
An exception center
A profit center
A cost center
An investment center
9. (TCO 7) For which of the following is an investment center manager responsible? (Points : 4)
Invested assets, sales, and costs
Sales, profits, and invested assets
Sales, invested assets, and assets
Revenues and costs
10. (TCO 7) An investment center generated a contribution margin of $200,000, controllable fixed costs of $100,000 and sales of $1,000,000. The center s average operating assets were $400,000. How much is the return on investment? (Points : 4)
25%
175%
50%
75%
11. (TCO 11) A manufacturing company makes the products that it sells. Briefly identify and define the cost elements that are incurred in making a product. After product cost elements are identified, how is the cost of goods manufactured for a period determined
12. (TCO 4) Are short-term creditors, long-term creditors, and stockholders primarily interested in the same characteristics of a company? Explain.
13. (TCO 5) Keller Company estimates that variable costs will be 60% of sales and fixed costs will total $1,920,000. The selling price of the product is $10, and 600,000 units will be sold.
Instructions:
(a) Compute the break-even point in units and dollars
(b) Compute the margin of safety in dollars and as a ratio
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| 1.(TCO 1) Which statement(s) summarizes the revenues and expenses of an entity? |
Balance sheet only
Statement of cash flows and income statement
Statement of retained earnings and statement of operations
Income statement only
| 2.(TCO 1) Assets appear on the: |
balance sheet. income statement. statement of retained earnings. both balance sheet and the statement of retained earnings. |
| 3.(TCO 2) Purchasing a three-year insurance policy for cash would include a: |
debit to Cash and a credit to Prepaid Insurance debit to Prepaid Insurance and a credit to Cash debit to Prepaid Insurance and a credit to Insurance Expense debit to Insurance Expense and a credit to Dividends |
| 4.(TCO 2) The normal balance of a liability account is a _____ and the normal balance of the common stock account is a _____. |
debit; credit debit; debit credit; debit credit; credit |
| 5.(TCO 3) Which statement about a trial balance is NOT true |
The trial balance must be prepared at the end of the accounting period. The trial balance is a list of all accounts with their balances. The trial balance lists the balance sheet accounts and their balances first and then the income statement accounts and their balances. The trial balance lists asset accounts and their balances first, then liability accounts and their balances, and then stockholders equity accounts and their balances. |
| 6.(TCO 3) The normal balance of Accounts Payable is a _____ because it is a(n) _____ account. |
credit; liability debit; asset credit; stockholders equity debit; expense |
| 7.(TCO 4) Adjusting entries are: |
not needed under the accrual basis of accounting. prepared at the option of the auditor. prepared at the beginning of the accounting period to update all accounts. prepared at the end of the accounting period to update certain accounts. |
| 8.(TCO 4) A journal entry contains a debit to a liability account and a credit to a revenue account. This is an example of a(n): |
accrued expense. deferred expense. unearned revenue. accrued revenue. |
| 9.(TCO 5) In a bank reconciliation, items recorded by the company, but not yet recorded by the bank, include: |
bank collections. bank fees. outstanding checks. NSF checks. |
| 10.(TCO 5) All of the following are purposes of internal control EXCEPT: |
to promote operational inefficiency. to encourage adherence to company policies. to ensure accurate and reliable accounts records. to safeguard assets. |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| 1.(TCO 6) Under the allowance method for estimating uncollectible accounts, the entry to record the estimated bad debts: (Points : 6) |
increases total assets.
reduces net income.
has no effect on total assets or net income.
increases net income and decreases total assets.
| 2.(TCO 6) Net accounts receivable is calculated as: (Points : 6) |
sales less sales returns and allowances. accounts receivable plus allowance for uncollectible accounts. accounts receivable less allowance for uncollectible accounts. accounts payable plus allowance for uncollectible accounts. |
| 3.(TCO 7) If a company is using a perpetual inventory system, the balance in its inventory account three-quarters of the way through an accounting period would be equal to: (Points : 6) |
the total of the beginning inventory plus goods purchased during the accounting period the amount of goods purchased during the period the inventory on hand at the beginning of the period the inventory on hand at the beginning of the period plus goods purchased during the accounting period minus goods sold during the period |
| 4.(TCO 7) When the LIFO method is used, cost of goods sold is assumed to consist of: (Points : 6) |
units with the lowest per unit cost. oldest units. units with the highest per unit cost. most recently purchased units. |
| 5.(TCO 8) On January 3, 2010, ZB Corporation acquired equipment for $180,000. The estimated life of the equipment is 5 years. The estimated residual value is $30,000. What is the book value of the asset on December 31, 2011, if ZB Corporation uses the straight-line method of depreciation (Points : 6) |
$150,000 $130,000 $120,000 $90,000 |
| 6.(TCO 8) At the end of an asset s useful life, the balance in Accumulated Depreciation will be the same as: (Points : 6) |
depreciable cost. book value. salvage value. total depreciation expense. |
| 7.(TCO 9) Current liabilities fall into two categories which are referred to as: (Points : 6) |
unearned liabilities and payable liabilities liabilities of a known amount and estimated liabilities contra-liabilities and contingent liabilities contingent liabilities and non-contingent liabilities |
| 8.(TCO 9) Monthly sales were $200,000. It was estimated that 4% of the units sold would have to be replaced under warranty. On the date of sale the company should record a debit to: (Points : 6) |
Sales for $8,000 Warranty Expense for $8,000 Warranty Payable for $8,000 No entry is required since the actual liability amount is not known. |
| 9.(TCO 10) The employer sends the master copy of the W-2 form to: (Points : 6) |
Internal Revenue Service Federal Reserve Bank Social Security Administration Treasurer of the United States |
| 10.(TCO 10) The employer send copies of the W-2 to the: (Points : 6) |
Employee Social Security Administration Internal Revenue Service a and b |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. (TCO A) Below you will find selected information (in millions) from Coca-Cola Co. s 2012 Annual Report:
|
Income Taxes Payable
|
$471
|
|
Short-term Investments and Marketable Securities
|
8,109
|
|
Cash
|
8,442
|
|
Other non-current Liabilities
|
10,449
|
|
Common Stock
|
1,760
|
|
Receivables
|
4,812
|
|
Other Current Assets
|
2,973
|
|
Long-term Investments
|
10,448
|
|
Other Non-current Assets
|
3,585
|
|
Property, Plant and Equipment
|
23,486
|
|
Trademarks
|
6,527
|
|
Other Intangible Assets
|
20,810
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
53
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
9,010
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
8,680
|
|
Short Term Notes Payable
|
17,874
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
2,781
|
|
Other Current Liabilities
|
796
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
14,736
|
|
Paid-in-Capital in Excess of Par Value
|
11,379
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
55,038
|
|
Inventories
|
3,264
|
|
Treasury Stock
|
35,009
|
Other information taken from the Annual Report:
|
Sales Revenue for 2012
|
$48,017
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold for 2012
|
19,053
|
|
Net Income for 2012
|
9,019
|
|
Inventory Balance on 12/31/11
|
3,092
|
|
Net Accounts Receivable Balance on 12/31/11
|
4,920
|
|
Total Assets on 12/31/11
|
79,974
|
|
Equity Balance on 12/31/11
|
31,921
|
Required:
1. Using the information provided prepare a Balance Sheet. Separate the current assets from non-current assets and provide a total for each. Also separate the current liabilities from the non-current liabilities and provide a total for each.
2. Using the Balance Sheet from your answer above calculate; Current Ratio, Days in Inventory, Average Collection Period, Return on Assets Ratio, Debt to Total Assets and Return on common stockholders equity ratio. (Make sure to show all your work)
(Points : 36)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Below you will find selected information (in millions) from Coca-Cola Co. s 2012 Annual Report: Income Taxes Payable $471 Short-term Investments and Marketable Securities 8,109 Cash 8,442 Other non-current Liabilities 10,449 Common Stock 1,760 Receivables 4,812 Other Current Assets 2,973 Long-term Investments 10,448 Other Non-current Assets 3,585 Property, Plant and Equipment 23,486 Trademarks 6,527 Other Intangible Assets 20,810 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 53 Accumulated Depreciation 9,010 Accounts Payable 8,680 Short Term Notes Payable 17,874 Prepaid Expenses 2,781 Other Current Liabilities 796 Long-Term Liabilities 14,736 Paid-in-Capital in Excess of Par Value 11,379 Retained Earnings 55,038 Inventories 3,264 Treasury Stock 35,009 Other information taken from the Annual Report: Sales Revenue for 2012 $48,017 Cost of Goods Sold for 2012 19,053 Net Income for 2012 9,019 Inventory Balance on 12/31/11 3,092 Net Accounts Receivable Balance on 12/31/11 4,920 Total Assets on 12/31/11 79,974 Equity Balance on 12/31/11 31,921 Required:
1. Using the information provided prepare a Balance Sheet. Separate the current assets from non-current assets and provide a total for each. Also separate the current liabilities from the non-current liabilities and provide a total for each.
2. Using the Balance Sheet from your answer above calculate; Current Ratio, Days in Inventory, Average Collection Period, Return on Assets Ratio, Debt to Total Assets and Return on common stockholders equity ratio. (Make sure to show all your work) (Points : 36)
2. The following selected data was retrieved from the Wal-Mart, Inc. financial statements for the year ending January 31, 2013: Accounts Payable $38,080 Accounts Receivable 6,768 Cash 7,781 Common Stock 3,952 Cost of Goods Sold 352,488 Income Tax Expense 7,981 Interest Expenses 2,064 Membership Revenues 3,048 Net Sales 466,114 Operating, Selling and Administrative Expenses 88,873 Retained Earnings 72,978 Required: Using the information provided above: 1. Prepare a multiple-step income statement 2. Calculate the Profit Margin, and Gross profit rate for the company. Be sure to provide the formula you are using, show your calculations, and discuss your findings/results. (Points : 36)
3. Please review the following real-world Hewlett Packard Statement of Cash flows and address the 2 questions below: Cash flow from operating activities In millions In millions For the year ended 2012 For the year ended 2011 Net (loss) earnings $(12,650) $7,074 Depreciation and amortization 5,095 4,984 Impairment of goodwill and purchased intangible assets 18,035 885 Stock-based compensation expense 635 685 Provision for doubtful accounts 142 81 Provision for inventory 277 217 Restructuring charges 2,266 645 Deferred taxes on earnings (711) 166 Excess tax benefit from stock-based competition (12) (163) Other, net 265 (46) Accounts and financing receivables 1,269 (227) Inventory 890 (1,252) Accounts payable (1,414) 275 Taxes on earnings (320) 610 Restructuring (840) (1,002) Other assets and liabilities (2,356) (293) Net cash provided by operating activities 10,571 12,639 Cash flows from investing activities: Investment in property, plant, and equipment (3,706) (4,539) Proceeds from sale of property, plant, and equipment 617 999 Purchases of available-for-sale securities and other investments (972) (96) Maturities and sales of available-for-sale securities and other investment 662 68 Payments in connection with business acquisitions, net of cash acquired (141) (10,480) Proceeds from business divestiture, net 87 89 Net cash used in investing activities (3,453) (13,959) Cash flow from financing activities: (Payments) issuance of commercial paper and notes payable, net (2,775) (1,270) Issuance of debt 5,154 11,942 Payment of debt (4,333) (2,336) Issuance of common stock under employee stock plans 716 896 Repurchase of common stock (1,619) (10,117) Excess tax benefit from stock-based compensation 12 163 Cash dividends paid (1,015) (844) Net cash used in financing activities (3,860) (1,566) Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents 3,258 (2,886) Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period 8,043 10,929 Cash and cash equivalents at end of period $11,301 $8,043 Required: 1) Please calculate the percentage increase or decrease in cash for the operating, investing, and financing sections and explain the major reasons for the increase or decrease for each of these sections. 2) Please calculate the free cash flow for 2012 and explain the meaning of this ratio.
|
4. You are CFO of Goforit, Inc., a wholesale distribution company specializing in emerging technologies. Your CEO is a brilliant marketer, but relies on you to explain issues and choices in accounting and finance. She has heard from other members of a CEO organization to which she belongs that a company s net income can vary widely depending on which accounting choices are made from the GAAP menu.
Assuming the goal is to maximize net income, choose an accounting treatment from each of the following scenarios, and explain to your CEO why the choice will produce the desired effect on reported Net Income for the current year. Include in your answer the effect of the choice on both the income statement and balance sheet.
Required:
a. Goforit carries significant electronics inventory in a competitive environment where prices are actually falling. Which inventory valuation method would you choose LIFO, FIFO, or average cost? Assume that unit purchases exceed unit sales.
b. Goforit has a large investment in warehouse equipment including conveyor belts, forklifts, and automated packaging systems. Which depreciation method would you choose: Straight line (SL) or double declining balance (DDB)?
(Points : 36)
|
5. Please review the following real-world ratios for Johnson & Johnson and Pfizer for the year ended 2012 and address the 2 questions below.
|
Ratio Name
|
Johnson & Johnson
|
Pfizer
|
|
Profit margin
|
16.1%
|
24.7%
|
|
Inventory turnover ratio
|
3.1
|
1.7
|
|
Average collection period
|
59.4 days
|
69.1 days
|
|
Cash debt coverage ratio
|
.27
|
.16
|
|
Debt to Total assets
|
46.6%
|
127.5%
|
Required:
) Please explain the meaning of each of the Pfizer ratios above.
2) Please state which company performed better for each ratio.
(Points : 36)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. (TCO D) Which of the following performance measures will decrease if there is an increase in the accounts receivable?
Return on Investment Residual Income
(A)
Yes
Yes
(B)
No
Yes
(C)
Yes
No
(D)
No
No
(Points : 5)
Choice A
Choice B
Choice C
Choice D
Question 2. 2. (TCO D) For which of the following decisions are opportunity costs relevant?
The decision to make or buy a needed part
The desision to keep or drop a product line
(A)
Yes
Yes
(B)
Yes
No
(C)
No
Yes
(D)
No
No
(Points : 5)
Choice A
Choice B
Choice C
Choice D
Question 3. 3. (TCO D) For which of the following decisions are sunk costs relevant? (Points : 5)
The decision to keep an old machine or buy a new one
The decision to sell a product at the split-off point or after further processing
The decision to accept or reject a special order offer
All of the above
None of the above
1. (TCO D) Seebach Corporation has two major business segments Apparel and Accessories. Data concerning those segments for June appear below.
Sales revenues, Apparel
$700,000
Variable expenses, Apparel
$406,000
Traceable fixed expenses, Apparel
$98,000
Sales revenues, Accessories
$710,000
Variable expenses, Accessories
$312,000
Traceable fixed expenses, Accessories
$107,000
Common fixed expenses totaled $292,000 and were allocated as follows: $155,000 to the Apparel business segment and $137,000 to the Accessories business segment.
Required:
Prepare a segmented income statement in the contribution format for the company. Omit percentages; show only dollar amounts. (Points : 15)
Question 2. 2. (TCO D) Ferro Wares is a division of a major corporation. The following data are for the latest year of operations.
Sales $33,040,000
Net Operating Income $1,453,760
Average Operating Assets $8,000,000
The company’s minimum required rate of return 18%
Required:
i. What is the division’s ROI?
ii. What is the division’s residual income? (Points : 15)
Question 3. 3. (TCOD) The management of Thews Corporation is considering dropping product E28I. Data from the company’s accounting system appear below.
Sales $480,000
Variable Expenses $202,000
Fixed Manufacturing Expenses $158,000
Fixed Selling and Administrative Expenses $130,000
All fixed expenses of the company are fully allocated to products in the company’s accounting system. Further investigation has revealed that $86,000 of the fixed manufacturing expenses and $67,000 of the fixed selling and administrative expenses are avoidable if product E28I is discontinued.
Required:
i. What is the net operating income earned by product E28I according to the company’s accounting system? Show your work!
ii. What would be the effect on the company’s overall net operating income of dropping product E28I? Should the product be dropped? Show your work! (Points : 15)
Question 4. 4. (TCO D) Rosiek Corporation uses part A55 in one of its products. The company’s accounting department reports the following costs of producing the 4,000 units of the part that are needed every year.
Per Unit
Direct Materials $2.80
Direct Labor $6.30
Variable Overhead $8.50
Supervisor’s Salary $2.60
Depreciation of Special Equipment $6.80
Allocated General Overhead $6.10
An outside supplier has offered to make the part and sell it to the company for $32.30 each. If this offer is accepted, the supervisor’s salary and all of the variable costs, including direct labor, can be avoided. The special equipment used to make the part was purchased many years ago and has no salvage value or other use. The allocated general overhead represents fixed costs of the entire company. If the outside supplier’s offer were accepted, only $4,000 of these allocated general overhead costs would be avoided. In addition, the space used to produce part A55 could be used to make more of one of the company’s other products, generating an additional segment margin of $26,000 per year for that product.
Required:
i. Prepare a report that shows the effect on the company’s total net operating income of buying part A55 from the supplier rather than continuing to make it inside the company.
ii. Which alternative should the company choose? (Points : 15)
Question 5. 5. (TCO D) A customer has asked Clougherty Corporation to supply 4,000 units of product M97, with some modifications, for $40.10 each. The normal selling price of this product is $48.00 each. The normal unit product cost of product M97 is computed as follows.
Direct Materials $18.50
Direct Labor $1.20
Variable manufacturing overhead $8.40
Fixed manufacturing overhead $3.90
Unit product cost $32.00
Direct labor is a variable cost. The special order would have no effect on the company’s total fixed manufacturing
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. (TCO A) Which of the following is an advantage of the sole proprietorship relative to the corporate form of business organization
Limited liability of investor
Transferability of ownership
Simple to establish
Unlimited life
2. (TCO A) The payment of cash dividends is recorded in the _____.
operating section of the statement of cash flows
investing section of the statement of cash flows
financing section of the statement of cash flows
noncash investing and financing section of the statement of cash flows
3. (TCOs A, B) Below is a partial list of account balances for Landon Company::
Cash $10,000
Prepaid insurance 700
Accounts receivable 3,500
Accounts payable 2,800
Notes payable 4,200
Common stock 1,400
Dividends 700
Revenues 21,000
Expenses 17,500
What did Landon Company show as total debits
$32,400
$29,400
$34,500
$35,200
4. (TCOs B, E) Under the accrual basis of accounting, revenues are recorded and reported _____.
when companies receive payments for jobs performed or products provided
when companies have provided products or performed services
when companies receive payments prior to providing products or performing services
when companies receive payments after providing products or performing services
5. (TCO D) Three companies report the same cost of goods available for sale, but each employs a different inventory costing method. If the price of goods has increased during the period, then the company using _____.
FIFO will have the highest income tax expense
average cost will have the income tax expense
LIFO will have the highest income tax expense
All three methods will result in the same income tax expense.
6. (TCOs A, E) Equipment with a cost of $212,000 has an estimated salvage value of $12,000 and an estimated life of 5 years or 15,000 hours. It is to be depreciated by the straight-line method. What is the amount of depreciation for the first full year, during which the equipment was used 6,000 hours?
$80,000
$84,800
$42,400
$40,000
7. (TCO D, G) Payne Corporation issues 100 twenty-year, 6%, $1,000 bonds dated July 1, 2010, at 105. The journal entry to record the issuance will show a _____.
debit to Discount on Bonds Payable of $5,000
debit to Premium on Bonds Payable of $5,000
credit to Discount on Bonds Payable of $5,000
credit to Premium on Bonds Payable of $5,000
8. (TCO C) Accounts receivable arising from sales to customers amounted to $80,000 and $120,000 at the beginning and end of the year, respectively. Income reported on the income statement for the year was $2,000,000. Exclusive of the effect of other adjustments, the cash flows from operating activities to be reported on the statement of cash flows is _____.
$2,040,000
$2,000,000
$1,200,000
$1,960,000
9. (TCO F) If you are making comparisons with other companies to provide insight into a company’s competitive position, you are performing what type of analysis
Common-size analysis
Intercompany analysis
Intracompany analysis
Industry average analysis
10. (TCO F) In a common size income statement, the 100% figure is _____.
Total Assets
Total Stockholders’ Equity
Net Sales
Net Income
11. (TCO F) Horizontal analysis of comparative financial statements includes the _____.
development of common-size statements
calculation of liquidity ratios
calculation of dollar amount changes and percentage changes from the previous year to the current year
evaluation of financial statement data that expresses each item in a financial statement as a percentage of a base amount
12. (TCO F) A common measure of solvency is the _____.
asset turnover
current cash debt coverage ratio
cash debt coverage ratio
current ratio
13. (TCO F) Short-term creditors would be most interested in which of the following ratios?
Average collection period
Times interest earned
Cash debt coverage
Free cash flow
14. (TCO G) To calculate the market value of a bond, we need to _____.
multiply the bond price times the interest rate
calculate the present value of the principal only
calculate the present value of the interest only
calculate the present value of both the principal and interest payments
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. T/F The two accounts affected by the adjustment for insurance are prepaid insurance and insurance expenses 2. T/F The two accounts affected by the adjustment for supplies are supplies and supplies expense. 3. T/F The work sheer is a temporary accounting form and can be prepared in pencil. 4. A net loss results when the total revenue is greater than the total expenses. 5. T/F The account balance for cash account is recorded in the Trial Balance Credit column and extended to the Balance Sheet Credit columns. 6. T/F The sales account balance is recorded in the Trial Balance Credit column and extended to the Balance sheet credit columns 7. T/F All financial statements have three-line headings. 8. T/F To determine the net income, this calculation is used: TOTAL REVENUE-TOTAL EXPENSES= NET INCOME 9. T/F The amount of current capital is calculated as follows: CAPITAL ACCOUNT BALANCE+NET INCOME-DRAWING ACCOUNT BALANCE=CURENT CAPITAL 10. T/F The two kinds of equities reported on the income statement are liabilities and owner s equity. 11. T/F The balance sheet reports information about the elements in the accounting equation. 12. T/F The owners drawing account is closed to the owners capital account. 13. T/F A balance sheet is a financial statement that reports assers, liabilities, and owners equity on a specific date. 14. T/F The income summary account is a temporary account that does not have a normal balance 15. T/F The temporary accounts are reduced to zero at the end of each fiscal period. 16. T/F Temporary accounts with zero balances are listed on the post-closing trial balance. 17. T/F All balances sheet accounts are closed to the income summary account. 18. T/F The information needed to prepare a balance sheet is obtained from a work sheet s Account Title column and the Balance Sheet columns. 19. T/F Reporting revenue earned and the expenses incurred to earn that revenue in the same fiscal period is an application of the accounting concept Matching Expenses with Revenue 20. T/F Expense accounts are closed by posting a credit to each expense account and debiting the income summary for the total of all expense account balances.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. There are three (and only three) paths through a network (project), each with a probability of completion in less than 24 months as indicated:
a. S-a-b-F P1(b. S- d-e-F P2(c. S- g-h-F P3(If the tasks are independent, what is the probability of the network being completed within 24 months? Note: S is the start node, F is the finish node.
2. You have been assigned to estimate the cost of installing fiber optic cable in a country. Fortunately, you have done a number of similar projects in this area in the past and you have accumulated the following parametric cost estimates based on this experience:
Mobilization/demobilization Cost = $10,000
Buried cable construction:
Cost per kilometer = $10,000 Sand
Cost per kilometer = $17,500 Sand & Clay
Cost per 100 meters = $ 5,500 Rock
Overhead cable installation:
Cost per kilometer = $ 7,500
Cost per Road Crossing = $12,500
Cost per pipeline Crossing = $ 5,000
The scope of the new project is as follows:
Predominately sand 150 km
Predominately sand & clay 100 km
Rock 500 meters
overhead XXXXXcrossings 3
pipeline crossings 5
Estimate the cost of construction for this project. Assume the estimates are fully loaded, ie they include labor, materials, applicable indirect costs such as overhead, etc. Must show your work.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Is there a significant decrease in body weight for patients after participating in a 7-week special weight loss diet? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
IV= Time
DV= Body weight
Covariate=
Best method of analysis=
2. What is the relationship between gender (male/female) and high school degree (yes/ no)? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
3. Does the distribution of the educators (highschool, college, and graduate school) attending the conference differ than what one would expect by chance? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
4. Is there a difference in SAT scores for high school seniors attending Bass High, Flounder High and Minnow High? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
5. Is there a relationship between job satisfaction and vacation time? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
6. Does the amount of vacation days predict greater job satisfaction? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
7. Is salary or perceived job stability (on a scale of 1-10) a better predictor of job satisfaction scores? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
8. What is the relationship between college degree (yes/no) and employment full time (yes/no)? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
9. Does the distribution of college majors at This University (psychology, education or business) differ from the expected 20%, 20%, 60% respectively? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
10. The CEO of Company Z recommends that employee breakdown should be : 10% upper management, 20% lower management and 70% sales representatives. Does the current employee breakdown abide by the CEO s recommendation? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
1. Jim is retaking statistics as part of his doctoral program. On his final in his MA program, he received a 225. The class mean of 230 and standard deviation of 12 were published. Jim just received his current stats final grade of 260, where the class mean is 245 and standard deviation is 17. How do Jim s scores compare? Which was better? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6) 2. Are the Mini Mental Status scores for the elders in Unit 2 significantly lower than the minimum normal score of 25 points. Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6) 3. Do 2nd graders who use computer games to study spelling words perform better on their spelling tests than those who do not use computer games? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6) 4. Did the June marketing campaign for Happiness products increase their sales from rates in May versus sale rates in July? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6) 5. Is there a difference in computer proficiency skills for employees who are under 35, between 35-49 and 50 and over? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6) 6. What are the effects of daily amount of TV viewing (2 hours) on reading comprehension scores for elementary school children (first, second and third grade)? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6) 7. Is there a significant difference in the acceptance rate to the Psychology graduate program for participants with and without experience working with mentally ill patients when controlling for age? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6) 8. Is there a difference in the amount of Barry Motter movie tickets sold to people who are: under the age of 18 years, between 19-24 years or 25-30 years? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6) 9. What are the effects of degree (BA, MBA, DBA) and years of experience at 1, 5 and 10 years on salary? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6) 10. After controlling for years of depression, is there a difference in depression scores for patients who have completed 3 months of behavior therapy, cognitive therapy or drug therapy? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. the method for testing may be: z score one-sample t-test paired-samples t-test independant sample t test levene’s test f test one-way anova two-way anova ancova pearson r pearson correlation pearson matrix simple regression multiple regression
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Treasury stock is best classified as:
A) A current asset.
B) A long-term investment.
C) A contra liability.
D) A reduction of stockholders’ equity.
E) A reduction of retained earnings.
2. Which of the following would be included in operating income?
A) Interest income for a manufacturing firm.
B) Rent income for a leasing subsidiary.
C) Gain from sale of marketable securities for a retailer.
D) Dividend income for a service firm.
E) None of the answers are correct.
3. Which of the following is a current liability?
A) Prepaid insurance.
B) Account receivable.
C) Unearned rent revenue.
D) Building.
E) Common stock.
4. Which of the following is a recurring item?
A) Equity in earnings of nonconsolidated subsidiaries.
B) Error of a prior period.
C) Discontinued operations.
D) Extraordinary gain.
E) Cumulative effect of change in accounting principle.
5. Ownership of debt instruments of the government and other companies that can be readily converted to cash are best reported as:
A) Long-term investments.
B) Cash.
C) Marketable securities.
D) Intangibles.
E) Inventory of near-cash items.
6. Which of the following is not true about a stock dividend?
A) With a stock dividend, the firm issues a percentage of outstanding stock as new shares to existing shareholders.
B) The overall effect of a stock dividend is to leave total stockholders’ equity and each owner’s share of stockholders’ equity unchanged.
C) In theory, with a stock dividend, total market value considering all outstanding shares should not change.
D) Since the number of shares changes under a stock dividend, any ratio based on the number of shares must be restated.
E) The accounting for a stock dividend, assuming the distribution is relatively small, requires that the par value of the stock be removed from retained earnings.
7. Tangible assets on the balance sheet should include:
A) Equipment.
B) Taxes payable.
C) Trademarks.
D) Bonds payable.
E) None of the answers are correct.
8. When a company discontinues and disposes of a component segment of its operations, the gain or loss from disposal should be reported as:
A) An adjustment to retained earnings.
B) A sale of fixed assets in “other” expense.
C) An extraordinary item.
D) An accounting change.
E) A special item after continuing operations and before extraordinary items.
9. Gross profit is the difference between:
A) Net income and operating income.
B) Revenues and expenses.
C) Sales and cost of goods sold.
D) Income from continuing operations and discontinued operations.
E) Gross sales and sales discounts.
10. The balance sheet reports:
A) The assets, liabilities, gains, and losses for a period of time.
B) The changes in assets, liabilities, and equity for a period of time.
C) The assets, expenses, and liabilities as of a certain date.
D) The probable future benefits, probable future sacrifices, and residual interest for a period of time.
E) The financial condition of an accounting entity as of a particular date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Units-of-activity is an appropriate depreciation method to use when (Points : 1)
it is impossible to determine the productivity of the asset.
the asset’s use will be constant over its useful life.
the productivity of the asset varies significantly from one period to another.
the company is a manufacturing company
2. The reconciliation of the cash register tape with the cash in the register is an example of (Points : 1)
other controls.
independent internal verification.
establishment of responsibility.
segregation of duties.
3. Mitchell Corporation bought equipment on January 1, 2012 .The equipment cost $120,000 and had an expected salvage value of $20,000. The life of the equipment was estimated to be 6 years. The depreciable cost of the equipment is (Points : 1)
$120,000.
$100,000.
$20,000.
$16,667.
4. A plant asset with a cost of $360,000 and accumulated depreciation of $342,000 is sold for $42,000. What is the amount of the gain or loss on disposal of the plant asset? (Points : 1)
$42,000 loss.
$24,000 loss.
$24,000 gain.
$42,000 gain.
5. Maximum benefit from independent internal verification is obtained when (Points : 1)
it is made on a pre-announced basis.
it is done by the employee possessing custody of the asset.
discrepancies are reported to management.
it is done at the time of the audit.
6. A system of internal control (Points : 1)
is infallible.
can be rendered ineffective by employee collusion.
invariably will have costs exceeding benefits.
is premised on the concept of absolute assurance
7. A company purchases a remote building site for computer operations. The building will be suitable for operations after some expenditures. The wiring must be replaced to computer specifications. The roof is leaky and must be replaced. All rooms must be repainted and recarpeted and there will also be some plumbing work done. Which of the following statements is true? (Points : 1)
The cost of the building will not include the repainting and recarpeting costs.
The cost of the building will include the cost of replacing the roof.
The cost of the building is the purchase price of the building, while the additional expenditures are all capitalized as Building Improvements.
The wiring is part of the computer costs, not the building cost.
8. The account Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is classified as a(n) (Points : 1)
liability.
contra account of Bad Debt Expense.
expense.
contra account to Accounts Receivable.
9. The matching rule relates to credit losses by stating that bad debt expense should be recorded (Points : 1)
in the same period as allowed for tax purposes.
in the period of the sale.
for an exact amount.
in the period of the loss.
10. A very small company would have the most difficulty in implementing which of the following internal control activities? (Points : 1)
Separation of duties.
Limited access to assets.
Periodic independent verification.
Sound personnel procedures.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Vaughn Company, which uses a periodic inventory system, had a beginning inventory on May 1, of 400 units of Product A at a cost of $7 per unit. During May, the following purchases and sales were made.
Purchases
May 6 ——–375 units at $9
May 14——– 250 units at $10
May 21 ——- 300 units at $11
May 28 ——- 452 units at $13
—————- 1350 ———-
Sales
May 4 ——— 275 units
May 8 ——— 300 units
May 22——– 400 units
May 24 ——– 225 units
—————–1200—-
Instructions: Compute the May 31 ending inventory and May cost of goods sold under (a) Average Cost, (b) FIFO, and (c) LIFO. Provide appropriate supporting calculations.
(a) Average Ending Inventory = $_________;
Cost of Goods Sold = $_________.
(b) FIFO Ending Inventory = $_________;
Cost of Goods Sold = $_________.
(c) LIFO Ending Inventory = $_________;
Cost of Goods Sold = $_________.
Part 2 Which of the following accounts should be closed with a debit or a credit to Income Summary at the end of the fiscal year? If it is not closed to Income
Summary, mark as n/a.
1. Sales
2. Cost of Goods Sold
3. Accumulated Depreciation
4. Merchandise Inventory
5. Sales Returns and Allowances
6. H. Denton, Drawing
7. Freight-out
8. Sales Discounts
9. JInterest Expense
10. H. Denton, Capital
——————————————————————————–
Please help me solve the missing amounts.
1)”All three are related because they are from the same business.” —- This threw me off… please help.
Beginning of the year
Total Assets = $85,000
Total Liabilities =
Total Owner’s Equity = 35,000
End of the Year
Total Assets = $90,000
Total Liabilities = 40,000
Total Owner’s Equity =
Owner’s Equity Changes During the year
Investments = $12,000
Drawings = 20,000
Revenues = 80,000
Expenses =
—————————————…
2)Calculate B. Petry company’s 2010 net income.
B. Petry, Capital January 1, 2010 = $125,000
B. Petry, Capital December 31, 2010 = 160,000
Petry investments during 2010 = 20,000
Petry withdrawals during 2010 = 38,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Village Company’s selected cost data for 2012 are shown below:
Cost of goods manufactured $145,200
Work in process inventory, Jan. 1, 2012 18,500
Work in process inventory, Dec. 31, 2012 22,500
Direct materials used 15,800
What are total manufacturing costs incurred by Village Company in 2012
$149,200
$158,300
$139,800
$117,100
None of these is correct
2. The following information pertains to Bright Toy Company’s operating activities for 2012. The company sells light box toys and sold 10,000 units in 2012. Purchases $ 126,000 Selling and Administrative Expenses 90,000 Merchandise inventory, 1/1/2012 14,000 Merchandise inventory, 12/31/2012 10,000 Sales Revenue 250,000 .What is the cost per unit sold
$13.00
$12.40
$14.00
$10.40
None of these is correct
3. A service company s income statement does NOT include cost of goods sold.
True
False
4. Accounting firms, building contractors, and healthcare providers are companies that use job order costing.
True
False
5. Management accounting is influenced significantly by rules of GAAP and guidelines of the Securities Exchange Commission.
True
False explanation: financial accounting uses GAAP and SEC not management accounting
6. Indirect materials and indirect labor are tracked to individual job costing records and recorded in the Work in process account.
True
False explanation: it s direct materials and direct labor that is charged to work in process
7. Arabica Manufacturing Company uses a predetermined manufacturing overhead rate based on a percentage of direct labor cost. At the beginning of 2012, they estimated total manufacturing overhead costs at $1,050,000, and they estimated total direct labor costs at $840,000. In June, 2012, Arabica completed job number 511. Job stats are as follows: Direct materials cost $27,500 Direct labor cost $13,000 Direct labor hours 400 hours Units of product produced: 200 crates How much manufacturing overhead was allocated to the job
$16,250
$10,400
$ 5,000
$34,375
None of these is correct
8. Archangel Manufacturing has just finished the year 2012. They created a predetermined manufacturing overhead allocation rate at the beginning of the year based on a percentage of direct labor costs. Below are various data: Total manufacturing overhead estimated at the beginning of the year: $140,000 Total direct labor costs estimated at the beginning of the year: $350,000 Total direct labor hours estimated at the beginning of the year: 12,000 direct labor hours Actual manufacturing overhead costs for the year: $159,000 Actual direct labor costs for the year: $362,000 Actual direct labor hours for the year: 12,400 direct labor hours Based on the data above, how much manufacturing overhead was allocated to production?
$825,360
$905,000
$144,800
$159,280
None of these is correct
9. The journal entry to record the incurrence of $1,500 of direct labor and $200 of indirect labor includes which of the following?
Debit to Manufacturing overhead for $1,700
Debit to Work in process inventory for $1,500 and debit to Finished goods for $200
Debit to Work in process inventory for $1,700
Debit to Work in process for $1,500, debit to Manufacturing overhead for $200
10. Which of the following describes the cost of goods manufactured
The cost of the goods that were sold during the period
The total cost of all goods that were completed, or partially completed during the period
The cost of those goods which were completed during the period
The total costs in inventory at the end of the period
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. When indirect materials are requisitioned from the materials storeroom and placed in production, an entry is made crediting Raw Materials Inventory and debiting:
A. Work in Process Inventory.
B. Cost of Goods Manufactured.
C. Manufacturing Overhead Applied.
D. Manufacturing Overhead.
2. The entry to record the application of overhead to jobs consists of a debit to __________ and a credit to __________.
A. Manufacturing Overhead Applied; Manufacturing Overhead
B. Manufacturing Overhead; Manufacturing Overhead Applied
C. Work in Process Inventory; Manufacturing Overhead Applied
D. Manufacturing Overhead Applied; Work in Process Inventory
3. At the end of the fiscal year, any overapplied or underapplied overhead is:
A. transferred to the Cost of Goods Sold account in an adjustment.
B. shown on the balance sheet as either a deferred charge or a deferred credit.
C. allocated to Cost of Goods Sold, Finished Goods Inventory, and Work in Process Inventory.
D. transferred to the Cost of Goods Manufactured account in an adjustment.
4. Job order cost accounting is appropriate:
A. on standard types of products
B. when a company produces more than one product in batches rather than on a continuous basis.
C. only for goods produced on special order.
D. for all manufacturing companies.
5. When a perpetual inventory system is used, sales revenue is recorded as products are sold:
A. but the cost of the goods sold is not recorded.
B. and the cost of the goods sold is transferred from the Finished Goods Inventory account to the Cost of Goods Sold account.
C. and the cost of the goods sold is transferred from the Work in Process Inventory account to the Cost of Goods Sold account.
D. and the cost of goods sold is transferred from the Cost of Goods Manufactured to the Cost of Goods Sold account.
6. A firm purchased 25 units of materials with a unit price of $2.00 on May 5. On May 15, the firm purchased 25 units with a unit price of $2.10. If the firm uses the FIFO method of inventory pricing, the total cost of 30 units issued on May 20 would be:
A. $62.50.
B. $60.00.
C. $63.00.
D. $60.50.
7. Job order cost sheets constitute a subsidiary ledger that supports the __________ account.
A. Work in Process Inventory
B. Finished Goods Inventory
C. Raw Materials Inventory
D. Cost of Goods Manufactured
8. Manufacturing overhead includes all of the following EXCEPT:
A. indirect labor.
B. direct labor.
C. utilities.
D. payroll taxes on factory labor.
9. If manufacturing overhead is applied at a rate of $1.50 per direct labor dollar and the Department B worker had worked 200 hours at $12 an hour on Job L1147, then the applied overhead would be:
A. $ 3,600.
B. $ 18.
C. $ 300.
D. $ 2,400.
10. At the end of the year the Manufacturing Overhead account is closed into what account?
A. Work in Process
B. Finished Goods
C. Cost of Goods Sold
D. Manufacturing Overhead Control
11. What form is presented at the storeroom to obtain materials or supplies for use in the factory?
A. Materials Request Form
B. Materials Requisition Form
C. Raw Materials Ledger Card
D. Production Order Form
12. During one month, 3,000 units of a product were completed and 800 units were 20 percent complete and still in process. The equivalent production for the month is __________ units.
A. 3,800
B. 4,000
C. 3,040
D. 3,160
13. Process cost accounting is most appropriate:
A. when there is continuous production on a single product.
B. when a company produces more than one product in batches rather than on a continuous basis.
C. for companies with either continuous or batch processing of different products.
D. for all manufacturing companies.
14. A firm had 600 units in its work in process inventory at the beginning of a month. Of these units, 30 percent were complete with respect to labor, materials, and overhead. The firm transferred 5,000 units to the finished goods inventory during the month. It had 500 units of which 40 percent were complete and still in process at the end of the month. Equivalent production for the month was __________ units.
A. 5,680
B. 5,380
C. 5,200
D. 5,180
15. A department transferred 7,000 units to the finished goods storeroom during a month. There was no beginning work in process inventory, but 500 units were still in process at the end of the month. Equivalent production for the month was 7,400 units, and production costs incurred totaled $16,800. Inventory costs would be determined using a unit cost of:
a. $2.27.
b. $2.40.
c. $2.24.
d. $2.58.
16. A firm had no work in process at the beginning of a month. It transferred 4,000 units to finished goods during the month, and 500 units were still in process at the end of the month. Equivalent production for the month was 4,400 units. At what stage of completion were the unfinished units at the end of the month?
a. 67 percent
b. 75 percent
c. 20 percent
d. 80 percent
17. In a process cost accounting system:
a. the Finished Goods Inventory account is debited for the cost of completed units any time during the month.
b. the Work in Process Inventory accounts are used to accumulate the costs for labor, materials, and manufacturing overhead.
c. manufacturing overhead is not included in the determination of inventory costs.
d. inventory costs are calculated when goods are sold.
18. At the end of the month, the entry to close the Manufacturing Overhead control account is recorded as a debit to and a credit to:
a. Manufacturing Overhead Applied; Manufacturing Overhead
b. Work in Process Inventory accounts; Manufacturing Overhead
c. Manufacturing Overhead; the Work in Process inventory accounts
d. Manufacturing Overhead; Manufacturing Summary
19. The method that combines the cost of beginning inventory and the current costs of the period is the:
A .market value process costing method.
b. method of net realizable value.
c. replacement cost method.
d. average method of process costing.
20.Total costs accounted for in each department consist of the:
a. cumulative cost plus the work in process-ending costs.
b. total costs transferred out less the total work in process ending costs.
c. cumulative cost plus total costs transferred out.
d. total costs transferred out plus the total work in process ending costs.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. When interest expense is calculated using the effective-interest amortization method, interest expense on a bond that pays interest annually, is equal to
A. the actual amount of interest paid.
B. the carrying value of the bonds payable multiplied by the effective interest rate.
C. the maturity value of the bonds payable multiplied by the effective interest rate.
D. the carrying value of the bonds payable multiplied by the stated interest rate
2. Treasury stock:
A. does not appear on the balance sheet.
B. is a contra-equity account.
C. is an asset account.
D. is recorded as additional paid-in capital
3. A stock dividend:
A. is the same thing as a stock split.
B. will reduce stockholders’ equity just like a cash dividend.
C. will not change any of the accounts within stockholders’ equity.
D. will reduce retained earnings just like a cash dividend.
4. The effect of a stock dividend is to:
A. decrease total assets and stockholders’ equity.
B. change the composition of stockholders’ equity.
C. decrease total assets and total liabilities.
D. increase the market value per share of common shares.
5. The ROE ratio measures:
A. the return stockholders receive in dividends for each dollar of their investment.
B. the return stockholders receive in dividends and stock price growth for each dollar of their investment.
C. the amount earned by the company on each dollar contributed by stockholders and earnings reinvested in the company.
D. the amount earned by the company on each dollar obtained from equity and debt financing
6. Which of the following statements regarding cash flows from investing activities is true?
A. The proceeds from sales of investments are reported as cash inflows from investing activities.
B. Cash flows from investing activities are calculated by making adjustments to net income.
C. Cash paid to acquire long-lived assets is reported as a cash inflow from investing activities.
D. Cash received from issuing a long-term payable is reported as a cash inflow from investing activities.
7. Which of the following would be included in cash flows from investing activities?
A. Cash proceeds from sales.
B. Cash received from an issuance of bonds.
C. Dividends paid to stockholders.
D. Cash used to purchases of equipment
8. If the calculation of net cash flows from operating activities starts with net income, the company:
A. is using the net income method.
B. will remove the effects of all noncash items included in the calculation of net income.
C. is using the direct method
D. will add all noncash items not included in the calculation of net income
9. Cash flows from investing activities include cash:
A. inflows and outflows reflecting revenues and expenses.
B. outflows from the sale of long-term investments.
C. inflows from the sale of long-term investments.
D. inflows from the sale of a company’s own stock to its stockholders
10. When the direct method is used to determine the net cash flow from operating activities, other operating expenses are converted into cash outflows by:
A. adding changes in prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities to other expenses.
B. subtracting increases in prepaid expenses and subtracting decreases in accrued liabilities from other expenses.
C. adding increases in prepaid expenses and adding decreases in accrued liabilities to other expenses.
D. subtracting changes in prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities from other expenses
11. The retained earnings account has a beginning balance of $321,975 and an ending balance of $356,413. Net income is $40,251. Which of the following statements is true?
A. $5,813 would be subtracted when determining cash flows from financing activities.
B. $40,251 would be added when determining cash flows from financing activities.
C. $34,438 would be added when determining cash flows from financing activities.
D. $321,975 would be added when determining cash flow from operating activities
12. At certain times of the year, many retail companies experience a rapid increase in inventory as they prepare for a period of high sales. All other things equal, this would cause:
A. both the quality of income ratio and the capital acquisitions ratio to fall.
B. the quality of income ratio to fall while the capital acquisitions ratio would remain the same.
C. the quality of income ratio to rise while the capital acquisitions ratio would remain the same.
D. both the quality of income ratio and the capital acquisitions ratio to rise
13. If a company uses the indirect method to determine net cash flows from operating activities:
A. gains must be added to net income and losses subtracted from net income
B. gains and losses must be added to net income.
C. gains must be subtracted from net income and losses added to net income
D. gains and losses must be subtracted from net income.
14. The repayment of the principal of a loan which had been used to finance the purchase of equipment should be reported on the statement of cash flows as a
A. cash outflow from investing activities
B. cash outflow from operating activities.
C. cash outflow from financing activities.
D. noncash transaction in a supplemental disclosure.
For each of the following transactions, indicate whether operating (O), investing (I), or financing activities (F) are affected and whether the effect is a cash inflow (+) or outflow ( ), or (NE) if the transaction has no effect on cash.
1. Purchased new equipment by signing a promissory note.
2. Recorded and paid income taxes to the federal government.
3. Issued shares of stock for cash.
4. Prepaid rent for the following period.
5. Recorded an adjusting entry for expiration of a prepaid expense.
6. Paid cash to purchase new equipment.
7. Issued long-term debt for cash.
8. Collected payments on account from customers.
9. Recorded and paid salaries to employees.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which financial statement would you utilize to determine whether a company will be able to pay liabilities which are due in 30 days
A. Income statement
B. Balance sheet
C. Statement of retained earnings
D. Statement of cash flows
2. Which of the following is an objective of the external audit of a company’s financial statements
A. To provide a forecast of the company’s future earnings.
B. To assure no fraud has been committed by the company’s management.
C. To provide credibility and assurance that the financial statement information conforms with generally accepted accounting principles in all material respects.
D. To detect all accounting errors made by the accounting system and employees.
3. Huron has provided the following year-end balances:
Cash, $25,000
Patents, $7,900
Accounts receivable, $9,300
Property, plant, and equipment, $98,700
Prepaid insurance, $3,600
Accumulated depreciation, $10,000
Inventory, $37,000
Trademarks, $12,600
How much are Huron’s current assets
A. $85,900.
B. $71,300.
C. $74,900.
D. $102,100.
4. Which group requires CPAs to follow a professional code of ethics and standards
A. American Institute of Certified Public Accountants
B. Internal Revenue Service
C. Securities & Exchange Commission
D. Local taxing agency
5. Match each career with the related definition by entering the appropriate letter in the space provided.
Careers Definitions
_ ___(1) financial analyst a. Chief executive officer who has primary responsibility for the financial information presented in the financial statements.
_____(2) Independent auditor b. Advisor who analyzes financial and other economic information to form forecasts and stock recommendations.
_____(3) CEO c. CPA who examines financial statements and attests to their fairness.
_____(4) Tax practitioner d. Individual who provides tax planning and tax services.
6. Phipps Company borrowed $25,000 cash on October 1, 2010, and signed a six-month, 8% interest-bearing note payable with interest payable at maturity. Assuming that no adjusting entries have been made during the year, what is the amount of accrued interest payable to be reported on the December 31, 2010 balance sheet
_____________
7. On January 1, 2011 Miller Corporation had retained earnings of $18,000. During 2010, Miller reported net income of $25,000, declared and paid dividends of $20,000, and issued stock for $10,000. What were Miller’s retained earnings on December 31, 2011
_____________
8. A corporation has $80,000 in total assets, $36,000 in total liabilities, and a $10,000 credit balance in retained earnings. What is the balance in the contributed capital account
____________
9. During 2010, Sigma Company earned service revenues amounting to $900,000, of which $700,000 was collected in cash; the balance will be collected in January 2011. What amount should the 2010 income statement report for service revenues
_______________
10. A company receives a $55,000 cash deposit from a customer on December 15 but will not deliver the goods until January 20. What month will revenue be recorded
_______
11. On January 1, 2011, the general ledger of Global Corporation included supplies inventory of $2,000. During 2011, supplies purchases amounted to $6,000. A physical count of inventory on hand at December 31, 2011 determined that the supplies inventory was $1,300. How much is the 2011 supplies expense
_______
12. A company reported the following information for its most recent year of operation: purchases, $300,000; beginning inventory, $20,000; and cost of goods sold, $10,000. How much was the company’s ending inventory
__________
13. Lauer Corporation uses the periodic inventory system and has provided the following information about one of their laptop computers:
Date Transaction Number of Units Cost per Unit
1/1 Beginning inventory 100 $800
5/5 Purchase 200 $900
8/10 Purchase 300 $1,000
10/15 Purchase 200 $1,050
During the year, 150 laptop computers were sold.
What was cost of goods sold using the FIFO cost flow assumption _________
14. Lauer Corporation uses the periodic inventory system and has provided the following information about one of their laptop computers:
Date Transaction Number of Units Cost per Unit
1/1 Beginning inventory 100 $800
5/5 Purchase 200 $900
8/10 Purchase 300 $1,000
10/15 Purchase 200 $1,050
During the year, 150 laptop computers were sold.
What was cost of goods sold using the LIFO cost flow assumption _____
15. On January 1, 2010, Woodstock, Inc. purchased a machine costing $40,000. Woodstock also paid $2,000 for transportation and installation. The expected useful life of the machine is 9 years and the residual value is $6,000. How much is the annual depreciation expense assuming use of the straight-line depreciation method
__________
16. A company purchased an oil well for $50,000. It is estimated that 100,000 barrels can be extracted from the well. What is the depletion expense assuming 30,000 barrels are extracted and sold?
________
17. The following data were provided by the detailed payroll records of Mountain Corporation for the month of March 2011:
Wages $35,000
Income Taxes Withheld 7,350
Union dues 175
FICA taxes at a 7.65% rate (no employee has reached the maximum)
Requirements:
a) Prepare the journal entry to record the payroll and the related employee deductions.
b) Prepare the journal entry to record the employers FICA payroll tax expense.
18. For each of the transactions listed below, indicate whether it is an operating (O), investing (I) or financing (F) activity on the statement of cash flows. Also, indicate if the transaction increases (+) or decreases (-) cash.
|
|
Transaction
|
Type of Activity
|
Effect on Cash
|
|
A)
|
Sold stock for cash
|
|
|
|
B)
|
Collected cash from customers on account
|
|
|
|
C)
|
Purchased equipment
|
|
|
|
D)
|
Paid operating expenses
|
|
|
|
E)
|
Repaid the bank loan
|
|
|
|
F)
|
Paid dividends to stockholders
|
|
|
19. Record the following transactions indicating the account affected and whether the account increased (+) or decreased (-)
|
|
Transaction
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Stockholders Equity
|
|
A)
|
Paid accounts payable of $15,000
|
|
|
|
|
B)
|
Purchased $1,000 of supplies on account
|
|
|
|
|
C)
|
Borrowed $20,000 cash from the bank
|
|
|
|
|
D)
|
Purchased equipment for $18,000 and paid cash
|
|
|
|
|
E)
|
Sold stock and received $50,000 cash
|
|
|
|
|
F)
|
Earned $90,000 of revenue on account
|
|
|
|
|
G)
|
Collected $70,000 accounts receivable
|
|
|
|
|
H)
|
Paid dividends of $13,000
|
|
|
|
|
I)
|
Paid operating expenses of $12,000
|
|
|
|
|
J)
|
Depreciation expense for the year, $23,000
|
|
|
|
|
K)
|
Accrued year end wages of $4,000
|
|
|
|
|
L)
|
Received cash for services provided, $75,000
|
|
|
|
|
M)
|
Paid $12,000 for a 2 year insurance policy
|
|
|
|
|
N)
|
Insurance expired for the year $6,000
|
|
|
|
|
O)
|
Accrued interest expense on note, $1,000
|
|
|
|
20 . Letter Account Title Letter Account Title
A Cash G Notes payable
B Accounts receivable H Contributed capital
C Supplies I Retained earning
D Prepaid Insurance J Revenue
E Equipment K Operating expenses
F Accounts payable
During 2010, the company completed the transactions given below. Indicate the appropriate journal entry for each transaction by giving the account letter and amount.
|
|
Transaction
|
Letter
|
Debit
|
Letter
|
Credit
|
|
1)
|
Paid $500 in operating expenses
|
|
500
|
|
500
|
|
2)
|
Paid $12,000 for a two year insurance policy
|
|
12,000
|
|
12,000
|
|
3)
|
Purchased equipment for $40,000. Paid $10,000 cash and signed a $30,000 note
|
|
40,000
|
|
10,000
30,000
|
|
4)
|
Issued capital stock and received $8,000 cash
|
|
8,000
|
|
8,000
|
|
5)
|
Received cash for services provided $7,500
|
|
7,500
|
|
7,500
|
|
6)
|
Received $2,100 on accounts receivable
|
|
2,100
|
|
2,100
|
|
7)
|
Insurance expired for the year, $23,000
|
|
23,000
|
|
23,000
|
|
8)
|
Accrued year end expenses of $4,000
|
|
4,000
|
|
4,000
|
|
9)
|
Paid accounts payable of $1,2,00
|
|
1,200
|
|
1,200
|
|
10)
|
Earned $9,000 of revenue on account
|
|
9,000
|
|
9,000
|
|
11)
|
Paid dividends to stockholders, $3,000
|
|
3,000
|
|
3,000
|
21. National Shops, Inc. reported the following amounts on its balance sheet as of December 31, 2010:
Inventory $325,000
Notes payable 100,000
Cash 150,000
Contributed capital 250,000
Equipment 700,000
Accumulated depreciation 600,000
Accounts receivable 30,000
Accounts payable 45,000
Retained earnings 210,000
Requirements:
1. What is the amount of National’s total assets? _______
2. What is the amount of National s total liabilities? _____
3. What is the amount of National s stockholders equity ____
22. For each of the accounts listed below, indicate whether the normal balance is a debit (DR) or credit (CR)
______ Inventory ______ Prepaid insurance
______ Notes payable ______ Accounts payable
______ Retained earnings ______ Cost of Goods Sold
______ Equipment ______ Cash
______ Accounts receivable ______ Wage Expense
_____ Revenue _____ Contributed capital
23. Indicate whether the following items would be added (+) or subtracted (-) from the company s books or the bank statement during the preparation of a bank reconciliation.
|
Reconciling item
|
Company s Books
|
Bank Statement
|
|
Outstanding checks
|
|
|
|
Bank service charge
|
|
|
|
Interest earned on the account
|
|
|
|
Deposits in transit
|
|
|
|
A check written for $59 but was incorrectly recorded in the check register for $95
|
|
|
24. The following data were taken from the records of Lilo Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2010:
Sales 900,000
Sales returns and allowances 10,000
Selling and administrative expenses 170,000
Cost of goods sold 510,000
The income tax rate is 35%.
Based on the above data, prepare a multiple-step income statement using good form. Include gross profit and pretax income. Use the form below.
25. For each of the accounts listed below, indicate whether they would be classified as an
ASSET (A) , LIABILITY (L), STOCKHOLDERS EQUITY (SE), REVENUE (R), EXPENSE (E)
_____ Inventory ______ Prepaid insurance
______ Notes payable ______Accounts payable
______ Retained earnings ______Cost of Goods Sold
______ Equipment ______Cash
______ Accounts receivable ______ Wage Expense
_____Revenue
26. For each of the accounts listed below, indicate which financial statement they would be included on Balance Sheet (BS) or Income Statement (IS)
______ Inventory ______ Prepaid insurance
______ Notes payable ______Accounts payable
______ Retained earnings ______Cost of Goods Sold
______ Equipment ______Cash
______ Accounts receivable ______ Wage Expense
______Revenue ______Contributed capital
27. Compute the missing amounts for each independent case.
|
|
Total
Revenues
|
Total
Expenses
|
Net Income
(Loss)
|
Total
Assets
|
Total
Liabilities
|
Stockholders
Equity
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
28. Compute the missing amounts for each independent case.
|
|
Sales
Revenue
|
Beginning
Inventory
|
Purchases
|
Total
Available
|
Ending
Inventory
|
Cost of
Goods Sold
|
Gross
Profit
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which of the following accounts would not appear on a balance sheet
Equipment
Interest Payable
Interest Revenue
Retained Earnings
2. Which of the following statements about the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (PCAOB) is not true
The PCAOB was created by the Sarbanes-Oxley Act to regulate the accounting firms that audit financial statements of public companies.
Independent auditors are required to register with the PCAOB.
The PCAOB has the power to impose sanctions against a registered accounting firm.
The PCAOB requires public accounting firms to conduct peer reviews of other such firms and make their report public.
3. Which financial statement matches asset increases from operating a business with asset decreases from operating the business
Statement of changes in equity
Balance sheet
Income statement
Statement of cash flows
4. The Blumer Company entered into the following transactions during 2010:
The company was started with $22,000 of common stock issued to investors for cash.
On July 1, the company purchased land that cost $15,500 cash.
There was $700 of supplies purchased on account.
The amount of total liabilities appearing on the December 31, 2010 balance sheet would be:
$3,600
$4,000
$475
$700
5. Rowena Company spent cash to purchase equipment. As a result of this event:
total liabilities increased.
total assets increased.
net income increased.
total assets were unchanged.
6. ABC Company acquired $23,000 by issuing common stock to investors. Which of the following choices accurately reflects how this event would affect the company’s financial statement?
Row Assets = Liab. + Equity Rev. – Exp. = Net Inc. Cash Flow
One 23,000 = NA + 23,000 NA – NA = NA 23,000 FA
Two 23,000 = NA + 23,000 23,000 – NA = 23,000 NA
Three 23,000 = NA + 23,000 23,000 – NA = 23,000 23,000 FA
Four 23,000 = 23,000 + NA 23,000 – NA = 23,000 23,000 OA
Row One
Row Two
Row Three
Row Four
7. Parrot Company paid a $300 cash dividend. Which of the following choices accurately reflects how this event would affect the company’s financial statements?
Balance Sheet Income Statement
Row Assets = Liab. + Equity Rev. – Exp. = Net Inc.
Statement of Cash Flows
One NA = 300 + (300) NA – 300 = (300) NA
Two (300) = NA + (300) NA – 300 = (300) (300) FA
Three (300) = NA + (300) NA – NA = NA (300) FA
Four (300) = NA + (300) NA – NA = NA (300) OA
Row One
Row Two
Row Three
Row Four
8. Sefcik Company purchased supplies on account. Which of the following choices accurately reflects how this event would affect the company’s financial statements
Row Assets = Liab. + Equity Rev. – Exp. = Net Inc. Cash Flow
One + = NA + – NA – + = – NA
Two + – = NA + NA NA – NA = NA – OA
Three + = + + NA NA – NA = NA NA
Four + – = NA + NA NA – NA = NA NA
Row One
Row Two
Row Three
Row Four
9. Ohio Company provided services to a customer for $1,700 cash. As a result of this event:
total assets decreased.
total liabilities increased.
retained earnings increased.
cash flows from financing activities increased.
10. The claims of a business s creditors are called:
assets.
liabilities.
equity.
revenue.
11. The Sarbanes-Oxley Act:
was prompted by corporate bankruptcies and audit failures.
limits an auditor s ability to provide non-audit services to a client.
clarifies the responsibility of a company s management for its financial statements.
all of the above.
12. Hardin Company began operations in 2010. During the year, the following cash transactions
occurred:
Issued stock for $40,000
Borrowed $24,000 from bank
Provided services to customers for $53,000 cash
Paid back $8,000 of the loan from the bank
Paid rent expense, $9,000
Paid operating expenses, $29,000
Assuming that Hardin engaged in no transactions during the year other than those listed above, what was the amount of net income or loss for the year
$19,000 net income
$15,000 net income
$12,000 net income
$11,000 net loss
13. In event of liquidation of a business:
creditors have priority claim on the business s assets.
investors have priority claim on the business s assets.
resource users have priority claim on the business s assets.
stakeholders are assured of receiving the resources they had provided to the business.
14. The Blumer Company entered into the following transactions during 2010: There was $700 of supplies purchased on account. Sales on account amounted to $9,500. Cash collections of receivables were $5,500. Supplies on hand as of December 31, 2010 amounted to $225. The beginning balance of supplies at January 1, 2010 was $100.
The adjusting entry necessary to record the supplies expense would result in a:
$700 increase in assets and liabilities.
$700 decrease in assets and equity.
$575 decrease in assets and equity. solution: 700+100-225 = 575 decrease
$575 increase in assets and liabilities.
15. The amount of land owned by a business appears on which financial statement
Income statement
Statement of changes in stockholders equity
Statement of cash flows
Balance sheet
16. The purpose of the accrual basis of accounting is to:
report revenue when cash is received.
improve the matching of revenue and expense in the proper period.
report expenses when cash disbursements are made.
improve the company’s earnings per share.
17. Which of the following groups has primary responsibility for establishing generally accepted accounting principles for businesses in the United States
The U.S. Supreme Court
Each state s Secretary of the Treasury
The Financial Accounting Standards Board
The Internal Revenue Service
18. In 1998, Parker Corporation purchased land for $130,000. In 2010, Parker Company had the land appraised, and its value was estimated to be $190,000. Also during 2010, another company offered Parker $145,000 for the parcel of land. When the balance sheet is prepared at the end of 2010, at what dollar amount should the land be reported
$190,000
$145,000
$130,000
None of the above
19. Which of the following accounts is a permanent account (an account that is not closed)
Prepaid Insurance
Service Revenue
Salaries Expense
Rent Expense
20. Which of the following lists represents the correct sequence of stages in an accounting cycle
Record transactions, prepare statements, adjust accounts, and close temporary accounts
Prepare statements, close temporary accounts, record transactions, and adjust accounts
Close temporary accounts, record transactions, prepare statements, and adjust accounts
Record transactions, adjust accounts, prepare statements, and close temporary accounts
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which of the following is not considered a “cost” of financing credit sales
A. The opportunity cost of lost interest.
B. The increased sales resulting from the extension of credit.
C. Keeping the records for accounts receivable.
D. The possibility of unpaid accounts.
2. Lowe Company has the following account balances:
Compute the net realizable value of Lowe’s accounts receivable & show work above.
3. In the first year of operations, 2011, Jake’s Repair Service recognized $110,000 of service revenue on account. The ending accounts receivable balance was $7,550. Jake estimates that 3% of sales on account will not be collected; no accounts receivable had been written off by year end. Assume there were no other transactions affecting accounts receivable.
a) What amount of cash was collected in 2011?
b) What amount of uncollectible accounts expense was recognized in 2011
4. If Jenkins Company loans $5,000 to Brown Company on March 1, 2011, and the one-year note carries an interest rate of 8%, how much interest revenue will Jenkins recognize in 2011? How much in 2012
5. On January 1, 2011, the Accounts Receivable balance was $18,000 and the balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts was $1,400. On January 15, 2011 a $400 uncollectible account was written-off. The net realizable value of accounts receivable immediately after the write-off is:
A $17,600.
B $16,200.
C $16,600.
D $17,000.
The Mason Company earned $90,000 of revenue on account during 2011. There was no beginning balance in the accounts receivable and allowance accounts. During 2011 Morgan collected $68,000 of cash from its receivables accounts. The company estimates that it will be unable to collect 3% of its sales on account.
6. The amount of uncollectible accounts expense recognized on the 2011 income statement was
A. $2,040.
B. $660.
C. $2,700.
D. $22,000.
7. Richmond Company made a loan of $6,000 to one of the company’s employees on April 1, 2011. The one-year note carried a 6% rate of interest. The amount of interest revenue that Richmond would report in 2011 and 2012, respectively would be:
A. $360, $0
B. $0, $360
C. $90, $270
D. $270, $90
8. Einstein Company accepted credit card payments for $25,000 of services provided to customers. The credit card company charges a 3% service charge. This transaction would
A. decrease expenses by $750.
B. increase assets by $25,000.
C. increase Retained Earnings by $24,250.
D. b and c.
9. Beacon Company accepts a credit card as payment for $950 of services provided for the customer. The credit card company charges a 4% handling charge for its collection services. Select the answer that shows how the entry to record the sale would affect Beacon’s financial statements.
A.
B.
C.
D.
10. Accounts receivable turnover is computed by dividing:
A. 365 divided by Accounts Receivable.
B. Accounts receivable divided by Sales.
C. Accounts Receivable by net income.
D. Sales divided by Accounts Receivable.
11. The average number of days to collect accounts receivable is computed by dividing:
A. Accounts Receivable by net income.
B. Accounts Receivable by 365.
C. 365 by the accounts receivable turnover ratio.
D. Sales divided by Accounts Receivable.
12. A firm’s operating cycle can be determined by:
A. Adding the inventory turnover ratio to the receivables turnover ratio divided into 365 days.
B. Adding the average days in inventory to the average days in receivables.
C. Dividing cost-of-goods-sold by average inventory.
D. Dividing 365 days by the difference in the inventory turnover and the receivable turnover.
13. The following information is available for Bluefield Company for the most recent year.
What was Bluefield’s operating cycle for the most recent year? (rounded)
A. 52 days
B. 76 days
C. 83 days
D. 122 days
14. Which of the following statements is correct regarding accounting treatment of goodwill
A. Goodwill is recorded as an asset and amortized over 5 years regardless of any change in value.
B. Goodwill is recorded as an asset and is not written off as an expense unless its value decreases.
C. Goodwill is recorded as an asset and amortized over 40 years unless its value decreases.
D. Goodwill is expensed immediately in the year of purchase.
15. Which of the following terms is used to identify the expense recognition for intangible assets
A. Amortization.
B. Depletion.
C. Depreciation.
D. Allocation.
16. Which of the following terms is applied to long-term assets that have no physical substance and provide rights, privileges and special opportunities to businesses
A. Tangible assets
B. Intangible assets
C. Natural resources
D. Property, plant and equipment
17. Which of the following is not classified as property, plant and equipment
A. Computers
B. Land
C. Copyright
D. Office furniture
18. Which of the following terms is used to identify the process of expense recognition for property, plant and equipment
A. Amortization
B. Depletion
C. Depreciation
D. Revision
19. Chesapeake Company paid $375,000 for a group purchase that included office furniture, a building and land. An appraiser provided the following estimates of the market values of the assets if they had been purchased separately: Office furniture – $75,000; Building – $320,000, Land – $36,000. Based on this information the amount of cost that would be allocated to the office furniture is:
A. $31,323.
B. $65,255.
C. $75,000.
D. $278,422.
20. Albemarle Company purchased an asset with a list price of $70,000 and received a 2% cash discount on the purchase. The asset was delivered under terms FOB shipping point, and freight costs amounted to $1,400. Albemarle paid $1,600 to have the asset installed. Insurance costs to protect the asset from fire and theft amounted to $800 for the first year of operations. Based on this information, the amount of cost recorded in the asset account would be:
A. $73,000.
B. $72,800.
C. $70,000.
D. $70,600.
21. At the end of the current accounting period, Rodgers Co. recorded depreciation of $25,000 on its equipment. The effect of this entry on the company’s balance sheet is to:
A. decrease assets and increase liabilities.
B. decrease owners’ equity and increase liabilities.
C. decrease assets and increase owners’ equity.
D. decrease owners’ equity and decrease assets.
22. On January 1, 2010, Leland Company purchased an asset that cost $10,000. The asset had an expected useful life of five years and an estimated salvage value of $2,000. Leland uses the straight-line method for the recognition of depreciation expense. At the beginning of the fourth year of usage, the company revised its estimated salvage value to $1,000. Based on this information, the amount of depreciation expense to be recognized at the end of 2013 is:
A. $4,200.
B. $2,100.
C. $1,600.
D. $1,000.
23. The Harlow Company purchased the Hampton Company for $600,000 cash. The fair market value of Hampton’s assets was $520,000, and the company had liabilities of $30,000. Which of the following choices would reflect the purchase on Harlow’s financial statements
A.
B.
C.
D.
24. The Parks Corporation, a U.S. business, is a direct competitor of the Riddler Company, a Japanese firm. The two firms not only compete for customers, but also for investment capital. In 2011, each company spent about $35,000 U.S. dollars or the equivalent on research and development. U.S. GAAP requires the entire amount to be expensed, while Japan requires its businesses to record R&D expenditures as an asset and then to expense it over its useful life. Assuming the treatment of R&D is the only difference between the two firms, which of the following is correct
A. Parks will have higher total assets than Riddler in 2011.
B. Riddler will have a lower net income for 2011.
C. Parks will have a higher debt-to-assets ratio than Riddler in 2011.
D. This difference in accounting principles does not affect the total amount of assets reported by the two companies.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which of the following is NOT a step in the decision making process?
a)Explore workable alternatives
b)Determine relevant cost and revenue data
c)Consider appropriate non-financial factors
d)Make decision
2. Which of the following is NOT a consideration when determining whether to continue making a part or to buy that part?
a)Timing of the cash receipts and expenditures
b)Opportunity cost
c)Impact on employees
d)Sunk cost
3. Contribution margin is calculated by deducting:
a)variable costs from revenue
b)variable costs and controllable fixed costs from revenue
c)variable costs and common costs from revenue
d)fixed costs from revenue
4. A segment of a business probably should be discontinued if:
a)its common costs exceed its contribution margin
b)its contribution margin exceeds its controllable fixed costs and its common costs
c)if cannot produce a contribution margin
d)it has a net loss
5. When direct costing is used, cost of goods sold reflects:
a)both variable and fixed manufacturing costs
b)variable manufacturing costs and variable selling and administrative expenses
c)variable manufacturing costs only
d)fixed manufacturing costs only
6. On an income statement prepared with a direct costing approach, the excess of sales over the cost of goods sold, based on variable costs only, is referred to as the:
a) marginal gross profit on sales
b) manufacturing margin
c) marginal income on sales
d) contribution margin
7. Fixed manufacturing costs are written off as current expenses of the period in which they occurred when using_____costs.
a)direct
b)standard
c)absorption
d)differential
8. Which inventory costing system is NOT acceptable for financial reporting purposes?
a)Absorption costing
b)Direct costing
c)Standard costing
d)Variable costing
9. Which of the following would NOT be relevant to a decision about whether to continue making a part or whether to buy it from an outside supplier?
a)Alternative uses for the plant where the part was produced if the part is purchased
b)A fee previously spent for design of the part
c)The variable costs of making the part
d)The number of additional employees needed to make the part
10. A company has sales of $100,000, ending finished goods inventory of $9,000, variable manufacturing costs of $50,000, and fixed manufacturing costs of $28,000 for the year. Assuming the company uses direct costing, the manufacturing margin for the year is:
a)$22,000
b)$31,000
c)$59,000
d)$13,000
11. A segment of a business reported a contribution margin of $36,000 and controllable fixed costs of $12,000. If the segment had been eliminated, the company-wide net income would have been:
a)$12,000 higher
b)$24,000 lower
c)$36,000 lower
d)$24,000 higher
12. If a decision must be made to close a warehouse, non-refundable prepaid rent on the warehouse is a(n)________cost.
a)opportunity
b)common
c)sunk
d)variable
13. When the balance in ending finished goods inventory increases, net income under absorption costing is:
a)lower than under direct costing
b)higher than under direct costing
c)the same under direct costing
d)unaffected by the increase
14. Which of the following is the first step in the decision-making process?
a)Evaluate the cost and revenue data
b)Identify workable alternatives
c)Define the problem
d)Consider appropriate nonfinancial factors
15. Which of the following is NOT a consideration regarding a special order?
a)If the company has sufficient capacity
b)If the special order jeopardized sales to existing customers
c)Federal laws regarding the price
d)whether employee morale would be affected
16.Which of the following cost amounts can be found in a firms accounting records?
a)Opportunity costs
b)Differential costs
c)Incremental costs
d)Sunk costs
17. Costs that are not directly traceable to a specific segment of a business are called_________costs.
a)sunk
b)common
c)fixed
d)incremental
18. Which of the following is NOT true of the direct costing procedure?
a)Variable and fixed costs are considered as part of the cost of goods manufactured
b)The cost of goods sold, based solely on variable costs, is subtracted from net sales to arrive at the manufacturing margin.
c)Variable selling expenses are deducted from manufacturing margin
d)Variable administrative expenses are deducted from the manufacturing margin
19. Data for a firm s first year of operation is given below. The firm uses absorption costing.
Units produced (no work in process) 6,000
Units sold 5,000
Units in ending inventory of finished goods 1,000
Sales price for each unit $75
Variable manufacturing costs for each unit mnfctrd $30
Variable selling and admin. Exp. For ea unit sold $16
Fixed manufacturing costs for the year $90,000
Fixed selling and admin. Exp. For the year $65,000
The cost of the good sold for the year is:
a)$270,000
b)$225,000
c)$150,000
d)$45,000
20. Data for a firms first year of operation is given below. The firm uses direct costing.
Units produced (no work in process) 6,000
Units sold 5,000
Units in ending inventory of finished goods 1,000
Sales price for each unit $75
Variable manufacturing costs for each unit mnfctrd $30
Variable selling and admin. Exp. For ea unit sold $16
Fixed manfctg costs for the year $90,000
Fixed selling and admin. Exp. For the year $65,000
The cost of the good sold for the year is:
a)$270,000
b)$225,000
c)$150,000
d)$45,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Jim is retaking statistics as part of his doctoral program. On his final in his MA program, he received a 225. The class mean of 230 and standard deviation of 12 were published. Jim just received his current stats final grade of 260, where the class mean is 245 and standard deviation is 17. How do Jim s scores compare? Which was better? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
2. Are the Mini Mental Status scores for the elders in Unit 2 significantly lower than the minimum normal score of 25 points. Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
3. Do 2nd graders who use computer games to study spelling words perform better on their spelling tests than those who do not use computer games? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
4. Did the June marketing campaign for Happiness products increase their sales from rates in May versus sale rates in July? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
5. Is there a difference in computer proficiency skills for employees who are under 35, between 35-49 and 50 and over? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
6. What are the effects of daily amount of TV viewing (2 hours) on reading comprehension scores for elementary school children (first, second and third grade)? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
7. Is there a significant difference in the acceptance rate to the Psychology graduate program for participants with and without experience working with mentally ill patients when controlling for age? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
8. Is there a difference in the amount of Barry Motter movie tickets sold to people who are: under the age of 18 years, between 19-24 years or 25-30 years? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
9. What are the effects of degree (BA, MBA, DBA) and years of experience at 1, 5 and 10 years on salary? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
10. After controlling for years of depression, is there a difference in depression scores for patients who have completed 3 months of behavior therapy, cognitive therapy or drug therapy? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Joleen Harmon, CPA, has two clients. Client A requires 20 hours of partner time and 100
hours of staff time. Client B will use 12 hours of partner time and 80 hours of staff time.
Partners are paid $85 an hour and bill support time at 60% of their hourly rate. Staff are
paid $25 an hour and bill support time at $20 per billable hour.
On a separate sheet of paper, calculate the total charge to each of these clients if profit is
added at 20% over cost. Label each answer carefully and show all of your work. (This
question is worth 10 points.)
2. The Tijama Manufacturing Company has determined the cost of manufacturing a unit of
product to be as follows, based on annual production of 50,000 units per year:
Direct materials $20.00
Direct labor 15.00
Variable factory overhead 10.00
Fixed factory overhead 12.00
Operating statistics for the month of August and September are as follows:
August September
Units produced 4,200 3,500
Units sold 3,500 4,200
Selling and administrative expenses $25,000 $35,000
The selling price is $75 a unit. There were no inventories on August 1, and there is no
work in process at September 30.
Prepare comparative income statements for each month under both absorption costing
and direct costing. Use the forms at the end of this examination to complete this problem.
(This question is worth 25 points.)
3. The Donal Company has sales of $800,000, variable costs of $300,000, and fixed costs
of $250,000.
On a separate sheet of paper, compute the following. Label each answer carefully and
show all of your work.
a. Contribution margin ratio
b. Break-even sales volume
c. Margin of safety ratio
d. Net income as a percentage of sales
(This question is worth 20 points, 5 points for each part.)
4. Complete Problem 9-6 on page 416 in your textbook. Use the
forms provided in the Study Guide/Working Papersbooklet on
pages WP-283 and WP-284. (This question is worth 25 points.)
5. Complete the Chapter 10 Mini-Case on page 461 in your
textbook. Use a separate sheet of paper. Label each answer
and show all of your work. (This question is worth 20 points.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
- “List and describe the purpose of each part of a time line with an initial cash inflow and a future cash outflow. Which cash flows should be negative and which positive” (Cornett, Adair, and Nofsinger, 2014, p. 91)?
- “How are the present value and future value related” (Cornett, Adair, & Nofsinger, 2014, p. 91)?
- “How are present values affected by changes in interest rates” (Cornett, Adair, & Nofsinger, 2014, p. 91)?
- “How much would be in your savings account in eight years after depositing $150 today, if the bank pays 7 percent per year” (Cornett, Adair, & Nofsinger, 2014)?
- Recalculate the savings account balance, using a 6 percent interest rate, and again, using an 8 percent interest rate.
“A deposit of $350 earns the following interest rates: (a) 8 percent in the first year, (b) 7 percent in the second year, and (c) 5 percent in the third year. What would be the third year future value” (Cornett, Adair, & Nofsinger, 2014)? “Compute the present value of a $850 payment made in 10 years when the discount rate is 12 percent” (Cornett, Adair, & Nofsinger, 2014).
- Recalculate the present value, using an 11-percent discount rate, and again, using a 13-percent discount rate.
“What annual rate of return is earned on a $5,000 investment when it grows to $9,500 in five years” (Cornett, Adair, & Nofsinger, 2014)?
- Recalculate the rate of return, assuming the growth occurred in four years, and again, assuming the growth occurred in six years.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Management accounting reports might include information about:
customer complaints.
net income for the year on budgeted income statement.
total assets on budgeted balance sheet.
All of the above are correct.
2. Which of the following types of information are used in management accounting?
financial information
nonfinancial information
information focused on the long term
All of these are correct.
3. The person MOST likely to use management accounting information is a(n):
banker evaluating a credit application
shareholder evaluating a stock investment
governmental taxing authority
assembly department supervisor
4. The person MOST likely to use ONLY financial accounting information is a:
factory shift supervisor
vice president of operations
current shareholder
department manager
5. A weekly report comparing machine time used to available machine time is information MOST useful to:
a front-line employee
the manager of operations
the chief executive officer
the accounting department
6. Product costs are expensed on the income statement when:
raw materials for the product are purchased
raw materials are requisitioned for the product
the product completes the manufacturing process
the product is sold
7. The cost of inventory reported on the balance sheet may include the cost of all the following EXCEPT:
advertising
wages of the plant supervisor
depreciation of the factory equipment
parts used in the manufacturing process
8. The plans of management are often expressed formally in:
financial statements.
performance reports.
budgets.
ledgers.
9. For a manufacturing company, what type of position (line or staff) is each of the following
a. Manager of a Data Processing Department
b. Manager of a Production Department
a. Staff
b. Staff
a. Staff
b. Line
a. Line
b. Staff
a. Line
b. Line
10. Which of the folloiwng is NOT one of the five steps in the lean thinking model discussed in the text
Continuously pursue perfection in the business process.
Identify value in specific products/services.
Implement an enterprise system.
Create a pull system that responds to customer orders.
11. The five step framework used to guide Six Sigma improvement efforts includes all of the following EXCEPT:
Analyze.
Control.
Digitize.
Measure.
12. Which of the following is NOT one of the Institute of Management Accountants’ five Standards of Ethical Conduct?
Competence
Confidentiality
Independence
Integrity
13. Materials used in the operation of a factory, such as cleaning supplies, that are not an integral part of the final product should be classified as:
direct materials.
a period cost.
administrative expense.
manufacturing overhead.
14. All of the following are examples of product costs except:
depreciation on the company’s retail outlets.
salary of the plant manager.
insurance on the factory equipment.
rental costs of the factory facility.
15. The following costs were incurred in July:
Direct materials $35,000
Direct labor $13,000
Manufacturing overhead $15,000
Selling expense $14,000
Administrative expenses $30,000
Prime costs during the month totaled:
$48,000
$28,000
$107,000
$63,000
16. In July direct labor was 40% of conversion cost. If the manufacturing overhead cost for the month was $34,000 and the direct materials cost was $23,000, the direct labor cost was:
$22,667
$15,333
$51,000
$34,500
17. The following data are for a recent period’s operations:
Beginning finished goods inventory $150,475
Ending finished goods inventory $145,750
Sales $400,000
Gross margin $120,000
The cost of goods manufactured was:
$115,275
$284,725
$275,275
$124,725
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. A method of estimating bad debts expense that involves a detailed examination of outstanding accounts and their length of time past due is the:
Direct write-off method
Aging of accounts receivable method
Percentage of sales method
Aging of investments method
Percent of accounts receivable method
2. If a company had net income of $2,379,600, interest expense of 234,000, a tax rate of 40%, and operating income of 4,200,000, what would the times interest earned ratio be for the company
10.17
17.95
7.78
7.18
4.07
3. Most employees and employers are required to pay:
Local payroll taxes
State payroll taxes
Federal payroll taxes
Both B and C only
Local, state and federal payroll taxes
4. Sales taxes payable:
Is an estimated liability
Is a contingent liability
Is a current liability for retailers
Is a business expense
Is a long-term liability
5. Cardco Inc. has an annual accounting period which ends on December 31. During the current year a depreciable asset which cost $42,000 was purchased on September 2. The asset has a $4,000 estimated salvage value. The company uses straight-line depreciation and expects the asset to have a 5 year life. What is the total depreciation expense for the current year
$1,900.00
$7,600.00
$2,533.33
$2,800.00
$3,166.67
6. An employee earned $4,300 working for an employer. The current rate for FICA social security is 6.2% and the FICA Medicare rate is 1.45%. The employer’s total FICA payroll tax for this employee is:
$62.35
$266.60
$328.95
$657.90
7. Amounts received in advance from customers for future products or services:
Are revenues
Increase income
Are liabilities
Are not allowed under GAAP
Require an outlay of cash in the future
8. Pepsi’s accounts receivable turnover was 9.9 for this year and 11.0 for last year. Coke’s turnover was 9.3 for this year and 9.3 for last year. These results imply that:
Coke has the better turnover for both years
Pepsi has the better turnover for both years
Coke’s turnover is improving
Coke’s credit policies are too loose
Coke is collecting its receivables more quickly than Pepsi in both years
9. Obligations due to be paid within one year or within the company’s operating cycle, whichever is longer, are:
Current assets
Current liabilities
Earned revenues
Operating cycle liabilities
Bills
10. The maturity date of a note receivable:
Is the day of the credit sale
Is the day the note was signed
Is the day the note is due to be paid
Is the date of the first payment
Is the last day of the month
11. A company had a bulldozer destroyed by fire. The bulldozer originally cost $125,000. The accumulated depreciation on it was $60,000. The proceeds from the insurance company were $90,000. The company should recognize:
A loss of $25,000
A gain of $25,000
A loss of $65,000
A gain of $65,000
A gain of $90,000
12. The interest accrued on $3,600 at 7% for 60 days is:
$36
$42
$252
$180
$420
13. A machine originally had an estimated useful life of 5 years, but after 3 complete years, it was decided that the original estimate of useful life should have been 10 years. At that point the remaining cost to be depreciated should be allocated over the remaining:
2 years
5 years
7 years
8 years
10 years
14. The useful life of a plant asset is:
The length of time it is used productively in a company’s operations
Never related to its physical life
Its productive life, but not to exceed one year
Determined by the FASB
Determined by law
15. A company had average total assets of $897,000. Its gross sales were $1,090,000 and its net sales were $1,000,000. The company’s total asset turnover is equal to:
0.82
0.90
1.09
1.11
1.26
16. Times interest earned is calculated by:
Multiplying interest expense times income
Dividing interest expense by income before interest expense
Dividing income before interest expense and any income tax by interest expense
Dividing interest and income tax expense by income before interest and income tax expense
17. Advance ticket sales totaling $6,000,000 cash would be recognized as follows:
Debit Sales, credit Unearned Revenue
Debit Unearned Revenue, credit Sales
Debit Cash, credit Unearned Revenue
Debit Unearned Revenue, credit Cash
18. Depreciation:
Measures the decline in market value of an asset
Measures physical deterioration of an asset
Is the process of allocating to expense the cost of a plant asset
Is an outflow of cash from the use of a plant asset
Is applied to land
19. A company has net sales of $870,000 and average accounts receivable of $174,000. What is its accounts receivable turnover for the period?
0.20
5.00
20.0
73.0
1,825
20. On October 10, 2010, Printfast Company sells a commercial printer for $2,350 with a one year warranty that covers parts. Warranty expense is project to be 4% of sales. On February 28, 2011, the printer requires repairs. The cost of the parts for the repair is $80 and Printfast pays their technician $150 to perform the repair. What is the warranty liability at the end of 2010
$49.00
$84.80
$94.00
$0, there is no liability at the end of 2010
$230.00
21. Depletion:
Is the process of allocating the cost of natural resources to periods in which they are consumed
Is also called depreciation
Is also called amortization
Is an unrealized expense reported in equity
Is the process of allocating the cost of intangibles to periods in which they are used
22. The matching principle requires:
That expenses be ignored if their effect on the financial statements are less important than revenues to the financial statement user
The use of the direct write-off method for bad debts
The use of the allowance method of accounting for bad debts
That bad debts be disclosed in the financial statements
That bad debts not be written off
23. Revenue expenditures:
Are additional costs of plant assets that do not materially increase the asset’s life or its productive capabilities
Are known as balance sheet expenditures
Extend the asset’s useful life
Substantially benefit future periods
Are debited to asset accounts
24. Many companies use accelerated depreciation in computing taxable income because:
It is required by the tax rules
It is required by financial reporting rules
It postpones tax payments until later years and the company can use the resources now to earn additional income before payment is due
Using it causes a company to use higher income in the early years of the asset’s useful life
The results are identical to straight-line depreciation
25. A change in an accounting estimate is:
Reflected in past financial statements
Reflected in future financial statements and also requires modification of past statements
A change in a calculated amount that is part of financial statements that results from new information or subsequent developments and from better insight or improved judgment
Not allowed under current accounting rules
Considered an error in the financial statements
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Mobile Company has sales of $4,885,340 in sales at 12/31/10, cost of goods sold of $2,542,353 at 12/31/10, inventories of $338,599 at 12/31/10 and $487,505 at 12/31/09 and accounts payable of $296,307 at 12/31/10 and $334,207 at 12/31/09, the company’s accounts payable outstanding at 12/31/0 would be:
2. Which of the following is the date on which a company incurs a legal liability to distribute the dividend to owners of the stock?
Date of record
Commitment date
Date of declaration
Date of payment
3. A company would need to record an impairment loss for its equipment when
the original cost of the equipment exceeds its fair value and is deemed not recoverable.
the carrying amount of the equipment exceeds its fair value and is deemed not recoverable
management determines that the equipment will no longer be used.
the cash flows from the equipment are less than its fair value.
4. Below is selected information from Marker s 2012 financial statements:
As of Dec. 31, 2012 Dec. 31, 2011
Cash and short-term investments$ 958,245$ 745,800
Accounts Receivable (net) 125,850135,400
Inventories 195,650175,840
Prepaid Expenses and other current assets45,30030,860
Total Current Assets $1,325,045 $1,087,900
Plant, Property and Equipment, net1,478,3201,358,700
Intangible Assets 125,600120,400
Total Assets $2,928,965$2,567,000
Short-term borrowings $ 25,190$ 38,108
Current portion of long-term debt 45,00040,000
Accounts payable 285,400325,900
Accrued liabilities 916,722705,891
Income taxes payable 125,400115,600
Total Current Liabilities $1,397,712$1,225,499
Long-term Debt 450,000430,000
Total Liabilities $1,847,712$1,655,499
Shareholders’ Equity $1,081,253$ 911,501
Total Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity$2,928,965$2,567,000
Selected Income Statement Data – for the year ending December 31, 2012:
Net Sales$3,210,645
Cost of Goods Sold(2,310,210)
Operating Income$ 900,435
Net Income$ 324,850
Selected Statement of Cash Flow Data – for the year ending December 31, 2012:
Cash Flows from Operations$584,750
Interest Expense42,400
Income Tax Expense114,200
Marker s Liabilities to Assets Ratio for 2012 is
5. GAAP stipulates that firms should do what with expenditures that increase the service potential of an asset beyond that originally anticipated?
Capitalize the expenditure and depreciate it over the remaining service life of the asset.
Expense the expenditure immediately.
Capitalize the expenditure, but do not depreciate the asset.
Charge it off to shareholders equity.
6. Below is selected information from Marker s 2012 financial statements:
As of Dec. 31, 2012Dec. 31, 2011
Cash and short-term investments$ 958,245$ 745,800
Accounts Receivable (net) 125,850135,400
Inventories 195,650175,840
Prepaid Expenses and other current assets45,30030,860
Total Current Assets $1,325,045$1,087,900
Plant, Property and Equipment, net1,478,3201,358,700
Intangible Assets 125,600120,400
Total Assets $2,928,965$2,567,000
Short-term borrowings$ 25,190$ 38,108
Current portion of long-term debt45,00040,000
Accounts payable285,400325,900
Accrued liabilities916,722705,891
Income taxes payable 125,400115,600
Total Current Liabilities$1,397,712$1,225,499
Long-term Debt450,000430,000
Total Liabilities$1,847,712$1,655,499
Shareholders’ Equity$1,081,253$ 911,501
Total Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity$2,928,965$2,567,000
Selected Income Statement Data – for the year ending December 31, 2012:
Net Sales$3,210,645
Cost of Goods Sold(2,310,210)
Operating Income$ 900,435
Net Income$ 324,850
Selected Statement of Cash Flow Data – for the year ending December 31, 2012:
Cash Flows from Operations$584,750
Interest Expense42,400
Income Tax Expense114,200
Marker s 2012 Long-term debt to Shareholder’s Equity ratio is:
7. All of the following statements are true regarding accounting for software development costs except:
Firms must expense as incurred all costs incurred internally in developing computer software until such development achieves the technological feasibility of a product.
Firms must capitalize as incurred all costs incurred internally in developing computer software.
Researchers have found a significant association between costs and future earnings which support capitalizing and amortizing product development costs permitted by U.S. GAAP and IFRS.
The interpretation of the meaning of technological feasibility has created diversity in the practice of accounting for software development costs.
8. All of the following are typically recognized as accounting liabilities except: (Points : 5)
Bonds payable
Loan Guarantees
Rental fees received in advance
Taxes Payable
9. Below is selected information from Marker s 2012 financial statements:
As of Dec. 31, 2012 Dec. 31, 2011
Cash and short-term investments$ 958,245$ 745,800
Accounts Receivable (net) 125,850135,400
Inventories 195,650175,840
Prepaid Expenses and other current assets45,30030,860
Total Current Assets $1,325,045$1,087,900
Plant, Property and Equipment, net1,478,3201,358,700
Intangible Assets 125,600 120,400
Total Assets $2,928,965 $2,567,000
Short-term borrowings$ 25,190$ 38,108
Current portion of long-term debt45,00040,000
Accounts payable285,400325,900
Accrued liabilities916,722705,891
Income taxes payable 125,400115,600
Total Current Liabilities$1,397,712$1,225,499
Long-term Debt 450,000 430,000
Total Liabilities $1,847,712$1,655,499
Shareholders’ Equity$1,081,253$ 911,501
Total Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity$2,928,965$2,567,000
Selected Income Statement Data – for the year ending December 31, 2012:
Net Sales$3,210,645
Cost of Goods Sold(2,310,210)
Operating Income$ 900,435
Net Income$ 324,850
Selected Statement of Cash Flow Data – for the year ending December 31, 2012:
Cash Flows from Operations$584,750
Interest Expense42,400
Income Tax Expense114,200
Marker s Long-term debt to long-term capital for 2012 is
10. Which kind of dividend is a return of the original investment by shareholders?
Cash dividend
Stock dividend
Liquidating dividend
Scrip dividend
11. All of the following conditions signal that revenue recognition may have been recorded
too early except:
large and volatile amounts of uncollectible accounts receivable.
unusually large amounts of returned goods.
excessive warranty expenditures.
a decrease in the number of days accounts receivable are outstanding.
12. If the portions of the firm s foreign operations in higher-tax-rate countries grew more rapidly than foreign operations in lower-tax-rate countries, the company may seek out more tax effective ways of operating abroad through all of the following means except:
Assess whether transfer prices or cost allocations can be adjusted to shift income
from high-tax-rate to low-tax-rate jurisdictions.
Shift from domestic to foreign borrowing to increase deductions for interest against
foreign-source income.
Shift from debt to equity financing of foreign operations to increase interest deductions
against foreign-source income.
Shift some operations, like marketing, to the United States where the average tax rate is lower.
13. Under current U.S. GAAP unrealized gains and losses from four balance sheet items are reported in accumulated other comprehensive income or loss. Which of the following is not one of the balance sheet items?
Derivatives held as cash flow hedges.
Deferred tax assets related to net operating loss carry-forwards.
Minimum pension obligations.
Investment securities classified as available for sale.
14. All of the following are benefits of leasing except:
They have the ability to shift the tax benefits from depreciation and other deductions from a lessee that has little or no taxable income to a lessor that has substantial taxable income.
They provide flexibility to change capacity as needed without having to purchase or sell assets.
They have the ability to reduce the risk of technological obsolescence, relative to outright ownership, by maintaining the flexibility to shift to technologically more advanced assets
In an operating lease, the lessee recognizes the signing of the lease as the simultaneous acquisition of a long-term asset and the incurring of a long-term liability for lease payments.
15.
Current AssetsAs of Dec. 31, 2010Dec. 31, 2009
Cash and short-term investments$1,267,038$ 616,604
Accounts Receivable (net)490,816665,828
Inventories338,599487,505
Prepaid Expenses and other current assets292,511291,915
Total Current Assets$2,388,964$2,061,852
Current Liabilities
Short-term borrowings$ 25,190$ 38,108
Current portion of long-term debt182,295210,090
Accounts payable296,307334,247
Accrued liabilities941,912743,999
Income taxes payable203,049239,793
Total Current Liabilities1,648,7531,566,237
Selected Income Statement Data – for the year ending December 31, 2010:
Net Sales$4,885,340
Cost of Goods Sold2,542,353
Operating Income733,541
Net Income230,101
Selected Statement of Cash Flow Data – for the year ending December 31, 2010:
Cash Flows from Operations$1,156,084
Mobile’s current ratio in 2010 was:
16. If Mobile has accounts receivable of $490,816 at 12/31/10 and $665,828 at 12/31/09, inventories of $338,599 at 12/31/10 and $487,505 at 12//31/09, and sales of $4,885,340 and cost of goods sold of $2,542,353 in 2010, Mobile’s days receivables at the end of 2010 would be:
17. Below is selected information from Marker s 2012 financial statements:
As of Dec. 31, 2012Dec. 31, 2011
Cash and short-term investments$ 958,245$ 745,800
Accounts Receivable (net)125,850135,400
Inventories 195,650175,840
Prepaid Expenses and other current assets45,30030,860
Total Current Assets$1,325,045$1,087,900
Plant, Property and Equipment, net1,478,3201,358,700
Intangible Assets125,600120,400
Total Assets$2,928,965$2,567,000
Short-term borrowings$ 25,190$ 38,108
Current portion of long-term debt45,00040,000
Accounts payable285,400325,900
Accrued liabilities916,722705,891
Income taxes payable125,400115,600
Total Current Liabilities$1,397,712$1,225,499
Long-term Debt450,000430,000
Total Liabilities$1,847,712$1,655,499
Shareholders’ Equity$1,081,253$ 911,501
Total Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity$2,928,965$2,567,000
Selected Income Statement Data – for the year ending December 31, 2012:
Net Sales$3,210,645
Cost of Goods Sold(2,310,210)
Operating Income$ 900,435
Net Income$ 324,850
Selected Statement of Cash Flow Data – for the year ending December 31, 2012:
Cash Flows from Operations$584,750
Interest Expense42,400
Income Tax Expense114,200
Marker s 2012 Liabilities to Shareholders Equity ratio is:
18. For U.S. GAAP, software development costs are capitalized as intangible assets (Points : 5)
once the technological feasibility of the product is established.
after a copyright is obtained.
from the beginning of development.
once the product is introduced into the marketplace.
19. Below is selected information from Marker s 2012 financial statements:
As of Dec. 31, 2012Dec. 31, 2011
Cash and short-term investments$ 958,245$ 745,800
Accounts Receivable (net)125,850135,400
Inventories 195,650175,840
Prepaid Expenses and other current assets45,30030,860
Total Current Assets$1,325,045$1,087,900
Plant, Property and Equipment, net1,478,3201,358,700
Intangible Assets125,600120,400
Total Assets$2,928,965$2,567,000
Short-term borrowings$ 25,190$ 38,108
Current portion of long-term debt45,00040,000
Accounts payable285,400325,900
Accrued liabilities916,722705,891
Income taxes payable125,400115,600
Total Current Liabilities$1,397,712$1,225,499
Long-term Debt450,000430,000
Total Liabilities$1,847,712$1,655,499
Shareholders’ Equity$1,081,253$ 911,501
Total Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity$2,928,965$2,567,000
Selected Income Statement Data – for the year ending December 31, 2012:
Net Sales$3,210,645
Cost of Goods Sold(2,310,210)
Operating Income$ 900,435
Net Income$ 324,850
Selected Statement of Cash Flow Data – for the year ending December 31, 2012:
Cash Flows from Operations$584,750
Interest Expense42,400
Income Tax Expense114,200
Marker s interest coverage ratio for 2012 is:
20. All of the following are criteria that financial reporting requires before recognizing an obligation as a liability except:
The transaction or event that gave rise to the obligation has already occurred.
The firm has a present obligation and little or no discretion to avoid the transfer.
The firm must know the precise amount of the obligation before recording it.
The obligation involves a probable future sacrifice of economic benefits a future transfer of cash, goods, or services; the forgoing of a future cash receipt; or the transfer of equity shares at a specified or determinable date. The firm can measure with reasonable precision the cash-equivalent value of the resources needed to satisfy the obligation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Not all pricing methods apply to the market place. In manufacturing it is common practice to determine the cost of a product as it moves through it transformation to a finished product. (1) Explain how a transfer price could be used to make other financial decisions (10 points) and (2) provide an example of the application of transfer price data (10 points). (Points : 20 2. Internal Control Procedures are required to safeguard company assets and to ensure ethical operation of the business. (1) Explain how proper approvals can satisfy the purpose of internal control (10 points) and (2) provide an example of how this control could be implemented (10 points). 3. To promote better management control of business centers financial responsibilities are assigned to managers. There are three basic types of responsibility centers. (1) Explain how a investment center operates (10 points) and (2) provide an example of its application in business. (10 points). 4. To evaluate the financial operation and health of a business ratio analysis is used. (1) Provide the formula for Debt to Total Assets Ratio and explain how it is computed (10 points) and (2) provide an example of how this ratio can be used in decision making in business (10 points). (Points : 20) 5. Planning for capital investments is an important function of management. You are responsible for considering purchasing new equipment for $450,000. It is expected that the equipment will produce net annual cash flows of $55,000 over its 10-year useful life. Annual depreciation will be $45,000. Compute the cash payback period. (1) Explain the pros and cons of using this method to evaluate a capital expenditure (10 points) and (2) show all computations required to arrive at the correct solution. (15 points). 6. To adequately plan for the success of the business a budget must be developed. (1) Identify the budgets that comprise the master budget (10 points) and (2) Describe the sources for preparing the budgeted income statement (15 points). Include textbook page references to identify where the correct answer was located. (Points : 25) 7. Financial statement analysis is used by investors, creditors and managers of business to evaluate the operation and health of the business. This information is in part the basis for decision making. (1) Identify ratios used to evaluate the profitability of a company (10 points) and (2) provide an example of how the results of this analysis could be used to make business decisions. (15 points). 8. There are three different forms of business; sole-proprietor, partnership and corporation. (1) Explain why a corporation’s separation of ownership and management may be a benefit (10 points) and (2) as a stockholder explain why preemption may be a benefit. (15 points). 9. Allgood Inc. has fixed costs of $480,000. It has a unit selling price of $6, unit variable cost of $4.50, and a target net income of $1,500,000. Compute the required sales in units to achieve its target net income. (1) Explain how the analysis is to be performed (10 points) and (2) Show all computations required to arrive at the correct answer. (20 points). (Points : 30) 10. At the Wilber Company it costs $30 per unit ($20 variable and $10 fixed) to make a product at full capacity that normally sells for $45. A foreign wholesaler offers to buy 3,000 units at $24 each. Wilber will incur special shipping costs of $2 per unit. Assuming that Wilber has excess operating capacity, indicate the net income (loss) Wilber would realize by accepting the special order. (1) Explain how the analysis is to be performed (10 points) and (2) Show all computations required to arrive at the correct answer. (20 points). (Points : 30)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:
Social Security taxes: 6% on the first $55,000 earned
Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned
Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
State income taxes: 5% of gross earnings
Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned
Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned
The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end.
a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:
Social Security taxes
Medicare taxes
Federal income taxes withheld
State income taxes
Insurance withholdings
b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:
Matching Social Security taxes
Matching Medicare taxes
State unemployment taxes
Federal unemployment taxes
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The board of Directors of Pastrana, Inc. is negotiating the purchase of Burgos Galleries. The balance sheet @ 12/31/2009 of Burgos is presented below:
Assets Liabilities & Stockholder s Equity
Cash $ 70,000 Notes Payable $ 50,000
Land $ 100,000 Account Payable $ 300,000
Equipment $ 375,000 Total Liabilities $ 350,000
Intangible Assets $ 30,000 Common Stocks $ 200,000
________ Retained Earnings $ 25,000 $ 225,000
Total Assets $ 575,000 Total Liabilities & Stk s Ety $ 575,000
Additional Information:
1. Land is undervalued by $50,000.
2. Equipment is overvalued by $ 5,000. 3. Burgos agrees to sell the business to Pastrana Co. for $380,000.
Required:
1. Prepare a presentation showing in good form the calculation of Goodwill in this transaction.
2. Explain the rational for your calculations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Price Manufacturing assigns overhead based on machine hours. The Milling Department logs 1,800 machine hours and Cutting Department shows 3,000 machine hours for the period. If the overhead rate is $5 per machine hour, the entry to assign overhead will show a
A) debit to Work in Process for $15,000.
B) credit to Manufacturing Overhead for $24,000.
C) credit to Work in Process Cutting Department for $15,000.
D) debit to Manufacturing Overhead for $24,000.
2. Barnes and Miller Manufacturing is trying to determine the equivalent units for conversion costs with 10,000 units of ending work in process at 80% completion and 28,000 physical units. There are no beginning units in the department. Conversion costs occur evenly throughout the entire production period. What are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the current period
A) 8,000.
B) 38,000.
C) 26,000.
D) 36,000.
3. Conversion cost per unit equals $7.00. Total materials costs are $60,000. Equivalent units are 20,000. How much is the total manufacturing cost per unit
A) $7.00.
B) $4.00.
C) $3.00.
D) $10.00.
4. If 120,000 units are started into production and 40,000 units are in process at the end of the period, how many units were completed and transferred out?
A) 40,000.
B) 160,000.
C) 120,000.
D) 80,000.
5. Equivalent units are calculated by
A) dividing equivalent units by the percentage of work done.
B) multiplying the percentage of work done by the equivalent units of output.
C) dividing physical units by the percentage of work done.
D) multiplying the percentage of work done by the physical units.
6. In CVP analysis, the term “cost”
A) includes manufacturing costs plus selling and administrative expenses.
B) excludes all fixed manufacturing costs.
C) means cost of goods sold.
D) includes only manufacturing costs.
7. Fessler, Inc. has a product with a selling price per unit of $200, the unit variable cost is $90, and the total monthly fixed costs are $300,000. How much is Fessler’s contribution margin ratio
A) 45%
B) 150%
C) 222%
D) 55%
8. The break-even point is where
A) total sales equal total fixed costs.
B) total sales equal total variable costs.
C) contribution margin equals total fixed costs.
D) total variable costs equal total fixed costs.
9. Norman Company sells MP3 players for $60 each. Variable costs are $40 per unit, and fixed costs total $90,000. How many MP3 players must Norman sell to earn net income of $210,000
A) 3,750.
B) 4,500.
C) 5,250.
D) 15,000.
10. Casey Company has fixed costs of $2,500,000 and variable costs are 40% of sales. What are the required sales if Casey Company desires net income of $250,000?
A) $4,166,667
B) $6,875,000
C) $6,250,000
D) $4,583,333
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The primary objective of financial accounting is:
To serve the decision-making needs of internal users
To provide financial statements to help external users analyze and interpret an organization’s activities
To monitor and control company activities
To provide information on both the costs and benefits of managing products and services
To know what, when and how much to produce
2. Apatha Company has assets of $600,000, liabilities of $250,000 and equity of $350,000. It buys office equipment on credit for $75,000. The effects of this transaction include:
Assets increase by $75,000 and expenses increase by $75,000
Assets increase by $75,000 and expenses decrease by $75,000
Liabilities increase by $75,000 and expenses decrease by $75,000
Assets decrease by $75,000 and expenses decrease by $75,000
Assets increase by $75,000 and liabilities increase by $75,000
3. Source documents include all of the following except:
Sales tickets
Ledgers
Checks
Purchase orders
Bank statements
4. Ethical behavior requires:
That an auditors’ pay not depend on the figures in the client’s reports
Auditors to invest in businesses they audit
Analysts to report information favorable to their companies
Managers to use accounting information to benefit themselves
That an auditor provides a favorable opinion
5. A parcel of land is: offered for sale at $150,000, assessed for tax purposes at $95,000, recognized by its purchasers as being worth $140,000 and purchased for $137,000. The land should be recorded in the purchaser’s books at:
$95,000
$137,000
$138,500
$140,000
$150,000
6. An asset created by prepayment of an expense is:
Recorded as a debit to an unearned revenue account
Recorded as a debit to a prepaid expense account
Recorded as a credit to an unearned revenue account
Recorded as a credit to a prepaid expense account
Not recorded in the accounting records until the earnings process is complete
7. Which of the following accounting principles dictates when expenses are recognized
Revenue recognition principle
Monetary unit principle
Business entity principle
Matching principle
Full disclosure principle
8. Risk is:
Net income divided by average total assets
The reward for investment
The uncertainty about the expected return that will be earned from an investment
Unrelated to expected return
9. Fast-Forward had cash inflows from operations of $62,500; cash outflows from investing activities of $47,000; and cash inflows from financing of $25,000. The net change in cash was:
$40,500 increase
$40,500 decrease
$134,500 decrease
$134,000 increase
10. If the liabilities of a business increased $75,000 during a period of time and the equity in the business decreased $30,000 during the same period, the assets of the business must have:
Decreased $105,000
Decreased $45,000
Increased $30,000
Increased $45,000
11. Net Income:
Decreases equity
Represents the amount of assets owners put into a business
Equals assets minus liabilities
Is the excess of revenues over expenses
Represents the owners’ claims against assets
12. Assets created by selling goods and services on credit are:
Accounts payable
Accounts receivable
Liabilities
Expenses
13. Of the following accounts, the one that normally has a credit balance is:
Cash
Office Equipment
Sales Salaries Payable
Dividends
Sales Salaries Expense
14. Prepaid expenses are:
Payments made for products and services that do not ever expire
Classified as liabilities on the balance sheet
Decreases in retained earnings
Assets that represent prepayments of future expenses
15. Generally Accepted Accounting Principles:
Focus on the review of a situation
Does not require financial statements
Never change
Intend to make information on the financial statements relevant, reliable and comparable
Oversees Security and Exchange Commission
16. A company purchased a new truck at a cost of $42,000 on July 1, 2011. The truck is estimated to have a useful life of 6 years and a salvage value of $3,000. How much depreciation expense will be recorded for the truck for the year ended December 31, 2011
$3,250
$3,500
$4,000
$6,500
$7,000
17. On January 1, Able Company purchased equipment costing $135,000 with an estimated salvage value of $10,500, and an estimated useful life of five years. What is the amount that should be recorded as depreciation on December 31
$27,000
$24,900
$29,100
$135,000
18. The Retained Earnings account has a credit balance of $17,000 before closing entries are made. If total revenues for the period are $55,200, total expenses are $39,800 and dividends are $9,000, what is the ending balance in the Retained Earnings account after all closing entries are made
$8,000
$15,400
$23,400
$17,000
$32,400
19. The length of time covered by a set of periodic financial statements is referred to as the:
Fiscal cycle
Natural business year
Accounting period
Business cycle
Operating cycle
20. A classified balance sheet:
Measures a company’s ability to pay its bills on time
Organizes assets and liabilities into important subgroups
Presents revenues, expenses and net income
Reports operating, investing and financing activities
21. The approach to preparing financial statements based on recognizing revenues when they are earned and matching expenses to those revenues is:
Cash basis accounting
The matching principle
The time period principle
Accrual basis accounting
Revenue basis accounting
22. The adjusted trial balance contains information pertaining to:
Asset accounts only
Balance sheet accounts only
Income statement accounts only
All general ledger accounts
Revenue accounts only
23. A company earned $2,000 in net income for October. Its net sales for October were $10,000. Its profit margin is:
2%
20%
200%
500%
$8,000
24. A company had no office supplies available at the beginning of the year. During the year, the company purchased $250 worth of office supplies. On December 31, $75 worth of office supplies remained. How much should the company report as office supplies expense for the year
$75
$125
$175
$250
$325
25. Unearned revenue is reported on the financial statements as:
A revenue on the balance sheet
A liability on the balance sheet
An unearned revenue on the income statement
An asset on the balance sheet
An operating activity on the statement of cash flows
26. An account linked with another account that has an opposite normal balance and that is subtracted from the balance of the related account is a(n):
Accrued expense
Contra account
Accrued revenue
Intangible asset
Adjunct account
27. On April 30, 2011, a three-year insurance policy was purchased for $18,000 with coverage to begin immediately. What is the amount of insurance expense that would appear on the company’s income statement for the year ended December 31, 2011
$500
$4,000
$6,000
$14,000
$18,000
28. On June 30, 2011, Apricot Co. paid $5,000 cash for management services to be performed over a two-year period. Apricot follows a policy of recording all prepaid expenses to asset accounts at the time of cash payment. The adjusting entry on December 31, 2011 for Apricot would include:
A debit to an expense for $1,250
A debit to a prepaid expense for $1,250
A credit to an expense for $3,750
A debit to a prepaid expense for $3,750
29. On April 1, 2011, a company paid the $1,350 premium on a three-year insurance policy with benefits beginning on that date. What will be the insurance expense on the annual income statement for the year ended December 31, 2011
$1,350
$450
$1,012.50
$337.50
$37.50
30. A trial balance prepared after adjustments have been recorded is called a(n):
Balance sheet
Adjusted trial balance
Unadjusted trial balance
Classified balance sheet
Unclassified balance sheet
31. The conservatism principle:
Requires that when there are more than one equally likely estimate of amounts expected to be received or paid in the future, then the less optimistic amount should be used
Requires that a company use the same accounting methods period after period
Requires that revenues and expenses be reported in the period in which they are earned or incurred
Requires that all items of a material nature be included in financial statements
Requires that all inventory items be reported at full cost
32. Merchandise inventory includes:
All goods owned by a company and held for sale
All goods in transit
All goods on consignment
Only damaged goods
Only items that are on the shelf
33. A merchandising company:
Earns net income by buying and selling merchandise
Receives fees only in exchange for services
Earns profit from commissions only
Earns profit from fares only
Buys products from consumers
34. A company has sales of $1,500,000, sales discounts of $102,000, sales returns and allowances of $123,000, shipping charges of $15,000, sales commissions of $34,000,net income totaled $263,500, and cost of goods sold of $420,000. What is the net sales amount for the period
$1,500,000
$1,275,000
$1,725,000
$1,521,000
$1,479,000
35. During a period of steadily rising costs, the inventory valuation method that yields the lowest reported net income is:
Specific identification method
Average cost method
Weighted-average method
FIFO method
LIFO method
36. A company has inventory of 10 units at a cost of $10 each on June 1. On June 3, they purchased 20 units at $12 each. 12 units are sold on June 5. Using the FIFO periodic inventory method, what is the cost of the 12 units that were sold
$120
$124
$128
$130
$140
37. Which of the following is the most serious limitation of internal controls
Computer error
Human fraud or human error
Cost-benefit principle
Cybercrime
Management fraud
38. The inventory valuation method that tends to smooth out erratic changes in costs is:
FIFO
Weighted average
LIFO
Specific identification
WIFO
39. A company had sales of $375,000 and its gross profit was $157,500. Its cost of goods sold equal:
$(217,000)
$375,000
$157,500
$217,500
40. The quick assets are defined as:
Cash, short-term investments and inventory
Cash, short-term investments and current receivables
Cash, inventory and current receivables
Cash, noncurrent receivables and prepaid expenses
Accounts receivable, inventory and prepaid expenses
41. Cost of goods sold:
Is another term for merchandise sales
Is the term used for the cost of buying and preparing merchandise for sale
Is another term for revenue
Is also called gross margin
Is a term only used by service firms
42. A company purchased $4,000 worth of merchandise. Transportation costs were an additional $350. The company later returned $275 worth of merchandise and paid the invoice within the 2% cash discount period. The total amount paid for this merchandise is:
$3,725.00
$3,925.00
$3,995.00
$4,000.50
$4,075.00
43. Which of the following procedures would weaken the control over cash receipts that arrive through the mail
After the mail is opened, a list (in triplicate) of the money received is prepared with a record of the sender’s name, the amount and an explanation of why the money is sent
The bank reconciliation is prepared by a person who does not handle cash or record cash receipts
For safety, only one person should open the mail and that person should immediately deposit the cash received in the bank
The cashier should not also be the record keeper who records the amounts received in the accounting records
All of the above are good internal control procedures over cash receipts that arrive through the mail
44. The full disclosure principle:
Requires that when a change in inventory valuation method is made, the notes to the financial statements report the type of change, why it was made and its effect on net income
Requires that companies use the same accounting method for inventory valuation period after period
Is not subject to the materiality principle
Is only applied to retailers
Is also called the consistency principle
45. J.C. Penny had net sales of $28,496 million, its cost of goods sold was $19,092 million and its net income was $997 million. Its gross margin ratio equals:
3.5%
5.2%
33%
67%
149.3%
46. A company normally sells its product for $20 per unit. However, the selling price has fallen to $15 per unit. This company’s current inventory consists of 200 units purchased at $16 per unit. Replacement cost has now fallen to $13 per unit. Calculate the value of this company’s inventory at the lower of cost or market.
$2,550
$2,600
$2,700
$3,000
$3,200
47. In comparing the canceled checks on the bank statement with the entries in the accounting records, it is found that check number 4239 for November’s rent was correctly written and drawn for $7,390, but was erroneously entered in the accounting records as $3,790. When preparing the November bank statement, the company should:
Deduct $3,600 from the book balance of cash
Add $3,600 to the bank statement balance
Add $7,390 to the book balance of cash
Deduct $3,600 from the bank statement balance
Add $3,600 to the book balance of cash
48. Cash equivalents:
Are short-term, highly liquid investments
Include 6-month CDs
Include checking accounts
Are recorded in petty cash
Include money orders
49. A company has inventory of 15 units at a cost of $12 each on August 1. On August 5, they purchased 10 units at $13 per unit. On August 12 they purchased 20 units at $14 per unit. On August 15, they sold 30 units. Using the FIFO periodic inventory method, what is the value of the inventory at August 15 after the sale
$140
$160
$210
$380
$590
50. Given the following information:
Petty cash balance $ 450.00 Courier receipt $ 82.50
Postage receipt $ 48.00 Office Supplies receipt $ 56.22
Business Meal receipt $ 102.34 Cash on hand at the end of the month $ 76.21
What is the amount of cash over and short?
debit $84.73
credit $84.73
debit $160.94
credit $160.94
no cash over or short would be recorded
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The primary objective of the statement of cash flows is to provide information about a company’s
cash receipts and disbursements.
non-cash financing and investing activities.
financial position.
profitability.
2. During the year, cash increased by $300 million. Investing and financing activities created positive cash flow totaling $500 million. What were net cash flows from operating activities in the statement of cash flows
Inflow of $300 million
Outflow of $200 million
Inflow of $600 million
3. Which of the following is not reported as an adjustment to net income when using the indirect method of computing net cash flows from operating activities
Cash dividends paid
A change in accounts receivable
Depreciation
A change in a prepaid expense
4. Which of the following is reported as a deduction from net income when using the indirect method to determine net cash flows from operating activities
Depreciation expense
A bad debt written off under the allowance method
Amortization of premium on bonds payable
Dividends declared
5. Each year, White Mountain Enterprises (WME) prepares a reconciliation schedule that compares its income statement with its statement of cash flows on both the direct and indirect method bases.
In its 2011 income statement, WME reported $58,000 for insurance expense. WME paid $72,000 in insurance premiums during 2011. In its reconciliation schedule, WME should
show a $14,000 positive adjustment to net income under the indirect method for the increase in prepaid insurance.
show a $14,000 negative adjustment to net income under the indirect method for the decrease in prepaid insurance.
show a $14,000 negative adjustment to net income under the indirect method for the increase in prepaid insurance.
show a $14,000 positive adjustment to net income under the indirect method for the decrease in prepaid insurance
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Rowe Pottery designs and makes specialized gift quality pottery. Rowe is considering manufacturing its own clay. Currently, the cost to buy clay is $2.65 per pound. If Rowe were to make the clay, three raw materials would have to be purchased. The raw materials are used in equal quantities (Mat 1 cost $.25/lb, Mat 2 cost $.43/lb and Mat 3 cost $.70/lb) and three pounds of raw materials makes three pounds of clay. The clay would be mixed in a large vat for proper curing and consistency. Three employees ($15/hour labor and benefits) would be needed to monitor each batch of clay which takes 10 hour and yields 500 pounds of clay. Variable overhead would consist of additional maintenance on the required equipment and storage of the unfinished clay and would total $620 per batch of clay. The clay could be produced in the current facility but would result in approximately $90,000 of additional inventory on hand at any given time. Currently, Rowe buys 250,000 pounds of clay each year. What is the return on investment if Rowe decides to make its own clay? Should they make the clay? Explain.
2) Pottery throwers are paid $30 per hour and can throw approximately 6 pieces per hour. Using the costs above for clay, the average pot requires 6 lbs of clay each (use the cost of clay determined above) All pottery must be fired in a kiln to harden. Every firing takes 10 hours of set up and 3 hours of take down ($15/hr) and yeilds 38 pieces of pottery. The kiln in 2011 used 235,000 therms of gas at $.22 per therm and was fired 930 times (which is the projection also for 2012). The kiln cost $150,000 in 2007 and is being depreciated over 10 years with no salvage value using the straight line method. Each piece of pottery is also decorated at a rate of 4 pots per hour with decorators costing $22 per hour. Shipping and handling usually cost $6 per piece. The production manager’s salary is $91,000 per year and selling costs are fixed around $126,000 per year. Rowe receives a special order for 5,000 Christmas pots that will be picked up at the factory cutting shipping and handling costs in half. Also, the decorating needs on these pots will take half as long as usual. The customer is offering $37 per pot (regular price is $58). Should Rowe take the order? Show your computations. Explain your conclusion.
3) Wilson Athletic has developed a new golf ball that consistently flies 20% further than their old balls. With the worldwide market for golf balls at 3 million dozen, Wilson believes their new ball is revolutionary enough to capture 8% of that market in the first year and 16% in the second through fifth year of production. Wilson plans on selling this ball at premium to the price of other balls at $31 per dozen. However, variable costs per dozen are also relatively high due to the specialized nature of the manufacturing-$21. To reach their sales goals, Wilson plans to pay $1.5 million in advertising and $2.2 million in player endorsement contracts each year that Wilson makes the ball. Wilson will also have to add on to its existing factory and add new equipment that will (in total) cost $2.2 million. This facility will require $250,000 in utilities and maintenance per year of manufacturing. This building and equipment will have a five year life and can be sold for $50,000 at the end of five years. Wilson’s tax rate is 40% and discount rate/cost of capital is 12%. What is the NPV and IRR for the new golf ball project? Should Wilson proceed with the project?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Rowe Pottery designs and makes specialized gift quality pottery. Rowe is considering manufacturing its own clay. Currently, the cost to buy clay is $2.65 per pound. If Rowe were to make the clay, three raw materials would have to be purchased. The raw materials are used in equal quantities (Mat 1 cost $.25/lb, Mat 2 cost $.43/lb and Mat 3 cost $.70/lb) and three pounds of raw materials makes three pounds of clay. The clay would be mixed in a large vat for proper curing and consistency. Three employees ($15/hour labor and benefits) would be needed to monitor each batch of clay which takes 10 hour and yields 500 pounds of clay. Variable overhead would consist of additional maintenance on the required equipment and storage of the unfinished clay and would total $620 per batch of clay. The clay could be produced in the current facility but would result in approximately $90,000 of additional inventory on hand at any given time. Currently, Rowe buys 250,000 pounds of clay each year. What is the return on investment if Rowe decides to make its own clay? Should they make the clay? Explain.
2) Pottery throwers are paid $30 per hour and can throw approximately 6 pieces per hour. Using the costs above for clay, the average pot requires 6 lbs of clay each (use the cost of clay determined above) All pottery must be fired in a kiln to harden. Every firing takes 10 hours of set up and 3 hours of take down ($15/hr) and yeilds 38 pieces of pottery. The kiln in 2011 used 235,000 therms of gas at $.22 per therm and was fired 930 times (which is the projection also for 2012). The kiln cost $150,000 in 2007 and is being depreciated over 10 years with no salvage value using the straight line method. Each piece of pottery is also decorated at a rate of 4 pots per hour with decorators costing $22 per hour. Shipping and handling usually cost $6 per piece. The production manager’s salary is $91,000 per year and selling costs are fixed around $126,000 per year. Rowe receives a special order for 5,000 Christmas pots that will be picked up at the factory cutting shipping and handling costs in half. Also, the decorating needs on these pots will take half as long as usual. The customer is offering $37 per pot (regular price is $58). Should Rowe take the order? Show your computations. Explain your conclusion.
3) Wilson Athletic has developed a new golf ball that consistently flies 20% further than their old balls. With the worldwide market for golf balls at 3 million dozen, Wilson believes their new ball is revolutionary enough to capture 8% of that market in the first year and 16% in the second through fifth year of production. Wilson plans on selling this ball at premium to the price of other balls at $31 per dozen. However, variable costs per dozen are also relatively high due to the specialized nature of the manufacturing-$21. To reach their sales goals, Wilson plans to pay $1.5 million in advertising and $2.2 million in player endorsement contracts each year that Wilson makes the ball. Wilson will also have to add on to its existing factory and add new equipment that will (in total) cost $2.2 million. This facility will require $250,000 in utilities and maintenance per year of manufacturing. This building and equipment will have a five year life and can be sold for $50,000 at the end of five years. Wilson’s tax rate is 40% and discount rate/cost of capital is 12%. What is the NPV and IRR for the new golf ball project? Should Wilson proceed with the project?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Ryan Company purchased a machine on July 1, 2013. The machine cost $250,000 and has a salvage value of $10,000 and a useful life of eight years. The adjusting entry for the year ending December 31, 2014, would include a debit to Depreciation Expense of
$30,000.
$15,000.
$31,250.
$15,625.
2. An adjusting entry will not take the format of which one of the following entries
A debit to an expense account and a credit to an asset account
A debit to an expense account and a credit to a revenue account
A debit to an asset account and a credit to a revenue account
A debit to a liability account and a credit to a revenue account
3. The Supplies on Hand account balance at the beginning of the period was $6,600. Supplies totaling $12,825 were purchased during the period and debited to Supplies on Hand. A physical count shows $3,825 of Supplies on Hand at the end of the period. The proper journal entry at the end of the period
debits Supplies on Hand and credits Supplies Expense for $9,000.
debits Supplies Expense and credits Supplies on Hand for $12,825.
debits Supplies on Hand and credits Supplies Expense for $15,600.
debits Supplies Expense and credits Supplies on Hand for $15,600.
4. An accrued expense can be described as an amount
paid and matched with earnings for the current period.
paid and not matched with earnings for the current period.
not paid and not matched with earnings for the current period.
not paid and matched with earnings for the current period.
5. If an expense has been incurred but not yet recorded, then the end-of-period adjusting entry would involve
a liability account and an asset account.
a liability account and a revenue account.
a liability and an expense account.
a receivable account and a revenue account.
6. On August 1 of the current year, Kyle Company borrowed $278,000 from the local bank. The loan was for 12 months at 9 percent interest payable at the maturity date. The adjusting entry at the end of the fiscal year relating to this obligation would include a
debit to interest expense of $25,020.
debit to interest expense of $10,425.
credit to note payable of $10,425.
debit to interest receivable of $10,425.
7. Sky Company collected $12,350 in interest during 2013. Sky showed $1,850 in interest receivable on its December 31, 2013, balance sheet and $5,300 on December 31, 2012. The interest revenue on the income statement for 2013 was
$3,450.
$8,900.
$12,350.
$14,200.
8. Total net income over the life of an enterprise is
higher under the cash basis than under the accrual basis.
lower under the cash basis than under the accrual basis.
the same under the cash basis as under the accrual basis.
not susceptible to measurement.
9. A company sold 10,000 shares of its own $1 par value common stock for $60,000. The entry to record the sale would include a
debit to treasury stock for $60,000.
debit to contributed capital for $10,000.
credit to common stock, $1 par value for $10,000.
credit to common stock, $1 par value for $60,000.
10. Which of the following is true
Prepaid expenses are increased by a credit.
Gains are increased by a debit.
Losses are increased by a credit.
Accumulated depreciation is increased by a credit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. To separate the semi-variable costs into their fixed and variable components, one can use which of the following methods?
a) labor variance method
b) material variance method
c) relevant range of activity method
d) high-low point method
2. A budget prepared using several differing levels of activity is a:
a) fixed budget
b) flexible budget
c) manufacturing cost budget
d) budget performance report
3. Direct factory labor is usually considered to be a ___________cost.
a) variable
b) fixed
c) semi-variable
d) mixed
4. The cost of utilities consumed in the factory is a good example of a_______cost.
a) variable
b) fixed
c) semi-variable
d) standard
5. The salary of the factory supervisor is a good example of a __________cost.
a)variable
b)fixed
c)semi-variable
d)standard
6. As the level of activity increases, the fixed cost per unit of activity:
a) increases
b) decreases
c) does not change
d) may increase or decrease
7. As the level of activity increases, the variable cost per unit of activity:
a) increases
b) decreases
c) does not change
d) may increase or decrease
8. As the level of activity increases, the total variable costs for the period:
a)increase
b)decrease
c)do not change
d)may increase or decrease
9. As the level of activity increases, the total fixed costs for the period:
a) increases
b) decrease
c) may increase or decrease
d) do not change
10. Costs that reflect what costs should be for the units of product manufactured during the period under normal efficient operating conditions are known as ___________costs.
a)variable
b)fixed
c)standard
d)semi-variable
11. In a factory, the fixed costs per unit are $45 when 400 units are produced. If 450 units are produced, the fixed costs per unit would be:
a)$45
b)$40
c)$10
d)$50.63
12. In a factory,the total variable costs are $600 if 500 units are produced. If 400 units are produced, the total variable costs would be:
a)$480
b)$600
c)$120
d)$333
13. The standard quantity of materials for a product was 40 pounds per unit at the standard price of $2.00 per pound. The actual price per pound of materials was $1.50, and the actual quantity used was 44 pounds. An analysis would indicate a:
a)$20.00 favorable price variance
b)$22.00 favorable price variance
c)$6.00 unfavorable quantity variance
d)$18.00 favorable price variance
14. The labor standard for a product was five hours at a wage rate of $8 per hour.The firm produced 900 units of the item.Labor Costs totaled $35,250 and 4,700 hours of labor were used. An analysis of labor costs would indicate:
a)a $750 favorable labor rate variance
b)a $1,600 unfavorable labor time variance
c)both the labor rate variance and the labor time variance listed above
d)a $1,600 favorable labor rate variance
15. The quantity variance for an item is the difference between its actual quantity and its standard quantity multiplied be the:
a)standard cost of the item
b)actual cost of the item
c)price variance
d)budgeted amount for the item
16. An unfavorable price variance for materials means that:
a)the actual cost of the materials was more than the budgeted amount
b)more materials were used in production than anticipated
c)more labor hours were required to work with the materials than expected
d)the actual cost of the materials was more than the standard cost
17. The materials price variance for an item is the difference between its actual price and its standard cost:
a)multiplied by the actual quantity used
b)multiplied by the standard quantity allowed
c)multiplied by the difference between the actual quantity and the standard quantity
d)divided by the actual quantity
18. The flexible budget usually shows:
a)only fixed costs
b)only variable costs
c)fixed and variable costs together
d)fixed and variable costs separately
Use the following information to answer questions 19 and 20.
The standard costs for a unit of product are shown below.
Materials 2 pounds at $1.00 per pound $2.00
Labor 1 hour at $10.00 per hour 10.00
Overhead 60% of direct labor 6.00
During June, Job N-5 for 100 units was completed. The actual costs of the job are shown below.
Materials 300 pounds at $1.45 per pound $435
Labor 200 hours at $9.50 per hour 1,900
Overhead Applied 60% of direct labor 1,140
19. Which of the following represents the material price variance?
a)$325 unfavorable
b)$235 unfavorable
c)$100 unfavorable
d)$135 unfavorable
20. Which of the following represents the material quantity variance?
a)$325 unfavorable
b)$235 unfavorable
c)$100 unfavorable
d)$135
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 205 Week 3 Exercise Assignment
1. Specific identification method. Boston Galleries uses the specific identification method for inventory valuation. Inventory information for several oil paintings follows.
Painting Cost
1/2 Beginning inventory Woods $11,000
4/19 Purchase Sunset $21,800
6/7 Purchase Earth $31,200
12/16 Purchase Moon $4,000
Woods and Moon were sold during the year for a total of $35,000. Determine the firm s
a. cost of goods sold.
b. gross profit.
c. ending inventory.
2. Inventory valuation methods: basic computations. The January beginning inven tory of the White Company consisted of 300 units costing $40 each. During the first quarter, the company purchased two batches of goods: 700 Units at $44 on February 21 and 800 units at $50 on March 28. Sales during the first quarter were 1,400 units at $75 per unit. The White Company uses a periodic inventory system. Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods.
FIFO LIFO Weighted Average
Goods available for sale $ $ $
Ending inventory, March 31
Cost of goods sold
3. Perpetual inventory system: journal entries. At the beginning of 20X3, Beehler Company implemented a computerized perpetual inventory system. The first transactions that occurred during 20X3 following.
Purchases on account: 500 units @ $4 = $2,000
Sales on account: 300 of the above units = $2,550
Returns on account: 75 of the above unsold units
The company president examined the computer-generated journal entries for these transactions and was confused by the absence of a Purchases account.
a. Duplicate the journal entries that would have prepared on the computer printout.
b. Calculate the balance in the firm s Inventory account.
c. Briefly explain the absence of the Purchases account to the company president.
4. Inventory valuation methods: computations and concepts. Wave Riders Surfboard Company began business on January 1 of the current year. Purchases of surfboards were as follows:
1/3: Purchase 100 boards @ $125
3/17: Sold 50 boards @ $130
5/9: 5/9: 246 boards @140
7/3: 400 boards @ $150
10/23: 74 boards @ $160
Wave Riders sold 710 boards at an average price of $250 per board. The company uses a periodic inventory system.
Instructions
a. Calculate cost of goods sold, ending inventory, and gross profit under each of the following inventory valuation methods:
First-in, first-out
Last-in, first-out
Weighted average
b. Which of the three methods would be chosen if management s goal is to
(1) produce an up-to-date inventory valuation on the balance sheet?
(2) approximate the physical flow of a sand and gravel dealer?
(3) report low earnings (for tax purposes) for a separate electronics company that has been experiencing declining purchase prices?
5. Depreciation methods. Betsy Ross Enterprises purchased a delivery van for $30,000 in January 20X7. The van was estimated to have a service life of 5 years and a resid ual value of $6,000. The company is planning to drive the van 20,000 miles annually. Compute depreciation expense for 20X8 by using each of the following methods:
a. Units-of-output, assuming 17,000 miles were driven during 20X8
b. Straight-line
c. Double-declining-balance
6. Depreciation computations. Alpha Alpha Alpha, a college fraternity, purchased a new heavy-duty washing machine on January 1, 20X3. The machine, which cost $1,000, had an estimated residual value of $100 and an estimated service life of 4 years (1,800 washing cycles). Calculate the following:
a. The machine s book value on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the straight-line depreciation method
b. Depreciation expense for 20X4, assuming use of the units-of-output depreciation method. Actual washing cycles in 20X4 totaled 500.
c. Accumulated depreciation on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the double-declining-balance depreciation method.
7. Depreciation computations: change in estimate. Aussie Imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for $50,000 on January 1, 20X3. At the time of acquisition, the machine was estimated to have a service life of 5 years (25,000 operating hours) and a residual value of $5,000. During the 5 years of operations (20X3 – 20X7), the machine was used for 5,100, 4,800, 3,200, 6,000, and 5,900 hours, respectively.
Instructions
a. Compute depreciation for 20X3 – 20X7 by using the following methods: straight line, units of output, and double-declining-balance.
b. On January 1, 20X5, management shortened the remaining service life of the machine to 20 months. Assuming use of the straight-line method, compute the company s depreciation expense for 20X5.
c. Briefly describe what you would have done differently in part (a) if Aussie Imports had paid $47,800 for the machinery rather than $50,000 In addition, assume that the company incurred $800 of freight charges $1,400 for machine setup and testing, and $300 for insurance during the first year of use.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The statement of cash flows reports ________.
all of the income, expenses, profit or losses a company has earned or incurred during an accounting period
the change in total assets during an accounting period
all of the cash a company has received and all of the cash a company has disbursed during an accounting period
all of the sources and uses of shareholders equity
2. The statement of cash flows reports the ________.
sources and uses of cash
profitability of a company
changes in shareholders equity
financial position of a company
3. Cash budgets allow companies to plan for any cash shortage by ________.
borrowing money
altering the timing of receipts or disbursements
securing a line of credit from a local bank
all of these
4. Cash from operating activities includes ________.
all cash receipts and all cash disbursements for long-term business assets
detailed estimates of the sources of cash and uses of cash
all cash receipts and cash disbursements for routine sales and payments made in the course of doing business
all cash receipts and all cash disbursements for loans, contributions from owners, and distributions to owners
5. The following information is from Cashew, Inc. s December 31, 2011 annual report:
Income statement Balance sheet
12/31/11 12/31/10
Sales Revenue $90,000
Accounts receivable $8,000 $10,000
Salary expense $30,000
Salary payable $2,000 $3,000
Cash collected from customers on Cashew, Inc. s statement of cash flows equals ________.
$92,000
$88,000
$90,000
$98,000
6. The following information is from Sharp, Inc. s December 31, 2011 annual report:
Income statement Balance sheet
12/31/11 12/31/10
Sales Revenue $90,000
Accounts receivable $8,000 $10,000
Salary expense $30,000
Salary payable $2,000 $3,000
Cash paid for salaries on Sharp, Inc. s statement of cash flows equals ________.
$31,000
$29,000
$30,000
$33,000
7. The following information is from X, Inc. s December 31, 2011 annual report:
Income statement Balance sheet
12/31/11 12/31/10
Sales Revenue $90,000
Unearned revenue $8,000 $10,000
Insurance expense $30,000
Prepaid insurance $2,000 $3,000
Note: X, Inc. does not sell to its customers on account; it collects cash from its customers in advance.
Cash collected from customers on X, Inc. s statement of cash flows equals ________.
$98,000
$92,000
$88,000 solution: 90000-(10000-8000) = 88000
$90,000
8. The following information is from Avatar, Inc. s December 31, 2011 annual report:
Income statement Balance sheet
12/31/11 12/31/10
Sales Revenue $80,000
Unearned revenue $5,000 $9,000
Insurance expense $20,000
Prepaid insurance $3,000 $2,000
Note: Avatar always collects cash from its customers in advance.
Cash paid for insurance on Avatar, Inc. s statement of cash flows equals ________.
$23,000
$19,000
$22,000
$21,000
9. The following information is from ABC, Inc. s December 31, 2011 annual report:
Income statement Balance sheet
12/31/11 12/31/10
Sales Revenue $800,000
Unearned revenue $8,000 $10,000
Insurance expense $30,000
Prepaid insurance $1,000 $3,000
Note: ABC, Inc. does not sell to its customers on account; it collects cash from its customers in advance.
Cash paid for interest on ABC, Inc. s statement of cash flows equals ________.
$28,000
$32,000
$33,000
$30,000
10. On January 1, 2011, Company Z had accounts receivable of $5,000. During the year, Company Z sold $100,000 of merchandise to credit customers. At December 31, 2011, Company Z had accounts receivable of $4,000. How much cash did the company collect from credit customers during the year?
$105,000
$101,000
$95,000
$99,000
11. The direct method of preparing the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows ________.
adjusts accrual-basis income
lists each important item of cash outflows from investing activities
adjusts cash-basis income
lists each important item of cash inflows from operating activities
12. The direct method for the preparation of the statement of cash flows ________.
starts by estimating the sources of cash and the uses of cash.
starts with net income and makes adjustments for all the items that are not cash.
starts by converting every number on the income statement to its cash amount.
all of these
13. The indirect method of preparing the statement of cash flows ________.
starts by converting net income into an accrual-based number
is preferred by business over the direct method
reports a greater amount of cash than the direct method
provides greater clarity for users than the direct method
14. Depreciation expense, using the indirect method of preparing the statement of cash flows, is ________.
added to investing activities
subtracted from investing activities
added to net income
subtracted from net income
15. The indirect method for the preparation of the statement of cash flows ________.
is not in conformity with GAAP
is not in conformity with IFRS
is the preferred method used by businesses
is recommended by the FASB
16. A use of cash for operating activities is ________.
payment of dividends
cash used to purchase treasury stock
payment of an account payable
cash used to buy equipment
17. A use of cash for investing activities is ________.
payment of an account payable
cash used to purchase treasury stock
cash used to buy equipment
payment of dividends
18. Team Shirts, Inc. had net cash from operating activities of $50,000. It paid $40,000 to buy a new computer system by signing a $30,000 note and paying the balance. Net cash from (or used for) investing activities for the period was ________.
$40,000
$(10,000)
$10,000
$(40,000)
19. Negative cash flow from financing activities on the statement of cash flows means that a company has ________.
paid a large cash dividend to shareholders
bought additional property, plant and equipment
sold additional shares of common stock
paid more for operating expenses than it collected from customers
20. Positive cash flow from operating activities on the statement of cash flows means that a company has ________.
bought additional property, plant and equipment
paid a large cash dividend to shareholders
sold additional shares of common stock
collected more from customers than it paid for operating expenses
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
True-False
1. T F Managers use their knowledge of cost behavior to estimate the impact of changes in operations (such as changing output volume) on future profitability.
2. T F The traditional definition of variable cost assumes a linear relationship between cost and some measure of volume or output.
3. T F Both total fixed costs and fixed cost per unit are assumed to remain constant within the relevant range.
4. T F The high-low method is useful in identifying the fixed and variable components of a mixed cost.
5. T F Although the long-term goal in a just-in-time operating environment is to approach theoretical capacity, companies never operate at this level.
6. T F Service businesses do not have any overhead costs.
7. T F Contribution margin per unit is selling price per unit minus fixed costs per unit.
Multiple Choice
8. As production decreases, one would expect the variable cost per unit to
a. decrease.
b. increase.
c. remain unchanged.
d. decrease and then increase.
e. do none of the above.
9. The difference between fixed costs and variable costs is that
a. variable costs per unit vary within the relevant range, while fixed costs per unit remain constant within the relevant range.
b. variable costs per unit are constant (remain unchanged) within the relevant range, while fixed costs per unit vary within the relevant range.
c. variable costs per unit change in direct proportion to changes in activity, while total fixed costs change in direct proportion to changes in activity.
d. variable costs per unit and fixed costs per unit remain constant within the relevant range.
e. none of the above.
10. A good example of a mixed cost is
a. direct materials cost.
b. indirect materials cost.
c. utilities cost.
d. depreciation.
e. none of the above.
11. Assume total costs are represented on the vertical (y) axis and volume of activity is represented on the horizontal (x) axis. If the graph shows a line that is parallel to the horizontal axis, then the graph best illustrates
a. fixed costs per unit.
b. total direct materials cost.
c. equipment maintenance cost.
d. factory supervisory salaries.
e. none of the above.
12. Data for Cost A and Cost B are as follows:
Number of Units Produced
Total Cost
Number of Units Produced
Per Unit Cost
Cost A
1
$ 10
Cost B
1
$3,000
10
100
10
300
100
1,000
100
30
Which of the following best describes the behavior of Costs A and B?
a. Cost A is fixed; Cost B is variable.
b. Cost A is variable; Cost B is fixed.
c. Both Cost A and Cost B are variable.
d. Both Cost A and Cost B are fixed.
e. None of the above
13. In the month of lowest production volume, 500 units were produced, and total utilities costs were $2,800. In the month of highest production volume, 850 units were produced, and total utilities costs were $4,200. Using the high-low method, what is the fixed cost?
a. $400.00
b. $800.00
c. $2,675.00
d. $3,987.50
e. None of the above
14. In the month of highest telephone activity, 3,400 calls were placed, and total telephone costs were $1,050. In the month of lowest activity, 2,000 calls were placed, and total telephone costs were $700. Using the high-low method, what is the variable cost per call?
a. $4.00
b. $2.00
c. $.50
d. $.25
e. None of the above
15. The following information represents an annual income statement for a company that manufactures laser printers:
Sales revenue (1,600 units @ $400)
$640,000
Less variable costs
384,000
Contribution margin
$256,000
Less fixed costs
400,000
Operating loss
($144,000)
What is the breakeven point in units?
a. 1,000
b. 1,960
c. 2,500
d. 2,800
e. None of the above
16. If a product has a selling price of $35 per unit, variable costs of $15 per unit, and total fixed costs of $240,000 per year, how many units must be sold during the year to generate a profit of $80,000?
a. 32,000
b. 16,000
c. 14,000
d. 8,000
e. None of the above
17. Z Company manufactures two products, X and Y. The selling price is $12 per unit for X and $16 per unit for Y. The variable cost is $8 per unit for X and $10 per unit for Y. Fixed costs total $35,000 per month. Each product is half of Z Company s sales mix. How many units of Y must the company sell to break even?
a. 3,500
b. 7,000
c. 8,750
d. 14,000
e. None of the above
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. (TCO 1) Which financial statement is prepared first
Balance sheet
Income statement
Retained earnings statement
Statement of cash flows
2. (TCO 1) Management s views on the company s short-term debt paying ability, expansion financing, and results of operations are found in which of the following?
auditor s report
management discussion and analysis section
notes to the financial statements
president s state of the company report
3. (TCO 4) Using the following balance sheet and income statement data, what is the earnings per share?
Current assets $ 9,000 Net income $ 12,000
Current liabilities 4,000 Stockholders equity 27,000
Average assets 44,000 Total liabilities 6,000
Total assets 30,000
Average common shares outstanding was 10,000
$1.20
$2.00
$0.83
$0.44
4. (TCO 4) Which of the following is not considered a measure of liquidity
Current ratio
Working capital
Debt to total assets ratio
Each of the above are liquidity measures
5. (TCO 2) Which pair of the listed accounts follows the rules of debits and credits, in relation to increases and decreases, in the same manner?
Salary Expense and Notes Payable
Common Stock and Rent Expense
Accounts Receivable and Advertising Expense
Service Revenue and Equipment
6. (TCO 2) The principle purpose of posting is which of the following
help identify errors made in the journal
accumulate the effects of journalized transactions in the individual accounts
enter transactions directly into the ledger
help determine if the financial statements are ready to be prepared
7. (TCO 3) Joe is a warehouse custodian, and also maintains the accounting record of the inventory held at the warehouse. An assessment of this situation indicates ___ .
documentation procedures are violated
independent internal verification is violated
segregation of duties is violated
establishment of responsibility is violated
8. (TCO 3) The following information was taken from Niland Company cash budget for the month of April:
Beginning cash balance $30,000
Cash receipts 27,000
Cash disbursements 34,000
If the company has a policy of maintaining end of the month cash balance of $25,000, the amount the company would have to borrow is which of the following
$29,000
$5,000
$2,000
$0
9. (TCO 11) Managerial accounting does which of the following
is concerned with costing products
is governed by generally accepted accounting principles
pertains to the entity as a whole and is highly aggregated
places emphasis on special-purpose information
10. (TCO 11) Which of the following is not a manufacturing cost category
Cost of goods sold
Direct materials
Direct labor
Manufacturing overhead
11. (TCO 11) Which of the following are period costs
Raw materials
Direct materials and direct labor
Direct labor and manufacturing overhead
Selling expenses
12. (TCO 11) Ranger Company reported total manufacturing costs of $65,000, manufacturing overhead totaling $13,000, and direct materials totaling $15,000. How much is direct labor cost
$52,000
$37,000
$94,000
$29,000
13. (TCO 11) Hardigan Manufacturing Company reported the following year-end information:
beginning work in process inventory, $80,000
cost of goods manufactured, $980,000
beginning finished goods inventory, $50,000
ending work in process inventory, $70,000
and ending finished goods inventory, $40,000
How much is Hardigan s cost of goods sold for the year?
$980,000
$990,000
$970,000
$1,000,000
14. (TCO 5) What effect do changes in activity have on fixed costs per unit
No effect. Fixed costs per unit stay the same at every activity level.
An inverse effect.
A directly proportional effect.
It depends on the particular level of activity.
15. (TCO 5) Which of the following is an underlying assumption of CVP analysis
Factors other than changes in activity may affect costs.
Cost classifications are reasonably accurate.
Increases in inventories cause increase in total fixed costs.
Unit costs remain the same over the relevant range.
1. (TCO 5) A company has total fixed costs of $150,000 and a contribution margin ratio of 30%. How much sales are necessary to break even?
$450,000
$120,000
$54,000
$500,000
2. (TCO 5) How much sales are required to earn a target income of $80,000, if total fixed costs are $100,000 and the contribution margin ratio is 40%
$300,000
$200,000
$450,000
$330,000
3. (TCO 6) Which one of the following is not a benefit of budgeting?
It facilitates the coordination of activities.
It provides definite objectives for evaluating performance.
It provides assurance that the company will achieve its objectives.
It requires all levels of management to plan ahead on a recurring basis.
4. (TCO 6) Which one of the following would most likely cause an unrealistic budget to result?
All levels of management contributed to its development.
The budget has been developed in a participative approach.
The budget has been developed in a top down fashion.
The budget was developed after considerable planning.
5. (TCO 6) What three differences exist between long-range planning and budgeting
Amount of detail, content, and emphasis
Time periods involved, amount of detail, and content
Content, emphasis, and amount of detail
Emphasis, time periods involved, and amount of detail
6. (TCO 6) Which of the following statements about a budgeted income statement is true?
It is prepared before the operating budgets are prepared.
It reflects the cash to be received and paid as a result of operations.
It is prepared after the cash budget is prepared.
It is prepared using the individual operating budgets.
7. (TCO 7) Which statement is true concerning a static budget report
It considers performance at numerous activity levels.
It is appropriate in evaluating a manager s effectiveness in controlling fixed costs.
It should be used when the actual level of activity is materially different from the master budget activity level.
It is most effective when evaluating a manager s effectiveness in controlling variable costs.
8. (TCO 7) The foreign subsidiary of a large corporation is which of the following
not a responsibility center
a profit center
a cost center
an investment center
9. (TCO 7) The best measure of the performance of the manager of a profit center is which of the following
rate of return on investment
success in meeting budgeted goals for controllable costs
amount of controllable margin generated by the profit center
amount of contribution margin generated by the profit center
10. (TCO 7) Merck Pharmaceuticals is evaluating its Vioxx division, an investment center. The division has a $45,000 controllable margin and $300,000 of sales. How much will Merck s average operating assets be when its return on investment is 10%?
$450,000
$495,000
$300,000
$255,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Cash flow information: Direct and indirect methods
The comparative year-end balance sheets of Sign Graphics, Inc., revealed the following activity in the company’s current accounts:
|
|
20X5
|
20X4
|
Increase / Decrease)
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$55,400
|
$35,200
|
$20,200
|
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
83,800
|
88,000
|
-4,200
|
|
|
Inventory
|
243,400
|
233,800
|
9,600
|
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
25,400
|
24,200
|
1,200
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$123,600
|
$140,600
|
($17,000)
|
|
|
Taxes payable
|
43,600
|
49,200
|
-5,600
|
|
|
Interest payable
|
9,000
|
6,400
|
2,600
|
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
38,800
|
60,400
|
-21,600
|
|
|
Note payable
|
44,000
|
|
44,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The accounts payable were for the purchase of merchandise. Prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities relate to the firm’s selling and administrative expenses. The company’s condensed income statement follows.
|
SIGN GRAPHICS INC.
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
for the Year Ended December 31, 20×5
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sales
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$713,800
|
|
|
Less: Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
|
323,000
|
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
|
|
|
|
$390,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Less: Selling & administrative expenses
|
|
$186,000
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
|
|
|
|
17,000
|
|
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
|
|
|
|
27,000
|
|
230,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Add: gain on sale of land
|
|
|
|
|
$160,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
21,800
|
|
|
Income before taxes
|
|
|
|
|
$182,600
|
|
|
Income taxes
|
|
|
|
|
|
36,800
|
|
|
Net income
|
|
|
|
|
|
$145,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other data:
1. Long-term investments were purchased for cash at a cost of $74,600.
2. Cash proceeds from the sale of land totaled $76,200.
3. Store equipment of $44,000 was purchased by signing a short-term note payable. Also, a $150,000 telecommunications system was acquired by issuing 3,000 shares of preferred stock.
4. A long-term note of $49,400 was repaid.
5. Twenty thousand shares of common stock were issued at $5.19 per share.
6. The company paid cash dividends amounting to $128,600.
Instructions:
a. Prepare the operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows, assuming use of:
1. The direct method.
2. The indirect method.
b. Prepare the investing and financing activities sections of the statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Your client, ABC Corporation, structured a like-kind exchange with an unrelated party using a qualified intermediary, QI4U.com. Unfortunately, QI4U.com was poorly managed and declared bankruptcy AFTER acquiring the property from ABC but BEFORE completing the exchange. How should this transaction be treated for tax purposes? Assume that any payments recovered in full satisfaction of the intermediary s obligation will not be received for over a year. Also, discuss how the tax treatment differs if the subsequent payment in full satisfaction of the intermediary s obligation exceeds or does not exceed ABC Corporation s basis in the exchanged asset. Support your position with relevant citations from the Internal Revenue Code, Treasury Regulations, IRS Rulings, and court cases.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1 A 95% con dence interval for the mean income of shop assistants in a certain city
is found to be ( 12,000, 15,000). Say in one sentence what this means. Would a
99% con dence interval be better than a 95% one? (Say why/why not.)
2. A charity believes that when it puts out an appeal for charitable donations the
donations it receives will be normally distributed with a mean of 50 and a standard
deviation of 6.
a) Find the probability that the rst donation it receives will be less than 40.
b) Find the value x such that 5% of donations are more than x.
3. A consultant for Dell was investigating computer usage among students at a
particular university. 200 undergraduates and 100 postgraduates were chosen at
random and asked if they owned a laptop. It was found that 81 of the
undergraduates and 63 of the postgraduates owned a laptop. The consultant
calculated that 48% (144 out of 300) of the students interviewed owned a laptop.
Explain, with reasons, whether the gure of 48% will be a good estimate of the
proportion of all students who own a laptop.
4. For a certain variable, the standard deviation in a large population is equal to 12.5.
How big a sample is needed to be 95% sure that the sample mean is within 1.5 units
of the population mean?
(5 marks)
5. a) What conclusions would you draw from a test which is signi cant at the 1%
level?
b) What conclusions would you draw from a test which is signi cant at the 10%
level, but not the 5% level?
c) An accounting rm wishes to test the claim that no more than 5% of a large
number of transactions contains errors. In order to test this claim, they examine
a random sample of 225 transactions and nd that exactly 20 of these are in
error. What conclusion should the rm draw? Use a 5% signi cance level.
6. A pro t-maximising retailer can obtain cameras from the manufacturer at a cost of
50 per camera. The retailer has been selling the cameras at a price of 80, and
at this price consumers have been buying 40 cameras per month. The retailer is
planning to lower the price to stimulate sales and knows that for each 5 reduction
in the price, 10 more cameras will be sold each month. Assuming price is a multiple
of 5, what price should the retailer charge and what will the monthly pro ts be?
7. Explain brie y the purpose of
a) sampling
b) model building.
Discuss any advantages and limitations.
8. The prospective operator of a shoe store has the opportunity to locate in an
established and successful shopping centre. Alternatively, at lower cost, he can
locate in a new centre, whose development has recently been completed. If the new
centre turns out to be very successful, it is expected that annual store pro ts from
location in it would be 130,000. If the centre is only moderately successful, annual
pro ts would be 60,000. If the new centre is unsuccessful, an annual loss of 10,000
would be expected. The pro ts to be expected from location in the established
centre will also depend to some extent on the degree of success of the new centre,
as potential customers may be drawn to it. If the new centre was unsuccessful,
annual pro ts for the shoe store located in the established centre would be expected
to be 90,000. However, if the new centre was moderately successful, the expected
pro ts would be 70,000, while they would be only 30,000 if the new centre turned
out to be very successful. All pro ts are inclusive of location cost. The probability
that the new shopping centre will be very successful is 0.4 and the probability it will
be moderately successful is also 0.4.
a) Draw the decision tree for this problem.
b) According to the expected monetary value criterion, where should the shoe
store be located? Assume a risk-neutral decision-maker.
c) Without calculating or drawing anything, explain brie y how a perfect forecast
of shopping centre success changes the decision tree in a) .
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.The account “Cash” had the following changes: increase of $250, decrease of $75, increase of $113, and decrease of $35. The final balance is a
A.debit balance of $253.
B.credit balance of $253.
C.credit balance of $110.
D.debit balance of $363.
2.During a recent week, incurred wages were $700. However, $280 of the wages hadn’t been paid. The adjusting entry for wages would be
A.debit wages payable, 420; credit wages expense, $420.
B.debit wages payable, $280; credit wages expense, $280.
C.debit wages expense, $280; credit wages payable, $280.
D.debit wages expense, $420; credit wages payable, $420.
3.Items such as wages and interest that have been incurred, but not yet paid, are called accrued
A.assets.
B.liabilities.
C.notes.
D.revenues.
4.A T-account has a $509 debit balance. This account is most likely not
A.dividends.
B.common stock.
C.advertising expense.
D.land.
5.A cash payment was made to pay for delivery expenses but was mistakenly charged to advertising
expenses. Which effect will this have on the balance of the trial balance?
A.The trial balance will still balance.
B.Advertising expense will be correct.
C.Cash will be correct.
D.Delivery expense will be understated.
6.Which business form is similar to a corporation in regard to owner liability?
A.Partnership
B.Limited liability company
C.Limited liability corporation
D.Sole proprietorship
7.The income statement is used to report
A.the financial position on a specific date.
B.results of operations for a specific period.
C.results of operations for a specific date.
D.the financial position for a specific period.
8.Office equipment was purchased for $2,400 on account to Business Furniture Company. The journal entry would include a
A.debit to Accounts Payable and a credit to Cash.
B.debit to Office Equipment and a credit to Accounts Payable.
C.debit to Office Equipment and a credit to Cash.
D.credit to Cash and a debit to Office Equipment Expense.
9.A T-account has which major parts?
A.A debit side, a credit side, and a total column
B.A title, a debit side, and a credit side
C.A title, a current date, and a balance
D.A debit side, a credit side, and a balance
10.The balance sheet is used to report
A.the financial position for a specific period.
B.the financial position on a specific date.
C.results of operations for a specific date.
D.results of operations for a specific period.
11.The adjusted trial balance for supplies was $333. The unadjusted trial balance for supplies was $509. The amount of supplies expense would be a
A.$509 debit.
B.$176 credit.
C.$333 debit.
D.$176 debit.
12.The matching principle in accounting requires the matching of revenue earned with the
A.assets used to produce the revenue.
B.liabilities used to produce the revenue.
C.expenses incurred to produce the revenue.
D.assets used less the liabilities incurred.
13.The unadjusted trial balance for prepaid rent shows a $12,000 balance. At the end of the year, $7,000 of the rent had been used. The adjusted trial balance for prepaid rent is a
A.$5,000 credit.
B.$7,000 credit.
C.$5,000 debit.
D.$7,000 debit.
14.Rick lists his building at current replacement value, rather than the price he paid for the building. Which principle is Rick violating?
A.Cost
B.Entity
C.Going concern
D.Reliability
15.Which concept would notbe considered if you were to compare the price of a Camaro in 1979 with the price of a Camaro in 2009?
A.Reliability of the price in 1979
B.Objectivity of the price in 1979
C.Market price in 1979
D.Current cost in 2009
16.Expenses paid in advance, such as rent and insurance, are classified as prepaid expenses. Into which category are they placed?
A.Assets
B.Liabilities
C.Revenues
D.Expenses
17.The account “Notes payable” had the following changes: increase of $500, increase of $200, decrease of $550, and increase of $250. The final balance is a
A.debit balance of $400.
B.debit balance of $950.
C.credit balance of $550.
D.credit balance of $400.
18.The total revenues of $6,500, total expenses of $3,500, and dividends of $500 were recorded in the
closing entries. The net change in retained earnings for the month was
A.$3,000.
B.$2,500.
C.$3,500.
D.$6,000.
19.A 20-month insurance policy was purchased for $1,500 on May 1. How much insurance will be
expensed on December 31?
A.$300
B.$600
C.$1,500
D.$75
20.The unadjusted trial balance for depreciation expense shows a $780 balance. The expense was adjusted by $235. The adjusted trial balance figure for depreciation expense is now a
A.$545 debit.
B.$1,015 debit.
C.$545 credit.
D.$1,015 credit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. From the adjusted trial balance for Worker Products Company given below, prepare a multiple-step income statement in good form.
Worker Products Company
Adjusted Trial Balance
December 31
DebitCredit
Cash $9,400
Accounts receivable25,000
Merchandise inventory 36,000
Office supplies 900
Store equipment 75,000
Accumulated depreciation – store equipment $22,000
Office equipment 60,000
Accumulated depreciation -office equipment 15,000
Accounts payable 42,000
Notes payable 10,000
F. Worker, Capital 110,700
F. Worker, Withdrawals 48,000
Sales 325,000
Sales discounts 6,000
Sales returns and allowances 16,500
Cost of goods sold 195,000
Sales salaries expense 32,500
Depreciation expense – store equipment 11,000
Depreciation expense – office equipment 7,500
Office supplies expense 1,300
Interest expense 600
Totals $524,700 $524,700
2. From the adjusted trial balance for Worker Products Company given below, prepare the necessary closing entries.
Worker Products Company
Adjusted Trial Balance
December 31
Debit Credit
Cash$ 9,400
Accounts receivable 25,000
Merchandise inventory 36,000
Office supplies 900
Store equipment 75,000
Accumulated depreciation – store equipment $22,000
Office equipment 60,000
Accumulated depreciation -office equipment 15,000
Accounts payable 42,000
Notes payable 10,000
F. Worker, Capital 110,700
F. Worker, Withdrawals 48,000
Sales 325,000
Sales discounts 6,000
Sales returns and allowances 16,500
Cost of goods sold 195,000
Sales salaries expense 32,500
Depreciation expense – store equipment 11,000
Depreciation expense – office equipment 7,500
Office supplies expense 1,300
Interest expense 600
Totals $524,700 $524,700
3. A company made the following merchandise purchases and sales during the month of May:
May 1 Purchased 380 units at$15 each
May 5 Purchased 270 units at$17 each
May 10 Sold400 units at $50 each
May 20 Purchased 300 units at $22 each
May 25 Sold 400 units at $50 each
There was no beginning inventory. If the company uses the LIFO periodic inventory method, what would be the cost of the ending inventory
4. A company made the following merchandise purchases and sales during the month of May:
May 1 Purchased 380 units at $15 each
May 5 Purchased 270 units at $17 each
May 10 Sold 400 units at $50 each
May 20 Purchased 300 units at $22 each
May 25 Sold 400 units at $50 each
There was no beginning inventory. If the company uses the FIFO periodic inventory method, what would be the cost of the ending inventory
5. Flaxco purchases inventory from overseas and incurs the following costs: the cost of the merchandise is $50,000, credit terms are 2/10, n/30 that apply only to the $50,000; FOB shipping point freight charges are $1,500; insurance during transit is $500; and import duties are $1,000. Flaxco paid within the discount period and incurred additional costs of $1,200 for advertising and $5,000 for sales commissions. Compute the cost that should be assigned to the inventory.
A. $50,000
B. $53,000
C. $52,000
D. $51,500
E. $53,200
6. A company had inventory of 10 units at a cost of $20 each on November 1. On November 2, it purchased 10 units at $22 each. On November 6 it purchased 6 units at $25 each. On November 8, it sold 22 units for $54 each. Using the FIFO perpetual inventory method, what was the cost of the 22 units sold
A. $470
B. $490
C. $450
D. $570
E. $520
7. Perch Company reported the following purchases and sales for its only product. Perch uses a perpetual inventory system. Determine the cost assigned to cost of goods sold using FIFO.
Date Activities Units Acquired at Cost Units Sold at Retail
May 1 Beginning Inventory150 units @ $10.00
5 Purchase220 units @ $12.00
10 Sales140 units @ $20.00
15 Purchase100 units @ $13.00
24 Sales150 units @ $21.00
A. $2,260
B. $3,180
C. $1,860
D. $3,580
E. $2,100
8. Perch Company reported the following purchases and sales for its only product. Perch uses a perpetual inventory system. Determine the cost assigned to ending inventory using LIFO.
Date Activities Units Acquired at Cost Units Sold at Retail
May 1 Beginning Inventory 150 units @ $10.00
5 Purchase 220 units @ $12.00
10 Sales 140 units @ $20.00
15 Purchase 100 units @ $13.00
24 Sales 150 units @ $21.00
A. $2,260
B. $3,180
C. $1,860
D. $3,580
E. $2,100
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
- Allen and McConnell, Inc. (A & M) manufacture a variety of consumer products which they sell to retailers around the country. One of their products, Pogo, normally wholesales for $180/unit. Pogo is manufactured in a separate facility that currently operates at 7,000 units/mo below capacity. Pogo costs $136/unit to manufacture: $36 of direct materials, $25 of direct labor, and $75 of overhead (applied at 300% of direct labor). The overhead pool is 80% fixed and 20% variable. A new customer, Enormous Mart, has approached A & M about purchasing a large quantity of Pogo: 8,000 units/mo for each of the next six months. Enormous Mart has offered to pay $110/unit. Because of a small design modification, A & M will incur $50,000 in one-time set up costs, which will result in a reduction of $4/unit in raw materials costs. Because the order is negotiated through headquarters, the normal 10% sales commission will not be paid.
- Is the order profitable for A & M? Show your calculations
- What other factors should A & M consider in deciding whether to accept the order?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Below you will find selected information (in millions) from Coca-Cola Co. s 2012 Annual Report: Income Taxes Payable $471 Short-term Investments and Marketable Securities 8,109 Cash 8,442 Other non-current Liabilities 10,449 Common Stock 1,760 Receivables 4,812 Other Current Assets 2,973 Long-term Investments 10,448 Other Non-current Assets 3,585 Property, Plant and Equipment 23,486 Trademarks 6,527 Other Intangible Assets 20,810 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 53 Accumulated Depreciation 9,010 Accounts Payable 8,680 Short Term Notes Payable 17,874 Prepaid Expenses 2,781 Other Current Liabilities 796 Long-Term Liabilities 14,736 Paid-in-Capital in Excess of Par Value 11,379 Retained Earnings 55,038 Inventories 3,264 Treasury Stock 35,009 Other information taken from the Annual Report: Sales Revenue for 2012 $48,017 Cost of Goods Sold for 2012 19,053 Net Income for 2012 9,019 Inventory Balance on 12/31/11 3,092 Net Accounts Receivable Balance on 12/31/11 4,920 Total Assets on 12/31/11 79,974 Equity Balance on 12/31/11 31,921 Required:
1. Using the information provided prepare a Balance Sheet. Separate the current assets from non-current assets and provide a total for each. Also separate the current liabilities from the non-current liabilities and provide a total for each.
2. Using the Balance Sheet from your answer above calculate; Current Ratio, Days in Inventory, Average Collection Period, Return on Assets Ratio, Debt to Total Assets and Return on common stockholders equity ratio. (Make sure to show all your work) (Points : 36)
2. The following selected data was retrieved from the Wal-Mart, Inc. financial statements for the year ending January 31, 2013: Accounts Payable $38,080 Accounts Receivable 6,768 Cash 7,781 Common Stock 3,952 Cost of Goods Sold 352,488 Income Tax Expense 7,981 Interest Expenses 2,064 Membership Revenues 3,048 Net Sales 466,114 Operating, Selling and Administrative Expenses 88,873 Retained Earnings 72,978 Required: Using the information provided above: 1. Prepare a multiple-step income statement 2. Calculate the Profit Margin, and Gross profit rate for the company. Be sure to provide the formula you are using, show your calculations, and discuss your findings/results. (Points : 36)
3. Please review the following real-world Hewlett Packard Statement of Cash flows and address the 2 questions below: Cash flow from operating activities In millions In millions For the year ended 2012 For the year ended 2011 Net (loss) earnings $(12,650) $7,074 Depreciation and amortization 5,095 4,984 Impairment of goodwill and purchased intangible assets 18,035 885 Stock-based compensation expense 635 685 Provision for doubtful accounts 142 81 Provision for inventory 277 217 Restructuring charges 2,266 645 Deferred taxes on earnings (711) 166 Excess tax benefit from stock-based competition (12) (163) Other, net 265 (46) Accounts and financing receivables 1,269 (227) Inventory 890 (1,252) Accounts payable (1,414) 275 Taxes on earnings (320) 610 Restructuring (840) (1,002) Other assets and liabilities (2,356) (293) Net cash provided by operating activities 10,571 12,639 Cash flows from investing activities: Investment in property, plant, and equipment (3,706) (4,539) Proceeds from sale of property, plant, and equipment 617 999 Purchases of available-for-sale securities and other investments (972) (96) Maturities and sales of available-for-sale securities and other investment 662 68 Payments in connection with business acquisitions, net of cash acquired (141) (10,480) Proceeds from business divestiture, net 87 89 Net cash used in investing activities (3,453) (13,959) Cash flow from financing activities: (Payments) issuance of commercial paper and notes payable, net (2,775) (1,270) Issuance of debt 5,154 11,942 Payment of debt (4,333) (2,336) Issuance of common stock under employee stock plans 716 896 Repurchase of common stock (1,619) (10,117) Excess tax benefit from stock-based compensation 12 163 Cash dividends paid (1,015) (844) Net cash used in financing activities (3,860) (1,566) Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents 3,258 (2,886) Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period 8,043 10,929 Cash and cash equivalents at end of period $11,301 $8,043 Required: 1) Please calculate the percentage increase or decrease in cash for the operating, investing, and financing sections and explain the major reasons for the increase or decrease for each of these sections. 2) Please calculate the free cash flow for 2012 and explain the meaning of this ratio.
4. You are CFO of Goforit, Inc., a wholesale distribution company specializing in emerging technologies. Your CEO is a brilliant marketer, but relies on you to explain issues and choices in accounting and finance. She has heard from other members of a CEO organization to which she belongs that a company s net income can vary widely depending on which accounting choices are made from the GAAP menu.
Assuming the goal is to maximize net income, choose an accounting treatment from each of the following scenarios, and explain to your CEO why the choice will produce the desired effect on reported Net Income for the current year. Include in your answer the effect of the choice on both the income statement and balance sheet.
Required:
a. Goforit carries significant electronics inventory in a competitive environment where prices are actually falling. Which inventory valuation method would you choose LIFO, FIFO, or average cost? Assume that unit purchases exceed unit sales.
b. Goforit has a large investment in warehouse equipment including conveyor belts, forklifts, and automated packaging systems. Which depreciation method would you choose: Straight line (SL) or double declining balance (DDB)?
(Points : 36)
5. Please review the following real-world ratios for Johnson & Johnson and Pfizer for the year ended 2012 and address the 2 questions below.
Ratio Name
Johnson & Johnson
Pfizer
Profit margin
16.1%
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.) Berger Company purchased equipment having an invoice price of $22,500. The terms of sale were 3/10, n/60, and Berger paid within the discount period. In addition, Berger paid a $235 delivery charge, $615 installation charge, and $1,528 sales tax. Berger paid for optional accident insurance for transport of the equipment amounting to $35. The amount recorded as the cost of this equipment is:
$24,913
$24,878
$24,238
$24,203
2.) The cost of successfully defending a patent in an infringement suit should be
added to the cost of the patent.
charged to Legal Expenses.
deducted from the book value of the patent.
recognized as a loss in the current period.
3.) Mather Company purchased equipment on January 1, 2012 at a total invoice cost of $224,000; additional costs of $4,000 for freight and $20,000 for installation were incurred. The equipment has an estimated salvage value of $8,000 and an estimated useful life of five years. The amount of accumulated depreciation at December 31, 2013 if the straight-line method of depreciation is used is:
$88,000
$99,200
$96,000
$86,400
4.) In April 2013, Sparkle Enterprises purchased the Crimson Mine at a cost of $18,000,000. The mine is estimated to contain 500,000 tons of ore with a residual value of $2,000,000 after mining operations are completed. During 2013, 120,000 tons of ore were removed from the mine and sold. In this situation:
The amount of depletion deducted from revenue during 2013 is $3,840,000.
The book value of the mine is $16,000,000 at the end of 2013.
The amount of depletion deducted from revenue during 2013 is $2,000,000.
The mine is classified as an intangible asset with in indefinite life and is not amortized.
5.) The units-of-activity method is generally not suitable for
delivery equipment.
buildings.
factory machinery.
airplanes.
6.) On May 1, 2013, Pinkley Company sells office furniture for $150,000 cash. The office furniture originally cost $375,000 when purchased on January 1, 2006. Depreciation is recorded by the straight-line method over 10 years with a salvage value of $37,500. What depreciation expense should be recorded on this asset in 2013?
$16,875
$33,750
$12,500
$11,250
7.) The cost of land includes all of the following except
parking lots.
closing costs.
real estate brokers’ commissions.
accrued property taxes.
8.) The interest charged on a $200,000 note payable, at the rate of 8%, on a 90-day note would be
$4,000
$1,333
$16,000
$8,888
9.) Which of the following statements about liabilities is incorrect?
Companies sometimes show
liabilities in order of magnitude.
liabilities before assets.
long-term liabilities before current assets.
current liabilities netted against current assets.
10.) The market interest rate is often called the
contractual rate.
stated rate.
effective rate.
coupon rate.
11.) A retail store credited the Sales Revenue account for the sales price and the amount of sales tax on sales. If the sales tax rate is 5% and the balance in the Sales Revenue account amounted to $273,000, what is the amount of the sales taxes owed to the taxing agency?
$260,000
$273,000
$13,000
$13,650
12.) Corporations are granted the power to issue bonds through
federal security laws.
tax laws.
state laws.
bond debentures.
13.) Farris Company borrowed $800,000 from BankTwo on January 1, 2012 in order to expand its mining capabilities. The five-year note required annual payments of $208,349 and carried an annual interest rate of 9.5%. What is the balance in the notes payable account at December 31, 2013?
$522,729
$667,651
$648,000
$800,000
14.) Bonds that are secured by real estate are termed
bearer bonds.
debentures.
serial bonds.
mortgage bonds.
15.) Which of the following is usually not an accrued liability?
Taxes payable
Notes payable
Interest payable
Wages payable
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Chapman Inc. has several outdated computers that cost a total of $8,600 and could be sold as scrap for $4,600. They could be updated for an additional $2,400 and sold. If Chapman updates the computers and sells them, net income will increase by $5,400. What amount would be considered sunk costs?
A) $5,400
B) $11,000
C) $8,600
D) $1,200
2. It costs Chapman Company $18.40 of variable and $3.75 of fixed costs to produce one bathroom scale, which normally sells for $47.00. A foreign wholesaler offers to purchase 4,000 scales at $26.90 each. Chapman would incur special shipping costs of $2.75 per scale if the order were accepted. Chapman has sufficient unused capacity to produce the 4,000 scales. If the special order is accepted, what will be the effect on net income?
A) $107,600 increase
B) $23,000 increase
C) $8,000 increase
D) $23,000 decrease
6. Mesh Merchandising Company expects to purchase $86,000 of materials in July and $118,000 of materials in August. 21ree-quarters of all purchases are paid for in the month of purchase, and the other one-fourth are paid for in the month following the month of purchase. How much will August’s cash disbursements for materials purchases be?
A) $118,000
B) $64,500
C) $88,500
D) $110,000
8. The following information is taken from the production budget for the first quarter:
Beginning inventory in units 883
Sales budgeted for the quarter 338,000
Capacity in units of production facility 350,000
How many finished goods units should be produced during the quarter if the company desires 2,100 units available to start the next quarter?
A) 339,217
B) 340,100
C) 351,217
D) 336,783
9. Sala Co. is contemplating the replacement of an old machine with a new one. The following information has been gathered:
Old Machine New Machine
Price $300,000 $600,000
Accumulated Depreciation 90,000 -O-
Remaining useful life 10 years -O-
Useful life -0- 10 years
Animal operating costs $240,000 $180,600
If the old machine is replaced, it can be sold for $24,000.
The net advantage (disadvantage) of replacing the old machine is
A) $18,000
B) $(6,000)
C) $24,000
D) $(60,000)
10. Astor Manufacturing has the following budgeted sales: January $120,000, February $180,000, and March $150,000. 40% of the sales are for cash and 60% are on credit. For the credit sales, 50% are collected in the month of sale, and 50% the next month. The total expected cash receipts during March are:
A) $159,000.
B) $168,000.
C) $157,500.
D) $150,000.
12. Comma Co. makes and sells widgets. The company is in the process of preparing its selling and administrative expense budget for the month. The following budget data are available:
Item Variable Cost Per Unit Sold Monthly Fixed Cost
Sales commissions $1 $10,000
Shipping $3
Advertising $4
Executive salaries $120,000
Deprec ation on office equipment $4,000
Other $2 $6,000
Expenses are paid in the month incurred. If the company has budgeted to sell 80,000 widgets in October, how much is the total budgeted selling and administrative expenses for October?
A) $930,000
B) $940,000
C) $800,000
D) $140,000
13. The cost to produce Part A was $82 per unit in 2012. During 2013, it has increased to $89 per unit. In 2013, Supplier Company has offered to supply Part A for $75 per unit. For the make-or-buy decision,
A) incremental revenues are $14 per unit.
B) incremental costs are $7 per unit.
C) net relevant costs are $7 per unit.
D) differential costs are $14 per unit.
15. At January 1, 2013, Farley, Inc. has beginning inventory of 2,000 surfboards. Farley estimates it will seli 5,000 units during the first quarter of 2013 with a 12% increase in sales each quarter. Farley’s policy is to maintain an ending inventory equal to 25% of the next quarter’s sales. Each surfboard costs $100 and is sold for $150. How much is budgeted sales revenue for the third quarter of 2013?
A) $975,000
B) $6,272
C) $225,000
D) $940,800
16. If there were 68,000 pounds of raw materials on hand on January 1, 135,000 pounds are desired for inventory at January 31, and 400,000 pounds are required for January production, how many pounds of raw materials should be purchased in January?
A) 332,000 pounds
B) 197,000 pounds
C) 535,000 pounds
D) 467,000 pounds
400,000 required + 135,000 desired ending inventory 68,000 beginning inventory = 467,000
18. On January 1, Stranbrough Company has a beginning cash balance of $21,000. During the year, the company expects cash disbursements of $169,400 and cash receipts of $154,000. If Stranbrough requires an ending cash balance of $20,000, the company must borrow
A) $36,400.
B) $25,600.
C) $20,000.
D) $14,400.
7. Walton, Inc. is considering the following alternatives:
Alternative 1
Alternative 2
Revenues $120,000 $120,000
Variable costs 32,000 43,000
Fixed costs 34,000 51,000
Which of the following are relevant in choosing between the alternatives?
A) Revenues
B) Variable costs and fixed costs
C) Fixed costs
D) Variable costs
11. Kalamoo produces several products that can be sold at the split-off point or then sold processed further.
The following results are from a recent period:
Product Sales Value At Split-Off Additional Variable Costs Sales Value After Further Processing
Green Lumber 75,200 12,000 86,200
Rough Lumber 79,500 8,000 88,500
Sawdust 45,000 20,000 67,000
Which products should be processed further?
A) All three products
B) Green lumber and rough lumber
C) Rough lumber and sawdust
D) Green lumber and sawdust
Only green lumber should not be processed further since the sales value at split-off $75,200 + additional variable costs $12,000 = $87,200 which is more than the sales value after further processing of $86,200.
19. Lytle Company reported the following information for 2013:
Octvber November December
Budgeted sales
$230,000 $220,000 $270,000
Budgeted purchases
$120,000 $128,000 $144,000
All sales are on credit.
Customer amounts on account are collected 50% in the month of sale and 50% in the following month.
Cost of goods sold is 35% of sales.
Lytle purchases and pays for merchandise 60% in the month of acquisition and 40% in the following month.
Accounts payable is used only for inventory acquisitions.
How much cash will Lytle receive during November?
A) $110,000
B) $245,000
C) $220,000
D) $225,000
22. Walton Division has the following data:
Sales $660,000
Variable expenses 250,000
Fixed expenses 476,000
The fixed costs are not awidable and must be allocated to profitable divisions if the segment is eliminated. What will be the incrementa) effect on net income if Walton Division is eliminated?
A) $410,000 decease
B) $476,000 decrease
C) $66,000 ncrease
D) Cannot be determined from the data provided.
25. A company’s unit costs based on 500,000 units are:
Variable costs $32
Fixed costs 20
The normal unit sales price per unit is $110. A special order from a foreign company has been received for 4,000 units at $90 a unit. In order to fulfill the order, 2,000 units of regular sales would have to be foregone. The opportunity cost associated with this order is
A) $64,000.
B) $180,000.
C) $220,000.
D) $156,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Company A has assets of $1,000,000, liabilities = 400,000 and equity = $600,000.
What is the debt to asset ratio for Company A?
40%
60%
100%
20%
1. Based on the following income statement what is the Net Profit Margin Ratio?
Cinnamon and Spice., Inc.
Income Statement
12/31/2008
Revenue:
Sales$200,000
Expenses:
Selling expense112,000
Operating expense28,000
Interest expense25,000
Other expense15,000
Total expense180,000
Net Income$20,000
10%
20%
180%
80%
1. Sales with terms 2/ 10, n/ 30 means:
The buyer gets a 10 percent discount for payment within 30 days.
The buyer gets 2 percent discount for payment within 10 days.
The buyer gets a 10 percent discount for payment within 10 days.
The buyer gets a 2 percent discount for payment within 30 days.
1. A $ 1,000 sale is made on May 1 with terms 2/ 10, n/ 30. What amount, if received on May 9, will be considered payment in full?
$ 1,000
$ 900
$ 800
$ 980
1. A company has net sales of $500,000 and cost of goods sold of $400,000. The company s gross profit percentage is:
80%
20%
50%
10%
1. Company Alpha has Sales of $800,000, Sales Discounts of $40,000 and Sales Returns of $50,000. How will this be shown on the Income Statement?
With net sales of $710,000
With net sales of $890,000
With net sales of $790,000
With net sales of $810,000
1. Instructions
MATRIX INC. BANK RECONCILIATION
Cash balance per bank$9,610
Cash balance per books (general ledger)$7,430
Outstanding checks$2,417
Check mailed to the bank for deposit had
not reached the bank by the statement
date.$500
NSF check returned by the bank for
accounts receivable$225
July interest earned on the bank statement$30
Check no. 781 for supply expense cleared
the bank for $268; erroneously recorded
in our books for $240
Deposit by Acme Company erroneously
credited to the Matrix bank account by
the bank$486
2. Prepare a standard bank reconciliation and answer the multiple choice questions in this exercise.
QUESTIONS BELOW
Question 1
1.How are the outstanding checks of $2,417 shown on the bank reconciliation?
Reduction of the book balance.
Reduction of the bank balance.
Added to the book balance.
Added to the bank balance.
Outstanding checks are not shown on the bank reconciliation.
Question 2
1.How is the check of $500 that was mailed to the bank, but not yet received by the bank, shown on the bank reconciliation?
Reduction of the book balance.
Reduction of the bank balance.
Added to the book balance.
Added to the bank balance.
This item is not shown on the bank reconciliation.
Question 3
1.How is the non sufficient funds (NSF) check shown on the bank reconciliation?
Reduction of the book balance.
Reduction of the bank balance.
Added to the book balance.
Added to the bank balance.
This item is not shown on the bank reconciliation.
Question 4
1.How is the interest earned shown on the bank reconciliation?
Reduction of the book balance.
Reduction of the bank balance.
Added to the book balance.
Added to the bank balance.
Outstanding checks are not shown on the bank reconciliation.
Question 5
1.Check #781 for supply expense was written for $268 and cleared the bank for that amount. However, when Matrix Inc. recorded the check in their books for $240. How is this error shown on the bank reconciliation?
Reduction of the book balance of $268.
Reduction of the bank balance of $268.
Reduction of the book balance of $28.
Reduction of the bank balance of $28.
Reduction of the book balance of $240.
Question 6
1.How is the erroneous deposit of $486 shown on the bank reconciliation?
Reduction of the book balance.
Reduction of the bank balance.
Added to the book balance.
Added to the bank balance.
This item is not shown on the bank reconciliation.
Question 7
1.What is the up to date ending cash balance (book) on the bank reconciliation?
$7,207
$7,657
$7,707
$7,177
$9,624
Question 8
1.What journal entry must be made on the Matrix Inc. books to record the NSF check of $225?
Debit Cash $225; Credit Accounts Receivable $225
Debit Accounts Receivable $225; Credit Cash $225
Debit NSF Expense $225; Credit Cash $225
Debit Cash $225; Credit Interest Income $225
Question 9
1.What journal entry must be made on the Matrix Inc. books to record the interest income of $30?
Debit Interest Income $30; Credit Cash $30
Debit Interest Expense $30; Credit Cash $30
Debit Interest Receivable $30; Credit Interest Income $30
Debit Cash $30; Credit Interest Income $30
Question 10
1.What journal entry must be made on the Matrix Inc. books to record the check #781 error?
Debit Cash $28; Credit Supply Expense $28
Debit Cash $268; Credit Supply Expense $268
Debit Cash $240; Credit Supply Expense $240
Debit Supply Expense $28; Credit Cash $28
Debit Supply Expense $240; Credit Cash $240
Question 11
1.What journal entry must be made on the Matrix Inc. books to record the erroneous deposit of $486?
Debit Cash $486; Credit Bank Account $486
Debit Bank Account $486; Credit Cash $486
Debit Cash $486; Credit Income $486
Debit Cash 486; Credit Expense $486
No entry is made on the Matrix Inc. books.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Dalian Company provides the following information:
Price per unit: $20
Variable cost per unit: $8
Fixed costs per month: $15,000
What is the breakeven point in terms of units sold
1,150
1,200
1,875
1,250
2. A traditional costing system employs multiple allocation rates, but an activity-based costing system uses only one single allocation rate.
True
False
3. Formosa Steel Products makes steel building materials for export, and uses an activity-based costing system to account for the indirect manufacturing costs of its various products. Indirect costs for the whole factory are broken down into three activities casting, materials handling, and milling. The cost driver for casting is machine hours; the cost driver for material handling is kilograms, and the cost driver for milling is direct labor hours. Activity costs and volumes for the year were estimated as follows:
Activity Cost Volume
Casting $2,000,000 800,000.00 Machine hours
Material Handling $400,000 500,000.00 Kilograms
Milling $1,120,000 140,000.00 Direct labor hours
One product is steel reinforcement rods, sold by the metric ton. Engineering reports show that one metric ton of steel reinforcement rods requires $100 of direct materials cost plus $50 of direct labor cost. Producing one metric ton of steel rods also requires 24 machine hours for casting, weighs 1,000 kilograms, and requires 15 direct labor hours.
What is the activity rate for the milling activity
$8.00 per direct labor hr
$4.40 per direct labor hr
$0.13 per direct labor hr
$0.80 per direct labor hr
4. Two main benefits of activity-based costing are more accurate product cost information and more detailed information on costs of activities and the drivers of these costs.
True
False
5. Which of the following statements is CORRECT with respect to variable cost per unit, within the relevant range
It will increase as production decreases.
It will decrease as production decreases.
It will remain the same as production levels change.
It will decrease as production increases.
6. The first step in the activity-based costing system is to identify each activity and its total indirect cost.
True
False
7. Peterson Company has both fixed and variable costs. If the volume doubles, the total variable costs will double.
True
False
8. Activity-based costing systems and traditional costing systems will produce the same results for product cost and profitability, although they use different methods of calculation.
True
False
9. Jurassic Manufacturers produces flooring material. Fixed costs are $5,000 per month. Sales price for one unit of product is $50, and the variable cost per unit is $30. If Jurassic wishes to earn an operating income of $2,000, how many units need to be sold
270
300
320
350
10. The main difference between activity-based costing and traditional costing systems is that activity-based costing uses a separate allocation rate for each activity.
True
False
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Do mental health counselors with doctoral degrees earn a higher yearly income than those with masters degrees 5 years post graduation? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
2. Are patient depression scores different depending on patient s family status: single, married, or married with children? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
3. What are the effects of training group (blue, red or yellow group) and gender on work performance scores? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
4. Taking into consideration SAT scores, is there a difference in the first year GPA for students who have or have not selected a major by the end of the first year? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
5. Is there a relationship between age and hours of sleep? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
7. How much of the variance in annual income can be explained by years of education, and years of experience and which is a better predictor of yearly income? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
8. Is there a relationship between years of education and income? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
9. Does SAT score predict GPA at the end of Freshman year in college? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
10. Is BMI score or time spent exercising a better predictor of physical fitness scores? Provide the IV, DV, Covariate, and best method of analysis. (Points : 6)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Expenses that are closely related to a particular department and can easily be assigned to it during an accounting period are called _ expenses.
a. operating
b. indirect
c. allocated
d. direct
2. In a store with several sales departments, departmentalized accounts would be
used for:
a. sales only.
b. sales, purchases, and merchandise inventory.
c. sales and other income items only.
d.all expense accounts.
3. A department probably would be considered for elimination if it had a:
a. positive contribution margin and a net income from operations.
b. positive contribution margin and a net loss from operations.
c. negative contribution margin and a net loss from operations.
d. net loss, regardless of the contribution margin.
4. The procedure for assigning indirect expenses to departments at the end of
an accounting period is called:
a. valuation.
b. amortization.
c. allocation.
d. distribution.
5. If a segment of business is considered a profit center:
a. it must sell products or services to customers outside the business.
b. both revenue and cost data must be accumulated for the segment.
c. no indirect expenses can be allocated to the segment.
d. only revenue is accumulated for the segment.
6. The contribution margin of a department is the difference between its:
a. net sales and the total expenses.
b. net sales and its cost of goods sold.
c. gross profit on sales and its indirect expenses.
d. gross profit on sales and its direct expenses.
7. A transfer price is the:
a. price for which a company sells its products to customers.
b. price at which goods are moved from one department of a company to another department of the company.
c. basis on which indirect expenses are allocated.
d. price at which a company purchases its products from a supplier.
8. Department B had net sales of $70,000, gross profit on sales of$35,000, total direct expenses of $9,000, and total indirect expenses of $6,000. Department B’s contribution margin is:
a. $20,000.
b. $29,000.
c. $26,000.
d. $35,000.
9. Department A had total sales of $84,000 and Department B had total sales of $36,000. Other Office Expenses, totaling $2,500, are allocated on the basis of total sales. The amount allocated to Department B is:
a. $750.
b. $1,750.
c. $1,250.
d. $1,071.
10. One department in a company had a contribution margin of $15,000 and a net loss from operations of $2,000. The indirect expenses allocated to this department would have been incurred whether or not the department existed. If this department had been eliminated, the company’s reported net income would have been:
a. $2,000 higher.
b. $15,000 lower.
c. $13,000 lower.
d. the same with or without the department.
11. The Balance Sheet of a manufacturing firm will include which account that will NOT be included in the Balance Sheet of a service firm
a. Cash
b. Accounts Payable
c. Prepaid insurance
d. Work in Process Inventory
12. Closing entries for a manufacturing firm include all of the following EXCEPT:
a. transferring all manufacturing cost accounts to Manufacturing Summary
b. transferring all Revenue and Expense account balances to Income Summary
c. closing Manufacturing Summary to Income Summary.
d. closing Income Summary to Net Income
13. Wages paid to the factory maintenance and repair personnel of a manufacturing business are shown:
a.in the Operating Expenses section of the income statement
b.as Direct Labor on the statement of cost goods manufactured.
c. as part of Manufacturing Overhead on the statement cost of goods manufactured.
d. as a part of the Cost of Goods Sold section of the income statement.
14. The manufacturing costs incurred during the year are:
a. shown by the expense accounts such as Wages Expense and Utilities Expense that are listed in the Operating Expenses section of the income statement.
b. shown as Direct Labor, Raw Materials, and Manufacturing Overhead in the Operating Expenses section of the Income statement.
c. used in the computation of cost of goods manufactured.
d. shown in the Cost of Goods Sold section of the income statement.
15. Indirect labor for a manufacturing business includes the wages of:
a. factory repair and maintenance employees.
b. employees who assemble the product.
c. employees who sell the product.
d. office employees.
16. Gross profit for a manufacturing business is computed by deducting:
a. cost of goods sold from net sales.
b. cost of goods manufactured from net sales.
c. the ending finished goods inventory from the total goods available for sale.
d. operating expenses from the costs of goods sold.
17. The three components of total manufacturing cost are:
a. cost of goods manufactured, cost of goods sold, and work in process.
b. raw materials used, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.
c. selling expenses, administrative expenses, and manufacturing overhead.
d. raw materials used, direct labor, and cost of goods sold.
18. The cost of goods manufactured for a fiscal period is reported on:
a. both the statement of cost of goods manufactured and the income statement.
b. both the statement of the cost of goods manufactured and the balance sheet.
c. both the income statement and the balance sheet.
d. the statement of cost of goods manufactured only.
19. The balance sheet of a manufacturing business shows:
a. the finished goods inventory and the cost of goods manufactured.
b. the cost of goods manufactured rather than inventory figures.
c. a single inventory figure-the amount of the finished goods inventory.
d. the raw materials inventory, the work in process inventory, and the finished goods inventory.
20. The Indirect Labor account is closed by crediting it and debiting:
a. Wages Payable.
b. income Summary.
c. Manufacturing Summary.
d. Wages Expense.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. A firm has two plants with cost functions: TCA = qA2 & TCB = 4qB2 It is the only producer of this good in a country with demand for it given by: QD = 104 – 2P
a) If this good cannot be imported or exported, how much will be produced, and how will production be divided between the two plants? What is the price and the firm s profit?
b) Now the good can be exported and sold at a price of $40, but importing is still banned. What is different in the firm s behavior in the foreign versus the domestic market?
How much will the firm produce, how will production be divided between the two plants, and how much will be sold in the two markets? What is the price in the domestic market, and what will be the firm s profit?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1-The following production and cost per EUP data are available for Louvre Corp. for February 2013: Units completed during February 390,000 Units in ending inventory (100% complete as to direct material; 30% Complete as to direct labor; 25% complete as to overload) 55,500 Direct material cost per EUP $7.50 Direct Labor cost per EUP $9.00 Overhead cost per EUP $10.20
a. What is the cost of goods completed during February? b. What is the cost of ending inventory at February 28, 2013? c. What is the cost to account for during February?
2-In October 2013, Manachaca Company had the following production and cost data:
Beginning inventory units (80% complete as the DM; 45% complete as to DL; 42,600 30% complete as to OH) October complete production 1,570,000 Units in ending inventory (35% complete as to DM; 15% complete as to DL; 25% complete as to OH) 28,400 Beginning inventory cost $458,482 October direct material cost per EUD $10.74 October direct labor cost per EUD $13.88 October overhead cost per EUP $24.80
a. What is the cost of the beginning inventory transferred out in October? b. What is the total cost transferred out in October? c. What is the cost of ending inventory at the end of October? d. What is the total cost to account for during October?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The fundamental accounting equation is a reflection of the:
Money measurement concept
Conservatism concept
Dual-aspect concept
Historical cost concept
2. The historical cost concept reflects the fact that financial accounting practice favors:
Reliability over relevance
Management’s best guess over historical financial information
Relevance over reliability
Consensus market values over historical financial information
3. Jon Sports’ inventory account increased from $25,000 on December 31, 2003 to $30,000 on December 31, 2004. Which one of the following items would be included in the operating section of its 2004 indirect method statement of cash flows?
Add increase in inventory $5,000
Subtract increase in inventory ($5,000)
Add inventory balance $20,000
Subtract inventory balance ($20,000)
4. Turnkey Systems, Inc. began the month of June, 2004 with a prepaid expenses balance of $240,000. During the month, debits totaling $110,000 and credits totaling $80,000 were made to the prepaid expenses account. What was the June, 2004 ending balance of prepaid expenses?
A debit balance of $210,000
A credit balance of $210,000
A debit balance of $270,000
A credit balance of $270,000
5. Pentex and Marbro, small companies in the stationery business, each had a dollar gross margin of $20,000 during September 2004. Pentex’s September sales were twice that of Marbro’s. If Pentex’s gross margin as a percentage of sales for September was 10%, Marbro’s gross margin as a percentage of sales for the same period was:
10%
5%
20%
Cannot be calculated
6. When an entity recognizes revenue before it has received cash for the sale, it records an increase in a(n):
assets
liabilities
expenses
none of the above
7. Juan Foods pays off a long-term debt in full. Which one of the following statements describes the effect of the sale on Juan Foods?
Current ratio increases; total debt to equity ratio decreases
Current ratio decreases; total debt to equity ratio decreases
Current ratio decreases; total debt to equity ratio increases
Current ratio increases; total debt to equity ratio increases
8. On January 1, 2005, Mansfield Company has a retained earnings balance of $256,000. During 2005, its net income is $44,000 and it announces and pays $12,000 in dividends. There is no other dividend-related activity during the year. Its December 31, 2005 retained earnings balance is:
$212,000
$288,000
$300,000
$224,000
9. Juan Foods makes a cash sale with a positive gross margin. Which one of the following statements describes the effect of the sale on Juan Foods?
Current ratio increases
Current ratio decreases
No change to Juan Foods’ current ratio
Insufficient information to judge effect on current ratio
10. Juan Foods pays off a long-term debt in full. Which one of the following statements best describes the appropriate book-keeping for this transaction?
Debit cash; credit long-term debt
Debit long-term debt; credit owners’ equity
Debit owners’ equity; credit long-term debt
Debit long-term debt; credit cash
11. On March 31, 2005, Cars, Inc. owes Preston Devices, one of its suppliers, $25,000 for previous purchases. During April 2005, Preston sells Cars devices with a sales price of $10,000 and a cost to Preston of $8,000. During April Cars pays Preston $12,000 against the amount owed to Preston. What is the effect of these April transactions on Preston’s balance sheet?
Cash increased by $12,000; accounts receivable decreased by $2,000; inventory decreased by $8,000; retained earnings increased by $2,000.
Accounts receivable increased by $2,000; inventory decreased by $8,000; cash increased by $12,000; retained earnings increased by $12,000.
Cash increased by $12,000; retained earnings decreased by $2,000; inventory decreased by $10,000; accounts receivable decreased by $12,000.
Cash increased by $2,000; accounts receivable decreased by $2,000; inventory decreased by $8,000; retained earnings decreased by $12,000.
12. Consider the same scenario as in the previous question: On March 31, 2005, Cars, Inc. owes Preston Devices, one of its suppliers, $25,000 for previous purchases. During April 2005, Preston sells Cars devices with a sales price of $10,000 and a cost to Preston of $8,000. During April Cars pays Preston $12,000 against the amount owed to Preston. If Preston had no other sales and records no other collections from customers during the month of April, the operating section of Preston’s indirect method statement of cash flows for April will show the following de-accrual adjustments to net income:
Subtract change in accounts receivable; add change in inventory.
Add change in accounts receivable; subtract change in inventory
Add change in accounts receivable; add change in inventory.
Subtract change in accounts receivable; subtract change in inventory
13. Planet Music buys all of its inventory on credit. During 2005, Planet Music’s inventory account increased by $10,000. Which of the following statements must be true for Planet Music during 2005?
It made payments of less than $10,000 to suppliers.
It made cash payments of $10,000 to suppliers.
It made more cash payments to its suppliers than it recorded as cost of goods sold.
It paid less cash to suppliers than it recorded as cost of goods sold.
14. On December 31, 2005, Juan Foods purchases a van for $12,000. How does the purchase of the van affect Juan Foods’ 2005 income statement?
Decreases sales by $12,000
Increases operating expenses by $12,000
No material effect
Increases cost of goods sold by $12,000
15. To be recorded as a liability, an item must meet three specific conditions. Two of them are: it must involve probable future sacrifice of economic resources by the entity, and it must be a present obligation that arose as a result of a past transaction. Which one of the following is the third condition?
The item must reduce the market value of the recording entity
It must involve a transfer of resources to another entity
It must involve the expenditure of cash now or in the future
It must not cause total liabilities to exceed total assets
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. If there were 20,000 pounds of raw materials on hand on January 1, 45,000 pounds are desired for inventory at January 31, and 295,000 pounds are required for January production, how many pounds of raw materials should be purchased in January?
2. XYZ Company expects the following sales and collection pattern for the first four months of the year:
|
Month
|
Cash Sales
|
Credit Sales
|
Total Sales
|
|
January
|
$12,000
|
$23,000
|
$35,000
|
|
February
|
$8,000
|
$22,000
|
$30,000
|
|
March
|
$9,000
|
$25,000
|
$34,000
|
|
April
|
$11,000
|
$28,000
|
$39,000
|
5% of credit sales are collected in the same month
75% of sales are collected in the following month
15% of sales are collected in the second following month
What are the projected cash collections for the month of March?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. 1. The information below depicts 2013 summary for Match Company. The company has two operations, that is, manufacturing and wholesale. The amounts are in thousands.
Sales revenue $25,000
Cost of goods sold 16,000
Interest revenue 70,000
Selling and administrative expenses 4,700
Goodwill write-off 820
2014 Income taxes 1,244
Gain on sale of investments (This is normal and recurring) 110
Loss due to flood damage, net of tax (This is extraordinary item) 390
Loss on disposition of wholesale division, net of tax 440
Loss on operations of wholesale division, net of tax 90
Match Company has 500,000 shares of common stock outstanding throughout the year. The company decided to discontinue its entire wholesale operations. On August 31, 2013, Match Company sold the wholesale operations to Reed Company.
Required:
Prepare a multi-step income statement and earnings per share for the Match Company.
L 2. Lancaster Inc. s December 31, 2013 balance sheet accounts are copied below:
Cash $20,000
Accounts receivable 21,200
Accounts payable 30,000
Long-term notes payable 41,000
Long-term Investments 32,000
Common stock 100,000
Property, plant, and equipment assets (net of depreciation) 81,000
Retained earnings 23,200
Land 40,000
During 2014, the following transactions occurred. Lancaster Inc.
1. Purchased a tract of land for $18,000 cash.
2. Sold part of its $32,000 investment for $15,000. This transaction resulted in a gain of $3,400. The investment was classified as available-for-sale.
3. Issued additional $20,000 in common stock. The issue was at par.
4. Declared and paid dividends of $8,200 to stockholders.
5. Purchased land through the issuance of $30,000 in bonds.
6. Retired Long-term notes payable with the face value of $16,000. The company paid $16,000 cash.
7. Recorded depreciation expense of $11,000.
Lancaster s Net income for 2014 was $32,000.
Balances on December 31, 2014 are below:
Cash $32,000
Accounts Receivable $41,600
Accounts Payable $30,000
Required:
a. Prepare a statement of cash flows for year ended December 31, 2014. Use the indirect method for cash flows from operating activities.
b. How can users of financial statements utilize statement of cash flows in making informed decisions?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The initial owners of stock of a newly formed corporation are called directors.
2. The paid-in capital from sale of treasury stock account is debited if the sales price of the treasury stock sold is greater than its cost.
3. Bonds of major corporations are traded on bond exchanges.
4. An equal stream of periodic payments is called an annuity.
5. If the amount of a bond premium on an issued 11%, 4-year, $100,000 bond is $12,928, the annual interest expense is $5,500.
6. There is a loss on redemption of bonds when bonds are redeemed above carrying value.
7. Income tax expense reported on the income statement is the total taxes to be paid.
8. Cash, as the term is used for the statement of cash flows, could indicate either cash or cash equivalents.
9. Using the indirect method, if land costing $85,000 was sold for $145,000, the amount reported in the financing activities section of the statement of cash flows would be $85,000.
10. One of the prerequisites to paying a cash dividend is sufficient retained earnings.
11. Cash paid to acquire treasury stock should be shown on the statement of cash flows from investing activities.
12. In the vertical analysis of an income statement, each item is generally stated as a percentage of total assets.
13. If a company’s rate of return on common stockholders’ equity is greater than its rate of return on total assets, the company is effectively using leverage.
14. Generally, all deductions made from an employee’s gross pay are required by law.
15. The main source of paid-in-capital is from issuing stock.
Multiple Choice: 16. The journal entry a company uses to record the payment of a discounted note is a. debit Notes Payable and Interest Expense; credit Cash b. debit Notes Payable; credit Cash c. debit Cash; credit Notes Payable d. debit Accounts Payable; credit Cash
17. An employee receives an hourly rate of $15, with time and a half for all hours worked in excess of 40 during the week. Payroll data for the current week are as follows: hours worked, 48; federal income tax withheld, $120; cumulative earnings for the year prior to this week, $24,500; Social security tax rate, 6% on maximum of $100,000; and Medicare tax rate, 1.5% on all earnings; state unemployment compensation tax, 3.4% on the first $7,000; federal unemployment compensation tax, .8% on the first $7,000. What is the net amount to be paid the employee? a. $568.74 b. $601.50 c. $660.00 d. $574.90
18. The following totals for the month of April were taken from the payroll register of Magnum Company. Salaries $12,000 FICA taxes withheld 550 Income taxes withheld 2,500 Medical insurance deductions 450 Federal Unemployment Taxes 32 State Unemployment Taxes 216
The journal entry to record the monthly payroll on April 30 would include a a. credit to Salaries Payable for $8,500. b. debit to Salaries Expense for $8,500. c. debit to Salaries Payable for $8,500. d. debit to Salaries Payable for $8,252.
19. Elgin Company sells merchandise with a one year warranty. In 2009, sales consisted of 2,500 units. It is estimated that warranty repairs will average $10 per unit sold, and 30% of the repairs will be made in 2009 and 70% in 2010. In the 2009 income statement, Elgin should show warranty expense of a. $7,500 b. $17,500 c. $25,000 d. $0
20. The excess of issue price over par of common stock is termed a(n) a. discount b. income c. deficit d. premium
21. The charter of a corporation provides for the issuance of 100,000 shares of common stock. Assume that 60,000 shares were originally issued and 5,000 were subsequently reacquired. What is the amount of cash dividends to be paid if a $1 per share dividend is declared? a. $60,000 b. $5,000 c. $100,000 d. $55,000
22. The liability for a dividend is recorded on which of the following dates? a. the date of record b. the date of payment c. the date of announcement d. the date of declaration
23. When the market rate of interest was 11%, Munson Corporation issued $1,000,000, 12%, 8-year bonds that pay interest semiannually. The selling price of this bond issue was a. $1,052,310 b. $1,154387 c. $1,000,000 d. $ 720,495
24. A $300,000 bond was redeemed at 103 when the carrying value of the bond was $315,000. The entry to record the redemption would include a a. loss on bond redemption of $6,000. b. gain on bond redemption of $6,000. c. gain on bond redemption of $9,000. d. loss on bond redemption of $9,000.
25. When the effective-interest method is used, the amortization of the bond premium a. increases interest expense each period b. decreases interest expense each period c. increases interest expense in some periods and decreases interest expense in other periods d. has no effect on the interest expense in any period
26. Long-term investments are held for all of the listed reasons below except a. their income b. long-term gain potential c. influence over another business entity
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Is it possible for companies both to maximize financial value and be socially responsible? Explain 2. List the four basic types of financial ratios used to measure a company s performance, give an example of each type of ratio and explain its significance. 3. Name and describe 4 commonly used sources of short-term financing 4. Why is the $1,000 you receive today worth more than $1,000 you receive next year? What concept does this illustrate? Why is this concept particularly important when firms evaluate capital budgeting proposals? 5. Financial statements are prepared using generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP). Who is responsible for establishing these principles, and what goals guide their formulation? Why has GAAP been criticized in recent years? 6. State the accounting equation and define each of its terms. What is the logic behind this equation? 7. Discuss the key differences between financial accounting and managerial accounting
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Linda Blye opened Cardinal Window Washing Inc. on July 1, 2010. During July the following transactions were completed.
July 1 Issued 11,000 shares of common stock for $11,000 cash. 1 Purchased used truck for $9,000, paying $2,000 cash and the balance on account. 3 Purchased cleaning supplies for $900 on account. 5 Paid $1,800 cash on 1-year insurance policy effective July 1. 12 Billed customers $3,200 for cleaning services. 18 Paid $1,000 cash on amount owed on truck and $500 on amount owed on cleaning supplies. 20 Paid $2,000 cash for employee salaries. 21 Collected $1,400 cash from customers billed on July 12. 25 Billed customers $2,500 for cleaning services. 31 Paid $260 for gas and oil used in the truck during month. 31 Declared and paid $600 cash dividend. The chart of accounts for Cardinal Window Washing contains the following accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Cleaning Supplies, Prepaid Insurance, Equipment, Accumulated Depreciation Equipment, Accounts Payable, Salaries Payable, Common Stock, Retained Earnings, Dividends, Income Summary, Service Revenue, Gas & Oil Expense, Cleaning Supplies Expense, Depreciation Expense, Insurance Expense, Salaries Expense. Instructions a. Journalize the July transactions. b. Post to the ledger accounts c. Prepare a trial balance at July 31. d. Journalize the following adjustments. 1. Services provided but unbilled and uncollected at July 31 were $1,700. 2. Depreciation on equipment for the month was $250. 3. One-twelfth of the insurance expired. 4. An inventory count shows $360 of cleaning supplies on hand at July 31. 5. Accrued but unpaid employee salaries were $400. e. Post adjusting entries to the T accounts. f. Prepare an adjusted trial balance. g. Prepare the income statement and a retained earnings statement for July and a classified balance sheet at July 31. h. Journalize and post closing entries and complete the closing process. i. Prepare a post-closing trial balance at July 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
2.(TCO D) Lindon Company uses 4,500 units of Part X each year as a component in the assembly of one of its products. The company is presently producing Part X internally at a total cost of $69,000 as follows:
| Direct materials |
$16,000 |
| Direct labor |
18,000 |
| Variable manufacturing overhead |
10,000 |
| Fixed manufacturing overhead |
25,000 |
| Total costs |
$69,000 |
An outside supplier has offered to provide Part X at a price of $11 per unit. If Lindon stops producing the part internally, one third of the manufacturing overhead would be eliminated.
Required: Prepare a make-or-buy analysis showing the annual advantage or disadvantage of accepting the outside supplier’s offer.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lindon Company uses 5,000 units of Part X each year as a component in the assembly of one of its products. The company is presently producing Part X internally at a total cost of $80,000 as follows:
Direct materials………………………………………..$18,000
Direct labor………………………………………………20,000
Variable manufacturing overhead………………. 12,000
Fixed manufacturing overhead………………….. 30,000
Total costs……………………………………………….80,000
An outside supplier has offered to provide Part X at a price of $13 per unit. If Lindon stops producing the part internally, one third of the manufacturing overhead would be eliminated.
Required: Prepare a make-or-buy analysis showing the annual advantage or disadvantage of accepting the outside supplier’s offer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I have tried these problems and I am not sure if I am doing them right because there is not a whole lot I can follow in the text book that I have from online.
1. Liquidity ratios. Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:
Edison Stagg Thornton
Cash $6,000 $5,000 $4,000
Short-term investments 3,000 2,500 2,000
Accounts receivable 2,000 2,500 3,000
Inventory 1,000 2,500 4,000
Prepaid expenses 800 800 800
Accounts payable 200 200 200
Notes payable: short-term 3,100 3,100 3,100
Accrued payables 300 300 300
Long-term liabilities 3,800 3,800 3,800
a. Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?
2. Computation and evaluation of activity ratios. The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:
20X5 20X4
Net credit sales $832,000 $760,000
Cost of goods sold 530,000 400,000
Cash, Dec. 31 125,000 110,000
Average Accounts receivable 205,000 156,000
Average Inventory 70,000 50,000
Accounts payable, Dec. 31 115,000 108,000
Instructions
a. Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 20X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.
3. Profitability ratios, trading on the equity. Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 20X7:
Net sales $1,750,000
Interest expense 120,000
Income tax expense 80,000
Preferred dividends 25,000
Net income 130,000
Average assets 1,200,000
Average common stockholders’ equity 500,000
a. Compute the profit margin on sales ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.
b. Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly ex plain.
4. Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
20X2 20X1
Current Assets $86,000 $80,000
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net) 99,000 90,000
Intangibles 25,000 50,000
Current Liabilities 40,800 48,000
Long-Term Liabilities 153,000 160,000
Stockholders Equity 16,200 12,000
Net Sales 500,000 500,000
Cost of Goods Sold 322,500 350,000
Operating Expenses 93,500 85,000
a. Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
5.Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
20X2 20X1
Current Assets $86,000 $80,000
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net) 99,000 80,000
Intangibles 25,000 50,000
Current Liabilities 40,800 48,000
Long-Term Liabilities 153,000 150,000
Stockholders Equity 16,200 12,000
Net Sales 500,000 500,000
Cost of Goods Sold 322,500 350,000
Operating Expenses 93,500 85,000
a. Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
6. Ratio computation. The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.
LONE PINE COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)
20X2 20X1
Assets
Current Assets
Cash and Short-Term Investments $400 $600
Accounts Receivable (net) 3,000 2,400
Inventories 3,000 2,300
Total Current Assets $6,400 $5,300
Property, Plant, and Equipment
Land $1,700 $500
Buildings and Equipment (net) 1,500 1,000
Total Property, Plant, and Equipment $3,200 $1,500
Total Assets $9,600 $6,800
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
Current Liabilities
Accounts Payable $2,800 $1,700
Notes Payable 1,100 1,900
Total Current Liabilities $3,900 $3,600
Long-Term Liabilities
Bonds Payable 4,100 2,100
Total Liabilities $8,000 $5,700
Stockholders Equity
Common Stock $200 $200
Retained Earnings 1,400 900
Total Stockholders Equity $1,600 $1,100
Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity $9,600 $6,800
LONE PINE COMPANY
Statement of Income and Retained Earnings
For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)
Net Sales* $36,000
Less: Cost of Goods Sold $20,000
Selling Expense 6,000
Administrative Expense 4,000
Interest Expense 400
Income Tax Expense 2,000 32,400
Net Income $3,600
Retained Earnings, Jan. 1 900
Ending Retained Earnings $4,500
Cash Dividends Declared and Paid 3,100
Retained Earnings, Dec. 31 $1,400
*All sales are on account.
Instructions
Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calcu lations to two decimal places when necessary:
a. Quick ratio
b. Current ratio
c. Inventory-turnover ratio
d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio
e.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assessing Roche Publishing Company s
Cash Management Efficiency
Lisa Pinto, vice president of finance at Roche Publishing Company, a rapidly growing
publisher of college texts, is concerned about the firm s high level of short-term
resource investment. She believes that the firm can improve the management of its
cash and, as a result, reduce this investment. In this regard, she charged Arlene
Bessenoff, the treasurer, with assessing the firm s cash management efficiency. Arlene
decided to begin her investigation by studying the firm s operating and cash conversion
cycles.
Arlene found that Roche s average payment period was 25 days. She consulted
industry data, which showed that the average payment period for the industry was 40
days. Investigation of three similar publishing companies revealed that their average
payment period was also 40 days. She estimated the annual cost of achieving a 40-day
payment period to be $53,000.
Next, Arlene studied the production cycle and inventory policies. The average
age of inventory was 120 days. She determined that the industry standard as reported
in a survey done by Publishing World, the trade association journal, was 85 days. She
estimated the annual cost of achieving an 85-day average age of inventory to be
$150,000.
Further analysis showed Arlene that the firm s average collection period was 60
days. The industry average, derived from the trade association data and information
on three similar publishing companies, was found to be 42 days 30% lower than
Roche s. Arlene estimated that if Roche initiated a 2% cash discount for payment
within 10 days of the beginning of the credit period, the firm s average collection
period would drop from 60 days to the 42-day industry average. She also expected
the following to occur as a result of the discount: Annual sales would increase from
$13,750,000 to $15,000,000; bad debts would remain unchanged; and the 2% cash
discount would be applied to 75% of the firm s sales. The firm s variable costs equal
80% of sales.
Roche Publishing Company is currently spending $12,000,000 per year on its
operating-cycle investment, but it expects that initiating a cash discount will increase
its operating-cycle investment to $13,100,000 per year. (Note: The operating-cycle
investment per dollar of inventory, receivables, and payables is assumed to be the
same.) Arlene s concern was whether the firm s cash management was as efficient as it
could be. Arlene knew that the company paid 12% annual interest for its resource
investment and therefore viewed this value as the firm s required return. For this
reason, she was concerned about the resource investment cost resulting from any inefficiencies
in the management of Roche s cash conversion cycle. (Note: Assume a 365-
day year.)
To Do
a. Assuming a constant rate for purchases, production, and sales throughout the
year, what are Roche s existing operating cycle (OC), cash conversion cycle
(CCC), and resource investment need?
b. If Roche can optimize operations according to industry standards, what would
its operating cycle (OC), cash conversion cycle (CCC), and resource investment
need be under these more efficient conditions?
c. In terms of resource investment requirements, what is the annual cost of Roche s
operational inefficiency?
d. Evaluate whether Roche s strategy for speeding its collection of accounts receivable
would be acceptable. What annual net profit or loss would result from
implementation of the cash discount?
e. Use your finding in part d, along with the payables and inventory costs given,
to determine the total annual cost the firm would incur to achieve the industry
level of operational efficiency.
f. Judging on the basis of your findings in parts c and e, should the firm incur the
annual cost to achieve the industry level of operational efficiency? Explain why
or why not.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The list of accounts below and the unadjusted balances of these accounts were taken from the ledger of the Manville Corporation at the end of their accounting period, March 31, 20X2:
Cash $ 3,995
Accounts Receivable 13,240
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 120
Inventory’April 1, 20X1 22,800
Prepaid Insurance 360
Supplies on Hand 520
Equipment 15,000
Accumulated Depreciation’Equipment 4,500
Accounts Payable 11,870
Taxes Payable 390
Capital Stock 25,000
Retained Earnings 11,920
Dividends 9,000
Sales 89,490
Sales Returns and Allowances 920
Sales Discounts 1,330
Purchases 56,320
Purchase Returns and Allowances 490
Purchase Discounts 1,125
Transportation-In 880
Sales Salaries 11,800
Rent Expense 3,600
Advertising Expense 2,700
Utilities Expense 1,880
Maintenance Expense 560
Additional data:
A. Merchandise inventory at March 31, 20X2, was $23,300.
B. The Allowance for Doubtful Accounts should be increased by $600.
C. Prepaid insurance represents a three-year policy purchased April 1, 20X1.
D. Supplies on hand were estimated to be $170 on March 31, 20X2.
E. The cost of the equipment is being depreciated over a 15-year estimated life using
The straight-line method. Salvage value should be ignored.
F. Unpaid sales salaries on March 31, 20X2, amounted to $200.
1. Prepare a worksheet
2. Prepare an income statement
3. Prepare a statement of retained earnings
4. Prepare a balance sheet
5. Prepare the closing entries
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Listed below are some information, characteristics, and accounting principles and assumptions. Match the letter of each with the appropriate phrase that states its application.
Potential Matches:
1 : Economic activity can be identified with a particular unit of accountability
2 : Affairs of the business distinguished from those of its owners
3 : Application of the same accounting principles as in the preceding year
4 : Business enterprise assumed to have a long life
5 : Presentation of error-free information with representational faithfulness
6 : Notes as part of necessary information to a fair presentation
7 : Money is the common denominator of economic activity and provides an appropriate basis for accounting measurement and analysis
8 : Earnings process completed and realized or realizable
9 : Valuing assets at amounts originally paid for them
10 : Implies that a company can divide its economic activities into artificial time periods
Choices Answer
: Consistency characteristic
: Historical cost principle
: Going concern principle
: Periodicity assumption
: Reliability characteristic
: Economic entity assumption
: Monetary unit assumption
: Revenue recognition principle
: Full disclosure principle
: Economic entity assumption
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
) Listed below are some information, characteristics, and accounting principles and assumptions. Match the letter of each with the appropriate phrase that states its application.
(Points : 30)
| Potential Matches: |
| 1 : Economic activity can be identified with a particular unit of accountability |
| 2 : Affairs of the business distinguished from those of its owners |
| 3 : Application of the same accounting principles as in the preceding year |
| 4 : Business enterprise assumed to have a long life |
| 5 : Presentation of error-free information with representational faithfulness |
| 6 : Notes as part of necessary information to a fair presentation |
| 7 : Money is the common denominator of economic activity and provides an appropriate basis for accounting measurement and analysis |
| 8 : Earnings process completed and realized or realizable |
| 9 : Valuing assets at amounts originally paid for them |
|
10 : Implies that a company can divide its economic activities into artificial time periods
| Answer |
| : Consistency characteristic |
| : Historical cost principle |
| : Going concern principle |
| : Periodicity assumption |
| : Reliability characteristic |
| : Economic entity assumption |
| : Monetary unit assumption |
| : Revenue recognition principle |
| : Full disclosure principle |
| : Economic entity assumption |
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| LoBianco Company’s record of transactions for the month of April was as follows. |
| Purchases |
|
Sales |
|
|
|
|
| April 1 (Balance on hand) |
|
|
|
|
|
| 744 |
@ |
6 |
620 |
@ |
9 |
|
|
| 1860 |
@ |
6.3 |
1612 |
@ |
9 |
|
|
| 992 |
@ |
6.5 |
744 |
@ |
11 |
|
|
| 1488 |
@ |
6.8 |
1488 |
@ |
11 |
|
|
| 868 |
@ |
6.9 |
1116 |
@ |
13 |
|
|
| 620 |
@ |
7.3 |
|
|
|
|
|
| 5,300 |
|
|
5,580 |
|
|
|
|
LoBianco Company’s record of transactions for the month of April was as follows. |
| Purchases |
|
Sales |
|
|
|
|
| April 1 (Balance on hand) |
|
|
|
|
|
| 744 |
@ |
6 |
620 |
@ |
9 |
|
|
| 1860 |
@ |
6.3 |
1612 |
@ |
9 |
|
|
| 992 |
@ |
6.5 |
744 |
@ |
11 |
|
|
| 1488 |
@ |
6.8 |
1488 |
@ |
11 |
|
|
| 868 |
@ |
6.9 |
1116 |
@ |
13 |
|
|
| 620 |
@ |
7.3 |
|
|
|
|
|
| 5,300 |
|
|
5,580 |
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
LoBianco Company’s record of transactions for the month of April was as follows.
Purchases Sales
April 1 (Balance on hand) 600 @ $6.00 April 3 500 @ $10.00
April 4 1,500 @ $6.08 April 9 1,300 @ $10.00
April 8 800 @ $6.40 April 11 600 @ $11.00
April 13 1,200 @ $6.50 April 23 1,200 @ $11.00
April 21 700 @ $6.60 April 27 900@ $12.00
April 29 500 @ $6.79
5,300 4,500
(a) Assuming that periodic inventory records are kept in units only, compute the inventory at April 30 using (1) LIFO and (2) average cost.
LIFO $
Average Cost $
(b) Assuming that perpetual inventory records are kept in dollars, determine the inventory using (1) FIFO and (2) LIFO.
FIFO $
LIFO $
(c) Compute cost of goods sold assuming periodic inventory procedures and inventory priced at FIFO.
Cost of goods sold $
(d) In an inflationary period, which inventory method FIFO, LIFO, average cost will show the highest net income?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.
Lobo Corporation was organized on january1, 2010. During its first year, the corporation issued60,000 shares of $12 par value preferred stock and 400,000 shares of $3 par value common stock. No dividends were declared in 2010, but dividends were declared on December 31 for the next three years as follows:
|
Year Dividend
|
|
2011 45,000
|
|
2012 55,000
|
|
2013 65,000
|
Instructions
(a)
Show the allocation of dividends to each class of stock, assuming the preferred stock dividend is 7% and cumulative.
(b)Journalize the declaration of the cash dividend at December 31, 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
A six-column table for JKL Company follows. The first two columns contain the unadjusted trial balance for the company as of July 31, 2013. The last two columns contain the adjusted trial balance as of the same date.
|
|
Unadjusted Trial Balance |
|
Adjusted Trial Balance |
| Cash |
$ |
44,000 |
|
|
|
$ |
44,000 |
|
|
| Accounts receivable |
|
15,000 |
|
|
|
|
24,000 |
|
|
| Office supplies |
|
21,000 |
|
|
|
|
3,000 |
|
|
| Prepaid insurance |
|
10,040 |
|
|
|
|
3,460 |
|
|
| Office equipment |
|
94,000 |
|
|
|
|
94,000 |
|
|
| Accum. Depreciation Office equip. |
|
|
$ |
16,000 |
|
|
|
$ |
23,000 |
| Accounts payable |
|
|
|
9,600 |
|
|
|
|
11,000 |
| Interest payable |
|
|
|
0 |
|
|
|
|
1,000 |
| Salaries payable |
|
|
|
0 |
|
|
|
|
9,000 |
| Unearned consulting fees |
|
|
|
20,000 |
|
|
|
|
16,000 |
| Long-term notes payable |
|
|
|
62,000 |
|
|
|
|
62,000 |
| Common stock |
|
|
|
15,000 |
|
|
|
|
15,000 |
| Retained earnings |
|
|
|
30,000 |
|
|
|
|
30,000 |
| Dividends |
|
6,000 |
|
|
|
|
6,000 |
|
|
| Consulting fees earned |
|
|
|
148,740 |
|
|
|
|
161,740 |
| Depreciation expense Office equip. |
|
0 |
|
|
|
|
7,000 |
|
|
| Salaries expense |
|
81,000 |
|
|
|
|
90,000 |
|
|
| Interest expense |
|
2,200 |
|
|
|
|
3,200 |
|
|
| Insurance expense |
|
0 |
|
|
|
|
6,580 |
|
|
| Rent expense |
|
15,500 |
|
|
|
|
15,500 |
|
|
| Office supplies expense |
|
0 |
|
|
|
|
18,000 |
|
|
| Advertising expense |
|
12,600
|
|
|
|
|
14,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Totals |
$ |
301,340 |
$ |
301,340 |
|
$ |
328,740 |
$ |
328,740 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
eBookLearning Objective 1 Problem-Solving StrategyProblem-Solving Strategy 4
Problem 24-4 (Algorithmic)
Differential Analysis for Further Processing
The management of Jamaican Sugar Company is considering whether to process further raw sugar into refined sugar. Refined sugar can be sold for $2.17 per pound, and raw sugar can be sold without further processing for $1.22 per pound. Raw sugar is produced in batches of 43,200 pounds by processing 108,000 pounds of sugar cane, which costs $0.30 per pound of cane. Refined sugar will require additional processing costs of $0.46 per pound of raw sugar, and 1.2 pounds of raw sugar will produce 1 pound of refined sugar.
Required:
|
1. Prepare a differential analysis as of January 30, 2012, to determine whether to sell raw sugar (Alternative 1) or process further into refined sugar (Alternative 2). If required, do not round interim calculations.
|
|
| Sell Raw Sugar (Alt. 1) or Process Further into Refined Sugar (Alt. 2) |
|
|
|
|
|
| Sell Raw Sugar (Alternative 1) |
|
|
| Process Further into Refined Sugar (Alternative 2) |
|
|
| Differential Effect on Income (Alternative 2) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Texas Company produces one product that it sells for $50 per unit. In producing that product, Texas Company incurs variable costs of $35 per unit and fixed costs of $400,000. How many units of the product will Texas Company have to produce and sell to earn a profit of $42,000? (Be sure round up.)
2.Alabama Corporation and California Corporation have the same sales and profits as follows:
Alabama California
Sales $1,000,000 $1,000,000
Variable Costs 600,000 400,000
Contribution Margin 400,000 600,000
Fixed Costs 200,000 400,000
Profit 200,000 200,000
Using an operating leverage analysis, determine how much profits would increase for each company if each experienced a 10% increase in sales.3. Virginia, LLC, sells its product for $20 and incurs variable costs in producing that product of $8 per unit and total fixed costs of $10,000. Using the contribution margin ratio approach, calculate the number of units of the product that Virginia, LLC must sell to generate a profit of $14,400.4.Arkansas Company provided the following information at the end of 2010:
Beginning balance in Work-In-Progress $300,000
Ending balance in Work-In-Progress 350,000
Beginning balance in Finished Goods 400,000
Ending balance in Finished Goods 350,000
Direct materials costs 1,000,000
Direct labor costs 2,000,000
Manufacturing overhead 2,000,000
Selling expenses 300,000
General and administrative expenses 200,000
Sales 8,000,000
Prepare an income statement for fiscal year 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Cody Macedo established an insurance agency on January 1 of the current year and completed the following transactions during January: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| (a) |
Opened a business bank account with a deposit of $75,000 in exchange for capital stock. |
| (b) |
Purchased supplies on account, $3,000. |
| (c) |
Paid creditors for account, $1,000. |
| (d) |
Received cash from fees earned on insurance commissions, $11,800. |
| (e) |
Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $4,000. |
| (f) |
Paid automobile expenses for month, $600, and miscellaneous expenses, $200. |
| (g) |
Paid office salaries, $2,500. |
| (h) |
Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $1,900; therefore, the cost of supplies used during the month was $1,100. |
| (i) |
Billed insurance companies for sales commissions earned, $12,500. |
| (j) |
Paid dividends, $5,000. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| To Do: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 1 |
In tabular form, indicate the effect each transaction has on the accounts. Calculate the balance of each account after all the transactions have been entered. |
| 2 |
Using the account balances at the end of the month, prove the accounting equation is in balance. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Use the prepared forms on the Worksheet (click on the tab below) to complete each of the exercises described here. |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is available for Carter Corporation for 2012:
1) Materials inventory decreased $4,000 during 2012.
2) Materials inventory on December 31, 2012, was 50% of materials inventory on January 1, 2012.
3) Beginning work in process inventory was $145,000.
4) Ending finished goods inventory was $65,000.
5) Purchases of direct materials were $154,700.
6) Direct materials used were 2.5 times the cost of direct labor.
7) Total manufacturing costs incurred were $246,400, 80% of cost of goods manufactured and $156,000 less than cost of goods sold.
Compute:
a) finished goods inventory on January 1, 2012
b) work in process inventory on December 31, 2012
c) direct labor incurred
d) factory overhead incurred
e) direct materials used
f) materials inventory on January 1, 2012
g) materials inventory on December 31, 2012
Note to students: The answers are not necessarily calculated in alphabetical order.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
New Century Financial Corp., formed in 1995, was a large mortgage lender in the United States. Many of these mortgages were securitized and transferred to investors. New Century accounted for the proceeds of these securitizations as sales. However, New Century committed to buy back mortgages that became troubled within up to a year after transfer.
New Century would retain some mortgages for itself (called retained interests), from which it would receive future cash flows. Also, the transfer agreements included the right to service the mortgages, for which New Century charged a fee. New Century valued these retained interests and servicing rights at current value, based on their discounted expected future cash flows. Thus, revenue from retained interests was recognized at the time of retention, and servicing revenue was recognized at the time of mortgage transfer. These policies required numerous estimates, as compared to a more conservative policy of recognizing revenues as cash flows (when retained interests were received and when servicing responsibilities were rendered).
The company s share price increased dramatically, to a high of US$64 in 2004. Its reported net income reached $1.4 billion in 2005.
However, New Century seriously underestimated the extent of its mortgage buybacks and resulting credit losses. Of $40 billion of mortgages granted in the first three quarters of 2006, it provided only $13.9 million for buybacks. Investor concerns about increasing buybacks rose in 2006 as the 2007 2008 market meltdowns approached. These buyback concerns added to concerns about early revenue recognition from retained interests and servicing. Also, the company failed to write down its retained interests as the current value of the underlying mortgages decreased.
New Century was soon unable to borrow money to finance mortgage buybacks. Its shares lost 90% of their value, and the company was delisted from the New York Stock Exchange. In April 2007, it filed for bankruptcy protection.
New Century s auditor (KPMG) was drawn into the lawsuits that followed. KPMG denied liability, claiming that the provisions for buybacks were deemed adequate at the time and blaming New Century s failure on the market meltdowns of 2007 2008. In December 2009, the SEC filed civil fraud charges against three former executives of New Century, seeking damages and return of bonuses. Several other lawsuits followed. In November 2010, financial media reported final settlement of a class action lawsuit that included a payment of over $65 million by former company officers and directors, and a payment of $44.75 million by auditor KPMG.
Required:
- Use the concept of relevance to defend New Century s policy of recognizing revenue as it securitized and sold mortgages. What was the policy s major weakness? (5 marks)
- Outline a more conservative accounting policy for New Century s mortgage sale transactions. Consider both statement of financial position and net income effects of your policy. (Hint: Read Theory in Practice 8.3, textbook, p. 314.) (4 marks)
- Use two characteristics of investor behaviour based on psychology to explain the rapid rise in New Century s share price. Be sure to identify the specific behavioural characteristics you draw on in your answer. (8 marks)
- Despite your answer in part (c), is the rapid rise in New Century s share price necessarily inconsistent with (semi-strong) securities market efficiency? Explain. (4 marks)
- Note that retained interests meet the definition of a financial instrument. How would these financial instruments be accounted for under IAS 39? (4 marks)
Question 2 (25 marks)
Efficient securities market theory has long been under attack from behavioural finance, which draws on behavioural theories of investor behaviour to explain why security prices do not always behave as the economic theories of rational investing and market efficiency predict. These attacks have increased since the 2007 2008 security market meltdowns.
Required:
- Explain why prospect theory predicts that security prices will differ from their prices under efficient security markets theory. (8 marks)
- Describe two accounting-related efficient securities market anomalies and explain why each is an anomaly. (8 marks)
- The efficient securities market anomalies suggest that investors underreact to the full information content of financial statements. Choose one behavioural theory that predicts this underreaction and explain why it predicts underreaction. (4 marks)
- Should accountants be concerned that the importance of financial reporting may decline if behaviourally biased investors do not use all the information in the financial statements? Explain. (5 marks)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1 (7 marks)
The following are independent statements concerning certain auditing issues.
Required
Indicate whether you agree or disagree with each statement, and explain your reasoning.
-
Each of the following changes (considered independently and holding other things constant) can be expected to decrease the level of detection risk associated with the auditor s substantive tests: (1 mark)
1. decreasing materiality
2. increasing inherent risk
3. decreasing audit risk
-
An auditor was appointed to the audit of BID Inc. (BID) subsequent to BID s year-end date. BID is in the business of providing IT consulting services and is also a computer equipment reseller. BID only orders inventory from the manufacturer once a customer has placed an order. This allows for BID to have low levels of inventory. As a result of being appointed to the audit subsequent to year end, the auditor was unable to attend the year-end inventory count and could not obtain sufficient and appropriate audit evidence for the inventory balance. In this circumstance the auditor should issue a qualified opinion due to a scope limitation and the audit report should set out the nature of the qualification in the auditor s responsibility paragraphs. (1 mark)
-
When the auditor s preliminary assessment of control risk is that the control risk is low to medium and the auditor plans to place some reliance on the operating effectiveness of the controls to reduce the amount of substantive testing, the sample size required in testing the effectiveness of the controls should be larger since control risk is lower. (1 mark)
-
Auditors perform analytical procedures on the draft financial statements at the planning stage of the audit looking for relationships that do not make sense, as these may indicate problem areas where there may be material misstatements. (1 mark)
-
In audit and review engagements, an assessment of the CGA s independence from the entity is required, whereas in compilation engagements the assessment is not required. (1 mark)
-
The auditor will decide on the nature, extent, and timing of the audit evidence to be obtained and evaluated. An auditor must obtain the best available evidence with the consideration of cost. (1 mark)
-
The auditor, in an audit using a combined approach, will rely on the client s internal controls. It is the auditor s responsibility to develop and implement effective controls. (1 mark)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
2000 words
International accounting standards are unusable from an investor s viewpoint and make global allocation of capital more complex instead of simplifying it . Chief financialofficers at large listed entities say. Millions of dollars have been spent adopting international financial reporting standards to help investors make like-for-like comparisons between companies inglobal capital markets. But CFO s say they are useless and have driven financial disclosuresto unmanageable levels…… Investors don t openthe 60-70 pages of IFRS account, theyrely on investor reports and management briefing to understand a company s numbers……. The criticism comes as the United States, the world s largest capital market, decideswhether to retire its domestic accounting standard (US GAAP) and adopt IFRS .Australian Financial Review, 6/2/2012.
In the light of the above statement;
-
Describe the IASBConceptual Framework s perspective of users and their decisions.
-
Which qualitative characteristics of financial reporting, as per the IASB Conceptual
Framework, appear not to be satisfied by current reporting practices as per IFRS.
-
In your opinion, do corporate financial reports satisfy the central objective of financial
reporting as identified in the Conceptual Framework? Discuss and give example to support your opinion.Assessment criteria
|
2000 words max.
|
Excellent (HD)
|
Very Good (D)
|
Good (C)
|
Satisfactory (P)
|
Unsatisfactory (F)
|
|
1. Introduction (10)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2. Body/Discussion (40)Criticalevaluation of topic
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3. Recommendation/s (10) Conclusion (5)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4. Examples (10)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
6. Referencing, citations (5)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
7. Evidence of reading, quality and quantity (10)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8. English expression, coherence, grammar and spelling. Logical flow of ideas
|
APA referencing |
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
One client had indicated that they were interested in purchasing $45,500 worth of products, so the bookkeeper recorded the transaction. However, the client has not actually committed to the purchase.
The bookkeeper already corrected the sales account. However, the bookkeeper may have made a mistake when computing cost of goods sold. She included total production costs for 2012 and did not adjust ending inventory for the $45,500 worth of units left at the end of the year. The amount of ending inventory was determined using a physical count.
|
Smith Company
|
|
31-Dec-12
|
|
Trial Balance (accounts in alphabetical order)
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
67,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
24,500
|
|
|
Cash
|
30,000
|
|
|
Common stock
|
|
10,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
24,350
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
234,000
|
|
|
Equipment (net of depreciation)
|
316,000
|
|
|
Insurance
|
1,400
|
|
|
Inventory
|
25,000
|
|
|
Long-term debt
|
|
145,000
|
|
Marketing
|
4,500
|
|
|
Paid-in capital
|
|
90,000
|
|
Property taxes
|
8,900
|
|
|
Rent
|
18,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
|
|
Revenues
|
|
406,000
|
|
Salaries
|
67,500
|
|
|
Utilities
|
6,700
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total
|
760,850
|
718,000
|
Required
Prepare an income statement for the company in good format. Also, explain the adjustments separately. Always include the name of the company and the period covered in the title. Don’t forget dollar signs where appropriate. You do not need to include the balance sheet. Consequently, you will not need all the accounts listed above. How does the income or loss compare to the original income statement? Explain the importance of the matching concept
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kip Bowman is owner and sole employee of KB Corporation. He pays himself a salary of $1,500 each week. Additional tax information includes: FICA tax OASDI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2% on first $110,100 (6.2% employer) FICA tax HI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.45% on total pay Federal income tax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $232.00 per pay State income tax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22% of the federal income tax withholding Federal unemployment tax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.6% on first $7,000 State unemployment tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.05% on first $14,000 Additional payroll deductions include: 401(k) plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3% per pay Child support garnishment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $100 per pay Health insurance premium. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $95 per pay Record the payroll entry and payroll tax entry for the pay of the week ended June 7 (his year-to-date pay is $31,500). JOURNAL DATE DESCRIPTION
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Kristopher Manufacturing produces two types of entry doors: Deluxe and Standard. The allocation basis for support costs has been direct labor dollars. For 2009, Kristopher compiled the following data for the two products:
|
|
|
Deluxe
|
|
Standard
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sales in units
|
|
50,000
|
|
400,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sales price per unit
|
|
$650
|
|
$475
|
|
Direct material and labor costs per unit
|
|
$180
|
|
$130
|
|
Manufacturing overhead costs per unit
|
|
$80
|
|
$120
|
Last year, Kristopher purchased an expensive robotics system to allow for more decorative door products in the deluxe product line. The CFO suggested that an activity-based costing (ABC) analysis could be valuable to help evaluate a product mix and promotion strategy for the next sales campaign. She obtained the following ABC information for 2009:
|
Activity
|
|
Cost
|
|
Cost Driver
|
|
Total
|
|
Deluxe
|
|
Standard
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Setups
|
|
$500,000
|
|
# of setups
|
|
500
|
|
400
|
|
100
|
|
Machine-related
|
|
$44,000,000
|
|
# of machine hours
|
|
600,000
|
|
300,000
|
|
300,000
|
|
Packing
|
|
$5,000,000
|
|
# of shipments
|
|
250,000
|
|
50,000
|
|
200,000
|
Required (15 points):
a. Using the current system, what is the estimated
1. total cost of manufacturing one unit for each type of door?
2. profit per unit for each type of door?
b. Using the activity-based costing data presented above,
1. compute the cost-driver rate for each overhead activity.
2. compute the revised manufacturing overhead cost per unit for each type of entry door.
3. compute the revised total cost to manufacture one unit of each type of entry door.
4. compute the profit per unit for each type of door.
c. Is the deluxe door as profitable as the original data estimated Why or why not?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
La Famiglia Pizzeria provided the following information for the month of October:
- Sales are budgeted to be $157,000. About 85 percent of sales are cash; the remainder are on account.
- La Famiglia expects that, on average, 70 percent of credit sales will be paid in the month of sale, and 28 percent will be paid in the following month.
- Food and supplies purchases, all on account, are expected to be $116,000. La Famiglia pays 25 percent in the month of purchase and 75 percent in the month following purchase.
- Most of the work is done by the owners, who typically withdraw $6,000 a month from the business as their salary. (Note: The $6,000 is a payment in total to the two owners, not per person.) Various part-time workers cost $7,300 per month. They are paid for their work weekly, so on average 90 percent of their wages are paid in the month incurred and the remaining 10 percent in the next month.
- Utilities average $5,950 per month. Rent on the building is $4,100 per month.
- Insurance is paid quarterly; the next payment of $1,200 is due in October.
- September sales were $181,500 and purchases of food and supplies in September equaled $130,000.
- The cash balance on October 1 is $2,147.
If required, round to the nearest dollar.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The fiscal year ends December 31 for Lake Hamilton Development. To provide funding for its Moonlight Bay project, LHD issued 5% bonds with a face amount of $500,000 on November 1, 2013. The bonds sold for $442,215, a price to yield the market rate of 6%. The bonds mature October 31, 2033 (20 years). Interest is paid semiannually on April 30 and October 31.
1.
What amount of interest expense related to the bonds will LHD report in its income statement for the year ending December 31, 2013? (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to the nearest dollar amount.)
Interest expense $
2.
What amount(s) related to the bonds will LHD report in its balance sheet at December 31, 2013? (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount.)
Bonds payable $
Interest payable $
3.
What amount of interest expense related to the bonds will LHD report in its income statement for the year ending December 31, 2014? (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to the nearest dollar amount.)
Interest expense $
4.
What amount(s) related to the bonds will LHD report in its balance sheet at December 31, 2014? (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount.)
Bonds payable $
Interest payable $
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.
Lala corporation has the following stockholders’ equity accounts on january1, 2013:
|
Commonstock,$10 par value $6,800,000
|
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par 400,000
|
|
Retained earnings
Total stockholders equity
|
620,000
|
|
$7,820,000
|
The company uses the cost method to account for treasury stock transactions. During 2013, the following treasury stock transactions occurred:
March 1Purchased 36,000 shares at $36 per share.
July1 Sold 10,000 sharesat$39 per share.
Sept1 Sold 9,500 sharesat$32 per share.
Instructions
Journalize the treasury stock transactions for 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Create & name a file with the following format: LastNameFirstNameWeek3.java.
Example:The instructor would create a file with the following name: DeweyKenWeek3.java
Proper coding conventions required the first letter of the class start with a capital letter and the first letter of each additional word start with a capital letter.
Only submit the.java file needed to make your program run.
|
5%
|
|
LastNameFirstNameWeek3.java
-
- Use the Scanner class to accept input from the user.
-
- Prompt the user for their first name, last name, and age each individually.
-
- Use string concatenation to obtain the user s full name.
-
- Use equals() and If their first and last name are the same print: Hello First Last, your first and last name are the same
-
- If your first and last name are different, print: Hello First Last, your first and last name are different
-
- Print the length of their first name and of their full name.
-
- Use the charAt() method of the String class to find the user s initials. Print these, followed by their ASCII value, in tabular format (see example)
-
- Print out the name per example below.
-
- Using an increment operator, increase the age by one output per example below. Do not create a new variable
-
- Using compound assignment operators, increase the age by 4 more and output the new age. Do not create a new variable.
|
90%
|
|
Upload your document to the Dropbox.
NOTE: Complete your activity and submit it to the Dropbox.
If needed, click on the Help button above for more information on Course Tools/Using the Dropbox.
|
5%
|
|
Total
|
100%
|
|
Example 1
Please enter your first name: Ken
Please enter your last name: Ken
Please enter your age in years: 48
Hello Ken Ken, your first and last name are the same
The length of your first name is: 3
The length of your full name is: 6
Inits ASCII Value
K 75
K 75
You are now 48 years old.
In one year you will be 49.
In five years you will be 53.
Example 2
Please enter your first name: Ken
Please enter your last name: Dewey
Please enter your age in years: 48
Hello Ken Dewey, your first and last name are different
The length of your first name is: 3
The length of your full name is: 8
Inits ASCII Value
K 75
D 68
You are now 48 years old.
In one year you will be 49.
In five years you will be 53.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The following information was made available from the income statement and balance sheet of Lauren Company.
Item 12/31/10 12/31/09
Accounts Receivable $53,400 58,600
Accounts Payable 35,600 32,700
Merchandise Inventory 85,000 79,000
Sales (2010) 243,000
Interest Revenue (2010) 5,600
Dividend Revenue (2010) 1,200
Tax Expense (2010) 12,300
Salaries Expense (2010) 28,000
COGS (2010) 65,000
Interest Expense (2010) 3,600
Operating Expenses 28,500
Complete the cash flow from operating activities section for Lauren Company using the direct method for the year ended December 31, 2010.
2. Given the following balance sheet, complete a horizontal analysis. Compute the percentage to the nearest tenth of a percent.
Jill s Bikes
Comparative Balance Sheet
For Years Ended December 31, 2011 and 2010
(in thousands) 2011 2010 Difference Percentage
Assets
Current Assets
Cash and Equivalents $72 $94
Accounts Receivable, net 122 104
Inventory 288 232
Total Current Assets 482 430
Property, Plant and Equipment 638 358
Total Assets $1,120 $788
Liabilities
Current Liabilities
Accounts Payable $242 $148
Accrued Liabilities 48 66
Total Current Liabilities 290 214
Long-Term Liabilities 346 208
Total Liabilities 636 422
Stockholders Equity
Common Stock 70 60
Retained Earnings 414 306
Total Stockholders Equity 484 366
Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity $1,120 $788
Part B: Answer each of the following questions. Each answer is worth 4 points.
1. Record the following transactions using the accounting equation.
Example:
Assets = Liabilities + Equity
XXXX(cash) XXXX(accounts payable)
A. Amanda invests $17,000 cash into her merchandising business.
B. She buys $6,500 of office equipment and $3,000 of office supplies with cash from Office Depot.
C. Additional purchases were supplies for $35,000 on account from various suppliers.
2. Journalize the following transactions and omit the explanations.
A. ABC Corporation purchased $15,000 of office furniture by putting $7,000 down in cash and the rest on account on
April 8.
B. The corporation paid $60,000 for a two-year lease on April 19.
C. The corporation had sales of $45,000, of which $35,000 were on account on April 20.
D. The corporation borrowed $25,000 by signing a note payable on April 22.
E. The corporation paid $1,250 on one of its accounts payable on April 26.
3. Prepare a trial balance from the following information for Learn a New Language, Inc. for December 31, 2012.
Accounts payable $5,012
Common stock $9,692
Cash $3,928
Notes payable $1,439
Wages expense $777
Marketing expense $493
Equipment $8,345
Accounts receivable $1,142
Inventory $8,074
Sales $6,616
4. Compute the missing information from this post-closing trial balance.
Cash $34,689
Accounts Receivable 9,467
Prepaid Rent 5,000
Prepaid Insurance (A)
Supplies 944
Accounts Payable $5,389
Wages Payable (B)
Common Stock 37,049
Retained Earnings 8,234
______ _______
Total $52,356 $52,356
5. Journalize the following transactions using the perpetual inventory method.
Aug. 6 Purchased $830 of inventory on account from Johnston with terms of 2/10, n/30.
Aug. 8 Purchased $2,611 of inventory for cash from Pillner Company.
Aug.15 Paid for August 6 purchase from Johnston.
Aug. 17 Purchased $1,743 of merchandise on account from Luis Company with Terms of 3/15, n/45.
6. Given the following information, prepare a balance sheet for Isaiah s Tool Shed for the year ending December 31, 2012.
Cash $65,750 Retained Earnings $179,319
Common Stock $35,000 Equipment $27,500
Accounts Receivable $11,478 Accounts Payable $29,450
Land $30,000 Inventory $78,311
Prepaid Supplies $7,357 Income Taxes Payable $4,209
Office Computers $11,345 Other PPE $31,446
Accum. Depr. (all) $23,459 Prepaid Insurance $8,250
7. Rick Company s beginning inventory and purchases during the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012, were as follows:
(Note: The company uses a perpetual system of inventory.)
Units Unit Price Total Cost
January 1 Beginning inventory 18 $24 $432
March 12 Sold 13
April 11 Purchase 45 $29 $1,305
June 20 Sold 33
Aug 16 Purchase 35 $27 $945
Sept 11 Sold 29
Total Cost of Inventory
Ending inventory is 23 units. $2,682
What is the cost of goods sold for Rick Company for 2012 using LIFO?
8. Assume that in Year 1, the ending merchandise inventory is overstated by $30,000. If this is the only error in Years 1 and 2, fill in the items below, indicating which items will be understated, overstated, or correctly stated for Years 1 and 2.
Item Year 1 Year 2
Ending inventory ___________ _____________
Beginning inventory ___________ _____________
Cost of goods sold ___________ _____________
9. Below is a list of treatments of accounting topics. Place GAAP on the line if the treatment is GAAP-based and place IFRS on the line if the treatment is IFRS-based.
A. Interest and dividend income are reported in the investing section of the cash flow statement.__________
B. Interest expense is reported in the financing section of the cash flow statement. ___________
C. The use of LIFO is prohibited. ___________
10. Record the necessary journal entries from the following bank reconciliation information for July 31, 2011:
Bank Balance, July 31, 2011 $36,739
Checkbook Balance, July 31, 2011 36,444
Bank collection of note receivable 1,200 + 165 interest
Bank service charge 35
Deposits in transit 2,400
Outstanding checks 1,245
NSF check from customer 330
Correction of book error (check #456 written for $160, recorded at $610) gas expense
11. Journalize the following transactions for Tammy Company:
Sept. 1 Sold $3,500 of merchandise to Jim on account
Oct. 1 Exchanged Jim s account receivable for a fourmonth, 8% note for $3,500
Dec. 31 Recorded accrued interest on Jim s note
Feb. 1 Jim paid off his note with interest (round to nearest dollar)
12. A truck was purchased on January 2 at a cost of $60,000. It s expected to be used for five years and to have a residual value of $5,000 after 120,000 miles of service. The truck was driven for 23,000 miles the first year and 25,000 miles the second year. Calculate the depreciation expense to the nearest dollar for the first and second years.
Method Year 1 Year 2
Straight-line ________ ________
Double-declining-balance ________ ________
Units-of-production ________ ________
13. Prepare the general journal entries for the following transactions:
Jan. 2, 2011 Purchased land with a building on it for $750,000. The land is worth $300,000. Paid $150,000 cash down and signed a mortgage payable for the balance.
Dec. 31, 2011 Depreciation is computed using the straight-line method. The estimated salvage value of the building is $75,000 and has an estimated life of 20 years.
July 1, 2012 The building and land are sold for $825,000 cash.
14. Journalize the following treasury stock transactions:
June 3 Reacquired 350 shares of $12 par common stock at $10 per share.
June 7 Sold 180 shares of treasury stock for $16 per share.
June 8 Sold 150 shares of treasury stock for $9 per share.
15. Lowry Landscapes had net income of $50,000 for 2010.
Land was sold for $40,000, of which $3,000 was a gain.
The beginning cash balance was $53,000, and the ending cash balance was $151,000. Depreciation expenses were
$11,000. Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2010, for Lowry Landscapes using the
indirect method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lavender Company has decided to use a predetermined rate to assign factory overhead to production. The following predictions have been made for 2014:
Total factory overhead costs $150,000
Direct labor hours 40,000 hours
Direct labor costs $200,000
Required:
a. Compute the predetermined factory overhead rate assuming Lavender uses direct labor hours as the activity base.
b. Assume that actual factory overhead was $152,500 and that Lavender applies factory overhead to Work in Process based on direct labor hours. If actual direct labor was 42,000 hours for 2014, was factory overhead overapplied or underapplied? By how much?
c. Lavender Company follows the policy of writing off any under- or overapplied factory overhead balance to Cost of Goods Sold at the end of the year. Make the entry necessary at the end of 2014 to dispose of the factory overhead balance (variance) determined in Part (b).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Completethe Addressing International Legal and Ethical Issues simulation located on the student website.
Write a 350-word summary. In your paper, answer the following questions:
What are the issues involved in resolving legal disputes in international transactions?
What are some practical considerations of taking legal action against a foreign business partner based in another country?
What factors could work against CadMex’s decision to grant sublicensing agreements?
When the local customs and laws conflict with the customs and laws of an organization operating abroad, which should prevail? Explain why.
How would you compare the issues in this simulation to the domestic legal issues discussed in your Week One readings? How should companies resolve domestic and international issues differently?
Format your paper consistent with APA guidelines. (Title page with running head and reference pages are required.) Please see Grading Rubric week 2
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acct 504 Case Study 3
The LBJ Company has budgeted sales revenues as follows:
April May June
Credit sales $94,000 $89,500 $75,000
Cash sales 48,000 75,000 57,000
Total sales $142,000 $164,500 $132,000
Past experience indicates that 30% of the credit sales will be collected in the month of sale and the remaining 70% will be collected in the following month.
Purchases of inventory are all on credit and 40% is paid in the month of purchase and 60% in the month following purchase. Budgeted inventory purchases are $195,000 in April, $135,000 in May, and $63,000 in June.
Other budgeted cash receipts: (a) sale of plant assets for $33,000 in May, and (b) sale of new common stock for $50,000 in June. Other budgeted cash disbursements: (a) operating expenses of $15,000 each month, (b) selling and administrative expenses of $10,150 each month, (c) purchase of equipment for $19,000 cash in June, and (d) dividends of $20,000 will be paid in June.
The company has a cash balance of $20,000 at the beginning of May and wishes to maintain a minimum cash balance of $20,000 at the end of each month. An open line of credit is available at the bank and carries an annual interest rate of 10%. Assume that all borrowing is done on the first day of the month in which financing is needed and that all repayments are made on the last day of the month in which excess cash is available. Also assume that there is no outstanding financing as of May 1.
Requirements:
1. Use this information to prepare a Cash Budget for the months of May and June, using the template provided in Doc Sharing.
2. What are the three sections of a Cash Budget, and what is included in each section?
3. Why is a Cash Budget so vital to a company?
4. What are the five basic principles of cash management that a company can follow in order to improve its chances of having adequate cash?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Leader Profile
Many argue that the single largest variable in organizational success is leadership. Effective leadership can transform an organization and create a positive environment for all stakeholders. In this assignment, you will have the chance to evaluate a leader and identify what makes him/her effective.
Consider all the leaders who have affected your life in some way. Think of people with whom you work community leaders, a family member, or anyone who has had a direct impact on you.
- Choose one leader you consider to be effective. Write a paper addressing the following:
- Explain how this leader has influenced you and why you think he/she is effective.
- Analyze what characteristics or qualities this person possesses that affected you most.
- Create a leadership scorecard to assess this leader. You decide what scores to include (e.g., scale of 1 5, 5 being the highest) but be sure to assess the leader holistically across the critical leadership competencies you feel most important (e.g., visioning, empowering, strategy development and communication).
- Critique this individual s skills against what you have learned about leadership so far in this course.
- How well do they meet the practices covered in your required readings?
- How well have they adapted to the challenges facing leaders today?
- If you could recommend changes to their leadership approach, philosophy, and style, what would you suggest? Why?
- Using the module readings, the Internet including general organizational sources like the Wall Street Journal, BusinessWeek, or Harvard Business Review, build a leadership profile of the leader you selected. Include information from personal experiences as well as general postings on the selected leader from Internet sources like blogs. Be sure to include 2 3 additional resources not already included in the required readings in support of your leadership profile.
Write a 5 7-page paper in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.
| Assignment 2 Grading Criteria |
Maximum Points |
| Explained how this leader has been influential and why you think the leader is effective showing analysis of the leader s characteristics or qualities. |
12 |
| Analyzed the characteristics or qualities the leader possesses that has affected you most. |
12 |
| Created a leadership scorecard to assess the leader including visioning, empowering, strategy development and communication. |
28 |
| Critiqued the leader s individual skills against your required readings. |
20 |
| Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. |
8 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Learning Objectives : Preparing common-size statements; analyzing
profitability; making comparisons with the industry”
Top managers of McDonough Products, Inc., have asked for your help in comparing the company s profit performance and financial position with the average for the industry. The accountant has given you the company s income statement and balance sheet and also the following data for the industry. The problem is that McDonough is in dollars and the Industry Average is in percentages. To complete the analysis you will need to convert McDonoughs dollar amounts to percentages.
McDonough Products, Inc.
Income Statement Compared with Industry Average
Year Ended December 31, 2010
McDonough “Industry
Average”
Net sales……………………………………………………………………. $700,000 100.0%
Cost of goods sold…………………………………………………….. 490,000 57.3
Gross profit……………………………………………………………….. 210,000 42.7
Operating expenses ………………………………………………….. 175,000 29.4
Operating income………………………………………………………. 35,000 13.3
Other expenses………………………………………………………….. 7,000 2.5
Net income ……………………………………………………………….. $28,000 10.8%
McDonough Products, Inc.
Balance Sheet Compared with Industry Average
December 31, 2010
McDonough “Industry
Average”
Current assets……………………………………………………………. $471,200 72.1%
Fixed assets, net ……………………………………………………….. 114,700 19.0
Intangible assets, net …………………………………………………. 21,080 4.8
Other assets………………………………………………………………. 13,020 4.1
Total …………………………………………………………………………. 620,000 100.0%
Current liabilities ……………………………………………………….. 240,560 47.2%
Long-term liabilities …………………………………………………… 135,160 21.0
Stockholders equity…………………………………………………… 244,280 31.8
Total …………………………………………………………………………. $620,000 100.0%
Industry Average Current Ratio 1.53
Industry Average Total Debt to Total Assets 0.68
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The ledger of Chopin Rental Agency on March 31 of the current year includes the following selected accounts before adjusting entries have been prepared.
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
$3,600
|
|
|
Supplies
|
2,800
|
|
|
Equipment
|
25,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation-Equipment
|
|
$8,400
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
20,000
|
|
Unearned Rent Revenue
|
|
6,300
|
|
Rent Revenue
|
|
60,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
-0-
|
|
|
Wage Expense
|
14,000
|
|
An analysis of the accounts shows the following.
1.The equipment depreciates $250 per month.
2.One-third of the unearned rent was earned during the quarter.
3.Interest of $500 is accrued on the notes payable.
4.Supplies on hand total $650.
5.Insurance expires at the rate of $300 per month.
Prepare the adjusting entries at March 31, assuming that adjusting entries are made quarterly. Additional accounts are: Depreciation Expense; Insurance Expense; Interest Payable; and Supplies Expense.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The ledger of Hixson Company at the end of the current year shows Accounts Receivable $120,000, Sales $840,000, and Sales Returns and Allowances $30,000.
Journalize entries to record allowance for doubtful accounts using two different bases.
Instructions:
(a) If Hixson uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectible accounts, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming Hixson determines that Fell’s $1,400 balance is uncollectible.
(b) If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $2,100 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be (1) 1% of net sales, and (2) 10% of accounts receivable.
(c) If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a debit balance of $200 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be (1) 0.75% of net sales and (2) 6% of accounts receivable.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lehighton Chalk Company manufactures blackboard chalk for educational uses. The companys product is sold by the box at $50 per unit. Lehighton uses an actual costing system, which means that the actual costs of direct material, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead are entered into work-in-process inventory. The actual application rate for manufacturing overhead is computed each year; actual manufacturing overhead is divided by actual production (in units) to compute the application rate. Information for Lehightons first two years of operation is as follows:
Required:
Lehighton Chalk Company had no beginning or ending work-in-process inventories for either year. p. 345
1. Prepare operating income statements for both years based on absorption costing.
2. Prepare operating income statements for both years based on variable costing. 3. Prepare a numerical reconciliation of the difference in income reported under the two costing methods used in requirements (1) and (2)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. A plant that uses process costing has 8,000 units in beginning work in process, 15,000
more started, and 5,000 units in the ending work in process. Using this information, answer
the following questions on a separate sheet of paper. Label each answer carefully and
show all of your work. (Each answer is worth 3 points.)
a. How many units are there to account for?
b. How many units are transferred using the average cost method?
c. How many units are transferred using the first-in, first-out method?
d. How many units were both started and completed during the period?
2. The Spangle Company uses the process cost system and average costing. The following
prediction data are for the month of July:
Use the form at the end of this examination to prepare a cost of production summary for
the month. (This problem is worth 15 points.)
Production Costs
Work in process, beginning of month
Materials $2,500
Labor 1,200
Factory overhead 1,100 $4,800
Costs incurred during the month
Materials $13,500
Labor 9,200
Factory overhead 8,500 31,200
$36,000
Production Report Units
In process, beginning of month 500
Finished and transferred during month 3,800
Work in process, end of month 400
Stage of completion 50%
Use the form at the end of this examination to prepare a cost of production summary for
the month. (This problem is worth 15 points.)
3. The following data is for a production company:
Beginning inventory 1,000 units, three-fourths completed
Finished and transferred 16,000 units
Work in process, end of month 2,000 units, one-half completed
Assume that materials, labor, and factory overhead are added evenly throughout the process.
On a separate sheet of paper, complete the following problems. Label each answer carefully
and show all your work.
a. Using the average cost method, compute the equivalent production.
b. Using the first-in, first-out method, compute the equivalent production.
c. During the month, Department B received 10,000 units from Department A with a unit
cost of $10; 2,000 of these units were lost during production in Department B.
Determine the adjusted cost of these units.
d. During the month, Department 2 received 8,000 from Department 1 with a unit cost of
$15. Department 2 added materials that increased the number of units by 50%.
Determine the adjusted cost of these units.
(Each answer is worth 5 points.)
4. Complete Problem P5-9 on pages 246 247 in your textbook. Use the forms provided in the
Study Guide/Working Papersbooklet on pages WP-161 to WP-170.
(This problem is worth 20 points.)
5. Complete Problem P6-9 on page 290 in your textbook. Use the forms provided in the
Study Guide/Working Papersbooklet on pages WP-201 to WP-204.
(This problem is worth 15 points.)
6. Complete the Chapter 6 Mini-Case, Parts 1 and 2, on pages 291 292 in your textbook.
Use a separate sheet of paper. Label each answer and show all of your work.
(This problem is worth 18 points.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lewis Manufacturing Company has four operating divisions. During the first quarter of 2008, the company reported aggregate income from operations of $176,000 and the following divisional results.
Division
I II III IV
Sales $250,000 $200,000 $500,000 $400,000
Cost of goods sold 200,000 189,000 300,000 250,000
Selling administrative expenses 65,000 60,000 60,000 50,000
Income (loss) from operations $(15,000) $(49,000) $140,000 $100,000
Analysis reveals the following percentages of variable costs in each division.
I II III IV
Cost of goods sold 70% 90% 80% 75%
Selling and administrative expenses 40 70 50 60
Discontinuance of any division would save 50% of the fixed costs and expenses for that division.
Top management is very concerned about the unprofitable divisions (I and II). Consensus is that one or both of the divisions should be discontinued.
Instructions
(a) Compute the contribution margin for Divisions I and II.
(a) I $84,000
(b) Prepare an incremental analysis concerning the possible discontinuance of (1) Division I and (2) Division II. What course of action do you recommend for each division?
(c) Prepare a columnar condensed income statement for Lewis Manufacturing, assuming Division II is eliminated. Use the CVP format. Division II s unavoidable fixed costs are allocated equally to the continuing divisions.
(c) Income III $133,850
(d) Reconcile the total income from operations ($176,000) with the total income from operations without Division II.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Four Exercise Assignment
Liability
1. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:
Social Security taxes: 4% on the first $55,000 earned per employee
Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned per employee
Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
State income taxes: 4% of gross earnings
Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned per employee
Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned per employee
The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end and no wages have been paid during the month.
a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:
Social Security taxes
Medicare taxes
Federal income taxes withheld
State income taxes
Insurance withholdings
b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:
Matching Social Security taxes
Matching Medicare taxes
State unemployment taxes
Federal unemployment taxes
2. Current liabilities: entries and disclosure.A review of selected financial activities of Visconti s during 20XX disclosed the following:
|
|
|
|
|
|
1-Dec: Borrowed $10,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3-month, 15% note payable.
|
|
|
Interest and principal are due at maturity.
|
|
|
|
|
10-Dec: Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to
|
|
|
total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates
|
|
|
that 3% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit (parts only).
|
|
|
22-Dec: Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
|
26-Dec: Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a 15% note payable due in 60 days. (Assume 360 day year for interest)
|
|
|
31-Dec: Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162
|
|
|
|
31-Dec: Accrued three days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest for each of the notes payable.
3.Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:
|
2-Aug: Borrowed $55,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 90-day, 12% note.
|
|
20-Aug: Issued a $50,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $50,000 delivery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest r ate.
|
|
10-Sep: Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued
|
|
a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.
|
|
11-Sep: Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account
|
|
payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and carries a 14% interest rate.
|
|
10-Oct: The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.
|
|
11-Oct: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.
|
|
30-Oct: Paid note to Bank of Kingsville.
|
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest. (Daily interest is calculated utilizing the 360 day method).
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of December 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Lilly Company has the following info at December 31st, 2010:
COST RETAIL
Beginning inventory $20,500 $28,750
Purchases 12,500 18,750
Transportation in 250
Sales 26,250
Using the retail inventory method compute the estimated cost of the ending inventory at year-end.
2. Malone Company determines its inventory at lower of cost of market at 12/31/2011.
At year-end, equipment with a cost of $650,000 has a replacement cost of $550,000, a net realizable value (NRV) of $585,000 and NRV less normal profit margin of $565,000. The company would determine the LCM value of the ending inventory at:
3. Peterson Company had the following records for product BA-101:
UNITS UNIT COST
Jan 1 Beg Inventory 600 $8
Purchases:
Jan 5 1,100 $9
Jan 25 1,300 $10
Feb16 800 $11
March 26 600 $12
A physical inventory on March 31st showed 1,500 units on hand.
a. Compute ending inventory at March 31st using FIFO
b. Calculate Cost of goods sold using FIFO.
4. The records of Hayek Boutique have the following data:
COST RETAIL
Beg. Inventory $200,000 $280,000
Purchases $1,425,000 $2,140,000
Markups $80,000
Markdowns $15,000
Sales $2,250,000
Compute the ending inventory using the retail inventory method.
5. Malone has the following information of the ending inventory at cost and lower of cost or market at 12/31/10, 12/31/11, and 12/31/12:
12/31/10 $650,000 $680,000
12/31/11 $780,000 $712,000
12/31/12 $905,000 $830,000
a. What is the value of the inventory at each of these 3 year-end dates?
b. Record the journal entry to bring the inventory to the proper value at each year-end if needed.
6. Johnson has the following information for the month of June:
June 1 Beg. Bal. of 300 units at $10 each
June 10th Sold 200 units at $24 per unit
June 11th Purchased 800 units at $11 each
June 15 Sold 500 units at $25 each
June 20 Purchased 500 units at $13 each
June 27th Sold 250 units at $27 each
Using the LIFO perpetual method prepare a schedule and calculate
a. Ending inventory at June 30th
b. Value of cost of goods sold.
c. What is the gross profit at June 30th?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Linda s Lampshades started business on Jan. 1, 2001. They had the following inventory transactions:
Journals – Jan. 2001
Purchases
Supplier Date Received Quantity Unit Cost Amount
Donna 01/10/01 110 12.00 1320.00
Thomas 01/15/01 160 14.00 2240.00
Cindy 01/18/01 150 15.00 2250.00
Sales
Customer Date shipped Quantity Sel. Price Amount
Norilene 01/16/01 200 25.00 5000.00
1. Calculate the ending inventory, using the perpetual inventory method:
A. Using FIFO
B. Using LIFO
C. Using Average Cost
2. Prepare the following statement
Using
FIFO LIFO Average Cost
Sales
Cost of Sales
Gross Profit
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Jones Inc. computes its predetermined overhead rate annually on the basis of machine hours. At the beginning of the year it estimated that its total manufacturing overhead would be $900,000 and the total machine hours (mh) would be 45,000. Its actual total manufacturing overhead for the year was $995,000 and its actual machine hours were 50,000.
What is the predetermined overhead rate for the year? Show Computations.
2. Snapper Corp. computes its predetermined overhead rate annually on the basis of direct-labor hours. At the beginning of the year it estimated that its total manufacturing overhead would be $240,000 and the total direct labor hours (dlh) would be 6,000. Its actual total manufacturing overhead for the year was $210,000 and its actual direct labor hours were 5,400.
How much would be applied to the jobs for the year? Show Computations.
3. Smith Jones Company uses a predetermined overhead rate of 75% of direct labor cost. This predetermined rate was based on $60,000 estimated direct labor cost and $45,000 of estimated total manufacturing overhead. The company incurred actual total manufacturing costs of $52,000 and $71,000 of direct labor cost during the period.
What is the amount of overapplied or underapplied manufacturing overhead? Show Computations.
4. Tanner Bay Inc. has two departments, Assembly and Packaging. The company uses a job-order costing system and computes a predetermined overhead rate in each department. The Assembly Department bases its rate on machine hours and the Packaging Department bases its rate on direct labor hours. At the beginning of the year, the company made the following estimates:
Assembly Packaging
Direct Labor-hours 3,000 4,000
Machine-hours 8,500 9,900
Manufacturing Overhead $144,500 $172,000
Direct labor cost $89,200 $101,000
Assume also the following actual data on Job #503 which was started and completed during the year:
Assembly Packaging
Direct Labor-hours 23 37
Machine-hours 109 142
Manufacturing Overhead $8,787 $6,566
Direct labor cost $2,100 $1,990
What is the predetermined overhead rate to be used in each department? Show computations.
5. XYZ Corporation has two departments, Machining and Assembly. The company uses a job-order costing system and computes a predetermined overhead rate in each department. The Machining Department bases its rate on machine hours and the Assembly Department bases its rate on direct labor cost. At the beginning of the year, the company made the following estimates;
Machining Assembly
Direct Labor-hours 11,000 9,000
Machine-hours 23,000 14,000
Manufacturing Overhead $368,000 $312,000
Direct labor cost $102,100 $78,000
Assume also the following actual data on Job #219 which was started and completed during the year:
Machining Assembly
Direct Labor-hours 104 98
Machine-hours 189 290
Materials requisitioned $33,400 $44,200
Direct labor cost $4,200 $9,600
a. What is the total cost assigned to Job #219? Show Computation.
b. What is the predetermined overhead rate to be used in each department? Show computations
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tax Form
Resolved Question:
Instructions:
Please complete the required federal individual income tax return forms for the following taxpayers. Unless instructed otherwise, the information provided is for the taxpayers 2012 tax year. Please complete their 2012 tax return. Ignore the requirement to attach the form(s) W-2 to the front page of the Form 1040. If required information is missing, use reasonable assumptions to fill in the gaps.
Joseph and Diana Cohen live in Pleasantville, New Jersey. Joseph is the Vice President of Sales at a small start-up company. Diana is a former advertising executive who currently consults with former clients. She also serves on the Board of Directors of an advertising company. The Cohens have three children: Rebecca (18), Alan (15) and David (12). During the year, Rebecca left home to attend a liberal arts college. The Cohens plan to file a joint tax return. The Cohens provided the following information: Joseph s Social Security number isNNN-NN-NNNN/p>
Diana s Social Security number isNNN-NN-NNNN/li>
Rebecca s Social Security number isNNN-NN-NNNN/li>
Alan s Social Security number isNNN-NN-NNNN/li>
David s Social Security number isNNN-NN-NNNN/li>
The Cohen s mailing address is 85 North Maple Drive, Pleasantville, New Jersey 08233
Rebecca, Alan, and David are tax dependents for federal tax purposes
Joseph Cohen reported the following the following information relating to his employment during the year:
Company
Gross Wages
Federal Income Tax Withholding
State Income Tax Withholding
Alternative Energy
$115,325
$28,230
$13,400
The above amounts do not reflect any income items described below. . Joseph s employer withheld all applicable and appropriate payroll taxes on all income for which it was required to withhold.
Diana Cohen received the following revenue during the year (she uses the cash method of accounting).
Consulting revenue reported to her on a form 1099-MISC, Box 7
High-end Retail $32,000
Jensen s Health Products $8,500
Strategic Solutions $3,750
Board of Directors fees reported to her on a form 1099-MISC, Box 7
Natural Sunshine, Inc. $6,500
During the year, Diana paid the following business expenses:
Consultant-related
Airfare $2,900
Hotel $1,450
Meals $390
Parking $320
She drove 290 business miles for her consulting related activities (she has documentation to verify)
Board of Director-related-
Meals $125
Hotel $225
She drove 315 business miles for her Board of Director activities (she has documentation to verify)
Neither business required the filing of forms 1099 to report payments made during the tax year. In addition, Ms. Cohen drove a 2010 Lexus purchased on January 1, 2010 for all of her business mileage. She drove the vehicle a total of 10,605 miles during the year for all purposes. She has written documentation to support the mileage amounts. She also has access to another vehicle for personal purposes.
The Cohens also received the following during the year:
Interest income from First Bank of New Jersey $320
Interest income from Patterson, New Jersey School District $200
Interest income from U.S. Treasury Bond $350
Interest income from General Mills corporate bond $400
Qualified dividend income from Rio Tinto $1,500
Qualified dividend income from Microsoft $750
Qualified dividend income from Cooper Tire $200
Qualified dividend income from Cardinal Health $425
Qualified dividend income from Union Pacific $140
Qualified dividend income from Procter & Gamble $190
Qualified dividend income from PepsiCo $225
Qualified dividend income from Kellogg $200
Qualified dividend income from Abbott Labs $275
Qualified dividend income from 3M $350
Dividend income (not qualified) from China Fund $2,000
The Cohens did not own, control or manage any foreign bank accounts nor were they a grantor or beneficiary of a foreign trust during the tax year.
The Cohens had the following activity in their brokerage account during the year. All transactions were reported on a form 1099-B with Box A checked:
Sold 2,000 shares of Microsoft 7/1/CY (current year) $22,500
Sold 75 shares of Apple 4/15/CY $28,750
Sold 350 shares of Cooper Tire 10/14/CY $14,700
Sold 1,000 shares of Cardinal Health 9/3/CY $35,000
Sold 50 shares of Union Pacific 1/7/CY $2,750
Purchased 100 shares of Procter & Gamble 7/10/CY $7,700
Purchased 75 shares of Apple 4/18/CY $29,000
Purchased 350 shares of Cooper Tire 11/1/CY $14,000
Purchased 350 shares of PepsiCo 5/14/CY $32,000
Purchased 300 shares of Kellogg 10/14/CY $21,000
Relevant tax basis/holding period information related to sales of securities in the current year:
Purchased 2,000 shares of Microsoft on 5/1/CY for $21,000
Purchased 200 shares of Apple on 3/8/2010 for $90,000
Purchased 300 shares of Cooper Tire on 1/12/2009 for $9,000
Purchased 50 shares of Cooper Tire on 6/28/CY for $2,000
Received 1,000 shares of Cardinal Health from Diana s father as a gift on 10/10/96. Donor s basis was $7,000. FMV at the date of the gift was $41,000
Purchased 100 shares of Union Pacific on 9/5/PY (prior year) for $6,000
The Cohens have a $43,000 long-term capital loss carry forward from their prior tax year.
The Cohens received a New Jersey state tax refund of $400 in the current year relating to their prior year New Jersey Individual Income Tax return filed in April of the current year. The Cohens did not pay the alternative minimum tax in the prior year and they received full benefit for all of the state tax income taxes they paid and deducted in the prior year.
Diana is a 10% owner in an advertising agency Bright Ideas ( BI ) (EIN 20-1234567). BI is a Subchapter S corporation. The company reported ordinary business income for the 2013 year of $150,000. Sarah acquired the stock several years ago. Her basis in the stock before considering her income allocation was $92,000. Sarah is a passive owner with respect to this entity.
Diana is a 20% owner in Natural Sunshine, Inc. ( NS ) (EIN 24-9876543). NS is a Subchapter S corporation. The company reported an ordinary business loss for the year of ($80,000). Sarah acquired the stock several years ago. Her basis in the stock before considering her loss allocation was $45,000. Sarah is a passive owner with respect to this entity.
Joseph received 5,000 shares of restricted (common) stock from his employer on July 1 of the current year. The terms of the restricted stock grant are such that if Joseph is still employed by Alternative Energy on July 1 in five years the entire 5,000 shares will vest and become his property. Joseph, upon the advice of his tax advisor, prepared and filed an IRC Section 83(b) election on July 8, of the current year. The value of the shares on July 1 was $5 per share. Joseph estimates the value of the shares in five years will be at least $150 per share. Joseph notified Alternative Energy about the IRC Sec. 83(b) in a timely manner. None of the income tax consequences of this restricted stock grant were reported in the $115,325 reported as part of his gross wages above.
In May, Joseph was injured at home in an accident. The accident restricted Joseph from working for about a month. During this time, Joseph received $15,000 in disability payments attributable to a disability insurance policy. The disability policy premiums were paid on Joseph s behalf as a nontaxable fringe benefit.
The Cohens paid the following expenses during the year:
Dentist (unreimbursed by insurance) $1,500
Doctors (unreimbursed by insurance) $ 2,425
Prescriptions (unreimbursed by insurance) $ 675
Real property taxes on residence $7,525
Vehicle property tax based upon value $1,250
Mortgage interest on principal residence $12,550
Margin interest paid to broker $600
Contribution to United Way $2,000
Contribution to American Cancer Society $5,000
Contribution to neighborhood drive to oppose development project $500
Contribution to the Temple Mount Synagogue $12,000
Fee paid to Mouser, Johnson, and Hintze CPAs for tax preparation $450
The Cohens also donated clothing, electronics, furniture and other household goods to the Salvation Army of Pleasantville, New Jersey on April 15. Estimated thrift value of the goods donated is $275.
Miscellaneous Information
On September 1, the Cohens paid $200 in foreign taxes attributable to the dividend received from the China Fund.
During the year, the Cohens paid for Rebecca s tuition payments to attend The College of Liberal Arts of New Jersey (CLA). Rebecca attended the spring/summer and the fall semesters as a full-time student. Total amount paid by the Cohens during the year for tuition was $9,000 and $2,000 for books. Rebecca also used $6,000 from a scholarship received from CLA to pay the rest of the tuition. Rebecca was not required to perform any services as a condition of accepting the scholarship. Rebecca was not employed during the year. CLA s address and employer identification number (EIN) is as follows:
The College of Liberal Arts of New Jersey
65 Ivory Tower
Penns Grove, NJ 08069
EIN- 22-5698324
The Cohens would like to contribute to the Presidential Election Campaign. The Cohens would also like to receive a refund (if any) of any tax they may have overpaid for the year. Their preferred method of receiving the refund is by check
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
House of Tutors, Incorporated, (HTI) is a company that runs a tutoring service for high school and university students. The company reported the following amounts in its post-closing trial balance, prepared at the end of its first fiscal year, at August 31, 2013.
|
|
| Accounts Payable |
$ |
50 |
|
| Accounts Receivable |
|
270 |
|
| Accumulated Depreciation |
|
1,250 |
|
| Cash |
|
750 |
|
| Contributed Capital |
|
3,000 |
|
| Equipment |
|
12,500 |
|
| Interest Payable |
|
45 |
|
| Note Payable (long-term) |
|
8,500 |
|
| Retained Earnings |
|
795 |
|
| Supplies |
|
120 |
|
|
| The company encountered the following events during September 2013: |
| a. |
HTI provided 100 hours of regular hourly tutoring at the rate of $18 per hour, all of which was collected in cash.
|
| b. |
HTI paid tutors at the hourly rate of $9 per hour. On September 28, HTI paid for 90 hours of tutor time and promised to pay the remaining hours worked.
|
| c. |
HTI hosted an all-night review session on September 29 for people cramming for midterm exams, at a special price of $10 per attendee. Rather than collect cash at the time of the review session, HTI will send bills in October to the 80 people who attended the review session.
|
| d. |
At the beginning of the night-long review session, HTI paid $250 cash to its tutors for wages. No additional wages will be paid for the review session.
|
| e. |
HTI collected $250 cash on account from students who received tutoring during summer 2013. |
| f. |
HTI also collected $300 cash from a high school for a tutoring session to be held in October 2013. |
| g. |
HTI determined that depreciation for September should be $150. |
| h. |
On September 30, HTI declared and paid a $550 cash dividend. |
| i. |
Although HTI adjusted its accounts on August 31, it has not yet paid the $45 monthly interest owed on the promissory note, for either August or September. The note is due October 2016.
|
| j. |
HTI has only $45 of supplies left at September 30. |
| k. |
HTI s income taxes are approximately 30% of income before tax.
|
- 1.Record the entry for the provison of 100 hours of regular hourly tutoring at the rate of $18 per hour, all of which was collected in cash.
- 2.Record the entry for payment by HTI for 90 hours of tutor time. HTI paid tutors at the hourly rate of $9 per hour. HTI promised to pay the remaining hours worked.
- 3.Record the entry for the all night review session at a special price for $ 10 per attendee. Rather than collect cash at the time of the review session, HTI will send bills in October to the 80 people who attended the review session.
- 4.Record the payment of $250 cash to its tutuor for wages, at the beginning of the night-long review session. No additional wages will be paid for the review session.
- 5.Record the collection of $250 cash on account from students who received tutoring during summer 2013.
- 6.Record the collection of $300 cash from a high school for a tutoring session to be held in October 2013.
- 7.Record the entry for depreciation of $150 determined by HTI for September.
- 8.Record the declaration and payment of $550 cash dividend.
- 9.Record the entry for the $45 monthly interest owed on the promissory note but not yet paid, for either August or September. The note is due October 2016. HTI adjusted its accounts on August 31.
- 10.Record the entry for only $45 of supplies left at September 30.
- 11.Record the entry for income taxes which are approximately 30% of income before tax.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Apr. 2
|
Purchased merchandise from Blue Company under the following terms: $6,700 price, invoice dated April 2, credit terms of 2/15, n/60, and FOB shipping point.
|
|
3
|
Paid $375 for shipping charges on the April 2 purchase.
|
|
4
|
Returned to Blue Company unacceptable merchandise that had an invoice price of $500.
|
|
17
|
Sent a check to Blue Company for the April 2 purchase, net of the discount and the returned merchandise.
|
|
18
|
Purchased merchandise from Fox Corp. under the following terms: $13,850 price, invoice dated April 18, credit terms of 2/10, n/30, and FOB destination.
|
|
21
|
After negotiations, received from Fox a $3,878 allowance on the April 18 purchase.
|
|
28
|
Sent check to Fox paying for the April 18 purchase, net of the discount and allowance.
|
|
Prepare journal entries to record the above transactions for a retail store. Assume a perpetual inventory system.(Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
uicy Manufacturing Corporation incurred the following costs.
Beginning direct materials inventory $24,000
Beginning work-in-process inventory $10,500
Beginning finished goods inventory $28,500
Ending direct materials inventory $24,000
Ending work in process $21,000
Ending finished goods $39,000
Factory supervisor’s salary $42,000
Depreciation on plant $18,000
Sales $1,200,000
Selling and administrative expenses $187,500
Plant maintenance $9,000
Plant utilities $16,500
Direct material purchases $322,500
Direct labor $360,000
Required: Calculate the following.
a. Direct materials used
b. Cost of goods manufactured
c. Cost of goods sold
d. Operating income
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1 Julie Smith, an analyst with ABC Company, has collected the following data about the firm:
EBITDA = $3.5 million
Tax rate = 40%
Debt outstanding = $3 million
Cost of debt = 10.5%
Cost of common equity = 14%
Shares of stock outstanding = 800,000
BV of the stock per share = $12
The firm s product market is considered stable, and the firm expects no growth, and all earnings are paid out as dividends. Calculate the firm s earning per share, assuming depreciation & amortization costs of $500,000 per year.
Question 2Lucent Technology is considering seller-finance for an existing customer with the following information. The net income is $110MM. The depreciation cost is $20MM. What is the subject firm’s cash flow from operations (CFO)
Question 3 H.R. Pickett Corporation has $500,000 of debt outstanding, and it pays an interest rate of 10% annually. The company s annual sales are $2 millions, and its average tax rate is 30%, and its profit margin on sales is 5%. What s Pickett s TIE ratio?
Question 4 Use the following information on Dylan Enterprises for questions:
1). What s the firm s net working capital for the current year? Show your calculation.
2). What is Dylan’s time interest earned (TIE) for the current year? Show your calculation.
3). What is Dylan’s retained earning for the current year? Show your calculation.
4). Waht is Dylan’s ROA for the current year?
|
5). DuPont model for profitability & ROE analysis: Calculate current year s ROE by showing the value of each individual component.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On July 1, 2012, Kim Wheeler established an interior decorating business, Aztec Designs. During the month, Kim completed the following transactions related to the business:
July 1 Kim transferred cash from a personal bank account to an account to be used for the business, $21,000.
4 Paid rent for period of July 4 to end of month, $2,750.
10 Purchased a used truck for $18,000, paying $4,000 cash and giving a note payable for the remainder.
13 Purchased equipment on account, $9,000.
14 Purchased supplies for cash, $1,500.
15 Paid annual premiums on property and casualty insurance, $3,600.
15 Received cash for job completed, $12,000.
Enter the following transactions on Page 2 of the two-column journal.
21 Paid creditor a portion of the amount owed for equipment purchased on July 13, $2,000.
24 Recorded jobs completed on account and sent invoices to customers, $9,800.
26 Received an invoice for truck expenses, to be paid in August, $700.
27 Paid utilities expense, $1,000.
27 Paid miscellaneous expenses, $300.
29 Received cash from customers on account, $4,600.
30 Paid wages of employees, $2,800.
31 Withdrew cash for personal use, $2,500.
Instructions
1. Journalize each transaction in a two-column journal beginning on Page 1, referring to the following chart of accounts in selecting the accounts to be debited and credited.
(Do not insert the account numbers in the journal at this time.) Journal entry explana-
tions may be omitted.
11 Cash 31 Kim Wheeler, Capital
12 Accounts Receivable 32 Kim Wheeler, Drawing
13 Supplies 41 Fees Earned
14 Prepaid Insurance 51 Wages Expense
16 Equipment 53 Rent Expense
18 Truck 54 Utilities Expense
21 Notes Payable 55 Truck Expense
22 Accounts Payable 59 Miscellaneous Expense
2. Post the journal to a ledger of four-column accounts, inserting appropriate posting references as each item is posted. Extend the balances to the appropriate balance columns after each transaction is posted.
3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance for Aztec Designs as of July 31, 2012.
4. Determine the excess of revenues over expenses for July.
5. Can you think of any reason why the amount determined in (4) might not be the net income for July?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyze the following scenario: Jump Hospital currently allocates all maintenance department costs based on departmental square feet. However, the manager of the pharmacy department has suggested that an ABC approach be used for the portion of the maintenance department costs that relate to repairing equipment. Her contention is that the pharmacy has relatively little equipment that breaks. However, it must subsidize many high-tech departments that require expensive equipment repairs. Using the tables below, calculate the maintenance cost assigned to the pharmacy using the existing method and using an ABC approach.
|
Maintenance Costs
|
|
Routine Maintenance
|
Repairs
|
Total
|
|
Volume (Square Feet)
|
100,000
|
800
|
|
|
Labor Hours
|
10,000
|
4000
|
14,000
|
|
Labor Cost/Hour
|
$12.00
|
$18.00
|
$13.71
|
|
Supplies
|
$20,000
|
$80,000
|
$100,000
|
|
Administration
|
|
|
$15,000
|
|
Department Information
|
|
Pharmacy
|
All Other Departments
|
Total
|
|
Square Feet
|
2,000
|
98,000
|
100,000
|
|
Volume of Repairs
|
3
|
797
|
800
|
|
Hours of Repairs
|
6
|
3,994
|
4,000
|
|
Supplies Used for Repairs
|
$200
|
$79,800
|
$80,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Clopack Company manufactures one product that goes through one processing department called Mixing. All raw materials are introduced at the start of work in the Mixing Department. The company uses the weighted-average method to account for units and costs. Its Work in Process T-account for the Mixing Department for June follows (all forthcoming questions pertain to June):
WORK IN PROCESS – MIXING DEPARTMENT
June 1 balance 28,000 Completed and transferred ?
Materials 120,000 to Finished Goods
Direct labor 79,500
Overhead
97,000
The June 1 work in process inventory consisted of 5,000 pounds with $16,000 in materials cost and $12,000 in conversion cost. The June 1 work in process inventory was 100% complete with respect to materials and 50% complete with respect to conversion. During June 37,500 pounds were started into production. The June 30 work in process inventory consisted of 8,000 pounds that were 100% complete with respect to materials and 40% complete with respect to conversion.
Required:
How many units were completed and transferred to finished goods during the period?
Units completed and transferred to finished goods
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On June 30, 2014, Robertson, Inc. sold $3,000,000 (face value) of bonds. The bonds are dated June 30, 2014, pay interest semiannually on December 31 and June 30, and will mature on June 30, 2017. The following schedule was prepared by the accountant for Robertson, Inc for 2014.
Semi-Annual Interest to Interest Unamortized Bond
Interest Period be Paid Expense Amortization Amount CarryingValue
$75,000 $2,936,625
1 $120,000 $131,625 $11,625 63,375 1,936,625
Instructions
On the basis of the above information, answer the following questions. (Round your answer to the nearest dollar or percent.)
1. What is the stated interest rate for this bond issue?
2. What is the market interest rate for this bond issue?
3. What was the selling price of the bonds as a percentage of the face value?
4. Prepare the journal entry to record the sale of the bond issue on June 30, 2014.
5. Prepare the journal entry to record the payment of interest and amortization on December 31, 2014.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Kara Ries, Tammy Bax, and Joe Thomas invested $54,000, $70,000, and $78,000, respectively, in a partnership. During its first calendar year, the firm earned $403,200.
|
|
Prepare the entry to close the firm s Income Summary account as of its December 31 year-end and to allocate the $403,200 net income to the partners under each of the following separate assumptions:
1.The partners have no agreement on the method of sharing income and loss.
2.The partners agreed to share income and loss in the ratio of their beginning capital investments
3.Close the income summary account assuming the partners have agreed to share income and loss in the ratio of their beginning capital investments
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The general ledger of the Karlin Company, a consulting company, at January 1, 2011, contained the following account balances:
The following is a summary of the transactions for the year: a. Sales of services, $100,000, of which $30,000 was on credit.
b. Collected on accounts receivable, $27,300.
c. Issued shares of common stock in exchange for $10,000 in cash.
d. Paid salaries, $50,000 (of which $9,000 was for salaries payable).
e. Paid miscellaneous expenses, $24,000.
f. Purchased equipment for $15,000 in cash.
g. Paid $2,500 in cash dividends to shareholders.
|
Requirement :
|
|
Prepare a general journal entry for each of the summary transactions listed above.
Prepare an unadjusted trial balance
Prepare and post adjusting journal entries. Post to offline T-accounts. Accrued salaries at year-end amounted to $1,000. Depreciation for the year on the equipment is $2,000. The allowance for uncollectible accounts is estimated to be $1,500
Prepare an adjusted trial balance
Prepare an income statement for 2011 and a balance sheet as of December 31, 2011
Prepare and post closing entries
Prepare a post-closing trial balance
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kean Dry Cleaners is owned and operated by Wally Lowman. A building and equipment are currently being rented, pending expansion to new facilities. The actual work of dry cleaning is done by another company at wholesale rates. The assets and the liabilities of the business on March 1, 2012, are as follows: Cash, $ 15,000; Accounts Receivable, $ 31,000; Supplies, $ 3,000; Land, $ 36,000; Accounts Payable, $ 13,000. Business transactions during March are summarized as follows:
a. Wally Lowman invested additional cash in the business with a deposit of $ 28,000 in the business bank account.
b. Paid $ 14,000 for the purchase of land as a future building site.
c. Received cash from cash customers for dry cleaning revenue, $ 17,000.
d. Paid rent for the month, $ 5,000.
e. Purchased supplies on account, $ 2,500.
f. Paid creditors on account, $ 12,800.
g. Charged customers for dry cleaning revenue on account, $ 34,000.
h. Received monthly invoice for dry cleaning expense for March ( to be paid on April 10), $ 13,500.
i. Paid the following: wages expense, $ 7,500; truck expense, $ 2,500; utilities expense, $ 1,300; miscellaneous expense, $ 2,700.
j. Received cash from customers on account, $ 28,000.
k. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $ 1,900; therefore, the cost of sup-plies used during the month was $ 3,600.
l. Withdrew $ 8,000 cash for personal use.
Instructions:
1. Determine the amount of Wally Lowman s capital as of March 1 of the current year.
2. State the assets, liabilities, and owner s equity as of March 1 in equation form similar to that shown in this chapter. In tabular form below the equation, indicate increases and decreases resulting from each transaction and the new balances after each transaction.
3. Prepare an income statement for March, a statement of owner s equity for March, and a balance sheet as of March 31.
4. (Optional). Prepare a statement of cash flows for March.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
KellyConsultingTransactions for May2008
|
May3
|
Receivedcash fromclientsas an advance payment forservicesto beprovidedand recorded itasunearned fees,$1,550.
|
|
May5
|
Receivedcash fromclientson account,$1,750.
|
|
May9
|
Paidcash for anewspaperadvertisement,$100
|
|
May13
|
PaidOffice Station Co. forpart ofthe debt incurredon April5,$400
|
|
May15
|
Recorded services providedon account forthe periodMay1-15,$5,100.
|
|
May16
|
Paidpart-timereceptionistfor two weeks’salaryincluding the amountowedon April 13,$750.
|
|
May17
|
Recorded cashfromcash clientsfor fees earned during the periodMay1-16,
$7,380
|
|
May20
|
Purchased suppliesonaccount, $500.
|
|
May21
|
Recorded services providedon account forthe periodMay16-20,$2,900.
|
|
May25
|
Recorded cashfromcash clientsfor fees earned for the period May17-23,
$4,200.
|
|
May27
|
Receivedcash fromclientson account,$6,600.
|
|
May28
|
Paid part-timereceptionistfor two weeks’salary,$750.
|
|
May28
|
Paidtelephonebill forMay, $150.
|
|
May28
|
Paidelectricitybill forMay,$225.
|
|
May28
|
Recorded cashfromcash clientsfor fees earned ,$2,875.
|
|
May28
|
Provided serviceson account $2,200.
|
|
May28
|
Kellywithdrew$7,500 forpersonal use.
|
Adjusting entriesforMay 31 are
Insurancewaspurchased for aone-year period,startingon March 1,2008.
Rent was prepaidon January1,2008, for aone-yearperiod, startingon January1.
Officeequipmenthas a5yearlife,witha2,500 salvage value.
A supplies inventory countshowsan ending balanceof $1,235.
PortfolioInstructions
1.Record theending balances fromthe April30 postclosing trial balanceintothe ledger sheetsoralternatively, youmaycreate T-accounts onan Excel spreadsheet.
2.Record journalentriesforthe May transactionson thejournal sheets givenorcreate aspreadsheetconfiguredasa journal sheet.
3.Post the journal entries tothe ledger sheetsorif you createdT-accountsposttheentriesto yourT-accounts.
4.Enter the ending balancesfromtheledgerorT-accountsonto theworksheettrialbalancecolumns.
5.Enter the adjustments directlyon totheworksheet.
6.Extendtothe adjusted trialbalancecolumns.
7.Extendtothe financialstatement columns.
8.Preparethefinancial statements.
9.Enter the closing entriesontotheworksheet.
10.Preparethe post-closingtrial balanceforMay.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kelly Clark owns a popular hot dog stand on a trendy section of Melrose Boulevard. Following the success of her rst hot dog stand, Kelly’s,” which has been in operations for three years, she is now considering opening a second hot dog stand in another trendy location, on Ocean Drive in Sunset Key. Kelly has hired a consultant, Mark, for $5,000, whose market research shows that the clientele in both areas is similar. They are young professionals, typically without children, who like the traditional aspect of eating hot dogs, but also relish her gourmet, organic hot dogs and the healthy side dishes her stand also sells.
Kelly’s overall plan is to get the second stand up and running for ve years, and then sell both stands o to a new owner and travel around the world. Kelly estimates that the cost of the specialized kitchen equipment for the second hot dog stand is $69,000 and installation costs are $1,000. Kelly forecasts that she will need to invest $50,000 initially in net working capital for the new outlet. As annual sales are predicted to be stable, Kelly anticipates that she will need to maintain $50,000 in net working capital for each year of operating the second hot dog stand. She also estimates that yearly operating costs of the new location would be almost identical to those of her current stand. A more detailed breakdown of revenue and costs of the current stand are reported in table 1 of the appendix.
In addition to contributing prots, Kelly expects that opening a second stand will decrease the cost of producing hot dogs from 60 cents to 50 cents in both locations. This is due to economics of scale, since the new outlet would double output over the current level of demand.
Kelly has so far replied upon word-of-month for advertisement. Mark, the marketing consultant, recommends to her to advertise inside mobile Apps. He argues that, given the demographic of her customers, this will be an eective way to further maximize the synergy created by opening the second stand. His research shows that an annual advertising spending of $5,000 should bring additional revenue of $4,000 each year to each stand.
The kitchen equipment falls into the MACRS 7-year class. At the end of the fifth year, the equipment is expected to have a market value of $20,000.
Kelly expects that she will be able to manage both locations herself, avoiding hiring a second manager for the new location. Assume that the marginal tax rate is 35 percent and the required rate of return is 10 percent.
1. What is the initial investment outlay of the second hot dog stand?
2. What is the net salvage value of the kitchen equipment at the end of the fifth year?
3. Forecast the incremental cash ows generated by the second hot dog stand from Year 1 to Year 5.
4. What are the NPV, IRR and Protability Index of second hot dog stand? How long will it take for Kelly to recover her initial investment?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The KGV Blood Bank, a private charity partly supported by government grants, is located on the Caribbean island of St. Lucia. The blood bank has just finished its operations for September, which was a particularly busy month due to a powerful hurricane that hit neighboring islands causing many injuries. The hurricane largely bypassed St. Lucia, but residents of St. Lucia willingly donated their blood to help people on other islands. As a consequence, the blood bank collected and processed about 20% more blood than had been originally planned for the month.
A report prepared by a government official comparing actual costs to budgeted costs for the blood bank appears below. (The currency on St. Lucia is the East Caribbean dollar.) Continued support from the government depends on the blood bank s ability to demonstrate control over its costs.
|
KGV Blood Bank
|
|
|
Cost Control Report
|
|
|
For the Month Ended September 30
|
|
|
Planning Budget
|
Actual Results
|
Variances
|
|
Liters of blood collected . .
|
600
|
|
780
|
|
|
|
|
Medical supplies . . . . . . . .
|
$7,110
|
|
$9,252
|
|
$2,142
|
U
|
|
Lab tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
8,610
|
|
10,782
|
|
2,172
|
U
|
|
Equipment depreciation. .
|
1,900
|
|
2,100
|
|
200
|
U
|
|
Rent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
1,500
|
|
1,500
|
|
0
|
|
|
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
300
|
|
324
|
|
24
|
U
|
|
Administration . . . . . . . . .
|
14,310
|
|
14,575
|
|
265
|
U
|
|
Total expense . . . . . . . . . .
|
$33,730
|
|
$38,533
|
|
$4,803
|
U
|
The managing director of the blood bank was very unhappy with this report, claiming that his costs were higher than expected due to the emergency on the neighboring islands. He also pointed out that the additional costs had been fully covered by payments from grateful recipients on the other islands. The government official who prepared the report countered that all of the figures had been submitted by the blood bank to the government; he was just pointing out that actual costs were a lot higher than promised in the budget.
The following cost formulas were used to construct the planning budget:
|
Cost Formulas
|
|
Medical supplies . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$11.85q
|
|
Lab tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$14.35q
|
|
Equipment depreciation . . . . . . .
|
$1,900
|
|
Rent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$1,500
|
|
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$300
|
|
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$13,200 + $1.85q
|
Required:
1. Prepare a new performance report for September using the flexible budget approach.
2. Do you think any of the variances in the report you prepared should be investigated? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem #1
Kingdom Leasing Inc. agrees to lease jousting equipment to Knight Inc. on Jan 1, 2012. They agree on the following terms:
1) The normal selling price of the jousting equipment is $325000 and the cost of the asset to Kingdom Leasing Inc. was $250000.
2) Knight will pay all maintenance, insurance and taxes costs directly and annual payments of $60000 on Jan 1 each year.
3) The lease begins on Jan 1, 2012 and payments will be in equal annual installments.
4) The lease is non-cancelable with no renewal option. The lease term is 10 years (the same as the estimated economic life).
5) At the end of the lease, the jousting ring will revert to Kingdom Leasing Inc. and have an unguaranteed residual value of $30000. Their implicit interest rate is 10%.
6) Kingdom Leasing, Inc. Incurred costs of $6500 in negotiating and closing the lease. There are no uncertainties regarding additional costs yet to be incurred and the collectability of the lease payments is reasonably predictable.
Required:
a) Determine what type of lease this would be for the lessor and calculate the following: (show all work)
Lease Receivable
Sales Price
Cost of Sales
b) Prepare Kingdom’s amortization schedule for the lease terms.
c) Prepare all the journal entries for Kingdom for 2012. Assume a calendar year fiscal year.
Problem #2
Kingdom Leasing Inc. agrees to lease jousting equipment to Knight Inc. on Jan 1, 2012. They agree on the following terms:
1) The normal selling price of the jousting equipment is $325000 and the cost of the asset to Kingdom Leasing Inc. was $250000.
2) Knight will pay all maintenance, insurance and taxes costs directly and annual payments of $60000 on Jan 1 each year.
3) The lease begins on Jan 1, 2012 and payments will be in equal annual installments.
4) The lease is noncancelable with no renewal option. The lease term is 10 years (the same as the estimated economic life).
5) At the end of the lease, the jousting ring will revert to Kingdom Leasing Inc. and have an unguaranteed residual value of $30000. Their implicit interest rate is 10%.
6) Kingdom Leasing, Inc. Incurred costs of $6500 in negotiating and closing the lease. There are no uncertainties regarding additional costs yet to be incurred and the collectability of the lease payments is reasonably predictable.
Required:
a) Determine what type of lease this would be for the lessee and calculate the initial obligation.
b) Prepare Knight Inc.’s amortization schedule for the lease terms.
c) Prepare all the journal entries for Knight Inc. for 2012. Assume a calendar year fiscal year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem #1
Kingdom Leasing Inc. agrees to lease jousting equipment to Knight Inc. on Jan 1, 2012. They agree on the following terms:
1) The normal selling price of the jousting equipment is $325000 and the cost of the asset to Kingdom Leasing Inc. was $250000.
2) Knight will pay all maintenance, insurance and taxes costs directly and annual payments of $60000 on Jan 1 each year.
3) The lease begins on Jan 1, 2012 and payments will be in equal annual installments.
4) The lease is non-cancelable with no renewal option. The lease term is 10 years (the same as the estimated economic life).
5) At the end of the lease, the jousting ring will revert to Kingdom Leasing Inc. and have an unguaranteed residual value of $30000. Their implicit interest rate is 10%.
6) Kingdom Leasing, Inc. Incurred costs of $6500 in negotiating and closing the lease. There are no uncertainties regarding additional costs yet to be incurred and the collectability of the lease payments is reasonably predictable.
Required:
a) Determine what type of lease this would be for the lessor and calculate the following: (show all work)
Lease Receivable
Sales Price
Cost of Sales
b) Prepare Kingdom’s amortization schedule for the lease terms.
c) Prepare all the journal entries for Kingdom for 2012. Assume a calendar year fiscal year.
Problem #2
Kingdom Leasing Inc. agrees to lease jousting equipment to Knight Inc. on Jan 1, 2012. They agree on the following terms:
1) The normal selling price of the jousting equipment is $325000 and the cost of the asset to Kingdom Leasing Inc. was $250000.
2) Knight will pay all maintenance, insurance and taxes costs directly and annual payments of $60000 on Jan 1 each year.
3) The lease begins on Jan 1, 2012 and payments will be in equal annual installments.
4) The lease is noncancelable with no renewal option. The lease term is 10 years (the same as the estimated economic life).
5) At the end of the lease, the jousting ring will revert to Kingdom Leasing Inc. and have an unguaranteed residual value of $30000. Their implicit interest rate is 10%.
6) Kingdom Leasing, Inc. Incurred costs of $6500 in negotiating and closing the lease. There are no uncertainties regarding additional costs yet to be incurred and the collectability of the lease payments is reasonably predictable.
Required:
a) Determine what type of lease this would be for the lessee and calculate the initial obligation.
b) Prepare Knight Inc.’s amortization schedule for the lease terms.
c) Prepare all the journal entries for Knight Inc. for 2012. Assume a calendar year fiscal year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kingdom Leasing Inc. agrees to lease jousting equipment to Knight Inc. on Jan 1,2012. They agree on the following terms:
1) The normal selling price of the jousting equipment is $325000 and the cost of the asset to Kingdom Leasing Inc. was $250000. Fair Value 325000
2) Knight will pay all maintenance,insurance,and taxes costs directly and annual payments of $60000 on Jan 1 each year. Residual Value 30000
3) The lease begins on Jan 1, 2012 and payments will be in equal annual installments. Lease term 10
4) The lease is noncancelable with no renewal option. The lease terms is 10 years (the same as the estimated economic life). Lease payments 60000
5) At the end of the lease, the jousting ring will revert to Kingdom Leasing Inc. and have an unguaranteed residual value of $30000. Their implicit interest rate is 10%. manuf cost 250000
6) Kingdom Leasing, Inc. Incurred costs of $6500 in negotiating and closing the lease. There are no uncertainties regarding additional costs yet to be incurred and the collectibility of the lease payments is reasonably predictable. lease neg 6500
Required: PV res value 11566.2
a) Determine what type of lease this would be for the lessor and calculate the following: (show all work) $238,434
Lease Receivable
Sales Price
Cost of Sales
b) Prepare Kingdom’s amortization schedule for the lease terms.
c) Prepare all the journal entries for Kingdom for 2012. Assume a calendar year fiscal year.
2.
| Kingdom Leasing Inc. agrees to lease jousting equipment to Knight Inc. on Jan 1,2012. They agree on the following terms: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 1) The normal selling price of the jousting equipment is $325000 and the cost of the asset to Kingdom Leasing Inc. was $250000. |
|
Fair Value |
325000 |
| 2) Knight will pay all maintenance,insurance,and taxes costs directly and annual payments of $60000 on Jan 1 each year. |
|
Residual Value |
30000 |
| 3) The lease begins on Jan 1, 2012 and payments will be in equal annual installments. |
|
Lease term |
10 |
| 4) The lease is noncancelable with no renewal option. The lease terms is 10 years (the same as the estimated economic life). |
|
Lease payments |
60000 |
| 5) At the end of the lease, the jousting ring will revert to Kingdom Leasing Inc. and have an unguaranteed residual value of $30000. Their implicit interest rate is 10%. |
|
manuf cost |
250000 |
| 6) Kingdom Leasing, Inc. Incurred costs of $6500 in negotiating and closing the lease. There are no uncertainties regarding additional costs yet to be incurred and the collectibility of the lease payments is reasonably predictable. |
|
lease neg |
6500 |
|
|
|
|
| Required: |
|
PV res value |
11566.2 |
| a) Determine what type of lease this would be for the lessee and calculate the initial obligation. |
|
|
$ 238,434 |
| b) Prepare Knight Inc.’s amortization schedule for the lease terms. |
|
|
|
| c) Prepare all the journal entries for Knight Inc. for 2012. Assume a calendar year fiscal year. |
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kingston Company purchased a piece of equipment on January 1, 2012. The equipment cost $120,000 and had an estimated life of 8 years and a salvage value of $15,000. What was the depreciation expense for the asset for 2013 under the double-declining-balance method?
$22,500.
$30,000.
$13,000.
$23,438.
Which of the following statements concerning financial statement presentation is not a true statement?
The balances of all individual assets, as they appear in the subsidiary plant ledger, should be disclosed in the footnotes.
Intangibles are reported separately under Intangible Assets.
The balances of major classes of assets may be disclosed in the footnotes.
The balances of the accumulated depreciation of major classes of assets may be disclosed in the footnotes.
The book value of a plant asset is the difference between the
cost of the asset and the amount of depreciation expense for the year.
replacement cost of the asset and its historical cost.
cost of the asset and the accumulated depreciation to date.
proceeds received from the sale of the asset and its original cost.
Research and development costs
must be expensed when incurred under generally accepted accounting principles.
are classified as intangible assets.
are capitalized and then amortized over a period not to exceed 40 years.
should be included in the cost of the patent they relate to.
A company purchased factory equipment on June 1, 2013, for $80,000. It is estimated that the equipment will have a $5,000 salvage value at the end of its 10-year useful life. Using the straight-line method of depreciation, the amount to be recorded as depreciation expense at December 31, 2013, is
$7,500.
$3,750.
$4,375.
$3,125.
Interest may be included in the acquisition cost of a plant asset
if the asset acquisition is financed by a long-term note payable.
if it is a part of a lump-sum purchase.
during the construction period of a self-constructed asset.
if the asset is purchased on credit.
Gagner Clinic purchases land for $150,000 cash. The clinic assumes $1,500 in property taxes due on the land. The title and attorney fees totaled $1,000. The clinic has the land graded for $2,200. What amount does Gagner Clinic record as the cost for the land?
$150,000
$132,500
$154,700
$132,200
The effective-interest method for amortization of bond discounts is required under
Both GAAP and IFRS.
GAAP only.
IFRS only.
Neither GAAP or IFRS
If bonds can be converted into common stock,
they will carry a higher interest rate than comparable bonds without the conversion feature.
the bondholder may benefit if the market price of the common stock increases substantially.
they will be converted only if the issuer calls them in for conversion.
they will sell at a lower price than comparable bonds without a conversion feature.
The discount on bonds payable or premium on bonds payable is shown on the balance sheet as an adjustment to bonds payable to arrive at the carrying value of the bonds. Indicate the appropriate addition or subtraction to bonds payable:
Premium on Discount on
Bonds Payable Bonds Payable
Add Add
Deduct Add
Add Deduct
Deduct Deduct
From the standpoint of the issuing company, a disadvantage of using bonds as a means of long-term financing is that
income to stockholders may increase as a result of trading on the equity.
interest must be paid on a periodic basis regardless of earnings.
the bondholders do not have voting rights.
bond interest is deductible for tax purposes.
A bondholder that sends in a coupon to receive interest payments must have a(n)
mortgage bond.
unsecured bond.
bearer bond.
serial bond.
A cash register tape shows cash sales of $1,500 and sales taxes of $120. The journal entry to record this information is
Cash1,620
Sales Revenue1,620
Cash1,620
Sales Taxes Payable120
Sales Revenue1,500
Cash1,500
Sales Tax Expense120
Sales Revenue1,620
Cash1,620
Sales Revenue1,500
Sales Taxes Revenue 120
On August 1, 2012, a company borrowed cash and signed a one-year interest-bearing note on which both the face value and interest are payable on August 1, 2013. How will the note payable and the related interest be classified in the December 31, 2012, balance sheet?
Notes PayableInterest Payable
Current LiabilityCurrent liability
Noncurrent LiabilityNot shown
Current LiabilityNoncurrent liability
Noncurrent LiabilityCurrent liability
Admire County Bank agrees to lend Givens Brick Company $300,000 on January 1. Givens Brick Company signs a $300,000, 8%, 9-month note. What entry will Givens Brick Company make to pay off the note and interest at maturity assuming that interest has been accrued to September 30?
Interest Payable12,000
Notes Payable300,000
Interest Expense6,000
Cash 318,000
Notes Payable318,000
Cash 318,000
Notes Payable300,000
Interest Expense18,000
Cash318,000
Interest Expense18,000
Notes Payable300,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PART (i)
Jackson Company uses a perpetual inventory system and a job costing system at its plant. The plant has two production departments Machining and Assembly. Its job-costing system has two direct cost categories (direct materials and direct manufacturing labour) and two manufacturing overhead cost pools (the Machining Department, allocated using machine hours and the Assembly Department, allocated using direct manufacturing labour costs). The 2012 budget for the plant is as follows:
Machining Dept.
Assembly Dept.
Manufacturing Overhead
Direct manufacturing labour cost
Direct manufacturing labour-hours
Machine-hours
$1,800,000
$1,400,000
100,000
50,000
$3,600,000
$2,000,000
200,000
200,000
a) Calculate an overhead rate for each department. (2 marks)
b) During the month of November, the cost record for Job #520 shows the following:
Machining Dept.
Assembly Dept.
Direct material used
Direct manufacturing labour costs
Direct manufacturing labour-hours
Machine hours
$45,000
$14,000
1,000
2,000
$63,000
$15,000
1,500
1,000
What is the total manufacturing overhead allocated to Job #520? (2 marks)
c) Given that selling, distribution and administrative costs are absorbed in each job cost at 20% of prime cost & that Job #520 required special design costs of $7,000; calculate the total cost and quotation price of Job #520, where a mark-up of 33 1/3 % is applied to the selling price of all jobs. (6 marks)
d) Prepare the general journal entries necessary to reflect the following transactions related to Job #520, using the total figures for: – Direct materials used
– Direct labour cost incurred
– Special Design cost paid for by cash
– Manufacturing overheads applied
– Production cost of job completed
– Selling price of the job (6 marks)
e) At the end of 2012, the company had actually incurred the following:
Machining Dept.
Finishing Dept.
Manufacturing overhead incurred
Direct manufacturing labour costs
Machine-hours
$2,100,000
$1,980,000
55,000
$3,700,000
$2,200,000
210,000
Compute the manufacturing overhead variance for each department and for the plant as a whole. Show the journal entry necessary to dispose of this variance. (3 marks)
PART (ii) (25 marks)
Gambler Company produces a product by way of three consecutive processes. The following data relates to Process 3 for the month of April.
During April, 30,000 units valued at $29.55 each were transferred from Process 2 to Process 3.
Other costs incurred during the month were:
Direct Materials Added
Direct Labour
Manufacturing Overhead
$309,000
$458,600
$391,400
Normal losses are estimated to be 5% of the units transferred in from Process 2. Inspection takes place during the processing operation, at which point bad units are separated from good units and sold as scrap at $40 each.
At inspection, 4,000 units were rejected as scrap. These units had reached the following degree of completion:
Transfer from Process 2 100%
Direct material added 80%
Conversion costs 60%
Work-in-progress at the end of April was 5,000 units and had reached the following degree of completion:
Transfer from Process 2 100%
Materials added 55%
Conversion costs 50%
There were no incomplete units in Process 3 at the beginning of the period.
Materials added and conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the process.
Required:
(a) Complete the template given to determine the equivalent units for direct materials (From Process 2 & Materials added) and conversion costs. (10 marks)
(b) Compute the cost per univalent unit for direct materials and conversion costs. (4 marks)
(c) Compute:
The total cost of the units completed and transferred out
Cost of the unexpected losses
Cost of ending work in process inventory in Process 3. (3 marks)
(d) Prepare the Work in Process Inventory Process 3 T-account, clearly showing the ending balance. (4 marks)
(e) State the journal entries to record the assignment of direct materials and direct labour, the allocation of manufacturing overhead to the process and to record the cost of the units completed and transferred out to Finished Goods. (4 marks)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For this discussion, imagine that you have been asked to make a presentation before your organization’s board of directors on how financial information flows through an accounting information system. To make your presentation move smoothly from the beginning to the end and not to lose any of the board members (and to keep them awake), you have decided to make a chart that shows the flow of information and the steps necessary for their understanding. You also need to make some notes on each step so you have acheat sheet(Makes you look and sound brilliant. Think promotion!).
You need not make the chart so elaborate that it requires a special application program (Visio or PowerPoint) to display it for a wow factor. Keep your creation simple. Do not forget to include some notes on the flow and steps in your process. One more thing, do not use an attachment to display your results.
Post your information flow and notes to this discussion by midnight on Wednesday of this week. Refer to the Discussion Participation Scoring Guide for expectations on the post.
Response Guidelines
From the perspective of a new member of your board of directors who has a degree in biology, respond to the posts of at least two of your fellow learners with questions or issues they did not address in their original discussion by midnight on Sunday of this week. Critically evaluate the information flow and notes (not the diagram) that have been displayed in the discussion. Identify other issues that might not have been considered.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
We re continuing to analyze the same company as in modules 2, 3, and 4.
Based on additional information added in modules 3 and 4, please use the information below to make a statement of cash flows.
- The beginning cash balance is $30,000.
- Use the Net Income from Module 2.
- Use depreciation expense of Module 2.
- During the year 13, Inventory increases by $42,500.
- During the year 13, Land increases by $400,000.
- During the year 13, Long-Term Debts increase by $360,000.
- During the year 13, the company made a secondary offering of stock and raised an additional $150,000.
- During the year 13, the company had paid $15,000 in dividends.
Using the Indirect Method, prepare a statement of cash flows for the company in good format and compare two financial statements between the income statement and statement of cash flows. You do not need to include the income statement or balance sheet.
This is a Signature Assignment for ACC201 Module 5 SLP.
There are 2 specific learning outcomes: 1) apply business theories, models, and concepts to guide analysis of problems and situations and 2) utilize data driven analysis in making business decisions.
In this SLP assignment for Module 5 our emphasis will be on understanding the statement of cash flows. You will be summarizing all of what you learned the in the Cases, SLPs and TDs.
The grading rubric below has been developed to measure student success in meeting the ACC201 Module 5 SLP expectations related to applying your knowledge of the statement of cash flows and income statement on making business decisions.
|
|
Assignment Expectation
|
Weak (1)
|
Marginal (2)
|
Adequate (3)
|
Strong (4)
|
|
Organization
10%
|
Demonstrates the ability to create content logically, concisely, and in an appropriate manner to understanding of the statement of cash flows.
|
There is no logical sequence of information. Wording is rambling and unfocused.
|
Paper does not follow a logical sequence.
|
Paper follows a logical sequence. There are some minor problems with sub-classification and/or results are not clear.
|
Paper follows a logical sequence with a correct computation and results. Each activity relates to others in a carefully organized framework.
|
|
Demonstrates the ability to support a central point or viewpoint throughout the paper.
|
Insufficient elaboration and/or support (e.g., computation, each activity) in the paper.
|
Limited elaboration and/or support in the paper.
|
Support with some specific details and elaboration in the paper.
|
Support through both specific details and elaboration apparent in the paper.
|
|
Content
70%
|
Demonstrates the ability to calculate cash flows from each activity and compare cash flows with net income.
|
The purpose is not identified, is unclear, or inappropriate in the paper.
|
Purpose is occasionally unclear in the paper.
|
Clear purpose, but not consistently sustained throughout the paper.
|
Clear purpose sustained throughout the paper.
|
|
Demonstrates the ability to gather and sort accounting information and data on a particular activity.
|
Does not have a grasp of information and appropriate data. Topic is poorly created. Supporting explanations are absent or vague. Trite ideas and/or unclear wording reflect a lack of understanding of topic.
|
Seems uncomfortable with information and data. Topic is evident but with little or no elaboration.
|
Seems comfortable with the accounting information and data. Topic is evident with some supporting details.
|
Demonstrates full knowledge of the topic with explanation and elaboration. The topic is well developed, effectively supported, and appropriate for the assignment. Critical thinking is clearly and creatively expressed. Data choices are well thought out.
|
|
Delivery
20%
|
Demonstrates the ability to use appropriate word choice and grammar in the paper.
|
There are many sentences with grammatical errors. Some sentences are incomplete/halting, and/or vocabulary is somewhat limited or inappropriate.
|
There are a few sentences that are complete and grammatical. Word choice is not always appropriate for presentation.
|
Sentences are generally complete and grammatical, and they flow together easily. With a few exceptions, words are chosen for their precise meaning.
|
All sentences are complete and grammatical, and they flow together easily. Words are chosen for their precise meaning. Word choice illustrates grasp of content and enhances explanation.
|
|
Demonstrates the ability to make an effective explanation outline that is free from bias.
|
Words chosen for an explanation are inappropriate and exhibits bias. Some readers may be confused.
|
Words chosen for the paper are free from bias with one or two minor exceptions.
|
Words have no apparent bias. There is some inappropriate explanation.
|
Words and explanation are completely free from bias.
|
Post your assignment to CourseNet.
SLP 5 Assignment Expectations
- Create a statement of cash flows and compare cash flows with net income.
- Write 2-4 pages, showing computations and discussing the results
- cite and list all references
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
We re continuing to analyze the same company as in modules 2 and 3.
Additional information added in module 3:
- One client had indicated that they were interested in purchasing $42,500 worth of products. However, the client has not actually committed to the purchase.
- The bookkeeper already corrected the sales account. However, the bookkeeper may have made a mistake when computing cost of goods sold. She included total production costs for 2012 and did not adjust ending inventory for the $42,500 worth of units left at the end of the year. The amount of ending inventory was determined using a physical count.
Additional information for module 4:
- The company made a secondary offering of stock and raised an additional $150,000.
- The company had already paid $15,000 in dividends before deciding on the offering.
- The company now has cash to invest in a piece of raw land on which to build in the future. The investment takes place before year end. The cost of the land is $400,000, the downpayment is $40,000 and a note to the bank covers the rest.
|
Nybrostrand Company
|
|
31-Dec-13
|
|
Trial Balance (accounts in alphabetical order)
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
$ 78,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$ 36,500
|
|
|
Cash
|
30,000
|
|
|
Common stock
|
|
10,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
24,350
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
307,000
|
|
|
Equipment (net of depreciation)
|
415,000
|
|
|
Insurance
|
1,400
|
|
|
Inventory
|
34,000
|
|
|
Long-term debt
|
|
127,000
|
|
Marketing
|
4,500
|
|
|
Paid-in capital
|
|
50,000
|
|
Property taxes
|
16,900
|
|
|
Rent
|
28,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
|
|
Revenues
|
|
586,000
|
|
Salaries
|
50,000
|
|
|
Utilities
|
6,700
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total
|
954,350
|
851,000
|
|
|
|
Prepare a balance sheet for the company in good format. Update the balance sheet for the changes to income in module 3 and also consider the effect of paying the dividend. You do not need to include the income statement.
The submission should be 2 to 4 pages and need to include answers to all the questions listed above. Show computations, discuss the results and include references in APA format
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jane Kent is a licensed CPA (Accountant). During the first month of operations of her business, Jane Kent, Inc., the following events and transactions occurred:
May 1 Stockholders invested $25,000 cash in exchange for common stock.
2 Hired a secretary-receptionist at a salary of $2,000 per month.
3 Purchased $2,500 of supplies on account from Read Supply Company.
7 Paid office rent of $900 cash for the month.
11 Completed a tax assignment and billed client $2,100 for services provided.
12 Received $3,500 advance on a management consulting engagement.
17 Received cash of $1,200 for services completed for H. Arnold Co.
31 Paid secretary-receptionist $2,000 salary for the month.
31 Paid 40% of balance due Read Supply Company.
Jane uses the following chart of accounts: No. 101 Cash, No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 126 Supplies, No. 201 Accounts Payable, No. 205 Unearned Revenue, No. 311 Common Stock, No. 400 Service Revenue, No. 726 Salaries Expense, and No. 729 Rent Expense.
Requirements:
a. Journalize the transactions
b. Post to the ledger accounts
c. Prepare a trial balance on May 31, 2011
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, 2011, Lurch, Inc. had the following stockholders equity balances.
Common Stock (500,000 shares issued) $1,000,000
Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value 500,000
Common Stock Dividends Distributable 100,000
Retained Earnings 600,000
During 2011, the following transactions and events occurred.
1. Issued 50,000 shares of $2 par value common stock as a result of 10% stock dividend declared on December 15, 2010.
2. Issued 30,000 shares of common stock for cash at $5 per share.
3. Purchased 25,000 shares of common stock for the treasury at $6 per share.
4. Declared and paid a cash dividend of $111,000.
5. Sold 8,000 shares of treasury stock for cash at $6 per share.
6. Earned net income of $360,000.
Instructions
Prepare a stockholders equity statement section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. On January 1, 2013, Daniels Corporation issued $5,000,000, 10-year, 8% bonds at 103. Interest is payable semiannually on January 1 and July 1. The journal entry to record this transaction on January 1, 2013 is
a. Cash 5,000,000
Bonds Payable 5,000,000
b. Cash 5,150,000
Bonds Payable 5,150,000
c. Premium on Bonds Payable 150,000
Cash 5,000,000
Bonds Payable 5,150,000
d. Cash 5,150,000
Bonds Payable 5,000,000
Premium on Bonds Payable 150,000
2. Levin Company issued 500 shares of no-par common stock for $5,500. Which of the following journal entries would be made if the stock has a stated value of $2 per share?
a. Cash 5,500
Common Stock 5,500
b. Cash 5,500
Common Stock 1,000 Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par 4,500
c. Cash 5,500
Common Stock 1,000
Paid-in Capital in Excess of Stated Value 4,500
d. Common Stock 5,500
Cash 5,500
3. Motes industries owns 45% of Newton Company. For the current year, Newton reports net income of $250,000 and declares and pays a $60,000 cash dividend. Which of the following correctly presents the journal entries to record Motes equity in Newton s net income and the receipt of dividends from Newton?
a. Dec. 31 Stock Investments 112,500
Revenue from Stock Investments 112,500
Dec. 31 Cash 27,000
Stock Investments 27,000
b. Dec. 31 Stock Investments 112,500
Revenue from Stock Investments 112,500
Dec. 31 Cash 60,000
Stock Investments 60,000
c. Dec. 31 Stock Investments 85,500
Revenue from Stock Investments 85,500
Dec. 31 Cash 27,000
Stock Investments 27,000
d. Dec. 31 Revenue from Stock Investments 112,500
Stock Investments 112,500
Dec. 31 Stock Investments 27,000
Cash 27,000
4. Talbot, Inc. has the following income statement (in millions):
Wilkinson, INC.
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 3
Net Sales $300
Cost of Goods Sold 120
Gross Profit 180
Operating Expenses 44
Net Income $136
Using vertical analysis, what percentage is assigned to Cost of Goods Sold?
a. 30%
b. 40%
c. 100%
d. None of the above
5. Mah, Inc. completed Job No. B14 during 2013. The job cost sheet listed the following:
Direct materials $55,000
Direct labor $30,000
Manufacturing overhead applied $20,000
Units produced 3,000 units
Units sold 1,800 units
How much is the cost of the finished goods on hand from this job?
a. $105,000
b. $63,000
c. $42,000
d. $51,000
6. In the month of June, a department had 20,000 units in beginning work in process that were 70% complete. During June, 80,000 units were transferred into production from another department. At the end of June there were 10,000 units in ending work in process that were 40% complete. Materials are added at the beginning of the process, while conversion costs are incurred uniformly throughout the process. The equivalent units of production for materials for June were
a. 90,000 equivalent units.
b. 100,000 equivalent units.
c. 104,000 equivalent units.
d. 80,000 equivalent units.
7. A company budgeted unit sales of 204,000 units for January, 2013 and 240,000 units for February, 2013. The company has a policy of having an inventory of units on hand at the end of each month equal to 30% of next month’s budgeted unit sales. If there were 61,200 units of inventory on hand on December 31, 2013, how many units should be produced in January, 2013 in order for the company to meet its goals?
a. 214,800 units
b. 204,000 units
c. 193,200 units
d. 276,000 units
8. A company’s planned activity level for next year is expected to be 200,000 machine hours. At this level of activity, the company budgeted the following manufacturing overhead costs:
Variable Fixed
Indirect materials $280,000 Depreciation $120,000
Indirect labor 400,000 Taxes 20,000
Factory supplies 40,000 Supervision 100,000
A flexible budget prepared at the 160,000 machine hours level of activity would show total manufacturing overhead costs of
a. $576,000.
b. $720,000.
c. $768,000.
d. $816,000.
9. A company developed the following per-unit standards for its product: 2 pounds of direct materials at $4 per pound. Last month, 1,500 pounds of direct materials were purchased for $5,700. The direct materials price variance for last month was
a. $5,700 favorable.
b. $300 favorable.
c. $150 favorable.
d. $300 unfavorable.
10. In incremental analysis,
a. costs are not relevant if they change between alternatives.
b. all costs are relevant if they change between alternatives.
c. only fixed costs are relevant.
d. only variable costs are relevant.
Problem 1:
Here are comparative balance sheets for Hayes Company.
Hayes Company
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31, 2013
Assets 2013 2012
Cash $ 43,000 $ 10,000
Accounts receivable 18,000 14,000
Inventories 25,000 18,000
Prepaid expenses 6,000 9,000
Long-term investments 0 18,000
Equipment 60,000 32,000
Accumulated depreciation Equipment (20,000) (14,000)
Total assets $ 122,000 $ 87,000
Liabilities and Stockholder s Equity
Accounts payable $ 17,000 $ 7,000
Bonds payable 37,000 47,000
Common stock ($1 par) 40,000 23,000
Retained earnings 28,000 10,000
Total liabilities and stockholder s equity $ 122,00 $ 87,000
Additional information:
1. The 2013 Income Statement reported $6,000 in depreciation expense, a $4,000 loss on
sale of investments and Net income of $43,000.
2. Cash dividends of $15,000 were declared and paid.
3. Long-term investments that has a cost of $18,000 were sold for $14,000
4. Sales for 2013 were $120,000.
Instructions: Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2013 using the indirect method.
Hayes Company
Statement of Cash Flows
For the Year Ended December 31, 2013
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities
Problem 2:
Doherty Corporation is projecting a cash balance of $31,785 in its December 31, 2013, balance sheet. Doherty schedule of expected collections from customers for the first quarter of 2013 shows total collections of $189,885. The schedule of expected payments for direct materials for the first quarter of 2013 shows total payments of $40,200. Other information gathered for the first quarter of 2013 is: sale of equipment $3,392; direct labor $70,178, manufacturing overhead $34,583, and purchase of securities $12,372. Selling and administrative expenses are projected to be $45,117; this figure includes $1,117 in depreciation expense on the office equipment. All costs and expenses will be paid in cash. Doherty wants to maintain a balance of at least $30,000 cash at the end of each quarter.
Instructions: Complete the cash budget for the first quarter.
Doherty Corporation
Cash Budget
For the Quarter Ending March 31, 2013
Problem 3
Delaney Corporation has the following cost records for February 2013.
Indirect factory labor $ 4,612 Factory utilities $ 601
Direct materials used 22,361 Depreciation, factory equipment 1,585
Work in process, 6/1/12 2,769 Direct labor 31,084
Work in process, 6/30/12 3,733Maintenance, factory equipment 1,792
Finished goods, 6/1/12 4,609 Indirect materials 2,268
Finished goods, 6/30/12 7,429 Factory manager’s salary 3,315
Instructions: Prepare a cost of goods manufactured schedule for February 2013.
Delaney Corporation
Cost of Goods Manufactured Schedule
For the Month Ended June 30, 2013
Manufacturing overhead:
Problem 4:
Wallace Corporation has 72,615 shares of common stock outstanding. It declares a $2.10 per share cash dividend on August 1 to stockholders of record on September 15. The dividend is paid on October 31.
Instructions: Prepare the entries on the appropriate dates to record the declaration and payment of the cash dividend.
Date Account Description Debit Credit
Problem 5:
Hawkins Manufacturing incurs unit costs of $7.90 ($6.10 variable and $1.80 fixed) in making a sub-assembly part for its finished product. A supplier offers to make 12,000 of the assembly part at $5.75 per unit. If the offer is accepted, Hawkins will save all variable costs but no fixed costs.
Instructions: Prepare an analysis showing the total cost savings, if any, Hawkins will realize by buying the part.
Make Buy
Total annual cost
Hawkins Company should _______________ the part because total annual costs to
make are less than total costs to buy.
Problem 6
On July 1, Ketel Corporation purchases 500,000 shares of its $6 par value common stock for the treasury at a cash price of $10 per share. On September 1, it sells 275,000 shares of the treasury stock for cash at $13 per share. The balance in the retained earnings account is $6,345,000.
Instructions: Journalize the two treasury stock transactions.
Date Account Description Debit Credit
Problem 7:
Reed Company has a unit-selling price of $500, variable costs per unit of $269, and fixed costs of $265,580.
Instructions: Compute the break-even point in units using either (a) the mathematical equation or (b) contribution margin per unit. Round answer up to the next whole unit.
Problem 8:
Lopez Company has a factory machine with a book value of $89,851 and a remaining useful life of 4 years. A new machine is available at a cost of $325,275. This machine will have a 4-year useful life with no salvage value. The new machine will lower annual variable manufacturing costs from $630,925 to $425,840.
Instructions: Prepare an analysis showing whether the old machine should be retained or replaced.
Retain Equipment Replace Equipment
Total costs
The equipment should be _______________ because total costs are lower than to retain the machine.
Problem 9:
For Mathers Company, variable costs are 68% of sales, and fixed costs are $215,000. Management’s net income goal is $68,610.
Instructions: Compute the required sales needed to achieve management’s target net income of $78,610.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, 2014, Harter Company had Accounts Receivable $127,600, Notes Receivable $25,200, and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $15,000. The note receivable is from Willingham Company. It is a 4-month, 8% note dated December 31, 2013. Harter Company prepares financial statements annually at December 31. During the year, the following selected transactions occurred.
| Jan. 5 |
|
Sold $20,200 of merchandise to Sheldon Company, terms n/15. |
| 20 |
|
Accepted Sheldon Company s $20,200, 3-month, 7% note for balance due. |
| Feb. 18 |
|
Sold $8,200 of merchandise to Patwary Company and accepted Patwary s $8,200, 6-month, 8% note for the amount due. |
| Apr. 20 |
|
Collected Sheldon Company note in full. |
| 30 |
|
Received payment in full from Willingham Company on the amount due. |
| May 25 |
|
Accepted Potter Inc. s $4,200, 3-month, 6% note in settlement of a past-due balance on account. |
| Aug. 18 |
|
Received payment in full from Patwary Company on note due. |
| 25 |
|
The Potter Inc. note was dishonored. Potter Inc. is not bankrupt; future payment is anticipated. |
| Sept. 1 |
|
Sold $10,580 of merchandise to Stanbrough Company and accepted a $10,580, 6-month, 9% note for the amount due.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Five Assignment
1. Basic present value calculations
Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar:
a. A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at an 11% rate of return.
b. An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at an 11% rate of return.
c. A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 12% rate of return.
d. An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has an 11% rate of return.
2. Cash flow calculationsand net present value
On January 2, 20X7, Brian Rein invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.70 per share in 20X7 and 20X8; the dividend was raised to $3.30 per share in 20X9. On December 31, 20X9, Rein sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,100. Rein uses the net-present- value method and desires a 16% return on investments.
a. Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note:Rein is entitled to the 20X9 dividend.
b. Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar.
c. Given the results of part (b), should Rein have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain.
3. Net present value
The City of Brighton is studying a 550-acre site on Route 401 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows:
Purchase cost: $400 per acre
Site preparation: $180,000
The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Brighton, which shares a facility in Bath Township with other municipalities, estimates that the new location will save $40,000 in annual operating costs.
a. Should the landfill be acquired if Brighton desires an 8% return on its investment? Use the net-present-value method to determine your answer.
4. Net-present-value
ABC Entertainment is considering the acquisition of a sight-seeing boat for summer tours along the Mississippi River. The following information is available:
|
Cost of boat
|
$550,000
|
|
Service life
|
10 summer seasons
|
|
Disposal value at the end of 10 seasons
|
$100,000
|
|
Capacity per trip
|
260 passengers
|
|
Fixed operating costs per season (including straight-line depreciation)
|
$160,000
|
|
Variable operating costs per trip
|
$1,000
|
|
Ticket price
|
$6 per passenger
|
All operating costs, except depreciation, require cash outlays. On the basis of similar operations in other parts of the country, management anticipates that each trip will be sold out and that 130,000 passengers will be carried each season. Ignore income taxes.
Instructions:
By using the net-present-value method, determine whether ABC Entertainment should acquire the boat. Assume a 14% desired return on all investments,- round calculations to the nearest dollar.
5. Equipment replacement decision
Richardson Enterprises is studying the replacement of some equipment that originally cost $74,000. The equipment is expected to provide six more years of service if $8,500 of major repairs are performed in two years. Annual cash operating costs total $28,000. Richardson can sell the equipment now for $37,000; the estimated residual value in six years is $5,000.
New equipment is available that will reduce annual cash operating costs to $21,000. The equipment costs $105,000, has a service life of six years, and has an estimated residual value of $13,000. Company sales will total $430,000 per year with either the existing or the new equipment. Richardson has a minimum desired return of 12% and depreciates all equipment by the straight-line method.
Instructions:
a. By using the net-present-value method, determine whether Richardson should keep its present equipment or acquire the new equipment. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar, and ignore income taxes.
b. Richardson s management feels that the time value of money should be considered in all long-term decisions. Briefly discuss the rationale that underlies management’s belief.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
18.In January 2007, installation costs of $8,000 on new machinery were charged to Repair Expense. Other costs of this machinery of $30,000 were correctly recorded and have been depreciated using the straight-line method with an estimated life of 10 years and no salvage value. At December 31, 2008, it is decided that the machinery has a remaining useful life of 20 years, starting with January 1, 2008. What entry(ies) should be made in 2008 to correctly record transactions related to machinery, assuming the machinery has no salvage value? The books have not been closed for 2008 and depreciation expense has not yet been recorded for 2008.
Please answer question 18 from Ch 22. What did you find to be the most challenging part of the problem? Explain why
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Develop a system that keeps track of preschool students. There are four types
of preschoolers: Guppies, who are two; Puppies, who are three; Tigers, who are
four; and Lions, who are five.
Each group needs a special list of school materials. Guppies need paste and
colored paper. Puppies need paste, colored paper, and rulers. Tigers need
the supplies of the younger students plus a notebook and pencil. Lions need
all of this and scissors.
Ms. Smith teaches the Guppies and Puppies. Ms. Jones teaches the Tigers. Ms.
Anderson teaches the Lions.
Your system should capture the name, age, and school group (which is determined by
age) of “n” number of preschoolers. Note that if the user does not enter a school group,
the group appropriate for that age should be added for the student.
Each type of student (Guppies, Puppies, etc.) should be separate
classes that all inherit from a common parent, “preschoolStudent”. The parent
class should have defaults for each of the data variables and methods needed.
Your application should store the individual objects in an ArrayList, and should
allow the inputing of “n” number of records. The only attributes that the user
must input are the name and age of each entered student (be sure to handle
the entry of different data types with a try catch block). Group is optional, with the
system ascertaining the appropriate preschool class for each one.
Your application should also print out a report that groups each class, with the
teacher and students, along with the supply list.
Example (Data entry):
Name: Timmy Jones
Age: 4
Name: Suzy Smith
Age: 5
Name: Mikey Nesmith
Age: 2
Name: Pablo Garcia
Age: 4
Group: Tiger
(Print out):
Guppies Ms. Smith
Mikey Nesmith
Supplies needed: …
Puppies Ms. Smith
Supplies needed: …
Tigers Ms. Jones
Timmy Jones
Supplies needed: …
Lions Ms. Anderson
Suzy Smith
Pablo Garcia
Supplies needed: …
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question
Javier and Anita Sanchez purchased a home on January 1 of year 1 for $500,000 by paying $50,000 down and borrowing the remaining $450,000 with a 7 percent loan secured by the home. The loan requires interest-only payments for the first five years. The Sanchezes would itemize deductions even if they did not have any deductible interest.
a. Assume the Sanchezes also took out a second loan secured by the home for $80,000 to fund expenses unrelated to the home. The interest rate on the second loan is 8 percent. The Sanchezes make interest-only payments on the loan in year 1. What is the amount of their deductible interest expense on the second loan in year 1?
b. Assume the original facts and that the Sanchezes take out a second loan secured by the home in the amount of $50,000 to fund expenses unrelated to the home. The interest rate on the second loan is 8 percent. The Sanchezes make interest-only payments during the year. What is the amount of their deductible interest expense on the second loan in year 1?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jefferson Jerome is interested in purchasing Art Specialists, Inc. , an auction
house. The company receives the right to sell art, but not to purchase the art
themselves, for a 5% commission. Art Specialists rents office space and holds its
auctions at local hotels.
Art Specialists, Inc.
Unadjusted Trial Balance
|
December 31, 2009
Cash
|
$ 65,000.00
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$ 36,000.00
|
|
Supplies
|
$ 8,000.00
|
|
Equipment
|
$ 53,000.00
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
$ 14,500.00
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 5,600.00
|
|
Dividends
|
$ 50,000.00
|
|
Capital stock
|
$ 25,000.00
|
|
Retained earnings
|
$ 84,900.00
|
|
Commission income
|
$ 250,000.00
|
|
Rent Expense
|
$ 20,000.00
|
|
Wages Expense
|
$ 70,000.00
|
|
Auction Expenses
|
$ 56,000.00
|
|
Depreciation Expenses
|
$ 7,000.00
|
|
Membership Expenses
|
$ 6,000.00
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
$ 9,000.00
|
|
TOTAL
|
$ 380,000.00
|
$ 380,000.00
|
As Jefferson s accountant, you have received the trial balance above as well as
the general ledger. The review has found the following errors:
Year end bank reconciliation showed that the balance should be $40,000.
A customer should have been billed for $25,000, but it was recorded as a
cash payment of the commission income.
Membership expenses are not related to the business and should be
shown as a dividend to shareholder.
Depreciation expense should be $3,500 for the year.
Supplies expenses failed to record $2,000 in packing supplies used during
the year.
Accounts receivables that have not been billed $10,000.
Required:
1. Record the correcting entry.
2. Prepare financial statements
3. Current owners want $200,000 for the business. Jefferson does not want to pay more than Net Worth x 1.5. Should he buy?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jenkins Company uses a job order cost system with overhead applied to jobs on the basis of direct labor hours. The direct labor rate is $20 per hour, and the predetermined overhead rate is $15 per direct labor hour. The company worked on three jobs during April. Jobs A and B were in process at the beginning of April. Job A was completed and delivered to the customer. Job B was completed during April, but not sold. Job C was started during April, but not completed. The job cost sheets revealed the following costs for April:
Required:
If no other jobs were started, completed, or sold, determine the balance in each of the following accounts at the end of April:
a. Work in Process
b. Finished Goods
c. Cost of Goods Sold
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Jess Gilmore Company specialized in the purchase, renovation, and resale of older homes. Jess employs several carpenters and painters to do the work for him. It is essential for im to have accurate cost estimates so he can determine total renovation costs before he purchases a piece of property. If estimated renovation costs plus the purchase price of a house are higher than its estimated resale value, the house is not a worthwhile investment.
Jess has been using the home s interior square feet for his exterior paint cost estimations. Recently he decided to include the number of openings- the total number of doors and windows in a house as a cost driver. Their cost is significant because they require time-consuming preparatory work and careful brushwork. The rest of the house usually is painted either by rollers or spray guns, which are relatively efficient ways to apply paint to a large area. Jess has kept careful records of these expenses on his last 12 jobs:
House Square Feet Openings Cost
1 2,600 13 $3,335
2 3,010 15 $3,742
3 2,800 12 $3,100
4 2,850 12 $3.150
5 4,600 19 $4,700
6 2,700 13 $3,225
7 2,375 11 $2,920
8 2,450 11 $2,836
9 2,600 10 $2,945
10 3,700 16 $4,112
11 2,650 13 $3,210
12 3,550 16 $3,965
1. Using the high-low cost estimation technique, determine the cost of painting a 3,300 square foot house with 14 openings. Also determine the cost for a 2,400 square foot house with 8 openings.
2. Plot the cost data against square feet and against openings. Which variable is a better cost driver? Why?
3. What are the sustainability issues for this company, and what is the role of cost estimation in this regards?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jiranna Healthcare owns and operates a 268-bed hospital in the San Jose area. The hospital is Jiranna Healthcare%u2019s main facility and is home to more than 80 on-site specialty and surgery clinics, employing over 5,000 staff. In addition to the main hospital, Jiranna Healthcare has 18 satellite clinics, containing primary care services such as pediatrics, family medicine, and geriatric health. These facilities (hospital plus outlying clinics) serve a total enrollee population of 97,000.
Currently, Jiranna Healthcare%u2019s centralized call center schedules primary care appointments and handles an average of 1,500 to 2,000 calls daily with a staff of 20. Patients routinely have difficulty obtaining access to urgent or acute care (primary care) in a timely fashion. Additionally, the majority of Jiranna Healthcare%u2019s primary care centers are unable to meet access standards in three out of four cases. These access issues have a secondary effect on the call center, which experiences a much higher call rate because members have to call back multiple times to find available appointments. The existing process leads to overutilization of emergency departments for urgent care and primary care concerns. In addition, patient satisfaction has steadily declined as a result of the continued lack of appointment availability.
To address this problem, there is a proposal to implement a centralized nurse triage line, an off-site phone center that would be staffed by registered nurses with a multitude of specialties (including ER nurses, critical care, surgical, and even some nurse practitioners). These nurses are able to offer callers medical advice encompassing the treatment of fevers, wound care, and emergent conditions such as chest pain. The nurses are trained to triage conditions to the appropriate level of care be that at home, at an urgent care center, or at an emergency department.
The major cost impact is the increased salary requirement for the phone center staff, which will entail approximately 33 multi-discipline employees, based on workload and enrollment data. Additional elements of the proposal include hiring an IT specialist to manage the triage line%u2019s computer system, and facility renovations. The main benefit of this proposal is projected cost reductions in patient care as a result of moving primary care out of the expensive emergency-room setting.
Assignment
The Capital Project Case Study, Part 2 spreadsheet provides cash flow data (costs and benefits) for the proposal. Download and save this Excel spreadsheet, and use the information provided to complete the following:
1. Determine the cash inflows and outflows for each year.
2. Evaluate the capital project by calculating the following metrics:
a. net present value (NPV)
b. internal rate of return (IRR)
c. modified internal rate of return (MIRR)
d. payback period
e. discounted payback period
3. Indicate whether the project is acceptable, assuming Jiranna has a corporate policy of not accepting projects that take more than 3.5 years to pay for themselves, and assuming an 11% cost of capital.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job Costing Problem
Hoover Inc. uses a job-order coding system. The company s inventory balances on February 1, the start of its fiscal year, were as follows:
|
Raw Materials Inventory
|
$69,325
|
|
Work in Process Inventory
|
$55,100
|
|
Finished Goods Inventory
|
$81,256
|
During the year, the following transactions were completed:
1.
Raw materials were purchased on account, $215,221.
2.
Raw materials were issued from the storeroom for use in production, $198,000 (70% direct and 30% indirect).
3.
Employee salaries and wages were accrued as follows: direct labor, $243,300; indirect labor, $98,750; and selling and administrative salaries, $72,340.
4.
Utility costs were incurred in the factory, $79,233.
5.
Advertising costs were incurred. $110,600.
6.
Prepaid insurance expired during the year, $35,000 (80% related to factory operations, and 20% related to selling and administrative activities).
7.
Depreciation was recorded, $192,100 (75% related to factory assets, and 25% related to selling and administrative assets).
8.
Manufacturing overhead was applied to jobs at the rate of 160% of direct labor cost.
9.
Goods that cost $720,200 to manufacture according to their job cost sheets were transferred to the finished goods warehouse.
10.
Sales for the year totaled $1,293,300 and were all on account. The total cost to manufacture these goods according to their job cost sheets was $725,825.
Submit an Excel document which each tab labeled by item number in good form that demonstrates the following:
1.
Prepare the journal entries to record the transactions for the year.
2.
Prepare the T-accounts for raw materials inventory, work in process inventory, finished goods inventory, manufacturing overhead, and cost of goods sold. Don t forget to enter the beginning balances in the inventory accounts.
3.
Is manufacturing overhead underapplied or overapplied for the year Prepare a journal entry to close this balance to cost of goods sold.
Production Data
Maple, Inc. manufactures syrup that goes through three processing stages prior to completion. Information on work in the first department, Blending, is given below for August:
|
Production data:
|
|
|
Pounds in process, August 1; materials 100% complete; conversion 70% complete
|
3,000
|
|
|
Pounds started into production during August
|
85,000
|
|
|
Pounds completed and transferred out
|
?
|
|
|
Pounds in process, August 31; materials 80% complete; conversion 30% complete
|
6,000
|
|
Cost data:
|
|
|
Work in process inventory, August 1: Materials cost
|
$900
|
|
|
Conversion cost
|
$5,900
|
|
|
Cost added during May: Materials cost
|
$151,000
|
|
|
Conversion cost
|
$161,700
|
The company uses the weighted-average method.
Submit an Excel document which each tab labeled by item number in good form that demonstrates the following:
1.
Compute the equivalent units of production.
2.
Compute the costs per equivalent unit for the month.
3.
Determine the cost of ending work in process inventory and of the units transferred out to the next department.
4.
Prepare a cost reconciliation schedule for the month.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Johnson Corporation’s lead accountant shows the following information:
On 1/1/2012, Johnson purchased a bottling machine for $800,000
A) Straight-Line basis Depreciation for 5 years for tax purposes. (Use the half-year convention for tax purposes. Half a year of depreciation is allowable in the year of acquisition and in the year of disposition. A Company depreciates an asset to zero value so that there is no salvage value at the end of its MACRS life. Use the IRS-published MACRS table of MACRS Depreciation Rates, by Property Class.
B) Use the 8-Year Useful Life for Financial Reporting.
C) Tax-Exempt Municipal Bonds yielded Interest of $1,500,000 in 2013.
D) Pretax financial income is $2,300,000 in 2012 and $2,400,000 in 2013.
E) The company recognized an Extraordinary Gain of $150,000 in 2013 (which is fully taxable).
F) Taxable Income is expected in future years with an expected tax rate of 35%.
Required:
1) Compute Taxable Income & Income Taxes Payable for 2013.
2) Prepare the Journal Entries for Income tax Expense, Income Taxes Payable, and Deferred Taxes for 2013.
3) Prepare the Deferred Income Taxes presentation for 12/31/2013 Balance Sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Johnson Corporation’s lead accountant shows the following information:
On 1/1/2012, Johnson purchased a bottling machine for $800,000
A) Straight-Line basis Depreciation for 5 years for tax purposes. (Use the half-year convention for tax purposes. Half a year of depreciation is allowable in the year of acquisition and in the year of disposition. A Company depreciates an asset to zero value so that there is no salvage value at the end of its MACRS life. Use the IRS-published MACRS table of MACRS Depreciation Rates, by Property Class.
B) Use the 8-Year Useful Life for Financial Reporting.
C) Tax-Exempt Municipal Bonds yielded Interest of $1,500,000 in 2013.
D) Pretax financial income is $2,300,000 in 2012 and $2,400,000 in 2013.
E) The company recognized an Extraordinary Gain of $150,000 in 2013 (which is fully taxable).
F) Taxable Income is expected in future years with an expected tax rate of 35%.
Required:
1) Compute Taxable Income & Income Taxes Payable for 2013.
2) Prepare the Journal Entries for Income tax Expense, Income Taxes Payable, and Deferred Taxes for 2013.
3) Prepare the Deferred Income Taxes presentation for 12/31/2013 Balance Sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jonathan Macintosh is a highly successful Pennsylvania orchardman who has formed his own company
to produce and package applesauce. Apples can be stored for several months in cold storage, so applesauce
production is relatively uniform throughout the year. The recently hired controller for the firm is
about to apply the high-low method in estimating the company s energy cost behavior. The following
costs were incurred during the past 12 months:
Month Pints of Applesauce Produced Energy Cost
January ………………………………………………………. 35,000 ………………………………………. $23,400
February ……………………………………………………… 21,000 ………………………………………. 22,100
March ………………………………………………………… 22,000 ………………………………………. 22,000
April …………………………………………………………… 24,000 ………………………………………. 22,450
May …………………………………………………………… 30,000 ………………………………………. 22,900
June ………………………………………………………….. 32,000 ………………………………………. 23,350
July ……………………………………………………………. 40,000 ………………………………………. 28,000
August ……………………………………………………….. 30,000 ………………………………………. 22,800
September …………………………………………………… 30,000 ………………………………………. 23,000
October ………………………………………………………. 28,000 ………………………………………. 22,700
November ……………………………………………………. 41,000 ………………………………………. 24,100
December …………………………………………………… 39,000 ………………………………………. 24,950
Required:
1.Use the high-low method to estimate the company s energy cost behavior and express it in
equation f orm.
2.Predict the energy cost for a month in which 26,000 pints of applesauce are produced.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Introduction: The purpose of this assignment is for you to learn more about the fair value disclosure requirements included in the FASB Accounting Standards Codification (the Codification). You will do so by examining fair value disclosures included in the following filings:
Form 10-Q for The Goldman Sachs Group, Inc. (GS) for its quarter ended June 30, 2013, filed with the SEC on August 8, 2013.
The majority of the questions in this assignment can be answered by referring to the financial statements (Item 1) and Notes to Financial Statements in these Form 10-Qs.
1)Under what circumstances does Goldman Sachs classify over-the-counter derivative contracts within Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy?
Answer:
2)How are trading assets and trading liabilities classified within Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy initially valued and why How are they valued subsequently and when are the inputs and assumptions changed?
Answer:
3)As of June 30, 2013, approximately what percentages of Goldman s financial assets measured at fair value fall within Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy, respectively Show your calculations.
Answer:
4)As of June 30, 2013, approximately what percentages of Goldman s financial liabilities measured at fair value fall within Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy, respectively Show your calculations.
Answer:
5)What is the total amount of unrealized gain or loss on Goldman Sachs financial assets and financial liabilities classified within Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy that are still held at the June 30, 2013 reporting date for the three months ended on that date For the six months ended on that date?
Answer:
6)What is the amount of transfers between the levels 1 & 2 of the fair value hierarchy for the three months ending June 30,2013 For the six months ending on that date?
Answer:
7)Comment on the overall value of the information disclosed by Goldman Sachs to comply with the fair value disclosure requirements in the Codification. Focus on its overall understandability and usefulness to the users of the financial statements. Also, discuss the inclusion of ASU 2011-04 in the disclosures.
Answer:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Three Exercise Assignment
Inventory
1. Specific identification method. Boston Galleries uses the specific identification method for inventory valuation. Inventory information for several oil paintings follows.
|
Painting
|
Cost
|
|
1/2 Beginning inventory
|
Woods
|
$21,000
|
|
4/19 Purchase
|
Sunset
|
21,800
|
|
6/7 Purchase
|
Earth
|
31,200
|
|
12/16 Purchase
|
Moon
|
4,000
|
|
|
|
|
Woodsand Moonwere sold during the year for a total of $35,000. Determine the firm s
a. cost of goods sold.
b. gross profit.
c. ending inventory.
2. Inventory valuation methods: basic computations. The January beginning inven tory of the Gilette Company consisted of 300 units costing $40 each. During the first quarter, the company purchased two batches of goods: 700 Units at $44 on February 21 and 800 units at $50 on March 28. Sales during the first quarter were 1,400 units at $75 per unit. The White Company uses a periodic inventory system. Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods.
|
FIFO
|
LIFO
|
Weighted Average
|
|
|
|
|
|
Goods available for sale
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
Ending inventory, March 31
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.Perpetual inventory system: journal entries. At the beginning of 20X3, Beehler Company implemented a computerized perpetual inventory system. The first transactions that occurred during 20X3 follow:
1/2/20X3 Purchases on account: 500 units @$6 = $3,000
1/15/20X3 Sales on account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550
1/20/20X3 Purchases on Account: 200 units @ 5 = $1,000
1/25/20X3 Sales on Account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550
The company president examined the computer-generated journal entries for these transactions and was confused by the absence of a Purchases account.
a. Duplicate the journal entries that would have appeared on the computer printout under FIFO & LIFO
b. Calculate the balance in the firm s Inventory account under each method.
c. Briefly explain the absence of the Purchases account to the company president.
4. Inventory valuation methods: computations and concepts.
Wild Riders Surfboard Company began business on January 1 of the current year. Purchases of surfboards were as follows:
|
Date
|
Quantity
|
Unit Cost
|
Total Cost
|
|
1/3
|
100
|
$125
|
$12,500
|
|
4/3
|
200
|
$135
|
$27,000
|
|
6/3
|
100
|
$145
|
$14,500
|
|
7/3
|
100
|
$155
|
$15,500
|
|
Total
|
500
|
|
$69,500
|
Wild Riders sold 400 boards at $250 per board on the dates listed below. The company uses a perpetual inventory system.
|
Date
|
Quantity Sold
|
Unit Price
|
Total Sales
|
|
3/17
|
50
|
$250
|
$12,500
|
|
5/17
|
75
|
$250
|
$18,750
|
|
8/10
|
275
|
$250
|
$68,750
|
|
Total
|
400
|
|
$100,000
|
Instructions
a. Calculate cost of goods sold, ending inventory, and gross profit under each of the following inventory valuation methods:
First-in, first-out
Last-in, first-out
Weighted average
b. Which of the three methods would be chosen if management s goal is to
(1) produce an up-to-date inventory valuation on the balance sheet?
(2) show the lowest net income for tax purposes?
5. Depreciation methods.Mike Davis Enterprises purchased a delivery van for $40,000 in January 20X7. The van was estimated to have a service life of 5 years and a resid ual value of $6,000. The company is planning to drive the van 20,000 miles annually. Compute depreciation expense for 20X8 by using each of the following methods:
a. Units-of-output, assuming 17,000 miles were driven during 20X8
b. Straight-line
c. Double-declining-balance
6. Depreciation computations.Alpha Alpha Alpha, a college fraternity, purchased a new heavy-duty washing machine on January 1, 20X3. The machine, which cost $2,000, had an estimated residual value of $100 and an estimated service life of 4 years (1,800 washing cycles). Calculate the following:
a. The machine s book value on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the straight-line depreciation method
b. Depreciation expense for 20X4, assuming use of the units-of-output depreciation method. Actual washing cycles in 20X4 totaled 500.
c. Accumulated depreciation on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the double-declining-balance depreciation method.
7. Depreciation computations: change in estimate.Aussie Imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for $50,000 on January 1, 20X3. At the time of acquisition, the machine was estimated to have a service life of 5 years (25,000 operating hours) and a residual value of $5,000. During the 5 years of operations (20X3 – 20X7), the machine was used for 5,100, 4,800, 3,200, 6,000, and 5,900 hours, respectively.
Instructions
a. Compute depreciation for 20X3 – 20X7 by using the following methods: straight line, units of output, and double-declining-balance.
b. On January 1, 20X5, management shortened the remaining service life of the machine to 15 months. Assuming use of the straight-line method, compute the company s depreciation expense for 20X5.
c. Briefly describe what you would have done differently in part (a) if Aussie Imports had paid $47,800 for the machinery rather than $50,000 In addition, assume that the company incurred $800 of freight charges $1,400 for machine setup and testing, and $300 for insurance during the first year of use.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
During June, the following changes in inventory item #27 took place:
|
|
June 1
|
|
Balance
|
1,400 units @ $24
|
|
|
14
|
|
Purchased
|
800= units @ $36
|
|
|
24
|
|
Purchased
|
700 units @ $30
|
|
|
8
|
|
Sold
|
400 units @ $50
|
|
|
10
|
|
Sold
|
1,000 units @ $40
|
|
|
29
|
|
Sold
|
600 units @ $44
|
Perpetual inventories are maintained.
Instructions
What is the cost of the ending inventory for item #27 under the following methods (Show calculations.)=
(a) FIFO.
(b) LIFO.
(c) Moving average
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
31.
Harvel Company is required by law to collect and remit sales taxes to the state. If Havel has $4,500 of cash sales that are subject to an 6% sales tax, what is the journal entry to record the cash sales?
Debit Cash $4,500; credit Sales $4,230; credit Sales Taxes Payable $270.
Debit Accounts Receivable $4,770; credit Sales $4,500; credit Sales Taxes Payable $270.
Debit Sales Taxes Payable $270; debit Cash $4,230; credit Sales $4,500.
Debit Cash $4,770; credit Sales $4,500; credit Sales Taxes Payable $270.
Debit Cash $4,500; credit Sales $4,500; and record the sales tax when paid.
32. On November 1, Carter Company signed a 120-day, 12% note payable, with a face value of $10,800. What is the adjusting entry for the accrued interest at December 31 on the note? (Use 360 days a year.)
No journal entry required.
Debit interest expense, $144; credit interest payable, $144.
Debit interest expense, $216; credit interest payable, $216.
Debit interest expense, $288; credit interest payable, $288.
Debit interest expense, $432; credit interest payable, $432.
33. A company purchased a cash register on January 1 for $5,900. This register has a useful life of 5 years and a salvage value of $650. What would be the depreciation expense for the second year of its useful life using the double-declining-balance method?
$1,416.
$1,352.
$2,100.
$1,050.
$2,360.
34. A company had average total assets of $950,000. Its gross sales were $1,106,000 and its net sales were $945,000. The company’s total asset turnover equals (Round your final answer to two decimal places):
0.99.
1.14.
1.01.
1.17.
0.86.
34.
A company purchased property for $100,000. The property included a building, a parking lot, and land. The building was appraised at $57,500; the land at $48,600, and the parking lot at $18,900. Land should be recorded in the accounting records with an allocated cost of (Do not round intermediate calculations):
$44,880.
$9.
$100,000.
$48,600.
$38,880.
35. A company purchased property for $100,000. The property included a building, a parking lot, and land. The building was appraised at $57,500; the land at $48,600, and the parking lot at $18,900. Land should be recorded in the accounting records with an allocated cost of (Do not round intermediate calculations):
$44,880.
$100,000.
$38,880.
$9.
$48,600.
36.
Phil Phoenix is paid on a monthly basis. For the month of January of the current year, he earned a total of $9,038. FICA tax for Social Security is 6.2% and the FICA tax for Medicare is 1.45%. The FUTA tax rate is 0.8%, and the SUTA tax rate is 5.4%. Both unemployment taxes are applied to the first $7,000 of an employee’s pay. The amount of Federal Income Tax withheld from his earnings was $1,499.67. What is the amount of the employer’s monthly payroll tax expenses for this employee? (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to two decimal places.)
$131.05
$560.36
$378.00
$56.00
$1,125.41
37.
Employees earn vacation pay at the rate of one day per month. During July, 23 employees qualify for one vacation day each. Their average daily wage is $98 per day. What is the amount of vacation benefit expense to be recorded for the month of July?
$2,254
$98
$23
$225.40
$22,540
38. On December 1, Martin Company signed a 90-day, 6% note payable, with a face value of $12,000. What amount of interest expense is accrued at December 31 on the note? (Use 360 days a year.)
$120
$60
$180
$0
$720
39.
A company purchased a delivery van for $14,000 with a salvage value of $2,000 on September 1, Year 1. It has an estimated useful life of 4 years. Using the straight-line method, how much depreciation expense should the company recognize on December 31, Year 1? (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your final answer to whole dollar amount.)
$750.
$3,500.
$1,000.
$1,167.
$3,000.
40.
An employee earned $46,800 during the year working for an employer. The FICA tax rate for Social Security is 6.2% and the FICA tax rate for Medicare is 1.45%. The employee’s annual FICA taxes amount is:
$3,580.20.
Zero, since the employee’s pay exceeds the FICA limit.
$678.60.
$7,160.40.
$2,901.60.
41. A corporation was formed on January 1. The corporate charter authorized 100,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. During the first month of operation, the corporation issued 220 shares to its attorneys in payment of a $4,200 charge for drawing up the articles of incorporation. The entry to record this transaction would include:
A debit to Organization Expenses for $2,200.
A credit to Common Stock for $4,200.
A credit to Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value, Common Stock for $4,200.
A debit to Organization Expenses for $4,200.
A debit to Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value, Common Stock for $2,000.
42. A company has 30,000 shares of common stock outstanding. The stockholders’ equity applicable to common shares is $382,500, and the par value per common share is $10. The book value per share is:
$10.00.
$38.25.
$0.08.
$12.75.
$2.75.
43. The partnership agreement for Smith Wesson & Davis, a general partnership, provided that profits be shared between the partners in the ratio of their financial contributions to the partnership. Smith contributed $150,000, Wesson contributed $90,000 and Davis contributed $30,000. In the partnership’s first year of operation, it incurred a loss of $256,500. What amount of the partnership’s loss, should be absorbed by Smith? (Do not round your intermediate calculations and round your final answer to the nearest whole dollar amount.)
$128,250
$28,500
$64,125
$85,500
$142,500
44.
Badger and Fox are forming a partnership. Badger contributes a building that has a market value of $366,000; the partnership assumes responsibility for a $133,000 note secured by a mortgage on the property. Fox invests $108,000 in cash and equipment that has a market value of $83,000. For the partnership, the amounts recorded for total assets and for total capital account are:
Total assets $557,000; total capital $557,000.
Total assets $557,000; total capital $424,000.
Total assets $424,000; total capital $557,000.
Total assets $424,000; total capital $424,000.
Total assets $690,000; total capital $690,000
45.Smith, West, and Krug form a partnership. Smith contributes $201,000, West contributes $167,500, and Krug contributes $301,500. Their partnership agreement calls for a 6% interest allowance on the partner’s capital balances with the remaining income or loss to be allocated equally. If the partnership reports income of $205,200 for its first year, what amount of income is credited to West’s capital account?
$67,060.
$68,400.
$55,000.
$65,050.
$73,090.
46. Rice, Hepburn, and DiMarco formed a partnership with Rice contributing $63,600, Hepburn contributing $53,000 and DiMarco contributing $42,400. Their partnership agreement called for the income (loss) division to be based on the ratio of capital investments. If the partnership had income of $84,000 for its first year of operation, what amount of income would be credited to DiMarco’s capital account? (Do not round your intermediate calculations. Round your final answer to the nearest thousand.)
$84,000.
$33,600.
$22,400.
$28,000.
$42,400.
47. A company had a beginning balance in retained earnings of $43,400. It had net income of $6,400 and paid out cash dividends of $5,725 in the current period. The ending balance in retained earnings equals:
$12,125.
$42,725.
$44,075.
$49,800.
$55,525.
48. Smith, West, and Krug form a partnership. Smith contributes $177,000, West contributes $147,500, and Krug contributes $265,500. Their partnership agreement calls for a 6% interest allowance on the partner’s capital balances with the remaining income or loss to be allocated equally. If the partnership reports income of $176,400 for its first year, what amount of income is credited to Krug’s capital account?
$55,850.
$57,620.
$47,000.
$62,930.
$58,800.
49. A company has earnings per share of $9.20. Its dividend per share is $1.25, its market price per share is $111.32, and its book value per share is $87. Its price-earnings ratio equals:
12.10.
7.36.
8.10.
9.20.
9.46.
50. A corporation had 13,000 shares of $10 par value common stock outstanding when the board of directors declared a stock dividend of 4,680 shares. At the time of the stock dividend, the market value per share was $18. The entry to record this dividend is:
No entry is needed.
Debit Common Stock Dividend Distributable $84,240; credit Retained Earnings $84,240.
Debit Retained Earnings $46,800; credit Common Stock Dividend Distributable $46,800.
Debit Retained Earnings $84,240; credit Common Stock Dividend Distributable $84,240.
Debit Retained Earnings $84,240; credit Common Stock Dividend Distributable $46,800; credit Paid-In Capital in Excess of Par Value, Common Stock $37,440.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
It is the first intermediate accounting course. Balance sheet questions, journal entries, bank reconciliations, statements of financial position. The prof in the course said it should take an accountant (not a student) 8 hours to complete.
Yes everything before the 5th of november.
Date: Thu, 31 Oct 2013 06:58:29 +0530
From: info@thehomeworkhelp.com
To: darej11@hotmail.com
Subject: Re: TheAccountingHomeworkHelp.com: Accounting
what kind of questions we can expect?
so we have to do all parts by 5th nov?
Jerad Cunningham wrote:
Chapter 3 Case Study
This case study is a large problem involving several steps to test your mastery of course material up to this point.
It consists of several steps, each of which must be successfully (>90%) completed before proceding to the next, as subsequent steps depend on results from previous steps. In the case study, incorrect answers will bewha pointed out, but no further feedback will be given.
You can click the mark below to view the attempt that yielded that mark.
When you have completed a step sufficiently well, you can click the ‘Done – Show Solution’ button to see a correct solution. You should use this as a basis for subsequent steps. Once this has been done you cannot attempt the step again, but can view the solution at any time.
Note that after each attempt you should refresh this page using the button below.
| Available: 2013-09-10 |
| Due Date: 2013-11-05 |
| Time Limit: No limit |
| Part 1: |
0 / 80 |
|
|
| Part 2: |
None |
|
|
| Part 3: |
None |
|
|
| Part 4: |
None |
|
|
| Part 5: |
None |
|
|
| Part 6: |
None |
|
|
| Part 7: |
None |
|
|
| Part 8: |
None |
|
|
| Part 9: |
None |
|
|
| Part 10: |
None |
|
|
| Part 11: |
None |
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Preview |
| 1.IT210 Course Work/All IT210 Discussion Questions and Capstone.doc |
| 2.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 1 Input Data and Output Process appendix_c.doc |
| 3.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 2 Application – Level Requirements appendix_f.doc |
| 4.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 2 Chapter 2 Programming Problem.doc |
| 5.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 2 Software Development Activities and Purposes.doc |
| 6.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 3 Sequential and Selection Processing Control Structure Appendix G.doc |
| 7.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 4 Appendix H.doc |
| 8.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 4 Appendix I.doc |
| 9.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 4 Currency Conversion Design.doc |
| 10.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 4 Iteration Control Structure.doc |
| 11.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 5 CheckPoint-Simple Array Process – Week 5.doc |
| 12.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 6 Algorithm Verification Appedix J.doc |
| 13.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 6 Currency Conversion Test Procedure.doc |
| 14.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 7 Chapter 5 Programming Problems.doc |
| 15.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 7 Peer Reviews of Currency Conversion Test Procedure Appendix K 1.doc |
| 16.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 7 Peer Reviews of Currency Conversion Test Procedure Appendix K 2.doc |
| 17.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 8 GUI Image.jpg |
| 18.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 8 Interfaces and Communication Messages.doc |
| 19.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 8 Object Oriented Design.doc |
| 20.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 8 Object-Oriented Data and Processes.doc |
| 21.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 9 Currency Conversion Final Project.doc |
| 22.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 9 Currency Conversion GUI.jpg |
| 23.IT210 Course Work/IT210 – Week 9 Currency Conversion GUI.psd |
| 24.IT210 Course Work/it210_appendix_a.doc |
| 25.IT210 Course Work/it210_appendix_b.doc |
| 26.IT210 Course Work/it210_course_syllabus.pdf |
| 27.IT210 Course Work/ |
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 1
The income statement of Rodriquez Company is shown below.
|
RODRIQUEZ COMPANY INCOME STATEMENT FOR THE YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2012
|
|
Sales
|
|
|
|
$6,894,600
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
|
$1,893,870
|
|
|
|
Purchases
|
|
4,375,530
|
|
|
|
Goods available for sale
|
|
6,269,400
|
|
|
|
Ending inventory
|
|
1,608,650
|
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
4,660,750
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
|
|
2,233,850
|
|
Operating expenses
|
|
|
|
|
|
Selling expenses
|
|
440,640
|
|
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
|
703,840
|
|
1,144,480
|
|
Net income
|
|
|
|
$1,089,370
|
Additional information:
|
1.
|
|
Accounts receivable decreased $312,690 during the year.
|
|
2.
|
|
Prepaid expenses increased $178,550 during the year.
|
|
3.
|
|
Accounts payable to suppliers of merchandise decreased $281,970 during the year.
|
|
4.
|
|
Accrued expenses payable decreased $124,510 during the year.
|
|
5.
|
|
Administrative expenses include depreciation expense of $55,760.
|
Prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the direct method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturing company is thinking of launching a new product. The company expects to sell $950,000 of the new product in the first year and $1,500,000 each year thereafter. Direct costs including labor and materials will be 45% of sales. Indirect incremental costs are estimated at $95,000 a year. The project requires a new plant that will cost a total of $1,500,000, which will be a depreciated straight line over the next 5 years. The new line will also require an additional net investment in inventory and receivables in the amount of $200,000. Assume there is no need for additional investment in building the land for the project. The firm’s marginal tax rate is 35%, and its cost of capital is 10%. To receive full credit on this assignment, please show all work, including formula and calculations used to arrive at financial values. Assignment Guidelines: Using the information in the assignment description: Prepare a statement showing the incremental cash flows for this project over an 8-year period. Calculate the payback period (P/B) and the net present value (NPV) for the project. Answer the following questions based on your P/B and NPV calculations: Do you think the project should be accepted? Why? Assume the company has a P/B (payback) policy of not accepting projects with life of over 3 years.If the project required additional investment in land and building, how would this affect your decision?
Explain. Your submitted assignment (125 points) must include the following:
A double-spaced Word document of 2 3 pages that contains your calculation values, your complete calculations, any formula that you used, and your answers to the two questions listed in the assignment guidelines.
You must include your explanation of how you used Microsoft Excel for your calculations if applicable.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Individual Tax Return Problem 4
Extra Credit
Required:
Use the following information to complete Phillip and Claire Dunphy s 2013 federal income tax return. If information is missing, use reasonable assumptions to fill in the gaps. Ignore the alternative minimum tax for this problem.
Any required forms, schedules, and instructions can be found at the IRS Web site (
www.irs.gov
). The instructions can be helpful in completing the forms.
Facts:
1. Phillip and Claire are married and file a joint return. Phillip is self-employed as a real estate agent, and Claire is a flight attendant. Phillip and Claire have three dependent children. All three children live at home with Phillip and Claire for the entire year.
The Dunphys provide you with the following information:
The Dunphys do not want to contribute to the presidential election campaign.
The Dunphys live at 3701 Brighton Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90018
Phillip s birthday is 11/5/1967 and his Social Security number is 321-44-5766.
Claire s birthday is 5/12/1970 and her Social Security number is 567-77-1258
Haley s birthday is 11/6/2001 and her Social Security number is 621-92-8751.
Alex s birthday is 2/1/2003 and her Social Security number is 621-92-9926.
Luke s birthday is 12/12/2007 and his Social Security number is 621-99-9926.
The Dunphys do not have any foreign bank accounts or trusts.
2. Claire is a flight attendant for Western American Airlines (WAA), where she earned $57,000 in salary. WAA withheld federal income tax of $6,375, state income tax of $1,800, Los Angeles city income tax of $675, Social Security tax of $3,600, and Medicare tax of $825.
3. Phillip and Claire received $300 of interest from State Savings Bank on a joint account. They also received a qualified dividend of $395 on jointly owned stock in Xila Corporation.
4. Phillip s Real Estate business is named “Phillip Dunphy Realty.” His business is located at 645 Grove Street, Los Angeles, CA 90018, and his employer identification number is 93-3488888. Phillip s gross receipts during the year were $730,000. Phillip uses the cash method of accounting for his business. Phillip s business expenses are as follows:
Advertising $5,000
Professional Dues $800
Professional Journals $200
Employee wages $48,000
Insurance on office contents $1,120
Accounting services $2,100
Miscellaneous office expense $500
Utilities and telephone $3,360
Payroll taxes $3,600
Depreciation- to be calculated (by you the paid tax preparer)
|
On March 20, Phillip moved his business out of the old offices at 1103 Allium Lane into a newly constructed and equipped office on Grove Street. Phillip sold his old office building and all its furnishings. Phillip s expenditures for the new office building are as follows:
Date Acquired
|
Asset
|
Cost
|
|
3/20
|
Land
|
$300,000
|
|
3/20
|
Office Building
|
$2,500,000
|
|
3/20
|
Furniture
|
$200,000
|
|
4/1
|
Computer System
|
$350,000
|
|
6/1
|
Artwork
|
$150,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
INDIVIDUAL TAX RETURN PROBLEM 5
Required:
Use the following information to complete Paul and Judy Vance s 2011 federal
income tax return. If information is missing, use reasonable assumptions to fill
in the gaps.
You may need the following forms and schedules to complete the project:
Form 1040, Schedule A, Schedule B, Schedule C, Schedule D, Schedule E,
Appendix CC-7
Schedule SE, Form 2106-EZ, Form 4562 (for the dental practice), Form 4562
(for the rental property), Form 4797, and Form 8863. The forms, schedules,
and instructions can be found at the IRS Web site (www.irs.gov). The
instructions can be helpful in completing the forms.
Facts:
1. Paul J. and Judy L. Vance are married and file a joint return. Paul is selfemployed
as a dentist, and Judy is a college professor. Paul and Judy have
three children. The oldest is Vince who lives at home. Vince is a law student
at the University of Cincinnati and worked part-time during the year, earning
$1,500, which he spent for his own support. Paul and Judy provided $6,000
toward Vince s support (including $4,000 for Vince s fall tuition). They also
provided over half the support of their daughter, Joan, who is a full-time
student at Edgecliff College in Cincinnati. Joan worked part-time as an independent
contractor during the year, earning $3,200. Joan lived at home until
she was married in December 2011. She filed a joint return with her husband,
Patrick, who earned $20,000 during the year. Jennifer is the youngest and
lived in the Vances home for the entire year. The Vances provide you with the
following additional information:
Paul and Judy would like to take advantage on their return of any
educational expenses paid for their children.
The Vances do not want to contribute to the presidential election
campaign.
The Vances live at 621 Franklin Avenue, Cincinnati, OH 45211.
Paul s birthday is 3/5/1957 and his Social Security number is 333-45-6666.
Judy s birthday is 4/24/1960 and her Social Security number is 566-77-8888.
Vince s birthday is 11/6/1988 and his Social Security number is 576-18-7928.
Joan s birthday is 2/1/1992 and her Social Security number is 575-92-4321.
Jennifer s birthday is 12/12/1999 and her Social Security number is
613-97-8465.
The Vances do not have any foreign bank accounts or trusts.
2. Judy is a lecturer at Xavier University in Cincinnati, where she earned $30,000.
The university withheld federal income tax of $3,375, state income tax of
$900, Cincinnati city income tax of $375, $1,260 of Social Security tax and
$435 of Medicare tax. She also worked part of the year for Delta Airlines.
Delta paid her $10,000 in salary, and withheld federal income tax of $1,125,
state income tax of $300, Cincinnati city income tax of $125, Social Security
tax of $420, and Medicare tax of $145.
3. The Vances received $800 of interest from State Savings Bank on a joint
account. They received interest of $1,000 on City of Cincinnati bonds they
bought in January with the proceeds of a loan from Third National Bank of
Cincinnati. They paid interest of $1,100 on the loan. Paul received a dividend
of $540 on General Bicycle Corporation stock he owns. Judy received a dividend
of $390 on Acme Clothing Corporation stock she owns. Paul and Judy
received a dividend of $865 on jointly owned stock in Maple Company. All of
the dividends received in 2011 are qualified dividends.
4. Paul practices under the name Paul J. Vance, DDS. His business is located at
645 West Avenue, Cincinnati, OH 45211, and his employer identification number
is 01-2222222. Paul s gross receipts during the year were $111,000. Paul uses
C-8Appendix C
the cash method of accounting for his business. Paul s business expenses are as
follows:
Advertising $ 1,200
Professional dues 490
Professional journals 360
Contributions to employee benefit plans 2,000
Malpractice insurance 3,200
Fine for overbilling State of Ohio for work 5,000
performed on welfare patient
Insurance on office contents 720
Interest on money borrowed to refurbish office 600
Accounting services 2,100
Miscellaneous office expense 388
Office rent 12,000
Dental supplies 7,672
Utilities and telephone 3,360
Wages 30,000
Payroll taxes 2,400
In June, Paul decided to refurbish his office. This project was completed and the
assets placed in service on July 1. Paul s expenditures included $8,000 for new
office furniture, $6,000 for new dental equipment (seven-year recovery period),
and $2,000 for a new computer. Paul elected to compute his cost recovery
allowance using MACRS. He did not elect to use 179 immediate expensing,
and he chose to not claim any bonus depreciation.
5. Judy s mother, Sarah, died on July 2, 2006, leaving Judy her entire estate.
Included in the estate was Sarah s residence (325 Oak Street, Cincinnati, OH
45211). Sarah s basis in the residence was $30,000. The fair market value of the
residence on July 2, 2006, was $155,000. The property was distributed to Judy
on January 1, 2007. The Vances have held the property as rental property and
have managed it themselves. From 2007 until June 30, 2011, they rented the
house to the same tenant. The tenant was transferred to a branch office in
California and moved out at the end of June. Since they did not want to bother
finding a new tenant, Paul and Judy sold the house on June 30, 2011. They
received $140,000 for the house and land ($15,000 for the land and $125,000 for
the house), less a 6 percent commission charged by the broker. They had
depreciated the house using the MACRS rules and conventions applicable to
residential real estate. To compute depreciation on the house, the Vances had
allocated $15,000 of the property s basis to the land on which the house is
located. The Vances collected rent of $1,000 a month during the six months
the house was occupied during the year. They incurred the following related
expenses during this period:
Property insurance $500
Property taxes 800
Maintenance 465
Depreciation (to be computed) ?
6. The Vances sold 200 shares of Capp Corporation stock on September 3,
2011, for $42 a share (minus a $50 commission). The Vances received the
stock from Paul s father on June 25, 1980, as a wedding present. Paul s
father originally purchased the stock for $10 per share in 1967. The stock
was valued at $14.50 per share on the date of the gift. No gift tax was paid
on the gift.
Appendix CC-9
7. Judy is required by Xavier University to visit several high schools in the Cincinnati
area to evaluate Xavier University students who are doing their practice teaching.
However, she is not reimbursed for the expenses she incurs in doing this. During
the spring semester (January through April 2011), she drove her personal automobile
6,800 miles in fulfilling this obligation. Judy drove an additional 6,700 personal
miles during 2011. She has been using the car since June 30, 2010. Judy uses
the standard mileage method to calculate her car expenses.
8. Paul and Judy have given you a file containing the following receipts for expenditures
during the year:
Prescription medicine and drugs (net of insurance reimbursement) $ 376
Doctor and hospital bills (net of insurance reimbursement) 2,468
Penalty for underpayment of last year s state income tax 15
Real estate taxes on personal residence 4,762
Interest on home mortgage (paid to Home State Savings & Loan) 8,250
Interest on credit cards (consumer purchases) 595
Cash contribution to St. Matthew s church 3,080
Payroll deductions for Judy s contributions to the United Way 150
Professional dues (Judy) 325
Professional subscriptions (Judy) 245
Fee for preparation of 2010 tax return paid April 14, 2011 500
9. The Vances filed their 2010 federal, state, and local returns on April 14, 2011.
They paid the following additional 2010 taxes with their returns: federal income
taxes of $630, state income taxes of $250, and city income taxes of $75.
10. The Vances made timely estimated federal income tax payments of $1,500 each
quarter during 2011. They also made estimated state income tax payments of
$300 each quarter and estimated city income tax payments of $160 each quarter.
The Vances made all fourth-quarter payments on December 31, 2011. They would
like to receive a refund for any overpayments.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are considering the purchase of an industrial warehouse. The purchase price is $1 million. You expect to hold the property for five years. You have decided to finance the acquisition with the $700,000 loan, 10 percent interest rate, 30-year term, and annual interest-only payments. (That is, the annual payment will not include any amortization of principal.) There are no up-front financing costs. You estimate the following cash flows for the first year of operations:
$135,000 Effective gross income
27,000 Operating expenses
$108,000 NOI
a. Calculate the overall rate of return (or cap rate ).
b. Calculate the debt coverage ratio.
c. What is the largest loan that you can obtain (holding the other terms constant) if the lender requires a debt service coverage ratio of at least 1.2?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Information pertaining to John Corporation’s sales revenue is presented in the following table:
February March April
Cash Sales $160,000 $150,000 $120,000
Credit Sales 300,000 400,000 280,000
Total Sales $460,000 $550,000 $400,000
Management estimates that 5% of credit sales are not collectible. Of the credit sales that are collectible, 60% are collected in the month of sale and the remainder in the month following the sale. Cost of purchases of inventory each month are 70% of the next month’s projected total sales. ll purchases of inventory are on account; 25% are paid in the month of purchase, and the remainder is paid in the month following the purchase.
John’sbudgeted total cash receipts in April are:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need this same set of questions also. 1-26. How much would this be?
1. The initial owners of stock of a newly formed corporation are called directors.
2. The paid-in capital from sale of treasury stock account is debited if the sales price of the treasury stock sold is greater than its cost.
3. Bonds of major corporations are traded on bond exchanges.
4. An equal stream of periodic payments is called an annuity.
5. If the amount of a bond premium on an issued 11%, 4-year, $100,000 bond is $12,928, the annual interest expense is $5,500.
6. There is a loss on redemption of bonds when bonds are redeemed above carrying value.
7. Income tax expense reported on the income statement is the total taxes to be paid.
8. Cash, as the term is used for the statement of cash flows, could indicate either cash or cash equivalents.
9. Using the indirect method, if land costing $85,000 was sold for $145,000, the amount reported in the financing activities section of the statement of cash flows would be $85,000.
10. One of the prerequisites to paying a cash dividend is sufficient retained earnings.
11. Cash paid to acquire treasury stock should be shown on the statement of cash flows from investing activities.
12. In the vertical analysis of an income statement, each item is generally stated as a percentage of total assets.
13. If a company’s rate of return on common stockholders’ equity is greater than its rate of return on total assets, the company is effectively using leverage.
14. Generally, all deductions made from an employee’s gross pay are required by law.
15. The main source of paid-in-capital is from issuing stock.
Multiple Choice:
16. The journal entry a company uses to record the payment of a discounted note is
a. debit Notes Payable and Interest Expense; credit Cash
b. debit Notes Payable; credit Cash
c. debit Cash; credit Notes Payable
d. debit Accounts Payable; credit Cash
17. An employee receives an hourly rate of $15, with time and a half for all hours worked in excess of 40 during the week. Payroll data for the current week are as follows: hours worked, 48; federal income tax withheld, $120; cumulative earnings for the year prior to this week, $24,500; Social security tax rate, 6% on maximum of $100,000; and Medicare tax rate, 1.5% on all earnings; state unemployment compensation tax, 3.4% on the first $7,000; federal unemployment compensation tax, .8% on the first $7,000. What is the net amount to be paid the employee?
a. $568.74
b. $601.50
c. $660.00
d. $574.90
18. The following totals for the month of April were taken from the payroll register of Magnum Company.
Salaries $12,000
FICA taxes withheld 550
Income taxes withheld 2,500
Medical insurance deductions 450
Federal Unemployment Taxes 32
State Unemployment Taxes 216
The journal entry to record the monthly payroll on April 30 would include a
a. credit to Salaries Payable for $8,500.
b. debit to Salaries Expense for $8,500.
c. debit to Salaries Payable for $8,500.
d. debit to Salaries Payable for $8,252.
19. Elgin Company sells merchandise with a one year warranty. In 2009, sales consisted of 2,500 units. It is estimated that warranty repairs will average $10 per unit sold, and 30% of the repairs will be made in 2009 and 70% in 2010. In the 2009 income statement, Elgin should show warranty expense of
a. $7,500
b. $17,500
c. $25,000
d. $0
20. The excess of issue price over par of common stock is termed a(n)
a. discount
b. income
c. deficit
d. premium
21. The charter of a corporation provides for the issuance of 100,000 shares of common stock. Assume that 60,000 shares were originally issued and 5,000 were subsequently reacquired. What is the amount of cash dividends to be paid if a $1 per share dividend is declared?
a. $60,000
b. $5,000
c. $100,000
d. $55,000
22. The liability for a dividend is recorded on which of the following dates?
a. the date of record
b. the date of payment
c. the date of announcement
d. the date of declaration
23. When the market rate of interest was 11%, Munson Corporation issued $1,000,000, 12%, 8-year bonds that pay interest semiannually. The selling price of this bond issue was
a. $1,052,310
b. $1,154387
c. $1,000,000
d. $ 720,495
24. A $300,000 bond was redeemed at 103 when the carrying value of the bond was $315,000. The entry to record the redemption would include a
a. loss on bond redemption of $6,000.
b. gain on bond redemption of $6,000.
c. gain on bond redemption of $9,000.
d. loss on bond redemption of $9,000.
25. When the effective-interest method is used, the amortization of the bond premium
a. increases interest expense each period
b. decreases interest expense each period
c. increases interest expense in some periods and decreases interest expense in other periods
d. has no effect on the interest expense in any period
26. Long-term investments are held for all of the listed reasons below except
a. their income
b. long-term gain potential
c. influence over another business entity
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have just joined a CPA firm. Your manager is impressed with the recommendations that you provided on the reporting of securities for the client. He comes in and says You did a great job! The client was thrilled with the recommendations.
Your manager has another consulting assignment. He asked you to prepare for him the entries and financial statement presentation for both of the following situations:
- The new client has the following securities on his or her books on Dec 31, 2011:
|
Available-for-sale securities
|
Cost
|
Fair Value
|
|
2,000 shares of ABC stock
|
$30,000
|
$35,000
|
|
1,000 shares of XYZ stock
|
$20,000
|
$18,000
|
|
Total
|
$50,000
|
$53,000
|
-
- Prepare the adjusting entry required for 2010 under available-for-sale securities.
- How are the amounts reported in the financial statements?
- The client has the following portfolio for trading securities as of Dec 31, 2011:
|
Available for trading securities
|
Cost
|
Fair Value
|
|
4,000 shares of ABC stock
|
$40,000
|
$35,000
|
|
2,000 shares of XYZ stock
|
$30,000
|
$20,000
|
|
Total
|
$70,000
|
$55,000
|
-
- Prepare the adjusting entry required for 2010 under trading securities.
- How are the amounts reported in the financial statements?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have just joined a CPA firm. This is your first time working with the client. The client has asked for help in reporting some securities, and the audit manager on the job has asked you for recommendations on the reporting.
Provide a report that includes your recommendations on reporting, and its effect on carrying value and earnings in each of the following situations:
- The client has an equity security that has declined in value (i.e., the market value is less than what he or she paid for it [cost]). It is currently classified as available-for-sale, but the client would like to change its reporting to a trading security.
- The client has a combination of investments in a portfolio that are long-term investments. The portfolio has increased in value on the whole, but there is one stock whose value has fallen by more than 60%. The client thinks that this decline in value is permanent.
- The client has a portfolio of trading securities that has dropped 20% in value. He or she has another portfolio that is available-for-sale and its fair value has increased by 40%.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Bruno Company has decided to expand its operations. The bookkeeper recently completed the balance sheet presented below in order to obtain additional funds for expansion.
BRUNO COMPANY
BALANCE SHEET
DECEMBER 31, 2012
Current assets
Cash $262,650
Accounts receivable (net) 342,650
Inventories (lower-of-average-cost-or-market) 403,650
Equity investments (trading) at cost (fair value $123,330) 143,330
Property, plant, and equipment
Buildings (net) 573,330
Equipment (net) 163,330
Land held for future use 178,330
Intangible assets
Goodwill 82,650
Cash surrender value of life insurance 92,650
Prepaid expenses 14,650
Current liabilities
Accounts payable 138,330
Notes payable (due next year) 127,650
Pension obligation 85,330
Rent payable 51,650
Premium on bonds payable 55,650
Long-term liabilities
Bonds payable 503,330
Stockholders equity
Common stock, $1.00 par, authorized 400,000 shares, issued 292,650 292,650
Additional paid-in capital 182,650
Retained earnings ?
Prepare a revised balance sheet given the available information. Assume that the accumulated depreciation balance for the buildings is $162,650 and for the office equipment, $107,650. The allowance for doubtful accounts has a balance of $19,650. The pension obligation is considered a long-term liability. (List current assets in order of liquidity. List property plant and equipment in order of buildings and equipment.)
2. Presented below is the trial balance of Vivaldi Corporation at December 31, 2012.
Debit Credit
Cash $200,110
Sales $7,902,670
Debt Investments (trading) (cost, $145,000) 155,670
Cost of Goods Sold 4,802,670
Debt Investments (long-term) 302,110
Equity Investments (long-term) 280,110
Notes Payable (short-term) 92,670
Accounts Payable 457,670
Selling Expenses 2,002,670
Investment Revenue 64,260
Land 260,000
Buildings 1,043,110
Dividends Payable 139,110
Accrued Liabilities 98,670
Accounts Receivable 437,670
Accumulated Depreciation Buildings 352,000
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 27,670
Administrative Expenses 901,260
Interest Expense 212,260
Inventory 600,110
Extraordinary Gain 81,260
Notes Payable (long-term) 903,110
Equipment 602,670
Bonds Payable 1,003,110
Accumulated Depreciation Equipment 60,000
Franchises 160,000
Common Stock ($5 par) 1,002,670
Treasury Stock 193,670
Patents 195,000
Retained Earnings 81,110
Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par 83,110
$12,349,090 $12,349,090
Calculate ending retained earnings and prepare a balance sheet at December 31, 2012, for Vivaldi Corporation. Ignore income taxes. (List current assets in order of liquidity. List property plant and equipment in order of land, building and equipment.)
3. Presented below is a condensed version of the comparative balance sheets for Sondergaard Corporation for the last two years at December 31.
2012 2011
Cash $205,670 $102,180
Accounts receivable 235,800 242,350
Investments 68,120 96,940
Equipment 390,380 314,400
Less: Accumulated depreciation equipment (138,860 ) (116,590 )
Current liabilities 175,540 197,810
Capital stock 209,600 209,600
Retained earnings 375,970 231,870
Additional information:
Investments were sold at a loss (not extraordinary) of $9,170; no equipment was sold; cash dividends paid were $65,500; and net income was $209,600.
(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2012 for Sondergaard Corporation. (Show amounts that decrease cash flow with either a – sign e.g. -15,000 or in parenthesis e.g. (15,000).)
4. As loan analyst for Madison Bank, you have been presented the following information.
Plunkett Co. Herring Co.
Assets
Cash $117,200 $319,000
Receivables 210,300 306,200
Inventories 579,400 510,100
Total current assets 906,900 1,135,300
Other assets 505,200 614,100
Total assets $1,412,100 $1,749,400
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
Current liabilities $308,100 $349,600
Long-term liabilities 390,400 505,200
Capital stock and retained earnings 713,600 894,600
Total liabilities and stockholders equity $1,412,100 $1,749,400
Annual sales $935,700 $1,517,200
Rate of gross profit on sales 30 % 40 %
Each of these companies has requested a loan of $50,010 for 6 months with no collateral offered. In as much as your bank has reached its quota for loans of this type, only one of these requests is to be granted.
Compute the various ratios for each company. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.25.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1:
Wenner Furnace Corp. purchased machinery for $320,850 on May 1, 2012. It is estimated that it will have a useful life of 10 years, salvage value of $17,250, production of 276,000 units, and working hours of 25,000. During 2013, Wenner Corp. uses the machinery for 2,650 hours, and the machinery produces 29,325 units.
From the information given, compute the depreciation charge for 2013 under each of the following methods. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $45,892.)
Question 2:
Conan O Brien Logging and Lumber Company owns 4,000 acres of timberland on the north side of Mount Leno, which was purchased in 2000 at a cost of $610 per acre. In 2012, O Brien began selectively logging this timber tract. In May of 2012, Mount Leno erupted, burying the timberland of O Brien under a foot of ash. All of the timber on the O Brien tract was downed. In addition, the logging roads, built at a cost of $157,000, were destroyed, as well as the logging equipment, with a net book value of $317,000.
At the time of the eruption, O Brien had logged 20% of the estimated 500,000 board feet of timber. Prior to the eruption, O Brien estimated the land to have a value of $210 per acre after the timber was harvested. O Brien includes the logging roads in the depletion base.
O Brien estimates it will take 3 years to salvage the downed timber at a cost of $710,200. The timber can be sold for pulp wood at an estimated price of $2 per board foot. The value of the land is unknown, but must be considered nominal due to future uncertainties.
(a) Determine the depletion cost per board foot for the timber harvested prior to the eruption of Mount Leno. (Round per unit answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 0.45.)
Depletion cost per board foot
$
(b) Prepare the journal entry to record the depletion prior to the eruption. (Round per unit answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 0.45 for computational purpose and final answer to 0 decimal places, e.g. $45,892. If no entry is required, select “No entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
Question 3:
Margaret Avery Company from time to time embarks on a research program when a special project seems to offer possibilities. In 2011, the company expends $336,110 on a research project, but by the end of 2011 it is impossible to determine whether any benefit will be derived from it.
(a) The project is completed in 2012, and a successful patent is obtained. The R&D costs to complete the project are $128,610. The administrative and legal expenses incurred in obtaining patent number(NNN) NNN-NNNN84 in 2012 total $35,000. The patent has an expected useful life of 5 years. Record these costs in journal entry form. Also, record patent amortization (full year) in 2012. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
Account Titles and Explanation
Debit
Credit
(To record research and development costs)
(To record legal and administrative costs)
(To record one year s amortization expense)
(b) In 2013, the company successfully defends the patent in extended litigation at a cost of $40,320, thereby extending the patent life to December 31, 2020. What is the proper way to account for this cost? Also, record patent amortization (full year) in 2013. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
Account Titles and Explanation
Debit
Credit
(To record legal cost of successfully defending patent)
(To record one year s amortization)
Question 4:
Reichenbach Co., organized in 2011, has set up a single account for all intangible assets. The following summary discloses the debit entries that have been recorded during 2012 and 2013.
Intangible Assets
7/1/12 8-year franchise; expiration date 6/30/19 $59,440
10/1/12 Advance payment on laboratory space (2-year lease) 24,740
12/31/12 Net loss for 2011 including state incorporation fee, $2,170,
and related legal fees of organizing, $6,090 (all fees incurred in 2011) 17,160
1/2/13 Patent purchased (10-year life) 85,850
3/1/13 Cost of developing a secret formula (indefinite life) 75,340
4/1/13 Goodwill purchased (indefinite life) 277,990
6/1/13 Legal fee for successful defense of patent purchased above 18,515
9/1/13 Research and development costs 159,000
Prepare the necessary entries to clear the Intangible Assets account and to set up separate accounts for distinct types of intangibles. Make the entries as of December 31, 2013, recording any necessary amortization and reflecting all balances accurately as of that date. (Ignore income tax effects.) (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually. Round all answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 8,564.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
International Business Grading Policies and Lesson Plans
1
The grade points of 100% or 1000 points are divided into the following assignments:
1. International Business Project (Total 30% or 300 points possible)
Assignment
3 students will form a group to develop a portfolio for a product/service in a foreign country of their own choice on the issue of entry strategy. The purpose of this project is to simulate the decisions one might be asked to make in a multinational or global corporation. It is intended to give first-hand experience in identifying market opportunities and developing market entry strategies. In order to form the essential foundation for the portfolio, the market analysis has to be prepared. The group should work as if they represent a large multinational company planning to expand operations to a new country.
Selecting a country
Select a foreign country in which the group has some specific interest. It can be an industrialized or a developing nation. Some suggestions include: leading emerging markets such as Argentina, Brazil, Chile, China, Egypt, Hungary, India, Israel, Ivory Coast, Japan, Mexico, Nigeria, Poland, Russia, Singapore, South Africa, Turkey, Vietnam, and other countries in the European Union, Middle East, Eastern Europe, former Soviet Union republics, etc.
Selecting a product
In this project, the focus should be on consumer products, as they offer more opportunities to focus on cultural adaptation than do most industrial goods. When selecting your product, consider two factors. First, the product should have obvious cultural overtones to provide a strong cultural impact to the project. Second, the product should be one that you know something about. Examples of products: powered milk, baby food, disposable diapers, diet supplements, prepared foods such as dry soups, soft drink mix, children s toys, instant noodles, franchise outlets, etc. You also choose a real brand from an existing company.
Proposed outline
Part A: Country/Market Analysis
1. General information of the selected country ( location, climate, topography, etc.) along with a brief history
2. Cultural and social analysis
Language or languages spoken/written
Religion(s) and religious influences in life and business
Customs/traditions/manners/habits: food, drinks, clothing, personal hygiene, myths and superstitions
Core values, norms, and attitudes relating to foreign and domestic products
High or low context culture: rankings or Hofstede s Cultural Dimensions
Aesthetics-colors, music, symbolism, beauty, etc.
Social institutions-family life, educational institutions, class systems, etc.
Business customs protocols, greetings, keeping time, space, gift giving, hospitality, negotiations, etc.
IBA3000 International Business Grading Policies and Lesson Plans
2
3. Economic analysis
Population; actual count (latest), growth rates, number of households, working population, age distribution, density of population, etc.
Income, GNP or GDP, per capita income, average family income, distribution of wealth, etc.
Natural resources.
Infrastructure, transportation & communication systems
Inflation rates
International trade statistics: exports, imports, balance-of-payments situation, exchange rates
Trade restrictions: embargoes, quotas, import taxes, tariffs, licensing, customs duties
4. Political and legal analysis
Political ideology
Role of politics
Relationship with other countries
Legislation, regulations, or special rules affecting marketing of your product
Tariffs, quotas, and other restrictions on imports and exports
Information on subsidies provided
Intellectual property rights
Part B: Market entry strategies
1. Introduction: describe the product and the company you work for
2. Situation analysis: describe the environment you operate in (modify part A information relevant to your plan) general information about the industry, competition and governmental controls along with information about the firm and the market
3. Target market and position : define your target consumers and the positioning of your product
4. Marketing mix
Product details
–Describe your product in some details and reasons to buy
–Attitudes toward foreign products in the target country
–Strategic alternatives: extension, adaptation, or invention
–How many do you expect to sell?
Pricing details
–Your pricing objectives and strategies
–Environmental influences on your pricin decisions
–At what price you will sell your product and why?
–Total revenue expectations
Channels of distribution details
–Your channel objectives and constraints
–What channels of distribution will you select (retailers, wholesale middlemen, etc)?
Promotion details
–Who is your target audience?
–Your promotion objectives
–Types of promotion (advertising, sales promotions, personal selling, etc) with reasons of selection
–What will be your basic advertising message? What media will you use and why?
IBA3000 International Business Grading Policies and Lesson Plans
3
–Proposed promotion expenditures
5. Conclusion
This part answers several questions: Why have chosen the specific strategy? What are the chances of success for your product in the targeted country? And you can add your recommendations to market or not to market the product in the country. You provide reasons to support your recommendation.
6. Reference list
You must provide a complete reference for all materials you consult. Information drawn from these sources should be cited within the body of your paper.
7. Appendix or appendices: appendix or appendices can include related materials.
Write-up, 20% or 200 points, Due on November 28th
This write-up should be in double-spaced, 12 font size APA format. Part A: Market Analysis and Part B: Market Entry Strategies are expected to be approximately 3000 wordsin total (excluding appendices and supporting materials). This paper is due on November 28, 2012. Please submit your assignment in two methods, a hardcopy and an electronic file via email to plimprayoon2@alliant.edu
Suggested sources of information
1. Statistical Data
United Nations Statistical Yearbook
UNESCO Social Statistical Compendium
Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD)
European Marketing Data and Statistics
Consumer Europe
Statistical Yearbook for Latin America
The Market of Asia/Pacific: Thailand, Taiwan, China, Hong Kong, South Korea, Philippines, Indonesia, Singapore, and Malaysia
Worldwide Economic indicators
International Marketing Data and Statistics
World Factbook
World Development Report
World Almanac
2. Bibliographies and Indexes
The Economist Intelligence Unit
Sociological Abstracts
National Geographic Index
Business Periodicals Index
Encyclopedia Britannica
3. Information by Country
The World Almanac and Book of Facts
Worldmark Encyclopedia of Nations
Europa Yearbook
Country Profiles
4. Culture Information by Country
IBA3000 International Business Grading Policies and Lesson Plans
4
5. Useful Links on www
General Resources Sites
www.odci.gov/cia/publications/factbook
www.t-bird.edu/research/ibic
www.ita.doc.gov/td/industry/otea/index.html
www.usitc.gov/edu.htm
www.census.gov/ipc/www/idbnew.html
www.popnet.org
www.prb.org
www.washingtonpost.com/wp-srv/business/longterm/hoovers/hoovers.htm
www.city.net
www.refdesk.com/facts.html
Global News sites
http://news.bbc.co.uk
http://news.google.com
www.pwcglobal.com/gx/eng/ins-sol/exec-pers/int-brief.html
www.cnn.com
www.mckinsey.com
www.asia1.com.sg
www.stat-usa.gov/itabems.html
www.eurunion.org
www.sice.oas.org
www.imf.org
www.jetro.org
www.un.org
www.wto.org
www.worldbank.org
Other Journals
European marketing data and statistics
Industrial marketing management
International marketing data and statistics
The Journal of database marketing
Marketing week
Marketing in Europe
Marketing pocket book
Harvard business review
Quarterly review of marketing
Regional marketing pocket book
UK marketing source book
Journal of vacation marketing
Business week
Business monitor
Journal of world business
Etc.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Need this back as soon as possible. If possibly by midnight!
The SEC is currently considering a shift from U.S. GAAP to IFRS. This change has a possibility of being mandated. A shift of this magnitude can mean all accountants be re-educated on the new standards. Certainly the intention is to have a single global set of rules to simplify the world of accounting however some thought leaders voice that it could complicate the profession more. Below you will find links to articles on this topic. Some support the change and some do not.
Required: You are to prepare a 1 page paper using APA format and state whether you are for or against implementing the proposed change. Please ensure that you list three reasons you took the position you did and why.
For your reading documents please click the Required Documents button below.
This assignment should be typed and follow APA guidelines for document format and citations of resources.
Use the following links to complete assignment
http://www.pwc.com/us/en/issues/ifrs-reporting/publications/ifrs-and-us-gaap-similarities-and-differences.jhtml
http://public.kenan-flagler.unc.edu/faculty/langm/bll-ias_revision.pdf
http://www.ifrs.com/
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1 of 30 3.3334 Points
The business bought supplies on account. To record this:
A. an asset is debited and a liability is credited.
B. an asset is debited and an asset is credited.
C. an expense is debited and a liability is credited.
D. None of these are correct.
Question 2 of 30 3.3334 Points
Given the following list of accounts with normal balances, what are the trial balance totals of the debits and credits?
|
Cash
|
$1000
|
|
Equipment
|
500
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
350
|
|
Capital
|
900
|
|
Service Fees
|
1000
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
750
|
A. $4,500 debit, $4,500 credit
B. $3,250 debit, $3,250 credit
C. $1,125 debit, $1,125 credit
D. $2,250 debit, $2,250 credit
Question 3 of 30 3.3334 Points
Which of the following is prepared first?
A. Trial balance
B. Statement of owner’s equity
C. Income statement
D. Balance sheet
Question 4 of 30 3.3334 Points
Given the following list of accounts with normal balances, what are the trial balance totals of the debits and credits?
Cash $1,100
Accounts Receivable 800
Capital 1,900
Withdrawals 500
Service Fees 1,000
Rent Expense 500
A. $1,200 debit, $1,200 credit
B. $2,900 debit, $2,900 credit
C. $3,900 debit, $3,900 credit
D. $2,000 debit, $2,000 credit
Question 5 of 30 3.3334 Points
A liability would be credited and an expense debited if:
A. the business paid a creditor.
B. the business bought supplies on account.
C. the business incurred an expense and did not pay the expense immediately.
D. the business bought supplies for cash.
Question 6 of 30 3.3334 Points
An asset would be debited and a liability credited if:
A. the business incurred an expense and did not pay for the expense immediately.
B. the business bought equipment on account.
C. the business bought supplies for cash.
D. the business incurred an expense and paid it.
Question 7 of 30 3.3334 Points
Which of the following errors would cause the trial balance to be out of balance?
A. An entry is not posted at all.
B. A debit is entered as $200 and the credit is entered at $2,000.
C. An entry is posted twice.
D. None of these answers are correct.
Question 8 of 30 3.3334 Points
]]>
Which of the following is not a financial statement?
A. Statement of owner’s equity
B. Trial balance
C. Income statement
D. Balance sheet
Question 9 of 30 3.3334 Points
One asset would be debited and another credited if:
A. the business provided services to a credit customer.
B. the business paid a creditor.
C. the business provided services to a cash customer.
D. the business bought supplies paying cash.
Question 10 of 30 3.3334 Points
The owner invested personal equipment in the business. To record this transaction:
A. debit Equipment and credit Accounts Payable.
B. credit Equipment and debit Capital.
C. debit Equipment and credit Capital.
D. debit Accounts Payable and credit Equipment.
Question 11 of 30 3.3334 Points
A journal entry affecting three or more accounts is called a:
A. simple entry.
B. multi-step entry.
C. multi-level entry.
D. compound entry.
Question 12 of 30 3.3334 Points
If Accounts Payable has been credited, it is most likely that:
A. a payment was made on account.
B. a correcting entry was made for the overstatement of the purchase of equipment on account.
C. a purchase was made on account.
D. None of these are possible.
Question 13 of 30 3.3334 Points
When the trial balance includes a debit column total of $10,350 and a credit column total of $11,350, it is probable that:
A. a transposition error occurred.
B. a $500 debit was recorded twice.
C. a $500 debit was recorded as a credit.
D. a $500 credit was recorded twice.
Question 14 of 30 3.3334 Points
The posting reference column in the journal is used for:
A. recording the account number to which the entry was posted.
B. recording the time when the entry was posted.
C. recording the initials of the person who did the posting.
D. recording the source documents identification number.
Question 15 of 30 3.3334 Points
The journal entry to record a withdrawal by the owner would most commonly include:
A. a debit to Wage Expense and a credit to Cash.
B. a debit to Withdrawals and a credit to Cash.
C. a debit to Capital and a credit to Cash.
D. a debit to Cash and a credit to Wage Expense.
Question 16 of 30 3.3334 Points
The general journal:
A. is completed after the general ledger.
B. is the book of final entry.
C. contains account balances.
D. is the book of original entry.
Which of the following entries records the owner taking cash for personal use?
A. Capital, debit; Cash, credit
B. Wage Expense, debit; Cash, credit
C. No entry is necessary since the owner owns the cash and the entire business.
D. Withdrawals, debit; Cash, credit
Interim statements are prepared to:
A. notify management of the company’s current financial position.
B. allow management to make changes to the business before processing year-end financial statements.
C. notify investors of the company’s current financial position.
D. All of the above are correct.
Question 19 of 30 3.3334 Points
A debit to the Capital account was posted to an expense account. This would cause:
A. liabilities to be understated.
B. capital to be overstated.
C. assets to be overstated.
D. expense to be understated.
If the debit and credit totals of a trial balance are not equal, it could be due to the following type of error:
A. Recording the same transaction more than once
B. Incorrectly calculating the debit side of the trial balance
C. Failure to record a transaction
D. Recording the same erroneous amount for both the debit and the credit sides of a transaction
Which of the following transactions would cause the trial balance to be out of balance?
A. A credit to Cash and a debit to Supplies for the same amount
B. A debit to Cash and a debit to Equipment for the same amount
C. A debit to Accounts Receivable and a credit to Accounting Fees for the same amount
D. All of these answers are correct.
If Prepaid Rent has been debited, it is likely that:
A. a bill for the past month’s rent was received.
B. this month’s rent was paid.
C. the rent was paid for three months in advance.
D. All of these are possible.
As Withdrawals increase:
A. owner’s equity decreases.
B. Cash increases.
C. expense increases.
D. owner’s equity increases.
Question 26 of 30 3.3334 Points
Proof that the dollar amount of the debits equals the dollar amount of the credits in the ledger means:
A. all accounts have their correct balances in the ledger.
B. only the ledger is accurate; the journal may be incorrect.
C. only that the debit dollar amounts equal the credit dollar amounts.
D. all of the information from the journal was correctly transferred to the ledger.
Question 27 of 30 3.3334 Points
The process that begins with recording business transactions and includes the completion of the financial statements is the:
A. accounting cycle.
B. fiscal year.
C. calendar year.
D. natural business years.
Question 28 of 30 3.3334 Points
The entry to record the payment of office salaries would be:
A. Debit Salaries Expense; Credit Cash
B. Debit Cash; Credit Accounts Receivable
C. Debit Cash; Credit Salaries Expense
D. Debit Salaries Expense; Credit Accounts Payable
Question 29 of 30 3.3334 Points
The entry to record completing a financial lecture and immediately collecting payment from customers would be:
|
|
|
Cash
|
500
|
|
Lecture Fees
|
500
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
500
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
500
|
|
|
|
|
|
Lecture Fees
|
500
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
500
|
|
|
|
|
|
Lecture Fees
|
500
|
|
Cash
|
500
|
|
|
|
Question 30 of 30
|
3.3334 Points
|
Antonio’s catered a reception. The total price was $500. The customer paid half of the fee in cash and placed the remainder on account. The journal entry to record this transaction is:
|
|
|
Cash
|
500
|
|
Catering Service Fees
|
500
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
500
|
|
Cash
|
250
|
|
Catering Service Fees
|
250
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
250
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
250
|
|
Catering Service Fees
|
500
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
500
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
500
|
|
ASSIGN 8
The entry to replenish the petty cash fund debited Insurance Expense for postage. This would cause:
A. Petty Cash to be understated.
B. Postage Expense to be overstated.
C. Insurance Expense to be overstated.
D. Petty Cash to be overstated.
Question 2 of 20 5.0 Points
The petty cash overage was not recorded. This would cause:
A. expenses to be understated.
B. expenses to be overstated.
C. revenues to be overstated.
D. revenues to be understated.
Question 3 of 20 5.0 Points
Outstanding checks:
A. have not been presented to the bank for payment and have not been subtracted from the checkbook.
B. have been subtracted on the bank records but not the checkbook records.
C. have not been presented to the bank for payment but have been subtracted in the checkbook.
D. have been returned to the business for nonpayment.
Question 4 of 20 5.0 Points
An example of an internal control is:
A. all checks are prenumbered.
B. the use of bank account.
C. all checks written must have reference source documents.
D. All of these answers are correct.
Question 5 of 20 5.0 Points
The check is written and signed by the:
A. drawer.
B. payee.
C. payer.
D. drawee.
Question 6 of 20 5.0 Points
A nonsufficient funds check was returned to your company. How does the bank treat this on your bank statement?
A. It is shown as a credit memo.
B. It is added to the bank balance.
C. It is shown as a debit memo.
D. None of these answers are correct.
Question 7 of 20 5.0 Points
The bank would issue a credit memorandum to Maria’s Life Management when the bank:
A. discovered a check that was deposited was returned for nonsufficient funds.
B. collects a note receivable from a customer.
C. received the deposits in transit.
D. None of these answers are correct.
Question 8 of 20 5.0 Points
The debit recorded in the journal to establish the petty cash fund is to:
A. Petty Cash.
B. Accounts Receivable.
C. Accounts Payable.
D. Cash.
What type of an account is the petty cash fund?
A. Liability
B. Expense
C. Asset
D. Revenue
Determine the adjusted cash balance per bank for Santa’s Packaging on November 30, from the following information:
|
Cash balance on the bank statement
|
$2,350
|
|
Customer’s check returned NSF
|
500
|
|
Customer’s note collected by the bank
|
600
|
|
Deposits in transit, November 30
|
1,400
|
|
Outstanding checks, November 30
|
2,650
|
|
|
A. $1,350
|
|
|
|
B. $1,250
|
|
|
|
C. $1,100
|
|
|
|
D. $1,550
|
|
|
Question 11 of 20
|
5.0 Points
|
The drawee is the:
|
|
A. the person to whom the check is payable.
|
|
|
|
B. bank that drawer has an account with.
|
|
|
|
C. person who writes the check.
|
|
|
|
D. the person who reconciles the account.
|
|
|
Question 12 of 20
|
5.0 Points
|
]]>
Checks that have been processed by the bank and are no longer negotiable are:
|
|
A. checks in process.
|
|
|
B. outstanding checks.
|
|
|
C. canceled checks.
|
|
|
D. blank checks.
|
|
|
|
Question 13 of 20
|
5.0 Points
|
]]>
The May bank statement for Accounting Services shows a balance of $6,300, but the balance per books shows a cash balance of $7,980. Other information includes:
1. A check for $200 to pay the electric bill was recorded on the books as $20.
2. Included on the bank statement was a note collected by the bank for $400 plus interest of $30.
3. Checks outstanding totaled $260.
4. Bank service charges were $50.
5. Deposits in transit were $2,140.
Which item(s) should be subtracted from the balance per books?
|
|
A. Bank service charge
|
|
|
|
B. Bank service charge and the note collected by the bank
|
|
|
|
C. Checks outstanding and bank service charge
|
|
|
|
D. None of the above are correct.
|
|
|
Question 14 of 20
|
5.0 Points
|
]]>
The May bank statement for Accounting Services shows a balance of $6,300, but the balance per books shows a cash balance of $7,980. Other information includes:
1. A check for $200 to pay the electric bill was recorded on the books as $20.
2. Included on the bank statement was a note collected by the bank for $400 plus interest of $30
3. Checks outstanding totaled $260.
4. Bank service charges were $50.
5. Deposits in transit were $2,140.
The adjusted cash balance at the end of August should be:
|
|
A. $7,620.
|
|
|
|
B. $7,980.
|
|
|
|
C. $9,810.
|
|
|
|
D. $8,180.
|
|
|
Question 15 of 20
|
5.0 Points
|
]]>
The person or company to whom a check is payable is called the:
|
|
A. drawer.
|
|
|
|
B. payer.
|
|
|
|
C. drawee.
|
|
|
|
D. payee.
|
|
|
Question 16 of 20
|
5.0 Points
|
]]>
On a bank reconciliation, deposits added to the bank side are called:
|
|
A. deposits in transit.
|
|
|
|
B. deposits on hold.
|
|
|
|
C. outstanding deposits.
|
|
|
|
D. late deposits.
|
|
|
Question 17 of 20
|
5.0 Points
|
]]>
Scotch Services received a credit memorandum from the bank. During the bank reconciliation they should:
|
|
A. decrease the ending cash balance on the bank statement.
|
|
|
B. increase their cash account on the company’s books.
|
|
|
C. decrease their cash account on the company’s books.
|
|
|
D. increase the ending cash balance on the bank statement.
|
|
|
Question 18 of 20
|
5.0 Points
|
]]>
The May bank statement for Accounting Services shows a balance of $6,300, but the balance per books shows a cash balance of $7,980. Other information includes:
1. A check for $200 to pay the electric bill was recorded on the books as $20.
2. Included on the bank statement was a note collected by the bank for $400 plus interest of $30.
3. Checks outstanding totaled $260.
4. Bank service charges were $50.
5. Deposits in transit were $2,140.
Which item(s) will require a journal entry to update the balance in the Cash account?
|
|
A. Bank service charges, note collected by the bank, and error made by Accounting Services
|
|
|
B. Checks outstanding and deposits in transit
|
|
|
C. Bank service charges, note collected by the bank, and deposits in transit
|
|
|
D. None of these answers are correct.
|
|
Question 19 of 20
|
5.0 Points
|
]]>
Samantha’s Tutoring Service’s $200 petty cash fund has a shortage of $4. The facts are: $80 in valid receipts for expenses; $116 in coins and currency. The journal entry to replenish the petty cash fund would include a:
|
|
A. credit to Cash for $80.
|
|
|
B. debit to Cash Short/Over for $4.
|
|
|
C. credit to Cash Short/Over for $4.
|
|
|
D. credit to Petty Cash for $84.
|
|
Question 20 of 20
|
5.0 Points
|
]]>
Information to calculate the adjusted cash balance for Sam’s Gift Wrapping is as follows:
|
Cash balance per general ledger
|
$2,100
|
|
Customer’s check returned NSF
|
75
|
|
Bank service charges
|
40
|
|
Deposits in transit
|
500
|
|
Outstanding checks
|
700
|
|
Customer’s note collected by bank
|
645
|
|
|
A. $2,430
|
|
|
B. $2,630
|
|
|
C. $2,330
|
|
|
D. $2,230
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
- Prepare Financial Statements from Adjusted Trial Balance Worksheet
The 2012 year-end adjusted balances taken from the general ledger of Cooperstown Services, Inc. are listed below in general ledger order.
|
Coopertown Suppliers, Inc.
|
|
|
DR
|
CR
|
|
Cash
|
$12,950
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
28,150
|
|
|
Supplies
|
8,400
|
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
9,500
|
|
|
Land
|
115,000
|
|
|
Buildings
|
360,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
260,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
|
$239,900
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
35,300
|
|
Salaries payable
|
|
7,300
|
|
Taxes payable
Common stock
|
|
5,200
31,500
|
|
Additional paid-in capital Common
Retained earnings
|
|
15,400
427,600
|
|
Dividends
|
25,400
|
|
|
Service revenue
|
|
475,000
|
|
Salaries expense
|
335,600
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
25,100
|
|
|
Supplies expense
|
12,950
|
|
|
Insurance expense
|
8,200
|
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
30,850
|
|
|
Utilities expense
|
5,100
|
|
|
Total
|
$1,237,200
|
$1,237,200
|
Transfer these accounts and balances to a spreadsheet worksheet and prepare an Income statement, a Classified Balance Sheet, and a Statement of Retained Earnings all in good form using proper headings for each statement. Note that Cooperstown is a service company so there is no cost of goods sold in its chart of accounts. Also, assume that all the liabilities are current liabilities. Keep in mind that you should not report any accounts without balances in your statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Below you will find selected information (in millions) from Coca-Cola Co. s 2012 Annual Report:
|
Income Taxes Payable
|
$471
|
|
Short-term Investments and Marketable Securities
|
8,109
|
|
Cash
|
8,442
|
|
Other non-current Liabilities
|
10,449
|
|
Common Stock
|
1,760
|
|
Receivables
|
4,812
|
|
Other Current Assets
|
2,973
|
|
Long-term Investments
|
10,448
|
|
Other Non-current Assets
|
3,585
|
|
Property, Plant and Equipment
|
23,486
|
|
Trademarks
|
6,527
|
|
Other Intangible Assets
|
20,810
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
53
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
9,010
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
8,680
|
|
Short Term Notes Payable
|
17,874
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
2,781
|
|
Other Current Liabilities
|
796
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
14,736
|
|
Paid-in-Capital in Excess of Par Value
|
11,379
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
55,038
|
|
Inventories
|
3,264
|
|
Treasury Stock
|
35,009
|
Other information taken from the Annual Report:
|
Sales Revenue for 2012
|
$48,017
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold for 2012
|
19,053
|
|
Net Income for 2012
|
9,019
|
|
Inventory Balance on 12/31/11
|
3,092
|
|
Net Accounts Receivable Balance on 12/31/11
|
4,920
|
|
Total Assets on 12/31/11
|
79,974
|
|
Equity Balance on 12/31/11
|
31,921
|
Required:
1. Using the information provided prepare a Balance Sheet. Separate the current assets from non-current assets and provide a total for each. Also separate the current liabilities from the non-current liabilities and provide a total for each.
2. Using the Balance Sheet from your answer above calculate; Current Ratio, Days in Inventory, Average Collection Period, Return on Assets Ratio, Debt to Total Assets and Return on common stockholders equity ratio. (Make sure to show all your work)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I just need the correct answer for the total expenses and percentage column please
Instructions
Review the Patton Fuller income statements for 2008 and 2009. A link to the Patton Fuller Virtual Organization is located on the student website.
Completethe worksheet located below using the 2008 and 2009 Patton Fuller income statements. You must: Calculate the dollar value change from 2008 to 2009 for each line item. Calculate the percentage change from 2008 to 2009 for each line item.
Savethe completed worksheet as a Microsoft Word document with your name in the file name.
Submitthe file to your instructor.Worksheet
Submitted By:[Team A- Essence Lujan, Kanisha Wilson, Ingrid Kearney, Staci Markusfeld, Jenny Esdaille, Melissa Parian]
| Line Item |
Dollar Value Change |
Percentage Change |
| Revenues |
| Net Patient Revenue |
$41,391 |
9.89% |
| Other Revenues |
$277 |
9.87% |
| Total Revenues |
$41,668 |
9.89% |
| Expenses |
| Salaries and Benefits |
$6,623 |
3.1% |
| Supplies |
$3,238 |
4.5% |
| Physician and Professional Fees |
$3,311 |
4.1% |
| Utilities |
$36 |
3.09% |
| Other |
$55 |
3.08% |
| Depreciation and Amortization (Non-Cash Expenses) |
$11,081 |
44.40% |
| Interest |
111 |
3.1% |
| Provision for Doubtful Accounts |
414 |
3.1% |
| Total Expenses |
24,869 |
|
| Operating Income |
($15,799) |
98.1% |
| Non-Operating Income (Loss) |
|
|
| Investment Income |
$202 |
(76.5%) |
| Net Income |
($15,473) |
97.6% |
Reply, Reply All or Forward | More
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Primary Task Response:Within the Discussion Board area, write 400 600 words that respond to the following questions with your thoughts, ideas, and comments. This will be the foundation for future discussions by your classmates. Be substantive and clear, and use examples to reinforce your ideas.
You are the accountant for Jolly Fitness, a health club. The business owner is concerned about low revenue. There are 3 situations related to this club:
- The membership fees are due in the beginning of the year and are collected in advance. They have 4 clubs in the vicinity, and the members can use any of these facilities. To attract more members, they also allow them to cancel the membership with a full refund for the unused months.
- Some customers only want to attend classes like kickboxing, spinning, and aerobics; they do not want to become members. Therefore, the club sells coupon books that have 25 coupons. If the customers do not use these coupons by the end of the year, they will expire.
- Jolly Fitness also makes its own fitness machines. It sells these machines to the customers with 30% down and a 2-year payment plan. However, customers can return the machine with a full refund within 90 days. It also provides servicing on this equipment, and historically 6% of the machines sold will have repair services.
Because of low revenue, the business owner is looking for some business loans to finance these transactions. He asks you, his accountant, to go ahead and recognize the revenue related to the membership dues, the revenue from the coupon books sold, and the machines that have been sold as well. You are concerned because you know that this is against GAAP principles.
- For each situation, explain to the business owner the following:
- How he is violating the GAAP principles of revenue recognition
- How the revenue should be recognized.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determine the value that is described in each of the following investments. Assume that no money is withdrawn during the investment period, and provide 1 possible explanation of the use of each type of investment.
- Using standard Net Present value tables, determine the present value of a dollar for $10,000.00 invested at 8%, compounded annually for a period of 5 years.
- Using standard Net Present value tables, determine the future value of a dollar for a one-time $10,000.00 deposit earning 8% interest compounded annually to be withdrawn in 5 years.
- Using standard Net Present value tables, determine the present value of an annuity that earns $10,000.00 payable in 5 annual installments over a period of 5 years, assuming 8% interest compounded annually.
- Using standard Net Present value tables, determine the future value of an annuity of $10,000.00 annual deposits earning 8% interest compounded annually at the end of 5 years.
Assume no money is withdrawn during the investment period.
Provide one possible explanation of the uses of each type of investment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| please assist |
| Question Detail:
Using the chart below, complete 1 and 2 below.
|
Price
|
Quantity
|
|
per unit
|
demanded
|
|
$10.00
|
25
|
|
9.50
|
30
|
|
9.00
|
35
|
|
8.50
|
40
|
|
8.00
|
45
|
|
7.50
|
50
|
|
7.00
|
55
|
|
6.50
|
60
|
|
6.00
|
65
|
|
5.50
|
70
|
|
5.00
|
75
|
- Figure the elasticity of demand for each of the following showing all calculations:
- $10.00 to $ 9.50 b. $ 8.50 to $ 8.00
c. . $ 6.50 to $ 6.00 d. $ 6.00 to $ 5.50
e. $5.50 to $5.00
- For each of the above write beside your answer whether the demand is elastic, inelastic, or unit elastic.
Problem 1
Complete the following table assuming perfect competition.
|
Q
|
TR
|
MR
|
MC
|
TVC
|
TFC
|
AFC
|
AVC
|
TC
|
Profit
|
|
0
|
15
|
|
1
|
55
|
|
2
|
85
|
|
3
|
105
|
|
4
|
115
|
|
5
|
140
|
|
6
|
170
|
|
7
|
211
|
|
8
|
271
|
|
Price=30
|
At what level of output is profit maximized?
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
. Basic present value calculations
Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar:
-
A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at an 11% rate of return.
-
An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at an 11% rate of return.
-
A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 12% rate of return.
-
An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has an 11% rate of return.
2. Cash flow calculationsand net present value
On January 2, 20X7, Brian Rein invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.70 per share in 20X7 and 20X8; the dividend was raised to $3.30 per share in 20X9. On December 31, 20X9, Rein sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,100. Rein uses the net-present- value method and desires a 16% return on investments.
-
Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note:Rein is entitled to the 20X9 dividend.
-
Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar.
-
Given the results of part (b), should Rein have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain.
3. Net present value
The City of Brighton is studying a 550-acre site on Route 401 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows:
Purchase cost: $400 per acre
Site preparation: $180,000
The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Brighton, which shares a facility in Bath Township with other municipalities, estimates that the new location will save $40,000 in annual operating costs.
-
Should the landfill be acquired if Brighton desires an 8% return on its investment? Use the net-present-value method to determine your answer.
4. Net-present-value
ABC Entertainment is considering the acquisition of a sight-seeing boat for summer tours along the Mississippi River. The following information is available:
|
Cost of boat
|
$550,000
|
|
Service life
|
10 summer seasons
|
|
Disposal value at the end of 10 seasons
|
$100,000
|
|
Capacity per trip
|
260 passengers
|
|
Fixed operating costs per season (including straight-line depreciation)
|
$160,000
|
|
Variable operating costs per trip
|
$1,000
|
|
Ticket price
|
$6 per passenger
|
All operating costs, except depreciation, require cash outlays. On the basis of similar operations in other parts of the country, management anticipates that each trip will be sold out and that 130,000 passengers will be carried each season. Ignore income taxes.
Instructions:
By using the net-present-value method, determine whether ABC Entertainment should acquire the boat. Assume a 14% desired return on all investments,- round calculations to the nearest dollar.
5. Equipment replacement decision
Richardson Enterprises is studying the replacement of some equipment that originally cost $74,000. The equipment is expected to provide six more years of service if $8,500 of major repairs are performed in two years. Annual cash operating costs total $28,000. Richardson can sell the equipment now for $37,000; the estimated residual value in six years is $5,000.
New equipment is available that will reduce annual cash operating costs to $21,000. The equipment costs $105,000, has a service life of six years, and has an estimated residual value of $13,000. Company sales will total $430,000 per year with either the existing or the new equipment. Richardson has a minimum desired return of 12% and depreciates all equipment by the straight-line method.
Instructions:
-
By using the net-present-value method, determine whether Richardson should keep its present equipment or acquire the new equipment. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar, and ignore income taxes.
-
Richardson s management feels that the time value of money should be considered in all long-term decisions. Briefly discuss the rationale that underlies management’s belief.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question #1
Consider the following potential investment, which has the same risk as the firm s other projects:
|
Time
|
Cash Flow
|
|
0
|
-$192,000
|
|
1
|
$68,000
|
|
2
|
$70,000
|
|
3
|
$72,000
|
|
4
|
$74,000
|
The firm s current weighted-average cost of capital is 15%.
a) How much value will this investment create for the firm?
b) At what discount rate will this project break even?
c) Should the firm do this investment? Be sure to justify your recommendation.
d) How would your analysis change if this potential investment was more risky than the firm s other projects? Be specific.
Question #2
A firm believes it can generate an additional $450,000 per year in revenues for the next 6 years if it replaces existing equipment that is no longer usable with new equipment that costs $500,000. The additional sales will require an initial investment in net working capital of $35,000, which is expected to be recovered at the end of the project (after 6 years). The existing equipment has a book value of $15,000 and a market value of $5,000. The firm expects to be able to sell the new equipment when it is finished using it (after 6 years) for $20,000. The contribution margin is expected to be 40% of revenue. Assume the firm uses straight line depreciation, its marginal tax rate is 35%, and its weighted-average cost of capital is 14%.
a) How much value will this new equipment create for the firm?
b) At what discount rate will this project break even?
c) Should the firm purchase the new equipment? Be sure to justify your recommendation.
Question #3
After a study of its processes, a firm determines it has the following 4 overhead cost pools related to the production of its 2 products: Set-up, Shipping, Product design, and Plant utilities and administration.
Both products are produced in the same facility using the same equipment. Product XYZ is a higher volume product that takes a relatively small amount of machine-time to produce, while Product ABC is a lower volume product that takes a significantly higher amount of machine-time. Also, Product XYZ requires very little set-up time, while Product ABC requires a more time-consuming set-up. Both products are shipped in a similar way, with each shipment requiring a similar amount of work.
Based on this information, determine the hierarchy level for each cost pool and an appropriate allocation base for each pool.
|
Cost Pool
|
Hierarchy Level
|
Allocation Base
|
|
Setup
|
|
|
|
Shipping
|
|
|
|
Product design
|
|
|
|
Plant utilities & administration
|
|
|
Question #4
The Dana Company manufactures a specialized piece of manufacturing equipment. Its machine has always been distinct from its competitors machines and is considered to be superior to their products, too. However, its competitors are catching up both in terms of features and quality. Dana has refined its manufacturing to the point that it never produces defective machines, relying on well-trained workers and highly-complex manufacturing equipment. Without these workers and this equipment, Dana would have a difficult time producing its products without defects. Since a large amount of materials are wasted in production, however, one of its goals is to reduce the amount of direct materials used to produce the machines. Given the unique and specialized nature of the machines, Dana often needs to provide a significant amount of support to its customers.
a) Based on this information, what type of strategy do you believe Dana is pursuing? Be sure to back up your claim with specific evidence.
b) List and justify eight metrics (2 in each of the Balanced Scorecard perspectives) that you believe Dana should include in its Balanced Scorecard.
c) Dana calculates the following figures:
|
2012 operating income
|
$2,700,000
|
|
2013 operating income
|
$3,319,500
|
|
Growth component
|
$280,000
|
|
Price-recovery component
|
$247,500
|
|
Productivity component
|
$92,000
|
In 2013, Dana sold more units and charged a higher price than in 2012. Dana also paid more for raw materials in 2013 than it did in 2012.
Based on this information, do you believe Dana s increase in operating income in 2013 is consistent with its goals and strategy? Be sure to justify your answer with specific information.
Question #5
Consider the following quality cost report:
|
Q1
|
Q2
|
Q3
|
Q4
|
|
Prevention costs
|
$1,020
|
$1,508
|
$1,300
|
$1,140
|
|
Appraisal costs
|
$880
|
$910
|
$766
|
$532
|
|
Internal failure costs
|
$710
|
$636
|
$472
|
$358
|
|
External failure costs
|
$1,470
|
$1,264
|
$672
|
$512
|
|
Total quality costs
|
$4,080
|
$4,318
|
$3,210
|
$2,542
|
|
Total revenues
|
$16,480
|
$18,160
|
$18,600
|
$18,040
|
Do you believe this firm s quality initiatives have been successful? Be sure to justify your opinion with specific information.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P11-2A Greeve Corporation had the following stockholders’ equity accounts on January 1, 2011: Common Stock ($1 par) $400,000, Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value $500,000, and Retained Earnings $100,000. In 2011, the company had the following treasury stock transactions.
|
|
| Mar. 1 |
Purchased 5,000 shares at $7 per share. |
| June 1 |
Sold 1,000 shares at $10 per share. |
| Sept. 1 |
Sold 2,000 shares at $9 per share. |
| Dec. 1 |
Sold 1,000 shares at $5 per share. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Greeve Corporation uses the cost method of accounting for treasury stock. In 2011, the company reported net income of $60,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Quiz 3
Please answer the following (on page 578 to 581): This is in chapter 11.
1. Exercises and Problems 1 through 6 and 10 through 13
Post your answers in your assignment folder.
1. In deciding whether to establish a foreign operation, which factor(s) might a multinational corporation (MNC) consider?
a. After-tax returns from competing investment locations.
b. The tax treatments of branches versus subsidiaries.
c. Withholding rates on dividend and interest payments.
d. All of the above.
2. Why might a company involved in international business find it beneficial to establish an operation in a tax haven?
a. The OECD recommends the use of tax havens for corporate income tax avoidance.
b. Tax havens never tax corporate income.
c. Tax havens are jurisdictions that tend to have abnormally low corporate income tax rates.
d. Tax havens banking systems are less secretive.
3. Which of the following item(s) might provide an MNC with a tax-planning opportunity as it decides where to locate a foreign operation?
a. Differences in corporate tax rates across countries.
b. Differences in local tax rates across countries.
c. Whether a country offers a tax holiday.
d. All of the above.
4. Why might companies have an incentive to finance their foreign operations with as much debt as possible?
a. Interest payments are generally tax deductible.
b. Withholding rates are lower for dividends.
c. Withholding rates are lower for interest.
d. Both (a) and (c).
5. Kerry is a U.S. citizen residing in Portugal. Kerry receives some investment income from Spain. Why might Kerry be expected to pay taxes on the investment income to the United States?
a. The United States taxes its citizens on their worldwide income.
b. The United States taxes its citizens on the basis of residency.
c. Portugal requires all of its residents to pay taxes to the United States.
d. None of the above.
6. Poole Corporation is a U.S. company with a branch in China. Income earned by the Chinese branch is taxed at the Chinese corporate income tax rate of 25 percent and at the rate of 35 percent in the United States. What is this an example of?
a. Capital-export neutrality.
b. Double taxation.
c. A tax treaty.
d. Taxation on the basis of consumption.
Questions 10, 11, and 12 are based on the following information:
Information for Year 1, Year 2, and Year 3 for the Andean branch of Powell Corporation is presented in the following table. The corporate tax rate in the Andean Republic in Year 1 was 25 percent. In Year 2, the Andean Republic increased its corporate
income tax rate to 29 percent. In Year 3, the Andean Republic increased its corporate tax rate to 36 percent. The U.S. corporate tax rate in each year is 35 percent.
Year 1 Year 2 Year 3
Foreign source income. . . . . $75,000 $100,000 $100,000
Foreign taxes paid . . . . . . . . 18,750 29,000 36,000
U.S. tax before FTC . . . . . . . 26,250 35,000 35,000
10. For Year 1, Year 2, and Year 3, what is the foreign tax credit allowed in the
United States?
a. $7,500, $6,000, and $0.
b. $18,750, $29,000, and $36,000.
c. $75,000, $100,000, and $100,000.
d. $18,750, $29,000, and $35,000.
11. For Year 3, what is the net U.S. tax liability?
a. $35,000.
b. $0.
c. $1,000.
d. $6,000.
12. In Year 3, how much excess foreign tax credit can Powell carry back?
a. $7,500.
b. $6,000.
c. $1,000.
d. $0.
13. Bay City Rollers Inc., a U.S. company, has a branch located in S o Antonio and another in the Bahian Islands. The foreign source income from the S o Antonio
branch is $150,000, and the foreign source income from the Bahian Island branch is $225,000. The corporate tax rates in S o Antonio, the Bahian Islands, and the United States are 30 percent, 24 percent, and 35 percent, respectively.
Required:
Determine Bay City Rollers ( a ) U.S. foreign tax credit and ( b ) net U.S. tax liability related to these foreign sources of income.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording and Posting Accrual Basis Journal Entries
Ricky s Piano Rebuilding Company has been operating for one year (2012). At the start of 2013, its income statement accounts had zero balances and its balance sheet account balances were as follows:
Cash $ 6,000 Accounts Payable $ 8,000
Accounts Receivable 25,000 Unearned Revenue (deposits) 3,200
Supplies 1,200 Notes Payable 40,000
Equipment 8,000 Contributed Capital 8,000
Land 6,000 Retained Earnings 9,000
Building 22,000
Required:
1. Create T-accounts for the balance sheet accounts and for these additional accounts: Piano
Rebuilding Revenue, Rent Revenue, Wages Expense, and Utilities Expense. Enter the beginning balances.
2. Prepare journal entries for the following January 2010 transactions, using the letter of each transaction as a reference:
a. Received a $500 deposit from a customer who wanted her piano rebuilt in February.
b. Rented a part of the building to a bicycle repair shop; $300 rent received for January.
c. Delivered five rebuilt pianos to customers who paid $14,500 in cash.
d. Delivered two rebuilt pianos to customers for $7,000 charged on account.
e. Received $6,000 from customers as payment on their accounts.
f. Received an electric and gas utility bill for $350 for January services to be paid in February.
g. Ordered $800 in supplies.
h. Paid $1,700 on account in January.
i. Paid $10,000 in wages to employees in January for work done this month.
j. Received and paid cash for the supplies in (g).
3. Post the journal entries to the T-accounts. Show the unadjusted ending balances in the T-accounts
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
| Comparing Costing Methods and Ethical Decision Making |
Stacy Lynn, Inc. (SLI) is a manufacturer of rice cookers. The rice cookers sell for $45 per unit; the sales were 3,600 units in the current year, 2009. SLI has 400 units available for sale at the end of 2009 and is projecting sales of 4,400 units in 2010. SLI is planning the same production level for 2010 as in 2009, 4,000 units. The variable manufacturing costs for SLI are $16 and the variable selling costs are only $.50 per unit. The fixed manufacturing costs are $100,000 per year and the fixed selling costs are only $500 per year. Assume that beginning inventory was -0- for 2009.
Stacy Ann Lynn, the great grand-daughter of the company s founder is the current CEO/President of the company, which is still a family owned business. The previous several years have been especially difficult due to price-pressure from Chinese imports. At the moment, all that Stacy believes she can do is to try to keep the company running until the economy improves. But, the company needs an immediate infusion of cash. So, she has decided to ask her bank for a large line of credit to maintain operating viability for the foreseeable future.
Additional Financial Information for SLI, 2009 and 2010:
Based on the information provided in the narrative and the financial statement above, please post a substantive response to the following parts of this Unit 6 Discussion:
- If Patty wants to show the bank the maximum profit over the previous 2-year period, which costing method should she present?
- But, the bank requires that all financial statements conform to Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP). Based on that requirement, which costing method should she present?
- The bank has delivered a memo in preparation for the meeting to negotiate the Credit Line; the memo states that they will expect a significant Net Income. Based on your responses to parts A and B, what are the legal and ethical issues facing Stacy Lynn?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 2: Capital Structures
Due Week 7 and worth 240 points
For this assignment, choose a large publicly traded retail company, and review its capital structure.
Write a four to five (4-5) page paper in which you:
1. Based on your review of the selected company s capital structure, assess the level of capital risk that the company maintains. Propose at least two (2) changes to the capital structure that would mitigate capital risk.
2. Based on your review of the selected company s capital structure, propose at least two (2) changes to the capital structure that will provide for financial growth.
3. Analyze the components of a capital structure in general, and predict at least two (2) factors which could make a capital structure vary for different types of industries.
4. Assume that management would like to increase shareholder value for the company that you chose. Recommend at least two (2) changes that the company should implement with regard to the capital structure that would create greater shareholder value.
5. Use at least three (3) quality academic resources in this assignment.
Note:Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
xamine the industry average ratios for the auto parts industry, and then compare them to Parts, Inc., a fictional company in that industry. Determine if the ratios for Parts, Inc. are favorable or unfavorable, and enter your answer in the table. Indicate the significance of your ratings for Parts, Inc. in terms of the implications of the financial condition for the company.
|
Average Ratios |
Parts, Inc. Ratios |
Rating |
| Liquidity Ratios |
|
|
|
| Current Ratio |
3:1 |
1.5:1 |
|
| Quick Ratio |
1.5:1 |
1:1 |
|
|
|
|
|
| Asset Management Ratio |
|
|
|
| Inventory Turnover |
7 times |
5 times |
|
|
|
|
|
| Debt Management Ratio |
|
|
|
| Debt to Equity |
1:2 |
1.5:2 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Your firm has been investigating the possibility of locating facilities in an East Asian country such as Thailand, Malaysia, Taiwan, or Singapore. You have been asked by the chief executive officer (CEO) to research what has been happening in these countries in terms of environmental legislation and laws regarding wages and hours. He has asked you to prepare a report that addresses the following information:
- Describe the level of environmental regulation in any 2 of these countries.
- Describe the 2 selected countries’ versions of wage and working-hour legislation.
Use the Library and other Internet resources to find the legislation for the specific countries.
Select 2 of the 4 East Asian countries to analyze for this assignment. Use the Library and other Internet resources to answer the following questions for each selected country:
- What is the country’s environmental regulation level?
- What kind of legislation has been passed in the country regarding working hours and wages?
- Do you think the country’s environmental regulation is sufficient? Explain.
- Do you feel that the country’s hour and wage legislation is ethical? Explain.
must include a 2 3-page Word document that contains your answers to the 4 questions listed. You must also include a reference list in APA format.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identifying and Managing Risk
In this assignment, you will compare and evaluate risk management techniques from experts in the field. Go to the Ashford University Library and find one article by Dr. James Kallman. Dr. Kallman, an expert in the field of risk management, has written many articles on managing financial risk. Find a second article in the Ashford University Library from another credible author of your choice who also provides recommendations for risk management.
Develop a three- to four-page analysis (excluding the title and reference pages), of the techniques Dr. Kallman has identified for managing risks. In this analysis, compare Dr.Kallman s techniques to the techniques recommended in the second article you researched. Explain why you agree or disagree with each authors recommendations. Describe other factors you believe should be considered in risk management. The assignment should be comprehensive and include specific examples. The paper should be formatted according to APA.
You must cite at least two scholarly sources, in addition to the text, from the Ashford University Library, one being an article by Dr. Kallman.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Select an NFP statement or an IRS form 990. Thewww.foundationcenter.org web site will be helpful to locate the most recently available form 990. Present it in a conference for approval.
1. Write a brief paper on the NFP. Relate topics from our textbook to your entity. Our conference postings should assist you in completing your deliverables. The form 990 is the resource for your NFP. Consider too the concept of a Citizens’ Centric Report (CCR). Refer towww.agacgfm.org for information on the CCR. A CCR is a 4 page document summarizing information and creating a presentation for citizens and other stakeholders.
- Prepare a Power Point presentation or create a Citizen Centric Report (CCR: templates and guidance atwww.agacgfm.org ) based on each paper to post in our conference in week 8 for discussion and comments. Submit only the papers in the assignment folders. The Power Point presentations (or the CCR) will be posted initially only in the conference. The NFP paper, and the two Power Point presentations (or CCR). This is a total of 4 documents, 2 for the municipality and 2 for the NFP. Your municipality may be at the local or state level
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The following information was made available from the
income statement and balance sheet of Lauren Company.
Item 12/31/10 12/31/09
Accounts Receivable $53,400 58,600
Accounts Payable 35,600 32,700
Merchandise Inventory 85,000 79,000
Sales (2010) 243,000
Interest Revenue (2010) 5,600
Dividend Revenue (2010) 1,200
Tax Expense (2010) 12,300
Salaries Expense (2010) 28,000
COGS (2010) 65,000
Interest Expense (2010) 3,600
Operating Expenses 28,500
Complete the cash flow from operating activities section for Lauren Company using the direct method for the year ended December 31, 2010.
2. Given the following balance sheet, complete a horizontal analysis. Compute the percentage to the nearest tenth of a percent.
Jill s Bikes
Comparative Balance Sheet
For Years Ended December 31, 2011 and 2010
(in thousands) 2011 2010 Difference Percentage
Assets
Current Assets
Cash and Equivalents $72 $94
Accounts Receivable, net 122 104
Inventory 288 232
Total Current Assets 482 430
Property, Plant and Equipment 638 358
Total Assets $1,120 $788
Liabilities
Current Liabilities
Accounts Payable $242 $148
Accrued Liabilities 48 66
Total Current Liabilities 290 214
Long-Term Liabilities 346 208
Total Liabilities 636 422
Stockholders Equity
Common Stock 70 60
Retained Earnings 414 306
Total Stockholders Equity 484 366
Total Liabilities and
Stockholders Equity $1,120 $788
1. Record the following transactions using the accounting equation.
Example: Assets = Liabilities + Equity XXXX(cash) XXXX(accounts payable)
A. Amanda invests $17,000 cash into her merchandising business.
B. She buys $6,500 of office equipment and $3,000 of office supplies with cash from Office Depot.
C. Additional purchases were supplies for $35,000 on account from various suppliers.
2. Journalize the following transactions and omit the explanations.
A. ABC Corporation purchased $15,000 of office furniture by putting $7,000 down in cash and the rest on account on April 8.
B. The corporation paid $60,000 for a two-year lease on April 19.
C. The corporation had sales of $45,000, of which $35,000 were on account on April 20.
D. The corporation borrowed $25,000 by signing a note payable on April 22.
E. The corporation paid $1,250 on one of its accounts payable on April 26.
3. Prepare a trial balance from the following information for Learn a New Language, Inc. for December 31, 2012.
Accounts payable $5,012
Common stock $9,692
Cash $3,928
Notes payable $1,439
Wages expense $777
Marketing expense $493
Equipment $8,345
Accounts receivable $1,142
Inventory $8,074
Sales $6,616
4. Compute the missing information from this post-closing trial balance.
Cash $34,689
Accounts Receivable 9,467
Prepaid Rent 5,000
Prepaid Insurance (A)
Supplies 944
Accounts Payable $5,389
Wages Payable (B)
Common Stock 37,049
Retained Earnings 8,234
_______ _______
Total $52,356 $52,356
5. Journalize the following transactions using the perpetual inventory method.
Aug. 6 Purchased $830 of inventory on account from Johnston with terms of 2/10, n/30.
Aug. 8 Purchased $2,611 of inventory for cash from Pillner Company.
Aug.15 Paid for August 6 purchase from Johnston.
Aug. 17 Purchased $1,743 of merchandise on account from Luis Company with Terms of 3/15, n/45.
6. Given the following information, prepare a balance sheet for Isaiah s Tool Shed for the year ending December 31, 2012.
Cash $65,750 Retained Earnings $179,319
Common Stock $35,000 Equipment $27,500
Accounts Receivable $11,478 Accounts Payable $29,450
Land $30,000 Inventory $78,311
Prepaid Supplies $7,357 Income Taxes Payable $4,209
Office Computers $11,345 Other PPE $31,446
Accum. Depr. (all) $23,459 Prepaid Insurance $8,250
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The income statement for Hyland Company for 2014 appears below:
Hyland Company
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2014
Sales revenue (40,000 units) 1,000,000
Variable expenses 700,000
Contribution margin 300,000
Fixed expenses 345,000
Net income (loss) (45,000)
Instructions
Answer the following independent questions and show computations to support your answers:
1. What was the company s break-even point in sales dollars in 2014?
2. How many additional units would the company have to sell in 2015 (compared to 2014) in order to
earn net income of $45,000?
3. If the company is able to reduce variable costs by $4.50 per unit in 2015 and other costs and unit
revenues remain unchanged, how many units will the company have to sell in order to earn a net
income of $45,000?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Income statement preparation On December 31, 2006, Cathy Chen, a selfemployed certified public accountant (CPA), completed her first full year in business. During the year, she billed $360,000 for her accounting services. She had two employees: a bookkeeper and a clerical assistant. In addition to her monthly salary of $8,000, Ms. Chen paid annual salaries of $48,000 and $36,000 to the bookkeeper and the clerical assistant, respectively. Employment taxes and benefit costs for Ms. Chen and her employees totaled $34,600 for the year. Expenses for office supplies, including postage, totaled $10,400 for the year. In addition, Ms. Chen spent $17,000 during the year on tax-deductible travel and entertainment associated with client visits and new business development. Lease payments for the office space rented (a tax-deductible expense) were $2,700 per month. Depreciation expense on the office furniture and fixtures was $15,600 for the year. During the year, Ms. Chen paid interest of $15,000 on the $120,000 borrowed to start the business. She paid an average tax rate of 30 percent during 2006.
a. Prepare an income statement for Cathy Chen, CPA, for the year ended December 31, 2006.
b. Evaluate her 2006 financial performance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Homework 5
1.Ingham Inc. has the capacity to produce 10,000 fax machines per year. Ingham currently produces and sells 7,000 units per year. The fax machines normally sell for $100 each. Modem Products has offered to buy 2,000 fax machines from Ingham for $60 each. Unit-level costs associated with manufacturing the fax machines are $15 each for direct labor and $40 each for direct materials. Product-level and facility-sustaining costs are $50,000 and $65,000, respectively.
Required:
a)What is Ingham’s current net income?
b) Should Ingham accept the special offer?
2. Based on the segment income statement below, Sorbet is considering eliminating its Mangoline.
|
Revenue from Mangosales
|
$500,000
|
|
Salaries for Mangoworkers
|
(100,000)
|
|
Direct material
|
(300,000)
|
|
Sunk costs (equipment depreciation)
|
(75,000)
|
|
Allocated company-wide facility-sustaining costs
|
(50,000)
|
|
Net loss
|
$ (25,000)
|
Required:
Identify each cost as being relevant or not relevant in this decision.
|
|
Relevant
|
Not Relevant
|
|
Revenue from Mangosales
|
|
|
|
Salaries for Mangoworkers
|
|
|
|
Direct material
|
|
|
|
Sunk costs (equipment depreciation)
|
|
|
|
Allocated company-wide facility-sustaining costs
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Two Exercise Assignment
Revenue and Expenses
1. Recognition of concepts. Jim Armstrong operates a small company that books entertainers for theaters, parties, conventions, and so forth. The company s fiscal year ends on June 30. Consider the following items and classify each as either (1) prepaid expense, (2) unearned revenue, (3) accrued expense, (4) accrued revenue, or (5) none of the foregoing.
a Interest owed on the company’s bank loan, to be paid in early July
b Professional fees earned but not billed as of June 30
c Office supplies on hand at year-end
d An advance payment from a client for a performance next month at a convention
e The payment in part (d) from the client’s point of view
f Amounts paid on June 30 for a 1-year insurance policy
g The bank loan payable in part (a)
h Repairs to the firm’s copy machine, incurred and paid in June
2. Understanding the closing process. Examine the following list of accounts:
-
|
Note Payable
|
Accumulated Depreciation: Building
|
|
Alex Kenzy, Drawing
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
Product Revenue
|
Cash
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
Utility Expense
|
Which of the preceding accounts
a. appear on a post-closing trial balance?
b. are commonly known as temporary, or nominal, accounts?
c. generate a debit to Income Summary in the closing process?
d. are closed to the capital account in the closing process?
3. Adjusting entries and financial statements. The following information pertains to Sally Corporation:
-
The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one half of this amount had been earned.
-
Sally Corporation provided $1,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31.
-
Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,000.
-
The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period.
-
The company paid $18,000 on October 1 of the current year to Vantage Property Management. The payment was for 6 months rent of Sally Corporation s headquarters, beginning on November 1.
Sally Corporation s accounting year ends on December 31.
Instructions
Analyze the five preceding cases individually and determine the following:
a. The typeof adjusting entry needed at year-end (Use the following codes: A, adjustment of a prepaid expense; B, adjustment of an unearned revenue; C, adjustment to record an accrued expense; or D, adjustment to record an accrued revenue.)
b. The year-end journal entry to adjust the accounts
c. The income statement impact of each adjustment (e.g., increases total revenues by $500)
4. Adjusting entries. You have been retained to examine the records of Mary s Day Care Center as of December 31, 20X3, the close of the current reporting period. In the course of your examination, you discover the following:
-
On January 1, 20X3, the Supplies account had a balance of $1,350. During the year, $5,520 worth of supplies was purchased, and a balance of $1,620 remained unused on December 31.
-
Unrecorded interest owed to the center totaled $275 as of December 31.
-
All clients pay tuition in advance, and their payments are credited to the Unearned Tuition Revenue account. The account was credited for $65,500 on August 31. With the exception of $15,500 all amounts were for the current semester ending on December 31.
-
Depreciation on the school s van was $3,000 for the year.
-
On August 1, the center began to pay rent in 6-month installments of $24,000. Mary wrote a check to the owner of the building and recorded the check in Prepaid Rent, a new account.
-
Two salaried employees earn $400 each for a 5-day week. The employees are paid every Friday, and December 31 falls on a Thursday.
-
Mary s Day Care paid insurance premiums as follows, each time debiting Prepaid Insurance:
-
|
Date Paid
|
Policy No.
|
Length of Policy
|
Amount
|
|
Feb. 1, 20X2
|
1033MCM19
|
1 year
|
$540
|
|
Jan. 1, 20X3
|
7952789HP
|
1 year
|
912
|
|
Aug. 1, 20X3
|
XQ943675ST
|
2 years
|
840
|
Instructions
The center s accounts were last adjusted on December 31, 20X2. Prepare the adjusting entries necessary under the accrual basis of accounting.
5. Bank reconciliation and entries. The following information was taken from the accounting records of Palmetto Company for the month of January:
-
|
Balance per bank
|
$6,150
|
|
Balance per company records
|
3,580
|
|
Bank service charge for January
|
20
|
|
Deposits in transit
|
940
|
|
Interest on note collected by bank
|
100
|
|
Note collected by bank
|
1,000
|
|
NSF check returned by the bank with the bank statement
|
650
|
|
Outstanding checks
|
3,080
|
Instructions:
a. Prepare Palmetto s January bank reconciliation.
b. Prepare any necessary journal entries for Palmetto.
6. Direct write-off method. Harrisburg Company, which began business in early 20X7, reported $40,000 of accounts receivable on the December 31, 20X7, balance sheet. Included in this amount was $550 for a sale made to Tom Mattingly in July. On January 4, 20X8, the company learned that Mattingly had filed for personal bankruptcy. Harrisburg uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectibles.
a. Prepare the journal entry needed to write off Mattingly s account.
b. Comment on the ability of the direct write-off method to value receivables on the year-end balance sheet.
7. Allowance method: analysis of receivables. At a January 20X2 meeting, the president of Sonic Sound directed the sales staff to move some product this year. The president noted that the credit evaluation department was being disbanded because it had restricted the company s growth. Credit decisions would now be made by the sales staff.
By the end of the year, Sonic had generated significant gains in sales, and the president was very pleased. The following data were provided by the accounting department:
-
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Sales
|
$23,987,000
|
$8,423,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable, 12/31
|
12,444,000
|
1,056,000
|
|
Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, 12/31
|
?
|
23,000 cr.
|
The $12,444,000 receivables balance was aged as follows:
-
|
Age of Receivable
|
Amount
|
Percentage of Accounts Expected to Be Collected
|
|
Under 31 days
|
$4,321,000
|
99%
|
|
31260 days
|
4,890,000
|
90
|
|
61290 days
|
1,067,000
|
80
|
|
Over 90 days
|
2,166,000
|
60
|
Assume that no accounts were written off during 20X2.
Instructions
a. Estimate the amount of Uncollectible Accounts as of December 31, 20X2.
b. What is the company s Uncollectible Accounts expense for 20X2?
c. Compute the net realizable value of Accounts Receivable at the end of 20X1 and 20X2.
d. Compute the net realizable value at the end of 20X1 and 20X2 as a percentage of respective year-end receivables balances. Analyze your findings and comment on the president s decision to close the credit evaluation department.
What is the purpose of a bank reconciliation? What are the reasons for differences between the cash reported in the accounting records and the cash balance in the bank statements?
Analyze several of your peers posts. Let at least two of your peers know what happens to the discrepancies between the book balance and the bank balance. Could these differences just be written off.
Guided Response:
A bank reconciliation reconciles the bank account balance per the books to the actual bank balance.Outstanding checks, deposits in transit, and bank errors are reasons there are differences between the cash reported in the accounting records and the cash balance in the bank statements.
1.Financial statements are a product of the accounting cycle. Think about two different companies: a manufacturing company, and a retail company. Why would different companies have different accounting cycles? Would you expect the steps of the accounting cycle to be the same for each company? Why or why not?
Guided Response:
Review several of your peers posts and identify what steps of the accounting cycle that you feel are the most critical. Respond to at least two of your peers and provide recommendations to extend their thinking. Challenge your peers by asking a question that may cause them to reevaluate their position on the accounting cycle.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week One Exercise Assignment
Basic Accounting Equations
1. Recognition of normal balances
The following items appeared in the accounting records of Triguero’s, a retail music store that also sponsors concerts. Classify each of the items as an asset, liability; revenue; or expense from the company’s viewpoint. Also indicate the normal account balance of each item.
a. Amounts paid to a mall for rent.
b. Amounts to be paid in 10 days to suppliers.
c. A new fax machine purchased for office use.
d. Land held as an investment.
e. Amounts due from customers.
f. Daily sales of merchandise sold.
g. Promotional costs to publicize a concert.
h. A long-term loan owed to Citizens Bank.
i. The albums, tapes, and CDs held for sale to customers.
2.Basic journal entries
The following transactions pertain to the Jennifer Royall Company:
-
|
May 1
|
Jennifer Royall invested cash of $25,000 and land valued at $15,000 into the business.
|
|
5
|
Provided $1,000 of services to Jason Ratchford, a client, on account.
|
|
9
|
Paid $1,250 of salaries to an employee.
|
|
14
|
Acquired a new computer for $4,200, on account.
|
|
20
|
Collected $800 from Jason Ratchford for services provided on May 5.
|
|
24
|
Borrowed $2,500 from BestBanc by securing a six-month loan.
|
Prepare journal entries (and explanations) to record the preceding transactions and events.
3. Balance sheet preparation. The following data relate to Preston Company as of December 31, 20XX:
Building $40,000 Accounts receivable $24,000
Cash 21,000 Loan payable 30,000
J. Preston, Capital 65,000 Land 21,000
Accounts payable ?
Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 20XX. (See Exhibit 1.1 and 1.4)
4. Basic transaction processing. On November 1 of the current year, Richard Simmons established a sole proprietorship. The following transactions occurred during the month:
1: Simmons invested $32,000 into the business for $32,000 in common stock.
2: Paid $5,000 to acquire a used minivan.
3: Purchased $1,800 of office furniture on account.
4: Performed $2,100 of consulting services on account.
5: Paid $300 of repair expenses.
6: Received $800 from clients who were previously billed in item 4.
7: Paid $500 on account to the supplier of office furniture in item 3.
8: Received a $150 electric bill, to be paid next month.
9: Simmons withdrew $800 from the business.
10: Received $250 in cash from clients for consulting services rendered.
Instructions
a. Arrange the following asset, liability, and owner s equity elements of the accounting equation: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Office Furniture, Van, Accounts Payable, Common Stock/Dividends, and Revenues/Expenses. (See Exhibit 1.5)
b. Record each transaction on a separate line. After all transactions have been recorded, compute the balance in each of the preceding items.
c. Answer the following questions for Simmons.
(1) How much does the company owe to its creditors at month-end? On which financial statement(s) would this information be found?
(2) Did the company have a good month from an accounting viewpoint? Briefly explain.
5. Transaction analysis and statement preparation. The transactions that follow
relate to Burton Enterprises for March 20X1, the company s first month of activity.
|
3/1
|
Joanne Burton, the owner, invested $20,000 cash into the business.
|
|
3/4
|
Performed $2,400 of services on account.
|
|
3/7
|
Acquired a small parcel of land by paying $6,000 cash
|
|
3/12
|
Received $500 from a client who was billed previously on March 4.
|
|
3/15
|
Paid $200 to the Journal Herald for advertising expense.
|
|
3/18
|
Acquired 9,000 of equipment from Park Central Outfitters by Paying
|
|
|
$7,000 down and agreeing to remit the balance owed within two weeks (A/P).
|
|
3/22
|
Received $300 cash from clients for services.
|
|
3/24
|
Paid $1,500 on account to Park Central Outfitters in partial settlement of
|
|
|
the balance due from the transaction on March 18.
|
|
3/28
|
Rented a car from United Car Rental for use on March 28. Total charges
|
|
|
amounted to $125, with United billing Burton for the amount due.
|
|
3/31
|
Paid $600 for March wages
|
|
3/31
|
Processed a $600 cash withdrawal (dividend) from the business for Joanne Burton
|
Instructions
a. Determine the impact of each of the preceding transactions on Burton s assets,
liabilities, and owner s equity. See exhibit 1.5. Use the following format:
Assets = Liabilities + Owner s Equity
Cash, Accounts Receivable, Land, Equipment Accounts Payable (+)Common Stock (+) Revenues
(-) Dividends (-) Expenses
a. Record each transaction on a separate line. Calculate balances only after the last transaction has been recorded.
b. Prepare an income statement, a statement of retained earnings, and a balance sheet, (See Exhibit 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4)
6. Entry and trial balance preparation. Lee Adkins is a portrait artist. The following schedule represents Lee s combined chart of accounts and trial balance as of May 31.
Account number Account name Debit Credit
|
110
|
Cash
|
$ 2,700
|
|
|
120
|
Accounts Receivable
|
12,100
|
|
|
130
|
Equipment and Supplies
|
2,800
|
|
|
140
|
Studio
|
45,000
|
|
|
210
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$2,600
|
|
310
|
Lee Adkins, Capital
|
|
57,400
|
|
320
|
Lee Adkins, Drawing
|
30,000
|
|
|
410
|
Professional Fee Revenue
|
|
39,000
|
|
510
|
Advertising Expense
|
2,300
|
|
|
520
|
Salaries Expense
|
2,100
|
|
|
540
|
Utilities Expense
|
2,000
|
|
|
|
$99,000
|
$99,000
|
The general ledger also revealed account no. 530, Legal and Accounting Expense. The following transactions occurred during June:
|
6/2
|
Collected $3,000 on account from customers
|
|
6/7
|
Sold 25% of the equipment and supplies to a young artist for $700 cash
|
|
6/10
|
Received a $300 invoice from the accountant for preparing last quarter’s financial Statements.
|
|
6/15
|
Paid $1,900 to creditors on account.
|
|
|
6/27
|
Adkins withdrew $2,000 cash for personal use.
|
|
6/30
|
Billed a customer $3,000 for a portrait painted this month.
|
|
|
|
a. Record the necessary journal entries for June on page 2 of the company s general journal. (See Exhibit 2.6)
b. Open running balance ledger T accounts by entering account titles, account numbers, and May 31 balances. (See exhibit 2.3 and 2.4)
c. Post the journal entries to the T accounts.
d. Prepare a trial balance as of June 30. (See exhibit 2.9)
7. Journal entry preparation. On January 1 of the current year, Peter Houston invested $80,000 cash into his company MuniServ. The cash was obtained from an owner investment by Peter Houston of $50,000 and a $30,000 bank loan. Shortly thereafter, the company acquired selected assets of a bankrupt competitor. The acquisition included land ($10,000), a building ($40,000), and vehicles ($10,000). MuniServ paid $45,000 at the time of the transaction and agreed to remit the remaining balance due of $15,000 (an account payable) by February 15.
During January, the company had additional cash outlays for the following items:
-
|
Purchases of store equipment
|
$4,600
|
|
Note payment
|
500
|
|
Salaries expense
|
2,300
|
|
Advertising expense
|
700
|
|
|
|
The January utility bill of $200 was received on January 31 and will be paid next month. MuniServ rendered services to clients on account amounting to $9,400. All customers have been billed; by month end, $3,700 had been received in settlement of account balances.
Instructions
-
Present journal entries that reflect MuniServ’s January transactions, including the $80,000 raised from the owner investment and loan. (See exhibit 2.6)
-
Compute the total debits, total credits, and ending balance that would be found in the company’s Cash account. (Post to T Accounts, see exhibit 2.3 and 2.4)
c. Determine the amount that would be shown on the January 31 trial balance for Accounts
Payable. Is the balance a debit or a credit?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Key Assignment Draft
Craig Brown, a mechanic, is planning to open his own car repair shop. He has selected the location, the kinds of cars that he will service, and the number of people that he will employ. However, he needs some help with the capitalization of the machines that he needs to buy, and how he has to depreciate these assets. He approaches you, an accountant friend, to help him understand the fundamentals of capitalization of expenses, the various depreciation methods, and the impact of this depreciation expense related to his assets on the financial statements. You use a former client and other businesses in the industry to prepare a report explaining these concepts to him.
Part A
- Explain to Craig the following:
- Why it is it important to distinguish between expenses that need to be capitalized and expenses that need to be expensed.
- What the underlying fundamental concept is that governs what expenses should be capitalized and what should be expensed.
- Give an example of a company that experienced financial difficulty because of capitalizing expenses that should have been expensed.
- The ABC car repair shop, a former client of yours, purchased a machine on January 1, 20X1, at a net cost of $65,000. At the end of the 4-year life, it expected that the machine would have a salvage value of $1,000. It also estimated that the machine would run for 13,000 hours during its 4-year life. The company s fiscal year ends on December 31. Using the following information, compute depreciation for this machine for each of the 4 years using each of the following methods:
- Straight-line method
- Sum-of-years method
- Double-declining method
- Units-of-production
|
Year
|
Machine Hours
|
|
20X1
|
2,000
|
|
20X2
|
3,500
|
|
20X3
|
1,500
|
|
20X4
|
6,000
|
- The ABC car repair shop purchased a machine in 20X1 at a cost of $20,000. The tractor was sold for $2,000 in 20X3. Depreciation recorded through the disposal totaled $16,000.
- Prepare the journal entry to record the sale.
- If the machine was sold for $10,000, what will the entry be?
- The ABC car repair shop traded an old machine for a newer model. The old model s book value was $150,000 (original cost $350,000, less $200,000 accumulated depreciation) and its fair value was $200,000. ABC paid $40,000 to complete the exchange.
- Prepare the journal entry to record the exchange.
Part B
Research the annual reports of various companies to find examples of the following, and explain the meaning of your findings to Craig:
- Equity securities:Find a company that has investments and equity securities listed on its balance sheet.
- Cite the source of the statement(s).
- Look at the footnotes to the financial statements and comment on its holdings in equity securities.
- Explain how this information is used by an investor.
- Cumulative effect:This has an impact on shareholders equity. Find a company that has an impact on their financial statements because of cumulative effect.
- Cite the source of the statement(s).
- Explain its footnotes.
- Explain how this information is used by an investor.
- Leases:Find a company that has leases.
- Cite the source of the statement(s).
- Examine its footnotes. See if it has capital leases or operating leases. What is the difference in the presentation in the financial statements? Provide an explanation of the notes to financial statements about leases.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please share a current article information (newspaper, magazine, website, etc.) found outside of class related to the objectives covered during class.
Please write at least 400 words and apply concepts and teachings from the weekly readings.
Topics for this week were the following:
Management s decision-making process
o To be effective, the decision-making process should be systematic and based on timely and relevant information.
o The decision-making process includes the following four steps, each of which depends on timely information from accountants:
Identify the problem and assign responsibility for resolution.
Determine and evaluate possible courses of action.
Make a decision (Note. A nondecision is a decision to do nothing status quo.)
Review results of the decision.
Incremental analysis
o Incremental analysis is a time-saving tool for decision making. It leads to timelier and often better decisions. The incremental analysis approach isolates relevant informationcosts and revenues that are impacted by the decisionand uses this information to compare alternatives and make the most profitable decisions.
o Examples of decisions best made through incremental analysis include:
Accept an order at special price decisions.
Make-or-buydecisions.
Sell or process further decisions.
Retain or replace equipment decisions.
Eliminate an unprofitable segment decision.
Allocate limited resources decisions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
House of Tutors, Incorporated, (HTI) is a company that runs a tutoring service for high school and university students. The company reported the following amounts in its post-closing trial balance, prepared at the end of its first fiscal year, at August 31, 2013
|
| Accounts Payable |
$ |
50 |
|
| Accounts Receivable |
|
270 |
|
| Accumulated Depreciation |
|
1,250 |
|
| Cash |
|
750 |
|
| Contributed Capital |
|
3,000 |
|
| Equipment |
|
12,500 |
|
| Interest Payable |
|
45 |
|
| Note Payable (long-term) |
|
8,500 |
|
| Retained Earnings |
|
795 |
|
| Supplies |
|
120 |
|
|
| a. |
HTI provided 100 hours of regular hourly tutoring at the rate of $18 per hour, all of which was collected in cash.
|
| b. |
HTI paid tutors at the hourly rate of $9 per hour. On September 28, HTI paid for 90 hours of tutor time and promised to pay the remaining hours worked.
|
| c. |
HTI hosted an all-night review session on September 29 for people cramming for midterm exams, at a special price of $10 per attendee. Rather than collect cash at the time of the review session, HTI will send bills in October to the 80 people who attended the review session.
|
| d. |
At the beginning of the night-long review session, HTI paid $250 cash to its tutors for wages. No additional wages will be paid for the review session.
|
| e. |
HTI collected $250 cash on account from students who received tutoring during summer 2013. |
| f. |
HTI also collected $300 cash from a high school for a tutoring session to be held in October 2013. |
| g. |
HTI determined that depreciation for September should be $150. |
| h. |
On September 30, HTI declared and paid a $550 cash dividend. |
| i. |
Although HTI adjusted its accounts on August 31, it has not yet paid the $45 monthly interest owed on the promissory note, for either August or September. The note is due October 2016.
|
| j. |
HTI has only $45 of supplies left at September 30. |
| k. |
HTI s income taxes are approximately 30% of income before tax.
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Houston-based Advanced Electronics manufactures audio speakers for desktop computers. The following data relates to the period just ended when the company produced and sold 42,000 speaker sets:
Sales $3,360,000
Variable Costs 840,000
Fixed Costs 2,280,000
Management is considering relocating its manufacturing facilities to Northern Mexico to reduce costs. Variable costs are expected to average $18 per set; annual fixed costs are anticipated to be $1,984,000. (Ingors income taxes)
1. Calculate the company’s current income and determine the level of dollar sales needed to double that figure, assuming that manufacturing operations remain in the United States.
2. Determine the break even point in speaker sets if operations are shifted to Mexico
3. Assume that management desires to achieve the Mexican break even point; however, operations remain in the United States.
a) If variable costs remain constant, what must management do to fixed costs? By how much must fixed costs change?
b) If fixed costs remain constant, what must management do to the variable cost per unit? By how much must unit variable cost change?
4. Determine the impact (increase, decrease, or no effect) of the following operating changes.
a) Effect of an increase in direct material costs on the break-even point
b) Effect of an increase in fixed administration costs on the unit contribution margin.
c) Effect of an increase in the un it contribution margin on net income.
d) Effect of an decrease in the number of units sold on the break even point.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 2: Calculating Inventory
Finlon Upholstery Inc. uses a job-order costing system to accumulate manufacturing costs. The company’s work-in-process on December 31, 2001, consisted of one job (no. 2077), which was carried on the year-end balance sheet at $156,800. There was no finished-goods inventory on this date.
Finlon applies manufacturing overhead to production on the basis of direct-labor cost. (The budgeted direct-labor cost is the company’s practical capacity, in terms of direct-labor hours multiplied by the budgeted direct-labor rate.) Budgeted totals for 2002 for direct labor and manufacturing overhead are $4,200,000 and $5,460,000, respectively. Actual results for the year are as follows:
|
Actual Results
|
|
|
Direct Materials Used
|
$5,600,000.00
|
|
Direct Labor
|
$4,350,000.00
|
|
Indirect Material Used
|
$65,000.00
|
|
Indirect Labor
|
$2,860,000.00
|
|
Factory Depreciation
|
$1,740,000.00
|
|
Factory Insurance
|
$59,000.00
|
|
Factory Utilities
|
$830,000.00
|
|
Selling and Administrative Expenses
|
$2,160,000.00
|
|
Total
|
$17,664,000.00
|
Job No. 2077 was completed in January 2002 and there was no work in process at year-end. All jobs produced during 2002 were sold with the exception of Job No. 2143, which contained direct-material costs of $156,000 and direct-labor charges of $85,000. The company charges any under- or over-applied overhead to the cost of goods sold category.
Using the above information, do the following:
- Calculate the company s predetermined overhead application rate.
- Calculate the additions to the work-in-process inventory account for the direct material used, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.
- Calculate the finished-goods inventory for the 12/31/01 balance sheet.
- Calculate the over-applied or under-applied overhead at year end.
- Explain if it is appropriate to include selling and administrative expenses in the cost of goods sold category.
Perform your calculations in an Excel spreadsheet and copy the calculations into a Word document.
Write a 1-page paper in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M2_A2.doc.
By Wednesday, October 9, 2013, deliver your assignment and calculations to the M2: Assignment 2 Dropbox.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Encore Video Store Co. is owned and operated by Sergio Alonzo. The following is an excerpt from a conversation between Sergio Alonzo and Suzie Engel, the chief accountant for The EncoreVideo Store:
Sergio: Suzie, I ve got a question about this recent balance sheet.
Suzie: Sure, what s your question?
Sergio: Well, as you know, I m applying for a bank loan to finance our new store in Cherokee, and I noticed that the accounts payable are listed as $120,000.
Suzie: That s right. Approximately $100,000 of that represents amounts due our suppliers, and the remainder is miscellaneous payables to creditors for utilities, office equipment, supplies, etc.
Sergio: That s what I thought. But as you know, we normally receive a 2% discount from our suppliers for earlier payment, and we always try to take the discount.
Suzie: That s right. I can t remember the last time we missed a discount.
Sergio: Well, in that case, it seems to me the accounts payable should be listed minus the 2% discount. Let s list the accounts payable due suppliers as $98,000, rather than $100,000. Every little bit helps. You never know. It might make the difference between getting the loan and not.
How would you respond to Sergio Alonzo s request?
Needs to be at least 100 words. I would need this by no later than 05/18/2013 12pm CT
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PART I.
Hoyt, Inc. has estimated current year sales (in millions) for the next four quarters.
Quarter 1 – $240, Quarter 2 – $250, Quarter 3 – $205, and Quarter 4 – $350
Sales for the 1st quarter next year are projected to be $230.
Accounts Receivable at the beginning of the year was $100.
Beginning Accounts Payable were $60.
The beginning cash balance is $50.
Hoyt, Inc. cash collection schedule is as follows: 60% of sales in the current quarter, 40% in the 1st quarter after sale.
Purchases from suppliers in a quarter are equal to 50% of the next quarter s forecasted sales.
Suppliers are normally paid in 50% in the quarter purchases are made and 50% in the following quarter.
Wages, taxes and other expenses are 20% of current quarter sales
Hoyt, Inc. maintains a minimum cash balance of $30
Question #1: Complete a cash budget for Hoyt, Inc.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
need help replying to this, 50-100 word count
It s mentioned that employees may feel that a lack of recognition will create loss of motivation. One of the areas that I find hard, is to administer a Performance and Career Development appraisal. I find this hard because we evaluate based on performance, but merit raises are hard to give when everyone is “exceeding” or meeting expectations. Most companies offer a pool, such as 3% of total salary and then ask managers to divide this between direct reports. 3% pool does not mean everyone will get a 3% raise. Assuming all are evaluated similarly, how do you give one employee 6%, when the next only gets 2%? Is there more than performance? When you ask employees they feel their performance should be tied to compensation, such as raises.
Think about inflation. Typically, inflation accounts for 1.5% to 3% each year. When you get a raise each year do you consider what is going on with inflation? Is the merit increase an increase based on performance or is it a standard of living increase? I am curious to the responses. Should there be truly an increase above and beyond standard inflation
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 2: Using Financial Ratios to Assess Organizational Performance
Using the financial statements from your selected health care organization in Assignment 1,The UHS strategy develop a financial plan for the next three (3) years.
Write a four to five (4-5) page paper in which you:
1. Suggest the financial ratio that most financial analysts would use to evaluate the financial condition of the company. Provide support for your rationale.
2. Speculate on the organization’s ability to meet its financial obligations as they come due. Provide support for your rationale.
3. Based on your ratio analysis, determine whether the profitability trends are favorable or unfavorable and explain your rationale.
4. Using financial ratio analysis, predict whether or not the company will be viable in five (5) years based on its performance over the past three (3) years. Provide support for your prediction.
5. Use at least two (2) quality academic resources.Note:Wikipedia and other Websites do not qualify as academic resources.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Associate Level Material Appendix C Creating a Budget Various budget approaches play an important role in resource allocation in human service organizations. You are the executive director for a local government workforce agency that focuses on providing career- and work-related skills. The Department of Education has awarded your agency with grant funding of $1.6 million to provide training programs to high school dropouts. The funded programs are a basic work skills training program and a vocational program. You are preparing a budget matrix to present to the awarding agency. The matrix budget consists of line-item, functional, and program budgets. Operating Expenses: Per Year Rent $125,000 Utilities $100,000 Office supplies $25,000 Equipment/lease $50,000 Transportation and travel $100,000 Outside consultants $100,000 Overhead costs $100,000 Personnel expenses: Annual Salary Number of FTEs Executive director $100,000 1 Training supervisor $80,000 1 Trainers $50,000 10 Administrative coordinator $45,000 1 Administrative staff $25,000 3 Employee-related benefit expenses @ 25% $200,000 All costs excluding the salary of the executive director and training supervisor will be allocated according to this formula: 60% to basic skills program 40% to vocational program Number of eligible students: 1,000 Use the information above to create each of the following: 1 A line-item budget table showing all associated costs implementing the training programs. 2 A combined functional and program budget to calculate all costs per enrolled student.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hunsicker Corporation has provided the following data for the month of January:
Inventories
Beginning
Ending
Raw materials
$30,000
$33,000
Work In process
$20,000
$18,000
Finished goods
$52,000
$60,000
Additional Information
Raw material purchases
$63,000
Direct labor costs
$92,000
Manufacturing overhead cost incurred
$75,000
Indirect materials included in manufacturing overhead costs incurred
$6,000
Manufacturing overhead cost applied to work in process
$69,000
Prepare a Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured and a Schedule of Cost of Goods Sold in good form.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hunsicker Corporation has provided the following data for the month of January:
|
Inventories
|
|
Beginning
|
Ending
|
|
Raw materials
|
$30,000
|
$33,000
|
|
Work In process
|
$20,000
|
$18,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
$52,000
|
$60,000
|
|
Additional Information
|
|
|
Raw material purchases
|
$63,000
|
|
Direct labor costs
|
$92,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead cost incurred
|
$75,000
|
|
Indirect materials included in manufacturing overhead costs incurred
|
$6,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead cost applied to work in process
|
$69,000
|
Prepare a Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured and a Schedule of Cost of Goods Sold in good form.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
. The Hyatt Company is trying to decide whether it should purchase new equipment and continue to make its subassemblies internally or if production should be discontinued and the subassembly purchased from an outside supplier. Either way production can not continue using the current equipment. New equipment for producing the subassemblies can be purchased at a cost of $400,000. The equipment would have a five-year useful life (the company uses straight-line depreciation) and a $50,000 salvage value. Alternatively, the subassemblies could be purchased from an outside supplier. The supplier has offered to provide the subassemblies for $9 each under a five-year contract. Hyatt Company’s present costs per unit of producing the subassemblies internally (with the old equipment) are given below. The costs are based on a current activity level of 40,000 subassemblies per year: Direct Materials $ 3.00 Direct Labour $ 4.20 Variable Overhead $ 0.60 Fixed Overhead ($0.80 supervision, $0.90 depreciation, and $2 general company overhead) $ 3.70 Total Cost per Unit $11.50
The new equipment would be more efficient and would reduce direct labour costs and variable overhead costs by 25%. Supervision cost ($30,000 per year) and direct materials cost per unit would not be affected by the new equipment. The company has no other use for the space now being used to produce the subassemblies. The company’s total general company overhead would not be affected by this decision. Assume direct labour is a variable cost.
Required:Assume that 40,000 subassemblies are needed each year. Prepare an analysis of the two alternatives and make a recommendation to the management of the company of the appropriate course of action.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
5. TheincomestatementforHylandCompanyfor2014 appearsbelow:
|
Hyland Company
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2014
|
|
Salesrevenue(40,000 units)
|
1,000,000
|
|
Variableexpenses
|
700,000
|
|
Contributionmargin
|
300,000
|
|
Fixedexpenses
|
345,000
|
|
Netincome(loss)
|
(45,000)
|
Instructions
Answerthe followingindependentquestionsandshowcomputationstosupportyouranswers:
1. Whatwasthecompany sbreak-evenpointinsalesdollarsin2014?
2. Howmanyadditionalunitswouldthecompanyhavetosellin2015 (comparedto2014) inorderto earnnetincomeof$45,000?
3. Ifthecompanyisabletoreducevariablecostsby$4.50 perunitin2015 and othercostsandunit revenuesremainunchanged,howmanyunitswillthecompanyhavetosellinordertoearnanet incomeof$45,000?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Select a scholarly empirical journal article** in Business from the library s full-text databases. Paragraph 1: Provide a quick overview of the study. Paragraph 2: Analyze the way the research study was completed from an ethical standpoint. Paragraph 3: Assess if it was done well or not based on what you have learned so far. This post must be 3 paragraphs in length. Since you are doing research, there must be citations in the body of the post and a reference list at the end. The goal is to apply learned concepts in order to show your understanding. You should steer away from quotations; they do not showcase your knowledge. The article must end with a large reference list (more than 10 articles) and will contain citations in the body of the article. The article must describe a primary research study with human subjects. A description of the survey, methodology, data collection, analysis, and conclusions are included in the article. Once you have located an applicable source from AIU s library, save a copy in Word or PDF. Add to work the article. Please do not use quotes or copy definitions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Your city has decided to build a new library. The projected cost is $2 million. A bond issue for $1.2 million has been authorized, and the remainder is supposed to come from a contribution of $800,000 from the general fund. The bonds sold for $1.3 million, a premium of $100,000. Create the required journal entries for the following transactions:
- The budget for the library
- The payment and receipt of funds from the general fund
- The issuance of the bonds
- Assume that the premium remained in the capital projects fund.
- Identify all of the funds required for these entries.
- Discuss how the bond premium could be disposed.
In general terms, compare and contrast how expenditures are controlled in the general fund and in debt service funds. Explain why differences would occur.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I am looking an answer to this; WACC
Cost of Debt #1
30 year bonds
Current Price 98.25% of par value
7.5% coupon rate
Semi Annual Bond
12 years to maturity
tax rate 40%
What is total cost of debt I got 4.5%
Pref. Stock #2
Dividend $3.25
Current Price $63.25
What is the cost of preferred I got 5.1%
Equity #3
Risk Free Rate 7.00%
Market Risk Premium 6.00%
Stock Beta .6
What is the cost of equity I got 10.6%
Debt/Equity #4
6,000 Bonds outstanding selling @ 98.25% of Par Value
45,000 Preffered stock @ $63.25
350,000 Shares of COmmon Stock @ 28.00 per share
What is WACC —
Given the WACC calculate the NPV for the following capital budgeting decision
Investment is: $250,000
Cash Flows
yr 1 -50,000
yr 2 65,000
yr 3 75,000
yr 4 95,000
yr 5 215,000
NPV IS
Decision ACCEPT / REJECT
Calculate Payback
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
- The contractual rate of interest is usually stated as a(n)Answer
-
|
|
monthly rate. |
|
|
daily rate. |
|
|
semiannual rate. |
|
|
annual rate. |
-
4 points
Question 2
-
A bond with a face value of $100,000 and a quoted price of 97 has a selling price of
Answer
|
|
$97,250. |
|
|
$97,025. |
|
|
$97,002. |
|
|
$97,500. |
4 points
Question 3
-
The contractual interest rate on a bond is often referred to as the:
Answer
|
|
Callable rate. |
|
|
the maturity rate. |
|
|
market rate. |
|
|
stated rate. |
4 points
Question 4
-
If the market interest rate for a bond is higher than the stated interest rate, the bond will sell at:
Answer
|
|
A premium. |
|
|
A discount. |
|
|
Par. |
|
|
Both a and b correct. |
4 points
Question 5
-
If the market rate of interest is 10%, a $10,000, 12%, 10-year bond that pays interest annually would sell at an amount
Answer
|
|
less than face value. |
|
|
equal to face value. |
|
|
greater than face value. |
|
|
that cannot be determined. |
4 points
Question 6
-
If bonds are issued at a premium, the stated interest rate is
Answer
|
|
higher than the market rate of interest. |
|
|
lower than the market rate of interest. |
|
|
too low to attract investors. |
|
|
adjusted to a higher rate of interest. |
4 points
Question 7
-
Gomez Corporation issues $500,000 10-year, 8% bonds dated January 1, 2010, at 96. The journal entry to record the issuance will show a
Answer
|
|
debit to Cash of $500,000. |
|
|
credit to Discount on Bonds Payable for $20,000. |
|
|
debit to Bonds Payable for $480,000. |
|
|
debit to Cash for $480,000. |
4 points
Question 8
-
Molina Corporation issues 2,000, 10-year, 8%, $1,000 bonds dated January 1, 2010, at 103. The journal entry to record the issuance will show a
Answer
|
|
debit to Cash of $2,000,000. |
|
|
debit to Premium on Bonds Payable for $60,000. |
|
|
credit to Bonds Payable for $2,060,000. |
|
|
credit to Cash for $2,060,000. |
Short answer – fill in the blanks below.
On December 31, 2005, Hanks Service Co. issued $300,000 face value, 9%, 5-year bonds for cash of $ 288,417, a price that yields 10%. Interest is to be paid annually.
Compute the amount of interest Hanks Co. will pay to bondholders each year during the term of the bonds. ______________
On January 2,1998, Lang Co. had issued $100,000 of 12% bonds to yield 10%. On January 2, 2000, the Premium on Bonds Payable account had a balance of $8,000. This account shows the unamortized amount of the premium.
Determine the carrying value of the bonds 1/2/2000. ______________
Determine the amount paid to bondholders at the maturity date of the bonds, January 2, 2008. ________________
Please note – be sure to provide both amounts in your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Record the following transactions in general journal form for the AAA Corporation.
Common stock: 500,000 shares authorized; 300,000 shares issued and outstanding
Preferred stock: 10,000 shares authorized; all shares currently unissued
Feb. 1 Issued for cash 3,000 shares of Preferred Stock at $100 per share, par value.
Feb. 6 Issued for cash 100,000 shares of Common Stock at $5 per share, par value.
Feb. 15 Issued 10,000 shares, $5 par value Common Stock in exchange for cash, $87,000.
Feb.18 Issued for cash 65,000 shares of $5 par value Common Stock for $8 per share.
Feb. 20 AAA declared a cash dividend to common stockholders, $1.00 per share on the shares outstanding.
Feb. 27 Paid the cash dividend to common stockholders
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Based on the following account balances from the ledger of the Sands Corp.;
A. Determine the Retained Earnings balance at 12/31/07.
Dividends for the year were $75,000 and the corporation’s net income was $340,000 for the year.
B. Determine the Total Stockholder’s Equity reported on the Balance Sheet 12/31/07.
| Account Titles |
Account Balance |
|
Additional Paid In Capital
Short term Investments
|
$ 117,000
50,000
|
|
Preferred stock, 12%, $100 par value
Common Stock, $5 par value
Retained earnings, 1/1/07
|
400,000
1,650,000
125,000
|
|
Organizational expense
Treasury Stock-common(2,000 shares)
Merchandise Inventory
|
1,500
37,000
105,000
|
|
Purchases
Gain on sale of investment
Dividend Revenue
|
650,000
4,800
11,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
Notes Payable
Estimated income taxes payable
|
400,000
80,000
115,000
|
|
Paid-in-capital-Donations
Mortgage Payable
Interest Expense
|
200,000
105,000
7,500
|
|
Interest Payable
Dividends Payable
Dividends
Cash
|
3,000
15,000
75,000
146,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
- Which of the following ratios is most useful in evaluating liquidity?
- Answer
-
|
|
Return on assets. |
|
|
Return on equity. |
|
|
Debt to equity ratio. |
|
|
Current ratio. |
-
4 points
Question 2
-
The current ratio is calculated as:
Answer
|
|
Current assets divided by noncurrent assets. |
|
|
Current assets divided by current liabilities. |
|
|
Current liabilities divided by noncurrent liabilities. |
|
|
Current liabilities divided by current assets. |
6 points
Question 3
-
Excerpts from Stealth Company’s December 31, 2013 and 2012, financial statements are presented below:
Stealth Company’s 2013 inventory turnover is:
Answer
|
|
3.62 times. |
|
|
3.96 times. |
|
|
4.07 times. |
|
|
6.03 times. |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exercise 10-11 Prepare a statement of stockholders’ equity [LO7]
|
Power Drive Corporation designs and produces a line of golf equipment and golf apparel. Power Drive has 100,000 shares of common stock outstanding as of the beginning of 2012. Power Drive has the following transactions affecting stockholders’ equity in 2012.
|
| March |
1 |
Issues 55,000 additional shares of $1 par value common stock for $52 per share. |
| May |
10 |
Repurchases 5,000 shares of treasury stock for $55 per share. |
| June |
1 |
Declares a cash dividend of $1.50 per share to all stockholders of record on June 15. (Hint: Dividends are not paid on treasury stock.) |
| July |
1 |
Pays the cash dividend declared on June 1. |
| October |
21 |
Reissues 2,500 shares of treasury stock purchased on May 10 for $60 per share. |
|
Power Drive Corporation has the following beginning balances in its stockholders’ equity accounts on January 1, 2012: common stock, $100,000; paid-in capital, $4,500,000; and retained earnings, $2,000,000. Net income for the year ended December 31, 2012, is $600,000.
|
| Required: |
|
Prepare the statement of stockholders’ equity for Power Drive Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2012. (Amounts to be deducted should be indicated with a minus sign. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
POWER DRIVE CORPORATION Statement of Stockholders’ Equity For the year ended December 31, 2012 |
|
Common Stock |
Additional Paid-in Capital |
Retained Earnings |
Treasury Stock |
Total Stockholders’ Equity |
| Balance, January 1 |
$ 100,000 |
$ 4,500,000 |
$ 2,000,000 |
$ 0 |
$ 6,600,000 |
| Issued common stock |
|
|
|
|
|
| Repurchased treasury stock |
|
|
|
|
|
| Cash dividends |
|
|
|
|
|
| Sold treasury stock |
|
|
|
|
|
| Net income |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Balance, December 31 |
$ |
$ |
$ |
$ |
$ |
|
value: 1.00 points
Exercise 10-9 Record common stock, treasury stock, and cash dividends [LO2, 4, 5]
|
Power Drive Corporation designs and produces a line of golf equipment and golf apparel. Power Drive has 100,000 shares of common stock outstanding as of the beginning of 2012. Power Drive has the following transactions affecting stockholders’ equity in 2012.
|
| March |
1 |
Issues 55,000 additional shares of $1 par value common stock for $52 per share. |
| May |
10 |
Repurchases 5,000 shares of treasury stock for $55 per share. |
| June |
1 |
Declares a cash dividend of $1.50 per share to all stockholders of record on June 15. (Hint: Dividends are not paid on treasury stock.) |
| July |
1 |
Pays the cash dividend declared on June 1. |
| October |
21 |
Reissues 2,500 shares of treasury stock purchased on May 10 for $60 per share. |
| Required: |
| Record each of these transactions. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.) |
| Date |
General Journal |
Debit |
Credit |
| Mar. 1 |
(Click to select)Treasury stockCashAdditional paid-in capitalAccounts receivableAccounts payableCommon stockRetained earningsPreferred stock |
|
|
|
(Click to select)Additional paid in capitalCommon stockCashPreferred stockTreasury stockRetained earningsAccounts receivableAccounts payable |
|
|
|
(Click to select)Retained earningsCommon stockTreasury stockAdditional paid in capitalAccounts payableAccounts receivableCashPreferred stock |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| May 10 |
(Click to select)Retained earningsAdditional paid-in capitalPreferred stockAccounts payableCommon stockAccounts receivableCashTreasury stock |
|
|
|
(Click to select)Common stockRetained earningsTreasury stockPreferred stockCashAdditional paid-in capitalAccounts receivableAccounts payable |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| June 1 |
(Click to select)Additional paid-in capitalTreasury stockDividendsDividends payableCashAccounts receivableCommon stockAccounts payable |
|
|
|
(Click to select)Additional paid-in capitalCommon stockDividendsAccounts receivableTreasury stockCashAccounts payableDividends payable |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| July 1 |
(Click to select)CashRetained earningsDividendsAdditional paid-in capitalAccounts receivableTreasury stockAccounts payableDividends payable |
|
|
|
(Click to select)Accounts receivableCashDividendsAccounts payableTreasury stockRetained earningsDividends payableAdditional paid-in capital |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Oct. 21 |
(Click to select)Preferred stockRetained earningsTreasury stockAdditional paid-in capitalAccounts payableAccounts receivableCommon stockCash |
|
|
|
(Click to select)CashCommon stockPreferred stockAccounts payableAccounts receivableRetained earningsAdditional paid in capitalTreasury stock |
|
|
|
(Click to select)Retained earningsAccounts payableCashAccounts receivablePreferred stockTreasury stockAdditional paid in capitalCommon stock |
|
|
|
check my workeBook Links (3) references
| Worksheet |
Difficulty: Medium |
Learning Objective: 10-04 Account for treasury stock. |
|
Exercise 10-9 Record common stock, treasury stock, and cash dividends [LO2, 4, 5]
Exercise 10-8 Record cash dividends [LO5]
|
On March 15, American Eagle declares a quarterly cash dividend of $0.075 per share payable on April 13 to all stockholders of record on March 30.
|
| Required: |
|
Record American Eagle’s declaration and payment of cash dividends for its 220 million shares. (Enter your answers in dollars, not in millions.Leave no cells blank. If no entry is required, select “No journal entry required” in the account field and enter zero (0) in the amount field. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
| Date |
General Journal |
Debit |
Credit |
| March 15 |
(Click to select)No journal entry requiredAccounts payableDividendsCommon stockAccounts receivableDividends payableAdditional paid-in capitalCash |
|
|
|
(Click to select)Notes receivableDividends payableAccounts receivableCommon stockNo journal entry requiredAdditional paid-in capitalAccounts payableCash |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| March 30 |
(Click to select)Additional paid-in capitalNotes receivableCashAccounts receivableDividends payableAccounts payableRetained earningsNo journal entry required |
|
|
|
(Click to select)Accounts receivableAccounts payableNo journal entry requiredNotes receivableDividends payableRetained earningsCashAdditional paid-in capital |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| April 13 |
(Click to select)Dividends payableNo journal entry requiredAccounts payableCashAccounts receivableRetained earningsNotes receivableAdditional paid-in capital |
|
|
|
(Click to select)CashAdditional paid-in capitalAccounts receivableNo journal entry requiredNotes receivableDividends payableAccounts payableRetained earnings |
|
|
Exercise 10-5 Record common stock, preferred stock, and dividend transactions [LO2, 3, 5]
| Italian Stallion has the following transactions during the year related to stockholders equity. |
| February |
1 |
Issues 5,000 shares of no-par common stock for $15 per share. |
| May |
15 |
Issues 500 shares of $10 par value preferred stock for $12 per share. |
| October |
1 |
Declares a cash dividend of $0.75 per share to all stockholders of record (both common and preferred) on October 15. |
| October |
15 |
Date of record. |
| October |
31 |
Pays the cash dividend declared on October 1. |
| Required: |
|
Record each of these transactions. (Leave no cells blank. If no entry is required, select “No journal entry required” in the account field and enter zero (0) in the amount field.Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
| Date |
General Journal |
Debit |
Credit |
| Feb. 1 |
(Click to select)No journal entry requiredAdditional paid-in capitalDividends payableCash dividendsPreferred stockCommon stockCashTreasury stock |
|
|
|
(Click to select)Dividends payablePreferred stockCash dividendsTreasury stockCashNo journal entry requiredAdditional paid-in capitalCommon stock |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| May 15 |
(Click to select)No journal entry requiredPreferred stockCash dividendsTreasury stockAdditional paid-in capitalDividendsCashDividends payable |
|
|
|
(Click to select)Additional paid-in capitalDividendsTreasury stockCashNo journal entry requiredPreferred stockCash dividendsDividends payable |
|
|
|
(Click to select)Additional paid-in capitalPreferred stockTreasury stockDividendsCash dividendsCashDividends payableNo journal entry required |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Oct. 1 |
(Click to select)Accounts payableDividendsAccounts receivableDividends payableRetained earningsCashNo journal entry requiredAdditional paid-in capital |
|
|
|
(Click to select)Retained earningsDividends payableCashNo journal entry requiredAccounts payableAccounts receivableAdditional paid-in capitalDividends |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Oct. 15 |
(Click to select)DividendsTreasury stockCash dividendsDividends payableAdditional paid-in capitalCashNo journal entry requiredPreferred stock |
|
|
|
(Click to select)Preferred stockCash dividendsCashDividends payableNo journal entry requiredTreasury stockAdditional paid-in capitalDividends |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Oct. 31 |
(Click to select)DividendsRetained earningsDividends payableAccounts payableAccounts receivableAdditional paid-in capitalNo journal entry requiredCash |
|
|
|
(Click to select)DividendsCashDividends payablePreferred stockAdditional paid-in capitalCash dividendsNo journal entry requiredTreasury stock |
|
|
|
Learning Objective: 10-02 Record the issuance of common stock. |
Learning Objective: 10-05 Describe retained earnings and record cash dividends.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) A company purchased $60,000 of 5% bonds on May 1 at par value. The bonds pay interest on February 1 and August 1. The amount of interest accrued on December 31 (the company’s year-end) would be
A. 250
B. 500
C. 1,250
D. 2,500
E. 3,000
2) Hamilton Company owns 88,200 of Hennie Company’s 180,000 outstanding shares of common stock. Hennie Company pays $30,000 in total cash dividends to its shareholders. Hamilton’s entry to record this transaction should include a
A.Credit to Long-Term investments for $14,700
B.Credit to Dividend Revenue for $30,000
C.Debit to Dividend Revenue for $14,700
D.Debit to Interest Revenue for $14,700
E.Credit to Long-Term Investments for $30,000
|
3) On April 18, Riley Co. made a short-term investment in 300 common shares of XLT Co. The purchase price is $42 per share and the broker s fee is $250. The intent is to actively manage these shares for profit. On May 30, Riley Co. receives $1 per share from XLT in dividends.
|
Prepare the April 18 and May 30 journal entries to record these transactions
4) Journ Co. purchased short-term investments in available-for-sale securities at a cost of $50,000 on November 25, 2013. At December 31, 2013, these securities had a fair value of $47,000. This is the first and only time the company has purchased such securities
Prepare the December 31, 2013, year-end adjusting entry for the securities’ portfolio
5) On February 1, 2013, Garzon purchased 6% bonds issued by PBS Utilities at a cost of $40,000, which is their par value. The bonds pay interest semiannually on July 31 and January 31. For 2013, prepare entries to record Garzon’s July 31 receipt of interest and its December 31 year-end interest accrual. (Do not round your intermediate calculations.)
Record the interest revenue on July 31, 2013
Record the interest accrued on the bonds as of December 31, 2013.
6) On May 20, 2013, Montero Co. paid $1,000,000 to acquire 40% of ORD Corp. s outstanding stock. Also assume that ORD Corp. paid a $100,000 dividend on November 1, 2013. Prepare the journal entry to record the dividend on November 1, 2013.
|
7) On May 20, 2013, Montero Co. paid $1,000,000 to acquire 25,000 common shares (10%) of ORD Corp. as a long-term investment. On August 5, 2014, Montero sold one-half of these shares for $625,000.
|
| What valuation method should be used to account for this stock investment? |
|
Equity method |
|
Fair value method |
|
Prepare entries to record both the acquisition and the sale of these shares.
On May 20, 2013, Montero Co. paid $1,000,000 to acquire 25,000 common shares (10%) of ORD Corp. as a long-term investment.
On August 5, 2014, Montero sold one-half of these shares for $625,000.
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Here are comparative balance sheets for Wilson Company.
Wilson Company
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31, 2013
Assets 2013 2012
Cash $ 44,550 $ 13,500
Accounts receivable 24,300 18,900
Inventories 33,750 24,300
Prepaid expenses 8,100 12,150
Long-term investments 0 24,300
Equipment 81,000 43,200
Accumulated depreciation Equipment (27,000) (18,900)
Total assets $ 164,700 $ 117,450
Liabilities and Stockholder s Equity
Accounts payable $ 22,950 $ 9,450
Bonds payable 49,950 63,450
Common stock ($1 par) 54,000 31,050
Retained earnings 37,800 13,500
Total liabilities and stockholder s equity $ 164,700 $ 117,450
Additional information:
1. The 2013 Income Statement reported $8,100 in depreciation expense, a $5,400 loss on
sale of investments and Net income of $48,600.
2. Cash dividends of $24,300 were declared and paid.
3. Long-term investments that has a cost of $24,300 were sold for $18,900
4. Sales for 2013 were $162,000.
Instructions:
Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2013 using the indirect method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Auerbach Enterprises. Complete Case 3A (Auerbach Enterprises) in Chapter 3.
Auerbach Enterprises manufactures air conditioners for automobiles and trucks manufactured throughout
North America. The company designs its products with flexibility to accommodate many makes and models of
automobiles and trucks. The company s two main products are MaxiFlow and Alaska. MaxiFlow uses a few
complex fabricated parts, but these have been found easy to assemble and test. On the other hand, Alaska uses
many standard parts but has a complex assembly and testing process. MaxiFlow requires direct materials costs
which total $135 per unit, while Alaska s direct materials requirements total $110 per unit. Direct labor costs per
unit are $75 for MaxiFlow and $95 for Alaska.
Auerbach Enterprises uses machine hours as the cost driver to assign overhead costs to the air conditioners.
The company has used a company-wide predetermined overhead rate in past years, but the new controller,
Bennie Leon, is considering the use of departmental overhead rates beginning with the next year.
The following planning information is available for the next year for each the four manufacturing departments
within the company:
Overhead Machine
Costs Hours
Radiator parts fabrication………….. $ 80,000 10,000
Radiator assembly, weld, and test…. 100,000 20,000
Compressor parts fabrication………. 120,000 5,000
Compressor assembly and test…….. 180,000 45,000
Total $480,000 80,000
Normally, the air conditioners are produced in batch sizes of 20 at a time. A production batch of 20 units requires
the following number of hours in each department:
MaxiFlow Alaska
Radiator parts fabrication……….. 28 16
Radiator assembly, weld, and test……. 30 74
Compressor parts fabrication……… 32 8
Compressor assembly and test……… 26 66
Total 116 164
Required:
1. Compute the departmental overhead rates using machine hours as the cost driver.
2. Compute a company-wide overhead rate using machine hours as the cost driver.
3. Compute the overhead costs per batch of MaxiFlow and Alaska assuming:
(a) The company-wide rate.
(b) The departmental rates.
4. Compute the total costs per unit of MaxiFlow and Alaska assuming:
(a) The company-wide rate.
(b) The departmental rates.
5. Is one product affected more than the other by use of departmental rates rather than a company-wide rate?
Why or why not?
In this case, you are provided the overhead cost data for the Auerbach Enterprises. Management needs advice in determining how to allocate these costs utilizing a job order costing system either department-wide or company-wide. Address Questions 1through 5 located at the end of the case. Based on the case questions, you are required to provide a three to five double-spaced written report addressing management s concerns and providing recommendations. The written report should be properly formatted according to APA guidelines and demonstrate research and critical thinking skills. Conclusions and recommendations should be supported by at least 2 scholarly sources from the Ashford Library or other external sources, excluding the textbook. For Questions 1 through 4, you will need to complete several calculations. Be sure to label and clearly identify your work to demonstrate your understanding of the concept even if you arrive at the incorrect answer. The calculations should be included as part of your analysis and written recommendations required for submission.
For Question 5, fully address management s concerns as part of your written analysis and recommendation using the new or the previous calculations to support your recommendation/explanation. The written analysis should be supported by at least 2 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.
Week 2 Written Assignment should:
Demonstrate graduate level work including appropriate research and critical thinking skills.
Be presented as a written analysis (not a question/answer format).
Incorporate case questions into the overall analysis.
Follow APA formatting guidelines including title page, reference page and in-text citations.
Consists of three to five double-spaced pages of content.
Provide at least 2 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please review the following real-world Hewlett Packard Statement of Cash flows and address the 2 questions below:
|
Cash flow from operating activities
|
In millions
|
In millions
|
|
|
For the year ended 2012
|
For the year ended 2011
|
|
Net (loss) earnings
|
$(12,650)
|
$7,074
|
|
Depreciation and amortization
|
5,095
|
4,984
|
|
Impairment of goodwill and purchased intangible assets
|
18,035
|
885
|
|
Stock-based compensation expense
|
635
|
685
|
|
Provision for doubtful accounts
|
142
|
81
|
|
Provision for inventory
|
277
|
217
|
|
Restructuring charges
|
2,266
|
645
|
|
Deferred taxes on earnings
|
(711)
|
166
|
|
Excess tax benefit from stock-based competition
|
(12)
|
(163)
|
|
Other, net
|
265
|
(46)
|
|
Accounts and financing receivables
|
1,269
|
(227)
|
|
Inventory
|
890
|
(1,252)
|
|
Accounts payable
|
(1,414)
|
275
|
|
Taxes on earnings
|
(320)
|
610
|
|
Restructuring
|
(840)
|
(1,002)
|
|
Other assets and liabilities
|
(2,356)
|
(293)
|
|
Net cash provided by operating activities
|
10,571
|
12,639
|
|
Cash flows from investing activities:
|
|
|
|
Investment in property, plant, and equipment
|
(3,706)
|
(4,539)
|
|
Proceeds from sale of property, plant, and equipment
|
617
|
999
|
|
Purchases of available-for-sale securities and other investments
|
(972)
|
(96)
|
|
Maturities and sales of available-for-sale securities and other investment
|
662
|
68
|
|
Payments in connection with business acquisitions, net of cash acquired
|
(141)
|
(10,480)
|
|
Proceeds from business divestiture, net
|
87
|
89
|
|
Net cash used in investing activities
|
(3,453)
|
(13,959)
|
|
Cash flow from financing activities:
|
|
|
|
(Payments) issuance of commercial paper and notes payable, net
|
(2,775)
|
(1,270)
|
|
Issuance of debt
|
5,154
|
11,942
|
|
Payment of debt
|
(4,333)
|
(2,336)
|
|
Issuance of common stock under employee stock plans
|
716
|
896
|
|
Repurchase of common stock
|
(1,619)
|
(10,117)
|
|
Excess tax benefit from stock-based compensation
|
12
|
163
|
|
Cash dividends paid
|
(1,015)
|
(844)
|
|
Net cash used in financing activities
|
(3,860)
|
(1,566)
|
|
Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
|
3,258
|
(2,886)
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period
|
8,043
|
10,929
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period
|
$11,301
|
$8,043
|
Required:
1) Please calculate the percentage increase or decrease in cash for the operating, investing, and financing sections and explain the major reasons for the increase or decrease for each of these sections.
2) Please calculate the free cash flow for 2012 and explain the meaning of this ratio.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hi I need help with some accounting homework. I do not want the answers, I need to know how to get the answers. Thanks.
Carlsville Company, which began operations in 2013, invests its idle cash in trading securities. The following transactions are from its short-term investments in its trading securities.
| 2013 |
|
| Jan. |
20 |
|
Purchased 800 shares of Ford Motor Co. at $26 per share plus a $125 commission. |
| Feb. |
9 |
|
Purchased 2,200 shares of Lucent at $44.25 per share plus a $578 commission. |
| Oct. |
12 |
|
Purchased 750 shares of Z-Seven at $7.50 per share plus a $200 commission. |
| 2014 |
|
| Apr. |
15 |
|
Sold 800 shares of Ford Motor Co. at $29 per share less a $285 commission. |
| July |
5 |
|
Sold 750 shares of Z-Seven at $10.25 per share less a $102.50 commission. |
| July |
22 |
|
Purchased 1,600 shares of Hunt Corp. at $30 per share plus a $444 commission. |
| Aug. |
19 |
|
Purchased 1,800 shares of Donna Karan at $18.25 per share plus a $290 commission. |
| 2015 |
|
| Feb. |
27 |
|
Purchased 3,400 shares of HCA at $34 per share plus a $420 commission. |
| Mar. |
3 |
|
Sold 1,600 shares of Hunt at $25 per share less a $250 commission. |
| June |
21 |
|
Sold 2,200 shares of Lucent at $42 per share less a $420 commission. |
| June |
30 |
|
Purchased 1,200 shares of Black & Decker at $47.50 per share plus a $595 commission. |
| Nov. |
1 |
Required:
| 1. |
Prepare journal entries to record these short-term investment activities for the years shown. (Ignore any year-end adjusting entries.)
|
|
Sold 1,800 shares of Donna Karan at $18.25 per share less a $309 commission.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hiatt Corporation s balance sheet at December 31, 2010, is presented below.
HIATT CORPORATION
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2010
Cash $ 24,600 Accounts payable $ 25,600
Accounts receivable 45,500 Common stock ($10 par) 80,000
Allowance for doubtful Retained earnings 127,400
accounts (1,500)
Supplies 4,400
Land 40,000
Building 142,000
Accumulated depreciation building (22,000)
$233,000 $233,000
During 2011, the following transactions occurred.
1. On January 1, 2011, Hiatt issued 1,500 shares of $20 par, 7% preferred stock for $33,000.
2. On January 1, 2011, Hiatt also issued 900 shares of the $10 par value common stock for $21,000.
3. Hiatt performed services for $280,000 on account.
4. On April 1, 2011, Hiatt collected fees of $36,000 in advance for services to be performed
from April 1, 2011, to March 31, 2012.
5. Hiatt collected $267,000 from customers on account.
6. Hiatt bought $35,100 of supplies on account.
7. Hiatt paid $32,200 on accounts payable.
8. Hiatt reacquired 400 shares of its common stock on June 1, 2011, for $38 per share.
9. Paid other operating expenses of $188,200.
10. On December 31, 2011, Hiatt declared the annual preferred stock dividend and a $1.20 per share dividend on the outstanding common stock, all payable on January 15, 2012.
11. An account receivable of $1,300 which originated in 2010 is written off as uncollectible
Adjustment data:
1. A count of supplies indicates that $5,900 of supplies remain unused at year-end.
2. Recorded revenue earned from item 4 above.
3. The allowance for doubtful accounts should have a balance of $3,500 at year end.
4. Depreciation is recorded on the building on a straight-line basis based on a 30-year life and a salvage value of $10,000.
5. The income tax rate is 30%. (Hint: Prepare the income statement up to income before taxes
and multiply by 30% to compute the amount.)
Instructions
(You may want to set up T accounts to determine ending balances.)
(a) Prepare journal entries for the transactions listed above and adjusting entries.
(b) Prepare an adjusted trial balance at December 31, 2011.
(c) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the year ending
December 31, 2011, and a classified balance sheet as of December 31, 2011.
Check figures:
(b) Totals $671,350
(c) Net income $54,250
Total assets $361,200
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hickory Company manufactures two products – 14,000 units of Product Y and 6,000 units of Product Z. The company uses a plantwide overhead rate based on direct labor-hours. It is considering implementing an activity-based costing (ABC) system that allocates all of its manufacturing overhead to four cost pools. The following additional information is available for the company as a whole and for Products Y and Z.
|
Activity Cost Pool |
|
|
Activity Measure |
|
|
Estimated Overhead Cost |
|
|
Expected Activity |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Machining |
|
|
Machine Hours |
|
|
$ 200,000.00 |
|
|
10,000 |
MHs |
|
Machine Setups |
|
|
Number of Setups |
|
|
$ 100,000.00 |
|
|
200 |
setups |
|
Production design |
|
|
Number of products |
|
|
$ 84,000.00 |
|
|
2 |
products |
|
General Factory |
|
|
Direct Labor Hours |
|
|
$ 300,000.00 |
|
|
12,000 |
DLHs |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Activity Measure |
|
Product Y |
|
Product Z |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Machining |
|
7,000 |
|
3,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Machine Setups |
|
50 |
|
150 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Production design |
|
1 |
|
1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
General Factory |
|
8,000 |
|
4,000 |
|
|
|
|
Required:
1. What is the company’s plantwide overhead rate?
2. Using the plantwide overhead rate, how much manufacturing overhead cost is allocated to Product Y? How much is allocated to Product Z?
3. What is the activity rate for the Machining activity cost pool?
4. What is the activity rate for the Machine Setups activity cost pool?
5. What is the activity rate for the Product Design activity cost pool?
6. What is the activity rate for the General Factory activity cost pool?
7. Which of the four activities is a batch-level activity? Why?
8. Which of the four activities is a product-level activity? Why?
9. Using the ABC system, how much total manufacturing overhead cost would be assigned to Product Y?
10. Using the ABC system, how much total manufacturing overhead cost would be assigned to Product Z?
11. Using the plantwide overhead rate, what percentage of the total overhead cost is allocated to Product Y? What percentage is allocated to Product Z?
12. Using the ABC ststem, what percentage of the Machining cost is assigned to Product Y? What percentage is assigned to Product Z? Are these percentages similar to those obtained in question 11? Why?
13. Using the ABC system, what percentage of Machine Setups cost is assigned to Product Y? What percentage is assigned to Product Z? Are these percentages similar to those obtained in question 11? Why?
14. Using the ABC system, what percentage of Product Design cost is assigned to Product Y? What percentage is assigned to Product Z? Are these percentages similar to those obtained in question 11? Why?
15. Using the ABC system, what percentage of General Factory cost is assigned to Product Y? What percentage is assigned to Product Z? Are these percentages similar to those obtained in question 11? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using High-Low to Calculate Fixed Cost, Calculate the Variable Rate, and Construct a Cost Function
Pizza Vesuvio makes specialty pizzas. Vesuvio’s controller wants to calculate the fixed and variable costs associated with labor used in the restaurant. Data for the past eight months were collected:
Month Labor Cost($) Employee Hours
January 6,900 350
February 8,040 540
March 9,799 640
April 9,687 600
May 8,390 470
June 7,350 340
July 9,390 560
August 7,431 300
In your calculations, round the variable rate per employee to the nearest cent. If required, round your final answers to the nearest cent.
1. Using the high-low method, calculate the fixed cost of labor.
$
2. Using the high-low method, calculate the variable rate.
$ per employee hour
3. Using the high-low method, construct the cost formula for total labor cost.
Total labor cost = $ + ($ Employee hours)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hills Company s June 30, 2010, bank statement and the June ledger account for cash are summarized here:
Bank Statement
Balance June 30, 2013 ——- 6,070
Cash
June 30 Balance —————– 6,400
Required:
1. Prepare a bank reconciliation. A comparison of the checks written with the checks that have cleared the bank shows outstanding checks of $700. Some of the checks that cleared in June were written prior to June. No deposits in transit were noted in May, but a deposit is in transit at the end of June.
2. Give any journal entries that should be made as a result of the bank reconciliation.
3. What is the balance in the Cash account after the reconciliation entries
4. In addition to the balance in its bank account, Hills Company also has $300 cash on hand. This amount is recorded in a separate T-account called Cash on Hand. What is the total amount of cash that should be reported on the balance sheet at June 30
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hillyard Company
Hillyard Company, an office supplies specialty store, prepares its master budget on a quarterly basis. The following data have been assembled to assist in preparing the master budget for the first quarter:
1.
As of December 31, (the end of the prior quarter), the company s general ledger showed the following account balances:
Cash $48,000 (debit)
Accounts receivable $224,000 (debit)
Inventory $60,000 (debit)
Buildings and equipment, net $370,000 (debit)
Accounts payable $93,000 (credit)
Capital stock $500,000 (credit)
Retained earnings $109,000 (credit)
2.
Actual sales for December and budgeted sales for the next four months are as follows: December $280,000, January $400,000, February $600,000, March $300,000 and April $200,000.
3.
Sales are 20% for cash and 80% on credit. All payments on credit sales are collected in the month following sale. The accounts receivable at December 31 are a result of December credit sales.
4.
The company s gross margin is 40% of sales. (In other words, cost of goods sold is 60% of sales.)
5.
Monthly expenses are budgeted as follows: salaries and wages, $27,000 per month; advertising, $70,000 per month; shipping, 5% of sales; other expenses, 3% of sales. Depreciation, including depreciation on new assets acquired during the quarter, will be $42,000 per quarter.
6.
Each month s ending inventory should equal 25% of the following month s cost of goods sold.
7.
One half of the month s inventory purchases is paid for in the month of purchase; the other half is paid in the following month.
8.
During February, the company will purchase a new copy machine for $1,700 cash. During March, other equipment will be purchased for cash at a cost of $84,500.
9.
During January, the company will declare and pay $45,000 in cash dividends.
10.
Management wants to maintain a minimum cash balance of $30,000. The company has an agreement with a local bank that allows the company to borrow in increments of $1,000 at the beginning of each month. The interest rate on these loans is 1% per month and for simplicity we will assume that interest is not compounded. The company would, as far as it is able, repay the loan plus accumulated interest at the end of the quarter.
Required:
Using the data above, complete the following statements and schedules for the first quarter:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Preview |
| 1.HIS 115 WEEK 4 CheckPoint The Confederation Government Table.docx |
| 2.HIS 115 WEEK 4 DQ1.docx |
| 3.HIS 115 WEEK 4 DQ2.docx |
| 4.HIS 115 WEEK 5 Assignment Western Expansion Presentation.pptx |
| 5.HIS 115 WEEK 5 CheckPoint The War of 1812.docx |
| 6.HIS 115 WEEK 6 CheckPoint The Bank War.docx |
| 7.HIS 115 WEEK 6 DQ1.docx |
| 8.HIS 115 WEEK 6 DQ2.docx |
| 9.HIS 115 Week 7 Assignment Perfection Era.doc |
| 10.HIS 115 WEEK 7 CheckPoint Class Structure and Slave Culture.docx |
| 11.HIS 115 WEEK 8 CheckPoint The Civil War Matrix.docx |
| 12.HIS 115 WEEK 8 DQ1.docx |
| 13.HIS 115 WEEK 8 DQ2.docx |
| 14.HIS 115 WEEK 9 Final Project Historical Timeline and Essay.docx |
| 15.HIS 115 WEEK 1 Assignment North American Civilization Paper.docx |
| 16.HIS 115 WEEK 1 CheckPoint European Societal Changes.docx |
| 17.HIS 115 WEEK 2 CheckPoint Early Northern and Southern Colonies.docx |
| 18.HIS 115 WEEK 2 DQ1.docx |
| 19.HIS 115 Week 2 DQ2.docx |
| 20.HIS 115 WEEK 3 Assignment Seven Years War.docx |
| 21.HIS 115 WEEK 3 CheckPoint Great Britain and the Colonies.docx |
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.The fundamental accounting equation is a reflection of the:
Money measurement concept
Conservatism concept
Dual-aspect concept
Historical cost concept
2.The historical cost concept reflects the fact that financial accounting practice favors:
Reliability over relevance
Management’s best guess over historical financial information
Relevance over reliability
Consensus market values over historical financial information
3.Jon Sports’ inventory account increased from $25,000 on December 31, 2003 to $30,000 on December 31, 2004. Which one of the following items would be included in the operating section of its 2004 indirect method statement of cash flows?
Add increase in inventory $5,000
Subtract increase in inventory ($5,000)
Add inventory balance $20,000
Subtract inventory balance ($20,000)
4.Turnkey Systems, Inc. began the month of June, 2004 with a prepaid expenses balance of $240,000. During the month, debits totaling $110,000 and credits totaling $80,000 were made to the prepaid expenses account. What was the June, 2004 ending balance of prepaid expenses?
A debit balance of $210,000
A credit balance of $210,000
A debit balance of $270,000
A credit balance of $270,000
6.When an entity recognizes revenue before it has received cash for the sale, it records an increase in a(n):
5.Pentex and Marbro, small companies in the stationery business, each had a dollar gross margin of $20,000 during September 2004. Pentex’s September sales were twice that of Marbro’s. If Pentex’s gross margin as a percentage of sales for September was 10%, Marbro’s gross margin as a percentage of sales for the same period was:
10%
5%
20%
Cannot be calculated
7.Juan Foods pays off a long-term debt in full. Which one of the following statements describes the effect of the sale on Juan Foods?
Current ratio increases; total debt to equity ratio decreases
Current ratio decreases; total debt to equity ratio decreases
Current ratio decreases; total debt to equity ratio increases
Current ratio increases; total debt to equity ratio increases
8.On January 1, 2005, Mansfield Company has a retained earnings balance of $256,000. During 2005, its net income is $44,000 and it announces and pays $12,000 in dividends. There is no other dividend-related activity during the year. Its December 31, 2005 retained earnings balance is:
$212,000
$288,000
$300,000
$224,000
9.Juan Foods makes a cash sale with a positive gross margin. Which one of the following statements describes the effect of the sale on Juan Foods?
Current ratio increases
Current ratio decreases
No change to Juan Foods’ current ratio
Insufficient information to judge effect on current ratio
10.Juan Foods pays off a long-term debt in full. Which one of the following statements best describes the appropriate book-keeping for this transaction?
Debit cash; credit long-term debt
Debit long-term debt; credit owners’ equity
Debit owners’ equity; credit long-term debt
Debit long-term debt; credit cash
11.On March 31, 2005, Cars, Inc. owes Preston Devices, one of its suppliers, $25,000 for previous purchases. During April 2005, Preston sells Cars devices with a sales price of $10,000 and a cost to Preston of $8,000. During April Cars pays Preston $12,000 against the amount owed to Preston. What is the effect of these April transactions on Preston’s balance sheet?
Cash increased by $12,000; accounts receivable decreased by $2,000; inventory decreased by $8,000; retained earnings increased by $2,000.
Accounts receivable increased by $2,000; inventory decreased by $8,000; cash increased by $12,000; retained earnings increased by $12,000.
Cash increased by $12,000; retained earnings decreased by $2,000; inventory decreased by $10,000; accounts receivable decreased by $12,000.
Cash increased by $2,000; accounts receivable decreased by $2,000; inventory decreased by $8,000; retained earnings decreased by $12,000.
12.Consider the same scenario as in the previous question: On March 31, 2005, Cars, Inc. owes Preston Devices, one of its suppliers, $25,000 for previous purchases. During April 2005, Preston sells Cars devices with a sales price of $10,000 and a cost to Preston of $8,000. During April Cars pays Preston $12,000 against the amount owed to Preston. If Preston had no other sales and records no other collections from customers during the month of April, the operating section of Preston’s indirect method statement of cash flows for April will show the following de-accrual adjustments to net income:
Subtract change in accounts receivable; add change in inventory.
Add change in accounts receivable; subtract change in inventory
Add change in accounts receivable; add change in inventory.
Subtract change in accounts receivable; subtract change in inventory
13.Planet Music buys all of its inventory on credit. During 2005, Planet Music’s inventory account increased by $10,000. Which of the following statements must be true for Planet Music during 2005?
It made payments of less than $10,000 to suppliers.
It made cash payments of $10,000 to suppliers.
It made more cash payments to its suppliers than it recorded as cost of goods sold.
It paid less cash to suppliers than it recorded as cost of goods sold.
14.On December 31, 2005, Juan Foods purchases a van for $12,000. How does the purchase of the van affect Juan Foods’ 2005 income statement?
Decreases sales by $12,000
Increases operating expenses by $12,000
No material effect
Increases cost of goods sold by $12,000
15.To be recorded as a liability, an item must meet three specific conditions. Two of them are: it must involve probable future sacrifice of economic resources by the entity, and it must be a present obligation that arose as a result of a past transaction. Which one of the following is the third condition?
The item must reduce the market value of the recording entity
It must involve a transfer of resources to another entity
It must involve the expenditure of cash now or in the future
It must not cause total liabilities to exceed total assets
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
HomeLife Life Insurance Company has two service departments (actuarial and premium rating) and two production departments (advertising and sales). The distribution of each service department s efforts (in percentges) to the other departments is
To
From Actuarial Premium Rating Advertising Sales
Actuarial 80% 10% 10%
Premium 20% 20% 60
The direct operating costs of the departments (including both variable and fixed costs) are
Actuarial $80,000
Premium rating 15,000
Advertising 60,000
Sales 40,000
1. Determine the total cost allocated to the advertising and sales departments using the direct method.
2. Determine the total cost allocated to advertising and sales using the step method
3. Determine the total cost allocated to advertising and sales using the reciprocal method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 2: LASA 2 Manufacturing Budget Analysis
Tom Emory and Jim Morris strolled back to their plant from the administrative offices of Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company. Tom is manager of the machine shop in the company’s factory; Jim is manager of the equipment maintenance department.
The men had just attended the monthly performance evaluation meeting for plant department heads. These meetings had been held on the third Tuesday of each month since Robert Ferguson, Jr., the president’s son, had become plant manager a year earlier.
As they were walking, Tom Emory spoke: Boy, I hate those meetings! I never know whether my department’s accounting reports will show good or bad performance. I’m beginning to expect the worst. If the accountants say I saved the company a dollar, I’m called Sir, but if I spend even a little too much boy, do I get in trouble. I don’t know if I can hold on until I retire.
Tom had just been given the worst evaluation he had ever received in his long career with Ferguson & Son. He was the most respected of the experienced machinists in the company. He had been with the company for many years and was promoted to supervisor of the machine shop when the company expanded and moved to its present location. The president (Robert Ferguson, Sr.) had often stated that the company’s success was due to the high-quality work of machinists like Tom. As supervisor, Tom stressed the importance of craftsmanship and told his workers that he wanted no sloppy work coming from his department.
When Robert Ferguson, Jr., became the plant manager, he directed that monthly performance comparisons be made between actual and budgeted costs for each department. The departmental budgets were intended to encourage the supervisors to reduce inefficiencies and to seek cost reduction opportunities. The company controller was instructed to have his staff tighten the budget slightly whenever a department attained its budget in a given month; this was done to reinforce the plant manager’s desire to reduce costs. The young plant manager often stressed the importance of continued progress toward attaining the budget; he also made it known that he kept a file of these performance reports for future reference when he succeeded his father.
Tom Emory’s conversation with Jim Morris continued as follows:
Emory: I really don’t understand. We’ve worked so hard to meet the budget, and the minute we do so they tighten it on us. We can’t work any faster and still maintain quality. I think my men are ready to quit trying. Besides, those reports don’t tell the whole story. We always seem to be interrupting the big jobs for all those small rush orders. All that setup and machine adjustment time is killing us. And quite frankly, Jim, you were no help. When our hydraulic press broke down last month, your people were nowhere to be found. We had to take it apart ourselves and got stuck with all that idle time.
Morris:I’m sorry about that, Tom, but you know my department has had trouble making budget, too. We were running well behind at the time of that problem, and if we had spent a day on that old machine, we would never have made it up. Instead, we made the scheduled inspections of the forklift trucks because we knew we could do those in less than the budgeted time.
Emory: Well, Jim, at least you have some options. I’m locked into what the scheduling department assigns to me and you know they’re being harassed by sales for those special orders. Incidentally, why didn’t your report show all the supplies you guys wasted last month when you were working in Bill’s department?
Morris:We’re not out of the woods on that deal yet. We charged the maximum we could to other work and haven’t even reported some of it yet.
Emory: Well, I’m glad you have a way of getting out of the pressure. The accountants seem to know everything that’s happening in my department, sometimes even before I do. I thought all that budget and accounting stuff was supposed to help, but it just gets me into trouble. It’s all a big pain. I’m trying to put out quality work; they’re trying to save pennies.
Review the case. Respond to the following:
- Identify the problems that appear to exist in Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company’s budgetary control system and explain how the problems are likely to reduce the effectiveness of the system. (approximately 1 page)
- Explain how Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company’s budgetary control system could be revised to improve its effectiveness. (approximately 1 2 pages)
- Explain how the use of an activity-based costing system could change the results of the budget, if utilized. (approximately 1 page)
- As stated in the case, many employees have quit trying and have altered behavior on the job. Provide specific ways for how you would use a budget to change employee behavior and align goals in the organization. Explain how goal alignment can improve profitability and overall return to the shareholders of the company. (approximately 1 page)
- Synthesize data to explain the concept of ROI and describe how the use of an activity-based costing system can improve the company s ROI and the potential impact on free cash flow. (approximately 1 page)
Write a 5 6-page report in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M6_A2.doc
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Companies that outsource research and development and design jobs:
A. have always made a wise decision.
B. will be more profitable in the long run.
C. run the risk of overseas companies using the information to produce competitive products.
D. always invest in the overseas companies that take on these jobs.
2. For-profit businesses and nonprofit organizations are similar in that they both:
A. contribute to the welfare of society.
B. seek to earn a profit.
C. have a limited life.
D. must be controlled by a board of directors.
3. Adam Smith believed that countries would prosper if businesspeople were free to start and run their own businesses. Businesspeople would make a profit by providing the goods, services and ideas that others in the economy wanted, and they would hire others to help increase those profits, leading to social and economics benefits for many. This idea was called the __________.
A. kinked demand theory.
B. invisible hand.
C. spending multiplier.
D. demand accelerator.
4. Jake considers himself to be a follower of Thomas Malthus. Which of the following statements would Jake be most likely to make?
A. The key to economic growth is to keep taxes and government regulations to a minimum.
B. Command economies are more likely to encourage economic growth than free market economies.
C. Allowing people to follow their self-interest is the best way to generate economic growth and prosperity.
D. A society will not experience sustainable economic progress unless it accepts the need to limit population growth.
5. Which of the following statements best describes the theory of comparative advantage?
A. The best way for a nation to ensure full employment is to be totally self-sufficient rather than relying on other nations to obtain goods and services.
B. Each nation should produce those goods that it can produce more efficiently and effectively than other nations, and buy the goods it cannot produce efficiently from other nations.
C. The nation that has the largest reserves of gold and other natural resources will enjoy a position of comparative advantage in trade relationships.
D. A nation should produce those goods for which domestic demand is comparatively strong, and should import those goods for which domestic demand is comparatively weak.
6. Free trade between nations generally results in:
A. industrialized nations gaining at the expense of developing nations.
B. an increase of jobs in developed nations.
C. mutually beneficial exchange relationships.
D. higher prices for imported goods.
7. Given the ethical lapses that are prevalent today in our businesses, which of the following can be done to restore trust in the free-market system and leaders in general?
A. Business leaders that have broken the law should be given another chance.
B. New laws making accounting records transparent may help restore trust.
C. Making the government accountable for business leader behavior will restore trust.
D. It’s up to the government to pass laws requiring ethical behavior of all leaders, business and otherwise.
8. Laws represent the standards of ________ behavior.
A. ethical
B. legal
C. moral
D. socially responsible
9. A ___________ is a form of business that is owned, and usually managed, by one person.
A. closed corporation
B. subchapter S corporation
C. sole proprietorship
D. limited partnership
10. ____________ comprise about 20% of all businesses but account for about 81% of U.S. business receipts.
A. Corporations
B. Partnerships
C. Sole proprietorships
D. Limited liability companies
11. The U.S. government’s Immigration Act of 1990: A. encouraged entrepreneurs to come to the U.S. through “investor visas”. B. established a government program to teach American workers displaced by immigration how to start their own businesses. C. established guidelines to help entrepreneurs recruit legal aliens as a source of low cost labor. D. proposed an exchange program for American and European entrepreneurs to temporarily live internationally in order to open up foreign branches for their businesses.
12. Which of the following statements is characteristic of entrepreneurs A. They like certainty B. They have the ability to visualize a clear path C. They look at problems and see opportunities D. They prefer to be inventive rather than worry about whether the invention solves a customer need
13. A vision for a company is: A. an explanation of why the company exists and where it wants to go. B. the same thing as an objective. C. a detailed plan that outlines the major organizational structure of the firm. D. very relevant for the short-term, but less useful for the long-term.
14. _________ planning is a part of contingency planning that is used to deal with sudden and unexpected changes in the business environment. A. Crisis B. Tactical C. Operational D. SWOT
15. Fayol’s ____________ principle says that workers’ attitudes would create an environment of pride and loyalty within an organization. A. esprit de corps B. hierarchy of loyalty C. unity of command D. equity
16. __________ believed that managers were trustworthy and companies would do well if employees simply did what they were told. A. John Keynes B. Adam Smith C. Peter Drucker D. Max Weber
17. One strategy U.S. manufacturers have employed in order to become more competitive is:
A. focusing on providing the lowest priced products.
B. relying on advanced technology and the Internet to unite companies.
C. maintaining a distance relationship with suppliers in an effort to guard trade secrets.
D. increasing advertising budgets.
18. To strengthen its manufacturing base in the future, U.S. will have to:
A. uncover lower wage workers in the U.S. to compete with China.
B. continue to innovate.
C. support students in high school and college interested in studying the arts.
D. cut the amount of benefits offered to workers.
19. The concept that a hierarchy of human needs could be used to explain motivation was developed by:
A. Abraham Maslow.
B. Frederick Taylor.
C. Douglas McGregor.
D. Frederick Herzberg.
20. Abraham Maslow thought that once needs at one level of his hierarchy were met:
A. motivation would diminish.
B. another, higher order need would emerge to motivate that person.
C. that type of need would never again be an effective motivator.
D. he or she would become more interested in lower-level needs.
TRUE OR FALSE
21. The sense of satisfaction you get when you achieve an important goal is an intrinsic reward.
T______ F_______
22. Extrinsic rewards are those that are given to a person by someone else.
T______ F________
23. Since motivation comes from within an individual, there is little that managers can do to help motivate employees.
T_______ F________
24. When unhappy employees leave a company, the firm normally ends up benefiting financially.
T________ F________
25. A key element of Frederick Taylor’s approach was the time-motion study, which examined the tasks performed to complete a job and the time needed to complete each task.
T_______ F______
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Han Products manufactures 30,000 units of part S-6 each year for use on its production line. At this
level of activity, the cost per unit for part S-6 is as follows:
Direct materials ………….. $ 3.60
Direct labor ……………. $10.00
Variable manufacturing overhead $ 2.40
Fixed manufacturing overhead .. $ 9.00
Total cost per part ………… $25.00
An outside supplier has offered to sell 30,000 units of part S-6 each year to Han Products for $21 per part. If Han Products accepts this offer, the facilities now being used to manufacture part S-6 could be rented to another company at an annual rental of $80,000. However, Han Products has determined that two-thirds of the fixed manufacturing overhead being applied to part S-6 would continue even if part S-6 were purchased from the outside supplier.
Computations showing how much profit will increase or decrease if the outside supplier’s offer is accepted is required.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hand-In Assignment – Six
Application, Analysis, and Comprehension (LO 8)
Justin Manufacturing, which produces electrical components, is contemplating submitting a bid for 30,000 units of Item No. 54. The bid’s cost will be follows: Raw materials $ 75,000 Direct labor 120,000 Manufacturing overhead 150,000 Additional set-up costs 3,000 Special device 5,000 Allocated administrative overhead 12,000 Total cost $365,000 The special device will be purchased for this job and once the job is completed, the device will be discarded. Justin applies total manufacturing overhead of $5 to each unit (0.5 machine hours at $10 per hour). This figure is based, in part, on budgeted yearly fixed overhead of $1,440,000 and an anticipated volume of 480,000 machine hours (40,000 per month). Justin is presently working at 85% of capacity, and the client needs the order in two months.
REQUIRED: 1. Is Justin’s current operating environment one of excess capacity or no excess capacity? Briefly explain.
2. If Justin had excess capacity, what would be the lowest cost total that the company should use when figuring its bid for the order?
3. Can Justin produce this order in the required time frame of two months? Explain.
4. Suppose that Justin is in marginal financial health. Explain the benefits and problems of approaching the bidding procedure with (1) a low bid or (2) a high bid.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hardin Company is preparing its manufacturing overhead budget for 2012. Relevant data consist of the following.
Units to be produced (by quarters): 10,000, 12,000, 14,000, 16,000.
Direct labor: Time is 1.5 hours per unit.
Variable overhead costs per direct labor hour: Indirect materials $0.70; indirect labor $1.20; and maintenance $0.50.
Fixed overhead costs per quarter: Supervisory salaries $35,000; depreciation $16,000; and maintenance $12,000.
Complete the manufacturing overhead budget for the year, showing quarterly data. (Round overhead rate to 2 decimal places, i.e. 4.25.)
HARDIN COMPANY
Manufacturing Overhead Budget
For the Year Ending December 31, 2012
Quarter
1 2 3 4 Year
Variable costs
Indirect materials $ $ $ $ $
Indirect labor
Maintenance
Total variable
Fixed costs
Supervisory salaries
Depreciation
Maintenance
Total fixed
Total manufacturing overhead$ $ $ $ $
Direct labor hours
Manufacturing overhead rate per direct labor hour $
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Harmon Household Products, Inc., manufactures a number of consumer items for general household use. One of these products, a chopping board, requires an expensive hardwood. During a recent month, the company manufactured 4,000 chopping boards using 11,000 board feet of hardwood. The hardwood cost the company $18,700.
The company’s standards for one chopping board are 2.5 board feet of hardwood, at a cost of $1.80 per board foot.
Required:
- According to the standards, what cost for wood should have been incurred to make 4,000 chopping blocks? How much greater or less is this than the cost that was incurred?
- Break down the difference computed in (1) above into a materials quantity variance and a materials price variance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
|
Haupt Consulting |
|
|
|
|
|
Adjusted Trial Balance |
|
|
|
|
|
31-Dec-10 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Balance |
|
|
|
Account Tide |
Debit |
Credit |
|
|
|
Cash |
7,700 |
|
|
|
|
Account receivable |
1,500 |
|
|
|
|
Supplies |
100 |
|
|
|
|
Equipment |
2,000 |
|
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation-eqiup |
|
33 |
|
|
|
Furniture |
3,600 |
|
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation-furniture |
|
60 |
|
|
|
Account payable |
|
3,600 |
|
|
|
Salary payable |
|
700 |
|
|
|
Unearned service revenue |
|
600 |
|
|
|
Carl haupt Capital |
|
10,000 |
|
|
|
Carl Haupt Withdrawal |
1,600 |
|
|
|
|
Service Revenue |
|
3,200 |
|
|
|
Rent expense |
500 |
|
|
|
|
Utlilities expense |
200 |
|
|
|
|
Salary Expense |
700 |
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expense-equip |
33 |
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expense-furniture |
60 |
|
|
|
|
Supplies expense |
200 |
|
|
|
|
total |
18,193 |
18,193 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1 completed the accounting work sheet at dec 31 |
|
|
|
|
|
2 Journalize and post the closing entries at Dec 31 Denote each closing amount as CLO and an account balance as BAL |
|
|
|
|
|
3. Prepare a classified balance sheet at dec 31. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Complete accounting worksheet at 12/31 |
6 |
|
|
|
|
Journalize and post closing entries at 12/31 |
6 |
|
|
|
|
Prepare classified balance sheet |
7 |
|
|
|
|
Accuracy and timeliness |
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
|
Haupt Consulting |
|
|
|
|
Trial Balance |
|
|
|
|
18-Dec-10 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Balance |
|
|
Account Tide |
Debit |
Credit |
|
|
Cash |
8,100 |
|
|
|
Account receivable |
1,700 |
|
|
|
Supplies |
300 |
|
|
|
Equipment |
2,000 |
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation-eqiup |
|
|
|
|
Furniture |
3,600 |
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation-furniture |
|
|
|
Account payable |
|
3,900 |
|
|
Salary payable |
|
|
|
|
Unearned service revenue |
|
|
|
|
Carl haupt Capital |
|
10,000 |
|
|
Carl Haupt Withdrawal |
|
|
|
|
Service Revenue |
|
2,500 |
|
|
Rent expense |
500 |
|
|
|
Utlilities expense |
200 |
|
|
|
Salary Expense |
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expense-equip |
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expense-furniture |
|
|
|
|
Supplies expense |
|
|
|
|
total |
16,400 |
16,400
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hawks Electronic Repair Shop has budgeted the following time and material for 2008.
HAWKS ELECTRONIC REPAIR SHOP
Budgeted Costs for the Year 2008
Time Charges Material Loading Charges
Shop employees wages and benefits $108,000
Parts manager s salary and benefits $25,400
Office employee s salary and benefits 20,000 13,600
Overhead (supplies, depreciation, advertising, utilities) 26,000 18,000
Total budgeted costs $154,000 $57,000
Hawks budgets 5,000 hours of repair time in 2008 and will bill a profit of $5 per labor hour along with a 30% profit markup on the invoice cost of parts. The estimated invoice cost for parts to be used is $100,000.
On January 5, 2008 Hawks is asked to submit a price estimate to fix a 72-inch big-screen TV. Hawks estimates that this job will consume 20 hours of labor and $500 in parts.
Instructions:
(a) Compute the labor rate for Hawks Electronic Repair Shop for the year 2008.
(b) Compute the material loading charge percentage for Hawks Electronic Repair Shop for the year 2008.
(c) Prepare a time-and-material price quotation for fixing the big-screen TV.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Preview |
| 1.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/GRADES/ |
| 2.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/GRADES/HCA 240 GRADES.doc |
| 3.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 1/ |
| 4.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 1/Appendix B Health and Diseases.doc |
| 5.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 1/HCA 240 Week 1 DQ 1 main forum day 2.doc |
| 6.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 1/HCA 240 Wk 1 DQ 2 Main forum day 4.doc |
| 7.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 1/HCA 240 Wk 1 Ex. Name that pathogen attchmnt day 7.doc |
| 8.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 2/ |
| 9.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 2/HCA 240 Wk 2 ASSgnt HIV ind forum attchmnt day 7.doc |
| 10.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 2/HCA 240 Wk 2 Chkpnt 2 cancer info ind forum attchmnt day 5.doc |
| 11.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 2/HCA 240 Wk 2 chkpnt Appendix C ind forum attchmnt day 3.doc |
| 12.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 3/ |
| 13.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 3/HCA 240 W 3 DQuestion 2 main forum day 4.doc |
| 14.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 3/HCA 240 Wk 3 Chkpnt Card. vas. dis. ind forum attchmnt day 5.doc |
| 15.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 3/HCA 240 Wk 3 DQ 1 main forum day 2.doc |
| 16.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 4/ |
| 17.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 4/HCA 240 Wk 4 blood disord ind forum day 7 attchmnt.doc |
| 18.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 4/HCA 240 Wk 4 Chkpnt 1blood bnk ind forum day 3.doc |
| 19.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 4/HCA 240 Wk 4 Radio Ad ind forum day 5.doc |
| 20.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 5/ |
| 21.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 5/HCA 240 Wk 5 Chkpnt diagnosis ind forum day 7 attchmnt.doc |
| 22.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 5/HCA 240 Wk 5 DQ 1 main forum day 2.doc |
| 23.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 5/HCA 240 Wk 5 DQ 2 Part A main forum day 4.doc |
| 24.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 6/ |
| 25.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 6/HCA 240 wk 6 chkpnt kidney failure ind forum day 4.doc |
| 26.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 6/Wk 6 HCA 240 STD pres ind forum day 7 attchmnt.ppt |
| 27.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 7/ |
| 28.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 7/HCA 240 Week 7 DQ 1main forum day 2.doc |
| 29.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 7/HCA 240 Week 7 DQ 2 main forum day 4.doc |
| 30.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 7/hca240 wk 7 app f ind forum day 5 attchmnt.doc |
| 31.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 8/ |
| 32.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 8/HCA 240 Wk 8 App G ind forum day 4 attchmnt.doc |
| 33.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 8/Wk 8 HCA 240 Mental Ill ind forum day 7 attchmnt.doc |
| 34.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 9/ |
| 35.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 9/HCA 240 Week 9 Capstone DQ main forum day 3.doc |
| 36.HCA 240 WHOLE CLASS/WEEK 9/HCA 240 Wk 9 Final Project ind forum day 7 attchmnt.doc |
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Health Care Reform Project consists of three parts, which you will complete in Weeks Two, Three, and Five. Each part builds upon the last portion completed.
Resource: Grading Criteria: Health Care Reform Project, Part I on the student website
o
Select a current health care economic issue, such as managed care, health care spending, prescription drugs, the influence of current legislation on health care, medical care for an aging population, or the influence of illegal immigrants on health care economics in the United States.
Describe the issue in 300-350 words.
o
Perform a literature search on the issue. Find at least three articles and summarize each article in 150-200 words.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
There are a variety of communication modalities available to health care consumers and health care providers. These modalities and venues of communication may entail benefits and challenges to both consumers and providers.
Select one communication modality used for marketing in health care.
Write a 1,050-1,400 word paper about a communication modality used in health care. Includethe following in your paper:
- Identify one specific mode of communication used by consumers and health care providers.
- List as subheadings and discuss the following:
- One benefit to the patient
- One aspect relating to the values and importance of maintaining patient confidentiality when using this mode of communication
- One reason this mode is an effective means of communication between consumers and providers
- How does this mode of communication differ from others?
- How might media and social networking change communication in health care?
- How is this mode of communication used to market health care products or services?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Title:HCS/405 Health Care Financial Accounting (University of Phoenix) |
| Question Detail:
Course Materials
Baker, J. J., & Baker, R. W. (2011). Health care finance: Basic tools for nonfinancial managers (3rd ed.). Sudbury, MA: Jones & Bartlett Publishers.
All electronic materials are available on the student website.
|
Week One: Overview of Health Care Finance
|
|
Details
|
Due
|
Points
|
|
Objectives
|
1.1Define basic health care finance terms.
1.2Describe the four segments that comprise a financial management system.
1.3Identify financial reporting practices and ethical standards of conduct.
|
|
Reading
|
Readthe Week One Read Me First.
|
|
Reading
|
Read Ch. 1 of Health Care Finance.
|
|
Reading
|
Read Ch. 2 of Health Care Finance.
|
|
Reading
|
Review the Healthcare Financial Management Association website (www.hfma.org). You may find this website helpful as a general resource for this course.
|
|
Reading
|
Read this week s Electronic Reserve Readings. Pay special attention to the following articles:
Sarbanes-Oxley. (2007). Encyclopedia of Small Business.
Sarbanes-Oxley. (2009). In BUSINESS: The Ultimate Resource.
|
|
Participation
|
Participate in class discussion 4 of 7 days. All participation in the class each week needs to be substantive and must be relevant to the participation.
|
2
|
|
Discussion
Questions
|
Post your response to Week One Discussion Questions in the Main forum by Day 2 and Day 5.Responses to each question must be at least 200 to 300 words and apply concepts and teachings from the weekly readings.
|
DQ1 Wed
DQ2 Sat
|
2
|
|
Nongraded Activities and Preparation
Reporting Practices and Ethics Paper (Preparation)
|
Beginworking on the Reporting Practices and Ethics Paper due in Week Two.
|
|
Learning Team Instructions
|
Learning Team You will be assigned to a Learning Team.
|
|
Learning Team Instructions
Weekly Review
|
Review the Week One objectives and discuss additional insights and questions that may have arisen.
|
|
Learning Team Instructions
Patton-Fuller Income Statement Worksheet (Preparation)
|
Beginworking on the Patton-Fuller Income Statement Worksheet due in Week Two.
|
|
Learning Team Instructions
Financial Statements Review (Preparation)
|
Beginworking on the Financial Statements Review due in Week Three.
|
|
Individual
Week One Health Care Financial Terms
Worksheet
|
Resources:University of Phoenix Material: Week One Health Care Financial Terms Worksheet
Complete the University of Phoenix Material: Week One Health Care Financial Terms Worksheet located on the student website.
|
Sat
|
2
|
|
Week Two: Financial Reporting and Financial Performance
|
|
Details
|
Due
|
Points
|
|
Objectives
|
2.1Describe the annual report and financial statements of a health care organization.
2.2Explain the utilization of health care revenue sources.
2.3Describe how revenues and expenses are grouped for planning and control.
|
|
Reading
|
Read the Week Two Read Me First.
|
|
Reading
|
Read Ch. 4 of Health Care Finance.
|
|
Reading
|
Read Ch. 5 of Health Care Finance.
|
|
Reading
|
Read Ch. 6 of Health Care Finance.
|
|
Reading
|
Read Ch. 10 of Health Care Finance.
|
|
Reading
|
Read this week s Electronic Reserve Readings.
|
|
Participation
|
Participate in class discussion 4 of 7 days.
|
2
|
|
Discussion Questions
|
Post your response to Week One Discussion Questions in the Main forum by Day 2 and Day 5.Responses to each question must be at least 200 to 300 words and apply concepts and teachings from the weekly readings.
|
DQ1 Wed
DQ2 Sat
|
2
|
|
Learning Team
Instructions
Learning Team Charter
|
Workon the Learning Team Charter with your group.Complete the Learning Team Charter and submit the assignment to the Assignment Link
|
Saturday
|
1
|
|
Nongraded Activities and Preparation
Simulation Review (Preparation)
|
Beginworking on the Simulation Review due in Week Four.
|
|
Learning Team Instructions
Financial Statements Review (Preparation)
|
Continueworking on the Financial Statements Review due in Week Three.
|
|
Individual
Reporting Practices and Ethics Paper
|
Resources: University of Phoenix Material: Reporting Practices and Ethics Paper Grading Criteria
Findtwo or three articles that address financial reporting practices and ethical standards in health care finance, including the following topics:
Generally accepted accounting principles
Corporate compliance, ethics, or fraud and abuse
Write a 700- to 1,050-word paper on the financial management of health care organizations, integrating your research articles.
Include a summary of the four elements of financial management.
Include a summary of generally accepted accounting principles and general financial ethical standards.
Provide examples from the articles that reflect ethical standards of conduct and financial reporting practices.
Explain the significance of each example.
Format your paper consistent with APA guidelines.
|
Monday
|
18
|
|
Individual
Week Two Health Care Financial Terms
Worksheet
|
Resources:University of Phoenix Material: Week Two Health Care Financial Terms Worksheet
Complete the University of Phoenix Material: Week Two Health Care Financial Terms Worksheet located on the student website.
|
Sat
|
2
|
|
Learning Team
Patton-Fuller Income Statement Worksheet
|
Resource:University of Phoenix Material: Patton-Fuller Income Statement Worksheet.
Review the income statements for 2008 and 2009located in the Patton-Fuller Community Hospital Virtual Organization.
- Click on the Virtual Organization link on the left column of the student website.
- Click on the Healthcare tab and access the Patton-Fuller Community Hospital.
- Click the Chief Financial Officer link under the Corporate Officers tab to access the financial statements.
Complete the University of Phoenix Material: Patton-Fuller Income Statement Worksheet located on the student website.
|
Monday
|
2
|
|
Week Three: Budgeting and Cost Classification
|
|
Details
|
Due
|
Points
|
|
Objectives
|
3.1Describe the process for creating an operating budget and a capital budget.
3.2Analyze costing methods in the health care industry.
|
|
Reading
|
Read the Week Three Read Me First.
|
|
Reading
|
Read Ch. 7 of Health Care Finance.
|
|
Reading
|
Read Ch. 8 of Health Care Finance.
|
|
Reading
|
Read Ch. 15 of Health Care Finance.
|
|
Reading
|
Read Ch. 16 of Health Care Finance.
|
|
Reading
|
Read this week s Electronic Reserve Readings.
|
|
Participation
|
Participate in class discussion 4 of 7 days.
|
2
|
|
Discussion
Questions
|
Post your response to Week One Discussion Questions in the Main forum by Day 2 and Day 5.Responses to each question must be at least 200 to 300 words and apply concepts and teachings from the weekly readings.
|
DQ1 Wed
DQ2 Sat
|
2
|
|
Nongraded Activities and Preparation
Simulation Review (Preparation)
|
Continue working on the Simulation Review due in Week Four.
|
|
Learning Team Instructions
Health Care Case Study: Sensitivity Analysis (Preparation)
|
Begin the Health Care Case Study: Sensitivity Analysis assignment, due in Week Five.
|
|
Individual
Week Three Health Care Financial Terms Worksheet
|
Resources:University of Phoenix Material: Week Three Health Care Financial Terms Worksheet
Complete the University of Phoenix Material: Week Three Health Care Financial Terms Worksheet located on the student website.
|
Sat
|
2
|
|
Learning Team
Financial Statements Review
|
Resources: Patton-Fuller Community Hospital Virtual Organization and University of Phoenix Material: Financial Statements Review Grading Criteria
Reviewthe financial statements,located in the Patton-Fuller Community Hospital Virtual Organization.
- Click on the Virtual Organization link on the left column of the student website.
- Click on the Healthcare tab and access the Patton-Fuller Community Hospital.
- Click the Chief Financial Officer link under the Corporate Officers tab to access the financial statements.
Write a 350- to 700-word summary that addresses the following:
Annual report, including the Patton-Fuller financial statements
o How did the audited and unaudited financial statements differ?
Relationship between revenue sources and expenses on Patton-Fuller s financial performance
o What is the effect of revenue sources on financial reporting at the hospital?
o How are the hospital s revenues and expenses grouped for planning and control?
Formatyour paper consistent with APA guidelines.
|
Monday
|
14
|
|
Week Four: Management Reporting and Analysis
|
|
Details
|
Due
|
Points
|
|
Objectives
|
4.1Describe the financial concepts related to health care staffing.
4.2Explain the use of trend analysis.
4.3Summarize the utilization of forecasting and comparative data.
4.4Identify key financial ratios.
|
|
Reading
|
Read the Week Four Read Me First.
|
|
Reading
|
Read Ch. 9 of Health Care Finance.
|
|
Reading
|
Read Ch. 11 of Health Care Finance.
|
|
Reading
|
Read Ch. 13 of Health Care Finance.
|
|
Reading
|
Read Ch. 14 of Health Care Finance.
|
|
Reading
|
Read this week s Electronic Reserve Readings.
|
|
Participation
|
Participate in class discussion 4 out of 7 days.
|
2
|
|
Discussion
Questions
|
Post your response to Week One Discussion Questions in the Main forum by Day 2 and Day 5.Responses to each question must be at least 200 to 300 words and apply concepts and teachings from the weekly readings.
|
DQ1 Wed
DQ2 Sat
|
2
|
|
Learning Team Instructions
Health Care Case Study: Sensitivity Analysis (Preparation)
|
Continue the Health Care Case Study: Sensitivity Analysis assignment, due in Week Five.
|
|
Individual
Simulation Review
|
Resources:Health Care Financial Accounting simulation and University of Phoenix Material: Simulation Review
Read the instructions in the University of Phoenix Material: Simulation Review located on the student website.
Submityour simulation review to your instructor.
|
Monday
|
18
|
|
Individual
Week Four Health Care Financial Terms Worksheet
|
Resources:University of Phoenix Material: Week Four Health Care Financial Terms Worksheet
Complete the University of Phoenix Material: Week Four Health Care Financial Terms Worksheet located on the student website.
|
Sat
|
2
|
|
Learning Team
Patton-Fuller Ratio Computation
|
Resource: Patton-Fuller Community Hospital Virtual Organization
Reviewthe financial statements, located in the Patton Fuller Community Hospital Virtual Organization.
- Click on the Virtual Organization link on the left column of the student website.
- Click on the Healthcare tab and access the Patton-Fuller Community Hospital.
- Click the Chief Financial Officer link under the Corporate Officers tab to access the financial statements.
Computethe eight ratios as shown in Chapter 11 for Patton-Fuller Hospital based on its unaudited financial statements and critique its operating results and financial position. Ratio by ratio, do you agree or disagree with the CEO s report to the Board? Why or why not?
Read the Annual Report and the audited financial statements, and re-compute those same ratios using the audited financial statements.
Considerthe financial performance before the audit, and after the audit. What has changed and how significant is that change? What plans should the hospital Board make for next year and the next five years?
|
Sat
|
2
|
|
Week Five: Future Technology Applications in Finance
|
|
Details
|
Due
|
Points
|
|
Objectives
|
5.1Explain future trends in health care finance technology.
|
|
Reading
|
Read the Week Five Read Me First.
|
|
Reading
|
Read Ch. 19 of Health Care Finance.
|
|
Reading
|
Read Ch. 20 of Health Care Finance.
|
|
Reading
|
Read this week s Electronic Reserve Readings.
|
|
Participation
|
Participate in class discussion 4 out of 7 days
|
2
|
|
Discussion Questions
|
Respond to weekly discussion questions.
Mandatory:How might financial managers budget for unforeseen changes and improvements in information technology that require large capital outlays? (DQ2)
|
DQ1 Wed
DQ2 Sat
|
2
|
|
Individual
Week Five Health Care Financial Terms Worksheet
|
Resources:University of Phoenix Material: Week Five Health Care Financial Terms
Complete the University of Phoenix Material: Week Five Health Care Financial Terms located on the student website.
|
Sat
|
2
|
|
Learning Team
Sensitivity Analysis
|
Resources:Patton-Fuller Community Hospital Virtual Organization and University of Phoenix Material: Sensitivity Analysis Grading Criteria
Reviewthe ffinancial statements, annual report, and budget issues documents, located in the Patton-Fuller Community Hospital Virtual Organization.
Create a 12- to 15-slide MicrosoftPowerPointpresentation that summarizes elements that affect staffing at Patton-Fuller, such as raises in wages and changes in the nurse-to-patient ratio. Include speaker notes.
Includethe following in your presentation:
Provide a comparative analysis of the last two years of data.
Explain how the 2010 budget assumptions will positively or negatively affect Patton-Fuller.
Explain how you may use a trend analysis to plan for staffing at Patton-Fuller.
Summarize the trend analysis and how comparative data facilitates forecasting at Patton-Fuller.
|
Monday
|
15
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hello,
Below you will find the assignment that I was referring to. My firm deadline is Tuesday, September 3,2013 at 8am America/New York time. NO EXCEPTIONS! Thank you.
Assignment 3: Post-Merger Analysis
Due Week 9 and worth 280 points
In today s uncertain economic and regulatory environment for the health services
industry, many organizations may be presented with merger and acquisition
opportunities to gain market share and drive financial and operational
efficiencies. Given the current state of this market segment:
Write a five to six (5-6) page paper in which you:
1.Suggest the key financial drivers that most likely will cause health care
organizations to merge. Provide support for your rationale.
2.Assuming that two (2) health care organizations have merged. Determine the
evaluation criteria that a financial analyst would use to evaluate the financial
performance of the organization post-merger, and identify the determinants that
the analyst would use to decide whether or not the merger generated favorable
financial results for the organization. Provide support for your evaluation.
3.Determine the key factors that will drive the financial planning process for
most organizations in the post-merger phase, and examine the related impact to
the organization process. Provide support for your rationale.
4.Create an argument to assert that the financial planning process is of high
value to a health care organization. Provide support for your argument.
5.Predict the financial stability of the health care industry over the next five
(5) years. Provide support for your prediction.
6.Use at least three (3) quality academic resources. Note: Wikipedia and other
Websites do not qualify as academic resources.
Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:
Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch
margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or
school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional
instructions.
Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s
name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and
the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
statistics questions 4
– A health inspector at a restaurant will enter the kitchen and choose 5 stations to
inspect from a predetermined list of 15 stations present in most restaurant kitchens.
a. How many different sets of 5 stations exist?
b. If all sets are equally likely, what is the probability of each set?_ __ _, _
c. If the inspector were instead to randomly select 13 stations .to_ ‘i_r~~p.e:c,:t, how many
different sets of 13 stations would exist?
d. If all sets were equally likely, what is the probability of each set?
– The company policy for customer service representatives gives time off for positive
reviews. If, in the first 20 calls a customer service agent handles In a day, 13 or more
elect to take a subsequent survey and rate the service as “excellent,” then the company
gives the agent his or her final hour of work that day off, paid. Ellie receives excellent
reviews from about 30% of the calls she handles. Assuming she always receives at
least 20 calls in the first 7 hours of a workday, on what percentage of her 8-hour . .
workdays does Ellie get the final hour off?
– Since careful records have begun being kept in January, Eric’s small business has
delivered the following quantities of flowers throughout town.
January February March April May June July August
BSomuaqllu ets 85 34 26 24 43 29 30 19
LBaorugqeu ets 23 64 27 18 33 23 20 13
– Assuming the data is normally distributed, _Eonstruct two separate 90% confidence
intervals, one for the number of deliveries of small bouquets in September and one for
the number of large bouquets in September.
quality control experiment is to be done on a machine that fills tubes with toothpaste.
Its specifications require that it fill tubes with 4. 7oz. A random sample of 40 tubes filled
by the machine is taken and each tube is weighed. The resulting data are below, with
the weight of the tube already having been subtracted from each:. Pertorm a hypothesis
test at the 90% confidence level to determine if the machine is performing according to
specifications.
4.66 4.61 4.71 4.63 4.70 4.62 4.63 4.61 4.7b 4.56
4.60 4.66 4.68 4.57 4.67 4.72 4.67 4.64 4.66 4.75
4.69 4.64 4.67 4.65 4.69 4.65 4.75 4.53 4.57 4.74
4.68 4.67 4.66 4.68 4.64 4.65 4.64 4.80 4.71 4.69
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Aggressive working capital policy: (Points : 5) May increase the entity’s return, but it also increases the risk
Calls for maintaining high cash balances on hand
Leads to increased interest costs incurred by having to take on additional debt to meet short-term obligations
All of the above
| 2.A firm has the following accounts:
Net patient revenue = $1,500,000 Supply expense = $200,000 Depreciation expense = $100,000 Salaries and benefits = $700,000 Other expenses = $200,000 Net accounts receivable = $150,000
What is the net income for the period? (Points : 5)
|
$150,000 $50,000 $500,000 $850,000
|
| 3. A hospital issues $20 million in bonds and $60 million in equity to finance a new project. Its targeted debt to equity ratio is: (Points : 5) |
50% 33% 200% 300%
|
| 4. Which of the following statements about accounts receivable and inventory is true? (Points : 5) |
They are both considered current assets They are both considered expenses They are both excluded from current assets They are both considered current liabilities Total revenue outpaces total avoidable fixed costs
|
| 5. The breakeven point occurs where: (Points : 5) |
Total fixed costs and total revenue intersect Revenue minus variable cost minus fixed cost = 0 Total profit margin and total costs intersect Total variable costs and total revenue intersect Total revenue outpaces total avoidable fixed costs
|
| 6. A statement that reports the revenues minus expenses of an entity is called: (Points : 5) |
Income statement Statement of retained earnings Balance sheet Report of management Statement of cash flows
|
| 7.An imaging center has the following information:
Revenue per test: $225 Variable cost per test: $150 Total fixed costs: $225,000 Estimated number of tests = 3,500
Calculate the total dollar contribution margin dollars and percentage. (Points : 15)
228,875
|
| 8. Your hospital has the following revenue for the months of July-September: July $3,000,000 August $2,500,000 September $4,000,000. If 30% of the month’s revenue is collected in the same month, 40% is collected in the second month and 30% is collected in the third month, how much of July’s revenue is collected in August? (Points : 15)
|
9. Accounts receivables can constitute more than 50% of a healthcare organization’s current assets. Managing accounts receivables is critical to the cash flow of the organization. If you were a billing manager what should you consider when implementing credit and collection policies? (Points : 20) 10. Provide an example of a financial report and then explain in detail the steps in the financial analysis process. (Points : 20)
11. A competitive hospital maintains current equipment and purchases new in order to stay current with the latest technology. If you were evaluating the capital budget performance of a hospital what factors would you consider justifying taking on more debt to purchase new equipment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Helix Company produces several products in its factory, including a karate robe. The company uses a standard cost system to assist in the control of costs. According to the standards that have been set for the robes, the factory should work 780 direct labor-hours each month and produce 1,950 robes. The standard costs associated with this level of production are as follows:
Total Per Unit of Product
Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $35,490 $18.20
Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $7,020 3.60
Variable manufacturing overhead (based on
direct labor-hours) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$2,340 1.20
$23.00
During April, the factory worked only 760 direct labor-hours and produced 2,000 robes. The following actual costs were recorded during the month:
Total Per Unit of Product
Direct materials (6,000 yards) . . . . . . .$36,000 $18.00
Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $7,600 3.80
Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . $3,800 1.90
$23.70
=====
At standard, each robe should require 2.8 yards of material. All of the materials purchased during the month were used in production.
Required:
Compute the following variances for April:
1. The materials price and quantity variances.
2. The labor rate and efficiency variances.
3. The variable manufacturing overhead rate and efficiency variances
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. On October 1, Steve’s Carpet Service borrows $250,000 from First National Bank on a 3-month, $250,000, 8% note. The entry by Steve’s Carpet Service to record payment of the note and accrued interest on January 1 is (Points : 2) Notes Payable…………..255,000
Cash…………………………….255,000
Notes Payable…………..250,000
Interest Payable…………..5,000
Cash……………………………….255,000
Notes Payable…………..250,000
Interest Payable………….20,000
Cash……………………………….270,000
Notes Payable…………..250,000
Interest Expense…………..5,000
Cash……………………………….255,000
| Question 2. 2. A current liability is a debt that can reasonably be expected to be paid (Points : 2) |
within one year or the operating cycle, whichever is longer. between 6 months and 18 months. out of currently recognized revenues. out of cash currently on hand. |
| Question 3. 3. Unearned Rent Revenue is (Points : 2) |
a contra account to Rent Revenue. a revenue account. reported as a current liability. debited when rent is received in advance. |
| Question 4. 4. When an interest-bearing note matures, the balance in the Notes Payable account is (Points : 2) |
less than the total amount repaid by the borrower. the difference between the maturity value of the note and the face value of the note. equal to the total amount repaid by the borrower. greater than the total amount repaid by the borrower. |
| Question 5. 5. As interest is recorded on an interest-bearing note, the Interest Expense account is (Points : 2) |
increased; the Notes Payable account is increased. increased; the Notes Payable account is decreased. increased; the Interest Payable account is increased. decreased; the Interest Payable account is increased. |
| Question 6. 6. The interest charged on a $100,000 note payable, at the rate of 6%, on a 60-day note would be (Points : 2) |
$6,000. $3,333. $1,500. $1,000. |
| Question 7. 7. On October 1, Steve’s Carpet Service borrows $250,000 from First National Bank on a 3-month, $250,000, 8% note. What entry must Steve’s Carpet Service make on December 31 before financial statements are prepared? (Points : 2) |
Interest Payable…………..5,000 Interest Expense……………….5,000
Interest Expense…………..20,000 Interest Payable……………….20,000
Interest Expense…………..5,000 Interest Payable……………….5,000
Interest Expense…………..5,000 Notes Payable…………………..5,000 |
| Question 8. 8. The interest charged on a $50,000 note payable, at the rate of 6%, on a 2-month note would be (Points : 2) |
$3,000. $1,500. $750. $500. |
| Question 9. 9. The entry to record the issuance of an interest-bearing note credits Notes Payable for the note’s (Points : 2) |
maturity value. market value. face value. cash realizable value. |
| Question 10. 10. Crawford Company has total proceeds (before segregation of sales taxes) from sales of $4,770. If the sales tax is 6%, the amount to be credited to the account Sales Revenue is: (Points : 2) |
$4,770. $4,484. $5,056. $4,500. |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Time Value of Money
When the Genesis and Sensible Essential teams held their weekly meeting, the time value of money and its applicability yielded an extremely stimulating discussion. However, most of the team members from Genesis were very perplexed. Sensible Essentials decided the most expedient way to demonstrate how interest rates as well as time impact the value of money was to use examples. You have been asked to prepare a report analyzing your findings of the three example calculations listed below.
In this assignment, you will do the following:
- Calculate the future value of $100,000 ten years from now based on the following annual interest rates:
- 2%
- 5%
- 8%
- 10%
- Calculate the present value of a stream of cash flows based on a discount rate of 8%. Annual cash flow is as follows:
- Year 1 = $100,000
- Year 2 = $150,000
- Year 3 = $200,000
- Year 4 = $200,000
- Year 5 = $150,000
- Years 6-10 = $100,000
- Calculate the present value of the cash flow stream in problem 2 with the following interest rates:
- Year 1 = 8%
- Year 2 = 6%
- Year 3 = 10%
- Year 4 = 4%
- Year 5 = 6%
- Years 6-10 = 4
Perform your calculations in an Excel spreadsheet. Copy the calculations in a Word document. In addition, write a 2- to 3-page executive summary in Word format. Your summary should reflect a proper analysis of your findings, including a comparison and contrast of data.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are given the following information for the ABC Corporation:
| ABC Corporation |
| Balance Sheet (Partial) |
|
Year 3 |
Year 4 |
| Cash |
$70,000 |
$9,640 |
| AR |
70,000 |
85,000 |
| Inventories |
87,000 |
84,000 |
| Accounts Payable |
48,000 |
51,000 |
| ABC Corporation |
| Income Statement |
| For the Year Ending December 31, Year 4 |
| Sales |
|
$560,000 |
| Operating Expenses |
$420,000 |
|
| Depreciation Expense |
46,000 |
466,000 |
| Income Before Taxes |
|
$94,000 |
| Income Tax Expense |
|
$37,600 |
| Net Income |
|
$56,400 |
Other Data:
- The ABC corporation sold an asset and recorded a loss on the sale of $8.700. The sale price was $220,000 and the asset was originally purchased for $360,000.
- Dividends paid in Year 4 were $22, 460.
Required:
- Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ending December 31, Year 4 using the indirect method.
- What conclusions could you arrive at regarding the cash position of the firm?
- What information was provided in the statement of cash flows that was not evident if just the balance sheet and the income statement were examined?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exercise 9-5 Record bonds issued at face amount [LO4]
|
On January 1, 2012, Splash City issues $400,000 of 8% bonds, due in 15 years, with interest payable semiannually on June 30 and December 31 each year.
|
|
Assuming the market interest rate on the issue date is 8%, the bonds will issue at $400,000. Record the bond issue on January 1, 2012, and the first two semiannual interest payments on June 30, 2012, and December 31, 2012. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Date
|
General Journal
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Jan. 1, 2012
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Jun. 30, 2012
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Dec. 31, 2012
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Exercise 9-8 Record bonds issued at face amount [LO4]
|
On January 1, 2012, White Water issues $500,000 of 6% bonds, due in 20 years, with interest payable semiannually on June 30 and December 31 each year.
|
|
Assuming the market interest rate on the issue date is 6%, the bonds will issue at $500,000. Record the bond issue on January 1, 2012, and the first two semiannual interest payments on June 30, 2012, and December 31, 2012. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Date
|
General Journal
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Jan. 1, 2012
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Jun. 30, 2012
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Dec. 31, 2012
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Exercise 9-11 Record bonds issued at face amount with interest payable annually [LO4]
|
On January 1, 2012, White Water issues $500,000 of 6% bonds, due in 20 years, with interest payable annually on December 31 each year.
|
|
Assuming the market interest rate on the issue date is 6%, the bonds will issue at $500,000. Record the bond issue on January 1, 2012, and the first two interest payments on December 31, 2012, and December 31, 2013. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Date
|
General Journal
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Jan. 1, 2012
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Dec. 31, 2012
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Dec. 31, 2013
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Handout to review material covering Bonds (10 points)
1. Why would bonds ever sell at a premium? a. Stated Rate = Market Rate
b. Stated Rate > Market Rate
c. Stated Rate
2. Why would bonds ever sell at a discount? a. Stated Rate = Market Rate
b. Stated Rate > Market Rate
c. Stated Rate
3. At what amount do bonds sell for if the Stated Rate is equal to the Market Rate?
a. Bonds sell at a Discount
b. Bonds sell at Face Value
c. Bonds sell at a Premium
4. $500,000, 10%, 20 year bonds sell at 102.
These bonds are selling at a a. Discount b. Premium
Give the amount of cash received for these bonds when sold. ____________
5. On the day the bonds were dated, Willow Corp. issued 12% bonds having a face value of $100,000 for $95,233.
a. What entry is required to record the sale of the bonds?
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
b. What amount of interest would be paid to bondholders annually? ____________
c. What amount of interest would be paid to bondholders semi-annually?____________
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The main purpose of this module is to review the balance sheet in more detail.
Is there a difference in approach to valuation by US GAAP and IFRS? Discuss and note two or three specific differences. In addition, clearly
- Distinguish between an expense (expired cost) and an asset.
- Distinguish between current and long-term assets.
- Distinguish between current and long-term liabilities.
- Review Apple s balance sheet and provide two examples of each of the above categories.
- Discuss retained earnings and how income or loss and dividends affect this account. Review Apple s retained earnings account and explain how it changes between the two past years.
- Comment on at least three differences between Apple s and Samsung s balance sheets.
- Does Apple or Samsung have more debt?
- Which of the two companies is the bigger one? Explain your reasoning.
Modular Case Assignment Expectations:
The submission should be 3 to 5 pages and need to include answers to all the questions listed above. Show computations, discuss the results and include references in APA format.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please, complete the following two applied problems in a Word or Excel document. Show all your calculations and explain your results. Submit your assignment in the drop box by using the Assignment Submission button.
Week 1 Assignment Study Guide
1. A generous university benefactor has agreed to donate a large amount of money for student scholarships. The money can be provided in one lump-sum of $10mln, or in parts, where $5.5mln can be provided in year 1, and another $5.5mln can be provided in year 2. Assuming the opportunity interest rate is 6%, what is the present value of the second alternative? Which of the two alternatives should be chosen and why? How would your decision change if the opportunity interest rate was 12%? Please, show all your calculations.
2. Volkswagen is considering opening an Assembly Plant in Chattanooga, Tennessee, for the production of its 2012 Passat, tailored for the US market. The CEO of the company is considering two potential options for the size of the plant: one is a large size with a projected annual production of 150,000 cars, and the other one is a smaller size plant, which is cheaper to build, but can only produce up to 80,000 cars per year. Depending on the expected level of demand for these cars in the US, Volkswagen has to decide which option is more profitable. The discount rate is 6% and for simplicity purposes, the CEO is only evaluating a two-year horizon. The initial factory setup cost, the expected demand scenarios, profit, and probabilities are shows in the below table. Calculate the Net Present Value in each of the two options. Which option should the CEO choose and why? Please, show all your calculations.
3. An angel investor is considering investing in one of two start-up businesses and is evaluating the expected returns along with the risk of each option in order to choose the better alternative.
- Business 1 is an innovative protein energy drink, which has ENPV of $100,000 with a standard deviation of $40,000.
- Business 2 is a unique chicken wings dipping sauce with an ENPV of $60,000 and a standard deviation of $25,000.
a) Apply the coefficient-of-variation decision criterion to these alternatives to find out which is preferred by the angel investor, assuming that he/she is risk-averse.
b) Apply the maximin criterion, assuming that the worst outcome in Business 1 is to lose $5,000, whereas the worst outcome in Business 2 is to make only $5,000 in profit.
c) If you were the angel investor, what is your certainty equivalent for these two projects? Are you risk-averse, risk-neutral, or risk-lover?
Bus 640 Managerial Economics week 1 assignment
BUS 640 Week 1 Assignment Economics of Risk and Uncertainty Applied Problems
U can also Purchase Week 2 Assignment Consumer Demand Analysis and Estimation Applied Problems ( Just click On below Link)
http://www.homeworkmarket.com/content/bus640-week-2-consumer-demand-analysis-and-estimation-applied-problems-bus-640-week-2-assign
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A. Given the following owner s income and expense estimates for an apartment property, formulate a reconstructed operating statement. The building consists of 10 units that could rent for $550 per month each.
Owner s Income Statement
Rental income (last year) $60,600
Less: Expenses
Power $2,200
Heat 1,700
Janitor 4,600
Water 3,700
Maintenance 4,800
Reserves 2,800
Management 3,000
Depreciation 5,000
Mortgage payments 6,300 34,100
Net income $26,500
Estimating vacancy and collection losses at 5 percent of potential gross income, reconstruct the operating statement to obtain an estimate of NOI. Remember, there may be items in the owner s statement that should not be included in the reconstructed operating statement.
B.)Using the NOI obtained above and an Ro of 11.0 percent, calculate the property s Indicated value. Round your final answer to the nearest $500.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
3. Given that the optimal solution of the following linear programming problem is x = 15 and y = 10, State the problem in standard form and do a constraint analysis for the optimal solution. Maximize 50x + 40y Subject to 4x + 2y 80 3x + 5y 60 y 10 x, y > 0
4. A company manufactures two kinds of pinball machines, each requiring a different manufacturing technique. Each Super Ball machine requires 20 hours of labor, 7 hours of testing, and yields a profit of $300. Each Silver Ball machine requires 12 hours of labor, 8 hours of testing, and yields a profit of $200. There are 2000 hours of labor and 1000 hours of testing available. The company has made contracts with the retailers to provide at least 60 Super Ball machines and at least 50 Silver Ball machines. The manufacturer wants to determine how many of each kind of pinball machines to manufacture. The objective is to maximize the total profit. Formulate a linear programming model for the above situation by determining (a) The decision variables. (b) The objective function. (c) All the constraints. Note: Do NOT solve the problem after formulating.
5. Charm City Foods manufactures a snack bar by blending two ingredients: a nut mix and a granola mix. Information about the two ingredients (per ounce) is shown below. Ingredient Cost In Dollars Fat Grams Protein Grams Calories Nut Mix 0.80 22 6 600 Granola Mix 0.40 2 2 50 The company needs to develop a linear programming model whose solution would tell them how many ounces of each mix to put into the snack bar. The blend should contain no more than 1000 calories, at least 10 grams of protein, and no more than 30 grams of fat. In addition, at least one ounce of nut mix must be included in the blend. Formulate a linear programming model for the above situation by determining (a) The decision variables. (b) The objective function. (c) All the constraints. Note: Do NOT solve the problem after formulating.
6. Determine whether the following linear programming problem is infeasible, unbounded, or has multiple optimal solutions. Draw a graph to find the feasible region (if it exists) and explain your conclusion. Maximize 20xl + 25×2 Subject to: 2xl + x2 10 x2 0
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gladly Company is a company that manufactures plastic products for industrial use. It has a mainframe computer system. Last year, Gladly suffered a $500,000 loss due to fraud perpetuated by a computer programmer. The programmer manipulated Gladly’s accounting program so that several cheques were issued to him personally. Each cheque was less than $10,000 which did note require approval from the controller. These smaller cheques for approved vendors were processed automatically by the program and electronic signatures were applied to the cheques. Any cheque of $10,000 or more had to be approved and signed by the controller
a) Define general computer controls and application controls. Provide an example of each.
b) Provide two examples of a general control that may have prevented the fraud.
C) Describe the implications of weak general controls on application controls and on the financial statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Glaser Services acquired 30% of the outstanding common stock of Nickels Company on Jan. 1, 2008, by paying $840,820 for the 49,460 shares. Nickels declared and paid $0.40 per share cash dividends on Mar. 15, June 15, Sept. 15, and Dec 15, 2008. Nickels reported net income of $371,100 for the year. At Dec. 31, 2008, the market price of Nickels common stock was $26 per share.
Prepare the jounal entries for Glaser Services for 2008 assuming Glaser cannot exercise significant influence over Nickels.(use the cost method and assume that Nickels common stock should be classified as a trading security.)
Also, prepare the journal entries for Glaser Services for 2008, assuming Glaser can exercise significant influence over Nickels. Use the equity method. (Jan. 1, Mar. 15, June 15, Sept. 15, Dec. 15, Dec. 31)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Goldberg Apparel Company uses a job order system. The following data summarize the operations related to production for March:
1. Materials purchased on account, $23300
2. Materials requested $208300 of which 5600 was for general factory use
3. Factory labor used 190500 of which 62500 was indirect
4. Other cost incurred on account were for factory overhead 89300 selling expense 64000 and administrative expenses 37800
5. Prepaid expenses for factory overhead were 7500 for selling expenses 1300 and for administrative expenses 1250
6. Depreciation of factory equipment was 18900 of office equipment 14700 and of store equipment 2600
7. Factory overhead cost applied jobs 190000
8. Jobs completed 583300
9. Cost if goods sold 577700
Journalize the entries to record the summarized operations
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
13-27
Golden Gate Construction Associates, a real estate developer and building contractor in San Francisco, has two sources of long-term capital: debt and equity. The cost to Golden Gate of issuing debt is the after-tax cost of the interest payments on the debt, taking into account the fact that the interest payments are tax deductible. The cost of Golden Gate s equity capital is the investment opportunity rate of Golden Gate s investors, that is, the rate they could earn on investments of similar risk to that of investing in Golden Gate Construction Associates. The interest rate on Golden Gate s $60 million of long-term debt is 10 percent, and the company s tax rate is 40 percent. The cost of Golden Gate s equity capital is 15 percent. Moreover, the market value (and book value) of Golden Gate s equity is $90 million.
Required: Calculate Golden Gate Construction Associates weighted-average cost of capital.
13-28
Refer to the data in the preceding exercise for Golden Gate Construction Associates. The company has two divisions: the real estate division and the construction division. The divisions total assets, current liabilities, and before-tax operating income for the most recent year are as follows: Division Total Assets Current Before-Tax Operating Income Liabilities Real estate …………………………………………………………….. $100,000,000 $6,000,000 $20,000,000 Construction ………………………………………………………….. 60,000,000 4,000,000 18,000,000 Required: Calculate the economic value added (EVA) for each of Golden Gate Construction Associates divisions. (You will need to use the weighted-average cost of capital, which was computed in the preceding exercise.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Google has invested $450 million + working capital of $50 million to convert an old paper mill in Hamina, Finland into a state-of-the-art data centre. The project has a lifespan of 10 years . The rationale for the investment is to increase capacity and position the company for a push into the cloud computing market where Amazon Web Services currently dominates.
1. Google s sales of cloud computing services are $800 million in 2013. Sales revenue is expected to grow at 20 percent p.a. even without the new data centre.
2. It is expected that the Hamina data centre will add 3.50 percent p.a. to sales revenue. Therefore, in year 1 (2014) sales revenue would be $960 million without the new centre. With the new centre it will be 3.50 percent more, or $993.6 million. Note: this is different than simply increasing the growth rate of sales by 3.50 percent to make a total of 23.50 percent p.a. Don t take my word for it, try it!
3. Wages are a variable cost. The data centre will employ 90 people in 2014. The wages cost will be $6,000,000 in 2014. Wages costs are expected to grow by 2 percent p.a. in each subsequent year.
4. Other variable costs associated with running the data centre will amount to $21,000,000 in 2014. These other variable costs will also grow at 2 percent p.a. in each subsequent year.
5. Fixed costs will amount to $2,000,000 in 2014. These are expected to grow by 3 percent p.a. in each subsequent year.
6. Further injections of working capital will be required in 2016 and 2019. $55,000,000 will be required in each of these years. All working capital is returned at the end of the project.
7. The depreciation rule that should be applied is straight-line-to-zero .
8. The taxation rate that should be applied throughout the analysis is the average corporate taxation rate in the United States. This is 25 percent.
9. If you record a negative EBIT in any given year, taxes should be set to $0.00 for that year.
10. The corporate finance team recommends a discount rate of 12.50 percent be used to evaluate the investment.
In Google s assessment, the key to the project is the savings that it may be able to obtain on electricity. Data centres require a lot of electricity. In 2010, for example, Google consumed 2.26 terawatt hours of electricity (about the equivalent of annual usage of 200,000 households). In fact, in 2010, data centres run by companies like Microsoft, Amazon and Facebook were responsible for 1.5% of the world s total electricity usage . Powering the internet consumes 10% of the world s electricity each year . Google is a leader in renewable energy. 34% of its annual power consumption comes from renewable sources .
The data centre in Finland has a number of electricity saving features:
1. Finland has a moderate climate. Air conditioning is not usually necessary even on the hottest summer days . Of course, winter becomes very cold.
2. The facility in Hamina used to be a paper mill. When Google acquired it, the facility had a seawater intake tunnel taking in cold water from the Gulf of Finland. This now forms the heart of a seawater cooling system that further reduces the need for air conditioning units.
3. Usually, electricity usage suffers from leakage . Google s data centre will run at 80% efficiency (only 20% leakage ) versus an industry average of 40% (60% leakage) :
The standard measurement of data centre efficiency is called power usage effectiveness, or PUE. A perfect number is XXXXX meaning all the power drawn by the facility is put to use. Experts considered 2.0 indicating half the power is wasted to be a reasonable number for a data centre. Google was getting an unprecedented 1.2.
3. The final efficiency feature takes advantage of the renewable energy initiatives that have been developed in many European countries over the past several decades in tandem with Scandinavia s integrated electricity grid that connects countries like Finland with nearby Sweden. In particular, Google will access 72 MW p.a. of wind power from a facility in Sweden.
These efficiency measures translate into cash flows:
1. Google will save $48,000,000 in 2014 electricity generation costs by shifting capacity from existing data centres to Hamina. This saving is expected to grow by 11% per year. This comes from two sources. First, as electricity gradually becomes more expensive, the efficiencies become worth more in dollar terms. Second, the Finnish government will provide tax concessions for efficient electricity generation.
Your Task
1. Use the financial information given below to compute a NPV and IRR for the investment in the Hamina data centre.
2. Perform a sensitivity analysis on your results by reworking the NPV and IRR calculations across a range of operating cash flows: 20 percent, 10 percent, + 10 percent, + 20 percent of the original operating cash flow numbers .
3. Drawing on your initial analysis (point 1) and your sensitivity analysis (point 2), explain whether the project is likely to create market value for Google
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Answers tpo AA. The measurement focus and basis of accounting that are most unlike those used by business entities are those used by (Points : 2)
Governmental funds.
Fiduciary funds.
Proprietary funds.
Contribution funds.
2. Under the dual-track accounting approach used in the text, which of the following transactions or events would be recorded in the general journal for governmental activities at the government-wide level (Points : 2)
Recording the annual budget, property tax levy, and payroll.
Recording the property tax levy, issuance of tax anticipation notes, and accrual of interest on long-term debt at year-end.
Recording the property tax levy, payroll, and encumbrances for purchase orders.
Recording the property tax levy, encumbrances for purchase orders, and payment of interest on long-term debt.
3. Which of the following would result in the amortization of a bond discount or premium (Points : 2)
Bonds are issued: No; Bonds are held as investments: No
Bonds are issued: No; Bonds are held as investments: Yes
Bonds are issued: Yes; Bonds are held as investments: No
Bonds are issued: Yes; Bonds are held as investments: Yes
4. Which of the following funds are governmental funds (Points : 2)
General Fund, special revenue funds, capital projects funds, debt service funds, and private-purpose trust funds.
General Fund, special revenue funds, private-purpose trust funds.
General Fund, special revenue funds, debt service funds, capital projects funds, and permanent funds.
General Fund, special revenue funds, capital projects funds, debt service funds, and internal service funds.
5. When the budget of a government is adopted and Estimated Revenues exceed Appropriations, the excess is (Points : 2)
Credited to Budgetary Fund Balance.
Debited to Budgetary Fund Balance.
Debited to Reserve for Encumbrances.
Credited to Reserve for Encumbrances.
6. The Financial Accounting Standards Board has the responsibility for setting accounting and financial reporting standards for (Points : 2)
All not-for-profit organizations that are nongovernmental and business entities.
All special purpose governments.
All not-for-profit organizations.
All federal government agencies.
7. On the due date for bond interest, the debt service fund journal entry (or entries) will include a debit to (Points : 2)
Expenditures-Bond Interest.
Interfund Transfers In.
Appropriations.
Interest Expense.
8. Which of the following is a proprietary fund (Points : 2)
Special revenue fund.
Investment trust fund.
Debt service fund.
Internal service fund.
9. Which of the following distinguishes governments from nongovernmental not-for-profit organizations (Points : 2)
Absence of profit motive.
The power to enact and enforce a tax levy.
Resource providers do not expect benefits proportional to the resources provided.
Absence of a defined ownership interest that can be sold, transferred, or redeemed.
10. Generally accepted accounting principles applicable to state and local governments require that (Points : 2)
Only governmental funds and proprietary funds should be provided.
Only those funds required by law, GASB standards, and sound financial administration should be provided.
Only those funds required by law should be provided.
All categories of funds must be provided.
11. In late June, the Everready Construction Co. submitted a $600,000 progress billing on a construction contract. On July 2, the bill was approved for payment, subject to a five percent retention, as provided by the contract. Construction expenditures should be debited when (Points : 2)
The bill is approved for payment.
The bill is received.
The bill is paid (except for the five percent retention).
The final five percent of the bill is paid.
12. Which of the following information should be included in the financial section of a comprehensive annual financial report (Points : 2)
Transmittal letter.
The basic financial statements, including notes thereto.
Tables and charts showing demographic and economic data.
A description of the government.
13. The city of Milan was notified that it had been approved for a state government grant in the amount of $1,000,000 to help finance its new city jail. The money from the grant will be received later in the current fiscal year. The journal entry to record this transaction will include (Points : 2)
A credit to Other Financing Sources upon notification.
A credit to Revenues when all eligibility requirements are met.
A credit to Revenues upon receipt of the money from the state.
A credit to Other Financing Sources upon receipt of the money from the state.
14. Extraordinary items and special items are reported (Points : 2)
With normal recurring general revenues.
As separate line items in the Function/Programs section of the statement of activities.
As separate line items below General Revenues in the statement of activities.
As separate line items above General Revenues.
15. The General Fund received $200,000 in lieu of taxes from the city owned water utility, an enterprise fund. This is an example of a(an) (Points : 2)
Interfund transfer.
Interfund loan.
Internal exchange transaction.
Reimbursement.
16. When the budget of a government is recorded and Appropriations exceeds Estimated Revenues, the Budgetary Fund Balance account is (Points : 2)
Credited at the beginning of the year and debited at the end of the year.
Credited at the beginning of the year and no entry is made at the end of the year.
Debited at the beginning of the year and no entry is made at the end of the year.
Debited at the beginning of the year and credited at the end of the year.
17. The expenditure classification “Public Safety” is an example of which of the following types of classifications (Points : 2)
Activity.
Function.
Character.
Object.
18. Which of the following statements is always true concerning the reporting of debt service funds (Points : 2)
Debt service funds are reported in a separate column in the governmental fund financial statements.
Debt service funds are reported in a separate column in the government-wide financial statements.
Debt service funds are reported in the Other Governmental Funds column in the governmental fund financial statements.
Debt service funds are reported in the Governmental Activities column in the government-wide financial statements.
19. Which of the following would be considered an internal exchange transaction (Points : 2)
The General Fund transfers $200,000 to establish a Central Supplies Fund; this amount will not be repaid.
The General Fund transfers $125,000 to the Debt Service Fund for payment of currently due bond interest payments.
The General Fund orders and receives supplies from the Central Supplies Fund in the amount of $9,000.
The Capital Projects Fund completes a library building project and transfers the remaining cash to the Debt Service Fund.
20. Which of the following is identified by the GASB as the “cornerstone” of all financial reporting in government (Points : 2)
Understandability.
Representational faithfulness.
Accountability.
Interperiod equity.
21. Five trucks were leased by Pleasantville under terms qualifying as a capital lease. These trucks are to be used by the fire department. Where would the capital lease transaction be recorded (Points : 2)
Internal service fund.
Special revenue fund.
Plant and equipment fund.
Governmental activities.
22. On June 1, 2012, Brooktown levied special assessments in the amount of $500,000, payable in 10 equal annual installments beginning on June 30, 2012. The assessment installments are intended to pay principal and interest on special assessment bonds for which the town has pledged its full faith and credit should assessments be insufficient. Assuming no allowance for uncollectible receivables, the journal entry in the debt service fund on June 1, 2012 would include: (Points : 2)
A debit to Assessments Receivable-Current for $500,000.
A debit to Assessments Receivable-Current for $50,000.
A credit to Revenues for $500,000.
No journal entry is made in the debt service fund because special assessments are used.
23. In 2011, Weaver City signed a contract in the amount of $6,000,000 for the construction of a new city hall. Expenditures were $4,000,000 in 2011 and $2,050,000 in 2012, which included a change to the original construction design in the amount of $50,000. What amount should be added to net capital assets in the governmental activities accounts in 2012 (Points : 2)
$6,000,000
$6,050,000
$2,050,000
$2,000,000.
24. The accrual basis of accounting applicable to proprietary fund types requires that exchange revenues be recognized when (Points : 2)
Earned.
Collected in cash.
Authorized by the budget ordinance.
Measurable and available.
25. The expenditure classification “City Attorney” is an example of which of the following types of classification (Points : 2)
Function.
Organization unit.
Character.
Program.
26. On what should the government-wide financial statements report (Points : 2)
Net assets and results of financial operations of the government as a whole.
Fiscal accountability.
The cost of government services.
Budgetary compliance.
27. Which of the following is true for debt service funds (Points : 2)
A legally required budget should be recorded in the accounts.
A combining balance sheet may not be prepared for a comprehensive annual financial report (CAFR) when more than one debt service fund exists.
Encumbrance accounting is often used.
GAAP requires that a separate debt service fund be established for each bond issue.
28. Which of the following budgetary accounts is typically used by a debt service fund (Points : 2)
Encumbrances.
Appropriations.
Estimated Uncollectible Accounts.
Reserve for Encumbrances.
29. Which of the following is not a budgetary account (Points : 2)
Encumbrances.
Reserve for Encumbrances.
Estimated Revenues.
Appropriations.
30. When bonds are sold at a premium for a capital project, the premium amount generally (Points : 2)
Increases the cash available to the capital projects fund.
Is transferred to the debt service fund.
Is transferred to the General Fund.
Is ignored by both the capital projects fund and any other fund.
31. With regard to depreciation of general capital assets, which of the following statements is correct (Points : 2)
Depreciation expense should be recorded in the appropriate governmental funds, and recorded in the governmental activities accounts.
Depreciation expense must be recorded in the governmental fund, but no depreciation expense is recorded in the governmental activities accounts.
No depreciation can be recorded in any governmental fund, but depreciation expense must be recorded in the governmental activities accounts.
No depreciation can be recorded in any governmental fund, nor is it permissible to record depreciation expense in the governmental activities accounts.
32. The account “Interfund Transfers In” would be classified in a General Fund statement of revenues, expenditures, and changes in fund balance as a(an) (Points : 2)
Revenue.
Other financing use.
Other financing source.
Current liability
33. Which of the following steps in the acquisition of goods and services by an activity accounted for by the General Fund generally occurs first (Points : 2)
Disbursement.
Appropriation.
Encumbrance.
Expenditure.
34. Which of the following is true regarding capital projects funds (Points : 2)
Encumbrances accounting is employed.
Encumbrances accounting is not normally employed, but Estimated Revenues and Appropriations accounts are used.
No budgetary accounts are ever used.
All budgetary accounts are employed in the same manner as for the General Fund and special revenue funds.
35. The body that has been established to recommend accounting and financial reporting standards for the federal government is the (Points : 2)
Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB).
Governmental Accounting Standards Board (GASB).
Cost Accounting Standards Board (CASB).
Federal Accounting Standards Advisory Board (FASAB).
36. The Town of Ashland levied property taxes in the amount of $800,000. The town estimates that 1 percent will be uncollectible. The journal entry to record the tax levy will include (Points : 2)
A debit to cash for $792,000.
A credit to revenues for $792,000.
A debit to estimated uncollectible current taxes for $8,000.
A debit to estimated revenues for $800,000.
37. Which of the following is a fiduciary fund (Points : 2)
Investment trust fund.
Special revenue fund.
Debt service fund.
Enterprise fund.
38. Which of the following should not be reported as a liability of the General Fund (Points : 2)
General obligation bonds payable (due in 10 years).
Vouchers payable.
Tax anticipation notes payable.
Due to federal government.
39. A capital projects fund might be used to account for which of the following activities (Points : 2)
Maintaining roads and bridges.
Building a parking garage.
Providing water and sewer services.
Servicing long-term debt.
40. The fund financial statements for governmental funds should include a (Points : 2)
Statement of cash flows.
Statement of revenues, expenses, and changes in fund net assets.
Balance sheet.
Statement of activities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Research Paper
Course Research Paper (Due ASAP)
In order to understand activity-based costing and how it differs from a traditional costing system, you will review and analyze JetBlue airways Form 10-K report. In an 8-10 page paper, analyze JetBlue’s strategy. The following concepts should be covered in your paper:
1. What is JetBlue’s strategy for success in the marketplace? Does the company rely on customer intimacy, operational excellence, or product leadership customer value proposition? Use evidence to support your conclusion.
2. What business risks does JetBlue face that may threaten the company’s ability to satisfy stockholder expectations? What are some examples of control activities that the company could use to reduce these risks? (Hint: Focus on pages 17-23 of the 10-k.)
3. How can the concept of unit-level activities be applied to an airline? More specifically, what are two examples of unit-level activities for JetBlue? What steps has JetBlue taken to manage these unit-level activities more efficiently?
4. How can the concept of batch-level activities be applied to an airline? What are two examples of batch-level activities for JetBlue? What steps has JetBlue taken to manage these batch-level activities more efficiently?
5. What is one example of a customer-level activity and an organization-sustaining activity for JetBlue?
6. Give an example of a transactions driver and a duration driver that could be used to assign fuel costs to a particular flight departure. Which of the two activity measures would be more accurate and why?
This paper requires that students use the APA format in writing course papers. Therefore, the APA rules for formatting, quoting, paraphrasing, citing, and listing of sources are to be followed. Make sure you include a title page and reference page in addition to your 8-10 pages of text. Your paper must contain at least five current references and may include Internet sources, books, your text book, and professional journals or similar resources. Note: your sources must be considered scholarly sources.
Other information:
2004 Form 10-K report in the link or weblink
http://library.corporate-ir.net/library/13/131/131045/items/211507/200410k.pdf
Course Textbook
Zimmerman, J. L. (2009). Accounting for decision making and control(6th ed.). New York, NY: McGraw Hill.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The entire course discussions, assignments, and final exam are available.
For Example:
Discussion 3
What is the difference between operations costing and a process costing system?
Operating costing and Process costing are two common methods for determining unit product costs. Both systems have the same basic purpose to assign material, labor, and manufacturing overhead costs to products and provide a mechanism for computing unit product costs.
Operating costs are the expenses which are related to the operation of a business, or to the operation of a piece of equipment or manufacturing plant.
Process costing is used in companies that produce many units of a single product for long periods.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Grate Care Company specializes in producing products for personal grooming. The company operates six divisions, including the Hair Products Division. Each division is treated as an investment center. Managers are evaluated and rewarded on the basis of ROI performance. Only those managers who produce the best ROIs are selected to receive bonuses and to fill higher-level managerial positions. Fred Olsen, manager of the Hair Products Division, has always been one of the top performers. For the past two years, Fred s division has produced the largest ROI; last year, the division earned an operating income of $2.56 million and employed average operating assets valued at $16 million. Fred is pleased with his division s performance and has been told that if the division does well this year, he will be in line for a headquarters position. For the coming year, Fred s division has been promised new capital totaling $1.5 million. Any of the capital not invested by the division will be invested to earn the company s required rate of return (9 percent). After some careful investigation, the marketing and engineering staff recommended that the division invest in equipment that could be used to produce a crimping and waving iron, a product currently not produced by the division. The cost of the equipment was estimated at $1.2 million. The division s marketing manager estimated operating earnings from the new line to be $156,000 per year. After receiving the proposal and reviewing the potential effects, Fred turned it down. He then wrote a memo to corporate headquarters, indicating that his division would not be able to employ the capital in any new projects within the next eight to 10 months. He did note, however, that he was confident that his marketing and engineering staff would have a project ready by the end of the year. At that time, he would like to have access to the capital.
Required: 1. Explain why Fred Olsen turned down the proposal to add the capability of producing a crimping and waving iron. Provide computations to support your reasoning. 2. Compute the effect that the new product line would have on the profitability of the firm as a whole. Should the division have produced the crimping and waving iron? 3. Suppose that the firm used residual income as a measure of divisional performance. Do you think Fred s decision might have been different? Why? 4. Explain why a firm like Grate Care might decide to use both residual income and return on investment as measures of performance. 5. Did Fred display ethical behavior when he turned down the investment? In discussing this issue, consider why he refused to allow the investment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Green Fields Miniature Golf and Driving Range Inc. was opened on March 1 by Mickey Fields. The following selected events and transactions occurred during March.
Mar. 1 Invested $60,000 cash in the business in exchange for common stock.
3 Purchased Melissa Wie’s Golf Land for $38,000 cash. The price consists of land $10,000; building $22,000; and equipment $6,000. (Make one compound entry.)
5 Advertised the opening of the driving range and miniature golf course, paying advertising expenses of $1,600.
6 Paid cash $1,480 for a one-year insurance policy.
10 Purchased golf equipment for $2,500 from Young Company, payable in 30 days.
18 Received golf fees of $1,200 in cash.
25 Declared and paid a $1,000 cash dividend.
30 Paid wages of $900.
30 Paid Young Company in full.
31 Received $750 of fees in cash.
Instructions: Journalize the March transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment
In addition to the financial statements presented on the next pages, also find the notes below. Use information as necessary from the notes and the financial statements to construct the cash flow statement for the company for the year ending December 31, 2012
Notes:
1. All equipment/furniture purchases are made using cash. There were no disposals during the year.
2. Land that originally cost $14,000 was sold for $9,800.
3. Short-term investments are not classified as a cash equivalent and are non-trade related. Any purchases or sales are made in cash.
4. Long-term notes payable and bonds payable are shown in the balance sheet at their face value and indicate repayments or issuances as appropriate.
5. Cash dividends were paid to shareholders during the year.
3
2012 2011
Assets
Current Assets
Cash $ 58.8 $ 42.0
Accounts Receivable $ 102.2 $ 105.0
Short-term Investments $ 56.0 $ 21.0
Inventory $ 105.0 $ 98.0
Total Current Assets $ 322.0 $ 266.0
Property Plant and Equipment
Land $ 70.0 $ 84.0
Equipment and Furniture $ 770.0 $ 560.0
Less: Accumulated Depreciation $ (161.0) $ 609.0 $ (105.0) $ 455.0
Net Property Plant and Equipment $ 679.0 $ 539.0
Total Assets $ 1,001.0 $ 805.0
Liabilities
Current Liabilities
Accounts Payable $ 39.2 $ 49.0
Salaries Payable $ 2.8 $ 7.0
Interest Payable $ 7.0 $ 4.2
Income Tax Payable $ 12.6 $ 16.8
Total Current Liabilities $ 61.6 $ 77.0
Long-term Liabilities
Notes Payable $ – $ 42.0
Bonds Payable $ 224.0 $ 140.0
Total Long-term Liabilities $ 224.0 $ 182.0
Shareholders’ Equity
Common Stock $ 350.0 $ 280.0
Paid in Capital – excess of par $ 176.4 $ 140.0
Retained Earnings $ 189.0 $ 126.0
Total Shareholders’ Equity $ 715.4 $ 546.0
Total Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity $ 1,001.0 $ 805.0
Green Lantern Company
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2012 and 2011
($ in 000s)
4
Revenues
Sales Revenue $ 532.0
Expenses
Cost of Goods Sold $ 182.0
Salaries Expense $ 63.0
Depreciation Expense $ 56.0
Interest Expense $ 16.8
Loss on Sale of Land $ 4.2
Income Tax Expense $ 98.0 $ (420.0)
Net Income $ 112.0
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
There are three separate alternatives presented in the case: Scenario One, Two, and Three.
Click on the tabs below to see the three scenarios from the case along with additional assumptions. The assumptions in the three scenarios are given to create an example of the decision making process used in conjuction with capital budgeting tools.
These are your goals:
Using the budget figures and projection assumptions given, calculate a 5 year projected income statement and cash flow statement for each alternative. Include a sensitivity analysis.
Calculate net present value (NPV) and the internal rate of return (IRR – the hurdle rate or required rate of return) of future cash flows for each of the alternatives.
Calculate the weighted average cost of capital for each alternative and determine the optimal WACC.
Make a decision as to which alternative would be best for the organization. As you will see, each alternative not only has a different projection, but a different level of risk that is built into the NPV calculations.
Your work will be evaluated based on the way you analyzed the information, made assumptions, and how you presented your findings.
The scenarioo 3 is the most attractive as the NPV and the IRR are the hihgest among three alternatives.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Guiltier Corporation uses allowance method to accounts uncollectible accounts receivables. Credit terms for sales is n30 (net is due at 30 days).
Below is the company s uncollectible policy:
Monthly provision for uncollectible accounts is 2% of credit sales.
Write-off of bad debts is debited to allowance for uncollectible accounts.
If bad debt is recovered after being written off, the amount is credited to allowance for uncollectible accounts.
Below is information about credit sales, bad debt and uncollectible accounts. All accounts are shown in thousands.
January 1, 2013, balance in allowance for uncollectible accounts was $130.
Credit sales for the year was $9,000.
As per policy, monthly provision for uncollectible accounts is 2% of credit sales was made throughout the year.
Write-off of bad debts was $90.
Recoveries of accounts previously written off was $15.
Aging Reports of accounts receivable based on months of sales is below. This was prepared on December 30, 2013 (the last day of sale for the year). All accounts are shown in thousands.
Description Balance Estimated % Uncollectible
11/1/13-12/30/13 $1,080 2%
7/1/13 10/31/13 650 10%
1/1/2013-6/30/2013 420 25%
12/31/2012 150 80%
Total $2,300
On December 31, 2013, Guiltier Corporation s accountant wrote off $60 from the 12/31/2012 accounts receivable balance. The estimated percentage uncollectible is applicable to the remaining balance after the write off.
Required:
a. Prepare a schedule as of December 31, 2013 showing the balance in the allowance for uncollectible accounts. Remember to include the write off on this date as described above.
b. Prepare journal-entry for the adjustment to allowance for uncollectible accounts on December 31, 2013.
c. Show how accounts receivables will be shown on Guiltier Corporation s balance sheet on December 31, 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gulf University for Science and Technology
ACCT 500- Financial and Managerial Accounting Project
Fall 2013-2014
(Work in groups of fives)- Deadline for submission 10 December 2013
Select one company listed on the Kuwait Stock Exchange (exclude banks, insurance, real estate, financial services and investment instrument sectors) and obtain the most recent English copy if it s annual report (2012 Annual report containing 2011 comparative figures) to shareholders (you should find the annual report under Investor Relations on the company s website).
You are required to work ingroups of 5.Please email me names of group members and your selected company before29 October 2013.
Letter to Stockholders
Your annual report should contain a letter (or two) to the shareholders from one (or two) key officers of the company. Read it (them), and answer the following questions (for each one).
1. Who wrote the letter? What is that person s position in the company?
2. In one hundred words or less, explain the basic message in the letter.
3. What is the basic pattern for letters of this type? How well does the letter fit the mold?
Other material
Your annual report most likely contains several pages of material between the Stockholders Letter and the financial sections, or possibly even before the Stockholders Letter.
4. Provide a description (one hundred fifty words or less) of this material and the message it communicates. Does it impress you?
Financial Highlights
5. Does the company present any financial highlights in the annual report to shareholders?
6. If so, what items is the company highlighting this year?
7. Do the highlighted items show the company in a positive, mixed or negative light? Explain.
8. What items are not included in the financial highlights that you think should have been included in the company s list of highlighted items?
Explain your answer. [Hint: answer this question after you have completed the rest of the project.]
Fiscal Year
9. The fiscal year for the company extends from when to when? Where did you locate this information?
10. Explain why the company has chosen this particular time period for its fiscal year.
Balance Sheet
11. For which dates/years does the company report a balance sheet?
12. Using totals for each category (total assets, total liabilities, total Share Holders Equity), what is the balance sheet equation for the most recent year?
13. What three assets are largest in amount on the most recent balance sheet?
14. Does the make-up of the assets seem consistent with what you expected to see for this type of company? Explain.
15. What three liabilities are largest in amount on the most recent balance sheet?
16. Which is larger in amount for the most recent year, contributed capital or retained earnings?
17. Convert the balance sheet for each year into common size format (vertical analysis) and present neatly in columns.
18. What is the percentage of current assets to total assets for each year?
19. What is the percentage of current assets to current liabilities for each year? What does this ratio tell you? Compute the net working capital?
20. What is the percentage of total debt (liabilities) to total assets for each year (this is called the debt percentage)? Explain
21. Did the debt percentage increase (ratio of total debt to total asset), decrease or stay the same from the prior year to the current year? What do these numbers say about the company?
22. What is the percentage of stockholders equity to total assets for each year? Explain
23. Does the company s ratio of stockholders equity to total assets seem consistent with the business risk of the company? Explain.
24 Compute the quick ratio and explain it. What do these numbers say about the company?
25. What was the percentage change in total assets from the prior year to the current year? Be sure to mark your answer as an increase or decrease.
26. Does the company’s common stock have a par value? If so, how much was the reported par value per share? What was the market value per share at year end?
27. How many shares of common stock were issued at the end of each fiscal year?
Income Statement
28. For which dates (or periods of time) does the company report income statements?
29. Using totals for each category (total revenue, total expense), what is the income statement equation for the most recent year?
30. What amount of net sales is reported for each year?
31. What is the percentage change in sales for each year? Describe the trend in revenues.
32. What amount of net income is reported for each fiscal year? Compute the earnings per share and explain it? Compute the return on assets and return on equity? Explain all ratios.
33. What is the percentage change in net income for each year? Which is changing faster, sales or net income?
34. What three expenses are largest in amount on the most recent income statement?
35. Convert the income statement for each year into common size format and present neatly in columns.
36. Identify significant trends from the common size income statements.
37. If the company sells products, compute the gross margin and the gross profit margin percentage for each fiscal year?
38. What was the amount of operating income for each year? What is the operating profit margin for each year? Describe the trend in operating income. What was the net profit margin for each fiscal year? What is the trend in the ratio?
39. Compute three turnover ratios and explain them
Statement of Cash Flows
40. Using totals for each category, what is the cash flows equation for the most recent year?
41. Does the company report cash flows from operating activities using the direct or the indirect method? Describe how you can tell. Compute the operating cash flow ratio and explain it? Compute and explain the cash return on assets?
42. Does the ending balance of cash and cash equivalents agree with the amount reported on the balance sheet?
43. On what statement(s) would you expect to find information regarding the declaration and payment of dividends? Did the company declare or pay dividends in any year? If yes, compute the dividend per share ?
44. Compute the cash flow interest coverage ratio and the interest coverage ratio? Which one, in your opinion, is better, and why?
45. Describe the trend in cash flows from financing activities?
Statement of Changes in Stockholders Equity
46. Using amounts from the statement of changes in stockholders equity, what is the equation for changes in retained earnings for the most recent year?
Notes to the Financial Statements
47. How many notes to the financial statements are presented for the most recent year?
48. The first note to the financial statements lists and describes significant accounting policies.
Identify and summarize two accounting policies.
49. Choose two of the notes and briefly summarize them.
Report of Independent Public Accountants (Auditors)
50. What accounting firm audited the company s financial statements?
51. What is the auditor firm s responsibility with respect to auditing them?
52. What type of opinion did the independent auditors issue on the financial statements? What does it mean?
53. The auditor firm should have investigated the internal control system of the company. Please describe what is communicated in the letter reporting on this investigation. What was the auditor s opinion on the internal control system?
What is meant by Internal control systems What are the components of internal control systems?
Management’s Discussion and Analysis
54. Provide a description (200-300 words) of the MD&A.
Corporate Governance and Corporate Social Responsibility
55- What is corporate governance? What are the basic elements of corporate governance? In one page, comment on the corporate governance practices in your company.
56- What does corporate social responsibility mean? Does your company have a CSR section in their report? Provide a description (350-500 words) of this material and the message it communicates. Does it impress you?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Halogen Laminated Products Company began business on January 1, 2011. During January, the following transactions occurred:
Jan. 1 Issued common stock in exchange for $100,000 cash.
2 Purchased inventory on account for $35,000 (the perpetual inventory system is used).
4 Paid an insurance company $2,400 for a one-year insurance policy.
10 Sold merchandise on account for $12,000. The cost of the merchandise was $7,000.
15 Borrowed $30,000 from a local bank and signed a note. Principal and interest at 10% is to be repaid in six months.
20 Paid employees $6,000 wages for the first half of the month.
22 Sold merchandise for $10,000 cash. The cost of the merchandise was $6,000.
24 Paid $15,000 to suppliers for the merchandise purchased on January 2.
26 Collected $6,000 on account from customers.
28 Paid $1,000 to the local utility company for January gas and electricity.
30 Paid $4,000 rent for the building. $2,000 was for January rent, and $2,000 for February rent.
Required:
1. Prepare general journal entries to record each transaction. Omit explanations.
2. Post the entries to T-accounts.
3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance as of January 30, 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hamilton Company s beginning inventory and purchases during the fiscal year ended September 30, 20-2, were as follows:
Units Unit Price Total Cost
Oct 1, 20-1 Beginning inventory 300 $20.00 $ 6,000
October 18 First purchase 500 21.50 10,750
November 25 2nd purchase 400 22.00 8,800
January 12, 20-2 3rd purchase 800 23.00 18,400
March 17 4th purchase 900 23.50 21,150
June 2 5th purchase 600 24.00 14,400
August 21 6th purchase 500 25.00 12,500
September 27 7th purchase 400 25.75 10,300
4,400 $ 102,300
Use the following information for the specific identification method.
There are 1,000 units of inventory on hand on September 30, 20-2. Of these 1,000 units:
100 are from October 18, 20-1 .. 1st purchase
300 are from January 12, 20-2 .. 3rd purchase
100 are from March 17 . 4th purchase
200 are from June 2 .. 5th purchase
100 are from August 21 6th purchase
200 are from September 27 7th purchase
REQUIRED
Calculate the total amount to be assigned to cost of goods sold for the fiscal year ended September 30, 20-2, and ending inventory on September 30, 20-2, under each of the following periodic inventory methods:
Cost of Goods Sold Ending Inventory
1. FIFO
2. LIFO
3. Weighted-average (round calculations to two decimal places)
4. Specific identification
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.The useful life of a plant asset is:
The length of time it is used productively in a company’s operations
Never related to its physical life
Its productive life, but not to exceed one year
Determined by the FASB
Determined by law
2. Depreciation:
Measures the decline in market value of an asset
Measures physical deterioration of an asset
Is the process of allocating to expense the cost of a plant asset
Is an outflow of cash from the use of a plant asset
Is applied to land
3. Plant assets are
Tangible assets used in the operation of a business that have a useful life of more than one accounting period
Current assets
Held for sale
Intangible assets used in the operations of a business that have a useful life of more than one accounting period
Tangible assets used in the operation of business that have a useful life of less than one accounting period
4. A company has net sales of $870,000 and average accounts receivable of $174,000. What is its accounts receivable turnover for the period
0.20
5.00
20.0
73.0
1,825
5. FICA taxes include:
Social Security taxes
Charitable giving
Employee income taxes
Unemployment taxes
6. Times interest earned is calculated by:
Multiplying interest expense times income
Dividing interest expense by income before interest expense
Dividing income before interest expense and any income tax by interest expense
Dividing interest and income tax expense by income before interest and income tax expense
7. Amortization:
Is the systematic allocation of the cost of an intangible asset to expense over its estimated useful life
Is the process of allocating to expense the cost of a plant asset to the accounting periods benefiting from its use
Is the process of allocating the cost of natural resources to periods when they are consumed
Is an accelerated form of expensing an asset’s cost
Is the same as depletion
8. A method of estimating bad debts expense that involves a detailed examination of outstanding accounts and their length of time past due is the:
Direct write-off method
Aging of accounts receivable method
Percentage of sales method
Aging of investments method
Percent of accounts receivable method
9. A company purchased a tract of land for its natural resources at a cost of $1,500,000. It expects to mine 2,000,000 tons of ore from this land. The salvage value of the land is expected to be $250,000. The depletion expense per ton of ore is:
$0.75
$0.625
$0.875
$6.00
$8.00
10. The matching principle requires:
That expenses be ignored if their effect on the financial statements are less important than revenues to the financial statement user
The use of the direct write-off method for bad debts
The use of the allowance method of accounting for bad debts
That bad debts be disclosed in the financial statements
That bad debts not be written off
11. Liabilities:
Must be certain
Must sometimes be estimated
Must be for a specific amount
Must always have a definite date for payment
Must involve an outflow of cash
12. In the accounting records of a defendant, lawsuits:
Are estimated liabilities
Should always be recorded
Should always be disclosed
Should be recorded if payment for damages is probable and the amount can be reasonably estimated
13. A contingent liability:
Is always of a specific amount
Is a potential obligation that depends on a future event arising out of a past transaction or event
Is an obligation not requiring future payment
Is an obligation arising from the purchase of goods or services on credit
Is an obligation arising from a future event
14. Total asset turnover is calculated by dividing:
Gross profit by average total assets
Average total assets by gross profit
Net sales by average total assets
Average total assets by net sales
Net assets by total assets
15. If the times interest ratio:
Increases, then risk increases
Increases, then risk decreases
Is greater than 1.5, then the company is in default
Is less than 1.5, the company is carrying too little debt
16. Promissory notes that require the issuer to make a series of payments consisting of both interest and principal are:
Debentures
Discounted notes
Installment notes
Indentures
Investment notes
17. A company borrowed $300,000 cash from the bank by signing a 5-year, 8% installment note. The present value factor for an annuity at 8% for 5 years is 3.9927. Each annuity payment equals $75,137. The present value of the note is:
$75,137
$94,013
$300,000
$375,685
18. A bond traded at 102 means that:
The bond pays 2.5% interest
The bond traded at $1,025 per $1,000 bond
The market rate of interest is 2.5%
The bonds were retired at $1,025 each
19. Dividend yield is the percent of cash dividends paid to common shareholders relative to the:
Common stock’s market value
Earnings per share
Investors’ purchase price of the stock
Amount of retained earnings
Amount of cash
20. A bondholder that owns a $1,000, 10%, 10-year bond has:
Ownership rights
The right to receive $10 per year until maturity
The right to receive $1,000 at maturity
The right to receive $10,000 at maturity
21. A company issues at 9% bonds at par with a par value of $100,000 on April 1, which is 4 months after the most recent interest date. How much total cash interest is received on April 1 by the bond issuer
$750
$5,250
$1,500
$3,000
$6,000
22. Bonds owned by investors whose names and addresses are recorded by the issuing company and for which interest payments are made with checks to the bondholders, are called:
Callable bonds
Serial bonds
Registered bonds
Coupon bonds
23. The right of common shareholders to protect their proportionate interest in a corporation by having the first opportunity to buy additional proportionate shares of common stock issued by the corporation
is called a:
Preemptive right
Proxy right
Right to call
Financial leverage
24. Owners of preferred stock often do not have:
Ownership rights to assets of the corporation
Voting rights
Preference to dividends
The right to sell their stock on the open market
Preference to assets at liquidation
25. The dividend yield is computed by dividing:
Cash dividends per share by earnings per share
Earnings per share by cash dividends per share
Cash dividends per share by the market price per share
Market price per share by cash dividends per share
Cash dividends per share by retained earnings
26. A company issues 9%, 20-year bonds with a par value of $750,000. The current market rate is 9%. The amount of interest owed to the bondholders for each semiannual interest payment is.
$0
$33,750
$67,500
$750,000
$1,550,000
27. Secured bonds:
Are also referred to as debentures
Have specific assets of the issuing company pledged as collateral
Are backed by the issuer’s bank
Are subordinated to those of other unsecured liabilities
Are the same as sinking fund bonds
28. Bonds with a par value of less than $1,000 are known as:
Junk bonds
Baby bonds
Callable bonds
Unsecured bonds
Convertible bonds
29. A corporation’s distribution of additional shares of its own stock to its stockholders without the receipt of any payment in return is called a:
Stock dividend
Stock subscription
Premium on stock
Discount on stock
Treasury stock
30. A premium on common stock:
Is the amount paid in excess of par by purchasers of newly issued stock
Is the difference between par value and issue price when the amount paid is below par
Represents profit from issuing stock
Represents capital gain on sale of stock
Is prohibited in most states
31. A company had a market price of $83.12 per share, earnings per share of $4.87 and dividends per share of $5.40. Its price-earnings ratio is equal to:
.056
.065
8.09
15.39
17.07
32. Reporting of discontinued segments includes:
Income or loss from operating the discontinued segment net of tax and gain or loss from disposal of the segment’s net assets net of tax
Extraordinary items
Changes in accounting principle
Items that are both unusual and infrequent
Writing off of receivables
33. One of several ratios that reflects solvency includes the:
Acid-test ratio
Current ratio
Times interest earned ratio
Total asset turnover
Days’ sales in inventory
34. The ability to meet short-term obligations and to efficiently generate revenues is called:
Liquidity and efficiency
Solvency
Profitability
Market prospects
Creditworthiness
35. A company’s transactions with its creditors to borrow money and/or to repay the principal amounts of loans are reported as cash flows from:
Operating activities
Investing activities
Financing activities
Direct activities
Indirect activities
36. A company had net cash flows from operations of $120,000, total cash flows of $500,000 and average total assets of $2,500,000. The cash flow on total assets ratio equals:
4.8%
5.0%
20.0%
20.8%
24.0%
37. Net sales divided by average accounts receivable is equal to the:
Days’ sales uncollected
Average accounts receivable ratio
Current ratio
Profit margin
Accounts receivable turnover ratio
38. The comparison of a company’s financial condition and performance across time is known as:
Horizontal analysis
Vertical analysis
Political analysis
Financial reporting
Investment analysis
39. Selected information from Doodle Company’s for 2010 is below (in millions):
Inventory decreased $6.0
Accounts Payable increased by $7.0
Cost of goods sold $36.50
Salaries Expense $24.0
Salaries Payable decreased $6.0
Accounts Receivable increased by $10.0
Sales $56.4
What is the amount of cash paid for salaries by Doodle during 2010
$4.0
$6.0
$24.0
$30.0
$18.0
40. A company has sales of $5,417,000, a gross profit ratio of 35%, ending merchandise inventory of $201,425, and total current assets of $1,539,600. What is the days sales’ in inventory ratio for the year?
6.10
20.88
26.15
22.67
15.77
41. Financial statements with data for two or more successive accounting periods placed in columns side by side, sometimes with changes shown in dollar amounts and percents, are referred to as:
Period-to-period statements
Controlling statements
Successive statements
Comparative statements
Serial statements
42. The average number of times a company’s inventory is sold during an accounting period, calculated by dividing cost of goods sold by the average inventory balance is equal to the:
Accounts receivable turnover
Inventory turnover
Days’ sales uncollected
Current ratio
43. Which of the following items is not likely to be considered an extraordinary item
Loss from an unexpected union strike
Condemnation of property by the city government
Loss of use of property due to a new and unexpected environmental regulation
Loss due to an earthquake in Florida
Expropriation of property by a foreign government
44. Net income divided by net sales is equal to the:
Return on total assets
Profit margin
Current ratio
Total asset turnover
Days’ sales in inventory
45. Comparative financial statements in which each amount is expressed as a percentage of a base amount and in which the base amount is expressed as 100%, are called:
Comparative statements
Common-size comparative statements
General-purpose financial statements
Base line statements
Index statements
46. The reporting of net cash provided or used by operating activities that lists the major items of operating cash receipts, such as receipts from customers and subtracts the major items of operating cash disbursements, such as cash paid for merchandise is referred to as the:
Direct method of reporting net cash provided or used by operating activities
Cash basis of accounting
Classified statement of cash flows
Indirect method of reporting net cash provided or used by operating activities
Net method of reporting cash flows from operating activities
47. The indirect method for the preparation of the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows:
Separately lists each major item of operating cash receipts
Separately lists each major item of operating cash payments
Reports net income and then adjusts it for items necessary to determine net cash provided or used by operating activities
Is required if the company is a merchandiser
48. A company has a profit margin of 5%. If net income is equal to $83,000 and average total assets is equal to $45,000, how much are net sales
$4,150
$2,250
$1,660,000
$6,400
$128,000
49. A component of operating efficiency and profitability, calculated by expressing net income as a percent of net sales is equal to the:
Acid-test ratio
Merchandise turnover
Price earnings ratio
Accounts receivable turnover
Profit margin ratio
50. An investment that is readily convertible to a known amount of cash and that is sufficiently close to its maturity date so that its market value is relatively insensitive to interest rate changes is a(n):
Short-term marketable equity security
Operating activity
Common stock
Cash equivalent
Financing activity
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| GB518: Financial Accounting Principles and Analysis final exaam |
Question Detail:
|
The useful life of a plant asset is: (Points : 2)
|
The length of time it is used productively in a company’s operations Never related to its physical life Its productive life, but not to exceed one year Determined by the FASB Determined by law
|
|
2.Depreciation: (Points : 2)
|
Measures the decline in market value of an asset Measures physical deterioration of an asset Is the process of allocating to expense the cost of a plant asset Is an outflow of cash from the use of a plant asset Is applied to land
|
|
3.Plant assets are: (Points : 2)
|
Tangible assets used in the operation of a business that have a useful life of more than one accounting period Current assets Held for sale Intangible assets used in the operations of a business that have a useful life of more than one accounting period Tangible assets used in the operation of business that have a useful life of less than one accounting period
|
|
4.A company has net sales of $870,000 and average accounts receivable of $174,000. What is its accounts receivable turnover for the period? (Points : 2)
|
0.20 5.00 20.0 73.0 1,825
|
|
5.FICA taxes include: (Points : 2)
|
Social Security taxes Charitable giving Employee income taxes Unemployment taxes
|
|
6.Times interest earned is calculated by: (Points : 2)
|
Multiplying interest expense times income Dividing interest expense by income before interest expense Dividing income before interest expense and any income tax by interest expense Dividing interest and income tax expense by income before interest and income tax expense
|
|
7.Amortization: (Points : 2)
|
Is the systematic allocation of the cost of an intangible asset to expense over its estimated useful life Is the process of allocating to expense the cost of a plant asset to the accounting periods benefiting from its use Is the process of allocating the cost of natural resources to periods when they are consumed Is an accelerated form of expensing an asset’s cost Is the same as depletion
|
|
8.A method of estimating bad debts expense that involves a detailed examination of outstanding accounts and their length of time past due is the: (Points : 2)
|
Direct write-off method Aging of accounts receivable method Percentage of sales method Aging of investments method Percent of accounts receivable method
|
|
9.A company purchased a tract of land for its natural resources at a cost of $1,500,000. It expects to mine 2,000,000 tons of ore from this land. The salvage value of the land is expected to be $250,000. The depletion expense per ton of ore is: (Points : 2)
|
$0.75 $0.625 $0.875 $6.00 $8.00
|
|
10.The matching principle requires: (Points : 2)
|
That expenses be ignored if their effect on the financial statements are less important than revenues to the financial statement user The use of the direct write-off method for bad debts The use of the allowance method of accounting for bad debts That bad debts be disclosed in the financial statements That bad debts not be written off
|
|
11.Liabilities: (Points : 2)
|
Must be certain Must sometimes be estimated Must be for a specific amount Must always have a definite date for payment Must involve an outflow of cash
|
|
12.In the accounting records of a defendant, lawsuits: (Points : 2)
|
Are estimated liabilities Should always be recorded Should always be disclosed Should be recorded if payment for damages is probable and the amount can be reasonably estimated
|
|
13.A contingent liability: (Points : 2)
|
Is always of a specific amount Is a potential obligation that depends on a future event arising out of a past transaction or event Is an obligation not requiring future payment Is an obligation arising from the purchase of goods or services on credit Is an obligation arising from a future event
|
|
14.Total asset turnover is calculated by dividing: (Points : 2)
|
Gross profit by average total assets Average total assets by gross profit Net sales by average total assets Average total assets by net sales Net assets by total assets
|
|
15.If the times interest ratio: (Points : 2)
|
Increases, then risk increases Increases, then risk decreases Is greater than 1.5, then the company is in default Is less than 1.5, the company is carrying too little debt
|
|
16.Promissory notes that require the issuer to make a series of payments consisting of both interest and principal are: (Points : 2)
|
Debentures Discounted notes Installment notes Indentures Investment notes
|
|
17.A company borrowed $300,000 cash from the bank by signing a 5-year, 8% installment note. The present value factor for an annuity at 8% for 5 years is 3.9927. Each annuity payment equals $75,137. The present value of the note is: (Points : 2)
|
$75,137 $94,013 $300,000 $375,685
|
|
18.A bond traded at 102 means that: (Points : 2)
|
The bond pays 2.5% interest The bond traded at $1,025 per $1,000 bond The market rate of interest is 2.5% The bonds were retired at $1,025 each
|
|
19.Dividend yield is the percent of cash dividends paid to common shareholders relative to the: (Points : 2)
|
Common stock’s market value Earnings per share Investors’ purchase price of the stock Amount of retained earnings Amount of cash
|
|
20.A bondholder that owns a $1,000, 10%, 10-year bond has: (Points : 2)
|
Ownership rights The right to receive $10 per year until maturity The right to receive $1,000 at maturity The right to receive $10,000 at maturity
|
|
21.A company issues at 9% bonds at par with a par value of $100,000 on April 1, which is 4 months after the most recent interest date. How much total cash interest is received on April 1 by the bond issuer? (Points : 2)
|
$750 $5,250 $1,500 $3,000 $6,000
|
|
22.Bonds owned by investors whose names and addresses are recorded by the issuing company and for which interest payments are made with checks to the bondholders, are called: (Points : 2)
|
Callable bonds Serial bonds Registered bonds Coupon bonds
|
|
23.The right of common shareholders to protect their proportionate interest in a corporation by having the first opportunity to buy additional proportionate shares of common stock issued by the corporation is called a: (Points : 2)
|
Preemptive right Proxy right Right to call Financial leverage
|
|
24.Owners of preferred stock often do not have: (Points : 2)
|
Ownership rights to assets of the corporation Voting rights Preference to dividends The right to sell their stock on the open market Preference to assets at liquidation
|
|
25.The dividend yield is computed by dividing: (Points : 2)
|
Cash dividends per share by earnings per share Earnings per share by cash dividends per share Cash dividends per share by the market price per share Market price per share by cash dividends per share Cash dividends per share by retained earnings
|
|
26.A company issues 9%, 20-year bonds with a par value of $750,000. The current market rate is 9%. The amount of interest owed to the bondholders for each semiannual interest payment is. (Points : 2)
|
$0 $33,750 $67,500 $750,000 $1,550,000
|
|
27.Secured bonds: (Points : 2)
|
Are also referred to as debentures Have specific assets of the issuing company pledged as collateral Are backed by the issuer’s bank Are subordinated to those of other unsecured liabilities Are the same as sinking fund bonds
|
|
28.Bonds with a par value of less than $1,000 are known as: (Points : 2)
|
Junk bonds Baby bonds Callable bonds Unsecured bonds Convertible bonds
|
|
29.A corporation’s distribution of additional shares of its own stock to its stockholders without the receipt of any payment in return is called a: (Points : 2)
|
Stock dividend Stock subscription Premium on stock Discount on stock Treasury stock
|
|
30.A premium on common stock: (Points : 2)
|
Is the amount paid in excess of par by purchasers of newly issued stock Is the difference between par value and issue price when the amount paid is below par Represents profit from issuing stock Represents capital gain on sale of stock Is prohibited in most states
|
|
31.A company had a market price of $83.12 per share, earnings per share of $4.87 and dividends per share of $5.40. Its price-earnings ratio is equal to: (Points : 2)
|
.056 .065 8.09 15.39 17.07
|
|
32.Reporting of discontinued segments includes: (Points : 2)
|
Income or loss from operating the discontinued segment net of tax and gain or loss from disposal of the segment’s net assets net of tax Extraordinary items Changes in accounting principle Items that are both unusual and infrequent Writing off of receivables
|
|
33.One of several ratios that reflects solvency includes the: (Points : 2)
|
Acid-test ratio Current ratio Times interest earned ratio Total asset turnover Days’ sales in inventory
|
|
34.The ability to meet short-term obligations and to efficiently generate revenues is called: (Points : 2)
|
Liquidity and efficiency Solvency Profitability Market prospects Creditworthiness
|
|
35.A company’s transactions with its creditors to borrow money and/or to repay the principal amounts of loans are reported as cash flows from: (Points : 2)
|
Operating activities Investing activities Financing activities Direct activities Indirect activities
|
|
36.A company had net cash flows from operations of $120,000, total cash flows of $500,000 and average total assets of $2,500,000. The cash flow on total assets ratio equals: (Points : 2)
|
4.8% 5.0% 20.0% 20.8% 24.0%
|
|
37.Net sales divided by average accounts receivable is equal to the: (Points : 2)
|
Days’ sales uncollected Average accounts receivable ratio Current ratio Profit margin Accounts receivable turnover ratio
|
|
38.The comparison of a company’s financial condition and performance across time is known as: (Points : 2)
|
Horizontal analysis Vertical analysis Political analysis Financial reporting Investment analysis
|
|
39.Selected information from Doodle Company’s for 2010 is below (in millions): Inventory decreased $6.0 Accounts Payable increased by $7.0 Cost of goods sold $36.50 Salaries Expense $24.0 Salaries Payable decreased $6.0 Accounts Receivable increased by $10.0 Sales $56.4 What is the amount of cash paid for salaries by Doodle during 2010? (Points : 2)
|
$4.0 $6.0 $24.0 $30.0 $18.0
|
|
40.A company has sales of $5,417,000, a gross profit ratio of 35%, ending merchandise inventory of $201,425, and total current assets of $1,539,600. What is the days sales’ in inventory ratio for the year? (Points : 2)
|
6.10 20.88 26.15 22.67 15.77
|
|
41.Financial statements with data for two or more successive accounting periods placed in columns side by side, sometimes with changes shown in dollar amounts and percents, are referred to as: (Points : 2)
|
Period-to-period statements Controlling statements Successive statements Comparative statements Serial statements
|
|
42.The average number of times a company’s inventory is sold during an accounting period, calculated by dividing cost of goods sold by the average inventory balance is equal to the: (Points : 2)
|
Accounts receivable turnover Inventory turnover Days’ sales uncollected Current ratio
|
|
43.Which of the following items is not likely to be considered an extraordinary item? (Points : 2)
|
Loss from an unexpected union strike Condemnation of property by the city government Loss of use of property due to a new and unexpected environmental regulation Loss due to an earthquake in Florida Expropriation of property by a foreign government
|
|
44.Net income divided by net sales is equal to the: (Points : 2)
|
Return on total assets Profit margin Current ratio Total asset turnover Days’ sales in inventory
|
|
45.Comparative financial statements in which each amount is expressed as a percentage of a base amount and in which the base amount is expressed as 100%, are called: (Points : 2)
|
Comparative statements Common-size comparative statements General-purpose financial statements Base line statements Index statements
|
|
46.The reporting of net cash provided or used by operating activities that lists the major items of operating cash receipts, such as receipts from customers and subtracts the major items of operating cash disbursements, such as cash paid for merchandise is referred to as the: (Points : 2)
|
Direct method of reporting net cash provided or used by operating activities Cash basis of accounting Classified statement of cash flows Indirect method of reporting net cash provided or used by operating activities Net method of reporting cash flows from operating activities
|
|
47.The indirect method for the preparation of the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows: (Points : 2)
|
Separately lists each major item of operating cash receipts Separately lists each major item of operating cash payments Reports net income and then adjusts it for items necessary to determine net cash provided or used by operating activities Is required if the company is a merchandiser
|
|
48.A company has a profit margin of 5%. If net income is equal to $83,000 and average total assets is equal to $45,000, how much are net sales? (Points : 2)
|
$4,150 $2,250 $1,660,000 $6,400 $128,000
|
|
49.A component of operating efficiency and profitability, calculated by expressing net income as a percent of net sales is equal to the: (Points : 2)
|
Acid-test ratio Merchandise turnover Price earnings ratio Accounts receivable turnover Profit margin ratio
|
|
50.An investment that is readily convertible to a known amount of cash and that is sufficiently close to its maturity date so that its market value is relatively insensitive to interest rate changes is a(n): (Points : 2)
|
Short-term marketable equity security Operating activity Common stock Cash equivalent Financing activity
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Creditors’ claims on the assets of a company are called:
Net losses
Expenses
Revenues
Equity
Liabilities
2. Which of the following elements are found on the Balance Sheet
Service Revenue
Net Income
Operating Activities
Utilities Expense
Retained Earnings
3. Assets created by selling goods and services on credit are:
Accounts payable
Accounts receivable
Liabilities
Expenses
4. The description of the relation between a company’s assets, liabilities and equity, which is expressed as Assets = Liabilities + Equity is known as the:
Income statement equation
Accounting equation
Business equation
Return on equity ratio
Net income
5. An example of an operating activity is:
Paying wages
Purchasing office equipment
Borrowing money from a bank
Selling stock
Paying off a loan
6. Of the following accounts, the one that normally has a credit balance is:
Cash
Office Equipment
Sales Salaries Payable
Dividends
Sales Salaries Expense
7. Reebok had income of $150 million and average assets of $1,800 million. Its return on assets is:
8.33%
83.3%
12.0%
120%
8. If Beginning Retained Earnings was $184,300, the company distributed $46,000 in dividends and Ending Retained Earnings was $345,000, what was the net income for the period
$154,700
$206,700
$114,700
$575,300
$160,700
9. Ethical behavior requires:
That an auditors’ pay not depend on the figures in the client’s reports
Auditors to invest in businesses they audit
Analysts to report information favorable to their companies
Managers to use accounting information to benefit themselves
That an auditor provides a favorable opinion
10. A parcel of land is: offered for sale at $150,000, assessed for tax purposes at $95,000, recognized by its purchasers as being worth $140,000 and purchased for $137,000. The land should be recorded in the purchaser’s books at:
$95,000
$137,000
$138,500
$140,000
$150,000
11. Prepaid expenses are:
Payments made for products and services that do not ever expire
Classified as liabilities on the balance sheet
Decreases in retained earnings
Assets that represent prepayments of future expenses
12. Apatha Company has assets of $600,000, liabilities of $250,000 and equity of $350,000. It buys office equipment on credit for $75,000. The effects of this transaction include:
Assets increase by $75,000 and expenses increase by $75,000
Assets increase by $75,000 and expenses decrease by $75,000
Liabilities increase by $75,000 and expenses decrease by $75,000
Assets decrease by $75,000 and expenses decrease by $75,000
Assets increase by $75,000 and liabilities increase by $75,000
13. Which of the following accounting principles dictates when expenses are recognized
Revenue recognition principle
Monetary unit principle
Business entity principle
Matching principle
Full disclosure principle
14. Which of the following is the primary purpose of accounting
To establish a business
To identify, record and communicate business transactions
To deceive stockholders
To keep from paying taxes
To establish credit for a company
15. If assets are $99,000 and liabilities are $32,000, then equity equals:
$32,000
$67,000
$99,000
$131,000
$198,000
16. Financial statements are typically prepared in the following order:
Balance sheet, statement of retained earnings, income statement
Statement of retained earnings, balance sheet, income statement
Income statement, balance sheet, statement of retained earnings
Income statement, statement of retained earnings, balance sheet
17. Unearned revenue is reported on the financial statements as:
A revenue on the balance sheet
A liability on the balance sheet
An unearned revenue on the income statement
An asset on the balance sheet
An operating activity on the statement of cash flows
18. The accrual basis of accounting:
Is generally accepted for external reporting since it is more useful for most business decisions
Is flawed because it gives complete information about cash flows
Recognizes revenues when received in cash
Recognizes expenses when paid in cash
Eliminates the need for adjusting entries at the end of each period
19. On January 1, Able Company purchased equipment costing $135,000 with an estimated salvage value of $10,500, and an estimated useful life of five years. What is the amount that should be recorded as depreciation on December 31
$27,000
$24,900
$29,100
$135,000
20. A 10-column spreadsheet used to draft a company’s unadjusted trial balance, adjusting entries, adjusted trial balance and financial statements and which is an optional tool in the accounting process is a(n):
Adjusted trial balance
Work sheet
Post-closing trial balance
Unadjusted trial balance
General ledger
21. Which of the following identifies the proper order of the accounting cycle
Analyze, Journalize, Unadjusted Trial Balance
Analyze, Post, Unadjusted Trial Balance
Journalize, Post, Adjusted Trial Balance
Unadjusted Trial Balance, Adjusted Trial Balance, Close
Adjusted Trial Balance, Adjustments, Financial Statements
22. The special account used only in the closing process to temporarily hold the amounts of revenues and expenses before the net difference is added to (or subtracted from) the retained earnings account is the:
Income Summary account
Closing account
Balance column account
Contra account
23. A trial balance prepared after adjustments have been recorded is called a(n):
Balance sheet
Adjusted trial balance
Unadjusted trial balance
Classified balance sheet
Unclassified balance sheet
24. If accrued salaries were recorded on December 31 with a credit to Salaries Payable, the entry to record payment of these wages on the following January 5 would include:
A debit to Cash and a credit to Salaries Payable
A debit to Cash and a credit to Prepaid Salaries
A debit to Salaries Payable and a credit to Cash
A debit to Salaries Payable and a credit to Salaries Expense
No entry would be necessary on January 5
25. Based on the following information, determine the current assets, assuming all accounts have a normal balance
Cash $ 6,754 Dividends $ 2,000
Accounts receivable $ 13,733 Consulting fees earned $ 13,718
Office supplies $ 2,625 Rent expense $ 3,673
Land $ 37,153 Salaries expense $ 6,642
Office equipment $ 14,535 Telephone expense $ 560
Accounts payable $ 6,463 Miscellaneous expense $ 280
Common stock $ 54,490 Retained Earnings ?
$74,800
$37,647
$60,265
$23,112
26. Which of the following accounts would not be on the post closing trial balance
Accounts Payable
Accounts Receivable
Common Stock
Dividends
27. A trial balance prepared after the closing entries have been journalized and posted is the:
Unadjusted trial balance
Post-closing trial balance
General ledger
Adjusted trial balance
Work sheet
28. On January 1 a company purchased a five-year insurance policy for $1,800 with coverage starting immediately. If the purchase was recorded in the Prepaid Insurance account and the company records adjustments only at year-end, the adjusting entry at the end of the first year is:
Debit Prepaid Insurance, $1,800; credit Cash, $1,800
Debit Prepaid Insurance, $1,440; credit Insurance Expense, $1,440
Debit Prepaid Insurance, $360; credit Insurance Expense, $360
Debit Insurance Expense, $360; credit Prepaid Insurance, $360
Debit Insurance Expense, $360; credit Prepaid Insurance, $1,440
29. On April 1, 2011, a company paid the $1,350 premium on a three-year insurance policy with benefits beginning on that date. What will be the insurance expense on the annual income statement for the year ended December 31, 2011
$1,350
$450
$1,012.50
$337.50
$37.50
30. A company earned $2,000 in net income for October. Its net sales for October were $10,000. Its profit margin is:
2%
20%
200%
500%
$8,000
31. A company has sales of $1,500,000, sales discounts of $102,000, sales returns and allowances of $123,000, shipping charges of $15,000, sales commissions of $34,000,net income totaled $263,500, and cost of goods sold of $420,000. What is the net sales amount for the period
$1,500,000
$1,275,000
$1,725,000
$1,521,000
$1,479,000
32. Given the following information:
Petty cash balance $ 450.00 Courier receipt $ 82.50
Postage receipt $ 48.00 Office Supplies receipt $ 56.22
Business Meal receipt $ 102.34 Cash on hand at the end of the month $ 76.21
What is the amount of cash over and short
debit $84.73
credit $84.73
debit $160.94
credit $160.94
no cash over or short would be recorded
33. A company had net sales of $31,500 and ending accounts receivable of $2,700 for the current period. Its days’ sales uncollected is equal to:
11.7 days
23.3 days
31.3 days
42.5 days
46.6 days
34. Merchandise inventory:
Is a long-term asset
Is a current asset
Includes supplies
Is classified with investments on the balance sheet
Must be sold within one month
35. A company had expenses other than cost of goods sold of $51,000. Determine sales and gross profit given cost of goods sold was $25,000 and net income was $60,000.
Sales: $136,000; Gross Profit: $111,000
Sales: $136,000; Gross Profit: $85,000
Sales: $85,000; Gross Profit: $136,000
Sales: $111,000; Gross Profit: $136,000
Sales: $60,000; Gross Profit: $25,000
36. A company had $43 missing from petty cash which was not accounted for by petty cash receipts. The correct procedure is to:
Debit Cash Over and Short for $43
Credit Cash Over and Short for $43
Debit Petty Cash for $43
Credit Petty Cash for $43
Credit Cash for $43
37. Which of the following is the most serious limitation of internal controls
Computer error
Human fraud or human error
Cost-benefit principle
Cybercrime
Management fraud
38. Which inventory valuation method assigns a value to the inventory on the balance sheet that approximates current cost and also mimics the actual flow of goods for most businesses
FIFO
Weighted average
LIFO
Specific identification
First In Still Here
39. A company had sales of $695,000 and its cost of goods sold of $278,000. Its gross margin equals:
$(417,000)
$695,000
$278,000
$417,000
40. Multiple-step income statements:
Are required by the FASB
Contain more detail than a simple listing of revenues and expenses
Are required for the perpetual inventory system
List cost of goods sold as an operating expense
Can only be used in perpetual inventory systems
41. Goods on consignment:
Are goods shipped by the owner to the consignee who sells the goods for the owner
Are reported in the consignee’s books as inventory
Are goods shipped to the consignor who sells the goods for the owner
Are not reported in the consignor’s inventory since they do not have possession of the inventory
42. A seller of goods or services, usually a manufacturer or wholesaler is known as a:
Vendor
Payee
Vendee
Creditor
Debtor
43. Physical inventory counts:
Are not necessary under the perpetual system
Are necessary to measure and adjust for inventory shrinkage
Must be taken at least once a month
Require the use of hand-held portable computers
44. A company purchased $4,000 worth of merchandise. Transportation costs were an additional $350. The company later returned $275 worth of merchandise and paid the invoice within the 2% cash discount period. The total amount paid for this merchandise is:
$3,725.00
$3,925.00
$3,995.00
$4,000.50
$4,075.00
45. The inventory valuation method that tends to smooth out erratic changes in costs is:
FIFO
Weighted average
LIFO
Specific identification
WIFO
46. A remittance advice is:
An explanation for a payment by check
A bank statement
A voucher
An EFT
A cancelled check
47. A merchandising company:
Earns net income by buying and selling merchandise
Receives fees only in exchange for services
Earns profit from commissions only
Earns profit from fares only
Buys products from consumers
48. The understatement of the beginning inventory balance causes:
Cost of goods sold to be understated and net income to be understated
Cost of goods sold to be understated and net income to be overstated
Cost of goods sold to be overstated and net income to be overstated
Cost of goods sold to be overstated and net income to be understated
Cost of goods sold to be overstated and net income to be correct
49. Alpha Company had cash sales of $94,275, credit sales of $83,450, sales returns and allowances of $1,700 and sales discounts of $3,475. Alpha’s net sales for this period equal:
$94,275
$172,550
$174,250
$176,025
$177,725
50. A company has inventory of 15 units at a cost of $12 each on August 1. On August 5, they purchased 10 units at $13 per unit. On August 12 they purchased 20 units at $14 per unit. On August 15, they sold 30 units. Using the FIFO periodic inventory method, what is the value of the inventory at August 15 after the sale
$140
$160
$210
$380
$590
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1. Question : Creditors’ claims on the assets of a company are called:
Net losses
Expenses
Revenues
Equity
Liabilities
Question 2. Question : If assets are $99,000 and liabilities are $32,000, then equity equals:
$32,000
$67,000
$99,000
$131,000
$198,000
Question 3. Question : The principle prescribing that financial statements reflect the assumption that the business will continue operating instead of being closed or sold, unless evidence shows that it will not continue is the:
Going-concern principle
Business entity principle
Objectivity principle
Cost Principle
Monetary unit principle
Question 4. Question : If the liabilities of a business increased $75,000 during a period of time and the equity in the business decreased $30,000 during the same period, the assets of the business must have:
Decreased $105,000
Decreased $45,000
Increased $30,000
Increased $45,000
Question 5. Question : If equity is $300,000 and liabilities are $192,000, then assets equal:
$108,000
$192,000
$300,000
$492,000
$792,000
Question 6. Question : Net Income:
Decreases equity
Represents the amount of assets owners put into a business
Equals assets minus liabilities
Is the excess of revenues over expenses
Represents the owners’ claims against assets
Question 7. Question : Distributions of assets by a business to its stockholders are called:
Dividends
Expenses
Assets
Retained earnings
Net Income
Question 8. Question : Which accounting assumption assumes that all accounting information is reported monthly or yearly?
Business entity assumption
Monetary unit assumption
Value assumption
Cost assumption
Time period assumption
Question 9. Question : Apatha Company has assets of $600,000, liabilities of $250,000 and equity of $350,000. It buys office equipment on credit for $75,000. The effects of this transaction include:
Assets increase by $75,000 and expenses increase by $75,000
Assets increase by $75,000 and expenses decrease by $75,000
Liabilities increase by $75,000 and expenses decrease by $75,000
Assets decrease by $75,000 and expenses decrease by $75,000
Assets increase by $75,000 and liabilities increase by $75,000
Question 10. Question : Stride Rite has total assets of $425 million. Its total liabilities are $110 million. Its equity is $315 million. Calculate the debt ratio.
38.6%
13.4%
34.9%
25.9%
14.9%
Question 11. Question : The description of the relation between a company’s assets, liabilities and equity, which is expressed as Assets = Liabilities + Equity is known as the:
Income statement equation
Accounting equation
Business equation
Return on equity ratio
Net income
Question 12. Question : Reebok had income of $150 million and average assets of $1,800 million. Its return on assets is:
8.33%
83.3%
12.0%
120%
Question 13. Question : Which of the following elements are found on the Balance Sheet?
Service Revenue
Net Income
Operating Activities
Utilities Expense
Retained Earnings
Question 14. Question : Which of the following elements are found on the income statement?
Cash
Accounts Receivable
Common Stock
Retained Earnings
Salaries Expense
Question 15. Question : Internal users of accounting information include:
Shareholders
Customers
Creditors
Government regulators
Line Supervisor
Question 16. Question : A credit is used to record:
An increase in an expense account
An increase in an asset account
An increase in an unearned revenue account
A decrease in a revenue account
A decrease to retained earnings
Question 17. Question : If Beginning Retained Earnings was $184,300, the company distributed $46,000 in dividends and Ending Retained Earnings was $345,000, what was the net income for the period?
$154,700
$206,700
$114,700
$575,300
$160,700
Question 18. Question : Double-entry accounting is an accounting system:
That records each transaction twice
That records the effects of transactions and other events in at least two accounts with equal debits and credits
In which the impact of each transaction is recorded in two or more accounts but that could include two debits and no credits
That may only be used if T-accounts are used
That insures that errors never occur
Question 19. Question : Ethical behavior requires:
That an auditors’ pay not depend on the figures in the client’s reports
Auditors to invest in businesses they audit
Analysts to report information favorable to their companies
Managers to use accounting information to benefit themselves
That an auditor provides a favorable opinion
Question 20. Question : The financial statement that shows: beginning and ending retained earnings balances and the effects of net income (loss) and a dividend for the period is the:
Statement of financial position
Statement of cash flows
Balance sheet
Income statement
Statement of retained earnings
Question 21. Question : An example of a financing activity is:
Buying office supplies
Obtaining a long-term loan
Buying office equipment
Selling inventory
Buying land
Question 22. Question : Unearned revenues are:
Revenues that have been earned and received in cash
Revenues that have been earned but not yet collected in cash
Liabilities created when a customer pays in advance for products or services before the revenue is earned
Recorded as an asset in the accounting records
Increases to retained earnings
Question 23. Question : Of the following accounts, the one that normally has a credit balance is:
Cash
Office Equipment
Sales Salaries Payable
Dividends
Sales Salaries Expense
Question 24. Question : Increases in retained earnings from a company’s earnings activities are:
Assets
Revenues
Liabilities
Stockholder’s Equity
Expenses
Question 25. Question : Prepaid expenses are:
Payments made for products and services that do not ever expire
Classified as liabilities on the balance sheet
Decreases in retained earnings
Assets that represent prepayments of future expenses
Promises of payments by customers
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Question : A company’s Office Supplies account shows a beginning balance of $600 and an ending balance of $400. If office supplies expense for the year is $3,100, what amount of office supplies was purchased during the period?
$2,700
$2,900
$3,300
$3,500
$3,700
Question 2. Question : A 10-column spreadsheet used to draft a company’s unadjusted trial balance, adjusting entries, adjusted trial balance and financial statements and which is an optional tool in the accounting process is a(n):
Adjusted trial balance
Work sheet
Post-closing trial balance
Unadjusted trial balance
General ledger
Question 3. Question : Unearned revenue is reported on the financial statements as:
A revenue on the balance sheet
A liability on the balance sheet
An unearned revenue on the income statement
An asset on the balance sheet
An operating activity on the statement of cash flows
Question 4. Question : A company shows a $600 balance in Prepaid Insurance in the Unadjusted Trial Balance columns of the work sheet. The Adjustments columns show expired insurance of $200. This adjusting entry results in:
$200 less in net income
$200 more in net income
$200 difference between the debit and credit columns of the Unadjusted Trial Balance
$200 of prepaid insurance
An error in the financial statements
Question 5. Question : A company had no office supplies available at the beginning of the year. During the year, the company purchased $250 worth of office supplies. On December 31, $75 worth of office supplies remained. How much should the company report as office supplies expense for the year?
$75
$125
$175
$250
$325
Question 6. Question : A company earned $2,000 in net income for October. Its net sales for October were $10,000. Its profit margin is:
2%
20%
200%
500%
$8,000
Question 7. Question : The Income Summary account is used:
To adjust and update asset and liability accounts
To close the revenue and expense accounts
To determine the appropriate dividend amount
In some situations to replace the income statement
To replace the retained earnings account in some businesses
Question 8. Question : A company purchased a new truck at a cost of $42,000 on July 1, 2011. The truck is estimated to have a useful life of 6 years and a salvage value of $3,000. How much depreciation expense will be recorded for the truck for the year ended December 31, 2011?
$3,250
$3,500
$4,000
$6,500
$7,000
Question 9. Question : Which of the following accounts would not be on the post closing trial balance?
Accounts Payable
Accounts Receivable
Common Stock
Dividends
Retained Earnings
Question 10. Question : A trial balance prepared after the closing entries have been journalized and posted is the:
Unadjusted trial balance
Post-closing trial balance
General ledger
Adjusted trial balance
Work sheet
Question 11. Question : An account linked with another account that has an opposite normal balance and that is subtracted from the balance of the related account is a(n):
Accrued expense
Contra account
Accrued revenue
Intangible asset
Adjunct account
Question 12. Question : The approach to preparing financial statements based on recognizing revenues when they are earned and matching expenses to those revenues is:
Cash basis accounting
The matching principle
The time period principle
Accrual basis accounting
Revenue basis accounting
Question 13. Question : The Retained Earnings account has a credit balance of $17,000 before closing entries are made. If total revenues for the period are $55,200, total expenses are $39,800 and dividends are $9,000, what is the ending balance in the Retained Earnings account after all closing entries are made?
$8,000
$15,400
$23,400
$17,000
$32,400
Question 14. Question : A company pays each of its two office employees each Friday at the rate of $100 per day each for a five-day week that begins on Monday. If the monthly accounting period ends on Tuesday and the employees worked on both Monday and Tuesday, the month-end adjusting entry to record the salaries earned but unpaid is:
Debit Unpaid Salaries $600 and credit Salaries Payable $600
Debit Salaries Expense $400 and credit Salaries Payable $400
Debit Salaries Expense $600 and credit Salaries Payable $600
Debit Salaries Payable $400 and credit Salaries Expense $400
Question 15. Question : The adjusted trial balance contains information pertaining to:
Asset accounts only
Balance sheet accounts only
Income statement accounts only
All general ledger accounts
Revenue accounts only
Question 16. Question : On January 1, Able Company purchased equipment costing $135,000 with an estimated salvage value of $10,500, and an estimated useful life of five years. What is the amount that should be recorded as depreciation on December 31?
$27,000
$24,900
$29,100
$135,000
Question 17. Question : The special account used only in the closing process to temporarily hold the amounts of revenues and expenses before the net difference is added to (or subtracted from) the retained earnings account is the:
Income Summary account
Closing account
Balance column account
Contra account
Question 18. Question : Financial statements are typically prepared in the following order:
Balance sheet, statement of retained earnings, income statement
Statement of retained earnings, balance sheet, income statement
Income statement, balance sheet, statement of retained earnings
Income statement, statement of retained earnings, balance sheet
Question 19. Question : A classified balance sheet:
Measures a company’s ability to pay its bills on time
Organizes assets and liabilities into important subgroups
Presents revenues, expenses and net income
Reports operating, investing and financing activities
Reports the effect of profit and dividends on retained earnings
Question 20. Question : Based on the following information, what would be the beginning balance in the Retained Earnings Account, assuming all accounts have a normal balance?
Cash $ 6,754 Dividends $ 2,000
Accounts receivable $ 13,733 Consulting fees earned $ 13,718
Office supplies $ 2,625 Rent expense $ 3,673
Land $ 37,153 Salaries expense $ 6,642
Office equipment $ 14,535 Telephone expense $ 560
Accounts payable $ 6,463 Miscellaneous expense $ 280
Common stock $ 54,490 Retained Earnings ?
$0
$13,718
$13,155
$13,284
Question 21. Question : If accrued salaries were recorded on December 31 with a credit to Salaries Payable, the entry to record payment of these wages on the following January 5 would include:
A debit to Cash and a credit to Salaries Payable
A debit to Cash and a credit to Prepaid Salaries
A debit to Salaries Payable and a credit to Cash
A debit to Salaries Payable and a credit to Salaries Expense
No entry would be necessary on January 5
Question 22. Question : On January 1 a company purchased a five-year insurance policy for $1,800 with coverage starting immediately. If the purchase was recorded in the Prepaid Insurance account and the company records adjustments only at year-end, the adjusting entry at the end of the first year is:
Debit Prepaid Insurance, $1,800; credit Cash, $1,800
Debit Prepaid Insurance, $1,440; credit Insurance Expense, $1,440
Debit Prepaid Insurance, $360; credit Insurance Expense, $360
Debit Insurance Expense, $360; credit Prepaid Insurance, $360
Debit Insurance Expense, $360; credit Prepaid Insurance, $1,440
Question 23. Question : The accrual basis of accounting:
Is generally accepted for external reporting since it is more useful for most business decisions
Is flawed because it gives complete information about cash flows
Recognizes revenues when received in cash
Recognizes expenses when paid in cash
Eliminates the need for adjusting entries at the end of each period
Question 24. Question : The difference between the cost of an asset and the accumulated depreciation for that asset is called
Depreciation Expense
Unearned Depreciation
Prepaid Depreciation
Depreciation Value
Book Value
Question 25. Question : A trial balance prepared after adjustments have been recorded is called a(n):
Balance sheet
Adjusted trial balance
Unadjusted trial balance
Classified balance sheet
Unclassified balance sheet
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which of the following aspects of a company would not be considered a critical success factor, for a company that competes on differentiation? (Points : 2)
Cutting edge research and development.
Excellent customer service.
Award-winning product quality.
Continually beating competitors to the market with new, innovative products.
A high level of production efficiency
Question 2. 2. Which of the following tend to be non-differential in the short term since they cannot be changed, but are more likely to be differential in the long term? (Points : 2)
Fixed costs.
Variable costs.
Mixed costs.
Semi-variable costs.
Question 3. 3. The competitive strategy in which the firm succeeds by developing and maintaining a unique value for the product, as perceived by the customer, is termed: (Points : 2)
Differentiation.
Specialization advantage.
Design strategy.
Benchmarking.
Product Specialization.
Question 4. 4. Using value-chain analysis, a firm can develop a competitive advantage by specifically looking for ways to: (Points : 2)
Add value and reduce cost.
Improve manufacturing productivity.
Improve customer service.
Improve product quality.
Question 5. 5. Which of the following contemporary management techniques requires a balancing of multiple goals? (Points : 2)
Target costing.
The theory of constraints.
Benchmarking.
Business process improvement.
Enterprise sustainability.
Question 6. 6. Direct materials and direct labor costs total $40,000 and factory overhead costs total $100 per machine hour. If 200 machine hours were used for Job #202, what is the total manufacturing cost for Job #202? (Points : 2)
$95,000
$75,000
$65,000
$60,000
Question 7. 7. Tierney Construction, Inc. recently lost a portion of its financial records in an office theft. The following accounting information remained in the office files:
COGS = $80,000
WIP Inventory January 1. = $18,500
WIP Inventory December 31 = $14,500
Selling & Administrative Expenses = $16,000
Net Income = $30,000
Factory O/H = $20,000
Direct Materials Inventory, January 1= $26,000
Direct Materials Inventory, December 31= $14,000
COGM = $98,000
Finished Goods Inventory, January 1 = 31,000
Direct labor cost incurred during the period amounted to 2.5 times the factory overhead. The CFO of Tierney Construction, Inc. has asked you to recalculate the following accounts and to report to him by the end of tomorrow.
What should be the amount in the finished goods inventory at December 31, 2013? (Points : 2)
$55,500.
$35,000.
$43,000.
$49,000.
Question 8. 8. The key difference between weighted-average and FIFO process costing methods is the handling of the partially completed: (Points : 2)
Beginning direct materials inventory.
Ending direct materials inventory.
Beginning work-in-process inventory.
Ending work-in-process inventory.
Beginning finished goods inventory.
Question 9. 9. When completed units are transferred to the warehouse: (Points : 2)
Cost of Goods Sold account is debited.
Cost of Goods Manufactured account is debited.
Finished Goods Inventory account is debited.
Work-in-Process Inventory account is debited.
Finished Goods Inventory account is credited.
Question 10. 10. Effective implementation of activity-based costing (ABC) requires: (Points : 2)
Normally the assistance of a consultant.
A sophisticated and expensive computer system.
Support of top management and key employees.
Capturing properly the complexity of the data.
ABC has no significant implementation issues.
Question 11. 11. The total cost of direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead transferred from the Work-in-Process Inventory account to the Finished Goods Inventory account during an accounting period is: (Points : 2)
Normal cost of goods sold.
Adjusted cost of goods sold.
Total manufacturing cost.
Cost of goods manufactured.
Actual cost of goods sold.
Question 12. 12. Units accounted for includes units completed and transferred out plus: (Points : 2)
Beginning inventory.
Units to account for.
Ending inventory.
Units started.
Question 13. 13. ABC Company uses a Materials Inventory account to record both direct and indirect materials. ABC charges direct materials to WIP, while indirect materials are charged to the Factory Overhead account. During the month of April, the company has the following cost information:
Total Materials (Direct and Indirect) Purchased = $ 90,000
Indirect Materials Issued to Production = 30,000
Total Materials Issued to Production = 110,000
Beginning Materials Inventory = 50,000
The ending materials inventory cost is: (Points : 2)
$110,000.
$30,000.
$90,000.
$80,000.
Question 14. 14. Wings Co. budgeted $555,600 manufacturing direct wages, 2,315 direct labor hours, and had the following manufacturing overhead:
Overhead Cost Pool – Budgeted O/H $ – Budgeted Level for Cost Driver – O/H Cost Driver
Materials Handling $160,000 3,200 lbs. Material Weight
Machine Setup 13,200 390 S/U s # of S/Us
Machine Repair 1,380 30,000 Mach. Hrs Machine Hrs.
Inspections 10,560 160 Inspections # of Inspections
Requirements for Job #971 which included 4 Units of Production:
D/L Hours = 20 Hours
D/Mat ls = 130 lbs.
Machine S/U = 30 Set-ups
Machine Hrs. = 15,000 Machine Hours
Inspections = 15 Inspections.
Using ABC, the materials handling overhead cost assigned to Job #971 is: (Points : 2)
$2,300.
$990.
$6,500.
$690.
$1,020.
Question 15. 15. Which of the following is required for multiple regression? (Points : 2)
The use of dummy variables.
The use of more than one cost driver.
The use of more than one dependent variable.
The use of a trend variable.
The use of multiple sets of data.
Question 16. 16. Technology and complexity issues often lead management to simplify and to: (Points : 2)
Use linear estimation methods.
Use volume-based costing and nonlinear estimation methods.
Use volume-based costing methods.
Use nonlinear estimation methods.
Use activity-based costing and volume-based costing methods.
Question 17. 17. Which of the following methods considers all reciprocal flows between service departments through simultaneous equations? (Points : 2)
Dual method.
Step method.
Reciprocal method.
Direct method.
The net realizable value method.
Question 18. 18. A relatively low margin of safety ratio (MOS%) for a product is usually an indication that the product: (Points : 2)
Is losing money.
Has a high contribution margin.
Is riskier than a product with a higher margin of safety ratio.
Is less risky than a product with a higher margin of safety ratio.
Requires heavy fixed cost to produce or sell.
Question 19. 19. The use of a relationship of total factory overhead to direct labor hours is said to be valid only within the relevant range, which means: (Points : 2)
Within a reasonable dollar amount for labor costs.
Within the range of observations of the cost driver.
Within the range of reasonableness as judged by the department supervisor.
Within the budget allowance for overhead.
Question 20. 20. Cleaning Care Inc. expects to sell 10,000 mops. Fixed costs (for the year) are expected to be $10,000, unit sales price is expected to be $12, and unit variable costs are budgeted at $7.
Cleaning Care’s margin of safety (MOS) in units is: (Points : 2)
1,000.
2,000.
4,000.
8,000.
9,000.
Question 21. 21. Stylish Sitting is a retailer of office chairs located in San Francisco, California. Due to increased market competition, the CFO of Stylish Sitting has grown worried about the firm’s upcoming income stream. The CFO asked you to use the company financial information provided below.
Sales Price $75.00
Per Unit Variable Costs:
Invoice Cost 41.70
Sales Commission 18.30
Total Per Unit Variable Cost $60.00
Fixed Costs:
Advertising $ 56,000
Rent 78,000
Salaries 226,000
Total Annual Fixed Costs $360,000
If 40,000 office chairs were sold, Stylish Sitting’s operating income would be: (Points : 2)
$240,000.
$280,000.
$210,000.
$340,000.
$120,000.
Question 22. 22. The Robinson-Patman Act, administered by the U.S. Federal Trade Commission, addresses pricing that could substantially damage the competition in an industry. This pricing is called: (Points : 2)
Competitive pricing.
Predatory pricing.
Cost-benefit pricing.
Variable pricing.
Question 23. 23. In terms of evaluating mutually exclusive projects, the internal rate of return (IRR) method mistakenly favors investment proposals with: (Points : 2)
Short useful lives.
Long useful lives.
Moderate cash flow returns.
Large residual values.
Question 24. 24. Which of the following statements regarding a joint production process is NOT true? (Points : 2)
The essential decision facing management is whether to sell products at the split-off point or to sell these products after further processing.
The allocation of joint (common) production costs to individual products helps management determine which products should be processed beyond the split-off point.
Costs incurred up to the split-off point are referred to as joint production costs.
The decision as to whether individual products should be sold “as is” or processed further is made on the basis of comparing incremental revenues and incremental costs.
Question 25. 25. Which of the following is not true regarding the appropriate discount rate to be used in conjunction with discounted cash flow (DCF) decision models? (Points : 2)
For projects of “above average” risk, the appropriate discount rate is the weighted-average cost of capital (WACC)
It includes an estimate of the after-tax cost of debt.
It can differ across investment projects, according to perceived risk.
It is also sometimes referred to as the “hurdle rate” for capital budgeting purposes.
Question 26. 26. In a sell-or-process-further decision, joint production costs: (Points : 2)
Are irrelevant to the decision.
Should be allocated to outputs on the basis of relative sales dollars.
Should be allocated to outputs on the basis of relative physical units.
Cannot be allocated to products for financial reporting purposes.
Question 27. 27. Pique Corporation wants to purchase a new machine for $300,000. Management predicts that the machine can produce sales of $200,000 each year for the next 5 years. Expenses are expected to include direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead (excluding depreciation) totaling $80,000 per year. The firm uses straight-line depreciation with no residual value for all depreciable assets. Pique’s combined income tax rate is 40%. Management requires a minimum after-tax rate of return of 10% on all investments.
What is the payback period for the new machine (rounded to nearest one-tenth of a year)? (Assume that the cash inflows occur evenly throughout the year.) (Points : 2)
2.5 years.
2.7 years.
3.1 years.
3.6 years.
Question 28. 28. ____________________ is an important first step in value engineering because it identifies critical consumer preferences that will define the product’s desired functionality: (Points : 2)
Consumer analysis.
Sales force analysis.
Design analysis.
R&D analysis.
Market place analysis.
Question 29. 29. The “flexible budget” can best be described as a budget that adjusts: (Points : 2)
Revenues for sales-dollar changes.
Revenues and expenses for changes in output (such as sales volume).
Expenses for changes in budgeted output between two periods.
For efficiency, but not selling price and cost variances.
For selling price and cost variances, but not efficiency variances.
Question 30. 30. An organization’s overall management accounting and control system: (Points : 2)
Includes the planning function.
Is also referred as the organization’s core performance-measurement system.
Is separate from its operational control system.
Includes nonfinancial, but not financial, performance measures.
Focuses on strategic, not operational, control
Question 31. 31. The total operating income variance for a period reveals whether a company has achieved: (Points : 2)
The sales level budgeted for the period.
An adequate return on investment (assets) during the period.
Control of basic business processes.
Control of total expenses for the period.
The master budgeted operating income for the period.
Question 32. 32. Which of the following benefits is not typically associated with a move to a just-in-time (JIT) manufacturing system? (Points : 2)
Raw materials are delivered as close as possible to time of production.
Existence of long-term contracts with selected suppliers.
Reduction in employee training and education costs.
Decreases in manufacturing lead time.
Improved customer-response time (CRT).
Question 33. 33. The difference between the total actual sales revenue of a period and the total flexible-budget sales revenue for the units sold during the period is the: (Points : 2)
Total flexible-budget variance.
Sales volume variance.
Selling price variance.
Operating income flexible-budget variance.
Question 34. 34. The process by which managers at all levels in the firm gain information about the performance of tasks within the firm and judge that performance against pre-established criteria is: (Points : 2)
Performance measurement.
Employee inspection.
Goal congruence.
Managerial evaluation.
Management control.
Question 35. 35. Matinna Co. maintains no inventories and has the following data pertaining to one of its direct materials in July:
Standard Quantity of DM for the Units Manufactured = 30,000
DM Purchased Actual Cost = $63,000
Standard Price per Unit of DM (SP) = $2.00
Direct Material Efficiency Variance = $4,500 (F)
All materials purchased during the month were issued to production.
What was the company’s direct materials flexible-budget (FB) variance for July? (Points : 2)
$1,500 favorable.
$3,000 unfavorable.
$3,000 favorable.
$7,500 unfavorable.
$7,500 favorable.
Question 36. 36. The manager acting independently in such a way as to simultaneously achieve top management’s objectives is: (Points : 2)
Performance evaluation.
Operational control.
Goal congruence.
Principal-agent model.
Management control.
Question 37. 37. The “risk-averse” manager will be improperly biased to: (Points : 2)
Seek out decisions with uncertain outcomes.
Make risky decisions.
Avoid decisions with uncertain outcomes.
Maximize his or her own risk and minimize the company’s risk.
Use resources beyond his/her control.
Question 38. 38. Other things being equal, income computed by the variable costing method will exceed that computed by the full costing method if: (Points : 2)
Units produced exceed units sold.
Units sold exceed units produced.
Fixed manufacturing costs, increase.
Variable manufacturing costs increase.
Question 39. 39. The common factor among control systems in hiring practices, promotion policies, and strategic performance measurement is: (Points : 2)
Management sets expectations for desired employee performance.
Employee-determined expectations for desired employee performance.
Coordination of activities.
Communication of results.
Question 40. 40. The contribution by profit center (CPU) expands the contribution margin income statement by distinguishing: (Points : 2)
Variable and fixed costs.
Short-term and long-term fixed costs.
Controllable and non-controllable fixed costs.
Noncontrollable and untraceable fixed costs.
Net income and contribution margin.
Question 41. 41. Controllable margin is determined by subtracting short-term controllable fixed costs from the: (Points : 2)
Long-term controllable fixed cost.
Contribution margin.
Variable costs.
Fixed costs.
Variable costs and fixed costs.
Question 42. 42. Economic value added is calculated from: (Points : 2)
Average total assets, current liabilities, net income, and the cost of capital.
EVA net income and EVA invested capital.
Net income, cost of capital, and net assets.
Net income and the cost of capital.
EVA net income, the cost of capital, and EVA invested capital.
Question 43. 43. Which one of the following develops the value of the firm as the present value of the firm’s net free cash flows? (Points : 2)
Discounted cash flow method.
Cash flow liquidity method.
Multiples-based method.
Profitability method.
Purchasing power method.
Question 44. 44. When strategic performance measures or critical success factors are used to determine bonus compensation, the bonus will usually depend either on the amount of improvement in the measure or on: (Points : 2)
Maintaining the current level.
Achieving a predetermined goal.
Quality of work completed.
Intensity of effort expended.
Question 45. 45. Which of the following is one of the most comprehensive bases of compensation? (Points : 2)
Balanced scorecard.
Unit-based compensation pool.
Firm-wide compensation pool.
Salary.
Question 46. 46. The receivables turnover ratio is a measure of: (Points : 2)
Asset value.
Leverage.
Sales performance.
Profitability.
Liquidity.
Question 47. 47. The stock option form of bonus payments to managers usually: (Points : 2)
Motivates well even in extended market downturns.
Can lose some motivation because of the delay in reward.
Focuses on the short-term.
Is not consistent with shareholder interests.
Has less risk than other types of bonus payment plans.
Question 48. 48. The King Mattress Company had the following operating results for 2012-2013. In addition, the company paid dividends in both 2012 and 2013 of $60,000 per year and made capital expenditures in both years of $30,000 per year. The company’s stock price in 2012 was $8 and $7 in 2013. The industry average earnings multiple for the mattress industry was 9 in 2013 and the free cash flow and sales multiples were 18 and 1.5, respectively. The company is publicly owned and has 1,200,000 shares of outstanding stock at the end of 2013.
Balance Sheet, December 31
2013 2012
Cash $ 340,000 $ 100,000
Accounts Receivable 350,000 400,000
Inventory 250,000 300,000
Total Current Assets $ 940,000 $ 800,000
Long Lived Assets 1,080,000 1,100,000
Total Assets $ 2,020,000 $ 1,900,000
Current Liabilities $ 200,000 $ 300,000
Long-Term Liabilities 600,000 500,000
Stockholder s Equity 1,220,000 1,100,000
Total Liabilities & Equity $ 2,020,000 $ 1,900,000
Income Statement for the Year Ended December 31
Sales $ 4,750,000 $ 4,500,000
Cost of Sales 4,100,000 4,000,000
Gross Margin $ 650,000 $ 500,000
Operating Expenses 350,000 400,000
Operating Income $ 300,000 $ 100,000
Taxes 120,000 40,000
Net Income $ 180,000 $ 60,000
Cash Flow from Operations
Net Income $ 180,000 $ 60,000
Plus Depreciation Expense 50,000 50,000
+Decrease (-Inc) in A/T and Inventory 100,000 – 0 –
+Increase (-Dec) in Current Liabilities (100,000) – 0
Cash Flow from Operations $ 230,000 $ 110,000
The inventory turnover ratio for 2013 is (rounded): (Points : 2)
11.2
12.7
13.7
14.9
Question 49. 49. During October, Rover Industries produced 35,000 units of product with costs as follows:
DM = $ 84,000
DL = 43,000
Variable O/H = 13,000
Fixed O/H = 147,000
Total =$ 287,000
What is Rover’s unit cost for October, calculated on the variable costing basis? (Points : 2)
$3.25.
$3.75.
$4.00.
$4.50.
$5.00.
Question 50. 50. The King Mattress Company had the following operating results for 2012-2013. In addition, the company paid dividends in both 2012 and 2013 of $60,000 per year and made capital expenditures in both years of $30,000 per year. The company’s stock price in 2012 was $8 and $7 in 2013. The industry average earnings multiple for the mattress industry was 9 in 2013 and the free cash flow and sales multiples were 18 and 1.5, respectively. The company is publicly owned and has 1,200,000 shares of outstanding stock at the end of 2013.
Balance Sheet, December 31
2013 2012
Cash $ 340,000 $ 100,000
Accounts Receivable 350,000 400,000
Inventory 250,000 300,000
Total Current Assets $ 940,000 $ 800,000
Long Lived Assets 1,080,000 1,100,000
Total Assets $ 2,020,000 $ 1,900,000
Current Liabilities $ 200,000 $ 300,000
Long-Term Liabilities 600,000 500,000
Stockholder s Equity 1,220,000 1,100,000
Total Liabilities & Equity $ 2,020,000 $ 1,900,000
Income Statement for the Year Ended December 31
Sales $ 4,750,000 $ 4,500,000
Cost of Sales 4,100,000 4,000,000
Gross Margin $ 650,000 $ 500,000
Operating Expenses 350,000 400,000
Operating Income $ 300,000 $ 100,000
Taxes 120,000 40,000
Net Income $ 180,000 $ 60,000
Cash Flow from Operations
Net Income $ 180,000 $ 60,000
Plus Depreciation Expense 50,000 50,000
+Decrease (-Inc) in A/T and Inventory 100,000 – 0 –
+Increase (-Dec) in Current Liabilities (100,000) – 0
Cash Flow from Operations $ 230,000 $ 110,000
The current ratio for 2013 is: (Points : 2)
1.8
2.0
3.9
4.7
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Unit 2 : Unit 2: Introduction to Job Costing, Activity Based Costing, Process Costing and Customer Profitability Analysis. – Quiz
| 1.Volume-based cost accounting systems often do a poor job of product costing because they: (Points : 2) |
Use only volume-based cost drivers. Fail to recognize the impact of overhead in product cost. Often do not reflect changes in major cost categories caused by plant automation. Too often use an allocation base that does not have a cause-effect relationship to resource usage.
|
2.ABC Company listed the following data for 2010:
|
Budgeted Factory Overhead
|
$1,044,000
|
|
Budgeted Direct Labor Hours
|
72,000
|
|
Budgeted Machine Hours
|
24,000
|
|
Actual Factory Overhead
|
1,037,400
|
|
Actual Direct Labor Hours
|
72,000
|
|
Actual Machine Hours
|
23,000
|
Round calculations to two significant digits. Assuming ABC Company applied overhead based on direct labor hours, the company’s predetermined overhead rate for 2010 is: (Points : 2)
|
$43.50 per direct labor hour. $14.38 per direct labor hour. $44.24 per direct labor hour. $14.50 per direct labor hour. $14.41 per direct labor hour.
|
| 3.The sum of units transferred out and ending inventory units, assuming no spoilage, determines the: (Points : 2) |
Units completed during the period. Units spoiled. Units transferred in during the period. Units accounted for.
|
| 4.A time ticket: (Points : 2) |
Shows the time an employee worked on each job, pay rate, and total cost chargeable to each job. Shows the time that a department’s employees worked on all jobs, the pay rate of each employee, and the total cost chargeable to each job. Shows the time an employee worked on each job and the total cost chargeable to each job only. Shows the time an employee worked on each job only.
|
| 5.Which one of the following is the amount of factory overhead applied that exceeds the actual factory overhead cost? (Points : 2) |
Factory overhead applied. Actual factory overhead. Overapplied overhead. Allocated factory overhead. Underapplied overhead.
|
| 6.Which method is a method used to prepare the departmental production cost report when using a process cost system? (Points : 2) |
LIFO method. FIFO method. Weighted production method. Production average method. Throughput average method
|
| 7.The journal entry to record incurred direct labor would include a credit to: (Points : 2) |
Work-in-Process Inventory. Accrued Payroll. Factory Overhead. Materials Inventory. Finished Goods Inventory.
|
| 8.The costs of operating a regional warehouse is an example of a: (Points : 2) |
Customer unit-level cost. Customer batch-level cost. Customer-sustaining cost. Distribution-channel cost.
|
| 9.Normal spoilage is defined as: (Points : 2) |
Spoilage that occurs under efficient operations. Scrap. Uncontrollable waste as a result of a special production run. Spoilage that arises under inefficient operations. Controllable spoilage.
|
| 10.Firms should use a process costing system when they produce products that: (Points : 2) |
Are semi-homogeneous. Pass through a series of manufacturing processes. Pass through only one department. Have small batch sizes.
|
| 11.From the industries listed below, which one is most likely to use process costing in accounting for production costs? (Points : 2) |
Printing shop. Accounting firm. Electrical contractor. Steel mill.
|
| 12.The number of the same or similar units that could have been produced given the amount of work actually performed on both complete and partially complete units is referred to as: (Points : 2) |
Physical units. Completed units. Equivalent units. Produced units. Units to account for.
|
| 13.The major limitation of volume-based costing systems is the use of volume-based: (Points : 2) |
Criteria. Standards. Rates. Variances. Restrictions.
|
| 14.Multistage ABC is used when: (Points : 2) |
There are many departments in the organization. Management wants a higher level of accuracy from the ABC calculations. There are complex relationships among the activities. To simplify the ABC calculations. There is no such thing as Multistage ABC.
|
| 15.With the increase in competition over the past several years, traditional cost accounting systems have become less common in product costing because (Points : 2) |
They use volume-based cost drivers. They use structural cost drivers. They use executional cost drivers. They use indirect cost drivers.
|
| 16.A Production Cost Report summarizes all except: (Points : 2) |
The physical units of a department. The equivalent units of a department. The costs incurred during the period. The costs assigned to both units completed and ending work-in-process inventories. The budgeted labor and overhead application rates.
|
| 17.In a process costing system, the cost of abnormal spoilage should be: (Points : 2) |
Prorated between units transferred out and ending inventory. Included in the cost of units transferred out. Treated as a loss in the period incurred. Ignored in the period incurred.
|
| 18.For job costing in service industries, overhead costs are usually applied to jobs based on: (Points : 2) |
Factory overhead. Indirect labor. Indirect materials. Direct labor-hours or dollars. Direct materials.
|
19.Roussey Co. had the following information for the month of June:
|
Work-in-Progress Inventory 6/1
|
2,000 Units
|
|
Units Transferred In
|
10,000 Units
|
|
Work-in-Progress Inventory 6/30
|
3,000 Units
|
Beginning work-in-process inventory is 30 percent complete as to conversion. Ending work-in-process inventory is 40 percent complete as to conversion. Materials are added at the end of the process. The equivalent units for materials under the weighted-average method are calculated to be: (Points : 2)
|
12,000. 10,000. 9,600. 9,000. 7,000.
|
| 20.Under conventional job costing, factory overhead costs are assigned to products or services using labor or machine hours which are: (Points : 2) |
Multiple cost pools. A homogeneous cost pool. Volume-based cost drivers. Nonvolume-based cost drivers only.
|
| 21.Which one of the following is a high value-added activity? (Points : 2) |
Set up. Rework. Repair. Storage. Processing.
|
22.Jackson Inc. listed the following data for 2010:
|
Budgeted Factory Overhead
|
$1,300,000
|
|
Budgeted Direct Labor Hours
|
82,000
|
|
Budgeted Machine Hours
|
41,000
|
|
Actual Factory Overhead
|
1,201,000
|
|
Actual Direct Labor Hours
|
86,300
|
|
Actual Machine Hours
|
39,400
|
Round calculations to two significant digits. Assuming Jackson Inc. applied overhead based on machine hours, the firm’s predetermined overhead rate for 2010 is: (Points : 2)
|
$27.40 per machine hour. $29.38 per machine hour. $31.71 per machine hour. $33.50 per machine hour. $37.41 per machine hour.
|
| 23.The three major differences between process and job order costing systems are those relating to: (Points : 2) |
Quantity, quality, and cost. Speed, accuracy, and design. Cost object, product or service variety, and timing of unit cost calculation. Responsibility for cost, system design, and authorization codes.
|
24.Oregonian Fisheries Inc. processes king salmon for various distributors. Two departments are involved processing and packaging. Data relating to tons of king salmon processed in the processing department during June 2010 are provided below:
|
|
|
Percent Completed
|
|
|
Tons of King Salmon
|
Materials
|
Conversion
|
|
Work-in-Progress Inventory 6/1
|
1,800
|
90
|
80
|
|
Work-in-Progress Inventory 6/30
|
2,800
|
60
|
40
|
|
Started Processing During June
|
7,800
|
|
|
Total equivalent units for conversion under the weighted-average method are calculated to be: (Points : 2)
|
6,860 equivalent units. 8,480 equivalent units. 6,480 equivalent units. 7,440 equivalent units. 7,920 equivalent units.
|
25.Roussey Co. had the following information for the month of June:
|
Work-in-Progress Inventory 6/1
|
2,000 Units
|
|
Units Transferred In
|
10,000 Units
|
|
Work-in-Progress Inventory 6/30
|
3,000 Units
|
Beginning work-in-process inventory is 30 percent complete as to conversion. Ending work-in-process inventory is 40 percent complete as to conversion. Materials are added at the end of the process. How many units were completed in June? (Points : 2)
|
12,000. 10,000. 9,600. 9,000. 7,000.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Unit 3 Assignment includes the following textbook problems:
Exercise 9-35 found on page 350 in your textbook
Problem 10-43 found on page 407 in your textbook
Submit your assignment using a single Excel workbook. Place each exercise/problem on a separate tab (sheet). Format the Excel spreadsheet to make all computations. The computations must be included in the assignment solutions. Be sure that you highlight or otherwise distinguish the answers.
When you have completed the assignment, upload your completed Excel document to the Unit 3 Assignment Dropbox before Tuesday, 11:59 PM (ET) of Unit 3. Name your assignment filename using this format: LastName_FirstName_Unit#_AssignmentName. For example, the Unit 3 assignment would be named:
10-43 Accounts Receivable Collections Esplanade Company s credit sales have the following historical
pattern:
70 percent collected in the month of sale
15 percent collected in the first month after month of sale
10 percent collected in the second month after month of sale
4 percent collected in the third month after month of sale
1 percent uncollectible
The following sales on open account (credit sales) have been budgeted for the last six months in
2010:
July $60,000 October 90,000
August 70,000 November 100,000
September 80,000 December 85,000
Required
1. Determine the estimated total cash collections from accounts receivable during October 2010.
2. Compute the estimated total cash collections during the fourth quarter from credit sales of the fourth quarter
9-35 CVP Analysis Connelly, Inc., a manufacturer of quality electric ice cream makers, has experienced
a steady growth in sales over the past few years. Since her business has grown, Jan DeJaney, the
president, believes she needs an aggressive advertising campaign next year to maintain the company s
growth. To prepare for the growth, the accountant prepared the following data for the current year:
Variable costs per ice cream maker
Direct labor $ 13.50
Direct materials 14.50
Variable overhead 6.00
Total variable costs $ 34.00
Fixed costs
Manufacturing $ 82,500
Selling 42,000
Administrative 356,000
Total fixed costs $480,500
Selling price per unit $ 65.00
Expected sales (units) 30,000
Required
1. If the costs and sales price remain the same, what is the projected operating profit for the coming year?
2. What is the breakeven point in units for the coming year?
3. Jan has set the sales target for 35,000 ice cream makers which she thinks she can achieve by an additional
fixed selling expense of $200,000 for advertising. All other costs remain as in requirement 1. What will
be the operating profit if the additional $200,000 is spent on advertising and sales rise to 35,000 units?
4. What will be the new breakeven point if the additional $200,000 is spent on advertising?
5. If the additional $200,000 is spent for advertising in the next year, what is the required sales level in
units to equal the current year s income at 30,000 units?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
GB519 Measurement and Decision Making
Exercise 14-56 Page 629
Exercise 14-56
Boron Chemical Company produces a synthetic resin that is used in the automotive
industry. The company uses a standard cost system. For each gallon of output, the
following direct manufacturing costs are anticipated:
Direct labor:
2 hours
Direct Materials: 2 gallons
$25/hr
$10/gal
=$50.00
=$20.00
During December of 2010, Boron produced a total of 2,500 gallons of output and
incurred the following direct manufacturing costs:
Direct labor:
4,900 hours worked @ an average wage rate of $19.50/hr
Direct Materials: Purchased: 6,000 gallons@ $10.45/gal
Used in production: 5,100 gallons
Boron recordes price variances for materials at the time of purchase
Required – give journal entries for the following events and transactions:
1. Purchase, on credit, of direct materials
Actual Cost
6,000 @ $10.45/gal
Standard Cost 6,000 @ $10.00/gal
6000 gallons @ $10 a gallon = $60,000
Price Variance
$2,700
Accounts Payable $62,700
Open account recording will state that direct materials = 6,000 gallons
at $10.00 per gallon wil equal $10.45
2. Direct materials issued to production.
Actual Cost
5,100 gallons
Standard Cost 5,000 gallons (2 per unit) @ $10.00/gallon
2,500 x 2 gallons x $10.00 per gallon = $50,000
Variance
$1,000
Materials $5,100 gallons x $10.00/gallon = $51,000
Materials cost is $20/unit for full production of the period at 2,500 units
3. Direct labor cost of units completed this period.
Actual Cost
4,900 hours @ $19.50/hr
Standard Cost 5,000 hours (2hrs/unit) @ $25.00/hr
2,500 x 2 hours x $25.00/hr = $125,000
Variance = $5.50/hr x 4,900 hours
= $26,950
Efficiency Variance = 100 hrs x $25.00/hr = $2,500
Wages (4,900 hrs x $19.50/hr
= $95,550
Direct Labor cost s ($50/unit) for the completed production (2,500 units)
and the actual labor costs during the period
4. Direct manufacturing cost (direct labor plus direct materials)
of units completed and transferred to Finished Goods Inventory
Actual Cost
2,500 units
Standard Cost 2,500 units @ $10×2+$25×2 = $70.00
Inventory
$70.00/unit x 2,000 units
= $175,000
Direct manufacturing costs are recorded using cost of goods
manufactured for the period.
5. Sale, for $150.00 per gallon, of 2,000 gallons of output (hint:
you will need two journal entries here)
Actual Cost
2000 gallons
Standard Cost 2000 gallons @ $70.00/unit
$70 x 2,000 units = $140,000
Inventory
= $140,000
Direct manufacturing cost of cost of good sold for the period.
Accounts Receivable = $150/unit x 2,000 units
= $300,000
Sales Revenue = $300,000
Sales revenue is recorded using accounts receivable.
Dana Revier
GB519 Measurement and Decision Making
Problem 15-58 Page 690
Problem 15-58
Four Variance Analysis
Able Control Company, which manufactures electrical switches, uses
a standard cost system and carries all inventory and standard cost.
The standard factory overhead cost per switch is based on direct
labor hours
Variable Overhead
5 hours
$8.00/hr
Fixed Overhead
5 hours
$12.00/hr
Total standard overhead cost per unit produced
$100.00
**based on practical capacity of 300,000 direct labor hours per month
The following information is for the month of October:
– The company produced 56,000 switches, although 60,000 switches
were scheduled to be produced
– The company worked 275,000 direct labor hours ata total cost of
$2,550,000
– Variable overhead costs were $2,340,000
– Fixed overhead costs were $3,750,000
The production manager argued during th elast performance review tha the company
should use more up-to-date base for charging factory overhead costs to production.
She commented that her factory had been highly automated in the last two years
and as a result now has hardly any direction labor. The factory hires only highly
skilled workers to set up productionruns and to do periodic adjustments of
machinery whenever the need arises
Required
1. Compute the following for Able Control Company:
a. The fixed overhead spending variance for October
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Directions:
Submit your assignment using a single Excel workbook. Place each exercise/problem on a separate tab (sheet).
You must properly format Excel for the Journal Entries. And, for any discussion component (as in Part 2 of Problem 20-38), Insert a Textbox and use that to present your discussion on the Excel spreadsheet.
BRIEF Exercise 18-22 found on page 825 of your textbook:
Phelps Glass Inc. has reported the following financial data: net revenues of $10 Million, variables cost of $5 Million, controllable fixed cost of $2 Million, non controllable fixed cost of $1 Million, and untraceable cost of $500.000. The accounting manager has supplied you with this data and asked you to come up with the controllable margin, total contribution, CPC, and operating income.
Problem 20-38 found on page 920-921 in the textbook
Ramon Martinez is the general manager of Classic Inn, a local mid-priced hotel with 100 rooms. His job objectives include providing resourceful and friendly service to the hotels guests, maintaining an 80 percent occupancy rate, improving the average rate received per room to $88 from the current $85, and achieving a savings of 5 percent on all hotel costs. The hotels owner, a partnership of seven people who own several hotels in the region, want to structure Ramon s future compensation to objectively reward him for achieving these goals. In the past, he has been paid an annual salary of $72,000 with no incentive pay. The incentive plan the partners developed has each of the goals weighted as follows:
Measure Percent of Total Responsibility
Occupancy rate (also reflects guest service quality) 40%
Operating within 95 percent of expense budget 25
Average room rate 35100%
If Ramon achieves all of these goals, the partners determined that his performance shouldmerit a bonus of $23,000. The partners also agreed that his salary would be reduced to $60,000because of the addition of the bonus.
The goal measures used to compensate Ramon are as follows:
Occupancy goal: 29,200 room-nights= 80 percent occupancy rate
100 rooms 365 days
Compensation: 40 percent weight $23,000 target reward= $9,200$9,200/29,200
$0.315 per room-night
Expense goal:
5 percent savingsCompensation: 25 percent weight
$23,000 target reward
$5,750$5,750/5
$1,150 for each percentage point saved
Room rate goal:
$3 rate increaseCompensation: 35 percent weight
$23,000 target reward
$8,050$8,050/300
$26.83 per each cent increase
Ramons new compensation plan will thus pay him a $60,000 salary plus 31.5 cents per room-night sold plus $1,150 for each percentage point saved in the expense budget plus $26.83 per eachcent increase in average room rate
Required
1. Based on this plan, what will Ramons total compensation be if his performance results are a. 30,000 room-nights, 5 percent saved, $3.00 rate increase?b. 25,000 room-nights, 3 percent saved, $1.15 rate increase?c. 28,000 room-nights, 0 saved, $1.00 rate increase?2.
Comment on the expected effectiveness of this plan
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Over the last 15 years the Heritage Foundation and the Wall Street Journal have joined forces to produce an
annual Index of Economic Freedom. This index defines 10 economic freedoms used to measure the level of
economic freedom in countries around the world. Explore the website for the Index of Economic Freedom. Be
sure to read the executive summary and pay particular attention to the graph labeled Economic Freedom and
Poverty and the graph labeled Economic Freedom and Economic Growth before you leave the website.
Assignment requirements: A) Based on your reading of material from the Index of Economic Freedom,
describe the relationship between economic freedom and variations in wealth among countries. B) Select a
country from the Index and bring in additional source material to explain its ranking and how it has changed
over the last 5-10 years.
The assignment is to be a minimum of five pages in length, excluding title page and reference page. Your
paper must incorporate quality references in addition to the Index of Economic Freedom, and must be in APA
format.
Submit your paper to the Unit 2 Dropbox by the end of Unit 2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are an economist writing a memo to the President of the United States addressing the current status of economy, the problems facing the U.S. economy, and the polocies that should be implemented (fiscal and monetary) to fix our current problem and achieve the United States’ economic goals. You must use minimum of 5 newspaper articles within the last year and write the minimum of three complete pages. You need to include bibliography using MLA citation format. The newspaper link must be attached.
Inflation – what is the inflation rate? Good or Bad? Cause of inflation?
Unemployment – What is the unemployment rate? Good or Bad? Why? Type?
GDP – What is GDP? What does it mean? Good or Bad? Why?
Aggergated Expenditures – Rising or Falling? What does it mean? Why? Good or Bad?
Phase of the Buisness Cycle – Based on above what phase are we in? Why?
Analyze the economy based on the cirteria above to determain the problems in the U.S. economy faces and recommened policy changes effect that would correct the problems of today’s economy. Be sure to explain how the recommended policy changes will affect the factors above and help the economy reach its goals.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Q1
On July 1st, H&M Construction purchases a bulldozer for $330,000. The equipment has a 9 year life with a residual value of $15,000. Harding uses straight-line depreciation.
Calculate the depreciation expense for the first year ending December 31st. =
Provide the journal entry for the first year ending December 31st.
Calculate the third year’s depreciation expense and provide the journal entry for the third year ending December 31st.
Calculate the last year’s depreciation expense.
Provide the journal entry for the last year.
Q2
Journalize the following transactions (Assume a 360-day year when calculating interest.
Mar 1: received a 90-day, 10 % note for $24,000, dated march 1, from Bat Co. on account
May 30: The note of march 1 was dishonored
For a compound transaction, if an amount box does not require an entry, leave it blank or enter “0”.
Q3
Calculate the amount of each periodicity range that is deemed to be uncollectible. If required, round your answers to two decimal places.
Age, Balance, Percent = amount
Not past due 850,000 3.50% =
1-30 days past due: 47,500 5.00% =
31-60 days past due: 21,750 10.00% =
61-90 days past due: 11,250 20.00% =
91-180 days past due: 5,065 30.00% =
181-365 days past due: 2,500 50.00% =
Over 365 days past due: 1,145 95.00% =
If the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $1,135.00, record the adjusting entry for the bad debt expense for the year. Round your answers to two decimal places.
debit=
credit =
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
AC company. purchased $24,000 of 4%, 10-year DCshoe bonds on July 12, 2012, directly from the county at par value. The bonds pay semiannual interest on May 1 and November 1. On December 1, 2012, AC company. sold $6,000 of the DCshoe bonds at 98 plus $20 accrued interest, less a $100 brokerage commission. Assume a 360-day year.
1- Provide the journal entry for the purchase of the bonds on July 12, plus 72 days of accrued interest.
investement DC=
interest receivable=
cash=
2. Provide the journal entry for semiannual interest on November 1.
cash=
interest receibalbe=
interect revenue=
3. Provide the journal entry for sale of the bonds on December 1.
cash=
loss on sale =
interest revenue=
invenstement in DCshoe=
4. Provide the adjusting entry for accrued interest of $120 on December 31, 2012.
=
=
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Company issued $2,000,000 of 30-year, 8% callable bonds on April 1, 2011, with interest payable on April 1 and October 1. The fiscal year of the company is the calendar year. Journalize transactions:
2011
Apr.1 -issued the bonds for cash at their face amount.
Oct. 1 Paid the interest on the bonds
2013
Oct.1 Called the bond issue at 103, the rate provided in the bond indenture.
(Omit entry for payment of interest)
2011 Apr. 1
=
=
2011 Oct. 1
=
=
2013 Oct. 1
=
=
=
2) Prepare entries:
A- Issued 1,000 shares of $10 par common stock at $59 for cash
=
=
=
B- Issued 1,400 shares of common stock in exchange for equipment with a fair market price of $60,000.
=
=
=
C- Purchased 100 shares of treasury stock at $32.
=
=
D- Sold 100 shares of treasury stock at $42
=
=
=
Q3 -The summary of the payroll for the monthly pay period ending July 15
Sales salaries $125,000
Federal income tax withheld $32,300
Office salaries $35,000
Medical insurance withheld $ 7,370
SS tax withheld $10,200
Medicare tax withheld $2,550
A- Journalize the entry to record the payroll.
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
B- Journalize the entry to record the employer’s payroll tax expense for the month. The state unemployment tax rate is 3.1%, and the federal unemployment tax rate is 0.8%. Only $25,000 of salaries are subject to unemployment taxes.
=
=
=
=
=
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Q1) On June 8, AC company. issued an $90,000, 6%, 120-day note payable to SC company. Assuming a 360-day year for your calculations, what is the maturity value of the note?
Q2) The MX Company issued $100,000 of 12% bonds on April 1, 2010 at face value. The bonds pay interest semiannually on January 1 and July 1. The bonds are dated January 1, 2010, and mature on January 1, 2014. The total interest expense related to these bonds for the year ended December 31, 2010 is?
Q3)The journal entry a company records for the payment of interest, interest expense, and amortization of bond discount is
A- debit Interest Expense, credit Interest Payable and Discount on Bonds Payable
B- debit Interest Expense, credit Cash and Discount on Bonds Payable
C- debit Interest Expense and Discount on Bonds Payable, credit Cash
D- debit Interest Expense, credit Cash
Q4) On the first day of the current fiscal year, $1,000,000 of 10-year, 7% bonds, with interest payable semiannually, were sold for $1,050,000. Prepare entries to record the following transactions for the current fiscal year:
A-Issuance of the bonds.
=
=
=
B- First semiannual interest payment.
=
=
C- Amortization of bond premium for the year, using the straight-line method of amortization.
=
=
Q5) Prepare entries to record the following
A- Issued 1,000 shares of $15 par common stock at $54 for cash
=
=
=
B- Issued 1,400 shares of no-par common stock in exchange for equipment with a fair market price of $24,000.
=
=
C-Purchased 100 shares of treasury stock at $26.
=
=
D- Sold 100 shares of treasury stock purchased in (c) at $29
=
=
=
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Q1) On January 1, 2011, CR Company. issued a $500,000, 5 year, 8% installment note payable with payments of $100,000 principal plus interest due on January 1 of each year for the next 5 years.
A) Prepare the adjusting journal entry at December 31, 2011 to accrue interest for the year
=
=
B) Show the account and amount and where it will appear on a multi-step income statement prepared on December 31, 2011.
Account= Where= Amount=
C) Show the account(s) and amount(s) and where they will appear on a classified balance sheet prepared on December 31, 2011.
Current Liabilities: =
=
Long-Term Liabilities: =
Q-2 – Journalize the following selected transactions completed during the current fiscal year:Jan. 3 the directors declared a stock split which reduced the par of common share from $100 to $20. this action increased the number of outstanding shares to 400,000.
Jan. 22- Declared a dividend of $1.50 per share on the outstanding shares of common stock.
Feb. 8 Paid the dividend declared on January 22.
Sep. 1 Declared a 5% stock dividend on the common stock outstanding ( the fair market value of the stock to be issued is $30).
Oct. 1- Issued the certificates for the common stock dividend declared on September 1.
Jan 3 =
=
Jan 22 =
=
Feb 8 =
=
Sep 1=
=
=
Oct 1 =
=
Q-3
MS has five sales employees which receive weekly paychecks. Each earns $11.50 per hour and each has worked 40 hours in the pay period. Each employee pays 12% of gross in Federal Income Tax, 3% in State Income Tax, 6% of gross in Social Security Tax, 1.5% of gross in Medicare Tax, and 1/2% in State Disability Insurance.
Journalize the recognition of the pay period ending January 19th which will be paid to the employees January 26th. (Keep in mind that none of the employees is subject to a ceiling amount for social security.)
Jan 19 = , = , = , = , = , = , =
Q-5- FK Construction installs swimming pools. They calculate that warranty obligations are 3% of gross sales. For the year just ending F K gross sales were $1,450,000. Due to previous quarter recognitions, the Warranty Liability account has a credit balance of $28,700.
Determine the year’s total warranty liability. =
Journalize any necessary value to establish the year’s liability at December 31st.
=
=
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
5.4.
General Hospital, a not-for-profit acute care facility, has the following cost structure for its inpatient services:
Fixed costs $10,000,000
Variable cost per inpatient day $200
Charge (revenue) per inpatient day $1,000
The hospital expects to have a patient load of 15,000 inpatient days next year.
a. Construct the hospital s base case projected P&L statement.
b. What is the hospital s breakeven point?
c. What volume is required to provide a profit of $1,000,000? A profit of $500,000?
d. Now assume that 20 percent of the hospital s inpatient days come from a managed care plan that wants a 25 percent discount from charges. Should the hospital agree to the discount proposal?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The general ledger of the Karlin Company, a consulting company, at January 1, 2011, contained the following account balances:
The following is a summary of the transactions for the year: a. Sales of services, $100,000, of which $30,000 was on credit.
b. Collected on accounts receivable, $27,300.
c. Issued shares of common stock in exchange for $10,000 in cash.
d. Paid salaries, $50,000 (of which $9,000 was for salaries payable).
e. Paid miscellaneous expenses, $24,000.
f. Purchased equipment for $15,000 in cash.
g. Paid $2,500 in cash dividends to shareholders.
|
Requirement :
|
|
Prepare a general journal entry for each of the summary transactions listed above.
Prepare an unadjusted trial balance
Prepare and post adjusting journal entries. Post to offline T-accounts. Accrued salaries at year-end amounted to $1,000. Depreciation for the year on the equipment is $2,000. The allowance for uncollectible accounts is estimated to be $1,500.
Prepare an adjusted trial balance
Prepare an income statement for 2011 and a balance sheet as of December 31, 2011.
Prepare and post closing entries.
Prepare a post-closing trial balance.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
GENERAL MOTORS CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME
Years Ended December 31,
———————–2003
2002
2001
———(dollars in millions except per share amounts)
GENERAL MOTORS CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES
Total net sales and revenues (Notes 1 and 24) $185,524 $177,324 $169,051
——- ——- ——Cost of sales and other expenses (Note 5)
152,071 146,793 138,847
Selling, general, and administrative expenses 21,008 20,690
19,433
Interest expense (Note 16)
9,464 7,503
8,317
——- ——- ——Total costs and expenses
182,543 174,986 166,597
——- ——- ——Income from continuing operations before
income taxes, equity income
and minority interests
2,981 2,338
2,454
Income tax expense (Note 11)
731
644
1,094
Equity income (loss) and minority interests
612
281
(138)
—– ——–Income from continuing operations
2,862 1,975
1,222
Loss from discontinued operations (Note 2)
(219) (239)
(621)
Gain on sale of discontinued operations
1,179
—– ——–Net income
3,822 1,736
601
Dividends on preference stocks
(46)
(99)
—– ——–Earnings attributable to common stocks
(Note 20)
$3,822 $1,690
$502
===== =====
===
Basic earnings (loss) per share attributable to
common stocks
$1-2/3 par value
Continuing operations
$5.10 $3.53
$2.21
Discontinued operations
$2.14 $(0.16) $(0.42)
———Earnings per share attributable to
$1-2/3 par value
$7.24 $3.37
$1.79
====
====
====
Losses per share from discontinued operations
attributable to Class H
$(0.22) $(0.21) $(0.55)
====
====
====
Earnings (loss) per share attributable to
common stocks assuming dilution
$1-2/3 par value
Continuing operations
$5.03 $3.51
$2.20
Discontinued operations
$2.11 $(0.16) $(0.43)
———Earnings per share attributable to $1-2/3
par value
$7.14 $3.35
$1.77
====
====
====
Losses per share from discontinued operations
attributable to Class H
$(0.22) $(0.21) $(0.55)
====
====
====
Reference should be made to the notes to consolidated financial statements.
GENERAL MOTORS CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
ASSETS
December 31,
———–2003 2002
(dollars in millions)
Cash and cash equivalents (Note 1)
Other marketable securities (Note 6)
$32,554 $20,320
22,215 16,825
—— —–Total cash and marketable securities
54,769 37,145
Finance receivables – net (Note 8)
173,137 134,643
Loans held for sale
19,609 15,720
Accounts and notes receivable (less allowances) 20,532 16,337
Inventories (less allowances) (Note 9)
10,960
9,737
Assets of discontinued operations
– 18,653
Deferred income taxes (Note 11)
27,190 39,767
Net equipment on operating leases
(less accumulated depreciation) (Note 10)
34,383 31,026
Equity in net assets of nonconsolidated affiliates
6,032
5,097
Property – net (Note 12)
38,211 35,956
Intangible assets – net (Notes 1 and 13)
4,760 10,796
Other assets (Note 14)
58,924 14,176
——- ——Total assets
$448,507 $369,053
======= =======
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
Accounts payable (principally trade)
$25,422 $21,138
Notes and loans payable (Note 16)
271,756 200,168
Liabilities of discontinued operations
7,956
Postretirement benefits other than pensions (Note 17)
36,292 38,152
Pensions (Note 17)
8,024 22,679
Deferred income taxes (Notes 11 and 15)
7,508
6,523
Accrued expenses and other liabilities (Note 15)
73,930 65,344
——- ——Total liabilities
422,932 361,960
Minority interests
307
279
Stockholders’ equity (Note 19)
$1-2/3 par value common stock (outstanding,
561,997,725 and 560,447,797 shares)
937
936
Class H common stock (outstanding,
958,284,272 shares in 2002)
96
Capital surplus (principally additional paid-in capital) 15,185 21,583
Retained earnings
12,752 10,031
—— —–Subtotal
28,874 32,646
Accumulated foreign currency translation adjustments
(1,815) (2,784)
Net unrealized gains (losses) on derivatives
51
(205)
Net unrealized gains on securities
618
372
Minimum pension liability adjustment
(2,460) (23,215)
—– —–Accumulated other comprehensive loss
(3,606) (25,832)
—– —–Total stockholders’ equity
25,268
6,814
——- ——Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
$448,507 $369,053
======= =======
Reference should be made to the notes to consolidated financial statements.
Volkswagen and GM (questions 1-7)
1. If you were to make a tender offer for Volkswagen, how would you decide much to
offer? What accounting differences between the U.S. and Germany should be taken
into account?
2. If Volkswagen were to sell bonds on the U.S. market, do you think its interest rate
would be greater or lesser than GM? Why?
4.
5.
6.
7.
3. Compute the following ratios for both companies in 2003. What are some
possible reasons for the differences in ratios?
Which of the statements do you prefer? Why? Which of the statements is more
transparent?
What differences should you look for when adjusting Volkswagen s results to GAAP
reporting standards? In other words, what are some of the major accounting
differences between Germany and the U.S. that are relevant to this industry?
If you were a bank, to whom would you rather lend money? Why?
If you were an equity investor, in whom would you rather invest? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Course name: Foundations of Financial Management (10248) – Fall I, 2013
Assignment name: Week 3 Questions/Problems
Problem 4-6
Future Value: Ordinary Annuity versus Annuity Due
1. What’s the future value of a 9%, 8-year ordinary annuity that pays $300 each year? Round your answer to the nearest cent.
$
If this were an annuity due, what would its future value be? Round your answer to the nearest cent.
$
Problem 4-7
Present and Future Value of an Uneven Cash Flow Stream
2. An investment will pay $100 at the end of each of the next 3 years, $400 at the end of Year 4, $600 at the end of Year 5, and $800 at the end of Year 6. If other investments of equal risk earn 8% annually, what is its present value? Round your answer to the nearest cent.
$
What is its future value? Round your answer to the nearest cent.
$
Problem 4-13
Present Value of an Annuity
3. Find the present value of the following ordinary annuities. Round your answers to the nearest cent. (Notes: If you are using a financial calculator, you can enter the known values and then press the appropriate key to find the unknown variable. Then, without clearing the TVM register, you can “override” the variable that changes by simply entering a new value for it and then pressing the key for the unknown variable to obtain the second answer. This procedure can be used in many situations, to see how changes in input variables affect the output variable. Also, note that you can leave values in the TVM register, switch to “BEG,” press FV, and find the FV of the annuity due.)
a. $400 per year for 10 years at 10%.
$
b. $200 per year for 5 years at 5%.
$
c. $400 per year for 5 years at 0%.
$
Now rework parts a, b, and c assuming that payments are made at the beginning of each year; that is, they are annuities due.
d. $400 per year for 10 years at 10%.
$
e. $200 per year for 5 years at 5%.
$
f. $400 per year for 5 years at 0%.
$
4..A $150,000 loan is to be amortized over 7 years, with annual end-of-year payments. Which of these statements is CORRECT?
a. The annual payments would be larger if the interest rate were lower.
b. If the loan were amortized over 10 years rather than 7 years, and if the interest rate were the same in either case, the first payment would include more dollars of interest under the 7-year amortization plan.
c. The proportion of each payment that represents interest as opposed to repayment of principal would be higher if the interest rate were lower.
d. The proportion of each payment that represents interest versus repayment of principal would be higher if the interest rate were higher.
e. The proportion of interest versus principal repayment would be the same for each of the 7 payments.
Problem 4-15
Effective Rate of Interest
5. Find the interest rate (or rates of return) for each of the following situations. Round your answers to two decimal places.
a. You borrow $700 and promise to pay back $763 at the end of 1 year.
%
b. You lend $700 and receive a promise to be paid $763 at the end of 1 year.
%
c. You borrow $95,000 and promise to pay back $165,227 at the end of 11 years.
%
d. You borrow $10,000 and promise to make payments of $2,445.7 at the end of each year for 5 years.
%
Problem 4-11
Time for a Lump Sum to Double
6. To the next whole year, how long will it take $200 to double if it is deposited and earns the following rates? Round your answers up to the next highest year. [Notes:(1) If you are using a financial calculator, you can enter the known values and then press the appropriate key to find the unknown variable. Then, without clearing the TVM register, you can “override” the variable that changes by simply entering a new value for it and then pressing the key for the unknown variable to obtain the second answer. This procedure can be used in parts b and d, and in many other situations, to see how changes in input variables affect the output variable.) (2) This problem cannot be solved exactly with some financial calculators. For example, if you enter PV = -200, PMT = 0, FV = 400, and I = 7 in an HP-12C, and then press the N key, you will get 11 years. The correct answer is 10.2448 years, which rounds to 10, but the calculator rounds up. However, the HP-10B gives the correct answer.]
a. 4.6%.
year(s)
b. 12.4%.
year(s)
c. 20.6%.
year(s)
d. 100%.
year(s)
Problem 4-19
Effective versus Nominal Interest Rates
7. Universal Bank pays 3% interest, compounded annually, on time deposits. Regional Bank pays 2%, compounded quarterly.
a. Based on effective interest rates, in which bank would you prefer to deposit your money?
I. You would choose Regional Bank because its EAR (or EFF%) is higher.
II. You would choose Universal Bank because its nominal interest rate is higher.
III. You would choose Regional Bank because its nominal interest rate is higher.
IV. You are indifferent between the banks and your decision will be based upon which one offers you a gift for opening an account.
V. You would choose Universal Bank because its EAR (or EFF%) is higher.
b. Could your choice of banks be influenced by the fact that you might want to withdraw your funds during the year as opposed to at the end of the year? In answering this question, assume that funds must be left on deposit during the entire compounding period in order for you to receive any interest.
I. If funds must be left on deposit until the end of the compounding period (1 year for Universal Bank and 3 months for Regional Bank), and you think there is a high probability that you will make a withdrawal during the year, then Regional Bank might be preferable.
II. If funds must be left on deposit until the end of the compounding period (3 months for Universal Bank and 1 year for Regional Bank), and you think there is a high probability that you will make a withdrawal during the year, then Regional Bank might be preferable.
III. If funds must be left on deposit until the end of the compounding period (1 year for Universal Bank and 3 months for Regional Bank), and you have no intentions of making a withdrawal during the year, then Regional Bank might be preferable.
IV. If funds must be left on deposit until the end of the compounding period (1 year for Universal Bank and 3 months for Regional Bank), and you think there is a high probability that you will make a withdrawal during the year, then Universal Bank might be preferable.
V. If funds must be left on deposit until the end of the compounding period (3 months for Universal Bank and 1 year for Regional Bank), and you think there is a high probability that you will make a withdrawal during the year, then Universal Bank might be preferable.
Problem 4-24
Required Lump-Sum Payment
8. To complete your last year in business school and then go through law school, you will need $25,000 per year for 4 years, starting next year (that is, you will need to withdraw the first $25,000 one year from today). Your rich uncle offers to put you through school, and he will deposit in a bank paying 4.37% interest a sum of money that is sufficient to provide the 4 payments of $25,000 each. His deposit will be made today.
a. How large must the deposit be? Round your answer to the nearest cent.
$
b. How much will be in the account immediately after you make the first withdrawal? Round your answer to the nearest cent.
$
How much will be in the account immediately after you make the last withdrawal? Round your answer to the nearest cent.
$
Problem 4-4
Number of Periods of a Single Payment
9. If you deposit money today in an account that pays 8.1% annual interest, how long will it take to double your money? Round your answer to the nearest whole.
years
Problem 4-28
PV and Effective Annual Rate
10. Assume that you inherited some money. A friend of yours is working as an unpaid intern at a local brokerage firm, and her boss is selling securities that call for 4 payments of $50 (1 payment at the end of each of the next 4 years) plus an extra payment of $1,000 at the end of Year 4. Your friend says she can get you some of these securities at a cost of $875 each. Your money is now invested in a bank that pays an 12% nominal (quoted) interest rate but with quarterly compounding. You regard the securities as being just as safe, and as liquid, as your bank deposit, so your required effective annual rate of return on the securities is the same as that on your bank deposit. You must calculate the value of the securities to decide whether they are a good investment. What is their present value to you? Round your answer to the nearest cent.
$
Problem 4-30
Loan Amortization
11. Your company is planning to borrow $1,500,000 on a 3-year, 8%, annual payment, fully amortized term loan. What fraction of the payment made at the end of the second year will represent repayment of principal? Round your answer to two decimal places.
%
Problem 4-31
Nonannual Compounding
a. 12. It is now January 1. You plan to make a total of 5 deposits of $300 each, one every 6 months, with the first payment being made today. The bank pays a nominal interest rate of 10% but uses semiannual compounding. You plan to leave the money in the bank for 5 years. How much will be in your account after 5 years? Round your answer to the nearest cent.
$
b. You must make a payment of $1,628.08 in 10 years. To get the money for this payment, you will make 5 equal deposits, beginning today and for the following 4 quarters, in a bank that pays a nominal interest rate of 8% with quarterly compounding. How large must each of the 5 payments be? Round your answer to the nearest cent.
$
13. Your bank account pays a 6% nominal rate of interest. The interest is compounded quarterly. Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. The periodic rate of interest is 1.5% and the effective rate of interest is greater than 6%.
b. The periodic rate of interest is 6% and the effective rate of interest is also 6%.
c. The periodic rate of interest is 6% and the effective rate of interest is greater than 6%.
d. The periodic rate of interest is 3% and the effective rate of interest is 6%.
e. The periodic rate of interest is 1.5% and the effective rate of interest is 3%.
14. Which of the following statements regarding a 30-year monthly payment amortized mortgage with a nominal interest rate of 10% is CORRECT?
a. The monthly payments will increase over time.
b. A larger proportion of the first monthly payment will be interest, and a smaller proportion will be principal, than for the last monthly payment.
c. The total dollar amount of interest being paid off each month gets larger as the loan approaches maturity.
d. The amount representing interest in the first payment would be higher if the nominal interest rate were 7% rather than 10%.
e. Exactly 10% of the first monthly payment represents interest.
15. A $50,000 loan is to be amortized over 7 years, with annual end-of-year payments. Which of these statements is CORRECT?
a. The annual payments would be larger if the interest rate were lower.
b. If the loan were amortized over 10 years rather than 7 years, and if the interest rate were the same in either case, the first payment would include more dollars of interest under the 7-year amortization plan.
c. The proportion of each payment that represents interest as opposed to repayment of principal would be lower if the interest rate were lower.
d. The last payment would have a higher proportion of interest than the first payment.
e. The proportion of interest versus principal repayment would be the same for each of the 7 payments
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Course name: Foundations of Financial Management (10248) – Fall I, 2013
Assignment name: Week 4 Questions/Problems
1. Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. Assume that two bonds have equal maturities and are of equal risk, but one bond sells at par while the other sells at a premium above par. The premium bond must have a lower current yield and a higher capital gains yield than the par bond.
b. A bond’s current yield must always be either equal to its yield to maturity or between its yield to maturity and its coupon rate.
c. If a bond sells at par, then its current yield will be less than its yield to maturity.
d. If a bond sells for less than par, then its yield to maturity is less than its coupon rate.
e. A discount bond’s price declines each year until it matures, when its value equals its par value.
2. You are considering two bonds. Bond A has a 9% annual coupon while Bond B has a 6% annual coupon. Both bonds have a 7% yield to maturity, and the YTM is expected to remain constant. Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. The price of Bond A will decrease over time, but the price of Bond B will increase over time.
b. The price of Bond B will decrease over time, but the price of Bond A will increase over time.
c. The prices of both bonds will remain unchanged.
d. The prices of both bonds will increase by 7% per year.
e. The prices of both bonds will increase over time, but the price of Bond A will increase by more.
Problem 5-2
Yield to Maturity for Annual Payments
3. Wilson Wonders’s bonds have 15 years remaining to maturity. Interest is paid annually, the bonds have a $1,000 par value, and the coupon interest rate is 12%. The bonds sell at a price of $1,100. What is their yield to maturity? Round your answer to two decimal places.
%
Problem 5-6
Maturity Risk Premium
4. The real risk-free rate is 2%, and inflation is expected to be 4% for the next 2 years. A 2-year Treasury security yields 7.8%. What is the maturity risk premium for the 2-year security?
%
Problem 5-4
Determinant of Interest Rates
5. The real risk-free rate is 4%. Inflation is expected to be 2% this year and 4% during the next 2 years. Assume that the maturity risk premium is zero.
What is the yield on 2-year Treasury securities? Round your answer to two decimal places.
%
What is the yield on 3-year Treasury securities? Round your answer to two decimal places.
%
Problem 5-19
Maturity Risk Premiums
6. Assume that the real risk-free rate, r*, is 3% and that inflation is expected to be 7% in Year 1, 6% in Year 2, and 4% thereafter. Assume also that all Treasury securities are highly liquid and free of default risk. If 2-year and 5-year Treasury notes both yield 10%, what is the difference in the maturity risk premiums (MRPs) on the two notes; that is, what is MRP5 minus MRP2? Round your answer to two decimal places.
%
7. Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. You hold two bonds. One is a 10-year, zero coupon, issue and the other is a 10-year bond that pays a 6% annual coupon. The same market rate, 6%, applies to both bonds. If the market rate rises from the current level, the zero coupon bond will experience the larger percentage decline.
b. The time to maturity does not affect the change in the value of a bond in response to a given change in interest rates.
c. The shorter the time to maturity, the greater the change in the value of a bond in response to a given change in interest rates.
d. You hold two bonds. One is a 10-year, zero coupon, bond and the other is a 10-year bond that pays a 6% annual coupon. The same market rate, 6%, applies to both bonds. If the market rate rises from the current level, the zero coupon bond will experience the smaller percentage decline.
e. The longer the time to maturity, the smaller the change in the value of a bond in response to a given change in interest rates.
8. Assume that all interest rates in the economy decline from 10% to 9%. Which of the following bonds would have the largest percentage increase in price?
a. An 8-year bond with a 9% coupon.
b. A 10-year zero coupon bond.
c. A 1-year bond with a 15% coupon.
d. A 10-year bond with a 10% coupon.
e. A 3-year bond with a 10% coupon.
Problem 5-20
Inflation Risk Premiums
9. Because of a recession, the inflation rate expected for the coming year is only 4%. However, the inflation rate in Year 2 and thereafter is expected to be constant at some level above 4%. Assume that the real risk-free rate is r* = 2% for all maturities and that there are no maturity premiums. If 3-year Treasury notes yield 2 percentage points more than 1-year notes, what inflation rate is expected after Year 1?
%
10. Which of the following events would make it more likely that a company would choose to call its outstanding callable bonds?
a. The company’s bonds are downgraded.
b. Market interest rates decline sharply.
c. Inflation increases significantly.
d. The company’s financial situation deteriorates significantly.
e. Market interest rates rise sharply.
11. Tucker Corporation is planning to issue new 20-year bonds. Initially, the plan was to make the bonds non-callable. If the bonds were made callable after 5 years at a 5% call premium, how would this affect their required rate of return?
a. Because of the call premium, the required rate of return would decline.
b. The required rate of return would increase because the bond would then be more risky to a bondholder.
c. The required rate of return would decline because the bond would then be less risky to a bondholder.
d. There is no reason to expect a change in the required rate of return.
e. It is impossible to say without more information.
12. A 10-year bond with a 9% annual coupon has a yield to maturity of 8%. Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. The bond’s current yield is greater than 9%.
b. If the yield to maturity remains constant, the bond’s price one year from now will be higher than its current price.
c. The bond is selling below its par value.
d. If the yield to maturity remains constant, the bond’s price one year from now will be lower than its current price.
e. The bond is selling at a discount
Problem 5-1
Bond Valuation with Annual Payments
13. Jackson Corporation’s bonds have 13 years remaining to maturity. Interest is paid annually, the bonds have a $1,000 par value, and the coupon interest rate is 11%. The bonds have a yield to maturity of 10%. What is the current market price of these bonds? Round your answer to the nearest cent.
$
Problem 5-7
Bond Valuation with Semiannual Payments
14. Renfro Rentals has issued bonds that have a 12% coupon rate, payable semiannually. The bonds mature in 15 years, have a face value of $1,000, and a yield to maturity of 10%. What is the price of the bonds? Round your answer to the nearest cent.
$
Problem 5-14
Current Yield with Semiannual Payments
15. A bond that matures in 9 years sells for $950.The bond has a face value of $1,000 and a yield to maturity of 9.8764%. The bond pays coupons semiannually. What is the bond’s current yield? Round your answer to two decimal places.
%
Problem 5-8
Yield to Maturity and Call with Semiannual Payments
16. Thatcher Corporation’s bonds will mature in 10 years. The bonds have a face value of $1,000 and an 8% coupon rate, paid semiannually. The price of the bonds is $1,100. The bonds are callable in 5 years at a call price of $1,050. Round your answers to two decimal places.
What is their yield to maturity?
%
What is their yield to call?
%
17. Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. A sinking fund provision makes a bond more risky to investors at the time of issuance.
b. If interest rates have increased since a company issued bonds with a sinking fund, the company is less likely to retire the bonds by buying them back in the open market, as opposed to calling them in at the sinking fund call price.
c. Most sinking funds require the issuer to provide funds to a trustee, who saves the money so that it will be available to pay off bondholders when the bonds mature.
d. Sinking fund provisions never require companies to retire their debt; they only establish “targets” for the company to reduce its debt over time.
e. Sinking fund provisions sometimes turn out to adversely affect bondholders, and this is most likely to occur if interest rates decline after the bond has been issued.
Problem 5-8
Yield to Maturity and Call with Semiannual Payments
18. Thatcher Corporation’s bonds will mature in 10 years. The bonds have a face value of $1,000 and an 8% coupon rate, paid semiannually. The price of the bonds is $1,100. The bonds are callable in 5 years at a call price of $1,050. Round your answers to two decimal places.
What is their yield to maturity?
%
What is their yield to call?
%
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Hoen Manufacturing Company experienced the following accounting events during its first year of operation. With the exception of the adjusting entries for depreciation, all transactions are cash transactions.
1.
Acquired $50,000 cash by issuing common stock.
2. Paid $8,000 for the materials used to make products, all of which were started and completed during the year.
3. Paid salaries of $4,400 to selling and administrative employees.
4. Paid wages of $7,000 to production workers. 5. Paid $9,600 for furniture used in selling and administrative offices. The furniture was acquired
on January 1. It had a $1,600 estimated salvage value and a four-year useful life.
6. Paid $13,000 for manufacturing equipment. The equipment was acquired on January 1. It
had a $1,000 estimated salvage value and a three-year useful life.
7. Sold inventory to customers for $25,000 that had cost $14,000 to make.
Required
Explain how these events would affect the balance sheet, income statement, and statement of cash flows by recording them in a horizontal financial statements model as indicated here. The first event is recorded as an example. In the Cash Flow column, indicate whether the amounts represent financing activities (FA), investing activities (IA), or operating activities (OA).
2.
Identify the following costs as fixed or variable. Costs related to plane trips between Seattle, Washington, and Orlando, Florida, follow. Pilots are paid on a per trip basis.
a. Pilots salaries relative to the number of trips flown.
b. Depreciation relative to the number of planes in service.
c. Cost of refreshments relative to the number of passengers.
d. Pilots salaries relative to the number of passengers on a particular trip.
e. Cost of a maintenance check relative to the number of passengers on a particular trip.
f. Fuel costs relative to the number of trips. First Federal Bank operates several branch offices in grocery stores. Each branch employs a su-
pervisor and two tellers.
g. Tellers salaries relative to the number of tellers in a particular district.
h. Supplies cost relative to the number of transactions processed in a particular branch.
i. Tellers salaries relative to the number of customers served at a particular branch.
j. Supervisors salaries relative to the number of branches operated.
k. Supervisors salaries relative to the number of customers served in a particular branch.
l. Facility rental costs relative to the size of customer deposits.
Costs related to operating a fast-food restaurant follow.
m. Depreciation of equipment relative to the number of restaurants.
n. Building rental cost relative to the number of customers served in a particular restaurant.
o. Manager s salary of a particular restaurant relative to the number of employees.
p. Food cost relative to the number of customers.
q. Utility cost relative to the number of restaurants in operation.
r. Company president s salary relative to the number of restaurants in operation.
s. Land costs relative to the number of hamburgers sold at a particular restaurant.
t. Depreciation of equipment relative to the number of customers served at a particular restaurant
3.
Webster Training Services (WTS) provides instruction on the use of computer software for the em- ployees of its corporate clients. It offers courses in the clients offices on the clients equipment. The only major expense WTS incurs is instructor salaries; it pays instructors $5,000 per course taught. WTS recently agreed to offer a course of instruction to the employees of Chambers Incorporated at a price of $400 per student. Chambers estimated that 20 students would attend the course.
Base your answer on the preceding information.
Part 1: Required
a. Relative to the number of students in a single course, is the cost of instruction a fixed or a variable cost?
b. Determine the profit, assuming that 20 students attend the course.
c. Determine the profit, assuming a 10 percent increase in enrollment (i.e., enrollment increases
to 22 students). What is the percentage change in profitability?
d. Determine the profit, assuming a 10 percent decrease in enrollment (i.e., enrollment de-
creases to 18 students). What is the percentage change in profitability?
e. Explain why a 10 percent shift in enrollment produces more than a 10 percent shift in profit-
ability. Use the term that identifies this phenomenon.
4.
Inman Manufacturing Company makes a product that it sells for $60 per unit. The company incurs variable manufacturing costs of $24 per unit. Variable selling expenses are $12 per unit, annual fixed manufacturing costs are $189,000, and fixed selling and administrative costs are $141,000 per year.
Required
Determine the break-even point in units and dollars using the following approaches.
a. Equation method. b. Contribution margin per unit. c. Contribution margin ratio. d. Confirm your results by preparing a contribution margin income statement for the break-
even sales volume.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Answer all of the following questions. Explain your answer briefly and clearly, showing any necessary calculations. Your answer should be submitted in an Excel file, with separate tabs for each question. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 1. (9) Westminster Company has had the following experience over the past six quarters: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Units produced |
|
Electricity Cost ($) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
27,000 |
|
110,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
34,000 |
|
126,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
31,000 |
|
116,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
23,000 |
|
88,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
22,000 |
|
90,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
32,000 |
|
120,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| a) Using the high-low method, determine an equation for electricity cost (Y) as a function of units produced (X). Assume a linear function. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| b) Using your equation, forecast electricity cost at a volume of 30,000 units produced. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 2. (12) Barrister Company has decided to replace an existing production machine with a new machine, which it will lease from the manufacturer. Barrister must decide between two models, A and B, which operate at equal speed and produce product of equal quality. Both have capacity in excess of Barrister s present needs. Model A leases for $16,000/month, and has a monthly maintenance cost of $2,000. Model B leases for $25,000/month and has monthly maintenance cost of $1,000. Variable unit costs of production for Model A are: materials, $24, direct labor, $16. Because of design efficiencies, Model B will produce the same product for $23 of material and $13 of labor. |
| a) At what monthly production volume would Barrister be indifferent between the two models? |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| b) If the volume in (a) is expected to be regularly exceeded, which model should Barrister lease, and why? |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 3. (14) Gotham Art Museum is considering hosting a travelling exhibit of paintings by a famous artist sponsored by the Smithsonian Institution. The Smithsonian charges $250,000 for a one-month exhibit, which covers all costs of transportation. They will also receive 10% of gross ticket sales revenue from the exhibit. Gotham will incur costs of $85,000 to modify exhibit space for the paintings; these modifications would have no value after the exhibit. Additional staff for ticket sales and security will cost $50,000. |
| It is expected that 12,000 visitors will purchase the exhibit ticket for $40, which would include access to the entire museum. Of these, it is estimated that 10,000 would not have attended the museum, while 2,000 would have purchased the regular admission ticket for $25. It is estimated that the increase in visitors will result in additional sales of $100,000 for the gift shop, and $40,000 for the caf . Additional staffing for these units will cost $15,000. The gift shop normally runs a gross margin of 40%, and the caf 70%. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Determine the incremental profit or loss to Gotham Art Museum of hosting the travelling exhibit. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 4. (18) Veeblefester Company manufactures two types of gizmo (Model A and Model B) in its Longmont plant. |
|
| Product information: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Model A |
Model B |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Direct material/unit |
$40 |
$55 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Direct labor/unit |
|
$32 |
$47 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Budgeted volume (units) |
8,000 |
10,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Setups |
|
50 |
30 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Machine hours |
|
16,000 |
24,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Shipments |
|
230 |
170 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Budgeted overhead for the year is $3,200,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| a) Compute the unit cost of each model if overhead is allocated on the basis of machine hours. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| b) Overhead costs are driven 55% by machining, 25% by setups, and 20% by shipments. |
|
|
|
| Compute the unit cost of each model if overhead is allocated with an ABC system, using |
|
|
|
|
these three cost drivers. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| c) Model A currently sells for $300/unit. In order to meet budgeted sales volume, the |
|
|
|
|
marketing department is advocating a 15% price cut. Is this advisable? Explain. |
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The adjusted trial balance of Foxworthy Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2011 reported the following: sales revenue, $22,300,000; cost of goods sold, $14,500,000; selling expenses, $2,300,000; general and administrative expenses, $1,200,000; dividend revenue from investments, $200,000; interest expense, $300,000.
Foxworthy s management has not yet accrued for income taxes. The company’s income tax rate is 40% on all items of income or loss.
Two million shares of common stock were outstanding throughout the year.
The company’s controller has provided the following information with respect to certain non-recurring transactions that also occurred during the year (all transactions are material in amount):
Investments classified as available for sale were sold during the year at a loss of $300,000.
One of the factories was closed during the year. Restructuring costs incurred were $2,000,000.
During the year, Foxworthy completed the sale of one of its operating divisions that qualifies as a component of the entity. The division had reported operating income of $800,000 in 2011 prior to the sale, and its assets were sold at a loss of $1,800,000.
In 2011, the company’s accountant discovered that depreciation expense in 2010 for the office building was overstated by $300,000.
One of Foxworthy’s manufacturing facilities located in a foreign country was expropriated. A loss of $800,000 was recognized. The event is considered to be unusual and infrequent.
Required:
Prepare a formalIncome Statement in proper format, including basic earnings per share disclosure for Foxworthy Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following income statement items appeared on the adjusted trial balance of Foxworthy Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2011 ($ in 000s): sales revenue, $22,300; cost of goods sold, $14,500; selling expenses, $2,300; general and administrative expenses, $1,200; dividend revenue from investments, $200; interest expense, $300. Income taxes have not yet been accrued. The company’s income tax rate is 40% on all items of income or loss. These revenue and expense items appear in the company’s income statement every year. The company’s controller, however, has asked for your help in determining the appropriate treatment of the following nonrecurring transactions that also occurred during 2011 ($ in 000s). All transactions are material in amount.
a. Investments were sold during the year at a loss of $300. Foxworthy also had unrealized losses of $200 for the year on investments accounted for as securities available for sale. b. One of the company’s factories was closed during the year. Restructuring costs incurred were $2,000. c. One of Foxworthy’s manufacturing facilities located in a foreign country was expropriated. A loss of $800 was recognized. The event is considered to be unusual and infrequent. d. the year, Foxworthy completed the sale of one of its operating divisions that qualifies as a component of the entity according to GAAP regarding discontinued operations. The division had incurred operating income of $800 in 2011 prior to the sale, and its assets were sold at a loss of $1,800. e. In 2011, the company’s accountant discovered that depreciation expense in 2010 for the office building was overstated by $300. 6. Foreign currency translation gains for the year totaled $600.
Required: Prepare Foxworthy’s combined statement of income and comprehensive income for 2011, including basic earnings per share disclosures. Two million shares of common stock were outstanding throughout the year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following income statement items appeared on the adjusted trial balance of Foxworthy Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2011 ($ in 000s): sales revenue, $22,300; cost of goods sold, $14,500; selling expenses, $2,300; general and administrative expenses, $1,200; dividend revenue from investments, $200; interest expense, $300. Income taxes have not yet been accrued. The company’s income tax rate is 40% on all items of income or loss. These revenue and expense items appear in the company’s income statement every year. The company’s controller, however, has asked for your help in determining the appropriate treatment of the following nonrecurring transactions that also occurred during 2011 ($ in 000s). All transactions are material in amount.
a. Investments were sold during the year at a loss of $300. Foxworthy also had unrealized losses of $200 for the year on investments accounted for as securities available for sale.
b. One of the company’s factories was closed during the year. Restructuring costs incurred were $2,000.
c. One of Foxworthy’s manufacturing facilities located in a foreign country was expropriated. A loss of $800 was recognized. The event is considered to be unusual and infrequent.
d. the year, Foxworthy completed the sale of one of its operating divisions that qualifies as a component of the entity according to GAAP regarding discontinued operations. The division had incurred operating income of $800 in 2011 prior to the sale, and its assets were sold at a loss of $1,800.
e. In 2011, the company’s accountant discovered that depreciation expense in 2010 for the office building was overstated by $300.
6. Foreign currency translation gains for the year totaled $600.
Required: Prepare Foxworthy’s combined statement of income and comprehensive income for 2011, including basic earnings per share disclosures. Two million shares of common stock were outstanding throughout the year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Franklin s Tower Company completes these transactions during April of the current year (the terms of all its credit sales are 2/10, n/30):
Apr. 2 Purchased $15,400 of merchandise on credit from Garcia Company, invoice dated April 2, terms 2/10, n/60.
3 Sold merchandise on credit to M. Jagger, Invoice No. 760, for $3,500 (cost is $2,000).
3 Purchased $880 of office supplies on credit from Paper Clips, Inc. Invoice dated April 2, terms n/10 EOM.
4 Issued Check No. 587 to NewLook Magizine for advertising expense, $750.
5 Sold merchandise on credit to C. Watts, Invoice No. 761, for $6,000 (cost is $4,400).
6 Received an $75 credit memorandum from Paper Clips, Inc., for some of the office supplies received on April 3 and returned for credit.
9 Purchased $11,000 of store equipment on credit from Jane s Junk, invoice dated April 9, terms n/10 EOM.
11 Sold merchandise on credit to K. Richards, Invoice No. 762, for $12,800 (cost is $6,900).
12 Issued Check No. 588 to Garcia Company in payment of its April 2 invoice, less the discount.
13 Received payment from M. Jagger for the April 3 sale, less the discount.
13 Sold $4,200 of merchandise on credit to M. Jagger (cost is $2,100), Invoice No. 763.
14 Received payment from C. Watts for the April 5 sale, less the discount.
16 Issued Check No. 589, payable to Payroll, in payment of sales salaries for the first half of the month, $8,850. Cashed the check and paid employees.
16 Cash sales for the first half of the month are $42,420 (cost is $20,070). (Cash sales are recorded daily from cash register readings but are recorded only twice in this problem to reduce repetitive entries.)
17 Purchased $16,600 of merchandise on credit from Lesh Company, invoice dated April 16, terms 2/10, n/30.
18 Borrowed $50,000 cash from Second National Bank by giving a long-term note payable.
20 Received payment from K. Richards for the April 11 sale, less the discount.
20 Purchased $690 of store supplies on credit from Jane s Junk, invoice dated April 19, terms n/10 EOM.
23 Received a $600 credit memorandum from Lesh Company for defective merchandise received on April 17 and returned for credit.
23 Received payment from M. Jagger for the April 13 sale, less the discount.
25 Purchased $9,470 of merchandise on credit from Garcia Company, invoice dated April 24, terms 2/10, n/60.
26 Issued Check No. 590 to Lesh Company in payment of its April 17 invoice, less the return and the discount.
27 Sold $2,880 of merchandise on credit to C. Watts, Invoice No. 764 (cost is $2,120).
27 Sold $1,700 of merchandise on credit to K. Richards, Invoice No. 765 (cost is $810).
30 Issued Check No. 591, payable to Payroll, in payment of the sales salaries for the last half of the month, $12,000.
30 Cash sales for the last half of the month are $69,690 (cost is $45,500).
Required
1. Prepare a sales journal like Exhibit 7.5 and a cash receipts journal like Exhibit 7.7. Number both journal pages as page 3. Then review the transactions of Franklin s Tower Company and enter those that should be journalized in the sales journal and those that should be journalized in the cash receipts journal. Ignore any transactions that should be journalized in a purchases journal, a cash disbursements journal, or a general journal.
2. Open the following general ledger accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Inventory, Long-Term Notes Payable, Cost of Goods Sold, Sales, and Sales Discounts. Enter the March 31 balances for Cash ($55,000), Inventory ($101,000), and Long-Term Notes Payable ($156,000). Also open accounts receivable subsidiary ledger accounts for C. Watts, M. Jagger, and K. Richards.
3. Verify that amounts that should be posted as individual amounts from the journals have been posted. (Such items are immediately posted.) Foot and crossfoot the journals and make the month-end postings.
4. Prepare a trial balance of the general ledger and prove the accuracy of the subsidiary ledger by preparing a schedule of accounts receivable.
Analysis Component
5. Assume that the total for the schedule of Accounts Receivable does not equal the balance of the controlling account in the general ledger. Describe steps you would take to discover the error(s).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Fruit Snacks Corp. Inc. makes lunchbox style fruit snacks. The owner of the company is setting up a standard cost system, and she has collected the following data for one of the company’s products-fruit chews.
The data below pertain only to the fruits used in the product
Material requirements, kilograms of fruits per dozen bags 0.95 kilograms
Allowance for waste, kilograms of fruits per dozen bags 0.06 kilograms
Allowance for rejects, kilograms of fruits per dozen bags 0.04 kilograms
Purchase price, fruit $7.50 per kilogram
Purchase discount 4% of purchase price
Shipping cost from the supplier $0.30 per kilogram
Receiving and handling cost $0.l0 per kilogram
a. Determine the standard price of a kilogram of fruits. Show computations
b. Determine the quantity of fruits for one dozen bags. Show computations
2. Posters Now uses a standard cost system. Job 67 is for the manufacturing of 800 units of the product P100. The company standards for one unit of the product P100 are as follows:
Standard quantity: 11 ounces
Standard price: $3 per ounce
Standard direct labor: 1.5 hours
Standard labor rates: $12 per hour
The job required 8000 ounces of raw material costing $26,100.
a. What is the materials price variance? Show computations
b. What is the materials quantity variance? Show computations
3. Posters Now uses a standard cost system. Job 67 is for the manufacturing of 800 units of the product P100. The company standards for one unit of the product P100 are as follows:
Standard quantity: 11 ounces
Standard price: $3 per ounce
Standard direct labor: 1.5 hours
Standard labor rates: $12 per hour
The job required 8000 ounces of raw material costing $26,100. The job also used 1,250 labor hours at rate of $12.20 per hour.
a. What is the labor rate variance? Show calculations
b. What is the labor efficiency variance? Show calculations
4. Walker Corporation is a distributor of several products. They used a predetermined variable overhead rate based on direct labor hours. In the most recent month, 90,000 items were shipped to customers using 3,500 direct labor hours. The company incurred a total of $12,600 in variable overhead costs. According to the company s overhead standards, 0.04 direct labor hours are required to fulfill an order for one item and the variable overhead rate is $3.50 per direct labor hours.
a. What is the variable overhead spending variance? Show calculations
b. What is the variable overhead efficiency variance? Show calculations
5. For the third quarter of the year, the following data was reported:
Inspection time 1.4 days
Process time 4.5 days
Wait time 12.0 days (the time between the customer order and the beginning of production)
Queue time 3.9 days
Move time 0.8 days
a. What is the throughput time? Show calculations
b. What is the manufacturing cycle efficiency for the quarter? Show calculations
c. What is the delivery cycle time? Show calculations
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fryer Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 700 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
Cost Percent Complete
Material costs 12,600 75%
Conversion costs 8,900 60%
A total of 7,300 units were started and 6,200 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
Cost
Material costs 132,200
Conversion costs 117,500
The ending inventory was 80% complete with respect to materials and 45% complete with respect to conversion costs.
Required:
The total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processing department during the month is closest to what amount?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) A company purchased $60,000 of 5% bonds on May 1 at par value. The bonds pay interest on February 1 and August 1. The amount of interest accrued on December 31 (the company’s year-end) would be
A. 250
B. 500
C. 1,250
D. 2,500
E. 3,000
2) Hamilton Company owns 88,200 of Hennie Company’s 180,000 outstanding shares of common stock. Hennie Company pays $30,000 in total cash dividends to its shareholders. Hamilton’s entry to record this transaction should include a
A.Credit to Long-Term investments for $14,700
B.Credit to Dividend Revenue for $30,000
C.Debit to Dividend Revenue for $14,700
D.Debit to Interest Revenue for $14,700
E.Credit to Long-Term Investments for $30,000
|
3) On April 18, Riley Co. made a short-term investment in 300 common shares of XLT Co. The purchase price is $42 per share and the broker s fee is $250. The intent is to actively manage these shares for profit. On May 30, Riley Co. receives $1 per share from XLT in dividends.
|
Prepare the April 18 and May 30 journal entries to record these transactions
4) Journ Co. purchased short-term investments in available-for-sale securities at a cost of $50,000 on November 25, 2013. At December 31, 2013, these securities had a fair value of $47,000. This is the first and only time the company has purchased such securities
Prepare the December 31, 2013, year-end adjusting entry for the securities’ portfolio
5) On February 1, 2013, Garzon purchased 6% bonds issued by PBS Utilities at a cost of $40,000, which is their par value. The bonds pay interest semiannually on July 31 and January 31. For 2013, prepare entries to record Garzon’s July 31 receipt of interest and its December 31 year-end interest accrual. (Do not round your intermediate calculations.)
Record the interest revenue on July 31, 2013
Record the interest accrued on the bonds as of December 31, 2013.
6) On May 20, 2013, Montero Co. paid $1,000,000 to acquire 40% of ORD Corp. s outstanding stock. Also assume that ORD Corp. paid a $100,000 dividend on November 1, 2013. Prepare the journal entry to record the dividend on November 1, 2013.
|
7) On May 20, 2013, Montero Co. paid $1,000,000 to acquire 25,000 common shares (10%) of ORD Corp. as a long-term investment. On August 5, 2014, Montero sold one-half of these shares for $625,000.
|
| What valuation method should be used to account for this stock investment? |
|
Equity method |
|
Fair value method |
|
Prepare entries to record both the acquisition and the sale of these shares.
On May 20, 2013, Montero Co. paid $1,000,000 to acquire 25,000 common shares (10%) of ORD Corp. as a long-term investment.
On August 5, 2014, Montero sold one-half of these shares for $625,000.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gagliano is introducing a new product using either a capital-intensive method or a labor-intensive method, which will not affect the quality of the product. Estimated manufacturing costs as follows: Capital-Intensive-Direct Materials $5/unit, Direct Labor $6/unit, Variable Overhead $3/unit, Fixed Manufacturing Costs $2,508,000. Labor-Intensive-Direct Materials $5.50/unit, Direct Labor $8.00/unit, Variable Overhead $4.50/unit, Manufacturing Costs $1,538,000. Introductory unit sales price of $30. Incremental selling expenses are estimated to be $502,000 annually plus $2/unit sold, regardless of manufacturing method. Instructions:
(a) Calculate the estimated break-even point in annual unit sales of the new product if Gagliano Company uses the: (1) capital-intensive method (2) labor-intensive method.
(b) Determine annual unit sales volume at which they would be indifferent between the two methods.
(c) Explain when both should be employed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Galloway Company is a small editorial services company owned and operated by Fran Briggs. On July 31, 2012, the end of the current year, Galloway Company’s accounting clerk prepared the unadjusted trial balance shown below.
Galloway Company
Unadjusted Trial Balance
July 31, 2012
Debit Credit
Cash 7,500
Accounts Receivable 38,400
Prepaid Insurance 7,200
Supplies 1,980
Land 112,500
Building 200,250
Accumulated Depreciation-Building 137,550
Equipment 135,300
Accumulated Depreciation-Equipment 97,950
Accounts Payable 12,150
Unearned Rent 6,750
Salaries and Wages Payable –
Fran Briggs, Capital 221,000
Fran Briggs, Drawing 15,000
Fees Earned 324,600
Rent Revenue –
Salaries and Wages Expense 193,370
Utilities Expense 42,375
Advertising Expense 22,800
Repairs Expense 17,250
Depreciation Expense-Building –
Depreciation Expense-Equipment –
Insurance Expense –
Supplies Expense –
Miscellaneous Expense 6,075
Total $800,000 $800,000
The data needed to determine year-end adjustments are as follows:
a. Unexpired insurance at July 31, $4,800.
b. Supplies on hand at July 31, $600.
c. Depreciation of building for the year, $3,100.
d. Depreciation of equipment for the year, $2,700.
e. Rent unearned at July 31, $1,750.
f. Accrued salaries and wages at July 31, $3,000.
g. Fees earned but unbilled on July 31, $10,750.
Required:
1. Journalize the adjusting entries using the following additional accounts: Salaries and Wages Payable; Rent Revenue; Insurance Expense; Depreciation Expense Building; Depreciation Expense Equipment; and Supplies Expense.
2. Determine the balances of the accounts affected by the adjusting entries, and prepare an adjusted trial balance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P13-16 Activity-based costing versus traditional overhead allocation methods [LO 9] Galvaset Indutries manufactures and sells custom-made windows. Its job costing system was designed using an activity-based costing approach. Direct materials and direct labor costs are accumulated separately, along with information concerning three manufacturing overhead cost drivers (activities). Assume that the direct labor rate is $20 per hour and that there were no beginning inventories. The following information was available for 2010, based on an expected production level of 50,000 units for the year, which will require 200,000 direct labor hours: Activity (Cost Driver) Budgeted Costs for 2010 Cost Driver Used as Allocation Base Cost Allocation Rate Materials handling $ 325,000 Number of parts used $ 0.25 per part Cutting and lathe work 2,340,000 Number of parts used 1.80 per part Assembly and inspection 5,000,000 Direct labor hours 25.00 per hour The following production, costs, and activities occurred during the month of March: Units Produced Direct Materials Costs Number of Parts Used Direct Labor Hours 3,800 $142,000 83,600 17,180 Required: (a) Calculate the total manufacturing costs and the cost per unit of the windows produced during the month of March (using the activity-based costing approach). (Round “cost per unit produced” to 2 decimal places and the rest to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Total manufacturing cost $ Cost per unit produced $ (b) Assume instead that Galvaset Industries applies manufacturing overhead on a direct labor hours basis (rather than using the activity-based costing system previously described). Calculate the total manufacturing cost and the cost per unit of the windows produced during the month of March. (Hint: You will need to calculate the predetermined overhead application rate using the total budgeted overhead costs for 2010.) (Do not round your intermediate calculations. Round “cost per unit produced” to 2 decimal places and the rest to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Total manufacturing cost $ Cost per unit produced $
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
gambler company produces a product by way of three consecutive processes. the following data relates to Process 3 for the month of April.
During April, 30,000 units valued at $29.55 each were transferred from Process 2 to Process 3.
Other costs incurred during the month were:
Direct Materials added $309,000
Direct Labour $458,600
Manufacturing Overhead $391,400
Normal losses are estimated to be 5% of the units transferred in from Process 2. Inspection takes place during the processing operation, at which point bad units are separated from good units and sold as scrap at $40 each.
At inspection, 4,000 units were rejected as scrap. These units had reached the following degree of completion:
Transfer from Process 2 100%
Direct material added 80%
Conversion costs 60%
Work-in-progress at the end of April was 5000 units and had reached the following degree of completion:
Transfer from Process 100%
Materials added 55%
Conversion costs 50%
There were no incomplete units in Process 3 at the beginning of the period.
Materials added and conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the process.
Required:
a) Complete the template given to determine the equivalent units for direct materials (From Process 2 & Materials added) and conversion costs.
b) Compute:
The total cost of the units completed and transferred out
Cost of the unexpected losses
Cost of ending work in process inventory in Process 3
d) Prepare the Work in Process Inventory-Process 3 T-account, claerly showing the ending balance.
e) State the journal entries to record the assignment of direct materials, and direct labour, the allocation of manufacturing overhead to the process and to record the cost of the units completed and transferred out to Finished Goods.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Garcia Manufacturing uses a job order cost system and applies overhead to production on the basis of direct labor costs. On January 1, 2010, Job No. 50 was the only job in process. The costs incurred prior to January 1 on this job were as follows: direct materials $20,000, direct labor $12,000, and manufacturing overhead $16,000. As of January 1, Job No. 49 had been completed at a cost of $90,000 and was part of finished goods inventory. There was a $15,000 balance in the Raw Materials Inventory account. During the month of January, Garcia Manufacturing began production on Jobs 51 and 52, and completed Jobs 50 and 51. Jobs 49 and 50 were also sold on account during the month for $122,000 and $158,000, respectively. The following additional events occurred during the month. Purchased additional raw materials of $90,000 on account.
Incurred factory labor costs of $65,000. Of this amount $16,000 related to employer payroll taxes.
Incurred manufacturing overhead costs as follows: indirect materials $17,000; indirect labor $15,000; depreciation expenses $19,000, and various others manufacturing overhead costs on account $20,000.
Assigned direct materials and direct labor to jobs as follows.
Job No. Direct Materials Direct Labor 50 $10,000 $ 5,000 51 39,000 25,000 52 30,000 20,000
Calculate the predetermined overhead rate for 2010, assuming Garcia Manufacturing estimates total manufacturing overhead costs of $1,050,000, direct labor costs of $700,000, and direct labor hours of 20,000 for the year. %
Prepare the journal entries to record the purchase of raw materials, the factory labor costs incurred, and the manufacturing overhead costs incurred during the month of January. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest egg 10, 5, 3, 2.) Account/Description Debit Credit Factory wages payable Accumulated depreciation Finished goods inventorySalesCashRaw materials inventory Depreciation expense Accounts payable Wages expense Factory labor Manufacturing overhead Work in process inventory Employer payroll taxes payable Work in process inventory Depreciation expense Factory labor Employer payroll taxes payable Finished goods inventory Accounts payable Factory wages payableSalesRaw materials inventoryCashManufacturing overhead Accumulated depreciation Wages expense (To record purchase of raw materials.) Sales Accumulated depreciationCashFactory labor Depreciation expenseRaw materials inventory Employer payroll taxes payable Accounts payable Factory wages payable Manufacturing overhead Wages expense Work in process inventory Finished goods inventory Accounts payable Factory labor Employer payroll taxes payableSalesCashWork in process inventory Manufacturing overhead Factory wages payable Accumulated depreciation Raw materials inventory Depreciation expense Wages expense Finished goods inventory Employer payroll taxes payable Finished goods inventorySalesCashDepreciation expenseRaw materials inventory Accounts payable Factory labor Factory wages payable Wages expense Work in process inventory Manufacturing overhead Accumulated depreciation (To record factory labor costs.) Cash Raw materials inventory Factory labor Finished goods inventory Factory wages payable Manufacturing overhead Work in process inventory Accounts payable Accumulated depreciation Employer payroll taxes payableSalesDepreciatexpenseWages ages expense Wages expense Work in process inventory Finished goods inventory Raw materials inventory Accumulated depreciation Employer payroll taxes payable Accounts payableSalesManufacturoverheadFactory Tory wages payableCashFactory labor Depreciation expense Factory labor Manufacturing overheadCashFinished good inventory Employee payroll taxes payable Raw materials inventory Factory wages payable Accounts payableSalesWageexpense Accumulated depreciation Depreciation expense Work in process inventory Factory wages payable Depreciation expense Wages expense Factory labor Employer payroll taxes payable Work in process inventory Finished goods inventorySalesManufacturoverhead Raw draw materials inventory Accumulated depreciationCashAccounts payable Factory labor Raw materials inventory Wages expense Work in process inventory Accounts payable Employer payroll taxes payableSalesFinished good inventory Depreciation on expenseCashFactory wages payable ManufacturioverheaAccumulated Tided depreciation (To record overhead costs.)
Prepare the journal entries to record the assignment of direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead costs to production. In assigning manufacturing overhead costs, use the overhead rate calculated in the first part of the question. Account/Description Debit Credit Employer payroll taxes payabfinishedhed goods inventory Factory wages payable Wages expense Accumulated depreciation Depreciation expenseSalesCashAccounts payable Manufacturing overhead Factory
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Garlington Technologies Inc.’s 2013 financial statements are shown below:
Balance Sheet as of December 31, 2013
Cash $ 180,000 Accounts payable $ 360,000
Receivables 360,000 Notes payable 156,000
Inventories 720,000 Line of credit 0
Total current assets $1,260,000 Accruals 180,000
Fixed assets 1,440,000 Total current liabilities $ 696,000
Common stock 1,800,000
Retained earnings 204,000
Total assets $2,700,000 Total liabilities and equity $2,700,000
Income Statement for December 31, 2013
Sales $3,600,000
Operating costs 3,279,720
EBIT $ 320,280
Interest 18,280
Pre-tax earnings $ 302,000
Taxes (40%) 120,800
Net income 181,200
Dividends $ 108,000
Suppose that in 2014 sales increase by 15% over 2013 sales and that 2014 dividends will increase to $116,000. Forecast the financial statements using the forecasted financial statement method. Assume the firm operated at full capacity in 2013. Use an interest rate of 13%, and assume that any new debt will be added at the end of the year (so forecast the interest expense based on the debt balance at the beginning of the year). Cash does not earn any interest income. Assume that the AFN will be in the of form of a line of credit. Round your answers to the nearest dollar. Do not round intermediate calculations.
Garlington Technologies Inc.
Pro Forma Income Statement
December 31, 2014
Sales $
Operating costs $
EBIT $
Interest $
Pre-tax earnings $
Taxes (40%) $
Net income $
Dividends: $
Addition to RE: $
Garlington Technologies Inc.
Pro Forma Balance Statement
December 31, 2014
Cash $
Receivables $
Inventories $
Total current assets $
Fixed assets $
Total assets $
Accounts payable $
Notes payable $
Accruals $
Total current liabilities $
Common stock $
Retained earnings $
Total liabilities and equity $
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gary Company follows the practice of recording prepaid expenses and unearned revenues in balance sheet accounts. Gary s annual accounting period ends on December 31, 2008 The following information concerns the adjusting entries to be recorded as of that date:
a. The Office Supplies account started this year with a $4,000 balance. During 2008, the company purchased supplies for $8,400 which was added to the Office Supplies account. The inventory of supplies available at December 31, 2008 totaled $1,800.
b. An analysis of the company’s insurance policies provided these facts:
Policy Date of Purchase Months of Coverage Cost
A January 1, 2007 24 $4,800
B April 1, 2008 36 $3,600
C July1, 2008 12 $5,400
The total premium for each policy was paid in full (for all months) at the purchase date. and the Prepaid Insurance account was debited for the full cost. (Year-end adjusting entries for Prepaid Insurance were properly recorded in all prior years.)
c. The company has 20 employees, who earn a total of $3,200 in salaries each working day. They are paid each Monday for their work in the five-day work week ending on the previous Friday. Assume that December 31, 2008 is a Tuesday, and all 20 employees worked the first two days of that week. Because New Year’s Day is a paid holiday, they will be paid salaries for five full days on Monday, January 6, 2009.
d. The company purchased a building on January 1, 2008. It cost $785,000 and is expected to have $35,000 salvage value at the end of its predicted 25-year life. Annual depreciation Is $30,000.
e. Since the company is not large enough to occupy the entire building it owns, it rented space to a tenant at $2,400 per month, starting on October 1, 2008. The rent was paid on time on October 1, and November 1, and the amount received was credited to the Rent Earned account. However, the tenant has not paid the December rent. The company has worked out an agreement with the tenant who has promised to pay both the December and January rent in full on January 15. The tenant has agreed to not fall behind again.
f. On December 1, the company rented space to another tenant for $3,200 per month. The tenant paid six months’ rent in advance on that date. The payment was recorded with a credit to the Unearned Rent account.
Required:
1. Use the information to prepare adjusting entries as of December 31, 2008.
2. Prepare journal entries to record the first subsequent cash transactions in 2009 for parts c and e.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P1-1A
Complete the following by inserting either a “+” or a “-” sign in the appropriate cell.If the transactions both increases and decreases a column, use a “+ / -“. The first transaction is complete for you as an example.
TransactionTransaction Total Total Total NetOperatingFinancingInvesting
AssetsLiabilitiesEquityIncomeActivityActivityActivity
NumberDescription
1Owner invests cash in exchange for stock
2Incurs legal costs on credit
3Pays cash for employee wages
4Borrows cash by signing long-term note payable
5Receives cash for services provided
6Buys land by signing note payable
7Buys office equipment for cash
8Provides services on credit
9Collects cash on receivable from transaction (8)
10Pays cash dividend
P1-8A
J. D. Simpson started The Simpson Co., a new business that began operations on May 1. The Simpson Co. completed the following transactions during its first month of operations.
May 1 J. D.Simpson invested $60,000 cash in the company in exchange for common stock.
1 The company rented a furnished office and paid $3,200 cash for May s rent.
3 The company purchased $1,680 of office equipment on credit.
5 The company paid $800 cash for this month s cleaning services.
8 The company provided consulting services for a client and immediately collected $4,600 cash.
12 The company provided $3,000 of consulting services for a client on credit.
15 The company paid $850 cash for an assistant s salary for the first half of this month.
20 The company received $3,000 cash payment for the services provided on May 12.
22 The company provided $2,800 of consulting services on credit.
25 The company received $2,800 cash payment for the services provided on May 22.
26 The company paid $1,680 cash for the office equipment purchased on May 3.
27 The company purchased $60 of advertising in this month s (May) local paper on credit; cash payment is due June 1.
28 The company paid $850 cash for an assistant s salary for the second half of this month.
30 The company paid $200 cash for this month s telephone bill.
30 The company paid $480 cash for this month s utilities.
31 The company paid $1,200 cash for dividends.
Required
1. Arrange the following asset, liability, and equity titles in a table like Exhibit 1.9: Cash; Accounts Receivable; Office Equipment; Accounts Payable; Common Stock; Dividends; Revenues; and Expenses.
2. Show effects of the transactions on the accounts of the accounting equation by recording increase and decreases in the appropriate columns. Do not determine new account balances after each transaction. Determine the final total for each account and verify that the equation is in balance.
3. Prepare an income statement for May, a statement of retained earnings for May, a May 31 balance sheet, and a statement of cash flows for May.
P2-3A
The accounting records of Fabiano Distribution show the following assets and liabilities as of December 31
2010 2011
Cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 52,500 $ 18,750
Accounts receivable . . . . . . . . 28,500 22,350
Office supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,500 3,300
Office equipment . . . . . . . . . . 138,000 147,000
Trucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,000 54,000
Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 180,000
Land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 45,000
Accounts payable . . . . . . . . . . 7,500 37,500
Note payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 105,000
Late in December 2011, the business purchased a small office building and land for $225,000. It paid $120,000 cash toward the purchase and a $105,000 note payable was signed for the balance. Mr. Fabiano had to invest $35,000 cash in the business (in exchange for stock) to enable it to pay the $120,000 cash. The business also pays $3,000 cash per month for dividends.
Required:
1. Prepare balance sheets for the business as of December 31, 2010 and 2011. (Hint: Report only total equity on the balance sheet and remember that total equity equals the difference between assets and liabilities.)
2. By comparing equity amounts from the balance sheets and using the additional information presented in this problem, prepare a calculation to show how much net income was earned by the business during 2011.
3. Compute the 2011 year-end debt ratio for the business
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Your assignment is to write five letters for five different audiences. The objective of each of the
first four letters is to let the recipient know that a request to carry a product is beingturned down.
The fifth letter involves a personal response. While abroad on business you made friends with
someone at a professional conference held in Japan. He has sent you a letter inviting you and
your family to come and visit when you are next in Japan. Your new friend wants you to visit his
home and dine with his family. Accept this invitation in acordial letter. ,Advice from Flood,
Weiss, and Thomas will be invaluable for completing the assignment.
Assignment Checklist:
Write 5 letters: 4 Business letters and 1 personal letter
Accommodate 5 different audiences
Using your Flood and Weiss texts for reference, communicate that their request is being
turned down in the 4 business letters
Accept the personal invitation to visit the Japanese family
Use the appropriate format and proper English mechanics according to your reading
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following (given in scrambled order) are accounts and balances from the accounting records of Alleg, Inc., as of December 31, 2012, after the books were closed for the year.
|
Common stock, authorized 21,000 share At $1 par value, issued 12,000 shares
|
$12,000
|
|
Additional paid-in capital
|
38,000
|
|
Cash
|
14,000
|
|
Marketable securities
|
17,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
26,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
16,000
|
|
Current maturities of long-term debt
|
11,000
|
|
Mortgages payable
|
80,000
|
|
Bonds payable
|
65,000
|
|
Inventory
|
33,000
|
|
Land and buildings
|
57,000
|
|
Machinery and equipment
|
120,000
|
|
Goodwill
|
13,000
|
|
Patents
|
9,000
|
|
Other assets
|
45,000
|
|
Deferred income taxes (long-term liability)
|
18,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
33,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
61,000
|
Bonds and mortgages generally have 10-30 years until maturity. Marketable securities are short-term investments that can be converted to cash in a matter of minutes.
Required:
- Prepare a classified balance sheet with a proper heading on a spreadsheet. For assets, use the classifications of current assets, plant and equipment, intangibles, and other assets. For liabilities, use the classifications of current liabilities and long-term liabilities.
- Compute the total asset turnover rate assuming that total revenues in 2012 were $682,500. Round to the nearest hundredth, e.g. 3.33.
- Assume that Alleg s primary competitor has an asset turnover of 2.12. What does this tell you about Alleg s asset management?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is available to reconcile Clark Company s book balance of cash with its bank
statement cash balance as of July 31, 2011.
a. On July 31, the company s Cash account has a $26,193 debit balance, but its July bank statement
shows a $28,020 cash balance.
b. Check No. 3031 for $1,380 and Check No. 3040 for $552 were outstanding on the June 30 bank reconciliation. Check No. 3040 is listed with the July canceled checks, but Check No. 3031 is not. Also, Check No. 3065 for $336 and Check No. 3069 for $2,148, both written in July, are not among the canceled checks on the July 31 statement.
c. In comparing the canceled checks on the bank statement with the entries in the accounting records, it is found that Check No. 3056 for July rent was correctly written and drawn for $1,250 but was erroneously entered in the accounting records as $1,230.
d. A credit memorandum enclosed with the July bank statement indicates the bank collected $9,000 cash on a non-interest-bearing note for Clark, deducted a $45 collection fee, and credited the remainder to its account. Clark had not recorded this event before receiving the statement.
e. A debit memorandum for $805 lists a $795 NSF check plus a $10 NSF charge. The check had been received from a customer, Jim Shaw. Clark has not yet recorded this check as NSF.
f. Enclosed with the July statement is a $15 debit memorandum for bank services. It has not yet been recorded because no previous notification had been received.
g. Clark s July 31 daily cash receipts of $10,152 were placed in the bank s night depository on that date,
but do not appear on the July 31 bank statement.
Required
1. Prepare the bank reconciliation for this company as of July 31, 2011.
2. Prepare the journal entries necessary to bring the company s book balance of cash into conformity
with the reconciled cash balance as of July 31, 2011.
Analysis Component
3. Assume that the July 31, 2011, bank reconciliation for this company is prepared and some items are
treated incorrectly. For each of the following errors, explain the effect of the error on (i) the adjusted
bank statement cash balance and (ii) the adjusted cash account book balance.
a. The company s unadjusted cash account balance of $26,193 is listed on the reconciliation as $26,139.
b. The bank s collection of the $9,000 note less the $45 collection fee is added to the bank statement
cash balance on the reconciliation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
The following information describes production activities of Truzor Manufacturing for the year:
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Actual raw materials used |
|
38,000 |
lbs. at $5.70 per lb. |
|
| Actual factory payroll |
|
6,000 |
hours for a total of $96,000 |
|
| Actual units produced |
|
30,000 |
|
|
|
|
Budgeted standards for each unit produced are 1.00 pounds of raw material at $5.80 per pound and 10.0 minutes of direct labor at $15.50 per hour.
|
| (1) |
Compute the direct materials price and quantity variances.(Input all amount as a positive value. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response)
|
|
|
|
| Price variance |
$ |
(Click to select)UFNone |
| Quantity variance |
$ |
(Click to select)NoneFU |
|
| (2) |
Compute the direct labor rate and efficiency variances. (Input all amount as a positive value. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Please round to the nearest whole number. Omit the “$” sign in your response)
|
|
|
|
| Rate variance |
$ |
(Click to select)NoneFU |
| Efficiency variance |
$ |
(Click to select)NoneUF |
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information pertains to Mountain High Campers.
A. Mountain High Campers estimates bad debt expense at 3/5% of credit sales. The company reported accounts receivable and allowance for uncollectible accounts balances of 486,000 and 220 (cr) respectively, at Dec. 31, 2012. During 2013, Mountain High s credit sales and collections were 415,000 and 519,000 respectively, and 3,200 in bad accounts were written off.
1. Prepare the adjusting entry to record bad debt expense for 2013 (show supporting calculations or use T accounts to support your answer).
2. Mountain High’s accounts receivable at December 31, 2013, are________________.
3. Mountain High’s adjusted allowance for uncollectible accounts at December 31, 2013, is_________.
4. How would the amount in A1 differ if the allowance account had an ending balance on December 31, 2012, of 120 (dr).
B. Mountain High estimates bad debts on an analysis of receivables. An aging schedule estimates bad debts to be 3000. Using the relevant data from Part A, answer the same 4 questions.
C. Prepare a summary journal entry (all bad accounts written off in a single entry) if Mountain High had used the direct write-off method of accounting for uncollectible accounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information reflects Cash flow and other activities of Framer Company for six months ending June 30.
Paid for Equipment 45,000
Paid for income taxes 3,000
Paid for insurance 1,000
Paid for interest 900.
Paid for utilities 790.
Paid for advertising 560.
Paid to owners 5,000
Paid to suppliers 28,000
Paid to employees 17,000
Depreciation Expense 13,500
Received from customers 99,000
Received from issuing long-term 40,000
Received from sale of land 18,000
1). what are the net cash flows from the operating activity for the period?
2). what are the net cash flow from the investing activity for the period?
3). what are the net cash flow from the financing activity for the period?
4). what was the net change in cash flow for the period?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is used for Lucky’s Inc. s monthly master budget.
June’s balance sheet balances:
|
Cash
|
$10,500
|
Accounts payable
|
$53,760
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$80,000
|
Capital stock
|
$260,000
|
|
Inventory
|
$26,000
|
Retained earnings
|
$2,740
|
|
Building and equipment (net)
|
$200,000
|
|
|
Actual sales for June and budgeted sales for July, August, and September:
|
June (actual)
|
$140,000
|
|
July (budget)
|
$320,000
|
|
August (budget)
|
$180,000
|
|
September (budget)
|
$200,000
|
Sales are 25% cash and 75% on credit. All credit sales are collected in the following month. There are no bad debts.
Gross margin percentage is 60% of sales.
The desired ending inventory is expected to be 20% of the following month’s cost of goods sold. One fifth of the purchases are paid for in the month of purchase, and the remaining balance is purchased on credit and paid in the following month.
The monthly cash operating expenses are $80,000, including the monthly depreciation expense of $7,000.
During July, Lucky’s Inc. will purchase new office equipment for $17,000 cash.
Dividends of $13,500 were declared and paid in July.
The company must maintain a minimum cash balance of $25,000. A line of credit is used to maintain this balance. Borrowing will be made in increments of $1,000. All borrowing is done at the beginning of the month, and repayments are made at the end of the month. The annual interest rate is 12%, paid when the loan is repaid (ignore accrual of interest).
Required:
Prepare a balance sheet, income statement, and cash budget for the month of July.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following is the Operating Statement for Silhouette Brands, Inc. I’ve added three columns of percentages to give you more data to consider as you evaluate the Operating Statement.
Keep in mind the following: Your grade for this assignment will be based not only upon getting correct answers, but also upon how well you demonstrate the depth and breadth of your knowledge and understanding of the material. A discussion of the material, not one or two word answers, is what is expected and upon what you will be graded. . 2002 2001 ’01 to ’02 . $ % of Sales $ % of Sales % increase Net sales 62349545 26072585 139.1% Cost of Goods Sold 51402174 82.4% 21010605 80.6% 144.6% Gross Profit 10947371 17.6% 5061980 19.4% 116.3% Advertising 1818126 2.9% 327479 1.3% 455.2% General & Administrative 8067331 12.9% 4162408 16.0% 93.8% Total Operating Exp 9885457 15.9% 4489887 17.2% 120.2% Income from Operations 1061914 1.7% 572093 2.2% 85.6% Interest Income 17977 0.0% 16237 0.1% 10.7% Gain on Marketable Securities 0.0% 41962 0.2% -100.0% Interest Expense -2400 0.0% -3184 0.0% -24.6% Total Other 15577 0.0% 55015 0.2% -71.7% Income Before Taxes 1077491 1.7% 627108 2.4% 71.8% Taxes 536143 0.9% 161000 0.6% 233.0% Net Income 541348 0.9% 466108 1.8% 16.1%
Consider the following questions in your evaluation: 1. What was the percentage increase in sales from 2001 to 2002? 2. What impact did the new sales have on the gross profit? 3. Were the new sales more or less profitable sales based upon their impact on the gross profit? 4. What happened to the advertising expenses ($ & %)? 5. Is the change in advertising likely to be long term? Why? 6. What impact did the new sales have on G&A (General & Administrative)? Why? 7. Are total operating expenses up or down as a percentage? 8. What impact does the change in operating expenses have on the bottom line? 9. Is income from operations up or down ($ & %)?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following relate to Eagle Corporation; assume a December 31, 2011 year end:
1. During 2011, Eagle Corporation purchased supplies for $2,500. At December 31, 2010, the supplies account reflected a balance of $750. At December 31, 2011, a count of the supplies shows $1,500 of supplies on hand.
2. Eagle Corporation leases some of its office space to another company. On October 1, 2011, Eagle received a $5,000 check from its tenant which was credited to Rent Revenue. The check is to satisfy four months of rent.
3. On February 1, 2011, Eagle borrowed $150,000 from Bank of America. The note is due in one year and carries an interest rate of 6%.
4. Eagle Corporation performed and completed services for clients in December 2011; payment for $15,000 of these services will not be collected until January.
5. On May 31, 2011, Eagle Corporation acquired equipment for $23,000. Eagle estimates that it will use the equipment for 4 years and that at the end of that period, the equipment will be worth $5,000.
Required:
1. Prepare the adjusting journal entry required (in proper format) for each of the above.
2. Prior to making the adjusting entries above, Eagle s accountant determined net income to be $8,000. Determine what Eagle should report as net income as of December 31, 2011 (show your computations for partial credit review).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Multiple-step income statement and report form of balance sheet
The following selected accounts and their current balances appear in the ledger of Aqua Co. for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2013:
Cash $ 83,500 Sales $3,625,000
Accounts Receivable 150,000 Sales Returns and Allowances 37,800
Merchandise Inventory 380,000 Sales Discounts 20,200
Office Supplies 15,000 Cost of Merchandise Sold 2,175,000
Prepaid Insurance 12,000 Sales Salaries Expense 388,800
Office Equipment 115,200 Advertising Expense 45,900
Accumulated Depreciation Depreciation Expense
Office Equipment 49,500 Store Equipment 8,300
Store Equipment 511,500 Miscellaneous Selling Expense 2,000
Accumulated Depreciation Office Salaries Expense 77,400
Store Equipment 186,700 Rent Expense 39,900
Accounts Payable 48,600 Insurance Expense 22,950
Salaries Payable 9,600 Depreciation Expense
Note Payable Office Equipment 16,200
(final payment due 2025) 54,000 Office Supplies Expense 1,650
Capital Stock 15,000 Miscellaneous Administrative
Retained Earnings 253,800 Expense 1,900
Dividends 125,000 Interest Expense 12,000
Instructions
1. Prepare a multiple-step income statement.
2. Prepare a retained earnings statement.
3. Prepare a report form of balance sheet, assuming that the current portion of the note payable is $8,000.
4. Briefly explain (a) how multiple-step and single-step income statements differ and (b) how report-form and account-form balance sheets differ.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
The following two events occurred for Tanger Co. on October 31, 2011, the end of its fiscal year.
|
|
a.
|
Tanger rents a building from its owner for $3,300 per month. By a prearrangement, the company delayed paying October’s rent until November 5. On this date, the company paid the rent for both October and November.
|
|
b.
|
Tanger rents space in a building it owns to a tenant for $700 per month. By prearrangement, the tenant delayed paying the October rent until November 8. On this date, the tenant paid the rent for both October and November.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In a formal business report to Dr. Chris Smith, identify any errors that were made in preparing the preliminary income statement. Dr. Smith is concerned because this information has to be given to the Pine Street Bank by the end of this course as a requirement for a small business loan. (Total – 8 points) Your report must include a list and explanation of each error that you found on the preliminary income statement. Required Information: – Formal business letter (1.5 points) – List and explanaton of at least 5 errors. (2.5 points); – Schedule of costs of goods manufactured (COGM) for the last quarter of last year ended December 31. (2 point); and – Corrected income statement. (2 points) – MLA citations (1 point deduction if the in-text citations and works cited are not in the correct MLA format.) Make sure you explain any changes that you made to the income statement for the quarter ended December 31 of last year. You will not get credit for your work if it is submitted after the end of week 3. Comment: In the business world you will be expected to know how to prepare a formal business letter. I expect you to prepare a letter that is well-written and free of grammatical errors. See Doc Sharing for assistance in preparing a formal business letter to Dr. Chris Smith. The requested information should come after the formal business letter. Week 4 Dr. Smith also wants you to prepare a comprehensive table of tax and information returns that PIBM must file during the year. Prepare a table of tax and information returns that the firm must file for the federal government and Commonwealth of Pennsylvania. Be sure to identify by title the when the tax and/or information returns must be filed. Consider using the following headings for the table (a) Identification/schedule numbers (for example, Form 941, Form 940, etc.),; (b) Title (for example, Employer s Quarterly Federal Tax Return, Employer s Annual Federal Unemployment (FUTA) Tax Return, etc.); (c) Filing Frequency (for example, weekly, monthly, annually, etc.); (d) Description (Provide a brief identifying description.); and Citations in the MLA format. Use the example below to format the tax and information returns Federal Format Example Form/Schedule Title When Filed Description Form 940 Employer s Annual Federal Unemployment Tax Return Annually Form 940 is used to report your annual Federal Unemployment Tax Act (FUTA) tax. The purpose of the FUTA tax is to provide funds for paying unemployment compensation to workers who have lost their jobs. Repeat this table for the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania. This information for the week 4 assignment is available on the Internet using a www.google.com or www.bing.com search. Comment: This is a research taxation assignment. Its purpose is to show you that companies must complete an array of filings. Be sure that your list of tax and information returns is comprehensive. Identifying less that six items will not be considered comprehensive. Go to the Internet to get this information. Scoring: – Federal government returns (3 points) – Commonwealth of Pennsylvania (3 points) – MLA citations (1 point deduction if the in-text citations and works cited are not in the correct MLA format.) You will not get credit for your work if it is submitted after the end of week 4. Week 6 Dr. Smith wants to expand the firm s retail operations to Canada in the next three years. Prepare a formal report to Dr. Smith that identifies the business taxes that PIBM might have to pay for a retail site located in Toronto, Canada. Submit the information by Dropbox by the end of week 6. – Prepare a properly formatted formal business letter addressed to Dr. Smith (1 point) – Provide a table that gives a comprehensive list of requirements for establishing and doing a business in Toronto. In the table consider the city’s business tax filings, registrations, business licenses, permits and other information filings (0.5 point for each item up to a maximum of 3 points) – Cite your sources in the MLA format. (1 point deduction if the in-text citations and works cited are not in the correct MLA format.) To find this information for this assignment, consider searches using the following words: – U.S. Consulate in Toronto – Establishing a Business in Toronto – Doing Business in Toronto
| Schedule 1 – Preliminary Income Statement and Related Sales Information |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Unit purchase price from manufacturer |
|
$ 200 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Bicycles sold to consumers |
|
|
1,600 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Unit selling price to consumer |
|
|
$ 520 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Philadelphia Bicycle Manufacturing Company, Inc. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Preliminary Income Statement |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For the Quarter Ended December 30, 2011 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sales |
|
|
|
|
|
$ 823,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Less: operating expenses |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Selling and administrative salaries |
|
$ 80,100 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Advertising |
|
|
|
$ 45,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cleaning supplies, factory |
|
|
$ 6,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Indirect labor costs |
|
|
$ 35,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation |
|
|
|
$ 85,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Direct labor cost |
|
|
$ 95,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Raw materials purchased |
|
|
$310,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Maintenance |
|
|
|
$ 47,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Rentals |
|
|
|
$ 65,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Insurance |
|
|
|
$ 9,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Utilities |
|
|
|
$ 40,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Travel, administration and sales |
|
$ 6,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$828,000 |
$ 828,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net operating profit/(loss) |
|
|
|
$ (5,000) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Schedule 2 – Allocation of costs/expenses between the factory and the administrative/selling offices. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Selling & |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Factory |
|
Administration |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Maintenance |
|
85% |
|
15% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Rentals |
|
95% |
|
5% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Insurance |
|
90% |
|
10% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Utilities |
|
80% |
|
20% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation |
|
90% |
|
10% |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Schedule 3 – Beginning and Ending Inventory |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Beginning |
|
End of |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
of Quarter |
|
Quarter |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Raw materials |
|
0 |
|
0 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Work-in-process |
|
0 |
|
0 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Finished goods |
|
0 |
|
0 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
All materials were used during the quarter. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Formworks Company prepares monthly budgets. The current budget plans for a September ending inventory of 15,000 units. Company policy is to end each month with merchandise inventory equal to a specified percent of budgeted sales for the following month. Budgeted sales and merchandise purchases for the three most recent months follows.
Sales (units) Purchases (units)
July 120,000 138,000
August 210,000 204,000
September 180,000 159,000
(1) Prepare the merchandise purchases budget for the months of July, August, and September.
(2) Compute the ratio of ending inventory to the next month’s sales for each budget prepared in part 1.
(3) How many units are budgeted for sale in October?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fougere Realtors, Inc. specializes in home re-sales. It earns revenue from selling fees. Fougere Realtors major costs are commissions for salespersons, listing agents, and listing companies. Its business has improved steadily over the last ten years. As usual, Chris Fougere, the managing partner of Fougere Realtors, Inc., received a report summarizing the performance for the most recent year.
Fougere Realtors, Inc.
Performance Report
For the year ended December 31, 2007
Budget Actual Variance
Number of home re-sales 180 202 22 F
Variable expenses
Sales commissions $1,102,950 $1,205,183 $102,233 U
Automobile 36,000 39,560 3,560 U
Advertising 171,000 192,690 21,690 U
General overhead 656,100 716,970 60,870 U
Total $1,966,050 $2,154,403 $188,353 U
Fixed expenses
General overhead 60,000 62,300 2,300 U
Total expenses $2,026,050 $2,216,703 $190,653 U
Required:
a) Explain the major weakness of this performance report and why all the variances for the variable expenses are unfavourable (U) (5 marks)
b) As a first step in helping Chris Fougere to evaluate cost / expense control in the organization, complete the following for the year ended December 31, 2007, assuming the only cost driver is the number of home re-sales. (Note: Indicate any variance as either favourable (F) or unfavourable (U).) (15 marks)
Budget Actual Variance
Number of home re-sales 202 202 0
Variable expenses
Sales commissions $ $ 1,205,183 _________
Automobile $ _________ 39,560 _________
Advertising $ _________ 192,690 _________
General overhead $ _________ 716,970 _________
Total $ _________ $2,154,403 _________
Fixed expenses
General overhead $ _________ 62,300 _________
Total expenses $ $2,216,703
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Foundations of Accounting I
Accounting Project
Written by: Karen Pitsch
Donna s Entertainment is a merchandising business. Their account balances as of November 30, 2012 (unless otherwise indicated), are as follows:
110 Cash $ 73,920
112 Accounts Receivable 34,250
113 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 11,000
115 Merchandise Inventory 123,900
116 Prepaid Insurance 3,750
117 Store Supplies 2,850
123 Store Equipment 100,800
124 Accumulated Depreciation-Store Equipment 20,160
210 Accounts Payable 21,450
211 Salaries Payable 0
218 Interest Payable 0
220 Note Payable (Due 2017) 15,000
310 P. Williams, Capital (January 1, 2012) 73,260
311 P. Williams, Drawing 50,000
312 Income Summary 0
410 Sales 853,445
411 Sales Returns and Allowances 20,020
412 Sales Discounts 13,200
510 Cost of Merchandise Sold 414,575
520 Sales Salaries Expense 74,400
521 Advertising Expense 18,000
522 Depreciation Expense 0
523 Store Supplies Expense 0
529 Miscellaneous Selling Expense 2,800
530 Office Salaries Expense 40,500
531 Rent Expense 18,600
532 Insurance Expense 0
533 Bad Debt Expense 0
539 Miscellaneous Administrative Expense 1,650
550 Interest Expense 1,100
Donna s Entertainment uses the perpetual inventory system and the First-in, Last-out costing method. Transportation-in and purchase discounts should be added to the Inventory Control Sheet, but since this will complicate the computation of the First-in, Last-out costing method, please ignore this step in the process. They also use the Allowance Method for bad debt.
The Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary Ledgers along with the Inventory Control Sheet should be updated as each transaction affects them (daily).
Donna s Entertainment sells four types of television entertainment units.
The sale prices of each are:
TV A: $3,500
TV B: $5,250
TV C: $6,125
PS D: $9,000
During December, the last month of the accounting year, the following transactions were completed:
Dec. 1. Issued check number 2632 for the December rent, $2,600.
3. Purchased three TV C units on account from Prince Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $11,100.
4. Issued check number 2633 to pay the transportation changes on purchase of December 3, $400. (NOTE: Do not include shipping and purchase discounts to the Inventory Control sheet for this project.)
6. Sold four TV A and four TV B on account to Albert Co., invoice 891, terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point.
10. Sold two projector systems for cash.
11. Purchased store supplies on account from Matt Co., terms n/30, $580.
13. Issued check to Prince Co. number 2634 for the full amount due, less discount allowed.
14. Issued credit memo for one TV A unit returned on sale of December 6.
15. Issued check number 2635 for advertising expense for last half of December, $1,500.
16. Received cash from Albert Co. for the full amount due (less return of December 14 and discount).
19. Issued check number 2636 to buy two TV C units, $7,600.
19. Issued check number 2637 for $6,100 to Joseph Co. on account.
20. Sold five TV C units on account to Cameron Co., invoice number
892, terms 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point.
20. For the convenience of the customer, issued check number 2638 for shipping charges on sale of December 20, $700.
21. Received $12,250 cash from McKenzie Co. on account, no discount.
21. Purchased three projector systems on account from Elisha Co., terms 1/10, n/30, FOB destination, $15,600.
24. Received notification that Marie Co. has been granted bankruptcy with no
amount of recovery. We are to write-off her amount due. (Note: See page
402 for entry required.)
25. Issued a debit memo for return of $5,200 because of a damaged projection
system purchased on December 21, receiving credit from the seller.
26. Issued check number 2639 for refund of cash on sales made for cash, $600. (Customer was going to return goods until an allowance was arranged.)
27. Issued check number 2640 for sales salaries of $1,750 and office
salaries of $950.
28. Purchased store equipment on account from Matt Co., terms n/30, FOB
destination, $1,200.
29. Issued check number 2641 for store supplies, $470.
30. Sold four TV C units on account to Randall Co., invoice number 893,
terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point.
30. Received cash from sale of December 20, less discount, plus transportation
paid on December 20. (Round calculations to the nearest dollar.)
30. Issued check number 2642 for purchase of December 21, less return
of December 25 and discount.
30. Issued a debit memo for $300 of the purchase returned from
December 28.
Instructions:
1. Enter the balances of each of the accounts in the appropriate
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Foundations of Accounting I Accounting Project
Written by: Karen Pitsch Special thanks to Donna Larner
Randiddle Co. is a merchandising business. Their account balances as of November 30, 2012 (unless otherwise indicated), are as follows:
110 Cash $ 74,370 112 Accounts Receivable 6,178 113 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 650 115 Merchandise Inventory 2,346 116 Prepaid Insurance 5,750 117 Store Supplies 2,850 123 Store Equipment 100,800 124 Accumulated Depreciation-Store Equipment 31,060 210 Accounts Payable 3,286 211 Salaries Payable 0 218 Interest Payable 0 220 Note Payable (Due 2017) 30,000 ($6,000 to be paid in 2013) 310 Randiddle, Capital (January 1, 2012) 46,288 311 Randiddle, Withdrawals 60,000 312 Income Summary 0 410 Sales 296,130 411 Sales Returns and Allowances 10,020 412 Sales Discounts 7,200 510 Cost of Goods Sold 30,250 520 Sales Salaries Expense 34,400 521 Advertising Expense 18,000 522 Depreciation Expense 0 523 Store Supplies Expense 0 529 Miscellaneous Selling Expense 2,800 530 Office Salaries Expense 25,500 531 Rent Expense 24,200 532 Insurance Expense 0 533 Bad Debt Expense 0 539 Miscellaneous Administrative Expense 1,650 550 Interest Expense 1,100
Randiddle Co. uses the perpetual inventory system and the Last-in, First-out costing method. Transportation-in and purchase discounts should be added to the Inventory Control Sheet, but since this will complicate the computation of the Last-in, First-out costing method, please ignore this step in the process. They also use the Allowance Method for bad debt.
The Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary Ledgers along with the Inventory Control Sheet should be updated as each transaction affects them (daily).
Randiddle Co. sells three types of microwave ovens. The sale prices of each are:
900 watt microwave: $199 1000 watt microwave: $299 1200 watt microwave: $499
1794..1996 During December, the last month of the accounting year, the following transactions were completed:
Dec. 1. Issued check number 2632 for the December rent, $2,200. 2. Sold two 1200 watt microwaves for cash. 4. Purchased four 1000 watt microwaves on account from Matt Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $596. 5. Issued check number 2633 to pay the transportation charges on purchase of December 4, $89. (NOTE: Debit Merchandise Inventory. Do not include shipping and purchase discounts to the Inventory Control sheet for this project.) 6. Sold six 1000 watt microwaves and four 1200 watt microwaves on account to Briana Co., invoice 891, terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. 8. Issued check number 2634 for refund of cash on sales made for cash, $150. (Customer was going to return goods until an allowance was arranged.) 10. Purchased store supplies on account from Prince Co., terms n/30, $310. 10. Issued check to Matt Co. number 2635 for the full amount due, less discount allowed. (Round discount to nearest dollar.) 11. Paid Prince Co. full amount due, check number 2636. 12. Issued credit memo for one 1000 watt microwave returned on sale of December 6. (NOTE: Assume the returned microwave was from the 11/30 inventory) 13. Issued check number 2637 for advertising expense for last half of December, $3,000. 14. Received cash from Briana Co. for the full amount due (less return of December 12 and discount; round to nearest dollar). 19. Issued check number 2638 to buy five 900 watt microwaves, $495. 19. Issued check number 2639 for $596 to Joseph Co. on account. 20. Sold seven 900 watt microwaves on account to Cameron Co., invoice number 892, terms 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. 20. To expedite sale on Dec. 20, issued check number 2640 for shipping charges on sale to Cameron on December 20, $120 (NOTE: Cameron Co. will be reimbursing us for this shipping cost). 21. Received $1,396 cash from McKenzie Co. on account, no discount. 21. Purchased three 1200 watt microwaves on account from Elisha Co., terms 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $747, shipping $78 (NOTE: Debit Merchandise Inventory $825, but only put $747 in the Inventory Control Sheet). 24. Received notification that Marie Co. has been granted bankruptcy with no amount of recovery. We are to write-off her amount due. 26. Issued a debit memo for return of $249 because of damage to one 1200 watt microwave purchased on December 21, receiving credit from the seller. 27. Issued check number 2641 for sales salaries of $2,050 and office salaries of $1,400. 28. Purchased store equipment on account from Joseph Co., terms n/30, FOB destination, $1,200. 29. Issued check number 2642 for store supplies, $70. 29. Purchased seven 1000 watt microwave from Prince Co, terms 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, for $1,113 on account, shipping $107. 30. Sold eight 1000 watt microwaves on account to Briana Co., invoice number 893, terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. 30. Received cash from sale of December 20, less discount, plus transportation paid on December 20. (Round calculations to the nearest dollar.) 31. Issued check number 2643 for purchase of December 21, less return of December 25 and discount. (Round discount to the nearest dollar.) 31. Issued a debit memo for $200 of the purchase returned from December 28.
Instructions:
1. Enter the balances of each of the accounts in the appropriate balance column of the General Ledger (B-S and I-S Ledger). Write Balance in the item section, and place a (x) in the Post Reference column. 2. Journalize the transactions in a sales journal, purchases journal, cash receipts journal, cash payments journal, or general journal as illustrated in chapter 7. Also post to the Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary ledgers and Inventory Control Sheet as needed. 3. Total each column on the special journals and prove the journals. 4. Post the totals of the account named columns and individually post the Other Accounts columns as well to the General Ledger. 5. Prepare the Schedule of Accounts Receivable and the Schedule of Accounts Payable (their total amount must equal the amount in their controlling general ledger account). 6. Prepare the unadjusted trial balance on the worksheet. 7. Complete the worksheet for the year ended December 31, 2012, using the following adjustment data: a. Merchandise inventory on December 31 $1,090 b. Insurance expired during the year 2,250 c. Store supplies on hand on December 31 850 d. Depreciation for the current year needs to be calculated. The business uses the Straight-line method, the store equipment has a useful life of 10 years with no salvage value. (NOTE: the purchase and return will not be included as the dates of the transactions were after the 15th of the month). e. Accrued salaries on December 31: Sales salaries $1,075 Office salaries 540 $1,615 f. The note payable terms are at 8%, payment is not being made until Jan. 3, 2013. Interest must be recognized for one month. g. Calculate the Bad Debt adjustment amount; net realizable value of Accounts Receivable is determined to be $6,313.
8. Prepare a multiple-step income statement, a statement of owner s equity, and a classified balance sheet in good form. (Recommend review of Current Liabilities on page 149.) 9. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. 10. Journalize and post the closing entries. Indicate closed accounts by inserting a zero in both balance columns opposite the closing entry. 11. Prepare a post-closing trial balance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Stock A’s beta is 1.5 and Stock B’s beta is 0.5. Which of the following statements must be true about these securities? (Assume market equilibrium.)
a. The expected return on Stock A should be greater than that on B.
b. Stock B must be a more desirable addition to a portfolio than A.
c. The expected return on Stock B should be greater than that on A.
d. Stock A must be a more desirable addition to a portfolio than B.
e. When held in isolation, Stock A has more risk than Stock B.
An individual has $35,000 invested in a stock with a beta of 0.3 and another $75,000 invested in a stock with a beta of 1.7. If these are the only two investments in her portfolio, what is her portfolio’s beta? Round your answer to two decimal places.
Problem 6-6
Required Rate of Return
Suppose rRF = 5%, rM = 11%, and rA = 15%.
a. Calculate Stock A’s beta. Round your answer to two decimal places.
b. If Stock A’s beta were 2.2, then what would be A’s new required rate of return? Round your answer to two decimal places.
%
Scheuer Enterprises has a beta of 1.10, the real risk-free rate is 2.00%, investors expect a 3.00% future inflation rate, and the market risk premium is 4.70%. What is Scheuer’s required rate of return?
a. 9.92%
b. 9.43%
c. 10.42%
d. 10.17%
e. 9.67%
Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. A large portfolio of randomly selected stocks will always have a standard deviation of returns that is less than the standard deviation of a portfolio with fewer stocks, regardless of how the stocks in the smaller portfolio are selected.
b. If you add enough randomly selected stocks to a portfolio, you can completely eliminate all of the market risk from the portfolio.
c. A large portfolio of randomly selected stocks will have a standard deviation of returns that is greater than the standard deviation of a 1-stock portfolio if that one stock has a beta less than 1.0.
d. A large portfolio of stocks whose betas are greater than 1.0 will have less market risk than a single stock with a beta = 0.8.
e. Diversifiable risk can be reduced by forming a large portfolio, but normally even highly-diversified portfolios are subject to market (or systematic) risk.
Jane has a portfolio of 20 average stocks, and Dick has a portfolio of 2 average stocks. Assuming the market is in equilibrium, which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. Jane’s portfolio will have less diversifiable risk and also less market risk than Dick’s portfolio.
b. Dick’s portfolio will have more diversifiable risk, the same market risk, and thus more total risk than Jane’s portfolio, but the required (and expected) returns will be the same on both portfolios.
c. The required return on Jane’s portfolio will be lower than that on Dick’s portfolio because Jane’s portfolio will have less total risk.
d. If the two portfolios have the same beta, their required returns will be the same, but Jane’s portfolio will have less market risk than Dick’s.
e. The expected return on Jane’s portfolio must be lower than the expected return on Dick’s portfolio because Jane is more diversified.
Inflation, recession, and high interest rates are economic events that are best characterized as being
a. systematic risk factors that can be diversified away.
b. irrelevant except to governmental authorities like the Federal Reserve.
c. risks that are beyond the control of investors and thus should not be considered by security analysts or portfolio managers.
d. among the factors that are responsible for market risk.
e. company-specific risk factors that can be diversified away.
Assume that investors have recently become more risk averse, so the market risk premium has increased. Also, assume that the risk-free rate and expected inflation have not changed. Which of the following is most likely to occur?
a. The required rate of return for an average stock will increase by an amount equal to the increase in the market risk premium.
b. The required rate of return for each individual stock in the market will increase by an amount equal to the increase in the market risk premium.
c. The required rate of return on the market, rM, will not change as a result of these changes.
d. The required rate of return on a riskless bond will decline.
e. The required rate of return will decline for stocks whose betas are less than 1.0.
Problem 6-13
Historical Returns: Expected and Required Rates of Return
eBook
You have observed the following returns over time:
Year Stock X Stock Y Market
2006 13% 13% 10%
2007 21 6 8
2008 -16 -3 -12
2009 5 2 1
2010 19 11 18
Assume that the risk-free rate is 5% and the market risk premium is 16%
a. What is the beta of Stock X? Round your answer to two decimal places.
What is the beta of Stock Y? Round your answer to two decimal places.
b. What is the required rate of return on Stock X? Round your answer to two decimal places.
%
What is the required rate of return on Stock Y? Round your answer to two decimal places.
c. What is the required rate of return on a portfolio consisting of 80% of Stock X and 20% of Stock Y? Round your answer to two decimal places.
%
d. If Stock X’s expected return is 24%, is Stock X under- or overvalued?
I. Stock Y is undervalued, because its expected return is below its required rate of return.
II. Stock X is overvalued, because its expected return exceeds its required rate of return.
III. Stock X is overvalued, because its expected return its is below required rate of return.
IV. Stock Y is undervalued, because its expected return exceeds its required rate of return.
V. Stock X is undervalued, because its expected return is below its required rate of return.
Problem 6-3
Required Rates of Return
10. Assume that the risk-free rate is 3% and that the market risk premium is 6%.
What is the required rate of return on a stock with a beta of 1.1? Round your answer to two decimal places.
%
What is the required rate of return on a stock with a beta of 0.7? Round your answer to two decimal places.
%
11. Stock A has a beta of 0.8 and Stock B has a beta of 1.2. 50% of Portfolio P is invested in Stock A and 50% is invested in Stock B. If the market risk premium (rM rRF) were to increase but the risk-free rate (rRF) remained constant, which of the following would occur?
a. The required return would increase for Stock A but decrease for Stock B.
b. The required return on Portfolio P would remain unchanged.
c. The required return would decrease by the same amount for both Stock A and Stock B.
d. The required return would increase for Stock B but decrease for Stock A.
e. The required return would increase for both stocks but the increase would be greater for Stock B than for Stock A.
12. Stock A’s beta is 1.5 and Stock B’s beta is 0.5. Which of the following statements must be true, assuming the CAPM is correct.
a. Stock A would be a more desirable addition to a portfolio then Stock B.
b. When held in isolation, Stock A has more risk than Stock B.
c. In equilibrium, the expected return on Stock B will be greater than that on Stock A.
d. Stock B would be a more desirable addition to a portfolio than A.
e. In equilibrium, the expected return on Stock A will be greater than that on B.
13. Assume that you manage a $10.00 million mutual fund that has a beta of 1.05 and a 9.50% required return. The risk-free rate is 4.20%. You now receive another $5.00 million, which you invest in stocks with an average beta of 0.65. What is the required rate of return on the new portfolio? (Hint: You must first find the market risk premium, then find the new portfolio beta.)
a. 9.74%
b. 9.51%
c. 9.05%
d. 8.83%
e. 9.27%
14. Assume that in recent years both expected inflation and the market risk premium (rM rRF) have declined. Assume also that all stocks have positive betas. Which of the following would be most likely to have occurred as a result of these changes?
a. The required returns on all stocks have fallen, but the fall has been greater for stocks with higher betas.
b. The average required return on the market, rM, has remained constant, but the required returns have fallen for stocks that have betas greater than 1.0.
c. The required returns on all stocks have fallen, but the decline has been greater for stocks with lower betas.
d. The required returns on all stocks have fallen by the same amount.
e. Required returns have increased for stocks with betas greater than 1.0 but have declined for stocks with betas less than 1.0.
15. Problem 6-9
Portfolio Required Return
16. Suppose you manage a $4.815 million fund that consists of four stocks with the following investments:
Stock Investment Beta
A $440,000 1.50
B 625,000 -0.50
C 1,100,000 1.25
D 2,650,000 0.75
If the market’s required rate of return is 12% and the risk-free rate is 6%, what is the fund’s required rate of return? Round your answer to two decimal places.
%
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Course name: Foundations of Financial Management (10248) – Fall I, 2013
Assignment name: Week 6 Questions/Problems
Problem 7-9
Declining Growth Stock Valuation
1. Brushy Mountain Mining Company’s ore reserves are being depleted, so its sales are falling. Also, its pit is getting deeper each year, so its costs are rising. As a result, the company’s earnings and dividends are declining at the constant rate of 4% per year. If D0 = $6 and rs = 18%, what is the value of Brushy Mountain Mining’s stock? Round your answer to the nearest cent.
$
Problem 7-4
Preferred Stock Valuation
2. Nick’s Enchiladas Incorporated has preferred stock outstanding that pays a dividend of $3 at the end of each year. The preferred stock sells for $40 a share. What is the stock’s required rate of return? Round the answer to two decimal places.
Problem 7-2
Constant Growth Valuation
Boehm Incorporated is expected to pay a $3.40 per share dividend at the end of this year (i.e., D1 = $3.40). The dividend is expected to grow at a constant rate of 10% a year. The required rate of return on the stock, rs, is 17%. What is the value per share of the company’s stock? Round your answer to the nearest cent.
$
Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. The constant growth model takes into consideration the capital gains investors expect to earn on a stock.
b. Two firms with the same expected dividend and growth rates must also have the same stock price.
c. It is appropriate to use the constant growth model to estimate a stock’s value even if its growth rate is never expected to become constant.
d. If a stock has a required rate of return rs = 12%, and if its dividend is expected to grow at a constant rate of 5%, this implies that the stock’s dividend yield is also 5%.
e. The price of a stock is the present value of all expected future dividends, discounted at the dividend growth rate.
If in the opinion of a given investor a stock’s expected return exceeds its required return, this suggests that the investor thinks
a. the stock should be sold.
b. the stock is a good buy.
c. management is probably not trying to maximize the price per share.
d. dividends are not likely to be declared.
e. the stock is experiencing supernormal growth.
Companies can issue different classes of common stock. Which of the following statements concerning stock classes is CORRECT?
a. All firms have several classes of common stock.
b. All common stocks, regardless of class, must have the same voting rights.
c. All common stocks fall into one of three classes: A, B, and C.
d. Some class or classes of common stock are entitled to more votes per share than other classes.
e. All common stock, regardless of class, must pay the same dividend.
7.Which of the following statements is CORRECT, assuming stocks are in equilibrium?
a. Assume that the required return on a given stock is 13%. If the stock’s dividend is growing at a constant rate of 5%, its expected dividend yield is 5% as well.
b. A required condition for one to use the constant growth model is that the stock’s expected growth rate exceeds its required rate of return.
c. The dividend yield on a constant growth stock must equal its expected total return minus its expected capital gains yield.
d. A stock’s dividend yield can never exceed its expected growth rate.
e. Other things held constant, the higher a company’s beta coefficient, the lower its required rate of return.
8. A share of common stock just paid a dividend of $1.00. If the expected long-run growth rate for this stock is 5.4%, and if investors’ required rate of return is 11.4%, what is the stock price?
a. $17.13
b. $16.70
c. $17.57
d. $16.28
e. $18.01
9. A company currently pays a dividend of $3.25 per share, D0 = 3.25. It is estimated that the company’s dividend will grow at a rate of 23% percent per year for the next 2 years, then the dividend will grow at a constant rate of 6% thereafter. The company’s stock has a beta equal to 1.55, the risk-free rate is 7.5 percent, and the market risk premium is 6 percent. What is your estimate is the stock’s current price? Round your answer to the nearest cent.
$
10. A stock is expected to pay a year-end dividend of $2.00, i.e., D1 = $2.00. The dividend is expected to decline at a rate of 5% a year forever (g = 5%). If the company is in equilibrium and its expected and required rate of return is 15%, which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. The company’s current stock price is $20.
b. The company’s dividend yield 5 years from now is expected to be 10%.
c. The company’s expected capital gains yield is 5%.
d. The constant growth model cannot be used because the growth rate is negative.
e. The company’s expected stock price at the beginning of next year is $9.50.
11. The beta coefficient for Stock C is bC = 0.6, and that for Stock D is bD = – 0.6. (Stock D’s beta is negative, indicating that its rate of return rises whenever returns on most other stocks fall. There are very few negative-beta stocks, although collection agency and gold mining stocks are sometimes cited as examples.)
a. If the risk-free rate is 8%and the expected rate of return on an average stock is 11%, what are the required rates of return on Stocks C and D? Round the answers to two decimal places.
1. rC =
2. rD =
b. For Stock C, suppose the current price, P0, is $25; the next expected dividend, D1, is $1.50; and the stock’s expected constant growth rate is 4%. Is the stock in equilibrium? Explain, and describe what would happen if the stock is not in equilibrium.
I. In this situation, the expected rate of return = 9.80%. However, the required rate of return is 10%. Investors will seek to buy the stock, raising its price to $25.86. At this price, the stock will be in equilibrium.
II. In this situation, the expected rate of return = 10%. However, the required rate of return is 9.80%. Investors will seek to sell the stock, raising its price to $25.86. At this price, the stock will be in equilibrium.
III. In this situation, the expected rate of return = 9.80%. However, the required rate of return is 10%. Investors will seek to sell the stock, raising its price to $25.86. At this price, the stock will be in equilibrium.
IV. In this situation, the expected rate of return = 10%. However, the required rate of return is 9.80%. Investors will seek to buy the stock, raising its price to $25.86. At this price, the stock will be in equilibrium.
V. In this situation, both the expected rate of return and the required rate of return are equal. Therefore, the stock is in equilibrium at its current price.
12. For a stock to be in equilibrium, that is, for there to be no long-term pressure for its price to depart from its current level, then
a. the past realized return must be equal to the expected return during the same period.
b. the expected return must be equal to both the required future return and the past realized return.
c. the expected future return must be less than the most recent past realized return.
d. the expected future returns must be equal to the required return.
e. the required return must equal the realized return in all periods.
13. Investors require a 15% rate of return on Brooks Sisters’ stock (rs = 15%).
a. What would the value of Brooks’s stock be if the previous dividend was D0 = $3.25 and if investors expect dividends to grow at a constant compound annual rate of (1) – 2%, (2) 0%, (3) 7%, or (4) 12%? Round your answers to the nearest cent.
1. $
2. $
3. $
4. $
b. Using data from part a, what is the Gordon (constant growth) model’s value for Brooks Sisters’s stock if the required rate of return is 15% and the expected growth rate is (1) 15% or (2) 23%? Are these reasonable results? Explain.
1.
2.
c. Is it reasonable to expect that a constant growth stock would have g > rs?
14. The risk-free rate of return, rRF , is 11%; the required rate of return on the market, rM, 15%; and Schuler Company’s stock has a beta coefficient of 1.7.
a. If the dividend expected during the coming year, D1, is $2.00, and if g is a constant 1.75%, then at what price should Schuler’s stock sell? Round your answer to the nearest cent.
$
b. Now, suppose the Federal Reserve Board increases the money supply, causing a fall in the risk-free rate to 6% and rM to 13%. How would this affect the price of the stock? Round your answer to the nearest cent.
$
c. In addition to the change in part b, suppose investors’ risk aversion declines; this fact, combined with the decline in rRF, causes rM to fall to 8%. At what price would Schuler’s stock sell? Round your answer to the nearest cent.
$
d. Suppose Schuler has a change in management. The new group institutes policies that increase the expected constant growth rate to 7%. Also, the new management stabilizes sales and profits, and thus causes the beta coefficient to decline from 1.7 to 0.7. Assume that rRF and rM are equal to the values in part c. After all these changes, what is Schuler’s new equilibrium price? (Note: D1 goes to $2.10.) Round your answer to the nearest cent.
$
15. The expected return on Natter Corporation’s stock is 14%. The stock’s dividend is expected to grow at a constant rate of 8%, and it currently sells for $50 a share. Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. The stock’s dividend yield is 7%.
b. The stock’s dividend yield is 8%.
c. The current dividend per share is $4.00.
d. The stock price is expected to be $54 a share one year from now.
e. The stock price is expected to be $57 a share one year from now.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Course name: Foundations of Financial Management (10248) – Fall I, 2013
Assignment name: Week 7 Questions/Problems
1. Use the Black-Scholes model to find the price for a call option with the following inputs: (1) current stock price is $32, (2) strike price is $35, (3) time to expiration is 6 months, (4) annualized risk-free rate is 3%, and (5) variance of stock return is 0.26. Round your answer to the nearest cent.
$
2. A call option on the stock of Bedrock Boulders has a market price of $7. The stock sells for $29 a share, and the option has an exercise price of $24 a share.What is the exercise value of the call option?
$
What is the option’s time value?
$
3. The current price of a stock is $50, the annual risk-free rate is 6%, and a 1-year call option with a strike price of $55 sells for $7.20. What is the value of a put option, assuming the same strike price and expiration date as for the call option?
a. $7.71
b. $8.55
c. $7.33
d. $9.00
e. $8.12
4. Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. As the stock’s price rises, the time value portion of an option on a stock increases because the difference between the price of the stock and the fixed strike price increases.
b. Issuing options provides companies with a low cost method of raising capital.
c. The potential loss on an option decreases as the option sells at higher and higher prices because the profit margin gets bigger.
d. The market value of an option depends in part on the option’s time to maturity and also on the variability of the underlying stock’s price.
e. An option’s value is determined by its exercise value, which is the market price of the stock less its striking price. Thus, an option can’t sell for more than its exercise value.
5. Call options on XYZ Corporation’s common stock trade in the market. Which of the following statements is most correct, holding other things constant?
a. If XYZ pays a dividend, then its option holders will not receive a cash payment, but the strike price of the option will be reduced by the amount of the dividend.
b. The higher the strike price on XYZ’s options, the higher the option’s price will be.
c. Assuming the same strike price, an XYZ call option that expires in one month will sell at a higher price than one that expires in three months.
d. The price of these call options is likely to rise if XYZ’s stock price rises.
e. If XYZ’s stock price stabilizes (becomes less volatile), then the price of its options will increase.
Deeble Construction Co.’s stock is trading at $30 a share. Call options on the company’s stock are also available, some with a strike price of $25 and some with a strike price of $35. Both options expire in three months. Which of the following best describes the value of these options?
a. The options with the $25 strike price will sell for less than the options with the $35 strike price.
b. If Deeble’s stock price rose by $5, the exercise value of the options with the $25 strike price would also increase by $5.
c. The options with the $35 strike price have an exercise value greater than $0.
d. The options with the $25 strike price have an exercise value greater than $5.
e. The options with the $25 strike price will sell for $5.
The exercise price on one of Flanagan Company’s options is $15, its exercise value is $21, and its time value is $4. What are the option’s market value and the price of the stock?
Market value $
Price of the stock $
Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. LEAPS are very short-term options that were created relatively recently and now trade in the market.
b. An option holder is not entitled to receive dividends unless he or she exercises their option before the stock goes ex dividend.
c. Options typically sell for less than their exercise value.
d. Put options give investors the right to buy a stock at a certain strike price before a specified date.
e. Call options give investors the right to sell a stock at a certain strike price before a specified date
An option that gives the holder the right to sell a stock at a specified price at some future time is
a. a call option.
b. a naked option.
c. a put option.
d. an out-of-the-money option.
e. a covered option.
Suppose you believe that Delva Corporation’s stock price is going to decline from its current level of $82.50 sometime during the next 5 months. For $510.25 you could buy a 5-month put option giving you the right to sell 100 shares at a price of $85 per share. If you bought this option for $510.25 and Delva’s stock price actually dropped to $60, what would your pre-tax net profit be?
a. $2,193.70
b. $2,303.38
c. $1,989.75
d. $510.25
e. $2,089.24
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Course name: Foundations of Financial Management (10248) – Fall I, 2013
Assignment name: Week 1 Questions
1. Suppose the U.S. Treasury announces plans to issue $50 billion of new bonds. Assuming the announcement was not expected, what effect, other things held constant, would that have on bond prices and interest rates?
a. There would be no changes in either prices or interest rates.
b. Prices would decline and interest rates would rise.
c. Prices and interest rates would both rise.
d. Prices would rise and interest rates would decline.
e. Prices and interest rates would both decline.
2. Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. Shareholders in a regular corporation (not an S corporation) pay higher taxes than owners of an otherwise identical proprietorship.
b. Corporate shareholders are exposed to unlimited liability.
c. Corporations generally face fewer regulations than sole proprietorships.
d. Corporate shareholders are exposed to unlimited liability, and this factor may be compounded by the tax disadvantages of incorporation.
e. It is usually easier to transfer ownership in a corporation than it is to transfer ownership in a sole proprietorship.
3. Jane Doe, who has substantial personal wealth and income, is considering the possibility of starting a new business in the chemical waste management field. She will be the sole owner, and she has enough funds to finance the operation. The business will have a relatively high degree of risk, and it is expected that the firm will incur losses for the first few years. However, the prospects for growth and positive future income look good, and Jane plans to have the firm pay out all of its income as dividends to her once it is well established. Which of the legal forms of business organization would probably best suit her needs?
a. Regular corporation, because of the limited liability.
b. Partnership, but only if she needs additional capital.
c. S corporation, to gain some tax advantages and also to obtain limited liability.
d. In this situation, the various forms of organization seem equally desirable.
e. Proprietorship, because of ease of entry.
4. Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. Sole proprietorships and partnerships generally have a tax advantage over many corporations, especially large ones.
b. Sole proprietorships are subject to more regulations than corporations.
c. One of the disadvantages of incorporating a business is that the owners then become subject to liabilities in the event the firm goes bankrupt.
d. Corporations of all types are subject to the corporate income tax.
e. In any type of partnership, every partner has the same rights, privileges, and liability exposure as every other partner.
5. Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. A fast-growth company would be more likely to set up as a partnership for its business organization than would a slow-growth company.
b. Corporations are at a disadvantage relative to partnerships because they have to file more reports to state and federal agencies, including the Securities and Exchange Administration, even if they are not publicly owned.
c. Partnerships have difficulty attracting capital in part because of their unlimited liability, the lack of impermanence of the organization, and difficulty in transferring ownership.
d. A major disadvantage of a partnership relative to a corporation as a form of business organization is the high cost and practical difficulty of its formation.
e. In a regular partnership, liability for the firm’s debts is limited to the amount a particular partner has invested in the business.
6. Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. While the distinctions are blurring as investment banks are today buying commercial banks, and vice versa, investment banks generally specialize in lending money, whereas commercial banks generally help companies raise capital from other parties.
b. Consumer automobile loans are evidenced by legal documents called “promissory notes,” and these individual notes are traded in the money market.
c. Capital market transactions involve only the purchase and sale of equity securities, i.e., common stocks.
d. The New York Stock Exchange is an auction market with a physical location.
e. If an investor sells shares of stock through a broker, then this would be a primary market transaction.
7. Which of the following is a primary market transaction?
a. You sell 200 shares of IBM stock on the NYSE through your broker.
b. IBM issues 2,000,000 shares of new stock and sells them to the public through an investment banker.
c. You buy 200 shares of IBM stock from your brother. The trade is not made through a broker you just give him cash and he gives you the stock.
d. One financial institution buys 200,000 shares of IBM stock from another institution. An investment banker arranges the transaction.
e. You invest $10,000 in a mutual fund, which then uses the money to buy $10,000 of IBM shares on the NYSE.
8. Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. The financial manager should seek that combination of assets, liabilities, and capital that will generate the largest expected projected after-tax income over the relevant time horizon, generally the coming year.
b. Potential agency problems can arise between stockholders and managers, because managers hired as agents to act on behalf of the owners may instead make decisions favorable to themselves rather than the stockholders.
c. The proper goal of the financial manager should be to attempt to maximize the firm’s expected cash flows, because this will add the most to the wealth of the individual shareholders.
d. The riskiness inherent in a firm’s earnings per share (EPS) depends on the characteristics of the projects the firm selects, and thus on the firm’s assets. However, EPS is not affected by the manner in which those assets are financed.
e. Large, publicly-owned firms like AT&T and GM are controlled by their management teams. Ownership is generally widely dispersed, hence managers have great freedom in how they manage the firm. Managers may operate in stockholders’ best interests, but they may also operate in their own personal best interests. As long as managers stay within the law, there is no way to either force or motivate them to act in the stockholders’ best interests.
9. Which of the following would be most likely to lead to higher interest rates on all debt securities in the economy?
a. Households start saving a larger percentage of their income.
b. The level of inflation begins to decline.
c. The economy moves from a boom to a recession.
d. Corporations step up their expansion plans and thus increase their demand for capital.
e. The Federal Reserve uses monetary policy in an attempt to stimulate the economy.
10. Which of the following could explain why a business might choose to operate as a corporation rather than as a sole proprietorship or a partnership?
a. Corporate shareholders escape liability for the firm’s debts, but this factor may be offset by the tax disadvantages of the corporate form of organization.
b. Corporations generally face relatively few regulations.
c. Corporate investors are exposed to unlimited liability.
d. Corporations generally find it relatively difficult to raise large amounts of capital.
e. Less of a corporation’s income is generally subjected to taxes than would be true if the firm were a partnership.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Course name: Foundations of Financial Management (10248) – Fall I, 2013
Assignment name: Week 2 Questions/Problems
1. Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. The statement of cash flows reflects cash flows from operations, but it does not reflect the effects of buying or selling fixed assets.
b. The statement of cash flows shows where the firm’s cash is located; indeed, it provides a listing of all banks and brokerage houses where cash is on deposit.
c. The statement of cash flows reflects cash flows from operations and from borrowings, but it does not reflect cash obtained by selling new common stock.
d. The statement of cash flows reflects cash flows from continuing operations, but it does not reflect the effects of changes in working capital.
e. The statement of cash flows shows how much the firm’s cash the total of currency, bank deposits, and short-term liquid securities (or cash equivalents) increased or decreased during a given year.
2. Personal After-Tax Yield
Corporate bonds issued by Johnson Corporation currently yield 8%. Municipal bonds of equal risk currently yield 5.5%. At what tax rate would an investor be indifferent between these two bonds? Round your answer to two decimal places.
%
Problem 2-9
Corporate After-Tax Yield
3. The Shrieves Corporation has $5,000 that it plans to invest in marketable securities. It is choosing among AT&T bonds, which yield 7.5%, state of Florida muni bonds, which yield 4.5% (but are not taxable), and AT&T preferred stock, with a dividend yield of 6%. Shrieves’s corporate tax rate is 40%, and 70% of the dividends received are tax exempt. Find the after-tax rates of return on all three securities. Round your answers to two decimal places.
A-T rate of return on AT&T bond %
A-T rate of return on Florida muni bonds %
A-T rate of return on AT&T preferred stock %
Problem 2-3
Income statement
4. Little Books Inc. recently reported $3.75 million of net income. Its EBIT was $7.75 million, and its tax rate was 40%. What was its interest expense? (Hint: Write out the headings for an income statement and then fill in the known values. Then divide $3.75 million net income by (1 – T) = 0.6 to find the pre-tax income. The difference between EBIT and taxable income must be the interest expense. Use this same procedure to work some of the other problems.) Round your answer to the nearest whole dollar and enter your answer as a dollar amount.
$
Problem 2-5
Net Cash Flow
5. Kendall Corners Inc. recently reported net income of $4.5 million and depreciation of $765,000. What was its net cash flow? Assume it had no amortization expense.
$
Problem 3-11
Balance Sheet Analysis
6. Complete the balance sheet and sales information in the table that follows for Hoffmeister Industries using the following financial data:
Debt ratio: 45%
Quick ratio: 0.90
Total assets turnover: 1.2
Days sales outstanding: 36 days*
Gross profit margin on sales: (Sales – Cost of goods sold)/Sales = 25%
Inventory turnover ratio: 3.0
* Calculation is based on a 365-day year.
Round your answers to the nearest whole dollar.
Balance Sheet
Cash $
Accounts payable $
Accounts receivable $
Long-term debt $ 60,000
Inventories $
Common stock $
Fixed assets $
Retained earnings $ 97,500
Total assets $ 300,000 Total liabilities and equity $
Sales $
Cost of goods sold $
7. Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. The reported income of two otherwise identical firms must be identical if the firms are publicly owned, provided they follow procedures that are permitted by the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC).
b. The income statement for a given year, say 2007, is designed to give us an idea of how much the firm earned during that year.
c. The focal point of the income statement is the cash account, because that account cannot be manipulated by “accounting tricks.”
d. The reported income of two otherwise identical firms cannot be manipulated by different accounting procedures provided the firms follow Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP).
e. If a firm follows Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP), then its reported net income will be identical to its reported net cash flow.
8. Companies HD and LD are both profitable, and they have the same total assets (TA), Sales (S), return on assets (ROA), and profit margin (PM). However, Company HD has the higher debt ratio. Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. Company HD has a higher fixed assets turnover than Company LD.
b. Company HD has a lower total assets turnover than Company LD.
c. Company HD has a lower equity multiplier than Company LD.
d. Company HD has a higher ROE than Company LD.
e. Company HD has a lower operating income (EBIT) than Company LD.
Problem 3-2
Debt Ratio
9. Vigo Vacations has an equity multiplier of 1.9. The company’s assets are financed with some combination of long-term debt and common equity. What is the company’s debt ratio? Round your answer to two decimal places.
%
10. Aubey Aircraft recently announced that its net income increased sharply from the previous year, yet its net cash flow from operations declined. Which of the following could explain this performance?
a. The company’s cost of goods sold increased.
b. The company’s depreciation and amortization expenses declined.
c. The company’s interest expense increased.
d. The company’s operating income declined.
e. The company’s expenditures on fixed assets declined.
Problem 3-7
Current and Quick Ratios
11. Ace Industries has current assets equal to $7 million. The company’s current ratio is 2.0, and its quick ratio is 1.5.
1. What is the firm’s level of current liabilities?
$ million
2. What is the firm’s level of inventories?
$ million
Problem 3-4
Price/Earnings Ratio
12. A company has an EPS of $1.20, a cash flow per share of $4.40, and a price/cash flow ratio of 5.0. What is its P/E ratio? Round your answer to two decimal places.
13. Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. Suppose a firm’s total assets turnover ratio falls from 1.0 to 0.9, but at the same time its profit margin rises from 9% to 10% and its debt increases from 40% of total assets to 60%. Under these conditions, the ROE will increase.
b. Suppose a firm’s total assets turnover ratio falls from 1.0 to 0.9, but at the same time its profit margin rises from 9% to 10% and its debt increases from 40% of total assets to 60%. Without additional information, we cannot tell what will happen to the ROE.
c. The modified Du Pont equation provides information about how operations affect the ROE, but the equation does not include the effects of debt on the ROE.
d. Other things held constant, an increase in the debt ratio will result in an increase in the profit margin on sales.
e. Suppose a firm’s total assets turnover ratio falls from 1.0 to 0.9, but at the same time its profit margin rises from 9% to 10%, and its debt increases from 40% of total assets to 60%. Under these conditions, the ROE will decrease.
14. Last year, Tucker Technologies had (1) a negative net cash flow from operations, (2) a negative free cash flow, and (3) an increase in cash as reported on its balance sheet. Which of the following factors could explain this situation?
a. The company made a large capital investment early in the year.
b. The company sold a new issue of common stock.
c. The company had a sharp increase in its inventories.
d. The company had a sharp increase in its accrued liabilities.
e. The company had a sharp increase in its depreciation and amortization expenses.
15. Amram Company’s current ratio is 1.9. Considered alone, which of the following actions would reduce the company’s current ratio?
a. Borrow using short-term notes payable and use the proceeds to reduce accruals.
b. Borrow using short-term notes payable and use the proceeds to reduce long-term debt.
c. Use cash to reduce accruals.
d. Use cash to reduce short-term notes payable.
e. Use cash to reduce accounts payable.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The FINC 5000 Associates Corporation (FAC) has begun selling a new product and they want you to help them with next year s pro forma financial statements. Using the worksheet below, complete the company s forecast.
Assumptions:
To begin with, FAC is sure sales will grow 20% next year. Assume that is true. Then assume that COGS, Current Assets, and Current Liabilities all vary directly with Sales (that means if sales grows a certain percentage, then the account in question will grow by that same percentage). Assume that fixed expenses will remain unchanged and that $2,000 worth of new Fixed Assets will be obtained next year. Lastly, the current dividend policy will be continued next year.
FINC 5000 Associates Corporation
Financial Forecast
Estimated
This year for next year
Sales $10,000 ________
COGS 4,000 ________
Gross Profit 6,000 ________
Fixed Expenses 3,000 ________
Before Tax Profit 3,000 ________
Tax @ 33.3333% 1,000 ________
Net Profit $2,000 ________
Dividends $0 ________
Current Assets $25,000 ________
Net Fixed Assets 15,000 ________
Total Assets $40,000 ________
Current Liabilities $17,000 ________
Long term debt 3,000 ________
Common Stock 7,000 ________
Retained Earnings 13,000 ________
Total Liabs & Eq $40,000 ________
(AFN) = ________
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Finite Math Week 4 Quiz “?Financial Topics |
| Question Detail:
Finite Math
Week4QuizFinancialTopics
Foreachsectionreadthedirectionsanddeterminethebestanswer
Choose the best answer for the questions below. Answers are rounded to nearest whole dollar amount.
1. What is the simple interest earned over 6
years on a principal of $55,000 at 12% interest?
a. $39,600 b. $94,600 c. $61,600 d. $58,960
3. What is the value after 4 years if $8,700 is invested in an account that pays 9% interest compounded monthly?
a. $3,300 b.$12,453 c. $9,519
d. $279,979
5. Which of the following choices of investment
yields the greatest for a deposit of $20,000 over
20 years?
a. 12% simple interest
b. 10.5% compounded quarterly
c. 11.5% compounded weekly
d. 11% compounded daily
2. What is the effectiverateofinterest for a one year loan of $3,000 given at 15% interest if the interest is compounded quarterly?
a. 15.24% b. 15.27% c. 15.87% d. 15.94%
4. How much is the discount on a loan for which you agree to pay the lender $6,000 in one year at 8% interest?
a. $480
b. $5,520 c. $6,480 d. $960
6. You are due to receive 3 payments (one per year) which you can invest in an account that earns 9% interest per year. Which sequence of payments yields the greatest amount?
a. $200, $300, $250 b. $250, $100, $300 c. $400, $100, $100 d. $300, $200, $250
7. Compute the monthly loan payment required to pay off $150,000 dollars at 7% interest over 15 years. (Note: a monthly payment means the interest is compounded monthly)
a. $1,348.24
b. $427,342.01
c. $2,374.12
d. $16,084.35
Finite Math
Week 4 Quiz Financial Topics
8.How much money should be invested in an account that earns 9% interest, compounded monthly, if you want to have $500,000 after 20 years?
a.$45,600.00 b.$83,206.42 c.$41,603.21 d.$430,594.93
9.What is the value of an annuity if $250 dollars is deposited monthly for 7 years at 12% interest?
a.$1,803.38 b.$32,668.07 c.$113,527.42 d.$52,098.73
10.How much would you need to deposit if you wanted to withdrawal $750 a month for 3 years if a bank will pay 8% interest?
a.$25,000.00 b.$18,781.22 c.$23,933.85 d.$31,060.74
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Finlon Upholstery Inc. uses a job-order costing system to accumulate manufacturing costs. The company’s work-in-process on December 31, 20X1, consisted of one job (no. 2077), which was carried on the year-end balance sheet at $156,800. There was no finished-goods inventory on this date.
Finlon applies manufacturing overhead to production on the basis of direct-labor cost. (The budgeted direct-labor cost is the company’s practical capacity, in terms of direct-labor hours multiplied by the budgeted direct-labor rate.) Budgeted totals for 2002 for direct labor and manufacturing overhead are $4,200,000 and $5,460,000, respectively. Actual results for the year are as follows:
| Actual Results |
|
| Direct Materials Used |
$5,600,000.00 |
| Direct Labor |
$4,350,000.00 |
| Indirect Material Used |
$65,000.00 |
| Indirect Labor |
$2,860,000.00 |
| Factory Depreciation |
$1,740,000.00 |
| Factory Insurance |
$59,000.00 |
| Factory Utilities |
$830,000.00 |
| Selling and Administrative Expenses |
$2,160,000.00 |
| Total |
$17,664,000.00 |
Job No. 2077 was completed in January 20X2 and there was no work in process at year-end. All jobs produced during 2002 were sold with the exception of Job No. 2143, which contained direct-material costs of $156,000 and direct-labor charges of $85,000. The company charges any under- or over-applied overhead to the cost of goods sold category.
Required:
|
1. Determine the company s predetermined overhead application rate.
|
2. Determine the additions to the Work-in-Process Inventory account for direct material used, direct
|
labor, and manufacturing overhead.
3. Compute the amount that the company would disclose as finished-goods inventory on the
|
December 31, 20×2, balance sheet.
|
4. Prepare the journal entry needed to record the year s completed production.
5. Compute the amount of under- or overapplied overhead at year-end, and prepare the necessary
|
journal entry to record its disposition.
|
6. Determine the company s 20×2 cost of goods sold.
7. Would it be appropriate to include selling and administrative expenses in either manufacturing
| overhead or cost of goods sold? Briefly explain. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A firm allocates factory overhead using one cost pool with direct labor hours as the allocation base. The firm has two production departments (A1 and A2). The new accountant at the firm estimates that next year the total factory overhead costs will be $4,000,000 and approximately 500,000 direct labor hours will be worked. The accountant also estimates that A1 will use 150,000 direct labor hours and there will be about $2,000,000 in overhead costs in A1. A2 will use 350,000 direct labor hours and there will be $2,000,000 in overhead costs in A2. The firm has two products: R4 and R5. It takes two direct labor hours in A1 and three direct labor hours in A2 to complete one unit of R4. It takes one direct labor hour in A1 and four direct labor hours in A2 to complete one unit of R5.
REQUIRED:
What overhead cost per unit will you get using (a) plant-wide and (b) departmental pools? Which method is better and why? Support your answer with appropriate calculations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Firm A has $10,000 in assets entirely financed with equity. Firm B also has $10,000 in assets, but these assets are financed by $5,000 in debt (with a 10 percent rate of interest) and $5,000 in equity. Both firms sell 10,000 units of output at $2.50 per unit. The variable costs of production
are $1, and fixed production costs are $12,000. (To ease the calculation, assume no income tax.)
a. What is the operating income (EBIT) for both firms?
b. What are the earnings after interest?
c. If sales increase by 10 percent to 11,000 units, by what percentage will each firm s earnings after interest increase? To answer the question, determine the earnings after taxes and compute the percentage increase in these earnings from the answers you derived in part b.
d. Why are the percentage changes different?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The article “The Five Competitive Forces That Shape Strategy,” from Harvard Business Review, presents a comprehensive view of how five major competitive forces shape the industry and strategic planning of businesses. Each force has specific ways that shape competition, which may influence strategy.
Write a 1,050-1,750 word paper on the relationship between IT and a company’s competitive advantage or strategy.
Identify and briefly describe five specific areas where IT represents a risk to a company’s competitive advantage.
Identify and briefly describe five specific areas in which IT may support or promote a company’s competitive advantage.
Select a disadvantage you identified, and provide a detailed scenario of how it would occur, and what steps might be taken to reduce the risk.
Select an advantage you identified, and provide a detailed scenario of how it could be leveraged to improve a company’s competitive advantage.
Utilize the individual written assignment grading rubric for this assignment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
21. Five trucks were leased by Pleasantville under terms qualifying as a capital lease. These trucks are to be used by the fire department. Where would the capital lease transaction be recorded (Points : 2)
Internal service fund.
Special revenue fund.
Plant and equipment fund.
Governmental activities.
22. On June 1, 2012, Brooktown levied special assessments in the amount of $500,000, payable in 10 equal annual installments beginning on June 30, 2012. The assessment installments are intended to pay principal and interest on special assessment bonds for which the town has pledged its full faith and credit should assessments be insufficient. Assuming no allowance for uncollectible receivables, the journal entry in the debt service fund on June 1, 2012 would include: (Points : 2)
A debit to Assessments Receivable-Current for $500,000.
A debit to Assessments Receivable-Current for $50,000.
A credit to Revenues for $500,000.
No journal entry is made in the debt service fund because special assessments are used.
23. In 2011, Weaver City signed a contract in the amount of $6,000,000 for the construction of a new city hall. Expenditures were $4,000,000 in 2011 and $2,050,000 in 2012, which included a change to the original construction design in the amount of $50,000. What amount should be added to net capital assets in the governmental activities accounts in 2012 (Points : 2)
$6,000,000
$6,050,000
$2,050,000
$2,000,000.
24. The accrual basis of accounting applicable to proprietary fund types requires that exchange revenues be recognized when (Points : 2)
Earned.
Collected in cash.
Authorized by the budget ordinance.
Measurable and available.
25. The expenditure classification “City Attorney” is an example of which of the following types of classification (Points : 2)
Function.
Organization unit.
Character.
Program.
26. On what should the government-wide financial statements report (Points : 2)
Net assets and results of financial operations of the government as a whole.
Fiscal accountability.
The cost of government services.
Budgetary compliance.
27. Which of the following is true for debt service funds (Points : 2)
A legally required budget should be recorded in the accounts.
A combining balance sheet may not be prepared for a comprehensive annual financial report (CAFR) when more than one debt service fund exists.
Encumbrance accounting is often used.
GAAP requires that a separate debt service fund be established for each bond issue.
28. Which of the following budgetary accounts is typically used by a debt service fund (Points : 2)
Encumbrances.
Appropriations.
Estimated Uncollectible Accounts.
Reserve for Encumbrances.
29. Which of the following is not a budgetary account (Points : 2)
Encumbrances.
Reserve for Encumbrances.
Estimated Revenues.
Appropriations.
30. When bonds are sold at a premium for a capital project, the premium amount generally (Points : 2)
Increases the cash available to the capital projects fund.
Is transferred to the debt service fund.
Is transferred to the General Fund.
Is ignored by both the capital projects fund and any other fund.
31. With regard to depreciation of general capital assets, which of the following statements is correct (Points : 2)
Depreciation expense should be recorded in the appropriate governmental funds, and recorded in the governmental activities accounts.
Depreciation expense must be recorded in the governmental fund, but no depreciation expense is recorded in the governmental activities accounts.
No depreciation can be recorded in any governmental fund, but depreciation expense must be recorded in the governmental activities accounts.
No depreciation can be recorded in any governmental fund, nor is it permissible to record depreciation expense in the governmental activities accounts.
32. The account “Interfund Transfers In” would be classified in a General Fund statement of revenues, expenditures, and changes in fund balance as a(an) (Points : 2)
Revenue.
Other financing use.
Other financing source.
Current liability
33. Which of the following steps in the acquisition of goods and services by an activity accounted for by the General Fund generally occurs first (Points : 2)
Disbursement.
Appropriation.
Encumbrance.
Expenditure.
34. Which of the following is true regarding capital projects funds (Points : 2)
Encumbrances accounting is employed.
Encumbrances accounting is not normally employed, but Estimated Revenues and Appropriations accounts are used.
No budgetary accounts are ever used.
All budgetary accounts are employed in the same manner as for the General Fund and special revenue funds.
35. The body that has been established to recommend accounting and financial reporting standards for the federal government is the (Points : 2)
Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB).
Governmental Accounting Standards Board (GASB).
Cost Accounting Standards Board (CASB).
Federal Accounting Standards Advisory Board (FASAB).
36. The Town of Ashland levied property taxes in the amount of $800,000. The town estimates that 1 percent will be uncollectible. The journal entry to record the tax levy will include (Points : 2)
A debit to cash for $792,000.
A credit to revenues for $792,000.
A debit to estimated uncollectible current taxes for $8,000.
A debit to estimated revenues for $800,000.
37. Which of the following is a fiduciary fund (Points : 2)
Investment trust fund.
Special revenue fund.
Debt service fund.
Enterprise fund.
38. Which of the following should not be reported as a liability of the General Fund (Points : 2)
General obligation bonds payable (due in 10 years).
Vouchers payable.
Tax anticipation notes payable.
Due to federal government.
39. A capital projects fund might be used to account for which of the following activities (Points : 2)
Maintaining roads and bridges.
Building a parking garage.
Providing water and sewer services.
Servicing long-term debt.
40. The fund financial statements for governmental funds should include a (Points : 2)
Statement of cash flows.
Statement of revenues, expenses, and changes in fund net assets.
Balance sheet.
Statement of activities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Flamingo Grill is an upscale restaurant located in St. Petersburg, Florida. To help plan an advertising campaign for the coming season, Flamingo’s management team hired the advertising firm of Haskell and Johnson (HJ). The management team requested HJ’s recommendation concerning how the advertising budget should be distributed across television, radio, and newspaper advertisements. The budget has been set at $279,000.
In a meeting with Flamingo’s management team, HJ consultants provided the following information about the industry exposure effectiveness rating per ad, their estimate of the number of potential new customers reached per ad, and the cost for each ad:
Advertising Media Exposure Rating per Ad New Customers per Ad Cost per Ad
Television 90 4000 $10,000
Radio 25 2000 $ 3000
Newspaper 10 1000 $ 1000
The exposure rating is viewed as a measure of the value of the ad to both existing customers and potential new customers. It is a function of such things as image, message recall, visual and audio appeal, and so on. As expected, the more expensive television advertisement has the highest exposure effectiveness rating along with the greatest potential for reaching new customers.
At this point, the HJ consultants pointed out that the data concerning exposure and reach were only applicable to the first few ads in each medium. For television, HJ stated that the exposure rating of 90 and the 4000 new customers reached per ad were reliable for the first 10 television ads. After 10 ads, the benefit is expected to decline. For planning purposes, HJ recommended reducing the exposure rating to 55 and the estimate of the potential new customers reached to 1500 for any television ads beyond 10. For radio ads, the preceding data are reliable up to a maximum of 15 ads. Beyond 15 ads, the exposure rating declines to 20 and the number of new customers reached declines to 1200 per ad. Similarly, for newspaper ads, the preceding data are reliable up to a maximum of 20; the exposure rating declines to 5 and the potential number of new customers reached declines to 800 for additional ads.
Flamingo’s management team accepted maximizing the total exposure rating across all media as the objective of the advertising campaign. Because of management’s concern with attracting new customers, management stated that the advertising campaign must reach at least 100,000 new customers. To balance the advertising campaign and make use of all advertising media, Flamingo’s management team also adopted the following guidelines:
Use at least twice as many radio advertisements as television advertisements.
Use no more than 20 television advertisements.
The television budget should be at least $140,000.
The radio advertising budget is restricted to a maximum of $99,000.
The newspaper budget is to be at least $30,000.
HJ agreed to work with these guidelines and provide a recommendation as to how the $279,000 advertising budget should be allocated among television, radio, and newspaper advertising.
Managerial Report
Develop a model that can be used to determine the advertising budget allocation for the Flamingo Grill. Include a discussion of the following items in your report:
1. A schedule showing the recommended number of television, radio, and newspaper advertisements and the budget allocation for each medium. Show the total exposure and indicate the total number of potential new customers reached.
2. A discussion of how the total exposure would change if an additional $10,000 were added to the advertising budget.
3. A discussion of the ranges for the objective function coefficients. What do the ranges indicate about how sensitive the recommended solution is to HJ’s exposure rating coefficients?
4. The resulting media schedule if the objective of the advertising campaign was to maximize the number of potential new customers reached instead of maximizing the total exposure rating.
5. A comparison of the two media schedules resulting from items 1 and 4, respectively. What is your recommendation for the Flamingo Grill’s advertising campaign?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following account balances relate to the stockholders equity accounts of Chipo Corp. at year-end.
|
|
2012 |
|
2011 |
| Common stock, 10,500 and 10,000 shares, |
|
|
|
|
| respectively, for 2012 and 2011 |
|
$168,660 |
|
$143,120 |
| Preferred stock, 5,000 shares |
|
133,000 |
|
133,000 |
| Retained earnings |
|
303,410 |
|
257,000 |
A small stock dividend was declared and issued in 2012. The market value of the shares was $10,560. Cash dividends were $14,370 in both 2012 and 2011. The common stock has no par or stated value.
(a) What was the amount of net income reported by Chipo Corp. in 2012?
(b) Determine the amounts of any cash inflows or outflows related to the common stock and dividend accounts in 2012. Indicate where each of the cash inflows or outflows identified in would be classified on the statement of cash flows.
| Common stock |
|
$ |
|
InflowOutflow |
|
FinancingInvestingOperating |
| Dividends |
|
$ |
|
InflowOutflow |
|
InvestingOperatingFinancing |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Prepare the trial balance for Smith Construction as of May 31, 2010 listing the accounts in the proper order. |
|
| Prepare the Income Statement, Statement of retained earnings and balance sheet for Smith Construction as of May 31. |
| These statements are for the period March, April, and May. Assume retained earnings starts at a 0 blance |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Account |
Balance |
|
|
|
|
|
| Repair expense |
1,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
| cash |
47,240 |
|
|
|
|
|
| Tools |
1,200 |
|
|
|
|
|
| Accounts Payable |
0 |
|
|
|
|
|
| Supplies |
1,500 |
|
|
|
|
|
| Common Stock |
41,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
| Rent Expense |
2,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
| Equipment |
24,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
| Dividends |
3,900 |
|
|
|
|
|
| Accounts receivable |
1,080 |
|
|
|
|
|
| Salary Expense |
10,780 |
|
|
|
|
|
| Service Revenue |
51,700 |
|
|
|
|
|
| Retained Earnings |
0 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following balance sheet items, listed in Alphabetical order, are available from the records of Ruth Corporation at December 31,2010:
Accounts payable $18,255
Accounts receivable 23,450
Accumulated depreciation-automobiles 22,500
Accumulated depreciation- buildings 40,000
Automobiles 112,500
Bonds payable, due December 31, 2014 160,000
Buildings 200,000
Capital stock,$10 par value 150,000
Cash 13,230
Income taxes payable $6,200
Interest payable 1,500
Inventory 45,730
Land 250,000
Long-term investments 85,000
Notes payable, due June 30, 2011 10,000
Paid-in capital in excess of par value 50,000
Patents 40,000
Prepaid rent 1,500
Retained earnings 311,095
Salaries and wages payable 4,200
Required:
1. Prepare in good form a classified balance sheet as of December 31, 2010.
2. Compute Ruth s current ratio.
3. On the basis of your answer to (2), does Ruth appear to be liquid? What other information do you need to fully answer that question?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a monthly Cash Budget in tabular form for the months of February, March and April; showing the bank balance at each month’s end.
The following data is available from the various functional budgets prepared at Congo Limited.
January February March April
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
CASH SALES 128 84 72 90
Credit Sales 1,140 760 640 800
Purchases for Resale 880 560 520 320
Salaries and Wages 266 280 238 248
Overhead Expense 160 150 160 140
Other information is available as follows:
1. 5% of all sales on credit are expected to become bad debts. Receipts from credit customers are due in the month following sale.
2. All goods are bought on credit from suppliers who allow 2 % cash discount for payment in the month following purchase.
3. Salaries and wages are paid in the month in which they are earned.
4. Payments for overhead expenses are made in the month following the month in which expenses are incurred. The above overhead budget includes $28,000 per month for depreciation.
5. Two new vans costing $21,000 each are to be paid for in April.
6. Taxation amounting to $175,000 is to be paid in March.
7. The balance at the bank as at 31st January is expected to be $222,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
4-27
The following data pertain to the Vesuvius Tile Company for July.
Work in process, July 1 (in units)…………………………………………………………………………. 20,000
Units started during July………………………………………………………………………………. ?
Total units to account for…………………………………………………………………………………….. 65,000
Units completed and transferred out during July……………………………………………………… ?
Work in process, July 31 (in units)…………………………………………………………………………. 15,000
Total equivalent units: direct material…………………………………………………………………….. 65,000
Total equivalent units: conversion…………………………………………………………………………… ?
Work in process, July 1: direct material………………………………………………………………… $164,400
Work in process, July 1: conversion ……………………………………………………………………………….. ?
Costs incurred during July: direct material ………………………………………………………………………. ?
Costs incurred during July: conversion ………………………………………………………………….. 659,400
Work in process, July 1: total cost ……………………………………………………………………….. 244,200
Total costs incurred during July …………………………………………………………………………. 1,031,250
Total costs to account for …………………………………………………………………………………. 1,275,450
Cost per equivalent unit: direct material ……………………………………………………………………… 8.25
Cost per equivalent unit: conversion ………………………………………………………………………………. ?
Total cost per equivalent unit ………………………………………………………………………………….. 21.45
Cost of goods completed and transferred out during July ………………………………………………… ?
Cost remaining in ending work-in-process inventory: direct material……………………………………. ?
Cost remaining in ending work-in-process inventory: conversion ……………………………….. 79,200
Total cost of July 31 work in process ……………………………………………………………………. 202,950
Additional Information:
a.Direct material is added at the beginning of the production process, and conversion activity occurs uniformly throughout the process.
b.The company uses weighted-average process costing.
c.The July 1 work in process was 30 percent complete as to conversion.
d.The July 31 work in process was 40 percent complete as to conversion.
Required:Compute the missing amounts, and prepare the firm s July production report.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karmana Corporation for the just-completed year.
Sales ………………………………………………………$950
Raw materials inventory, beginning …………………$10
Raw materials inventory, ending …………………….$30
Purchases of raw materials ………………………….$120
Direct labor ………………………………………………$180
Manufacturing overhead ……………………………..$230
Administrative expenses ……………………………..$100
Selling expenses ………………………………………..$140
Work-in-process inventory, beginning ………………$50
Work-in-process inventory, ending ………………….$40
Finished goods inventory, beginning ………………$100
Finished goods inventory, ending ……………………$80
Use these data to prepare (in thousands of dollars) a schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured and a Schedule of Cost of Goods Sold for the year. In addition, elaborate on the relationship between these schedules as they relate to the flow of product costs in a manufacturing company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records ofLarden Corporation for the just-completed year.
|
|
Sales
|
$950
|
|
|
Purchases of raw materials
|
$170
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
$210
|
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$220
|
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$180
|
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$140
|
|
|
Raw materials inventory, beginning
|
$70
|
|
|
Raw materials inventory, ending
|
$80
|
|
|
Work-in-process inventory, beginning
|
$30
|
|
|
Work-in-process inventory, ending
|
$20
|
|
|
Finished goods inventory, beginning
|
$100
|
|
|
Finished goods inventory, ending
|
$70
|
Required:Prepare a Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured statement
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Larklin Corporation for the just-completed year.
Sales $820
Purchases of raw materials $195
Direct labor $170
Manufacturing overhead $250
Administrative expenses $180
Selling expenses $140
Raw materials inventory, beginning $80
Raw materials inventory, ending $35
Work-in-process inventory, beginning $65
Work-in-process inventory, ending $30
Finished goods inventory, beginning $130
Finished goods inventory, ending $165
Required: Prepare a Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured statement in the text box below.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Larklin Corporation for the just-completed year.
Sales $820
Purchases of raw materials $195
Direct labor $170
Manufacturing overhead $250
Administrative expenses $180
Selling expenses $140
Raw materials inventory, beginning $80
Raw materials inventory, ending $35
Work-in-process inventory, beginning $65
Work-in-process inventory, ending $30
Finished goods inventory, beginning $130
Finished goods inventory, ending $165
Required: Prepare a Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured statement in the text box below.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of the Maroon Corporation for the just-completed year.
Sales 1,150
Raw materials inventory, beginning15
Raw materials inventory, ending 40
Purchases of raw materials 150
Direct labor 250
Manufacturing overhead 300
Administrative expenses 500
Selling expenses 300
Work in process inventory, beginning 100
Work in process inventory, ending 150
Finished goods inventory, beginning 80
Finished goods inventory, ending 120
Use the above data to prepare (in thousands of dollars) a schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured and a Schedule of Cost of Goods Sold for the year. In addition, what is the impact on the financial statements if the ending finished goods inventory is overstated or understated
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of the Maroon Corporation for the just-completed year.
| Sales |
1,150 |
| Raw materials inventory, beginning |
15 |
| Raw materials inventory, ending |
40 |
| Purchases of raw materials |
150 |
| Direct labor |
250 |
| Manufacturing overhead |
300 |
| Administrative expenses |
500 |
| Selling expenses |
300 |
| Work in process inventory, beginning |
100 |
| Work in process inventory, ending |
150 |
| Finished goods inventory, beginning |
80 |
| Finished goods inventory, ending |
120 |
Use the above data to prepare (in thousands of dollars) a schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured and a Schedule of Cost of Goods Sold for the year. In addition, what is the impact on the financial statements if the ending finished goods inventory is overstated or understated
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
4.(TCO A) The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of the Maroon Corporation for the just-completed year.
| Sales |
1,200 |
| Raw materials inventory, beginning |
25 |
| Raw materials inventory, ending |
50 |
| Purchases of raw materials |
180 |
| Direct labor |
230 |
| Manufacturing overhead |
250 |
| Administrative expenses |
400 |
| Selling expenses |
200 |
| Work-in-process inventory, beginning |
150 |
| Work-in-process inventory, ending |
120 |
| Finished goods inventory, beginning |
100 |
| Finished goods inventory, ending |
110 |
Use the above data to prepare (in thousands of dollars) a schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured and a Schedule of Cost of Goods Sold for the year. In addition, what is the impact on the financial statements if the ending finished goods inventory is overstated or understated? (Points : 25)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Write a 700- to 1,050-word analysis of the audited financial statements of Patton-Fuller Hospital for 2008 and 2009.
Include in your analysis:
– Balance Sheet(Audited) in a Microsoft Excel document including columns for the following:
2008 financial data
2009 financial data
The amount of change in dollars
The percent change
Statement of Revenue and Expenses (Audited) in a Microsoft Excel document including columns for the following:
2008 financial data
2009 financial data
The amount of change in dollars
The percent change
Identify significant changes between the years.
Provide possible explanations for the change based on information in the Annual Report.
Format your assignment consistent with APA guidelines.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Horizontal and Vertical Analysis
Sanborn Corporation’s condensed comparative income statements for 20×8 and 20×7 appear below. The corporation’s condensed comparative balance sheets for 20×8 and 20×7 appear on the next page.
Sanborn Corporation
Comparative Income Statements
For the Years Ended December 31, 20×8 and 20×7
(in thousands of dollars)
20×8 20×7
Net sales $3,276,800 $3,146,400
Cost of goods sold 2,088,800 2,008,400
Gross margin $1,188,000 $1,138,000
Operating expenses
Selling expenses $ 476,800 $ 518,000
Administrative expenses 447,200 423,200
Total operating expenses $ 924,000 $ 941,200
Income from operations $ 264,000 $ 196,800
Interest expense 65,600 39,200
Income before income taxes $ 198,400 $ 157,600
InNet income $ 136,000 $ 100,800
Earnings per share $3.40 $2.52
Sanborn Corporation
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31, 20×8 and 20×7
20×8 20×7
Assets
Cash $ 81,200 $ 40,800
Accounts receivable (net) 235,600 229,200
Inventory 574,800 594,800
Property, plant, and
equipment (net) 750,000 720,000
Total assets $1,641,600 $1,584,800
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Accounts payable $ 267,600 $ 477,200
Notes payable (short-term) 200,000 400,000
Bonds payable 400,000,
Common stock, $10 par value 400,000 400,000
Retained earnings 374,000 307,600
Total liabilities and
stockholders’ equity $1,641,600 $1,584,800
1. Prepare schedules showing the amount and percentage changes from 20×7 to 20×8 for the comparative income statements and the balance sheets. You may use the forms below. (40 points)
Sanborn Corporation
Comparative Income Statements
For the Years Ended December 31, 20×8 and 20×7
(in thousands of dollars)
20×8 20×7 Increase or Decrease
Amount Percentage
Net sales $3,276,800 $3,146,400
Cost of goods sold 2,088,800 2,008,400
Gross margin $1,188,000 $1,138,000
Operating expenses
Selling expenses $ 476,800 $ 518,000
Administrative expenses 447,200 423,200
Total operating expenses $ 924,000 $ 941,200
Income from operations $ 264,000 $ 196,800
Interest expense 65,600 39,200
Income before income taxes $ 198,400 $ 157,600
Income taxes expense 62,400 56,800
Net income $ 136,000 $ 100,800
Earnings per share $3.40 $2.52
Sanborn Corporation
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31, 20×8 and 20×7
20×8 20×7 Increase or Decrease
Amount Percentage
Assets
Cash $ 81,200 $ 40,800
Accounts receivable (net) 235,600 229,200
Inventory 574,800 594,800
Property, plant, and
equipment (net) 750,000 720,000
Total assets $1,641,600 $1,584,800
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Accounts payable $ 267,600 $ 477,200
Notes payable (short-term) 200,000 400,000
Bonds payable 400,000
Common stock, $10 par value 400,000 400,000
Retained earnings 374,000 307,600
Total liabilities and
stockholders’ equity $1,641,600 $1,584,800
2. Using the forms below, prepare common-size income statements and balance sheets for 20×7 and 20×8 (40 points)
Sanborn Corporation
Common-Size Income Statements
For the Years Ended December 31, 20×8 and 20×7
20×8 20×7
Net sales
Cost of goods sold
Gross margin
Operating expenses
Selling expenses
Administrative expenses
Total operating expenses
Income from operations
Interest expense
Income before income taxes
Income taxes expense
Net income
Sanborn Corporation
Common-Size Balance Sheets
December 31, 20×8 and 20×7
20×8 20×7
Assets
Cash
Accounts receivable (net)
Inventory
Property, plant, and equipment (net)
Total assets
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Accounts payable
Notes payable (short-term)
Bonds payable
Common stock, $10 par value
Retained earnings
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
3. Comment on the results in requirements 1 and 2 by indentifying favorable and unfavorable changes in the components and composition of the statements. (30 points)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
on june 1 hightower service Co. was started with an intial investment in the company of $ 22,100 cash. Here are the assets, liabilities, snd common stock of the company at June 30, and the revenues and expenses for the month of june, its first montth of operations:
Cash $4,600
Accounts Receivable $4,000
Service revenue $7,500
Supplies $2,400
Advertising expenses $400
Equipment $26,000
Common stock $22,100
Notes payable $12,000
Accounts payable $500
Supplies espense $1,000
Maintenance and repairs expense $600
Utilities expense $300
Salaries and wages expense $1,400
I june, the company issued no additional stock but paid dicidends of $1,400.
Instruccionc
a, Prepare an income statement and aretained earnings statement for the month of june and a balance sheet at june 30, 2014
b. Briefly discuss wheter the company;s first month of operations was a success
c. Discuss the comoany’ds decision to distribute a dividend.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
LO 2 4.Per-Share Earnings and Dividends. Suppose the firm in Problem 3 had 40,000 shares of common stock outstanding. What is the earnings per share, or EPS, figure? What is the dividends per share figure?
LO 1 5.Market Values and Book Values. Klingon Widgets, Inc., purchased new cloaking machinery three years ago for $4 million. The machinery can be sold to the Romulans today for $6.2 million. Klingon s current balance sheet shows net fixed assets of $2.8 million, current liabilities of $710,000, and net working capital of $130,000. If all the current assets were liquidated today, the company would receive $825,000 cash. What is the book value of Klingon s assets today? What is the market value?
LO 3 7.Tax Rates. In Problem 6, what is the average tax rate? What is the marginal tax rate?
Lo4 14Calculating Total Cash Flows. Sheffield Co. shows the following information on its 2010 income statement: sales = $153,000; costs = $81,900; other expenses = $5,200; depreciation expense = $10,900; interest expense = $8,400; taxes = $16,330; dividends = $7,200. In addition, you re told that the firm issued $2,600 in new equity during 2010, and redeemed $3,900 in outstanding long-term debt.
LO 1 16. Preparing a Balance Sheet. Prepare a balance sheet for Alaskan Orange Corp. as of December 31, 2010, based on the following information: cash = $193,000; patents and copyrights = $847,000; accounts payable = $296,000; accounts receivable = $253,000; tangible net fixed assets = $5,100,000; inventory = $538,000; notes payable = $189,000; accumulated retained earnings = $4,586,000; long-term debt = $1,250,000.
LO 3 18. Marginal versus Average Tax Rates. (Refer to Table 2.3.) Corporation Growth has $89,000 in taxable income, and Corporation Income has $8,900,000 in taxable income.
LO 4 21. Calculating Cash Flows. Titan Football Manufacturing had the following operating results for 2010: sales = $19,780; cost of goods sold = $13,980; depreciation expense = $2,370; interest expense = $345; dividends paid = $550. At the beginning of the year, net fixed assets were $13,800, current assets were $2,940, and current liabilities were $2,070. At the end of the year, net fixed assets were $16,340, current assets were $3,280, and current liabilities were $2,160. The tax rate for 2010 was 35 percent.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial Management Decision Process Problems
LO 2 4.
Per-Share Earnings and Dividends. Suppose the firm in Problem 3 had 40,000 shares of common stock outstanding. What is the earnings per share, or EPS, figure? What is the dividends per share figure?
________________________________________________________________________________
LO 1 5.Market Values and Book Values. Klingon Widgets, Inc., purchased new cloaking machinery three years ago for $4 million. The machinery can be sold to the Romulans today for $6.2 million. Klingon s current balance sheet shows net fixed assets of $2.8 million, current liabilities of $710,000, and net working capital of $130,000. If all the current assets were liquidated today, the company would receive $825,000 cash. What is the book value of Klingon s assets today? What is the market value?
__________________________________________________________________________________
LO 3 7.
Tax Rates. In Problem 6, what is the average tax rate? What is the marginal tax rate?
__________________________________________________________________________
Lo4 14Calculating Total Cash Flows. Sheffield Co. shows the following information on its 2010 income statement: sales = $153,000; costs = $81,900; other expenses = $5,200; depreciation expense = $10,900; interest expense = $8,400; taxes = $16,330; dividends = $7,200. In addition, you re told that the firm issued $2,600 in new equity during 2010, and redeemed $3,900 in outstanding long-term debt.
b. The cash flow to creditors is the interest paid, minus any new borrowing. Since the company redeemed long-term debt, the net new borrowing is negative. So, the cash flow to creditors is:
c. The cash flow to stockholders is the dividends paid minus any new equity. So, the cash flow to stockholders is:
d. In this case, to find the addition to NWC, we need to find the cash flow from assets. We can then use the cash flow from assets equation to find the change in NWC. We know that cash flow from assets is equal to cash flow to creditors plus cash flow to stockholders. So, cash flow from assets is:
________________________________________________________________________________
LO 1 16. Preparing a Balance Sheet. Prepare a balance sheet for Alaskan Orange Corp. as of December 31, 2010, based on the following information: cash = $193,000; patents and copyrights = $847,000; accounts payable = $296,000; accounts receivable = $253,000; tangible net fixed assets = $5,100,000; inventory = $538,000; notes payable = $189,000; accumulated retained earnings = $4,586,000; long-term debt = $1,250,000.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
LO 3 18. Marginal versus Average Tax Rates. (Refer to Table 2.3.) Corporation Growth has $89,000 in taxable income, and Corporation Income has $8,900,000 in taxable income.
a. Using Table 2.3, we can see the marginal tax schedule. For Corporation Growth, the first $50,000 of income is taxed at 15%, the next $25,000 is taxed at 25%, and the next $14,000 is taxed at 34%. So, the total taxes for the company will be:
b. The marginal tax rate is the tax rate on the next $1 of earnings. Each firm has a marginal tax rate of 34% on the next $10,000 of taxable income, despite their different average tax rates, so both firms will pay an additional $3,400 in taxes.
LO 4 21. Calculating Cash Flows. Titan Football Manufacturing had the following operating results for 2010: sales = $19,780; cost of goods sold = $13,980; depreciation expense = $2,370; interest expense = $345; dividends paid = $550. At the beginning of the year, net fixed assets were $13,800, current assets were $2,940, and current liabilities were $2,070. At the end of the year, net fixed assets were $16,340, current assets were $3,280, and current liabilities were $2,160. The tax rate for 2010 was 35 percent.
(b) Operating cash flow
(c) Cash flow from assets
(d) Cash flow to creditors $ 2,070 incase no new debt was issued. Cash flow to stock holders was $550.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For many years up through the mid-1970’s, there existed a nation-wide chain of retail stores by the name of “W.T. Grant & Co.”. These stores often served as one of the “flagship” stores in shopping malls. W.T. Grant & Co. filed for Chapter 7 bankruptcy. This means that the company was liquidated and went out of business. You will not find a W.T. Grant store in existence today. Interestingly, if we were to examine the income statement of that company for each of the last few years of its existence, we’d find that the company was profitable. Its revenues exceeded its expenses, and the company thus reported a “net income” (as opposed to a net loss).
How is it possible that a company can be profitable and yet find it necessary to completely liquidate its operations and cease to exist? (HINT: The cash flow statement was not one of the required financial statements during that era. If it had been required, consumers and investors might not have been quite so surprised by the company’s Chapter 7 filing).
TEXTBOOK: Financial & Managerial Accounting: The Basis for Business Decisions 16th edition Williams Haka Bettner Carcello Chapters 12 and 13
At least 300 words.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial & Managerial Accounting 16th Edition Chapter-26
Q1. A company invests $100,000 in plant assets with an estimated 20-year service life and no salvage value. These assets contribute $10,000 to an final net income when depreciation is computed on a straight-line basis. Compute the payback period and explain your computation.
Solution-
Q2. How much is that laser in the window?
The management of Metro Printers is considering a proposal to replace some existing equipment with a new highly efficient laser printer. The existing equipment has a current book value of $2,200,000 and a remaining life (if not replaced) of 10 years. The laser printer has a cost of $1,300,000 and an expected useful life of 10 years. The laser printer would increase the company’s annual cash flows by reducing operating costs and by increasing the company’s ability to generate revenue. Susan Mills, controller of Metro Printers, has prepared the following estimates of the laser printer’s effect on annual earnings and cash flows:
Estimated increase in annual cash flows (before taxes):
Incremental revenue………………………………………………………………….. $140,000
Cost savings (other than depreciation)………………………………………… 110,000 $250,000
Reduction in annual depreciation expense:
Depreciation on existing equipment……………………………………………$220,000
Depreciation on laser printer………………………………………………………. 130,000 90,000
Estimated increase in income before income taxes………………………………………………………..$340,000
Increase in annual income taxes (40%)……………………………………………………………………….. 136,000
Estimated increase in annual net income…………………………………………………………………… $204,000
Estimated increase in annual net cash flows
($250,000 – $136,000)……………………………………………………………………………………. $114,000
Don Adams, a director of Metro Printers, makes the following observation: “These estimates look fine, but won’t we take a huge loss in the current year on the sale of our existing equipment? Softer the invention of the laser printer, I doubt that our old equipment can be sold for much at all.” In response, Mills provides the following information about the expected loss on the sale of the existing equipment:
Book value of existing printing equipment……………………………………….. $2,200,000
Estimated current sales price, net of removal costs………………………………. 200,000
Estimated loss on sale, before income taxes…………………………………………. $2,000,000
Reduction in current year’s income taxes as a result of loss (40%)…………. 800,000
Loss on sale of existing equipment, net of tax savings……………………………… $1,200,000
Adams replies, “Good grief, our loss would be almost as great as the cost of the laser itself. Add this $1,200,000 loss to the $1,300,000 cost of the laser, and we’re into this new equipment for $2,500,000. I’d go along with a cost of $1,300,000, but $2,500,000 is out of question.”
Instructions
a. Use Exhibits 26-3 and 26-4 to help compute the net present value of the proposal to sell the existing equipment and buy the laser printer, discounted at an annual rate of 15 percent. In your computation, make the following assumptions regarding the timing of cash flows:
1. The purchase price of the laser printer will be paid in cash immediately.
2. The $200,000 sales price of the existing equipment will be received in cash immediately.
3. The income tax benefit from selling the equipment will be realized one year from today.
4. Metro uses straight-line depreciation in its income tax returns as well as its financial statements.
5. The annual net cash flows may be regarded as received at year-end for each of the next 10 years.
b. Is the cost to Metro Printers of acquiring the laser printer $2,500,000, as Adams suggests? Explain fully.
Solution
Q3. The following are 10 technical accounting terms introduced or emphasized in this chapter:
Net Present Value Capital budgeting Incremental analysis
Discount Rate Payback period Present value
Sunk Cost Return on average investment Salvage value
Capital budget audit
Each of the following statements may (or may not) describe one of these terms. Answer None if the statement does not correctly describe any of the terms ..
a. The examination of differences among revenue, costs, and cash flows under alternative courses of actions….
b. A cost incurred in the past that cannot be changed as a result of future actions…..
c. The process of planning and evaluating proposals for investments in plant assets…..
d. The average annual net income from an investment expressed as a percentage of the average amount invested……
e. The length of time necessary to recover the entire cost of an investment from resulting annual net cash flows…..
f. The present value of an investments expected future cash flows…….
g. The amount of money today that is considered equivalent to the cash flows expected to take place in the future…..
h. The required rate of return used by an investor to discount future cash flows to their present value…..
i. Often an investments final cash flows to be considered in discounted cash flow analysis
Solution-
Q4. Toying With Nature wants to take advantage of children’s current fascination with dinosaurs by adding several scale-model dinosaurs to its existing product line. Annual sales of the dinosaurs are estimated at 80,000 units at a price of $6 per unit. Variable manufacturing costs are estimated at $2.50 per unit, incremental fixed manufacturing costs (excluding depreciation) at $45,000 annually, and additional selling and general expenses related to the dinosaurs at $55,000 annually.
To manufacture the dinosaurs, the company must invest $350,000 in design molds and special equipment. Since toy fads wane in popularity rather quickly, Toying With Nature anticipates the special equipment will have a three-year service life with only a $20,000 salvage value. Depreciation will be computed on a straight-line basis. All revenue and expenses other than depreciation will be received or paid in cash. The company’s combined federal and state income tax rate is 40 percent.
Instructions
a. Prepare a schedule showing the estimated increase in annual net income from the planned manufacture and sale of dinosaur toys. (Input all amounts as positive values. Round to the nearest whole dollar, where necessary. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
b. Compute the annual net cash flows expected from this project. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
c. Compute for this project the i) payback period ii) return on average investment iii) net present value, discounted at an annual rate of 15 percent. Use Exhibit 26-3 and 26-4where necessary. (Round your “PV factors” to 3 decimal places, playback period to the nearest tenth of a year, the return on average investment to the nearest tenth of a percent, and the net present value to the nearest dollar. Omit the “$” & “%” signs in your response.)
Solution
Q5. Monster Toys is considering a new toy monster called Garga. Annual sales of Garga are estimated at 100,000 units at a price of $8 per unit. Variable manufacturing costs are estimated at $3 per unit, incremental fixed manufacturing costs (excluding depreciation) at $60,000 annually, and additional selling and general expenses related to the monster at $40,000 annually.
To manufacture the monsters, the company must invest $400,000 in design molds and special equipment. Since toy fads wane in popularity rather quickly, Monster Toys anticipates the special equipment will have a three-year service life with only a $10,000 salvage value. Depreciation will be computed on a straight-line basis. All revenue and expenses other than depreciation will be received or paid in cash. The company s combined federal and state income tax rate is 30%.
Instructions
a. Prepare a schedule showing the estimated increase in annual net income from the planned manufacture and sale of Garga.
b. Compute the annual net cash flows expected from this project.
c. Compute for this project the (1) payback period, (2) return on average investment, and (3) net present value, discounted at an annual rate of 12%. Round the payback period to the nearest tenth of a year and the return on average investment to the nearest tenth of a percent.
Solution-
Q6. Doug s Conveyor Systems, Inc., is considering two investment proposals (1 and 2). Data for the two proposals are present here: 1 2 Cost of Investment $98,000 $98,500 Estimated Salvage value 12,000 6,500 Average estimated net income 13,000 10,500 calculate the return on average investment for both proposals.
Solution-
Q7. DQ Identify some conditions where upper management might allows some divisions to have a lower required rate of return.
Solution –
Q8. Heartland Paper Company is considering the purchase of a new high-speed cutting machine. Two cutting machine manufacturers have approached Heartland with proposals: (1) Toledo Tools and (2) Akron Industries. Regardless of which vendor Heartland chooses, the following incremental cash flows are expected to be realized: .. Year = 1 Incremental Cash Inflows = $26,000 Incremental Cash Outflows = $20,000 Year = 2 Incremental Cash Inflows = $27,000 Incremental Cash Outflows = $21,000 . Year = 3 Incremental Cash Inflows = $32,000 Incremental Cash Outflows = $26,000 . Year = 4 Incremental Cash Inflows = $35,000 Incremental Cash Outflows = $29,000 . Year = 5 Incremental Cash Inflows = $34,000 Incremental Cash Outflows = $28,000 . Year = 6 Incremental Cash Inflows = $33,000 Incremental Cash Outflows = $27,000 . a. If the machine manufactured by Toledo Tools costs $27,000, what is its expected payback period?…. b. If the machine manufactured by Akron Industries has a payback period of 66 months, what is its cost?…. c. Which of the machines is most attractive based on its respective payback period? Should Heartland base its decision entirely on this criterion? Explain your answer.
Solution
Q9. Micro technology is considering two alternative proposals for modernizing its production facilities. To provide a basis for selection, the cost accounting department has developed the following data regarding the expected annual operating results for the two proposals:
Proposal 1 Proposal 2
Required investment in equipment $360,000 $350,000
Estimated service life of equipment . 8years 7 years
Estimated salvage value $-0- $14,000
Estimated annual cost saving (net cash flow) 75,000 76,000
Depreciation on equipment (straight-line basis) 45,000 48,000
Estimated increase in annual net income 30,000 28,000
Instructions
a. for each proposal, compute the (1) payback period, (2) return on average investment, and (3) net present value, discounted at an annual rate of 12 percent. (Round the payback period tot eh nearest tenth of a year and the return on investment to the nearest tenth of a percent.) Use this exhibits 26-3 and 26-4 where necessary.
b. Based on your analysis in part a, state which proposal you would recommend and explain the reason for your choice.
Solution-
Q10. Macro Technology is considering two alternative proposals for modernizing its production facilities. To provide a basis for selection, the cost accounting department has developed the following data regarding the expected annual operating results for the two proposals:
Proposal 1 Proposal 2
Required investment in equipment $400,000 $380,000
Estimated service life of equipment 10 years 8 years
Estimated salvage value $ -0- $ 20,000
Estimated annual cost savings (net cash flow) 80,000 82,000
Depreciation on equipment (straight-line basis) 40,000 45,000
Estimated increase in annual net income 40,000 37,000
Instructions
a. For each proposal, compute the (1) payback period, (2) return on average investment, and (3) net present value, discounted at an annual rate of 15%. (Round the payback period to the nearest tenth of a year and the return on investment to the nearest tenth of a percent.)
b. Based on your analysis in part a, state which proposal you would recommend and explain the reasons for your choice.
Solution-
Q11. A particular investment proposal has a positive net present value of $20 when a discount rate of 8 percent is used. The same proposal has a negative present value of $2,000 when a discount rate of 10 percent is used. What conclusions can be drawn about the estimated return of this proposal?
Solution-
Q12. What are the pitfalls to avoid when investing in overseas activities? The following key issues have been identified as important:
a. Lower cost offshore does not always mean gains in efficiency.
b. Choose your model carefully, either run your own offshore operation or outsource
c. Get your current employees to be supportive, otherwise they can hinder the process
d. Be prepared to invest time and effort because quality control can be challenging
e. Treat your overseas partners as equals in your business dealings
Instructions-
1. Explain how the above list of key issues in offshore investments can have an impact on future cash flows associated with an offshore investment
2. Discuss the ethical implications of encouraging current employees to help a company shift jobs overseas.
Solution
Q13. What is the major short coming of using the payback period as the only criterion in making capital budgeting decisions?
Solution-
Q14. Foz Co. is considering four investment proposals (A, B, C and D). The following table provides data concerning each of these investments:
A B C D
Investment cost $ 44,000 $ 45,000 $ 50,000 $
Estimated salvage value 8,000 5,000
4,000
Average estimated net income 6,000 5,400 4,500
Return on average investment % 28 % 20 % 15
Compute the missing information pertaining to each investment proposal.
Solution –
Q15. Cartor Industries is evaluating two alternative investment opportunities. The controller of the company has prepared the following analysis of the two investment proposals:
Proposal A Proposal B
Required investment in equipment $ 220,000 $ 250,000
Estimated service life of equipment 5 years 6 years
Estimated salvage value $ 10,000 $ 0
Estimated annual net cash flow 60,000 60,000
Depreciation on equipment (straight-line basis) 42,000 40,000
Estimated annual net income 18,000 20,000
Instructions
a. For each proposed investment, compute the following. Assume discounted at an annual rate of 10 percent. Use Exhibits 26-3 and 26-4 where necessary. (Round your “PV factors” to 3 decimal places, payback period to the nearest tenth of a year and the return on average investment to the nearest tenth of a percent. Omit the “$” & “%” signs in your response.)
Proposal A Proposal B
(1) Payback period years years
(2) Return on average investment % %
(3) Net present value $ $
b. Based on your computations in part a, which proposal do you consider to be the better investment?
Solution
Q16. Flagg Equipment Company is evaluating two alternative investment opportunities. The controller of the company has prepared the following analysis of the two investment proposals:
Proposal A Proposal B
Required investment in equipment $260,000 $280,000
Estimated service life of equipment 6 years 7 years
Estimated salvage value $ 20,000 $ -0-
Estimated annual net cash flow 82,000 65,000
Depreciation on equipment (straight-line basis) 40,000 40,000
Estimated annual net income 42,000 25,000
Instructions
a. For each proposal investment, compute the (1) payback period, (2) return on average investment, and (3) net present value, discounted at an annual rate of 15%. (Round the payback period to the nearest tenth of a year and the return on investment to the nearest tenth of a percent.)
b. Based on your analysis in part a, which proposal do you consider to be the better investment Explain.
Solution
Q16. Landry s Tool Supply Corporation is considering purchasing a machine that costs $56,000 and will produce annual cash flows of $19,000 for six years. The machine will be repurchased at the end of six years for $2,000. What is the net present value of the proposed investment? Landry s requires a 12 percent return on all capital investment.
Solution-
Q17. Using the tables in Exhibits 26-3 and 26-4, determine the present value of the following cash flows discounted at an annual rate of 15 percent.
a. $10,000 to be received 20 years from today.
b. $15,000 to be received annually for 10 years.
c. $10,000 to be received annually for five years, with an additional $12,000 salvage value expected at the end of the fifth year.
d. $30,000 to be received annually for the first three years, followed by $20,000received annually for the next two years (total of five years in which cash is received).
Solution-
Q18. Marengo is a popular restaurant located in Chilton resort. Management feels that enlarging
Solution –
Q19. Samba Is a popular restaurant located in Brazilton Resort. Management feels that enlarging the facility to incorporate a large outdoor seating area will enable Samba to continue to attract existing customers as well as handle large banquet parties that now must be turned away.
Solution-
Q20. A company is trying to decide whether to go ahead with an investment opportunity that costs $35,650. The expected incremental cash inflows are $78,000, while the expected incremental cash outflows are $67,500. What is the payback period?
Solution-
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 1. The following information is for a product manufactured and sold by Rivera Corporation:
- Sales price per unit, $30
- Variable cost per unit, $20
- Total fixed costs, $200,000
- Last year, Rivera earned a profit of $60,000
Required:
1) How many units did Rivera sell last year?
2) Rivera’s managers are considering decreasing the sales price to $28 in an effort to increase market share. Also, the company wants a profit of $80,000. How many units would it have to sell at the lower selling price to achieve this target
Problem 2. The management accountant at Melrose, Inc. provided the following estimated costs for producing 5,000 units of a specialty product manufactured by the firm:
The company believes that direct labor hours are the most appropriate cost driver for assigning overhead costs to its product.
Required:
1) Compute the predetermined overhead rate for this company.
2) Compute the specialty product’s total estimated cost per unit.
3) Why do firms assign overhead costs using a predetermined overhead rate instead of assigning actual costs
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Topic: What do you think caused or contributed to the recent market meltdown and what can we do to prevent it happening again (concentrate on financial/accounting/regulatory issues)
There were many companies involved in the recent Meltdown of the financial industry. Some were in the Mortgage business, Banking and Brokerages. Here are some: Countrywide, Wachovia, Washington Mutual, IndyMac, Freddie Mac, Fannie Mae, Lehman Brothers,Merrill Lynch ,Goldman Sachs, A.I.G., Bear Stearns.
Select a specific company that was involved in the Meltdown :
1.State which company you selected in the title
2.Profile the company you have selected – what was their business, history of the company, or any other summary information you think would be good background. (a couple of paragraphs).
3.Describe the situation as it relates to the Meltdown, bankruptcy, or financial problems with this company; give specific examples of what happened. (about another paragraph or 2) .
4.What are your thoughts on this situation What are your feelings about what happened in item #2 or the entire meltdown? What does it mean for you Do you think this will happen again
Provide a minimum of three credible references (cite using APA).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Financial ratios |
| Question Detail: Week Five Exercise Assignment
Financial Ratios
- Liquidity ratios.Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:
|
Edison
|
Stagg
|
Thornton
|
|
Cash
|
$6,000
|
$5,000
|
$4,000
|
|
Short-term investments
|
3,000
|
2,500
|
2,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
2,000
|
2,500
|
3,000
|
|
Inventory
|
1,000
|
2,500
|
4,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
800
|
800
|
800
|
|
Accounts payable
|
200
|
200
|
200
|
|
Notes payable: short-term
|
3,100
|
3,100
|
3,100
|
|
Accrued payables
|
300
|
300
|
300
|
|
Long-term liabilities
|
3,800
|
3,800
|
3,800
|
- Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?
- Computation and evaluation of activity ratios.The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:
|
|
20X5
|
20X4
|
|
Net credit sales
|
$832,000
|
$760,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
530,000
|
400,000
|
|
Cash, Dec. 31
|
125,000
|
110,000
|
|
Average Accounts receivable
|
205,000
|
156,000
|
|
Average Inventory
|
70,000
|
50,000
|
|
Accounts payable, Dec. 31
|
115,000
|
108,000
|
|
Instructions
- Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 20X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.
|
3. Profitability ratios, trading on the equity.Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 20X7:
|
Net sales
|
$1,750,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
120,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
80,000
|
|
Preferred dividends
|
25,000
|
|
Net income
|
130,000
|
|
Average assets
|
1,200,000
|
|
Average common stockholders’ equity
|
500,000
|
- Compute the profit margin on sales ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.
- Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly ex plain.
- Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
|
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Current Assets
|
$86,000
|
$80,000
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)
|
99,000
|
90,000
|
|
Intangibles
|
25,000
|
50,000
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
40,800
|
48,000
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
153,000
|
160,000
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
16,200
|
12,000
|
|
Net Sales
|
500,000
|
500,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
322,500
|
350,000
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
93,500
|
85,000
|
- Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
|
5.Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Current Assets
|
$86,000
|
$80,000
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)
|
99,000
|
80,000
|
|
Intangibles
|
25,000
|
50,000
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
40,800
|
48,000
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
153,000
|
150,000
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
16,200
|
12,000
|
|
Net Sales
|
500,000
|
500,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
322,500
|
350,000
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
93,500
|
85,000
|
- Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
|
6. Ratio computation. The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.
|
|
LONE PINE COMPANY
|
|
Comparative Balance Sheets
|
|
December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)
|
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Assets
|
|
Current Assets
|
|
Cash and Short-Term Investments
|
$400
|
$600
|
|
Accounts Receivable (net)
|
3,000
|
2,400
|
|
Inventories
|
3,000
|
2,300
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$6,400
|
$5,300
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment
|
|
Land
|
$1,700
|
$500
|
|
Buildings and Equipment (net)
|
1,500
|
1,000
|
|
Total Property, Plant, and Equipment
|
$3,200
|
$1,500
|
|
Total Assets
|
$9,600
|
$6,800
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
$2,800
|
$1,700
|
|
Notes Payable
|
1,100
|
1,900
|
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
$3,900
|
$3,600
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
|
Bonds Payable
|
4,100
|
2,100
|
|
Total Liabilities
|
$8,000
|
$5,700
|
|
Stockholders Equity
|
|
Common Stock
|
$200
|
$200
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
1,400
|
900
|
|
Total Stockholders Equity
|
$1,600
|
$1,100
|
|
Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
|
$9,600
|
$6,800
|
|
LONE PINE COMPANY
|
|
Statement of Income and Retained Earnings
|
|
For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)
|
|
Net Sales*
|
$36,000
|
|
Less: Cost of Goods Sold
|
$20,000
|
|
Selling Expense
|
6,000
|
|
Administrative Expense
|
4,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
400
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
2,000
|
32,400
|
|
Net Income
|
$3,600
|
|
Retained Earnings, Jan. 1
|
900
|
|
Ending Retained Earnings
|
$4,500
|
|
Cash Dividends Declared and Paid
|
3,100
|
|
Retained Earnings, Dec. 31
|
$1,400
|
|
*All sales are on account.
|
Instructions
Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calcu lations to two decimal places when necessary:
a. Quick ratio
b. Current ratio
c. Inventory-turnover ratio
d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio
e. Return-on-assets ratio
f. Net-profit-margin ratio
g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity
h. Debt-to-total assets
i. Number of times that interest is earned
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Browse the Internet to acquire a copy of the most recent annual report for a publicly traded company.
Analyze the information contained in the company s balance sheet and income statement to answer the following questions:
What are the company s total assets at the end of its most recent annual reporting period? Why is this important?
What are the total assets at the end of the previous annual reporting period?
How much cash and cash equivalents did the company have at the end of its most recent annual reporting period?
What amount of accounts payable did the company have at the end of its most recent annual reporting period?
What amount of accounts payable did the company have at the end of the previous annual reporting period?
What are the company s net revenues for the last three annual reporting periods?
What is the change in dollars in the company s net income from its most recent annual reporting period to the previous annual reporting period?
What are the company s total current assets at the end of its most recent annual reporting period?
What are the total current assets at the end of the previous annual reporting period?
What in the information above would be important to a potential investor, employee, and so forth?
Summarizethe analysis in a 1,050- to 1,400-word paper in a Microsoft Word document.
Include a copy of the company s balance sheet and income statement.
Format your paper consistent with APA guidelines.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial Statement analysis Financial Statement AnalysisThe Lester (Ratio computations and preparations of statements) Lester Fredrick corporation has in recent years maintained the following relationship among the data on its financial statement 1. Gross profit rate on net sale 30%2. Net profit margin on net sales 8%3. Rate of selling expenses to net sales 15%4. Accounts receivable turnover 8per year5. Inventory turnover 10per year6. Acid-test ratio 2 to 17. Current ratio 3 to 18. Quick asset composition8% cash,27% marketable securities, 65% accounts receivable9. Asset turnover 2 per year10. Ratio of total assets to intangible assets 20 to 111. Ratio of accumulated depreciation to cost of fixed assets 1 to 312. Ratio of accounts receivable to accounts payable 2 to 113. Ratio of working capital to stockholders equity 1 to 1.9514. Ratio of total debt to stockholders equity 1 to 3The corporation had a net income after tax of $520000 for the year ended December 31,2003,which resulted in earnings of 9.74 per share of common stock. Addition information includes the following1. Capital stock authorized, issued(all in 1982), and outstandingCommon, $10 per share par value, issued at 10% premiumPreferred, 11% nonparticipating,$100 per share par value, issued at a 10% premium2. Market value per share of common at December 31,2008$119.523. Preferred dividends paid in 2003 $330004. Times interest earned in 2003 28.735. The amounts of the following were the same at December 31,2008,as at January 1,2003 inventory, account receivable, 10% bonds payable due 2006,and total stockholders equity 6. All purchases and sales were “on account“INSTRUCTION(a) Prepare in good form the condensed (1)balance sheet and (2)income statement and Retained Earnings Statement for the year ending December 31,2003, presenting the amounts you would expect to appear on the Lester Fredrick Corporation`s financial statements. The company`s tax rate in 2003 was 30%.Major caption appearing on Lester Frederick`s balance sheet are Current Assets(list each of the current assets), Property, plant and equipment , Intangible Assets, Current Liabilities (list each current liabilities),Long-Term Liabilities, and Stockholders` Equity (list each section). In addition to the accounts divulged in the problem, you should include accounts for Prepaid Expenses, Accrued Expenses, and Administrative Expenses.(b) Note For each amount used to prepare the three financial statements, please show computations.(c) Compute the following for 2003 (show your computation)1. Rate of return on common stockholders equity2. Price-earnings ratio for common stock3. Dividends paid per share of common stock4. Dividends paid per share of preferred stock5. Dividends yield on common stock
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial Statement Case Study
(This assignment is to be preparedindividually)
OBJECTIVE: The objective of this assignment is to expose you to the type of information contained in an annual report as well as learn where to locate specific financial data within the report. You will use the annual report from your assigned company to complete the three parts of this assignment. Each of the three parts of this assignment will be evaluated on the criteria outlined below.
LeBow Focus:
Economics:Explore stock pricing, inflation effects, and business cycles.
Problem Solving:Use critical thinking skills to evaluate ratio relationships in interpreting company financial health.
Career Planning:Explore some of the tasks and responsibilities for a career as a stockbroker, accountant, or financial manager.
Writing:Writing specific to business such as company performance analysis and investment analysis.
Part 1: Financial Statement Research 30 points
GOAL: For this section you should locate data in both the Income Statement and Balance Sheet. You will have to find the data from thetwo most currentconsecutive years available for each of the items listed below. You will then have tocalculate the percentage change for those two consecutive years and indicate that change. An excel spreadsheet should be used to complete this section.You must include a copy of the Income Statement and the Balance Sheet for this section of the assignment and highlight data used. Based on the data you gathered, whatoverall observations can you make about the company (that does not mean just stating assets went up or down, but rather strategies, trends or impacts) You can include questions you would ask or other information you would want to research.
*Sales*Cash
*Cost of Sales (COGS)*Total Current Assets
*Gross Profit*Long Term Debt
*Net Income (loss)*Total Equity
*Inventory*Total Assets
Part 2: Financial Statement Analysis 40 points
GOAL: For this section you will use financial ratios to evaluate the relationship between Balance Sheet and Income Statement data fromthe two most currentconsecutive years in making determinations about company performance.You are to compare this data to the averages for your company s industry. For each ratio you should show the formula used, enter your company s numbers into that formula, compute the ratio, and assign the proper label to the answer ($, %, etc.). You will complete this for each of the two years data. Once again, an excel spreadsheet should be used to complete this section. Based on the data gathered, whatoverall observations can you make about the company (that does not mean just stating a ratio went up or down, but rather why, given strategies, trends or impacts or particular input data) You can include questions you would ask or other information you would want to research.
*Current Ratio/Liquidity*Inventory Turnover
*Debt to Equity Ratio*Profit Margin
*ROI*One additional ratio of your choice
Part 3: Interpretive Analysis 40 points
GOAL: Each of the ratios in Section 2 provide relevant information to help answer specific questions about the financial health of the company. You will have to interpret that information for three of those ratios by responding to each of the multi-part following questions. The discussion should be thorough and incorporate data and analysis from above.
1. What is meant by liquidity Did the company experience and increase or a decrease in liquidity over the two-year period evaluated What effect do the liquidity figures have on the company s long term and/or short term performance?
2. What is meant by Profit Margin Did the company experience an increase or decrease in profit margin over the two year period evaluated What effect do the Profit Margin figures have on the company s long term and/or short term performance?
3. What is measured in a Debt to Equity ratio Did the company experience a change in its leverage over the two year period evaluated What impact do these Debt to Equity figures have on the company s overall long term and short term performance?
4. How does inventory and inventory turnover affect liquidity Did the company experience and increase or decrease in inventory turnover
Overall appearance of the report including, but not limited to: proper citations, proper use of grammar/spelling, sentence structure, formatting of the cover page and body of the report 15 points.
Please be certain to include an introduction and conclusion to the case study. The introduction should orient the reader to the company you have researched and provide an overview of the company. The conclusion should summarize your case study and leave the reader with a positive final impression of the work being submitted.
NOTES!
this is a financial statement case study, and we are doing tow differen company! one isCVS Caremark and anther one isPepsi and we need this done before wednesday.
total we will pay 100$
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial Statement Case Study 125 points
(This assignment is to be preparedindividually)
OBJECTIVE: The objective of this assignment is to expose you to the type of information contained in an annual report as well as learn where to locate specific financial data within the report. You will use the annual report from your assigned company to complete the three parts of this assignment. Each of the three parts of this assignment will be evaluated on the criteria outlined below.
LeBow Focus:
Economics:Explore stock pricing, inflation effects, and business cycles.
Problem Solving:Use critical thinking skills to evaluate ratio relationships in interpreting company financial health.
Career Planning:Explore some of the tasks and responsibilities for a career as a stockbroker, accountant, or financial manager.
Writing:Writing specific to business such as company performance analysis and investment analysis.
Part 1: Financial Statement Research 30 points
GOAL: For this section you should locate data in both the Income Statement and Balance Sheet. You will have to find the data from thetwo most currentconsecutive years available for each of the items listed below. You will then have tocalculate the percentage change for those two consecutive years and indicate that change. An excel spreadsheet should be used to complete this section.You must include a copy of the Income Statement and the Balance Sheet for this section of the assignment and highlight data used. Based on the data you gathered, whatoverall observations can you make about the company (that does not mean just stating assets went up or down, but rather strategies, trends or impacts) You can include questions you would ask or other information you would want to research.
*Sales*Cash
*Cost of Sales (COGS)*Total Current Assets
*Gross Profit*Long Term Debt
*Net Income (loss)*Total Equity
*Inventory*Total Assets
Part 2: Financial Statement Analysis 40 points
GOAL: For this section you will use financial ratios to evaluate the relationship between Balance Sheet and Income Statement data fromthe two most currentconsecutive years in making determinations about company performance.You are to compare this data to the averages for your company s industry. For each ratio you should show the formula used, enter your company s numbers into that formula, compute the ratio, and assign the proper label to the answer ($, %, etc.). You will complete this for each of the two years data. Once again, an excel spreadsheet should be used to complete this section. Based on the data gathered, whatoverall observations can you make about the company (that does not mean just stating a ratio went up or down, but rather why, given strategies, trends or impacts or particular input data) You can include questions you would ask or other information you would want to research.
*Current Ratio/Liquidity*Inventory Turnover
*Debt to Equity Ratio*Profit Margin
*ROI*One additional ratio of your choice
Part 3: Interpretive Analysis 40 points
GOAL: Each of the ratios in Section 2 provide relevant information to help answer specific questions about the financial health of the company. You will have to interpret that information for three of those ratios by responding to each of the multi-part following questions. The discussion should be thorough and incorporate data and analysis from above.
1. What is meant by liquidity Did the company experience and increase or a decrease in liquidity over the two-year period evaluated What effect do the liquidity figures have on the company s long term and/or short term performance?
2. What is meant by Profit Margin Did the company experience an increase or decrease in profit margin over the two year period evaluated What effect do the Profit Margin figures have on the company s long term and/or short term performance?
3. What is measured in a Debt to Equity ratio Did the company experience a change in its leverage over the two year period evaluated What impact do these Debt to Equity figures have on the company s overall long term and short term performance?
4. How does inventory and inventory turnover affect liquidity Did the company experience and increase or decrease in inventory turnover
Overall appearance of the report including, but not limited to: proper citations, proper use of grammar/spelling, sentence structure, formatting of the cover page and body of the report 15 points.
Please be certain to include an introduction and conclusion to the case study. The introduction should orient the reader to the company you have researched and provide an overview of the company. The conclusion should summarize your case study and leave the reader with a positive final impression of the work being submitted.
My company is Alcoa
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
4.Financial statement construction via ratios.Incomplete financial statements of Lock Box, Inc., are presented below.
|
LOCK BOX, INC.
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 19X3
|
|
Sales
|
$ ?
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
?
|
|
Gross profit
|
$15,000,000
|
|
Operating expenses & interest
|
?
|
|
Income before tax
|
$ ?
|
|
Income taxes, 40%
|
?
|
|
Net income
|
$ ?
|
|
LOCK BOX, INC.
Balance Sheet
December 31, 19X3
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Cash
Accounts receivable
Inventory
Property, plant, &. equipment
Total assets
|
$ ?
?
?
8,000,000
$24,000,000
|
|
Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
Accounts payable
Notes payable (short-term)
Bonds payable
Common stock
Retained earnings
Total liabilities & stockholders’ equity
|
$ ?
600,000 4,600,000
2,000,000
?
$24,000,000
|
Further information:
1. Cost of goods sold is 60% of sales. All sales are on account.
2. The company’s beginning inventory is $5 million; inventory turnover is 4.
3. The debt to total assets ratio is 70%.
4. The profit margin on sales is 6%.
5. The firm’s accounts receivable turnover is 5. Receivables increased by $400,000 during the year.
Instructions:
Using the preceding data, complete the income statement and the balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| The adjusted trial balance for Callahay Company as of December 31, 2011, follows. |
|
Debit |
Credit |
| Cash |
$ |
160,600 |
|
|
| Accounts receivable |
|
51,000 |
|
|
| Interest receivable |
|
22,200 |
|
|
| Notes receivable (due in 90 days) |
|
169,000 |
|
|
| Office supplies |
|
17,000 |
|
|
| Automobiles |
|
167,000 |
|
|
| Accumulated depreciation Automobiles |
|
|
$ |
55,000 |
| Equipment |
|
142,000 |
|
|
| Accumulated depreciation Equipment |
|
|
|
18,000 |
| Land |
|
84,000 |
|
|
| Accounts payable |
|
|
|
102,000 |
| Interest payable |
|
|
|
45,000 |
| Salaries payable |
|
|
|
24,000 |
| Unearned fees |
|
|
|
46,000 |
| Long-term notes payable |
|
|
|
154,000 |
| Common stock |
|
|
|
22,000 |
| Retained earnings |
|
|
|
283,800 |
| Dividends |
|
48,000 |
|
|
| Fees earned |
|
|
|
514,000 |
| Interest earned |
|
|
|
26,000 |
| Depreciation expense Automobiles |
|
27,000 |
|
|
| Depreciation expense Equipment |
|
20,500 |
|
|
| Salaries expense |
|
185,000 |
|
|
| Wages expense |
|
40,000 |
|
|
| Interest expense |
|
33,400 |
|
|
| Office supplies expense |
|
34,600 |
|
|
| Advertising expense |
|
63,500 |
|
|
| Repairs expense Automobiles |
|
25,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Totals |
$ |
1,289,800 |
$ |
1,289,800 |
|
Pepare Income statement, statement of Retained earnings and Balance sheet.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare Financial Statements from Adjusted Trial Balance Worksheet
The 2012 year-end adjusted balances taken from the general ledger of Cooperstown Services, Inc. are listed below in general ledger order.
|
Coopertown Suppliers, Inc.
|
|
|
DR
|
CR
|
|
Cash
|
$12,950
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
28,150
|
|
|
Supplies
|
8,400
|
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
9,500
|
|
|
Land
|
115,000
|
|
|
Buildings
|
360,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
260,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
|
$239,900
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
35,300
|
|
Salaries payable
|
|
7,300
|
|
Taxes payable
Common stock
|
|
5,200
31,500
|
|
Additional paid-in capital Common
Retained earnings
|
|
15,400
427,600
|
|
Dividends
|
25,400
|
|
|
Service revenue
|
|
475,000
|
|
Salaries expense
|
335,600
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
25,100
|
|
|
Supplies expense
|
12,950
|
|
|
Insurance expense
|
8,200
|
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
30,850
|
|
|
Utilities expense
|
5,100
|
|
|
Total
|
$1,237,200
|
$1,237,200
|
Transfer these accounts and balances to a spreadsheet worksheet and prepare an Income statement, a Classified Balance Sheet, and a Statement of Retained Earnings all in good form using proper headings for each statement. Note that Cooperstown is a service company so there is no cost of goods sold in its chart of accounts. Also, assume that all the liabilities are current liabilities. Keep in mind that you should not report any accounts without balances in your statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare Financial Statements from Adjusted Trial Balance Worksheet
The 2012 year-end adjusted balances taken from the general ledger of Cooperstown Services, Inc. are listed below in general ledger order.
|
Coopertown Suppliers, Inc.
|
|
|
DR
|
CR
|
|
Cash
|
$12,950
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
28,150
|
|
|
Supplies
|
8,400
|
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
9,500
|
|
|
Land
|
115,000
|
|
|
Buildings
|
360,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
260,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
|
$239,900
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
35,300
|
|
Salaries payable
|
|
7,300
|
|
Taxes payable
Common stock
|
|
5,200
31,500
|
|
Additional paid-in capital Common
Retained earnings
|
|
15,400
427,600
|
|
Dividends
|
25,400
|
|
|
Service revenue
|
|
475,000
|
|
Salaries expense
|
335,600
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
25,100
|
|
|
Supplies expense
|
12,950
|
|
|
Insurance expense
|
8,200
|
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
30,850
|
|
|
Utilities expense
|
5,100
|
|
|
Total
|
$1,237,200
|
$1,237,200
|
Transfer these accounts and balances to a spreadsheet worksheet and prepare an Income statement, a Classified Balance Sheet, and a Statement of Retained Earnings all in good form using proper headings for each statement. Note that Cooperstown is a service company so there is no cost of goods sold in its chart of accounts. Also, assume that all the liabilities are current liabilities. Keep in mind that you should not report any accounts without balances in your statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.
A repair that extends the useful life of an asset would be considered a/an
A.
extraordinary repair.
B.
betterment.
C.
capital expense.
D.
ordinary repair.
2.
A company receives a note payable for $3,500 at 9% for 45 days. How much interest (to the nearest
cent) will the customer owe using a 360-day year?
A.
$354.38
B.
$38.84
C.
$39.38
D.
$315.00
3.
If the amount extracted from a coal mine was different every year for four years, you would
A.
debit depletion expense for the same amount each year.
B.
use the same depletion expense rate per unit each year.
C.
credit accumulated depletion – coal mine for the same amount each year.
D.
recompute the depletion expense rate per unit each year.
4.
Brandon Corporation purchased a vein of mineral ore for $3,250,000. It is estimated that 15,000,000
tons of ore are available to be extracted. The salvage value is determined to be $400,000. The estimation
depletion expense for this year’s extraction of 1,760,000 tons of ore (rounded to the nearest dollar) is
A.
$381,333.
B.
$428,267.
C.
$334,400.
D.
$400,000.
5.
Research and development costs (R&D) are generally
A.
listed as “current assets” on the balance sheet.
B.
listed as “other intangibles” on the balance sheet.
C.
listed as “long-term assets” on the balance sheet.
D.
expensed and become part of the income statement.
6.
Amanda Industries had total assets of $600,000; total liabilities of $175,000; and total stockholders’
equity of $425,000. Amanda Industries’ debt ratio is
A.
29.2%.
B.
17.1%.
C.
41.2%.
D.
70.8%.
7.
Mackey Company has a five-year mortgage for $100,000. In the first year of the mortgage, Mackey will
report this liability as a
A.
current liability of $80,000 and a long-term liability of $20,000.
B.
current liability of $20,000 and a long-term liability of $80,000.
C.
long-term liability of $100,000.
D.
current liability of $100,000.
8.
Casey Company’s bank statement shows a bank balance of $43,267. The statement shows a bank
service charge of $50 and a bank collection of $760 in Casey Company’s behalf. Casey’s book balance
should be adjusted by a total of
A.
+$710.
B.
+$810.
C.
+$760.
D.
$710.
9.
Cash equivalents are
A.
not liquid and carry high risk.
B.
not liquid and carry little risk.
C.
very liquid and carry high risk.
D.
very liquid and carry little risk.
10.
Which marketable securities are reported at cost on the balance sheet date?
A.
Held-to-maturity securities
B.
Trading securities
C.
Trading and held-to-maturity securities
D.
Available-for-sale securities
11.
A truck costing $56,000 has accumulated depreciation of $50,000. The truck is scrapped for $500. The
journal entry to record this transaction is
A.
debit Loss on Disposal $6,000, debit Accumulated Depreciation – Truck for $50,000, and credit Truck for $56,000.
B.
debit Cash for $500, debit Accumulated Depreciation – Truck for $50,000, debit Loss on Disposal for $5,500, and credit
Truck for $56,000.
C.
debit Cash for $500, debit Loss on Disposal for $55,500, and credit Truck for $56,000.
D.
debit Cash for $500, debit Truck for $50,000, debit Loss on Disposal for $5,500, and credit Accumulated Depreciation –
Truck for $56,000.
12.
Meranda Corporation purchases a machine for $125,000. It has an estimated salvage value of $10,000
and is expected to produce 50,000 units in its lifetime. During the first year of operation, it produced
14,500 units. To the nearest dollar, the depreciation for the first year under the units of production method
will be
A.
$33,350.
B.
$36,250.
C.
$31,250.
D.
$35,500.
13.
Ryan Corporation made a basket purchase of three items. Item A was appraised at $35,000; item B
was appraised at $55,000; and item C was appraised at $60,000. The purchase price was $125,000. The
amount at which item C should be recorded (rounded to the nearest dollar) is
A.
$72,000.
B.
$29,167.
C.
$83,300.
D.
$50,000.
14.
Brandon Company completed an aging of its accounts receivable and came up with an estimated
amount of $6,342. The credit sales for the period are $85,000. The balance in the allowance for doubtful
accounts is a debit of $817. If Brandon uses 5% of credit sales as its estimating uncollectable accounts,
how much will the credit be to the allowance for doubtful accounts if Brandon uses the estimate of aging
receivables as its method of estimating uncollectable accounts?
A.
$5,067
B.
$4,250
C.
$7,159
D.
$5,525
15.
Which of the following would indicate poor internal control over accounts receivable?
A.
The person handling cash receipts passes the receipts to someone who enters them into accounts receivable.
B.
The same person handling cash receipts also records the accounts receivable transactions.
C.
The person who handles accounts receivable wouldn’t write off accounts as uncollectable.
D.
The mailroom employees open the mail and give the cash receipts to another employee.
16.
Ryan Corporation made a basket purchase of three items. Item A was appraised at $35,000; item B
was appraised at $55,000; and item C was appraised at $60,000. The purchase price was $125,000. The
amount at which item B should be recorded is
A.
($55,000/$95,000) $150,000.
B.
($55,000/$150,000) $125,000.
C.
($55,000/$95,000) $125,000.
D.
($55,000/$125,000) $150,000.
17.
Which of the following would be considered a contingent liability?
A.
Mortgage obligation
B.
Accounts payable obligation
End of exam
C.
Sales tax obligation
D.
Pending legal action
18.
Margaret is a customer of Tammy Company. The company wrote off her account of $1,200 on August
15. On October 12, she sent in a payment of $560. What will Tammy Company record first to reinstate
her account?
A.
Debit Uncollectible Accounts Expense; credit Accounts Receivable/Margaret.
B.
Debit Accounts Receivable/Margaret; credit Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.
C.
Debit Cash; credit Accounts Receivable/Margaret.
D.
Debit Allowance for Doubtful Accounts; credit Accounts Receivable/Margaret.
19.
Using a 360-day year, the maturity value of a 69-day note for $1,500 at 7% annual interest is (rounded
to the nearest cent)
A.
$1,605.00.
B.
$20.13.
C.
$1,584,88.
D.
$1,520.13.
20.
Which of the following isnota benefit to extending credit to customers?
A.
Bad-debt expenses
B.
Wider range of customers
C.
Increased revenues
D.
Increased profits
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.
Accounts receivable amounted to $215,000 at the beginning of the year and $245,000 at the end of the
year. Income reported on the income statement for the year was $300,000. The cash flow from operating activities on the cash flow statement using the indirect method is
A.
$315,000.
B.
$270,000.
C.
$300,000.
D.
$330,000.
2.
In a common-size income statement, selling expenses are 55%. This means that they’re 55% of
A.
net profit.
B.
net income.
C.
net sales.
D.
gross profit.
3.
Rick Company has declared a $40,000 cash dividend to shareholders. The company has 5,000 shares of
$20 par, 6% preferred stock, and 10,000 shares of $15 par common stock. The preferred stock is
cumulative. How much will be distributed to the preferred and common stockholders on the date of
payment if the preferred stock is $12,000 in arrears?
A.
$20,000 preferred; $20,000 common
B.
$6,000 preferred; $34,000 common
C.
$40,000 preferred; $0 common
D.
$18,000 preferred; $22,000 common
4.
The Isaiah Corporation Stockholders’ Equity section includes the following information:
Total par value of the preferred and common stock is
Preferred Stock $22,000
Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Preferred 2,980
Common Stock 48,000
Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Common 3,400
Retained Earnings 7,350
A.
$83,730.
B.
$76,380.
C.
$77,350.
D.
$70,000.
5.
Birch issued 200 shares of $12 par common stock in exchange for a piece of equipment with a current
market value of $3,000. Which of the following is not part of the journal entry for this transaction?
A.
Debiting equipment for $3,000
B.
Crediting paid-in capital in excess of par common for $600
C.
Crediting common stock for $3,000
D.
Crediting common stock for $2,400
6.
Which section of the income statement does not report net of income taxes or net of income tax savings?
A.
Continuing operations section
B.
Extraordinary items section
C.
Discontinued operations section
D.
Cumulative effect of changes in accounting principles section
7.
Earnings that a stockholder receives from a corporation are an example of which stockholder right?
A.
Dividends
B.
Liquidation
C.
Preemption
D.
Vote
8.
Casey Company has a $2,400 credit balance in Paid-In Capital Treasury Stock. It sells 500 shares of
treasury stock that the company reacquired at $21/share, for $18/share. After the transaction, what will the balance be in the Paid-In Capital in Excess of Par Treasury account?
A.
$1,500 debit
B.
$900 debit
C.
$900 credit
D.
$3,900 credit
9.
The records of Ashley Boutique showed a net loss of $30,000; depreciation expense of $25,000; and an
increase in supplies on hand of $5,000. The amount of net cash flow from operating activities using the
indirect method is
A.
($15,000).
B.
($10,000).
C.
$20,000.
D.
$15,000.
10.
The Amanda Corporation Stockholders’ Equity section includes the following information:
Preferred Stock $12,000
Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Preferred 2,700
Common Stock 15,000
Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Common 4,100
What was the total selling price of the preferred stock?
Retained Earnings 8,200
A.
$16,100
B.
$14,700
C.
$20,200
D.
$12,000
11.
Tammy Corporation has 350,000 shares of $3 par common stock outstanding. It has declared a 5%
stock dividend. The current market price of the common stock is $7.50/share. The amount that will be
debited to retained earnings on the date of declaration is
A.
$183,750.
B.
$52,500.
C.
$78,750.
D.
$131,250.
12.
Operating expenses other than depreciation for the year were $335,000. Prepaid expenses
decreased by $7,000. Cash payments for operating expenses to be reported on the cash flow statement
using the direct method would be
A.
$335,000.
B.
$328,000.
C.
$342,000.
D.
$7,000.
13.
Cost of goods sold for the year was $850,000. Inventory was $60,000 at the beginning of the year and
$90,000 at the end of the year. There were no changes in the amount in accounts payable for the year.
Cash payment for merchandise to be reported under the direct method is
A.
$880,000.
B.
$850,000.
C.
$910,000.
D.
$940,000.
14.
If current assets were $100,000 in 2009 and $88,000 in 2010, what was the amount of increase or
decrease in percentage terms from 2009 to 2010? (Round to the nearest percent.)
A.
Increase of 12%
B.
Decrease of 14%
C.
Decrease of 12%
D.
Increase of 14%
15.
What is the rate of return on common stockholders’ equity if sales are $100,000, net income is
$22,700, and average common stockholders’ equity is $86,000?
A.
26.4%
B.
86.0%
C.
22.7%
End of exam
D.
The rate of return can’t be determined from the information given.
16.
Net sales at Kelly’s Bakery increased from $40,000 to $60,000, and its cost of goods sold increased
from $20,000 to $40,000. Vertical analysis based on net sales would show which percentages for cost of
goods sold (rounded to the nearest %)?
A.
50% and 67%
B.
67% and 40%
C.
40% and 20%
D.
10% and 30%
17.
Casey Company has an accounts receivable turnover of 36 days, an inventory turnover of 77 days, and
an accounts payable turnover of 40 days. Casey’s cash conversion cycle is _______ day(s).
A.
81
B.
73
C.
1
D.
153
18.
For vertical analysis purposes, the base item on the income statement is
A.
gross profit.
B.
net sales.
C.
total expenses.
D.
net income.
19.
Rick Company has declared a $40,000 cash dividend to shareholders. The company has 5,000 shares
of $20 par, 6% preferred stock, and 10,000 shares of $15 par common stock. The preferred stock is
noncumulative. How much will be distributed to the preferred and common stockholders on the date of
payment?
A.
$6,000 preferred; $34,000 common
B.
$0 preferred; $40,000 common
C.
$34,000 preferred; $6,000 common
D.
$40,000 preferred; $0 common
20.
Brandon Company had extraordinary losses of $150,000. If its corporate tax rate is 30%, at which
amount will the losses be shown on the income statement?
A.
Not enough information is given to answer the question.
B.
$105,000
C.
$45,000
D.
$150,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Final Paper
Focus of the Final Paper
Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions. Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references.
Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:
Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?
Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet
Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.
Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.
Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.
Writing the Final Paper
1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:
a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted
3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In your final paper for this course, you will need to write a Methods section that is about 4 pages long where you will assess and evaluate the methods of research.
In preparation for this particular section, answer the following questions thoroughly and provide justification/support. The more complete and detailed your answers for these questions, the better prepared you are to successfully write your final paper.
Please submit your answers as a single 4- to 6-page document as a numbered list; this will ensure you do not inadvertently miss a question.
Additionally, please submit a title page and a reference page in proper APA format.
What is your research question?
What is your hypothesis or hypotheses? What is the null hypothesis?
How many participants would you like to use and why? What are the inclusion characteristics, i.e., what must they have in order to be included in your study (for example, gender, diagnosis, age, personality traits, etc.)? Are there any exclusion characteristics, i.e. are there certain characteristics that would exclude them from being in your study? Does the sample need to be diverse? Why or why not?
What sampling technique will be used to collect your sample? What population does your sample generalize to?
What are the variables in your study? HINT: Refer back to your hypothesis or hypotheses.
Provide operational definitions for each variable.
How will you measure each variable? Discuss the reliability and validity of these measures in general terms.
What technique will be used for data collection (e.g., observation, survey, interview, archival, etc.)?
What type of research design is being used?
Briefly discuss the procedure that would be followed when conducting the research.
What are some POTENTIAL ethical issues? How might they be addressed?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The final project should be eight pages in length and include a reference of all resources used. At least three sources should be from scholarly journals, e.g. Journal of Management, Journal of Marketing, or Harvard Business Review. This paper will be a research project that tests a hypothesis chosen by the student that can relate to the place of current employment or previous employment but may not include or involve human subjects directly.
Sample general topics could include:
Manufacturing Quality/Cost Improvement
Service Quality Improvement
Systems Design
Accounts Receivable/Billing/AR Aging
Marketing/Advertising Issues
Sales of Goods
Investments
Product Safety
Workplace Safety
Labor Pools
HR matters of broad concern
Population Studies
Others approved by course instructor
The hypothesis should be a possible cause and effect relationship regarding a process, underlying assumption, or plan that is important to the business. It should not be too broad. The hypothesis must be approved by the instructor by the end of the third week of class. The research process of planning, data sampling, collection and data evaluation should be described. The type of study should be defined and justified. Collect a small representative data sample. Fifteen is the recommended sample size. The data can be collected from observations, surveys, or historical records. The data results should be summarized and displayed and a brief analysis should be included. Use appropriate descriptive or inferential statistics.
OR
Need help with final paper needs to be at least eight pages in lengthand include a bibliography of all resources used. This paper will be a researchproject on a topic chosen by the student that can related to the place ofcurrent employment or previous employment. The research process of planning,data sampling, collection and data evaluation should be included. The type ofstudy should be defined and justified. The data results should be summarized anddisplayed and a brief report should be included.
BUS 642 Week 6 Final Project
BUS642 Week 6 Final Project
BUS642 Week 6 Final Project
BUS 642 Week 6 Final Project Paper
BUS642 Week 6 Final Project Paper
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1
Transactions for Mehta Company for the month of May are presented below.
May 1 B.D. Mehta invests $3,091 cash in exchange for common stock of Mehta Company, a small welding corporation.
3 Buys equipment on account for $1,153.
13 Pays $659 to landlord for May rent.
21 Bills Noble Corp. $539 for welding work done.
Prepare journal entries for each of these transactions.
Question 2
On July 1, 2012, Crowe Co. pays $18,673 to Zubin Insurance Co. for a 3-year insurance contract. Both companies have fiscal years ending December 31. For Crowe Co. journalize the entry on July 1 and the adjusting entry on December 31. (Round answers to zero decimal places, e.g. 2,555.)
Question 3
Dresser Company’s weekly payroll, paid on Fridays, totals $7,700. Employees work a 5-day week. Prepare Dresser’s adjusting entry on Wednesday, December 31, and the journal entry to record the $7,700 cash payment on Friday, January 2. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)
Question 4
Side Kicks has year-end account balances of Sales $886,140; Interest Revenue $15,570; Cost of Goods Sold $564,230; Operating Expenses $213,480; Income Tax Expense $37,660; and Dividends $21,348. Prepare the year-end closing entries. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)
Question 5
Financial information exhibits the characteristic of consistency when
extraordinary gains and losses are not included on the income statement.
accounting procedures are adopted which give a consistent rate of net income.
expenses are reported as charges against revenue in the period in which they are paid.
companies apply the same accounting treatment to similar events, from period to period.
Question 6
What is the relationship between the Securities and Exchange Commission and accounting standard setting in the United States?
The SEC coordinates with the AICPA in establishing accounting standards.
The SEC reviews financial statements for compliance.
The SEC requires all companies listed on an exchange to submit their financial statements to the SEC.
The SEC has a mandate to establish accounting standards for enterprises under its jurisdiction.
Question 7
Starr Co. had sales revenue of $621,700 in 2012. Other items recorded during the year were:
Cost of goods sold $330,000
Wage expense 129,300
Income tax expense 26,400
Increase in value of company reputation 15,100
Other operating expenses 12,500
Unrealized gain on value of patents 20,600
Prepare a single-step income statement for Allen for 2012. Allen has 100,000 shares of stock outstanding. (List multiple entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2. Round earnings per share to 2 decimal places, e.g. 0.20. Enter all amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary.)
Question 8
Portman Corporation has retained earnings of $728,900 at January 1, 2012. Net income during 2012 was $1,897,010, and cash dividends declared and paid during 2012 totaled $77,690. Prepare a retained earnings statement for the year ended December 31, 2012. Assume an error was discovered: land costing $86,630 (net of tax) was charged to repairs expense in 2009. (Enter all amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary.)
Question 9
On January 1, 2012, Richards Inc. had cash and common stock of $62,700. At that date the company had no other asset, liability or equity balances. On January 2, 2012, it purchased for cash $21,030 of equity securities that it classified as available-for-sale. It received cash dividends of $4,200 net of tax during the year on these securities. In addition, it has an unrealized holding gain on these securities of $5,520 net of tax. Determine the following amounts for 2012: (a) net income; (b) comprehensive income; (c) other comprehensive income; and (d) accumulated other comprehensive income (end of 2012).
(a) Net income $
(b) Comprehensive income $
(c) Other comprehensive income $
(d) Accumulated other comprehensive income $
Question 10
(Comprehensive Income)
Armstrong Corporation reported the following for 2012: net sales $1,286,800; cost of goods sold $763,800; selling and administrative expenses $331,100; and an unrealized holding gain on available-for-sale securities $23,000.
Prepare a statement of comprehensive income, using the two-income statement format. Ignore income taxes and earnings per share. (Enter all amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary.)
Question 12
Lazaro, Inc. sells goods on the installment basis and uses the installment-sales method. Due to a customer default, Lazaro repossessed merchandise that was originally sold for $950, resulting in a gross profit rate of 40%. At the time of repossession, the uncollected balance is $550, and the fair value of the repossessed merchandise is $299. Prepare Lazaro’s entry to record the repossession. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)
Question 13
Harding Corporation has the following accounts included in its December 31, 2012, trial balance: Accounts Receivable $110,620; Inventories $293,520; Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $9,270; Patents $73,940; Prepaid Insurance $9,710; Accounts Payable $78,930; Cash $34,760. Prepare the current assets section of the balance sheet listing the accounts in proper sequence.
Question 14
Patrick Corporation’s adjusted trial balance contained the following asset accounts at December 31, 2012: Prepaid Rent $20,500; Goodwill $54,940; Franchise Fees Receivable $2,200; Franchises $46,280; Patents $32,380; Trademarks $13,490. Prepare the intangible assets section of the balance sheet. (List amounts from largest to smallest, e.g. 10, 5, 3, 2.)
Question 15
Hawthorn Corporation’s adjusted trial balance contained the following accounts at December 31, 2012: Retained Earnings $121,510; Common Stock $708,320; Bonds Payable $104,690; Additional Paid-in Capital $202,370; Goodwill $60,810; Accumulated Other Comprehensive Loss $151,950. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet. (List entries in order of stock preferred status. For negative numbers use either a negative sign preceding the number, e.g. -45 or parenthesis, e.g. (45).)
Question 16
Keyser Beverage Company reported the following items in the most recent year.
Net income $45,500
Dividends paid 6,030
Increase in accounts receivable 11,770
Increase in accounts payable 7,510
Purchase of equipment (capital expenditure) 9,470
Depreciation expense 6,510
Issue of notes payable 20,990
Compute net cash flow provided by operating activities and the net change in cash during the year. (List amounts from largest positive to smallest positive followed by most negative to least negative, e.g. 15, 14, 10, -17, -5, -1. For negative numbers use either a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -45 or parenthesis e.g. (45).)
Compute free cash flow.
Free cash flow $
Question 17
Linden Corporation is preparing its December 31, 2012, financial statements. Two events that occurred between December 31, 2012, and March 10, 2013, when the statements were issued, are described below.
1. A liability, estimated at $162,910 at December 31, 2012, was settled on February 26, 2013, at $181,060.
2. A flood loss of $79,500 occurred on March 1, 2013.
What effect do these subsequent events have on 2012 net income? (If there is no impact select not change and 0 for the amount.)
Net income will by $ as a result of the adjustment of the liability.
Net income will by $ as a result of the adjustment of the flood loss.
Question 18
Roder Corporation has seven industry segments with total revenues as follows.
Penley $1,743 Cheng $581
Konami 1,992 Takuhi 498
KSC 664 Molina 2,075
Red Moon 747
Based only on the total revenues test, which industry segments are reportable?
Enter 1 if the segment is reportable. Enter 0 if the segment is not reportable.
Penley
Konami
KSC
Red Moon
Cheng
Takuhi
Molina
Question 19
Operating profits and losses for the seven industry segments of Roder Corporation are:
Penley $130 Cheng $(30)
Konami (60) Takuhi 45
KSC 40 Molina 215
Red Moon 75
Based only on the operating profit (loss) test, which industry segments are reportable?
Enter 1 if the segment is reportable. Enter 0 if the segment is not reportable.
Penley
Konami
KSC
Red Moon
Cheng
Takuhi
Molina
Question 20
Which of the following events will appear in the cash flows from financing activities section of the statement of cash flows?
Cash purchases of equipment.
Cash received as repayment for funds loaned.
Cash purchase of treasury stock.
Cash purchases of bonds issued by another company.
Question 22
The financial statement which summarizes operating, investing, and financing activities of an entity for a period of time is the
retained earnings statement.
statement of cash flows.
income statement.
statement of financial position.
Question 23
Ames Company reported 2012 net income of $155,580. During 2012, accounts receivable increased by $15,020 and accounts payable increased by $9,900. Depreciation expense was $41,710. Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows.(List amounts from largest positive to smallest positive followed by most negative to least negative, e.g. 15, 14, 10, -17, -5, -1. For negative numbers use either a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -45 or parenthesis e.g. (45).)
Question 24
Martinez Corporation engaged in the following cash transactions during 2012.
Sale of land and building $197,470
Purchase of treasury stock 41,520
Purchase of land 38,050
Payment of cash dividend 86,150
Purchase of equipment 56,870
Issuance of common stock 153,880
Retirement of bonds 100,610
Compute the net cash provided (used) by investing activities. (List multiple entries from the largest positive to the smallest positive amount followed by the most negative to the least negative amount, e.g. 15, 14, 10, -17, -5, -1. For negative numbers use either a negative sign preceding the number, e.g. -45 or parenthesis, e.g. (45).)
Question 26
A comparative balance sheet for Orozco Corporation is presented below.
December 31
Assets 2012 2011
Cash $63,005 $22,000
Accounts receivable 84,797 68,792
Inventories 182,797 191,792
Land 73,797 112,792
Equipment 267,203 197,208
Accumulated depreciation-equipment (71,797) (44,792)
Total $599,802 $547,792
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Accounts payable $36,797 $49,792
Bonds payable 150,000 200,000
Common stock ($1 par) 214,000 164,000
Retained earnings 199,005 134,000
Total $599,802 $547,792
Additional information:
1. Net income for 2012 was $110,594.
2. Cash dividends of $45,589 were declared and paid.
3. Bonds payable amounting to $50,000 were retired through issuance of common stock.
(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2012 for Orozco Corporation. (List multiple entries from the largest positive to the smallest positive amount followed by the most negative to the least negative amount, e.g. 15, 14, 10, -17, -5, -1. For negative numbers use either a negative sign preceding the number, e.g. -45 or parenthesis, e.g. (45).)
OROZCO CORPORATION
Question 27
Chris Spear invested $11,349 today in a fund that earns 8% compounded annually. To what amount will the investment grow in 3 years? To what amount would the investment grow in 3 years if the fund earns 8% annual interest compounded semiannually? (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 12,250.25. Hint: Use tables in text.)
Investment at 8% annual interest $
Investment at 8% annual interest compounded semiannually $
Question 30
(Simple and Compound Interest Computations)
Lyle O ‘Keefe invests $32,100 at 8% annual interest, leaving the money invested without withdrawing any of the interest for 9 years. At the end of the 9 years, Lyle withdrew the accumulated amount of money.
(a) Compute the amount Lyle would withdraw assuming the investment earns simple interest.
$
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Course Project Part II
You must show all work and calculations by typing out the longhand formula, or post a screen shot of any online calculator used, or attach an excel file showing formulas/calculations in order to earn any credit
Introduction
You will assume that you still work as a financial analyst for AirJet Best Parts, Inc. The company is considering a capital investment in a new machine and you are in charge of making a recommendation on the purchase based on (1) a given rate of return of 15% (Task 4) and (2) the firm s cost of capital (Task 5).
Task 4.Capital Budgeting for a New Machine
A few months have now passed and AirJet Best Parts, Inc. is considering the purchase on a new machine that will increase the production of a special component significantly. The anticipated cash flows for the project are as follows:
Year 1 $1,100,000
Year 2 $1,450,000
Year 3 $1,300,000
Year 4 $950,000
You have now been tasked with providing a recommendation for the project based on the results of a Net Present Value Analysis. Assuming that the required rate of return is 15% and the initial cost of the machine is $3,000,000.
1.
What is the project s IRR? (10 pts)
2.
What is the project s NPV? (15 pts)
3.
Should the company accept this project and why (or why not)? (5 pts)
4.
Explain how depreciation will affect the present value of the project. (10 pts)
5.
Provide at least one example for each of following as it relates to the project: (5 pts each)
a.
Sunk Cost
b.
Opportunity cost
c.
Erosion
6.
Explain how you would conduct a scenario and sensitivity analysis of the project. What would be some project-specific risks and market risks related to this project? (20 pts)
–
AirJet Best Parts Inc. is now considering that the appropriate discount rate for the new machine should be the cost of capital and would like to determine it. You will assist in the process of obtaining this rate.
1.
Compute the cost of debt. Assume AirJet Best Parts Inc. is considering issuing new bonds. Select current bonds from one of the main competitors as a benchmark. Key competitors include Raytheon, Boeing, Lockheed Martin, and the Northrop Grumman Corporation.
a.
What is the YTM of the competitor s bond? You may use a number of sources, but we recommend Morningstar. Find the YTM of one 15 or 20 year bond with the highest possible creditworthiness. You may assume that new bonds issued by AirJet Best Parts, Inc. are of similar risk and will require the same return. (5 pts)
b.
What is the after-tax cost of debt if the tax rate is 34%? (5 pts)
c.
Explain what other methods you could have used to find the cost of debt for AirJet Best Parts Inc.(10 pts)
d.
Explain why you should use the YTM and not the coupon rate as the required return for debt. (5 pts)
2.
Compute the cost of common equity using the CAPM model. For beta, use the average beta of three selected competitors. You may obtain the betas from Yahoo Finance. Assume the risk free rate to be 3% and the market risk premium to be 4%.
a.
What is the cost of common equity? (5 pts)
b.
Explain the advantages and disadvantages to use the CAPM model as the method to compute the cost of common equity. Compare and contrast this method with the dividend growth model approach. (10 pts)
3.
Compute the cost of preferred equity assuming the dividend paid for preferred stock is $2.93 and the current value of the stock is $50 per share.
a.
What is the cost of preferred equity? (5 pts)
b.
Is there any other method to compute this cost? Explain. (5 pts)
4.
Assuming that the market value weights of these capital sources are 30% bonds, 60% common equity and 10% preferred equity, what is the weighted cost of capital of the firm? (10 pts)
5.
Should the firm use this WACC for all projects? Explain and provide examples as appropriate. (10 pts)
6.
Recompute the net present value of the project based on the cost of capital you found. Do you still believe that your earlier recommendation for accepting or rejecting the project was adequate? Why or why not? (5 pts)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Statement of Retained Earnings
In its most recent financial statements, Newhouse Inc. reported $50 million of net income and $810 million of retained earnings. The previous retained earnings were $780 million. How much in dividends was paid to shareholders during the year?
Intermediate Problems 7 11
(2-7)
Corporate Tax Liability
The Talley Corporation had a taxable income of $365,000 from operations after all operating costs but before (1) interest charges of $50,000, (2) dividends received of $15,000, (3) dividends paid of $25,000, and (4) income taxes. What are the firm s income tax liability and its after-tax income? What are the company s marginal and average tax rates on taxable income?
(2-9)
Corporate After-Tax Yield
The Shrieves Corporation has $10,000 that it plans to invest in marketable securities. It is choosing among AT&T bonds, which yield 7.5%, state of Florida muni bonds, which yield 5% (but are not taxable), and AT&T preferred stock, with a dividend yield of 6%. Shrieves s corporate tax rate is 35%, and 70% of the dividends received are tax exempt. Find the after-tax rates of return on all three securities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1
Which of the following best describes an “opportunity cost”
The distribution of all products to be sold
Costs that were incurred in the past and cannot be changed
Benefits foregone by not choosing an alternative course of action
Expected future costs that differs among alternatives
Question 2
What is the name given to choosing among different alternative investments due to limited resources
Capital rationing
Resource allocation
Capital investing
Resource rationing
Question 3
The practice of directing executive attention to important deviations from budgeted amounts is called management by:
analysis.
exception.
objective.
control.
Question 4
The Mad Hatter Corporation reported the following income statement and balance sheet amounts and additional information for the end of the current year.
End of current year End of prior year
Net sales revenue (all credit) $ 1,200,000
Cost of goods sold $ 725,000
Gross profit $ 475,000
Selling/general expenses $ 280,000
Interest expense $ 42,000
Net Income $ 153,000
Current assets $ 112,000 $ 82,000
Long-term assets $ 505,000 $ 440,000
Total assets $ 617,000 $ 522,000
Current liabilities $ 57,000 $ 52,000
Long-term liabilities $ 275,000 $ 245,000
Common stockholders’ equity $ 415,000 $ 225,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $ 617,000 $ 522,000
Inventory and prepaid expenses account for $30,000 of the current year’s current assets.
Average inventory for the current year is $25,000.
Average net accounts receivable for the current year is $45,000.
There are 40,000 shares of common stock outstanding.
Total dividends paid during the current year were $37,000.
The market price per share of common stock is $20.
What is the earnings per share for the current year
$3.83
$4.64
$10.38
$5.23
Question 5
Return on investment and revenue growth would be examples of:
financial perspective.
customer perspective.
internal business perspective.
learning and growth perspective.
Question 6
Glow Sticks Corporation manufactures and sells glow-in-the-dark necklaces for $10 each. The company has the capacity to produce 25,000 necklaces in a year, but is currently producing and selling 20,000 necklaces per year. The company currently is incurring the following costs at its current production level of 20,000 necklaces:
Variable manufacturing costs $ 60,000
Fixed manufacturing costs $ 90,000
Variable selling and administrative costs $ 75,000
Fixed selling and administrative costs $ 50,000
An amusement park is interested in purchasing the excess capacity of 5,000 necklaces if it can receive a special price. This special order would not affect Glow Sticks Corporation’s regular sales or its cost structure. Glow Sticks Corporation’s profits would increase from this special order if the special order price per necklace is greater than:
$13.75.
$6.75.
$5.40.
$7.50.
Question 7
Roberts Corporation has an ROI of 23%, total assets of $5,250,000, and current liabilities of $950,000. What is Roberts Corporation’s operating income
$4,130,435
$218,500
$1,207,500
$22,826,087
Question 8
The following information relates to Bonny Unlimited for the past two years.
Account Current year Prior year
Net sales (all credit) $250,000 $180,000
Cost of goods sold $115,000 $110,000
Gross profit $135,000 $ 70,000
Income from operations $ 32,000 $ 30,000
Interest expense $ 4,000 $ 7,000
Net income $ 24,000 $ 18,000
Cash $ 16,000 $ 14,000
Accounts receivable, net $ 20,000 $ 31,000
Inventory $ 52,000 $ 44,000
Prepaid expenses $ 2,000 $ 1,000
Total current assets $ 90,000 $ 90,000
Total long-term assets $100,000 $120,000
Total current liabilities $ 60,000 $ 90,000
Total long-term liabilities $ 22,000 $ 78,000
Common stock, no par,
2,000 shares, market value $90 per share $ 40,000 $ 40,000
Retained earnings $ 68,000 $ 2,000
What is the current ratio for the current year
1.00
1.50
2.40
7.00
Question 9
Gutierrez Company budgeted 10,000 pounds of direct materials costing $21.50 per pound to make 5,000 units of product. The company actually used 10,200 pounds of direct materials costing $24.00 per pound to make the 5,000 units. What is the direct materials efficiency variance
$4,800 favorable
$4,300 unfavorable
$4,800 unfavorable
$4,300 favorable
Question 10
Which of the following types of analysis include common-sized financial statements
Horizontal analysis
Trend analysis
Vertical analysis
Ratio analysis
Question 11
Which of the following goals of a performance evaluation system is accomplished when a company’s actual results are compared to the results of competitors
Motivating unit managers
Communicating expectations
Benchmarking
Promoting goal congruence
Question 12
Outdoor Creations sells its patio heaters for $300 each. Its variable cost is $220 per heater. Fixed costs are $40,000 per month for volumes up to 1,000 patio heaters. Above 1,000 heaters, monthly fixed costs are $62,000. What is the budgeted operating income at a level of 1,300 heaters per month
$64,000
$104,000
$328,000
$42,000
Question 13
(Present value tables are needed.) Miami Marine Enterprises is evaluating the purchase of an elaborate hydraulic lift system for all of its locations to use for the boats brought in for repair. The company has narrowed their choices down to two: the B14 Model and the F54 Model. Financial data about the two choices follows.
B14 Model F54 Model
Investment $ 320,000 $ 240,000
Useful life (years) 8 8
Estimated annual net cash inflows for useful life $ 75,000 $ 40,000
Residual value $ 30,000 $ 10,000
Depreciation method Straight-line Straight-line
Required rate of return 14% 10%
What is the total present value of future cash inflows from the B14 Model
$38,455
$218,070
$358,455
$410,655
Question 14
Zany Brainy projected current year sales of 50,000 units at a unit sale price of $20.00. Actual current year sales were 55,000 units at $22.00 per unit. Actual variable costs, budgeted at $15.00 per unit, totaled $14.00 per unit. Budgeted fixed costs totaled $400,000, while actual fixed costs amounted to $420,000. What is the sales volume variance for total revenue
$110,000 unfavorable
$100,000 favorable
$110,000 favorable
$100,000 unfavorable
Question 15
Which department listed below would most likely be responsible for a “direct material price variance”
Marketing department
Personnel department
Production department
Purchasing department
Question 16
Green Garden Supply budgeted three hours of direct labor per unit at $10.00 per hour to produce 500 units of product. The 500 units were completed using 1,600 hours of direct labor at $10.50 per hour. What is the direct labor efficiency variance
$1,050 favorable
$1,000 favorable
$1,000 unfavorable
$1,050 unfavorable
Question 17
Which term below best describes “the comprehensive budget”
Sensitivity analysis
Responsibility center
Master budget
Operating budget
Question 18
Rong Company expects cash sales for July of $15,000, and a 20% monthly increase during August and September. Credit sales of $6,000 in July should be followed by 10% decreases during August and September. What are budgeted cash sales and budgeted credit sales for September
$12,150 and $8,640
$18,000 and $5,400
$21,600 and $4,860
$13,500 and $7,200
Question 19
Operating activities resulting from the sales of goods and services relate to:
the income statement.
retained earnings reported on the balance sheet.
assets and liabilities reported on the balance sheet.
net income on the retained earnings statement.
Question 20
Vera Enterprises has in its inventory 1,000 damaged handbags that cost $20,000. The handbags can be sold in their present condition for $12,000, or repaired at a cost of $13,000 and sold for $31,000. What is the opportunity cost of selling the handbags in their present condition
$18,000
$25,000
$32,000
$44,000
Question 21
If a company decides to outsource and then has freed capacity, the decision on what to do with that freed capacity would be based upon:
unavoidable fixed costs.
opportunity costs.
avoidable fixed costs.
none of the above.
Question 22
Which of the following is the correct order of the sections on a statement of cash flows
Operating, financing, investing
Investing, operating, financing
Financing, investing, operating
Operating, investing, financing
Question 23
Richol Corporation is considering an investment in new equipment costing $180,000. The equipment will be depreciated on a straight-line basis over a five-year life and is expected to generate net cash inflows of $45,000 the first year, $65,000 the second year, and $90,000 every year thereafter until the fifth year. What is the payback period for this investment? The equipment has no residual value.
2.00 years
2.37 years
2.78 years
4.00 years
Question 24
The Tandem division of the Great Adventures Cycles Company had the following results last year (in thousands).
Sales $ 4,000,000
Operating income $ 480,000
Total assets $ 2,000,000
Current liabilities $ 300,000
Management’s target rate of return is 10% and the weighted average cost of capital is 8%. Its effective tax rate is 40%.
What is the Tandem division’s Return on Investment (ROI)
24.00%
7.50%
12.00%
200.00%
Question 25
Horvath Corporation had beginning inventory of 22,000 units and expects sales of 76,500 units during the year. Desired ending inventory is 19,500 units. How many units should Horvath Corporation produce
79,000 units
35,000 units
74,000 units
118,000 units
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Title:Finance & Accounting homework
|
|
Question Detail:
-
Transaction Analysis
For each of the following transactions, show the effect if any of the transaction or adjustments on the appropriate balance sheet category or on net income by ensuring for each category affected the account name and amount and indicate whether this is an addition (+) or subtraction (-) using the horizontal analysis. Items that affect net income should notalso be shown as affecting owners equity.
-
Bonds payable with a face amount of $15,000 are issued at par on August 1. The coupon interest rate is 8% and interest is paid semi-annually.
-
At the end of December the company accrues the interest that is payable on the bonds issued in (a).
-
On Feb. 1 the company pays the interest on the bonds
-
Bonds payable with a face amount of $5,000 are issued at a price of 99 (That means at 99% of par value)
-
Of the proceeds from the bonds issued in (d), $3,000 is used to purchase land for future expansion
-
Because of warranty claims, finished goods inventories costing $200 is sent to customers to replace defective products
-
The 4 month 10% (annual interest rate) note payable with face amount of $12,000 was signed. The bank made the loan on a discount basis.
-
A long-term bond with principal of $25,000 will become due within the current year.
-
At the end of the month, the company recognizes its rent obligation of $4000 which it has not yet paid.
-
In the next month the company pays both the current month s rent of $4000 and pays the previous month s rent which it had accrued.
|
1
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
|
Transaction / Adjustment
|
Current Asset
|
Noncurrent Asset
|
Current Liability
|
Noncurrent Liability
|
Owners Equity
|
Net Income
|
|
|
Bonds payable with a face amount of $15,000 are issued at par.
|
Cash + 15,000
|
Bonds Payable +15,000
|
|
|
At the end of December the company accrues the interest that is payable on the bonds issued in (a)
|
|
|
On Feb. 1 the company pays the interest on the bonds
|
|
d
|
Bonds payable with a face amount of $5,000 are issued at a price of 99.
|
|
e
|
Of the proceeds from the bonds issued in part (d), $3,000 is used to purchase land for future expansion
|
|
f
|
Because of warranty claims, finished goods inventories costing $200 is sent to customers to replace defective products
|
|
g
|
The company borrwed $12,000 for 4 months at a 10% (annual) interest rate) from a bank. The bank made the loan on a discount basis
|
|
h
|
A long-term bond with principal of $25,000 will become due within the current year
|
|
i
|
At the end of the month, the company recognizes its rent obligation of $4000 which it has not yet paid.
|
|
j
|
In the next month the company pays both the current month s rent of $4000 and pays the previous month s rent which it had accrued
|
-
Bonds payable calculate issue price and bond discount
On January 01, 2009 Roberts Inc. issued $2 million face amount of 10-year 10% coupon rate bonds when market interest rates were 12%. The bonds pay interest annually and mature on Dec. 31, 2018.
-
Using the present value tables the appendix at the end of the book or your calculators), calculate the proceeds (issue price) of Drennen s bonds on January 1, 2009, assuming that the bonds were sold to provide a market rate of return to the investor
-
Show the accounting entry for the issuance of the bonds.
-
What is the annual interest expense?
-
Show the accounting entry for this payment.
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Owners Equity
|
Net Income
|
Revenues
|
Expenses
|
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Owners Equity
|
Net Income
|
Revenues
|
Expenses
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
-
Common stock balance sheet disclosure
The balance sheet caption for common stock is the following:
|
Common stock, $5 par value, 2,000,000 shares authorized, 1,400,000 shares issued, 1,250,000 shares outstanding
|
$
|
-
Calculate the dollar amount that will appear in the caption above.
-
Calculate the total amount of a cash dividend of $0.15 per share.
-
What accounts for the difference between the issued shares and outstanding shares
-
Calculate Earned Revenues
Big Blue University has a fiscal year that ends on June 30. 2009 Summer Session of the university runs seven weeks from June 9 through July 28. Total tuition paid by students for the summer session amount to $1.4 million.
-
How much revenue should be reflected in fiscal year ended June 30, 2009? Explain your answer (Hint: Calculate the number of weeks or days & the proportion before June 30)
-
Would your answer to Part A be any different if the university had a tuition refund policy that no tuition would be refunded after the end of the third week of the summer session classes Explain your answer.
-
Calculate Operating Income and Net Income
The following information is available from the accounting records of Monofill Inc. the year ended December 31, 2009:
|
Net cash provided by financing activities
|
$127,000
|
|
Dividends paid
|
28,000
|
|
Extraordinary loss from flood, net of tax savings of $35,000
|
135,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
16,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
31,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
12,500
|
|
Net sales
|
864,000
|
|
Advertising expense
|
25,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
77,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
559,000
|
|
General and administrative expenses
|
183,000
|
-
Calculate the operating income for the company
-
Calculate the company s net income for the year
-
Cash flows from operating, investing and financing activities direct method
The following information is available from Moonvessel Co. s accounting records of the year ended December 31, 2009 (amounts in millions):
|
Cash dividends declared and paid
|
$340
|
|
Interest and taxes paid
|
110
|
|
Collections from customers
|
1,530
|
|
Net Income
|
120
|
|
Repayment of long-term debt
|
320
|
|
Purchase of land and buildings
|
70
|
|
Cash paid to suppliers and employees
|
1230
|
|
Depreciation
|
70
|
|
Issuance of common stock
|
400
|
|
Purchase of new delivery trucks
|
80
|
-
Calculate the net cash provided (used) by operating activities for the company for the year
-
Calculate the net cash provided [used] by investing activities
-
Calculate the net cash provided (used) by financing activities
-
Calculate the net increase (decrease) in cash for the year
-
Operating income versus net income
If you were interested in evaluating the profitability of a company and could have only limited historical data, which you prefer to know the company s operating income or net income for the past 5 years Explain your answer.
-
Accrual to cash flows
For each of the following items, calculate the cash and sources for cash uses that should be recognized on the statement of cash flows for Baldwin Co. for the year ended Dec. 31, 2009.
-
Sales on account (all are collectible) amounted to $760,000, and accounts receivable decreased by $24,000. How much cash was collected from customers
-
Income tax expense for the year was $148,000.00, and income taxes payable decreased by $34,000, how much cash was paid for income taxes
-
Cost of goods sold amounted to $408,000, accounts payable increased by $19,000, and inventories increased by $14,000. How much cash was paid to suppliers
-
The net book value of buildings increased by $240,000. No buildings were sold, and depreciation expense for the year was $190,000. How much cash was paid to purchase the buildings?
4. Circle-Square Ltd is in the process of liquidating and going out of business. When a company liquidates it sells all of its assets, realizing whatever cash it can, and pays off its liabilities. Any difference between the book value of the asset (or liability) and the amount of cash received (or paid) is recorded as a gain or loss which is reflected in the Owners Equity account.
At the date the firm decides to liquidate, its Balance Sheet shows $22,800 in cash, $114,200 in Accounts Receivable, $61,400 in Inventory, $265,000 in Plant & Equipment, and Total Liabilities of $305,600.
It is estimated that:
1) the inventory can be disposed of in a liquidation sale for 80% of its cost.
2) all but 5 % of the accounts receivable can be collected
3) plant and equipment can be sold for $190,000.
4) liabilities must be paid off in total.
|
6
|
Set up the accounting equation and show the effects of the transactions described. Since total assets must equal total liabilities and owners equity, the unadjusted owners equity can be calculated by subtracting liabilities from the total of the assets given.
|
|
Item
|
Cash
|
+ Accounts Receivable
|
+Inventory
|
+ Plant & Equipment
|
– Liabilities
|
+ Owners Equity
|
|
a
|
Starting Position
|
22800
|
+114200
|
+61400
|
+265000
|
= 305600
|
+157800
|
|
b
|
Collection of Accts Receivable
|
|
c
|
Inventory liquidation
|
|
d
|
Sale of Plant & Equipment
|
|
e
|
Payment of liabilities
|
|
f
|
Balance
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. On the trial balance, which of the following should have the balances listed in the debit column?
A. Assets, dividends, and expenses
B. Liabilities, revenues, and common stock
C. Liabilities, revenues, and dividends
D. Assets, revenues, and dividends
2. The unadjusted trial balance for depreciation expense shows a $780 balance. The expense was adjusted
by $235. The adjusted trial balance figure for depreciation expense is now a
A. $545 debit.
B. $1,015 debit.
C. $1,015 credit.
D. $545 credit.
3. The balance sheet is used to report
A. the financial position on a specific date.
B. results of operations for a specific period.
C. results of operations for a specific date.
D. the financial position for a specific period.
4. Which business form is similar to a corporation in regard to owner liability?
A. Sole proprietorship
B. Limited liability company
C. Partnership
D. Limited liability corporation
5. A T-account has a $509 debit balance. This account is most likely not
A. advertising expense.
B. land.
C. common stock.
D. dividends.
6. A T-account has which major parts?
A. A title, a debit side, and a credit side
B. A debit side, a credit side, and a balance
C. A debit side, a credit side, and a total column
D. A title, a current date, and a balance
7. By definition, which type of organization has stockholders?
A. Sole proprietorships
B. Corporations
C. Limited liability companies
D. Partnerships
8. Supplies on hand were $900 at the start of the year. At the end of the year, it was determined that $350 of supplies had been used. What is the adjusting entry for supplies?
A. Debit supplies, $350; credit supplies expense, $350.
B. Debit supplies expense, $550; credit supplies, $550.
C. Debit supplies, $550; credit supplies expense, $550.
D. Debit supplies expense, $350; credit supplies, $350.
9. Beginning retained earnings are $31,000; sales are $46,800; expenses are $43,500; and dividends paid are $2,800. How much is the net income or loss for the company?
A. ($3,300)
B. $3,300
C. $500
D. $34,300
10. The closing entries show a debit to retained earnings of $350 and a credit to retained earnings of $750. There was also a credit to dividends payable of $100. This company had a
A. net income of $400.
B. net loss of $400.
C. net income of $500.
D. net loss of $500
11. The account “Cash” had the following changes: increase of $250, decrease of $75, increase of $113,
and decrease of $35. The final balance is a
A. debit balance of $363.
B. debit balance of $253.
C. credit balance of $110.
D. credit balance of $253.
12. The matching principle in accounting requires the matching of revenue earned with the
A. expenses incurred to produce the revenue.
B. liabilities used to produce the revenue.
C. assets used less the liabilities incurred.
D. assets used to produce the revenue.
13. Which financial statement illustrates the accounting equation?
A. Statement of cash flows
B. Balance sheet
C. Income statement
D. Statement of retained earnings
14. Beginning retained earnings are $65,000; sales are $29,500; expenses are $33,000; and dividends paid are $3,500. How much is the net income or loss for the company?
A. ($3,500)
B. ($7,000)
C. $26,000
D. $0
15. Rick owns a sporting goods store. In his initial accounting records, he included his personal computer and all of his personal sporting gear. Rick is violating which principle of accounting?
A. Reliability
B. Entity
C. Going concern
D. Cost
16. Which of the following is a disadvantage of the corporate form of business?
A. Ease of raising capital
B. Double taxation
C. Limited liability
D. Limited resources
17. Dividends are paid with cash to shareholders. Dividends are in which category of the chart of accounts?
A. Liabilities
B. Stockholders’ equity
C. Assets
D. Revenue
18. Collecting rent from a client three months in advance would be an example of a/an
A. accrued revenue.
B. accrued expense.
C. deferred expense.
D. deferred revenue.
19. The income statement is used to report
A. the financial position on a specific date.
B. results of operations for a specific period.
C. results of operations for a specific date.
D. the financial position for a specific period.
20. Office equipment was purchased for $2,400 on account to Business Furniture Company. The journal entry would include a
A. debit to Office Equipment and a credit to Accounts Payable.
B. credit to Cash and a debit to Office Equipment Expense.
C. debit to Office Equipment and a credit to Cash.
D. debit to Accounts Payable and a credit to Cash.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Justin and Juna, ages 44 and 38, are married and file a joint return. In addition to having THREE dependent children (Jennifer, Joyce, and Jacqueline), Justin and Juna have adjusted gross income ( AGI ) of $85,000 and itemized deductions of $20,000. What is their taxable income for 2013?
a. $85,000 b. $65,000 c. $53,300 d. $45,500
2. In 2013, Alan, age 16, will have $300 of interest from a certificate of deposit and $5,000 from working as a waiter. Assume Alan is claimed by his parents as a dependent. What is Alan s standard deduction for 2013?
a. $300 b. $1,000 c. $5,350 d. $6,100
4. What is Daenne s Taxable Income for 2013? Assume she is 45 years old and is single and has no dependents. Assume further that Daenne s AGI is $60,000 and that she made a charitable contribution of $1,000 (which would be her only itemized deduction).
a. $60,000 b. $59,000 c. $55,100 d. $50,000
5. In early 2013, Yuri received a gift of a home valued at $400,000 (from Yuri s uncle, Holman). Holman also gave Yuri a $20,000 cash gift. During 2013, Yuri rented the home to Juliana. As a result of the lease with Juliana, Yuri will earn net rental income of $30,000 (for 2013). What amount of income should Yuri s 2013 tax return include from these transactions?
a. $0 b. $20,000 c. $30,000 d. $450,000 6. In 2013, Lakesha, a calendar-year taxpayer, purchased business equipment (5-year property) for $2,400,000. The property was placed in service during 2013 (and is being used exclusively in Lakesha s extremely profitable business). No other personal property is purchased by Lakesha in 2013. What is the most that Lakesha may deduct in 2013 under Section 179 of the Code (ignore any potential deductions resulting from bonus deprecation or MACRS)?
a. $2,400,000 b. $500,000 c. $100,000 d. $0
7. Which of the following is most likely deductible FOR AGI (i.e., PRE-AGI)?
a. Amounts paid for moving expenses b. Amounts paid for state income taxes c. Amounts paid for an employee s unreimbursed travel expenses (i.e., the travel was related to taxpayer s fulltime position at a large corporation) d. Each of the above items would be deducted FROM AGI (i.e., POST-AGI)
8. Pedro has AGI of $100,000 in 2013. During 2013, Pedro also had an uninsured personal casualty loss of $15,000 (after the $100 reduction). The personal casualty loss related to an accident that Pedro had with Fernando. Pedro carried no collision insurance and Fernando was also an uninsured motorist. Assume Pedro itemizes deductions in 2013. What is the casualty loss amount that Pedro may deduct on his return?
a. $15,000 b. $10,000 c. $5,000 d. $0
9. If Katherine is insolvent with assets of $30,000 and liabilities of $35,000 and one of Katherine s creditors then cancels a debt of $20,000, what amount must Katherine recognize as income? a. $0 b. $5,000 c. $15,000 d. $20,000
10. TXX5761 Inc. paid all of the premiums for a $300,000 group-term life insurance policy on its 67-year-old President, Femi. Assume that pursuant to the applicable table, the cost per $1,000 of protection for a 1-month period is $1.27 (for a person aged 65 to 69). What amount relating to the policy (if any) must be included in Femi s Gross Income for the year (assume Femi was covered for all twelve months)?
a. $0 b. $3,810 c. $250,000 d. $300,000
11. In March 2013, Dennis, a calendar-year taxpayer, purchased new 7-year property for $2,000,000. The property was immediately placed into service (and is being used exclusively in Dennis s extremely profitable business). No other personal property will be purchased by Dennis in 2013. Dennis wants to take the largest possible tax deduction in 2013 relating to the equipment. Compute the largest tax deduction possible in 2013 for the equipment (consider the Section 179 election, Bonus Depreciation, and MACRS, if applicable):
a. $0 b. $500,000 c. $1,357,175 d. $2,000,000
12. During 2013, 7-year MACRS property was placed in service by Charles, a calendar-year taxpayer. Assume that Charles does NOT make a Section 179 election or take any bonus depreciation. The property will most likely be depreciated over:
a. One calendar year b. Three and one-half calendar years c. Seven calendar years d. Eight calendar years
13. Greg contributed some inventory from his sole proprietorship to a public charity for its use. On the date of the contribution, Greg s basis in the inventory was $5,000 and the fair market value was $15,000. What is the amount of charitable contribution allowed (before considering any potential percentage limitation)?
a. $15,000 b. $10,000 c. $5,000 d. $0 14. Sandra s business incurred a casualty loss in 2013. Immediately before the casualty, her business truck had an adjusted basis of $30,000 and a fair market value of $35,000. Immediately after the casualty, the truck had a fair market value of $20,000. Because of the truck damage, Sandra s insurance company provided $10,000 as a reimbursement in 2013. What was Sandra s 2013 casualty loss deduction?
A $15,000 B $5,000 C $30,000 D Unknown (because we must know Sandra’s AGI)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Company, Inc. Company, Inc. is considering acquiring a new piece of equipment The new piece of equipment costs $150. The company can lease or buy. If it leases the lease does not to be capitalized, it will be a 2-year lease, and the payment will be $85 at the beginning of each year. If the company buys it can borrow the full $150 at 8% interest on the loan. Assume the tax rate at 40%. Depreciation is $75 per year. No salvage value; equipment is worth nothing after 2 years.
| Q: |
Should Company, Inc. lease or buy the equipment? |
|
2)
|
I-Banks & ACME Inc. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
I-Bank specializes in underwriting new issues by small firms. |
|
|
|
|
|
On a recent offering of ACME Inc., the terms were as follows: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Price to public |
|
$5.50 |
per share |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Number of shares |
1.75 |
million |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Proceeds |
|
$8,000,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Out of pocket expenses incurred by I-Bank and related to ACME’s offering were $500,000. |
|
| Q: |
What profit or loss would I-Bank incur if the issue were sold to the public at the following average price? |
|
Barek Company |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Barek, whose stock price is now $27.50, needs to raise $27 million in common stock. |
|
Underwriters have informed the firm’s management that they must price the new issue |
|
to the public at $25 per share. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The underwriters’ compensation will be 6% of the issue price, so Barek will net: |
25.85 |
|
per share. The firm will also incur expenses in the amount of $200,000. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Q: |
How many shares must the firm sell to net $21.5 million after underwriting and |
|
flotation expenses? |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
10.
What is the advantage of using a composite of indicators (such as the 10 leading indicators) over
simply using an individual indicator?
12. Comment on whether each of the following three industries is sensitive to the business cycle.
If it is sensitive, does it do better in a boom period or a recession?
a.Automobiles
b.Pharmaceuticals
c.Housing
2.
List the five stages of the industry life cycle. How does the pattern of cash dividend payments
change over the cycle? (A general statement is all that is required.)
3.
Why might a firm begin paying stock dividends in the growth stage?
9.
For cyclical companies, why might the current P/E ratio be misleading?
510.
Assume D1 = $1.60, Ke = 13 percent, g = 8 percent. Using Formula 7 5 on page 168, for the
constant growth dividend valuation model, compute P0.
Leland Manufacturing Company anticipates a nonconstant growth pattern for dividends.
Dividends at the end of year 1 are $4.00 per share and are expected to grow by 20 percent per
year until the end of year 4 (that s three years of growth). After year 4, dividends are expected to
grow at 5 percent as far as the company can see into the future. All dividends are to be
discounted back to present at a 13 percent rate (Ke = 13 percent).
a.Project dividends for years 1 through 4 (the first year is already given). Round all values that
you compute to two places to the right of the decimal point throughout this problem.
b.Find the present value of the dividends in part a.
c.Project the dividend for the fifth year (D5).
d.Use Formula 7 5 on page 168 to find the present value of all future dividends, beginning with
the fifth year s dividend. The present value you find will be at the end of the fourth year. Use
Formula 7 5 as follows: P4 = D5/(Ke g).
e.Discount back the value found in part d for four years at 13 percent.
f.Add together the values from parts b and e to determine the present value of the stock.
14
14.
Mr. Phillips of Southwest Investment Bankers is evaluating the P/E ratio of Madison Electronics
Conveyors (MEC). The firm s P/E is currently 17. With earning per share of $2, the stock price is
$34.The average P/E ratio in the electronic conveyor industry is presently 16. However, MEC
has an anticipated growth rate of 18 percent versus an industry average of 12 percent, so 2 will
be added to the industry P/E by Mr. Phillips. Also, the operating risk associated with MEC is less
than that for the industry because of its long-term contract with American Airlines. For this
reason, Mr. Phillips will add a factor of 1.5 to the industry P/E ratio.he debt-to-total-assets ratio
is not as encouraging. It is 50 percent, while the industry ratio is 40 percent. In doing his
evaluation, Mr. Phillips decides to subtract a factor of 0.5 from the industry P/E ratio. Other
ratios, including dividend payout, appear to be in line with the industry, so Mr. Phillips will make
no further adjustment along these lines.However, he is somewhat distressed by the fact that the
firm only spent 3 percent of sales on research and development last year, when the industry norm
is 7 percent. For this reason he will subtract a factor of 1.5 from the industry P/E ratio.Despite
the relatively low research budget, Mr. Sanders observes that the firm has just hired two of the
top executives from a competitor in the industry. He decides to add a factor of 1 to the industry
P/E ratio because of this.
a.Determine the P/E ratio for MEC based on Mr. Phillips s analysis.
b.Multiply this times earnings per share, and comment on whether you think the stock
might possibly be under- or overvalued in the marketplace at its current P/E and price.
12.
What might a high dividend-payout ratio suggest to an analyst about a company s growth
prospects?
13.
Explain the probable impact of replacement-cost accounting on the ratios of return on assets,
debt to total assets, and tim es interest earned for a firm that has substantial old fixed assets.
5.
A firm has assets of $1,800,000 and turns over its assets 2.5 times per year. Return on assets is 20
percent. What is its profit margin (return on sales)?
15.
The Multi-Corporation has three different operating divisions. Financial information for each is
as follows:
a.Which division provides the highest operating margin?
b.Which division provides the lowest after-tax profit margin?
c.Which division has the lowest after-tax return on assets?
d.Compute net income (after-tax) to sales for the entire corporation.
e.Compute net income (after-tax) to assets for the entire corporation.
f.The vice president of finance suggests the assets in the Appliances division be sold off for $10
million and redeployed in Sporting Goods. The new $10 million in Sporting Goods will produce
the same after-tax return on assets as the current $8 million in that division. Recompute net
income to total assets for the entire corporation assuming the above suggested change.
g.Explain why Sporting Goods, which has a lower return on sales than Appliances, has such a
positive effect on return on assets.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Homework chapter 6
1- Zane Perelli currently has $100 that he can spend today on polo shirts costing $25 each. Alternatively, he could invest the $100 in a risk-free U.S. Treasury security that is expected to earn a 9% nominal rate of interest. The consensus forecast of leading economists is a 5% rate of inflation over the coming year.
a. How many polo shirts can Zane purchase today?
b. How much money will Zane have at the end of 1 year if he forgoes purchasing the polo shirts today?
c. How much would you expect the polo shirts to cost at the end of 1 year in light of the expected inflation?
d. Use your findings in parts b and c to determine how many polo shirts (fractions are OK) Zane can purchase at the end of 1 year. In percentage terms, how many more or fewer polo shirts can Zane buy at the end of 1 year?
e. What is Zane s real rate of return over the year? How is it related to the percentage change in Zane s buying power found in part d? Explain.
2-Bond interest payments before and after taxes Charter Corp. has issued 2,500 debentures with a total principal value of $2,500,000. The bonds have a coupon interest rate of 7%.
a. What dollar amount of interest per bond can an investor expect to receive each year from Charter?
b. What is Charter s total interest expense per year associated with this bond issue?
c. Assuming that Charter is in a 35% corporate tax bracket, what is the company s net after-tax interest cost associated with this bond issue?
3 – Valuation Fundamentals: Imagine that you are trying to evaluate the economics of purchasing an automobile. You expect the car to provide annual after-tax cash benefits of $1,200 at the end of each year and assume that you can sell the car for after tax proceeds of $5,000 at the end of the planned 5-year ownership period. All funds for purchasing the car will be drawn from your savings, which are currently earning 6% after taxes.
A. Identify the cash flows, their timing, and the required return applicable to valuing the car.
B. What is the maximum price you would be willing to pay to acquire the car? Explain.
4- Midland Utilities has outstanding a bond issue that will mature to its $1,000 par value in 12 years. The bond has a coupon interest rate of 11% and pays interest annually.
a. Find the value of the bond if the required return is
(1) 11%,
(2) 15%, and
(3) 8%.
b. Plot your findings in part a on a set of required return (x axis) market value of bond (y axis) axes.
c. Use your findings in parts a and b to discuss the relationship between the coupon interest rate on a bond and the required return and the market value of the bond relative to its par value.
d. What two possible reasons could cause the required return to differ from the coupon interest rate?
5-The Salem Company bond currently sells for $955, has a 12% coupon interest rate and a $1,000 par value, pays interest annually, and has 15 years to maturity.
a. Calculate the yield to maturity(YTM) on this bond.
b. Explain the relationship that exists between the coupon interest rate and yield to maturity and the par value and market value of a bond.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CARIBOU COFFEE and FAZER GROUP
CARIBOU COFFEE
Caribou owns coffee houses. Most locations are currently in the United States.
http://www.cariboucoffee.com/
FAZER GROUP
Fazer is probably most known for its chocolate. Below is the link to the company’s homepage.
http://www.fazer.com/
Required:
Go to each company s website and review the most recent financial statements for each company and answer the following questions.
- What accounting standards are used?
- What auditing standards are used by the external auditors?
- Analyze and comment on the differences in the annual statements found on the companies’ websites. Provide a few specific differences in content and format.
- How comparable are these financial statements?
Prepare a table for a period of three years showing some key financial information for the two companies. Include at least four items from the balance sheet, four items from the income statement, and four items from the statement of cash flow. Having reviwed and analyzed the financial information, please elaborate on the following three questions.
- Which one of the two companies is the most profitable?
- Compare growth of revenues versus income over time and between the two companies
- How can you explain the difference in profitability between the two companies?
- Indicate in detail the information you used to answer the above questions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Part A: Answer each of the following two questions. Each answer is worth 20 points.
1. The following information was made available from the income statement and balance sheet of Miranda Company.
Item 12/31/10 12/31/09
Accounts Receivable $ 42,000 $ 45,100
Accounts Payable 27,900 24,500
Merchandise Inventory 68,000 63000
Sales 2010 170,000
Interest Revenue 2010 3,200
Dividends Revenue 2010 1,800
Tax expense 2010 11,600
Salaries Expenses 2010 22,400
COGS 2010 57,000
Interest Expenses 2010 2,200
Operating Expenses 19,400
Complete the cash flow from operating activities section for Meranda Company using the direct method for the year ended December 31, 2010.
2. Given the following balance sheet, complete a horizontal analysis. Compute the percentage to the nearest tenth of a percent.
Jessica jewel store comparative Balance sheet for year ended December 31, 2011 and 2010
In thousands 2011 2010 Difference Percentage
Assets
Current Assets
Cash Equivalents $319 $288
Accounts Receivable, net 166 173
Inventory 437 400
Total Current Asset 922 861
Property, Plant and equipment 377 412
Total Assets $1,299 $1273
Liabilities
Current liabilities
Accounts Payables 132 144
Accrued Liabilities 90 84
Total current liabilities 222 228
Long Term Liabilities 84 96
Total Liabilities 306 324
Stockholder Equity
Common Stock 288 255
Retained Earnings 705 694
Total Stockholder Equity 993 949
Total Liabilities and Stockholder Equity $1,299 1,273
Part B: Answer each of the following 15 questions. Each answer is worth
4 points.
1. Given the following information, show the increase or decrease in the accounting equation:
A. Deanne invests $45,000 and $10,000 of office equipment into the business.
B. Furniture is purchased for $8,000 cash.
C. Supplies are purchased on credit for $2,300.
D. The month s electric bill of $775 was paid.
E. The month s cash sales were $5,000.
2. Journalize the following transactions and include the explanations.
A. Tammy invested $40,000 into her corporation on June 11.
B. Tammy purchased inventory for $95,000, of which $70,000 was on account on June 14.
C. Tammy paid one month s rent of $2,400 on June 16.
D. Tammy had sales of $15,000 on account on June 19.
E. Tammy had paid $2,500 on her payables account on June 21.
3. Prepare a trial balance from the following information for Computer
Systems, Inc. for December 31, 2012:
Accounts payable $4,298
Common stock $4,073
Sales $8,302
Cash $1,902
Notes payable $888
Wages expense $777
Supplies expense $1,028
Equipment $5,183
Accounts receivable $1,733
Inventory $6,938
4. Compute the missing information from this post-closing trial balance:
Cash $38,502
Accounts Receivable 14,372
Prepaid Rent 18,229
Prepaid Insurance 4,583
Supplies (A)
Accounts Payable (B)
Wages Payable 29,428
Common Stock 30,049
Retained Earnings 18,423
_______ _______
Total $80,436 $80,436
5. Journalize the following transactions using the perpetual inventory method:
Nov. 1 Purchased $3,600 of merchandise from Hilltop, terms 2/10, n/30.
Nov. 5 Purchased $1,750 of merchandise for cash from Owen s Supply.
Nov. 7 Purchased $3,400 of merchandise from Seaside, terms 1/15, n/30.
Nov. 10 Returned $500 of merchandise to Seaside. Credit Memo #131.
Nov. 11 Paid the invoice from Hilltop.
6. Given the following information, prepare a balance sheet for Brandon s
Campstore for the year ending December 31, 2012:
|
Cash
|
$38,745
|
Retained Earnings
|
$171,309
|
|
Common Stock
|
$43,500
|
Equipment
|
$37,200
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$14,109
|
Accounts Payable
|
$26,351
|
|
Land
|
$35,000
|
Inventory
|
$81,311
|
|
Prepaid Supplies
|
$9,003
|
Income Taxes Payable
|
$5,284
|
|
Office Computers
|
$16,399
|
Other PPE
|
$26,550
|
|
Accum. Depr. (all)
|
$21,013
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
$9,140
|
7. Rick Company s beginning inventory and purchases during the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012, were as follows: (Note:The company uses a perpetual system of inventory.)
|
|
Units
|
Unit Price
|
Total Cost
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
January 1 Beginning
|
18
|
$24
|
432
|
|
inventory
|
|
|
|
|
March 12 Sold
|
13
|
|
|
|
April 11 Purchase
|
45
|
$29
|
$1,305
|
|
June 20 Sold
|
33
|
|
|
|
Aug 16 Purchase
|
35
|
$27
|
$945
|
|
Sept 11 Sold
|
29
|
|
|
|
Total Cost of Inventory
|
|
|
|
|
Ending inventory is 23 units.
|
|
|
$2,682
|
What is the ending inventory of Rick Company for 2012 using FIFO?
8. Assume that in Year 1, the ending merchandise inventory is overstated by $30,000. If this is the only error in Years 1 and 2, fill in the items below, indicating which items will be understated, overstated, or correctly stated for
Years 1 and 2.
Item Year 1 Year 2
Gross Profit _____________ ______________
Net Income _____________ ______________
Ending Retained Earnings _____________ ______________
9. Below is a list of treatments of accounting topics. Place GAAP on the line if the treatment is GAAP-based and place IFRS on the line if the treatment is
IFRS-based.
A. The use of LIFO is allowed. ___________________
B. Both research and development costs are expensed as incurred.
___________________
C. Market is defined as current replacement cost. ___________________
10. Record the necessary journal entries from the following bank reconciliation information for July 31, 2011:
|
Bank Balance, July 31, 2011
|
$28,542
|
|
Checkbook Balance, July 31, 2011
|
29,344
|
|
Bank collection of note receivable
|
1,545 + 210 interest
|
|
Bank service charge
|
75
|
|
Deposits in transit
|
3,145
|
|
Outstanding checks
|
2,685
|
|
NSF check from customer
|
770
|
|
Correction of book error (check #456 written for $280, recorded at $28) maintenance expense
|
|
11. Journalize the following transactions for Ryan Company:
July 1 Sold $5,300 of merchandise to Rick on account.
Nov. 1 Exchanged Rick s account receivable for an eight-month, 6% note for $5,300.
Dec. 31 Recorded accrued interest on Jim s note (round to nearest dollar).
July 1 Rick paid off his note with interest (round to nearest dollar).
12. A computer system was purchased on July 1 at a cost of $125,000. It s expected to be used for four years and to have a residual value of $5,000 after 8,000 hours of service. The system was used for 1,750 hours the first year and 2,100 hours the second year. Calculate the depreciation expense to the nearest dollar for the first and second years.
Method
Year 1 Year 2
Straight-line ________ ________
Double-declining-balance ________ ________
Units-of-production ________ ________
13. Prepare journal entries for the following transactions for Ryan Company in the general journal:
Feb. 28 Machinery that cost $57,000 and had accumulated depreciation of $46,000 was sold for $2,500.
April 10 A van that cost $23,700 and had accumulated depreciation of $21,000 was sold for $1,250.
July 16 Equipment that cost $120,000 and had accumulated depreciation of $112,000 was traded in for new equipment with a fair-market value of $140,000. The old equipment and $135,000 in cash were given for the new equipment.
14. Journalize the following treasury stock transactions:
May 1 Reacquired 800 shares of $15 par common stock for $13 per share.
May 7 Sold 400 shares at $11 per share.
May 9 Sold 250 shares at $17 per share
15. The following information was taken from the financial statements of
Brandon Company for 12/31/10 and12/31/09:
Net income for 2010: $313,000
Depreciation expense for 2010: $28,400
Loss on sale of equipment: $7,300
Balance Sheet 12/31/10 12/31/09
Accounts Receivable $46,000 $50,000
Merchandise Inventory 35,000 28,000
Accounts Payable 27,000 24,000
Interest Payable 6,000 8,000
Prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows under the indirect method for the year ended December 31, 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Sarbanes-Oxley Act: (Points : 2)
was prompted by corporate bankruptcies and audit failures.
limits an auditor s ability to provide non-audit services to a client.
clarifies the responsibility of a company s management for its financial statements.
all of the above.
2. An element that is often present when fraud occurs is: (Points : 2)
the availability of an opportunity.
the existence of some form of pressure.
the ability to rationalize.
all of the above.
3. Recognition of revenue may result in which of the following? (Points : 2)
A decrease in a liability
An increase in a liability
An increase in assets
Both A and C
4. Ohio Company provided services to a customer for $1,700 cash. As a result of this event: (Points : 2)
total assets decreased.
total liabilities increased.
retained earnings increased.
cash flows from financing activities increased.
5. Rowena Company spent cash to purchase equipment. As a result of this event: (Points : 2)
total liabilities increased.
total assets increased.
net income increased.
total assets were unchanged.
6. October 1, 2010, the company paid $3,600 in advance for a 12-month insurance policy that became effective on October 1. The amount of insurance expense reported on the income statement for calendar year 2010 would be: (Points : 2)
$900
$2,400
$300
$600
7. Hardin Company began operations in 2010. During the year, the following cash transactions
occurred:
Issued stock for $40,000
Borrowed $24,000 from bank
Provided services to customers for $53,000 cash
Paid back $8,000 of the loan from the bank
Paid rent expense, $9,000
Paid operating expenses, $29,000
Assuming that Hardin engaged in no transactions during the year other than those listed above, what was the amount of net income or loss for the year? (Points : 2)
$19,000 net income
$15,000 net income
$12,000 net income
$11,000 net loss
8. Liabilities are shown on the: (Points : 2)
income statement.
statement of changes in stockholders equity.
statement of cash flows.
balance sheet.
9. As of December 31, 2009, Bueno Company had $1,000 in liabilities, $8,000 in common stock, and $2,500 in retained earnings. The total amount of assets on that date is: (Points : 2)
$10,000
$12,500
$11,500
$7,500
10. Which of the following statements about the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (PCAOB) is not true? (Points : 2)
The PCAOB was created by the Sarbanes-Oxley Act to regulate the accounting firms that audit financial statements of public companies.
Independent auditors are required to register with the PCAOB.
The PCAOB has the power to impose sanctions against a registered accounting firm.
The PCAOB requires public accounting firms to conduct peer reviews of other such firms and make their report public.
11. Liabilities are: (Points : 2)
claims of creditors.
the owner s interest in the company.
claims of investors.
both A and B.
12. The accounting equation may be written: (Points : 2)
Revenues Expenses = Net Income.
Assets = Liabilities.
Liabilities = Equity.
Assets = Claims on Assets.
13. A creditor: (Points : 2)
provides financial resources to a business in exchange for an ownership interest.
provides labor resources to a business.
lends financial resources to a business.
is a resource user.
14. The amount of land owned by a business appears on which financial statement? (Points : 2)
Income statement
Statement of changes in stockholders equity
Statement of cash flows
Balance sheet
15. Accounting information is said to be reliable if: (Points : 2)
it is based on recent (not longer than 6 months) information.
it was prepared by someone with good credentials in accounting, such as a certified public accountant.
it can be independently verified.
it complies with rules and standards of the Internal Revenue Service.
16. An asset use transaction: (Points : 2)
increases one asset and decreases another.
decreases an asset and decreases a liability or equity.
increases an asset and decreases a liability or equity.
increases an asset and increases a liability or equity.
17. The result of the matching process is reported on which financial statement? (Points : 2)
Balance Sheet
Income Statement
Statement of Changes in Stockholders Equity
Statement of Cash Flows
18. Which of the following would be included in the “cash flows from financing activities” section of the statement of cash flows? (Points : 2)
Collected cash from accounts receivable
Finance Company loaned cash to another company
Paid cash dividend to stockholders
Purchased business insurance
19. Which of the following lists represents the correct sequence of stages in an accounting cycle? (Points : 2)
Record transactions, prepare statements, adjust accounts, and close temporary accounts
Prepare statements, close temporary accounts, record transactions, and adjust accounts
Close temporary accounts, record transactions, prepare statements, and adjust accounts
Record transactions, adjust accounts, prepare statements, and close temporary accounts
20. Which of the following accounts is a permanent account (an account that is not closed)? (Points : 2)
Prepaid Insurance
Service Revenue
Salaries Expense
Rent Expense
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC Corporation intends to set up a new business unit; they are in the process of identifying their current assets and liabilities. Classify the following items into the one of these categories: current assets, non – current assets, current liabilities, non – current liabilities, equity, and profit and loss statement. In addition, state the rationale for your selection. Finished goods inventory Raw materials Bank loan with a repayment date three years from today Bank loan with a repayment date six months fr om today Outstanding receivables from products sold Depreciation expense Salary expense for employees Interest expense (payable to bank for loans) Money owed to a supplier for raw materials purchased Dividends to be paid to shareholders two months fr om today Retained earnings Shareholder s paid – in capital Machinery and equipment Accrued salaries and related expenses such as payroll taxes Income tax to be paid to the US government one month from today Cash and cash equivalents Building Goodwill Bonds payable to be paid in 15 months
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Project Descriptions
Research Project
OBJECTIVE
The specific objective of this graded written research exercise is to prepare an executive-level financial report to the chief financial officer (CFO) of a mythical company by which you are employed as a financial analyst. This report will pertain to the financial evaluation of a real, publicly-traded company. It will require independent research (Web-based or library), careful financial analysis, and the proper application of key financial theories and formulas.
SITUATION
You are a financial analyst with the mythical RenDi corporation. RenDi is a manufacturer of renewable synthetic diesel fuel. One of the emerging markets for this product is in ground support equipment (GSE) for the airline industry. A competitive technical and economic product evaluation has determined that Southwest Airlines (LUV), (a real publicly-traded company) is the best potential partner. The partnership entails an agreement that will allow Southwest to purchase renewable synthetic diesel at fixed rates for 5 years while RenDi studies the environmental costs/benefits of converting GSE to renewable fuel. RenDi would absorb all conversion costs for the GSE fleet of Southwest Airlines.Based upon some serious concerns about the stability of companies in the airline industry, the CEO has asked your CFO to conduct a financial analysis of Southwest Airlines to determine if it is prudent to commit to a 5 year contract with this company. The cost of converting over to renewable synthetic diesel fuel is significant and any interruption in the agreement during the next few years would adversly affect RenDi’s performance and profit. Specifically, the question is: will Southwest Airlines be financially viable over hte next two to three years?
YOUR SPECIFIC ASSIGNMENT
Your specific assignment is to research, analyze, and prepare a report for the CFO on the actual financial performance of Southwest Airlines for the years 2011, 2012, and 2013. In addition to reviewing the traditional financial performance indicators, you are also to review Southwest’s past and current stock performance for the same respective periods. Your report is to consist of three parts:
(1) An evaluation of Southwest Airline’s financial performance for the period 2011, 2012, & 2013.
(2) An evaluation of Southwest Airline’s stock performance for the period 2011, 2012, & 2013
(3) Finally, a specific recommendation, with supporting rationale, as to whether or not Southwest’s recent trend in financial and stock performance is of sufficient financial strength to warrant entering into a long-term commitment.
You are to consider all necessary and relevant financial performance and stock information, trends, and projections in supporting your recommendation. These factors include, but are not necessarily limited to financial statement analysis, financial ratio trends and industry comparatives, capital spending, stock growth, Beta values, credit rating service valuations, bond rating valuations, and management and investment reports – when these documents are available.
REPORT REQUIREMENTS
Your final report is to be an executive-level financial report, directed to the CFO. This report must be no longer than six (6) or seven (7) single-spaced pages. Include suitable comparative, quantitative and qualitative analyses and conclude with a specific and supported recommendation on the projected financial viability of Southwest Airlines for the next several years.
Essential research data, financial calculations and other documentation as necessary to support your recommendation should be referred to in summary form in your report and attached in detail as enclosures. All major sources should be referenced. There is no set limit to the size of the enclosures, but it is recommended that only essential enclosures be attached. You should use references and bibliography to identify any remaining supporting documents you wish to include.
Your report is to be submitted electronically and limited to a maximum of two files, one for the executive report and one for attachments. One file is acceptable with attachments included as separate pages at the end of your report. Only Word, Plain Text, Rich Text, and Excel file formats are acceptable.
This report is an individual effort and must be researched, developed and prepared by you. However, to maximize the learning benefit, you are encouraged to share freely or exchange sources of information (web sites), general approaches, alternatives, and discussion on general financial theory and applicability as related to the report. All questions related to this assignment should be referred to the mythical CFO (i.e., me).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.On the trial balance, which of the following should have the balances listed in the debit column?
A.Assets, dividends, and expenses
B.Liabilities, revenues, and common stock
C.Liabilities, revenues, and dividends
D.Assets, revenues, and dividends
2.The unadjusted trial balance for depreciation expense shows a $780 balance. The expense was adjusted
by $235. The adjusted trial balance figure for depreciation expense is now a
A.$545 debit.
B.$1,015 debit.
C.$1,015 credit.
D.$545 credit.
3.The balance sheet is used to report
A.the financial position on a specific date.
B.results of operations for a specific period.
C.results of operations for a specific date.
D.the financial position for a specific period.
4.Which business form is similar to a corporation in regard to owner liability?
A.Sole proprietorship
B.Limited liability company
C.Partnership
D.Limited liability corporation
5.A T-account has a $509 debit balance. This account is most likely not
A.advertising expense.
B.land.
C.common stock.
D.dividends.
6.A T-account has which major parts?
A.A title, a debit side, and a credit side
B.A debit side, a credit side, and a balance
C.A debit side, a credit side, and a total column
D.A title, a current date, and a balance
7.By definition, which type of organization has stockholders?
A.Sole proprietorships
B.Corporations
C.Limited liability companies
D.Partnerships
8.Supplies on hand were $900 at the start of the year. At the end of the year, it was determined that $350 of supplies had been used. What is the adjusting entry for supplies?
A.Debit supplies, $350; credit supplies expense, $350.
B.Debit supplies expense, $550; credit supplies, $550.
C.Debit supplies, $550; credit supplies expense, $550.
D.Debit supplies expense, $350; credit supplies, $350.
9.Beginning retained earnings are $31,000; sales are $46,800; expenses are $43,500; and dividends paid are $2,800. How much is the net income or loss for the company?
A.($3,300)
B.$3,300
C.$500
D.$34,300
10.The closing entries show a debit to retained earnings of $350 and a credit to retained earnings of $750. There was also a credit to dividends payable of $100. This company had a
A.net income of $400.
B.net loss of $400.
C.net income of $500.
D.net loss of $500
11.The account “Cash” had the following changes: increase of $250, decrease of $75, increase of $113,
and decrease of $35. The final balance is a
A.debit balance of $363.
B.debit balance of $253.
C.credit balance of $110.
D.credit balance of $253.
12.The matching principle in accounting requires the matching of revenue earned with the
A.expenses incurred to produce the revenue.
B.liabilities used to produce the revenue.
C.assets used less the liabilities incurred.
D.assets used to produce the revenue.
13.Which financial statement illustrates the accounting equation?
A.Statement of cash flows
B.Balance sheet
C.Income statement
D.Statement of retained earnings
14.Beginning retained earnings are $65,000; sales are $29,500; expenses are $33,000; and dividends paid are $3,500. How much is the net income or loss for the company?
A.($3,500)
B.($7,000)
C.$26,000
D.$0
15.Rick owns a sporting goods store. In his initial accounting records, he included his personal computer and all of his personal sporting gear. Rick is violating which principle of accounting?
A.Reliability
B.Entity
C.Going concern
D.Cost
16.Which of the following is a disadvantage of the corporate form of business?
A.Ease of raising capital
B.Double taxation
C.Limited liability
D.Limited resources
17.Dividends are paid with cash to shareholders. Dividends are in which category of the chart of accounts?
A.Liabilities
B.Stockholders’ equity
C.Assets
D.Revenue
18.Collecting rent from a client three months in advance would be an example of a/an
A.accrued revenue.
B.accrued expense.
C.deferred expense.
D.deferred revenue.
19.The income statement is used to report
A.the financial position on a specific date.
B.results of operations for a specific period.
C.results of operations for a specific date.
D.the financial position for a specific period.
20.Office equipment was purchased for $2,400 on account to Business Furniture Company. The journal entry would include a
A.debit to Office Equipment and a credit to Accounts Payable.
B.credit to Cash and a debit to Office Equipment Expense.
C.debit to Office Equipment and a credit to Cash.
D.debit to Accounts Payable and a credit to Cash.